The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutC2016-410 - 8/16/2016 - Approved 2016-410 8/16/16 M2016-094 PLW Cadagua Partners 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement,for the Project awarded on August 16,2016 ,is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner)and PLW Cadagua Partners (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: City Project No. E11066 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No.3 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: LNV,Inc. 801 Navigation,Suite 300 Corpus Christi,TX 78408 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: • Phil Boehk, P.E.-Acting Construction Engineer City of Corpus Christi-Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road#5 Corpus Christi TX 78411 ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 1,065 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 1,095 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Agreement 00 52 23-1 Proj.No.E11066 ONSWTP High Service Pump Building No.3 Rev06-22-2016 INDEXED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 E11066 LNV, Inc. 801 Navigation, Suite 300 / Corpus Christi, TX / 361‐883‐1984 February 22, 2016 Record Drawing Number WTR‐450 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 SEAL SHEET March 28, 201 CIVIL LNV, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-366 CIVIL LNV, INC. TBPE FIRM NO. F-366 STRUCTURAL LNV, INC. TBPE FIRM F-366 STRUCTURAL GOVIND DEVELOPMENT, LLC TBPE FIRM NO. F-10101 Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division / Section Title Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 21 13 Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 30 00 Bid Acknowledgment Form (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 30 01 Bid Form (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 30 02 Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders 00 30 05 Disclosure of Interest (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 30 06 Non-Collusion Certification 00 45 16 Statement of Experience (Rev 10-06-2015) 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 61 13 Performance Bond (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 61 16 Payment Bond (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 72 00 General Conditions (Rev 3-23-2015) 00 72 01 Insurance Requirements (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 72 02 Wage Rate Requirements (Rev 06-12-2015) 00 72 03 Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy (Rev 01-13-2016) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work (Rev 01-13-2016) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances 01 29 00 Application for Payment Procedures (Rev 03-11-2015) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev 01-13-2016) 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination (Rev 01-13-2016) 01 31 13 Project Coordination 01 31 14 Change Management 01 33 00 Document Management 01 33 01 Submittal Register (Rev 7/3/2014) 01 33 02 Shop Drawings 01 33 03 Record Data 01 33 04 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 05 Video and Photographic Documentation 01 35 00 Special Procedures Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Division / Section Title 01 40 00 Quality Management 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Part S Standard Specifications 02 10 20 Site Clearing and Stripping 02 10 40 Site Grading 02 10 80 Removing Abandoned Structures 02 20 20 Excavation & Backfill for Utilities 02 20 21 Control of Groundwater 02 20 22 Trench Safety for Excavations 02 20 40 Street Excavation 02 20 60 Channel Excavation 02 20 80 Embankment 02 21 00 Select Material 02 24 20 Silt Fence 02 52 05 Pavement Repair Curb Gutter Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement 02 52 23 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base 02 54 04 Asphalts Oils and Emulsions 02 54 12 Prime Coat 02 54 24 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (Class A) 02 56 08 Inlets 02 56 12 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 02 56 20 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 02 62 10 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (4-inch Diameter and Greater) 02 62 14 Grouting Abandoned Utility Lines 02 72 00 Control of Wastewater Flows (Temporary Bypass Pumping Systems) 02 72 03 Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures 02 72 05 Fiberglass Manholes 02 74 02 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culverts 02 80 20 Seeding 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Division / Section Title 03 20 20 Reinforcing Steel 03 80 00 Concrete Structures 05 54 20 Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers Part T Technical Specifications 02 41 13 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 03 35 11 Concrete Floor Finishes 03 60 00 Grouts 04 01 00 Maintenance of Masonry 04 05 11 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry 05 10 00 Structural Steel 05 10 01 Miscellaneous Metal 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 50 00.01 Metal Fabrications (Architectural) 05 50 00.02 Metal Fabrications (Structural) 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 07 14 00 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 22 00 Roof and Deck Insulation 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.16 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.19 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels 07 52 00 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing 07 60 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 71 00 Door Hardware Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Division / Section Title 08 80 00 Glazing 08 91 00 Louvers 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 80 01 Galvanizing 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 91 10 Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting 09 96 00 Protective Coatings 09 96 00.13 High-Performance Coatings 10 14 00 Signage 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 73 10 Protective Covers 13 12 00 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 23 00 50 Basic Materials and Methods 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 29 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 74 13 Packaged-Outdoor Handling Units 23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units 23 82 39 Unit Heaters 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Division / Section Title 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power System Studies 26 20 10 Medium Voltage Motors 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 26 29 23.01 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives 26 36 00 Transfer Switches 26 42 13 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines 26 42 14 Corrosion Control Test Stations 26 42 15 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 33 11 16 Waterlines 33 11 16.13 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – Plant Piping Belowground 33 11 16.23 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe 33 12 13 Water Service Lines 33 12 16 Butterfly Valves 33 13 00 Disinfection of Waterlines 40 05 00 Piping – General Requirements 40 05 00.40 Piping – General Requirements (Hydrostatic Test) 40 05 00.50 Piping – General Requirements (Service Pressure Tests) 40 05 00.60 Piping – General Requirements (Pneumatic Test) 40 05 09 Pipe Penetrations 40 05 13 PVC & CPVC Pipe and Fittings (Less than 4-inch Diameter) 40 05 14 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings 40 05 18 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – Plant Piping Aboveground 40 05 50 Valves 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 40 05 57 Electro-Hydraulic Valve Actuators 40 05 65 Metal Seated Ball Valves 40 05 70 Piping Specialties 40 05 76 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints 40 23 10 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specialties 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 90 03 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Division / Section Title 40 96 00 User Requirements Specifications 40 96 01 PLC Logic Sequence of Operations 41 22 25 Bridge and Hoist Systems 41 67 19 Safety Devices/Equipment 43 21 01 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) 43 21 02 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps 43 21 06 Sump Pumps Appendix Title A Geotechnical Report B Construction Sequencing Exhibits END OF SECTION Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 00 21 13 INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in this Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. GENERAL NOTICE 2.01 The City of Corpus Christi, Texas (Owner) is requesting Bids for the construction of the following Project: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project Number E11066 A. The Project includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. This project consists of constructing a new High Service Pump Building at the O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. The main components of the project include: a. Base Bid 1) 12,700 sq. ft Pump Building 2) Six Horizontal Split‐Case Pumps, Motors, and Associated Piping & Valves 3) Electrical, Instrumentation & Control Systems 4) 60‐inch and 72‐inch Yard Piping 5) Access Road Improvements 6) Pavement and Drainage Rehabilitation 7) Utility and Grading Improvements 8) Clearwell No. 1 Repairs b. Additive Alternates 1) Addition of a 2 MW Generator to include building extension and retrofit of existing building 2) Existing High Service 2 Pump Rehabilitation, replacement of High Service 2 check valves, and replacement of motor protection relays 3) 72‐inch waterline from wash water supply pump station to road east of South Filters 4) Access Road Rehabilitation for road servicing High Service 2 Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 2.02 The Engineer’s Opinion of Probable Construction Cost for the Project is $23,500,000. The Project is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 700 days. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, 365 additional days will be added to the substantial completion date. The Project is to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 2.03 Advertisement and bidding information for the Project can be found at the following website: www.CivCastUSA.com 2.04 Contract Documents may be downloaded or viewed free of charge at this website. This website will be updated periodically with Addenda, lists of interested parties, reports, or other information relevant to submitting a Bid for the Project. DELIVERY AND OPENING OF BIDS 3.01 Bids must be received no later than June 1, 2016 at 2:00 PM to be accepted. Bids received after this time will not be accepted. It is the sole responsibility of the Bidder to deliver the Bid, electronic or hard copy, by the specified deadline. 3.02 Complete and submit the Bid Form, the Bid Bond and the Bid Acknowledgement Form along with all required documents identified in the Bid Acknowledgement Form. 3.03 Electronic Bids may be submitted to the CivCast website at www.civcastusa.com. 3.04 If submitting a hard copy bid or bid security by cashier’s check or money order, please address envelopes or packages: City of Corpus Christi City Secretary’s Office City Hall Building, 1st Floor 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid – O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3, Project No. E11066 All envelopes and packages (including FEDEX envelopes) must clearly identify, on the OUTSIDE of the package, the project name and number and that bid documents are enclosed. 3.05 Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at June 1, 2016 at 2:00 PM, at the following location: City Hall Building – City of Corpus Christi First Floor Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 City Council Staff Room or Council Chambers 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 3.06 The Owner will read aloud the names of the Bidders and the apparent Bid amounts shown on the Bid Summary for all Bids received in time to be considered. PRE‐BID CONFERENCE 4.01 A non‐mandatory pre‐bid conference for the Project will be held on May 11, 2016 at 2:00 PM at the following location: City Hall Building – Engineering Services Conference Room 1 or 2 3rd floor, Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street, Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 5.01 Obtain a complete set of the Contract Documents as indicated in SECTION 00 52 23 AGREEMENT. 5.02 Use complete sets of Contract Documents in preparing Bids; Bidder assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Contract Documents. 5.03 OPT makes copies of Contract Documents available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for completion of the Project and does not confer a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 6.01 Before submitting a Bid: A. Examine and carefully study the Contract Documents, including any Addenda and related supplemental data. B. Become familiar with all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or the completion of Work. C. Carefully study and correlate the information available to the Bidder with the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data. D. Notify the OAR of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder discovers in the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data. E. Determine that the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for completion of Work. Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 6.02 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 5, that without exception the Bid is premised upon completion of Work required by the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data, that the Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data and the written resolutions provided by the OAR are acceptable to the Bidder, and that the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for completion of Work. INTERPRETATIONS AND ALTERNATE BIDS 7.01 Submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data using the Owner’s Bidding Website at www.civcastusa.com. Responses to questions submitted will be posted on the website by the Owner for the benefit of all Bidders. Responses will be posted for questions submitted by 5:00 p.m. seven (7) days prior to the date of the bid opening. Inquiries made after this period may not be addressed. 7.02 Submit any offer of alternate terms and conditions, or offer of Work not in strict compliance with the Contract Documents to the OAR no later than 14 days prior to the date for opening of Bids. OAR and Designer will issue Addenda as appropriate if any of the proposed changes to the Contract Documents are accepted. A Bid submitted with clarifications or taking exceptions to the Contract Documents, except as modified by Addenda, may be considered non‐responsive. 7.03 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Contract Documents, Addenda or the related supplemental data as deemed advisable by the Owner or Designer. Modifications to the Contract Documents prior to the award of contract can only be made by Addenda. Only answers in Addenda authorized by the Owner will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. BID SECURITY 8.01 Bidders must submit an acceptable Bid Security with their Bid as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a contract for the Project with the Owner within 10 days of Notice of Award of the Contract. The security must be payable to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas in the amount of 5 percent (5%) of the greatest amount bid. 8.02 Bid Security may be in the form of a Bid Bond or a cashier’s check, certified check, money order, or bank draft from a chartered financial institution authorized to operate in the State of Texas. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the CivCast System at www.CivCastUSA.com shall scan and upload a copy of Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Cashier’s check, certified check, money order or bank draft must be enclosed in a sealed envelope, plainly identified on the outside as containing bid documents, the bidder’s name and the job name and number and delivered as required in Article 7 below. 8.03 Bid Bond Requirements: Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 1. A Bid Bond must guarantee, without qualification or condition, that the Owner will be paid a sum equal to 5 percent (5%) of the greatest amount bid if, within 10 calendar days of Notice of Award of the Contract, the Bidder/Principal: a. fails to enter into a contract for the Project with the Owner; or b. fails to provide the required Performance and Payment Bonds. 2. A Bid Bond may not limit the sum payable to the Owner to be the difference between the Bidder/Principal’s bid and the next highest bidder. 3. The Bid Bond must reference the Project by name as identified in Article 1. 4. Bidders may provide their surety’s standard bid bond form if revised to meet these Bid Bond Requirements. 8.04 Failure to provide an acceptable Bid Security will constitute a non‐responsive Bid which will not be considered. 8.05 Failure to provide the required Performance and Payment Bonds will result in forfeiture of the Bid Security to the City as liquidated damages. 8.06 Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited if the apparent Selected Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement or Amendments to the Agreement. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom the Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the Owner until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 90 days after the date Bids are opened. 8.07 Bid Securities are to remain in effect until the Contract is executed. The Bid Securities of all but the three lowest responsible Bidders will be returned within 14 days of the opening of Bids. Bid Securities become void and will be released by the Owner when the Contract is awarded or all Bids are rejected. PREPARATION OF BID 9.01 The Bid Form is included with the Contract Documents and has been made available at the Owner’s Bidding Website. Complete all blanks on the Bid Form by typing or printing in ink. Indicate Bid prices for each Bid item or alternate shown. 9.02 Execute the Bid Acknowledgement Form as indicated in the document and include evidence of authority to sign. 9.03 Acknowledge receipt of all Addenda by filling in the number and date of each Addendum. Provide a signature as indicated to verify that the Addenda were received. A Bid that does not acknowledge the receipt of all Addenda may be considered non‐responsive. 9.04 Provide the name, address, email, and telephone number of the individual to be contacted for any communications regarding the Bid in the Bid Acknowledgement Form. 9.05 Provide evidence of the Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the State of Texas or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the Contract. Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 CONFIDENTIALITY OF BID INFORMATION 10.01 In accordance with Texas Government Code 552.110, trade secrets and confidential information in Bids are not open for public inspection. Bids will be opened in a manner that avoids disclosure of confidential information to competing Bidders and keeps the Bids from the public during considerations. All Bids are open for public inspection after the Contract is awarded, but trade secrets and confidential information in Bids are not typically open for public inspection. The Owner will protect this information to the extent allowed by Laws and Regulations. Clearly indicate which specific documents are considered to be trade secrets or confidential information by stamping or watermarking all such documents with the word “confidential” prominently on each page or sheet or on the cover of bound documents. Place “confidential” stamps or watermarks so that they do not obscure any of the required information on the document, either in the original or in a way that would obscure any of the required information in a photocopy of the document. Photocopies of “confidential” documents will be made only for the convenience of the selection committee and will be destroyed after the Effective Date of the Contract. Original confidential documents will be returned to the Bidder after the Effective Date of the Contract if the Bidder indicates that the information is to be returned with the Bid, and arrangements for its return are provided by the Bidder. MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 11.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by a Bidder, provided an authorized individual of the Bidder submits a written request to withdraw the Bid prior to the time set for opening the Bids. 11.02 A Bidder may withdraw its Bid within 24 hours after Bids are opened if the Bidder files a signed written notice with the Owner and promptly, but no later than 3 days, thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of the Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid. The Bid Security will be returned if it is clearly demonstrated to the Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in its Bid. A Bidder that requests to withdraw its Bid under these conditions may be disqualified from responding to a reissued invitation to Bid for the Work to be furnished under these Contract Documents. BIDS REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 12.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days, but the Owner may, at its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to the end of this period. STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE 13.01 The three lowest Bidders must submit the information required in SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE within 5 days of the date Bids are due to demonstrate that the Bidder meets the minimum requirements to complete the Work. EVALUATION OF BIDS 14.01 The Owner will consider the amount bid, the Bidder’s responsibilities, the Bidder’s safety record, the Bidder’s indebtedness to Owner, the Bidder’s capacity to perform the work and/or whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements. Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 14.02 Owner may conduct such investigations as it deems necessary to establish the responsibility of the Bidder and any Subcontractors, individuals, or entities proposed to furnish parts of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.03 Submission of a Bid indicates the Bidder’s acceptance of the evaluation technique and methodology as well as the Bidder’s recognition that some subjective judgments must be made by the Owner during the evaluation. Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the OPT and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any Bid. AWARD OF CONTRACT 15.01 The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive bid. Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, including without limitation, non‐conforming, non‐responsive or conditional Bids. The Owner reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous interpretation of the Bids submitted in the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating Bid prices and/or waive any or all formalities. 15.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work shall be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest. MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 16.01 Selected Contractor is required to comply with the Owner’s Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy as indicated in SECTION 00 72 03 MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY. 16.02 Minority participation goal for this Project has been established to be 45%. 16.03 Minority Business Enterprise participation goal for this Project has been established to be 15%. BONDS AND INSURANCE 17.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions and SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS sets forth the Owner’s requirements as to Bonds and insurance. When the Selected Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the Owner, it must be accompanied by the required Bonds and evidence of insurance. 17.02 Provide Performance and Payment Bonds for this Project that fully comply with the provisions of Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Administration of Bonds will conform to Texas Government Code Chapter 2253 and the provisions of these Contract Documents. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 18.01 The City Engineer or Director of Capital Programs will submit recommendation for award to the City Council for those project awards requiring City Council action. The Selected Bidder will be required to deliver the required Bonds and insurance certificates and endorsements along with the required number of counterparts (1) of the Agreement and attached documents to the Owner within 14 days. The Contract will be signed by the City Manager or his/her designee after Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 award and the Bidder’s submission of required documentation and signed counterparts. The Contract will not be binding upon Owner until it has been executed by both parties. Owner will process the Contract expeditiously. However, Owner will not be liable for any delays prior to the award or execution of Contract. SALES AND USE TAXES 19.01 The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any City or State sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax‐exempt agency. Assume responsibility for including any applicable sales taxes in the Contract Price and assume responsibility for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State of Texas Comptroller. 19.02 It is the Owner’s intent to have this Contract qualify as a “separated contract.” WAGE RATES 20.01 This Contract is subject to Texas Government Code Chapter 2258 concerning payment of prevailing wage rates. Requirements for paying the prevailing wage rates are discussed in SECTION 00 72 02 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS. Bidders must pay not less than the minimum wage shown on this list and comply with all statutes and rulings of the State of Texas Comptroller. ARTICLE 21 – BIDDER’s CERTIFICATION OF NO LOBBYING 21.01 In submitting its Bid, Bidder certifies that it has not lobbied the City or its officials, managers, employees, consultants, or contractors in such a manner as to influence or to attempt to influence the bidding process. In the event it reasonably appears that the Bidder influenced or attempted to influence the bidding process, the City may, in its discretion, reject the Bid. CONFLICT OF INTEREST 22.01 Bidder agrees to comply with Chapter 176 of the Texas Local Government Code and file Form CIQ with the City of Corpus Christi City Secretary’s Office, if required. For more information on Form CIQ and to determine if you need to file a Form CIQ, please review the information on the City Secretary’s website at http://www.cctexas.com/government/city‐secretary/conflict‐ disclosure/index. ARTICLE 23 – CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES 23.01 Bidder agrees to comply with Texas Government Code section 2252.908 and complete Form 1295 Certificate of Interested Parties as part of this contract, if required. For more information, please review the information on the Texas Ethics Commission website at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us. ARTICLE 24 ‐ REJECTION OF BID 24.01 The following will be cause to reject a Bid: A. Bids which are not signed by an individual empowered to bind the Bidder. Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 9 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 B. Bids which do not have an acceptable Bid Security, with Power of Attorney, submitted as required by Article 7. C. More than one Bid for same Work from an individual, firm, partnership or corporation. D. Evidence of collusion among Bidders. E. Sworn testimony or discovery in pending litigation with Owner which discloses misconduct or willful refusal by bidder to comply with subject contract or instructions of Owner. F. Failure to have an authorized agent of the Bidder attend the mandatory Pre‐Bid Conference, if applicable. G. Bids received from a Bidder who has been debarred or suspended by Owner. H. Bids received from a Bidder when Bidder or principals are currently debarred or suspended by Federal, State or City governmental agencies. 24.02 The following may be cause to reject a Bid or cause to deem a Bid non‐responsive or irregular. The City reserves the right to waive any irregularities and any or all formalities: A. Poor performance in execution of work under a previous City of Corpus Christi contract. B. Failure to achieve reasonable progress on an existing City of Corpus Christi contract. Evidence of Bidder’s recurring failure to complete an item of work within a timeframe acceptable to the City or in accordance with a City‐accepted schedule is evidence of Bidder’s failure to achieve reasonable progress under this subsection. C. Default on previous contracts or failure to execute Contract after award. D. Evidence of failure to pay Subcontractors, Suppliers or employees in accordance with Contract requirements. E. Bids containing omissions, alterations of form, additions, qualifications or conditions not called for by Owner, or incomplete Bids may be rejected. In any case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the Bid, OWNER reserves right to determine most advantageous Bid or to reject the Bid. F. Failure to acknowledge receipt of Addenda. G. Failure to submit post‐Bid information specified in Section 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE within the allotted time(s). H. Failure to timely execute Contract after award. I. Previous environmental violations resulting in fines or citations by a governmental entity (i.e. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Texas Commission on Environmental Quality, etc.). J. Bidder’s Safety Experience. K. Failure of Bidder to demonstrate, through submission of the Statement of Experience, the experience required as specified in Section 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, if that Section is included in the bidding documents. L. Evidence of Bidder’s lack of sufficient resources, workforce, equipment or supervision, if required by inclusion of appropriate requirements in Section 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE. Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 ‐ 10 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01‐13‐2016 City Project No. E11066 M. Evidence of poor performance on previous Projects as documented in Owner’s project performance evaluations. N. Unbalanced Unit Price Bid: “Unbalanced Bid” means a Bid, which includes a Bid that is based on unit prices which are significantly less than cost for some Bid items and significantly more than cost for others. This may be evidenced by submission of unit price Bid items where the cost are significantly higher/lower than the cost of the same Bid items submitted by other Bidders on the project. O. Evidence of Bidder’s lack of capacity to perform the Work. Evidence of Bidder’s lack of capacity. Evidence of capacity to perform the Work will include a factual review of (i) all remaining work or incomplete work items under any existing city or non‐city contract; (ii) ability to perform the Work with remaining sufficient resources, workforce, equipment and supervision/supervisory staff; (iii) ability in the past to timely complete the same or similar work in a good and workmanlike manner utilizing same or similar remaining resources or under the same or similar conditions. Evidence of incomplete work items under any existing City‐awarded IDIQ or other contract for similar work may constitute a lack of capacity to perform the Work. END OF SECTION Bid Acknowledgement Form 00 30 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 30 00 BID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT 1.01 In accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents, this Bid Proposal is submitted by _______________________________________________ (type or print name of company) on: June 1, 2016 at 2:00 PM for E11066 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 1.02 Submit Bids, Bid Security and all attachments to the Bid (See Section 7.01 below) to the City’s electronic bidding website at www.CivCastUSA.com. If submitting hard copy bids or bid security in the form of a cashier’s or certified check, please send to: The City of Corpus Christi, Texas City Secretary’s Office 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid - O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Project No. E11066 All envelopes and packages (including FEDEX envelopes) must clearly identify, on the OUTSIDE of the package, the project name and number and that bid documents are enclosed. ARTICLE 2 – BIDDERS’S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 2.01 Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner on the form included in the Contract Documents, to perform all Work specified or indicated in Contract Documents for the Contract Price indicated in this Bid or as modified by Contract Amendment. Bidder agrees to complete the Work within the Contract Times established in the Agreement or as modified by Contract Amendment and comply with the all other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2.02 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of SECTION 00 21 13 INVITATION AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, including those dealing with required Bonds. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the opening of Bids. 2.03 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of its failure to complete Work in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Agreement. 2.04 Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No. Addendum Date Signature Acknowledging Receipt Bid Acknowledgement Form 00 30 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Addendum No. Addendum Date Signature Acknowledging Receipt ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. 3.02 The Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.03 The Bidder is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.04 The Bidder has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: A. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; B. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; C. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; D. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and E. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. 3.05 The Bidder has considered the: A. Information known to Bidder; B. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; C. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and D. The Contract Documents. 3.06 The Bidder has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 3.04 and 3.05 with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: A. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; B. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and C. Bidder’s safety precautions and programs. 3.07 Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bid Acknowledgement Form 00 30 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 3.08 The Bidder is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 3.09 The Bidder has correlated the information known to the Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. 3.10 The Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Bidder. 3.11 The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 3.12 Bidder’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – BASIS OF BID 4.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for: Base Bid $ Additive Alternate 1 $ Additive Alternate 2 $ Additive Alternate 3 $ Additive Alternate 4 $ The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be either the Lowest Responsible Bidder or the Bidder who provides the Best Value for the Owner that submits a responsive Bid. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for the Base Bid, plus any combination of Add or Deduct Alternates or to the Bidder who provides the Best Value for the Owner. ARTICLE 5 – EVALUATION OF BIDDERS 5.01 The contract may be awarded either to the lowest responsible bidder or to the bidder who provides the best value for the Owner. The Owner will consider the amount bid, the Bidder’s responsibility, the Bidder’s safety record, the Bidder’s indebtedness to Owner and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements to determine the lowest responsible Bidder. The Owner reserves the right to waive any and all irregularities in determining the Bidders’ responsibility or value, and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements, and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. 5.02 The Owner has the right to accept a Bid, reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all irregularities in the Bids, or to reject non-conforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids. In Bid Acknowledgement Form 00 30 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 addition, the Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid where circumstances and developments have, in the opinion of the Owner, changed the responsibility of the Bidder. 5.03 Material misstatements in the documentation submitted to determine the Bidder’s responsibility, including information submitted per SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, may be grounds for rejection of the Bidder’s Bid on this Project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the Contract to such Bidder, may be grounds for immediate termination of the Contract. Additionally, the Bidder will be liable to the Owner for any additional costs or damages to the Owner resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney’s fees for collecting such costs and damages. ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01 Bidder will complete the Work required to be substantially completed within 700 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. Bidder will complete the Work required for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 730 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, 365 additional days will be added to the substantial and final completion dates. 6.02 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within the number of days indicated. ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID In compliance with the Bid Requirements in SECTION 00 21 13 INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, the following are made a condition of this Bid: A. Bid Security. B. SECTION 00 30 00 BID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM and documentation of signatory authority. C. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. D. SECTION 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS. E. SECTION 00 30 05 DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST. F. SECTION 00 30 06 NON-COLLUSION CERTIFICATION. ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS 8.01 The terms used in this Bid have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. The significance of terms with initial capital letters is described in the General Conditions. Bid Acknowledgement Form 00 30 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 ARTICLE 9 – VENUE 9.01 Bidder agrees that venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. ARTICLE 10 – SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDERS 10.01 Bidders must include their correct legal name, state of residency, and federal tax identification number in the Bid Form. 10.02 The Bidder, or the Bidder’s authorized representative, shall sign and date the Bid Form to accompany all materials included in the submitted Bid. Bids which are not signed and dated in this manner, or which do not contain the required documentation of signatory authority may be rejected as non-responsive. The individual(s) signing the Bid must have the authority to bind the Bidder to a contract, and if required, shall attach documentation of signatory authority to the Bid Form. 10.03 Bidders who are individuals (“natural persons” as defined by the Texas Business Organizations Code §1.002), but who will not be signing the Bid Form personally, shall include in their bid a notarized power of attorney authorizing the individual designated as their authorized representative to submit the Bid and to sign on behalf of the Bidder. 10.04 Bidders that are entities who are not individuals shall identify in their Bid their charter or Certificate of Authority number issued by the Texas Secretary of State and shall submit with their Bid a copy of a resolution or other documentation approved by the Bidder’s governing body authorizing the submission of the Bid and designating the individual(s) authorized to execute documents on behalf of the Bidder. Bidders using an assumed name (an “alias”) shall submit a copy of the Certificate of Assumed Name or similar document. 10.05 Bidders that are not residents of the State of Texas must document their legal authority to conduct business in Texas. Nonresident Bidders that have previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State may submit a copy of their Certificate of Authority. Nonresident Bidders that have not previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State shall submit a copy of the Bidder’s enabling documents as filed with the state of residency, or as otherwise existing. Bid Acknowledgement Form 00 30 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 ARTICLE 11 – BID SUBMITTAL 11.01 This Bid is submitted by: Bidder: (typed or printed full legal name of Bidder) By: (individual’s signature) Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Attest: (individual’s signature) State of Residency: Federal Tax Id. No. Address for giving notices: Phone: Email: (Attach evidence of authority to sign if the authorized individual is not the Bidder, but an individual signing on behalf of another individual Bidder, or if the authorized individual is a representative of a corporation, partnership, or joint venture.) END OF SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11066)Page 1 of 2 Rev 01-13-2016 Project Name: Project Number: Owner: Bidder: OAR: Designer: Item UNIT ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT A1 LS 1 A2 EA 1 B1 B2 LS 1 300,000.00$ 300,000.00$ C1 Alternate Generator Building Extension and Retrofit LS 1 D1 High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation LS 1 D2 Allowance for HS2 Discharge Butterfly Valves LS 1 50,000.00$ 50,000.00$ E1 72-Inch Waterline Extension LS 1 F1 High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehab LS 1 Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements DESCRIPTION Base Bid Mobilization Ozone Advisory Day Part A - General (per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Basis of Bid Part C -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) SUBTOTAL PART A - GENERAL (Items A1 thru A2) SUBTOTAL PART B - WATER IMPROVEMENTS (Items B1 thru B2) O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City of Corpus Christi LNV, Inc. City Project No. E11066 Part B - WATER IMPROVEMENTS (per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) ONSWTP Improvements and Modifications SUBTOTAL PART C - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (C1) Part D -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (D1 THRU D2) Part E -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (E1) Part F -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) SUBTOTAL PART F - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (F1) 00 30 01 BID FORM Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11066)Page 2 of 2 Rev 01-13-2016 Item UNIT ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNTDESCRIPTION Contract Times 700 days 730 days NOTE: 1. If only Base Bid is awarded, no additional days will be awarded. SUBTOTAL PART F - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (Item F1) Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in SUBTOTAL PART C - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (Item C1) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (PART C) SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (Items D1 thru D2) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (PART D) SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (Item E1) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (PART E) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (PART F) 2. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 3 or Additive Alternate No. 4 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 3 & 4 is awarded, no additional days will be awarded. 3. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, 365 additional days will be awarded. TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID (PARTS A THRU B) BID SUMMARY SUBTOTAL PART A - GENERAL (Items A1 thru A2) SUBTOTAL PART B - WATER IMPROVEMENTS (Items B1 thru B2) Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders 00 30 02 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code applies to the award of government contract to nonresident bidders. This law provides that: “a government entity may not award a governmental contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident underbids the lower bid submitted by a responsible resident bidder by an amount that is not less than the amount by which a resident bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident’s principal place of business is located.” “Nonresident bidder” refers to a person who is not a resident of Texas. “Resident bidder” refers to a person whose principal place of business is in this state, including a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has its principal place of business in this state. Check the statement that is correct for Bidder. ☐ Bidder qualifies as a nonresident bidder whose principal place of business or residency is in the State of . ☐ Bidder (includes parent company or majority owner) qualifies as a resident bidder whose principal place of business is in the State of Texas. The Owner will use the information provided in the State of Texas Comptroller’s annual publication of other states’ laws on contracts to evaluate the Bids of nonresident Bidders. Bidder: Company Name: (typed or printed) By: (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name: (typed or printed) Title: Business address: Phone: Email: END OF SECTION Non-Collusion Certification 00 30 06 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 00 30 06 NON-COLLUSION CERTIFICATION STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF NUECES OWNER: City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 CONTRACT: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Proj. Number E11066 Bidder certifies that the it has not been a party to any collusion among Bidders in the restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to submit a Bid at a fixed price or to refrain from bidding; or with any official or employee of the Owner as to quantity, quality, or price in the prospective contract, or any other terms of said prospective contract; or in any discussion between Bidders and any official of the Owner concerning exchange of money or other thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a contract. Company Name: (typed or printed) By: (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name: (typed or printed) Title: Business address: Phone: Email: END OF SECTION Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE ARTICLE 1 – REQUIREMENT TO PROVIDE A STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE 1.01 To be considered a responsive Bidder, the three lowest Bidders must complete and submit the Statement of Experience within 5 days after the date Bids are due to demonstrate the Bidders’ responsibility and ability to meet the minimum requirements to complete the Work. Failure to submit the required information in the Statement of Experience may result in the Owner considering the Bid non-responsive and result in rejection of the Bid by the Owner. The Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited if Bidder fails to deliver the Statement of Experience in an attempt to be released from its Bid. Bidders may be required to provide supplemental information if requested by the Owner to clarify, enhance or supplement the information provided in the Statement of Experience. 1.02 Bidders must provide the information requested in this Statement of Experience using the forms attached to this Section. A copy of these forms can be provided in Microsoft Word to assist with the preparation of the Statement of Experience. Information in these forms must be provided completely and in detail. Information that cannot be totally incorporated in the form may be included in an attachment to the form. This attachment must be clearly referenced by attachment number in the form, and the attached material must include the attachment number on every sheet of the attachment. The attachment must include only the information that responds to the question or item number to which the attachment information applies. 1.03 The Bidder may also be required to supply a financial statement, prepared no later than 90 days prior to the City Engineer’s request, signed and dated by the Bidder’s owner, president or other authorized party, specifying all current assets and liabilities. ARTICLE 2 – EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS 2.01 The Bidder agrees that, in addition to determining the apparent low Bid, the Owner will consider the responsiveness of the Bids and the responsibility of the Bidders in awarding a Contract for this Project. Information that indicates the Bidder or a Subcontractor is not responsible or that might negatively impact a Bidder’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time and for the Contract Price may result in the Owner rejecting the Bid. 2.02 If none of the three apparent low Bidders are deemed responsible, the Owner may notify the next apparent low Bidders in order, who will then be required to submit the Statement of Experience for review, until a Contract is awarded or all Bids have been rejected. 2.03 The Bidder is responsible for the accuracy and completeness of all of the information provided by the Bidder or a proposed Subcontractor in response to this Statement of Experience. 2.04 Provide general information about the organization as required in Table 1. Describe the organizational structure of the Bidder's organization as it relates to this Project in Table 2. 2.05 Provide resumes for the key personnel that will be actively working on this Project. A. Key personnel include the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Safety Manager and Quality Control Manager. If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role, and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this Project, indicate how that individual’s time is to be divided between this Project and other assignments. B. The Bidder may provide resumes for an alternate individual if the Bidder is not able to commit to one individual for the Project at the time the Bid is submitted. Qualifications of these individuals will be considered in determining whether the experience of the Bidder meets the minimum requirements. The Bidder must provide the services of the proposed key personnel for the life of the Project as a condition of Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 qualification. Failure to provide the proposed Key Personnel may result in the disqualification of the Bidder and may void the award of the Contract. C. Provide information for each primary and alternate candidate that includes: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training and a work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment. Additional information demonstrating experience that meets the minimum requirements should also be included. D. The Project Manager and Project Superintendent must have at least 5 years of recent experience in the management and oversight of projects of a similar size and complexity to this Project. This experience must include scheduling of manpower and materials, safety, coordination of Subcontractors, experience with the submittal process, Federal and State wage rate requirements and contract close-out procedures. The Project Superintendent is to be present at the Site at all times that Work is being performed. Foremen must have at least 5 years of recent experience in similar work and be subordinate to the Project Superintendent. Foremen cannot act as a superintendent without prior written approval from the Owner. 2.06 Provide information on the project experience and past performance of the organization. A. Provide information on projects that have been awarded to the Organization in the last 5 years in Table 3. Attach additional pages if necessary. Experience must include the satisfactory completion of at least five similar projects within the last 5 years for the Bidder's organization that are equal to or greater in size and magnitude than the current Project. B. In determining the responsibility of the Bidder, the Owner will consider the Bidder’s past projects and any substandard quality of workmanship on completed projects. The Owner will consider whether the Bidder’s past project experience shows substandard quality of workmanship, issues related to a substandard appearance of the completed work, the amount of warranty or rework required, problems with durability and maintainability of the completed project, and problems with the lack of quality of documentation provided. In addition to the work produced, the Owner may consider issues related to the quality of construction practices, responsiveness to the owner’s needs during construction, an inability to work in the spirit of partnering and any non-responsiveness of the Bidder to make warranty corrections. Information to make this determination will come from Owner's interviews with references provided for this project. By listing reference contact information in this Statement of Experience, Bidder indicates its approval for OPT to contact the individuals listed as a reference. ARTICLE 3 – STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS 3.01 Provide one printed copy of the Statement of Experience using the referenced tables and narrative descriptions as described in Article 2. Pages are to be 8-1/2 x 11 pages using a minimum font size of 10. A limited number of 11 x 17 sheets may be used, and must be folded to the size of an 8-1/2 x 11 page. 3.02 Provide a digital copy of the Statement of Experience in Portable Document Format (PDF) on a CD, portable drive, or other digital recording device. This digital copy is to include all information required to evaluate the Bid and should match the content of the printed copy of the Bid. When creating the digital copy: A. Create PDF documents from native format files. B. Rotate pages so that the top of the document appears at the top of the file when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the original documents. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. D. Submit color PDF documents if color is used in the printed version of the documents. Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 1 – Organization Information Organization doing business as: Business Address of Principal Office Telephone No. Website Form of Business (check one) ☐ Corporation ☐ Partnership ☐ Individual If a Corporation State of Incorporation Date of Incorporation Chief Executive Officer’s Name President’s Name Vice President’s Name(s) Secretary’s Name Treasurer’s Name If a Partnership Date of Organization Form of Partnership: ☐ General ☐ Limited If an Individual Name Ownership of Organization List of companies, firms, or organizations that own any part of the organization. Names of Companies, Firms, or Organizations Percent Ownership Organization History List of names that this organization currently, has, or anticipates operating under including the names of related companies presently doing business. Names of Organizations From Date To Date Indicators of Organization Size Average number of current full-time employees Average estimate of revenue for the current year Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 1 – Organization Information Organization doing business as: Previous History with City of Corpus Christi List the 5 most recent projects that have been completed with the City of Corpus Christi. Project Name Year 1 2 3 4 5 Construction Site Safety Experience Provide Bidders Experience Modification Ratio (EMR) History for the last 3 years. Provide documentation of the EMR. Year EMR Year EMR Year EMR Previous Bidding and Construction Experience Has Bidder or a predecessor organization been disqualified as a bidder within the last 10 years? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Has Bidder or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past 10 years? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Has Bidder or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Has Bidder or a predecessor organization been involved in claims or litigation involving project owners within the last 10 years? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Have liens or claims for outstanding unpaid invoices been filed against the Bidder for services or materials on any projects begun within the preceding 3 years? Specify the name and address of the party holding the lien or making the claim, the amount and basis for the lien or claim, and an explanation of why the lien has not been released or that the claim has not been paid if yes. Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 2 – Project Information Organization doing business as: Proposed Project Organization Provide a brief description of the organizational structure proposed for this project indicating the names and functional roles of proposed key personnel and alternates. Provide resumes for Project Manager, Superintendent, Safety Manager and Quality Control Manager. Position Primary Alternate Project Manager Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Division of work between Bidder and Proposed Subcontractor and Suppliers Provide a list of Work to be self-performed by the Bidder and the Work contracted to Subcontractors and Suppliers for more than 10 percent of the Work (based on estimated subcontract or purchase order amounts and the Contract Price). Description of Work Name of Entity Performing the Work Estimated Percentage of Contract Price Subcontractor Construction Site Safety Experience Provide Experience Modification Ratio (EMR) History for the last 3 years for Subcontractors that will provide Work valued at 25% or more of the Contract Price. Provide documentation of the EMR. Subcontractor Year EMR Year EMR Year EMR Subcontractor Year EMR Year EMR Year EMR Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 3 – Projects Awarded during the Last 5 Years Organization doing business as: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 3 – Projects Awarded during the Last 5 Years – Not including City of Corpus Christi Projects Organization doing business as: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 3 – Projects Awarded during the Last 5 Years – Not including City of Corpus Christi Projects Organization doing business as: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Project Information Project Name Description Reference Contact Information Project Owner Name/Title Telephone Email Project Designer Project Budget and Performance Original Contract Price Final Contract Price # Contract Days # Days Late Issues/Claims/ Litigation: Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 9 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 Table 4 – Demonstrated Minority, MBE, DBE Participation Organization doing business as Project Subcontractors and Suppliers Provide a list of anticipated Minority, MBE, DBE Subcontractors or Suppliers contracts that will be used to demonstrate compliance with the Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy Name Work to be Provided Estimated % of Contract Price Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 10 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 Rev 10-6-2015 ARTICLE 4 – CERTIFICATION 4.01 By submitting this Statement of Experience and related information, Bidder certifies that it has read this Statement of Experience and that Bidder’s responses are true and correct and contain no material misrepresentations and that the individual signing below is authorized to make this certification on behalf of the Bidder’s organization. The individual signing this certification shall attach evidence of individual’s authority to bind the organization to an agreement. Bidder: (typed or printed) By: (individual’s signature) Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Designated Representative: Name: Title: Address: Telephone No.: Email: END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 ARTICLE 2 – DESIGNER AND OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: LNV, Inc. 801 Navigation, Suite 300 Corpus Christi, TX 78408 2.02 The Owner’s Authorized Representative for this Project is: Name of Owner’s Authorized Representative Office Address City, State, Zip Code ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 700 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 730 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, 365 additional days will be added to the substantial and final completion dates. B. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages Agreement 00 52 23 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $1,000 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $1,000 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to 95 percent of the total earned value to date for completed Work and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. The balance will be held as retainage. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner’s option, retainage may be required at a higher percentage rate if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner’s option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. 6.02 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 L. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 – ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 13.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor’s fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 2. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 3. Addenda. 4. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor’s Bid Form. 5. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES One original of the signed Agreement will be required. The sequence of signatures will be completed in the following order: A. CONTRACTOR – Agreement must be signed by a person authorized to bind the firm or company. If Contractor is a Corporation, agreements must be Attested; B. ASSISTANT CITY ATTORNEY for the City; C. DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES; D. CITY SECRETARY for the City. Agreement 00 52 23 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta City Secretary J.H. Edmonds, P.E. Director of Engineering Services APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: Janet L. Kellogg Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Title: Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO.________________________ Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Name: Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address (principal place of business): Physical address (principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Contract Project name and number: Telephone (main number): Telephone (for notice of claim): Local Agent for Surety Name: Award Date of the Contract: Address: Contract Price: Bond Telephone: E-Mail Address: Date of Bond: The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of the Contract) Said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument in 4 copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original. Performance Bond 00 61 13 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Email Address: Email Address: (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev. 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO._____________________ Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Name: Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address (principal place of business): Physical address (principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Contract Project name and number: Telephone (main number): Telephone (for notice of claim): Local Agent for Surety Name: Award Date of the Contract: Address: Contract Price: Bond Telephone: E-Mail Address: Date of Bond: The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of Contract) Said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument in 4 copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original. Payment Bond Form 00 61 16 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev. 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Email Address: Email Address: (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ....................................................................................................... 6 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 6 1.02 Terminology ................................................................................................................................ 11 Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ................................................................................................................... 12 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 12 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................. 13 2.03 Before Starting Construction ...................................................................................................... 13 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ................................ 13 Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................. 13 3.01 Intent ........................................................................................................................................... 13 3.02 Reference Standards ................................................................................................................... 15 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 15 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 16 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 16 Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 16 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 16 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 16 4.03 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 17 4.04 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 17 Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................................................................... 18 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 18 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 18 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 19 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 19 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 21 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 22 Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 24 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 24 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................ 24 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 6.03 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 25 Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 25 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 25 7.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 25 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 26 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 26 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 27 7.06 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 28 7.07 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 28 7.08 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 28 7.09 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 29 7.10 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................. 30 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 30 7.12 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 30 7.13 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 30 7.14 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 31 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 32 Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 33 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 33 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 34 8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 34 Article 9 – Owner’s and OPT’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................... 35 9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 35 9.02 Replacement of Owner’s Project Team Members ...................................................................... 35 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 35 9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 35 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 35 9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 35 9.07 Modifications .............................................................................................................................. 35 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 35 9.09 Limitations on OPT’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................... 35 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 36 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program ................................................................................................ 36 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 2 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 Article 10 – OAR’s and Designer’s Status During Construction .................................................................. 36 10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 36 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 36 10.03 Resident Project Representatives ........................................................................................... 36 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................ 36 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments......................................................................... 36 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 37 10.07 Limitations on OAR’s and Designer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................... 37 Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work .................................................... 37 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents ....................................................... 37 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 38 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 38 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 39 11.05 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 40 11.06 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 40 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................... 40 11.08 Notice to Surety ...................................................................................................................... 41 Article 12 – Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 42 12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 42 12.02 Claims Process ......................................................................................................................... 42 Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 43 13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 43 13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 46 13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 46 13.04 Contingencies .......................................................................................................................... 47 Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 47 14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 47 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 47 14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 48 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 49 14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 49 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 49 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 50 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 3 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 50 15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 50 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 52 15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 52 15.04 Partial Utilization ..................................................................................................................... 53 15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 53 15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 53 15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 54 15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 54 Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 55 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 55 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 55 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................ 56 Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 57 17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 57 Article 18 – Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 57 18.01 Computation of Times............................................................................................................. 57 18.02 Owner’s Right to Audit Contractor’s Records ......................................................................... 57 18.03 Independent Contractor ......................................................................................................... 58 18.04 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 58 18.05 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 58 18.06 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 58 18.07 Severability .............................................................................................................................. 58 18.08 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 59 18.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries ................................................................................................... 59 18.10 Assignment of Contract........................................................................................................... 59 18.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity .......................................................................................... 59 18.12 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 59 18.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue ..................................................................................... 59 18.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury............................................................................................................. 59 18.15 Attorney Fees .......................................................................................................................... 59 18.16 Compliance with Laws............................................................................................................. 59 18.17 Enforcement............................................................................................................................ 60 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 4 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 18.18 Subject to Appropriation ......................................................................................................... 60 18.19 Contract Sum........................................................................................................................... 60 18.20 Contractor’s Guarantee as Additional Remedy ...................................................................... 60 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 5 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. A term with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, has the meaning indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution - The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date – The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City) authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid - The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Requirements. 7. Bidding Documents - The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and Addenda. 8. Bidder - An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bidding Requirements - The Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Security, Bid Form and attachments, and required certifications. 10. Bid Security - The financial security in the form of a bid bond provided by Bidder at the time the Bid is submitted and held by Owner until the Agreement is executed and the evidence of insurance and Bonds required by the Contract Documents are provided. A cashier’s check, certified check, money order or bank draft from any State or National Bank will also be acceptable. 11. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 12. Change Order - A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 6 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 13. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 14. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or his designated representative as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. 15. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. 16. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 17. Contract - The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 18. Contract Amendment - A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract, but does not make changes in the Work. 19. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 20. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications, and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any, that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 7 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 21. Contract Times - The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 22. Contractor - The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 23. Contractor’s Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 24. Cost of the Work - The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 13. 25. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR’s recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraphs 15.03 or 15.04. 26. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers or Registered Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 27. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 28. Effective Date of the Contract - The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 29. Field Order - A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 30. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 8 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 31. Indemnified Costs - All costs, losses, damages, and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner’s Indemnitees. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 32. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations - Applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 33. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. 34. Milestone - A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 35. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 36. Notice of Award - The notice of Owner’s intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 37. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 38. Owner - The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and his designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City’s officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 39. Owner’s Authorized Representative or OAR - The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 40. Owner’s Indemnitees - Each member of the OPT and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors. 41. Owner’s Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner’s Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 42. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 9 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 43. Progress Schedule - A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 44. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 45. Resident Project Representative or RPR - The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. 46. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 47. Schedule of Documents - A schedule of required documents, prepared, and maintained by Contractor. 48. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 49. Selected Bidder - The Bidder to which Owner intends to award the Contract. 50. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 51. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 52. Specifications - The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 53. Subcontractor - An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 54. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 55. Supplementary Conditions - The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 56. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 57. Technical Data - Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 10 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or c. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 58. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 59. Unit Price Work - Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 60. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 61. Work Change Directive - A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to “at no additional cost to Owner,” “at Contractor’s expense,” or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms “day” or “calendar day” mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed,” or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 11 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 E. The use of the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” and “provide” have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide.” F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word “all” is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” “provide,” or similar words include the meaning of the phrase “The Contractor shall...” before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT’s project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 12 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements (Division 01 Sections of the Specifications) apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract, Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 13 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 14 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations, whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 3. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00 - 15 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 4. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 5. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer’s or OAR’s interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor’s Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 16 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree. 4.04 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if OPT directly delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work. The Contractor agrees to make no Claim for damages for delay in the performance of the Contract occasioned by an act or omission to act of the OPT and agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor’s Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D.1, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8; and 3. Acts of war or terrorism. 4. Rain days in excess of the number of days allocated for rain as described in the Supplementary Conditions. E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 17 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor’s Team. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor’s Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor’s Team’s operations; c. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 18 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor’s Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner’s Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor’s safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor’s interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 19 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor’s cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR’s issuance of the OPT’s statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 20 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 2. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 3. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 4. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 5. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents, or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown General Conditions 00 72 00 - 21 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR’s issuance of OPT’s statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner’s Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor’s safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless this removal or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 22 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor’s Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor’s Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor’s Team that was not created by the Contractor’s Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR’s notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 23 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice, or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 24 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 6.03 Insurance A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner’s consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. C. Do not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday without OAR’s consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year’s Day January 1 Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 25 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 15.01.B 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Document. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor’s reasonable objections. F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 26 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 days of Owner’s notice to replace a Subcontractor, Supplier, or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner’s initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers’ Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor’s Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor’s Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 27 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 B. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner’s exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 28 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor’s Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor’s Team. E. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor’s Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner’s safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner’s safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 29 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor’s warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections, tests, or approvals by others; or 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 30 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 Indemnification A. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM AND AGAINST CLAIMS, DAMAGES, LOSSES AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY’S FEES OR DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, VIOLATIONS OF LAWS OR REGULATIONS, OR BODILY INJURY, DEATH, OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY CAUSED BY THE ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH CLAIM, DAMAGE, LOSS OR EXPENSE IS ALLEGED TO BE CAUSED IN PART BY AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE HEREUNDER, SUBJECT TO THE OWNER’S DEFENSES AND LIABILITY LIMITS UNDER THE TEXAS TORT CLAIMS ACT. HOWEVER, NOTHING HEREIN SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO REQUIRE CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE AGAINST A CLAIM, LOSS, DAMAGE OR EXPENSE CAUSED BY THE (I) NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT, (II) BREACH OR VIOLATION OF A STATUTE, ORDINANCE, GOVERNMENTAL REGULATION, STANDARD OR RULE, OR (III) THE BREACH OF CONTRACT BY AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE. PROVIDED FURTHER HOWEVER, AND IN ADDITION TO THE ABOVE, CONTRACTOR INDEMNIFIES EACH OF OWNER’S INDEMNITEES AGAINST CLAIMS FOR THE BODILY INJURY OR DEATH OF AN EMPLOYEE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S TEAM OF ANY TIER EVEN IF CAUSED BY THE SOLE OR CONCURRENT NEGLIGENCE OF AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE. B. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM AND AGAINST INDEMNIFIED COSTS, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO: (I) THE FAILURE TO CONTROL, CONTAIN, OR REMOVE A CONSTITUENT OF CONCERN BROUGHT TO THE SITE BY CONTRACTOR’S TEAM OR A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED BY CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, (II) CONTRACTOR’S TEAM’S ACTION OR INACTION RELATED TO DAMAGES, DELAYS, DISRUPTIONS, OR INTERFERENCE WITH THE WORK OF OWNER’S EMPLOYEES, OTHER CONTRACTORS, OR UTILITY OWNERS PERFORMING OTHER WORK AT OR ADJACENT TO THE SITE, OR (III) THE CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK. NOTHING IN THIS PARAGRAPH OBLIGATES THE CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM THE CONSEQUENCES OF THE OWNER’S AND OWNER’S INDEMNITEES OWN NEGLIGENCE. PROVIDED FURTHER HOWEVER, AND IN ADDITION TO THE ABOVE, CONTRACTOR INDEMNIFIES THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES AGAINST CLAIMS FOR THE BODILY INJURY OR DEATH OF AN EMPLOYEE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S TEAM OF ANY TIER EVEN IF CAUSED BY THE SOLE OR CONCURRENT NEGLIGENCE OF OWNER’S INDEMNITEES. C. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM AND AGAINST INDEMNIFIED COSTS RESULTING FROM INFRINGEMENT ON PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS BY CONTRACTOR’S TEAM TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. D. The indemnification obligations under this paragraph are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor’s Team or other individuals or entities under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner’s Indemnitees by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor’s Team. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 31 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner’s Indemnitees from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner’s Indemnitees do not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor’s counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner’s Indemnitees as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner’s Indemnitees may assume and control the defense If Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner’s Indemnitees as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner’s Indemnitees may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner’s consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner’s Indemnitees to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner’s Indemnitees; b. Would require Owner’s Indemnitees to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner and Owner’s Indemnitees’ full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 32 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials, or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor’s design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor’s Work. This other work may be performed by Owner’s employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s General Conditions 00 72 00 - 33 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor’s Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT, other contractor, or utility owner: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor’s Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor or utility owner to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor’s Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner’s employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors or utility owners if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 34 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 E. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or related damages, delays, disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S AND OPT’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner’s Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Paragraphs 15.01.D and 15.06.D. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. OPT’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 14.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT’s Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 35 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT’s responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. ARTICLE 10 – OAR’S AND DESIGNER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. OAR is Owner’s representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner’s representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer’s visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer’s authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner’s quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner’s representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR’s visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR’s authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives’ authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 14. 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer’s authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer’s authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 36 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 C. OAR and Designer’s authority related to Modifications is described in Articles 11. D. OAR’s authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 13 and 15. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work, or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 14.04, if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OAR will issue a Request for a Change Proposal if a Modification is required. OAR will provide documentation for changes related to the non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will provide documentation if design related changes are required. D. Contractor may appeal Designer’s decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer’s decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR’s and Designer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor’s Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor’s Team. ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 37 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer’s approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive are to be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive if negotiations are unsuccessful under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications, or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 38 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01 plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.D when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents or the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price without adjusting Contractor’s fee. D. Contractor’s Fee: Determine the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit as follows: 1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor’s fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.C.1 and 13.01.C.2; b. The Contractor’s fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.C.3; c. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor’s fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.C.1 and 13.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 2) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.C.4, and 13.01.D; e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 39 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 3. The adjustment in Contractor’s fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.D.2.a through 11.04.D.2.e, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 12. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. B. Notify the OAR immediately if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. Submit the following as part of the Change Proposal: 1. Any proposed change in Contract Price, Contract Times, or other relief, accompanied by a statement that the requested Change Order is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled; 2. The reason for the proposed change; and 3. Supporting data, accompanied by a statement that the supporting data is accurate and complete. C. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor’s supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 40 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 12. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay, or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor’s agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor’s submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Bid, nor a warranty that the Bid will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. A Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor if the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07. 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents, or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 41 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS 12.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. A demand or assertion by Owner to Contractor, submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision by Designer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Contesting Designer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; d. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or e. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. 2. A demand or assertion by Contractor to Owner, submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Contesting OPT’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; or b. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OPT has declined to address. 12.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. B. Claims by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer, and the OAR within 7 days: 1. After the start of the event giving rise to the Claim; or 2. After a final decision on a Change Proposal has been made. C. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. D. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. E. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Times, Contractor must certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief, the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled. F. The entity receiving a Claim is to review the Claim giving full consideration to its merits. The Owner and Contractor are to seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of actions taken on a Claim. G. Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediate the underlying dispute at any time after initiation of a Claim. 1. The agreement to mediate suspends the Claim submittal and response process. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 42 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 2. Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process after 60 days from the agreement to mediate and resume the Claim submittal and decision process as of the date of the termination. The Claim process resumes as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator, if the mediation is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. H. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part or denies it in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes within 30 days of this action. I. Notify the OAR if efforts to resolve the Claim are not successful, and the Claim is denied. A denial of the Claim is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes within 30 days of the denial. J. The results of the agreement or action on the Claim is to be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times if the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim. ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 13.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 13.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor’s employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 13.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 43 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers’ compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave, vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers’ field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining, with the OPT, which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 44 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 e. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; f. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor’s Team; g. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; h. Cost of additional utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; i. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and j. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor’s Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor’s fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor’s indemnification of Owner’s Indemnitees. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 13.01.C. E. The Contractor’s fee is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis. 2. In accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C for Work covered by a Modification determined on the basis of Cost of the Work. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting General Conditions 00 72 00 - 45 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 13.01. 13.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 13.02.B.1 and 13.02.B.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 13.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR’s decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03.E. E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR’s decision under Paragraph 13.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Agreement; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 46 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or if Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 13.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Agreement. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 13.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Agreement. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor’s selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor’s safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination General Conditions 00 72 00 - 47 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 14.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 48 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15 for costs associated with OPT’s evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 14.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT’s observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. 2. Submit a Change Proposal for an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to this uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, and reconstruction if the uncovered Work is found to be not Defective. 14.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 49 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner’s right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor’s Team or surety. 14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy the following deficiencies after 7 days’ notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 15. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07. ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payments are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in the Contract Documents. 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 2.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 50 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 13.01, 13.02 and 13.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses, or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor’s conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor’s Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Owner has been notified of failure to make payments to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or Employees; j. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; k. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; l. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; m. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; n. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 51 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 o. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; p. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; q. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or r. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 15.03 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work after Contractor’s notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 52 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor’s coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner’s assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor’s obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor’s access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 15.04 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 15.05 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted under Paragraph 15.04 is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 15.06 Final Payment A. Make Application for Final Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT’s reasons for not recommending final payment. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 53 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR’s recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 15.07 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05; 3. Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 17 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 15.08 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or longer periods of time prescribed by the terms of the Contract Documents. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 15.08.A and 15.08.B corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR’s instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. D. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or systems are placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. The correction period is extended for an additional period of 1 year for Defective Work corrected after the date of Substantial Completion or after the accepted date the correction period starts to run as described in Paragraph 15.08.E. This extended correction period starts to run when Defective Work has been satisfactorily corrected under this Paragraph 15.08. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 54 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 G. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 15.08 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.08 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor’s insolvency; 5. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; or 6. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of OPT. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 16.02.A.4. Owner may terminate this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR’s request for this information. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 55 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days’ notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of the Contract under this Paragraph 16.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 16.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. This cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner are to be reviewed as to their reasonableness and incorporated in a Change Order by OAR. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. 16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days’ notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.D.; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 56 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01 Methods and Procedures A. The Owner or Contractor may appeal a Claim, approved or denied in part or in full, by: 1. Electing to invoke the dispute resolution process if one is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; 2. Agreeing with the other party to submit the dispute to a dispute resolution process; or 3. Notifying the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to. ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS 18.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 18.02 Owner’s Right to Audit Contractor’s Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee, which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four (4) years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract, then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Example of Contractor written and electronically stores records include, but are not limited to: accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondences, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 57 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Agreement Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor’s records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner’s designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Section in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 18.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor’s Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor’s Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership, or formal business organization of any kind. 18.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of, the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 18.03 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 18.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner’s Indemnitees are not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor’s Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. 18.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision, affect the enforceability of that provision, or the enforceability of the remainder of this Contract. 18.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 58 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 18.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees, and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 18.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 18.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the consent of the Owner. 18.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. 18.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. 18.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 18.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 18.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys’ fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney’s fees. 18.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 59 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 B. Comply with all applicable federal, state, and city laws, rules and regulations. 18.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee, are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 18.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract, with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 18.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated, this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 18.20 Contractor’s Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor’s guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release, or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00 - 60 Corpus Christi Standards - Regular Projects 03-23-2015 Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ARTICLE 1 – INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.01 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AMOUNTS A. Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises - Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products / Completed Operations Hazard 6. Contractual Liability 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal & Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Per Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate Business Automobile Liability - Owned, Non-Owned, Rented and Leased $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Workers’ Compensation Statutory Employer’s Liability $500,000/ 500,000/ 500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Contractor’s Pollution Liability / Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. $2,000,000 Per Claim ☐ Required X Not Required Builder’s Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Contract Price X Required ☐ Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price ☐ Required X Not Required Owner’s Protective Liability Equal to Contractor’s liability insurance ☐ Required X Not Required 1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with Article 6 of the General Conditions and this Section. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Section. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT’s failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor’s full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor’s obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16 of the General Conditions if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner’s Indemnitees in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the “other insurance” clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor’s insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers’ compensation policy and Contractor’s professional liability policy. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers’ compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers’ compensation obligations. Provide an “All Other States” endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. Provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; 4. By any other person for any other reason; and 5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor’s commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Section. Insurance is to remain in effective for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. Eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody, and control of Contractor. Provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor in lieu of elimination of the exclusion, or if required by this Section. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or “All Peril” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor’s Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixture, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14 of the General Conditions, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, “Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. E. Purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor’s commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors for each named insured or additional insured; 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor’s pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Section must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Section or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not by rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 1.04 OWNER’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain an Owner’s Protective Liability insurance policy with the Owner as the named insured and other members of the OPT as additional insureds. Provide a policy that will protect the OPT from claims which arise from operations under the Contract Documents. Provide this coverage in the same amounts required for the Contractor’s liability insurance and from the same company that provides the Contractor’s liability insurance. 1.05 PROPERTY INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Section or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 1.06. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT, Contractor, and all Subcontractors, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder’s risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04 of the General Conditions. Maintain the builder’s risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Section. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 1.06 WAIVER OF RIGHTS A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Section are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner’s Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contains provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner’s Indemnitees, Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and other property insurance. 1.07 OWNER’S INSURANCE FOR THE PROJECT A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds, or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 – EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE 2.01 ACCEPTABLE EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of “Additional Insureds” for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days’ notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy’s terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 2.02 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 2.03 INSURANCE POLICIES A. Provide a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles if requested by the Owner. B. Owner may require the deletion, revision, or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions (except where policy provisions are established by Laws or Regulations binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter of any such policies). Comply with these requests and submit a copy of the replacement certificate of insurance to Owner at the address provided below within 10 days of the requested change. 2.04 CONTINUING EVIDENCE OF COVERAGE A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Section prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 2.05 NOTICES REGARDING INSURANCE A. Submit notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: City of Corpus Christi – Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. ARTICLE 3 – TEXAS WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE REQUIRED NOTICE 3.01 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage (“certificate”) - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers’ compensation insurance coverage for the person’s or entity’s employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 9 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 2. Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor’s/person’s Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project (“Subcontractor” in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. “Services” include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. “Services” does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor’s current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers’ Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 10 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers’ compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission’s Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor’s failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. END OF SECTION Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 00 72 02 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS ARTICLE 1 – PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 1.01 PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor is required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. 1.02 RECORDS A. In accordance with Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024, the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 1.03 LIABILITY; PENALTY; CRIMINAL OFFENSE A. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.003 – Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.053(b) – Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258, shall pay to the Owner, on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed or each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.058 – Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 1.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 Wage Determination (WD) No Construction Type Project Type TX-31 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) TX-40 Highway Highway Construction Projects (excluding tunnels, building structures in rest area projects & railroad construction; bascule, suspension & spandrel arch bridges designed for commercial navigation, bridges involving marine construction; and other major bridges). TX-342 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) General Decision Number: TX160031 01/08/2016 TX31 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20150031 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.15 for calendar year 2016 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the solicitation was issued on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.15 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2016. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/08/2016 * SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excluding Form Setting).........................$ 9.05 Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 Concrete Finisher................$ 7.56 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 13.37 2.58 Laborers: Common......................$ 7.25 Utility.....................$ 7.68 Power equipment operators: Backhoe.....................$ 9.21 Motor Grader................$ 8.72 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION General Decision Number: TX160040 01/08/2016 TX40 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20150040 State: Texas Construction Type: Highway Counties: Aransas, Calhoun, Goliad, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (excluding tunnels, building structures in rest area projects & railroad construction; Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 bascule, suspension & spandrel arch bridges designed for commercial navigation, bridges involving marine construction; and other major bridges). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.15 for calendar year 2016 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the solicitation was issued on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.15 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2016. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/08/2016 * SUTX2011-010 08/08/2011 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER (Paving & Structures)...$ 12.64 FORM BUILDER/FORM SETTER Paving & Curb...............$ 10.69 Structures..................$ 13.61 LABORER Asphalt Raker...............$ 11.67 Flagger.....................$ 8.81 Laborer, Common.............$ 10.25 Laborer, Utility............$ 11.23 Pipelayer...................$ 11.17 Work Zone Barricade Servicer....................$ 11.51 PAINTER (Structures).............$ 21.29 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Asphalt Distributor.........$ 14.25 Asphalt Paving Machine......$ 13.44 Mechanic....................$ 17.00 Motor Grader, Fine Grade....$ 17.74 Motor Grader, Rough.........$ 16.85 TRUCK DRIVER Lowboy-Float................$ 16.62 Single Axle.................$ 11.61 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 9 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION General Decision Number: TX160342 01/08/2016 TX342 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20150342 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.15 for calendar year 2016 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the solicitation was issued on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.15 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2016. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/08/2016 Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 10 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2014 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 23.14 21.55 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0278-002 08/30/2015 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 25.00 7.70 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-005 06/01/2014 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane.............$ 29.00 10.60 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 27.50 10.60 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * IRON0084-011 06/01/2015 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 23.02 6.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 0.00 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 11.36 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 0.00 Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 11 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 12 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 13 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 14 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 REV 06-12-2015 interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION END OF SECTION Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy 00 72 03 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 00 72 03 MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY ARTICLE 1 – PARTICIPATION POLICY 1.01 POLICY A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, and Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives of the Affirmative Action Policy Statement of the City dated October 1989, and any amendments thereto. In accordance with such policy, the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s). Minority person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). c. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect, to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise, must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy 00 72 03 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman, a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. F. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 1.03 GOALS A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor’s aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be as specified in SECTION 00 21 13 INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor’s percentage is prohibited. 1.04 COMPLIANCE A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project, the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi-weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No.E11066 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi, Texas LNV, Inc. CDM Smith Inc. Bath Group, Inc. Turner, Ramirez Architects Govind Development, LLC. B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54 “Substantial Completion” is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following minimum conditions must be met or completed: a. All new treatment structures and buildings fully constructed and complete with all utilities connected, tested, in service and operational. b. All equipment installed, tested, and functional in both Hand and Auto Modes. c. All site plans, yard piping, electrical and all other site work installed, tested, and complete and accepted by OAR. d. Fully functional SCADA System with fully functional HMI and operator interface panels with all equipment accepted by manufacturer’s representative and approved for operation. e. All programming, control narratives and system startup procedures and equipment interaction fully demonstrated. f. All testing requirements included in Section 01 33 06 shall be completed and accepted by the OAR. g. All SCADA and security equipment shall be installed and tested in accordance with the specification and manufacturer’s requirements and shall be accepted by the manufacturer’s representative and approved for operation. h. Final O&M manuals shall be delivered to the OAR in hard copy and electronic format. Electronic manuals shall be provided in a format acceptable to the OAR. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Proj ect No.E11066 i. Completion of installations of all required safety structures and equipment, including, but not limited to, guard rails, warning signs, pipe and equipment painting, labeling, and tagging. All safety related systems and equipment shall be installed, accepted by manufacturer’s representative and approved for use. j. All training completed using Draft O&M Manuals. 2. Only the following items not yet complete in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. Final Walkthrough b. Contractor As -Builts ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR’S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor’s progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 86 rain days have been set for this Project. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, an additional 43 rain days will be added for the project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 50 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No.E11066 ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Subsurface Investigation, Laboratory Testing Program and Foundation Recommendations for the Proposed High Service 3 Project, RETL Job No. G114183, Rock Engineering Testing and Laboratory, Inc., August 2014 - The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data in using this document: 1) Boring Logs 2) Recorded Groundwater Levels 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: a. NONE SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. Delete Paragraph 5.06 entirely and insert the following: “5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner.” ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: “The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: a. Base Bid 1) 12,700 sq. ft Pump Building 2) Six Horizontal Split-Case Pumps, Motors, and Associated Piping & Valves 3) Electrical, Instrumentation & Control Systems 4) 60-inch and 72-inch Yard Piping 5) Access Road Improvements 6) Pavement and Drainage Rehabilitation 7) Utility and Grading Improvements 8) Clearwell No. 1 Repairs b. Additive Alternates 1) Addition of a 2 MW Generator to include building extension and retrofit of existing building 2) Existing High Service 2 Pump Rehabilitation, replacement of High Service 2 check valves, and replacement of motor protection relays 3) 72-inch waterline from wash water supply pump station to road east of South Filters 4) Access Road Rehabilitation for road servicing High Service 2 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Site Infrastructure Improvements Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 2. O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant AEP Transmission Line Relocation B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate, and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. c. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. c. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. c. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor’s responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. c. Provide actual invoices for the materials. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate 1- Alternate Generator Building Extension and Retrofit 1. Installation of new 2 MW generator 2. Extension of existing Alternate Generator Building and Foundation to support new 2 MW generator 3. Existing Generator Building Retrofit. B. Alternate 2- High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation: 1. Replacement of existing four (4) Horizontal Split-Case impellers to match impellers of High Service Pump Building No. 3 Pumps. 2. Replacement of existing four (4) pump discharge tilting disc check valves 3. Removal of twenty-one (21) GE multilin motor protection relays existing in PCR #2 and PCR #3 and replacing with SEL motor protection relays C. Alternate 3 – 72-inch Waterline Extension: 1. Extension of 72-inch waterline from wash water supply pump station to road east of the South Filter Building. D. Alternate 4 – High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehabilitation 1. Rehabilitation of existing access road servicing High Service Pump Building No. 2 as shown on Baseline B of the plans. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance B2 - Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements 1. The sum of $300,000 to be used for any unforeseen conditions or conflicts related to the proposed civil, mechanical, structural, electrical, and/or architectural improvements. B. Allowance D2 – Allowance for HS2 Discharge Butterfly Valves 1. The sum of $50,000 to be used for installation of up to four (4) new 24-inch butterfly valves if it is deemed by OAR that the existing 24” Butterfly Valves cannot be reused as shown on plan sheets 110-113. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer’s facilities or on Site; 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor’s use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor’s safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Submit approval using the Consent of Surety Company to Payment Procedures form provided. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Progress Schedule per SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. 2. Project photographs per SECTION 01 33 05 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION. 3. Record Documents per SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner’s Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form for Attachment A - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials, or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor’s overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. E. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other cost associated with the item in the Agreement. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. F. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ANTICIPATED PAYMENTS AND EARNED VALUE A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. 1.04 BASIS FOR PAYMENTS A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 1.02.E.3 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 1.05. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Agreement. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 1.05. 2. Measure the Work described in the Agreement for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 1.05 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment show in the Application for Payment on Attachment A or Attachment B - Tabulation of Work on Approved Contract Modifications will be made for the invoice amount, up to the value show in the Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on Attachment D - Tabulation of Values for Materials and Equipment. Include invoice numbers on Attachment D so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on Attachment D. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value; and provide documents, satisfactory to the City, that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor’s obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 1.06 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES A. Include amounts for specified Alternate Work in the Agreement in accordance with SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES. B. Include amounts for specified Allowances for Work in the Agreement in accordance with SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES. 1.07 RETAINAGE AND SET-OFFS A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include Attachment C – Tabulation of Set-Offs in the Application for Payment. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 1.08 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTING AN APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line item for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the Set off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 1.09 RESPONSIBILITY OF OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT’s reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR’s recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR’s recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 03-11-2015 City Project No. E11066 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 1.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. C. Submit the final Application for Payment per the General Conditions, including the final Change Order. Provide the following with the Final Application for Payment: 1. Evidence of payment or release of liens on the forms provided and as required by the General Conditions. 2. Consent from Surety to Final Payment. 1.11 PAYMENT BY OWNER A. Owner is to pay the amount recommended for monthly payments within 30 days after receipt of the OAR’s recommended Application for Payment. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1 - Mobilization: 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Bonds and insurance; b. Transportation and setup for equipment; c. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; d. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; e. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; f. Demobilization; and g. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. B. Bid Item A2 – Ozone Advisory Day: 1. Payment will be as described in Paragraph 1.09, Section 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS. C. Bid Item B1 – ONSWTP Improvements and Modifications: 1. Payment will be made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning improvements and modifications as per plans and specifications including all Trench Safety. 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES A. Bid Item B2 – Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements: 1. Payment will be based on the Contractor’s actual costs and will be negotiated. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning improvements as specified by the OAR. B. Bid Item C1 – Alternate Generator Building Extension and Retrofit: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning Alternate Generator Building, and associated components, as per plans and specifications. C. Bid Item D1 – High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning High Service Pump Building No. 2, and associated components, as per plans and specifications. D. Bid Item D2 – Allowance for HS2 Discharge Butterfly Valves: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning 24-inch butterfly valves associated with Bid Item D1 as per plans and specifications. E. Bid Item E1 – 72-Inch Waterline Extension: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning waterline and appurtenances as per plans and specifications. F. Bid Item F1 – High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehabilitation: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning access road and appurtenances as per plans and specifications. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth as required in SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. 1. Provide copies of Supplier’s printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor in Record Drawings. 1.04 PERMITS A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 1.05 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 1.06 ACCESS TO THE SITE A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Roadways may not be approved for construction traffic. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 1.07 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures as discussed in SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS. E. Park employees’ vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner’s property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 1.08 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Coordinate Work with local utility company and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 1.09 PRE-CONSTRUCTION EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS (NOT APPLICABLE) A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 C. Prepare a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the Designer. E. Include the cost for these pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for pipe construction. Pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair. 1.10 DISRUPTION TO SERVICES / CONTINUED OPERATIONS A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner or utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action in accordance with SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES if facilities must be taken out of operation. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Drawings as required in SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. 1.12 REFERENCE DATA AND CONTROL POINTS A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 1.13 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier’s storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier’s instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier’s required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 1.14 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 1.15 MAINTENANCE OF ROADS, DRIVEWAYS, AND ACCESS A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner’s approval of a street closing. The request shall state: 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction, with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 1.16 AREA ACCESS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner’s Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner’s Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner’s Traffic Engineering Department. 1.17 OVERHEAD ELECTRICAL WIRES A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 1.18 BLASTING A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 1.19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 1.20 ENDANGERED SPECIES RESOURCES A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 1.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. C. For the Contractor’s convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Project Engineer 361-883-1984 LNV, Inc. 361-883-1984 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 9 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 01-13-2016 City Project No. E11066 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/ Wastewater/ Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) 361-885-5999 (Dispatch after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 MIS Department (City Fiber) 361-826-3740 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 254-379-4400 Time Warner Communications Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 Century Tel 361-883-3000 Windstream Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-886-9005 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 1.03 COMMUNICATION DURING THE PROJECT A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The Designer will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. E. Submit communications on the forms referenced in this Section or in SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES. c. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. d. Contractor’s organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor’s superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor’s detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre- Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 1.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 1.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the Designer to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. Designer will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 1.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 1.06. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1.06 DECISION AND ACTION ITEM LOG A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 1.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action items if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 1.07 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use “Notification by Contractor” form provided. 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor’s field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. c. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions, traps, and tanks. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work (lines added) in yellow; c. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Change Management 01 31 14 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUESTS FOR CHANGE PROPOSAL A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 1.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 1.02 CHANGE PROPOSALS A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT’s description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for labor by classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; 9) Home office cost; and 10) Other items of cost. d. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work Change Management 01 31 14 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 13 of the General Conditions for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the Designer to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 1.03 DESIGNER WILL EVALUATE THE REQUEST FOR A MODIFICATION. A. Designer will issue a Modification per the General Conditions if the Change Proposal is acceptable to the Owner. Designer will issue a Change Order or Contract Amendment for any changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor’s risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.04 EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list “or equal” or “or approved equal” products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow the procedures in Paragraph 1.05 for a substitution. B. Contractor may submit other manufacturers’ products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase “or equal” or “or approved equal.” 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT’s responsibility to prove the product is not equal. Change Management 01 31 14 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer’s published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 4. A Change Proposal is not required for any product that is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. If the product is not in full compliance, it may be offered as a Substitution. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 1.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS to request approval of a substitution. B. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer’s responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. C. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request, the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. Change Management 01 31 14 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. D. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Document Management 01 33 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. 1.04 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Document Management 01 33 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 a. Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software. b. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. c. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. d. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. e. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. f. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. g. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. h. Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size i. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 1.05 DOCUMENT NUMBERING A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor Document Management 01 33 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 Prefix Description Originator SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter “A” designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 1.06 DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Specification Section Application for Payment 01 29 00 Change Proposal 01 31 14 Certified Test Report 01 33 02 for approval of product 01 40 00 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor 01 31 13 Photographic Documentation 01 33 05 Progress Schedules 01 33 04 Record Data 01 33 03 Request for Information 01 31 13 Shop Drawing 01 33 02 Schedule of Values 01 29 00 Substitutions 01 31 14 Suppliers and Subcontractors 01 31 13 and 01 33 03 Document Management 01 33 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Section 01 33 01 Submittal Register Submittal Register O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Proj. Number E11066 013301-1 2/26/2016 Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 1.4 Shop Drawing 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 1.3 Shop Drawing 03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete 1.5 Record Data 03 35 11 Concrete Floor Finishes 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 04 01 00 Maintenance of Masonry 1.4 Mockup 04 05 11 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 1.4 Record Data 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.4 Record Data Sample 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 05 10 00 Structural Steel 1.3 Shop Drawing 05 10 01 Miscellaneous Metals 1.3 Shop Drawing 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 1.4 Shop Drawing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 1.2 Shop Drawing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 1.4 Shop Drawing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 1.4 Record Data 05 50 00.01 Metal Fabrications (Architectural)1.4 Shop Drawing 05 50 00.02 Metal Fabrications (Structural)1.3 Shop Drawing 07 14 00 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 1.4 Record Data 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 1.4 Record Data 07 22 00 Roof and Deck Insulation 1.3 Sample 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 1.6 Shop Drawing Sample 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 1.8 O&M Manual 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 07 42 13.16 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels 1.6 Shop Drawing Sample 07 42 13.19 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels 1.6 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 07 52 00 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing 1.6 Record Data Sample 07 60 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 07 84 00 Firestopping 1.4 Record Data 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.4 Record Data 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.4 Shop Drawing 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 1.4 Shop Drawing 08 80 00 Glazing 1.4 Record Data 08 91 00 Louvers 1.3 Shop Drawing 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.4 Record Data 09 80 01 Galvanizing 1.4 Record Data 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 1.4 Record Data 09 91 10 Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 09 96 00 Protective Coatings 1.6 Sample 09 96 00.13 High-Performance Coatings 1.3 O&M Manual 10 14 00 Signage 1.3 Sample 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 1.5 Record Data 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 1.4 Record Data 10 73 10 Protective Covers 1.3 Shop Drawing Sample 13 12 00 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels 1.6 Shop Drawing Sample 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment 1.5 Shop Drawing 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Installation 1.3 Shop Drawing Sample 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 1.3 Record Data 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 1.4 Shop Drawing 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 23 00 50 Basic Materials and Methods 1.13 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 1.3 Record Data Sample 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 3.3 Record Data 23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 1.3 Record Data 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 1.3 Record Data 23 74 13 Packaged-Outdoor Handling Units 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required 23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 23 82 39 Unit Heaters 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 1.3 Record Data 26 05 00 General Work for Req's for Electrical Specifications 1.5 Shop Drawing 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables 1.4 Record Data Sample 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 1.3 Record Data 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1.3 Record Data 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1.5 Shop Drawing 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System 1.4 Shop Drawing 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 1.3 Shop Drawing 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 1.3 Record Data Sample 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power System Studies 1.4 Shop Drawing 26 20 10 Medium Voltage Motors 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 24 16 Panelboards 1.4 Shop Drawing 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 1.5 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 36 00 Transfer Switches 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 42 13 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines 1.6 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 26 42 14 Corrosion Control Test Stations 1.6 Shop Drawing 26 42 15 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation 1.6 Shop Drawing 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 1.4 Shop Drawing 33 11 16 Waterlines 1.3 Record Data 33 11 16.13 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings - Belowground 1.3 Shop Drawing 33 11 16.23 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe 1.3 Shop Drawing 33 12 16 Butterfly Valves 1.4 Shop Drawing 33 13 00 Disinfection of Waterlines 1.3 Record Data 40 05 00 Piping - General Requirements 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 40 05 09 Pipe Penetrations 1.4 Shop Drawing 40 05 13 PVC & CPVC Pipe and Fittings 1.4 Shop Drawing 40 05 14 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings 1.4 Shop Drawing 40 05 18 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings - Aboveground 1.4 Shop Drawing 40 05 50 Valves 1.4 Record Data O&M Manual 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 1.2 Record Data 40 05 57 Electro-Hydraulic Valve Actuators 1.6 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 05 65 Metal Seated Ball Valves 1.6 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 05 70 Piping Specialties 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample O&M Manual 40 05 76 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints 1.5 Shop Drawing 40 23 10 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specialties 1.4 Shop Drawing 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 1.6 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 90 01 Instrumentation 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System 1.3 Shop Drawing 40 90 03 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing & Commissioning 1.2 O&M Manual 41 22 25 Bridge and Hoist Systems 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 41 67 19 Safety Devices/Equipment 1.3 Shop Drawing 43 21 01 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pumps 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 43 21 02 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps 1.4 Shop Drawing 43 21 06 Sump Pumps 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents, or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 1.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description ****REFER TO SECTION 01 33 01 – SUBMITTAL REGISTER**** B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each time a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawing; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawing are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawing related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer’s attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 1.10. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor’s risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner’s option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. 1.04 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 1.05 SPECIAL CERTIFICATIONS AND REPORTS A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product’s intended use. 1.06 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS. 1.07 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software. b. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. c. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. d. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. e. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 1.08.A. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 f. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. g. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. h. Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. i. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier’s standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of “or equal” products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14 day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 1.03. 1.08 SAMPLE AND MOCKUP SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner’s option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 1.09 REQUESTS FOR DEVIATION A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 1.10 DESIGNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Section for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 3. Designer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor’s markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. c. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is “Approved as Noted,” but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked “Approved as Noted” and “Resubmit with corrections made.” These Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 9 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as “At Variance With” (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as “Not Approved” if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires as change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 1.10.B that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 10 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay cost for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer’s review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Record Data 01 33 03 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 33 03 RECORD DATA 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents required be submitted for record purposes. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description ****REFER TO SECTION 01 33 01 – SUBMITTAL REGISTER**** B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; Record Data 01 33 03 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 1.04 RECORD DATA REQUIREMENTS A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 1.05 SPECIAL CERTIFICATIONS AND REPORTS A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: Record Data 01 33 03 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. 1.06 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS. 1.07 RECORD DATA SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software. b. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. c. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. d. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. e. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. f. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. g. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. Record Data 01 33 03 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 h. Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. i. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of “or equal” products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 1.03. 1.08 DESIGNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 1.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. Record Data 01 33 03 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 1.02. Document will be given the status of “Filed as Received” and not further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Submit Shop Drawing.” No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 1.02. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Revise and Resubmit.” Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked “Filed as Received.” When Record Data is filed, no further action is required and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Cancel - Not Required.” No further action is required and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked “Filed as Received.” 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Take the requirements of SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES into consideration when preparing schedule. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedules updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 1.03 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years’ minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor’s program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revise when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT indicating: 1. Specific dates each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific dates each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of the each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 1.04 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor’s plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 1.05 FLOAT TIME A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Video and Photographic Documentation 01 33 05 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 33 05 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way) including but not limited to streets, curb and gutter, utilities, driveways, fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. Video and Photographic Documentation 01 33 05 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photograph in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 2.02 VIDEO RECORDING A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Please note that the ONSWTP is a critical provider of potable water to the City of Corpus Christi, TX and is operating under the terms of a drinking water permit issued by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. This permit, which is posted at the ONSWTP for review, specifies the water quality limits that the plant must meet prior to discharge of finished water. Work shall be performed in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the finished water quality established by the permit. The Contractor shall bear the cost of penalties imposed on the Owner for water quality violations caused by actions of the Contractor. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the City of Corpus Christi Drinking Water Operations and the OAR throughout construction to maintain the required flow range from ONSWTP at all times. The ONSWTP required flow range to be maintained during specific time frames of the year are as follows: ONSWTP REQUIRED FLOW RANGE TIME FRAME MINIMUM FLOW MAXIMUM FLOW November 1 through March 31 (all years) 45 MGD 85 MGD April 1 through October 31 (all years) 50 MGD 110 MGD It is understood that shutdowns of existing pipelines, process units and operations, of short and controlled durations, may be necessary to complete construction. However, Contractor shall work with the City and OAR to schedule work that may impact plant operations in such a manner that plant production will meet the required flow ranges as shown in the table above. The Contractor’s project schedule will be structured to maintain capacity requirements. In the event that construction activity begins to impact capacity constraints in a manner unforeseen by the Contractor, the Contractor shall immediately take all steps necessary to remove the impact on capacity caused by construction and restore specified plant capacity. Pumping capacities of the facility include, but is not limited to the following table: Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 PUMP STATION PUMP NO. RATED CAPACITY (MGD) High Service 1 1 15.8 High Service 1 2 10.1 High Service 1 3 15.8 High Service 1 4 10.1 High Service 1 5 10.1 High Service 1 6 10.1 High Service 1 7 10.2 High Service 2 8 24.5 High Service 2 9 24.5 High Service 2 10 24.5 High Service 2 11 24.5 Wash Water 3 12.96 Wash Water 5 12.96 Wash Water 7 12.96 The Contractor shall provide the City and OAR a request for shutdown 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled shutdown. The City reserves the right to grant, delay, or deny such shutdown request depending upon required production capacity at the time. In addition, the Contractor’s overall construction schedule shall clearly highlight the anticipated scheduled shutdown dates and duration. The time of shutdown will be decided by the City. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for shutdown work scheduled during night-time, Sundays or holidays to meet ONSWTP operating requirements. B. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: The following construction activities in sequence are proposed to accomplish the improvement work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. It should be noted that the suggested construction plan serves as a general guideline to the Contractor on how the construction of work shall be sequenced in compliance with the constraints of maintaining plant operation. However, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to develop a detailed construction plan that outlines the specific details of proposed construction activities and submit to the City and Engineer for review and approval. Please refer to (Appendix B – Construction Sequencing Exhibits) for a color coded plan view of the construction sequence phasing as described in this section. If the Construction Sequencing Exhibits are not in color format, please contact Engineer. Construction Sequencing shall be as follows: 1. Phase 1 – High Service 3 Building, Yard Piping, Utilities, and Road Work (See Appendix B, Attachment No. 2) a. Construction of the new HS 3 building will have minimal impacts on plant operations, therefore, this work as well as the yard piping, utilities and road work shall be started first. Existing HS 2 and HS 1 shall remain in service during the Phase 1 construction. b. The Contractor shall demo, abandoned in place, and construct all proposed yard piping and utilities during Phase 1 except for the tie-in connections of the yard piping and the 36-inch drain line piping. Please note that bypass pumping will be Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 required for all wastewater improvements so the Contractor must include a bypass pumping plan with the detailed construction plan required for City and Engineers approval. c. The Contractor shall construct all road work improvements only after HS 3 building, yard piping and utilities of Phase 1 have been completed. 2. Phase 2 – Yard Piping Tie-Ins (See Appendix B, Attachment No. 2) a. Connection of the new yard piping with the existing yard piping will necessitate temporary process interruption when the connections are made. As shown on the Drawings, the connection of the new 60-inch HS 3 suction header to the existing HS 2 60-inch header will require temporary-closing of the 60-inch isolation BFV on the suction header pipe and supplying treated water to the HS 2 pumps via the 54- inch suction header. This connection shall be scheduled during low production periods to minimize impacts on plant operations. b. Connection of the new HS 3 60-inch discharge header to the existing 60-inch transmission line will require that the 60-inch transmission line be isolated and temporarily taken out of service. This line is typically closed so isolating the line for the proposed tie-in will have limited impacts, however, dewatering will be required. Due to the significant distance between the two existing 60-inch valves required to isolate the transmission line, the Contractor shall perform one (1) 60- inch line stop between the two existing valves but just downstream of the proposed discharge header connections and install a permanent 60-inch isolation valve so that dewatering is minimized. 3. Phase 3 – Decommissioning High Service 1 and Transfer Electrical to High Service 3, Clearwell 1 Improvements and 36-inch Drain Line Tie-in a. Electrical modifications will be completed on a bus switchboard basis as shown in the table below (also see Appendix B, Attachment No. 1): ELECTRICAL MODIFICATION SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SEQUENCING BUS SWITCHBOARD EXISTING HIGH SERVICE PUMPS / CAPACITY PROPOSED HIGH SERVICE PUMPS / CAPACITY 1 ST PCR-2 HS #1 PUMPS 3, 5, 6, 7 HS #3 PUMPS 13, 15 (VFD) SWITCHBOARD "A" 46.2 MGD 39.4 MGD 2 ND PCR-2 HS #1 PUMPS 1, 2, 4 HS #3 PUMPS 14, 16 SWITCHBOARD "B" 36.0 MGD 39.4 MGD 3 RD PCR-3 HS #2 PUMPS 8, 9 HS #3 PUMPS 12 (VFD) SWITCHBOARD "A" 49.0 MGD 19.7 MGD 4 TH PCR-3 HS #2 PUMPS 10, 11 (VFD) HS #3 PUMPS 17 SWITCHBOARD "B" 49.0 MGD 19.7 MGD Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 b. HS 3 pumps will require electrical feed out of PCR-2 and PCR-3. Currently, PCR-2 feeds HS 1 and PCR-3 feeds HS 2 as shown in table above and in the attached Simplified Power Diagram. During PCR-2 work, electrical will be swapped from HS 1 pumps to HS 3 pumps. During PCR-3 work, electrical will be performed for the addition of the remaining HS 3 pumps. As HS 3 pumps are brought online per each switchboard, all pumps connected to the switchboard will be tested according to manufacturer recommendations. As HS3 pumps are brought online to replace HS1 pump, they will be made operational and the ONSWTP operations staff will utilize the new pumps so as not lose any pumping capacity during the construction period. If pump capacity is reduced during this process, scheduling shall be coordinated with Plant staff to ensure the process is conducted during low demand periods. The Contractor shall conduct electrical modifications and motor protection relay replacement on a single switchboard at a time; all necessary testing for pertinent switchboard shall be completed before beginning any work on a different switchboard. Contractor shall complete electrical modification and motor protection relay replacement work at PCR-2 before any work at PCR-3 occurs. The Contractor should note that PCR-2 supplies power to the wash water pumps in addition to high service pumps, therefore, work on PCR-2 shall be coordinated with ONSWTP staff so as not to interrupt filter backwashing. c. Demolition of the existing HS 1 equipment will require a temporary shutdown of CW 1 to remove all seven existing vertical turbine pumps and seal the pump openings on the CW 1 roof slab as specified in the Drawings and Specifications. Associated pump discharge piping, valves, and fittings will also be demolished at this time as specified in the Drawings and Specifications. During this construction activity, all of the treated water (from Plant 1 and Plant 2) will be sent to CW 2 and pumped from there to the distribution system via HS 2 and HS 3. Once CW 1 is shut down and all treated water is being sent to CW 2, the Contractor shall empty and perform the needed improvements to CW 1 as specified in the Drawings and Specifications before the clearwell is put back into operation. When CW 1 has been shut down and emptied, the Contractor shall also construct the proposed 36-inch drain line tie-in and either remove or grout fill the existing 36-inch portion to be abandoned as specified in the Drawings and Specifications before CW 1 is put back into operation. The demolition of HS 1 and CW 1 improvements should be scheduled during low production periods to reduce hydraulic impacts on the 72- inch clearwell inlet pipeline. 4. Phase 4 – High Service 2 Rehabilitation & Alternate Power Building Improvements a. Once the construction of HS 3 is completed and all new equipment is field-tested to function properly, the existing HS 2 pumps will be removed for refurbishment and the HS 2 pump discharge valves will be replaced. b. Each pump in HS 2 will be required to be sent to the OEM (Flowserve) factory for pump impeller replacement. To minimize the impact on plant operations, only one pump will be removed at a time and the three remaining pumps will remain online to operate with the new HS 3 to pump treated water to the distribution system. A firm capacity of combined HS 2 (with three unmodified pumps) and HS 3 is 150.5 MGD at 260.8 ft TDH. Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 c. Process shut-downs should be scheduled for low flow periods for as short of duration as practical. Extended shut-down duration shall be requested in writing and approved by the City. The City will identify which pump will be taken out of service in order for de-energizing and demolition work. d. Contractor shall coordinate all pump shutdowns with OAR and plant operation staff to allow operators to isolate the pump to be modified prior to commencement of the disconnection work. Each pump will be removed from service and sent to an authorized factory of the pump manufacturer for required modifications as specified in Technical Specification 40 21 02.00 – Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps. e. Contractor shall control and monitor flow to each pump remaining in service such that no pump will be overloaded during the duration of this shutdown and repair. f. During the same time HS 2 rehabilitation is being performed, the Contractor shall also be retrofitting the existing portion of the Generator Building and expanding the building for a 4th generator as specified in the Drawings and Specifications. C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 C. Submit plan 1 month prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS (NOT USED) A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Critical Operation Max. Time Out of Operation Hours Operation can be Shut Down Liquidated Damages ($ per hour) B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner’s normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. These items are critical to the [for operation of the existing distribution system] [other description of critical nature of operations]. 2. Loss of [operation of the existing distribution system] [other description of critical nature of operations] can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. F. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: 1. Critical Operation 1 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 1.] 2. Critical Operation 2 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 2.] 3. Critical Operation 3 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 3.] Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE (NOT USED) 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Quality Management 01 40 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 40 00 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review the OPT’s Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; c. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT’s use in performing inspections and testing; Quality Management 01 40 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT’s Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work though Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings required by SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, the OPT’s Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed, or might be damaged by corrective actions. 1.02 QUALITY MANAGEMENT ACTIVITIES BY THE OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor’s Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 1.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 1.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor’s Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; Quality Management 01 40 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT’s acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT’s acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT’s acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT’s quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF OPT’S TEST REPORTS A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT’s anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT’s quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these tests results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT’s quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT’s Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implementing the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor’s Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Quality Management 01 40 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents they are not in compliance and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. 1.05 STANDARDS A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications.” B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 1.07 VERIFICATION TESTING FOR CORRECTED DEFECTS A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 1.08 TEST REPORTS A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; Quality Management 01 40 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the test was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; l. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 1.09 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 1.10 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. Use Contractor’s Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with Quality Management 01 40 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor’s Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, c. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 1.11.B.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 1.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor’s Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. Quality Management 01 40 00 - 7 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 IMPLEMENT CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Includes the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. Quality Management 01 40 00 - 8 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work one month prior to the expiration of the correction period prescribed in the General Conditions with the OPT. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT’s field office and the Contractor’s field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT’s field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT’s field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. The field office must be furnished with a telephone (with 24-hour per day answering service) and fax machine paid for by the Contractor. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor’s use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 15 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT’s field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor’s and the OPT’s field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi’s Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the “Plan”). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT’s field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT’s field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled “STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS” and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1.05 PERMITS A. Submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, SWPPP, and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre-construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner’s operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than “well pointing” to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream, the Corpus Christi Bay. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Owner, at the Owner’s expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Owner, at the Owner’s expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest sanitary sewer system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a sanitary sewer or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to Pumping groundwater from a trench to the sanitary sewer system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a “no cost” permit from the Owner’s Waste Water Department. Owner will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner’s requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine, which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner’s sanitary sewer system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.13 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by IBC 2009. Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 6 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 1 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions and specified administrative procedures in closing out the Contract. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Submit certifications and releases on forms provided. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Notify the Designer that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within a reasonable time after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. Designer will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the Designer when the items of Work in the Designer’s notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. Designer will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the Designer of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A. Notify the Designer when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within a reasonable time after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 1.06 if notified that the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. 1.06 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL A. Record Documents per SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per SECTION 01 33 05 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION. 1.07 TRANSFER OF UTILITIES A. Transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 1.08 WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICES AGREEMENTS A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS or by the individual Specification Sections. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the General Conditions. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 11-25-2013 City Project No. E11066 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1 year correction period specified in the General Conditions and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name, with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or services agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the General Conditions for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty bond and service agreement; h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds and services agreements within 10 days after equipment or components placed in service. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Standard Specifications SECTION 021020 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for clearing, grubbing and stripping of objectionable matter as required to complete the project, and shall include removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter as indicated on the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Tree stumps and roots shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below natural ground or 2 feet below base of subgrade, whichever is lower. Areas that underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six (6) inches of the soil. All material removed from the site under this operation shall become the Contractor's responsibility. The material shall be disposed of either at a disposal site indicated on the drawings or at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site clearing and stripping or clear right-of-way shall be measured by the acre. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for removing, handling, and disposing of objectionable matter from the site as indicated above. 021020 Page 1 of 1 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 021040 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 021020 “Site Clearing and Stripping”. Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six (6) inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill required to bring the site to the required grades and elevations indicated on the plans. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade in layers not to exceed six (6) inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions and soft spots that develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, site grading shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to other work. 021040 Page 1 of 1 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 021080 REMOVING ABANDONED STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall provide for the demolition, removal and disposal of abandoned structures or portions of abandoned structures, as noted on the drawings, and shall include all excavation and backfilling necessary to complete the removal. The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. METHOD OF REMOVAL Culverts or Sewers. Pipe shall be removed by careful excavation of all dirt on top and the sides in such manner that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Those pipes which are deemed unsatisfactory for reuse by the Engineer may be removed in any manner the Contractor may select. Concrete Structures. Unwanted concrete structures or concrete portions of structures shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure outside of the limits designated for removal which is damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be restored to its original condition at the Contractor's entire expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Portions of the abandoned structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure, outside of the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the Contractor, shall be restored to its original condition entirely at the Contractor’s expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent ground line, which will not interfere in any manner with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five (5) feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Reinforcement shall be cut off close to the concrete. Steel Structures. Steel structures or steel portions of structures shall be dismantled in sections as determined by the Engineer. The sections shall be stored if the members are to be salvaged and reused. Rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans and steel stringers of truss spans, shall be removed by butting the heads with a "cold cut" and punching or drilling from the hole, or by such other method that will not injure the members for re-use and will meet the approval of the Engineer. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss 021080 Page 1 of 3 Rev. 10-30-2014 members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure will not be required unless specifically called for on the plans or special provisions, and the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame-cutting will not be permitted, however, when the plans or special provisions call for the structure unit to be salvaged in such manner as to permit re-erection. In such case, all members shall be carefully matchmarked with paint in accordance with diagrams furnished by the Engineer prior to dismantling, and all rivets and bolts shall be removed from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph. Timber Structures. Timber structures or timber portions of structures to be reused shall be removed in such manner as to damage the timber for further use as little as possible. All bolts and nails shall be removed from such lumber as deemed salvable by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, timber piles shall be either pulled or cut off at the point not less than five (5) feet below ground line, with the choice between these two methods resting with the Contractor, unless otherwise specified. Brick or Stone Structures. Unwanted brick or stone structures or stone portions of structures shall be removed. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line, which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least five (5) feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Salvage. All material such as pipe, timbers, railings, etc., which the Engineer deems as salvable for reuse, and all salvaged structural steel, shall be delivered to a designated storage area. Materials, other than structural steel, which are not deemed salvable by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to suitable disposal sites off of the right-of-way arranged for by the Contractor, or otherwise disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Where temporary structures are necessary for a detour adjacent to the present structure, the Contractor will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he shall dismantle and stack or dispose of the material as required above as soon as the new structure is opened for traffic. Backfill. All excavations made in connection with this specification and all openings below the natural ground line caused by the removal of abandoned structures or portions thereof shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise provided on the drawings. Backfill in accordance with applicable requirements of Sections 022020 “Excavation and Backfill for Utilities” and 022080 “Embankment”. All open ends of abandoned pipe or other structures shall be filled or plugged as specified. That portion of the backfill which will support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, levee, or other structural feature shall be placed in layers of the same depth as those required for placing 021080 Page 2 of 3 Rev. 10-30-2014 embankment, maximum 10” loose lifts unless otherwise specified. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise specified. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tamps or rammers shall be used to obtain the required compaction. That portion of the backfill which will not support any portion of the roadbed, embankment, or other structural feature shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in such manner and to such state of compaction as will preclude objectionable amount of settlement, maximum 10” loose lifts to minimum 95% Standard Proctor density unless otherwise specified. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the work governed by this specification shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the project. 021080 Page 3 of 3 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipe and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 “Trench Safety for Excavations” of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, the Contractor, prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved, unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height; and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum, for pipes less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. 022020 Page 1 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping, or by installation of well-points, as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets, together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Abandoned Structures. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these lines shall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines, if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active wastewater lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. 022020 Page 2 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe (Initial Backfill) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable shall be granular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section, and shall be free of large hard lumps or other debris. If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench, in layers not to exceed ten (10) inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans, but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12) inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe (Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS: The backfill for that portion of trench over one (1) foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm water pipe) shall be imported select material or clean, excess material from the excavation meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall be placed in layers not more than ten (10) inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may only be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed 10 inches and density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four (24) hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill. If jetting is used, the top four (4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). PAVED AREAS: At utility line crossings under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains, and reinforced concrete storm water pipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilled as shown below: From top of initial backfill (typically twelve (12) inches above top of the pipe) to three (3) feet below bottom of road base course, backfill shall be select material meeting the requirements of 022100 “Select Material”. 022020 Page 3 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 Asphalt Roadways The upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course shall be backfilled to the bottom of the road base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench below the road base course with cement stabilized sand as noted above, or in the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill, shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 022020 Page 4 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 022021 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER 1. GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dewatering, depressurizing, draining, and maintaining trenches, shaft excavations, structural excavations, and foundation beds in a stable condition, and controlling ground water conditions for tunnel excavations. B. Protection of excavations and trenches from surface runoff. C. Disposing of removed ground water by approved methods. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12-inch (304.8 mm) Drop. B. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards-Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). C. Federal Register 40 CFR (Vol. 55, No. 222) Part 122, EPA Administered Permit Programs (NPDES), Para.122.26(b)(14) Storm Water Discharge. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Ground water control includes both dewatering and depressurization of water-bearing soil layers. 1. Dewatering includes lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations, or into tunnels and shafts, and disposing of removed ground water by approved methods. The intent of dewatering is to increase the stability of tunnel excavations and excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations; reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures, piping and other installations. 2. Depressurization includes reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom or instability of tunnel excavations. B. Excavation drainage includes keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 022021 Page 1 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 C. Surface drainage includes the use of temporary drainage ditches and dikes and installation of temporary culverts and sump pumps with discharge lines as required to protect the Work from any source of surface water. D. Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells, and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct subsurface investigations as needed to identify ground water conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of ground water control systems. B. Design a ground water control system, compatible with requirements of Federal Regulations 29 CFR Part 1926 and City Standard Specification Section 022022 - Trench Safety for Excavations, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting: a) Excavations (including utility trenches); b) Tunnel excavation, face stability or seepage into tunnels. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C. Provide ground water control systems which may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D. Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E. Provide ditches, berms, pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water away from excavations. F. Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 022021 Page 2 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 G. Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures, and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells, or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H. Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I. Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J. Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use, if applicable. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B. Comply with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) regulations and Texas Water Well Drillers Association for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C. Prior to beginning construction activities, file Notice of Intent (NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the Texas Pollutant Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000, administered by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). The general permit falls under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code. D. Prepare submittal form and submit to TCEQ along with application fee. E. Upon completion of construction, file Notice of Termination (NOT) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit with the TCEQ. F. Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of ground water and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. G. Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. 022021 Page 3 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 H. Conduct sampling and testing of ground water and receiving waters as outlined in Article 3 below. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. B. Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, shall be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C. All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. D. Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 GROUND WATER CONTROL A. Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers, piezometric pressures, and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water bearing layers. B. Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C. Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the ground water control system design. Notify the City’s Construction Inspector in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Revise the ground water control system design to reflect field changes. D. Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E. Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F. Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed 022021 Page 4 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the ground water control system design. G. Remove ground water control installations. 1. Remove pumping system components and piping when ground water control is no longer required. 2. Remove piezometers and monitoring wells when directed by the City Engineer. 3. Grout abandoned well and piezometer holes. Fill piping that is not removed with cement- bentonite grout or cement-sand grout. H. During backfilling, dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I. Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J. Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced, such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means for draining the affected portion of underground system, including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K. Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L. In unpaved areas, compact backfill to not less than 95 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. In paved areas (or areas to receive paving), compact backfill to not less than 98 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 698. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A. For above ground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B. Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are pre-drained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for 022021 Page 5 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C. Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation (including trenching). D. Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations, but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is pre-drained by an existing system such that the criteria of the ground water control system design are satisfied. E. Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F. Provide additional ground water control installations, or change the methods, in the event that the installations according to the ground water control system design do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the ground water control system design and by these specifications. 3.3 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A. Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of a layer of crushed stone and filter fabric, and sump pumping in combination with sufficient wells for ground water control to maintain stable excavation and backfill conditions. 3.4 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A. Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area or seepage into tunnel is occurring. Keep system in good condition. B. Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C. Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D. Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the City Engineer. 3.5 MONITORING AND RECORDING A. Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 022021 Page 6 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 B. Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when City Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Construction Inspector’s direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.6 SAMPLING, TESTING AND DISPOSAL OF GROUND WATER A. It is the intent that the Contractor discharge groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system in accordance with City Ordinance, Article XVI, Section 55-203, only if the groundwater is uncontaminated and the quality of the ground water is equal to or better than the quality of the receiving stream. B. The Contractor shall prevent ground water from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directly into the storm water system prior to testing and authorization. Ground water from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, and disposed of by approved methods. C. Laboratory analysis of groundwater and receiving water quality is to be performed by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense, prior to commencing discharge, and groundwater analysis shall be performed by the Contractor at a minimum of once per week. Contractor shall coordinate with the City Storm Water Department on all laboratory analysis. Laboratory analysis of groundwater shall also be performed at each new area of construction prior to discharge from that location. D. Sample containers, holding times, preservation methods, and analytical methods, shall either follow the requirements in 40 CFR Part 136 (as amended), or the latest edition of "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater." Any laboratory providing analysis must be accredited or certified by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality according to Title 30 Texas Administrative Code (30 TAC) Chapters 25 for the matrices, methods, and parameters of analysis, if available, or be exempt according to 30 TAC §25.6. E. Analysis of the ground water discharge shall show it to be equal to or better than the quality of the first natural body of receiving water. This requires testing of both the receiving water and a sample of the ground water. All parts of this procedure shall be complete prior to any discharge of ground water to the storm water system. F. Steps to Determine Legitimate Discharge: 1. Identify the First Receiving Water. a) When the first body of water is a fresh water system (Nueces River or Oso Creek), the analysis typically fails because the local ground water will likely be too high in Total Dissolved Solids (TDS). In the case of a perched aquifer, the ground water may turn out fairly fresh, but local experience shows this to be unlikely. b) If the receiving water is a marine environment, proceed with Step 2 below to compare the ground water quality to receiving water quality. 022021 Page 7 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 2. Compare Ground Water Discharge Quality to Receiving Water Quality. The following table, Ground Water Discharge Limits, indicates that the parameters to compare to the receiving water are Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) and Total Suspended Solids (TSS). If the ground water results are equal to or better than the receiving water, then the discharge may be authorized as long as the discharge does not exceed the other parameters which would indicate hydrocarbon contamination. Note that the receiving water only needs to be tested initially as a baseline and the ground water shall be tested weekly to ensure compliance. GROUND WATER DISCHARGE LIMITS Parameter Ground Water Monitoring Frequency Receiving Water Monitoring Frequency Maximum Limitation Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Initial + Weekly Once Prior to Discharge < Receiving Water Total Suspended Solids (TSS) Initial + Weekly Once Prior to Discharge < Receiving Water Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Initial + Weekly 15 mg/L Total Lead Initial + Weekly 0.1 mg/L Benzene Initial + Weekly 0.005 mg/L Total BTEX Initial + Weekly 0.1 mg/L Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Initial + Monthly 0.01 mg/L 3. Analyze Ground Water for Hydrocarbon Contamination. All other parameters listed on the Ground Water Discharge Limits table must be analyzed prior to ground water discharge to the storm water system. If no limits are exceeded, ground water discharge to the storm water system may be authorized following notification to the MS4 operator (City of Corpus Christi) and all Pollution Prevention Measures for the project are in place. Analytical results shall be on-site or readily available for review by local, state or federal inspectors. Note that this step is frequently done simultaneously with Step 2 above to shorten analytical processing time. 4. Pollution Prevention Measures. A storm water pollution prevention plan or pollution control plan shall be developed and implemented prior to any ground water discharges to the storm water system. The plan’s objectives are to limit erosion and scour of the storm water system, and minimize Total Suspended Solids (TSS) and other forms of contamination, and prevent any damage to the storm water system. Note that ground water discharges must cease immediately upon the first recognition of contamination, either by sensory or analytical methods. If the discharge of groundwater results in any damages to the storm water system, the responsible party 022021 Page 8 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 shall remediate any damage to the storm water system and the environment to the satisfaction of the Storm Water Department and/or any State or Federal Regulatory Agency. 5. MS4 Operator Notification. The MS4 operator shall be notified prior to ground water discharge to the storm water system. Contractor shall contact the designated City MS4 representative to request authorization to discharge ground water to the storm water system. Notification shall include: Project Name: Responsible Party: Discharge Location: Receiving Water: Estimated Time of Discharge: Linear Project: Yes / No Pollution Prevention Measures Implemented: Statement indicating all sampling and testing has been conducted and meets the requirements of a legitimate discharge. G. Discharges to Wastewater System In the event that the groundwater does not equal or exceed the receiving water quality, an alternative disposal option would include pumping to the nearest sanitary sewer system. Discharge to the sanitary sewer system requires a permit from the Wastewater Department. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a sanitary sewer or wastewater treatment plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Contractor shall contact the Pretreatment Group for City Utility Operations to obtain a Wastewater Discharge Permit Application for authorization to discharge to the wastewater system . Authorization approval will include review of laboratory analysis of the ground water and estimated flow data. Note that groundwater discharges must cease immediately upon the first recognition of contamination, either by sensory or analytical methods. If the discharge of groundwater results in any damages to the wastewater collection system or wastewater overflows, the responsible party shall remediate any damage to the wastewater collection system and the environment to the satisfaction of the Wastewater Department and/or any State or Federal Regulatory Agency. H. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Engineer on a case by case basis. 3.7 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through the use of dikes, ditches, curb walls, pipes, sumps or other approved means. B. Divert surface water into sumps and pump into drainage channels or storm drains, when 022021 Page 9 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 approved by the City Engineer. Provide settling basins when required by the City Engineer. C. Storm water that enters the excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is required to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering the storm water system. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, control of ground water will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 022021 Page 10 of 10 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer or Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer and Consultant from all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Utility Structures shall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those for manholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavation or by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Payment shall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 022022 Page 1 of 1 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 022040 STREET EXCAVATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Street Excavation required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (A) Stripping and Excavation Strip the top 6 inches in all areas to underlay compacted fill, curbs, base or pavement, by removing all humus, vegetation and other unsuitable materials. Unless otherwise noted, remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving, pipe and structures and other items within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Engineer, provided that the material meets the requirements for roadway embankment as specified in Article 3 below. Unwanted or unsuitable roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Engineer. "Unsuitable" material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts, when declared unwanted by the Engineer, shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer with suitable material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. Maintain moisture and density until covered and protected by the subbase or base course. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, and recompact (especially utility trenches). (B) Subgrade Preparation That area shown on the drawings for street construction shall be cut to grade, scarified to a depth not less than 6 inches, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings, and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) to within 0 to +3% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 in 5 of the most recent moisture or density tests is beyond +1% deviation from the required moisture or density requirement. Irregularities exceeding ½ inch in 16 feet shall be corrected. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed, replaced with suitable material and compacted (especially at utility trenches). The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained until the subgrade is protected. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted and refinished and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 022040 Page 1 of 3 Rev. 10-30-2014 (C) Curb Backfill and Topsoil (Sidewalks, Parkways, Islands, etc.) Fill and compact areas behind curbs and adjacent to sidewalks and driveways within 48 hours after completion of concrete work. The top 6 inches (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by excavation) of finish earth grade shall be clean excavated material or topsoil capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. It shall be free of concrete, asphalt, shell, caliche, debris and any other material that detracts from its appearance or hampers the growth of grass. Topsoil shall meet the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 028020 "Seeding". (D) Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line Finish grade at the property line shall be as shown on the drawings. The Engineer may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation. Use suitable material from the excavation. Unless otherwise directed, cuts at right-of - way lines shall be made at a slope of three horizontal to one vertical (3:1) or flatter. (E) Drainage During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times, and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. All slopes which, in the judgment of the Engineer, require variation, shall be accurately shaped, and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. 3. SELECTION OF ROADBED MATERIALS Where shown on the plans, Select Material shall be utilized to improve the roadbed, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately, and deposited in the roadway within limits and at elevations required. Material used for roadway embankment shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022100 Select Material. 4. GEOGRID If indicated on the drawings, geogrid shall be placed in the base layer according to the pavement details to provide a mechanically-stabilized aggregate base layer within the pavement structure. Geogrid shall be "Tensar TX5 Triaxial Geogrid", or pre-approved equivalent. Use (and approval) of a different product must be supported by documentation showing that the alternate pavement section will meet or exceed the required number of 18-kip equivalent single axle loads (ESAL) and structural number (SN) over the stated pavement design life, and the pavement design must be sealed and signed by a Texas professional engineer. Documentation must also include the structural design value used for the geogrid structural contribution, based on and supported by 022040 Page 2 of 3 Rev. 10-30-2014 validated test data. Alternate pavement designs shall utilize the same structural design values for other pavement structural components (HMAC, base, sub-base) as used in the original pavement design, and the pavement designs must be approved by the Engineer and the geotechnical consultant. Contractor shall take care to protect geogrid from damage. Overlap edges of geogrid in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than 12 inches. Do not drive tracked equipment directly on the geogrid. Provide at least 6 inches of compacted aggregate base material over the geogrid before driving any tracked equipment over the geogrid area. Standard highway- legal rubber-tired trucks may drive over the geogrid at very slow speeds (less than 5 mph). Avoid turns and sudden starts and stops when driving on the geogrid. Any damaged geogrid shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. Proper replacement shall consist of replacing the affected area adding 3 feet of geogrid in each direction beyond the limits of the affected area. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, street excavation shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings including excavation for street transitions. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, compacted subgrade shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, borrow material and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, geogrid shall be measured and paid for by the square yard to the limits shown on the drawings, excluding overlaps. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work. All work required for disposing of waste, including hauling will not be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary to the various contract items. 022040 Page 3 of 3 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 022060 CHANNEL EXCAVATION 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Channel Excavation required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Trees, stumps, brush and other vegetation shall be removed and hauled away. Excavated slopes shall be finished in conformance with the lines and grades established by the Engineer. When completed, the average plane of slopes shall conform to the slopes indicated on the drawings, and no point on completed slopes shall vary from the designated slopes by more than 0.5 foot measured at right angles to the slope. In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach on the roadbed. The tops of excavated slopes and the end of excavation shall be rounded. The bottom and sides of the ditch or channel shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate topsoil for seeding, sodding, or slope protection, as indicated on the drawings. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used, insofar as practicable, in the formation of embankments in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022080 "Embankment", or shall be otherwise utilized or satisfactorily disposed of as indicated on drawings, or as directed, and the completed work shall conform to the established alignment, grades and cross sections. During construction, the channel shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat workmanlike manner. Unsuitable channel excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site and properly disposed of. 3. SELECTION OF MATERIALS Where shown on the drawings, selected materials shall be utilized in the formation of embankment or to improve the roadbed, provided that the material meets the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Sections 022040 "Street Excavation" and 022100 “Select Material”, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately and deposited in the roadway within the limits and at elevations required. Concrete for lining channels, where specified on the drawings, shall be Class "A" in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, channel excavation shall be measured in its original position and the volume computed in cubic yards by the method of average end areas, or by linear foot of channel or drainage ditch, as specified. Channel excavation shall include, but not be limited to, clearing and removal of vegetation, excavation, de-watering, embankment, compaction, hauling, and disposal. Channel excavation shall not include undercutting to accommodate topsoil, sod, or slope protection. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 022060 Page 1 of 1 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 022080 EMBANKMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for Embankment required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placing embankment, the area to be covered shall be stripped of all vegetation and the material so removed shall be disposed of off the job site. Washes, gulleys, wet areas, and yielding areas shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the surface of the ground which is to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 6 inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. Embankment shall be placed in layers not to exceed ten (10) inches uncompacted (loose) depth for the full width of the embankment, unless otherwise noted. Where embankment is adjacent to a hillside or old roadbed, the existing slope shall be cut in steps to not less than the vertical depth of an uncompacted layer. The fill material shall be placed from the low side and compacted. Each layer shall overlap the existing embankment by at least the width indicated by the embankment slope. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, debris or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content before beginning compaction. Where layers of unlike materials abut each other, each layer shall be feather-edged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. Except as otherwise required by the drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot from the centerline of the embankment to the outside. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density and moisture by any method, type and size of equipment that will give the required compaction. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the required density and shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. For each layer of earth embankment and select material, it is the intent of this specification to provide the density as required herein, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Soils for 022080 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 embankment shall be sprinkled with water as required to provide not less than optimum moisture and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Field density determinations will be made in accordance with approved methods. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete, tests, as necessary, will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. Such procedure shall be determined by, and subject to, the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the embankment layers. All irregularities, depressions, weak or soft spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. Should the embankment, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or moisture before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be recompacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer of granular material. 3. SELECTION OF MATERIAL In addition to the requirement in the excavation items of the specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on drawings, with such modifications as may be directed by the Engineer. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than 0.10 foot from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. Select material, when specified, shall meet the requirements in City Standard Specification Section 022100 "Select Material". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, embankment shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 022080 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall be non-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation, hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2” diameter Liquid Limit (L.L.): < 35 Plasticity Index (P.I.) Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: as specified in the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10 inches loose depth (or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Details for Sanitary Sewers). Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 022100 Page 1 of 1 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 022420 SILT FENCE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for providing and installing silt fencing required to control sedimentation and erosion during construction of the project. 2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Geotextile shall meet the requirements for temporary silt fence per AASHTO M288. B. Fence Reinforcement Materials: Silt fence reinforcement shall be one of the following systems. Type 1: Self-Supported Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8- 1/2 feet apart, and geotextile without net reinforcement. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 42 inches long, embedded at least one (1) foot into the ground, and constructed of either wood or steel. Soft wood posts shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inches in cross section and essentially straight. Hardwood posts shall be a minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 inches in cross section. Fabric attachment may be by staples or locking plastic ties at least every 6 inches, or by sewn vertical pockets. Steel posts shall be T or L shaped with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. Attachment shall be by pockets or by plastic ties if the posts have suitable projections. Type 2: Net-Reinforced Fence - This system consists of fence posts, spaced no more than 8-1/2 feet apart, and geotextile with an attached reinforcing net. Fence posts shall meet the requirements of Self-Supported Fence. Net reinforcement shall be galvanized welded wire mesh of at least 12.5-gauge wire with maximum opening size of 4 x 2 inches. The fabric shall be attached to the top of the net by crimping or cord at least every 2 feet, or as otherwise specified. Type 3: Triangular Filter Dike - This system consists of a rigid wire mesh, at least 6-gauge, formed into an equilateral triangle cross-sectional shape with sides measuring 18 inches, wrapped with geotextile silt fence fabric. The fabric shall be continuously wrapped around the dike, with a skirt extending at least 12 inches from its upslope corner. C. Packaging Requirements: Prior to installation, the fabric shall be protected from damage due to ultraviolet light and moisture by either wrappers or inside storage. 022420 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 D. Certification and Identification: Each lot or shipment shall be accompanied by a certification of conformance to this specification. The shipment must be identified by a ticket or by labels securely affixed to the fabric rolls. This ticket or label must list the following information: a. Name of manufacturer or supplier b. Brand name and style c. Manufacturer's lot number or control number d. Roll size (length and width) e. Chemical composition 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, silt fence shall be measured by the linear foot. Payment shall be at the bid price for the unit of measurement specified and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, placing, maintaining and removing the silt fence. 022420 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 025205 PAVEMENT REPAIR, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY REPLACEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the removal and replacing of all types of pavements and surfacing required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, materials and proportions used along with this specification shall conform to the respective following specifications: City Standard Specifications Section 022020 “Excavation and Backfill for Utilities” Section 022100 “Select Material” Section 025223 "Crushed Limestone Flexible Base” Section 025424 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" Section 025610 "Concrete Curb and Gutter" Section 025612 "Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways" Section 025620 “Portland Cement Concrete Pavement” Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Class "A" Concrete Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel" Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 3. METHOD OF CUTTING The outline of the trench shall be marked upon the surface of the pavement to be cut, and all cuts into the pavement shall be saw-cut as nearly vertical as it is possible to make them. All unwanted materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor and shall not be used as backfill material. 4. BACKFILL OF TRENCH Excavation and backfilling of trench shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022020 “Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.” 5. REPLACING STREET AND OTHER PAVEMENT All pavements, driveways, sidewalks, and curbs and gutters which are cut shall be replaced in a workmanlike manner, with like or better materials or per pavement repair details on the drawings. 025205 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 6. REPLACING DRIVEWAY PAVEMENT On all concrete driveway pavements, the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class "A" concrete slab with a minimum thickness of six (6) inches. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old pavement. Reinforcement shall be #4 bars at 12 inches each way with additional diagonal bars as indicated on the drawings. Any other type shall be replaced with like or better replacement. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score mark. 7. REPLACING SIDEWALKS On all sidewalk pavements, the replacement shall consist of a reinforced Class "A" concrete slab four (4) inches thick. The type of finish for the replaced section shall be the same as that appearing on the old sidewalk. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score marks. Reinforcement shall be 4" x 4" - W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric located at mid-depth in the slab. 8. REPLACING CURB AND GUTTER On all curb and gutter, the replacement shall consist of a section conforming in all details to the original section or to City of Corpus Christi Standard curb and gutter section, if required by the Engineer. Cuts through the curb shall be replaced with Class "A" concrete. Preserve the original steel reinforcing and reinforce all new curbs with three #4 bars. Adjust grades for positive drainage. Replacement shall, in general, be to original joint or score mark. For jointed concrete roadways, the joints in curb or in curb and gutter should match the concrete roadway joints. 9. REPAIRING STREET SHOULDERS AND UNIMPROVED STREETS On streets or roads without curb and gutter where a shoulder is disturbed, it shall be restored to like or better condition. The shoulder surface shall be rolled to an acceptably stable condition. 10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, pavement repair shall be measured by the square yard of the type of repair specified; curb and gutter replacement shall be measured by the linear foot; and sidewalk and driveway replacement shall each be measured by the square foot. Payment will be made at the unit price bid for the completed work and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals required to complete the work. No separate measurement or payment will be made for subgrade compaction, sand leveling course, geogrid, ordinary backfill, cement-stabilized sand backfill, flexible base, prime coat, hot-mix asphaltic concrete, etc. 025205 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 025223 CRUSHED LIMESTONE FLEXIBLE BASE 1. DESCRIPTION This Specification shall govern all work for furnishing and placing Crushed Limestone Flexible Base required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL Crushed Limestone Flexible Base shall consist of crushed limestone produced from oversize quarried aggregate, sized by crushing and produced from a naturally occurring single source, meeting the requirements for Type ‘A’ material as specified in Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Specification Item 247 “Flexible Base”. Crushed gravel or uncrushed gravel shall not be acceptable. No blending of sources and/or additive materials will be allowed. The material shall be free of vegetation and shall be approved by the Engineer. All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversize shall be crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform product will be produced which meets all of the physical requirements for Grade 1-2 as specified in TxDOT Specification Item 247 “Flexible Base”. 3. TESTING The City will engage a laboratory and pay for one test each gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, modified proctor, moisture-density relation, CBR, and necessary field densities. The Engineer may call for additional tests at any time. The cost of all retests, in case of failure to meet specifications, will be deducted from the Contractor's payment. The City will pay for proctor and soil constants and abrasion tests at the rate described in the materials testing schedule. If material changes, the Contractor shall pay the cost of additional tests required by the Engineer. The Engineer may waive testing and/or lime admix for small amounts for unimportant uses. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to placement of flexible base, the surface of the previous underlying course shall be finished true to line and grade as established, and in conformity with the typical section shown on the drawings. Grade tolerance shall be generally 1/2 inch, and highs and lows must approximately balance. If called for in the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents, geogrid, as specified in City Standard Specification Section 022040 “Street Excavation”, shall be placed as indicated. Flexible base shall be delivered and spread the same day if possible (no later than the next day). Base shall be mixed as required to produce a uniform mixture with water. Base shall be placed in uniform lifts not to exceed 10 inch loose lifts or 8 inch compacted lifts. Moisture and density requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings, typical minimum 98% Modified Proctor 025223 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 (ASTM D1557) under flexible pavements or typical minimum 98% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) under concrete pavement and to within + 2% of optimum moisture. The section may be accepted if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent moisture or density tests is outside of the specified limits, and the failed test is within +1% deviation from specified moisture or density requirements. The surface of the compacted base, after meeting moisture and density requirements, shall be primed in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 025412 “Prime Coat”. On completion of compaction and priming, the surface shall be smooth and conform to lines, grades, and sections shown on the drawings. Areas with any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in lengths of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, and recompacting by repriming and rolling. Moisture and density shall be maintained until the paving is complete. Excessive loss of moisture shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing, or covering with a subsequent layer. Should the base, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or moisture before it is protected by placement of the next layer, it shall be re-compacted, refinished, and retested at the expense of the Contractor until acceptable to the City. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, crushed limestone flexible base shall be measured by the square yard complete in place. Payment shall be full compensation for all materials, royalty, hauling, placing, compacting, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the completion of work. Prime shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. Geogrid shall be measured and paid under separate bid item if specified on the Bid Form. 025223 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 025404 ASPHALTS, OILS AND EMULSIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for asphalt cement, cut-back and emulsified asphalts, performance-graded asphalt binders, and other miscellaneous asphaltic materials required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS When tested according to Texas Department of Transportation Test Methods, the various materials shall meet the applicable requirements of TxDOT Specification Item 300, “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions” (Latest Edition). 3. STORAGE, HEATING AND APPLICATION TEMPERATURES Store and apply asphaltic materials in accordance with TxDOT Item 300 (Latest Edition) at the lowest temperature yielding satisfactory results. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for any agitation requirements in storage and in application and storage temperatures. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, asphalts, oils and emulsions shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 025404 Page 1 of 1 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 025412 PRIME COAT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of an application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved area in accordance with this specification. Prime Coat shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60º F and falling, but it may be applied when the air temperature is above 50º F and is rising; the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Asphalt material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable. 2. MATERIALS The asphalt material used for the prime coat shall be MC-30 medium-curing cutback asphalt or AE- P asphalt emulsion prime, unless otherwise specified, and when tested by approved laboratory methods shall meet the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions". Blotter material shall be native sand. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the area and/or base is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned of dirt, dust, and other deleterious matter by sweeping or other approved methods. If found necessary by the Engineer, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the asphalt material. The asphalt material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified, evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the asphalt material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphalt material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times, and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the asphalt material with foreign material. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. The distributor shall have been recently calibrated and the Engineer shall be furnished an accurate and satisfactory record of such calibration. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the asphalt material applied appear to be in error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before proceeding with the work. Prime shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per City Standard 025412 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 Specification Section 025404 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions", with that range being 70 to 150 degrees F. Application rate shall be not less than 0.15 gallon per square yard, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the Engineer accepts the work. No traffic hauling or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Engineer. Spread blotter material before allowing traffic to use a primed surface. Allow sufficient time for the prime coat to cure properly before applying surface treatment or asphaltic concrete pavement. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, prime coat shall be measured by the gallon of asphalt material applied. Payment shall include furnishing, heating, hauling and distributing the asphalt material as specified; for furnishing, spreading and removing sand blotter material; for all freight involved; and for all manipulation, labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025412 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 025424 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Class A) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and laying Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (HMAC) surface, binder and base courses required to complete the project. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Aggregate. The aggregate shall consist of a blend of course aggregate, fine aggregate and, if required, a mineral filler. 2.1.1. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of that fraction of aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve and shall consist of crushed furnace slag, crushed stone, or crushed gravel. Deleterious material in course aggregate shall not exceed 2% per TxDOT Test Method TEX-217-F. Course aggregate shall be crushed such that a minimum of 85% of the particles have more than one crushed face, unless noted otherwise on the plans. Los Angeles abrasion losses for course aggregate shall not exceed 40% by weight for the surface course and 45% for the binder and base courses per TxDOT Test Method TEX-410-A. Polish Value not less than 30 for aggregate used in the surface course per TxDOT Test Method TEX-438-A. 2.1.2. Fine Aggregate is defined as the fraction passing a No. 10 sieve and shall be of uniform quality. Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings of material that pass the Los Angeles abrasion requirements in paragraph 2.1.1 above. Screenings shall be blended with a maximum of 15% uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type D mixes, or a maximum of 10% uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type A, B, and C mixes. Grading of fine aggregate shall be as follows: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight No. 10 100 No. 200 0-15 025424 Page 1 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 2.1.3 Filler shall consist of dry stone dust, Portland cement, hydrated lime, or other mineral dust approved by the Engineer. Grading of filler shall be as follows: Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing by Weight No. 30 95 No. 80 75 No. 200 55 2.2. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). Reclaimed asphalt pavement may be incorporated into the hot mix asphalt concrete furnished for the project, provided that the mixture is designed per the TxDOT Methods and meets the applicable provisions of said TxDOT Item 340 and this specification. 2.3. Asphalt. Asphalt Material shall be in accordance with Standard Specification Section 025404 "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions" and AASHTO. 2.3.1. Paving Mixture: APPLICATION ASPHALT GRADE Residential or low volume PG 64-22 Collector Surface Course PG 70-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Arterial Surface Course PG 76-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Base Courses PG 64-22 2.3.2. Tack Coat shall consist of an emulsion, SS-1 diluted with equal volume of water and applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard. 3. PAVING MIXTURE 3.1. Mix Design. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Bulletin C-14 and TxDOT Test Method TEX-204-F to conform to the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall furnish the mix design for the job-mix to be used for the project, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. The mix design shall be submitted prior to placement of the mixture. The design procedures are actually intended to result at a job-mix with properties in compliance with these specifications, and when properly placed the job-mix will be durable 025424 Page 2 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 and stable. The sieve analysis of the job-mix shall be within the range of the Master Gradation and Tolerances specified herein. The job-mix shall meet the density and stability requirements as specified and shall be included with the mix design as submitted per above. If the specific gravity of any of the types of aggregates differs by more than 0.3, use volume method. Plot sieve analysis of job-mix; percent passing versus size on four-cycle semi-log paper or other appropriate type paper. Show tolerance limits and Limits of Master Gradation. 3.2. Master Gradation of Aggregate. The aggregate for the type of mix specified shall be within the following tabulated limits per TxDOT Test Method TEX-200-F (Dry Sieve Analysis): Sieve Size Type A B C D Course Base Fine Base Course Surface Fine Surface 1-1/2" 100 1-1/4" 95-100 1" 100 7/8" 70-90 95-100 100 5/8" 75-95 95-100 1/2" 50-70 100 3/8" 60-80 70-85 85-100 1/4" No. 4 30-50 40-60 43-63 50-70 No. 10 20-34 27-40 30-40 32-42 No. 40 5-20 10-25 10-25 11-26 No. 80 2-12 3-13 3-13 4-14 No. 200 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* VMA % minimum 11 12 13 14 025424 Page 3 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 * 2-8 when TxDOT Test Method Tex-200-F, Part II (Washed Sieve Analysis) is used. 3.3. Tolerances. The mixture delivered to the job site shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances specified below. The gradation of the produced mix shall not fall outside the Master Grading Limits, with the following exceptions: for Type B material coarser than 3/8" and for Type D material coarser than #4. Variations from job-mix shall not exceed the following limits, except as noted above: Item: Tolerances Percent by Weight or Volume 1" to No. 10 Plus or Minus 5.0 No. 40 to No. 200 Plus or Minus 3.0 Asphalt Weight Plus or Minus 0.5 Asphalt Volume Plus or Minus 1.2 3.4. Mix Properties. The mixture shall have a minimum Hveem stability of 40 for Type A, B, and C mixes, and 35 for Type D mixes per TxDOT Test Method TEX-208-F at an optimum density of 96% (plus or minus 1.5) of theoretical maximum density per TxDOT Test Methods TEX-227-F and TEX-207-F. 3.5. Sampling and Testing of Raw Materials. The Contractor shall sample materials as necessary to produce a mix in compliance with these specifications. 4. EQUIPMENT 4.1. Mixing Plants. Mixing plants shall be either the weigh batching type or the drum mix type. Both types shall be equipped with satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, aggregate screens and bins (weigh batch only), and pollution control devices as required. 4.2. Truck Scales. A set of truck scales, if needed for measurement, shall be placed at a location approved by the Engineer. 4.3. Asphalt Material Heating Equipment. Asphalt material heating equipment shall be adequate to heat the required amount of material to the desired temperature. Agitation with steam or air will not be permitted. The heating apparatus shall be equipped with a recording thermometer with a 24-hour continuous chart that will record the temperature of the asphalt at the highest temperature. 4.4. Surge-Storage System. A surge-storage system may be used provided that the mixture coming out of the bins is of equal quality to that coming out of the mixer. The system shall be equipped with a gob hopper, rotating chute or other devices designed to minimize segregation of the asphalt mixture. 4.5. Laydown Machine. The laydown machine shall be capable of producing a surface that will meet the requirements of the typical cross section, of adequate power to propel the 025424 Page 4 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 delivery vehicles, and produce the surface tolerances herein required. It shall be wide enough to lay a 28-foot street (back-to-back of curbs) in a maximum of two passes. 4.6. Rollers. All rollers shall be self-propelled and of any type capable of obtaining the required density. Rollers shall be in satisfactory operating condition and free from fuel, hydraulic fluid, or any other fluid leaks. 5. STORAGE, PROPORTIONING AND MIXING 5.1. Storage and Heating of Asphalt Materials. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. 5.2. Feeding and Drying of Aggregates. The feeding of various sizes of aggregate to the dryer shall be done in such a manner that a uniform and constant flow of materials in the required proportions will be maintained. In no case shall the aggregate be introduced into the mixing unit at a temperature in excess of 350 degrees F. 5.3. Proportioning. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the job-mix. 5.4. Mixing. 5.4.1. Weigh Batch Plant. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 5.4.2. Drum Mix Plant. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 5.4.3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one percent by weight of total mix when determined by TxDOT Test Method TEX-212-F. 5.4.4. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250 and 325 degrees F. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25 degrees F. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 6.1. Construction Conditions. For mat thicknesses greater than 1.5 inches, the asphalt material may be placed with a laydown machine when the air temperature is 40 degrees F and 025424 Page 5 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 rising but not when the air temperature is 50 degrees F and falling. In addition, mat thickness less than and including 1.5 inches shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is placed is below 50 degrees F. All subsurface utilities shall be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to paving. 6.2. Prime Coat. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied and paid for as a separate item conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat", except the application temperature shall be as provided above. The tack coat or asphaltic concrete shall not be applied on a previously primed flexible base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6.3. Tack Coat. Before the asphalt mixture is laid, the surface upon which the tack coat is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat using materials and rates herein specified and/or as shown on the plans. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller as necessary. Tack coat is required before any pavement course not placed immediately following the previous course placement. 6.4. Transporting Asphalt Concrete. The asphalt mixture shall be hauled to the job site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign matter. In cool weather or for long hauls, canvas covers and insulated truck beds may be necessary. The inside of the bed may be given a light coating of lime water or other suitable release agent necessary to prevent from adhering. Diesel oil is not allowed. 6.5. Placing. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a laydown machine or other approved equipment in such a manner that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth and of uniform density, and meet the requirements of the typical cross section as shown on the plans. 6.5.1. Flush Structures. Adjacent to flush curbs, gutters, liners and structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted, it will be slightly above the edge of the curb and flush structure. 6.5.2. Construction joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six inches. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines, or as directed by the Engineer, but shall not be in the anticipated wheel path of the roadway. 6.6. Compacting. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the plans. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175 degrees F. 025424 Page 6 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 6.7. In-Place Density. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin, irregular level-up courses. Material should be compacted to between 96% and 92% of maximum theoretical density or between 4% and 8% air voids. Average density shall be greater than 92% and no individual determination shall be lower than 90%. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods TEX-207-F and TEX-227-F. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture, will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. 6.8. Thickness. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the drawings. No more than 10% of the measured thickness(es) shall be more than 1/4 inch less than the plan thickness(es). If so, the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 6.9. Surface Smoothness Criteria and Tests. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines, grade and cross-section. The surface shall be tested by the City with the Mays Roughness Meter. The Mays Roughness Value for each 600-foot section shall not exceed ninety inches per mile per traffic lane. For each 600-foot section not meeting this criteria, the Engineer shall have the option of requiring that section to be reworked to meet the criteria, or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: Adjusted Unit Price = (Adjustment Factor) X Surface Course Unit Bid Price The adjustment factor shall be: For Residential Streets: Adjustment Factor = 1.999 - 0.0111 M For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential) Adjustment Factor = 1.287 - 0.0143 M Where M = Mays Roughness Value In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. If the surface course is an inverted penetration (surface treatment) the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches per mile, prior to applying the above criteria. Localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) shall be tested with a ten-foot straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline. The maximum deviation shall not 025424 Page 7 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 exceed 1/8 inch in ten feet. Areas not meeting this criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Pavement areas having surface irregularities, segregation, raveling or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. 6.10. Opening to Traffic. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Engineer. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. If the surface ravels, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the square yard of the type and thickness of "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete" as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the "pay ticket" identifying the truck and showing the gross empty weight of the truck with driver as it arrives at the plant and the gross loaded weight of the truck with driver as it leaves the plant. The measured amount will be the difference of the loaded and empty trucks converted to tons. Payment shall be full compensation for quarrying, furnishing all materials, freight involved; for all heating, mixing, hauling, cleaning the existing base course or pavement, tack coat, placing asphaltic concrete mixture, rolling and finishing; and for all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work except prime coat when required. Prime coat, performed where required, will be measured and paid for in accordance with the provisions governing City Standard Specification Section 025412 "Prime Coat". All templates, straightedges, scales, and other weight and measuring devices necessary for the proper construction, measuring and checking of the work shall be furnished, operated and maintained by the Contractor at his expense. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. Pavement that fails to meet the in place density criteria may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense, or such pavement may, at the City’s discretion, be accepted by the City and the unit price for payment shall be reduced as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 025424 Page 8 of 8 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 025608 INLETS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of inlets complete in place and the materials used therein, including the installation, and the furnishing of frames, grates, rings and covers. 2. TYPES The various types of inlets are designated on the drawings by letters or by numbers indicating the particular design of each. Each type shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings and to the depth required by the profiles and schedules given. 3. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. Concrete for curb inlets shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", and City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", except as otherwise provided on the drawings. Concrete for grate inlets, drop inlets and post inlets shall be Class "C" concrete in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (2) Mortar. Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland cement and two parts clean, sharp mortar sand suitably graded for the purpose by conforming in other respects to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete" for fine aggregate. Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix but in no case shall it exceed 10 percent by weight of the total dry mix. (3) Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". (4) Concrete Blocks. Concrete blocks, when shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 139. (5) Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 055420 "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers". (6) Cast Iron. Cast iron for supports and inlet units shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans. The castings shall be clean and perfect, free from sand or blow holes or other defects. Cast iron castings shall conform to the requirements of "Gray Iron Castings" ASTM A 48, Class 30. 025608 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1) General. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", unless otherwise specified. Forms will be required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. (2) Inlets for Precast Concrete Pipe Sewers. The construction of inlets for precast concrete pipe sewers shall be done as soon as is practicable after sewer lines into or through inlet locations are completed. All sewers shall be cut neatly at the inside face of the walls of inlet and pointed up with mortar. Subgrade under cast-in-place and precast inlets shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. (3) Inverts. The inverts passing out or through the inlet shall be shaped and routed across the floor of inlet as shown on the plans. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. (4) Finishing Complete Inlets. Inlets shall be completed in accordance with the drawings. Backfilling to finish grade elevation with native material, free of debris and compacted to over 95% Standard Proctor density. Backfilling shall be in accordance with the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, inlets shall be measured as individual units by each inlet, complete in place. Extension to inlets will be measured by each extension separately from the inlet. Excavation, backfill, frames, grates, rings and covers will be considered subsidiary to the construction of the inlets. Payments shall be full compensation for furnishing all concrete, reinforcing steel, mortar, castings, frames, grates, rings and covers, and for all other materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required to perform the work prescribed above. 025608 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 025612 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall consist of sidewalks and driveways, with or without reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade, in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the drawings. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" concrete under City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements as specified in City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be redwood meeting the requirements specified in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". Cap seal shall be “Greenstreak” or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and hand tamped and sprinkled with water. Subgrade under concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. The subgrade shall be within 0-3% of optimum moisture content at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel shall be placed in position as shown on the drawings. Care shall be exercised to keep all reinforcing steel in its proper location. Driveways shall incorporate the gutter in a unified concrete placement as shown in the City Standard Detail for driveways. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on drawings. Unless otherwise provided by the drawings, no section shall be of a length less than 8 feet, and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. 025612 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 The different sections shall be separated by a premolded insert or board joint of the thickness shown on the drawings, placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. Where the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion joint material shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion joint material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on drawings. 5-foot wide sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 5 feet in length, by the use of approved jointing tools. For other widths of sidewalk, joints to be spaced longitudinally to match the transverse width. When completed, the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, concrete sidewalks and driveways shall be measured by the square foot of surface area of completed sidewalks, driveways, or sidewalks and driveways, as indicated on the drawings. Payment shall be full compensation for preparing and compacting the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials including concrete, reinforcing steel and expansion joint material; and for all manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 025612 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter – TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement, expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural (beam) or compressive (cylinder) tests as required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement of concrete pavement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type of cement will be permitted in any one project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 025620 Page 1 of 5 Rev. 3-25-2015 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”, Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”, Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar (Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete pavements shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deformed bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 “Reinforcing Steel”. Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cement and aggregate shall be stored and handled in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 025620 Page 2 of 5 Rev. 3-25-2015 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 5. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be 025620 Page 3 of 5 Rev. 3-25-2015 workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction Method Desired Slump Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement (slipformed) 1.5 inches 1 inch 3 inches Concrete Pavement (formed) 4 inches 2.5 inches 6.5 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, desired slump, minimum slump, maximum slump, and the strength requirements of the class of concrete for concrete pavement shall conform to the requirements of Table 1 and Table 2 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength (7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement Class Minimum Minimum Maximum of Flexural (Beam) Compressive Water-Cement Coarse Concrete Strength Strength Ratio Aggregate P* 450 psi (7 days) 3200 psi (7 days) 5.6 gal./sack No. 2 (1½") 570 psi (28 days) 4000 psi (28 days) 0.50 * 5% entrained air 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. 025620 Page 4 of 5 Rev. 3-25-2015 Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plants shall be as specified in City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s) in-place, will be measured by the square yard or square foot for the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steel dowels as shown on the plans; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants, and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 025620 Page 5 of 5 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 026210 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and Wastewater Force Mains) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all PVC pipe (AWWA C900 and C905) required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL PVC pipe shall be made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with an established hydrostatic-design-basis of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F. 3. DIMENSIONS Pipe shall be manufactured to ductile iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. 4. JOINT Pipe shall have a gasket bell end with a thickened wall section integral with the pipe barrel. The use of solvent weld pipe shall not be allowed. 5. GASKETS Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477 (High Head). 6. PIPE PRESSURE CLASS AND DIMENSION RATIO Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 18 and in accordance with: Pipe Size Designation 4" to 12" AWWA C900 Over 12" AWWA C905 7. CAUSE FOR REJECTION Pipe shall be clearly marked in accordance with AWWA Requirements. Unmarked or scratched pipe shall be rejected. 026210 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 8. CERTIFICATION The contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification, to include gaskets. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, PVC pipe (AWWA C900 or C905) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation, backfilling and testing of the PVC pipe, together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in place, per linear foot. 026210 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 026214 GROUTING ABANDONED UTILITY LINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for grouting abandoned utility lines in place. 2. MATERIALS A. Flowable Grout: Flowable grout (or flowable fill) shall consist of a mixture containing Portland cement, fly ash, sand, water, and “Darafill” admixture (or approved equivalent), in the amounts shown below (or otherwise proportioned to provide 100 psi compressive strength at 28 days), to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing the flowable grout. The flowable grout mixture shall be supplied by an approved ready-mix supplier. The manufacturer's representative shall be consulted for any final adjustments to improve the flowability of the mixture. Commercially produced flowable grout may be used with approval of the Engineer. 100 lbs/ CY Portland Cement 300 lbs/ CY Fly Ash 2100 lbs/ CY Sand 250 lbs/ CY Water 6 oz/ CY "Darafill" admixture, as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equivalent. B. Raw Soil: Soil shall be typical clayey soil of the area. It shall be from the project site or other approved source not suspected of being contaminated. The soil shall have a Plasticity Index over 15 and a Liquid Limit not to exceed 65. C. Lime: Lime shall be hydrated lime, calcium hydroxide, in accordance with AASHTO M 216. D. Water: Water shall be potable. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Flowable Grout: Mix Portland cement, sand, fly ash, “Darafill” and water in the amounts shown above to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing flowable grout. B. Soil-Lime Mix Design: The following is given as a typical mix design for soil-lime mixture for trial mix. The mix design is based on damp soil with an initial water content of about 15%. The proportions of soil and lime shall not be altered. The Contractor shall determine the amount of water to be added as required to produce a mix at its liquid limit. 026214 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 Trial Mix Design: Damp Soil 1000 lb. Lime 50 lb. Water (approximate) 48 gal. Consistency shall be checked with liquid limit apparatus. C. Placement: The Contractor shall grout abandoned lines as indicated on the drawings. Temporary pumping and venting ports shall be placed as required to provide complete filling of the abandoned line and proper placement of the grout. If segregation or "sand packing" is experienced during pumping, the Contractor shall reduce the water content of the mix or obtain other soil source (for soil-lime mixture), as required. Any damage resulting from pumping operation shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, grouting abandoned utility lines shall be measured by the linear foot of abandoned-in-place pipe. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and incidentals required to mix, transport, and place the grout and restore surface at pump ports. 026214 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 027200 CONTROL OF WASTEWATER FLOWS (TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS) 1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern all work necessary for designing, installing, implementing, operating, and maintaining a temporary bypass pumping and flow control system, as provided by the Contractor for the purpose of diverting wastewater flow around the work area for the duration necessary to complete the work (i.e., control of wastewater flows). The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, and incidentals required to maintain continuous and reliable wastewater service in all lines for the duration of the project. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Bypass Pumping Plan Form: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to legibly and thoroughly complete, in its entirety, the attached Bypass Pumping Plan Form and submit it to the Engineer and/or the appropriate City staff for review and approval, prior to the installation of any pumping system proposed for use. Unless the bypass pumping is associated with an emergency work order, the standard approval protocol is as follows: The Contractor prepares and submits the plan to the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to mobilizing to site. The Engineer reviews the bypass plan and coordinates approval with Engineering Services and the Operating Department. Engineer and City will put forth a reasonable level of effort to expedite the review and approval process. No deviation from the procedure shall be allowed. B. Bypass Pumping Plan Schematic: In addition to the above referenced form, the Contractor shall also furnish a sufficiently detailed schematic drawing identifying the approximate location of all bypass pumping system components. The schematic drawing shall clearly label parallel/crossing streets, identify landmark structures, and depict the locations of all pumps and piping. At a minimum, the bypass pumping plan schematic drawing and associated attachments should include the following items: 1) Pump curves showing designed operation point for this specific project 2) Approximate location of bypass system pumping components 3) Location of manhole or access point for suction and discharge 4) Configuration, routing, location and depth of the suction and discharge piping 5) General arrangement/type of additional support equipment. 6) Temporary pipe supports, anchoring and thrust restraint blocks, if required 7) Traffic Control Plan and Traffic Department permit if the bypass is within the right- of-way. 8) Description of the method for removing pressure and all wastewater from existing force mains being taken out of service, if necessary. 9) All other City-department and Regulatory requirements. 027200 Page 1 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 10) Sewer plugging locations, method, and types of plugs 11) Method of protecting discharge manholes or structures from erosion and damage. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY / AUTHORITY A. It is essential to the operation of the existing wastewater system that there is no interruption in the flow of wastewater throughout the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for designing, scheduling, providing, installing, operating, fueling and maintaining the temporary bypass pumping system in a manner that does not cause or contribute to overflows, releases, or spills of wastewater from the wastewater or bypass system. The Contractor shall neither anticipate nor expect any assistance from the City of Corpus Christi departments for any of the bypass operation. B. Contractor shall provide a responsible employee to man the bypass system 24 hours per day, 7 days per week during operation. The monitoring employee shall be properly trained, experienced, and mechanically qualified such that they can quickly and effectively address any potential emergency and non-emergency situations associated with the bypass system which must remain in operation. The wastewater and bypass systems should be inspected at least once every 2 hours. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the wastewater collection system is not compromised during bypass installation or operation, and contractor shall ensure that the system operates properly during this period. C. The Contractor shall consider and be responsible for the impacts on the collection system area, both upstream and downstream of the bypass and shall maintain the system in a manner that will protect public and private property from damage and flooding. Upstream impacts may include, but are not limited to backups and overflows. Downstream impacts may include, but are not limited to surcharges and overflows. D. Contractor shall make all effort to minimize spills of raw wastewater during the improvements and bypassing. All spills and sanitary sewer overflows shall immediately be reported to the City at 361-826-2489 and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for wash down, clean-up and disinfection of said spillages or overflows to the satisfaction of the owner at no additional cost to the City of Corpus Christi. E. The City is permitted through the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality to operate the wastewater system. The final authority comes from the City as to the operation of the wastewater system and as such it reserves the right to halt the bypassing operation at any time in order to maintain public health and safety. 027200 Page 2 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bypass Pumps a. Pumps shall be fully automatic self-priming pumps that do not require the use of foot-valves or vacuum pumps in the priming system. The pumps may be electric or diesel powered. Pre-approved manufacturers are Godwin or Rain-for-Rent. Approved equals may be considered by the Engineer if they meet all requirements in this specification but Contractor shall provide submittal package for Engineer’s review and approval prior to installation. Pumps shall be equipped with critically silenced, sound attenuated enclosures with a maximum 65 dB (10-feet from pump), a diesel day tank with a minimum 24-hour runtime without refuel, and automatic start/stop controls for each pump. b. Pumping capacity of the bypass pump shall be capable of handling the flow conditions at all times and shall provide a minimum of 1.5 times the existing capacity of whatever line or lift station is being bypassed. c. The Contractor shall have adequate standby equipment available and ready for immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown. In critical installations, as determined by the Engineer, one standby pump for each size pump utilized shall be installed at the mainline flow bypassing locations, ready for use in the event of primary pump failure. B. Suction and Discharge Piping: Determined according to pump size, flow calculations, system operating conditions, manhole depth, and length of suction piping in accordance with the pump manufacturers specifications and recommendations. In order to prevent the accidental spillage of flows, all discharge systems shall be temporarily constructed of heavy-duty pipe with positive restrained joints. a. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) i. Homogeneous throughout, free of visible cracks, discoloration, pitting, varying wall thickness, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults. Defective areas shall be cut out and butt-fusion welded as per manufacturer’s recommendations. ii. Assembled and joined at site using couplings, flanges, or butt-fusion method to provide leak proof joint, as per manufacturer’s recommendations and ASTM D- 2657. iii. Fusing must be performed by personnel certified as fusion technicians by manufacturer of HDPE pipe and/or fusing equipment. Fused joints shall be watertight and have tensile strength equal to that of pipe. iv. HDPE is required to be used in or adjacent to environmentally sensitive areas. b. Polyethylene Plastic Pipe (PE) i. High density solid wall and following ASTM F714 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-DR) based on outside diameter, ASTM D1248 and ASTM D3550 ii. Homogeneous throughout, free of visible cracks, discoloration, pitting, varying wall thickness, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults. c. Quick-Disconnect Steel Galvanized Pipe and Heavy-Duty Flexible Hoses 027200 Page 3 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 i. Must consist of heavy-duty steel with high tensile strength, x-ray welded, abrasion resistant and suitable for intended service with a maximum pressure rating of at least 174 PSI ii. Bauer quick-disconnect fittings/joints shall be restrained and watertight. Joints shall consist of vacuum sealing O-rings to help pumps prime faster and perform at their designed flow rates with no leaks, even at high pressure ratings iii. Joints shall provide 30-degree articulation at every coupling and shall not require perfect alignment to make each connection. iv. The galvanized couplings shall not be hindered by sand, mud, and grit. d. Valves and Fittings i. Contractor shall provide valves and fittings as necessary and in accordance with the approved pipe materials shown above. e. Plugs i. Selected and installed according to size of line to be plugged, pipe, manhole configurations, and based on specific application. ii. Prior to use, Engineer may inspect plugs for defects which may lead to failure. iii. Contractor shall provide additional plugs in the case of failure f. Miscellaneous i. When temporary piping crosses local streets/roadways and private driveways, Contractor shall provide traffic ramps or covers designed, installed, and maintained for H-20 loading requirements while in use. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULING & COORDINATION A. Unless the bypass pumping is associated with an emergency work order, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hour notice to the Engineer and Wastewater Department for the startup of bypass operations once the completed bypass plan has been approved by the design engineer. Unless needed otherwise for emergency work, no bypassing shall be initiated on Friday, Saturday or Sunday, or the day immediately preceding a City holiday. B. Inclement Weather: The Contractor shall not be allowed to commence bypass operation should inclement weather be forecast for the period of the scheduled improvements. C. Under special circumstances, as identified by the Engineer, where critical lines with large service areas are being bypassed, the Contractor is responsible for setting up a meeting between the Engineer/City/Operating Department to affirm and coordinate the approved bypass plan and to verify the intended site installation conforms to the approved plan. Engineer may also require the bypass system to be in service for at least 24-hours prior to taking existing gravity lines or force mains out of service to demonstrate reliability. D. Before beginning bypass operations, the Engineer/City Operating Department must be notified for field verification of pumps, piping, and equipment, etc., to ensure the site installation conforms to the approved plan. 027200 Page 4 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 E. Before beginning bypass operations, the Contractor shall confirm appropriate emergency contact information has been provided to the City and Engineer on the Bypass Pumping Plan Form including emergency cell phone number of bypass operators/monitors responsibly manning the bypass system 24 hours per day along with the project superintendent and pump supplier. F. The Contractor can work extended hours, if approved by the Engineer, to perform the improvements during the bypass operation. Work during extended hours cannot create a nuisance for the neighbors. G. Once a lift station is taken out of service and bypass operations begun, work shall be continuous on the lift station improvements until all improvements are completed and the lift station is returned to normal service. H. The Contractor shall cease bypass pumping operations and return flows to the new and/or existing wastewater system when directed by the Owner. This may be expected if the bypass system is not in accordance with this specification or if inclement weather is in the forecast. 3.2 INSTALLATION & OPERATIONS A. Installation of Temporary Force Mains a. Force mains may be placed along shoulder of road, medians, and/or outside of pavement. Do not place in streets or sidewalks without Engineers approval. b. When temporary piping crosses local streets/roadways and/or private driveways, Contractor shall provide traffic ramps or covers designed, installed, and maintained for H-20 loading requirements while in use. c. When traffic ramps cannot be used, install temporary piping in trenches and cover with temporary pavement, as approved by the Engineer. B. Discharge piping to gravity lines or manholes shall be designed in such a manner as to prevent discharge from contacting manhole walls or benching with as minimal turbulence as possible. C. Plugging or blocking of wastewater flows shall incorporate a primary and secondary plugging device. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of work, it is to be removed in a manner that permits the wastewater flow to slowly return to normal without surge, to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances downstream. D. The Contractor shall not cut existing force mains or gravity lines until it is determined that the containment area in place is sufficient for handling any wastewater within the pipe. E. Some locations may require multiple bypass systems. If bypass system is provided with air release valves, then the valve drains shall be piped to a manhole for discharge. F. Upon completion of the bypass pumping operations, remove piping, restore property to pre-construction condition and restore pavement. 027200 Page 5 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, Control of Wastewater Flows (Temporary Bypass Pumping Systems) shall not be measured for pay but will be considered subsidiary to the applicable pay item, to include all material, labor, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the bypass design, planning, coordination, installation, operation, maintenance and removal. 027200 Page 6 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 BYPASS PUMPING PLAN FORM Date: ________ ______ Project Title: ________________________________________________________ No.: _________ Engineer: ____________________________ Contractor: _____________________________ Service Area: _________________________ Lift Station No. (if applicable):_________________ Start Date & Time: _____________________ Completion Date & Time: _________________ Sewer Line Size being Bypassed: _______________ Estimated Peak Flow: _____________________ Line Plugging Method & Locations: _______________________________________________________ Suction Manhole or Lift Station Number and Depth: __________________________________________ Discharge Manhole or Lift Station Number and Depth: ________________________________________ Maximum Surcharge Depth Allowed: ______________________________________________________ Bypass Forcemain Size, Material & Length: _________________________________________________ Pump Description: (Self-Priming, Critically Silenced, and Automatic Level Controls Required) Make, Model, Suction/Discharge Size:____________________________________ Diesel or Electric Total Number of Pumps/Standby Pumps: _____________________________________________ Total & Firm Capacity (GPM @ TDH): ______________________________________________ Vacuum Trucks (if required, number and capacity): ___________________________________________ Contractor Personnel Manning Bypass System (24 hours/day): Name: ______________________________ Phone: _________________________________ Name: ______________________________ Phone: _________________________________ Emergency Contacts: Name: ______________________________ Phone: _________________________________ Name: ______________________________ Phone: _________________________________ Additional Notes: _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Required Checklist: YES NO Schematic drawing providing details of proposed bypass pumping system, routing of bypass lines (using manhole numbers and/or lift station names as applicable), equipment location, and proposed sequencing. Has traffic control plan been appropriately modified to facilitate the bypass pumping equipment? Pumps: Self-priming & Critically Silenced. Provide pump curve with Bypass plan. (Requirement). Contractor shall coordinate with Supplier for appropriate instruction and training on pump operation. Have emergency and/or backup provisions been made for quick pump change out in the case of system failure? Contractor has confirmed no rain (less than ½-in) in the forecast? Prepared by: Reviewed by: _____________________________________ _____________________________________ Contractor Representative Date Wastewater Representative Date 027200 Page 7 of 7 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 027203 VACUUM TESTING OF WASTEWATER MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification governs all work and materials necessary to perform vacuum testing of new or existing wastewater manholes. Manholes may be tested after installation with all connections (existing and/or proposed) in place. Vacuum testing may be performed prior to or after backfilling by the installer. Final acceptance, in accordance with the requirements of this specification, will consist of vacuum testing of the completed and installed structure (manhole) in place to include manhole/adjustment rings and manhole casting. 2. MATERIALS Vacuum testing shall consist of a minimum of the following: (a) Engine. (b) Vacuum Pump. (c) Hose. (d) Test Head device capable of sealing opening in manhole casting as required. (e) Pneumatic Test Plugs - these plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the connecting pipe to be sealed. 3. PROCEDURE (a) The test head shall be placed at the top of the manhole in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. (b) A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole, the valve on the vacuum line of the test head closed, and the vacuum pump shut off. The time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches of mercury. (c) The manhole shall pass if the time for the vacuum reading to drop from 10 inches of mercury to 9 inches of mercury meets or exceeds the values indicated in Table 1. (d) If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made by an approved method. The manhole shall then be retested until a satisfactory test is obtained. 027203 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 TABLE 1 - Minimum Test Times for Various Manhole Diameters (ASTM C1244) Depth Diameter (inches) (feet) 42 48 54 60 72 Time (seconds) 8 17 20 23 26 33 10 21 25 29 33 41 12 25 30 35 39 49 14 30 35 41 46 57 16 34 40 46 52 67 18 38 45 52 59 73 20 42 50 53 65 81 22 46 55 64 72 89 24 51 59 64 78 97 26 55 64 75 85 105 28 59 69 81 91 113 30 68 74 87 98 121 4. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION (a) Testing shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer or his designated representative. All manholes and structures shall be tested as finished and completed for final acceptance. (b) ANY DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIALS shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor and retested. This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable. 5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise indicated on the Bid Form, vacuum testing of wastewater manholes and structures will not be measured for pay. Such items shall be considered subsidiary to pay items applicable for Fiberglass Manholes, complete and in-place. 027203 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 027205 FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for providing, installing and adjusting fiberglass manholes required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL Fiberglass manholes shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings. 3. MATERIALS A. Manholes Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D3753-“Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells,” latest edition, and the referenced design criteria as follows: 1. ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service 2. ASTM D695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 3. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 4. ASTM C923 Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals 5. ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading 6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor 7. ASTM D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins 8. ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 9. ASTM F794 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter 10. ASTM C32 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made From Clay or Shale) The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be 0.50 inch. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be a minimum of 48 inches or as otherwise specified on the drawings, but shall not be less than 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe, whichever is larger. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a 027205 Page 1 of 6 Rev. 3-25-2015 minimum inside diameter of 31.75 inches at the top, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Manhole Pipe Connectors Manhole pipe connectors for Sanitary Sewer Application shall be made of corrosion resistant plastic. The connector shall eliminate leaks around the pipe entering the manhole wall and shall permit pipe movement without loss of seal integrity, and shall be in conformance with ASTM D3212. Material for elastomeric seal in push-on joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Material for rubber sleeve shall meet the requirements of ASTM C443. Manhole pipe connectors between 4 inches and 15 inches shall be Inserta Tee from Fowler Mfg., or approved equal. Manhole pipe connection for Storm Sewer Application shall be made with Ram-Nek flexible plastic gasket material as manufactured by K.T. Snyder Company of Houston, Texas, or approved equal, and wrapped with Class ‘A’ Subsurface Drainage Geotextile, AASHTO M288. C. Manhole Base Concrete shall be Class ‘A’ in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Caulk for seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete cast-in-place base shall be Epo-Flex epoxy (gun grade consistency) as manufactured by Dewey Supply of Corpus Christi, Texas, or approved equal. Precast reinforced concrete manhole base shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C478, as shown on the construction plans and detail drawings. D. Inflow Inhibitors Inflow inhibitors shall be installed in sanitary manholes. They shall be of 316 stainless steel with an equivalent thickness of not less than 18 gauge, and load tested in excess of 3000 pounds. The inhibitor shall rest on the lip of the seating surface of the manhole ring and shall not exceed a depth of 6.5 inches. The seating surface of the inhibitor shall have an attached gasket on the weight-bearing side. The inhibitor shall have a gas relief valve made of Nitrite and shall operate at a one (1) psi differential pressure. The inhibitor shall be fitted with a handle of 3/16 plastic coated stainless steel cable attached to the insert body with a 6# 316 stainless steel rivet. The inhibitor shall be constructed of materials that withstand highly corrosive sewer gases. E. Ring and Cover Manhole ring and cover for all manholes shall be for street application and shall be as indicated on the drawings. Manholes 5 feet in diameter and larger shall require a nominal 3- foot ring and cover, as specified on the drawings. HDPE adjustment rings are to be used for 027205 Page 2 of 6 Rev. 3-25-2015 grade adjustments. A maximum of 18” of adjustment rings may be utilized. F. Flowable Grout Flowable grout (or flowable fill) shall consist of a mixture containing Portland cement, fly ash, sand, water, and “Darafill” admixture (or approved equivalent), in the amounts shown below (or otherwise proportioned to provide 100 psi compressive strength at 28 days), to achieve a paste-like consistency immediately prior to placing the flowable grout. The flowable grout mixture shall be supplied by an approved ready-mix supplier. The manufacturer's representative shall be consulted for any final adjustments to improve the flowability of the mixture. Commercially produced flowable grout may be used with approval of the Engineer. 100 lbs/ CY Portland Cement 300 lbs/ CY Fly Ash 2100 lbs/ CY Sand 250 lbs/ CY Water 6 oz/ CY "Darafill" admixture, as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equivalent. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS General: The limits of excavation shall allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, power poles, drainage structures, streets, etc. Subgrade under manhole footings shall be compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Vertical Sides: When necessary to protect other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides on the excavation. The limits shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, power poles, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled. Sloping Sides: In unimproved areas where sufficient space is available, the Contractor will be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope shall be such that the excavation will be safe from caving. Safety requirements shall govern the back slope used. De-watering: The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams, bailing, pumping, well pointing, or any combination, as the particular situation may warrant. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to 027205 Page 3 of 6 Rev. 3-25-2015 insure the safety of the structure, but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven (7) days after placing concrete. All de-watering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth, firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the City, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not create an unsafe condition. Unauthorized Over-Excavation: Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that rest on earth, shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried below the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations: For sanitary sewer application, pipe penetrations for pipe sizes 4-inch through 15-inch shall be made with appropriately sized core drill bits recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe penetrations other than described above and as authorized by the Engineer shall be made as follows: cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus 1/2 inch. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with masonry blade. Impact type tools shall not be used. Handling: Manholes shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the manhole or the surroundings. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it traverses shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. Height Adjustment: If necessary, utilize HDPE adjustment rings to adjust the manhole to the correct grade elevation. A maximum of 18” of adjustment rings may be utilized. Installation: Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at the proper elevation, and a minimum of six (6) inches into concrete, then plumb. Backfill Material: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, initial backfill around manholes (from subgrade to five feet (5') above the top of the concrete footing) shall be flowable grout. The remaining final backfill around manholes shall be cement-stabilized sand, or approved equal, containing a minimum of 2 sacks of standard Type I or Type II Portland cement per cubic yard of sand, free of large hard lumps, rock fragments or other debris. The material shall be free of large lumps or clods which will not readily break down under compaction. This material shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Topsoil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around the structure, if necessary. 027205 Page 4 of 6 Rev. 3-25-2015 Schedule of Backfilling: The Contractor may begin backfilling around manhole as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and the forms removed. Compaction: Backfill shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted thickness and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. Contractor shall follow operational requirements for bypass pumping as set forth in City Standard Specification Section 027200 "Control of Wastewater Flows". 5. TESTING Manholes shall be tested for leakage by either of two tests as specified by the Engineer. Water Leakage Test: The Contractor shall provide water, labor, and materials for testing. Testing shall be as follows: 1. With sewers plugged, the manhole shall be filled with water. 2. The manhole shall be checked after 24 hours have elapsed. 3. Water loss shall not exceed 2.4 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 4-foot diameter manholes, or 3.0 gallons per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for 5-foot diameter manholes. Water loss shall not exceed 0.6 gallon per foot of diameter per foot of depth for the 24-hour period for all sizes of sanitary manholes. 4. If the manhole is within 9 feet of a waterline that is not or cannot be encased, the manhole shall be tested for no leaks and no noticeable loss of water shall be experienced for the 24-hour period. If water loss is excessive, the Contractor shall correct the problem and the manhole shall be retested. Vacuum Test: Vacuum testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027203 “Vacuum Testing of Wastewater Manholes and Structures”. 6. GRADE ADJUSTMENT OF EXISTING FIBERGLASS MANHOLES The adjustment of the ring and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. If the ring and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole, this work shall be done as described below. Note that manhole repair kits are available for this work. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least 6 inches below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. 027205 Page 5 of 6 Rev. 3-25-2015 Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. Mark, cut and remove the required section of the manhole. Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. Replace and align the top. Fiberglass a 6-inch strip along the outside seam all around with two layers of mat with one layer of woven roving sandwiched between. After the outside has set, go on the inside and fill any voids in the seam with epoxy or material provided by the manhole manufacturer for use in such application. After the putty has set, fiberglass a 6-inch strip on the inside as previously done on the outside. After curing, backfill with cement-stabilized sand, as described above, compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D698) or as directed by the Engineer or his designated representative. 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, fiberglass manholes shall be measured per each for each size (diameter) of manhole indicated. Payment shall be made at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to complete the work. Payment shall include, but not be limited to; excavation, dewatering, compaction, concrete foundation, manhole assembly, connections, cast iron frame and cover, adjustment to finish grade, concrete work, backfill, leakage testing, bypass pumping, and other work as required to complete the fiberglass manhole. Extra depth for a sanitary manhole over 6 feet in depth will be measured by the vertical foot of depth in excess of 6 feet and bid as “Extra Depth for Manhole (Wastewater)”. Rehabilitation of existing manholes with fiberglass inserts shall be measured by each individual structure rehabilitated, and paid for at the unit price bid per each, of the size, type and depth specified, complete in-place, and meeting the approval of the Engineer. "Complete in-place" shall mean all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to furnish and install the rigid fiberglass manhole inserts, make connections, grout the annular space with flowable grout, backfilling, leakage testing, and adjust the manholes to finish grade. 027205 Page 6 of 6 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 027402 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforced concrete pipe culverts and the material and incidental construction requirements for reinforced concrete pipe sewers. The culvert pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of these specifications to the lines and grades shown on the plans, and shall be of the classes, sizes and dimensions shown thereon. The installation of pipe shall include all joints or connections to new or existing pipe, headwalls, etc., as may be required to complete the work. 2. MATERIALS 1. General. Except as modified herein, materials, manufacture and design of pipe shall conform to ASTM C-76 for Circular Pipe. All pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. 2. Design. All pipe shall be Class III (Wall "B") unless otherwise specified on the plans. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the specified class as summarized in ASTM C-76 for Circular Pipe. 3. Sizes and Permissible Variations. a. Variations in diameter, size, shape, wall thickness, reinforcement, placement of reinforcement, laying length and the permissible underrun of length shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to previously. b. Where rubber gasket pipe joints are to be used, the design of the Joints and Permissible Variations in Dimensions shall be in accordance with ASTM C-443. 4. Workmanship and Finish. Pipe shall be substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. The ends of the pipe shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. 5. Curing. Pipe shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe as referred to above. 6. Marking. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: 027402 Page 1 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 a. The class of pipe. b. The date of manufacture. c. The name or trademark of the manufacturer. d. Marking shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. 7. Minimum Age for Shipment. Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein. 8. Inspection. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the pipe manufacturing plant. In addition, the finished pipe shall be subject to further inspection by the Engineer at the project site prior to and during installation. 9. Causes for Rejection. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding. c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. d. Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. 10. Repairs. Pipe may be repaired if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling, and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of the specifications. 11. Rejections. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe that meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 12. Jointing Materials. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the Contractor shall have the option of making the joints by any of the following methods: a. Ram-Nek, a pre-formed plastic base joint material manufactured by K. T. Knyder Company, Houston, Texas, or an approved equal. Use of Talcote as joint material will not be not permitted. Ram-Nek joint material and primer shall be supplied for 027402 Page 2 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 use on pipe in the following sizes, which is the minimum that will be required. Additional Ram-Nek may be required if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a proper joint is not secured. Pipe Size Primer Per 100 Jts. Cut Lengths Per Joint 12" 1.5 gals. 1½ pcs 1" x 2'-5" 15" 1.9 gals. 2 pcs 1" x 2'-5" 18" 2.7 gals. 1½ pcs 1½ " x 3'-5" 21" 3.8 gals. 2 pcs 1½ " x 3'-5" 24" 6.2 gals. 2 pcs 1½ " x 3'-5" 30" 8.5 gals. 2½ pcs 1½ " x 3'-5" 36" 9.5 gals. 3 pcs 1¾" x 3'-5" 42" 12.0 gals. 3½ pcs 1¾" x 3'-5" 48" 15.0 gals. 4 pcs 1¾" x 3'-5" 54" 20.0 gals. 4½ pcs 1¾" x 3'-5" 60" 25.0 gals. 5 pcs 1¾" x 3'-5" 66" 30.0 gals. 5½ pcs 1¾" x 3'-5" 72" 32.0 gals. 6 pcs 2" x 3'-5" 84" 35.0 gals. 7 pcs 2" x 3'-5" b. TYLOX Types "C", "C-P" or "CR" rubber gaskets, as applicable, as manufactured by Hamilton Kent Manufacturing Company, Kent, Ohio, or approved equal. All gaskets, lubricants, adhesives, etc., shall be manufactured, constructed, installed, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer of the rubber gasket material and conform to ASTM Designation: C-443. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish to the City, for approval, manufacturer's brochures detailing the complete use, installation, and specifications of concrete pipe and rubber gaskets before any rubber gasket material is used on the project. All rubber gaskets shall be fabricated from synthetic rubber. c. Cement Mortar is prohibited from jointing pipe except at manholes, pipe junctions, etc., or where specifically approved by the Engineer. d. Geotextile for wrapping pipe joints shall be Class "A" subsurface drainage type in accordance with AASHTO M288. 027402 Page 3 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Reinforced concrete pipe culverts shall be constructed from the specified materials in accordance with the following methods and procedures: 1. Excavation. All excavation shall be in accordance with the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities," except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the plans or permitted by the Engineer. When pipe is laid in a trench, the trench, when completed and shaped to receive the pipe, shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of the backfill and bedding material under and around the pipe. The Contractor shall make such temporary provisions as may be necessary to insure adequate drainage of the trench and bedding during the construction operation. Pipe shall be placed such that the identification markings are visible at the top prior to backfill. 2. Bedding. The pipe shall be bedded in accordance with the bedding details shown on the drawings. Bedding shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to other work. If the subgrade of the trench is unstable, even if this condition occurs at relatively shallow depths, full encasement of the pipe with crushed stone shall be required. 3. Laying Pipe. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the laying of pipe on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet (downstream) end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream, and shall proceed toward the inlet (upstream) end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. Where bell and spigot pipe are used, cross trenches shall be cut in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the prepared bed. These cross trenches shall be not more than two inches larger than the bell ends of the pipe. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. The ends of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is placed. As each length of pipe is laid, the mouth of the pipe shall be protected to prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in the bed, it shall form a smooth, uniform conduit. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used, the pipe shall be laid in the trench in such position that the markings "TOP" or "BOTTOM" shall not be more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. For pipe over 42 inches in diameter, the Contractor may drill two holes not larger than 2 inches in diameter, in the top of each section of the pipe, to aid in lifting and placing. The holes shall be neatly drilled, without spalling of the concrete, and shall be done without the cutting of any reinforcement. After the pipe is laid, the holes shall be filled with mortar and properly cured, and placed such that they are visible from the top for inspection prior to backfill. Multiple installations of reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid with the center lines of 027402 Page 4 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated on plans, the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipe shall be used. Diameter of Pipe 18" 24" 30" 36" 42" 48" 54" 60" to 84" Clear Distance Between Pipes 0'-9" 0'-11" 1'-1" 1'-3" 1'-5" 1'-7" 1'-11" 2'-0" 4. Jointing. a. If the use of Portland cement mortar joints is allowed, all pipe shall be jointed tight and sealed with stiff mortar, composed of one part Portland cement and two parts sand, so placed as to form a durable water-tight joint. The installation shall be as required by the Engineer. b. Joints using Rubber Gaskets: Where rubber gasket pipe joints are required by the plans, the joint assembly shall be made according to the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer. Water-tight joints will be required when using rubber gaskets. c. Joints using Cold-Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets shall be made as follows: A suitable prime of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the gasket joint sealer shall be brush-applied to the tongue and groove joint surfaces and the end surfaces and allowed to dry and harden. No primer shall be applied over mud, sand or dirt or sharp cement protrusions. The surface to be primed must be clean and dry when primer is applied. Before laying the pipe in the trench, the plastic gasket sealer shall be attached around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. The paper wrapper shall be removed from one side only of the two-piece wrapper on the gasket and pressed firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface. The outside wrapper shall not be removed until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, the outside wrapper on the gasket shall be removed and the pipe shall be pulled or pushed home with sufficient force and power (backhoe shovel, chain hoist, ratchet hoist or winch) to cause the evidence of squeeze-out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. The extruded gasket material shall be smoothed out over the joint on the exterior and interior of the pipe. Any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow shall be removed. (Pipe shall be pulled home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times.) Backfilling of pipe laid with plastic gasket joints may proceed as soon as the joint has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Special precautions shall be taken in placing and compacting backfill to 027402 Page 5 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 avoid damage to the joints. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F, plastic joint seal gaskets shall either be stored in an area warmed to above 70 degrees F, or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Gaskets shall then be applied to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in the trench, followed by connection to previously laid pipe. d. Pipe Joints for storm sewers shall be wrapped with geotextile material. The geotextile wrap shall be at least 2 feet wide and shall be centered on each joint. 5. After the pipe has been placed, bedded and jointed as specified, filling and/or backfilling shall be done in accordance with the applicable requirements of City Standard Specification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." If unstable conditions are encountered, fully encase the pipe with crushed stone as described above. When mortar joints are allowed, no fill or backfill shall be placed until the jointing material has been cured for at least six (6) hours. Special precautions shall be taken in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the pipe or damage to the joints. For side drain culverts and all other culverts where joints consist of materials other than mortar, immediate backfilling will be permitted. 6. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted in writing by the Engineer, no heavy earth moving equipment will be permitted to haul over the structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed thereon. Pipe damaged by the Contractor's equipment shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. 7. Cleaning and Television Inspection. All enclosed reinforced concrete pipe and manholes installed on this project shall be cleaned and televised in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 027611 "Cleaning and Televised Inspection of Conduits." 4. MEASUREMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforced concrete pipe will be measured by the linear foot. Such measurement will be made between the ends of the pipe barrel along its central axis. Where spurs or branches, or connections to existing pipe lines are involved, measurement of the spur or new connecting pipe will be made from the intersection of its center axis with the outside surfaces of the pipe into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, catch basins, manholes, junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of pipe, that length of pipe tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement but no other portion of the structure length or width will be so included. For multiple pipes, the measured length will be the sum of the lengths of the barrels measured as prescribed above. 027402 Page 6 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 5. PAYMENT Payment for reinforced concrete pipe measured as prescribed above will be made at the contract unit price bid per linear foot for the various sizes of "Reinforced Concrete Pipe" of the class specified. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and transporting the pipe; hauling and placing of earth cushion material where required for bedding pipe; for the preparation and shaping of beds; for hauling, placing and jointing of pipes; for furnishing and installing geotextile pipe joint wrapping; for end finish; for all connections to existing and new structures; for cleaning and television inspection; and for all other items of materials, labor, equipment, tools, excavation, backfill and incidentals necessary to complete the culvert or storm sewer in accordance with the plans and these specifications. 027402 Page 7 of 7 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 028020 SEEDING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for tilling, fertilizing, planting seeds, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS 2.1 FERTILIZER: All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or clearly marked containers showing the analysis, name, trademark and warranty. The fertilizer is subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas fertilizer law. Fertilizer shall have an analysis of 12-12-12 (percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash) as determined by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fertilizer shall be free flowing and uniform in composition. 2.2 SEED: Seed shall be labeled and meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Labels shall indicate purity, germination, name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop, and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within twelve months of delivery to the project. The quantity of "Commercial Seed" required to equal the quantity of "Pure Live Seed" shall be computed by the following formula: Commercial Seed = Pure Live Seed x 10,000 % Purity x % Germination The quantity of pure live seed and type required are indicated below. Mixture A or C shall be used for this project, depending on the time of the year planting is performed. LB/ACRE OF PURE LIVE SEED FOR MIXTURES COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME A B C Green Sprangletop Leptochloa Dubia 1.4 1.4 - Sideoats Grama (premier) Bouteloua Curtipendula 0.6 - 0.6 Bermudagrass (Hulled) Cynodon Dactylon 7.0 7.4 - Bermudagrass (Unhulled) Cynodon Dactylon - - 30.0 K-R Bluestem Andropogon Ischaemum 1.2 1.2 1.5 Buffalograss Buchloe Dactyloides - 4.2 - Annual Ryegrass Lolium Multiflorum 5.0 5.0 20.0 Mixture - A: Recommended for clay or tight soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture - B: Recommended for sandy soil planted between December 1 thru May 1. Mixture - C: Recommended for all soils planted between May 2 thru November 30. 028020 Page 1 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 2.3 MULCH: Mulch shall be either the straw type or wood cellulose fiber type. Straw Type mulch shall be of straw from stalks of domestic grain, Bermudagrass or cotton hulls, or other approved by the Engineer. Wood Cellulose Fiber Type mulch shall have no growth inhibiting ingredients and shall be dried with a moisture content less that 10% by weight. Fibers shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering and application of mulch. The cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that after addition and agitation in slurry tank with fertilizers, seeds and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry; when sprayed on the ground, the material shall form a uniform cover impregnated with seeds; the cover shall allow added water to percolate to the underlying soil. The fiber material shall be supplied in packages of not more than 100 lb. gross weight and shall be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the dry weight content. 2.4 EQUIPMENT: The fertilizing, seeding and/or mulching operations shall be accomplished with equipment suitable to the required function. It shall be of current design and in good operating condition. Special seeding and mulching equipment must also meet the following requirements: Seeder - Equipment for applying a seed-fertilizer mix shall be a hydraulic seeder designed to pump and discharge a waterborne, homogeneous slurry of seed and fertilizer. The seeder shall be equipped with a power driven agitator and capable of pressure discharge. Straw Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for straw mulch application shall be trailer mounted, equipped with a blower capable of 2000 r.p.m. operation, and that will discharge straw mulch material through a discharge boom with spout at speeds up to 220 feet per second. The mulch spreader shall be equipped with an asphalt supply and application system near the discharge end of the boom spout. The system shall apply asphalt adhesive in atomize form to the straw at a predetermined rate. The spreader shall be capable of blowing the asphalt-coated mulch, with a high velocity airstream, over the surface at a uniform rate, forming a porous, stable erosion-resistant cover. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Spreader - Equipment used for this application of fertilizer, seeds, wood pulp, water and other additives shall have a built-in agitation system with sufficient capacity to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to 40 lbs. of fiber plus the required fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. It shall have sufficient agitation and pump capacity to spray a slurry in a uniform coat over the area to be mulched. 028020 Page 2 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 PREPARATION OF SEEDBED: The area to be treated along with requirements for seed, fertilizer and other treatments, shall be done as indicated on the drawings and as specified below. Clearing – Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021020, "Site Clearing and Stripping". Grading - Refer to City Standard Specification Section 021040, "Site Grading". Tilling - The area to be seeded shall be tilled to a depth of 4 to 6 inches by disking, plowing, or other approved methods until soil condition is acceptable. Topsoiling – If the native soils are not conducive to the establishment and maintenance of grass growth, or if called for on the drawings, topsoil shall be placed over the area to be seeded to a depth of 5 inches after tilling. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7; shall contain between 2 and 20 percent organic material content in accordance with ASTM D5268; and shall be free of stones larger than one inch, debris, and extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 3.2 FERTILIZING: Fertilizer shall be uniformly applied at a rate of 400 lb/acre, after tilling. Fertilizing and seeding shall be done concurrently. If seeds and fertilizer are distributed in a water slurry, the mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within 30 minutes after all the components have come into contact. 3.3 SEEDING: The seed mixture shall be uniformly distributed at the rate specified above. Broadcast Seeding - Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After planting, the area shall be rolled on contour with a corrugated roller. Straw Mulch Seeding - Seed shall be placed with fertilizer, after tilling. After placement of the seed and fertilizer mixture, straw mulch shall be uniformly placed at a rate of 2 tons per acre. As soon as the mulch has been spread, it shall be anchored to the soil a minimum depth of 3 inches by use of a heavy, dulled disk harrow, set nearly straight. Disks shall be set approximately 9 inches apart. Straw Mulch With Asphalt Seeding - Seed, fertilizer and straw mulch shall be placed as described in "Straw Mulch Seeding" with the following two exceptions: 1) An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied to the mulch near the discharge end of the boom spout at a rate of 300 to 600 gallons per acre. 2) Mechanical anchoring by disking will not be required. Asphalt Mulch Seeding - The seed and fertilizer shall be placed as described for "Broadcast Seeding". After the area has been rolled, the area shall be watered sufficiently to assure a uniform moisture to a minimum depth of 4 inches. An asphalt-water emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 1500 to 1800 gallons per acre, immediately after watering. Asphalt shall be applied to the area in such a manner that a complete film is obtained and the finished surface shall be 028020 Page 3 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 comparatively smooth. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - After tilling, mulch shall be applied. Wood cellulose fibers shall be added to the hydraulic seeder after the proportionate amounts of seed, fertilizer, water and other approved materials are added. Application shall be 1500 lb./acre on flats, 2000 lb./acre on slopes up to 3:1, and 2500 lb./acre on slopes steeper than 3:1. One hundred (100) pounds of fiber per acre shall be used when asphalt is to be applied over cellulose mulch. The mulch shall provide a uniform cover over the soil surface. Asphalt Over Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding - "Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding" shall be done as described above. After mulch has been placed, an asphalt-water emulsion shall be uniformly spread over the mulch at a rate of 1200 gallons per acre. 3.4 MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall water, repair and reseed areas as required for a period of 45 days or until growth has been established, whichever is longer. This includes erosion damage. Maintenance does not include mowing or weed control, unless indicated on the plans. If at any time the seeded area becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, or the seeds have been damaged or destroyed, the affected portion shall be re-established to the specified condition prior to acceptance of the work. 3.5 GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall assure 95% of the seeded area has established grass growth at 45 calendar days after seeding, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Where established, grass growth is defined as at least one plant per square foot with no bare spots larger than three (3) square feet. The Contractor shall re-establish grass growth as directed by the Engineer during the one-year warranty period. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, seeding will be measured by the horizontal square yard of area seeded within the areas designated on the drawings. Areas disturbed by the Contractor that are outside of the designated areas (such as field office, laydown/ storage area, stockpile areas, etc.) shall be seeded by the Contractor for erosion control per the stormwater pollution prevention plan but will not be measured for payment. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, and shall include, but not be limited to, tilling soil, topsoiling, fertilizing, planting, mulching, watering and maintaining vegetation. Payment shall be due and payable only after grass growth has been established as described above. 028020 Page 4 of 4 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter – TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 030020 Page 1 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as SO 4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 030020 Page 2 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. Nominal Size 2-½ In. 2 In. 1-½ In. 1 In. 3/4 In. 1/2 In. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 20 15 to 50 60 to 80 95 to 100 2 (467)* 1-½ in. 0 0 to 5 30 to 65 70 to 90 95 to 100 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 to 5 40 to 75 90 to 100 95 to 100 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 5 35 to 80 90 to 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 030020 Page 3 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes ‘A’ and ‘C’, the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar (Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 030020 Page 4 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 030020 Page 5 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 030020 Page 6 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 030020 Page 7 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Designation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns, Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. Underwater or Seal Concrete Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 4 inches 3 inches 5 inches 2.5 inches 5 inches 4 inches 6 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 030020 Page 8 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Class of Concrete Sacks Cement per C.Y. (min.) Minimum Compressive Strength (f'c) 28-Day(psi) Min. Beam Strength 7-Day (psi) Maximum Water-Cement Ratio (gal/sack) Coarse Aggregate No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air (slabs, piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only (except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type II Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 030020 Page 9 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 030020 Page 10 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1) Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 030020 Page 11 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm) will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 030020 Page 12 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 030020 Page 13 of 13 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 032020 Page 1 of 6 Rev. 10-30-2014 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Bar Size Number Nominal Diameter, In. Nominal Area, Sq. In. Weight per Linear Foot, Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Gauge Number Equivalent Diameter, Inches Gauge Number Equivalent Diameter, Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 032020 Page 2 of 6 Rev. 10-30-2014 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter (d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3, #4, #5 4d #6, #7, #8 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru #8 6d -- #9, #10 8d -- #11 8d 8d #14, #18 10d -- 032020 Page 3 of 6 Rev. 10-30-2014 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 032020 Page 4 of 6 Rev. 10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements Lap Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d = bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 032020 Page 5 of 6 Rev. 10-30-2014 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 032020 Page 6 of 6 Rev. 10-30-2014 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material. (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2. Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)", except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3. Redwood. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 038000 Page 1 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 1. Class 1-a. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2. Class 1-b. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials, when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77º F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max., cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, Oº F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manuf.). Pass Flow at 200º F................................. None Water Content % by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 158º F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper, filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth, flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C, the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 3½"). (d) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1752 “Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction”, Type 1, where applicable: 038000 Page 2 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D1752, Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752, Type 1 40 lb./ft3 Min. Recovery ASTM D1752, Type 1 90% Min. Compression ASTM D1752, Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752, Type 1 0.25 inch Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752, Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75% Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3) Curing Materials. (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein, be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the 038000 Page 3 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 following: 24 hours after application............2 percent 72 hours after application............4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only) curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber joint material is used, it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch (1”) of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term “monolithic placement” shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 038000 Page 4 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms may be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For job fabricated forms, an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight, rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch (1/16”). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 038000 Page 5 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness, with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical, i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch (3/4”) on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 038000 Page 6 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design, mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 038000 Page 7 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F 15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F 30 minutes Agitated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F 45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F 60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement, and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done during daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started, the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature, the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 038000 Page 8 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet, except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes, troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 038000 Page 9 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 provided for emergency use in addition to those required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation, and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced, but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary, to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four (4) full curing days. If carts are used, timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set, at least one (1) curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature, the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40 degrees F for an additional 72 hours. 038000 Page 10 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers, culverts walls, retaining walls, parapets, wingwalls, bottoms of slabs, and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimens will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed, prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities, may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed, but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products, the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 038000 Page 11 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more than two (2) hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Article "Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 038000 Page 12 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case, measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12. TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working, the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screeded, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch (1/16”) in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surface texturing using a either carpet drag or metal tining as indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 038000 Page 13 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.035 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for any one test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch (1/8”), making proper allowances for camber, vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations, not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16”) will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer, irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations, camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities, therefore, shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of four (4) curing days except as noted herein. 038000 Page 14 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and 8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts 10 curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35 degrees F, the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Ponding. This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2”) of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 038000 Page 15 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 (1”) depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3) Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement, concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED STRUCTURE UNIT DESCRIPTION WATER FOR CURING MEMBRANE FOR INTERIM CURING WATER FOR CURING MEMBRANE FOR INTERIM CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) X 3 Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. X* X* 4 All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, manholes, retaining walls X* X* *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 038000 Page 16 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces, but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans, the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed, and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities, pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 038000 Page 17 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 to the work, the Contractor, when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day (24 hours) when Type I and Type II cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal, all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch (1/2") and the surface repaired. All fins, runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt, paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 038000 Page 18 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification, but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 038000 Page 19 of 19 Rev. 3-25-2015 SECTION 055420 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS AND COVERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the furnishing and installation of frames, grates, rings and covers for inlets, manholes and other structures in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36 “Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel”. 2. MATERIALS Welded steel grates and frames shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the plans and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A36. Castings, whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron, shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown on the plans and shall be clean substantial castings, free from burnt-on sand or blow holes, and shall be reasonable smooth. Runners, risers, fins, and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grates and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the perimeter contact area. Pairs of machined castings shall be matchmarked to facilitate subsequent identification at installation. Steel castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A27 "Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application". Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Cast Iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings", Class 30. Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A536 "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings". Grade 60-40-18 shall be used otherwise specified. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the plans, and shall be placed carefully to the lines and grades indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. Frames, grates, rings and covers shall be given one coat of a commercial grade red lead and oil paint and two coats of commercial grade aluminum paint. 055420 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 Painting on gray iron castings will not be required, except when used in conjunction with structural steel shapes. Commercial grade galvanized bolts and nuts shall be used. The zinc coating shall be uniform in thickness, smooth and continuous. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, frames, grates, rings and covers will not be measured for payment, but shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items. 055420 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 3-25-2015 Technical Specifications Division 02 Existing Conditions February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work – 02 41 13 SECTION 02 41 13 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND DEMOLITION WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification is intended to define cutting, patching, demolition, removal and relocation of all mechanical equipment, conduit and wiring, and piping, specified or required for a complete demolition. B. The City Of Corpus Christi retains salvage rights to all demolished equipment and wire. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other work. C. Demolition is to be as described in the following: 1. The removal of all existing work so indicated, specified or required. 2. The removal of existing work required to be removed for replacement by new work. 3. The removal of existing work required to be temporarily removed in order to erect new work. Work temporarily removed shall be reinstalled or replaced in a manner to restore the work to its original condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer. When such existing work is removed for the convenience of the various trades, such removal and replacement or reinstallation shall be performed by mechanics skilled in the trade of erecting the type of work involved. 4. The removal and reinstallation or relocation of existing electrical work as required by the installation of new work of all trades. 1.3 WORK NOT SHOWN ON PLANS A. Work not shown on the plans which must be removed and reinstalled, shall be done with no increase in contract price. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bid and determine the existing conditions to verify the demolition or removal. This work shall be done with no increase in contract price. 1.4 EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required to insure the continued service of any affected systems interrupted by the demolition or removals. This work shall be done with no increase in contract price. B. Existing conduits exposed by demolition work shall be relocated as necessary. Coordinate with owner such that no loss of time is incurred by the owner regarding facility operations and/or maintenance. C. Existing concealed conduits not reused in the work may be abandoned in place; however, all wires shall be removed. D. Existing exposed conduits not reused in the work shall be removed unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 1.5 DAMAGE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED WHILE PERFORMING WORK UNDER THIS SECTION IN ORDER TO ASSURE THERE WILL BE no damage to installations that are to remain in place. Any damage shall be repaired by the contractor at no increase in contract price. B. The Contractor shall remove, at his own expense, any part of the work that has been improperly executed. He shall be responsible for the care of all work until its completion and final acceptance, and he shall replace any damaged or lost material. The Owner/Engineer’s opinion of improperly executed work shall prevail. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work – 02 41 13 their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-protection systems. 3. Control systems. 4. Communication systems. 5. Electrical wiring systems. 6. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise and vibration-control elements and systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. Use materials identical to existing materials. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. B. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. C. Storage / Packing Containers 1. Shall be 28 inches long x 20 ¾ inches wide x 15 7/16 inches wide. 2. Shall be manufactured from high density gray polyethylene and be equipped with permanently attached flip up interlocking lids suitable for stacking up to three high. 3. Buckhorn Model NR422104 or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Owner. E. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FITTINGS A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work – 02 41 13 interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide at least seven (7) working days notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied areas. E. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. These items include the proper removal of any treated chilled water that is to be drained from the system. Receive proper written permission from the Owner if chilled water is to be drained into the sewer system. F. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. G. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior. I. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work – 02 41 13 J. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. K. Camera Equipment Demolition 1. Each camera shall be neatly and securely packed in the containers noted in section 2.0 Materials of these specifications. 2. Each component of the camera system shall be packaged with the camera itself. This includes but not limited to the following: a. Camera VDP cable system b. Fiber transceivers c. Coax and Surge Suppression devices d. Camera controller 3. Each separate camera system component shall be neatly wrapped with at least two layers of bubble wrap and secured with packing tape. 4. Once all components of each camera system are properly stored in the containers, each container shall be sealed and labeled by the camera number. Contact Owner for proper disposition of camera containers. 5. All demolitioned camera VDP cable systems shall not be cut but shall be removed from the connectorized end of the cable. The cable shall be tie wrapped to secure the cable in a coiled manner. All cable connectors shall be bubble wrapped with a least two layers and secured with packing tape for storage. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Owner reserves the “right of first refusal” for all demolished items as indicated on the drawings. Contractor is to take possession of demolished equipment and materials and verify the intent of the owner to refuse any items. Contractor shall dispose of refused demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work – 02 41 13 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Owner, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. E. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. F. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. G. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3.5 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original installer. Comply with original installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other sections of these specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even- February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Cutting, Patching, and Demolition Work – 02 41 13 plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight condition. END OF SECTION Division 3 Concrete February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Forest and Paper Association: 1. AF&PA - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. C. The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. E. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 2. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to design and applicable code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Forms shall be designed with consideration of rate, method of placing concrete, and construction loads to be encountered, including vertical, horizontal, and impact loads. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Requirements for submittals. B. Information on the Contractor’s proposed forming system: Submit in such detail as the Engineer may require to assure himself that the intent of the specifications can be complied with by use of the proposed system. C. Approval by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide forms adequate and satisfactory for the purpose required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF&PA. C. Install work in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design formwork under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Texas. B. Qualifications of Formwork Manufacturers: Use only forming systems manufactured by manufacturers having minimum 5 years’ experience, except as otherwise specified, or accepted in writing by the Engineer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work requiring attachment of components to formwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Lumber Forms: 1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete. 2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, shiplapped or tongue and groove, “Standard” Grade Southern Yellow Pine, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading Rules for W est Coast Lumber. Surface boards on four sides. B. Plywood Forms: 1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete. 2. Forms: Conform to PS 1; 5-ply plywood sheets made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement; full size 4 x 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with grade trademark of APA/EWA. 3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 3/4 inch thick; APA/EWA “B-B Plyform Structural I Exterior” grade. 4. Plywood where “Smooth Finish” is required, as indicated on Contract Drawings: APA/EWA “HD Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior” grade, minimum of 3/4 inch thick. 2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. B. Preformed Steel Forms: Rigidly constructed matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. D. Steel Forms: Sheet steel, suitably reinforced, and designed for particular use indicated on Contract Drawings. E. Form Liners: Smooth, durable, grainless and non-staining hardboard, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. F. Framing, Studding and Bracing: Southern Yellow Pine No. 2 with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: 1. General: a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by a recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. b. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock and spread forms. c. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during placement of concrete. B. Cone-Snap or Flat Bar Form Ties: 1. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with a minimum February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and 1-1/2 inches deep. 2. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the concrete. C. Taper Ties: 1. Neoprene Plugs for Taper Tie Holes: Size so that after they are driven, plugs are located in center third of wall thickness. 2. Dry-Pack Mortar for Filling Taper Tie Holes: a. Consist of mix of 1 part of Portland cement to 1 part of plaster sand. b. Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be such that mortar can be driven into holes and be properly compacted. c. Admixtures or Additives: Are not to be used in dry-pack mortar. D. Spreaders: Standard, non-corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete face. Wire ties, wood spreaders or through bolts are not permitted. E. Form Anchors and Hangers: F. Do not use anchors and hangers exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at concrete surface. G. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members to minimize twisting or rotation of member. H. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted. I. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. J. Corners: Chamfer, rigid plastic or wood strip type; 3/4 inch bevel unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings; maximum possible lengths. Provide 1/4 inch bevel at expansion and construction joints. K. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according to label directions. L. Dovetail Anchor System: System consisting of dovetail slots cast into the concrete, dovetail anchors that tie the masonry veneer to dovetail slots, and continuous wires that are embedded in the masonry and connect to the dovetail anchors: 1. Dovetail Slot: 18 gage, Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 167, foam filled and in 10 foot lengths. a. Manufacturers: (1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Hauppauge, NY; Model No. 305. (2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; Chicago, IL; Model No. 100. (3) Substitutions: Submit substitutions for approval. 2. Dovetail Anchors: 23 gage, 1 inch wide, Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 167, and with seismic notch for attachment to wire embedded in masonry. a. Manufacturers: (1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Hauppauge, NY; Model No. 303SV. (2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; Chicago, IL; Model No. 361. (3) Substitutions: Submit substitutions for approval. 3. Wire Reinforcement: 9 gage, Type 304 stainless steel wire in accordance with ASTM A 580. 4. Manufacturers: (1) Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.; Hauppauge, NY. (2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; Chicago, IL. M. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel or rigid PVC, 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. N. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751. O. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Contract Drawings. B. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Engineer. C. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical and electrical inserts or other embedded items. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Earth Forms: 1. Trench earth forms neatly, accurately, and at least 2 inches wider than footing widths indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Trim sides and bottom of earth forms. 3. Construct wood edge strips at top of each side of trench to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. 4. Form sides of footings where earth sloughs. 5. Tamp earth forms firm and clean forms of debris and loose material before depositing concrete. B. Formwork - General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. 2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete. C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish. 3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped. D. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms. After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. E. Framing, Studding and Bracing: 1. Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum for boards and 12 inches on center maximum for plywood. 2. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Construct beam soffits of material minimum of 2 inches thick. 4. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected. 5. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement or accidental impact. F. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318. G. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. H. Obtain Engineer’s approval before framing openings in structural members not indicated on Contract Drawings. I. Install chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists, columns and slabs exposed to view. J. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Do not coat forms for concrete indicated to receive “scored finish”. Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel. 3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete. C. in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. D. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 5. Cone-Snap Rod and Bar Ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill tie holes as follows: a. Remove form ties from surfaces. b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair. c. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar. 6. Taper Ties: a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows: (1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes. (2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy. (3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during driving: i. At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical recess. b. Dry-Pack of Taper Tie Holes: After installing plugs in tie holes: (1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry-pack mortar: (2) Dry-Pack Mortar: Place in holes in layers with thickness not exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer. (3) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days after the inside of the hole has been dry packed. (4) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side of water containing structures and the outside of below grade walls: c. Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel. d. Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend minimum of 2 inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes. e. Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or other voids. H. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 I. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp. J. Embedded Items: 1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers, water stops, and other features. 2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete. 3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under other Specification sections. 4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete. 5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations. K. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Contract Drawings. Establish exact locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings. L. Screeds: 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water. M. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. 2. Staking through membrane is not permitted. N. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air just before concrete is placed. 3.5 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.6 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Engineer. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Vertical Forms: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 7 Concrete Forming and Accessories – 03 10 00 1. Remain in place minimum of 36 hours after concrete is placed. 2. If, after 36 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist surface or other damage, forms may be removed. E. Other Forms Supporting Concrete and Shoring: Remain in place as follows: 1. Sides of Footings: 24 hours minimum. 2. Vertical Sides of Beams, Girders, and Similar Members: 36 hours minimum. 3. Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified strength f’c or until shoring is installed. 4. Shoring for Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Shore until concrete strength reaches specified strength. 5. Wall Bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength. F. Green Concrete: 1. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. 2. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of specified strength f’c. G. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces, and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified in Section 03 30 00. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Tolerances: 1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances listed below at time of acceptance of project. 3. Construct formwork to produce completed concrete surfaces within construction tolerances specified in ACI 117, paragraphs 2.1 through 2.2 and paragraphs 4.0 through 4.6, except as modified herein: a. Slabs: (1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on the Contract Drawings. (2) Slabs Indicated to be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade. b. On Circular Tank Walls: The Contractor may deviate from finish line indicated on the Contract Drawings by use of forms with chord lengths not to exceed 2 feet. c. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances required for proper installation and operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains. d. Maximum Tolerances: As follows: Item Tolerance Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8 inches Projected Ends of Anchor Bolts Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0 inches Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 Minus 1/16 inches 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Notify Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but minimum 48 hours prior to placing concrete. C. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing – 03 20 00 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Welded wire fabric. 3. Reinforcement accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 350 - Environmental Structures: Code Requirements. 4. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. 5. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. A185/A185M-07 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 4. ASTM A496/A496M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A497/A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 10. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 11. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement. 12. ASTM A934/A934M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 13. ASTM A996/A996M – Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar size, spacing, location, and quantity of reinforcing steel or welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing – 03 20 00 1. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice, ACI 301 and/or ACI 318. B. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. B. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A185/A185M; in flat sheets; unfinished. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type, unfinished. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic-coated steel hot-dip galvanized metal spacers with plastic tips, stainless steel or plastic spacers type, size and shape to meet Project conditions. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice and ACI 318. B. Form standard hooks for 180 degree bends, 90 degree bends, stirrup and tie hooks, and seismic hooks as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Reinforcing shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the Contract Drawings. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. D. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. E. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318. F. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices. G. Form spiral column reinforcement from minimum 3/8 inch diameter continuous deformed bar or wire. H. Form ties and stirrups from the following, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings: 1. For bars No. 10 and Smaller: No. 3 deformed bars. 2. For bars No. 11and Larger: No. 4 deformed bars. I. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Contract Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Submit location of splices to Engineer for review and approval. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, dimensions shown for reinforcing bars are out to out of steel. 3. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections. Where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, tie every other intersection. 4. Reinforcing steel shall be supported and tied in such a manner as to provide a February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing – 03 20 00 sufficiently rigid cage of steel. 5. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, over-turning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. 6. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to ensure that the reinforcement remains in the proper position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. Check drawing requirements (plans, sections and details) for additional reinforcing steel at all openings. D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 of one bar diameter, but not less than 1 inch. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars. E. For cast-in-place concrete, maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 as follows, unless specifically noted otherwise on “Issued for Construction” drawings: Reinforcement Location Minimum Concrete Cover Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3 inches Concrete exposed to earth or weather No. 6 bars and larger 2 inches No. 5 bars and smaller 1-1/2 inches Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground; slabs, walls & joists No. 14 bars and larger 1-1/2 inches No. 11 bars and smaller 3/4 inches Beams and Columns 1-1/2 inches Shell and Folded Plate Members No. 6 bars and larger 3/4 inch No. 5 bars and smaller 1/2 inch F. Splice reinforcing where indicated on Contract Drawings and in accordance with splicing device manufacturer’s instructions. G. Development and splices of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with ACI 318. H. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, grease, oil, concrete laitance or other foreign matter prior to concrete placement. I. Reinforcing shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. J. Install additional top and bottom corner bars, same size and quantity as the beam, footing or wall reinforcing, shown on the Contract Drawings and at all beam corners and interior/exterior beam, footing or wall intersections. K. Unless noted otherwise, corner or intersection bar lap lengths shall be a minimum of 40 bar diameters in both directions. 3.2 STORING A. Steel reinforcing shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing – 03 20 00 Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch B. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The contractor shall implement a quality control plan to ensure that the reinforcing size, type, finish, spacing, cover, splicing, material and placement are in accordance with the “Issued for Construction” drawings. B. If the project requires reinforcing inspections, no concrete shall be deposited until the engineer has inspected the reinforcing steel and has given permission to proceed with concrete placement. Notify the engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to the planned concrete pour. C. The contractor shall provide free access to Work and cooperate with the engineer or engineer’s appointed inspector. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following: 1. Building frame members. 2. Shear walls, elevator shafts, and foundation walls. 3. Supported slabs and slabs on grade. 4. Control and expansion joints. 5. Equipment pads. 6. Light pole and flagpole bases. 7. Thrust blocks. 8. Manholes and junction boxes. 9. Drainage inlets. 10. Headwalls and wingwalls. 11. Retaining walls. 12. Sidewalks and curb ramps. 13. Driveways. 14. Curbs and curb and gutter. 15. Concrete riprap. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control. 6. Section 31 63 29 - Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts. 1.2 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Cast-in-place concrete shall not be measured and paid for separately; it shall be subsidiary to other items of work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI CT - Concrete Terminology. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 6. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 7. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 8. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 3. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 6. ASTM C78 – Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). 7. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 8. ASTM C109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens). 9. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 10. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 11. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 12. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 13. ASTM C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 14. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 15. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 16. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 17. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 18. ASTM C496 – Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 19. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 20. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 21. ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 22. ASTM C845 - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. 23. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 24. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 25. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 26. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 27. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 28. ASTM C1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. 29. ASTM C1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 30. ASTM C1218 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 31. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. 32. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 33. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 34. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 35. ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 36. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 37. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 38. ASTM E154– Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 39. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 40. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI Design Handbook. D. South Coast Air Quality Management District: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Barrier Permeance: Maximum 0.01 Perms (grains/ft2 * hr * in.Hg) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method or water method. 1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms (grains/ft2 * hr * in.Hg) after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E154 Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured products, admixtures and vapor barrier. C. Design Data: 1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength/class indicated on Drawings a minimum of fifteen days prior to concrete placement. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: 2. Hot and cold weather concrete work. 3. Air entrained concrete work. 4. Identify mix ingredients, including type, brand, source and proportions of cement, fly ash, and admixtures, as well as aggregate gradation and chemical composition. Also include applicable reference specifications and copies of test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and will be suitable for job conditions. 5. Admixtures shall not contain chloride ions. D. Certificate of Compliance: Submit to the Engineer for approval for each strength/class of concrete indicated on Drawings: 1. Aggregates 2. Admixtures 3. Cement 4. Fly Ash 5. Epoxy Grout E. Obtain approval by Engineer before concrete placement. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and 318. B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather. D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work. E. Maintain one copy minimum of each document on site. 1.8 DELIVERY A. Do not deliver concrete until forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement and Engineer’s inspection has been completed satisfactorily. B. Packing and Shipping: 1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7 days. B. Maintain high early strength concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 for minimum 3 days. C. Concrete temperature at time of delivery shall not exceed 85 degrees F. Any temperature above this will not be accepted. Measures shall be taken to ensure proper temperature at time of placement. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of joint devices, sleeves, penetrations, openings, conduits, piping, etc. with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE A. Consistency of concrete mixtures shall be such that: 1. The mortar will cling to the coarse aggregate. 2. The aggregates will not segregate in the concrete when it is transported to the place of deposit. 3. The concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, will flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edge of the pile will stand and not flow. 4. The concrete and mortar will show no free water when removed from the mixer. 5. The concrete will slide and not flow into place when transported in metal chutes at an angle of thirty (30) degrees with the horizontal. 6. The surface of the finished concrete will be free of a surface film of “laitance”. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II – Moderate, Portland type. B. Site Mixed Cement 1. Cement used to make concrete shall be as indicated above. 2. Cement shall be of a standard brand manufactured by a reputable firm. 3. Only one brand of cement will be permitted unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 4. Each bag of cement shall be plainly marked with the name of the manufacturer and shall weigh no less than 94 pounds net. 5. Cement must be in good condition at the time it is delivered and it shall be properly protected against dampness after delivery. 6. No cement will be accepted which has become caked. C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. The source of supply of fine and coarse aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer before any material is delivered. If required, samples of the fine or coarse aggregates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2. Each sample shall be accompanied by complete information as to the source, name of producer, capacity and type of plant. D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: In accordance with ACI 318. E. Water: ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions, oils, acids, alkali, salts, organic material or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Manufacturers: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems. 2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 3. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. 4. Sika Corporation. 5. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. C. Chemical: ASTM C494. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618; Class F; 25% of cementitious materials by weight, maximum. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 F. Plasticizing: ASTM C1017 1. Drilled piers; walls and columns where reinforcing steel is congested and additional fluidity is required in concrete mix without adding water: Type I, plasticizing 2. Drilled piers utilizing temporary casing: Type II, plasticizing and retarding. G. Prohibited admixtures include calcium chloride, thiocyanates, and all admixtures that contribute free chloride ion in excess of 0.1% by weight of cement. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, Polyvinyl Acetate, Latex emulsion, or two- component modified epoxy resin. 1. Manufacturers: 2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 3. Meadows, W.R., Inc. 4. QUIKRETE. 5. Sika Corporation. 6. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745 Class A; 15 mil thick extruded polyolefin membrane; type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint tape recommended by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: a. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries, LLC. b. VaporGuard by Griffolyn. c. Zero-Perm by Alumiseal. d. Substitutions: Not Permitted. C. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 1. Manufacturers: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. QUIKRETE. c. Sika Corporation. d. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. D. Curing Compound: 1. A curing compound, which may be sprayed on the surface of the concrete to prevent evaporation of moisture, may be used with the Engineer’s prior approval. This curing compound must be compatible with the sealer. 2.5 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Construction Joint Devices: Not Applicable. B. Expansion Joint Devices: 1. Paving joints a. Manufacturers: (1) Greenstreak #610 or #628 by Greenstreak, Inc. (2) Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions to Engineer for review and approval. C. Expansion Joint Filler Material: 1. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D994; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt; thickness as specified on Drawings; tongue and groove profile. D. Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric, self-leveling polyurethane sealant or as indicated on Drawings. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX A. Select proportions for concrete in accordance with ACI 318 trial mixtures or field experience. B. Provide structural concrete to the following criteria, unless indicated otherwise on Structural Series Drawings: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 Minimum Compressive Strength (f 'c) 28-day (psi) Max. Aggregate Size (in) Slump (in) Cement Type Maximum Water-Cement Ratio Types of Structures 3000 1 1/2 6 +/- 1 Type I Normal 0.5 drilled piers, underream piers 4000 1 4 +/- 1 Type I Normal 0.45 spread footings and pedestals, mat foundations, columns 4000 3/4 4 +/- 1 Type I Normal 0.45 slab on grade foundations, suspended slabs, beams, roof slabs, walls, retaining walls 4500 1 4 +/- 1 Type I Normal with Microsilica 0.42 bulkhead caps, concrete at marine structures C. Provide concrete to the following criteria, unless indicated otherwise on Civil Series Drawings: Class of Concrete Minimum Cement Content (sacks/CY) Minimum Compressive Strength (f ’c) 28-day (psi) Minimum Flexural (Beam) Strength (fr) 7-day (psi) Maximum Water-Cement Ratio (gal./sack) (wt. ratio) Types of Structures A 5.0 3000 N/A 6.5 0.58 driveways, sidewalks, curb & gutter, header curbs, curb ramps, curb inlets, valley gutters, storm water manholes, collars for manholes and valves, manhole footings, sign post and fence post footings, channel lining, riprap, safety end treatment, thrust blocks and bollards February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 B 4.5 2500 N/A 8.0 0.71 concrete cradle for Class A pipe bedding, concrete pipe collar for RCP C 6.0 3600 N/A 6.0 0.53 cast-in-place reinforced concrete box (RCB) culverts (except top slab for direct traffic culverts), headwalls, wingwalls, aprons for box culverts, grate inlets, post inlets, junction boxes, low flow channel sections, cast- in-place bridge abutments and interior bents, concrete parapets S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 0.45 cast-in-place top slab for direct traffic culverts, cast- in-place bridge slabs P 5.5 4400 570 5.0 0.45 concrete pavement D. Slump requirements for concrete detailed on Civil Series Drawings shall be in accordance with Table 8 of TxDOT Item 421, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. E. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water/cement ratio is not exceeded. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the concrete being within the permissible ranges of slump. F. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Engineer. 1. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 3. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather. 4. Add air entrainment admixture to concrete mix for work exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals. 5. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit fly ash, pozzolans, silica fume, and slag content as required by applicable code. G. Average Compressive Strength Reduction: Not permitted. H. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 1. When a truck mixer is used for delivery of concrete, no water from the truck water system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of the mixing water, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 except when on arrival at the job site the slump of the concrete is less than that specified. 2. Certification: The manufacturer of the concrete shall furnish to the Contractor with each batch of concrete before unloading at the site, a delivery ticket on which is printed, stamped, or written the following information: a. Name of ready mix batch plant. b. Serial number of ticket. c. Date and truck number. d. Name of Contractor. e. Designation of job. f. Class or designation of concrete. g. Amount of concrete (cubic yards). h. Time loaded. i. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials. j. Type, name and amount of admixture. I. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 318. J. Mortar Mixes for Concrete Finishes: 1. Mortar Mix for F4 Finish: Consist of 1 part cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand passing Number 100 screen, mixed with enough water and emulsified bonding agent to have consistency of thick cream. 2. Mortar Mix for F5 Finish: Consist of 1 part cement to 1-1/2 parts of sand which passes Number 16 screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere or move from position with placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and epoxy as indicated on Drawings. C. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates. D. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed. E. Before beginning work, the contractor shall inform the Engineer fully on the methods of construction, which he proposes to follow, including the amount and character of the equipment which he plans to use on the work. F. Contractor is responsible for the safety and correctness of his method of construction, and for the adequacy of his equipment to carry out and complete the work in accordance with the contract documents. Concurrence on the part of the Engineer in any proposed method of construction, approval of equipment or the approval of concrete form plans shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of his responsibility to provide for the safety of workers and the public. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318. B. Notify testing laboratory and Engineer minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of operations. Engineer shall be permitted to inspect the forms, reinforcing steel placement and the preparations for placing the concrete with ample time for Contractor to correct any and all noted deficiencies before concrete arrives on site. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, and other cast-in items are not disturbed during concrete placement. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 E. When it is necessary to continue mixing, placing and finishing concrete after daylight hours, the work area shall be brilliantly lighted so that all operations are plainly visible. F. In general, concrete placing shall be so regulated that all finishing will be completed during daylight hours. G. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints and seal watertight in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. H. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing steel. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas and seal watertight in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. I. Apply sealants in joints in accordance with Section 07 92 00. J. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final position. Prevent segregation of mix. K. Concrete placed with a tremie pipe shall not be allowed to free fall more than 6 feet, with the exception of concrete piers. L. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints. M. Consolidate concrete immediately after placing by use of internal concrete vibrators supplemented by hand spading, rodding and tamping. 1. Air entrained concrete shall not be vibrated for more than 12 seconds. 2. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete inside forms. 3. The vibrating equipment shall at all times be adequate in number of units and power to properly consolidate all concrete. 4. Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing objectionable segregation. 5. Vibrators shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. 6. Where conditions make consolidation difficult or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing the same proportions of cement, sand, and water used in the concrete shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch. N. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. O. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. P. Do not interrupt successive placement between planned/approved joint locations; do not permit cold joints to occur. 1. A cold joint, as defined by ACI CT, is a joint or discontinuity resulting from a delay in placement of sufficient duration to preclude intermingling and bonding of the material. Q. Contractor shall submit construction joint placement plans for Engineer approval prior to placing concrete. R. Saw cut joints within 8 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness or 3/4 inch minimum, whichever is greater, or as specified on Drawings. S. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3.4 TRANSPORTING REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete mixed in stationary mixers or paving mixers and transported by non-agitating equipment shall be placed in the forms within 45 minutes from the time ingredients are charged into the mixing drum. B. Concrete that is truck mixed or transported in truck mixers or truck agitators shall be delivered to the site of the work and discharge completed in the forms within the time specified in ASTM C94. C. Transit-mixed concrete that is completely mixed at the site of concrete placement or batched cement and aggregates transported to mixers shall be placed in forms within 90 minutes after cement has been added. D. Concrete shall be placed in forms within 15 minutes after discharge from the mixer at the job site. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING – DESCRIPTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 A. Cement for Finishes: 1. Addition of white cement may be required to produce finish which matches color of concrete to be finished. B. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Use following finishes for vertical concrete surfaces as indicated in section “Concrete Finishing – Application”: 1. F1 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work and fill depressions 1 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 2. F2 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work, remove fins, fill depressions 1/2 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 3. F3 Finish: Repair defective work, remove fins, offsets, and curing membrane, and grind projections smooth. Fill depressions 1/4 inch or larger in depth or width and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 4. F4 Finish: a. Same as specified for F3 finish, and in addition fill depressions and holes 1/16 inch or larger in width with mortar. b. “Brush-Off” sandblast surfaces prior to filling holes to expose all holes near surface of the concrete. c. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and depressions while surfaces are still damp. d. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over entire area with clean burlap, sponge rubber floats, or trowels. e. Do not let any material remain on surfaces, except that within pits and depressions. f. Wipe surfaces clean and moist cure. 5. F5 Finish: Receive same finish specified for F3 Finish, and in addition, receive special stoned finish in accordance with the following requirements: a. Remove forms and perform required repairs, patching, and pointing as specified in this Section. b. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush and rub with hard wood float dipped in water containing 2 pounds of Portland cement per gallon. c. Rub surfaces until form marks and projections have been removed. d. Spread grindings from rubbing operations uniformly over surface with brush in such manner as to fill pits and small voids. e. Moist cure brushed surfaces and allow to harden for 3 days: (1) After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with carborundum stone of approximately Number 50 grit until entire surfaces have smooth texture and uniform color. (2) Continue curing for remainder of specified time. f. If any concrete surface is allowed to become too hard to finish in above specified manner, sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed to view, whether finished or not. (1) While still damp, rub over surface, plastic mortar, as specified for brushed surfaces and handstoned with Number 60 grit carborundum stone, using additional mortar for brushed surfaces until surface is evenly filled without excess of mortar. (2) Continue stoning until surface is hard. (3) After moist curing for 3 days, make surface smooth in texture and uniform in color by use of Number 50 or Number 60 carborundum stone. (4) After stoning, continue curing until 7 day curing period is completed. C. Horizontal Concrete: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, use following finishes for horizontal concrete surfaces as indicates in section “Concrete Finishing–Application”: 1. S1 Finish: Screed to grade and leave without special finish. 2. S2 Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish. 3. S3 Finish: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks. Provide smooth finish free of all irregularities. 4. S4 Finish: Steel trowel finish, without local depressions or high points, followed by a February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 light hairbroom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or brushes. Perform brooming parallel to slab drainage. Provide resulting finish that is rough enough to provide nonskid finish. Finish shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Owner and/or Engineer. 5. S5 Finish: Nonslip abrasive: After concrete has been screeded level and hardened enough to support a man standing on a board, sprinkle abrasive from shake screen into surface at a uniform rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square feet of surface area, wood float into finish, then trowel abrasive into surface with steel trowel properly exposing abrasive in surface as required to provide non slip surface. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING - APPLICATION A. Finish concrete surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. Where not specified or indicated on the Drawings, finish surfaces as follows: 1. F4 Finish for Following Vertical Surfaces: a. Concrete surfaces specified or indicated to be painted. b. Concrete surfaces, interior or exterior, exposed to view. 2. Surfaces in Open Channels, Basins, and Similar Structures: a. F3 Finish for vertical surfaces which are normally below water surface. b. F4 Finish for vertical surfaces located above normal water surface and exposed to view. c. Remove fins and fill tie holes from concrete surfaces located in closed boxes or channels where there is normally no access or passageway. 3. S4 Finish for Following Surfaces: a. Exterior walkways. b. Tops of exterior walls or beams which are to serve as walkways. c. Tops of exterior walls or beams which are to support gratings. 4. S3 Finish for Following surfaces: a. Building and machine room floors which are not covered with surfacing material: Provide floors that are free from trowel marks. 5. S2 Finish for Following Surfaces: a. Tops of corbels. b. Tops of walls and beams not covered above in S4 Finish. c. Tops of slabs not covered in S1 Finish below. d. All other surfaces not specified to be finished otherwise. 6. S1 Finish for Following Surfaces: a. Basin bottoms to which layer of grout is to be applied. b. Projecting footings which are to be covered with dirt. c. Slab surfaces which are to be covered with concrete fill. B. Concrete Floor Surfaces to which Surfacing Material is Applied 1. Finish smooth with tolerance within 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction from lines indicated on the Drawings. a. Wood float surfaces receiving quarry tile, ceramic tile or terrazzo with full bed setting system. b. Steel trowel surfaces receiving carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, or thin set ceramic tile. C. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. D. Defects: Concrete with excessive honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcing, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects) which affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished as specified above. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 308.1 and ACI 318. C. Curing shall be continuous for a minimum of 7 days or until 70% of the specified compressive strength has been obtained. D. Contractor shall submit the curing method selected from those published in ACI 308.1 to the Engineer of Record for approval. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Field testing will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory, retained by the Owner at his expense, in accordance with ACI 318. 1. Two copies of all test reports shall be furnished directly to the Owner. C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed testing firm. D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Engineer for review prior to commencement of Work. E. Concrete Inspections: 1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. 2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures. F. Strength Test Samples: 1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172. 2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31, cylinder specimens, standard cured. 3. Sample concrete and make one set of four 6-inch diameter by 12-inch long test cylinders or five 4-inch diameter by 8-inch long test cylinders for every 50 cu yds or less of each class of concrete placed each day, or any fraction thereof. 4. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 5 sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 5 batches are used. 5. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting and field cure. G. Field Testing: 1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143. 2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. 3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064. 4. Measure slump and temperature at commencement of concrete placement, for each compressive strength concrete sample, and for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete. 5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete at commencement of concrete placement, for each compressive strength concrete sample, and for each batch (minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete. H. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Test Method: ASTM C39. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Test one cylinder at 7 days. 4. Test two 6-inch diameter by 12-inch long cylinders or three 4-inch diameter by 8-inch long cylinders at 28 days. 5. Retain one cylinder for testing when requested by Engineer. 6. Dispose of remaining cylinders when testing is not required. I. Core Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Sampling and Testing Procedures: ASTM C42. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Drill three cores for each failed strength test from concrete represented by failed strength test. J. Water Soluble Chloride Ion Concentration Test Method: ASTM C1218; tested at 28 days. 1. Maximum Concentration: As permitted by applicable code. K. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 13 Cast -In- Place Concrete – 03 30 00 3.9 DEFECTS A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Concrete with honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcing, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects) which affects the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. 1. As described in ACI 309R, honeycomb occurs when the mortar does not fill the space between the coarse aggregate particles and when it shows on a surface, it is necessary to chip out the area and make a repair. C. The surface of the concrete shall not vary in alignment more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347. D. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished as specified in the “Concrete Finishing” paragraphs above. E. Patch imperfections as directed by Engineer. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, design strength, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. D. Failure to Meet Strength Requirements: 1. The Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions, or to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens, which failed. 2. If additional curing does not give the strength required, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or removal and replacement of those portions which fail to develop required strength. 3. Specimens will be considered to have failed when average strength for any period of placing is less than values indicated in the following table: 1. No. Days Consecutive Placing of Any One Class of Concrete Percent of Strength Specified 1 85 2 95 3 95 5 or more 100 4. When additional curing of portions of the structure is ordered by the Engineer, it shall be done at Contractor’s expense and no claim for extra compensation for such additional curing shall be allowed. 5. In no case shall the Contractor be required to provide such additional curing beyond a total of 21 days, except where average strength of specimens, representing concrete placed on any three consecutive days, fall below 80% of the value specified in the ”Concrete Mix” section of this specification. In this case, curing shall be continued until cores drilled from portions of the structure involved show an average strength equal to that specified in the “Concrete Mix” section of this specification. Cores shall have a diameter of approximately three times the maximum size aggregate and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C42. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Concrete Finishing – 03 35 00 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Finishing all concrete surfaces in this work. RELATED SECTIONS A. SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK B. SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REFERENCES A. ACI 117, “Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials”. B. ACI 301, “Structural Concrete for Buildings”. C. ACI 302, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction”. D. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete”. E. ACI 347, “Guide to formwork for concrete”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS (UNLESS DRAWINGS OR OTHER SPECIFICATIONS INDICATE OTHERWISE) A. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, 1/2-inch thick. B. Joint Sealants: ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25. Use T for horizontal surfaces (maximum 3 percent slope); ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25. Use NT for vertical surfaces (greater than 3 percent slope). PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. SURFACE TREATMENT A. Refer to Section 03 30 00, “CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE”, paragraph 3.05, “Curing Concrete.” TOLERANCES A. All floors are subject to measurement for flatness and levelness and shall comply with the following: 1. Slabs shall be flat with a tolerance of 5/16” in 10’ when tested with a ten foot long free-standing straight edge. Apply straight edge to slab at 3’-0” intervals in both directions, lapping straight edge 3’-0” on areas previously checked. Low spots shall not exceed the above dimension anywhere along the straight edge. Flatness shall be checked the next work day after finishing. 2. Except where indicated in the drawings, slabs shall be level within a tolerance of ¼” in 10’-0”, not to exceed ¾” total variation, anywhere on the floor, from elevations indicated on the drawings. Levelness shall be checked on a 10’-0” grid using a telescopic or laser level after removal of forms. B. Floor Elevation Tolerance Envelope: In addition to satisfying profile tolerances, the acceptable tolerance envelope for absolute elevation of the top of slab is ±3/4”, with respect to the elevation shown on the drawings. C. For further information, refer to Section 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK. SURFACE FINISHES (EXCEPT FLOORS, SLABS, AND PAVEMENTS): A. Defects: Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than one February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Concrete Finishing – 03 35 00 square inch surface area or 1/4-inch maximum depth, and other defective areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with non-shrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete with extensive honeycombing, exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects that affect the serviceability or structural strength, will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved by the PCCA; obtain approval of corrective action before repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances in ACI 347 and those required by Section 03 10 00, “Concrete Formwork”. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance. B. Surfaces Not Against Forms (Top of Walls): Surfaces not otherwise specified shall be finished with wood floats to even surfaces. C. Formed Surfaces: Unless the drawings show otherwise, provide rough form finish on concrete surfaces not exposed to view and smooth form finish and rubbed finish on concrete surfaces exposed to view. 1. Smooth Form Finish: Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. Remove fins and other projections. D. Rubbed Finish: Provide concrete with a smooth form finish and then finish as follows: 2. Smooth Rubbed: Provide on newly hardened concrete within 24 hours following form removal. Repair defects, immediately. Wet surfaces and rub with an abrasive tool to produce uniform color and texture. Use only the cement paste drawn from the concrete by the rubbing process. E. Slabs, caps, and/or beams to receive additional concrete shall be screeded with straightedges to bring the surface to the required finish plane with no visible course aggregate. Additionally, where specifically noted on the drawings, the surface shall be roughened to a full 1/4 in. amplitude to meet the requirements of ACI 318, Section 17.5. FLOOR AND SLAB FINISHES A. Finish: Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation before bleed water appears. Let concrete attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present before floating the surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorbing with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleed water. Provide a floated finish, then finish with a flexible bristle broom. Surface shall have hardened sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab. PART 4 – MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (NOT USED) END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Concrete Floor Finishes – 03 35 11 SECTION 03 35 11 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Curing compounds that also function as sealers. C. Section 09 96 00.13 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. B. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes. 1.4 MOCK-UP A. For coatings, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during application, with coatings applied. B. Mock-Up Size: 10 feet square. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS A. High Gloss Clear Sealer: 2.2 COATINGS A. High Gloss Clear Sealer: Transparent, non-yellowing, water-based coating. 1. Composition: Acrylic polymer-based. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials suitable for further finishes. 3.2 GENERAL A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 COATING APPLICATION A. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents, laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, and other impediments to adhesion. B. Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within limits established by coating manufacturer. C. Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove excess material. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Concrete Floor Finishes – 03 35 11 D. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, matching approved mock- ups for color, special effects, sealing and workmanship. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Grouts – 03 60 00 SECTION 03 60 00 GROUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete mortar. 2. Grout. 3. Drypack mortar. 4. Nonshrink grout. 5. Epoxy grout. 6. Non-shrink epoxy grout. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C 109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2 inch or 50 millimeter cube specimens). 2. C 531 - Test Method for Liner Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 3. C 579 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings. 4. C 827 - Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. 5. C 939 - Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method). 6. C 1090 - Test Method for Measuring Change in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout. 7. C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 8. C 1181 - Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts. B. Submittals 1. Nonshrink Grout and Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data prior to installation. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages or containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's product identification and printed instructions. B. All materials shall be stored in a cool dry covered place and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. All materials shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to manufacturer's literature or contact the manufacturer for any special physical or environmental limitations that may be required for use of products. Maintain temperature 40 degrees F or above for at least 72 hours following placement. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Non-shrink Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that the non-shrink grout will never go below its initial placement volume when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1107. B. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that non-shrink epoxy grout will show negligible shrinkage or expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Grouts – 03 60 00 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete Mortar: 1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and water quantity adjusted as required. 2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: White cement. B. Grout: Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand. C. Dry-pack Mortar: Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand. D. Non-shrink Grout: 1. Non-shrink grout shall be a preportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture. It shall contain no metallic particles such as aluminum powder and no metallic aggregate such as iron filings. It shall require only the addition of potable water. 2. Potable water for pre-soaking, mixing, and curing shall be clean and free of oils, acids, alkalies, organics, and any other deleterious matter. 3. Bleeding: Non-shrink grout shall be free from the emergence of mixing water from within or the presence of water on its surface. 4. Non-shrink grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1107. 5. Consistency: Non-shrink grout shall remain at a minimum flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes after mixing at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit when tested in accordance with ASTM C 230. If at a fluid consistency, it shall be verified in accordance with ASTM C 939. 6. Dimensional Stability (height change): Non-shrink grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1107, volume-adjusting Grade B or C at 45 degrees to 90 degrees. It shall show 90 percent or greater bearing area under bases or baseplates. 7. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink grout shall show minimum compressive strengths at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM C 1107 for various periods from the time of placement, including 5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 109 as modified by C 1107. 8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Grout. b. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Masterflow 928. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, CRYSTEX. d. Euco “NS” Grouts – Euclid Chemical Company E. Epoxy Grout: 1. Consist of mixture of epoxy and sand. 2. Sand: Clean, bagged, graded, and kiln dried silica sand. F. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: 1. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be 100 percent solids, premeasured, prepackaged system containing a two-component thermosetting epoxy resin and inert aggregate. 2. Consistency: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall maintain a flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes at 70 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Dimensional Stability (height change): 4. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion (less than 0.0006 in/in) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531. 5. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall show a minimum compressive strength of 10,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours and 14,000 pounds per square inch at 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B. 6. Compressive Creep: The compressive creep for non-shrink epoxy grout shall not exceed 0.0027 in/in when tested under a 400 pounds per square inch constant load at 140 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM C 1181. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Grouts – 03 60 00 7. Thermal Capability: The coefficient of thermal expansion for non-shrink epoxy grout shall not exceed 0.000018 inches per inch per degree Fahrenheit when tested under ASTM C 531, Method B. 8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Epoxy Grout. b. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Masterflow 648 CP Plus. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., EPOGROUT. d. Euclid Products e. MIXES G. Concrete Mortar Mix: 1. Use water-cement ratio that is no more than that specified for concrete being repaired. 2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of surrounding concrete. H. Grout Mix: 1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being repaired, with only sufficient water to give required consistency for spreading. 2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no more water used than allowed by water-cement ratio specified for concrete. 3. For Other Applications: Mix in proportions by weight of one part cement to four parts of concrete sand. I. Dry-pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble to touch after being formed into ball by hand. J. Non-shrink Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions such that resulting mix has fluid or flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by pouring. K. Epoxy Grout: 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for mixing. 2. Proportioning: a. For horizontal work, consist of mixture of one part epoxy with not more than 2 parts sand. b. For vertical or overhead work, consist of 1 part epoxy gel with not more than 2 parts sand. L. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations and all loose material or foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of grout or mortar. B. Inspect baseplate and anchor systems for rust, oil, and other deleterious substances that may affect the bond or performance of grout. C. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured sufficiently to attain its design strength and limit further shrinkage. D. Verify that temperature of cementitious or epoxy grout does not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Roughen all concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, chipping, or other mechanical means to assure bond. Loose or broken concrete shall be removed. 2. All grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious materials that may affect bond that were identified in the inspection process shall be completely removed from concrete and bottoms of baseplates. All metal surfaces should have a 2 to 3 mil peak-to-valley profile for epoxy grouts. 3. For cementitious mortars and grouts, concrete surfaces shall be saturated surface February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Grouts – 03 60 00 dry. Any standing water shall be removed prior to placing grouts. 4. For epoxy grouts, do not wet concrete surfaces with water. Instead, where required, wet surfaces with epoxy for horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical or overhead work prior to placing epoxy grouts. B. Forms and Headboxes for Grouts (Cementitious or Epoxy): 1. Forms for grouts shall be built of material with adequate strength to withstand the placement of grouts. 2. Forms must be rigid and liquid tight. All cracks and joints shall be caulked with an elastomeric sealant. All forms shall be lined with polyethylene for easy grout release. Forms carefully waxed with two coats of heavy-duty paste wax shall also be acceptable. 3. Forms shall be 4 to 6 inches higher than the baseplate on one side of the baseplate configuration when using head pressure for placement. 4. A sufficient number of headboxes shall be built to facilitate placement of grouts. 5. Air relief holes a minimum 1/8 inch in diameter shall be provided when required by a baseplate configuration to avoid entrapping air underneath. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Cement Mortar and Grout: 1. For Defective Concrete Repair: a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete. b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and similar type items. 2. Concrete Surfaces: a. Apply epoxy bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surfaces before placing mortar or grout. 3. Placing: a. Exercise particular care in placing Portland cement mortar or grout since they are required to furnish structural strength or impermeable water seal or both. b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that has not been placed within 30 minutes after mixing. B. Epoxy Grout: 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 PLACEMENT A. It will be to the CONTRACTOR’S discretion to have a grout manufacturer's representative present for a preconstruction meeting and during initial grout placement. Grout shall only be installed after the final equipment alignment is correct and accepted by the ENGINEER. 1. Grouts shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. A mortar mixer with moving paddles shall be used for mixing grouts. For cementitious grouts, pre-wet the mixer and empty out excess water before beginning mixing. 3. Cementitious Grouts: a. Non-shrink cementitious grout shall be added to a premeasured amount of water that does not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. b. Mix cementitious grouts per manufacturer's instructions for uniform consistency. c. Grouts may be drypacked, flowed, or pumped into place. All baseplate grouting shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other to avoid trapping air. Do not overwork grouts. d. Do not retemper grout by adding more water after stiffening. e. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of the grout in the headbox above the bottom of the baseplate. The headbox should be filled to the maximum level and the grout worked down to top of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Grouts – 03 60 00 baseplate. 4. Epoxy Grouts: a. Epoxy grouts shall be mixed in complete units. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the mix. b. Pour the hardener into the resin and mix for at least one minute and until each mixture is uniform in color. Pour the chemical components into the mortar mixer wheelbarrow and add the aggregate. Mix until aggregate is uniformly wetted. Overmixing will cause air entrapment in the mix. c. All epoxy grout shall be flowed into place using a headbox. All grouting shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other in a continuous flow to avoid trapping air. d. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of grout in headboxes above the bottom of baseplates. Headboxes shall be filled to the maximum level and grout worked down to the bottom of baseplates. e. Epoxy grouts shall not be cut back after setting. The final level of grout will be as installed with all chamfer edges built into the formwork. 3.5 CURING A. Cementitious Grouts: 1. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching initial set. Provide a 45 degree angle cut back. 2. Clean equipment and tools as recommended by the grout manufacturer. 3. Cure Grouts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Keep grout moist for a minimum of 3 days. The method needed to protect grouts will depend on temperature, humidity, and wind. Wet burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding and, in extreme conditions, a combination of methods shall be employed. 4. Grouts shall be maintained above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until they have attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch or above 70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from subsequent freezing. B. Epoxy Grouts: 1. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and recommendations. Do not wet cure epoxy grouts. 2. Consult the manufacturer for appropriate cure schedule. In no case should any surface in contact with grout be allowed to fall below 50 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement. 3. Equipment and tools shall be cleaned immediately with a strong liquid detergent and water solution before grout hardens. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109. B. Non-shrink grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 579 (Method B). PART 4 – MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Division 04 Masonry February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Maintenance of Masonry – 04 01 00 SECTION 04 01 00 MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water cleaning of Brick surfaces. B. Replacement of Damaged units. C. Repointing mortar joints. D. Repair of damaged masonry. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Brick masonry units. C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Mortar and grout. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Document Management, for submittal procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. Restore and repoint an existing masonry wall area sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include in mock-up area instances of mortar, accessories, wall openings, and flashings. B. Locate where directed. C. Acceptable panel and procedures employed will become the standard for work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry neatly stacked and tied on pallets. Store clear of ground with adequate waterproof covering. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. B. Do not blast clean or use process creating dust and dirt when wind is over 10 mph. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agent: Detergent type. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 04 05 11. 2.3 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Brick: Section 04 20 00. B. Block: Section 04 20 00. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Maintenance of Masonry – 04 01 00 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to be cleaned are ready for work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding elements from damage due to restoration procedures. B. Carefully remove and store removable items located in areas to be restored, including fixtures, fittings, finish hardware, and accessories; reinstall upon completion. C. Separate areas to be protected from restoration areas using means adequate to prevent damage. D. Mask immediately adjacent surfaces with material that will withstand cleaning and restoration procedures. 3.3 REPOINTING A. Perform repointing prior to cleaning masonry surfaces. B. Cut out loose or disintegrated mortar in joints to minimum 1/2 inch depth or until sound mortar is reached. 3.4 CLEANING NEW MASONRY A. Verify mortar is fully set and cured. B. Clean surfaces and remove large particles with wood scrapers, brass or nylon wire brushes. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately remove stains, efflorescence, or other excess resulting from the work of this section. B. Remove excess mortar, smears, and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion. C. Clean surrounding surfaces. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting – 04 05 11 SECTION 04 05 11 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. B. Grout for masonry. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 01 00 - Maintenance of Masonry: Bedding and pointing mortar for masonry restoration work. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout. C. Section 04 72 00 - Cast Stone Masonry: Installation of mortar. D. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Products and execution for grouting steel door frames installed in masonry. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011. C. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. D. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). E. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a. F. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. G. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. H. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2012. I. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. J. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2013. K. ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength; 2013. L. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2012. M. ASTM E518/E518M - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry; 2010. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. B. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C 270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C 780. C. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting – 04 05 11 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 1. Type: Type I - Normal. 2. Color: to be selected by Architect. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. E. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. 1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. H. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. I. Calcium Chloride is not permitted. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Property Specification 1. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type M. 3. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type: N 4. Pointing Mortar: Type N with maximum 2% ammonium stearite or calcium stearite per cement weight. 2.3 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio; mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, uniform in coloration. D. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. E. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. F. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. 2.4 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; mix in accordance with ASTM C476. 1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 2. Coarse grout for spaces with smalles horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 2.5 GROUT MIXING A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting – 04 05 11 2.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780 recommendations for preconstruction testing. 1. Test results will be used to establish optimum mortar proportions and establish quality control values for construction testing. B. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures. 1. Test results will be used to establish optimum grout proportions and establish quality control values for construction testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet grout pressure. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding. D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 3.3 GROUTING A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of contract documents. B. Low-Lift Grouting: 1. Limit height of pours to 16 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 24 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours. C. High-Lift Grouting: 1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours. 2. Hollow Masonry: Limit lifts to maximum 4 feet and pours to maximum height of 8 feet. 3. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780 procedures. 1. Test with same frequency as specified for masonry units. C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures. 1. Test with same frequency as specified for masonry units. D. Prism Tests: Test masonry and mortar panels for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C1314, and for flexural bond strength in accordance with ASTM C1072 or ASTM E518/E518M; perform tests and evaluate results as specified in individual masonry sections. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 5 Unit Masonry – 04 20 00 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Masonry Units. B. Facing Brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. E. Flashings. F. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. D. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. E. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2014. F. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011. G. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). H. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2014. I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. B. Samples: Submit two samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 MOCK-UP A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar, accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up. B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 5 Unit Masonry – 04 20 00 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners and other detailed conditions. 3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated. 4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Lightweight. 2.2 BRICK UNITS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample. 2. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 11. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Blok-Lok Limited; www.blok-lok.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); www.h-b.com. 3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 Change Management. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi), deformed billet bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; fabricated with moisture drip; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. E. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1-1/4 in width, 0.105 in thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. F. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face. G. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 in. 2.5 FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashing Materials: Copper, as specified in Section 07 60 00. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 5 Unit Masonry – 04 20 00 B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding. 3/8 inch wide x by maximum lengths available. C. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid mesh designed for installation at flashing locations. D. Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant. E. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.3 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.4 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.5 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. I. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. 3.6 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 4 of 5 Unit Masonry – 04 20 00 through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. 3.7 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories. C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.8 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.9 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 6 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 8 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing. C. Lap end joints of flashings at least 6 inches and seal watertight with flashing sealant/adhesive. 3.10 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 8 inches either side of opening. 3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Size control joints in accordance with Section 07 92 00. D. Form expansion joint as detailed on drawings. 3.12 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.13 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 5 of 5 Unit Masonry – 04 20 00 B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.14 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and wall recessed items. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.15 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Cast Stone Masonry – 04 72 00 SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural cast stone. B. Units required are: 1. Exterior wall units, including sills. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Mortar for setting cast stone. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry. C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints indicated to be left open for sealant. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS D. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013. F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. G. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. H. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2014. I. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. J. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013. K. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. L. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a. M. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013. N. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2010b. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers. B. Mortar Color Selection Samples. C. Full-Size Samples, For Review: 1. Basic Shapes: One of each. 2. Accent, Trim and Specialty Shapes: One of each. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and discoloration. Protect corners from damage. B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule. C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt. E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Cast Stone Masonry – 04 72 00 cracking, or other damage. F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided. G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural sandstone, complying with ASTM C1364. 1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece. 2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience. 3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet. 4. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings. 1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide: a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces. b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in. C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with ACI 318. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 1. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. D. Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M. E. Water: Potable. F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized. 1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I. G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, galvanized or ASTM A884/A884M, epoxy coated. H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: ASTM A123/A123M hot-dip galvanized steel, of type and size as required for conditions. I. Shelf Angles and Similar Structural Items: Hot-dip galvanized steel per ASTM A123/A123M, of shapes and sizes as required for conditions. J. Mortar: Portland cement-lime, as specified in Section 04 05 11; do not use masonry cement. K. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Cast Stone Masonry – 04 72 00 of Section 04 20 00. B. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar. C. Setting: 1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fill vertical joints with mortar. 4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout. D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed. 1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing. 2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints. 3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile. 4. Leave the following joints open for sealant: a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. b. Joints in projecting units. c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. f. Joints labeled "expansion joint". E. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more. 2. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units. F. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 10 feet. 1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect 's approval. 3.2 CLEANING A. Keep cast stone components clean as work progresses. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work from damage. B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar-splashed work to condition of new work. END OF SECTION Division 05 Metals February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Structural Steel – 05 10 00 SECTION 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern the furnishing, hauling, fabricating, and erection of all structural steel incorporated in the work. 1.2 CERTIFICATES A. Contractor shall submit manufacturers' certificates for all structural steel, including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties and for high- strength bolts. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings, prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer, which show complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. B. Drawings shall include, as a minimum, details of cuts, welds, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated, meet requirements of ASTM A-36 and A-992 Structural Steel, latest edition. B. High-Strength Structural Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A-572 High-Strength Structural Steel, Grade 50 with special requirements per AISC Technical Bulletin #3 unless other grade is shown on the drawings. C. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of ASTM A-325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, latest edition, including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers. D. High Strength Bolt Direct Tension Indicators: Meet requirements of ASTM F959, latest edition. E. Pipe: Meet requirements of ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Grade B, ASTM A-500, Grade B, or ASTM A-501 excluding furnace butt welding, latest edition. Black finish except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Tube: Meet requirements of ASTM A-500, Grade B, latest edition. G. Headed Anchor Studs (HD.A.S.): Meet requirements of AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code, latest edition, Type B. H. Deformed Anchor Studs (D.A.S.): Made from ASTM A-108 low carbon steel cold worked and deformed per ASTM A-496. Minimum yield stress = 60 ksi; minimum tensile strength = 80 ksi. Minimum bend diameters per ASTM A-496. I. Rebar: Rebar used for welding shall meet the requirements of ASTM A706. Rebar bends shall meet the minimum bend diameters listed in ACI 318, latest edition. J. Drilled-In Inserts: Size and type as noted on the drawings. K. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1, 70 Series. L. Shop Paint: Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC 13. 2.2 GALVANIZING REQUIREMENTS REFER TO SECTION 09 80 01, GALVANIZING. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION A. All structural steel shall be prefabricated in the shop in assemblies which will require February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Structural Steel – 05 10 00 minimum cutting, fitting and welding in the field. B. All connections, both shop and field, shall be welded unless otherwise shown on the plans. C. Dimensions, which may affect the fitting of the sections, shall be checked by the Contractor in the field before fabrication in the shop. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting the sections in the field to the lines and grades shown on the plans. E. The furnishing, fabricating, welding, delivery and erection of all structural steel shall be in accordance with the provisions of the A.I.S.C. “Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”, and the A.I.S.C. “Code of Standard Practice”, except where modified by this specification. PART 4 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Miscellaneous Metals – 05 10 01 SECTION 05 10 01 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment to accomplish all miscellaneous metal work; including, but not limited to lintels, support angles and frames, their anchorage and other items of ferrous metals indicated or required for completion of the project. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build- ings"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with applicable provisions unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA A. Show complete details and instructions for fabrication, assembly, and installation. Fur- nish anchor bolts required for installation in other work; furnish templates for bolt installation. Submit two copies for approval. 1.4 INSERTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be built into other work for installation of miscellaneous metal items; coordinate delivery to job site to avoid delay. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC MATERIALS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING: A. Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. D. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366. E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, Grade G90 zinc coating. (minimum 2 oz. per square foot of surface area F. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron (ASTM A 47) or cast steel (ASTM A 27) inserts, with steel bolts, washers and shims; hot dip galvanized. G. Shop Paint: FS TT-P-86, Type II, or, SSPC-Paint 14. Apply to cleaned and degreased steel surfaces at rate to provide a 2.0-mil dry film thickness. H. Galvanizing: ASTM A 386 for a assembled products; A 153 for iron and steel hardware. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Shop paint all items not specified to be galvanized after fabrication. B. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. C. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where possible. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Miscellaneous Metals – 05 10 01 3.2 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish Custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for framing and supporting and anchoring wood- work. Galvanize, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 LOOSE BEARING PLATES A. Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as shown. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. Galvanize after fabrication. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide as required to complete work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown; continuous welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other work. B. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with bedding mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to three parts sand and only enough water for packing and hydration, or use commercial non-shrink grout material. C. Touch up shop paint after installation. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces. PART 4 MEASURMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural shapes. 2. Channels and angles. 3. Hollow structural sections. 4. Structural pipe. 5. Structural plates and bars. 6. Floor plates. 7. Bolts, connectors, and anchors. 8. Grout. B. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment necessary for completion of the following work: 1. Structural steel framing and support members, tension rods or cables, pipe columns, struts and braces complete with required braces, connection plates, welds, washers, bolts, nuts, shims, anchor bolts and templates. 2. Base plates, cap plates, and shear stud connectors. 3. Erecting, connecting, field welding and adjusting for plumb and level. 4. All other work normally related to the above, as shown on Contract Drawings, or specified under this section. C. Work Furnished but not Installed: 1. Anchor bolts, anchor bolt templates, loose bearing plates and embedded items installed under Division 3 and/or Division 4 sections. D. Definitions: 1. Structural Steel: That work defined in Section 2.1 of the AISC “Code of Standard Practice”, as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. E. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing. 2. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in floor deck. 3. Section 05 50 00.02 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 19 - Standard Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 6. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 7. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 9. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. 10. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 11. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 12. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 13. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding. 14. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. 15. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 16. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel. 17. ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100-mm) Thick. 18. ASTM A618/A618M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. 19. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High- Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. 20. ASTM A847/A847M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. 21. ASTM A852/A852M - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi (485 MPa) Minimum Yield Strength to 4 in. (100 mm) Thick. 22. ASTM A913/A913M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST). 23. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 24. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 25. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. 26. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 27. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination. 28. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. 29. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 30. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 31. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 32. ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 33. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners. D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. E. Green Seal: 1. GC-03-2nd Edition, January 7, 1997 - Anti-Corrosive Paints. F. Research Council on Structural Connections: 1. RCSC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. G. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 4. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination: Requirements for coordination. B. Coordinate work with the following: 1. Section 05 21 00 as required for framed openings other than structural steel. 2. Section 05 50 00.02 for miscellaneous steel supports other than structural steel. 3. Section 07 84 00 for finishes on structural steel receiving fireproofing. C. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and attend a meeting prior to beginning steel erection at the site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and size and type of bolts. 2. Connections. Connections not detailed. 3. Cambers, loads, and clearances. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. State AWS pre-qualified weld designations for all types of groove welds used. Clearly indicate net weld lengths, sizes and welding sequences. C. Erection Drawings: 1. Submit erection drawings defining location of each assembly or piece within the structure a. Provide sufficient details to describe all field welding. b. Clearly identify all high strength bolts not required to be tensioned (a snug tight as defined by AISC). c. If drawings are submitted in multiple packages, each submittal shall be complete with all erection drawings, details, and piece drawings. d. Subsequent submittals of erection drawings which modify or add to earlier versions will be clearly marked. 2. Submit setting drawings for bolts and plates installed by others. a. Submit this information to the concrete contractor also so it may be utilized for installation of such items. D. Reproduction of the Contract Documents is not permitted. E. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, and destructive and non-destructive test analysis. G. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. H. Welding Procedure: Submit one copy welding procedure to Engineer of record and one copy to the testing agency for review. Welding procedures shall minimize distortions due to welding and through thickness stresses due to restraint of welding shrinkage. 1. Submit welding procedure specifications per AWS D1.1 for all groove welds. I. Contractor Requested Changes: 1. All contractor requests for substitutions of member sizes or material grades or modification of the strength or configuration of the structural framing for the Contractor’s convenience, erection sequence, or construction equipment, shall be subject to the Owner’s written approval. Additional costs for such changes shall be borne by the Contractor. 2. Contractor shall compensate the structural engineer of record to make these changes or review the design calculations of others and modify the construction documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Structural Steel: AISC 303 ASIC 341 and AISC 360. 2. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: AISC 303, Section 10. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 3. High Strength Bolted Connections: RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 4. Steel Cable Structures: ASCE 19. B. Unidentified Members: Structural steel members shown on plans but not identified as to size, section and/or material grade will be included in the bid price for the work by assuming sizes, sections and/or material grades, shown for similarly loaded members having approximately the same overall length. 1. All such members and their associated cost will be identified in the bid for the work. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing W ork of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience for projects of similar size. C. Shop Painter: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural W -Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Structural M-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Structural S-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. D. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W -shapes. E. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. F. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. G. Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. H. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. ASTM A-500, Grade B, or ASTM A-501 excluding furnace butt welding. I. Structural Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. Unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. J. Floor Plates: ASTM A786/A786M; pattern as indicated on Contract Drawings. K. Sliding Bearing Plates: Teflon coated. L. Suspension Cable: wire rope as indicated on Contract Drawings. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Bolts: Heavy hex, structural type. 1. ASTM A325; Type 1, plain unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings, or Type 3, plain. 2. ASTM A490; Type 1 or 3, plain. B. Nuts: ASTM A563; heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Plain, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, circular. 1. Finish: Plain, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. D. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959; Type 325 unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. 1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. E. Tension Control Assemblies: ASTM F1852; Type 1, heavy hex head, twist off type; complete with washers and heavy hex nuts. 1. Finish: Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. F. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108; 60 ksi ultimate stress; headed, unfinished and in accordance with AWS D1.1; Type B. G. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554; Grade 55, weldable, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. 1. Shape: Hooked, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M. H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 1. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. I. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type with current ICC-ES approved and published ICC-ES Evaluation Report. Complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Size and manufacturer as indicated on Contract Drawings. 1. Interior Use: Conditioned environments free from potential moisture; provide carbon steel anchors a. Finish: Zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1). 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: Exposed or potentially wet environments and attachment of exterior cladding materials; provide galvanized carbon steel conforming to ASTM A153 or stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel nuts shall conform to ASTM F594. a. Type: Galvanized, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Nuts and washers shall match alloy group of anchor and shall have minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. c. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Owner, provide one of the following: a. Kwik Bolt 3, ICC ESR-1385 and ESR-2302 – Hilti Fastening Systems b. Trubolt, ICC ESR 2251 – ITW Red Head c. Wedge-All, ICC ESR-1396 – Simpson Strong-Tie J. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded carbon steel rod conforming to ASTM A36 complete with required nuts, washers, adhesive system and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Current ICC-ES approval and published ICC-ES Evaluation Report required. Size and manufacturer as indicated on Contract Drawings. 1. Interior Use: Conditioned environments free from potential moisture; provide carbon steel anchors a. Finish: Zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1). 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: Exposed or potentially wet environments and attachment of exterior cladding materials; provide galvanized carbon steel conforming to ASTM A153 or stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel nuts shall conform to ASTM F594. a. Type: Galvanized, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Nuts and washers shall match alloy group of anchor and shall have minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. c. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Owner, provide one of the following: a. HIT-RE 500 SD, ICC ESR-2322 – Hilti Fastening Systems b. SET22, ICC ESR-1772 – Simpson Strong-Tie K. Drilled-In Inserts: Size and type as noted on the Contract Drawings. L. Forged Structural Steel Hardware: 1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085. 2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM A108; Grade 1030. 3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018. 4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon steel. 2.3 WELDING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 1. Rebar used for welding shall meet the requirements of ASTM A706. Rebar bends shall meet the minimum bend diameters listed in ACI 318. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent practicable, in accordance with reference standards cited herein and final shop drawings. 2. Use detailing and fabrication procedures that account for distortion and shrinkage due to welding processes, both in the shop and in the field. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 3. Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation. Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. B. Connections: 1. Provide connections as shown or noted on the Contract Drawings. The design of connections not shown or noted shall be provided by the Owner upon request. Standard framing connections not shown shall be bid on the basis of connection tables on pages 4-9 thru 4-31 of the AISC A Manual of Steel Construction, ASD. 2. Alternate connections designed by the Contractors Engineer may be submitted with one set of stamped calculations for record. 3. Alternate connection concepts shall be pre-approved during bidding. 4. All connections shall be designed for 110% of the value noted on plans. 5. Welds not specified shall be 3/16” fillet continuous but not less than the AISC minimum based on the thickness of the parts joined. C. Space shear stud connectors at as indicated on Contract Drawings. 1. Automatically end weld according to AWS D1.1, unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings. 2. Shop weld where possible. 3. Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached. Remove mill scale by grinding or sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to interfere with proper welding. D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. E. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. F. Develop required camber for members. G. Mark all members in protected, plainly visible locations in accordance with reference numbers on setting diagrams. 1. The member work point at each end of columns shall be determined and marked in the shop with a center punch or other acceptable means. 2. Marking shall be placed on the flanges and web at each end of columns. 3. Work point shall be as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 7.11.2(a). H. Perform all necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of other trades. 1. Secure correct information for required openings both before and after steel is delivered. 2. No cutting or drilling will be permitted on the job without the acceptance of the Owner. I. Splicing of members to obtain the required lengths will not be permitted without prior acceptance of the Owner, unless shown on the Contract Drawings. J. Camber beams and girders where indicated on the Contract Drawings. K. Where exact sizes and weights called for are not readily available, secure the Owner's acceptance of suitable sizes in time to prevent delay due to such substitutions. 2.5 FINISHES A. Prepare structural component surfaces to be covered in the completed structure in accordance with SSPC SP 3. B. Prepare structural component surfaces exposed to weather in the completed structure in accordance with SSPC SP 6. C. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted friction type (slip critical) connections. D. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication where shown on Contract Drawings. E. Galvanizing for Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors: Where shown on Contract Drawings 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: a. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F2329. b. Connectors and Anchors: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 B. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide, minimum 2 coats at 2 oz per square foot. C. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type I Inorganic or Type II Organic. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Testing Agency: 1. Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. a. Retention by the Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance with the contract documents. C. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests. D. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. E. Furnish the testing agency with the following: 1. Access on site to a complete set of field use shop and erection drawings with Engineer’s stamp. 2. Mill test reports. 3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops. 4. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material. 5. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field. 6. Representative sample pieces requested for testing. 7. Welding procedure specification. F. Assign an identifying symbol or mark to each person installing connections. Identify all shop and field connections with this mark so that the inspector can refer back to the person making the connection. G. Shop welds, including stud and rebar welds to embed plates and assemblies shall be tested before arriving at the job site. H. Contractor shall notify testing agency at least 10 working days in advance of any qualification testing for welding required herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation. Report all deviations to the General Contractor. B. Verify anchor rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct exposure for steel attachment. Report all deviations to the General Contractor. C. Do not proceed with erection until all unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor rods and embedments in concrete and masonry work. 1. Templates shall be permanently marked with column center lines and north arrow. B. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete and masonry work to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast- in-place concrete and masonry work operations. C. Storage of Structural Steel: 1. Support structural steel members which are stored at the project site above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports, upright to prevent twisting. 2. Protect steel from corrosion. 3. Store other materials in weather-tight and dry place, until ready for use. 4. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. 5. Where materials are to be stored on structure, store in a manner that will not cause February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 distortion or damage the supporting structure. 6. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 3.3 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications, including supplements, with additional requirements of this section. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. 1. Consider all structural steel as non-self-supporting steel frames until permanently secured. 2. Permanently secured is when the structure has its complete gravity and lateral load resisting systems in place including floor and roof diaphragms, vertical bracing and/or shear walls and foundations. 3. Contractor shall coordinate installation of all non-structural steel items which will load the non-self-supporting structural steel frame. The structural steel frame temporary supports shall resist all loads from these non-structural steel items. C. Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. D. Set base and bearing plates level and at correct elevations on roughened surfaces cleaned of all bond reducing materials. Temporarily support on steel wedges or shims until supported members are plumbed and grouting is completed. E. Field weld components and shear connectors indicated on Contract Drawings and shop drawings. 1. Clean existing surfaces before welding to existing steel. F. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; torque all high strength bolts used in column splices, connections of beams and girders to columns, and where noted on the Contract Drawings to the minimum tension shown in Table J3.7 of AISC “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ASD”, June 1, 1989; tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections. 1. All A325 and A490 bolts specified as slip critical or fully pre-tensioned shall be tightened and inspected using Direct Tension Indicating washers. 2. No drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair holes will be allowed. Make minor corrections by reaming. 3. Serious defects may not be corrected in the field but shall be called to the attention of the Owner for a decision as to the method and/or procedure for correction. G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Engineer. H. Splice only where indicated on Contract Drawings. I. Fasten splices in compression after bearing surfaces have been brought into contact. Clean bearing surfaces before assembly. Close all gaps 1/32” wide or greater by driving non- tapered mild steel shims full depth of the bearing surface along the full length of the gap. J. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes. K. Drilled-In Inserts: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth. Where adhesive inserts are used, clean hole in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Do not drill holes in concrete until material has achieved full design strength. 3.4 GROUT INSTALLATION A. Grout under base plates as indicated on Contract Drawings, in accordance with Section 03 60 00. B. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation, snug tighten anchor bolts. C. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air pockets. D. Moist cure grout. E. Remove forms after grout is set. Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed 45 degrees. F. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days, or as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Comply with Requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 Bridges, except as follows: 1. Columns: a. Maximum deviation of column from established column line shall not exceed 1”, accumulative from all sources. b. Bases of all columns shall be located on established centerlines (plan dimension) within +/- 1/8”. Bases shall be at specified elevation +/- 1/16”. c. Maximum variation between top elevation of all columns shall not exceed 1/4". Maximum variation between top elevations of any two adjacent columns shall not exceed 1/8”. 2. Members connecting to Columns: a. Horizontal deviation of member working point from position with respect to supporting column working line shall not exceed +/- 1/16” from the location shown on Contract Drawings. b. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice line of supporting column shall not exceed + 1/8” or – 1/4" from the elevation shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Cambered Steel Beams: Fabrication camber shall be adjusted to compensate for conditions of shipping, handling and erection. Maximum deviation of vertical camber at mid span of beam after erection, prior to placing deck, +3/8” or -0” maximum. 4. Other Members: Deviation of member working point horizontal location and elevation with respect to the supporting member shall not exceed +/- 1/16” from the location and elevation shown on the Contract Drawings. 5. Leveling and Plumbing: Base leveling and plumbing on a mean temperature of 70 degrees F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing. B. Verification of Erection Tolerances: 1. Surveys, made by a surveyor with experience on similar projects, employed by the General Contractor and acceptable to the Owner shall be made as follows: a. Determine actual plan location and elevation at the top and bottom of each column immediately upon completion of erection. 2. Survey reports shall be submitted to the Owner within 24 hours after recording the data. Such reports shall, in addition, identify all deviations of member location and/or elevation in excess of allowable tolerances specified. C. Shop inspection by the Testing Agency for all columns and 20% of beams and girders shall include examination of steel for straightness and alignment, conformance to length and camber tolerances, fissures, mill scale and other defects and deformities, as described in ASTM A6 and examination of aforementioned fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop drawings. D. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC 303 and “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts”. 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections. Verify the specified surface preparation of the faying surface has been correctly prepared. If twist off (self-indicating) bolts are used, verify that all torque-off splines have been sheared off. 2. Inspect the bolt tightness of 10% of the bolts (minimum of 2), selected at random, in each high strength bolted connection. a. If rejectable bolts are found in any connection, all remaining bolts in that connection shall be inspected for tightness. 3. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959. Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2. 4. When splines of twist off bolts are not sheared, or indicator washers are not properly deformed, the Testing Agency shall determine that proper bolt tension has been achieved by the application of a properly calibrated testing torque or the Contractor may, at his option, remove and replace all bolts with unsheared splines and all bolts without properly deformed indicator washers. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Drilled-In Inserts 1. Self-Expanding Inserts: The testing Agency shall inspect self-expanding, drilled-in February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 inserts shown on the structural Contract Drawings as follows: a. Prior to installation, the Testing Agency shall determine that the installing contractor has the proper materials and equipment for drilling holes in the receiving surface of required diameter and length. b. All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that they have been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to the proper depth. 2. Adhesive-Bonded Inserts: The Testing Agency shall inspect adhesive-bonded, drilled in inserts as follows: a. The Testing Agency shall be present at the site to observe the installation of the first 10 inserts placed. Such observation shall be to ensure that drilled holes are of required diameter and depth, holes are properly cleaned prior to installation of the insert, and that holes are completely filled with properly mixed adhesive after installation. b. All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that the insert has been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. F. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Inspection of welding by the Testing Agency will be such as to assure that the work conforms to specified requirements, and will include: a. Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to the requirements herein. b. Ascertain that the welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who are properly certified. c. Ascertainment that the fit-up, joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and the Contract Drawings, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without approval of the Owner. 3. Visually inspect all welds. 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full and/or partial penetration groove welds. 5. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 6. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on 10% of all other welds. 7. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94; performed on may be substituted for ultrasonic inspection with prior approval. 8. All embedded plates and assemblies manufactured by the steel fabricator and supporting structural elements shall be tested. 9. Test components of those embedded plates and assemblies as follows: a. Welded reinforcing bars and deformed anchors: 100% visual and 10% magnetic particle. 100% ultrasonic for all complete penetration groove welds to reinforcing bars. b. Stud connectors shall have all studs visually and acoustically tested in accordance with AWS D1.1. c. Plates: Embedded plates thicker than 3/8” shall be ultrasonically tested along the center line of the plate width. Such tests shall be made after stud/rebar shop welding. (1) Any discontinuity shall be cause for rejection. 10. If defective welds are discovered, the remaining uninspected welds shall receive such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be required by the Owner. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. 11. The welding inspector will have the authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion the weldment would not pass a more detailed investigation. 12. Reports by the Testing Agency’s inspector will contain, as a minimum, an adequate description of each weld tested, the identifying mark of the welder responsible for the weld, critique of any defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and a statement regarding the acceptability of the weld tested, as judged by current AWS standards. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 11 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 Reports shall be distributed as early as possible, but not later than one work week after the tests have been performed. The Owner shall be notified by phone if, in the judgment of the inspector, test results require immediate comment. G. Correct defective bolted connections and welds. 1. The cost of re-inspection of previously defective bolted and/or welded connections shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Steel Joist Framing- 05 21 00 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats, and anchors. B. Framed roof openings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Requirements for submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, locations of joists, joist leg extensions. 2. Joist coding, bridging, connections, and attachments. 3. Cambers. C. Welders’ Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificates that welders employed on the Work have met AWS verification within the previous 12 months. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables, including headers and other supplementary framing. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.5 FIELD MEASURMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings and shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists Members: SJI Type K, LH, KCS. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153. C. Primer: Manufacturer’s standard, minimum 2 coats. D. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated. B. Fabricate to achieve end bearing of: 1. 2-1/2 inches of steel. 2.3 FINISH A. Shop prime joists. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded or in contact with concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Steel Joist Framing- 05 21 00 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect and bear joists on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. C. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seat to bearing beams. D. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments. E. Frame roof openings as indicated. F. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured. G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist fabricator. H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed to be in contact with concrete. 3.3 ERECTON TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00, when tests are requested by Architect. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Steel Decking – 05 31 00 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel deck for floors and roofs, and associated accessories. B. Framing for openings. C. Bearing plates and angles. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Design metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks. B. Submit written certification that installed steel roof deck meets specified Underwriters Laboratory requirements. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Deck and deck installation shall conform to Underwriter’s Laboratory Construction Class 157, Wind Uplift Class UL90. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Requirements for submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, support locations, projections, openings and reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. C. Submit Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Submit Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate specific installation sequence, and special instructions. 1.5 QUALIFICAITONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store decking on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings and shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wheeling. B. Vulcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade B Structural Quality; with G90 galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A525. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. C. Touch-Up Primer: Zinc chromate type. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Steel Decking – 05 31 00 2.3 FABRICATION A. Metal Decking: Sheet steel, configured as follows: Roof: Span Design: Multiple Minimum Metal Thickness (Excluding Finish): 20 and 22 gage Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch profile Type: B Side Joints: Lapped Floor: Span Design: Multiple Minimum Metal Thickness (Excluding Finish): 22 gage Nominal Height: 0.6 inch profile Type: C Side Joints: Lapped B. Metal Closure Strips, and Related Accessories: 20 and 22 gage galvanized sheet steel; of profile and size as required. C. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks. B. Bear decking on steel supports with 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level. C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with fusion welds as required by UL Construction No. 157, Class 90. D. Side lap fasteners No. 10-16 by 3/4 inch long, self drilling, self tapping screws designated TEKS 1 at 12 inches on center maximum and to meet UL Construction No. 157. E. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1. F. Reinforce steel deck openings as indicated. G. Install 6-inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as decking, where deck changes direction. H. To contain wet concrete, install stops at roof edge upturned to top surface of slab. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary under wet concrete without distortion. I. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings. J. Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute. K. On the same day with no exception after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up prime paint. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 2 Metal Fabrications (Architectural) – 05 50 00.01 SECTION 05 50 00.01 METAL FABRICATIONS (ARCHITECTURAL) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel column anchor bolts. D. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Structural joist bearing plates, including anchorage. E. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates for metal deck bearing, including anchorage. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013. C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2011 w/Errata. D. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). E. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). F. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 FINISHES – STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 2 Metal Fabrications (Architectural) – 05 50 00.01 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be imbedded in masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.3 FINISHES – ALUMINUM A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized. B. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components as indicated on drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Metal Fabrications (Structural) – 05 50 00.02 SECTION 05 50 00.02 METAL FABRICATIONS (STRUCTURAL) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment to accomplish all miscellaneous metal work; including, but not limited to lintels, support angles and frames, their anchorage and other items of ferrous metals indicated or required for completion of the project. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Build- ings"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with applicable provisions unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA A. Show complete details and instructions for fabrication, assembly, and installation. Furnish anchor bolts required for installation in other work; furnish templates for bolt installation. Submit two copies for approval. 1.4 INSERTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be built into other work for installation of miscella- neous metal items; coordinate delivery to job site to avoid delay. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC MATERIALS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING: A. Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. D. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366. E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, Grade G90 zinc coating. (minimum 2 oz. per square foot of surface area.) F. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron (ASTM A 47) or cast steel (ASTM A 27) inserts, with steel bolts, washers and shims; hot dip galvanized. G. Shop Paint: FS TT-P-86, Type II, or, SSPC-Paint 14. Apply to cleaned and degreased steel surfaces at rate to provide a 2.0-mil dry film thickness, minimum 2 coats. H. Galvanizing: ASTM A 386 for a assembled products; A 153 for iron and steel hardware. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Shop paint all items not specified to be galvanized after fabrication. B. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. C. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where possible. 3.2 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish Custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for framing and supporting and anchoring woodwork. Galvanize, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 LOOSE BEARING PLATES A. Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as shown. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. Galvanize after fabrication. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Metal Fabrications (Structural) – 05 50 00.02 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide as required to complete work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other work; spaced not more than 24" o.c. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown; continuous welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other work. B. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with bedding mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to three parts sand and only enough water for packing and hydration, or use commercial non- shrink grout material. C. Touch up shop paint after installation. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION Division 06 Woods, Plastics, and Composites February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Rough Carpentry – 06 10 00 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2012. C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce; 2010. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. 1.3 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Rough Carpentry – 06 10 00 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. 2.4 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.2 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.3 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.5 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 31 00. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Rough Carpentry – 06 10 00 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co- generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing – 07 14 00 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate. C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Masonry joints prepared to receive flashings. D. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation used for protective cover. E. Section 07 60 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet covers, copings, and counterflashings. F. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing moving joints in waterproofed surfaces that are not part of work in this section. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). C. ASTM C836/C836M - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid- Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course; 2012. D. ASTM C1306 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of a Liquid- Applied Waterproofing Membrane; 2008. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for membrane, surface conditioner, flexible flashings, joint cover sheet, and joint and crack sealants. B. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and acceptable installation temperatures. D. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with all warranty conditions for the waterproof membrane. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid-applied waterproofing membranes with three years experience. B. Mock-Up: Construct a mock-up consisting of 100 sq ft of vertical waterproofed panel, including internal and external corners, drainage panel, base flashings, control joints, expansion joints, counterflashings, and protective cover similar to those that will be present in the finished work. 1. Locate where directed. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing – 07 14 00 2. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Cold-Applied, Modified-Polymer Elastomeric Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc: www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 3. Dupont; Product Tyvek Fluid Applied WB. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS A. Cold-Applied, Modified-Polymer Elastomeric Waterproofing: 1. Basis of Design: Tyvek Fluid-Applied WB manufactured by Dupont. 2. Equivalent products made by manufacturers listed above are also acceptable. 3. Cured Thickness: 25 mils (.25 inches), minimum. 4. Suitable for installation over concrete substrates. 5. Water Vapor Transmission: 25 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B at 25 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness). 6. Hardness: Passes at a Shore A hardness of 71, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2241. 7. Air Penetration: 0.0002 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. Type I per ASTM E 1677 and ≤ 0.01 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357.0. 8. Adhesion Strength (Concrete): Greater than 33 psi when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4541. 9. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame Spread: 25, Smoke Developed: 25. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant for Joints and Cracks in Substrate: Type compatible with waterproofing material and as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. B. Joint Tape: Self-adhered fiberglass mesh tape as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials. D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing – 07 14 00 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Fill non-moving joints and cracks with a filler compatible with waterproofing materials. E. Seal moving joints and joints with sealant, not rigid filler, using procedures recommended by sealant and waterproofing manufacturers. F. Prepare building expansion joints as indicated on drawings. G. Install cant strips at inside corners. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness. B. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. C. At joints and cracks less than 1/2 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces, apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet. D. At joints from 1/2 to 1 inch in width, loop joint cover sheet down into joint between 1-1/4 and 1/-3/4 inch. Extend sheet 6 inches on either side of expansion joint. E. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles. F. Install flexible flashings and seal into waterproofing material. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. G. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install counterflashing over all exposed edges. 3.4 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD A. Immediately after cooling, dust membrane with tack-reducing surfacing at rate of approximately 10 lbs/100 sq ft. B. After membrane has cooled, but before it becomes dusty, apply separation sheet. Lap joints to ensure complete coverage. C. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. D. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. B. Protect installed weather barrier system from damage during construction prior to cladding installation. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Thermal Insulation – 07 21 00 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction and exterior wall behind brick wall finish. B. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction. C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation. B. Section 07 22 00 - Roof and Deck Insulation: Insulation behind metal roof cladding, and as part of roofing system. C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2006. B. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2014. B. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006. C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2007. D. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2004. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Document Management. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Thermal Insulation – 07 21 00 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure firestop and air barrier materials are in place before beginning work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. B. Insulation Inside Exterior Walls: Extruded polystyrene board. (XPS) 2.2 BATT INSULATION MATE RIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed batt; roll; or blanket; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Material: Glass fiber. 2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 5. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 6. Thermal Resistance: As indicated in drawings. 7. Thickness: As indicated in drawings. 8. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side. 9. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 10. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 – Change Management. B. Batt Insulation (Metal Buildings): 1. Vinyl face blanket insulation shall be faced with GL-30 flame retardant vapor barrier facing. 2. Facing material shall be 00.00125" white metalized polypropylene file. 3. Film is a combination of fiberglass reinforcing yarn and natural kraft paper laminated together with a flame retardant adhesive. 4. Blanket insulation shall have a self-attachment system for installation or shall be furnished with an instllation attachment system. 5. Product specified is based upon Microlite "L", Wide-Blanket Insulation, as manufactured by Johns-Manville. 6. Vinyl faced blanket insulation for ceilings to have an R-19 (metal storage building). 7. Viny faced blanket insulation for walls to have an R-13 (JVMF work bays; metal storage building). 8. Manufacturer's: a. Owens Corning b. Johns-Manville c. Certain Teed d. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 – Change Management. 2.3 FORM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 4. Board Thickness: 2.5 inch. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Thermal Insulation – 07 21 00 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Manufacturers: a. GAF: www.gaf.com. b. Johns Manville; AP Foil-Faced: www.jm.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 34 14 – Change Management. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. C. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. D. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. E. Straps: Sheet metal strapping to support friction fit insulation as required, secured to stud framing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of irregularities or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.2 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. 3.3 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. 1. Tape seal joints between sheets. 2. Extend sheet full height of joint. B. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. C. Install boards horizontally on walls. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Thermal Insulation – 07 21 00 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. 4. Place impale fastener locking discs. D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Roof and Deck Insulation – 07 22 00 SECTION 07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials to install 1/8” per foot tapered insulation and Securock over deck substrates as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 6 "Rough Carpentry" B. Division 7 “Coal Tar Modified Bitumen Roofing” C. Division 7 “Flashing & Sheet Metal 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and product literature for all products listed. B. Design Loads: Submit copy of minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7- 02, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those detailed in article 1.06 of this specification. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened packages, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. B. Store all insulation delivered to the site in enclosed trailers. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation only when the weather conditions are in compliance with the roof system limitations. B. Protect the installed insulation from water penetration at the end of each day's work. C. Application of the roof system shall immediately follow the installation of the roof insulation as it is installed. 1.6 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity 1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the following criteria. Attachment shall be installed exactly as given in article 3.03. Design Code: ASCE 7-02, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. Roof Area Design Uplift Pressure Zone 1 - Field of roof 50.0 psf Zone 2 – Eaves and rakes 85.0 psf Zone 3 - Corners 125.0 psf Note: Edge Zone Width = 6 ft., 0 in. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of a standard February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Roof and Deck Insulation – 07 22 00 required. 2.2 MATERIALS A. 1-inch minimum, 1/4” per foot tapered Polyisocyanurate Insulation Boards: ASTM C 1289. Provide in 4 ft. by 4 ft. (over concrete), 4 ft. by 8 ft (over steel deck) sizes. H-Shield (Tapered) Hunter Panels LLC. B. 1/2-inch Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board coverboard, United States Gypsum Co. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Primer: Insul-Lock Primer B. Insulation Adhesive: Cold applied single component polyurethane adhesive Insul-Lock HR. C. Fasteners & Plates: 1. Steel Deck: Trufast #14 HD fasteners with 3-inch steel plates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive roof and deck insulation and associated work and conditions under which insulation will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. B. Verify deck and surfaces are clean, smooth, dry, free of depressions or irregularities prior to beginning installation of materials. C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, penetrations or vents through roof are solidly set, wood nailing strips are in place. D. Verify all specifications related to Carpentry, have been followed prior to beginning installation of insulation. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 PROTECTION A. During execution of work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall provide protection for roof insulation from water and wind penetration at the end of each day's work. B. Protect the roof insulation in areas that will receive excessive traffic with a surface protection such as plywood. C. All workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any application work where they may be walking on the in-place insulation. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION OVER CONCRETE DECK AREAS & STEEL DECK A. Primer Installation over concrete deck areas; A gallon of Insul-Lock HR Universal Primer covers 150 to 250 sq.ft., depending on surface conditions. B. Insulation board and cover board, Securock shall both be fully attached with specified insulation adhesive system as listed below. 1. Insulation Adhesive at PERIMETERS, Zone 2 of the roof is to be applied with adhesive ribbons equally spaced in 1/2” widths, 12” o.c. beads per 4’ x 4’ board 2. Insulation Adhesive at CORNERS, Zone 3 of the roof is to be applied with adhesive ribbons equally spaced in 1/2” widths, 12” o.c. beads per 4’ x 4’ board. 3. Note: Edge Zone Width = 6-ft. 0-in C. Offset joints of Securock with those of the tapered insulation. 3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION OVER STEEL DECK AREAS A. Base layer of insulation board shall both be fully attached with specified fasteners as listed below. 1. Fasteners in FIELD, Zone 1 of the roof are placed 32 fasteners per board. 2. Fasteners at PERIMETERS, Zone 2 of the roof are placed 32 fasteners per board. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Roof and Deck Insulation – 07 22 00 3. Fasteners at CORNERS, Zone 3 of the roof are placed 32 fasteners per board. B. Placement of any fastener from edge of insulation board shall be a minimum of three inches, and a maximum of six (6) inches. C. Offset joints of Securock with those of the tapered insulation. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanically-seamed, standing seam metal roof panels, with related metal trim and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for structural steel framing supporting metal panels. B. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for continuous metal decking supporting metal panels. C. Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for factory-formed metal wall [and soffit] panels. D. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for formed sheet metal copings, flashings, reglets, and roof drainage items in addition to items specified in this Section. E. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured copings, reglets, and roof drainage items in addition to items specified in this Section. F. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied Joint Sealants. G. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for steel framing supporting metal panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): www.aamanet.org: 1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc- Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. AAMA 809.2 – Voluntary Specification Non-Drying Sealants. B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org/codes-standards: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org: 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum- Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM A 980 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Ultra High Strength Cold Rolled. 5. ASTM C 645 – Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 6. ASTM D 226 – Standard Specification for Asphalt – Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 7. ASTM D 1003 - Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2244 – Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 9. ASTM D 4214 – Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 10. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 11. ASTM E 1646 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 12. ASTM E 1680 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. 13. ASTM E 1980 – Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): www.ul.com: 1. UL 580 - Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing, conduct preinstallation meeting at site attended by Owner, Architect, manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system 3. Coordinate work of Division 01 Sections “Roof Specialties” and “Roof Accessories” and openings and pentrations and manufacturer’s accessories with installation of metal panels. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal roof panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed-base roll forming, and accredited under IAS AC 472 Part B. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years’ experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. c. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of five installations not less the five years old, with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. IAS AC 472 certificate. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements. 3. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer certified by metal panel manufacturer February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 with minimum of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic certified by metal panel manufacturer supervising work on site whenever work is underway. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for specified products. 1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Samples for Verification: Provide 36-inch long section of each metal panel profile. Provide color chip verifying color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements, witnessed by a professional engineer. B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer’s field supervisor. C. IAS Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under provisions of IAS AC 472. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. 1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes, profiles, and locations of roof curbs and other roof-mounted equipment and roof penetrations, based upon sizes of actual selected equipment. 1.11 WARRANTY February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: On manufacturer’s standard form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Weathertightness Warranty: On manufacturer’s standard form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, up to cost limitation of fourteen dollars ($14.00) per square foot of covered area within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, including: 1. Fluoropolymer Two- Coat System: a. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of No. 6 rating per ASTM D 4214. c. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking. 2. Modified Silicone-Polyester Two-Coat System: a. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244 for vertical b. Color fading in excess of 7 Hunter units per ASTM D2244 for non-vertical applications. c. Chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D 4214 for vertical applications. d. Chalking in excess of No. 6 rating per ASTM D 4214, for non-vertical applications. e. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc., Houston, TX, Tel: (877) 713-6224, Email: info@mbci.com, Web: www.mbci.com 1. Provide basis of design product, MBCI BattenLok, S. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal roof panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. a. Wind Uplift Testing: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of proposed assembly per ASTM E 1592. 2. As indicated 3. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind building code with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span with no evidence or failure. 4. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, Section 9, “Earthquake Loads C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift class UL-90, in addition shall comply with TDI Windstorm and Project Wind Loading Requirements. D. Air Infiltration, ASTM E 1680: Maximum 0.25 cfm/sq. ft. (1.27 L/s per sq. m) at static- February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). E. Water Penetration Static Pressure, ASTM E 1646: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 12 lbf/sq. ft (575 Pa) F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. 2.3 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Mechanically-seamed, Concealed Fastener, Metal Roof Panels: Structural metal roof panel consisting of formed metal sheet with vertical ribs at panel edges, installed by lappingand mechanically interlocking edges of adjacent panels, and attaching panels to supports using concealed clips and fasteners in a weathertight installation. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, BattenLok HS, www.mbci.com/battenlokHS.html. 2. Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated ASTM Steel Sheet: A792/A792M, structural coating quality, by the Grade 50, coil-per ASTM A 755/A 755M 3. Aluminum Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet ASTM A792/A792M, structural quality, Grade 50, Coating Class AZ55 a. Nominal Coated Thickness: 22 gage. b. Panel Surface: Smooth with striations in pan. c. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system. d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Panel Width: 16 inches (406 mm). 5. Panel Seam Height: 2 inch (50.8 mm). 6. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed. 2.4 METAL ROOF PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete metal roof panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, gutters and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings, in manufacturer's standard profiles. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, thermal spacers, splice plates, support plates, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panel face sheet. C. Panel Clips: Provide panel clip of type specified, at spacing indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Two-piece Floating: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements. 2. Single-Piece Fixed: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements. D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable corrosion-resistant fasteners recommended by roof panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets, with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 E. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and tapes, and as follows: 1. Factory-Applied Seam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard hot-melt type. 2. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape, AAMA 809.2. F. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. G. Roof Accessories: Approved by metal roof panel manufacturer. Refer to Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for requirements for roof accessories. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal panel joints configured to accept factory- applied sealant providing weathertight seal and preventing metal-to-metal contact and minimizing noise resulting from thermal movement. B. Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs, except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish. 2.6 FINISHES A. Finishes, General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. B. Modified Silicone-Polyester Two-Coat System: 0.20 – 0.25 mil primer with 0.7 – 0.8 mil color coat. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300. C. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Metallic System: 0.2 – 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF metallic fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621. D. Interior Finish: 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) total dry film thickness consisting of primer coat and wash coat of manufacturer's standard light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel installation. 1. Inspect metal panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than the following: a. ¼ inch (6 mm) in 20 foot (6.1 m) in any direction. b. 3/8 inch (9 mm) over any single roof plane. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated metal roof panel system installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, girts, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members according to ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashings: Provide flashings as required to complete metal roof panel system. Install in accordance with Section 07 60 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” and approved shop drawings 3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Mechanically-Seamed, Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Install weathertight metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal roof panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Attach panels to supports using clips, screws, fasteners, and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports with concealed clips at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, with spacing and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer- approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels of types recommended by manufacturer. 4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel trim, flashing, and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers, with positive anchorage to building, and with weather tight mounting. Provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Metal Roof Panels – 07 41 13 4. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal panel assemblies, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal roof panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pre-formed metal wall panels with concealed fasteners, factory- finished. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Division 05 Section - Structural Steel 2. Division 05 Section - Steel Joists 3. Division 05 Section - Metal Fabrications 4. Division 06 Section - Rough Carpentry 5. Division 07 Section - Roof and Deck Insulation 6. Division 07 Section - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. SG02-1 2001 Edition of the North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A653-03 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip process. 2. B209-02a Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. 1993 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th edition. D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show wall panels with flashings and accessories in elevations, sections and details. Include metal thickness and finishes, panel lengths, joining details, anchorage details, flashings and special fabrication provisions for termination and penetrations. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and provide fastener pullout values. Shop drawings must be completed by the wall panel manufacturer's engineering department. Any and/or all changes recommended by the successful bidder must be approved by the manufacturer in writing prior to submittal. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's detailed material and system description, sealant and closure installation instructions, and finish specifications. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and required fastener pullout values. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 C. Samples: Provide full-size samples of the following materials and system components. Samples shall be of identical material type, thickness, panel width, and material grade/alloy as the system specified for this project. 1. Submit sample of panel section, at least 4" long x full panel width showing panel profile and also a sample of color selected. 2. Submit sample of panel fasteners. D. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Mill production reports certifying that the steel thicknesses are within allowable tolerances of the nominal or minimum thickness or gauge specified. B. Qualification Data for Installer. Refer to Quality Assurance Article below. 1.6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Requirements of Division 01 Section Closeout Submittals. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide specified warranty for the Project, executed by the authorized agent of the Manufacturer. C. Wall Panel Maintenance Instructions. Provide a manual of manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance of installed systems. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To maintain consistency with performance, inspection services and warranty, the manufacturer of the Metal Wall Panels shall be identical to that providing material in Section 07 42 13 – Metal Roof Panel System and identical to that providing material in Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of the wall panel system from a single manufacturer. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer shall have direct authority and control over all fabrication of steel components as well as the raw materials used in their fabrication. C. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized quality control program such as ISO-9001 approval. D. Engage the Manufacturer's Field Representative to conduct three times weekly inspections of work in progress as described herein and shall furnish written documentation of all such inspections. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre-installation conference approximately two (2) weeks before scheduled February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 commencement of modified bituminous roofing system installation and associated work. B. Require attendance of installer of each component of associated work which must precede or follow wall panel work (including mechanical or electrical work if any), Architect, Owner, system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, testing agencies and governing authorities. C. Objectives of conference to include: 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to work, including set up and mobilization areas for stored material and work area. 2. Tour representative areas of building, inspect and discuss condition of substrates, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others. 3. Review structural loading limitations of wall framing and inspect for unacceptable variations in planarity 4. Review system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 5. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 7. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary wall protection (if not mandatory requirement). 9. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached. Furnish a copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. 10. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days. D. The Owner's Representative will designate one of the conference participants to record the proceedings and promptly distribute them to the participants for record. E. The intent of the conference is to resolve issues affecting the installation and performance of wall panel work. Do not proceed with work until such issues are resolved the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer of Record. This shall not be construed as interference with the progress of Work on the part of the Owner or Engineer of Record. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's responsibilities: 1. All panels shall be shipped from the manufacturer with polystyrene or similar cushioned packaging material separating the individual panels to minimize flexing, stressing, scratching or otherwise damaging the material during transit to the job. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 2. Fully cover steel with tarpaulins or similar protective cover during transit to prevent dirt and debris from coming in contact with the finished goods. B. Installer's responsibilities: 1. Stack pre-finished materials to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion and denting and elevate one end to facilitate moisture run-off. 2. Unload wall panels using a boom or crane, supporting the panels in at least two locations during lifting, and never lift more than three panels at a time. 3. Protect moisture-sensitive materials and water-based from the weather. 4. Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred material from project site. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and storage and protection requirements for wall panel system. 1. Protection: a. Protect completed work from subsequent construction operations. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. b. Do not encumber the site with stored materials or equipment. c. Do not support wall-mounted equipment directly on the wall panel system. B. Ascertain that work of other trades which penetrates the wall or is to be made watertight by the wall is in place an approved prior to installation of roofing. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTIONS A. When the project is in progress, the system manufacturer will provide the following: 1. Keep the Architect and Owner informed as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Provide job site inspections at least three (3) times a week. 3. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 4. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no applications procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected. 1.12 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA. A. Capacity shall be determined using defined method in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Air infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283, and meet or exceed the following performance requirements: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 Pressure Area Leakage Rate 1.57 PSF > 0.06 cfm/sq.ft. C. Static air pressure water infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331, and meet or exceed the following performance requirements: Pressure Result 5 Gal/Hr per S.F. and Static Air No Leakage Pressure of 12.0 psf for 15 minutes 1.13 WARRANTIES A. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer of wall panels covering all of the following criteria. Multiple warranties are not acceptable. 1. 10 year watertight warranty signed by the manufacturer 2. Manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year finish warranty covering checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading, or adhesion. 3. Installer's two (2) year warranty covering wall panel system installation. 4. Galvalume material shall have a 20-year guarantee against corrosion, rupture, or perforation. 5. Warranties shall commence on date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Common Product Requirements." B. Basis of Design: Materials, manufacturer's product designations, and/or manufacturer's names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1. C. Substitutions: Products proposed as equal to the products specified in this Section shall be submitted in accordance with Bidding Requirements and Division 01 provisions. 1. Proposals shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer's standard specification section. That specification section shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. Substitution requests containing specifications without licensed engineer certification shall be rejected for non-conformance. 2. Include a list of three (3) projects of similar type and extent, located within a one hundred mile radius from the location of the project. In addition, the three projects must be at least five (5) years old and be available for inspection by the Architect, Owner or Owner's Representative. 3. Equivalency of performance criteria, warranty terms, submittal procedures, and contractual terms will constitute the basis of acceptance. 4. The Owner's decision regarding substitutions will be considered final. Unauthorized substitutions will be rejected. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The design is based upon metal wall panel systems engineered and manufactured by: The Garland Company 3800 East 91st Street Cleveland, Ohio 44105 Telephone: (800) 762-8225 Website: www.garlandco.com B. Site Formed Panels: Bidder will not be allowed to supply panels formed at the job-site on portable rollformers; metal panels must be factory pre-manufactured and engineered for this project. 2.3 METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM A. General. 1. Product designations for the metal wall panel system and waterproofing materials used in this Section are based on performance characteristics of the R-Mer Line Metal Wall Panel system manufactured by The Garland Company. B. Materials. 1. Panel material: 24 ga., Galvanized steel, type G-90, smooth as per ASTM A653- 96. 2. Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same material, thickness, and finish as wall panel system, unless indicated otherwise. C. Finish on surfaces: 1. Exposed surfaces for coated panels: a. Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system (polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2), applied by manufacturer's approved applicator. b. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and color coat. c. Color shall be selected by Architect. 2. Unexposed surfaces for coated panels shall be baked-on polyester coating with .20 - .30 dry film thickness (TDF). 3. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for uncoated panels shall be as shipped from the mill. D. Characteristics: 1. Fabrication: Panels shall be factory roll-formed from the specified metal. Field rolled panels will not be allowed. 2. Configuration: Panel shall have interlocking seams which conceal fasteners. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 3. Panel Length: Full Length without joints. 4. Panel Coverage Width : 18", Profile: V-groove (9”). 5. Panel Depth (Concealed Leg Height): 3" 6. Mechanical Finish: Panel surface shall have two (2) equally spaced vee grooves. E. Accessories: Fasteners: 1. Anchor fasteners (Concealed fasteners): Corrosion resistant steel screws, #10 x length appropriate for substrate, pancake head, Phillips or Square drive. Use self- drilling, self-tapping for metal substrate or A-point for plywood substrate. 2. Exposed Trim Fasteners (trim to panel): Trim fasteners shall be #6x1/2" SS410 Tek 1 Round washer head, painted to match panel color. Fastener material shall be stainless steel washer head. 3. Anchor fasteners (Concealed fasteners): Corrosion resistant steel screws, #10 x length appropriate for substrate, pancake head, Phillips or Square drive. Use self- drilling, self-tapping for metal substrate or A-point for plywood substrate. 4. Exposed Trim Fasteners (trim to panel): Trim fasteners shall be #6x1/2" SS410 Tek 1 Round washer head, painted to match panel color. Fastener material shall be stainless steel washer head. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate metal panels and flashing components to the maximum extent possible, forming metal work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises. Hem exposed edges of flashings. B. Form flashing components from full single width sheet in minimum ten (10'-0") feet sections. Provide shop fabricated, mitered corners, joined using closed end pop rivets and joint sealant. C. Fabricate panels and related sheet metal work in accordance with approved shop drawings and applicable standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION, GENERAL A. Comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Common Execution Requirements." 3.2 PREPARATION A. Inspection: Examine the alignment and placement of the building structure and substrate. Correct any objectionable warp, waves or buckles in the substrate before proceeding with installation of the pre-formed metal panels. B. Pre-installation conference: Prior to beginning metal wall panel work, convene a pre- installation conference as specified in Part 1 of this Specification. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 3.3 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. All details will be shown on manufacturer's shop drawings to successful bidder; install panels and flashings in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, within specified erection tolerances. B. Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and panels. C. Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on shop drawings. D. Seal laps and joints in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's product data. E. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal work to provide weather-tight conditions at wall panel terminations. Fabricate and install in accordance with standards of SMACNA Manual. F. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects. In light gauge panels with wide flat surfaces, some oil canning may be present. Oil canning does not affect the finish or structural integrity of the panel and is therefore not cause for rejection. G. Form joints in linear sheet metal to allow for one fourth (1/4) inch minimum expansion at twenty (20'-0") feet on center maximum and eight (8'-0") feet from corners. H. At joints in linear sheet metal items, set sheet metal items in two (2) one fourth (1/4) inch beads of butyl sealant. Extend sealant over all metal surfaces. Mate components for positive seal. Allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Replace damaged work than cannot be restored by normal cleaning methods. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during construction. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 3.6 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner, system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of system . B. Inspect work and flashing of penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. D. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections. E. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 9 Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13 the system manufacturer. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner's facility manager, or other representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures: 1. Maintenance. 2. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the warranty in effect and force. 3. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the warranty in effect and force END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 SECTION 07 42 13.16 VERTICAL INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foamed-insulation-core concealed fastener vertical metal wall panels, with related metal trim and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for steel framing supporting metal panels. B. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing items in addition to items specified in this Section. C. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for steel framing supporting metal panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): B. www.aamanet.org: 1. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems. 2. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc- Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): D. www.asce.org/codes-standards: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. E. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org: 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 5. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus 6. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 7. ASTM D 1622 - Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 9. ASTM D 4214 - Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 10. ASTM D 6226 - Standard Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics 11. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 12. ASTM E 84 - Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 13. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 14. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 15. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 259 – Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. 2. NFPA 285 – Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load Bearing Wall Assemblies. 3. NFPA 286 – Fire Test of Evaluating Conditions of Wall and Ceiling Finish to Roof Fire Growth. G. FM Global (FM): www.fmglobal.com: 1. FM 4880 American National Standard for Evaluating Insulated Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies 2. FM 4881 Approval Standard for Class 1 Exterior Wall Systems. H. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 1. CAN/ULC S102 – Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. 2. CAN/ULC S 101 – Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. CAN/ULC S 134 – Fire Test of Exterior Wall Assemblies. 4. Can/ULC S 138 – Fire Growth of Insulated Building Panels in a Full Scale Room Configuration. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assemblies and accessories from a single manufacturer approved under an accredited third-party quality control program B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum ten years experience in manufacture of similar products and successful use in similar applications. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. c. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of five installations not less than five years old, with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. Certificate from an accredited third-party Quality Control Program. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements 3. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer certified by metal panel manufacturer with minimum of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic certified by metal panel manufacturer supervising work on site whenever work is underway. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS D. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing, conduct preinstallation meeting at site attended by Owner, Architect, metal panel installer, metal panel manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. 3. Coordinate work of Division 07 Sections "Roof Specialties" and "Roof Accessories" and openings and penetrations and manufacturer's accessories with installation of metal panels. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 2. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with performance requirements and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Provide 36 inch long section of each metal panel profile. 2. Provide color chip verifying color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements. B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer’s field supervisor. C. Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under an accredited third-party Quality Control Program. D. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer’s written two (2) year limited warranty providing panels to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) that are covered under a separate warranty. 2. The installation contractor shall issue a separate one (1) year warranty against defects in installed materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion of the installation. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer’s warranty 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. Protect painted surfaces with a protective covering before shipping. 1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panels and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. 3. Shield foam insulated metal panels from direct sunlight until installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit Manufacturer’s two (2) year limited warranty providing panels to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) that are covered under a separate warranty. B. The installation contractor shall issue a separate one (1) year warranty against defects in installed materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion of the installation. C. Special Panel Finish Warranty: Submit Manufacturer’s twenty-five (25) year limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for adhesion to the metal substrate and twenty-five (25) year limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for chalk and fade. 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: a. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of No.6 rating per ASTM D 4214. c. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Houston TX. Tel: (877)713-6224; Email: info@ecoficientseries.com Web: www.mbci.com. B. Provide basis of design product [or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bid]. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by ASTM E 72 or ASTM E 1592 applied in accordance with IES AC 04, Section 4, Panel Load Test Option or Section 5, Panel Analysis Option: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. a. Wind Negative Pressure: Certify capacity of metal panels by testing of proposed assembly. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span with no evidence of failure. 3. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7 Sections 9, "Earthquake Loads." C. FM Approvals Listing: Comply with FM Approval 4881.Provide metal wall panel assembly listed in FM Approvals' "Approval Guide." D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide metal panel systems with the following fire- test characteristics determined by indicated test standard as applied by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: The insulating core shall have been tested per ASTM E 84. The core shall have: a. Flame spread index: 25 or less. b. Smoke developed index: 450 or less. 2. Room Test Performance: FM Global 4880: The panel assembly shall not support a self-propagating fire which reaches any limits of the 50’ (15.24m) high corner test structure as evidenced by flaming or material damage of the ceiling of the assembly. 3. Fire Propagation: The fire assembly shall meet the requirements of the standard for: a. NFPA 285 b. NFPA 286 4. Potential Heat: Determined in accordance with NFPA 259 5. Canadian Certifications – Flame Spread: Evaluation of fire spread over the exterior surface shall be conducted and in compliance with CAN/ULC S 138 Fire Growth of Insulated Building Panels in a Full-Scale Room Configuration. 6. IBC Chapter 26: Panel Performance under the above test methods, shall meet the requirements of IBC, Chapter on foam plastics. E. Air Infiltration, ASTM E 283: 1. Maximum 0.0002 cfm/sq. ft. (0.001 L/s per sq. m) at static air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). 2. Maximum 0.0009 cfm/sq. ft. (0.005 L/s per sq. m) at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 3. Maximum 0.0100 cfm/sq. ft. (0.050 L/s per sq. m) at static-air-pressure difference of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa). F. Water Penetration Static Pressure: 1. ASTM E 331: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa). 2. ASTM E 331 Modified (2 hour duration): No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. H. Thermal Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM C 518, Measurement of Steady State thermal Transmission, the panels shall provide a k factor of 0.14 btu/sf/hr/deg F at a 75° F (24° C) mean temperature. 2.3 INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS A. Concealed Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Structural metal panels consisting of exterior metal sheet with five major tapered inverted ribs 1-1/4by 1/4 inches February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 (32 by 6.4 mm) with planked profile between the inverted ribs, and interior metal sheet with planked profile, with factory foamed-in-place polyurethane core in thermally- separated profile, with tongue-and-groove panel edges, attached to supports using concealed fasteners. B. Concealed Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Horizontal Metal Wall Panel: Structural metal panel consisting of flush, smooth exterior metal sheet, and interior metal sheet with planked profile, with factory foamed-in-place polyurethane core in thermally-separated profile, with tongue-and-groove panel edges, attached to supports using concealed fasteners. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Eco-ficient Grand V. 2. G-90 galvanized coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 and/or AZ50 aluminum- zinc alloy coated steel, conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M, minimum grade 33, prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Exterior Face Sheet: 22 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface and 3/4 inch (19 mm) reveals. (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system (2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Interior Face Sheet: 24 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface and planked profile. (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system (2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Panel Width: 36 inches 4. Panel Thickness: 3 inch (76 mm) 5. Insulating Core: Polyurethane with zero ozone depletion potential blowing agent a. Closed Cell Content: 95% or more as determined by ASTM D 6226 b. Compressive Strength: As required to meet structural performance requirements and with a minimum of 15 psi as determined by ASTM D 1621 c. Minimum Density: 2.0 pcf (32 kg/m3) as determined by ASTM D 1622 d. Thermal Resistance R-Value: R-19 deg. F * hr * sq. ft./Btu (K * sq. m/W) per ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. 6. Heat Transfer Coefficient (U-factor): X Btu/hr * sq. ft. * deg. F (W/K * sq. m) as determined by ASTM C 1363 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. Tested specimen must include at least two engaged side joints. C. Concealed Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Structural metal panels consisting of exterior metal sheet and interior metal sheet with matching 4 by 1/8 inch (102 by 3 mm) o.c. planked profiles, with factory foamed-in-place polyurethane core in thermally- separated profile, with tongue-and-groove panel edges, attached to supports using concealed fasteners. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Eco-ficient Royal. 2. G-90 galvanized coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 and/or AZ50 aluminum- zinc alloy coated steel, conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M, minimum grade 33, prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Exterior Face Sheet: 22 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface. (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system. (2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Interior Face Sheet: 24 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface and planked profile. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system. (2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Panel Width: 42 inches (1067 mm 4. Panel Thickness: 3 inch (76 mm 5. Insulating Core: Polyurethane with zero ozone depletion potential blowing agent a. Closed Cell Content: 95% or more as determined by ASTM D 6226 b. Compressive Strength: As required to meet structural performance requirements and with a minimum of 15 psi as determined by ASTM D 1621 c. Minimum Density: 2.0 pcf (32 kg/m3) as determined by ASTM D 1622 d. Thermal Resistance R-Value: R-19 deg. F * hr * sq. ft./Btu (K * sq. m/W) per ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. 6. Heat Transfer Coefficient (U-factor): X Btu/hr * sq. ft. * deg. F (W/K * sq. m) as determined by ASTM C 1363 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. Tested specimen must include at least two engaged side joints. 2.4 METAL WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete metal panel assemblies incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, gutters and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panels. C. Panel Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, one- piece, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements. D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion-resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating, with weathertight resilient washers. E. Joint Sealers: 1. Sealants: Provide Tape Mastic Sealants, Non-skinning sealants, and Urethane Sealants per Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants” 2. Vertical Joint Gasket: Manufacturer's standard EPDM gasket. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels, trim, and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal panel joints configured to accept sealant tape providing weathertight seal and preventing metal-to- metal contact and minimizing noise resulting from thermal movement. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. 2.6 FINISHES A. Finishes, General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. B. Exterior Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish System C. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 – 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621, [meeting solar reflectance index requirements]. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300. D. Interior Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish System 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2-mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat a. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300 b. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panels. 1. Inspect framing that will support insulated metal panels to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings and are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer and installer. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that metal panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer but not greater than the following: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 20 foot (6100 mm) in any direction. b. 3/8 inch (9 mm) over any single wall plane. c. At Girt Spacing 10 feet (3048 mm) or more: ¼ inch (6 mm) out only. d. At Girt Spacing Less than 10 feet (3048 mm): 1/8 inch (3 mm) out only. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated metal panel installation. 3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Concealed-Fastener Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Panels: Install metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Attach panels to metal framing using screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives recommended for application by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, at spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Cut panels in field where required using manufacturer's recommended methods. 3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels. 4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by metal panel manufacturer C. Attach panel flashing trim pieces to supports using recommended fasteners and joint sealers D. Joint Sealers: Install tape sealers and liquid sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies 1. Seal panel base assembly, openings, panel head joints, and perimeter joints using joint sealers indicated in manufacturer's instructions 2. Seal wall panel joints utilizing tape sealer [and vapor seal bead of non-curing butyl]; apply continuously without gaps in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 9 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.16 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants". 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting; provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Water-Spray Test: After completing portion of metal panel assembly including accessories and trim, test 2-bay area selected by Architect for water penetration, according to AAMA 501.2. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 SECTION 07 42 13.19 HORIZONTAL INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foamed-insulation-core concealed fastener horizontal metal wall panels, with related metal trim and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel Framing” framing supporting metal for steel panels. B. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashings items in addition to items specified in this Section. C. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for steel framing supporting metal panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): www.aamanet.org: 1. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems. 2. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc- Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org/codes-standards: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.org: 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 518 – Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 5. ASTM C 1363-Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 6. ASTM D 2244-Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 7. ASTM D 4214 - Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 8. ASTM E 72-Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 9. ASTM D 1621 – Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 10. ASTM D 1622 – Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 11. ASTM D 6226 – Standard Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics 12. ASTM E 84 – Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 13. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 14. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 15. ASTM E1592-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) www.nfpa.org 1. NFPA 259 – Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. 2. NFPA 285 – Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load Bearing Wall Assemblies. 3. NFPA 286 – Fire Test of Evaluating Conditions of Wall and Ceiling Finish to Roof Fire Growth E. FM Global (FM): www.fmglobal.com 1. ANSI/FM 4480 American National Standard for Evaluating Insulated Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies. F. ANSI/FM 4881 Approval Standard for Class 1 Exterior Wall Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assemblies and accessories from a single manufacturer approved under an accredited third-party quality control program. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum ten years of experience in manufacture of similar products and successful use in similar applications. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. c. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of 5 installations not less than 5 years old, with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. Certificate from an accredited third-party Quality Control Program. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements. 3. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer certified by metal panel manufacturer with minimum of five years’ experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic certified by metal panel manufacturer supervising work on site whenever work is underway. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing, conduct preinstallation meeting at site attended by Owner, Architect, metal panel installer, metal panel manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 3. Coordinate work of Division 07 Sections "Roof Specialties" and "Roof Accessories" and openings and penetrations and manufacturer's accessories with installation of metal panels. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 2. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with performance requirements and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants and gaskets. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Provide 36 inch long section of each metal panel profile. 2. Provide color chip verifying color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements. B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm, Installer’s field supervisor. C. Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under an accredited third-party Quality Control Program. D. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer’s written two (2) year limited warranty providing panels to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) that are covered under a separate warranty. 2. The installation contractor shall issue a separate one (1) year warranty against defects in installed materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion of the installation. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data B. Manufacturer's Product/Finish Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's warranty. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. Protect painted surfaces with a protective covering before shipping. 1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panels and accessory items without February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. 3. Shield foam insulated metal panels from direct sunlight until installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit Manufacturer’s two (2) year limited warranty providing panels to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) that are covered under a separate warranty. B. The installation contractor shall issue a separate one (1) year warranty against defects in installed materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion of the installation. C. Special Panel Finish Warranty: Submit Manufacturer’s twenty-five forty (25) year limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for adhesion to the metal substrate and twenty-five (25) year limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for chalk and fade. 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: a. Color fading in excess of [5] [10] Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of No. [6] [8] rating per ASTM D 4214. c. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc., Houston, TX Tel: (877) 713-6224; Email: info@ecoficientseries.com; Web: www.mbci.com 1. Provide basis of design product MBCI, Eco-ficient Grand 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by ASTM E 72 or ASTM E 1592 applied in accordance with IES AC 04, Section 4, Panel Load Test Option or Section 5, Panel Analysis Option: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. a. Wind Negative Pressure: Certify capacity of metal panels by testing of proposed assembly. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind- load design pressures in accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span with no evidence of failure. C. FM Approvals Listing: Comply with FM Approval 4881. Provide metal wall panel assembly February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 listed in FM Approvals' "Approval Guide." D. Fire Performance Characteristics: provide metal panel systems with the following fire-test characteristics determined by indicated test standard as applied by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide metal panel systems with the following characteristics when tested per ASTM E 84. The core shall have: a. Flame spread index: 25 or less. b. Smoke developed index: 450 or less. 2. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC)Standard 4880, 50’ (15.24m) High Corner Test for Unlimited Height Structures: The panel assembly shall not support a self-propagating fire which reaches any limits of the 50’ (15.24m) high corner test structure as evidenced by flaming or material damage of the ceiling of the assembly. 3. Fire Propagation: The fire assembly shall meet the requirements of the standard for: a. NFPA 285 b. NFPA 286 4. Potential Heat: Determined in accordance with NFPA 259 5. IBC Chapter 26: Panel Performance under the above test methods, shall meet the requirements of IBC, Chapter on foam plastics. E. Air Infiltration, ASTM E 283: 1. Maximum 0.0002 cfm/sq. ft. (0.001 L/s per sq. m) at static air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). 2. Maximum 0.0009 cfm/sq. ft. (0.005 L/s per sq. m) at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 3. Maximum 0.0100 cfm/sq. ft. (0.050 L/s per sq. m) at static-air-pressure difference of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa). F. Water Penetration Static Pressure: 1. ASTM E 331: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa). 2. ASTM E 331 Modified (2 hour duration): No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. H. Thermal Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM C 518, Measurement of Steady State thermal Transmission, the panels shall provide a k factor of 0.14 btu/sf/hr/deg F at a 75° F (24° C) mean temperature. 2.3 INSULATED HORIZONTAL METAL WALL PANELS A. Concealed Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Horizontal Metal Wall Panel: Structural metal panel consisting of flush, smooth exterior metal sheet, and interior metal sheet with planked profile, with factory foamed-in-place polyurethane core in thermally-separated profile, with tongue-expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design and-groove panel edges, attached to supports using concealed fasteners. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Eco-ficient Grand H. 2. G-90 galvanized coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 and/or AZ50 aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel, conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M, minimum grade 33, prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 a. Exterior Face Sheet: 22 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface and 3/4 inch reveals. (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system (2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Interior Face Sheet: 24 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface and planked profile. (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two coat system (2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. 3. Panel Width: 36 inches. 4. Panel Thickness: 3 inch. 5. Insulating Core: Polyurethane with zero ozone depletion potential blowing agent a. Closed Cell Content: 95% or more as determined by ASTM D 6226 b. Compressive Strength: As required to meet structural performance requirements and with a minimum of 15 psi as determined by ASTM D 1621 c. Minimum Density: 2.0 pcf (32 kg/m3) as determined by ASTM D 1622 d. Thermal Resistance R-Value: R-19 deg. F * hr * sq. ft./Btu (K * sq. m/W) as determined by ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. 6. Heat Transfer Coefficient (U-factor): X Btu/hr * sq. ft. * deg. F (W/K * sq. m) as determined by ASTM C 1363 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. Tested specimen must include at least two engaged side joints. 2.4 METAL WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete metal panel assemblies incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, gutters and downspouts, end-splice backing plates, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extruded Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard profile base, head, sill, outside and inside corner, jamb, and joint extrusions configured to accept specified metal wall panel thicknesses and gaskets, and painted to match wall panels unless otherwise indicated. C. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panels. D. Panel Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, one-piece, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements. E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion- resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating, with weathertight resilient washers. F. Joint Sealers: 1. Sealants: Provide Tape Mastic Sealants, Concealed Joint Sealants and Urethane Joint Sealants per Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants”. 2. Vertical Joint Gasket: Manufacturer's standard EPDM gasket. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels, trim, and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal panel joints configured to accept sealant tape providing weathertight February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 seal and preventing metal-to- metal contact and minimizing noise resulting from thermal movement. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. 2.6 FINISHES A. Finishes, General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. B. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 – 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621, [meeting solar reflectance index requirements]. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300. C. Interior Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish System: 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2-mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat. a. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panels. 1. Inspect framing that will support insulated metal panels to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings and are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer and installer. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that metal panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer but not greater than the following: a. Support spacing less than 48 inches (1219 mm): 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane, outward only. b. Support spacing between 48 and 96 inches (1219 and 2438 mm): 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) out of plane, outward only. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated metal panel installation. 3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Concealed-Fastener Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Panels: Install metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Attach panels to metal framing using clips, screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels – 07 42 13.19 recommended for application by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports with concealed clips at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Cut panels in field where required using manufacturer's recommended methods. 3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels. 4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. C. Attach panel flashing trim and extruded aluminum trim pieces to supports using recommended fasteners and joint sealers. D. Joint Sealers: Install tape sealers, gaskets, and liquid sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. 1. Seal panel base assembly, openings, panel head joints, and perimeter joints using joint sealers indicated in manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seal wall panel joints utilizing tape sealer and weathertight seal bead non- curing butyl, plus vapor seal bead of non-curing butyl; apply continuously without gaps in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting; provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, extruded aluminum trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, gaskets, and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Water-Spray Test: After completing portion of metal panel assembly including accessories and trim, test 2-bay area selected by Architect for water penetration, according to AAMA 501.2. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 06 10 00 - “Rough Carpentry". C. Section 07 22 00 - “Roof and Deck Insulation". D. Section 07 60 00 - “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Modified bituminous sheet roofing work including but not limited to: One-ply of torch-applied 110-mil thick dual fiberglass scrim, SBS (styrene-butadiene-styrene) rubber modified base sheet, One-ply of torch-applied 195-mil thick SBS rubber, mineral surfaced, dual polyester/fiberglass scrim reinforced, modified roof membrane. One of each of the above for flashings. 1.3 References: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section. ASTM D 41 1994 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damproofing, and Waterproofing ASTM D 2178 1997a Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. ASTM D4586 Type II Class I Asphalt Roof Cement. ASTM D6162- III Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester /Glass Fiber Reinforcement ASTM D6163-III Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Dual Fiberglass scrim Reinforcement ASTM D 5147 2001a Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material. B. FACTORY MUTUAL GLOBAL RESEARCH, FACTORY MUTUAL APPROVALS (FM) . FM A/S4470 Class 1 Roof Covers 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire and Wind Uplift Rating: Provide modified bitumen roof system and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated that have been tested and listed by Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey or approved third party testing facility in accordance with ASTM E108, Class A for external fire and have been designed for listed wind loads in accordance with IBC 2006 and ASCE 7. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 B. Provide roof-covering materials bearing Factory Mutual Classification Marking on bundle, package, or container indicating that materials have been produced under FM's Classification and Follow-up Service. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Roofing system manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Certified and have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing modified bitumen roofing products in the United States. Show evidence that the products and materials are manufactured in the United States and that materials provided conform to all requirements specified herein, and are chemically and physically compatible with each other and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein. The Roofing System Manufacturer shall Indemnify the Architect for attorney's fees, related expenses and judgments incurred through litigation arising out of application or performance of the roof system, even if the litigation is groundless, false or fraudulent. The Architect shall be indemnified for a maximum aggregate sum of amount of $25,000. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer (Roofer) shall be specializing in Built-up bituminous roof application with minimum 5 years experience and who is currently certified by modified bituminous sheet roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. Any one or more of the following causes may be considered sufficient for the disqualification of installer: 1. Lack of responsibility as revealed by either financial, experience or equipment statements. 2. Lack of expertise as shown by past work and judged from the standpoint of workmanship and performance history. 3. Uncompleted work under other contracts which, in the judgment of the Owner, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. 4. Being in arrears on existing contracts, in litigation with an Owner, or having defaulted on a previous contract. C. Installer's Field Supervision: Installer to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman on job site during all phases of modified bituminous sheet roofing work and at any time roofing work is in progress, proper supervision of workmen shall be maintained. A copy of the Specifications shall be in the possession of the supervisor/foreman at all times. D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to respond immediately to correction of roof leakage during construction. E. Pre-application Roofing Conference: Before scheduled commencement of modified bitumen sheet roofing installation and associated work, meet at Project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including test agencies, and governing authorities. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work. 2. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 documents). 3. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 5. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. 6. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not a mandatory requirement). 7. Record (Contractor) discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Manufacturer's Certification: (Use form attached to end of this Section) The Manufacturer's Certification Form must be signed by a corporate officer of the roofing system manufacturer with the Corporate Seal affixed thereto. C. Product data for each type of product specified include manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. E. For all modified bituminous sheet roofing include independent test data according to ASTM Designation D 5147-97 “Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material”, substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. F. Samples of the following: Minimum, 3-by-5-inch samples of each colored modified bituminous mineral surfaced cap sheet and flashing materials to be exposed as finished roof surface. G. Manufacturer's ISO 9001 Certification. H. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit sample copy of specified roofing manufacturer's “Thirty (30) Year Warranty". I. Manufacture’s Indemnification Agreement. J. Manufacturer’s Inspection Reports: The Roofing System Manufacturer will provide, when the project is in progress the following: 1. Keeping the Architect informed as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Provide jobsite inspections at least two (2) times a week. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 3. Provide detailed weekly written reports to the Architect along with digital photographs of work in progress. All reports and photographs shall be descriptive of actual work in progress and be presented in a pre-approved manner. 4. Reporting to the Architect in writing, any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 5. Confirming, after completion of the project and based on manufacturer's observations and tests, that manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported. 1.7 INSURANCE CERTIFICATION A. Preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged. B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight place to ensure no possibility of significant moisture exposure. C. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on pallets or other raised surface. Stand all roll materials on end. Cover roll goods with a canvas tarpaulin or other breathable material (not polyethylene) D. Do not leave unused rolled goods on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and other moisture sources. E. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when a 40% chance of precipitation is expected. B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. D. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit unit of Work to be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.10 EQUIPMENT SAFEGUARDS A. Proper equipment is to be used to heat roofing membranes. Torches should be equipped with a pilot adjustment, flame height adjustment, 25 to 50 ft. of Approved or listed hose, pressure gauge and regulator. A spark igniter should be used. Torch trolleys and multiple torch head machines should be equipped with listed safety valves. B. Safety caps are to be tied to all propane cylinders and installed on the valves whenever cylinders are not in use. Carts used to transport propane cylinders should be stable. Tall, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 narrow, standing cylinders should be chained against walls or in proper carts. C. The propane cylinder should be adequately sized for the torch used. If frost buildup occurs on propane cylinders and the rate of vapor withdrawal is no longer adequate for operating conditions, the cylinder should not be placed on its side or heated with the torch flame. The hose should be disconnected and a larger cylinder used. Liquid propane cylinders may be of either the vapor withdrawal or liquid withdrawal type. With the vapor withdrawal type, vapor is drawn off from the torch head. Vapor withdrawal cylinders are equipped with female cylinder valves. Liquid withdrawal cylinders transfer the liquid, via a siphon tube, from the cylinder to the torch head where it is vaporized. Liquid withdrawal cylinders have male cylinder valves, which may be equipped with adapters. D. Frost buildup only occurs with vapor withdrawal cylinders. This buildup can be the result of an undersized cylinder or low air temperatures. When vapor is dawn off more quickly than it is replaced, heat is absorbed and frost buildup occurs on the outside of the cylinder. Vapor pressure then further declines. Consequently, liquid withdrawal cylinders are preferred. However, if vapor withdrawal cylinders are used, or if the temperatures are low (below 20°F, -7°C), 40 or 100 lb (18.2 or 45.5 kg) cylinders should be used with larger torches (such as those used in the field of the roof). E. Equipment should be thoroughly inspected and repaired or replaced as needed. Propane cylinders should be inspected for dents. If dents larger than 1 in. (25 mm) in diameter are found, the cylinder should be replaced. Torch and cylinder connectors should be visually inspected and checked for leaks with soap and water solution. An open flame should not be used to test for leaks. F. Leaky equipment should not be used. Regulators adjustments and pressure gauges should be checked to assure they are operable. The vent on the regulator should be checked to assure it is not blocked. If an unstable flame occurs (one which roars loudly and tends to blows itself out), the equipment should be repaired or replaced immediately. G. Propane cylinders should not be hoisted by their valves. Straps placed around the cylinders should be utilized. H. A fire watch should be conducted for at least one hour after torch work has been completed. All roof areas worked on should be checked for hot spots and signs of smoldering. If available, infrared roof scanners should be used. The inside of the building should also be inspected for signs of fire and smoke. All “hot spots” or fires, even if extinguished, should be reported to the fire department. Smoldering may continue after extinguishment, may take place for hours before flaming begins, and may take place in areas unsuspected by the layman. 1.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHING EQUIPMENT A. There should be at least one 10 lb (4.5 kg) multipurpose dry chemical portable extinguisher within 20 ft. (6.1 m) horizontal travel distance of torch-applied roofing equipment. For large roof areas, additional protection such as charged hose lines or additional extinguishers should be provided as practical. 1.12 FUEL HANDING SAFEGUARDS A. Fuel containers, burners and related appurtenances of roofing equipment in which liquefied petroleum gas is used for heating should comply with NFPA58, Standard for Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases. B. All fuel containers should be located at least 10 ft. (3 m) from the burner flame or at least 2 ft. (0.6 m) away when properly insulated from heat or flame. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 1.13 INSTALLATION SAFEGUARDS A. The flame from a hand-held torch should be constantly moved from side to side. The exposed outer surface of the membrane coil should be heated until a slight sheen develops. B. Caution should be used when working around roof openings, penetrations or flashings. Wood nailers, cant strips and metal flashing should not come in direct contact with the flame of the torch. Small detail torches should be used to heat the underside of the membrane away from these areas before securement. C. The torch should not be used in areas where the flame impingement cannot be fully viewed. Back-heat and flop the material when flame is not visible. D. Extreme caution is to be used near penetrations such as exhaust vents. Air conditioning units and ventilating fans should be shut down before torch work is done in surrounding areas. E. Feather seams around details with heated trowel. F. Expansion joints should be filled with mineral wool or ceramic fiber with a steel cover plate below. G. No full-time torches should be used under any circumstances. H. A torch stand is to be used to direct the flame upward when momentarily not in use. I. The cylinder valve should be closed to burn off propane in the line before shutting of the torch head. The gas supply should be shut off whenever a propane odor is detected. J. Torches should not be used near gas lines, electrical wires or flammable liquids during roof construction. K. When foam plastic, kraft-faced glass fiber or wood fiber insulation or cant strips, or plastic fasteners are to be used, they should be covered with a minimum 40 lb base sheet adhered with hot asphalt before the torch applied membrane is installed. L. Torch flames should not come in contact with exposed plastic roofing cement. 1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing with related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof accessories, flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion, and adjacent construction activity. Phased construction will not be accepted. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: “Thirty (30) year NDL Warranty", signed by a corporate officer of the corporation of modified bitumen sheet roofing system manufacturer, will pay all authorized cost or repair to the roof membrane system necessary to stop any leaks which occur during a Thirty (30) year period from the date of completion. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. When a particular performance standard is specified, it shall be indicative of a minimum standard required. Products not meeting these minimum performance requirements, shall not be bid and will not be considered. B. Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet, bitumen, membrane flashings from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. 2.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41, V.O.C compliant. B. Asphalt Roofing Mastic: ASTM D 4586, Type II, V.O.C compliant. 2.3 SHEET MATERIALS A. Modified Torch Base Sheet: SBS (styrene-butadiene-styrene), rubber membrane, reinforced with dual fiberglass scrim designed for torching applications, conforming to the following minimum performance requirements according to ASTM D-5147 @ 77° F: Machine Cross Machine Direction Direction Tensile Strength 210 lbf/in. 210 lbf/in. Elongation 4 % 4 % Tear Strength 250 lbf/in. 250 lbf/in. Low Temp. Flex. Passes -30° F Thickness 110 mils B. Modified Bitumen Sheet Membrane: mineral surfaced SBS (styrene-butadiene-styrene), rubber modified roof membrane; reinforced with a dual fiberglass scrim designed for torching applications, conforming to the following minimum performance requirements according to ASTM D-6162, Type III Grade G and ASTM D-5147 @ 77° F: Machine Cross Machine Direction Direction Tensile Strength 310 lbf/in. 310.lbf/in. Elongation 6.0% 6.0% Tear Strength 510.lbf 510.lbf Low Temp. Flex. Passes -40° F Thickness 195 mils Solar reflectance .73 Emittance .89 SRI 90 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive modified bitumen sheet roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 Installer. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing modified bitumen sheet roofing system. B. Protect other work from spillage of modified bitumen roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing system work. C. Code Compliance: Where required, install and test modified bitumen sheet roofing system to comply with governing regulations and specified requirements. D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work. E. Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. Do not permit phased construction. Complete application of roofing plies, cap sheet and flashing in a continuous operation. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. F. Water Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and any insulation. Provide temporary covering of two plies of No. 15 roofing felt set in adhesive; remove at beginning of next day's work. Seal off flutes in metal decking along cut off edge. Pull membrane free or cut to expose the insulation when resuming work, and remove the insulation sheets used for fill-in. 3.3 TORCH BASE SHEET UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Install one layer of SBS Torch Base Sheet to properly prepared substrate where indicated, Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each area of roofing. B. To a suitable substrate, lay out the roll in the course to be followed and unroll six (6) feet. C. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn-off backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond. D. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re-roll the first six (6) feet and bond it in a similar fashion. E. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of four (4) inches and end laps of eight inches. F. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal. G. Extend underlayment two (2) inches beyond top edges of cants at wall and projection bases. H. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projections details. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 3.4 MINERAL SURFACED SBS MODIFIED MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Over the SBS Torch Base Sheet underlayment, lay out the roll in the course to be followed and unroll six (6) feet. Seams for the top layer of modified membrane will be staggered over the SBS Torch Base Sheet seams. B. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn-off backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond. C. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re-roll the first six (6) feet and bond it in a similar fashion. D. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of four (4) inches and end laps of eight (8) inches. E. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal. 3.5 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. All base flashings are to be installed and completed on a daily basis. No condition should exist that will permit moisture entering behind, around, or under the roof or flashing membrane. B. Prepare all walls, penetrations and expansion joints to be flashed and where shown on the drawings, with asphalt primer at the rate of .75 to 1 gallon per square. Allow primer to dry tack free. C. The heat fused flashing membrane will be adhered to an underlying base ply of Self- Adhering SBS Fire Retardant membrane where indicated, or Torch Base Sheet nailed-off at all vertical surfaces where shown on the drawings. D. The entire sheet of flashing membrane must be heated to the point when surface bitumen melts and begins to flow. Both surfaces along the lap areas shall be heated. The heated area will immediately be worked into place and securely bonded. E. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with an additional ply of 8-inch wide flashing membrane. All laps must be tested with a round nosed trowel putting pressure against the side lap to insure that a complete, positive bond has been achieved and to protect against a superficially closed lap. F. After the laps have been tested, and a complete positive bond has been achieved, the applicator shall heat the seam edge and trowel along the seam edge. Troweling shall continue until a sloped, beveled edge has been produced. G. Secure top of flashing membrane with termination bar and fasten 8-inches o. c. H. Factory fabricated flashings, cap flashings and similar work to be coordinated with modified bitumen roofing work are specified in other Sections. I. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents to be coordinated with modified bituminous roofing system work, are specified in other Sections. 3.6 PROTECTION A. During execution of work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall provide protection for equipment, materials, inside and outside the building against falling debris, sparks, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 10 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing – 07 52 00 and water. Protection shall be provided in a manner to minimize interference, interruption, and inconvenience to other trades. B. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. C. All workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any application work where they may be walking on the in-place roofing membrane. Precautions shall be taken to protect the membrane and to maintain a clean appearance. Protect roofing during remainder of construction period. D. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report, with copies to Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. 3.7 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Installer, installer of associated work. Owner, Architect, roofing system manufacturer's representative and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system. B. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party attending. C. The Owner, Architect and Roofing System Manufacturer reserve the right to request a certified photographic and recorded thermographic scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The thermographic scan and photographic records shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor free of charge. D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense. E. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. F. The Contractor is to notify the Owner upon completion of corrections. G. Following the final inspection, acceptance will be made in writing by the material manufacturer. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove drippage of the bitumen adhesives from all walls, windows, floors, ladders, and finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 SECTION 07 60 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials to fabricate and install the following. 1. Gutters & Downspouts. 2. Fascia and edge metal. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Division 06 Section Rough Carpentry 2. Division 07 Section Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 5. ASTM D692 Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. B. American National Standards Institute and Single Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI) 1. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Testing and Certification Listing of Shop Fabricated Edge Metal. C. Warnock Hersey International, Inc., Middleton, WI (WH) D. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC) E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 1. Latest Edition Architectural Sheet Metal Manual G. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual H. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 1. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturer's specification data sheets for each product. 2. Metal material characteristics and installation recommendations. 3. Submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or fabrication so that equivalent colors to those specified can be approved. B. Samples: Submit two (2) samples, illustrating typical metal edge, coping, gutters, fascia extenders for material and finish. C. Shop Drawings 1. For manufactured and shop fabricated gravel stops, fascia, scuppers, and all other sheet metal fabrications. 2. Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashing, terminations, and installation details. 3. Indicate type, gauge and finish of metal. D. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Design Loads: Any material submitted must be accompanied by a report signed by an approved testing laboratory. This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the wind uplift and perimeter attachment requirements according to ASCE 7-05 and ANSI/SPRI ES-1. Submittals without testing agency approval will be rejected for non-conformance. B. A letter from an officer of the manufacturing company certifying that the materials furnished for this project are the same as represented in tests and supporting data. C. Mill production reports certifying that the steel thicknesses are within allowable tolerances of the nominal or minimum thickness or gauge specified. D. Certification of work progress inspection. Refer to Quality Assurance Article below. E. Certifications: 1. Submit certification that the perimeter/edge metal products being used on this project have been tested according to ANSI/SPRI ES-1 criteria. Certification submitted must be provided by either NRCA, Independent Test Agency or the perimeter/edge metal manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage an experienced roofing contractor specializing in sheet metal flashing work with a minimum of five (5) years experience. B. Maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on the job-site at all times during installation. Foreman must have a minimum of five (5) years experience with the installation of similar system to that specified. C. Upon request fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of financial responsibility. The Owner's representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible. B. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and storage requirements for pre-formed metal edge system. 1.9 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Wind Uplift Pressures: Metal edge system must meet minimum design load pressures as determined by ASCE 7. Provide completed calculations to show ANSI/SPRI ES-1 test results meet the minimum wind uplift pressures. B. Thermal expansion and contraction: 1. Completed metal edge flashing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion and contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling, producing excess stress on structure, anchors or fasteners, or reducing performance ability. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer covering all of the following criteria. Multiple warranties are not acceptable. 1. Pre-finished metal material shall require a written twenty (20)-year non- prorated warranty covering fade, chalking and film integrity. The material shall not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D2244 or chalking excess of 8 units per ASTM D659. If either occurs material shall be replaced per warranty, at no cost to the Owner. 2. Changes: Changes or alterations in the edge metal system without prior written consent from the manufacturer shall render the system unacceptable for a warranty. 3. Warranty shall commence on date of substantial completion or final payment, whichever is agreed by contract. 4. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized written warranty assuring that all sheet metal work including caulking and fasteners to be watertight and secure for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the building. Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop, and make good any damage to other work or equipment caused by such leaks or the repairs thereof. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Common Product Requirements." B. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 2.2 ACCEPTABLE FABRICATORS A. Any fabricator which has been certified by the NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) to fabricate their ANSI/SPRI ES-1 tested profiles on their Gravel-Stop, Metal Edge, Fascia and Coping Cap products. B. Provide a product carrying a signed and sealed Performance Test Report from a testing company for ANSI/SPRI ES-1 on their Gravel-Stop, Metal Edge, Fascia and Coping Cap products. C. Any fabricator with a Gravel-Stop, Metal Edge, Fascia and Coping Cap products that has been tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 standards. Proof of this testing must be provided via a report signed and sealed by a qualified third party testing agency. This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the wind uplift and perimeter attachment requirements according to ASCE 7-05 and ANSI/SPRI ES-1. Substitution requests submitted without licensed engineer approval will be rejected for non-conformance. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Materials: 1. Exposed base metal material: a. Aluminum, ASTM B209, alloy 3105-H14, in thickness of .040 &.050" nom. 2. Unexposed base metal material: a. Zinc-coated steel, ASTM A653, coating designation G-90, in thickness of 0.0299 nom./ 22 gauge, 36" to 48" by coil length, chemically treated, commercial or lock-forming quality. 3. Minimum gauge of steel or thickness of Aluminum to be specified in accordance with Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. recommendations. B. Finishes: 1. Exposed surfaces for coated panels: a. Steel Finishes: KYNAR 500 FINISH, COLOR AS SELECTED BY ARFCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURED STANDARD RANGE. Weathering finish as referred by National Coil Coaters Association (NCCA). PROPERTY TEST METHOD FLUOROCARBON* Pencil ASTM D3363 HB-H Hardness NCCA II-2 Bend ASTM D-4145 O-T NCCA II-19 Cross-Hatch ASTM D3359 no loss of Adhesion adhesion Gloss ASTM D523 25+/-5% (60° angle) Reverse ASTM D2794 no cracking or Impact loss of adhesion February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 Nominal ASTM D1005 Thickness Primer 0.2 mils Topcoat 0.8 mils TOTAL 1.0 mils * Subject to minimum quantity requirements b. Color shall be selected by Architect from standard colors. 2. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for mill finish flashing, fascia, and coping cap, shall be as shipped from the mill. 3. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for anodized aluminum flashing, fascia, and coping cap, shall be as shipped from mill. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Metal Primer: Zinc chromate type. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586 C. Sealant: Tuff-Stuff One part polyurethane sealant. D. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, No15 asphalt saturated roofing felt. E. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. F. Fasteners: 1. Corrosion resistant screw fastener as recommended by metal manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. 2. Fastening shall conform to Factory Mutual requirements or as stated on section details, whichever is more stringent. G. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: Material as specified for system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION, GENERAL A. Refer to Division 07 Section Common Work Results for Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Isolate metal products from dissimilar metals, masonry or concrete with bituminous paint, tape, or slip sheet. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive reactions. 3.3 GENERAL A. Secure fascia to wood nailers at the bottom edge with a continuous cleat. B. Fastening of metal to walls and wood blocking shall comply with building code standards. C. All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of sheet metal installation, whether specifically indicated or not, shall be provided and of the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 same material as item to which applied. D. Allow sufficient clearances for expansion and contraction of linear metal components. Secure metal using fasteners as required by the system. Exposed face fastening will be rejected. 3.4 INSPECTION A. Verify that curbs are solidly set and nailing strips located. B. Perform field measurements prior to fabrication. C. Coordinate work with work of other trades. D. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign matter. E. Commencement of installation shall be considered acceptance of existing conditions. 3.5 SHOP-FABRICATED SHEET METAL A. Metal work shall be shop fabricated to configurations and forms in accordance with recognized sheet metal practices. B. Hem exposed edges. C. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drip. D. Lap corners with adjoining pieces fastened and set in sealant. E. Form joints for gravel stop fascia system, coping cap with a 3/8" opening between sections. Back the opening with an internal drainage plate formed to the profile of fascia piece. F. Install sheet metal to comply with referenced ANSI/SPRI, SMACNA and NRCA standards. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Replace damaged work than cannot be restored by normal cleaning methods. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 3.8 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system. B. Inspect work and flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. D. Notify the Contractor upon completion of corrections. E. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 60 00 installation from the roofing system manufacturer. F. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Firestopping – 07 84 00 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011). B. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT, for submittal procedures. B. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit VOC content documentation for all non-preformed materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A. Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Firestopping – 07 84 00 2.3 FIRESTOPPING FOR FLOOR-TO-FLOOR, WALL-TO-FLOOR, AND WALL-TO-WALL JOINTS A. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Walls and Floors: 1. Floor to Floor Joints: 2. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete/Concrete Masonry Wall to Concrete Floor: 3. Concrete/Concrete Masonry Wall to Wall Joints: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0017; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. B. Gypsum Board Walls: 1. Wall to Wall Joints: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0067; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 2. Top of Wall Joints at Underside of Flat Concrete: b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1068; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. 3. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete Over Metal Deck, Wall Parallel to Ribs: c. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0049; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. 4. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete Over Metal Deck, Wall Perpendicular to Ribs, Cut to Fit Ribs: 2.3 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYPSUM BOARD WALLS A. Blank Openings: 1. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3334; Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve. 2.5 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Joint Sealants – 07 92 00 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Joint backings and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. C. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant. D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2015. B. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. D. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2000 (Reapproved 2011). E. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. F. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes the following. 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4. Substrates the product should not be used on. B. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start of installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s) to test each combination of sealant, substrate, backing, and accessories. 1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794. 2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087. 3. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work. 4. Deliver to manufacturer sufficient samples for testing. 5. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or techniques not indicated in product data submittals. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Joint Sealants – 07 92 00 6. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not older than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on the drawings, unless specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Wall expansion and control joints. b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. c. Joints between different exposed materials. d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry. e. Other joints indicated below. 2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b. Other joints indicated below. 3. Do not seal the following types of joints. a. Intentional weepholes in masonry. b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing device. c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls. B. Exterior Joints: Use nonsag non-staining silicone sealant, Type 6, unless otherwise indicated. C. Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant; Type 1. 2.2 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL A. Sealants and Primers: Provide products with levels of volatile organic compound (VOC) content. 2.3 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Type 4- Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248. 3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants. B. Type 2 - Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multicomponent; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. C. Type 1- Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non- staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Joint Sealants – 07 92 00 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. E. Concrete Floor Joints That Will Be Exposed in Completed Work: Test joint filler in inconspicuous area to verify that it does not stain or discolor slab. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. E. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. F. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field quality control inspection/testing as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY ASSURANCE article. B. Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures as indicated for original installation. END OF SECTION Division 8 Openings February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames – 08 11 13 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE. B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014. C. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013. E. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011. F. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2014. (ANSI/BHMA A156.115) G. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009 (ANSI). H. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames – 08 11 13 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 – Change Management. 2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating thickness interior, G90 exterior 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 3 - Extra Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level A, Model 2 - Seamless. 2. Core: Polyurethane. 3. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90. 4. Insulating Value: U-value of.1, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 where indicated. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. 2.4 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100), Level 2 and 3 Door Frames: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum thickness. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames – 08 11 13 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. C. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Removable type, of profile similar to jambs. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed. B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.6 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Touch up damaged factory finishes. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 4 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames – 08 11 13 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Overhead Coiling Doors – 08 33 23 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling doors, insulated slats, operating hardware, fire-rated and exterior, manual chain operation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. B. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Cylinder cores and keys. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Details of construction and fabrication. 4. Installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent construction. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Doors: Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: info@overheaddoor.com. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Overhead Coiling Doors – 08 33 23 B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 31 14. 2.2 COILING DOORS A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain. 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 60 psf, without undue deflection or damage to components. 2. Finish: Field Painted. 3. Manual hand chain lift operation. 4. Mounting: Within framed opening. B. Fire-Rated Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain; conform to NFPA 80. 1. Oversized Openings: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of fire rated units and operating hardware assembly. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking insulated slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors. B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. C. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In addition, install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Overhead Coiling Doors – 08 33 23 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 4 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts – 08 43 13 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestop at system junction with structure. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. D. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Hardware items other than specified in this section. E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2015. C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014. F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013. G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 4 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts – 08 43 13 E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 70 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING A. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance Tested, Center-Set Style: 2.2 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class II natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 2. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. 3. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 4. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 7. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 8. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 4 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts – 08 43 13 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing stops: Flush. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. B. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Install hardware using templates provided. J. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 4 of 4 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts – 08 43 13 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Door Hardware – 08 71 00 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for aluminum and hollow metal doors. B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. D. Lock cylinders for doors that hardware is specified in other sections. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including: 1. Integral weatherstripping. 2. Hinges. 3. Exit devices. 4. Push bars and pull handles. 5. Overhead stops. 6. Thresholds. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6). B. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware will be installed upon. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL A. Provide hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors, Except Hinges: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 4. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Door Hardware – 08 71 00 5. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware and control components and to building power connection. 2.2 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 3. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. C. Keying: Grand master keyed. D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch". 2.3 HINGES A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges. 2.4 PUSH/PULLS A. Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6. 1. Provide push and pull on doors not specified to have lockset, latchset, exit device, or auxiliary lock. 2. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces. 2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. C. Keying: Grand master keyed. D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch". 2.6 FLUSHBOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Manual Flushbolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over-size doors. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Door Hardware – 08 71 00 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. PART 4 HARDWARE SETS 4.1 HARDWARE SETS - GENERAL A. These Hardware Sets indicate requirements for single doors of that type, with conditional requirements for pairs and other situations. B. Pairs of Swinging Doors: Provide one of each specified item on each leaf unless specifically stated otherwise. Treat pairs as two active leaves unless otherwise indicated. C. HW-CYL: Doors Whose Hardware is Specified in Other Sections But Which Must Be Keyed To Building System: 1. Lock Cylinder, Mortise, keyed to building system. 4.2 SWING DOORS -- NOT REQUIRING KEY LOCKING A. HW-1: Push/Pull, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Closer. 2. Push/Pull. 4.3 SWING DOORS -- LOCKABLE, MAY BE LEFT UNLOCKED, KEY NOT REQUIRED TO LOCK A. HW-10: Office, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Lockset, Office. 2. Pair: One leaf inactive, with manual flush bolts. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 4 Glazing – 08 80 00 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS (Not Used) 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. F. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014. G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. H. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2012a. I. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. J. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. C. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of typical window assembly including glass and air barrier and vapor retarder seal. B. Locate where directed by Architect. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 4 Glazing – 08 80 00 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN - INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, with Low-E coating. 1. Application: All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Between-lite space filled with air. B. Basis of Design: PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 1. Outboard Lite: 2 Layers Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Low-E Coating: PPG Solarban 70XL on #2 surface. 2. 1/2" Air Space 3. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick. C. Substitution Procedures: See Section 01 31 14 – Change Management. 2.2 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Performance Criteria: Select type and thickness of glass to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. 2.3 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3. 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and Kind FT. 3. Tinted Types: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with requirements indicated for wind load design regardless of thickness indicated. B. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2. Plastic Interlayer: 3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the tong-less horizontal method. 2.4 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.5 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 4 Glazing – 08 80 00 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Butyl Sealant, Type A: Single component; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A, Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color. C. Polyurethane Sealant, Type B: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non- bleeding; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 20 to 35; color as selected. D. Silicone Sealant, Type C: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected. 2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; hardness range of 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Width: As required for application. 2. Thickness: As required for application. 3. Spacer Rod Diameter: As required for application. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option I; color as selected. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 4 of 4 Glazing – 08 80 00 3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Louvers – 08 91 00 SECTION 08 91 00 LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2012. C. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices; 2013. D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 – Document Management, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: 1. Airolite Company, LLC; www.airolite.com. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; www.awv.com. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc; www.c-sgroup.com. 4. Pottorff; www.pottorff.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 – Change Management February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Louvers – 08 91 00 2.2 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511. 1. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 2. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 3. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Formed Aluminum: Formed sheet, ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). 2.4 FINISHES A. KYNAR 500/HYLAR 5000 FINISH B. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw attached; installed on inside face of louver frame. B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 14 gage, 0.0641 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, diagonal design. C. Insect Screen: 56" X 56" size aluminum mesh. D. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel. E. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one piece per location. F. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant. D. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. 3.3 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Louvers – 08 91 00 B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION Division 9 Finishes February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies – 09 21 16 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Gypsum sheathing. F. Gypsum wallboard. G. Joint treatment and accessories. H. Textured finish system. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. D. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. E. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2012. B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014. C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014. H. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013. I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014. J. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. K. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. L. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies – 09 21 16 M. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. 2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. D. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as indicated on drawings. 2.3 BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. B. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies – 09 21 16 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges: Square, for vertical application. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 1 inch. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. C. Water-Resistive Barrier: Plastic sheet complying with ICC-ES AC38. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Chemical hardening type compound. E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. F. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain. G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.033 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium plated for exterior locations. H. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.2 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements. B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 4 of 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies – 09 21 16 3.4 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 1. Paper-Faced Sheathing: Immediately after installation, protect from weather by application of water-resistive barrier. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. 3.7 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated. 3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. D. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. 3.08 TEXTURE FINISH A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Galvanizing – 09 80 01 SECTION 09 80 01 GALVANIZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This specification is the preferred method for galvanizing hardware and structural steel items. B. The requirements herein are a minimum. C. Strict compliance with these requirements will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of adopting whatever additional provisions may be necessary to insure the successful completion of the work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 12 00, “Structural Steel Framing” 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A6 - “General Requirement for Delivery of Rolled-Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use” B. ASTM A90 - “Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles” C. ASTM A120 - “Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) for Welded and Seamless Pipe” D. ASTM A123 - “Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips” E. ASTM A143 - “Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement” F. ASTM A153 - “Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware” G. ASTM A384 - “Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies” H. ASTM A385 - “Rec. Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)” I. ASTM A780 - “Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings” J. ASTM E376 - “Rec. Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy- Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods” 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacture's published literature for products to be used. B. Submit name, address and phone number of galvanizing company, with name of contact person. C. Submit qualifications of company and personal responsible for surface preparation. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 PREPARATION OF MATERIAL A. To minimize warpage and distortion, fabrication shall be per ASTM A384. B. Cold-worked material shall be handled per ASTM A143 to safeguard against embrittlement. C. A stamped metal tag shall be wired to all fabricated structural steel, pipe, etc., before galvanizing to assure identification after galvanizing. D. All structural steel, pipe, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned by the fabricator after fabrication and before galvanizing. This cleaning shall include removal of all weld splatter, slag and flux deposit. E. All mill scale, rust, oil and other foreign matter shall be removed by the galvanizer before galvanizing. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Galvanizing – 09 80 01 2.2 GALVANIZING A. Material shall be hot-dip galvanized as follows, unless otherwise specified on the drawings: 1. Structural steel shapes, plates, pipe, grating and bars per ASTM A123, and/or A120. 2. Hardware, bolts, nuts, etc., per ASTM A153. 3. Each component shall be completely submerged in the molten zinc. If multi-dipping is necessary for complete coverage, a procedure which gives the minimum amount of warping shall be used. 4. Components of bolted assemblies shall be dipped separately with bolts removed. 5. Each component shall be brushed or wiped after dipping to remove flux, icicles, dross or any irregularity in the zinc coating. 6. Components shall be checked for straightness after dipping and shall be straightened if warped. Permissible variations in cross section, flatness, and straightness of components shall be per ASTM A6 except that the tolerances permitted for 3-inch structural shapes also apply to sizes 1 1/2 inches to 3 inches. 7. After galvanizing, internal threads in nuts and tapped holes shall be retapped oversize as follows when the external threads on the bolts or matching member are to be galvanized. OVERSIZE OF INTERNAL THREAD BOLT DIAMETER DIAMETER INCHES Under 5/8” 1/64 5/8” and Over 1/32 2.3 USING COLD GALVANIZING COMPOUND A. Preparation of the damaged surface is critical. The following general guidelines shall apply: 1. Surfaces to be reconditioned with cold galvanizing compound shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. 2. Blast clean the surface to near-white metal, in accordance with SSPC-SP10 (1 to 2 mil (25 to 50 um) anchor pattern), as a minimum. Where circumstances do not allow blast cleaning, it is permissible to power disk sand areas to be repaired to bright metal. To ensure that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected, surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged galvanized coating. The method and extent of surface preparation shall be determined by the Engineer. 3. If the area to be reconditioned includes welds, first remove all flux residue and weld spatter of a size or type that cannot be removed by blast cleaning by mechanical means, that is, chipping, etc. 4. Brush-apply the cold galvanizing compound to the prepared area. Apply the compound as recommended by the manufacturer employing multiple passes to achieve a dry film thickness as specified in Section 05100, paragraph 3.01(B). 5. Take thickness measurements with either a magnetic or electromagnetic gage to ensure that the applied coating thickness is as specified. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. The adherence of the zinc coating to the surface of the base metal shall be determined by cutting or prying with the point of a heavy knife, applied with sufficient pressure to remove a portion of the coating. The adherence shall be considered inadequate if the coating flakes off in the form of a layer of skin so as to expose the base metal in advance of the knife point. Testing carried out at edges or corners (points of lowest coating adherence) shall not be used to determine adherence of coating. Likewise, removal of small particles of the coating by paring or whittling shall not be used to determine failures. B. The distribution of the zinc coating shall be determined by visual inspection. Except for local excess coating thickness, which would interfere with the use of the product, rejection for poor distribution shall be made only for plainly visible excess coating not related to design factors February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Galvanizing – 09 80 01 such as holes, joints, or special drainage problems. If, in the opinion of the examiner, visual examination is not conclusive, the distribution of zinc can be determined by the use of a magnetic thickness gauge after a sufficient number of readings (not less than 10), is taken at each end and in the middle of the piece being examined. C. The average weight of coating shall be determined by magnetic thickness gauge where its use is applicable. Where thickness measurement is not feasible, the coating weight shall be determined as specified in Table I (ASTM specifications). PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory- finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 3. Surfaces inside cabinets. 4. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings. 5. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco. 7. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS). 8. Glass. 9. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated. 10. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2012. B. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 2007. C. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; 2013. D. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. C. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: PPG Industries. 2. Glidden Professional, a product of PPG Architectural Coatings: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. D. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 E. Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats. 2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats; where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically: 1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum. 2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum. 3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum. 4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located. D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2- ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2- dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. F. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. 2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint E-OP - All Exterior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete, concrete masonry, brick, cement board, primed wood, and primed metal. 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer recommended by manufacturer. 3. Top Coat(s): Styrene Acrylic Latex Water Repellent. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 4 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 B. Paint E-TR-C - Transparent Finish on Concrete Floors, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. 2 coats sealer. 2. Sealer: Water Based for Concrete Floors; MPI #99. C. Paint WE-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. PPG Speedhide Exterior Latex Wood Primer 6- 609 (WTF 3.2 mils / DFT 2.0 mil per coat). 2. Two coats; PPG Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat 6-650XI (WTF 4.0 mils / DFT 2.0 mils per coat).. D. Paint CE-OP-3A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. PPG Pitt-Glaze Duty Acrylic Block Filler 16-90 2. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel; PPG Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat 6- 650XI (WFT 4.0 mils / DFT 1.5 mils per coat).. E. Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer 6-212 spot prime rusted or damaged areas as needed ( MWF 3.6 mils/MDF 1.6 mils). 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; Industrial Enamel 7-282 (WMF 4.4 mils/MDF 2.0 mils per coat).. F. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____. G. Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat PPG Speedhide Galvanized Primer 6-209. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; 7-282 (WFT 4.4 mils/DFT 2.0 mils per coat). 2.4 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint I-OP - All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete, concrete masonry, brick, wood, plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex; MPI #143-148. 3. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. B. Paint I-OP-HD - Heavy Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including gypsum board, plaster, concrete, concrete masonry, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum. 1. Applications: See Finish Schedule. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer; primer may be omitted if top coat manufacturer approves. 3. Top Coat(s): High-Build Epoxy, Flat, Self-Priming; MPI #120. 4. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen at all locations. 5. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. C. Paint I-OP-DF - Dry Fall: Metals; exposed structure and overhead-mounted services in utilitarian spaces, including shop primed steel deck, structural steel, metal fabrications, galvanized ducts, galvanized conduit, and galvanized piping. 1. Shop primer by others. 2. One top coat; white. 3. Top Coat: Alkyd Dry Fall; MPI #55, 89, 225. D. Paint I-TR-C - Transparent Finish on Concrete Floors, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. 2 coats sealer. 2. Sealer: First Coat Kure-N-Seal at 1 gallon/200 sf. Two coats Kure-N-Seal at 1 gallon / 400 sf. E. Paint CI-OP-2A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat: February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 5 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 1. One coat of block filler. PPG Speedhide Interior/ Exterior Latex Block Filler 6-7 in dry areas; or Heavy Duty Block Filler PPG Pitt Glaze Acrylic Block Filler 16-90 in areas subject to moisture or high humididy. 2. Flat: One coat of alkyd enamel; PPG Speedhide Interior Alkyd Semi-GLoss 6- 1110XI or where scheduled for epoxy paint, provide block filler and 2 coats of PPG Aquapon WB Water Based Epoxy 98-1 Series ( 3.0 mils ). F. Paint CI-OP-3Af - Concrete Alkyd Floor Enamel: Painted Saftey Color (Yellow ) 2 Coat: 1. One coat of PPG Breakthroough! 150 Interior/Exterior Satin Water - Borne Acrylic V57-410. 2. Two coats PPG Breackthrough! 150 Interior / Exterior Satin Water-Borne Acrylic V57-410:. G. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat: PPG Speedhide Interior Latex Primer 6-2 (WFT 3.6 mils / DTF 1.0 mil). 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; PPG Speedhide Interior Latex Eggsheel 6- 411 (WFT 3.6 mils / 1.4 mils per coat). 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 6. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 6 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. J. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer. K. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. L. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. M. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. N. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. O. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. P. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. Q. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. R. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. S. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces. T. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 7 of 7 Painting and Coating – 09 90 00 C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. G. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. H. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. I. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. J. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. K. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.4 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting – 09 91 10 SECTION 09 91 10 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Shall govern work required for surface preparation and shop prime painting as required to complete the project. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Not Used 1.3 REFERENCES A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1. SSPC-SP-6, Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP-10, Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. 3. NSF Standard 61 B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface preparation, application procedures and dry mil thicknesses. B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by the City Engineer. 1.5 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the surface preparation and application of shop primers on ferrous metals, excluding stainless steels, as specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All painting materials shall be equal to those manufactured by the Tnemec Company, Inc. or equal. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of Tnemec products (unless otherwise noted) and Tnemec recommendations for application. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule together with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted to the City Engineer in writing for approval within 30 days after the signing of the Contract Agreement. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the fabrication site in unbroken packages, bearing the manufacturer's brand and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before using. C. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. D. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. 2.2 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. All colors will be selected by the City Engineer based on the color shown herein. The following surfaces shall have the types of paints specified below applied at the minimum dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat. B. The following types of paints by Tnemec, unless otherwise indicated, have been used as a February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting – 09 91 10 basis for the paint schedule: 1. Hydro-Zinc (Series 91 H2O 2000) – organic vehicle zinc-rich (NSF Standard 61 Certified)N/A 2. Tnemec-Zinc (Series 90-97) – zinc-rich urethane primer/ Carbozinc 859 C. All ferrous metals shall be shop coated according to the following areas of placement: 1. Submerged a. 1 Coat Series 91 H2O 2000 (3.0-5.0 DFT) 2. All Non-Submerged a. 1 Coat Series 90-97 (3.0-5.0 DFT) Carbozinc 859 D. Non-Primed Surfaces – Gears, bearing surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. E. Compatibility of Coating Systems – Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and finish coats specified in Section 09 96 00 for use in the field and which are recommended for use together. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRIMING A. Non-submerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning, immediately prior to priming. B. Submerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC-SP-10, Near White Blast Cleaning, immediately prior to priming. C. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease and other foreign material before priming. D. Shop prime in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommendations. PART 4 MEASUREMENT 4.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 SECTION 09 96 00 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Description A. Preparing surfaces, providing adequate conditions for proper workmanship, and furnishing and applying the protective coating materials required for metallic, concrete, masonry and plastic surfaces. B. Color code painting of piping, equipment and piping identification signs and markers. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for protective coatings. Include payment for protective coatings in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A13.1 – Color Schedule B. ANSI/AWWA C213 – Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. C. Federal Specification TT-P-28 – Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting 1200 degrees F. D. Federal Standard 595A – Federal Standard Colors. E. Military Specification DOD-P-23236 – Paint Coating Systems, Steel Ship Tank, Fuel and Salt Water Ballast, Class 2. F. NSF Standard 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. G. SSPC-PA 1 – Paint Application Specification No. 1 - Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. H. SSPC-PA 2 – Paint Application Specification No. 2 – Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. I. SSPC-Paint 16 – Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or Dark Red) Paint. J. SSPC-SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning. K. SSPC-SP 2 – Hand Tool Cleaning. L. SSPC-SP 3 – Power Tool Cleaning. M. SSPC-SP 5/NACE 1 – White Metal Blast Cleaning. N. SSPC-SP 6/ NACE 3 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. O. SSPC-SP 7/NACE 4 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. P. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 – Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. Q. SSPC-SP 11 – Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. R. SSPC-VIS 1-89 – Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. S. SSPC-VIS 3 – Visual Standard for Power-and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel. T. SSPC-QP 1 – Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors U. SSPC-QP 2 - Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Painting Contractors to Remove Hazardous Paint. V. SSPC-SP12/NACE 5 – Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High-and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Paint, coatings, or finishes as used in this Section include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxies, polyurethanes, acrylics, zincs, and other protective coatings with the exceptions of galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. B. DFT means minimum dry film thickness. C. VOC means Volatile Organic Components 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See the Drawings and other Specifications to determine how coatings under this Section will be applied. Paint or coat new and modified surfaces in conformance with this Section. B. Coating system schedules summarize surfaces to be coated, required surface preparation, and coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on Drawings are used to show exceptions to schedules, to show or extend limits of coating systems, or to clarify or February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 show details for application of coating systems. C. Do not apply protective coatings to the following surfaces unless specifically named or shown to be coated: 1.Concrete. 2.Stainless steel, bronze, or brass 3.Machined surfaces. 4.Grease fittings. 5.Glass. 6.Equipment nameplates. 7.Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces. 8.Galvanized steel electrical conduit and associated galvanized and factory-coated junction boxes and electrical panels. 9.Galvanized surfaces inside buildings and not exposed to view. 10.Manhole and valve covers and rings, storm water inlet gratings, covers, and frames. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 02 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit the following information at least 10 days prior to protective coating work. 1.Coating Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list naming the manufacturer and the coating number, keyed to the coating systems described in this Section. Submit the list prior to or at the time of sample submittal. 2.Paint Manufacturer’s Information: For each coating system to be used, submit the following data: a.Paint manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b.Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c.Paint manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations on surface preparation, application and curing. d.Colors available for each product, where applicable. e.Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings, where applicable. f.Material Safety Data Sheets for each product used. g.VOC of each paint or coating proposed, stated in grams per liter. 3.Samples a.Submit color samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials on 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch sheet metal or heavy cardstock. Have each sheet completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type, and color. b.Provide two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the City Engineer from the manufacturer’s standard color sheets. If custom -mixed colors are indicated, prepare color samples using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the City Engineer. c.Submit one 15-pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Submit five (5) references which show that the painting Contractor has previous successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the painting Contractor provided the protective coating. As an alternative, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 1. B. For any project which involves removal or repair of lead based paints, submit proof of certification in accordance with SSPC-QP 2. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL RESTRICTIONS A. Ventilate area where coating is being applied. Post and enforce NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME signs until coating has cured. B. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles (860 1x) measured mid-height at substrate surface. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 C. Restrict worker access and construction traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. D. Comply with all applicable OSHA confined space entry regulations including but not limited to OSHA Permit-Required Confined Space Standard 1910.146. 1.9 WARRANTY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Warranty Inspection: 1.A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating and painting. The Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer must attend the inspection. At the option of the City, the City may be represented by a NACE certified coating inspector. 2.The City Engineer may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. Cancellation of the warranty inspection does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 3.Repair defective work discovered during the warranty inspection in accordance with these Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COATINGS CRITERIA A. Suitability: Use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Recommendations must be accompanied by test methods used to determine suitability and results of these tests. B. Compatibility: In any coating system, use only compatible materials from a single manufacturer. Give particular attention to compatibility of primers, intermediate coats and finish coats. If necessary, apply a barrier coat or tie coat between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. C. Containers: Supply coating materials in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all plainly legible at the time of use. D. Colors: Use colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint as indicated on the coating schedules or as selected by the City Engineer. Make each coat a contrasting shade to the previous and following coats to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. The City Engineer will select finish colors from the manufacturer’s standard color samples. E. Substitute or Equal Products: 1.To establish equality under Section 01 31 14 – Change Management, furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent to or better in the following properties: a.Resistance to abrasion and physical damage. b.Resistance to chemical attack. c.Life expectancy. d.Ability to recoat in the future. e.Solids content by volume. f.Dry film thickness per coat. g.Compatibility with other coatings. h.Suitability for the intended service. i.Temperature limitations in service and during application. j.Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats. k.Ease of application. l.Ease of repairing damaged areas. m.Stability of colors. n.VOC content expressed in grams per liter. 2.For substitutions, submit protective-coating materials which are standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. Where requested, provide the City Engineer with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 proposed manufacturer’s products, which comply with these requirements. Applications must be in similar service environments to the job being contracted. 2.2 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying many of the specified industrial coating materials. Manufacturers and specific paint designations (numbers) are listed to indicate the required type and quality of coating. Contractors are to base their bid on the use of products supplied by one of the named manufacturers. These named manufacturers are designated to establish a level of acceptable product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as the only manufacturers of products acceptable for use. Other manufacturers will be considered on an individual basis, and may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Section 01 31 14 (Article 1.05) - Substitutions, Section 01 33 02 – Shop Drawings, and this Section. 1.Akzo/International Coatings 2.Ameron International 3.Carboline Coatings Company 4.Hempel Coatings USA, Inc. 5.ICI/Devoe Coatings 6.Sigma Coatings USA, Inc. 7.Tnemec Company 8.Sherwin Williams Co. B. System 1 – Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish Coat: Use a two-component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. As primer, use a rust inhibitive 2-component epoxy coating with minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume. It is common for most epoxies and urethanes to have a minimum 70 solid by volume @ this point. 1.Prime Coat: a.DFT = 4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b.Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC Epoxy, or equal. 2.Finish Coats (one or more): a.DFT = 2-4 mils (50-100 microns). b.Products: Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, Tnemec 74, VyGuard V54, Sherwin Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane, or equal. 3.Total System = 6-10 mils (150-250 microns). 4.Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. C. System 2 – Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyurethane: For prime coat, use a 2-component water or solvent-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating manufacturer as a primer for this system. As intermediate coat, use a high-build, 2-component epoxy with a solids content of at least 70 percent by volume. For finish coat, use a 2-component aliphatic acrylic or polyester polyurethane coating material that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and has a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. 1.Prime Coat: a.DFT = 2.5-4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b.Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Carbozinc 11 or D7WB, VyGuard 13F6 or 13F7, Sherwin W illiams Zinc Clad II L.V. or equal. 2.Intermediate Coat: a.DFT = 4-6 mils (100-150 microns). b.Ameron 385, Carboline 893, VyGuard V75, or equal. 3.Finish Coats (one or more): a.DFT = 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b.Ameron 450 GL, Carboline 134 HG, VyGuard V54, Sherwin Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane, or equal. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 4.Total System DFT = 9-14 mils (225-600 microns). 5.Apply intermediate coat in excess of 4 mils (100 microns) DFT using the mist coat/full coat technique to completely cover the inorganic zinc primer and prevent bubbling of the epoxy or polyurethane finish coat. 6.Apply more than one finish coat as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. 7.If inorganic zinc primer is used as a pre-construction or shop-applied primer, and there are damaged or uncoated areas, spot blast the damaged areas with abrasive to an SSPC-SP 10 Near White Metal Standard and then coat with the specified material. D. System 3 – Inorganic Zinc: Use a 2-component water-based inorganic zinc silicate which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film. 1.Prime Coat and Finish Coat (one). a.DFT = 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). b.Products: Ameron Dimetcote 21-5, Carbozinc D7WB, VyGuard 13F6 or 13F7, Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad XI, or equal. 2.Total System DFT = 2.5 to 4.0 mils (65-100 microns). E. System 4 – Acrylic Latex: Use a single component, water-based acrylic latex with a fungicide additive having a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Apply a prime coat as recommended by manufacturer. Select coating material, which is available in ANSI safety colors. 1.Prime Coat a.DFT = 2-3 mils (50-75 microns). b.Products: Carboline D3358, Ameron 148, Hemucryl 1803, Sherwin Williams DTM Primer/Finish. 2.Finish Coats (2 or more): a.DFT = 6-8 mils (150-200 microns). b.Products: Carboline D3359, Ameron 220, Hemucryl 4803, Sherwin Williams DTM Acrylic Coating, or equal. 3.Total System DFT = 8-11 mils (200-275 microns). F. System 5 – Epoxy: Use a two-component, rust inhibitive, polyamide-cured epoxy coating material with a recoatable finish that is available in a wide selection of colors. Use a coating with a minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume and resistant to service conditions of condensing moisture, splash and spillage of lubricating oils, and frequent washdown and cleaning. 1.Prime Coat: a.DFT = 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). b.Products: Ameron 385PA, Carboline 193, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal. 2.Prime Coat (where shop applied): a.DFT = 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). b.Products: Ameron 370, Carboline 193, Tnemec 161, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Recoatable Epoxy Primer, or equal. 3.Finish Coats (2 or more): a.DFT = 5-7 mils (125-175 microns). b.Products: Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Marcopoxy 646 FC, or equal. 4.Total System DFT = 8-12 mils (200-300 microns). G. System 6 – Aliphatic Polyurethane, Fiberglass: Use a two-component aliphatic polyurethane coating material with superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, and resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering. Use a primer, tie coat, or mist coat as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.Prime Coat (Tie Coat): Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal. 2.Finish Coats (2 or more) a.DFT = 2-4 mils (50-75 microns). b.Products: Ameron Amershield, Carbothane 134 HG, Tnemec 74, VyGuard V54, or equal. H. System 7 – Alkyd Enamel: Use a high quality, gloss, or semi-gloss, medium long oil alkyd February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 finish with a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer. 1.Prime Coat: a.DFT = 2-3 mils (50 to 75 microns). b.Products: Ameron 5105, Carboline AD29, Tnemec P4-55, VyGuard 13R29, kem Kromik Universal, or equal. 2.Finish Coats (2 or more): a.DFT = 2-4 mils (50-75 microns). b.Products: Ameron 5401HAS, Carboline GP62, Tnemec 2H, VyGuard V20, Sherwin Williams Industrial Enamel, or equal. 3.Total System DFT = 4-7 mils (100-175 microns). I. System 8 – Aluminum Metal Isolation: Use one coat of a high-build polyamide epoxy paint. 1.Products: Tnemec P66, Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 FC, or equal. 2.Total System DFT = 6-8 mils (150-200 microns). J. System 9 – Aluminum Silicone Resin: Use an aluminum silicone resin material suitable for a service temperature of up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C). Coating must comply with Federal Specification DOD-P-28. 1.Prime Coat and Finish Coat (2 or more): a.DFT = 2-4 mils (50-100 microns). b.Products: Tnemec 39-1061, Ameron 878, Carboline 4631, VyGuard V437A1, Sherwin Williams Steel Master 9500, or equal. c.Total System DFT = 2-4 mils (50-100 microns). K. System 10 – Zinc Rich Epoxy: Use a polyamide Epoxy resin material that contains at least 76 percent zinc in the dried film. 1.Prime Coat and Finish Coat (2 or more): a.DFT = 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). b.Products: Ameron 68HS, Carboline 858, VyGuard 13F4, Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad III, or equal. c.Total System DFT = 3-5 mils (75-125 microns). 2.3 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: The manufacturers listed in this paragraph are materials, which satisfy the material descriptions of this paragraph and have a documented successful record for long-term submerged or severe service conditions. Proposed substitute products will be considered as indicated under paragraphs 2.01.5. B. System 100 – Amine-Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build amine-cured epoxy with a solids content of at least 80 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed in the NSF 61 Standard. 1.Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): a.DFT = 16-19 mils (400 to 475 microns). b.Products: Ameron Amercoat 395, Carboline 891, Tnemec 139, Sherwin Williams Tank Clad H.S., or equal. 2.For coating of valves and non-submerged equipment, DFT = 12-14 mils (300-350 microns). C. System 101 – Polyamide Cured Epoxy: Use a high-build, polyamide epoxy resin with a solids content of at least 56 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in potable water or municipal wastewater. For potable water service, select a coating material listed under NSF 61 Standard. 1.Prime Coat and Finish Coats (3 or more): a.DFT = 12-14 mils (300-350 microns). b.Products: Tnemec 20, VyGuard 78PR, Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 NSF, or equal. D. System 102 – Coal Tar Epoxy: Use a high-build, 2-component amine or polyamide-cured coal tar epoxy with a solids content of at least 68 percent by volume. Use a coating suitable for long-term immersion in wastewater or for coating of buried surfaces. Coating must conform to Mil Spec DOD-P-23236, or to SSPC Paint 16. Prime coats are for use February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 as a shop primer only. Omit prime coat when both surface preparation and coating are performed in the field. 1.Prime Coat: DFT = 1.5-2.5 mils (38-65 microns). a.Products: Ameron Amercoat 83HS, Tnemec P66, VyGuard V75, Sherwin Williams Copoxy Primer, or equal. 2.Finish Coats (2 or more): a.DFT = 14-18 mils (350-450 microns). b.Products: Ameron 78HB, Carbomastic 14, Tnemec 46H413, VyGuard 64, Sherwin Williams Targuard Coal Tar Epoxy, or equal. c.Total System DFT = 15.5-20.5 mils (387-513 microns). E. System 103 – Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Use a 100 percent powder epoxy applied in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C213, except prepare surface as specified in the coating system schedule in this Section. Apply the coating using the fluidized bed process. 1.Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs, use a 100 percent solids liquid epoxy as recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer to provide a DFT of 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). 2.Powder Coating: a.DFT = 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). b.Products: Scotchkote 134 or 206N, Napgard 7-0008 or 7-2500, or equal. c.Total System DFT = 15-17 mils (375-425 microns). d.For coating of valves, DFT =11-12 mils (275-300 microns). F. System 104 – Chemical Resistant Sheet Lining: 1.Materials: Use natural rubber, chlorobutyl rubber, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber, chloroprene polymer (neoprene) rubber, or chlorosulfonated polyethylene (Hypalon) rubber sheet lining material. Submit shop drawings containing technical information that confirms the suitability of the lining material system for long-term immersion in each chemical to be stored. Service temperatures are expected to be up to 1500 F (650 C). a.Neoprene Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 59688, or equal. b.Chlorobutyl Sheet Lining Material: Use a synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 60924, or equal. c.Natural Rubber (soft) Sheet Lining Material: Use a soft natural rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 83160, or equal. d.Natural Rubber (hard) Sheet Lining Material: Use a hard, natural rubber resistant to oxidizing agents and formulated for autoclave curing. Provide a minimum lining thickness of 3/16 inch. Supply B.F. Goodrich compound 8631, or equal. e.EPDM Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulphuric acid solution and formulated for autoclave or steam curing under pressure. f.Hypalon Sheet Lining Material: Use synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution. 2.Primers: Use primers, adhesives, activators, accelerators, and other necessary materials as recommended by the sheet material manufacturer. 3.Metal Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, prepare the base metal as required by the sheet lining material manufacturer’s installation instructions. If the instructions differ from these specifications, provide the highest degree of cleaning and surface preparation required by either instructions or specifications. Perform abrasive blast cleaning in accordance with this section. 4.Installation: Install lining materials in accordance with the material manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Line interior surfaces including piping, vents, fittings, flange faces, manhole covers, and blind flanges. 5.Testing: Test the lining system for holidays in accordance with this Section before and after curing. 6.Curing: Cure the lining system by steam using the time and temperature as required February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 by the material manufacturer. G. System 105 – Vinyl Ester: Use vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake pigment that is suitable for immersion service in 30 percent hydrochloric acid and 30 percent sulfuric acid solutions. 1.Coating (2 or more coats): a.DFT = 40-45 mils (1000-1125 microns). b.Products: Plasite 4100, Sherwin Williams Magnalux 304 FF, or equal. c.Prime Coat: As recommended by the material manufacturer. H. System 106 – 100% Solids Epoxy: Use a solventless epoxy resin coating suitable for severe service areas subject to splash, spillage or intermittent immersion in wide range of industrial chemicals and wastewater. Coating to resist normal abrasion from rolling vehicles. 1.Coating (2 or more coats): a.DFT = 15-20 mils (325-500 microns). b.Products: Ameron, Carboline, Sherwin CorCote HCR. c.Prime Coat: As recommended by manufacturer. I. System 107 – 100% solids Epoxy Sealer: Use a clear, unpigmented solventless epoxy suitable for application over marginal surfaces, including damp surfaces, tight rust and tight old coatings. Coating serves as primer for alkyd, acrylic, epoxy, and polyurethane finish coats. 1.Coating (1 coat only): a.DFT = 1-2 mils (25-50 microns). b.Products: ICI/Devoe 167 PrePrime, Carboline Rust Bond, Sherwin Williams 920 PrePrime, or equal. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer’s products. B. For submerged and severe service coating systems, require the paint manufacturer to furnish the following services: 1.Provide at least 6 hours of on-site instruction on the proper surface preparation, use, mixing, application, and curing of the coating systems. 2.Observe the start of surface preparation, mixing, and application and curing of the coating systems. 3.Provide the services of a NACE Certified Coating Inspector at all times during the surface preparation, mixing, application, curing and testing of all coatings applied in submerged or acid spill areas. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Use skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision. For all jobs involving lead based paint removal or repair, require the presence of a certified Competent Person, Lead per OSHA requirements. B. Apply coating to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, and joints. Ensure thorough cleaning and an adequate thickness of coating material. Apply coatings to produce finished surfaces free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture and finish. Effect complete hiding so that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas. Apply a brushed stripe coat to all edges and welds after priming submerged or severe service areas. C. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, name plates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect the working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Mask openings in motors to prevent entry of coating or other materials. D. Do not damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Perform spray painting under carefully controlled conditions. Promptly repair any damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. E. Coordinate cleaning and coating so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation standards of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) form a part of this Specification: 1.Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from steel surfaces by cleaning with solvent, vapor degreasing, emulsion or alkaline cleaners, or steam. 2.Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of all loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3.Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by rotary or impact power tools, power wire brushing, or power abrading. 4.White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP5/NACE 1): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5.Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating, all of which are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. 7. Near-white Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10/NACE 2): Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except limit random staining to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface. 3.4 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) A. Provide the minimum abrasive-blasted surface preparation as indicated in the coating system schedules at the end of this Section. Where there is a confli ct between these specifications and the coatings manufacturer’s printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning applies. B. Perform metal surface preparation in conformance with the current SSPC/NACE Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces must match standard samples in SSPC-VIZ 1. C. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning using solving cleaning as per SSPC-SP1. D. Round or chamfer sharp edges. Grind to smooth finish burrs, surface defects, and weld splatter prior to blast cleaning. E. Select the type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer’s recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. As abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems use clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Do not use automated blasting systems and metal shot or grit for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting is planned with hard, sharp-cutting slag. F. Do not reuse abrasive except when an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, use clean, oil- free abrasives. In the abrasive mix, use at least 50 percent steel gri t. Replenish abrasive mix with new shot/grit combination as necessary to maintain the anchor profile within 1/2 mil (13 microns) of the specified profile. G. Comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. H. For air-blast cleaning, supply compressed air at adequate pressure from well -maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators which delivers oil and water -free air as checked with white blotter, white cloth, or plastic sheets at the b eginning of each blasting sequence. I. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation using dry air -blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. Vacuuming must be the final cleaning method immediately prior to painting areas that will go into submerged service. J. In enclosed areas and other areas where dust may settle, vacuum the surface clean and wipe it with a tack cloth. K. Remove damaged or defective coating by the specified blast or power tool cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. L. If the specified abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be in submerged service, then SSPC-SP2 – Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3 – Power Tool Cleaning, may be used. If the coated area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and will be in submerged service, then SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal may be used. M. Completely remove shop-applied coatings of unknown composition before the specified coatings are applied. Examine valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Completely remove temporary coatings by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 method before starting abrasive blast cleaning. Alternate cleaning methods such as Baking Soda Blasting or Sponge Jet Blasting may be used as appropriate. N. Use the solvent cleaning method (SSPC-SP1) to clean shop-primed equipment in the field before finish coats are applied. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZED FERROUS METAL A. For galvanized ferrous metal, use the alkaline cleaning method per SSPC -SP1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of protective coatin gs. Alternate methods with biodegradable surfactant type cleaners followed by fresh water washing may be used as appropriate. B. Apply pretreatment coatings of surfaces in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.6 SURFACE PREPAR ATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING COATINGS A. Remove grease, oil, heavy chalk, dirt, or other contaminants by solvent or detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Determine the generic type of the existing coatings by laboratory testing. B. Provide the degree of cleaning specified in the coating system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, remove deteriorated coatings by abrasive blast cleaning to meet the requirements of SSPC -SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Clean areas of tightly adhering coatings to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, with the remaining thickness of pre-existing coating not to exceed 3 mils. C. If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings, apply intermediate coatings conforming to the paint manufacturer’s recommendation for the indicated coating system or completely remove the existing coating prior to abrasive blast cleaning. Make a small trial application for compatibility prior to painting large areas. Allow the trial application to cure for 7 days at 50º F (10º C) or higher before determining compatibility. D. Completely remove coatings of unknown composition prior to application of new coatings. E. Where specified or where job site conditions do not permit dry-abrasive blasting for industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water jetting or wet - abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, use inhibitors approved by the manufacturer of the coating system, which will be applied over the cleaned area. Begin the coating application as soon as the surface has dried, and before the formation of any flash rusting. Perform water jetting with or without abrasive injection, as appropriate, to achieve the specified degree of surface cleanliness. Do not use water -jetting methods for submerged or severe-service coating systems, unless specified for that area. 3.7 PLASTIC, FIBERGLASS, AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE PREPARATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, for equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service, shop-prime, and then finish-coat in the field after installation. For methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting, comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of time, apply the finish coating in the shop and then touch-up the paint after installation. B. Perform surface preparation and coating work in the field for equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves. C. For certain pieces of equipment, it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switch gear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the required quality in the field or as indicated by the individual specification section for finish coats to be applied at the factory. For such equipment, prime and finish-coat in the shop and touch-up in the field after installation. Use the identical material for touch-up that was used for shop painting. Require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its shop drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. Submit the coating material product data sheet with the shop drawings for the equipment. D. For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer may have a standard coating system, which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. E. Protect shop-painted surfaces during shipment and handling. Protect surfaces with padding or blocking. Lift equipment with canvas or nylon slings. Before being top-coated, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 do not expose primed surfaces to the weather for more than 2 months or less when recommended by the coating manufacturer. F. Repair damage to shop-applied coatings in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer’s printed instructions. G. Make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Submit copies of applicable coating manufacturer’s product data sheets with equipment shop drawings. 3.8 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Coatings are to be applied to items requiring coating prior to placement into service. At no time will an equipment item be placed into service prior to receiving the finish coating. B. Apply protective coatings to steel substrates in accordance with SSPC-PA1 – Paint Application Specification No. 1. Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. C. Inspect cleaned surfaces and each coat prior to succeeding coats. Schedule inspections with the City Engineer in advance. D. Paint blast-cleaned ferrous metal surfaces before rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Limit blast cleaning to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day unless the area to be coated is protected by humidity control equipment set to maintain humidity below 50 percent at all times. E. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. F. Give special attention to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and o ther places where insufficient film thickness is likely to occur. Use stripe painting by brush, after application of the primer, for these areas. G. Give special attention to materials, which will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Coat such contact surface prior to assembly or installation. Use only inorganic zinc primers on faying surfaces. H. Apply finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats, in a manner which will present uniform texture and color-matched appearance. I. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions: 1. Temperature outside of the manufacturer’s recommended minimum and maximum range. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Substrate or air temperature less than 5º F (3º C) above the dew point. 4. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40ºF (14º C) or less than 5º F (3º C) above the dew point within 8 hours after application of the coating. 5. Wind conditions in excess of 15 MPH or dust laden. J. Determine the dew point by use of a sling psychrom eter in conjunction with the U.S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. K. For steel piping which will not be buried, have the surface abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. L. Apply finish coats after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete and the work areas are clean and dust free. Concrete must have cured for a minimum of 28 days @ 75º F (24º C) unless an approved epoxy sealer has been applied to green concrete within 12 hours of finishing the concrete. 3.9 CURING OF COATINGS A. Maintain curing conditions in accordance with the recommendations of the coating material manufacturer and this Section, whichever is the most stringent. Complete curing before placing the coating systems into service. B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation using heated air may be required until the coatings have fully cured. C. Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the interior surfaces of enclosed hydraulic structures. During applic ation and curing periods, continuously exhaust air from the lowest level of the structure using portable ducting to force air into all compartments and around baffles. After interior coating operations have been completed, provide a final curing period that meets the minimum temperature and time requirements of the manufacturer of the coating system being applied, while operating the forced air ventilation system continuously. 3.10 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Give the City Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 surface preparation work or coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. Perform surface preparation and coating applications in the presence of the City Engineer, or his appointed NACE certified coating inspector, unless the City Engineer has granted prior approval to perform the work in their absence. C. Inspection by the City Engineer or the NACE certified inspector, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. D. Erect and move scaffolding where requested by the City Engineer to facilitate inspection. Provide additional illumination to light areas to be inspected. Remove or grind smooth all scaffolding clips welded to the structure prior to surface preparation of the structure. E. Until final acceptance of the coatings, furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thickness (DFT) of protective coatings. Make DFT gauges available for the City Engineer’s use throughout the coating process until final acceptance of the coatings. Provide the services of a NACE certified coating inspector for all holiday detection work until the final acceptance of the coatings. Operate holiday inspection devices in the presence of the City Engineer. F. Perform holiday tests on coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Perform holiday tests on surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Mark and repair or reco at areas which contain holidays in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s printed instructions and then retest. DO NOT PERFORM HOLIDAY TESTING AFTER STRUCTURE HAS BEEN SUBMERGED. 1. Coatings with Thickness Exceeding 20 mils (500 microns): For surfaces having a total DFT exceeding 20 mils (500 microns); use a pulse-type holiday Detector such as Elcometer 136, or equal. Adjust and operate in accordance with NACE RP0188. 2. Coatings with Thickness of 20 mils (500 microns) or Less: For surfaces having a total DFT of 20 mils or less, use Elcometer 269 non-destructive type holiday detector, or equal. Instrument must operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils (250 and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent such as Kodak Photo-Flo, or equal, may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. For submerged or severe service areas, the residue of the wetting agent must be removed with clean, fresh water prior to application of any additional coats. G. On ferrous metals, measure the DFT in accordance with SSPC-PA2 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness with magnetic gauges using either a pull-off type gauge (Elcometer 211) or constant pressure gauge (Elcometer 345F), or equal. Test each coat for the correct thickness. Calibrate the DFT gauge at the beginning of each workday or shift in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the gauge. Do not take measurements until at least 8 hours after coating application. On non -ferrous metals, measure the DFT with positive pressure eddy current gages (Elcometer 345N) or equal. H. Evaluation of blast-cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison with photographic samples contained in SSPC-VIZ 1. I. Evaluation of surface profile will be based upon the use of TesTex pressure sensitive tapes. 3.11 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Painting and Color Coding: 1. Use colors and signs to identify all piping and equipment which is exposed to view in buildings or tunnels, above suspended ceilings or exposed above grade, and all outdoor piping. Identify each pipe and equipment item by a color complying with the following schedule of colors and by applied markers. 2. Coat item with the number of coats and type of material specified. Base coats for item painting may be a neutral color. Make each succeeding base coat a contrasting color. For the final coat, comply with the pipe identifying color schedule. 3. Apply pipe identification markers to exposed piping, except for the following pipe at wastewater lift stations: a. Discharge piping for wastewater pumps. b. Vent piping. c. Any piping inside wet wells. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 B. Pipe Identification Markers: 1. Identify all pipes with applied signs or markers at 15-foot centers, at both sides of penetrated walls or floors, adjacent to valves, at connected equipment, at branch fittings, and in congested pipe layouts. a. Apply markers consisting of signs with legends as follows: OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF PIPE OR COVERING (INCHES) LENGTH OF COLOR FIELD (INCHES) SIZE OF LETTERS (INCHES) 3/4 to 1- 1/4 8 1/2 1- 1/2 to 2- 3/8 8 3/4 2- 1/2 to 5- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 6 to 7- 7/8 12 1- 1/4 8 to 10 24 2- 1/2 Over 10 32 3- 1/2 b. As pipe markers, use semi-rigid outdoor grade acrylic plastic UV resistant with UV resistant ink, Seton Name Plate Corp., SetMark, or equal. Use Type SNA for outside diameters 3/4 through 5- 7/8 inches and Type STR for 6-inch outside diameter or larger. For pipes less than 3/4-inch in diameter, use applied marker of brass identification tags 1-1/2 inches square with depressed letters 1/4-inch high, black-filled. Apply tightly to pipeline with metal or plastic straps. Pipe markers shall meet ANSI A13.1 – 2007. c. For pipelines with operating temperatures above 150°F; Contractor shall paint pipe labeling with approved stencils. C. Pipe and Equipment Identification Color Schedule: 1. Color identification shall be in accordance with TCEQ Chapter 290.42(d)(13)A and Chapter 217.329. 2. For pipe and equipment coatings, use the colors listed in the following identification color schedule: PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION COLOR SCHEDULE WATER TREATMENT PLANT (WTP)/FACILITY SYSTEMS COLOR Plant Potable Water Light Blue Plant Process Water Light Blue with Dark Blue Bands Filter or Membrane Effluent Light Blue Filter or Membrane Backwash Supply Light Blue Filter or Membrane Backwash Waste Dark Grey Settled Water Green Raw Water Tan Filter Backwash Air Dark Green Raw Sludge Yellow Brown Thickened Sludge Brown Centrifuge Centrate Light Brown CHEMICAL SYSTEMS COLOR Chlorine (gas liquid, or vent) Yellow Chlorine (solution) or Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow with Red Bands Chlorine Dioxide Yellow with Blue Bands Ammonia (Gas, Aqueous, or Liquid Ammonium Yellow with Brown Bands February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 Sulfate) Ozone Stainless Steel with White Bands Liquid Alum or PACl Yellow with Orange Bands Alum or PACl Solution Yellow with Green Bands Ferric Chloride Brown with Red Bands Ferric Sulfate Brown with Yellow Bands Polymers White with Green Bands Liquid Caustic White with Red Bands Caustic (solution) White with Orange Bands Fluoride White with Yellow Bands Oxygen Orange Sulphur Dioxide Gas Lime Green with Yellow Bands Sodium BiSulfite Lime Green with Brown Bands 3. 4. For pipe identification colors not listed above, follow American National Standard (ANSI A13.1-2007) Color Schedule: a. Materials inherently hazardous, flammable or explosive; chemically active or toxic; extreme temperature or pressure; radioactive: Yellow Field with Black Letters. b. Material of inherently low hazard – liquid or liquid admixture: Green Field with White Letters; gas or gaseous admixture: Blue Field with White Letters. c. Fire quenching materials, water, foam, carbon dioxide, Halon, etc.: Red Field with White Letters. d. For polymer systems provide different band sizes and/or alternate schemes to distinguish between neat and activated polymer. e. For other systems not covered by this specification develop color code chart for review by Owner and Engineer. 3.12 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES – FERROUS METALS A. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal – Not Galvanized SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO./ DESCRIPTION FM-1: Surfaces indoors and outdoors, exposed or covered, except those listed below. Near White Metal blast cleaning SSPC- SP10/NACE 2 (2) Inorganic zinc/epoxy/ polyurethane FM-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, chlorine storage room, sodium hypochlorite storage room Near White Metal blast cleaning SSPC- SP10/NACE 2 (100) Amine-cured epoxy FM-3: Surfaces of pumps and equipment and other ferrous surfaces submerged or intermittently submerged in potable water, utility water, and wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2 feet above high- water level in hydraulic structures, and surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures, pump state wet wells, and vents (excluding shop-coated valves, couplings, and pumps). White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ NACE 1 (100) Amine-cured epoxy FM-4: Surfaces exposed to high temperature between 1500 and 6000 F Near White Metal blast cleaning SSPC- (3) Inorganic Zinc, water- February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATION SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO./ DESCRIPTION (650 and 3150 C). SP10/NACE 2 based FM-5: Surfaces exposed to high temperature between 6000 and 10000 F. Near White Metal blast cleaning SSPC- SP10/NACE 2 (9) Aluminum silicon resin FM-6: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in water passages of valves 4-inch size and larger, exterior surfaces of submerged valves. White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ NACE 1 (101) Polyamide-cured epoxy FM-7: Where indicated, ferrous surfaces in water passages of pumps which have discharge size of 4 inches or larger; exterior, submerged surfaces of pumps. White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ NACE 1 (101) Polyamide-cured epoxy FM-8: Ferrous surfaces of sleeve couplings. White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ NACE 1 (103) Fusion-bonded epoxy FM-9: Ferrous surfaces of sluice gates, flap gates, and shear gates, including wall thimbles. White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP5/ NACE 1 (101) Polyamide-cured epoxy FM-10: Structural steel, miscellaneous metal work, and supports for prefabricated metal buildings, not exposed to view in finished building. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 (10) Zinc Rich Epoxy FM-12: Ferrous metal exposed to view, inside and outside of buildings. Near White Metal blast cleaning SSPC- SP10/NACE 2 (2) Inorganic zinc/ epoxy/polyurethane FM-13: Surfaces of indoor equipment, not submerged. Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP6/ NACE 3 (5) Epoxy, equipment FM14: Exterior (exposed) surfaces shop- coated with fusion-bonded epoxy. Light abrasive blast to roughen surface (6) Aliphatic polyurethane FMG-1: Exposed surfaces indoors and outdoors, except those listed below. Alkaline cleaning SSPC- SP1 (1) or (4) Aliphatic Polyurethane, or Acrylic FMG-2: Surfaces in chlorination room, chlorine storage room, and sodium hypochlorite storage room. Alkaline Cleaning SSPC SP1 (100) Amine cured epoxy FMG-3: Surfaces submerged in water or wastewater, including surfaces lower than 2 feet above high-water level and surfaces inside hydraulic structures and vents Alkaline cleaning SSPC- SP1 followed by Brush- Off blast cleaning SSPC- SP7/ NACE 4 (100) Amine-cured epoxy FMG-4: Surface exposed to view, inside and outside of building. Alkaline Cleaning SSPC- SP1 (1) or (4) Aliphatic polyurethane, or Acrylic B. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal – Galvanized: Apply pretreatment coatings, barrier coatings, or washes as recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3.13 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES, NONFERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBERGLASS A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, use the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 17 Protective Coatings– 09 96 00 coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames, or hatches. Use primers recommended by coating manufacturer. SCHEDULE NO. AND APPLICATIONS SURFACE PREPARATION SYSTEM NO./ DESCRIPTION NFM-1: Exposed surfaces, indoors and outdoors, except those listed below. Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (1) Aliphatic Polyurethane NFM-2: Chlorination room, chlorine storage room, sodium hypochlorite storage room. Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (100) Amine-Cured Epoxy NFM-3: Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, or with any other metal except galvanized ferrous metal. Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (8) Aluminum Metal Isolation NFM-4: Polyvinyl chloride plastic, indoors and outdoors, not submerged. Solvent cleaned SSPC-SP1 (4) Acrylic NFM-5: Fiberglass surfaces. Per paragraph 3.09, Plastic, Fiberglass, and Non-Ferrous Metals Surface Preparation (6) Aliphatic Polyurethane Fiberglass END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 High-Performance Coatings – 09 96 00.13 SECTION 09 96 00.13 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. High performance coatings. B. Surface preparation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS (Not Used) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon of each type and color. 2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room names and numbers where used. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of coating, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Coating Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of coating. C. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. High-Performance Coatings: 1. Substitutions: Section 01 31 14 – Change Management February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 High-Performance Coatings – 09 96 00.13 2.2 TOP COAT MATERIALS A. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. B. Shellac: Pure, white type. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of coated surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of substrates. D. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. F. Masonry: Verify masonry joints are struck flush. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter. B. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface with shellac. C. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store. D. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage. 3.3 PRIMING A. Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. B. Concrete: Prior to priming, patch with masonry filler to produce smooth surface. C. Concrete Masonry: Apply masonry filler to thickness required to fill holes and produce smooth surface; minimum thickness of 30 mils. 3.4 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, to thicknesses specified and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting and Specification Manual". B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with full coating thickness. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 High-Performance Coatings – 09 96 00.13 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.6 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material. C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. END OF SECTION Division 10 Specialties February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Signage – 10 14 00 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. B. Building identification signs. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009 (ANSI). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Signage – 10 14 00 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name. 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "In Use/Vacant" indicator. 7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on the drawings. 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers to be determined later, and braille. C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs: 1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs. D. Emergency Evacuation Maps: 1. Map content to be provided by Owner. E. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters. 2. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings. 2.2 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Radius / Curved Signs: One-piece, curved extruded aluminum media holder securing flat, flexible sign media by curved lip on two sides; other two sides closed by end caps; concealed mounting attachment. 1. Sizes: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Finish: Natural (clear) anodized. 3. Sign Orientation: Curved in horizontal section. 4. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Mechanical anchorage, with predrilled holes, and set in clear silicone sealant. C. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: Clear. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Signage – 10 14 00 2.3 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch. 2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Metal Letters: 1. Mounting: Tape adhesive. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions. D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Wire Mesh Partitions – 10 22 13 SECTION 10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Cylinders for locksets. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. B. ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel; 2013. C. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design partition system to provide for movement of components without damage, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to design loads. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for screen materials, finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan and vertical dimensions, elevations, component details; head, jamb, and sill details; location of hardware. Provide component details, anchorage, and type and location of fasteners. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size, illustrating screen material. Submit samples of wire mesh and frame members illustrating style, color, and finish. Sample will be returned. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Not Used) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wire Mesh Partitions: 1. Acorn Wire and Iron Works, Inc: www.acornwire.com. 2. Miller Wire Works, Inc: www.millerwireworks.com. 3. Hoosier Fence CO.,Inc.. 4. Indiana Wir Products, Inc. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Wire Mesh Partitions – 10 22 13 5. Kentucky Metal Products Co. 6. Western Wire Works, Inc. 7. Wire and Iron Products, Inc. 8. Standard Wire and Steel Works 9. California Wire Products 10. Ford Logan 2.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory-fabricated modular assemblies of wall panels, doors, anchors, and accessories as required to provide a complete system and as indicated. 1. Comply with applicable code for screen mesh opening size. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Framing Members: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed steel tubing, square and rectangular shaped. B. Woven Screen Wire: ASTM A510/A510M uncoated crimped steel wire; conforming to the following: 1. Warp and Fill Wire Size: 10 gage, 0.135 inch. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized. B. Anchorage Devices: Provide power driven, powder actuated, and drilled expansion bolts. C. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts, unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, manufacturer's standard shapes, same finish as framing members. B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, manufacturer's standard shapes, same finish as framing members. C. Post Caps: Manufacturer's standard. D. Floor Base: Manufacturer's standard. E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: 1. Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Provide 1-1/2 Pair butt hinges riveted or welded to door and frame.. B. Latch Sets: 1/8" think angle strike bar. C. Cylinders for Locksets: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 2.7 COMPONENTS A. Corner Posts: 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 inch size by 1/8" gage, 1-1/2 inch wall thickness. B. Intermediate Posts: 1-1/4 by 4/8 inch size by 1/8" gage, 1-1/2 inch wall thickness. C. Intermediate Horizontal Members: 1 by 1/2 inch size by 1/8" gage, 1-1/2 inch wall thickness, notched into vertical member. D. Top Rail Horizontal Members: 1 by 1/2 inch size by 1/8" gage, 1-1/2 inch wall thickness, notched into vertical member. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Wire Mesh Partitions – 10 22 13 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. B. Make exposed joints flush or tight. C. Fabricate door for hinged operation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. C. After installation, touch-up field welds scratched or damaged surfaces with shop applied finish. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hinged doors to achieve free movement. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protection to prefinished surfaces. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 3 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories – 10 28 00 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS (Not Used) 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C. TAS - Texas Accessibility Standards; 2012. D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013. E. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2014e1. F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013. G. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. H. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011e1. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 3 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories – 10 28 00 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 31 14 – Change Management 2.2 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories. C. Mirror Glass: Tempered safety glass, ASTM C1048; and ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering as required. D. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless Steel; tamper-proof. 2.3 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.4 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TA-03): Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, satin finished cast aluminum brackets, eccentric-shaped plastic spindle for 1/2 revolution delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. 1. Product: 5241 manufactured by Bradley. B. Paper Towel Dispenser (TA-06): Folded paper type, stainless steel, semi-recessed, with viewing slots on sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock. 1. Capacity: 300 C-fold minimum. 2. Product: 244-10 manufactured by Bradley. C. Soap Dispenser: (TA-01) Soap lather dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator. 1. Minimum Capacity: 48 ounces. D. Mirrors (TA-02,): Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch thick tempered safety glass; ASTM C1048. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. 3. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. 4. Product: 780 manufactured by Bradley. E. Grab Bars (TA-04,TA-05): Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish. 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 3 of 3 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories – 10 28 00 2.5 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel. 1. Holders: 4 spring-loaded rubber cam holders. 2. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders. 3. Product: 9954 manufactured by Bradley. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data. D. See Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry for installation of blocking, reinforcing plates, and concealed anchors in walls and ceilings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 1 Fire Protection Specialties – 10 44 00 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS (Not Used) 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS (Not Used) 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated. B. Cabinet Signage: Die Cut letting; vertical; red text; "Fire Extinguisher". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 1 of 2 Protective Covers – 10 73 10 SECTION 10 73 10 PROTECTIVE COVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. 2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded Aluminum Canopies 1. 3 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete shop drawings bearing the seal of a registered engineer showing live and wind loads of the project. B. Submit samples of the finish and color selections. C. Submit manufacture’s brochures and product data. 1. 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation shall be done by the manufacture of the aluminum canopy to assure a single source responsibility for the work. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty against defects in materials, workmanship and installation. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AVAdek walkway cover system and canopies submitted, 9201 Winkler Drive, Houston, Texas 77017, 713-944-0988. B. Mapes Canopies Lincoln, NebraskaPhone: 1-888-273-1132.Fax: 1-877-455-6572. Or approved equal see Section 01 60 00 for substitutions. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. All components shall be 6063; 6061 or 6005 alloy extruded aluminum. B. Components shall be sized to comply with live load and wind load requirements of the project and shall not be less than the dimensions shown below: 1. Deck 3” 2. Trim: 8” 3. Beams: 6”X8” C. The Thickness of the aluminum deck panels shall be .078” thick. D. Beams are open at top to drain canopy system internally. February 2016 Technical Specifications For Construction Page 2 of 2 Protective Covers – 10 73 10 E. Flashing shall be .040” thick. F. All bolts and fasteners shall be stainless steel or finished to match adjacent components and sized by canopy engineer. 2. 3 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufactures written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 FABRICATION A. Columns and beams shall be heliarc welded. B. The canopy deck is to have welded end closures at the deck terminations. C. The canopy shall be fabricated to drain internally D. Flashing shall be fabricated to prevent leakage between the canopy and adjacent structures. 3. 2 INSTALLATION A. Install the canopy in strict accordance with the manufacture’s recommendations. B. Erect canopy after concrete and masony work in vicinity is completed and washed down. C. Install rain caps over draining sections of the deck D. Install flashing as required. E. Care shall be taken to prevent damage or scratching during installation. F. Thoroughly clean canopy after installation. END OF SECTION Division 13 Special Construction February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 SECTION 13 12 00 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS AND CANOPY ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal Framing Components. B. Metal Wall Panels and Trim. C. Metal Roof Panels and Trim. D. Metal Building Accessories. E. Doorway Canopies. F. Metal Roof Panels and Associated Trim at Turnstile Canopies. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation B. 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels C. 07 42 13.16 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels D. 07 42 13.19 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels 1.3 REFERENCES A. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction. B. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute. C. AWS – American Welding Society. D. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. E. ASTM A 529 – Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. F. ASTM A 572 – Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. G. ASTM A 792 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 Percent Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. H. ASTM A 992 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. I. ASTM A 1011- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. J. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. K. ASTM E 331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. L. MBMA – Metal Building Manufacturer’s Association. M. IAS – International Accreditation Service. N. LGSI – Light Gauge Steel Institute. 1.4 DEFINITIONS: THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS ARE LISTED FOR REFERENCE AND MAY OR MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. A. Traditional Metal Building System: A building system that will use either continuous or simple span “Z” purlins for support of the roof covering material. B. Long Bay Systems (LBS): A building system that will use simple span, cold-formed, open web purlins to support the roof covering material. C. Gable Symmetrical: A continuous frame building with the ridge in the center of the building, consisting of tapered or straight columns and tapered or straight rafters. The sidewall grits may be continuous (by-passing the columns) or simple span (flus in the column line). The rafters may or may not have interior columns. D. Gable Unsymmetrical: A continuous frame building with an off-centered ridge, consisting February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 of tapered or straight columns and tapered or straight rafters. The eave height and roof slope may differ on each side of the ridge. The sidewall grits may be continuous (by- passing the columns) or simple span (flus in the column line). The rafters may or may not have interior columns. E. Single Slope: A continuous frame building which does not contain a ridge, but consists of one continuous slope from side to side. The building consists of straight or tapered columns and tapered or straight rafters. The sidewall grits may be continuous (by-passing the columns) or simple span (flus in the column line). The rafters may or may not have interior columns. F. Lean-to (LT): A building extension, which does not contain a ridge, but consists of one continuous slope from side to side. These units usually have the same roof slope and grit design as the building to which they are attached. G. Roof Slope: Pitch expressed as inches of rise for each 12” of horizontal run. H. Building Width: Measured from outside to outside of sidewall secondary structural member (girt). I. Building Eave Height: A nominal dimension measured from the finished floor to the top flange of eave strut. J. Building Length: Measured from outside to outside of end wall secondary structural member. K. Acrylic-Coated Galvalume: Galvalume with a light acrylic coating such as Galvalume Plus by Bethlehem, Acrylume by National or Galvalume Plus by U.S. Steel. This coating eliminates the need for roll-forming oil and reduces the incidence of field marking by handling or foot traffic. L. Auxiliary Loads: Dynamic loads induced by cranes, conveyors, or other material handling systems. M. Collateral Loads: The weight of any non-moving equipment or material, such as ceilings, electrical, or mechanical equipment, sprinkler systems, plumbing. N. Dead Load: The actual weight of the building system (As provided by Metallic Building Company) supported by a given member. O. Floor Live Loads: Loads induced on the floor system by occupants of a building and their furniture, equipment, etc. P. Roof Live Loads: Loads produced by maintenance activities, rain, erection activities, and other movable or moving loads but not including wind, snow, seismic, crane, or dead loads. Q. Roof Snow Loads: Gravity load induced by the weight of snow or ice on the roof, assumed to act on the horizontal projection of the roof. R. Seismic Loads: Loads acting in any direction on a structural system due to action of an earthquake. S. Wind Loads: The loads on a structure induced by the forces of wind blowing from any horizontal direction. 1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. The building manufacturer will use standards, specifications, recommendations, findings and/or interpretations of professionally recognized groups such as AISC, IAS, AISI, AWS, ASTM, MBMA, Federal Specifications, and unpublished research by MBMA as the basis for establishing design, drafting, fabrication, and quality criteria, practices, and tolerances. The Manufacturer’s design, drafting, fabrication and quality criteria, practices and tolerances shall govern, unless specifically countermanded by the contract documents. 2. Design structural mill sections and welded up plate sections in accordance with the 13th edition of the AISC’s “Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”, ASD method or LRFD method. 3. Cold-Formed steel structural members and panels will generally be designed in accordance with “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”, 2001 Edition with 2004 Supplement. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 4. Roof Slope shall be ½”:12 unless indicated different in project drawings. B. Design Loads 1. Design Loads: The basic design loads shall include live and wind (Coastal Wind Load design from the Texas Windstorm Code) in addition to dead load. All other design loads, whether they be of static, dynamic or kinetic nature, shall be considered as auxiliary loads. 2. Vertical Live Load: Not less than 20 lbs/sq ft secondary member load and 12 lbs/sq ft primary member load applied on the horizontal projection of the roof and be in addition to the applicable standards. 3. Wind Loads: The wind load on the structure shall be the equivalent velocity pressure for an 125 mph wind speed (3-second gust), Importance Factor = 1, Exposure “C”, proportioned and applied as horizontal and uplift forces in accordance with ASCE 7-05 or as recommended by the MBMA publication entitled “Low Rise Building Systems Manual”. Latest edition. 4. Lateral Drift: Limit Lateral Deflection on Main Frame to L/600. 5. Collateral Loads: Use 5 psf for other superimposed static loads such as electrical and mechanical equipment which loads shall be considered as part of the design requirements and combined with the normal design loads as prescribed hereafter. Verify that roof structure is adequate to accommodate mechanical equipment designed to be suspended therefrom at the locations indicated on the drawings. 6. Auxiliary Loads: No induced dynamic loads are to be included. 7. Combining of Loads: The combining and distributing of normal loads and auxiliary loads for design purposes shall be as prescribed and recommended by MBMA. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Provide complete erection drawings for the proper identification and assembly of all building components. Drawings will show anchor bolt settings, transverse cross-sections, sidewall, endwall and roof framing, flashing and sheeting, and accessory installation details and column reaction loads to the foundation. C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples representing actual product, color and patterns. E. Certifications: Shop drawings and design analysis shall bear the seal of a registered professional engineer licensed in the state of Texas. Design analysis shall be provided as part of shop drawings. F. Bill of Materials: Bills of material shall be furnished and shall include item weights, if requested. G. Welder’s Certifications: Certifications: Certification of welder qualifications shall be furnished as specified by the Project Engineer. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single AISC – MB category certified Manufacturer/Fabricator with a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience. B. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single IAS certified Manufacturer/Fabricator with a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience. C. Erector Qualifications: All Products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 D. Design: Drawings and design analysis must bear the seal of a registered professional engineer registered in the state of Texas. Design analysis must be furnished by manufacturer. E. Mock-up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Owner. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Owner. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. Long term storage is NOT recommended. B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits are recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. DO not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. 1.10 WARRANTY A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owner’s Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer’s standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions and exclusions from coverage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Metallic Building Co., which is located at: 7301 Fairview; Houston, TX 77041; Toll Free Tel: 866-800-6353; Tel: 713-466-7788: Fax: 713-466-3194; Email: request info; Web: www.metallic.com 2. Star Building Systems 3. Varco Pruden Buildings B. Substitutions: As approved by Owner prior to bidding. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Primary Framing Steel: Roof Slope 1/2:12. 1. Steel for hot rolled shapes must conform to the requirements of ASTM Specifications A 36 or A 992, with minimum yield of 55 ksi. 2. Steel for built-up sections must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 1011, A 529, A 572 or A 36 as applicable, with minimum yield of 42, 46, 50 or 55 ksi as indicated by the design requirements. 3. Pipe must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53 Grade B with a minimum yield strength of 35 ksi. 4. Round tube must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 500 Grade B with a minimum yield strength of 42 ksi. 5. Square and Rectangular tube must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 500 Grade B with a minimum yield strength of 46 ksi. 6. Steel for Cold-Formed endwall “C” sections must conform to the requirements of ASTM A 1011 Grade 55 or ASTM A 653 Grade 50 with a minimum yield strength of 55 ksi. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 7. X-bracing as required by the purchase order will conform to ASTM A 36 for rod and angle bracing or ASTM A 475 for cable bracing. B. Secondary Framing Steel: 1. Steel used to form purlins, girts and eave struts must meet the requirements of ASTM A 1011 Grade 55 or ASTM A 653 Grade 50 with a minimum yield strength of 55 ksi. 2. Design Thickness – As determined by project requirements. C. Panels: 1. UL-580 Class 90, roll-formed pre-painted Galvalume. 2. Standing Seam Panels must have .5 percent minimum aluminum-zinc alloy coating and conform to ASTM A 792 with a minimum yield of 50 ksi. 3. Finish: Equal to MBCI Signature® 200 themoset coating consisting of a polyester resin modified by silicone resin intermediate. 4. Through-fastened panels must have .5 percent minimum aluminum-zinc alloy coating and conform to ASTM A 792 with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi. 5. Design Thickness – Unless otherwise noted in these specifications, the gauge thickness must be 24 - 0.0223 inches (0.566 mm). D. Fasteners: Fasteners shown are minimum requirements. The fasteners shall be in accordance with Metal Building Manufacturer Engineer Design and shall be provided as needed to comply with Windstrom Certifications at no additional cost to the owner. 1. Eave: #12-14 x 1 ¼ inch (32 mm) long life self-drilling with sealing washer. 2. Endlaps: #12-14 x 1 ¼ inch (32 mm) long life self-drilling with sealing washer. 3. Ridge: 1/4 -14 x 7/8 inch (22 mm) Lap Tek long life self-drilling with sealing washer. 4. Clips to Purlin: 1/4 -14 x 1 ¼ inch (32 mm) Tek 2 long life self-driling with Hex Washer Head and 5/8 inch (15 mm) O.D. washer. 5. Clips to Bar Joists - #12-24 x 1 ¼ inch (32 mm) Tek 4.5 self-driling with Hex Washer Head and 5/8 inch (15 mm) O.D. washer. 6. Long Life fasteners are used as a standard for all standing seam panels and on any through-fastened panel application for which a product warranty is desired. E. Clips: 1. All clips must have factory-applied mastic and designed so that movement between the panel and the clip does not occur. 2. High Sliding clips: Shall be height as required for 6” insulation and thermal blocks and shall and provide travel for panel thermal expansion and contraction in two directions. F. Sealant and Closures: 1. Sidelaps: Factory applied, hot melt, foamable mastic – Q41A. 2. Endlaps, Eave, Ridge Assembly and Gable Flashings: Field applied 100% solids butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant, furnished in roll form or pre-cut to length. 3. Outside Closures: Manufactured from the same materials as the roof panels. 4. Inside Closures: 18-gauge Galvalume or galvanized coated metal. 5. Provide additional strip of tape sealer at all roof panel lap joints and wall panel joints full length of laps to aid in minimizing air infiltration. The tape sealer will be in addition to factory applied sealers. 2.3 PRIMARY FRAMING A. Rigid Frames: Fabricated as welded built-up “I” sections or hot-rolled sections. Columns and rafters may be either uniform depth or tapered. B. Endwall Frames/Roof Beams: Fabricated as mill-rolled sections. Fabricate endwall columns of cold-formed “C” sections. Refer to drawings for structural steel framing at entry to be supplied by others and coordinate as needed. C. Finish: Red Oxide Primer. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 D. Field Bolted Connections: All field bolted connections shall be designed and detailed in accordance with AISC Design Guides 4 and 16 as applicable. 2.4 SECONDARY FRAMING A. Purlins and Girts: Purlins and girts shall be cold-formed “Z” sections with stiffened flanges. Flange stiffeners shall be sized shall be sized to comply with the requirements of the latest edition of ANSI and LGSI. Purlin and girt flanges shall be unequal in width to allow for easier nesting during erection. They shall be pre-punched at the factory to provide for field bolting to the rigid frames. They shall be simple or continuous span as required by design. Connection bolts will install through the purlin webs, not purlin flanges. B. Purlins (Excluding Long Bay): Horizontal structural members which support roof coverings. 1. Depth and Gauge: As required by design. 2. Maximum Length: To be determined by design. 3. Finish: Red Oxide Primer. C. Girts: Horizontal structural members that support vertical panels. 1. Depth and Gauge: As required by design. 2. Maximum Bay Spacing: refer to drawings. 3. Finish: Red Oxide Primer. D. Eave Struts: Unequal flange, cold-formed “C” sections. 1. Depth and Gauge: As required by design. 2. Finish: Red Oxide Primer. E. Base Framing: Base members to which the base of the wall covering may be attached to the perimeter of the slab. Secured to the concrete slab with mechanical anchors. 1. Base angle: Hot dip galvanized angle. Refer to drawings for base angle requirements. 2.5 ROOF PANELS A. Refer to Section 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 2.6 WALL PANELS A. Refer to Sections 07 42 13.16 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels and 07 42 13.19 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Doorway Canopies: Equal to Metallic Heavy Duty Personnel Door Canopies in sizes shown on drawings. Metal fascia and soffit finish per 13120.2.7 below, colors as chosen by owner. Provide additional framing at jambs and head to properly support canopy. Canopy shall be designed to meet all wind load requirements per 13120.5.B, above. B. Framed Openings: Provide framing members and flashing which surround openings at jambs, header and or sill, trim and fasteners. C. Roof Penetrations: Metal Building Supplier shall coordinate all penetrations with plumbers, electricians, etc as needed to insure that all penetrations are in accordance with roof manufacturer’s weather-tightness requirements. All penetrations shall be at the flat portion of roof panels. Do not penetrate the roofing at the ribs. 2.8 PANEL FINISHES A. Roof and Wall Panel: 1. Galvalume substrate. 2. Roof color as selected by owner from manufacturers standard color selection: Commercial/Industrial Signature Series – 200 Siliconized Polyester Coating. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 2.9 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Shops fabricate all framing members for field bolted assembly. The surfaces of the bolted connections must be smooth and free from burrs and distortions. 2. Shop connections must conform to the manufacturer’s standard design practices as defined in this section. Certification for welder qualifications will be furnished when required and specified in advance. 3. All framing members must carry an identifying mark. B. Primary Framing: 1. Plates, Stiffeners and Related Members: Factory weld base plates, splice plates, cap plates and stiffeners into place on the structural members. 2. Bolt holes and related machining: Shop fabricate base plates, splices and flanges to include bolt connection holes. Shop fabricates webs to include bracing holes. 3. Secondary structural connections (purlins and girts) to be ordinary bolted connections, which may include welded clips. 4. Manufacturer is responsible for all welding inspection in accordance with the manufacturer’s AISC-MB category and IAS certifications. 5. Non-Destructive Testing – NDT is not required on this project. C. Zee Purlins: 1. Fabricate girts from cold-formed “Z” sections with stiffened flanges. Size flange stiffeners to comply with the requirements of the latest edition of AISI. Girt flanges must be unequal in width to all for easier nesting during erection and pre-punched at the factory to provide for field bolting to the rigid frames. D. Girts: 1. Girts must be simple or continuous span as required by design. Connection bolts will install through the webs, not the flanges. E. Bracing: 1. Diagonal Bracing: a. Wind bracing in the roof need not be furnished where it can be shown that the diaphragm strength of the roof covering is adequate to resist the applied wind or seismic forces. Diagonal bracing in the roof may be used to resist the longitudinal loads in the structure if diaphragm action cannot be used. b. Diagonal bracing will be furnished to length and equipped with hillside washers and nuts at each end. It may consist of rods threaded each end or galvanized cable with suitable threaded end anchors. If load requirements so dictate, bracing may be of structural angle and/or pipe, bolted in place. 2. Special Bracing: Diagonal bracing is not permitted in the sidewall, a rigid frame type portal or fixed base column will be used. Refer to drawings for portal frame locations. 3. Flange Braces: The compression flange of all primary framing must be braced laterally with angles connecting to the bottom chords of purlins or to the webs of girts so that the flange compressive stress is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. 4. Bridging: a. Laterally brace the top chord of the LBS purlins with horizontal bridging if the roof system being used will not supply adequate lateral support to the top chord. b. Horizontally bridge the bottom chord for lateral bracing. One row of bolted diagonal bridging is required for all LBS purlins 40 ft. long and greater. F. Standing Seam Panels – General: 1. One side of the panel is configured as female, having factory applied hot melt mastic inside the female seam. The female side will snap over the male side and when seam creates a continuous lock, forming a 360 degree Pittsburg seam. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Metal Building Systems and Canopy Roof Panels – 13 12 00 2. Panels are factory notched at both ends so that field installation can commence or terminate from either end of the building. Panels cannot start at both ends of the building and work towards each other. 3. Maximum panel length is 45 feet unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. G. Endlaps: 1. Endlaps must have a 16 gauge backup plate and have the eight endlap joint fasteners installed in six pre-punched holes in the dimples in the trapezoidal legs. 2. Apply mastic between panels and secured with ¼ inch (6 mm) - #14 x 1 ¼ inch (32 mm) self-drilling fasteners through the panels and backup plate to form a compression joint. 3. “Through the roof” fasteners may only be used at eaves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Tough-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion. END OF SECTION Division 22 Plumbing February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment – 22 05 29 SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2.Trapeze pipe hangers. 3.Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5.Fastener systems. 6.Pipe stands. 7.Pipe positioning systems. 8.Equipment supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS: The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2.Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1.Trapeze pipe hangers. 2.Metal framing systems. 3.Pipe stands. 4.Equipment supports. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2.Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers. D. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment – 22 05 29 B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1.Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2.Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. 3.Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4.Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5.Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Allied Tube & Conduit. b.Cooper B-Line, Inc. c.Flex-Strut Inc. d.GS Metals Corp. e.Thomas & Betts Corporation. f.Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. g.Wesanco, Inc. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3.Standard: MFMA-4. 4.Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5.Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6.Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7.Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized. B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. b.Empire Industries, Inc. c.ERICO International Corporation. d.Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division. e.NIBCO INC. f.PHD Manufacturing, Inc. g.PHS Industries, Inc. 2.Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3.Standard: Comply with MFMA-4. 4.Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5.Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6.Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7.Coating: Paint. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment – 22 05 29 2.4 THERMAL HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2.Clement Support Services. 3.ERICO International Corporation. 4.National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5.PHS Industries, Inc. 6.Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7.Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8.Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9.Value Engineered Products, Inc. B. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.6 PIPE STANDS A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V- shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. C. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: 1.Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2.Base: Stainless steel. 3.Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous- thread rods. 4.Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless- steel, roller-type pipe support. D. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: 1.Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2.Bases: One or more; plastic. 3.Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4.Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5.Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers. E. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1.Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment – 22 05 29 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. G. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures. H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. N. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment – 22 05 29 B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immedi- ately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galva- nizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 2. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200). 3. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600). February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment – 22 05 29 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 3. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insula- tion that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building at- tachments where required in concrete construction. Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Plumbing Piping Installation – 22 07 19 SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any). C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that product complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. D. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. E. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 2. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 3. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range of colors available for each type of finish material. F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having ju- risdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. H. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Plumbing Piping Installation – 22 07 19 testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each ar- ea of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Plumbing Piping Installation – 22 07 19 B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Plumbing Piping Installation – 22 07 19 nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Plumbing Piping Installation – 22 07 19 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Plumbing Piping Installation – 22 07 19 insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. B. Exposed Sanitary Drains: 1. For all pipe sizes, insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. C. Domestic Hot Water: 1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. D. Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: 1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. 6. Water meters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For the following products: 1. Specialty valves. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers. 6. Water penetration systems. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. (2) NIBCO INC. (3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) and ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 1.Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1)Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. (2)NIBCO INC. (3)Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b.NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. 2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: B. Same size as pipes to be joined. 1.Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 2.End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. C. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. D. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b.Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c.Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d.JCM Industries. e.Romac Industries, Inc. f.Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. g.Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Capitol Manufacturing Company. b.Central Plastics Company. c.EPCO Sales, Inc. d.Hart Industries International, Inc. e.Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products. 2. Description: a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 the following: a.Capitol Manufacturing Company. b.Central Plastics Company. c.EPCO Sales, Inc. d.Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. b.Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c.End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b.Calpico, Inc. c.Central Plastics Company. d.Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Description: a.Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b.Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c.Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d.Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e.Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Couplings: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Calpico, Inc. b.Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Description: a. Galvanized-steel coupling. b.Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). c.End Connections: Female threaded. d.Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic. F. Dielectric Nipples: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b.Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c.Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a.Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. b.Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). c.End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d.Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2.Flexicraft Industries. 3.Flex Pression, Ltd. 4.Flex-Weld, Inc. 5.Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6.Mercer Rubber Co. 7.Metraflex, Inc. 8.Proco Products, Inc. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 9.Tozen Corporation. 10.Unaflex, Inc. 11.Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2.End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless- steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2.End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Section 02 20 20 related to excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section 22 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves. G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. K. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. L. Install piping to permit valve servicing. M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. N. Install piping free of sags and bends. O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. G. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints. J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. B. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section 21 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated. 3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing. 3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm). D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10- mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10- mm) rod. E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m). F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: (1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) or ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. 3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Domestic Water Piping – 22 11 16 END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2.Backflow preventers. 3.Water pressure-reducing valves. 4.Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7.Hose bibs. 8.Wall hydrants. 9.Drain valves. 10.Water hammer arresters. 11.Air vents. 12. Trap-seal primer valves. 13. Trap-seal primer systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NSF Compliance: 1.Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2.Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Ames Co. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 b.Cash Acme. c.Conbraco Industries, Inc. d.FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e.Rain Bird Corporation. f.Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2.Standard: ASSE 1001. 3.Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 4.Body: Bronze. 5.Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6.Finish: Rough bronze. B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b.Cash Acme. c.Conbraco Industries, Inc. d.Legend Valve. e.MIFAB, Inc. f.Prier Products, Inc. g.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h.Woodford Manufacturing Company. i.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2.Standard: ASSE 1011. 3.Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4.Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5.Finish: Rough bronze. C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Ames Co. b.Conbraco Industries, Inc. c.FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d.Flomatic Corporation. e.Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. f.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2.Standard: ASSE 1020. 3.Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4.Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Ames Co. b.Conbraco Industries, Inc. c.FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d.Flomatic Corporation. e.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2.Standard: ASSE 1015. 3.Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4.Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 5.Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 6.End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 7.Accessories: a.Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller General 2.3 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Water Regulators: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cash Acme. b.Conbraco Industries, Inc. c.Honeywell Water Controls. d.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2.Standard: ASSE 1003. 3.Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa). 4.Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 5.End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 2.4 BALANCING VALVES A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Armstrong International, Inc. b.Flo Fab Inc. c.ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div. d.NIBCO INC. e.TAC Americas. f.Taco, Inc. g.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2.Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator. 3.Body: Bronze. 4.Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50). 5.Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. C. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.NIBCO INC. b.Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c.Hammond Valve. d.Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Red-White Valve Corp. 2.Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3.Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 4.Body: Copper alloy. 5.Port: Standard or full port. 6.Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 7.Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 8.End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 9.Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device. 2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 1.Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3.End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 4.Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs: 1.Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2.Body Material: Cast Bronze. 3.Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4.Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded inlet. 5.Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6.Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7.Vacuum Breaker: Integral hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8.Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze. 9.Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle. 2.7 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: a.Zurn Z1300 Ecolotrol Wall Hydrant. 2.Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3.Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4.Operation: Loose key. 5.Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 6.Inlet: NPS 3/4. 7.Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 8.Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover. 9.Box and Cover Finish: Nickel bronze. 10.Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Rough bronze. 11.Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant. 2.8 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1.Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2.Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3.Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5.Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6.Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7.Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8.Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9.Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1.Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2.Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3.Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4.Body: ASTM B 62 bronze. 5.Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder joint. 6.Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: 1.Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2.Pressure Rating: 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or Class 125. 3.Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4.Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 5.Drain: NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side outlet with cap. 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.AMTROL, Inc. b.Josam Company. c.MIFAB, Inc. d.PPP Inc. e.Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f.Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g.Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h.Watts Drainage Products Inc. i.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2.Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3.Type: Copper tube with piston. 4.Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.10 AIR VENTS A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents: 1.Body: Bronze. 2.Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60 deg C). 3.Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4.Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents: 1.Body: Stainless steel. 2.Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum pressure rating. 3.Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4.Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5.Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet. 6.Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded. 2.11 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves: 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.MIFAB, Inc. b.PPP Inc. c.Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d.Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e.Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2.Standard: ASSE 1018. 3.Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 4.Body: Bronze. 5.Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 6.Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 7.Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. 2.12 TRAP SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: a.MIFAB, Inc. – Enclosed Electronic Trap Seal Primer, MI-100-15 2.Standard: ASSE 1044, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 3.Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water tubing. 4.Cabinet: Surface-mounting steel box with steel cover. 5.Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power. 6.Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001. 7.Number Outlets: 15. 8.Size Outlets: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2.Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air- gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3.Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. C. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and water pressure- reducing valve. F. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. G. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain. H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. I. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1.Pressure vacuum breakers. 2.Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 4.Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 5. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. 6. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies. 7. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers. 8.Water pressure-reducing valves. 9.Calibrated balancing valves. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties – 22 11 19 10.Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 11.Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies. 12.Primary water tempering valves. 13.Outlet boxes. 14. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. 15. Trap-seal primer systems. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. C. Provide permanent OSHA approved “Non-Potable Water” warning label signage at each hose bib & non-freeze wall hydrant location. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1.Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping – 22 13 16 SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1.Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1.Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1.Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2.Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1.Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping – 22 13 16 1.Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1.General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2.Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 3.Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. (2) Fernco Inc. (3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. (4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b.Standard: ASTM C 1173. c.Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d.Sleeve Materials: (1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. (2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. (3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4.Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. (2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b.Standard: ASTM C 1460. c.Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements in Section 02 20 20 related to excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B. Piping Installation C. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Install piping to permit valve servicing. H. Install piping at indicated slopes. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping – 22 13 16 K. Install piping to allow application of insulation. L. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long- turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. M. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. N. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1.Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2.Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3.Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. P. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. Q. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows: 1.Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. R. Install force mains at elevations indicated. S. Plumbing Specialties: 1.Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. 2.Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. T. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.2 JOINING CONSTRUCTION A. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. A. B. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1.Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2.PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1.Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2.In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping – 22 13 16 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1.Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2.Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3.Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4.Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a.100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b.Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c.Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 6.Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, and coupling. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods. E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1.NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2.NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3.NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4.NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5.NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod. F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm). G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1.Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2.Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4.Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5.Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 6.Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping – 22 13 16 A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2.Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1.Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2.Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4.Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5.Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6.Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water- based latex paint. 3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following: 1.Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2.Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following: 1.Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2.Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following: 1.Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2.Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following: 1.Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2.Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following: 1.Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2.Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping – 22 13 16 F. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following: 1.Solid-wall PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 2.Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Plumbing Fixtures – 22 40 00 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1.Faucets for lavatories and sinks. 2.Fixture supports. 3. Interceptors. 4.Water closets. 5. Lavatories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials. D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating. E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated. F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic. H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE OF PLUMBING FIXTURE INDICATED. INCLUDE SELECTED FIXTURE AND trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. W arranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101- 336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Plumbing Fixtures – 22 40 00 Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1.Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory faucets: 1.Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2.Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3.Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4.Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7.Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8.NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9.Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11.Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12.Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1.Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2.Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3.Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 5.Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 6.Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1.Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2.Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 3.Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 4.Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 5.Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 8.Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 9.Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10.Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2. 11.Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 12.Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 13.Whirlpool Bathtub Equipment: UL 1795. 1.6 WARRANTY The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Structural failures of unit shell. b.Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers. c.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Plumbing Fixtures – 22 40 00 use. 2.Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed. 2.Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed. 3.Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above. 4.Toilet Seats: 2 sets. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. Lavatory Faucets 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.American Standard Companies, Inc. b.Bradley Corporation. c.Chicago Faucets. d.Delta Faucet Company. e.Elkay Manufacturing Co. f.Kohler Co. g.Moen, Inc. h.Eljer. 2.Description: Two-handle mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a.Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b.Finish: Polished chrome plate. c.Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm. d.Centers: 4 inches. e.Mounting: Deck, exposed. f.Valve Handle(s): Lever. 2.2 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Engineered Brass Co. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. c.McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d.Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. e.TCI Products. f.TRUEBRO, Inc. g.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. 3.Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold- water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Plumbing Fixtures – 22 40 00 2.3 INTERCEPTORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Josam Company. 2.MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. 3.Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4.Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5.Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6.Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2.4 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings. a.American Standard. 2.Description: Wall-mounted integral trap flush valve water closet. a.Style: One piece. (1)Bowl Type: Elongated bowl. (2)Design Consumption: 1.6 gal/flush (3)Trip Mechanism: Flush valve. (4)Color: White b. Supply: See plumbing schedule on drawings. c.Toilet Seat: Provided by manufacturer. 2.5 LAVATORIES A. Lavatories 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.American Standard Companies, Inc. b.Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. c.Eljer. d.Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. e.Kohler Co. 2.Description: Counter mounted vitreous china fixture. a.Type: Counter-mounted. b.Faucet Hole Punching: 4-inch centers. c.Faucet Hole Location: Top. d.Color: White. e.Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated copper with stops. f.Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC, NPS 1-1/4, P-trap - NPS 1-1/4, tubular waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. g.Hair Interceptor: Not required. h.Protective Shielding Guard(s): Yes. P ART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Plumbing Fixtures – 22 40 00 written instructions. B. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. C. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1.Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. E. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. F. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system. G. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. I. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1.Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2.Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. J. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. K. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section 07 90 05 "Joint Sealers." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1.Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Plumbing Fixtures – 22 40 00 2.Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 SECTION 23 00 50 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.3 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.4 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.5 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.6 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.7 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the Engineer, owner and contractor. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 additional charge to the Owner. 1.9 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1.Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2.American Standards Association, ASA. 3.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4.American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. 5.American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. 6.American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7.American Water Works Association, AWWA. 8.National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9.National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10.Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11.Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12.International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in UGCSGC. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the BASE BID design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions. N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with City of Corpus Christi for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of three (3) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) pdf in lieu of three (3) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1.A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2.An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3.A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5.Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6.Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7.Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8.Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9.Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to UGCSGC for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1.REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2.REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3.NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4.REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5.CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor’s stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6.MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipmentor material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items: 1.Packaged Outdoor Air Pre-treatment Air Handling Units (Owner Furnished). 2.Variable Frequency Drives (Owner Furnished w/ OAHU’s). 3.Noise and Vibration Controls. 4.HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 5.Duct Specialties. 6.Duct Fabrication Drawings. 7.Louvered Architectural Screen Wall. 8.Filters. 9.Fire Dampers. 10.Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 11.Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 12.Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 13.Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU’s, ACCU’s, and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1.Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: 2.Wall and type locations. a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. b.Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. c.Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. d.Equipment connections and support details. e.Routing of roof drain piping. f.Fire-rated floor penetrations. g.Structural floor and roof opening sizes and details. 3.Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 4.Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following installed conditions: 1.Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2.Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3.Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4.Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5.Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to UGCSGC for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Engineer. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the Engineer. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY:_______________________________ (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY:_______________________________ (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with UGCSGC and in addition to the requirements specified in UGCSGC, include the following information for equipment items: 1.Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2.Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3.Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4.Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 schedule submitted. C. Submit 2 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 23. 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with UGCSGC for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in “D ring type” binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow ¼” of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, include the following information for equipment items: 1.Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2.Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3.Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4.Fabrication drawings. 5.Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6.Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7.Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8.Equipment and motor name plate data. 9.Wiring diagrams. 10.Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11.Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12.Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13.Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to UGCSGC for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include a maximum of 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 outlines. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Engineer/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Engineer/Owner’s risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney’s fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Engineer/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Professional Engineers (TBPE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Engineer of record to revise the engineering drawings without the Engineer’s written consent. F. It is agreed that “MEP” hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Engineer/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in TSPE Standards. G. If the client, Engineer/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for “record purposes”, then an AutoCAD based compact disc (“CD”) will be prepared. The “CD” will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a “plot” format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 H. At the Owner’s request, Engineer will prepare one “CD” of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the “CD” to the Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the “CD” will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD”. I. The “CD” will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The “CD” will be prepared in a “.dwg” format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. J. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The “CD” will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1.Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2.Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3.Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4.Install panels only in locations approved by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ROUGH - IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 26 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1.Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2.Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3.Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5.Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6.Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7.Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8.Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Engineer for review. 9.Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10.Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11.Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12.Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13.Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14.The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15.The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16.Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17.Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18.Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a.Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b.Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1.Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2.Remove and replace defective Work. 3.Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5.Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6.Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7.Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 14 Basic Materials and Methods – 23 00 50 "Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.4 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1.A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2.During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment – 23 05 13 SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUM MARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1.Motor controllers. 2.Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3.Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4.Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1.For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2.For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1.Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2.Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment – 23 05 13 A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4.Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2.Split phase. 3.Capacitor start, inductor run. 4.Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. P ART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment – 23 05 29 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment, pipe penetrations through building surfaces, and pipe stacks. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM B633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. B. ASTM A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip C. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process D. ASTM A1011 – Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability (Formerly ASTM A570) E. MSS SP58 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, and Manufacture F. MSS SP69 - Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Wall Supports 1.Pipes 4 inch and smaller: 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to wall with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece pipe straps. B. Floor Supports 1.Pipes 4 inch and smaller: 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to floor with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece pipe straps. C. Vertical Supports 1.Pipes 4 inch and smaller: 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch minimum bolted to wall with pipe attached to steel channel with 2 piece pipe straps. D. Plastic Pipe Supports 1.V-bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18-gauge continuous support channel to form a continuous support system for plastic pipe or flexible tubing. 2.2 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hang and support ductwork per SMACNA 1995, ch.4. B. Do not hang ductwork from piping or other ducts or equipment. C. All exterior duct support strut-type framework shall be 304 stainless steel. D. Provide at least two supports for each length of duct. Install supports on both sides of duct turns, branch fittings and transitions. E. Support rectangular duct sizes to 36 inches by trapeze hangers. F. Use angle iron “V” construction supports or similarly rigid construction for vertical ducting which needs lateral support. G. Anchor duct and supports to prevent swaying. After system start-up replace or otherwise alleviate condition of any duct support element which vibrates. H. Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, hang equipment independently of the ductwork. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment – 23 05 29 2.3 HANGER RODS A. Steel hanger rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, and continuous threaded. 2.4 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 EXECUTION A. Support horizontal piping as follows: Pipe Size Max Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter 1/2 to 1-1/4” 6’-6” 3/8” 1-1/2” 9’-0” 3/8” 2” 10’-0” 3/8” 2-1/2” 10’-0” 1/2" 3” 12’-0” 1/2" 3-1/2” 13’-0” 1/2" 4” 14’-0” 5/8” PVC (all sizes) 5’-0” 3/8” B. Support horizontal copper tubing as follows: Pipe Size Max Hanger Spacing Hanger Rod Diameter 1/2 to 3/4" 5’-0” 3/8” 1” 6’-0” 3/8” 1-1/4” 7’-0” 3/8” 1-1/2” 8’-0” 3/8” 2” 8’-0” 3/8” 2-1/2” 9’-0” 1/2" 3” 10’-0” 1/2" C. Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment – 23 05 29 G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers, copper colored epoxy paint, or non-adhesive isolation tape. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper tubing may also be used. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment – 23 05 53 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUM MARY A. Section Includes: 1.Equipment labels. 2.Warning signs and labels. 3.Pipe labels. 4.Duct labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1.Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2.Letter Color: Black. 3.Background Color: White. 4.Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5.Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6.Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three- fourths the size of principal lettering. 7.Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8.Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment – 23 05 53 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Red. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1.Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2.Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high. 2.4 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Black. C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment – 23 05 53 exterior exposed locations as follows: 1.Near each valve and control device. 2.Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3.Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4.At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5.Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6.Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7.On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1.Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2.Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 3.ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing – 25 05 93 SECTION 25 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Approved submittal date on equipment installed, to accomplish the test procedures, outlined under Services of the Contractor of this Section, will be provided by the Contractor. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB. The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer employed by the TAB firm. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the date on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices. The Contractor and the various subcontractors of the equipment installed, shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor and material required to eliminate deficiencies or malperformance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Contractor Personnel: Submit evidence to show that the personnel who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personnel be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer's opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing. B. Qualifications of Tab Firm Personnel: 1.A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm. 2.Personnel used on the jobsite shall be either Professional Engineers or technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of Work for that specified project. 3.Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personnel who actually balance the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) shall be required. C. Calibration List: Submit to the Engineer for approval, a list of the gauges, thermometers, velometer, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. Submit evidence to show that the balancing devices are properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTORS A. The Drawings and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, provide access as requested by the TAB firm. B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm that the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Construction Manager that such a condition exists. C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers or February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing – 25 05 93 the addition of dampers required for correct balance of the new work as required by the TAB firm, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced, to determine whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves, thermometers, gauges, pressure and temperature taps, means of reading static pressure and total pressure in duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item. E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts to each air handling unit has individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide, correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified, operate the systems at no expense to the Owner for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period. H. Project Contract completion schedules shall provide time for allowances to permit the successful completion of TAB services to Owner's final inspection and acceptance. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor: 1.Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, window, ceilings installed and penetrations complete, to obtain project operating conditions. 2.Air Distribution Systems: a.Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified. b.Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. c.Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. d.Fans (supply) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings. e.Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes. 3.Automatic Controls: a.Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air resets and fire stats. b.Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory precalibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable. c.The temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Owner of deficiencies or malfunctions. 3.2 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and the Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract. The reinspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete. B. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, to check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Owner complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems. C. Measurements and recorded readings of air and electricity that appear in the reports will be February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing – 25 05 93 done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to affect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings. At time of opposite season check-out, the Owner's representative will be notified before readings or adjustments are made. E. In fan systems, the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees within each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. 3.3 PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made, the TAB firm will furnish the Owner the following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer: 1.Summary of main supply duct pitot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2.A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm. 3.Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan, exhaust fan, filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems included in the retrofit Work. These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available. 4.Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 5.The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used, final velocity reading obtained, temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items. The test results will be recorded on standard forms. 6.A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation. the final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personnel. 3.4 BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A. General: 1.Place all equipment into full operation, and shall continue the operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during Off-Peak cooling season Balancing Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that time. 2.The Contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After the approval by the Engineer, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system. All Work shall be done under the supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1% of scale and maintained in good working order. 3.Upon completion of the balancing and testing, the Balancing Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Architect for evaluation. 4.The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as: a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b.Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c.Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures at existing AHU mixing plenums, or O/A duct. d.Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage readings at each fan. B. Air Systems: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1.Check fan rotation. 2.Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3.Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4.Test and record motor full load amperes. 5.Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing – 25 05 93 6.Test and adjust system for design cfm, outside air (+2%). Change-out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7.Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8.Test and record leaving air temperatures, db and wb. 9.Adjust all O/A quantities to AHU to design cfm (+2%). C. Air Duct Leakage: (From SMACNA Duct Standards 3rd Edition) Test all ductwork (designed to handle over 1000 CFM) as follows: 1.Test apparatus shall consist of: a.A source of high pressure air--a portable rotary blower or a tank type vacuum cleaner. b.A flow measuring device consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers. 2.Test Procedures a.Test for audible leaks as follows: (1)Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. (2) Start the blower with its control damper closed. (3) Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 1.2 times the standard designed duct operating pressure. (4) Survey all joint for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set. b.After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: (1)Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 25% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. (2) Read the pressure differential across the orifice on manometer No. 2. If there is no leakage, the pressure differential will be zero. (3) Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one (1) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. (4) Even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at one point may result in a noisy leak which, must be corrected. D. DX Systems : 1.Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2.Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3.Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of operation or drawing schedule. E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated and all thermostats and dampers, adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to the approval of the Architect. F. The Air Balance Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Mechanical Insulation – 23 07 00 SECTION 23 07 00 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Duct Liner. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. D. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. F. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. B. Contractor shall provide asbestos-free insulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CELLULAR FOAM FOR PIPING A. Armaflex Pipe Insulation or equal, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation, black in color, supplied as unslit tubing,. Expanded closed-cell structure. 1.Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 2.W ater Vapor Transmission: 0.10 3.Flame-spread rating: 25 or less 4.Smoke-developed rating: 50 or less 2.2 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturers: 1.Manville Linacoustic or approved equal. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Mechanical Insulation – 23 07 00 B. Insulation: ASTM C1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1.'K' value : ASTM C518, 0.13 at 75 degrees F. 2.Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min. 4.Liner Thickness: 1 inch for indoor duct and 2 inches for outdoor. 5.Adhesive: Waterproof fire-retardant type. 6.Liner Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft. C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied or welded with integral press on head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.2 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. All insulated pipes: 1.Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. 2.Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. 3.Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Finish insulation at through supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are free area inside insulation. Exterior envelope dimensions are larger to allow for insulation on each side. For example, if Drawing shows duct dimension of 12 x 20 on duct which is to have 1 inch of insulation, outside envelope dimension would be 14 x 22. B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. All insulated ductwork conveying air (except for exhaust systems): 1.Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 2.Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 3.4 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE Piping Systems Pipe Size Thickness Condensate Drains (within building) all sizes ¾” Refrigerant Suction Line all sizes ¾” 3.5 DUCKWORK INULATION SCHEDULE Supply Ductwork Thickness Type Cooling and Heating 1” Interior ductlining w/glass fiber duct liner to dampen noise generation. Cooling and Heating 2” Exterior ductwork END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 HVAC Power Ventilators – 23 34 23 SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2.Centrifugal wall ventilators. 3.Ceiling-mounted ventilators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following: 1.Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2.Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3.Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4.Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5.Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6.Roof curbs. 7.Fan speed controllers. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 2.Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1.Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. 2.Ceiling suspension assembly members. 3.Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4.Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 HVAC Power Ventilators – 23 34 23 AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Belts: Two sets for each belt-driven unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2.Loren Cook Company. 3.Carnes Company. 4.Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1.Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. D. Belt Drives: 1.Resiliently mounted to housing. 2.Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3.Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4.Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 5.Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1.Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2.Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3.Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. F. Roof Curbs: Cast in place concrete curb. Size as required to accommodate fan opening. 1.Overall Height: 4 inches. G. Capacities and Characteristics: 1.Refer to equipment schedule. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2.Loren Cook Company. 3.Carnes Company. 4.Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. B. Construction: Galvanized steel fan panel. Galvanized steel drive frame assembly. C. Fan Wheel: Fabricated steel propeller. D. Belt Drives: 1.Resiliently mounted to housing. 2.Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 HVAC Power Ventilators – 23 34 23 3.Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4.Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 5.Fan and motor in exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1.Combination Starter Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. 2.Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3.Dampers: Gravity, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve. 4.Guard: Provide OSHA approved motor side guard. F. Capacities and Characteristics: 1.Refer to equipment schedule. 2.3 CEILING MOUNTED VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2.Loren Cook Company. 3.Carnes Company. 4. Broan-NuTone LLC. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. D. Grille: Stainless steel louvered grille. E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. F. Accessories: 1.Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. 2.Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. 3.Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. G. Capacities and Characteristics: 1.Refer to equipment schedule. 2.4 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1.Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2.Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. P ART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Support units using elastomeric mounts. 1.Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 HVAC Power Ventilators – 23 34 23 concrete base. C. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors shall meet the requirments as provided by the Engineer. B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1.Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2.Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3.Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4.Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5.Adjust belt tension. 6.Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7.Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8.Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9.Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10.Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11.Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles – 23 37 13 SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.Louver face diffuser. 2.Fixed face grille. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1.Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2.Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS Louver Face Diffuser: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Titus. b.Price Industries. c.METALAIRE, Inc. d.Nailor Industries Inc. 2.Material: Aluminum. 3.Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4.Face Size: Refer to Diffuser and Grille Schedule on drawings. 5.Mounting: Refer to Diffuser and Grille Schedule on drawings. 6.Pattern: Refer to layout on drawings. 7.Dampers: Refer to Diffuser and Grille Schedule on drawings. 8.Accessories: a.Adjustable pattern vanes. b.Throw reducing vanes. c.Equalizing grid. 2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES Fixed Face Grille: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Titus. b.Price Industries. c.METALAIRE, Inc. d.Nailor Industries Inc. 2.Material: Aluminum. 3.Finish: Baked enamel, white. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles – 23 37 13 "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Packaged-Outdoor Air Handling Units – 23 74 13 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED-OUTDOOR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following packaged air conditioners: 1.Cooling and heating units 20 tons and smaller. 2.Cooling and heating units 20 tons and larger. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer: C. Field quality-control test reports: Detailed system start-up reports and packaging and equipment inspection reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged air conditioners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged air conditioners and are based on the specific system indicated. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." D. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." E. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." F. ARI Certification: Units shall be ARI certified and listed. G. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh (39.6 kW): Rate packaged air-conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment." H. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of packaged air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Packaged-Outdoor Air Handling Units – 23 74 13 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2.Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3.Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 4.Warranty Period for Electronic Thermostats: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Fan Belts: 2sets for each belt-drive fan. 2.Filters: 2 sets of filters for each unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONERS A. Manufacturers: 1.Carrier Corp. 2.YORK International Corporation. 3.Lennox Industries Inc. 4.McQuay International. 5.Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group. B. Description: Units shall be factory assembled, single package, designed for outdoor installation. They shall have built in duct connections for horizontal discharge supply/return and be available with factory installed options or field installed accessories. The units shall be factory wired, piped and charged with R-410A refrigerant and factory tested prior to shipment. All unit wiring shall be both numbered and color coded. The cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with DOE and AHRI test procedures. Units shall be CSA certified to ANSI Z21.47 and UL 1995/CAN/CSA No. 236-M90 standards. C. Casing: Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with exterior surfaces coated with a non-chalking, powder paint finish, certified at 1000 hour salt spray test per ASTM-B117 standards. Indoor blower sections shall be insulated with up to 1” thick insulation coated on the airside. Either aluminum foil faced or elastometric rubber insulation shall be used in the unit’s compartments and be fastened to prevent insulation from entering the air stream. Cabinet doors shall be hinged with toolless access for easy servicing and maintenance. Full perimeter base rails shall be provided to assure reliable transit of equipment, overhead rigging, fork truck access and proper sealing on roof curb applications. Disposable 2” filters shall be furnished as standard and be accessible through hinged access door. Fan performance measuring ports shall be provided on the outside of the cabinet to allow accurate air measurements of evaporator fan performance without removing panels or creating bypass of the coils. Condensate pan shall be slide out design, constructed of a non corrosive material, internally sloped and conforming to ASHRAE 62-B9 standards. Condensate connection shall be a minimum of ¾” I.D. female and be rigid mount connection. D. Indoor Fan: Fan shall be a belt drive assembly and include an adjustable pitch motor pulley. Job site selected brake horsepower shall not exceed the motors nameplate horsepower rating plus the ser-vice factor. Units shall be designed to operate within the service factor. Fan wheel shall be double inlet type with forward curve blades, dynamically balanced to operate smoothly throughout the entire range of operation. Airflow design shall be constant February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Packaged-Outdoor Air Handling Units – 23 74 13 volume. Bearings shall be sealed and permanently lubricated for longer life and no maintenance. Entire blower assembly and motor shall be slide out design. E. Outside Coil Fan: The outdoor fans shall be of the direct drive type, discharge air vertically, have aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel spider brackets and shall be dynamically balanced for smooth operation. The outdoor fan motors shall have permanently lubricated bearings internally protected against overload conditions and staged independently. A cleaning window shall be provided on two sides of the units for coil cleaning. F. Evaporator Coils: Evaporator coils shall be direct expansion draw-thru type. Coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally enhanced copper tubes with all joints brazed. Special Phenolic coating shall be available as a factory option. G. Condenser Coils: Condenser coils shall be draw-thru type. Condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally enhanced copper tubes with all joints brazed or Micro-Channel aluminum tube, aluminum fins. H. Compressors: 1.Each unit shall have a variable speed inverter compressor on one circuit and multiple compliant fixed speed scroll compressors on the other. All compressors shall be isolated with resilient rubber isolators to decrease noise transmission. The lead compressor shall be driven by variable frequency drive to control compressor speed. The VFD will be mounted in a weather protected panel complete with ventilation fans. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the space load. Inverter driven compressor shall be able to modulate from 25 Hertz to a maximum of 100 Hz. The minimum unit capacity shall be 16% of full load. The variable speed inverter compressor motor shall be a brushless permanent magnet type, to provide higher efficiency at all speeds. Oil injection system shall be provided to ensure optimal efficiencies. Gearotor oil pump shall be provided for exceptional bearing lubrication at all compressor speed. Oil Strainer shall be provided to control the risk of system debris in the oil injection circuit. Each variable speed inverter compressor shall be engineered with an appropriate sized VFD to control compressor motor speed and to provide compressor protection functions. Crankcase heating shall be provided to prevent refrigerant migration and mixing with crankcase oil when the compressor is not in operation. Each variable speed compressor shall include a crankcase heater (done via a DC holding current through the motor windings or external, sight-glass, current sensing and motor temperature sensing, excessive refrigerant discharge temperature sensing protection, low oil level sensing protection, motor overload protection and a time delay to prevent short cycling and simultaneous starting of compressors following a power failure . Each fixed speed compressor shall include crankcase heater, sight- glass, anti-slug protection, current sensing and motor temperature sensing, motor overload protection and a time delay to prevent short cycling and simultaneous starting of compressors following a power failure 2.Compressors shall be isolated with resilient rubber isolators to decrease noise transmission. 3.Refrigeration capacity control shall be accomplished by modulating& staging of the unit’s multiple compressors. To maintain desired temperature control, the unit shall have one variable speed compressor plus a minimum of two steps of capacity control for fixed speed compressor(s). The unit shall modulate the inverter compressor speed and stage the fixed compressors to deliver the desired setpoint temperature with the minimum amount of energy. All compressor capacity control modulating & staging shall be controlled by the factory installed main unit control system. I. Refrigeration Circuit 1.Each unit shall have two independent refrigeration circuits. Each circuit shall be complete with low pressure control, pumpdown switch, liquid line solenoid valve, filter drier, liquid moisture indicator/sight-glass, thermal expansion valve, liquid line charging valve with a 3/8" charging port, a manual reset high pressure safety switch. The thermal expansion valve shall be capable of modulation from 100% to 25% of its rated capacity. Sight-glasses shall be accessible for viewing without disrupting unit operation. Each circuit shall be dehydrated and leak tested. 2.Each circuit shall be dehydrated and factory charged with 410-A Refrigerant and oil. Refrigeration capacity control shall be accomplished by staging of the unit’s multiple February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Packaged-Outdoor Air Handling Units – 23 74 13 compressors. All compressor capacity control staging shall be controlled by the factory installed main unit control system. J. Modulating hot gas reheat shall be factory installed on the lead circuit complete with modulating valves, micro-channel refrigerant reheat coil and dehumidification control. Controls shall maintain +/- 0.5 degree control of the reheat coil leaving air temperature. K. Unit Controls: 1.Unit shall be complete with self-contained low-voltage control circuit protected by a resettable circuit breaker on the 24-volt transformer side. 2.Unit shall incorporate a lockout circuit which provides reset capability at the space thermostat or base unit should any of the following standard safety devices trip and shut off compressor: a. Loss-of-charge/Low-pressure switch. b.High-pressure switch. 3. Freeze-protection thermostat, evaporator coil. If any of the above safety devices trip, an LED (light-emitting diode) indicator shall flash a diagnostic code that indicates which safety switch has tripped. 4.Unit shall incorporate “AUTO RESET” compressor over temperature, over current protection. 5.Unit shall operate with conventional thermostat designs and have a low voltage terminal strip for easy hook-up. 6.Unit control board shall have on-board diagnostics and fault code display. 7.Standard controls shall include anti-short cycle and low voltage protection, and permit cooling operation down to 0 ºF. 8.Control board shall monitor each refrigerant safety switch independently. 9.Control board shall retain last 5 fault codes in non-volatile memory, which will not be lost in the event of a power loss. 10.See drawing(s) for control sequence for packaged air handling unit. L. Electric Heat: An electric heating section, with nickel chromium elements, shall be provided (refer to mechanical schedule for size). The heating sec-tion shall have a primary limit control(s) (automatic reset) to pre-vent the heating element system from operating at an excessive temperature. The Heating Section assembly shall slide out of the unit for easy maintenance and service. Units with Electric Heating Sections shall be wired for a single point power supply with branch circuit fusing (where required). M. Outside-Air Damper: Outdoor and return air dampers that are interlocked and positioned by a 2-position, spring-return damper actuator. The maximum leakage rate for the outdoor air intake dampers shall not exceed 2% when dampers are fully closed and operating against a pressure differential of 0.5 IWG. A unit-mounted potentiometer shall be provided to adjust the outdoor and return air damper assembly to take in the design CFM of outdoor air to meet the ventilation requirements of the conditioned space during normal operation. Whenever the indoor fan motor is energized, the dampers open up to one of two pre-selected positions – regardless of the outdoor air enthalpy. Dampers return to the fully closed position when the indoor fan motor is de-energized. Dampers shall fully close on power loss. N. Power Connection: A factory supplied disconnect switch shall be provided. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single factory provided location and be capable of side entry to minimize penetrations and avoid unit field modifications. Separate side openings shall be provided for the control wiring. O. Accessories to be included: 1.Condensate drain trap. 2.Hot gas bypass. 3.Dirty-filter switch. 4.Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire and hail guards of steel, painted to match casing. 5.Stainless steel drain pan. 6.Factory or shop applied phenolic coating on evaporator and condenser coils and factory or shop applied urethane coating for unit casing, fan housings, compressors and copper tubing. 7.Factory installed smoke detectors on supply and return compartments. 8.Humidistat (integrated into thermostat). 9.Provide Honeywell commercial programmable wall-mount thermostat. Thermostat February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Packaged-Outdoor Air Handling Units – 23 74 13 shall have the ability to control cooling and heating through the maximum number of stages available with the unit. Thermostat shall have networking capabilities and, at minimum, to report current space temperature and current space humidity. 10.Unit mounted disconnect switch. 2.3 MOTORS A. All motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled. B. Fan motors shall have permanently lubricated bearings internally protected against overload conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 25 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2.Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3.Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1.Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2.Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 3.Inspect internal insulation. 4.Verify that labels are clearly visible. 5.Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 6.Verify that controls are connected and operable. 7.Verify that filters are installed. 8.Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. 9.Adjust vibration isolators. 10.Inspect operation of barometric dampers. 11.Lubricate bearings on fan. 12.Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 13.Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 14.Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a.Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Packaged-Outdoor Air Handling Units – 23 74 13 15.Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 16.Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 17.Calibrate thermostats. 18.Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 19.Inspect outside-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 20.Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following: a.Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b.Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c.Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature. 21.Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 22.Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c.Outside-air intake volume. 23.Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a.Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b.Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside-air intake. 24.Verify operation of remote panel and failure modes. Inspect the following: a.High-limit heat exchanger. b. Warm-up for morning cycle. c.Freezestat operation. d.Alarms. 25.After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set point. B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Split System Air Conditioning Units Equipment – 23 81 26 SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. List below only products and equipment that the reader might expect to find in this Section but are specified elsewhere. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for cooling (heat rejection for heating operation in heat pump units) and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space. B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant (evaporator for heating operation in heat pump units). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Retain paragraph below if Drawings do not include detailed reflected ceiling plans or if Project involves unusual coordination requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split- system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Split System Air Conditioning Units Equipment – 23 81 26 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. C. Verify available warranties on units and components and retain number below or insert other. D. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit. 2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp. 2. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company. 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group. 5. York International Corp. 6. Daikin McQuay 2.2 FLOOR-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends. 1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner. 2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated. B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve. C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. D. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral overload protection; resiliently mounted. 2.3 AIR -COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. Compressor Type: Scroll. 2. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic- reset low-pressure switch. C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. Retain paragraph below for heat pump units. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Split System Air Conditioning Units Equipment – 23 81 26 D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat. E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F (7 deg C). H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. Select paragraph above or below. B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features: 1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting. C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator-fan air handler section on plenum return box. Construct box using standard dimensional steel studs. Cover box on all sides with insulated sheet metal. Cut out rectangular opening on top of box for air handler. Refer to vendor installation instructions for opening dimensions. Plenum box to be located on finished floor. Refer to drawings for plenum box dimensions. C. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium - plated fasteners. D. Modify static deflection in paragraph below to suit Project. E. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection. B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Split System Air Conditioning Units Equipment – 23 81 26 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters. D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists. 2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils. 3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device. 4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration transmission to structure. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 3. Delete subparagraph above or below depending on which Section is retained in Division 1. 4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Unit Heaters – 23 82 39 SECTION 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CWP: Cold working pressure. C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Location and size of each field connection. 3. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 5. Location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties. 6. Location and arrangement of integral controls. 7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which unit heaters will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification: Finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater and wall and ceiling heaters indicated with factory-applied color finishes. F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Unit Heaters – 23 82 39 marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Not applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Chromalox. 2. Reznor. 3. Modine. 4. Trane. B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. C. Comply with UL 2021. D. Comply with UL 823. E. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls. F. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and - tested propeller unit heater before shipping. G. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. H. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units. I. General Coil Requirements: Test and rate propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. J. Electric-Resistance Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in m agnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation. 1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection of heaters. 2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material. K. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. L. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated, totally enclosed continuous duty with built in thermal overload protection. M. Control Devices: 1. Unit-mounted thermostat. N. Capacities and Characteristics 1. Heating Capacity: a. Refer to Electric Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. 2. Electric Coil: a. Refer to Electric Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. 3. Supply Air: a. Refer to Electric Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. 4. Fan Motor: a. Refer to Electric Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. b. Electrical Characteristics for Single-Point Connection: c. Refer to Electric Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Unit Heaters – 23 82 39 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. B. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with wall mounted universal bracket. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995. B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION Division 26 Electrical February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Electrical Testing – 26 01 26 SECTION 26 01 26 ELECTRICAL TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals of a NETA certified independent testing agency. Testing shall be inclusive of all medium voltage and low voltage equipment including conductors for the pump station. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and operation of the low and medium voltage equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Independent testing agency shall be NETA certified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Document Management” and shall include: 1. Equipment Installation Report: A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation checks, operation and testing of the medium voltage equipment. This report shall certify that 1) the equipment has been properly installed, 2) is in accurate alignment, 3) meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the equipment manufacturer, and 4) NETA certification of the testing agency. 2. Assessment Report: A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing maintenance checks, operation and testing of the electrical equipment. The report shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. The report shall summarize the results of the analysis and include recommendations of equipment repair or replacement. The report shall also establish a timeframe to repair/replace equipment by giving a target date. 1.4 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) E. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 GENERAL A. Perform all testing identified in the latest edition of NETA Standard for Accepting Testing Specifications B. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative. Types of equipment required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Low voltage cables 2. Medium voltage cables 3. Signal and Fiber Optic Cables 4. Grounding / Ground Grid System 5. Switchboards 6. Panelboards 7. Automatic Transfer Switches 8. Low Voltage Indoor Transformers 9. UPS System 10. Existing Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Switchgear Operational Functionality (Specific to Modifications, Revisions and Retrofits) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Electrical Testing – 26 01 26 11. Bridge Cranes 12. Hydraulic Valve Control Skid and Appurtenances 13. HVAC Equipment and Controls 14. 600V Pump Motors 15. 4160V Pump Motors 16. Motorized Roll-Up Doors 17. 5kV Variable Frequency Drives 18. Sump Pumps and Controls 19. All Power Metering and Associated Power Metering Appurtenances 20. Exhaust Fans, Motorized Louvers and Associated Control Components 21. All PLC, SCADA System Hardware and Associated Field Instrumentation 22. Overall Pump Station Operational Functionality 23. All Motor Protection Relays Operational Functionality 24. All Feeder Protection Relays Operational Functionality C. All applicable equipment testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for energization and start-up of the equipment. D. Testing shall include a complete functionality testing of electrical equipment under all the different operating parameters identified by the OWNER and ENGINEER. E. Testing shall be in accordance with NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications – 26 05 00 SECTION 26 05 00 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DIVISION XXVI This section applies to all sections of Electrical Division 26, of this project except as specified otherwise in each individual section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall submit his bid on the basis of executing all work as hereinafter specified, as indicated on the drawings, or as necessary to provide a complete and usable system. B. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to, or necessary for, the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection with, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. 1.3 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Manufacturer's data and descriptive literature for each item listed under Submittal Data in all sections of Division 26 shall be submitted to the engineer of record, or his designated representative, for approval as soon as practical, but not later than 30 days after the award of the contract. A. Wherever a brand name or names are mentioned in the specifications and/or indicated on the drawings, they shall be understood to be followed by the words "or approved equal" unless otherwise noted. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear the costs of all changes in his work and the work of other trades made necessary by the use of products and systems other than those of the first named basic manufacturers and systems specified in the Contract Documents. This cost shall include but not necessarily limited an hourly rate of $165.00 to the engineer for review of all changes as the result of manufacture substitutions. 1.4 HAZARDOUS AREAS There are no areas deemed to be hazardous from an NFPA electrical equipment safety prospective. 1.5 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings; manufacturers' data; certificates for equipment, materials, and finish; and pertinent details for each system where specified in each individual section, and obtain approval from the Engineer of Record before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. A. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. B. Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable industry and technical society publication references, and other information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish. C. Photographs of existing installations and data submitted in lieu of catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS Shop drawings (when required) shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size with a minimum scale of 1/8-inch per foot, unless specified otherwise. A. Drawings shall include floor plans, sectional views, wiring diagrams, and installation details of equipment. B. Drawings of all fabrication details shall include dimensions, methods of attachment to existing structures or poles, and indicate the actual mounting location number as noted on the plan drawing contract documents. C. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications – 26 05 00 operating equipment devices. D. If equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show acceptable equipment and resubmitted. 1.7 MANUFACTURER’S DATA Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cut sheets. 1.8 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE All electrical equipment and material shall be listed, labeled and installed per a recognized electrical testing laboratory’s standards. When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be submitted for approval. A. If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence unless otherwise specified in the individual sections. B. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, which is competent to perform an acceptable test. C. For materials and equipment whose compliance with organizational standards or specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, a certificate of compliance from the manufacturer shall be submitted for approval. D. This certificate shall identify the manufacturer, the product, and the referenced standard and shall simply state that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to all requirements of the project specifications and the referenced standards listed. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Protect all materials and finished work at all times to prevent damage or breakage either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals or mechanical injury. B. Equipment and materials shall be handled, stored, and protected to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Damaged or defective items shall be replaced. 1.10 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE This Contractor shall include a 100% guarantee against faulty materials, equipment, superintendence or labor and unauthorized substitutes for a period of 12 months (or for the terms of the extended maintenance and warranty period) from the date of final acceptance. Replacement of lamps is excluded. 1.11 STANDARD CODES, FEES AND PERMITS The entire installation shall conform to all local, state, and federal ordinances, codes, and regulations applying to the work in this contract. Comply with the latest editions of applicable codes. A. In the event that there is conflict between the plans and specifications and the local code requirements of governing agencies, the code requirements shall govern. However, if the contract requirements are in excess of the code requirements, the contract provisions shall govern. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all fees necessary in connection with his work. C. At the completion of all work, the Contractor shall deliver to the owner, or his designated representative, a certificate of inspection from the inspection department having jurisdiction over the work. D. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all materials, workmanship, and tests shall be in conformance with the latest approved standard rules, regulations, and specifications of the following authorities: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications – 26 05 00 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 2. National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 4. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 6. Insulated Power Cable Engineer's Association (IPCEA). 7. Underwriters Laboratory (U.L.) 8. City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1.12 DRAWINGS A. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is impossible to show all fittings, offsets, and accessories. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions at all sites affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish all fittings and accessories as may be required to meet the conditions encountered. 1.13 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall visit the proposed project site to inspect and familiarize himself with all conditions, obstructions and space limitations prior to bidding and before beginning construction. B. Refer to the civil, structural, and electrical drawings for construction details, and coordinate work with that of other trades so as to avoid unnecessary delays or damage to any part of the installation. If any omissions or discrepancies are found between the drawings and specifications or regulations, advise the owner, or his designated representative, prior to Bid Due Date. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products which are of similar material, design, and workmanship. A. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. B. The two-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. 2.2 EXPERIENCE REQUIRED Two years experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. A. Alternative Service Record - Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6,000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown. 2.3 SERVICE SUPPORT The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. A. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. B. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipm ent on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 2.4 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATE A. Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 General Work Requirements for Electrical Specifications – 26 05 00 3.1 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING A. The Contractor shall pay for injury or damage to the work of another Contractor which may be done by him or his employees. 3.2 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the field coordination of his work with that of other trades and the ON. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. In the event of conflicts due to lack of field coordination, the Engineer shall be the sole arbitrator in resolving the conflict. 3.3 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished prior to installation. A. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. B. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean up and remove all debris from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, remove from the project site all unused materials and equipment. Remove all visible labels, dirt, misplaced paint, grease and stains from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approvals shall be left in place. 3.5 TESTING A. See Specification 27 13 23. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Medium Voltage Cables – 26 05 13 SECTION 26 05 13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, and accessories for medium- voltage (2001 to 35,000 V) electrical distribution systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables. B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification. C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables. 1.4 ACTIONS SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable accessories. B. Samples: 8-inch (400-mm) lengths for each type of cable specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Material Certificates: For each type of cable and accessory. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. C. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) working days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cables: a. Aetna Insulated Wire, Inc.; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. General Cable Technologies Corporation. c. Kerite; a Marmon Wire & Cable/Berkshire Hathaway company. d. Okonite Company, The (Preferred) e. Prysmian Cables & Systems. f. Southwire Company. 2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Medium Voltage Cables – 26 05 13 b. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. c. Tyco Electronics; Raychem Products (Preferred) C. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70. 2.3 CABLES A. Cable Type: Type MV 105. B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8Conductor: C. Copper. D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, E. Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound. F. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber. G. Voltage Rating: 5 kV. H. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level. I. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield. J. Shielding and Jacket: Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated, polyethylene jacket. K. Three-Conductor Cable Assembly: Three insulated, shielded conductors cabled together with ground conductors. 1. Circuit Identification: Color-coded tape (black, red, blue) under the metallic shielding. L. Cable Sheath: Interlocked aluminum or Corrugated aluminum tube applied over cable. M. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Comply with ANSI C119.4 for connectors between aluminum conductors or for connections between aluminum to copper conductors. B. Copper-Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped connectors. 2.5 SOLID TERMINATIONS A. Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable and installation conditions, including orientation. 1. Compound-filled, cast-metal-body, metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable without external plastic jacket. 2. Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated conductors. 3. Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase- and ground-conductor rejacketing tubes, cable-end sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot. 4. Cast-epoxy-resin sheath seal kit with wraparound mold and packaged, two-part, epoxy-resin casting material. B. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class shall be equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations. 1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple, molded-silicone-rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type connector. 2. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer nontracking tubes; multiple, molded, nontracking skirt modules; and compression-type connector. 3. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief shield terminator; multiple-wet-process, porcelain, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type connector. 4. Class 1 Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Medium Voltage Cables – 26 05 13 shield ground strap, compression-type connector, and end seal. 5.Class 2 Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube, shield ground strap, and compression-type connector. Include silicone-rubber tape; cold-shrink-rubber sleeve; or heat-shrink, plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of insulation whether or not supplied with kits. 6.Class 3 Terminations: Kit with stress cone and compression-type connector. 2.6 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture. B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables. C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A-load make/break and continuous-current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. D. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating; designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. E. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainless-steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware. 1.Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire. 2.Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. 3.Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective caps, test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case. 4.Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator. A. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in test points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool. B. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and carrying case. 2.7 SPLICE KITS A. Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer for the application. B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, materials, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions. 1.Combination tape and cold-shrink-rubber sleeve kit with rejacketing by cast-epoxy- resin encasement or other waterproof, abrasion-resistant material. 2. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer heat-shrink jacket. 3.Premolded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit. 4.Premolded, EPDM splicing body kit with cable joint sealed by interference fit of mating parts and cable. 5.Separable multiway splice system with all components for the required splice configuration. 2.8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAPES A. Ethylene/propylene rubber-based, 30-mil (0.76-mm) splicing tape, rated for 130 deg C February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Medium Voltage Cables – 26 05 13 operation. Minimum 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide. B. Silicone rubber-based, 12-mil (0.30-mm) self-fusing tape, rated for 130 deg C operation. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide. C. Insulating-putty, 125-mil (3.175-mm) elastic filler tape. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide. 2.9 ARC PROOFING MATERIALS A. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10-mil- (250-micrometer-) thick, corrosion- protective, moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape. B. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch (8 mm) thick, and compatible with cable jacket. C. Glass-Cloth Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1 inch (25 mm) wide. 2.10 FAULT INDICATORS A. Indicators: [Automatically] [Manually] reset fault indicator[ with inrush restraint feature], arranged to clamp to cable sheath and provide a display after a fault has occurred in cable. Instrument shall not be affected by heat, moisture, and corrosive conditions and shall be recommended by manufacturer for installation conditions. B. Resetting Tool: Designed for use with fault indicators, with moisture-resistant storage and carrying case. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-93-639 before shipping. B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cables according to IEEE 576. B. Proof conduits prior to conductor installation by passing a wire brush mandrel and then a rubber duct swab through the conduit. Separate the wire brush and the rubber swab by 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) on the pull rope. 1. Wire Brush Mandrel: Consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. If an obstruction is felt, pull the brush back and forth repeatedly to break up the obstruction. 2. Rubber Duct Swab: Consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. Pull the rubber duct swab through the duct to extract loose debris from the duct. C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that does not deteriorate conductor or insulation. 2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips, that do not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable. 3. Use pull-in guides, cable feeders, and draw-in protectors as required to protect cables during installation. 4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Install cables in Duct Banks as per drawings and details. F. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped bed of 3-inch- (75-mm-) thick, clean sand. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping by a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of tamped earth, plus an additional 2 inches (50 mm) of sand. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Medium Voltage Cables – 26 05 13 G. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches (305 mm) above cables. H. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag. I. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of conductor damaged during pulling. J. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits. Use dead- front separable watertight connectors in manholes and other locations subject to water infiltration. K. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits. L. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows: 1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder is indicated to be connected. 2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal. 3. Standoff Insulator: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal. M. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition to arc- proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows: 1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil (250-micrometer) pipe-wrapping tape. 3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty. 4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable. 5. Band arc-proofing tape with two layers of 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide half-lapped, adhesive, glass-cloth tape at each end of the arc-proof tape. N. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." O. Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated. P. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated- connector fittings, and hardware. Q. Ground shields of shielded cable at one point only. Maintain shield continuity and connections to metal connection hardware at all connection points. R. Identify cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify phase and circuit number of each conductor at each splice, termination, pull point, and junction box. Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the identification. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency, owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. After all cable terminations are made, coordinate with and assist owners test agency to perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Perform direct-current High Potential test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommended maximum test voltage. C. Medium-voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables – 26 05 19 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. B. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated 7. Okonite Company (Preferred). B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN, Type THWN, Type XHHW or as indicated on drawings. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Tray cable, Type TC with ground wire. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables – 26 05 19 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics /Raychem (Preferred) B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATION S A. Feeders: Stranded copper B. Branch Circuits: Stranded copper. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway Tray cable. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC. F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC. I. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. J. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. K. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. L. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. M. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. N. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." O. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables – 26 05 19 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. General Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. General Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Contractor will perform a continuity test and megger test for each cable. 3. Perform all testing in presence of owner or owner’s representative. D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems – 26 05 26 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUM MARY A. Section includes: Grounding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Overhead-line grounding. 2. Underground distribution grounding. 3. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Submit final test reports: 1. Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2. Include recommended testing intervals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems – 26 05 26 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1- 5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: 1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use pressure-treated fir, cypress, or cedar. D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 50 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. General Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. C. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. D. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. E. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: All conductors shall be stranded conductors unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems – 26 05 26 A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. 9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. G. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J- STD-607-A. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems – 26 05 26 1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm) grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. H. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each indicated item, extending around the perimeter of buildings or areas February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems – 26 05 26 as indicated. 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and 2/0 for taps to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation. 3.5 LABELING A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All Perform tests and inspections. 1. Coordinate with owner or owner representative to witness following test. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified or a maximum of 5 ohms, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems – 26 05 29 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of 2.5 times the applied force. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems – 26 05 29 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. For this project, all steel supports shall be hot double dipped galvanized or aluminum materials. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. (Preferred) g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries (Preferred) c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Hilti Inc (Preferred) c. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems – 26 05 29 d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 316 stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Hilti Inc (Preferred) e. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. f. MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems – 26 05 29 anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements as per drawings and details. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. RNC: Rigid Non Metalic conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13. Approved Equal B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Carlon 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B. H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2.Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric – (Preferred). 5.Approved equal. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1.Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged-and- gasketed as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2.Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3.Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 5.Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2.Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3.EGS/Appleton Electric. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company – (Preferred). 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. 18. Approved equal. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with form 7 gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J. Gangable boxes are prohibited. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: PVC Coated RGS or Aluminum. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: PVC Coated RGS or Aluminum. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4X as indicated. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer than 72”. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m)intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Engineer for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to PVC coated RGS or Rigid Aluminum as per conditions before rising above floor. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 raceways in use. R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RGS that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. BB. Install drains at low points in conduit runs. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Duct Bank – Install duct bank per drawing and details. B. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 02 20 20 for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 02 20 20 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 7 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical System – 26 05 33 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 02 20 20. 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct- buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. General Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Cable Trays for Electrical System – 26 05 36 SECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Single-rail cable trays. 3. Trough cable trays. 4. Fiberglass cable trays. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:. 1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure. B. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. 2. All material shall be manufacture and not field fabricated. B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters: 1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Cable Trays for Electrical System – 26 05 36 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. 2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc (Preferred) Series 47 Alum. 7” NEMA VE Class 20C+. 2. Or equal. 3. Approved equal. B. Description: 1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails. 2. Rung Spacing: 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches (225 mm) at center of tray's width. 4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch (22-mm) width with radius edges. 5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a200-lb (90-kg) concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 6 inches (100 mm). 8. Straight Section Lengths: 20 feet (6 m) except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. 9. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 10. Fitting Minimum Radius: as required to maintain minimum bending radius of cable. 11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 20C+. 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Hardware and Fasteners: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594 stainless steel, Type 316. 14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. 15. Minimum load rating of 150 lb/ft. 2.4 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Aluminum: 1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts. 2. Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. 3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. 2.5 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 2.6 WARNING SIGNS A. Shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification 022020 - EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLAT ION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Cable Trays for Electrical System – 26 05 36 systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment. D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square-neck carriage bolts and locknuts. F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure. G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs. I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application. J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports. M. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings. P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings. Q. Seal penetrations through exterior walls with weatherproof caulking. R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through cable tray penetrations of exterior walls. S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables. T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V. U. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2. V. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps. W. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. 3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. Cable trays with single-conductor power conductors shall be bonded together with a grounding conductor run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the tray at 72-inch (1800-mm) intervals. The grounding conductor shall be sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors," and Article 392, "Cable Trays." D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding-bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer. E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Cable Trays for Electrical System – 26 05 36 B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm). D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm). E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches (900 mm) where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches (1800 mm) elsewhere. F. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed. B. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. 1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 COORDINATION The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends. H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. F. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. 2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag. 2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. 2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396- inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. 2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2.10 CABLES TIES A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 5. Color: Black. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: J. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. K. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. L. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. M. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service and feeder conductors. a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: (1) Phase A: Black. (2) Phase B: Red. (3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: (1) Phase A: Brown. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 (2) Phase B: Orange. (3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Colors for 600-V and above Circuits: (1) Phase A: Brown. (2) Phase B: Orange. (3) Phase C: Yellow. e. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive- backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation. H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer or load shedding. O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 7 Identification for Electrical Systems – 26 05 53 equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Control panels. d. PLC cabinets. e. Motors. f. Instruments and analyzers. g. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. h. Switchgear. i. Switchboards. j. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. k. Substations. l. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. m. Motor-control centers. n. Enclosed switches. o. Enclosed circuit breakers. p. Enclosed controllers. q. Variable-speed controllers. r. Push-button stations. s. Power transfer equipment. t. Contactors / electro-mechanical relays. u. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. v. Enclosed disconnect switches or breakers. w. Enclosed starters. x. Raceway / conduit. y. Cable tray. z. Control devices and protective relays. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 SECTION 26 05 73.01 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study, and an arc flash hazard analysis for the 480 volt and below electrical power system as shown on the plans. The Medium voltage short circuit and protective device coordination study, along with an arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed by Bath. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. UShort Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis The studies shall provide an evaluation of the 480 volt electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical equipment from Contract Documents, coordination with Bath engineering, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field investigations. A. Scope: 1. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data from all new Switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, Bath Engineering and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 2. Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Bath Engineering. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not acceptable. 3. The studies shall include both scenarios: under normal power and under generator power. 4. The studies shall include all switchboard power meter settings. 5. Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby" shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained from Bath Engineering. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 6. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 relay settings. The study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves, generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be consid- ered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier’s equipment (such as soft starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Medium Voltage system feeding each facility being considered. 7. Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 8. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 9. Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. 10. The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 11. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. 12. Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal approved by the ENGINEER. 13. The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the inter- rupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 14. The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. 15. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility for electrical data required for the studies. 16. The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that may be encountered at the pump station. This includes different transformers operating individually with various main and tie breakers open and closed. The studies shall clearly identify the particular operating configuration being evaluated. 1.2 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. UReferenceU UTitle IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 NFPA 70E Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NEC National Electrical Code 1.3 SCHEDULE A. The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Document Management” and shall include: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. 2. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis a. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. b. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. (1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: (a) Green to indicate a Category 0 (b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 (c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 (d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 (e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 (f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 B. Provide six (6) bound color copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. C. The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color copy Arc Flash Labels. D. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 3. Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD- ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584, ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices. 2.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. 2.3 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform the study. B. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1. One-Line Diagram: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct-acting trips, fuses, etc. b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable. f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. (1) Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc shall be included. h. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable. i. One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to the 208Y/120V panelboards. 2. Impedance Diagram: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 a. Available MVA or impedance from the Bath Engineering. b. Local generated capacity impedance. c. Bus impedance. d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e. Cable impedances. f. Equipment impedances. g. System voltages. h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding). i. Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all running at the same time. 3. Calculations: a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. c. A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER, with recommendations as required for improvements to the system. d. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation made for improvements. 2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer. a. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS B. The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. C. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. D. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, prohibited approach boundary and appropriate PPE required. E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control centers, combination motor starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all electrical panels, etc. such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6’-6” AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment. F. Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, scratch resistant, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by DuraLabel, Brady or approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 1. Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance outside the hazard area. 2. Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 3. The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above 40cal/cmP 2 P, and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. G. To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary and the Prohibited Approach Boundary. H. The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing fault at each bus in the system, the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. I. The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. J. Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01 Attachment A SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST [F&N Project No.] SPECIFICATION: PROJECT NUMBER 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Prior to sending submittal fill out checklist and verify all of the following information is included and clearly identified by highlighting, circling or other method. The items below are the minimum required and the Engineer may require additional information. 2. Indicate any substitutions or deviations from the specification and provide additional information as required per Specification 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures.” 3. Sign form prior to submittal and include with submittal. Submittals provided without “Submittal Checklist” will be returned without review. CHECK BOX IF ITEM HAS BEEN ADDRESSED:  1. Provide Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement.  2. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.  3. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc.  4. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Green to indicate a Category 0 b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4  5. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. Provide Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM softwar e is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis . February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Electrical Power System Studies – 26 05 73.01  8. Provide letter of qualification for studies being performed by the electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. CONTRACTOR NOTES/COMMENTS TO ENGINEER: STATEMENT: I have reviewed and certify that the submittal is complete and that the submittal is legible, accurate, and complete in a clear, easily understood manner. Signature: Date: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 SECTION 26 20 10 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification for medium voltage motors 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 260553 – Electrical Identification 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (ANSI/AFBMA): AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. American National Standards Institute/national Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA): MG 1 – Motors and Generators. C. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA): NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC). D. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (ANSI/IEEE): IEEE 112 – Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1. IEEE 85 – Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric Machinery. 2. IEEE 43 – Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Proposal Submittal: In order to evaluate the proposals, submit the following information. 1. General: Furnish a complete description of all equipment offered under these specifications, including catalogs, cuts and pertinent engineering data. Where the Proposer’s product differs from the specified requirements and/or catalog description, each point of difference shall be clearly stated. This requirement is set forth to facilitate the review of proposals and not to be construed by the Proposer’s as waiving any of the requirements of the specifications. 2. Outline Drawings: Submit preliminary outline drawings of the motors and appurtenances, showing layout dimensions of the proposed equipment. 3. Provide a plan and schedule indicating dates for submittals, manufacturing, testing and delivery. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings of motor being furnished. Shop drawings shall include the following: a. Outline of motor showing motor vibration sensors and drawings for all terminal boxes. b. Nameplate data sheets c. Oil type d. Paint color e. Shipping weights and dimensions, and center of gravity for lifting f. Motor bearing sizes and lubrication requirements. g. Submit motor documentation as required of this specification. Incomplete data submitted will not be reviewed and will be returned “Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit”. C. Operation and Maintenance Data (To be submitted prior to motor shipment): 1. Submit Manuals with instructions for installation, adjustment, lubrication, operation and maintenance of the motor. 2. Manuals shall be prepared by the motor Manufacturer and shall incorporate storage and installation instructions and operation and maintenance procedures, appropriate final certified shop drawings, performance curves, and test data. Manuals may be February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 Manufacturer’s standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to cover any special feature not included in standard material. Submit preliminary manuals for review prior to delivery of the equipment. D. Certified Test Reports: 1. Submit certified test reports for factory performance tests. Submit the following certified test reports for motor. a. Provide CTR for motor factory performance tests. b. Provide CTR for metallurgical analysis of castings and shafting. c. Provide CTR (with EIR) for vibration monitoring system. E. Motor Installation Report: Submit Installation Reports to include the following: 1. Outline drawings 2. Complete motor data 3. Assembly drawings 4. Electrical schematics and wiring diagrams 5. Motor performance curves and data 6. Motor weight 7. Catalog data 8. Assembly/disassembly sizes and weights 9. Operating instructions 10. Maintenance and lubrication recommendations 11. Recommended spare parts for startup including prices 12. Recommended spare parts list for one year operation 13. Quality control procedures 14. Nondestructive test procedures 15. Acceptance test procedure 16. Surface preparation and painting procedure 17. Shipping, handling, and storage procedures 18. Installation/erection procedure 19. Performance/acceptance test report (from factory prior to shipment) 20. Size of the largest three phase power factor correction capacitor unit which can be connected and switched to the motor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect and test motors in accordance with specified NEMA standards. Test motors to the requirements of ANSI/IEEE 112. See data sheets for other standard test requirements that may be specified. 2. In addition to the above, test and inspect in accordance with special requirements specified in the purchase documents. This requirement is not a release from the obligation of performing other tests and inspections specified in the referenced comments. 3. Experience Requirements: Motors shall be the product of manufacturers who have had at least 10 years of successful experience in the design, manufacturer and application of pumping units of the type, size, and performance capabilities as specified. 4. Factory Inspection and Tests: a. Equipment furnished under these specifications shall be subject to inspection during manufacture by a representative of the BUYER who shall be afforded proper facilities for determining compliance with the specifications. b. The BUYER may elect to have the factory performance tests witnessed by the BUYER, or designated representatives of the BUYER. If the option is taken to witness the tests, then payment will be in accordance with the appropriate item of the Proposal. c. If tests are to be witnessed by the BUYER or BUYER's representatives, the Manufacturer shall notify the BUYER sufficiently in advance (minimum 14 days) of the dates that tests will be made, so that the BUYER can make arrangements for his representative to be present. The BUYER will pay for the cost of the representative’s time, exception delineated herein. 5. Witness Testing: a. The Buyer/Engineer may witness the factory tests for all equipment. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 b. Testing shall be conducted in consecutive days. If testing requires more than 5 consecutive days, then testing shall be split up into separate trips that are a minimum of 1 week apart. Do not conduct tests on Saturdays, Sundays, or Holidays. c. The number of Buyer/Engineer persons witnessing the tests will be two persons. d. Under no circumstances, will the equipment be approved for shipment, nor will the equipment be accepted by the Buyer, if witness testing is specified, and the equipment is shipped without the testing being witnessed. e. If a test must be re-run due to failure in meeting the specified requirements, the witness expenses for the re-test shall be borne by the manufacturer or Vendor. f. Whether in or outside of the Continental United States of America, the cost for the travel, lodging expenses, meals and transportation to witness the factory motor tests for two representatives shall be included in the contract price. All travel arrangements are subject to approval by the Buyer and Engineer. (1) Where available, all flights shall be non-stop originating and returning to Dallas/Fort Worth (DFW) International Airport or Corpus Christi International Airport unless otherwise approved. (2) The Buyer/Engineer, who are witnessing the testing, shall approve all travel arrangements, including the airline selected, flight times, hotel selected, testing agenda, travel dates, etc. (3) An interpreter/guide shall be provided if English is not widely spoken, or in areas where English is not the native language. The Manufacturer shall arrange to provide an interpreter/guide for the entire time that the Buyer’s representatives are in the country for trips outside the Continental United States of America. (4) The Buyer/Engineer shall have direct communications with the person who is responsible for local arrangements and has the authority to pay for those expenses prior to leaving DFW or Corpus Christi. (5) The Manufacturer shall submit the testing agenda for approval at least 30 days prior to the test date, or the test date shall be rescheduled, with no change in the Contract price or time. The agenda shall include a detailed list of all tests to be done. (6) Where travel is over night, testing shall not start on the arrival day. Provide a testing schedule before the trip agenda is set. Tests may not start any sooner than 12 hours after arrival at hotel for trips outside North America. Buyer and Engineer will review agenda to ensure adequate time is allowed for shorter flights. (7) Flight arrangements shall be at least as follows: Coach for flights up to 3 hours in length, Business Class for flights longer than 3 hours. The Manufacturer shall pay for the Buyer’s and Engineer’s airfare. (8) Ground transportation at any destination shall be provided by the host Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). The Buyer/Engineer persons shall not be required to drive in a foreign country under any circumstances. (9) The Manufacturer shall provide for hotel, meals, travel and incidentals to be paid for by the host OEM at the testing location, whose equipment is being tested. The host OEM shall have the authority to resolve any expense problems. (10) Access to an international cell phone shall be provided while out of the Continental United States. Manufacturer shall provide and pay for at least one cell phone to be used by the Buyer’s representatives, purchased in the United States with a United States phone number that works at all times and locations as required by the witness testing. (11) Access to the internet shall be provided while out of the Continental United States. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 (12) Provide confirmed reservations at least two weeks before the trip. (13) Buyer’s and Engineer’s Representatives shall be allowed to return at any time. Manufacturer shall be responsible for any penalties, if applicable. Buyer and Engineer will stay no more than one week for factory testing. For factory test requiring more than one week, the testing shall be broken up into two separate trips. Manufacturer shall make travel arrangements for two separate trips. g. Passport and VISA Services (if required) (1) The Manufacturer shall be responsible to obtain Letters of Invitation and other documentation required to obtain a VISA into the host county. The Manufacturer shall obtain the VISA itself and directly pay for the cost of a VISA service and the fee that the host country charges for the VISA. (2) The Manufacturer shall use a VISA service located in the DFW or Corpus Christi area to handle the Buyer/Engineer’s passports who are traveling to witness the test, and to pay all expenses for the VISA service company and the cost of the VISA required by the host country. Each Buyer’s and Engineer’s Representative shall have the Visas in hand at least two weeks before the flight. (3) Each of the Buyer’s Representatives shall be responsible for obtaining their own passport. This is not the responsibility of the Manufacturer. 6. For each additional trip after the first that is required due to witnessed testing partial/complete failure or incomplete occurrence because the Manufacturer is not ready, any component of the equipment is not ready for testing, or any reason caused by the Manufacturers, Contractor, or his subcontractors/Suppliers, the Manufacturer shall pay all costs described in this specification. In addition, Manufacturer shall reimburse Engineer for Engineer’s labor at $1,200 per day per engineer (two engineers max). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prepare each unit for the type and mode of shipment specified. The preparation shall be suitable for at least six months of outdoor storage from time of shipment requiring no disassembly prior to operation (except for bearing and seal inspections). B. Provide instructions as necessary to preserve the integrity of the storage preparation after the equipment arrives at the jobsite. C. Coat exterior machined surfaces with a suitable rust preventative. D. After drained and cleaned, coat internal areas of bearings and auxiliary equipment in oil lubrication systems fabricated from carbon steel with a suitable oil-soluble rust preventative. E. Provide threaded openings with steel caps or solid-shank steel plugs. Do not use nonmetallic plugs or caps. F. When sleeve bearings are furnished, block the rotor to prevent axial and radial movement. G. When space heaters are furnished, make heater leads accessible without disturbing the shipping package. Tag leads for identification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric B. Reliance Electric C. Siemens D. Toshiba E. U.S. Motors F. TECO-Westinghouse Motor Company 2.2 DESIGN A. This specification defines the minimum requirements for medium-voltage, form-wound, squirrel-cage, induction motors typically rated above NEMA frame sizes for classified February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 electrical hazardous and non-classified area service. B. Use this specification for the selection and purchase of induction motors purchased separately or furnished with driven equipment as a package. C. This specification, along with the reference documents make up the requirements for motors 1500 horsepower and above. Use driven equipment specifications to supplement this specification and identify special project requirements. D. Motors purchased with this specification will drive vertical or horizontal pumps. Motors will be installed in a plant environment that may include high humidity, storms, salt-laden air, insects, plant life, fungus, rodents as well as traces of petroleum and/or chemicals. E. Motors shall perform satisfactorily for the application (pumping water). F. Make motors suitable for operation in an outdoor corrosive and wet environment. G. When motors are furnished with the driven equipment as a package, motors shall also meet the requirements of the driven equipment specification. H. Design motors for operation at a temperature of up to 104 degrees F ambient and at an elevation of up to 3300 feet above sea level unless specified otherwise on the data sheets. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Confirm ability of motors to supply the maximum output demanded by the driven equipment speed-torque-current characteristic appropriate to the driven equipment. B. Confirm ability of motors to overcome starting load inertia and accelerate the load to rated speed within 15 seconds at 80 percent of rated nameplate voltage, without exceeding the motor time-temperature damage curve. C. Design and construct motors for continuous full load duty. Motors may also operate intermittently. D. Motor torque with rated voltage and frequency applied, shall comply with ANSI/NEMA MG 1- 20.41; load torque characteristics and total inertia referred to the motor shaft shall be in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1-120.42. E. Single speed, polyphase motors shall have efficiencies which exceed those shown in the latest edition of ANSI/NEMA MG-1 Table 12-13. Provide motors commonly referred to as “NEMA Premium Efficiency”. 2.4 ENCLOSURES AND FRAMES A. Motors shall be provided with NEMA Type WP-II enclosures unless otherwise indicated. B. Motors frames, enclosures, terminal boxes, fan cover guards and air passages shall be cast iron or heavy fabricated steel of such design or proportions as to hold all motor components rigidly in proper position, and shall meet all NEMA requirements for the type of enclosure employed. End bells shall be cast iron. Steel sheet or plate used shall have a thickness of at least 1/8 inch. Fans, breathers, drains, screens, covers and hardware shall be corrosion- resistant materials. C. Make motor enclosure fans low inertia, nonsparking type, and suitable for bidirectional rotation and mount to the hub with stainless steel bolts. D. Furnish enclosure with a stainless steel automatic breather/drain located at the low point of the enclosure. E. Provide motor frame and enclosure with means for grounding to the main grounding system. The rear foot on horizontal motors shall be drilled and tapped on the junction box side for a service post ground connector. F. Provide motors with lifting eyebolts capable of supporting the weight of the motor. The threaded opening for the lifting eye shall not pierce motor frame. G. Provide clear space on motors to allow field drilling of dowel holes and installation of a tapered dowel pin on two, diagonally opposite motor feet. H. When a NEMA WP-II motor enclosure is specified, the following additional requirements shall apply. 1. Provide outlet airflow screens constructed of 1/8-inch, 304 stainless steel mesh on all NEMA WP-II motors for use in all Gulf Coast locations. Design the screen holders for easy removal and replacement while the motor is running. 2. Provide inlet air filters on NEMA WP-II enclosures. The inlet air filters shall be the permanent type. Inlet air filters shall consist of a galvanized steel frame and screen material, fabricated without any open passages, designed for high cleaning efficiency over a wide range of air velocities and coated with a viscous media to trap fine dust. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 Make arrangements for convenient and safe removal and replacement of inlet air filters while the motor is running. 2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors shall be rated 4160 volts, three-phase, 60Hz. B. Provide form-wound, squirrel-cage, induction motors, single speed, rated for continuous duty and suitable for inverter duty rated operation as well as across-the-line starting, at rated voltage. C. Determine the motor, speed, torque and special operating requirements from the requirements of the driven equipment. D. Motor windings and terminal leads shall be copper. Aluminum is not an allowable material for any portion of the motor. Copper rotors shall not be fabricated using brazing maler and any copper alloy must contain less than two percent phosphorous. E. Motors shall have a 1.15 service factor (SF) rating unless specified otherwise. F. Motor insulation shall be a minimum of Class F epoxy nonhygroscopic material with temperature rise limited to Class B design per ANSI/NEMA MG 1-20.40. The motor sealed insulation system shall consist of epoxy encapsulation which shall completely enclose end turns and permeate slots and shall be applied by a process that ensures void-free insulation. Stator coils shall have double dip vacuum pressure impregnation (VPI) and be sealed sufficiently to meet the test requirements specified in ANSI/NEMA MG 1-20.49.1. All motors shall be inverter duty rated. Inverter duty motors shall have the highest voltage rated pulse resistant insulation system available for application on the output of ASD’s (Adjustable Speed Drives). G. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with variation in voltage and frequency up to the limits set by ANSI/NEMA MG 1-20.45. H. Unless specified otherwise, make motors suitable for the number of full-voltage starts as required by ANSI/NEMA MG 1-20.43 as a minimum. I. Locked rotor current shall not exceed 600% of full load current. 2.6 TERMINAL BOXES A. Make motor terminal boxes weatherproof and with threaded conduit entrances with water- resistant seals between boxes and motor frame. Provide a motor line terminal box with hinged padlockable doors. Locate terminal boxes for space heaters and RTD’s on the same side as the line terminal box. B. Size the line terminal box so that feeder cables can be connected to motor leads for terminals without damage to the cable or the leads. Oversize the terminal box to allow space for stress cones and have adequate space to mount and enclose all devices mounted within. Minimum dimensions and usable volumes shall substantially exceed those given in ANSI/NEMA MG 1- 20.62. C. Furnish the line terminal box with suitable solderless ring-type, permanently numbered, cable connectors for incoming bolted-cable connections and one clamp-type ground terminal lug of sufficient size to contain a conductor the same size as motor leads. D. Wire accessory leads to a terminal board in a terminal box or boxes separate from the line leads. Separate accessory terminal boxes for the leads for space heaters, and temperature detectors, current transformers, and other similar accessories, when supplied. E. Place an OSHA warning label with the text “DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT” on the cover of the line terminal box. 2.7 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES A. Supply motors with space heaters. Arrange space heaters to provide optimum uniform heating of the stator winding and prevent condensation in the motor at ambient temperature when motor is not in operation. Space heaters shall be rated 240V but shall be connected for operation at 115V. Space heaters shall have maximum sheath temperature of 150 degrees C and shall be approved for the specified area classification. B. Unless specified otherwise, provide motors which are not operated on ASD with an adequately sized line terminal box housing complete with surge protection package consisting of both surge arresters and surge capacitors. Provide rotating machine type arresters with metal-oxide valve elements and appropriate voltage rating. Design surge capacitors with low internal inductance and nominally rated 0.5 microfarad. Make line leads February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 for arresters and capacitors of minimum length (not more than 18 inches) and connect by bolted terminals and lugs to allow easy disconnection for field testing. C. Provide motors with a minimum of six, three-wire, 100 ohm, platinum RTDs, two per phase, spaced equally around the circumference of the stator. Include three additional spare RTD’s, one per phase, as spares and label as spares, including which phase the spare is located in. D. Provide motors with three-wire, 100 ohm, platinum RTDs, one per bearing. 2.8 SHAFT AND COUPLINGS A. When motors are purchased separately from the driven equipment, make the motor shafts suitable for connection to the driven equipment; coordinate with the driven equipment OEM to furnish the motor half of the coupling, finished bored to match the specified shaft tolerance. B. Shaft runout measured in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1-4.07 shall not exceed the following: 1. 3600 rpm and above = 0.001 inch maximum 2. Below 3600 rpm = 0.002 inches maximum 2.9 ROTOR BALANCING AND VIBRATION A. Balance motor rotors dynamically according to NEMA standards. Depositing weld metal, solder and the like on the rotor to effect a balance will not be acceptable. Parent metal removed to achieve a balance shall be removed without affecting the structural strength of the rotor. Chiseling or sawing parent metal is prohibited. B. Measure vibration in all directions with the motor running uncoupled at no load, normal voltage and frequency, and at each speed of the operating range. Motor vibration shall not exceed the total amplitude, peak-to-peak values given in ANSI/NEMA MG 1-Part 7 as measured in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1-Part 7. Perform a second test and measure vibration in all directions with the motor running coupled to the load with normal load, normal voltage, normal frequency, and typical speed. 2.10 NAMEPLATES A. Fasten motor stainless steel nameplates securely to the motor by stainless steel screws. Nameplates shall include as a minimum the information required by ANSI/NEMA MG 1- 16.61. 2.11 FINISH A. Motors shall be primed and finished using the motor manufacturer's standard epoxy painting system. B. Cover internal surfaces, e.g., shaft, rotor, stator, and other similar components, with a corrosion-resistant coating of epoxy or equal material for increased life. 2.12 NOISE LEVELS A. Determine motor noise level in accordance with IEEE 85. Levels of noise generated by a motor shall not exceed 85 dbA at a distance of 3.3 feet. B. Noise level requirements may also be covered by a separate noise requirements specification included with the driven equipment specification. 2.13 MOTOR TECHNICAL DATA A. Provide motor technical data for use in setting SEL Motor Protection. Develop settings for SEL Motor Protection relays. 2.14 INVERTER DUTY MOTORS A. Provide Inverter Duty rated medium voltage induction motors for VSP pumps. B. The above motors will be furnished as part of pump packages. See pump specifications for additional information. PART 3 MOTORS 3.1 4160 VOLT MOTORS A. All motors shall receive a short commercial test in accordance with NEMA MG-1 and IEEE 112, latest version. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 B. In addition, all motors shall receive a complete test in accordance with IEEE 112, and certified copies of the test data recorded on appropriate forms of IEEE 112, together with a certified statement of compliance with minimum specified power factor and efficiencies shall be furnished to the ENGINEER. The recorded data on the forms shall be in sufficient clarity and detail to permit third-party longhand validation and verification of any computer generated results. Any longhand calculations shall be done in English. C. Tests to be performed on each motor shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Reference Resistance per IEEE Std. 112, latest version. 2. Reference Ambient of 25 degrees centigrade. 3. Efficiency using one of the following: a. Efficiency using an equivalent circuit with direct measurement of stray load loss per IEEE Method F. b. Efficiency at rated voltage and frequency by dynamometer (IEEE Method B), six points minimum. Dynamometer correction shall be applied. 4. Bearing Loss Stabilization. 5. Locked Rotor Test (two line method). 6. Slip. 7. Core Losses and Friction and Windage Losses. 8. Power Factor. 9. Load test at rated temperature rise (Stable to 1degree Celsius within 30 minutes). 10. Speed-Torque and Speed Current Curves. 11. Stator Temperature Rise Measurements by embedded detector and resistance at rated load per IEEE Std. 112, latest version. 12. High Potential Tests. 13. Winding Resistance Measurements. 14. Bearing Insulation Tests. 15. Noise Measurements per IEEE Std. 85, latest version (4 positions). 16. Vibration Measurements. 17. No load amps and no load power factor. 18. Locked rotor power factor. 19. Measured report values of motor weight. Measured value shall be within 5% of stated value. 20. Perform an impact test on one motor. Bolt the motor to a large mass and strike the motor to measure the first and second natural frequency. Furnish a report that compares the measured natural frequencies with the frequencies predicted during the submittal process. If the first natural frequency is not within 10% of the submitted natural frequency, the pump manufacturer shall produce a revised lateral frequency analysis to show how the total unit natural frequency has varied from that predicted during the submittal process. 21. Substitutions for or waivers of the tests and methods listed above will not be permitted. a. The ENGINEER or BUYER may witness the tests of all motors. b. Following completion of factory tests, the Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish to the ENGINEER for review and approval four (4) certified copies of all test data and test curves for each motor that are sealed by a P.E. The ENGINEER shall promptly review test data and, upon determining that the motor meets contract requirements, authorization will be given for shipment. Shipment shall not be made without written approval of test data by the ENGINEER, except at the risk of the Equipment Manufacturer. D. Variable Frequency Drives E. M edium voltage variable frequency drives (VFDs) are provided under a separate contract. F. Assembly: It is anticipated that pump and motor may be shipped from separate points for assembly at the project site. The pump manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination with the Motor Manufacturer to ensure that no undue difficulty in assembly will be occasioned when units are received at the project site. If the motor does not match properly, the defect shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Buyer. Any delays beyond the scheduled delivery time which are caused by these defects shall be subject to liquidated damages as provided for late delivery. G. Marking: Pump and motor shall each have a standard Manufacturer’s nameplate securely February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 affixed with tapping screws in a conspicuous place, showing the ratings, speed, rotation direction, serial number, model number, manufacturer, and other pertinent data. Pump Column sections and shafts shall be marked to indicate the installation sequence. H. Service of Manufacturer’s Representatives: 1. Motor Manufacturer Representative a. The motor manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent factory technician, who shall have had a minimum of five (5) years of experience in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment which is being furnished under this contract. This service is to ensure proper installation and adjustment of the motor, instruct personnel in proper operation, maintenance, and care of the equipment, for making operation tests of equipment, and recommendations for obtaining the most efficient use thereof. The motor technician shall be an employee of the motor manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. b. The service representative shall verify the proper installation, alignment, wiring, lubrication, and connection of all appurtenances prior to start-up. He shall be present during testing, and start-up and shall certify to the BUYER in writing that the motor has been properly installed and operate satisfactorily. c. The minimum time required to be on-site for 8 hours, not including travel time, is as follows: TASK DURATION Check Motor Installation 5 days (2 trip minimum) Pump Start-Up and Testing 5 days (2 trip minimum) Troubleshooting 2 days (1 trip minimum) Personnel Training 1 day (1 trip minimum) 3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prepare each unit for the type and mode of shipment specified. The preparation shall be suitable for at least six months of outdoor storage from time of shipment requiring no disassembly prior to operation (except for bearing and seal inspections). B. Provide instructions as necessary to preserve the integrity of the storage preparation after the equipment arrives at the jobsite. C. Coat exterior machined surfaces with a suitable rust preventative. D. After drained and cleaned, coat internal areas of bearings and auxiliary equipment in oil lubrication systems fabricated from carbon steel with a suitable oil-soluble rust preventative. E. Provide threaded openings with steel caps or solid-shank steel plugs. Do not use nonmetallic plugs or caps. F. When sleeve bearings are furnished, block the rotor to prevent axial and radial movement. G. When space heaters are furnished, make heater leads accessible without disturbing the shipping package. Tag leads for identification. 3.3 GENERAL A. Motors shall be horizontal, air cooled, solid shaft, copper wound stator, copper bar rotor construction, squirrel cage induction type. Motors shall be designed for use with variable frequency drives and across-the-line starters. 1. Motors shall be of a premium efficiency design and rated for inverter duty in accordance with MG-1, Part 31. The variable speed pumps will be varied by a variable frequency drive motor controller and will be operated for extended periods of time at speeds from 50% to 100% of rated synchronous motor speed. 2. Horsepower nameplate rating of motor, at the 1.0 service factor, shall be equal to or greater than the total horsepower requirement of the pump when operating at any head between shutoff and minimum specified operating heads, including power requirements for bowl assembly, column and line shaft bearing loss, and motor thrust February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 bearing loss from pump load. Motor shall have a service factor of 1.15 when operated across the line without using VFD and shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable provisions of the latest NEMA Standard Publication for Motors and Generators, MG-1 Part 20, subject to modifications and additions as herein set forth. 3. The locked rotor torque and breakdown torque shall not be less than shown in NEMA MG-1 20.10. 4. The locked rotor KVA/HP shall not exceed NEMA Code Letter F, 5.59 KVA/HP. 5. Motor shall have a sound pressure level of no more than 85 dBA average at 1 meter (3.3 ft) distance when measured per IEEE Std. 85 “Test Procedure for Airborne Measurements on Rotating Electrical Machinery”. 6. Rotor shall be “precision” balanced to within an amplitude peak to peak in accordance with the requirement of NEMA MG-1. 7. The stator shall have all connections brazed with silver brazing alloy. The stator shall be braced and supported to eliminate any detrimental winding movement. 8. The stator core shall be built up with high grade, non-aging laminated silicon steel C5 or better in accordance with ASTM A345. Each lamination core shall be plated to minimize eddy current losses. The laminations shall be adequately secured to the stator frame and securely held in place at each end. There shall be no perceptible buzzing or laminations during operation. Provide slot wedges for rigidity. 9. Stator windings to be designed to have surge capability of 3.5 p.u. at rise time of 0.1 to 10. 0.2 µs and 5 p.u. at a rise time of 1.2 µs or longer. 11. Motor shall be rated at 4160 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz. 12. Motor efficiency shall not be less than 95% and (uncorrected) power factor not less than 85% when operating at full load and rated voltage and frequency. 13. Motors shall be capable of bringing the pumps up to speed with a closed control valve and 80% of rated voltage. 14. The motor leads shall have the same insulation level as the motor. 15. Motors shall be painted in the factory with two (2) coats of manufacturer’s standard exterior enamel. Color shall be selected by the Buyer. 16. Non-reverse ratchets may be required. Motor and Pump Manufacturers shall verify if non-reverse ratchets are required. If required, non-reverse ratchets shall be provided. 17. Motor shall be rated for VFD use. B. Enclosure 1. Motor enclosure shall be Weather Protected NEMA Type I in accordance with NEMA MG-1. Arrange air discharge louvers to direct air in an upward/outward direction. 2. Provide adequate circulation for all operating speeds and loads. C. Insulation 1. Motor windings shall be full Class F insulated or better. After stator assembly, the stator assembly shall be sealed vacuum-pressure impregnation (VPI) of epoxy resin. The stator shall receive two VPI treatments, each treatment consisting of a dip followed by an oven bake.The windings shall comply with the latest applicable provisions of NEMA MG 1, and end winding coils shall be braced to limit displacement to no more than 5.0 mils under any condition of starting or running. a. Motor shall operate continuously at rated voltage and frequency (30 to 60 Hz) at 50C ambient temperature, with a temperature rise not to exceed both (1) Class B rise (70 degrees C), per NEMA MG-1 20.8 measured by resistance at a 1.0 service factor when operating at 100% of the nameplate rated horsepower. (2) and a Class B rise (80 degrees C) per NEMA MG-1 20.8 measured by embedded detector (RTD) at a 1.0 service factor when operating at 100% of the nameplate rated horsepower. b. Insulation shall be capable of preventing failure as a result of common mode voltages. D. Bearings and Lubrication 1. Provide oil-lubricated bearings with a ring oil lubrication system. Select and approve bearings for the application. 2. Provide proper bearing insulation to prevent circulation of shaft currents and resulting damage to include a shaft grounding brush assembly. Provide AEGIS PRO series rings February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 or approved equal. Insulating means shall also be provided for any oil-supply connections and monitoring equipment to prevent electrical bypassing of the bearing insulation. 3. Provide a reservoir for oil-lubricated bearing housings with sufficient depth to serve as a settling chamber for foreign materials, with a drain plug, and vents as required, accessible from the exterior of the motor. Furnish oil-lubricated motors with a constant oil-level sight gauge mounted on the motor housing and marked with running- and stopped-oil levels. Provide inspection openings to observe the oil rings. 4. Provide IP55 bearing seals to prevent moisture from entering through the shaft openings. 5. For inline pumps, special high thrust bearings are required for drive motors, except for pumps where the thrust bearings are provided as an integral part of the pump. 6. Motor bearings shall be designed for the maximum load imposed by the pump and motor, and shall be selected for a 5-year minimum life and a 25-year average life. Bearings shall be insulated as necessary to prevent shaft-bearing- frame current. Insulating means shall also be provided for any oil-supply connections and monitoring equipment to prevent electrical bypassing of the bearing insulation. 7. Thrust bearing shall be of the anti-friction type with oil reservoir and other necessary appurtenances. Guide bearings shall be oil-lubricated, anti- friction or split-sleeve type bearing with oil reservoir. Thrust bearings shall be of the air cooled type. E. Motor Terminal Box 1. Motor terminal box shall be of adequate size to accommodate stress cones to make up cable terminations for 5000 volt shielded cable. Motor terminal box shall be suitable for terminations without exceeding minimum bending radius per National Electrical Code. Terminal box shall be provided with standoff insulators and suitable for terminations using a NEMA two hole lug. Motor terminal box shall not be less than the next standard NEMA size box for a NEMA Type II box. Minimum vertical clearance from the bottom of the motor terminal lugs and the bottom of the terminal box shall not be less than 26”. Bottom and front of box shall be removable. Terminal box shall receive motor cables from the bottom. Terminal box shall be adequately constructed to prevent excessive vibration. Terminal box size, position and layout shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. F. Accessories Terminal Boxes 1. Motor shall have accessory leads from space heaters, RTD's, and vibration transducers terminated in separate boxes. Leads for space heaters, RTD’s and vibration transducers shall be terminated on barrier type terminals with stainless steel screws. Leads for bearing and winding RTD’s shall be brought to the same box. Leads shall be suitably marked and identified with heat shrink markers. Accessories boxes shall have phenolic nameplates, black with white lettering, attached with stainless steel screws. The nameplates shall say “SPACE HEATER”, “BEARING RTD’S”, “VIBRATION TRANSDUCERS”, and “WINDING RTD’S”. Accessories boxes shall be bottom or side entry and shall be supported by the motor. 2. Terminal boxes shall have provisions for terminating the following conduits: a. RTD Terminal Box: one (1) 1.5” conduit b. Space Heater Box: one (1) 1” conduit c. Vibration Transducers: one (1) 1.5” conduit G. Grounding Means 1. Provide a grounding lug threaded into the motor frame within the motor terminal box and other motor conduit boxes. Lug shall be similar and equal to Burndy KC Servit and suitable for terminating #4 ground wire. Provide two NEMA 2-hole ground pads located near the base of the motor mounted 180 degrees apart. Ground pads shall be stainless steel and suitable for terminating #4/0 ground conductor. H. Appurtenances All wires and electrical connections shall be copper. All wiring penetrating motor frame shall be protected against chaffing with a rubber grommet. 1. Space Heaters: Motor shall be equipped with space heaters for operation on 120 volt, 60 hertz, single-phase power. They shall maintain the internal temperature above dew point when motor is not operating. Space heaters shall not be located directly in the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 access holes where they may pose a danger of burn or shock to servicemen. Space heater wiring shall be routed to prevent wire being between the frame and space heater. 2. Temperature Monitors: Motor shall be equipped with six 100-ohm platinum resistance temperature detectors (RTD), two per phase, spaced around the motor windings and located at the hot spots of the stator. In addition, each thrust and guide bearing shall have a 100 ohm platinum RTD installed for sensing bearing temperature and integral to the bearing housing. 3. Conduits a. .Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtite, Type HTUA by Anamet Electrical, or equal. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be of the screw-in type with insulated throat by Thomas & Betts Co.; no equals. b. Rigid aluminum conduit, couplings, factory elbows, and fittings shall be 6063 alloy by Allied Tube & Conduit Co., or approved equal. Conduit hubs shall be insulated throat by Crouse-Hinds. c. .Liquidtight strain relief cord and cable connectors shall be Series LS by Crouse-Hinds, or approved equal. d. Design neat layout of conduit from transducers and bearing RTDs to the accessory terminal boxes. Submit a detailed layout Drawing to the ENGINEER for review. e. .All conduits and wire shall be routed and installed in an identical fashion for like motors. f. .Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-in. 4. Mounting Hardware- All mounting hardware including but not limited to strut channels, clamps, etc. shall be 316 stainless steel. 5. All appurtenance boxes shall be laid out to avoid overlap and access limitation to the boxes. Appurtenance boxes shall be secured with stainless steel screws. I. Documentation 1. Motor Manufacturer shall supply documentation for the motors as follows: a. Complete dimensional data including the following: (1) dimensional outline drawings (2) maintenance clearances (3) locations and sizes of lubrication connections, vents, drains, etc. b. Data Sheet: Fill out and submit with the Shop Drawing submittal the information requested on the Motor Submittal Data Sheet (Attachment B) for each motor size being provided. c. Complete nameplate data. d. Allowable time periods between starts. e. Subtransient reactance and X/R. f. Speed-torque curve at 100% and 80% of rated voltage. g. Speed-current curve at 100% and 80% of rated voltage. h. Acceleration time at 100% and 80% of rated voltage. i. Thermal damage curve (I2t) j. Locked rotor withstand time. k. Rotor inertia. l. Schematic and interconnection diagrams. m. Bearing descriptions. n. Motor weights. o. Alarm and shutdown values for temperatures of the winding and bearing RTDs. p. Alarm and shutdown values for vibration monitoring. q. Detailed conduit layout for motor. r. Dimensions and layouts of terminal box and accessories terminal boxes. s. Motor insulation voltage rating.Results of tests. t. Measured locked rotor current and torque, and locked rotor power factor. u. Motor no load data (i.e. amps, power factor, etc.). v. Maximum kVAR allowed for power factor correction. Maximum kVAR shall be included on motor nameplate as well.Instruction manual. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 w. Bill of Material with manufacturer’s cut sheets for all major equipment – RTDs, bearings, vibration transducers, terminal blocks, etc. Clearly identify on cut sheets the exact model number of equipment being provided. Note: All documentation listed above shall be supplied with the motor’s initial submittal with the exception of the motor test results, photographs, and instruction manual which shall be furnished later in the project. 3.4 SPECIAL TOOLS A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of Medium Voltage Motors as required to complete the project. B. Furnish a lifting bar/bracket for the motor and one set of any special tools or devices required for the assembly, operation, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. 3.5 LUBRICANT A. The Contractor shall furnish with equipment, oil and grease of the recommended type and grade, in sufficient quantity for prelube, initial filling and for operation during acceptance tests and installation. Advise Buyer of type and available sources of lubricants. In addition provide Owner with a sufficient quantity of motor lubricants for required service during the first 12 months after start–up. PART 4 PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall coordinate OEM verification that motor and motor base match pump bolt configuration. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the motor in accordance with the Manufacturer's published instructions using the necessary tools and instrument to ensure proper fit and alignment with the driven machine. B. Set the SEL relay for each motor. C. Before coupling up with the driven machine, perform the following work: 1. Test the motor winding insulation resistance in accordance with IEEE 43. 2. Terminate cables to the motor leads. 3. Energize motor momentarily to check rotation. 4. Check shaft of driven machine to ensure free movement. D. Couple motor up with driven machine. E. Record motor nameplate data. F. Set and align motor, assemble shaft coupling and adjust impeller setting. After running the pumping unit, readjust impeller. G. Furnish and install drain lines. H. Furnish and install shaft lubrication and bottom bowl grease appurtenances. I. Furnish and install wiring, conductors, conduits, cable trays, and connections for motor leads, control wiring, etc. J. Conduct acceptance tests and submit an installation report as required. 4.3 WARNING LABELS A. Verify that required OSHA warning labels have been installed. 4.4 PREPARATION A. The Manufacturer’s Representative has responsibilities in the installation and field testing of the equipment as described in this Section. Installation of equipment shall be performed by the Construction Contractor who shall be required to assemble the equipment, if required, and install it in accordance with Installation, Operation and Maintenance instructions which shall be furnished by the vendor or manufacturer, the installation drawings for this project and applicable Installation Instructions of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1. The Construction Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment and machinery necessary to receive, inspect, unload, store, protect, and install completely, in proper operating condition, the equipment. Contractor shall protect and store the motors February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 indoors and as recommended by the manufacturer, keeping bearings lubricated and the motor space heaters energized during storage and until they are put into service. 2. He shall also furnish such incidental items not supplied with the equipment, but which may or may not be described in the Plans and Specifications, for complete installation. 3. Certain items of equipment due to its size or character will be disassembled for shipping, and shall be assembled by the Construction Contractor as it is installed. It is the Contractor’s responsibility, in establishing his costs for installation, to determine the degree of disassembly that the equipment will be shipped in. B. The Contractor shall schedule the service of the manufacturer to assist in the assembly, installation, lubrication, adjustment, and acceptance test of the equipment. 4.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Test: 1. Upon completion of installation of equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory installation and operation of the equipment shall be conducted by the Manufacturer’s Representative. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Installation Contractor, Engineer and Buyer. Equipment shall be checked for excessive noise, alignment, vibration, and lateral deflection, general performance, etc. Vibration of the unit when measured at the top motor bearing shall not exceed the “Acceptable Field Vibration Limits” of the Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal Pumps. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Buyer. A minimum of 30 days of satisfactory operation will be required prior to final acceptance. Testing equipment shall be provided by the Manufacturer’s Representative. 2. A field “bump” test of the installed pump and motor shall be made under the supervision of the Service Representative to confirm that the Reed Frequency is not within the operational exciting frequency from 65 to 105 percent of the full synchronous motor speed. B. Test Data: The pumping units shall be operated throughout their full range of operating heads, including backspin, if possible, and at pump speeds from maximum speed to 50 percent speed, recording pump discharge pressure, water level, flow, motor voltage and current, vibrations, noise, deflection, and motor bearing temperatures, as applicable. C. Equipment Installation Report: The pump and motor representatives shall each submit a written report certifying the equipment is properly installed, lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from undue stress from connecting appurtenances, that it has been operated under all operating conditions and that it is operating satisfactorily. 4.6 PAINTING A. Touch-up all damage of painting of the pumping unit with extra paint furnished by the manufacturer. 4.7 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL TEST AND SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TEST A. The Contractor shall perform preliminary operational tests over a period of not less than two 10-hour tests or one 24-hour test. Data shall be recorded such as: reservoir levels; pump discharge pressure; pump speed; flow rates; vibration and pump and motor bearing temperatures; power information; etc. The vendor shall run all pumps at all operating speeds and feasible head conditions. B. The equipment Vendor shall be responsible for operating the equipment and recording and submitting the necessary data from this test. The Construction Contractor shall assist in the performance testing. C. The cost of power required for performing all tests will be borne by the Buyer. Testing will begin only after the pipeline is filled. The Contractor shall coordinate filling procedures with the Engineer. D. After the preliminary operational test is completed, and when pump station and pipeline construction is complete and prior to final acceptance of the pump station, the pump station Construction Contractor shall cooperate in performing an overall 30 day system operational test. The Buyer will be responsible for operating the equipment and recording data during this test. The Contractor and his vendors will be responsible for trouble- shooting and adjustments to equipment. This 30-day system operational test is not required as part of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 15 Medium Voltage Motors – 26 20 10 substantial completion. The purpose of the test is to demonstrate or check the ability of the system to pump continuously with various pump combinations and speeds. E. It is anticipated that the 30-day system operational testing may begin after work is completed by. However, no guarantee is made by the Engineer or Buyer as to the date for starting testing. If testing cannot begin as a sole result of delays in completion of work by other contractors, the pump station contractor will be granted an extension of time. No additional compensation will be provided to the Contractor as a result of delays in completion due to postponement of testing. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Low Voltage Transformers – 26 22 00 SECTION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1. Distribution transformers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 1. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Source quality-control test reports. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 CLOSE SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Low Voltage Transformers – 26 22 00 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under norm al control of temperature and humidity. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 6. Square D; Schneider Electric. 7. Approved Equal 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Cores: One leg per phase. C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray. E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None. F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity. G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor. 1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor. 2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Low Voltage Transformers – 26 22 00 K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness: a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz. L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. M. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core. N. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91. O. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows: 1. 9 kVA and Less: 40 2. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 3. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 4. 151 to 300 kVA: 55 5. 301 to 500 kVA: 60 END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Panelboards – 26 24 16 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Panelboards – 26 24 16 A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. Products 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3000 feet (2000 m). B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 3000 feet (2000 m). C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Panelboards – 26 24 16 anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X316 stainless steel. c. Corrosive Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316 stainless steel. d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder or metal frame with transparent protective cover. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra- capacity neutral bus. E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Panelboards – 26 24 16 load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short- circuit rating by an NRTL. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric (Preferred) B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: As indicated E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric (Preferred) B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D product indicated on drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. Approved Equal. C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Panelboards – 26 24 16 mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. 2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1 and as shown on drawings. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. C. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Panelboards – 26 24 16 I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordinate with owner to perform inspection and testing. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Coordinate with owner or owner representative to witness inspection of components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Assist owner’s agent in performing the following infrared scan tests and inspections: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: (1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Wiring Devices – 26 27 26 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Wall-switch. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 5. Approval Equal. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENT February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Wiring Devices – 26 27 26 A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W -C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590. 2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W -S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Single Pole: b. Cooper; AH1221. c. Hubbell; HBL1221. d. Leviton; 1221-2. e. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 2.6 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.7 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Black unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Wiring Devices – 26 27 26 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping. 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Manufacturer's field service report. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 device. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 or 600-VAC, with ratings as indicated: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled 2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. 5. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. F. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 2.4 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating. C. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 2.5 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316SS 3. Indoor Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316SS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing: Assist owner representative to perform testing as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Assist owner representative to perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers – 26 28 16 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Enclosed Controllers – 26 29 13 SECTION 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. CPT: Control power transformer. B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. C. MCP: Motor circuit protector. D. N.C.: Normally closed. E. N.O.: Normally open. F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. 1. Show tabulations of the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Enclosed Controllers – 26 29 13 protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 70 00, include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced- voltage solid-state controllers. 1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANC E SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 4. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Enclosed Controllers – 26 29 13 conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. B. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. 4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA. 6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 7. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting. 8. N.C. isolated overload alarm contact. 9. External overload reset push button. C. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. 2. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front- mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA. 3. MCCB Disconnecting Means: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Enclosed Controllers – 26 29 13 a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time- current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 12. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X 316 Stainless Steel. 3. Indoor Wet Locations: Type 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type. a. Push Buttons: Recessed types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: Incandescent types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s). C. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. D. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures. E. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; unwired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural- steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. D. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Enclosed Controllers – 26 29 13 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. B. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 7. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 1. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Enclosed Controllers – 26 29 13 without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 SECTION 26 29 23.01 MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to manufacture, fabricate, test, and deliver complete variable frequency drives as shown on the drawings and as specified herein, including all required appurtenances to be used in the Owner’s Pump Station as shown in the schedule below. The VFDs shall operate on 4,160 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz with drive isolation transformers, if required, and all appurtenances needed to meet the requirements of these specifications. The VFDs shall be suitable to drive the pumping unit at the Pump Station over the range of conditions specified. Location For Pump VFD Name High Service 3 Elec. Rm. 31-P-1911 VFD - 1911 High Service 3 Elec. Rm. 31-P-2012 VFD - 2012 High Service 3 Elec. Rm. 31-P-2015 VFD - 2015 B. The manufacturer shall provide the services of factory field engineers for start-up, field tests, troubleshooting, Owner training and the supervision of storage and installation. The minimum time required for the manufacturer field services to be on-site shall include a minimum of the following. These times do not include travel time and include a minimum of 8 hours working per day. Start-up/Testing 10 days (10 trips minimum) Field Tests 4 days (4 trips minimum) Troubleshooting 4 day (4 trips minimum) Owner Training 2 day (2 trips minimum) Supplementary Owner Training during Warranty Period 1 day (1 trip minimum) C. Harmonic analysis and test to verify results. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: The VFD manufacturer shall demonstrate 4 years experience with the drives using phase shift technology of the type and size herein specified. 1.Allen-Bradley – Active Front End PowerFlex 7000 series 2. Siemens – Perfect Harmony series 3. Eaton- Ampgard 4. Toshiba-Tosvert 300MVi 5.No other manufacturer will be accepted. B. Variable speed drives shall be of sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed their full-rated capacity when the driven equipment is operating as specified. C. The variable frequency drive manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network (United States), engineering service facilities within 250 miles of the project site to provide start-up service, emergency service, calls, repair work, service contracts, and maintenance and training of customer personnel. When requested by the Engineer, documentation shall be provided showing compliance, capabilities and references for this requirement. D. All equipment shall be NEMA rated. IEC or dual IEC/NEMA rated shall not be acceptable. E. Complete VFD integrated line up shall be UL Listed. F. The pump and pump motor manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating with the VFD February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 manufacturer to meet the design and performance requirements of the specification. The VFD shall be installed by the Construction Contractor. G. FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTS 1. The VFD manufacturer shall provide the following quality assurance steps within his factory: a. Incoming inspection of all components. b. In-process inspection of assemblies. c. 100% test and inspection of power devices. 2. The VFD printed circuit boards shall be tested using the manufacturer’s standard testing procedure. The VFD manufacturer shall provide certification that the tests have been completed. 3. Factory tests shall include a test of all equipment functions, per manufacturer’s standard testing procedures. The purpose of the test shall be to verify the functionality, performance and stability of each VFD. The test shall include, but not be limited to, a complete operational test demonstrating all controls, trips, inputs, outputs, etc., shown on the attached pump control schematic. A clearly labeled test box with dedicated switches, lights, etc. for each I/O shall be provided and used to demonstrate all controls, trips, inputs, outputs, etc. The manufacturer shall provide a report of certification that the tests have been completed prior to shipment to the Engineer for approval. 4. After all tests have been performed, each adjustable frequency controller shall undergo a 24-hour burn-in test. The controllers shall be burned in at 100 percent motor load connected to a dynamometer for 24 hours without an unscheduled shutdown. During this test, the efficiency of the VFDs shall be measured by simultaneously measuring the total KW input to the VFDs and the KW output of the VFD. Simultaneous KW measurements shall be made with two BMI 3030A, Yokogawa Model 2042 wattmeter or equal instruments with required accessories to confirm compliance with specified efficiencies. 5. The variable frequency drive manufacturer shall provide the actual test data, observations and certification that the tests have been completed prior to shipment to the Engineer for approval. 6. Efficiency test for 100% and 80% load (100% and 80% of the motor horsepower) at 100% speed shall be performed on all units with a dynamometer or reactor banks. 7. Each drive shall be operated full loaded for the VFD testing simulating the actual field operating conditions and the operating data – amps, true power factor, efficiency, etc. for the drive shall be recorded and officially submitted to the Owner/Engineer. H. Field Quality Control 1. The manufacturer shall furnish an equipment test report after installation, start-up and testing. 1.3 STANDARDS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entity. A. Local Laws and Ordinances. B. State and Federal Laws. C. National Electrical Code (NEC). D. Underwriters' Laboratories (U.L.) E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with this section, the General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” and shall include the following minimum information: 1. PRE-AND POST-SUBMITTAL MEETING a. A pre-submittal meeting shall be held before any shop drawings are submitted. A post-submittal meeting shall be held after the Engineer’s shop drawing review comments have been submitted. As a minimum the following shall attend the meeting: General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 VFD Supplier and Engineer. Representatives from the VFD Supplier shall include the Project Manager who will be responsible for the project at the factory, no exceptions. Any shop drawings submitted before the pre-submittal meeting will be rejected and sent back Not Approved, Revise and Re-submit. The VFD Supplier shall bring with them a detailed list of the items their submittal will include for review by the Engineer or a bootleg copy of the actual submittal. 2. SHOP DRAWINGS a. Any deviations from the specifications should be clearly identified on a separate sheet of paper in the shop drawing submittal. b. Size, type, and rating of all system components c. Internal component layout diagrams. d. Drawings shall show: (1) equipment dimensions, (2) stub-up locations and conduit entry and exit locations. Conduit entry and exit points clearly showing dimensions of entry and exit points. Provide a detailed top view showing how conduits penetrate the top of the VFD. Coordinate with the installation (Electrical) Contractor on this prior to submitting information to the Engineer. (3) shipping splits, (4) shipping weights, (5) ventilation details, (6) power equipment, (7) cable terminal sizes, (8) and nameplate schedule. (9) Provide a drawing of the front view elevation with designation of equipment and devices on doors, and clearly indicating the maximum mounting height of devices on doors. (10) Project specific control schematics and wiring diagrams. Labels on the control schematic for control relays, level switches, indication lights, etc. shall correspond to equipment tags/labels indicated on the Pump Control Schematic included in the plans. Include a label above each timing relay indicating the range and setpoint for that timing relay. (11) Project specific wiring diagram of the motor protection relay (12) Provide a drawing showing the Terminal strip layout showing customer field connections. The terminal strip layout shall also include a label next to each connection indicating signal description. (13) One-Line diagram and Three-Line diagram to be submitted with initial submittal, No Exceptions. e. Complete bills of materials with model numbers listed for individual components. f. Catalog cut sheets of major components, power equipment clearly identifying make and model number of device being provided. g. Data sheets of miscellaneous electrical equipment. Where a data sheet is not available provide the equipment ratings and model number for the devices. h. Data sheet of Motor Protection Relay (MPR) clearly indicating what options are included i. Spare Parts List j. Warranty information k. Letter of Compatibility: The VFD supplier in conjunction with the pump/motor supplier shall issue a letter of compatibility stating that the VFD and motor are compatible. Coordinate with the CMAR for this information. l. Data on the characteristics and performance of the variable frequency drives, including amperage ratings, horsepower rating, frame sizes, trip settings, short-circuit current rating, etc. Data shall include certification that the variable frequency drives are warranted for use with the motors specified in Appendix B and as specified herein. m. Heat dissipation for the VFD and phase shifting/isolation transformers, and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 transformer inrush data (duration versus magnitude). Transformer impedance and X/R data. Provide complete information for the phase shifting /isolation transformer including cut sheets for all transformer accessories. Submit the transformer elevations and side views, floor plan, dimensions, weight, packaging for shipment, field wiring diagrams for power and control circuits, transformer nameplate information, and itemized bill of materials for accessories. n. Project specific magnetizing current for the transformer (for Siemens VFD only). o. List of default VFD microprocessor motor protective features and their settings. p. Harmonic distortion analysis: The manufacturer of the drive equipment shall perform a bus voltage and/or current distortion calculation for each bus that supplies a drive. The harmonic study shall be performed to determine the harmonic content expected on the Purchaser's supply bus due to the addition of the variable frequency drive. The total harmonic distortion shall not exceed THD values as recommended by IEEE - 519, 1992 under normal worst case operating conditions. Harmonic analysis shall be provided prior to or with the VFD shop drawings for approval. q. SUBMITTALS FOR THE VFD SUBMITTED PRIOR TO OR WITHOUT THE HARMONIC ANALYSIS SHALL BE CONSIDERED INCOMPLETE AND NOT REVIEWED. THE INITIAL SUBMITTAL SHALL INCLUDE ALL INFORMATION LISTED ABOVE WITH THE EXCEPTION OF TEST RESULTS. r. Written description of field test procedures. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval two weeks prior to testing. s. Note: All documentation listed above shall be supplied with the VFD’s initial submittal. Incomplete submittals will be returned “NOT APPROVED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT”. 3. FACTORY TEST DATA a. Test data shall be submitted for Engineers approval prior to shipment of VFD. 4. FIELD TEST DATA a. Test data shall be submitted for Engineers approval prior to start up. 5. NETA Acceptance Testing Specification (ATS) field tests and inspections tests report. 6. Supplier shall submit a training outline for Owner’s/Engineer’s review and comment a minimum of 4 weeks before training is to take place. 7. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS a. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared by the equipment manufacturer and shall contain the final certified approved shop drawings, submittals, schematics, final wiring diagrams with any changes made during start-up, equipment installation report and maintenance procedures and test data. b. Manuals may be manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as necessary to cover any special feature not included in standard material. c. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include warranty information as well as a warranty information page that shall include information on the warranty start and end date as well as contact information for service. d. Operation and maintenance manuals shall also include one (1) software copy of all PLC program files burned on a CD. Provide a hard copy of all PLC programming logic in O&M Manuals. e. Submit preliminary manuals for review prior to start-up of equipment. 8. Bid Submittal: In order to evaluate the bids, submit the following information. a. Data Sheet: Submit information requested on the data Sheet included with the Bid Proposal forms. The Data Sheet is included in “Appendix D”. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 A. The manufacturer shall be responsible for delivery of the equipment and accessories, f.o.b. to the job site or to such storage site as may be designated by the Owner or Construction Contractor in good condition and undamaged. B. Unloading and storage of the equipment shall be the responsibility of the Construction Contractor who shall inspect the equipment for apparent damage. Equipment which is found to be damaged will not be accepted until properly repaired or replaced by the manufacturer. C. Handling and shipment of the equipment shall be in such a manner to prevent internal component damage, breakage, and denting and scoring of the enclosure finish. D. Equipment must be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation at all times. Equipment shall be stored indoors in a clean, dry, climate controlled heated and air conditioned environment that is free from dust, No Exceptions. Protect equipment from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances and physical damage. E. 100 watt incandescent lamps shall be placed in the VFD enclosure sections as required and energize to prevent the buildup of condensation during extended storage periods. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment furnished under this specification for a period of two (2) years against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure. B. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the first 2 years of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the Manufacturer shall furnish, deliver and install the defective part or parts at his own expense. C. The first 2 years of service shall be interpreted as the 24-month period following the installation, adjusting and acceptance testing, and the start of actual operation of the equipment, or 30 months after delivery, whichever occurs first. 1.7 HARMONICS ANALYSIS A. Provide an electrical system harmonics analysis for the electrical distribution system including the electric utility. The goal of the study shall be to determine requirements for the variable frequency drives and isolation/phase shifting transformers, if required, to comply with the harmonic distortion levels. B. A preliminary harmonic analysis shall be provided to the Engineer for approval prior to or at the same time as the VFD shop drawings being sent for approval. C. The harmonics analysis shall verify compliance with the harmonics and line notching requirements specified herein. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the maximum utility system short circuit kVA and system impedance from the local Utility. The location of the point of common coupling shall be defined as the main bus of 4,160 Volt Metal Enclosed Switchgear at the ON Stevens WTP, PCR #1 building. The study shall evaluate the VFD operating at the lowest operating speed as specified in the pump specification, VFD operating at the full speed condition, and ten percent speed increments between these points. The study shall contain, as a minimum, the following: 1. Analysis of a. One VFD operating at a time. b. Two VFDs operating at a time. c. Three VFDs operating at a time. 2. Preliminary harmonic levels without VFDs installed. 3. Preliminary harmonic levels with the VFDs operating. 4. Explanation of method used to perform the study. 5. Explanation of study results. 6. All calculations and/or computer printouts used to arrive at the recommendations. 7. Voltage and Current harmonic content up to the fiftieth harmonic, for the conditions specified above in table format. D. The harmonic distortion for voltage and current distortion levels and line notching shall meet the requirements of IEEE 519, latest version without the need for any ancillary filtering equipment. E. The Manufacturer/Contractor shall be responsible to obtain all data necessary to perform the study. This includes feeder cable sizes, approximate feeder length, motor data, switchgear data, electric utility data, and any other information relevant to the study. The analysis shall February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 use actual system impedance, Utility transformer impedance, and available fault current from the Utility. F. If harmonic filters are required to meet the requirements of the IEEE 519, the VFD manufacturer must provide the filters, and is responsible for the design and manufacturer of the filters at no cost to the Owner. G. The report shall be provided prior to or with the variable frequency drive shop drawings for approval. Submittals for the variable frequency drives submitted prior to or without the study will be considered incomplete and not reviewed. H. Compliance shall be verified with onsite field measurements of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion at the defined point of common coupling with and without the VFDs operating. I. VFD manufacturer shall coordinate with the Engineer of Record for electrical data required for the harmonic analysis. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Any modifications to a standard product required to meet this specification shall be performed by the VFD manufacturer only. B. Drive shall be air cooled. Liquid cooled systems shall not be acceptable. The VFDs shall consist of an incoming load-break fused disconnect switch, input rectifier grade drive isolation transformer (if required), input converter/DC bus/output inverter and control logic section. All components shall be integral to the VFD lineup, factory wired and tested as a complete system. C. VFD system shall maintain a .95 minimum true power factor (fundamental and displacement) from 30% to 100% speed. D. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1. The control schematic is based on a valve hydraulic oil accumulator system. 2. In the Local mode of operation the sequence of operations is initiated at the VFD. In Remote mode the sequence of operations is initiated via the SCADA system. 3. Timing relay TR1 is energized from the closed valve limit switch CVLS-1. The motor cannot be started until the valve has been closed for a prescribed period of time (15 minutes) field adjustable. Also, the motor cannot be started upon power failure until the valve has gone closed (CVLS-1) and timing relay TR1 has timed out after a prescribed period of time. 4. When the start sequence is initiated, the start command energizes CR3. CR5 becomes energized, and energizes CR6. CR6 sends a signal to the VFD to start the motor. If pressure is present (from pump discharge pressure switch), CR11 will become energized and send a signal to the hydraulic power unit solenoid (SOLV-1) to open the valve. 5. Once the motor is running, if the valve fails to make 5% open (CVLS-3 opens) in a prescribed period of time (3 minutes) field adjustable, TR2 will time out and seal in and the motor will stop due to “Valve Failure”. 6. Once the valve has reached 5% open, limit switch OVLS-2 will close energizing CR2. CR2 seals in CR6. 7. Stopping the motor due to power failure, E-stop, MPR trip, VFD trip, pump low level cutoff, valve maintenance mode, and valve failure will de-energize CR1. Opening of the normally closed contact CR1 causes the emergency slow close solenoid valve (SOLV-2) at the hydraulic power unit to de-energize and the valve will emergency slow close. 8. The normal stop sequence is initiated when the motor is called on to stop by either the momentary stop pushbutton located on the VFD panel or through a stop signal from SCADA. The stop command de-energizes CR5, which de-energizes CR11 and sends a signal to the hydraulic power unit solenoid (SOLV-1) to close the valve. Once the valve has reached 95% closed, limit switch OVLS-2 will open, de-energizing CR2. CR6 will drop out sending a signal to the VFD to stop the motor. 9. When the valve is in the fully closed position, CVLS-4 will close to provide local and remote indication of the valve being closed. When the valve is in the fully open position, OVLS-5 will close to provide local and remote indication of the valve being February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 open. When the valve is in the intermediate positions, both the valve open and the valve closed positions will be indicated locally and remotely. 10. Note: Control and timing relays shown on control schematic shall be hardwired NEMA type. PLC/computer programming shall not be used for timers and relays. 2.2 ALLEN BRADLEY VFD’S A. Allen-Bradley VFD’s shall be Active Front End, PowerFlex 7000 series. The VFD shall utilize PWM current source technology consisting of a Symmetrical Gate Commutated Thyristors (SGCT’s) input inverter, inductor DC bus and SGCT output inverter. B. The VFD line-up shall consist of an input power compartment – non-load break isolation disconnect switch with fuses and input contactor, output contactor if required, SGCT power semiconductor compartment and a compartment for auxiliary equipment (DC link inductor, control, etc.). C. Each VFD shall have a power device bypass option. A faulted power device shall be shunted allowing the VFD to resume the operation at the reduced capacity with remaining power devices. 2.3 SIEMENS VFD’S A. Siemens VFD’s shall be 18-pulse drives, Perfect Harmony series. The VFD shall utilize Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) voltage source technology consisting of a three-phase diode rectifier input inverter, capacitor DC bus and a single-phase bridge of IGBT’s (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor’s) output inverter, generating the PWM voltage output waveform to the motor. The VFD output inverter section shall be eighteen or more pulse to eliminate the need for harmonic filters. The input inverter shall be preceded with a phase shifting transformer (extended delta autotransformer type) for harmonic mitigation and common mode voltage protection. B. The VFD line-up shall consist of an input power compartment - load break disconnect switch with fuses, transformer compartment and power cell compartment. C. Provide in the initial shop drawing submittal the project specific magnetizing current for the transformer. 1. Transformer magnetizing current shall not cause excessive voltage disturbances on the electric utility system. Line reactors shall be provided to mitigate this as required. The input isolation transformer shall provide common mode voltage protection and phase shifting. Transformer shall be dry type and shall be factory mounted and pre-wired to the VFD. The transformer shall conform to the following specification, as well as prevailing codes and standards, including IEEE-519.The transformer shall have copper windings with minimum 220 degrees C insulation and maximum 115 degrees C rise. Transformer shall be OA rated and applied in a FA installation. Two full capacity 5 percent primary taps, 1 above, 1 below rated voltage shall be provided. Impedance shall be selected by the drive system designer. Each transformer shall be equipped with 120 volt single phase space heater(s) for moisture control. Provide distribution class MOV surge arrestors and current limiting fuses for transformer and VFD protection. D. Each VFD shall have a cell bypass option. A faulted cell shall be shunted allowing the VFD to resume the operation at the reduced capacity with remaining cells. E. A digital output from the VFD shall be provided to trip the breaker in the upstream 4.16kV Metal Enclosed Switchgear in case of a VFD fault. 2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Ratings 1. Guaranteed minimum VFD efficiency shall be 96.5% at 100% speed and 100% load and minimum 96% at 80% speed. Losses shall include drive isolation transformer or line reactor (if required), converter/DC bus/Inverter, and output harmonic filter. Auxiliary control, such as internal VFD control boards, cooling fans shall be included in all loss calculations. 2. Rated Input Power: Non-phase sequence sensitive, 4160 Volts, +10%/-5%, 3-phase, 60 Hz. a. Voltage Dip Ride-through: VFDs shall be capable of sustaining continued operation with a 30% dip in nominal line voltage. Output speed may decline only if current limit rating of VFD is exceeded. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 b. Power Loss Ride-through: VFDs shall be capable of 5 cycle power loss ride- through without fault activation. c. All 120VAC power for VFD control logic and 480VAC power for cooling fans shall be fused and supplied integral to the VFDs. 3. Output Power for P1, P2, P3 and P4: a. 1500 HP (1200 RPM), 4000V, 6 to 60Hz variable b. Note: VFD manufacturer shall verify power output required with pump and motor manufacturer. VFD manufacturer shall verify actual HP and amperage rating of motor. 4. Ambient Temperature Range: 0 to 40°C. 5. Humidity: 95% non-condensing 6. Elevation: Up to 3300 feet (1000 meters) above MSL without derating. 7. Power Unit Rating Basis: 100% rated current continuous, 110% rated current for one minute out of every ten minutes at rated temperature. 8. Fused input disconnect switch: 40kA.asym. B. Performance 1. The VFD shall be capable of providing breakaway and accelerating torque for the pump. 2. The VFD shall provide an output waveform that will allow utilization of standard motors without need of any special insulation or derating. Motor life expectancy should not be compromised in any way by operation with the VFD system. The VFD shall provide stable operation of the motor without compromising the motor insulation system, regardless of motor cable distance. The limitations in motor cable distance shall be clearly stated in the proposal. 3. The maximum allowable noise from the VFD systems shall be 85dBA at a distance of 3 feet at any speed and load condition. VFD systems with audible noise in excess of this limit shall be provided with sufficient noise treatment to reduce the sound pressure level below 85 dBA. C. Construction 1. The input section shall contain a suitably rated, non-load break disconnect switch with fuses rated for minimum of 50kA symmetrical and input contactor (Allen-Bradley VFD only) interlocked with the door. Safety blade position shall be visible through the door termination of stress cones. 2. The VFD enclosure shall be NEMA 1 with gasketed doors. Door vents shall consist of louver-panel assemblies that can be removed from the front in order to replace air filter. Cabinets and doors shall be fabricated using minimum 12-gauge steel for sturdy construction. All VFD exterior parts shall be painted with ANSI 61 or ANSI 49 gray paint. Paint procedures and materials shall be manufacturer’s system designed and proven for corrosion resistance. Provide removal lifting provisions. Lifting eyes shall be provided for each shipping split, and shall be attached to the structural framework preventing deformation during lifting. Framework will be design to allow lifting by forklift and overhead crane. 3. VFD shall be air-cooled provided with 100% fan redundancy and automatic switchover in the event of a fan failure. Water cooled drives shall not be acceptable. If a fan fails, the system must automatically switch to the alternate fan and generate an alarm to notify operator of initial fan system failure. Drive must have ability to detect failed operation of the cooling system using temperature monitors. During normal operation, the system must periodically cycle between fans to exercise them and to ensure availability of both systems. Heat will be rejected to the room from the VFD top front. Fans shall not be allowed to run continuously. All fans shall be controlled via thermostats. The manufacturer shall provide all control devices and wiring as required for a complete and operational system. VFD’s using liquid-cooled assemblies in conjunction with associated pumps, piping and separate remote mounted heat exchangers are not acceptable. 4. VFD’s shall be top entry, top exit. Incoming disconnect switch shall be able to accommodate stress cone termination for 5000V single conductor shielded cable, size as indicated below. 5. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 Cable requirements with phase and ground conductors Incoming Section 3-1/C #4/0 (5kV), #4G. (600V) Outgoing Section 3-1/C #4/0 (5kV), #4G. (600V) 6. Low voltage wiring for external field devices shall be top exit/top entry and shall be terminated on a single master set of terminal blocks located on the side or bottom of the control compartment. A minimum of twenty-five (25%) spare terminal blocks shall be provided. The VFD Manufacturer shall coordinate with the Installation Contractor on the size and number of conduits entering/exiting the top of the VFD and provide openings in the VFD as required. As part of the VFD submittal, the VFD manufacturer shall provide written documentation that this has been done and the number of conduits and sizes entering/exiting the top of the VFD shall be shown on the VFD drawings. 7. Main power bus shall be continuous tin plated copper bus, 100% rated over its entirety and integral to the line-up. Telescoping of the bus rating or running in a top hat shall not be acceptable. Medium voltage bus shall extend the entire length of the integrated line up. Cable bus between sections shall not be acceptable. Bus shall be appropriately sized for the VFD continuous rating and braced to withstand the mechanical forces caused by a momentary short circuit current of 50kA expected at the bus. VFDs are allowed to have power devices (cells) connected with copper cable within the power device (cell) cabinet. 8. Ground bus shall be continuous (1/4-in by 1-in minimum) tin plated copper along entire length of the integrated line up. Ground bus shall be located in the bottom of each vertical section. 9. All connections shall be bolted or continuously welded. Bolted bus joints shall have a minimum of four bolts in a two by two pattern. D. Basic Features 1. The VFDs shall be capable of producing an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the normal system 30-100% speed range. The VFDs must be capable of sustained operation at 1/10 speed to facilitate checkout and maintenance of the driven equipment. 2. The door of each unit shall include the door mounted components (as shown on the VFD control schematic) arranged in a logical manner, subject to the Owner/Engineer’s approval. Operator interface and control logic shall be 120VAC. All control and signal wires shall be shielded and fully protected against EMI/RFI interference. Door mounted components (keypad, lights, pushbuttons, switches, displays, motor protection relay, etc.) shall not be mounted any higher than 5’-6” AFF, which shall include the height of the 4” housekeeping pad. Front VFD panel layout showing exact mounting heights shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3. A door-mounted membrane keypad with integral 2-line, 24 character LCD display shall be furnished, capable of controlling the VFDs and setting drive parameters. The keypad shall include the following features: a. The digital display must present all diagnostic message and parameter values in English engineering units when accessed, without the use of codes. b. The keypad module shall contain a "self-test" software program which can be activated to verify proper keypad operations. c. The digital keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings in English engineering units. A plain English user menu shall be provided in software as a guide to parameter setting (rather than codes). Driver parameters shall be factory set in EEPROM and resettable in the field through the keypad. Six (6) levels of password security shall be available to protect drive parameters from unauthorized personnel. The EEPROM stored drive variables must be able to be transferred to new boards to reprogram spare February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 boards. d. The following door mounted digital indications shall be supplied: (1) Speed demand in percent (2) Input current in amperes (3) Output current in amperes (4) Output Frequency in hertz (5) Input voltage (6) Output voltage (7) Total 3-phase KW (8) Kilowatt hour meter (9) Elapsed time running meter (electro mechanical) (10) Output speed in percent. e. The following door mounted pushbuttons, control switches and indicating lights shall be supplied: (1) Emergency Stop pushbutton (push/pull type) (2) Hand-Off-SCADA selector switch (3) Start Pushbutton (4) Stop Pushbutton (5) Reset pushbutton (valve failure) (6) Amber push-to-test indicating light (valve failure) (7) White push-to-test indicating light (pump ready) (8) Red push-to-test indicating light (pump run) (9) Green push-to-test indicating light (pump stop) (10) Green push-to-test indicating light (valve closed) (11) Red push-to-test indicating light (valve open) (12) Red push-to-test indicating light (valve maintenance mode) (13) White indicating light (power on) f. VFDs shall be capable of direct communication to an IBM or compatible computer for serial link setup of parameters, fault diagnostics, trending and diagnostic log downloading. A USB port shall be door-mounted for computer interface. E. Enclosure 1. All VFD components including input switch and transformer (if required) shall be mounted and wired by the VFD manufacturer in a grounded enclosure meeting the following requirements without exception: a. Power conversion and auxiliary equipment enclosure sections shall be NEMA- 1 design. b. All relays and pushbuttons shall be NEMA rated. IEC or dual rated IEC/NEMA rated equipment is not acceptable. c. All power conductors (bus or cable) shall be insulated and of copper construction. d. The maximum dimensions for the VFD lineup shall not exceed the following, No Exceptions: Maximum Dimensions of VFD lineup (no exceptions) 120“H x 190“W x 45“D 2. INSTRUMENT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: Each instrument current transformer shall be indoor wound type, meter class. Insulation shall be equal to that necessary to meet the requirements of the IEEE standards. At normal rated amperes, under usual service conditions, no part of the transformer shall exceed the heating limits specified in the IEEE standards. Each current transformer shall be capable of carrying continuously, its rated primary amperes, under conditions of accidental open secondary circuit, without damage to the primary insulation. Accuracy shall have ANSI accuracy classification C200. 3. CONTROL RELAYS: Industrial type; contacts rated for 10 amps at 600 VAC; Allen- February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 Bradley Bulletin 700 Type PK, Square D Class 8501 Type X, or approved equal. Relays shall have the capability of having contact decks added in the field. Contacts shall be field convertible to normally open or normally closed. Coils and contacts shall each be replaceable without replacing any other part of the relay. Where control relays are indicated on the Plans, industrial control relays shall be furnished whether the relay coil is operated with 120 VAC or 24 VDC. General purpose “plug-in” type relays are not be acceptable. 4. TIMING RELAYS: Solid state. Ranges shall be as shown on the Plans. The timing relays shall have both normally open and normally closed contacts by having two sets of form C contacts. Timing relays where shown on the Plans shall be Square D, Class 9050 Type JCK60, time delay relay, Allen-Bradley 700-FS or approved equal model for operation on the control voltage of the equipment it is used in. Timing relay shall be provided with restraining strap. Terminal shall be front-mounted and readily accessible. 5. INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS: Heavy duty and oil tight (30 mm); Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. Pilot lights shall be push to test (LED type) and shall be Square D SK or approved equal. 6. ELAPSED TIME METER: The meter shall be of a non-reset type, for totalizing of hours and shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hertz. Starter shall be provided with an elapsed time meter; Yokogawa Model 240, 3 ½” New Big Look type elapsed time meter, or approval equal. Digital time meters are not acceptable. 7. Microprocessor and control logic boards and their power supplies shall be housed in a sealed, non-ventilated NEMA-1 section, safely accessible without exposure to high voltages and without drive shutdown. 8. All wiring shall be located internally within the VFD enclosure. External ductwork or wireways shall not be utilized. 9. All low and medium voltage wiring shall be copper. Aluminum is not acceptable. 10. Low voltage wiring shall be 600V rated. 11. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type, rated 600V. 12. All wiring shall be identified with wiring markers with alphanumeric characters. The identification of each wire shall be the same as that shown on the electrical schematic. Each wire shall be so identified at each end. Each end of every wire shall be provided with a heat shrinkable or equivalent sleeve-type wire marker labeled in accordance with the electrical schematic. Use of adhesive and clip-on type markers is prohibited. 13. Redundant cooling fans, each sized for 100% capacity cooling, with automatic switchover in the event of a blower failure, shall be furnished. Cooling fans shall be alternating and shall have an adjustable timer. Cooling fans shall not be allowed to run continuously. Cooling fans shall operate via a thermostat integrated in the VFD enclosure. The VFD manufacturer shall provide the thermostat, control devices and all wiring as required for a complete and operational system. 14. Air filters for VFD enclosure shall be able to be changed out during operation without opening the enclosure. 15. Maximum door swing clearance shall not exceed 36". 16. After fabrication, metal structures shall be thoroughly cleaned, bonderized as a unit and then given a primary coat, a coat of rust preventative and a finishing coat of quick- drying lacquer. Unless otherwise specified, the color of the panels and the exteriors of structures shall be gray ANSI-61. Instruments, relays, and meters shall have dull black standard finish. 17. VFD manufacturer shall verify with motor manufacturer that the contact from the VFD for energizing the motor space heater is properly sized to handle the space heater load. F. NAMEPLATES 1. Externally visible, permanent nameplates shall be provided to identify each instrument, switch, indicating light, etc. Equipment and terminal blocks shall be suitably identified. This shall include items on the back side of doors and panel mounted items. Nameplates shall be black with white lettering and attached with stainless steel screws. 2. Equipment nameplates and designations shall be 2 in. by 5 in. minimum, not less than 1/16 in. thick, engraved laminated plastic fastened with stainless steel screws. Nameplates shall be 1 in. white lettering on black background, and shall indicate equipment designations as shown on the drawings. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 3. Provide legend plates or 1 in. by 3 in. engraved nameplates with ¼ in. lettering for identification of all pilot devices and meters. Legend nameplates shall be secured with stainless steel screws. 4. Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a. “DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE – KEEP OUT” on all enclosure doors. b. “WARNING – HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK – DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE OPENING OR WORKING ON THIS UNIT” G. PROTECTIVE FEATURES AND CIRCUITS 1. The Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL-710, motor protection relay shall be used for motor protection and metering. The VFD controller and the SEL-710 shall include the following alarms and protective features: a. Static instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip. b. Undervoltage and power loss protection. c. Power unit overtemperature alarm and protection. Upon sensing an overtemperature condition VFD is to annunciate an alarm and automatically reduce output speed in order to shed load maintaining process operation. If overtemperature continues beyond specified period, unit to trip on overtemperature. d. Electronic motor inverse time overload protection. e. SEL-710 shall accept 100-ohm platinum motor bearing and stator winding RTDs. There will be a total of six stator winding RTDs (two per phase), and two motor bearing RTDs. f. The VFD shall be protected from damage due to the following, without requiring an output contactor: (1) Single-phase fault or three-phase short circuit on VFD output terminals. (2) Failure to communicate inverter thermistor due to severe overload or other conditions. (3) Loss of input power due to opening of VFD input disconnect device or utility power failure during VFD operation. (4) Loss of one (1) phase of input power. (5) Motor regeneration due to backspin or loss of VFD input power. g. The VFDs shall be able to withstand the following fault conditions without damage to the power circuit components. (1) Failure to connect a motor to the VFD output. (2) VFD output open circuit that may occur during operation. h. The VFD shall have auto frequency roll-back capability during overload or overtemperature and conditions to minimize nuisance tripping. i. In addition to the standard protective features of the drive, provide three current transformers and one zero sequence current transformer and one ground fault current transformer for ground fault protection wired to the Multilin motor protection relay. j. Control functions such as speed setpoint, start, stop, alarm, and status functions shall be transmitted as discrete I/O to the station PLC (provided by others). The VFD shall be capable of communicating setup parameters for 4 diagnostics, trending information, and diagnostic log down loading over an Ethernet TCP/IP data highway to the station PLC. k. All I/O, discrete, analog and Ethernet communication signals shall be wired to terminal blocks for customer’s use. H. PARAMETER SETTINGS 1. The following system configuring settings shall be provided, without exception, field adjustable through the keypad/display unit or via the serial communication port only. Except for Motor Nameplate Data, all parameters must be adjustable while the processor is on-line and the drive is running. a. Motor Nameplate Data (1) Motor frequency (2) Number of poles (3) Full load speed (4) Motor volts February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 (5) Motor full load amps (6) Motor KW (7) Current limit, max. b. VFD Limits (1) Manual accel rate (2) Manual decel rate (3) Auto accel rate (4) Auto decel rate (5) Motor flux buildup delay: time/amount (6) I boost (7) Overload trip curve select (Inverse or Constant) (8) Min/Max speed (frequency) (9) Auto reset for load or voltage trip select (10) Slip compensation (11) Catch-A-Spinning-Load select (12) Overload trip time set c. VFD Parameters (1) Voltage loop gain d. Controller Adjustments (1) PID control enable/disable (2) Setpoint select (3) Proportional band select (4) Reset time select (5) Rate time select (6) Input signal scaling (7) Input signal select (4-20 mA/0-5 Volts) (8) Auto start functions: On/Off, Delay On/Off, Level Select On/Off (9) Speed Profile: Entry, Exit, Point Select (10) Min, Max Speed Select (11) Inverse Profile Select (12) Critical speed avoidance select 2. All drive setting adjustments and operation parameters shall be stored in a parameter log which lists allowable maximum and minimum points as well as the present set values. I. DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES AND FAULT HANDING 1. The VFDs shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital diagnostic system which monitors its own control functions and displays faults and operating conditions. Microprocessor systems must be products of the same manufacturer as the VFD (to assure single source responsibility, availability of service and access to spare parts). 2. A "FAULT LOG" shall record, store, display and print upon demand, the following for the 50 most recent events: a. VFD mode (HAND-OFF-SCADA) b. Date and time of day c. Type of fault d. Reset mode (Auto/Manual) 3. A "HISTORIC LOG" shall record, store, display and print upon demand, the following control variables at 2.7 M/Sec. intervals for the 50 intervals immediately preceding a fault trip: a. VFD mode (HAND-OFF-SCADA) b. Speed demand c. VFD output frequency d. Demand (output) Amps e. Feedback (motor) Amps f. VFD output volts g. Type of fault h. REMOTE enable J. EXTERNAL TRIP 1. The VFD shall be capable of externally tripping the upstream vacuum contactor serving February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 the VFD. When the VFD’s main overcurrent protection device is tripped, the VFD shall send a signal to trip the circuit breaker that serves the VFD. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Manufacturer’s Representative has responsibilities in the installation and field testing of the equipment as described in this Section. Installation of equipment shall be performed by the Construction Contractor who shall be required to assemble the equipment, if required, and install it in accordance with Installation, Operation and Maintenance instructions which shall be furnished by the vendor or manufacturer, and the installation drawings for this project. 1. The Construction Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment and machinery necessary to receive, inspect, unload, store, protect, and install completely, in proper operating condition, the equipment. Contractor shall protect and store the Switchboard indoors, as recommended by the manufacturer and as described in section 1.04. 2. He shall also furnish such incidental items not supplied with the equipment, but which may or may not be described in the Plans and Specifications, for complete installation, such as wiring, conduit, ducts, anchors and other appurtenances as necessary. B. The Contractor shall schedule the service of the manufacturer to assist in the installation, adjustment, and acceptance test of the equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND START-UP A. Manufacturer’s representative shall be available to advise and assist the installation of the VFDs by the Construction Contractor. B. Furnish the services of a competent manufacturer’s service representative who shall be experienced in the assembly and wiring of the VFD drive units of similar size and character. He shall direct the installation of the equipment and shall assist and advise with the electricians or other workmen who are performing the actual work of installing the VFD drive units. He also shall assist in the adjustment and testing of the equipment. C. Adjust the calibration of protective relays according to the relay coordination study (provided by others) and test the settings. Prepare a card index for the relays, the settings, the test results and marked thereon, and submit to the Owner. D. Time spent on the job by the service representative shall be adequate for performing the above functions. E. All costs (travel expenses, testing equipment, etc.) required for testing and start-up shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer/Contractor. 3.3 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for the Owner’s representatives at the jobsite or other office location chosen by the Owner. Each eight hour training session shall be broken up into two segments each of 4-hours with a 15 minute break every two hours. Lunch break will be one hour. Training sessions shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner. B. When requested within the equipment warranty period, provide an additional training session from that indicated above for the Owner’s Representative at the jobsite or other office location chosen by the Owner. Each eight hour training session shall be broken up into two segments each of 4-hours with a 15 minute break every two hours. Lunch break will be one hour. Training sessions shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner. C. Training sessions shall be conducted by VFD manufacturer personnel. D. Training shall be for four members of the Owner's staff. E. Supplier shall submit a training outline for Owner’s/Engineer’s review and comment a minimum of 4 weeks before training is to take place. F. Instruct the operating and maintenance personnel in principle of operating of all major devices and the care and maintenance of components included in the VFD drive units, and troubleshooting for a period of not less than two (2) eight (8) hour days. Coordinate with Owner for exact requirements. Provide three-ring binders to participants complete with copies of drawings and other course material covered. G. All costs (travel expenses, testing equipment, etc.) required for the training shall be the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 responsibility of the equipment manufacturer/contractor. 3.4 COMMISIONING AND TESTING A. Startup procedures, testing and troubleshooting of the VFDs shall be performed under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Energization of the drives shall not be permitted without the manufacturer's representative permission. B. Once the drive has been installed, testing shall be provided by the manufacturer to verify conformance with the specifications for the following: 1. Harmonics 2. Efficiency 3. True Power Factor 4. A complete list of tests and testing procedures shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval two weeks prior to testing taking place. C. Testing, checkout and start-up of the VFD equipment shall be performed under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service engineer from the factory. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative. D. Harmonics Test - The VFD Supplier shall provide readings with printouts of the harmonic current at each harmonic as well as the total voltage distortion. The testing shall test current and voltage distortion, power factor for both the fundamental and displacement requirements for compliance with IEEE 519 and the specification. The following readings shall be provided: 1. At point of common coupling (4.16kV Switchgear): Contractor shall coordinate with the motor manufacturer for all data required to perform the harmonic analysis. a. With all drives running with load - All VFDs operating and starting at minimum pump speed and ramping up simultaneously to full pump speed with testing conducted at 10% speed increments. b. With all drives off. c. Test system with maximum number of pump motors operating as system will allow. Coordinate with Owner for maximum number of pumps allowed to operate at one time. The following combinations shall be evaluated: (1) One (1)-1500 HP running. (2) Two (2)-1500 HP running. (3) Three (3)-1500 HP running. 2. At the power connection to each drive: a. With the drive running loaded - All VFDs operating and starting at minimum pump speed and ramping up simultaneously to full pump speed with testing conducted at 10% speed increments. b. With drive off 3. A bound report shall include graphical representation of this information in the following format for each 10% speed increment: a. Voltage harmonic content versus harmonic order through 99th harmonic. b. Current harmonic content versus harmonic order through 99th harmonic. c. Power factor (displacement and non-sinusoidal) versus harmonic order through 99th harmonic. 4. Report shall provide written description of field test results and show verification that field tests meet the requirements of this VFD specification. Report shall be reviewed by Engineer/Owner for approval. If these tests show that the drives are not in compliance with the Specifications, the drive manufacturer shall make all changes required to comply with the Specifications at no cost to the Owner. If required, this could mean replacing the drives that are not in compliance. 5. A copy of all tests and checks performed in the field, complete with meter readings and recordings, where applicable, shall be submitted to the Engineer and Owner as an official submittal. E. The tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and Engineer. Provide at least two (2) weeks notice to the Owner and Engineer prior to conducting these tests. Final acceptance of the VFD installation will not be considered until the Owner and Engineer have witnessed the test described above and a formal written report has been submitted and approved by the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 16 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives – 26 29 23.01 Engineer. F. The VFD manufacturer or manufacturer representative shall submit a written Equipment Installation Report certifying the equipment is properly installed and has been operated under all operating conditions and is operating under all operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily per the requirements of the specification. G. Provide for the Engineer's review a complete list of test procedures, standards, equipment and calibration reports of the measuring and testing equipment used. H. Any deficiencies with regard to these specifications shall be corrected by the manufacturer at no expense to the Owner. Prior to any corrective action, a plan of correction shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. I. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. J. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Assist in field testing of equipment (including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state controllers). 3. Report results in writing. K. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.5 SPARE PARTS A. The following spare parts of the type and size furnished shall be provided: 1. Six of each type of power and control fuse rated 600V or less. 2. Six of each type of fuse rated greater than 600V. 3. Two of each type of panel lamp. 4. One of each type of printed circuit board, including diagnostic systems. 5. One spare EPROM chip for each VFD. 6. One microprocessor-based interface display and monitoring panel, and keypad. 7. One spare relay and timer of each type. 8. One of each fan or blower installed. 9. One PWM power cell or power module for each VFD. 10. And all spare parts and lubricants required for the first year preventive maintenance. 3.6 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient touch-up paint of the same type and color used at the factory to repair damages incurred in installation. Perform touch up painting to achieve the original paint thickness, quality, and appearance. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Transfer Switches – 26 36 00 SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following: 1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Nonautomatic transfer switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and nonautomatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Transfer Switches – 26 36 00 F. Comply with NFPA 70. G. Comply with NFPA 99. H. Comply with NFPA 110. I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Contactor Transfer Switches: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eaton b. ASCO c. Cummins d. Russel Electric or equal 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. 1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location. C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage- surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1. E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric- motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources. 1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable. 2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts. G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated. H. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed. I. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. 1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated. 2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips. J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated. C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Transfer Switches – 26 36 00 energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. E. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds. F. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1, UL 489, and UL 869A. G. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features: 1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. 2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second. 3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent. 4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored. 5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available." 8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. 9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. 1. Retain subparagraph below to require floor-mounting switches to be installed on concrete bases. Coordinate with Drawings. 2. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Transfer Switches – 26 36 00 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. 4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. 4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer- switch operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown. 5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Transfer Switches – 26 36 00 a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. H. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 SECTION 26 42 13 CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR PIPELINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design, furnishing, and installation of cathodic protection system(s) for buried steel, ductile iron, and concrete cylinder pipe piping as shown on the Drawings using rectifiers and deep anodes. B. Requirements for sacrificial anode cathodic protection on steel, ductile iron, concrete cylinder and metallic fittings in plastic pipe systems using zinc and/or magnesium anodes. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 42 15 - Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation. B. Section 26 42 14 - Corrosion Control Test Stations. 1.4 UNIT PRICES A. This item will be measured and paid for as a lump sum item for the job. B. Payment will be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and supervision for the installation of the cathodic protection system, complete in place including rectifier systems with deep anode groundbed and junction boxes, sacrificial anodes, power feed hookups, and all excavation, backfill, field welding, connections, adjustments, testing, cleanup, and other related work necessary for construction as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 94 - Ready Mixed Concrete B. ASTM A 518 – Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings C. ASTM D 1248 - Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Material for Wire and Cable D. ASTM D 4239 – Standard Test Methods for Sulfur in the Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke using High Temperature Tube Furnace Combustion Methods. E. ASTM D 5192 – Standard Practice for Collection of Coal Samples from Core. F. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe G. CSA – Canadian Standards Association, Standard C22.2, No. 66 and No. 107 H. City of Corpus Christi Electrical Code I. NACE RP-0169 – Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems. J. NACE RP-0572 – Recommended Practice for Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Impressed Current Deep Groundbeds. K. NEC 70 – National Electrical Code L. NEMA TC6 – PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. M. NEMA TC9 – Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. N. NEMA 4 – Type 3R Enclosures O. UL 83 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires P. UL 467 – Bonding and Grounding Equipment Q. UL 486A – Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors R. UL 506 – Specialty Transformers 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 02 - Submittals. B. Design Drawings and Computations: Prepare by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years experience February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 in cathodic protection design, all computations and drawings. C. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item. Include the manufacturer’s name on the catalog cuts. Provide sufficient information to show that the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where more than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the item proposed. D. Logs: Give the City of Corpus Christi representative a minimum of 48 hours’ notice prior to drilling the anode bore. Type and submit to the City of Corpus Christi representative, copies of detailed geological and resistance logs of each deep anode bore. E. Rectifier Operation and Maintenance Manual: The rectifier manufacturer to include a complete operation and maintenance manual with each rectifier shipped to the job site. In addition to operating instructions, include a circuit diagram and spare parts list in the manual. Operate the rectifier under full load conditions at the factory and thoroughly inspect and test by the manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. Report results of this testing on a manufacturer's quality control form and include in the operation manual. The rectifier manufacturer to reference each operating manual by rectifier model number and individual serial number. F. Report: Submit six (6) operating, monitoring and maintenance reports for the cathodic protection systems. Include all test data as required by Section 3.08, paragraph H. Include operating instructions, maintenance data, product data and test procedures in the manuals. G. Drawings: Maintain as-built drawings of the cathodic protection installation during installa tion and construction. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all rectifiers, anodes, wiring, connections and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items of equipment and material. Submit the original as-built drawings to the City of Corpus Christi representative. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that all components of the cathodic protection system meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Reference the applicable section of the specifications and the applicable standard detail on the certification. B. Drawings: The drawings for the cathodic protection system are diagrammatic and not scaled for exact locations unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing. Determine exact locations by field conditions and non-interference with other utilities or mechanical and structural features. Note other existing utilities in the area and do not damage these utilities during excavation. Repair any damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the City of Corpus Christi at the Contractor's expense. C. Inspection: All materials, fabrication and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the City of Corpus Christi or its designated representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SACRIFICIAL ANODES - MAGNESIUM A. Magnesium Anodes: Use high potential magnesium anodes. Follow the metallurgical composition of the magnesium anodes as listed below: Element Percent Composition Aluminum 0.01 Maximum Manganese 0.50 to 1.3 Copper 0.02 Maximum Nickel 0.001 Maximum Iron 0.03 Maximum Other - (each) 0.05 Maximum Other - (total) 0.30 Maximum Magnesium Balance B. Magnesium Anode Current Capacity: Magnesium anodes require a current capacity of no less than 500 amp-hours per pound of magnesium. C. Anode Backfill Material: Use chemical backfill material around all galvanic anodes. Backfill provides a reduced contact resistance to earth, provides a uniform environment surrounding February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 the anode, retains moisture around the anode, and prevents passivation of the anode. 1. All galvanic anodes come prepacked in a backfill material conforming to the following composition: a. Ground hydrated gypsum: 75 percent b. Powdered bentonite: 20 percent c. Anhydrous sodium sulfate: 5 percent. 2. Have a grain size backfill such that 100 percent is capable of passing through a 20 mesh screen and 50 percent is retained by a 100 mesh screen. 3. Completely surround the anode with the backfill mixture within a cotton bag. 4. For standard cast magnesium ingots, the required weight of backfill follows: Anode Weight Backfill Weight Total Weight (Pounds) (Pounds) (Pounds) 9 15 24 17 25 42 20 50 70 32 38 70 48 48 96 D. Anode Lead Wires: 1. Use a 20-foot length of No. 12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW or THW insulation for standard lead wires for a galvanic anode. 2. Color code all anode lead wires green when terminated in test stations. E. Lead Wire Connection to Magnesium Anode: 1. Cast magnesium anodes with a galvanized steel core with the weight of the core not to exceed 0.10 pounds per linear foot. 2. Recess one end of the anode to expose the core for the lead wire connection. 3. Silver-solder the lead wire to the core and fully insulate the connection by filling the recess with an electrical potting compound. 2.2 SACRIFICIAL ANODES - ZINC A. Zinc Anodes: Use high purity zinc anodes. The metallurgical composition of the zinc anodes conform to ASTM B 418, Type II and the following: Element Percent Composition Aluminum 0.005 Maximum Cadmium 0.003 Maximum Iron 0.0014 Maximum Lead 0.003 Maximum Zinc Balance B. Zinc Anode Current Capacity: Zinc anodes require a current capacity of no less than 335 amp - hours per pound of zinc. C. Anode Backfill Material: Use chemical backfill material around all galvanic anodes. Backfill provides a reduced contact resistance to earth, provides a uniform environm ent surrounding the anode, retains moisture around the anode, and prevents passivation of the anode. 1. All galvanic anodes come prepackaged in a backfill material conforming to the following composition: a. Ground hydrated gypsum: 75 percent b. Powdered bentonite: 20 percent c. Anhydrous sodium sulfate: 5 percent. 2. Have a grain size backfill such that 100 percent is capable of passing through a 20 mesh screen and 50 percent is retained by a 100 mesh screen. 3. Completely surround the anode with the backfill mixture within a cotton bag. 4. For standard cast zinc ingots, the required weight of backfill follows: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 Anode Weight Backfill Weight Total Weight (Pounds) (Pounds) (Pounds) 30 40 70 45 55 100 60 70 130 D. Anode Lead Wires: For the lead wire for the zinc anodes, use a 20-foot length of No. 12 AWG solid copper wire equipped with TW of THW insulation. E. Lead Wire Connection to Zinc Anode: 1. Cast zinc anodes with a 1/4-inch diameter galvanized steel core. 2. Extend one end of the core beyond the anode for the lead wire connection. 3. Silver-solder the lead wire to the core and fully insulate the connection. 2.3 IMPRESSED CURRENT ANODES A. Description: Use high silicon-chromium-iron anode centrifugally cast in tubular form in accordance with the following specifications. 1. Anode Alloy: The anode consists of Durichlor 51, high silicon, chromium iron or approved equal. This alloy to be made in accordance with ASTM A 518, Grade 3 with nominal percentages as follows: Chemical Composition Element Composition, Weight % Carbon 0.70 - 1.10 Manganese 1.50, max Silicon 14.20 - 14.75 Chromium 3.25 - 5.00 Molybdenum .20, max Copper 0.50, max 2. Casting Method: Centrifugally cast anodes in tubular form with a hollow, straight walled design. Do not exceed ¼” bowing and malformation tolerances over the seven-foot anode length. Do not allow anode designs which include enlargement of the outside diameter, at the center or elsewhere, or constrictions of a venturi type of the inside wall. The anode body to have solid walls of a uniform thickness with an open cylindrical interior. Do not allow static casting methods, such as sand, die or metal mold techniques, in order to avoid the risk of shrink cavities and internal stresses caused by non-uniform wall thickness. Use of extraneous materials such as chaplets, spacers or chills to center the anode mold are not to be permitted. Restrict any slag deficiencies to one end of the casting only allowing for simple inspection techniques to ascertain metal density and absence of slag inclusions. 3. Mechanical and Physical Properties: The mechanical and physical properties of the anode are as follows: Tensile Strength (1/2" dia. bar) psi. ...........................................15,000 Compressive Strength, psi. ......................................................100,000 Hardness, Brinell ............................................................................. 520 Density, gr/ml .................................................................................. 7.0 Melting Point, °F .......................................................................... 2300 Specific Resistance, micro-ohms-cm (20°C) .................................. 72 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 Coefficient of expansion, 32° to 212° F ........................... 7.33 X 106 4. Size: Conform to the following sizes for anode castings: Weight O.D. Length Type (pounds) (inches) (feet) TA-2 46 2.19 7 TA-3 63 2.66 7 TA-4 85 3.75 7 TA-5 110 4.75 7 TA-2 anodes are required unless otherwise noted on the drawings. B. Anode Lead Wire Connection: 1. Use a No. 8 AWG seven strand, copper conductor equipped with a fluorinated polymer insulation for the lead wire for an impressed current anode. Require the length of the lead wire sufficient to reach the anode terminal box without splicing additional wire. 2. Attach the anode lead wire at the center of the anode. Have a minimum pull-out strength of one and one-half times the breaking strength of the No. 8 AWG lead wire or 788 pounds for the center connection. 3. Do not exceed 0.004 ohms for the electrical contact resistance as measured across the lead wire-to-connector junction. C. Impressed Current Anode Backfill: Use SC3 calcined fluid petroleum coke as manufactured by Loresco, Inc. to backfill impressed current anodes. Anode backfill properties to be as follows: 1. Typical Chemical Analysis: Component Percent Composition Carbon (fixed) 99.35 minimum Ash 0.6 maximum Volatiles 0 (950C) Moisture 0.05 2. Physical Properties: Bulk density of 64 pounds/cubic foot. 3. Particle Analysis: Dust free with a maximum particle size of 1 mm. 2.4 VENT A. Use plastic vent pipe from the bottom anode to the surface for dissipating gases to the atmosphere. B. Require 1-inch diameter with 1/8-inch holes drilled on 6-inch centers in the area of the anodes for the plastic vent pipe. Do not drill holes in the vent pipe above the anodes. C. Extend the plastic vent pipe above grade, screen the vent outlet, and install in an inverted manner. 2.5 RECTIFIERS A. Cathodic protection rectifiers to be air-cooled, tap adjust Super Custom model as manufactured by Universal Rectifiers, Good-All Electric or approved equal, conforming to NEMA MR-20-1958 and listed in CSA File No. 45382. B. DC Output Ratings: Rate rectifiers as shown on the drawings. Supply units that are capable of operating at continuous, full rated output at an ambient temperature of 45° C, in full sunlight with an expected life in excess of 10 years. C. AC Input Ratings: Full rated DC output shall be obtainable with an AC input voltage at 5% below the nominal value. Continuous AC input voltage at 10% above the nominal value shall not damage the transformer, the diode bridge assembly, or exceed any component rates. (Note: This shall apply provided that the rectifier has not been previously adjusted to exceed the maximum DC voltage or amperage rating of the unit.) D. Cooling: Cool by natural air convection. Vent cabinets for natural air convection and screen against insects. E. Voltage Adjustments: Provide adjustment of the output voltage by means of not less than 25 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 approximately equal steps of secondary taps from 5 percent of rated voltage to full -rated voltage. F. Rectifying Elements: Rectifying elements to be silicon diodes sized as follows: 1. The Peak Inverse Voltage (PIV) of the diode shall be 300% of the maximum impressed voltage on the diode or 400 volts, whichever is greater. 2. Configure diodes into a full-wave bridge assembly. Size diodes to carry a minimum average current of one half of rated rectifier output. 3. Size heat sinks to keep diode junction temperatures less than 100° C at rated output and maximum ambient temperature. 4. Protect diodes against overload by means of semiconductor fuses, located in the transformer secondary leg to the diode bridge assembly. 5. Equip diodes with supplemental Metal Oxide Varistor (M.O.V.) surge arrestors at the diode bridge assembly sized to provide protection against secondary over-voltage surges. G. AC Circuit Breakers: Provide input overload and short circuit protection by magnetic trip circuit breakers. Size the circuit breaker to hold 100 percent of rated load. It may trip between 101 percent and 125 percent of rated load, and must trip at 125 percent and above. Provide 65 kAIC rating for 480V input circuit breakers and 22 kAIC rating for input circuit breakers below 480V. H. Surge Protection: Provide separate AC and DC surge protection by means of high energy Metal Oxide Varistors rated at 500 joules on the DC output and 750 joules on the AC input. I. Electrical Panels: Construct electrical panels from a minimum thickness of 1/4" NEMA "XX" laminated phenolic, rated for Class "B" operation (105°C maximum). Equip rectifiers rated at 100 amperes DC or higher with panels constructed from a minimum sheet thickness of 1/4" "UTR" fiberglass reinforced laminate rated for Class "F" operation (155°C). Permanently silk - screen rectifier front panel identifications onto the panel. J. Connection Hardware: Use only copper or high conductivity brass electrical hardware, suitably sized, and finished in electroless nickel plating for superior corrosion resistance. Tightly secure all connections with lock washers and nuts torqued to manufacturer's recommended specifications. K. Enclosures: 1. Mount rectifier unit, disconnect switch and anode junction panel in a single enclosure. 2. Enclosure to be free standing, NEMA 4X, 36” wide x 48” high x 24” deep, 12 gauge, type 304 stainless steel with lifting eyes. 3. Equip with single, louvered door with pad lockable, single handle. Provide drip shield and inside insect screen. 4. Include ground lug, sized for No. 6 AWG wire. 5. Place stickers on all four sides that read “Danger, High Voltage, Keep Out.” 6. Provide permanent engraved nameplate with black letters on white background that reads “Cathodic Protection Cabinet, Property of the City of Corpus Christi, In Case of Emergency, Call 311.” L. Rectifier Instrumentation: 1. Equip rectifier with separate analog ammeter and voltmeter. 2. Meters to be a minimum of 3-1/2" size, with a minimum scale length of 2-7/8". 3. Meters to be 0 - 50 millivolts full scale deflection, taut-band movement with four-to-one swamping (i.e. internal meter resistance comprised of 25% winding resistance and 75% fully temperature compensated dropping resistor for wide temperature range performance). 4. Provide meters with accuracy + 2% full scale deflection at 25°C., temperature compensated to 0.085% per degree C. 5. Scale rectifier meters to have rated output no less than 70%, or greater than 85% of full scale deflection. 6. Meter shunts to be panel-mounted Holloway type "SW" style, with an accuracy of +0.25%. M. Transformers: Construct transformers to meet UL 506, Specialty Transformers and the following: 1. Transformer designed as full isolation with separate isolated primary and secondary February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 windings and a minimum efficiency of 95%. 2. Equip transformer secondary with a minimum of 25 steps of secondary voltage adjustment (5-COARSE, 5-FINE). Provide tap adjustment by means of tap bars. 3. Rate transformer materials and construction for Class "H" operation (180°C). Further enhance insulation materials by dipping in thermosetting varnish and baking. 4. Rate transformer for a minimum dielectric strength of 2250 volts applied for one minute between the windings and the core. N. Potential Monitoring Connections: Provide two, five-way binding posts on the front of the rectifier instrument panel. One to be labeled “Reference” and one to be labeled “Structure”. O. Miscellaneous: 1. Supply rectifiers capable of operating on either 115 or 230 volt, single phase, 60 hertz AC input. 2. All cathodic protection rectifiers to be 100% quality control tested as outlined in this specification. 3. During manufacture, subject the rectifier to frequent visual and performance testing to assure a high degree of quality. 4. Subject rectifiers to 100% testing of the following rectifier electrical parameters: a. AC input voltage, current, apparent power and true power. b. DC output current, voltage and power. c. AC power factor. d. AC to DC conversion efficiency. e. Output ripple. f. Correct operation of optional features such as interrupters, filters, etc. 5. Give each rectifier a final overall visual inspection prior to packaging. 2.6 ANODE JUNCTION PANEL A. Enclosure: Mount the anode junction panel in the stainless steel rectifier enclosure as shown on the Drawing. Provide positive terminal, 0.01 ohm type RS Holloway shunts, and a minimum 3/16” thick, NEMA Grade “XX” phenolic panel. For size and terminal configurations, see Drawings. B. Positive Cable: Use a single conductor, seven strand, copper with THHN insulation for the positive cable from the junction box to the transformer-rectifier. 2.7 NEGATIVE CABLES A. Cables: Use single conductor, seven-strand, copper with medium density, HMW/PE insulation for the rectifier negative cables. The polyethylene to conform to ASTM D 1248, Type I, Class C, Grade 5. B. Test Lead: The test lead to be No. 12 AWG, solid copper wire with white, TW or THW insulation and of sufficient length to extend from the protected structure to the rectifier without splicing. 2.8 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODES A. Type: Provide a copper/copper sulfate, double membrane, ceramic cell in a geomembrane package, such as a Permacell Plus or approved equal. B. Wire: Equip with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue HMW/PE insulation of suitable length to extend from the pipeline to the rectifier without splicing. 2.9 EXOTHERMIC WELD EQUIPMENT A. Charges and Molds: Use weld charges and molds sized as specified by the manufacturer for the specific wire size and surface configuration. Weld charges and molds to be Cadweld by Erico or Thermoweld by Continental Industries or approved equal. B. Limitation: For high strength steel pipelines, use only 15 gram Cadweld charges. C. Weld Coating: Use Kop-Coat coating as manufactured by Carboline or approved equal for welds. D. Weld Cap: Cover the coated weld with a plastic weld cap. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 2.10 AC POWER SERVICE A. Products: All AC power components must meet local power company requirements. B. Meter Base: Meter base to be 120/240-volt, single phase, 100-ampere. C. Disconnect Switch: Provide fused disconnect switch fused with Class J fuses in NEMA 1 enclosure. Mount in cathodic protection cabinet with rectifier. D. Ground Rod: Ground rod must conform to the requirements of the utility company having jurisdiction. E. Ground Wire and Clamp: Ground wire to be bare, No. 6 AWG solid copper wire. Use a bronze, bolt-on ground rod clamp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SACRIFICAL ANODES A. Location: Install sacrificial anodes at locations where the anodes will operate at maximum effectiveness. B. Placement: Install anodes in native soil, in a vertically augured hole as shown on th e drawings. If a vertical installation of the anodes is not feasible, the anodes may be installed horizontally. C. Backfilling: After the hole is augured, lower the packaged anode into the hole and firmly tamp the soil around the package so that it is in intimate contact with the package. D. Lead Wire: Run lead wires from the anodes underground at a minimum depth of 36 inches. Connect the wires through a test station as indicated on the drawings. E. Handling: Handle galvanic anodes carefully to avoid damaging an ode materials and wire connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DEEP ANODE GROUNDBEDS A. Permits: A qualified well driller who is recognized as a fully experienced specialist in the installation of deep anode cathodic protection systems is required to perform the drill ing and installation of the deep anode systems. The deep anode system installer is required to have a minimum of 5 years experience installing deep anode systems with a minimum of 10 successful deep well anode installations. The Contractor is required to obtain and submit all applications for well drilling permits required by any City, County or State agency. B. Field Location: Contractor is responsible for verifying actual field conditions, location of underground structures, and assuring adequate physical s eparation from other structures and utilities. Location of the anode wells is approximate. Determine and verify the exact placement in the field with a representative of the City of Corpus Christi. C. Anode Hole Drilling: The anode hole to be 8 inches diameter by 200 feet deep unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Perform drilling with rotary bit equipment designed specifically for this purpose. Use standard techniques (i.e. trough and vacuum truck) to capture and contain the drilling fluids, mud and cuttings at the top of the hole. Select the type and consistency of drilling fluids to be consistent with soil characteristics. Level the drilling rig to provide a round, straight and plumb anode hole. D. Temporary Well Casing: Drilling of the holes may require t he installation of temporary well casings. Remove all temporary casings by the end of the job. E. Anode Hole Geological Logs: As the hole is drilled, maintain a record describing the depth and type of the geological formations encountered. Submit typed copi es of the log as required by Section 1.05.D. F. Anode Hole Resistance Log: Record an electric log of the hole using one of the anodes. Previously mark the anode lead wire in five-foot increments. Mark the anode lead wire for a distance equaling or exceeding the maximum anticipated depth of the hole. As the anode is lowered into the hole, perform a resistance log by impressing a minimum 12 volt DC current between the anode and a very well grounded structure such as the local AC power neutral network. Do not use Nilsson type soil resistance meters to perform this test. A recommended 12-volt DC power source is a heavy duty lead acid automobile battery. Lower the anode into the hole at ten foot increments, hold in place, and measure the voltage and current out put of the DC current source. Record the data, type and submit as required under Section 1.05.D. G. Vent Pipe Installation: Install the vent pipe in the hole with the first anode. Cap the bottom of the vent pipe. Cap the top of the vent pipe throughout the anode and coke breeze backfill February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 installation procedure to prevent intrusion of foreign material. Do not allow drilling mud to enter in the vent pipe. H. Anode Installation: The anode well to contain ten (10) tubular cast iron anodes spaced at 10 foot intervals on centers unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Center the anodes in the hole using anode centralizers. Install the anodes by lowering them individually into the hole by the lead wire. Mark the lead wires for the nominal anode depth. Record the fina l depth with the first anode in the hole (i.e. the bottom anode) identified as anode number one (1). Do not damage the anode lead during handling or lowering into the hole. Under no circumstances, clamp or pinch the anode lead wires around another object while lowering the anodes into the hole. If the insulation for any anode lead wires is cut, broken, or nicked during this operation or at any other time, reject the complete anode and remove from the job site immediately. Replace all damaged anodes at no additional expense to the City of Corpus Christi. I. Anode Column Coke Backfill: Slurry the coke backfill above-grade and then pump into the hole after the anodes are installed. Pump the coke from the bottom of the hole up using a pipe that is the length of the anode hole. Do not use the vent pipe to pump the coke. Raise the pipe as the anode column is filled with coke. Remove the pipe from the hole after the coke installation operation is completed. Use a sufficient amount of backfill such that the coke b reeze column extends a minimum of five feet above the top of the uppermost anode. Install the coke backfill uniformly with no voids around the anodes. J. Vent Pipe: Terminate the 1-inch diameter internal vent pipe with a gooseneck fitting. Leave the top end of the vent pipe open to allow gases from the anode hole to exit. K. Precautions: Take all necessary precautions to avoid entrance of foreign matter into the hole , movement of soil strata, or collapsing of the hole during the progress of the work. Should movement of soil strata or collapse of the drilled hole interfere with proper completion of the anode groundbed, recover the wires, anodes and vent pipe and ream or redrill the hole at no cost to the City. L. Mud and Cuttings: Dispose of drilling mud, cuttings and other waste in accordance with the methods and procedures of the best recognized practices and comply with the rules and regulations of the State, City and County. M. Completion: Pour a minimum 3’ x 4’ steel reinforced concrete pad as shown on the drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CATHODIC PROTECTION RECTIFIERS A. Codes: Comply with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and with all City of Corpus Christi, and local power company codes and standards. B. Mounting: Mount rectifiers on reinforced concrete pad as shown on the drawings. Place at elevation above the 100-year flood plain. C. Identification: Equip rectifiers with permanent engraved nameplates to ide ntify the units as "Cathodic Protection Cabinet, Property of City of Corpus Christi, In Case of Emergency Call 311.” D. Conduit: Place all wiring to the rectifier in rigid galvanized steel conduit when run above grade. 1. Use insulating bushings at the ends of all conduits. 2. Extend steel conduit 12 inches below grade. E. Electrical Service: Provide AC electrical service for each rectifier unit. Furnish and install the necessary wiring, conduits, wires, meter sockets, splice boxes and equipment to the service connection as required by the local power company. F. Completion: The installation is not considered complete until the AC and DC wiring is installed and the rectifier is capable of operating at full rated load. Install AC power such that the rectifier can be activated for test purposes. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE A. Depth: Install all underground wires and cables at a minimum of 36 inches below final grade with a minimum separation of 6 inches from other underground structures. B. Conduit: Enclose all positive and negative cables, and anode lead wires in rigid galvanized steel conduit when above-grade. 1. Use insulating bushings at the ends of all conduits. 2. Extend conduit 12 inches below grade. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANODE LEAD JUNCTION BOXES A. Location: Mount anode lead junction box inside cathodic protection cabinet as shown on drawings. B. Conduit: Enclose all cathodic protection wiring between the junction box and the rectifier in plastic wiring duct (Panduit or equal). See drawings. 3.6 NEGATIVE CABLE AND TEST LEAD ATTACHMENT A. Attach negative cables and test lead to the pipe by exothermic welding. B. Clean and dry the pipe to which the negative cables and test lead are to be attached. C. Use a grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease and dirt from the pipe over an area approximately 3 inches square. Clean the surface to bright metal. D. Remove approximately one inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be exothermic welded to the pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding. E. Using the proper size exothermic weld mold as recommended by the manufacturer, place the wire between the graphite mold and the prepared metal surface. Use a copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all wires No. 12 AWG size. F. Place the metal disk in the bottom of the mold. G. Remove the cap from the weld charge container. Pour the contents into the mold. Squeeze the bottom of the weld charge container and spread ignition powder over the charge. H. Close the mold cover and ignite the starting powder with a flint gun. Hold the mold fi rmly in place until all of the charge has burned and the weld has cooled slightly. I. Remove the exothermic weld mold and gently strike the weld with a hammer to remove the weld slag. Pull on the wire to assure a secure connection. If the weld is not secure or the wire breaks, repeat the procedure. J. If the weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Kop-Coat. Cover the coated weld with a plastic weld cap. 3.7 PERMANENT REFERENCE CELL A. Location: When not shown on the Drawings, locate the permanent ref erence cell near the negative structure connection. B. Placement: Remove the permanent reference cell from the shipping package and place below the springline and one foot away from the pipeline. Make certain that the reference electrode is completely surrounded by the special backfill material in the geomembrane package. C. Backfill the reference electrode with six inches of select, native soil and compact by hand. Moisten the soil for good compaction. Saturate the backfilled reference cell with 5 gallons of water. D. Wiring: Run continuous lengths of the blue reference cell wiring, and the white test lead to the rectifier unit in the same trench as the negative cable. Do not nick or otherwise damage the wire insulation. 3.8 POST INSTALLATION TESTING OF THE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. General: Inspect, energize, and adjust the cathodic protection as soon as possible after the equipment has been installed. B. Energization: Perform the energizing of the cathodic protection system by a Corrosion Engineer to achieve compliance with the referenced corrosion control standards set forth by NACE and/or AWWA. C. Notice: Prior to native state and polarized potential testing, give a minimum of 48 hours notice to the City of Corpus Christi to facilitate observation of the tests by a Cit y Representative. Contact: City of Corpus Christi __________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________ February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 11 Cathodic Protection for Pipelines – 26 42 13 D. Method: The Corrosion Engineer to: 1. Measure native state pipe-to-soil potentials at all test stations, permanent reference cells, electrical isolation devices, and locations of exposed pipe prior to energizing the cathodic protection system. 2. Measure casing-to-soil potentials and foreign line potentials, prior to energizing the cathodic protection system. 3. Energize the cathodic protection system and adjust the DC current output such that the pipe-to-soil potentials near the cathodic protection current source (either transformer- rectifier or sacrificial anodes) is approximately -1000 millivolts to a copper sulfate electrode (CSE). Record the DC voltage and current of the power supply. 4. Allow sufficient time for the pipeline to polarize. 5. Using a current interrupter, cycle the power supply “On” and “Off”. 6. Record “On” and “Instant Off” potentials at all water pipeline test stations, permanent reference cells, electrical isolation devices, locations of exposed pipe, casings and foreign pipelines. 7. For steel and ductile iron pipe, adjust the cathodic protection power supplies to satisfy the criteria of a minimum 100 millivolts of polarization or an “Instant Off” potential at least as negative as -850 millivolts CSE. 8. For concrete cylinder pipe, adjust the cathodic protection power supplies to achieve a minimum 100 millivolt of polarization without any “Instant Off” potentials more negative than -1000 millivolts CSE. 9. Record all final adjustments of the DC power supplies. 10. Verify that all electrical isolation devices are operating properly including flange isolators, and casing spacers. 11. Verify that interference does not exist with foreign pipelines. Perform joint tests and mitigate any interference detected. E. After initial energization and after rectifiers have been adjusted as necessary for compl iance with NACE RP-0169 (latest revision), perform a walk-through inspection with City Engineer to verify that all corrosion control components have been installed in accordance with project drawings and specifications. F. Make a punch list of outstanding work identified during walk -through inspection. Once Contractor has completed all work on punchlist, pipeline will be allowed to polarize for 30 days before final testing. Perform final testing and adjustment after 30-day polarization period. Repair deficiencies discovered during final testing at Contractor’s expense and at no additional cost to City of Corpus Christi. Should additional testing be required after final testing, cost of additional testing to be paid by Contractor and charged at a rate of $1,500.00 per day. G. Equipment: All cathodic protection testing instruments to be in proper working order and calibrated according to factory specifications. H. Report: Submit a written report in accordance with Section 1.05, Submittals. Include all test data, resistance and geologic logs, the rectifier O&M Manual and the As-Built Drawings. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Corrosion Control Test Stations – 26 42 14 SECTION 26 42 14 CORROSION CONTROL TEST STATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Test station materials and installation requirements. B. Locations requiring test stations are adjacent to manholes, major pipeline crossings, cased crossings and tunnels, below-grade insulated flanges and select sacrificial anode installations. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 42 15 - Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation. B. Section 23 42 13 - Cathodic Protection for Pipelines. 1.4 UNIT PRICES A. No payment will be made for corrosion control test stations under this section. Include cost in unit price for water mains or sewers. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1248 - Polyethylene Plastic Molding and Extrusion Material. B. NACE RP-0169 - Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems. C. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe. D. UL 83 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wires. E. UL 486A - Wire Connectors for Use with Copper Conductors. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals to conform to the requirements of Section 01 30 02. B. Design Drawings and Computations: Prepare all computations and drawings by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years’ experience in corrosion control. C. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item. Include the manufacturer’ name on the catalog cuts and provide sufficient information to show that the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where more than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the item proposed. D. Drawings: During installation and construction, maintain as-built drawings of the corrosion control test stations. Revise drawings to show exact locations of all wiring, connections, and terminal boxes. Properly identify all items of equipment and material. Submit the original as- built drawings to the City or its designated representative. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all components of the corrosion control test stations meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Reference the applicable section of the specifications and the applicable standard details on the certification. B. The drawings for the corrosion control test stations are diagrammatic and do not scale for exact locations, unless scales are explicitly stated on the specific drawing. Field conditions, non- interference with other utilities or mechanical and structural features determine exact locations. Note other existing utilities in the area and during excavation, do not damage these utilities. Repair any damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the City at the Contractor's expense. C. All materials, fabrication, and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the City February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Corrosion Control Test Stations – 26 42 14 or its designated representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH MOUNT TEST STATIONS A. Test stations consist of test wires, a terminal box and a traffic box as shown on the drawings. B. For the terminal box, use a five terminal Big Fink as manufactured by Cott Manufacturing Company or approved equal. C. For the concrete traffic box; use a 10.25-inch diameter 3-RT with a cast iron cover marked "CP Test" as manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc or approved equal. 2.2 ABOVE-GRADE TEST STATIONS A. At test station locations where flush mounted structures cannot be installed, use an above- grade test station, and place such that possible damage from vandalism, traffic, etc. is minimized. B. For the test station, use a five terminal Big Fink as manufactured by Cott Manufacturing or approved equal. C. Have a lockable, corrosion-proof plastic cover for the terminal boxes. Mount on a 5-foot length of 3-inch diameter UV-resistant plastic conduit. D. Install the test station adjacent to a permanent structure, if possible, for physical protection. 2.3 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODES A. Type: Provide a copper/copper sulfate, double membrane, ceramic cell in a geomembrane package such as a Permacell Plus or approved equal. B. Wire: Equip the electrode with No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire with blue HMWPE insulation of suitable length to attach to the terminal board of the test station without splicing. 2.4 TEST STATION LEAD WIRES A. Test station lead wires of all sizes shall have TW, THW or THHN insulation. B. Color code insulation based upon connection to underground structures: 1. Water piping: white. 2. Foreign structures: red. 3. Steel casings: yellow. C. Wire all terminal boards as shown on the drawings. 2.5 THERMITE WELD EQUIPM ENT A. Charges and Molds: Select weld charges and mold size for the specific surface configuration in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Use Erico, Cadweld, or Continental Industries, Thermoweld weld charges and molds. B. Weld Coating: Coat weld with Kop-Coat as manufactured by Carboline or approved equal. Cover coated weld with a plastic weld cap. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Required applications of corrosion control test stations include locations where future testing is anticipated for the following reasons: 1. Testing to determine the effectiveness of the installed cathodic protection systems and to allow for startup adjustments. 2. Testing to determine interference effects from and on adjacent or crossing foreign underground structures. 3. Testing to determine sources and magnitude of stray d-c currents and required mitigative measures. 4. Periodic monitoring to determine status of existing cathodic protection systems, stray current, and foreign line influence. B. Install test stations at each of the following locations: 1. On continuous pipelines adjacent to all manhole locations unless otherwise shown February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Corrosion Control Test Stations – 26 42 14 or noted on the drawings. 2. At all major underground pipeline crossings. 3. At all cased crossings and tunnels (both ends). 4. At all underground isolation flanges. 5. At galvanic anode locations, where indicated. 6. At all other locations shown on the drawings. 3.2 GENERAL A. Locate test stations adjacent to manholes where possible. If a flush mounted test station is not feasible in a particular location, then an above-grade test station may be used, subject to approval by the City or its designated representative. B. Use continuous test station lead wires without cuts or tears in the insulation. C. Locate test stations as close to directly over the pipe as possible. If the pipe is installed under a road, place the test station at the curb for easy access. D. Attach test lead wires to the pipe by thermite welding. E. Use color coded test wires as indicated on the drawings. F. Wire test station terminal board configurations as shown on the drawings. G. At foreign pipeline crossing test stations, the owners of the pipeline must be notified and must give permission before the test leads are connected to their pipeline. The City should have a representative present. 3.3 FLUSH-MOUNT TEST STATIONS A. Install flush-mount test stations as shown on the drawings. B. Coil sufficient slack beneath the test station to allow for soil settlement and to prevent damage to the leads during backfilling. Leave additional slack to allow for withdrawal of the terminal board a minimum of 18 inches above the top of the concrete traffic box for test purposes. C. Install flush-mount test stations with permanent copper/copper sulfate reference electrodes where indicated on the drawings. 1. Install reference electrode approximately 12-inches from the pipe. 2. Compact native soil by hand around the electrode. Use select granular backfill material for the balance of the backfill. 3. Saturate the backfilled reference electrode with 5 gallons of water. D. Set test stations outside areas of permanent paving in a Portland cement concrete pad, minimum of 24 inches square and no less than 4 inches thick. 3.4 ABOVE-GRADE TEST STATIONS A. Install above-grade test stations where a flush mounted test station cannot be located. Use and location of above-grade test stations must be approved by the City or its designated representative. B. Locate test station adjacent to a permanent structure (e.g. a power pole), if possible, for physical protection. C. Coil sufficient slack beneath the test station to allow for soil settlement. Do not damage the leads during backfilling. D. Set test stations in a Portland cement concrete anchor, a minimum of 12 inches in diameter and no less than 2 feet thick. 3.5 TEST LEAD WIRE ATTACHMENT A. Attach test leads to the pipe by thermite welding. B. Clean and dry the pipe to which the wires are to be attached. C. Use grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease, and dirt from an area approximately 3 inches square. Grind the surface to bright metal. D. Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be thermite welded to the pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding. E. Using the proper size thermite weld mold as recommended by the manufacturer, place the wire between the graphite mold and the prepared metal surface. Use a copper sleeve crimped over the wire for all No. 12 AWG wires. F. Place the metal disk in the bottom of the mold. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Corrosion Control Test Stations – 26 42 14 G. Pour the thermite weld charge into the mold. Squeeze the bottom of the cartridge to spread ignition powder over the charge. H. Close the mold cover and ignite the starting powder with a flint gun. I. After the exothermic reaction, remove the thermite weld mold and gently strike the weld with a hammer to remove the weld slag. Pull on the wire to assure a secure connection. If the weld is not secure or the wire breaks, repeat the procedure. J. If the weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Kop-Coat. Cover the coated weld with a plastic weld cap. 3.6 POST INSTALLATION BACKFILLING OF TEST STATION - LEAD WIRES. A. Protect test station wires to prevent damage to the wire insulation and conductor integrity during backfilling. B. After completion of the backfilling of the test wires to the pipe, verify the connection by recording a pipe-to-soil potential. C. Replace any test wire found to have a high resistance connection. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation – 26 42 15 SECTION 26 42 15 JOINT BONDING AND ELECTRICAL ISOLATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Joint bonding requirements for electrical continuity along steel, ductile iron and concrete cylinder pipe. Electrical isolation devices for installation at connections to existing piping, at selected below grade to above ground piping transitions, at cased crossings and at tunnels. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Section 26 42 14 - Corrosion Control Test Stations. Section 26 42 13 - Cathodic Protection for Pipelines. 1.4 UNIT PRICES No payment will be made for joint bonding and electrical isolation under this section. Include cost in unit price for water mains or sewers. 1.5 REFERENCES ASTM D 1248 - Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Material. AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flange for Waterworks Service. AWWA M9 Manual - Concrete Pressure Pipe. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flange and Flanged Fittings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS General: Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 02. Design Drawings and Computations: Prepare all computations and drawings by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Texas with a minimum of ten years of corrosion control experience. Catalog Cuts: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each item. Include the manufacturer’s name in the catalog cuts and provide sufficient information to show that the materials meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Where more than one item or catalog number appears on a catalog cut, clearly identify the item proposed. Test Results: Submit electrical continuity and flange isolation test results to the City or its designated representative. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL Provide manufacturer's certification that all electrical continuity bonding meets the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Reference certification to applicable section of specifications and applicable standard detail. Provide manufacturer's certification that all isolation devices meet the published material specifications. All materials, fabrication, and installations are subject to inspection and testing by the City or its designated representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS Joint bonding and electrical isolation materials to be incorporated into the project include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Electrical continuity bonds. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation – 26 42 15 2. Flange isolation assemblies. 3. Casing spacers. 4. End seals. 2.2 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY BONDS Applications: Applications for electrical continuity bonding include the following: 1. Bonding across bolted joint assemblies. 2. Bonding across gasketed joint assemblies. Preparation of Prestressed Concrete Pipe for Bonding: 1. General: a. Fabrication: Use prestressed concrete pipe for this project that has been fabricated in such a manner as to establish electrical continuity between metallic components of pipe and joints. b. Acceptable Methods: Establish electrical continuity as indicated in drawings and specifications. 2. Criteria for Electric Continuity: a. Tensile Wire: Pipe manufacturer to obtain a resistance no greater than 0.03 ohms between any wire and steel joint ring at end of pipe farthest from that wire. Manufacturer to report values obtained and method of measurement. b. Internal Pipe Joint Components: Pipe manufacturer to obtain resistance of less than c. 0.03 ohms between any component and steel pipe cylinder. 3. Tensile Wire Continuity: a. Establish continuity between tensile wire coils and steel cylinder on embedded cylinder type prestressed pipe by tightly wrapping tensile wire over longitudinal mild steel straps during pipe manufacture. 1) Use and install two continuous straps 1800 apart longitudinally along the pipe. These straps must maintain electrical continuity between metallic components. 2) Use steel straps made of mild steel and free of grease, mill scale, or other high resistance deposits. 3) Make longitudinal straps electrically continuous with pipe cylinder by steel fasteners of suitable dimensions placed between steel cylinder and longitudinal straps. Connect fasteners so as to remain intact during pipe fabrication process. 4. Steel Cylinder Continuity: a. Establish continuity of all joint components and steel cylinder. These components include the following: 1) Anchor socket brackets. 2) Anchor socket. 3) Spigot ring. 4) Bell ring. b. If mechanical contact does not provide a resistance of less than 0.03 ohms between components, tack weld component to provide electrical continuity. Preparation of Steel Pipe for Bonding: Bonding wires are not required for welded steel pipe Preparation of Ductile Iron Pipe for Bonding: Install insulated bond wires as shown on contract drawings. Electrical Bond Wires: Electrical bond wires are to be a minimum No. 2 AWG, seven strand, copper cable with THHN insulation. Remove one inch of THHN insulation from each end of the bond wire. Provide the minimum number of bond wires as shown on drawings for steel or ductile iron pipe. Electrical Bond Clip: Weld three (3) ASTM 366 steel bonding clips, each approximately 0.13 inches thick, 2.5 inches long, and 1.25 inches wide, with 1/8-inch fillet welds to the bell and spigot of adjacent prestressed concrete cylinder pipe or steel pipe with rubber gasketed joints. Manufacture clips to maintain continuity regardless of small deflections of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation – 26 42 15 finished joints. 2.3 FLANGE ISOLATION Applications: Required applications of dielectric flange isolation assemblies include but are not limited to the following: 1.At selected locations where new piping is mechanically connected to existing piping. 2.At selected below-grade to aboveground piping transitions. 3.At locations shown on the drawings. For concrete cylinder pipe, provide electrical isolation through the installation of the following materials: 1.Flange connection to Lock Joint bell adapter. 2.Flange connection to Lock Joint spigot adapter 3.Insulating Gasket: a.For piping 30 inches diameter and greater, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. b.For piping between 12 inches and 24 inches diameter, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. c. Alternately, provide plain-faced phenolic gasket, as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. Place phenolic gasket between two full-faced gaskets. Provide cloth-inserted rubber gasket material, 1/8 inch thick in accordance with AWWA C207. Use factory cut gaskets of proper dimensions. 4.Sleeves and Washers: a.For piping 30 inches diameter and greater, provide full length mylar sleeves with Pyrox G-10 washers, double washer sets as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. b.For piping between 12 inches and 24 inches diameter, provide full length mylar sleeves with Phenolic washers, double washer sets as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. For steel pipe, provide electrical isolation through installation of the following materials: 1.Insulating Gasket: a.For piping 30 inches diameter and greater, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. b.For piping between 12 inches and 24 inches diameter, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. c. Alternately, provide a plain-faced phenolic gasket, as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. Place phenolic gasket between two full-faced gaskets. Provide cloth-inserted rubber gasket material, 1/8 inch thick in accordance with AWWA C207. Use factory cut gaskets of proper dimensions. 2.Sleeves and Washers: a.For piping 30 inches diameter and greater, provide full length mylar sleeves with Pyrox G-10 washers, double washer sets as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. b.For piping between 12 inches and 24 inches diameter, provide full length mylar sleeves with Phenolic washers, double washer sets as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. For ductile iron pipe, provide electrical isolation through installation of the following materials: 1.Insulating Gasket: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation – 26 42 15 a.For piping 30 inches diameter and greater, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. b.For piping between 12 inches and 24 inches diameter, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrile seal, Type "E" LineBacker gasket as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. c. Alternately, provide a plain-faced phenolic gasket, as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. Place phenolic gasket between two full-faced gaskets. Provide cloth-inserted rubber gasket material, 1/8 inch thick in accordance with AWWA C207. Use factory cut gaskets of proper dimensions. 2.Sleeves and Washers: a.For piping 30 inches diameter and greater, provide full length mylar sleeves with Pyrox G-1 washers, double washer sets as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. b.For piping between 12 inches and 24 inches diameter, provide full length mylar sleeves with Phenolic washers, double washer sets as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., or approved equal. Coatings for buried isolation flanges shall be Densyl Tape system manufactured by Carboline, consisting of Densyl Mastic, Densyl Paste, and Densyl Tape, or approved equal. 2.4 CASING SPACERS For water or wastewater piping installed in tunnels or cased crossings, install casing spacers between the piping and the casing or tunnel liner to provide electrical isolation. Inside diameter of casing or tunnel liner must be 4 inches greater in diameter than the outside diameter of the piping. In the case of mechanically coupled piping, the casing must be a minimum of 4 inches greater in diameter than the outside diameter of the coupling at its largest point. For welded steel pipe 12 inch diameter and smaller, use injection molded polyethylene insulators, Model PE as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. For all other pipe materials 12 inch diameter and smaller, use 8 inch wide steel insulators with 2 inch wide glass reinforced runners, Model C8G-2 as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. For all piping greater than 12 inch diameter, use 12 inch wide steel insulators with 2 inch wide glass reinforced runners, Model C12G-2 as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. 2.5 CASING END SEALS For all piping less than 24 inch diameter, use hard rubber seals, Model PL Link Seal as manufactured by the Thunderline Corporation or approved equal For all piping 24 inch diameter and greater, use pull-on, 1/8 inch thick, synthetic rubber end seals, Model C, as manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY BOND WIRES Inspection: Use continuous bond wires with no cuts or tears in the insulation covering the conductor. General: Attach bond wires at required locations by thermite welding. Thermite Welding: Perform thermite welding of bond wires to piping in the following manner: 1.Clean and dry pipe to which wires are to be attached. 2.Use grinding wheel to remove all coating, mill scale, oxide, grease, and dirt from an area approximately 3 inches square. Grind surface to bright metal. 3.Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from each end of wire to be thermite February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation – 26 42 15 welded to pipe, exposing clean, oxide-free copper for welding. 4.Select proper size thermite weld mold as recommended by manufacturer. Place wire between graphite mold and the prepared metal surface. Use a copper sleeve crimped over wire for all 12 AWG wires. 5.Place metal disk in bottom of mold. 6.Pour thermite weld charge into the mold. Squeeze bottom of cartridge to spread ignition powder over charge. 7.Close mold cover and ignite starting powder with flint gun. 8.After exothermic reaction, remove thermite weld mold and gently strike weld with a hammer to remove weld slag. Pull on wire to assure a secure connection. If weld is not secure or the wire breaks, repeat procedure with new wire. 9.If weld is secure, coat all bare metal and weld metal with Kop-Coat. Cover coated weld with a plastic weld cap. Post-Installation Inspection: Make post-installation inspection of all electrical continuity bonds through a visual examination of each thermite weld connection for strength and suitable coating prior to backfilling. In addition, perform one or more of the following tests: 1.Circulate current through pipe using DC power supply. Calculate resistance through known length of pipe. Resistance must not exceed 150% of theoretical resistance for pipe and bonds. 2.Measure resistance through select bonded joints with a digital low resistance ohmmeter (DLRO). Resistance of 0.001 ohms or less is acceptable. 3.Position a CSE at a stationary location adjacent to bonded pipeline. Impress a temporary current on pipe. Record static, current-applied, and instant “off” pipe-to- soil potential readings along the pipe relative to the stationary CSE. a.Static potential measurements referenced to stationary CSE must be nearly identical along the pipe to indicate electrical continuity. b.Instant “off” potentials referenced to stationary CSE must be nearly identical along pipe to indicate electrical continuity. c. The difference between the instant “off” and the static potential referenced to stationary CSE must be equal at each point of contact to pipe to indicate electrical continuity. 4.If any of the above procedures indicates a poor quality bond connection, rebond the joint. 5.Record results and submit to City or its designated representative for approval prior to backfilling. Backfilling of Bonded Joints: 1.Backfill bonded piping in manner that prevents damage to the bond wires and all connections to the metallic structures. 2. 3.If construction activity damages a bonded connection, install new bond wire. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FLANGE ISOLATION DEVICES Placement: Install above-grade dielectric insulators at a minimum 12 inches and maximum of 48 inches above final grade. Assembly: Place gasket, sleeves, and washers as shown on the drawings. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for even tightening to proper torque. See drawings. Testing: Immediately after an insulating fitting has been installed, test electrical isolation with a Gas Electronics model, 601 meter. Fully document test results and submit to the City of Corpus Christi or its designated representative. Painting: Do not use metal base paints on insulating fittings. Encapsulation: Encapsulate below-grade insulating flanges with the Carboline Densyl tape system, or approved equal, after the insulating flange has been tested for effectiveness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CASING SPACERS Assemble and securely fasten casing spacers to the pipeline to be installed in casings or tunnels. Avoid inadvertent metallic contact between casing and carrier pipe. Place spacers close enough to ensure that the pipe is adequately supported throughout its length, particularly February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation – 26 42 15 at the ends, to offset settling and possible electrical shorting. The end spacer must be within 6 inches of the end of the casing pipe, regardless of size of casing and pipe or type of spacer used. Install spacers on PVC pipe at the insertion line to prevent over-insertion of the spigot into the bell. Grade the bottom of the trench adjacent to each end of the casing to provide a firm, uniform and continuous support for the pipe. If the trench requires some backfill to establish the final trench bottom grade, place the backfill material in 6-inch lifts and compact each layer. After the casing or tunnel liner has been placed, pump dry and maintain dry until the casing spacers and end seals are installed. Install casing spacers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Correctly assemble, evenly tighten, and prevent damage during tightening of the insulators and pipe insertion. Insulator Spacing: 1.Maximum distance between spacers to be 10 feet for pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, and 6 feet for pipe sizes greater than 6 inches. 2.For ductile-iron pipe, flanged pipe, or bell and spigot pipe, install spacers within one foot on each side of the bell or flange, and one in the center of the joint where 18 foot or 20 foot long joints are used. 3.If the casing or pipe is angled or bent, reduce the spacing. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF END SEALS Assemble hard rubber Link-Seals around the pipe and slide into the annular space between the pipe and casing. Evenly tighten the bolts to provide a positive seal. Place pull-on synthetic rubber end seals on the pipe and pull over the end of the casing. Securely fasten stainless steel bands. 3.5 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY TESTS Immediately after the pipe has been installed in the casing, but prior to connecting the line, perform an electrical continuity test to determine whether the casing is in fact insulated from the pipe. Have the continuity check fully documented and approved by the City or its designated representative prior to backfilling. If the electrical isolation between pipe and casing is not effective, immediately investigate the cause and remedy the situation. Under no circumstances, backfill a shorted casing. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Interior Lighting– 26 51 00 SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2.Emergency lighting units. 3.Exit signs. 4.Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 1.3 DEFINITIONS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color-rendering index. D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1.Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2.Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3.Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5.Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6.Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a.Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. b.Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following: 1.Lamps and ballasts, installed. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Interior Lighting– 26 51 00 2.Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system. D. Installation instructions. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1.Lighting fixtures. B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Lamps: Furnish at least 10 of each type. 2.Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: Furnish at least 2 of each type. 3.Ballasts: Furnish at least 4 of each type. 4.Globes and Guards: Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. B. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Interior Lighting– 26 51 00 NEMA LE 5B. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Diffusers and Globes: 1.Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a.Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. b.UV stabilized. 2.Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1.Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a."USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b.Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. c.Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d.Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e.ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f.CCT and CRI for all luminaires. H. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1.Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2.Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3.Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4.Sound Rating: Class A. 5.Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6.Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7.Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8.Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9.BF: 0.88 or higher. 10.Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 11.Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1.Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2.Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1.Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Interior Lighting– 26 51 00 the field. F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 1.Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low- power-factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of approximately 30 percent. H. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1.Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts. 2.Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C). 3.Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4.Sound Rating: Class A. 5.Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6.Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7.Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8.Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9.Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10.Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 2.5 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1.Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 2.Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3.Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a.Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b.Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c.Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d.Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e.LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f.Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. g.Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Interior Lighting– 26 51 00 A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1.Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2.Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3.Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4.Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5.LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6.Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7.Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage. 8.Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 9.Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 HID LAMPS A. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. 2.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. P ART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: 1.Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2.Install lamps in each luminaire. B. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Interior Lighting– 26 51 00 with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent lamps, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. END OF SECTION Division 27 Communications February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 SECTION 27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTIC AL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY A. This Section includes specifications for the expansion of a fiber optic cabling system. The fiber optic cabling system includes the procurement and installation of fiber to provide the communications to support the new High Service #3 Pump Station, Project E11066 for The City of Corpus Christi, Texas O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. In these specifications the term City or City’s shall refer to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. B. This specification is intended to give guidance to the installation contractor to provide a complete and fully functional fiber optic cabling system for the City of Corpus Christi’s O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant. This project shall include all necessary material and labor that is required to furnish a turnkey system installation based upon the scope of work as noted in paragraph A above and contained in theses specifications that follow. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: An experienced contractor who has the following qualifications as a minimum: 1. Experience utilizing directional drilling (trench-less technology) methods as described within these specifications if these methods are required. 2. The installer and tester for the fiber premises and outside cable plant shall be RCDD (Registered Communication Distribution Designer) Certified. Reference BiCSi latest edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, Corning Altos, or approved equal. FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. Fiber Optics Cable 1. Shall be all-dielectric loose tube and water-blocked. 2. Shall be in accordance with contract design documents. 3. Maximum attenuation shall not exceed .4 db per km 4. Shall be suitable for outdoor aerial and duct underground installation. 5. Shall be approved and listed by RUS 7 CFR 1755.900 6. Shall conform to all ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 test and design criteria. All fibers in each cable bundle assembly shall be tested and verify for continuity and light attenuation prior to leaving the factory. All test data shall be made available to the installation contractor upon acceptance of the cable. 7. Corning Altos or approved equal B. Connectors 1. All connectors shall be in accordance with contract design documents. 2. Fan out kits shall be outdoor buffer tube with a minimum of 24 inches tubing length. C. Below Grade Splice Closures (if required) 1. Shall be tested in accordance with Bellcore Testing Requirement GR-771-CORE and UL 1863. 2. Shall be suitable for submersion in 20 feet of water head. 3. Shall be configurable for future re-entry. 4. Shall be of a pre-molded port multi - section end plates with ports accepting cable diameters up to 1.25 inches. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 5. Shall have the capacity of up to 72 single fusion splices. 6. Shall conform to and support the splice requirements as noted in the contract drawing documents. 7. Shall be Performed Coyote Splice Closure splice trays or approved equal. CONDUIT A. PVC Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of A.N.S.I. Standard C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads with PVC external coating and urethane internal coating. Exterior PVC coating shall be a minimum of 40 mil thick, internal urethane coating shall be a minimum of 2 mils thick. 1. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds Form 7 or Appleton. All fittings shall be PVC coated. 2. Boxes: Cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds or Appleton. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit with a 90°C UL rating, approved for direct burial and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or an equal. 1. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 90° elbows shall be from the factory. 2. Boxes: For use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be of the same manufacturer as the conduit. C. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit: 1. Shall be constructed of polymeric materials, which are lightweight, flexible corrosion resistant and non-conductive. 2. The duct shall be pigmented throughout the entire cross-section so as to produce a uniform color. 3. Shall be smoothwall both inner and outer surface with a controlled outside diameter in accordance with ASTM Standard D 3035 4. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 Certified. 5. Shall have a minimum plastic density (polymer range) of .940 - .950 g/cc tested in accordance with ASTM Standard D 1505. 6. Shall have a crush strength of 2020 lbs/ft length measured in accordance with a modified ASTM D 2412 test method. 7. 1-1/4 HDPE shall have a average wall thickness of .195 inches with an average OD of 1.660 inches and an average ID of 1.270 inches. 8. Shall be Dura-line SDR 9 or approved equal. D. Uses Permitted: Unless otherwise indicated, all conduit shall be as follows: 1. RGS: Exposed above grade outdoors and as a transition between HDPE underground and RGS above grade 2. HDPE: Underground direct buried via directional drilling methods (if utilized) 3. PVC: Underground, concealed in concrete. 4. Flexible: Equipment connection ENCLOSURES AND BOXES A. Underground Locations: Pull boxes used in underground conduit runs shall be made of polymer concrete, shall be UL Listed and shall be of a size and construction appropriate for the intended application. Concrete pull boxes intended for underground installation shall be precast in sections with parkway or traffic rated covers, clearly marked as indicated on the drawings. These boxes shall have a vertical design load of 22,568 lbs with a test load of 33,852 lbs. Their respective traffic rated covers shall contain the proper logo on the cover and be rated for a minimum design load of 15,000 lbs over a 10 inch square with a minimum test load of 22,568 lbs (Quazite Type PG or approved equivalent). February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 B. Wet and Damp Locations: NEMA Type 4X and 3R boxes and enclosures shall be fabricated from stainless steel, and shall be furnished with a gasketed weathertight cover of the same material. Enclosures and cabinets for electrical equipment shall conform to NEMA Standard 250 and U.L. Standard 50. NEMA Type 4X waterproof boxes and enclosures shall be welded stainless steel, glass reinforced polyester with polyurethane foam -core, or cast metal of the sizes and materials indicated on the drawings complete with screw-fastened, gasketed covers and drilled and tapped conduit entries of the proper sizes and arrangements. EQUIPMENT RACKS, FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS A. All framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel. Hot dip after fabrication. B. Nuts, bolts shall be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel. All stainless steel hardware shall be a minimum 316 Grade stainless steel. C. All conduit clamps shall be hot-dipped galvanized one-hole clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION PULL BOX INSTALLATION A. Pull-boxes shall be placed as shown on the construction drawings. Hand-holes may be moved to locations more practical when necessary upon approval by The Project Manager. B. The location of pull boxes shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only. The Contractor is responsible for verifying locations prior to placement. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: 1. The trench shall be as straight as practical. The bottom of the trench shall be smooth and free from any sharp edges. The trench shall be kept clear of debris and loose rock. All changes in trench grade shall be gradual with no more than six (6) inches of vertical rise in every five (5) feet of horizontal run. 2. Any open trench shall be fenced, covered or otherwise barricaded. Exceptions are subject to approval by ONSW TP Project Manager. Good judgment and care must be exercised to prevent persons from falling into the open trench, or other damages to persons or property. 3. Roadways, which are open cut, shall be opened just prior to conduit placement. In no case shall the roadway be left impassable at the end of the day. Safety of the general public is paramount and appropriate steps shall be taken to ensure safety at all times. 4. The contractor is responsible for the haul off and proper disposal of all spoils materials removed from the trench. 5. The contractor shall provide the necessary means to carry storm water away from the work area and keep the work area free of obstructions. 6. A minimum clearance of twelve inches (12”) shall be maintained between existing utilities and ONSWTP conduits. 7. Trenches shall be promptly backfilled with earth and tamped with a mechanical tamper in 6 inch (15.24 cm) lifts so that the earth is restored to original grade to assure no hazard exists to vehicular, animal or pedestrian traffic. Trenches will be properly guarded or barricaded to prevent damage or injury. 8. Select backfill shall be unfrozen material, free of rocks or other debris. 9. Select backfill shall be used as a cushion and shall extend 3 inches on the sides and floor of trench to 6 inches above top of conduit. 10. Trenching processes will comply with all established Federal and State Safety Standards. B. Backfill: 1. The trench shall be backfilled and compacted to the satisfaction of the ONSWTP, promptly following duct placement. 2. The backfill shall consist of the materials previously excavated or equal materials February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 and shall conform to the following requirements: a. The backfill shall be placed and compacted in not more than 6” lifts, from the top of the installation to the ground line. The backfill shall be of suitable material free from boulders, roots, sod or other vegetation. In areas inaccessible to tamping type rollers, a mechanical tamper of a size suitable for the work involved may be used. b. Pneumatic tampers shall be operated at pressures no less than those recommended by the manufacturer. c. A 95% minimum density compaction of backfill is required or greater if required by the governing Federal, State, County, or City agency. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all compaction tests. If the proper compaction is not achieved, the Contractor shall remove all backfill materials and the backfill and compaction will be repeated at the Contractor’s expense until the compaction tests are accepted. TRENCHED ROAD A. Pavement replacement shall match existing paving in type of pavement appearance, wear surface and durability to the maximum extent practical. Replacement shall match existing structures and shall include curbing, walkways, or any other concrete structure(s) damaged during construction. Pavement repair shall be subject to approval by The Project Manager and must conform to the requirements of the local governing authority having jurisdiction including required cutbacks, or “T” topping. Pavement repair not installed in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications shall be removed and replaced. B. Roadways shall only be trenched as a last resort. The City of Corpus Christi will not approve the open trenching of roadways unless trench-less technology methods are not applicable. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Cement: Portland Cement shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C150 for type II Portland Cement. The cement shall be free of lumps and contamination by water other foreign matter. B. Water: Water shall potable and free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, salts and other impurities. C. Sand: Sand shall be clear, hard and durable grains, free of excessive foreign matter. D. Aggregate: Nominal ¾” durable crushed rock or limestone, free of excessive foreign matter. E. Mixing: 1. Maxim um water to cement ratio: 6.5 gallons per 94 pound sack of Portland Cement 2. Mix Ratio: 1 part cement, 2 parts sand, 3 parts aggregate. 28 day compressive strength, 3000 pounds DIRECTIONAL BORING A. This item includes all labor, equipment and certain materials required to install conduit using directional boring techniques. The running line of the conduit shall be kept straight and level. Any changes, either vertical or horizontal shall be gradual with no more than six (6) inches of deviation in every five (5) linear feet. Special care shall be taken to insure that the conduit connection between bores be kept straight and level. B. All utilities shall be pot holed for verification of location and depth prior to boring. C. The boring machines shall be grounded at all times during operation. The grounding method and operator’s safety equipment shall comply with the manufacturer’s guidelines and requirements. Adequate barricades shall be erected to limit access to the boring machine to operating personnel only. D. Excavation and backfilling of bore pits and potholes shall conform to that described in the sections noted above. E. Separation of Topsoil: Anywhere a bore pit, or other excavation exceeds 18” in width at the surface, the topsoil will be separated from the subsoil with topsoil to be placed back as the surface layer of soil when the hole is back-filled. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 F. Contractor shall provide the coupling machine required for the installation of the connectors on all HDPE conduits. G. The Contractor is responsible for all steel pipe and HDPE conduit broken off and lost in the borehole. H. If at any time the proposed running line crosses an existing utility, the excavated pothole shall remain open until the Project Manager or appointed representative is able to witness the bore head pass the existing utility. I. Where a pipe casing is utilized, the ends of the casing shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of water or other foreign materials. PROVING THE DUCT A. The duct shall be proved to verify continuity and integrity by pulling a solid rubber mandrel or a mandrel of other solid material such as steel or aluminum through the duct. The mandrel shall be a minimum of 3” long and 1” diameter. A City project representative must be present to witness all duct-proving operations. Duct that is not proved in the presence of a City Project representative shall not be considered complete. B. All duct systems shall be installed to allow for a sealed pneumatic system. The couplings are to be installed as per the manufacturer’s instruction. It is the responsibility of the subcontractor to provide a clean, sealed, uniform duct to the cable placing crews. SUBSURFACE OBSTRUCTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for locating and avoiding all subsurface obstructions. It is the Subcontractor’s responsibility to verify the locations of subsurface obstructions shown on the drawings as well as any additional obstructions not identified on the drawings. Contractor shall notify owners and operators of foreign pipelines or other utilities at least two working days prior to excavation near the utility. B. Contractor shall pothole all existing utilities or substructure crossings before excavation crosses their locations. If potholing does not expose the existing utility the Contractor shall request that the utility be located again to verify that the utility is beyond or deeper than the trench line or that the utility has been miss-marked. A minimum of twelve inches (12”) shall be maintained between existing utilities and conduits. This shall be included in the lump sum price. Damage to existing utilities is not acceptable and termination of this Contract may result from this negligence. C. Where construction will take place in areas near existing utilities, it is imperative that the Contractor meets with the approved representative responsible for the utility to resolve any depth or construction line conflicts prior to the start of construction. The City Project Engineer of Record must be notified of this meeting and may be present. D. DAMAGED UTILITIES 1. A copy of the contractors Cable Awareness Program must be submitted to the City Project Manager prior to construction. 2. Any utility damage will be reported to the utility owner and the City immediately. This includes any damage to the City owned cable. 3. Contractor will cooperate with the owner of the utility to facilitate any repairs necessary. 4. A copy of all documentation regarding the utility damage shall be submitted to the City Project Manager. ROADWAY, RAILROAD AND OTHER BORED CROSSINGS A. In no case shall the completed crossing be less than 48 inches deep at its shallowest point. B. Contractor shall not excavate into the side slopes of raised track beds. C. Backfill for excavations shall be mechanically tamped in 6-inch lifts to the same density as adjoining earth. RIGHT OF WAY / PROPERTY PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. General: 1. The Contractor shall protect the Right-of-Way/Property and minimize the damage from construction operations. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 2. Good soil erosion practices shall be practiced during all construction operations. B. Restoration: 3. Contractor shall keep the premises where work is being performed in a neat, clean, and orderly condition, and on completion of the work hereunder, Contractor shall remove all of its tools and equipment from the premises and any debris shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor. 4. Right-of-Way/Property located in non-paved areas shall be restored to its original or better condition within 24 hours or as soon as practicable, in the ONSWTP’s opinion, following duct-placing operations. In areas where open trench methods were used and backfill mounded over the trench, grading or filling will be required for final restoration of the Right-of-Way/Property. All rock and debris brought to the surface and left after backfilling shall be removed and disposed of, as directed by the City. 5. All areas disturbed by the construction activities shall be restored and re-seeded per the requirements and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. 6. Right-of-Way/Property located in paved areas shall be restored to operation for vehicular traffic, with temporary paving or the permanent paving, within 24 hours or as soon as practicable, in The City’s opinion, following duct placing operations. 7. All unit prices include the cost of seed, mulch, hay, hydro-mulch, sod, water, gravel, soil, sand, rip-rap, and all other materials required by the City or any governmental authority for site restoration. C. All rights of way clearing are included in all buried and underground outside plant placement pricing. FENCING AND OTHER EXCAVATION BARRICADES A. Temporary safety fencing erected around the Contractor’s excavations shall be installed to the satisfaction of the ONSWTP. During any non-working hours, Contractor shall place steel plates over any open trenches that would pose a threat to vehicular traffic. The steel plates shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the weight of vehicular traffic and anchored in place to prevent movement. Open trenches not exposed to vehicular traffic shall also be covered with plywood (or equal) sufficient to carry any pedestrian traffic, including motorcycles, bicycles, etc. and anchored in place. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to take all steps necessary to prevent all accidents and to protect the general public. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, maintaining and removing barricades, flashers, fences, plates, and ramps necessary to protect the public and property owner from involvement with excavations, open ditches, and other work areas. FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall comply with all fiber cable manufactures recommendations for the general installation of the fiber optic cable. The installation shall include but not necessarily limited to the pulling of fiber thru dedicated conduit / inner duct raceway systems, the bending of the fiber, the splicing and termination of the cable, and the testing of all cable, associated splicing and termination hardware. B. The contractor shall follow the manufacture spec #SRP-005-001 dated October 2002 entitled Fiber Optic Cable Placing – Duct from Corning Cable Systems for installation of outside plant fiber cable. C. The contractor shall use fusion splicing for all required splices. See field testing for quality control measures. D. The contractor shall use type SC connectors where required. All un-terminated cable shall be neatly coiled and bundled to prevent damage to fiber ends. E. All Fiber Optic Cable is to be placed inside duct system. F. Bends of small radii and twists that may damage the fiber optic cable shall be avoided. During cable placement, cable shall not be bent in a radius less than twenty (20) times the outside diameter of the cable or as specified by the manufacturer. Pulleys, sheaves or radius wheels shall be used to meet this requirement. G. Cable shall not be pulled with more than 600 lbs. of dynamic tension. Safeguards such as breakaway swivels, adjustable slip-clutch capstan winches, or pulling dynamometers shall be used. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 H. Cable lubricant shall be used to reduce the pulling tension on longer segments of the cable placement or at the discretion of the City. Cable lubricants must be compatible with the fiber optic cable’s outer sheath. Verification of the compatibility between the fiber optic cable and the cable lubricant will be required before any application. After cable installation, the inner-duct shall be sealed at the strand level using approved foam. I. Slack coils of approximately fifty (50) feet will be neatly coiled and placed in hand-holes specified as splice locations and so noted on construction drawings. Fiber identification tags shall be attached. Slack coils of approximately twenty (20) feet shall be neatly coiled and placed in hand-holes specified as fiber pull boxes and so noted on construction drawings. J. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to plan each cable pull using information about splice locations, pull box locations, staging areas, conduit layout, manhole locations, etc. K. Each cable shall be placed in a continuous piece, with termination and splice locations as shown on the construction drawings. No additional splices are allowed, unless specifically added by the City in writing. L. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and storage of the fiber optic cable. If necessary, a competent security guard shall be maintained on site when fiber optic cable is kept on the street overnight. M. All tracer wires shall be installed in the HDPE in which the fiber is installed and each tracer wire shall be spliced within each pull box. N. A telecommunication test station shall be located at each fiber optic cable splice box and the corresponding tracer wire shall be properly terminated as noted in the manufactures instruction information. WARNING TAPE AND LINE MARKERS A. Contractor shall place buried cable warning tape at all times when plowing, trenching, and backhoeing for burial of conduit for fiber optic cable. B. Buried cable warning tape shall be installed for optimum protection at a depth of twelve inches (12”) below final grade. C. Contractor shall install line markers at all changes in cable running line direction, splices, waterways, subsurface utilities, hand-holes and at both sides of street, bridge or railroad crossings. At no time shall any markers be spaced more than 500 feet apart. Markers shall be positioned so that they can be seen from the location of the cable and generally set facing perpendicular to the cable running line. D. A readily identifiable marker shall be placed at each right of way line where it is crossed by the buried cable. A marker should be at least 4 feet above ground and at the right of way line. Additional markers shall be placed at least every 500 feet where the cable is placed longitudinally on the right-of-way. SPLICING A. Contractor personnel performing splicing procedures shall be properly trained to splice and test fiber optic cable. B. All fibers are to be fusion spliced. (Except mechanical splices are allowed within the appropriate splice housings either existing or proposed) C. All spliced fibers will be protected by a fiber optic heat shrink sleeve. A heat oven will be used to shrink these sleeves. A heat gun which is hand applied will not be permitted. Care must be exercised to prevent damage to exposed fibers by overheating. The acrylic coating shall not be removed beyond the areas that will be covered by the heat shrink sleeves. D. To insure acceptable splices prior to closing and encapsulating the splice case, the Contractor will monitor the splice while it is being performed using an OTDR system. Encapsulation shall be performed immediately after testing is 100% complete and accepted. E. Each splice is to be tested bi-directionally at the required cable operational wavelength. The maximum splice loss, in one direction, shall be 0.45 dB. The bi-directional average loss shall be no greater than 0.15 dB. F. Negative losses or Gainers, shall be added to positive losses and averaged to determine the bi-directional splice loss. Gainers or losses may not exceed 0.3 dB and must be February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 within ten percent (10%) of each other when tested bi-directionally. G. If after five (5) attempts or where high negative loss values are being consistently obtained after many splice attempts, the Contractor is unable to meet the average splice loss objectives due to a gainer, the City Project Manager shall be notified and the Contractor shall: 1. In the presence of the City Project Manager, the Contractor will make an additional three (3) attempts to splice the cable. If the splice meets the specifications, the Contractor will complete splicing activities at this location. 2. If the splice fails to meet the specifications after the Contractor attempts to splice the cable in the presence of the City Project Manager, the Contractor will cut off and label one meter of cable from each of the cables being spliced. The Contractor shall then re-attempt to splice the cables. If after five (5) attempts the splice fails to meet City performance objectives, the Contractor will notify the City Project Manager that they were unsuccessful and complete the splicing activities at this location. H. If the second attempt to splice the cable fails (after the one meter sections have been removed) the City will pay the Contractor as if this were an additional splice point at the unit rates specified in the pricing forms. I. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the City Project Manager of an out of specification splice. Failure to do so may result in the Contractor having to re-enter the splice location and re-splice the cable at their own expense. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 1. Fiber Cable Plant a. The fiber cable manufacturer shall not ship cable with any single strand failures in the cable bundle. b. The contractor shall field test each count of fiber optic cable individually prior to unrolling the fiber off the reel for field installation. The test shall be a continuity test utilizing an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). All tests shall be documented. Tests that reveal a cable light reflection loss greater than 110% of the cable manufacture’s published specifications or factory tests shall be rejected (typically 5db / km). A fiber cable bundle that has more than a 1% cable test failure shall be rejected and not used in this installation. Fiber cable count bundles less than 10 strands shall have 0% failures. In the event the bundle exceeds 0% failures the cable shall be rejected and not used in this installation. c. Once the cable is installed and prior to splicing or terminating, the cable should again be continuity tested as noted in paragraph B above. The same test criteria shall apply. d. Once the cable is installed and terminated all outside plant cable backbone shall be tested by: OTDR in both directions and at both wavelengths of light transmission in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.1 (an average of the two will be used). The test criteria shall then be based upon both sum of connector cable and splice attenuation. Connector attenuation shall not exceed the No. of connector pairs times the published nominal connector loss typically .75db and the splice attenuation shall not exceed the number of splices times the allowed splice loss of .3db.End to End Attenuation as per ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7. All fibers that are left un-terminated will be tested using an OTDR. e. The contractor shall use a high resolution OTDR for testing connectors and splices and shall furnish to the City Project Manager a signature trace of all tests performed. High resolution OTDR’s provide accurate repeatable measurements to be taken from short distances (66ft) to several miles. f. The contractor shall test each fiber transmitter and receiver in a two stage process as documented in BiSCi Standards 2000 Edition Chapter 10 Fiber Cable Tests. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 DOCUMENTATION A. Test data results shall be submitted to the City Project Manager on Contractor supplied test data forms no later than 5 working days after the completion of the testing. The test data forms shall be completely and legibly filled out. Test data results shall be submitted as a neatly organized and indexed document for each segment (end point to end point). The document shall contain the following: 1. Copies of all OTDR fiber tests on computer disks, labeled with endpoints, optical length of splice location, and the date of the test. SYSTEM WARRANTY A. The base proposal system warranty shall be for a period of one year from the date of final system acceptance. This warranty will cover all parts and replacement labor for the manufactures hardware components. ACCEPTANCE TESTING The Contractor will be required to perform the following tests in order to confirm system acceptance: A. Bi-directional OTDR Splice Test 1. Each fiber at each splice point will be tested bi-directionally at the required wavelength with an OTDR capable of long range and high resolution testing. This test will be from an end point designated by the City Project Manager. The maximum loss for each splice in one direction shall be 0.15 dB and the maximum bi- directional average loss shall be 0.10 dB. The test results will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a Contractor supplied “Splice Loss Worksheet”. This test will be performed in conjunction with the bi-directional segment test after the closure has been closed, encapsulated and positioned. B. Bi-directional End-To-End Segment Test 2. Each fiber of each span shall be tested at required wavelength from end point to end point. The test results will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a contractor supplied “Segment Loss Worksheet”. This test will be performed after all of the splicing within the segment has been completed, splice cases closed, encapsulated and positioned. C. Bi-directional End-To-End Power Test 3. Each fiber of each span shall be tested in both directions from end-to-end using the proper wavelength stabilized light source and power meter. The average end-to-end losses must be within the ONSWTP’s specifications. The loss budgets for each loop includes: 0.4 dB/km @ 1310nm and .3 dB/ km @ 1550nm (fiber loss), 0.15 dB/splice, and 0.5 dB/connector. The results of this test are to be recorded on the contractor supplied test data sheets and submitted to the City’s Project Manager. 4. Contractor shall arrange to have a City representative present during power testing. Power testing performed without a City representative present will be invalid and must be re-done at the Contractor’s expense. 5. The Contractor is required to utilize an OTDR capable of producing fiber test documentation on computer disks and on a laser printer. These disks, along with the software needed to view and manipulate the test data, will be turned over to the ONSWTP two (2) days after testing is completed. The Contractor shall use one of the following OTDR emulation software programs: Siecor-1001-PC, Laser Precision PC-OTDR or PC-3000, or Tektronix FMTAP. 6. For the purposes of bi-directional OTDR testing, bare fiber adapters may be utilized. AS BUILT DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall redline drawings during the course of construction to show the actual alignment, depth, and other variances to the construction drawings on a daily basis. The drawings will be available for review by the City’s representative when requested on the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 10 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling – 27 13 23 job site. Additionally, all redline drawings will be submitted to the City Project Manager on a weekly basis including all actual construction to-date. B. A set of contract drawings shall be set aside for the sole purpose of redline “as built drawings”. These drawings shall be maintained as outlined above. At the conclusion of the Contract, this set of drawings shall be turned over to the City Project Manager. C. All red line fiber drawings must also reflect any and all changes to the fiber cable plant interconnectivity. These notes should be reflected on the existing contract fiber interconnectivity drawings. D. Red line drawings shall be protected from the elements, as they will become part of Project records. Red line drawings shall be marked to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the work as originally shown using the following method: 1.All annotations will be made legibly with erasable red pencil. 2.Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. 3.When changing text or dimensions, line through the old information and enter the new. 4.Use the same units of measure and the same precision as existing dimensions. 5.Dimensions will be referenced to the leased tract line. 6.When changing figures or details, annotate in the same drawing style as existing figures, and use a straight edge when creating lines and dimension leaders. 7.Provide any new information deemed important to the customer, but not shown on construction or shop drawings. 8.Note related change order numbers where applicable. 9.Show station numbers, offset and depth at all landmarks and 50 foot intervals. END OF SECTION Division 31 Earthwork February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts – 31 63 29 SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS P ART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.Machine drilled shaft. 2.Placing shaft casing. 3.Shear rings. 4.Belled base. 5.Concrete fill. 6. Reinforcement. B. Related Sections: 1.Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Requirements for concrete reinforcement. 2.Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete and placement of pier caps and grade beams. 3. Section 022020 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities: Excavating to working level. 1.2 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Designed Piers: 1.Design Pier Quantity: Determined by number of piers indicated in Contract Documents. 2.Design Pier Length: By the linear foot measured from bearing to top of pier as indicated on Contract Drawings. 3.Test Piers: Quantity and length as indicated on Contract Drawings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1.ACI 336.1 - Reference Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers. B. ADSC - The International Association of Foundation Drilling: 1.ADSC TL-4 - Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and Design Methods. C. ASTM International: 1.ASTM A252 - Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles. 2.ASTM D1143 - Standard Test Method for Piles Under Static Axial Compressive Load. 3.ASTM D4380 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bentonitic Slurries. 4.ASTM D4381 - Standard Test Method for Sand Content by Volume of Bentonitic Slurries. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Document Management: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1.Show detailed description of installation procedures and cleaning methods, and equipment and materials intended to be employed to construct drilled piers including details of drilling method; calculations showing adequacy of casings to support anticipated hydrostatic and soil pressures; personnel protection; fabrication, construction, transportation, and erection of reinforcement; concrete placement; and disposal of excavated materials. 2.Provide details of slurry including proposed details of mixing, circulating, de- sanding, and testing methods. Include intended sequence of pier installation. 3.Provide details for reinforcing steel as specified in Section 03 20 00. C. Welding procedures and qualifications of welders as specified in AWS D1.1 for casing steel and AWS D1.4 for reinforcing steel. D. Certified mill test reports for reinforcing steel. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts – 31 63 29 E. Concrete mix design as specified in Section 03 30 00. F. Existing Structure Survey: Submit survey documents including written description and photographs to document existing conditions. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Submit record documents. Record actual locations of piers, pier diameter, and pier depth. C. Accurately record the following: 1. Pier number, sizes, lengths, and locations of piers and footing groups. 2. Length, diameter and wall thickness of temporary or permanent casing. 3. Sequence of placement. 4. Date and time of start and completion of pier. 5. Depth augered or drilled through overburden and description of bearing stratum. 6. Final base and top elevations. 7. Elevation of adjacent grade. 8. Concreting data, including mix used, slump, air content, placement method, theoretical volume, and actual volume poured. 9. Deviation from indicated locations, plumbness, depth, elevations, and diameter. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ADSC TL-4 and ACI 336.1. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene a minimum of one week prior to commencing Work of this Section and notify Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to scheduled date and time of meeting. C. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section. D. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work. E. A test pier excavation and installation shall be performed at the site to verify the contractor’s construction methods and to identify any potential groundwater infiltration and soil sloughing problems. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should be present to witness the installation of all the drilled piers, including the test pier excavation and installation. Location of test pier to be determined by structural engineer at time of test. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Mix, store, and transport controlled slurry materials using equipment made for this purpose. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS A. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03 30 00. B. Reinforcement: Specified in Section 03 20 00. C. Equipment: Appropriate to dewater excavated shaft. D. Controlled Slurry: 1. Use controlled bentonite or polymer slurry only at locations specified or indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Bentonite and Polymer Materials: Suitable for intended purpose according to manufacturer. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts – 31 63 29 3. Controlled Slurry Properties: Properties Results at 68 deg F Test Methods Density, before concreting, for slurry 1 ft (300 mm) from pier bottom 64 pcf max. for polymer slurry API 13B,Section 1 (Mud Balance) 85 pcf max for bentonite slurry ASTM D4380 Marsh funnel viscosity, for entry slurry and pier slurry 26-50 sec/qt API 13B,Section 2 (Marsh Funnel and Cup) Sand content by volume, before concreting for slurry 1 ft (300 mm)from pier bottom 1% max for polymer slurry API 13B,Section 4 (Sand Screen Set) 25% max for bentonite slurry ASTM D4381 pH, during excavation 8-12 API 13B,Section 6 (Paper test strips or glass- electrode pH meter) 4. Provide physical or chemical treatment of water or slurry necessary to meet specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify site conditions are ready for Work of this section. C. Verify that field measurements and survey benchmarks are as indicated on Contract Drawings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Use placement method that will not cause damage to nearby structures. B. Document existing conditions for existing structures susceptible to damage: 1. Before pier installation, inspect existing structure thoroughly and notify Owner and Engineer in writing of visible defects and factors capable of prohibiting safe installation of drilled piers. 2. Compile list of existing visible defects to building structure, finishes, and accessories. This list will form basis for determining any required repair Work after pier installation. 3. Use caution during drilled pier installation and provide sufficient safe guards to prevent damage to existing adjacent building structures, finishes and accessories. C. Notify adjacent and affected building occupants with 5 days’ notice before proceeding with the Work. D. Notify utility companies to mark location of existing underground services. Do not begin work of this section until existing underground services are marked. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all possible conflicts that subsurface construction on this project. F. Contractor shall thoroughly probe and/or perform hydro excavation along project route to locate and identify all underground utilities/conflicts prior to beginning pier installation. Any and all conflicts found shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer. G. Expose adjacent utilities to verify exact location and depth prior to commencing work. H. Protect underground utilities and structures near the Work from damage. I. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage to existing underground utilities. J. Provide survey benchmarks and control points before beginning construction of piers. K. Prepare to place piers from existing site elevations. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts – 31 63 29 3.3 EQUIPMENT A. Drilling Equipment: Capable of installing piers using slurry stabilization method, drilled casing method or driven casing method. B. Combustion Engine Exhaust: 1. Direct engine exhaust fumes away from occupied areas adjacent to work area. 2. Confined Work Areas: Direct engine exhaust fumes to atmosphere with closed, sealed exhaust system. C. Tremie and Pump Pipes: Suitable for placement of concrete into piers with minimum inside diameter six times greater than maximum concrete aggregate size. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Construct piers in accordance with ACI 336.1 with ADSC commentary, as modified herein. B. Drill vertical pier shafts and belled bases to diameters and depths indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Place steel casings, if required, during drilling operations to withstand compressive, displacement, withdrawal stresses, and to maintain shaft walls. Set firmly in place. Use shaft casing when free water is encountered. Shaft casing shall be installed to a depth that penetrates a minimum of three feet into the nearest clay layer below the bottom design elevation to minimize free water entry into drilled excavation. If no clay layer is present or clay layer is deeper than 1.5 times the pier design depth, alternate installation methods may be required for proper pier installation. D. Clean shaft and bottom of loose material. Maintain shafts free of water. E. Allow inspection of shaft and casing by Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of reinforcement and concrete. F. Concrete shall be placed as soon as practical following drilling operations. No pier shall be drilled which cannot be filled with concrete by end of the workday or as designated by the Geotechnical Engineer. G. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03 20 00. H. Place concrete in single pour, in accordance with Section 03 30 00 with equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. I. Progressively raise shaft casing during concrete placement. J. Extend reinforcement or provide dowels for connection of caps and/or grade beams as indicated on the Contract Drawings. K. Set tops of piers to elevations indicated. 3.5 DRILLING TOLERANCES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements Tolerances. B. Tolerances for deviations from design position, orientation and elevation: 1. Maximum Deviation from Position at Top of Shaft: 1 inch. 2. Maximum Deviation of Drilled Piers and of Above Ground Concrete Pier Extensions from Plumb: 1 in 48. 3. Maximum Deviation of Pier Shaft Radius at Bottom of Shaft: Minus 0 inches. 4. Maximum Deviation of Pier Cut-Off Elevations: Plus 1 inch and minus 2 inches. C. Furnish corrective design and construction required to accommodate deviations exceeding specified tolerances, including replacement of piers, when necessary. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Section inspection services. B. Concrete testing shall be performed under provisions of Section 03 30 00. C. Request inspection of foundations, by Geotechnical Engineer, in accordance with applicable codes. D. Engage licensed surveyor to perform survey work specified in this section, including survey of design and actual pier locations, elevations, and plumbness. E. Monitor benchmarks and survey control points for displacement during construction. Correct or replace displaced survey controls. Verify previous measurements relying on displaced controls. F. Submit survey information as the Work progresses, to expedite construction operations. G. Perform load tests to requirements of ASTM D1143 if required. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts – 31 63 29 H. Test Piers: Same diameter, depth and type as specified for other piers placed in same manner. I. Accepted test piers may not be used in the Work. J. Contractor Supervision: Provide supervision of each phase of drilled pier construction. Check each drilled pier or shaft for required depth, clean-up, workmanship, and for tolerance requirements before concrete is placed. K. Observation: Geotechnical Engineer shall observe drilling and concreting of each pier. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48 hours’ notice prior to commencing work. L. Unacceptable Piers: Piers that fail, are placed out of position, exceed allowable tolerances, have defect inclusions, are below or above elevations or are damaged. M. Provide additional piers or replace piers failing to conform to specified requirements with no cost to Owner. 3.7 MONITORING AND INSPECTION A. Assist Geotechnical Engineer in monitoring and observing the Work including: 1. Verification of specified tolerances. 2. Verification of conformance to specified procedures for the Work. B. Analyze monitoring results and submit to Architect/Engineer within the next day. Develop reports to present information tabularly and graphically. C. Support materials at side and bottom of pier at during construction. Fill spaces between casing and sides of hole, or other areas where loss of material occurs, with grout or other stable material, to prevent movement of surrounding soil. D. When ground loss occurs in hole during drilling, immediately notify Engineer and take steps necessary to minimize further loss of material. E. When undue settlement is evidenced at any time, immediately notify Engineer. END OF SECTION Division 33 Utilities February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 SECTION 33 11 16 WATERLINES GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water lines. B. Specifications identify requirements for both small diameter water lines and large diameter water lines. When specifications for large diameter water lines differ from those for small diameter water lines, large diameter specifications will govern for large diameter pipe. REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.11/AWWA C111- Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile - Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. B. ANSI/NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System -Health Components. C. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings E. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. F. ASTM B 21 - Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes. G. ASTM B 98 - Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. H. ASTM B 301 - Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Copper Rod and Bar. I. ASTM B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for General Application. J. ASTM E 165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination K. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination L. ASTM F 1674 - Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe. M. AWWA C 206 - Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. N. AWWA C 207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 Inches through 144 Inches. SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of General Requirement – 01 33 00 Document Management. B. Conform to submittal requirements of applicable Section for type of pipe used. C. Submit Texas One-Call notification transmittal number prior to beginning excavation. D. Submit, a minimum of 15 days before beginning pipe laying operations, layout drawing identifying proposed sections for disinfecting, hydrostatic testing and site restoration for entire project for review and approval. Layout drawing to identify sequence for: E. Disinfection: F. Disinfection and transfer of services; to immediately follow sequence of hydrostatic testing. G. Site restoration; not to exceed limits specified; Sequence in order of disturbance. PRODUCTS PIPE MATERIALS A. Pipe shall be product of one manufacturer that has not less than five (5) years of successful and verifiable experience manufacturing pipe of the particular type and size indicated with proposed type joint. The Engineer reserves the right to request third party verification of this experience. Pipe manufacturer must have a certified quality assurance program. Certified program shall be ISO 9001: 2008 or other equivalent nationally recognized program as approved by Engineer. B. Where Carnegie joints are used in thrust restraint areas, weld bell and spigot ring onto steel cylinder, inside and outside. C. When adjoining proposed large diameter water line to existing large diameter water line of different pipe material and/or coating, provide a flanged connection. D. Provide electrical isolation when adjoining to pipe with different material or coating. Coating on the welded restrained portions of the piping shall be identical to the coating on February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 the adjoining pipe sections. E. Provide bends and fittings as required to comply with invert elevations shown in profile view of Drawings. Call outs for bends and fittings are not identified on Drawings in profile view. F. Install pipe materials that conform to following: 1. Technical Specification Section 33 11 16.13 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. Standard Specification Section 02 62 10 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. 3. Technical Specification Section 40 23 10.00 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 4. Technical Specification Section 33 11 16.23 – Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe. G. Conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NSF) Standard 61 and have certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. H. Type of pipe materials used is Contractor's option unless specifically identified on Drawings. I. Provide minimum of 3/8 inch inside joint recess between ends of pipe in straight pipe sections. WELDED JOINT PROTECTION FITTING FOR SMALL DIAMETER STEEL PIPE A. Cylindrical Corrosion Barrier: Provide approved cylindrical corrosion barrier. B. O-rings: Conform to National Sanitary Foundation requirements. RESTRAINED JOINTS A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: See Technical Specification Section 33 11 16.13 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. B. Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe and Steel Pipe: Welded joints 1. Where Carnegie joints are used in thrust restraint areas, weld bell and spigot ring onto steel cylinder, inside and outside. C. Restrained Joints where required on DIP and PVC pipe: 1. Restraint devices: Manufacture of high strength ductile iron, ASTM A 536 up to 24 inches, and ASTM A 36 for sizes greater than 30 inches. Working pressure rating twice that of design test pressure. 2. Bolts and connecting hardware: High strength low alloy material in accordance with ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. COUPLINGS AND APPURTENANCES FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATERLINE A. Flexible (Dresser-type) Couplings. 1. Install where shown on Drawings or where allowed by the Engineer for Contractor's convenience. Use galvanized flexible couplings when installed on galvanized pipe which is cement lined, or when underground. Provide gaskets manufactured from Neoprene or Buna-N. 2. For steel pipe; provide approved sleeve-type flexible couplings. Thickness of middle ring equal to or greater than thickness of pipe wall. 3. Provide approved flanged adapter couplings for steel pipe 4. Use Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers where flexible couplings are installed underground. Coat entire coupling with 20-mil of approved coal tar coating. B. Access Manways. 1. Provide access manways where shown on the drawings, at air valve locations, and as required for interior welding. 2. Access manways to be shop fabricated, 24-inch diameter, flanged outlets with blind flange covers. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, fabricate covers from steel plate with thickness as required. Fabricate two handles of ½-inch diameter steel rod. Field modifications to be made only by the manufacturer’s representative. 3. Within restrained joint sections, provide access manways a maximum of 250-feet apart. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipe used. B. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. C. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings. D. Confirm that nine feet minimum separation from gravity sanitary sewers and manholes or separation of four feet minimum from force mains as specified in this Section in all directions unless special design is provided on Drawings. E. Where above clearances cannot be attained, and special design has not been provided on Drawings, obtain direction from the Engineer before proceeding with construction. F. Inform the Engineer if unmetered sprinkler or fire line connections exist which are not shown on Drawings. Make transfer only after approval by the Engineer. G. For projects involving multiple subdivisions or locations, limit water line installation to maximum of two project site locations. Maximizing 2 pipe installation crews shall be permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. H. City of Corpus Christi Utilities Department will handle, at no cost to Contractor, operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections and for chlorination. Contractor is responsible for handling necessary installations and removal of chlorination and testing taps and risers. I. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outlined in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them "mandatory practices" for this Project. J. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. K. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and, therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. L. Do not remove plugs or clamps during months of peak water demands; June, July and August, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. HANDLING, CLEANING AND INSPECTION A. Handling: 1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. 2. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe, lining and coating. Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Provide pipe and fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. 3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable, canvas, leather, nylon or similar material. 4. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, leather, nylon, or similar material. Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. 5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe, protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers. Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material. Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris, tools, clothing, or other materials on pipe. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. 7. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe and PCCP, permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches, measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe, except: a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. 8. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. B. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation, and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed. Do not place debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. C. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective, damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. EARTHWORK A. Conform to applicable provisions of City Standard Specification Section 022020 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Bedding: Use bedding materials in conformance with the Drawings and City Standard Specification Section 022020 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. Backfill: Use backfill materials in conformance with Drawings and City Standard Specification 022020 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Backfill excavated areas in same day excavated. When not possible, cover excavated areas using steel plates on paved areas and other protective measures elsewhere. D. Place material in uniform layers of prescribed maximum loose thickness and wet or dry material to approximately optimum moisture content. Compact to prescribed density; Water tamping is not allowed. E. Pipe Embedment: Including 6-inch pipe bedding and backfill to 12 inches above top of pipe. PIPE CUTTING A. Cut pipe 12 inches and smaller with standard wheel pipe cutters. Cut pipe larger than 12 inches in manner approved by the Engineer. Make cuts smooth and at right angles to axis of pipe. Bevel plain end with heavy file or grinder to remove sharp edges. PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: 1. Lay pipe in subgrade free of water. 2. Make adjustments of pipe to line and grade by scraping away subgrade or filling in with granular material. 3. Properly form bedding to fully support bell without wedging or blocking up bell. 4. Open Cut Construction: Keep pipe trenches free of water which might impair pipe laying operations. Grade pipe to provide uniform support along bottom of pipe. Excavate for bell holes after bottom has been graded and in advance of placing pipe. Lay not more than nominal city block length of not more than 300 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. Cover or backfill laid pipe if pipe laying operations are interrupted and during non-working hours. Place backfill carefully and simultaneously on each side of pipe to avoid lateral displacement of pipe and damage to joints. If adjustment of pipe is required after it has been laid, remove and re-lay as new pipe. B. Install pipe continuously and uninterrupted along each street on which work is to be performed. Obtain approval of the Engineer prior to skipping any portion of Work. C. Protection of Pipeline: Securely place stoppers or bulkheads in openings and in end of line when construction is stopped temporarily and at end of each day's work. D. Perform Critical Location as shown on Drawings. Refer to City Standard Specification Section 022020 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for additional requirements at critical locations. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 E. Laying Large Diameter Water Line 1. Lay not more than 50 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. 2. Dig trench proper width as shown. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding, as determined by the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. 3. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment; employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as-built" horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. 4. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. 5. Before assembling couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with cup grease or liquid vegetable soap to facilitate installation. 6. Prior to proceeding with critical tie-ins submit sequence of work based on findings from "critical location" effort. F. For tie-ins to existing water lines, provide necessary material on hand to facilitate connection prior to shutting down existing water line. Provide City a minimum of two weeks’ notice prior to shutting down existing water line. JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for Concrete Cylinder Pipe, PVC, Steel, and DIP: 1. After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe, equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. 2. Lubricate gaskets with nontoxic water-soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. 3. Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. 4. After pipe sections are joined, check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. 5. Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust, use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. a. Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. b. Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. 6. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by the Engineer. B. Flanged Joints where required on Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe, or Steel Pipe: 1. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges, pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line. Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. 2. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide 1/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. 3. Use galvanized or black nuts and bolts to match flange material. Use cadmium- plated steel nuts and bolts underground. Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges. Tighten bolts alternately (180° apart) until all are evenly tight. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. Provide Densco petroleum based tape or approved equal for all exposed portions of nuts, bolts and pipe. 4. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. 5. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and smaller, provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. C. Welded Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe and Steel Pipe): 1. Prior to starting work, provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. 2. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide eighteen (18) inches working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. 3. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 30-inch and larger pipe. 4. Bell-and-spigot, lap-welded slip joints: Deflection may be taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 ½ inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 5 degrees. 5. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints, align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose; however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. 6. Protect coal-tar-epoxy lining during welding by draping an 18-inch-wide strip of heat resistant material over top half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. 7. Welding rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-70XX. 8. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. 9. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass. Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt, slag or flux. 10. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. 11. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. 12. Remove dirt, scale, and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings, or valves. 13. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: a. Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior or exterior welds for 36-inch and larger pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. b. Provide full circumferential welds on joints required to be welded. c. Only one end may be miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 2 ½ degrees. d. For large diameter water lines, the City will employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. The testing laboratory will furnish copies of test reports to Engineer for review. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. (1) Weld acceptance criteria: (a) Conduct in accordance with ASTM E165- Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination and ASTM E709 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. Use X-ray methods for butt welds, for 100 percent of joint welds. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 (b) Examine welded surfaces for the following defects: (i) Cracking. (ii) Lack of fusion/penetration. (iii) Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t) equals material thickness. (iv) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width. (v) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width. (vi) Four or more relevant 1/16-inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge. 14. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking, shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. 15. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds, so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated. Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after re-certification. 16. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24-inch diameter and smaller, unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. a. In addition to welding requirements contained here in Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation recommendations. b. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. c. All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. d. Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C 210 or AWWA C 213. e. All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. D. Harnessed Joints (Concrete Cylinder Pipe): 1. Use of snap-ring type restrained joints on pipe is limited to 20-inch through 48-inch diameters. 2. Position snap-ring joint bolt on top (12 o'clock portion). Provide minimum 2-inch joint recess. Use joint "diapers" minimum of 12 inches wide. 3. For field adjustments with deflections beyond manufacturer's recommendations: 4. Field trim spigot. 5. Do not engage ring. 6. Harnessed joints are not permitted in areas defined on Drawings as potentially petroleum contaminated material, in tunnels, or at bend greater than 5 degrees. 7. Install harness type joints including snap rings at straight sections of pipe. E. Joints 1. Restrained joints within 2 feet of a casing or fixed point shall be restrained by clamps, bolts retaining rings, bolt harness assemblies, or other means acceptable to the ENGINEER. Design of harness bolts, if used, shall be based on a maximum stress of 40,000 psi over the tensile stress area of the bolt. A rolled type harness shall not be permitted. Welding joint rings at locations where the pipe enters or exits a casing or other fixed points will not be acceptable. All restrained joints at other locations shall be welded as described above. 2. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 joints with concrete thrust blocks. 3. Thrust restraint lengths shown on drawings and/or in the Technical Specifications are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated. Adjustments in deflections may result in reduction or increase of required thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas for review by Engineer. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City. 4. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. 5. For 16-inch lines and larger use minimum 16-foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. 6. Installation. a. Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Examine and clean mechanism; remove dirt, debris and other foreign material. c. Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA food grade approved lubricant. d. Verify gasket is evenly seated. e. Do not over stab pipe into mechanism. 7. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. F. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to City Standard Specification Section 030020 - Portland Cement Concrete for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. G. Joint Grout (Concrete Cylinder Pipe, Steel Pipe): 1. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 2 cubic yard is required. When less than 2 cubic yard is required, grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes after mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. 2. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. 3. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. 4. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. 5. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at least 1 hour before compacting backfill. 6. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess. Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. 7. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 Inches and Smaller: Circumferentially butter bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot, strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Engineer for 20-inch pipe and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 smaller. 8. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing, by other approved coatings, or by pointing with grout. Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metallizing or other approved protective coatings. 9. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. 10. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. 11. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer, such as Flex Protex or equal, to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner after joint closure. 12. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 Inches and Larger: Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces, fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from the Engineer of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. 13. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line, must be completed before mortar is applied to interior joints. H. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick, use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling. Perform tests at no additional cost to City. I. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. 1. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. 3. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. 4. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required. 5. Assessment of deflection may be measured by Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. 6. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. J. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel, Concrete Cylinder Pipe and Fittings: 1. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. 2. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with non-shrink grout. 3. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. 4. For large diameter water lines, provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. CATHODIC PROTECTION APPURTENANCES A. Where identified on Drawings, modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits including test stations at February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 10 Waterlines – 33 11 16 connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line, or as shown on Drawings. B. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint. Repair coatings as specified by appropriate AWWA standard, as recommended by manufacturer, and as approved by the Engineer. C. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. SECURING, SUPPORTING AND ANCHORING A. Support piping as shown on Drawings and as specified in this Section, to maintain line and grade and prevent transfer of stress to adjacent structures. B. Where shown on Drawings, anchor pipe fittings and bends installed on water line by welding consecutive joints of pipe together to distance each side of fitting. Restrained length, as shown on Drawings, assumes that installation of pipe and subsequent hydrostatic testing begin upstream and proceed downstream, with respect to normal flow of water in pipe. If installation and testing differs from this assumption, submit for approval revised method of restraining pipe joints upstream and downstream of device used to test against (block valve, blind flange or dished head plug). C. Use adequate temporary blocking of fittings when making connections to distribution system and during hydrostatic tests. Use sufficient anchorage and blocking to resist stresses and forces encountered while tapping existing water line. POLYETHYLENE WRAP FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Double wrap pipe and appurtenances (except fire hydrants and fusion bond or polyurethane coated fittings) with 8-mil polyethylene film. B. Do not use polyethylene wrap if pipe is cathodically protected. CLEANUP AND RESTORATION A. Provide cleanup and restoration crews to work closely behind pipe laying crews, and where necessary, during disinfection and hydrostatic testing, service transfers, abandonment of old water lines, backfill and surface restoration. B. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, comply with the following; 1. Water line is installed to limits approved in layout submitted, immediately begin preparatory work for disinfection effort. 2. No later than three days after completing disinfection preparatory work, submit to City appropriate request for disinfection. 3. Immediately after transfer of services, begin site restoration. CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS A. Remove construction debris or foreign material and thoroughly broom clean and flush piping systems. Provide temporary connections, equipment and labor for cleaning. City must inspect water line for cleanliness prior to filling. DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Technical Specification Section 33 13 00 - Disinfection of Water Lines. FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTS A. Conform to requirements of Technical Specification Section 40 05 00.40 – Piping – General Requirements (Hydrostatic Testing). END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – 33 11 16.13 SECTION 33 11 16.13 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS – PLANT PIPING BELOWGROUND PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water lines. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C 104) - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings, for Water. B. ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C 110) - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-in. through 48-in. C. ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C 111) - Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. D. ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C 115) - Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. E. ANSI A 21.16 (AWWA C 116) - Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey iron Fittings for Water Supply Service. F. ANSI A 21.50 ( AWWA C 150) - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. G. ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C 151) - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water and Other Liquids. H. ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C 153) - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inches through 24 inches and 54 inches through 64 inches for Water Service. I. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. J. ASTM D 1248 - Standard Specification Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. K. ASTM F 477 - Elastomeric Seals (gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. L. ASTM G 62 - Standard Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings. M. AWWA C 105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. N. AWWA C 300 - Standard for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type, for Water and other Liquids. O. AWWA C 600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. P. SSPC-SP 6 - Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Q. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA) Manual for Railway Engineering. R. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of General Requirement 01 33 00 – Document Management B. For pipes 16 inches and greater submit shop drawings signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing the following: 1. Manufacturer’s pipe design calculations. 2. Provide lay schedule of pictorial nature indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fitting, flange, and special details, with plan and profile view of each pipe segment sketched, detailing pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, restrained joints, and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and fittings prior to review and approval by the Engineer. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD-ROM in Adobe portable document format (*.PDF). 3. Calculations and limits of thrust restraint. 4. Class and length of joint. C. Submit manufacturer's certifications that ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.51. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – 33 11 16.13 D. Submit certifications that pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A 21.11. E. Submit affidavit of compliance in accordance with ANSI A21.16 for fittings with fusion bonded epoxy coatings or linings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe Barrels: Shall conform to AWWA C115, C150 and C151 and bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval; minimum pressure Class 250 for water lines, or as shown on Drawings. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths, not less than 18 feet long, except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on shop drawings. C. For use of pressure class pipe for water lines, design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external loads and internal pressures. Base design on minimum of AASHTO HS-20 loading, AREMA E-80 loads and depths of bury as indicated on Drawings. Design pipes with Marston's earth loads for a transition width trench for zero to 16 feet of cover. Use Marston's earth loads for a trench width of O.D. (of pipe) + 4 feet for pipe greater than 16 feet of cover. Use Marston's equations for a trench condition in both open- cut and tunnel applications. Design for most critical groundwater level condition. Pipe design conditions: 1. W orking pressure = 100 psig; or greater if indicated on Drawings 2. Factory test pressure = 150 psig (for factory test sections) 3. Maximum pressure due to surge = 150 psi. 4. Minimum Pressure due to surge = -5 psi. 5. Design tensile stress due to surge or hydrostatic test pressure: No greater than 50% minimum yield. 6. Design bending stress due to combined earth loads and surge or hydrostatic test pressure: No greater than 48,000 psi. 7. Unit weight of fill ≥ 120 pcf. 8. Deflection lag factor (D l ) = 1.2. 9. Bedding constant (K) = 0.1. 10. Moment coefficient = 0.16. 11. Fully saturated soil conditions hw = h = depth of cover above top of pipe. D. Hydrostatic Test of Pipe: AWWA C 151, Section 5.2.1, at point of manufacture. Hold test for a minimum 2 minutes for thorough inspection of pipe. Repair or reject pipe revealing leaks or cracks. E. Pipe Manufacturer for large diameter water lines: Minimum of 5 years of successful pipe installations in continuous service. Manufacturer must maintain on site or in plant enough fittings to satisfy the following requirements: Line Diameter Required Bends* 20 and 24 inches Four 45° (degree) bends per 5,000 LF of water line > 24 inches Four 22.5° (degree) bends per 10,000 LF of water line *Based on total length of contract (minimum of four). Any combination of bends may be substituted at manufacturer’s option (i.e. two 22.5° bends are equivalent to one 45° bend) and will be counted as one fitting. F. Manufacturer or supplier must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 12 hours of notification. Use fittings at direction of the Engineer where unforeseen obstacles are encountered during construction. These fittings are in addition to any fittings called out in construction documents and must be available at all times. G. Provide flange adapter with insulating kit as required when connecting new piping to existing piping and piping of different materials, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. H. Clearly mark pipe section to show location and thickness/pressure class color coded. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – 33 11 16.13 2.2 JOINTS A. Joint Types: ANSI A 21.11 push-on; ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint; or ANSI A 21.16 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or required by these specifications. For bolted joints, conform to requirements of AWWA C111; provide minimum 304 stainless steel for restraint joints. B. Where required by Drawings, provide approved restrained joints for buried service. C. Threaded or grooved-type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide restrained joints for test pressure or maximum surge pressure as specified, whichever is greater for water lines. Do not use passive resistance of soil in determining minimum restraint lengths. Provide restrained joints between stations identified in Article 3.3 RESTRAINED PIPE REQUIREMENTS. E. Electrical Bond Wires: Use stranded, copper cable furnished with high molecular weight polyethylene insulation (HMWPE). Use wire gauge (AWG) as shown on drawings. F. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer for pipe joints or restrained joints. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by the Engineer. When other methods are deemed satisfactory, install at no additional cost to City. 2.3 GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber (SBR) gasket material in accordance with ANSI A21.11 or ASTM F 477 (One Bolt only); for flanged joints 1/8-inch-thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A 21.15. B. For pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, see General Requirement 01 57 00 – Temporary Controls. Notify Engineer prior to installation. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they connect to. B. Push-on Fittings: ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) standard or ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153); ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets and lubricants; for all sizes and pressure rated at 250 psig. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI 21.10; ductile iron ANSI A 21.11 joints, gaskets, and lubricants; pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A 21.11; pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Lines: Shall conform to AWWA C153 and shall be: 1. Fusion bonded epoxy lined or 2. Cement mortar lined 2.5 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water line Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat; ANSI A 21.16 fusion bonded epoxy coating for interior; comply with NSF 61. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Technical Specification Section 33 11 16 - Water Lines, except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C 600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in double polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. D. Holiday Testing. 1. Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Conform to requirements for new fittings in ANSI A 21.16. E. Provide electrical continuity bonding across buried mechanical and push-on joint assemblies, except where insulating flanges are required by drawings. 1. Provide minimum number of bond wires shown on drawings. Remove one inch of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings – 33 11 16.13 HMWPE insulation from each end of bond wire prior to attaching. 2. Secure wire onto pipe using approved Termite Welding procedures. 3. Coat bare metal and weld metal after weld is secure. Use coal-tar compound or other compatible coating. For polyurethane coated pipe, use compatible polyurethane coating. 4. Visually inspect Thermite Weld connections for electrical continuity, strength and suitable coating prior to backfilling or placing pipe in augered hole or casing. 3.2 FIELD REPAIR OF COATINGS A. Fusion Bonded Epoxy: Conform to requirements for new fittings in ANSI A 21.16. 3.3 RESTRAINED PIPE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide restrained mechanical joints 75’ upstream and downstream of all pipe bends or fittings. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe – 33 11 16.23 SECTION 33 11 16.23 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE EMBEDDED CYLINDER PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing and installing new prestressed concrete embedded steel cylinder pipe and fittings for buried large diameter water lines. 1.2 REFERENCES The AWWA standard for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type (AWWA C301, latest revision) is made a part of these specifications. Documents referenced in AWWA C301, Section 1.3 form a part of AWWA C301 to the extent specified therein. Other standards applicable to the work specified herein are, but not limited to, the following: A. AWWA C301 – Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type B. AWWA C304 – Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe C. AWWA C651 – Disinfection of Watermains D. AWWA Manual M9 – Concrete Pressure Pipe E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of General Requirement 01 33 00 – Document Management. B. Submit shop drawings and certification signed and sealed by Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas showing following: 1. Manufacturer’s pipe design calculations. 2. Provide lay schedule of pictorial nature indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details, with plan view of each pipe segment sketched, detailing pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, welded joints, and other critical features. Indicate station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Do not start production of pipe and fittings prior to review and approval by the Engineer. Provide final approved lay schedule on CD Rom in Adobe portable document format (*PDF). 3. Include hot tapping procedure. 4. Submit certification from manufacturer that design was performed for project in accordance with requirements of this section. C. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and assurance for materials and welding. Submit standard repair procedures that describe in detail shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, etc. D. Submit following within 45 days after manufacturing of pipe and fittings. 1. Steel: a. Steel reports as required in AWWA C 301. b. Results of other tests of steel reinforcement required in AWWA C 301. 2. Test Results. a. Hydrostatic testing, acid etching, magnetic particle and x-ray weld test reports as required. b. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day) test results for each type of coating and lining mix design. E. Submit certification for welder and welding operator demonstrating their certification within past 6 months in accordance with AWWA C 206. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to perform. F. Calibrate within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by the Engineer. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe – 33 11 16.23 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finished pipe shall be the product of one (1) manufacturer which has had not less than 10 years successful experience manufacturing pipe of the types and sizes indicated. B. The manufacturer will be required to furnish mill test certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, steel plate, and cement. The manufacturer shall perform the tests described in AWWA C301, for all pipe, fittings and specials. 1.5 INSPECTION A. The Engineer and/or Owner’s representative may witness manufacture and fabrication of pipe and appurtenances. Independent testing laboratory under contract to the Engineer or Owner may perform tests at direction of the Engineer to verify compliance with these specifications. Provide assistance to accomplish such testing, including equipment and personnel, at no additional cost to City. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE A. Furnish pipe by same manufacturer. B. Provide prestressed concrete embedded cylinder pipe in conformance with AWWA C 304 and C301 and AWWA M 9. The manufacturing facility shall be certified under the American Concrete pressure Pipe Association audit and certification program. C. Use of pipe from inventory is permitted only if specifications and certifications are met. Provide testing records for such pipe. D. Do not use prestressed concrete cylinder pipe in aerial crossings, exposed or other unburied areas. E. Pipe Manufacturer. 1. Must have minimum of 5 years of manufacturer’s pipe installations that have been in successful and continuous service. 2. Must maintain on site or in plant minimum of four 22.5° bends per 10,000 linear feet of water line. Any combination of bends may be substituted at manufacturer's option (i.e. two 11.25° bends are equivalent to one 22.5° bend and will be counted as one fitting). Must be capable of delivering bends to job site within 12 hours of notification. These fittings are in addition to any fittings called out on Drawing and must be available at all times. F. Pipe Design Conditions: Pipe shall be designed in accordance with the AWWA C304 Design Standard, using the following design conditions; these conditions shall also be used in designing fittings and specials: External Loading: 1. The earth load shall be taken as the greater of the following: a. Depth from existing ground level to top of pipe as shown on plans, or 2. The external load shall be determined by Marston’s formula for positive projecting conduits provided the trench width equals or exceeds the transition width. If the trench width is less than the transition width Marston’s formula for trench conditions shall be used. The following soil characteristics shall be used: a. Soil weight = 120 pounds per cubic foot (1920 kg/m³) b. Ku’ = 0.130 3. Live loads shall be calculated as: a. Pipe in streets AASHTO HS-20 b. Pipe within railroad right-of-way Cooper E-80 c. Both HS-20 and E-80 load shall be completed in accordance with the American Concrete Pipe Association “Concrete Pipe Design Manual” and “Concrete Pipe Handbook”. 4. Working pressure: 100 psig; or greater if indicated on Drawings. 5. Factory test pressure: 150 psig (for factory test sections) 6. Maximum pressure due to surge: 150 psi. 7. Minimum pressure due to surge: -5 psi. 8. Unit weight of soil: 120 pcf minimum, unless otherwise specified. 9. Transient pressure (Pt) shall be 40% of the working pressure or 40 psi, whichever is February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe – 33 11 16.23 greater. 10. Minimum trench width: As shown on the drawings or indicated in City Standard Specification 022020 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers. G. The date of manufacture or a serial number traceable to the date of manufacture and the mark or trademark of the manufacturer shall be clearly marked by stencil with waterproof paint at the bell end of the pipe barrel. Unsatisfactory or damaged pipe will be either permanently rejected or returned for minor repairs. Pits, blisters, rough spots, minor breakage and other imperfections may be repaired, subject to the approval of the engineer, after demonstration by the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. Repairs shall be carefully inspected before final approval. Cement mortar used for repairs shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa) at the end of 7 days and 4,500 psi (31 MPa) at the end of 28 days, when tested in cylinders stored in the standard manner. Major breakage or spalling from interior of pipe shall be reason for the rejection of pipe. H. Cement shall be Type I or Type II and shall be in accordance with ASTM C150. I. The pipe core shall be manufactured by the centrifugal or vertically cast process. J. Mortar coatings shall consist of one part cement to a maximum of 3 parts fine aggregate, by weight. Rebound, not to exceed one-fourth of the total mix weight, may be used provided the rebound is treated as fine aggregate. K. Bell and spigot joint rings shall be steel, self-centering type and otherwise as specified in AWWA C301. L. The rubber gaskets shall be in accordance with AWWA C301. M. Wall fittings shall be supplied with adequate bracing to keep them round and true during transportation and construction. N. Restrained joints, installed as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the engineer, shall be the clamp type; Snap Ring or welded joint type as shown in AWWA Manual M9. O. Radii for curved sections as specified on the drawings may be produced by joint deflection as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Deflections required which are in excess of those recommendations shall be produced by beveling the end of the pipe. P. Bends shall be fabricated to the deflection angle required. 2.2 LIMIT-STATES DESIGN CRITERIA A. The method adopted for the allowable combination of internal pressures and external loads is based on satisfying certain limit-states design criteria. This procedure is similar to design methods used for other types of concrete structures. The limit-states design criteria assures reliable performance of pipe (subjected to design factored loads) and also provides assurance that the state of specified prestress and safety margins will be maintained throughout the life of the pipe. 2.3 CALCULATION OF STRESSES AND STRAINS A. Stresses and strains in the pipe wall are calculated from moments and thrusts at critical locations (invert, crown and springline) resulting from internal pressures, external loads and the weight of pipe and fluid. Calculations of these moments and thrusts induced by the external loads are evaluated by the recognized “Olander” theory. The section of the pipe wall is then checked as an equivalent beam section. B. Unless otherwise specified, the materials and workmanship for pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C301 for Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type. The design shall conform to AWWA C304 for Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Steel thickness of all fittings shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual M9 and AWWA C301 specifications. B. Interior and exterior concrete/mortar coating shall be as per AWWA C301. 2.5 BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. The “Marston Theory of Loads on Underground Conduits” concludes that the load experienced by a buried pipe is affected by trench width, type of soil and density of backfill material. Bedding condition types are illustrated in Chapter 6 of AWWA Manual M9 for concrete pressure pipe. The bedding required for this project is type R4 for design of E-301 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe – 33 11 16.23 pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe is ruggedly constructed. It only requires a single sling around its midpoint when being installed. B. The pipe’s rubber gasket joint affords many advantages. There is no need for caulking, welding or bolting, thus the use of expensive jointing materials and highly skilled labor is eliminated. The only joint materials required are an inexpensive vegetable compound soap solution to lubricate the inside bell surface and the gasket and a small amount of cement mortar to fill the inside and outside annular joint spaces. Depending on the manufacturing location and/or the product application, the inside annular space may be protected by shop- applied protective coating or joint mortar. C. Prestressed concrete embedded cylinder pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Manual M9, Concrete Pressure Pipe, except as otherwise provided herein. D. All prestressed concrete cylinder pipe shall have a minimum of 3' (0.9 m) of cover or as shown on the drawings, whichever is greater. Pipe shall be laid such that the invert elevations shown on the drawings are not exceeded. E. The pipe interior shall be maintained dry and broom clean throughout the construction period. F. Gasket, gasket groove and bell shall be cleaned and lubricated with a vegetable lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer. The lubricant shall be approved for use in potable water and shall be harmless to the rubber gasket. Pipe shall be laid to match existing pipe. As soon as the spigot is centered in the bell of the previously laid pipe, it shall be forced home with approved automatic equipment. After the gasket is compressed, verify the position of the gasket with a feeler gauge provided by the pipe manufacturer. G. Place a cloth diaper approved by the pipe manufacturer around each exterior joint recess and fasten it in place with either wire or steel strapping stitched into its edges. Mix a 1:3 mortar grout of sufficient liquid consistency to flow easily and pour it into the joint recess beneath the cloth band. To assist the flow and to assure complete filling of the entire recess completely around the pipe, fill the joint with mortar from one side in one continuous operation until the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the filling of the joint, pat or manipulate the sides of the wrapper to settle the mortar and expel any entrapped air. Close the joint recess at the top with a stiffer mix of the same mortar. H. Where applicable, pack interior joints of pipe 30" (750 mm) diameter and larger with mortar after backfilling is completed. Mortar grout shall be employed, consisting of one part by volume of Portland cement, 3 parts by volume of well graded coarse concrete sand meeting the requirements of ASTM C33, and sufficient water to make a stiff mortar suitable for overhead work. The mixture shall have a dry, crumbly consistency and shall be pushed into place and troweled to make a smooth joint. I. All pipe shall be sound and clean before laying. When laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plug or other approved means. Good alignment shall be preserved in laying. The deflections at joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the drawings, shall be provided, if required, in crossing utilities which may be encountered upon opening the trench or any other situation encountered that requires horizontal or vertical alignment adjustments. J. Have on hand a sufficient supply of assorted short pipe lengths, adapters and any other fittings necessary to prevent delays in pipe laying. K. Provide mechanical or welded joint restraint per AWWA Manual M9. L. Bolts, flange faces and steel joint rings shall be shop coated with rust preventative compound. All other metal surfaces shall be shop primed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. M. All operations described in this Guide should be performed in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) regulations, state and local codes, and industry safe practices. Material handling equipment shown or described in this Guide should have sizes and capacities determined by a qualified person. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe – 33 11 16.23 3.2 PIPE HANDLING A. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings to the project site. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. Before lowering into the trench, inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe. Keep the pipe clean during and after the laying operation and free of sticks, dirt, animals and trash, and at the close of each operating day, effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasket night cap. B. Excavation and Laying 1. A backhoe is most often used for excavation, but a rotary trenching machine may be used for some soil conditions. Usually, the pipe is installed by the same backhoe used for excavation. The weight of the pipe and the force exerted by the laying equipment are usually enough to fit the spigot into the bell of the previously laid pipe section. C. Checking the Joint 1. Insert a steel feeler gauge about 1/2” (13 mm) wide and 0.010” (0.25 mm) thick into the joint recess and determine by feel if the gasket is properly seated in the groove. D. Interior Joint Protection 1. Unless protected by inorganic zinc or other protective coating, the inside joint recess should be filled with cement mortar and finished smooth with a trowel. E. Exterior Joint Space 1. Use a wrapper strapped around the pipe and over the joint to grout the exterior space. Pour wet cement mortar grout at one side of the opening on top of the pipe until the grout has advanced completely around the joint. F. Backfilling 1. After filling the exterior space of the pipe joint, begin backfilling immediately. This eliminates the delay between the laying and backfilling operations. 3.3 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTS A. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for conducting a hydrostatic pressure test on the pipelines. The procedures and method for conducting the pressure tests shall be approved by the engineer. B. Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, bulkheads, etc., as required in conjunction with testing portions of the pipe. Furnish test pumps, gauges, meters and any other equipment required in conjunction with carrying out the tests. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests shall conform to AWWA Manual M9. C. All pipelines shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 20% above the normal operating pressure at the lowest point of the section being tested and this pressure maintained for at least one hour. The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with AWWA Manual M9. D. Lines which fail to meet the requirements of the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are met. Defective materials, pipe, valves and accessories shall be removed and replaced. 3.4 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all of the new pipelines by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, and pieces of wood or other material which may have entered during the construction period. If, after this cleaning, obstructions remain, they shall be removed. B. After the pipe lines are cleaned and if the ground-water level is above the pipe, or following a heavy rain, the engineer will examine the pipe for leaks. If defective pipes or joints are discovered at this time, they shall be repaired or replaced. 3.5 DISINFECTION A. Before being placed into service, pipelines which will convey potable water shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 1 Water Service Lines – 33 12 13 SECTION 33 12 13 WATER SERVICE LINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing and installing water service lines required to complete the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Service fittings shall have a minimum of 150 psi working pressure rating, unless indicated otherwise. B. Fittings and materials shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA C800. C. All service connections shall require service clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. See City Standard Specification Section 022020, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities ". B. Service lines shall be placed by the Contractor as indicated on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Butterfly Valves – 33 12 16 SECTION 33 12 16 BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal body butterfly valves and manual valve operators. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1. ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. 2. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. D 429 - Test Methods for Rubber Property - Adhesion to Rigid Substrates. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3 Inches through 48 Inches for Water and Other Liquids. 2. C 504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. General Purpose Butterfly Valves: a. Design Standard: In accordance with AWWA C 504 as modified and complemented herein. b. Class: (1) Valves 3”-20”: AWWA Class 150B, when not otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. (2) Valves 24”-72”: AWWA Class 75B, when not otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Design Requirements for General Purpose Butterfly Valves and High Performance Butterfly Valves: a. Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C 504 and its Appendix A, using the following values: (1) Maximum Water Velocity: 16 feet per second with valve fully open. (2) Maximum pressure differential across the closed valve in accordance with AWWA Class designation, or as indicated on the Butterfly Valve Schedule. (3) System head loss characteristic, exclusive of valve, proportional to the velocity head. (4) Coefficient for seating and unseating torque, dynamic torque, and bearing friction in accordance with valve manufacturer's published recommendations. b. Valve Disc: Seat in an angular position of 90 degrees to the pipe axis and rotate an angle of 90 degrees between fully open and closed positions. (1) Do not supply valves with stops or lugs cast with or mechanically secured to the body of the valve for limiting the disc travel. c. Unacceptable Thrust Bearings: Do not provide valves with thrust bearings exposed to the fluid in the line and consisting of a metal bearing surface in rubbing contact with an opposing metal bearing surface. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Tight shutoff at the AWWA rated class with flow in either direction. 2. Suitable for the following service conditions: a. Throttling. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Butterfly Valves – 33 12 16 b. Frequent operation. c. Operation after long periods of inactivity. d. Installation in any position and flow in either direction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include certified drawings and material specifications in accordance with AWWA C 504. B. Include description of the method of attachment of the edge to the valve disc. C. Product Data: Include manufacturer's published recommendations for seating and unseating torque coefficient, dynamic torque, and bearing friction for calculation of maximum operating torque. D. Test Reports: Records of tests performed in accordance with AWWA C 504 requirements. E. Certificates: Affidavit of compliance specified in AWWA C 504. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. DeZurik. 2. Henry Pratt Company. 3. Kennedy Valve. B. Valve Body: 1. Material: Cast-iron ASTM A 126, Class B. a. Flanges: 125 pound ANSI/ASME B16.1. b. Mechanical Joint Ends: In accordance with AWWA C 110. 2. Body Design: a. Provide short body or long body valves at contractor's option, subject to: (1) Location in the piping system so that when the valve is operated, its operation will not interfere with, nor be impaired by, adjacent fittings, valves, equipment or other installations. b. Valves 30 Inches in Nominal Size and Larger: Valve port diameter not reduced more than 1-1/2 inches from the nominal valve diameter. 3. Valve Ends: Compatible with piping system. C. Disc Materials: 1. Stainless steel or nickel-chrome mating edge on a cast-iron or ductile iron disc. D. Shaft and Bearings: 1. Shaft: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. Thrust Bearings: Self-lubricating, sleeve type; Teflon lined with fiberglass backing, or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) with phenolic or stainless steel backing. 3. Provide valves with polytetrafluoroethylene with phenolic or stainless steel backing. E. Disc Pins: Secure valve disc to shaft by means of solid, smooth sided, Type 316 stainless steel or monel, taper or dowel pin. 1. Extend pins through shaft and mechanically secure in place. F. Seats: 1. For valves less than 24 inches nominal size, bond or vulcanize seats into the valve body. 2. For valves 24 inches nominal size and larger, mechanically retain seats in the valve body. a. Achieve retaining effect by an epoxy injection method that expands the seat into the body, or by segmented clamping tee lock ring with adjusting screws. b. Provide means to prevent nuts and screws used to retain rubber seats from loosening due to vibration or cavitation. c. Seat Retainers: Type 316 stainless Steel. 3. Resilient Seat: Withstand 75 pound pull when tested in accordance with ASTM D 429, Method B. 4. Do not provide valve with seats retained by a snap ring. 5. Seat Materials: a. EPDM. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Butterfly Valves – 33 12 16 G. Valve Packing: 1. Valves 4 Inch to 48 Inch in Nominal Size: Self-adjusting V-type packing or chevron type packing. 2. Valves 54 Inch in Nominal Size and Larger: Adjustable V-type packing with bronze packing gland or self-adjusting V-type packing. 2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVE OPERATORS A. Provide underground valves 6 inches in nominal size and larger with a totally enclosed worm gear operator mounted on the valve. 1. Valve Shaft: Extend from the valve to the operator and be as specified for valve shafts. 2. Operator: Gasketed for watertightness. 3. Provide a 2-inch AWWA operating nut for those valves scheduled for portable operators. B. Manual Operators on Aboveground Butterfly Valves Larger than 6 Inches in Nominal Size: Worm geared; valves 10 inches in nominal size and smaller on low pressure air service may be lever operated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop coat interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, except as follows: 1. Finished surfaces. 2. Bearing surfaces. 3. Stainless steel components. B. Surface Coatings: 1. Unfinished Surfaces: a. Interior Surfaces: High solids cycloaliphatic amine epoxy. b. Exterior Surfaces: (1) Submerged Valves: High solids cycloaliphatic amine epoxy. (2) Buried Valves and Valves in Manholes and Vaults: Coal tar. (3) Other Valves: High solids epoxy and polyurethane system. 2. Polished and Machined Surfaces: Rust-preventive compound. 3. Actuators and Accessories: Rust-inhibitive primer. C. Coating Materials: 1. High Solids Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy: a. Application: Shop apply to iron and steel surfaces, except stainless steel. b. Product: Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval. c. Quality Control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts. (1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. (2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are corrected. d. Additional field coating, other than touchup coating of damaged surfaces, will not be required. (1) Perform touchup coating within the recoat time recommended by the paint manufacturer. (2) When touchup coating is required after expiration of the recoat time, precede coating by blast cleaning or other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material for satisfactory adhesion between coats. 2. Rust-inhibitive Primer: a. Rust-inhibitive Primers: Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval. b. Surface Preparation: Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval. 3. Rust-preventive Compound: One of the following or equal: a. Houghton, Rust Veto 344. b. Rust-Oleum, R-9. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Butterfly Valves – 33 12 16 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal, unless a vertical shaft is required to suit a particular installation, and unless a vertical shaft is indicated on the Drawings. B. Install pipe spools or valve spacers in locations where butterfly valve disc travel may be impaired by adjacent pipe lining, pipe fittings, valves, or other equipment. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. The Butterfly Valve Schedule is not a valve take off list. 1. Only major process control valves are included in the Schedule. B. Abbreviations: The following apply to the Butterfly Valve Schedule: 1. Valve Ends: a. F = Flanged end. b. MJ = Mechanical joint end. c. VIC = Grooved coupling end. 2. AWWA Class: In accordance with AWWA C 504. 3. Type of Operator: a. M = Manual operator. b. E = Electric operator. c. P = Portable operator (2-inch square AWWA operating nut). 4. Disc Orientation: a. V = Vertical b. H = Horizontal 5. Limit Switches: Provide limit switches on manually operated valves where indicated on the Drawings. C. See Drawings for locations of Butterfly Valves. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 3 Disinfection of Water Lines – 33 13 00 SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Disinfection of water lines, bacteriological testing, and flushing of lines at completion of treatment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA C 651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. B. APHA/AWWA/WEF - Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Disinfection Test Plan Which Details Procedure to be Utilized to Disinfect Water Lines Including: 1. Method and locations of disinfectant application. 2. Locations of sampling points. 3. Method of flushing and location of flushing ports. 4. Method of dechlorination. 5. Disposal location for dechlorinated water. B. Submit Disinfection Reports and Include the Following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project name and location. 3. Treatment subcontractor's name, address, and phone number. 4. Type and form of disinfectant used. 5. Time and date of disinfectant injection start. 6. Time and date of disinfectant injection completion. 7. Test locations. 8. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in parts per million for each outlet tested. 9. Time and date of flushing start. 10. Time and date of flushing completion. 11. Disinfectant residual after flushing in parts per million for each outlet tested. C. Submit Bacteriological Reports and Include the Following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project name and location. 3. Laboratory's name, certification number, address, and phone number. 4. Time and date of water sample collection. 5. Name of person collecting samples. 6. Test locations. 7. Time and date of laboratory test start. 8. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 9. Certification that water conforms or fails to conform to bacterial standards of Federal Safe Drinking Water Act. 10. Bacteriologist's signature and bacteriological laboratory's evidence of certification. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Bacteriological Laboratory: Certified by state in which Project is located. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and contamination. B. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials. C. Maintain storage room dry and with temperatures as uniform as possible between 60 degrees Fahrenheit and 80 degrees Fahrenheit. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 3 Disinfection of Water Lines – 33 13 00 1.6 PROTECTION A. Provide necessary signs, barricades, and notices to prevent persons from accidentally consuming water or disturbing system being treated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERI ALS A. Disinfectant: Free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING WATER LINES A. Prior to chlorination, remove by flushing or other means, soil, and debris from the water lines. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Verify that water line system is completed and cleaned. B. Start disinfection of water lines when conditions are satisfactory. 3.3 SYSTEM TREATMENT A. Perform disinfection of water lines in accordance with AWWA C 651 and as specified in this Section. B. Starting at outlet closest to water source, bleed water from each outlet until water produces odor of disinfectant. Repeat process at each outlet throughout system. C. Test for disinfectant residual at each of following locations and other locations in accordance with submitted disinfection test plan: 1. Ends of piping runs. 2. Remote outlets. 3. Tanks. 4. At least two outlets on each building floor where directed. D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. E. When disinfectant residual is less than 25 parts per million after 24 hours, repeat system treatment. 3.4 FLUSHING A. Remove disinfectant from water lines. B. Flush water lines with potable water containing no more disinfectant residual than the active distribution system or 1.0 parts per million, whichever is greater. C. Continue flushing until water at designated flushing ports contains disinfectant residual equal to concentration specified above. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of chlorinated water in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan and applicable requirements of federal, state, county, and city having jurisdiction over disposal of hazardous wastes in location of the Project and disposal site. 3.6 BACTERIOLOGICAL TEST A. The bacteriological test shall be performed by the O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Laboratory and shall be paid by the City. B. Instruct bacteriological laboratory to take water samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing system. C. At the end of 24 hours and before the water main or structure is placed in service, collect bacteriological quality samples at each of following locations and other locations in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan and Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater: 1. Where water enters system. 2. Ends of piping runs. 3. Remote outlets. 4. Tanks. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 3 Disinfection of Water Lines – 33 13 00 5. At least two outlets on each building floor. D. Analyze water samples in accordance with Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. E. When bacteriological test proves water quality to be unacceptable, repeat disinfection treatment. END OF SECTION Division 40 Process Integration February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Piping – General Requirements-40 05 00 SECTION 40 05 00 PIPING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the basic administrative and testing requirements for piping. Specific piping materials, systems and related installation and testing requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 40. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Piping materials and systems are included in other Sections of Division 40. B. Valves are included in Section 40 05 50. C. Pipe insulation is included in Section 07 21 00. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, general submittals for piping and piping systems are listed below. It is not intended that all submittals listed below be provided for all piping materials and systems. Refer to individual System or Piping Sections for specific submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Piping layouts in full detail. 2. Location of pipe hangers and supports. 3. Location and type of backup block or device to prevent joint separation. 4. Large scale details of wall penetrations and fabricated fittings. 5. Schedules of all pipe, fittings, special castings, couplings, expansion joints and other appurtenances. 6. Catalog cuts of joints, couplings, harnesses, expansion joints, gaskets, fasteners and other accessories. 7. Brochures and technical data on coatings and linings and proposed method for application and repair. C. Samples D. Design Data E. Test Reports 1. Copies of certified shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard. 2. Copies of all field test reports, signed by Contractor and Engineer or City Representative. F. Certificates 1. Copies of certification for all welders performing work in accordance with ANSI B31.1. G. Manufacturer’s Installation (or application) instructions. H. Statement of Qualifications I. Manufacturers Field Report J. Project Record Document K. Operation and Maintenance Data L. Warranties 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Piping – General Requirements-40 05 00 C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1.AWS B2.1 - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.AWWA Manual M11 - Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. Factory Mutual (FM) H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new and unused. B. Install piping to meet requirements of local codes. C. Provide manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Reference to standards such as ASTM and ANSI shall apply to those versions in effect at the time of bid opening. D. Coordinate dimensions and drilling of flanges with flanges for valves, pumps and other equipment to be installed in piping systems. Bolt holes in flanges to straddle vertical centerline. E. Reject materials contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuel, aromatic compounds, paint solvent, paint thinner and acid solder. F. Pipe joint compound, for pipe carrying flammable or toxic gas, must bear approval of UL or FM. G. Unless otherwise specified, pressures referred to in all Piping Sections are expressed in pounds per square in gauge above atmospheric pressure, psig and all temperature are expressed in degrees Fahrenheit (F). 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. During loading, transportation and unloading take care to prevent damage to pipes and coating. Carefully load and unload each pipe under control at all times. Place skids or blocks under each pipe in the shop and securely wedge pipe during transportation to ensure no injury to pipe and lining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Specific piping materials and appurtenances are specified in the respective Piping or System Sections. B. General installation materials shall be as specified below. 1.Unions shall be brass or bronze unions for joining nonferrous pipe; malleable brass or bronze seated iron or steel unions for joining ferrous pipe; PVC unions for joining PVC pipe; CPVC unions for joining CPVC pipe. 2.Flanged Joints. Bolt and nuts, Grade B, ASTM A307 Type 304 stainless steel, bolt number and size same as flange standard; studs - same quality as machine bolts; 1/16-in thick rubber gaskets with cloth insertions; rust resistant coatings. 3.Temporary Plugs shall be standard plugs or caps which are suitable for permanent service. 4.Wall Sleeve Seals shall be a specified in Section 40 05 09. 5.Flexible Connections shall be flanged spool type, 180 degree F maximum service, single filled arch with synthetic rubber tube and cover, steel ring reinforced synthetic fiber carcass, with flanges drilled to 150 lb ANSI B16.5. Steel retaining rings, control rods and compression sleeves shall be provided where shown and as required for the working pressure of the system in which the joint is installed. All flexible joints shall be rated for the working pressure of the system in which they are installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Piping – General Requirements-40 05 00 A. All dirt, scale, weld splatter, water and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside and outside of all pipe and sub-assemblies prior to installing. Repair all coatings if damaged. B. All pipe joints and connections to equipment shall be made in such a manner as to produce a minimum of strain at the joint. C. Install piping in a neat manner with lines straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines and with risers plumb. Run piping so as to avoid passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets and/or interference with other lines or extending beyond furring lines as determined by Architectural Drawings. All work shall be accomplished using recognized methods and procedures of pipe fabrication and in accordance with the latest revision of applicable ANSI Standards, ASME Codes and Pipe Fabrication Institute Standards. 1.Use full length of pipe except where cut lengths are necessary. Do not spring or deform piping to make up joints. 2.Pipe shall be cut square, not upset, undersized or out of round. Ends shall be carefully reamed and cleaned before being installed. 3.Bending of pipe is not permitted. Use fittings for all changes in direction. 4.Do not use bushings except where specifically approved by the Owner's Representative. Reducers shall be eccentric to provide for drainage from all liquid bearing lines and facilitate air removal from water lines. 5.Verify the locations and elevations of any existing piping and manholes before proceeding with work on any system. Any discrepancies between the information shown on the Drawings and the actual conditions found in the field shall be reported at once to the Owner's Representative. No claim for extra payment will be considered if the above provision has not been complied with. 6.Where lines of lower service rating tie into services or equipment of higher service rating the isolation valve between the two shall conform to the higher rating. 7.Mitering of pipe to form elbow is not permitted. 8.All piping interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned after installation and kept clean by approved temporary closures on all openings until the system is put in service. Closures should be suitable to withstand the hydrostatic test. 9.End caps on pre cleaned pipe shall not be removed until immediately before assembly. All open ends shall be capped immediately after completion of installation. D. Test Connections 1.Provide 1/2-in female NPT test connection equipped with 1/2-in brass plug on all pump suction and discharge lines. Where indicated on the Drawings, test connections should be equipped with bar stock valve and gauge. Provide test connections at all steam traps. The connection shall be located on the discharge side of the trap between the trap and the first valve. It shall consist of a 1/2-in branch connection terminated with a gate valve. E. Unions 1.Unions screwed or flanged shall be provided where indicated and in the following locations even if not indicated. a.In long runs of piping to permit convenient disassembly for alterations or repairs. b.In by passes around equipment. c.In connections to tanks, pumps and other equipment between the shut off valve and the equipment. d.In connections on both sides of traps, controls and automatic control valves. F. Vents and Drains 1.Provide vents and drains in the following places: a.Water Lines - Vents at high points and drains at low points. b.Air Lines - Drains at low points. 3.2 UNIONS A. Use unions to allow dismantling of pipe, valves and equipment. 3.3 WELDING A. Welding in accordance with ANSI B31 and AWS B3.0. B. Install welding fittings on all welded lines. Make changes in direction and intersection of lines with welding fittings. Do not miter pipes to form elbows or notching of straight runs to form February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Piping – General Requirements-40 05 00 tees, or any similar construction. Do not employ welder who has not been fully qualified in above specified procedure and so certified by approved welding bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 3.4 FLANGED JOINTS A. Make flanged joints with bolts; bolt studs with nut on each end; or studs with nuts where one flange is tapped. Use number and size of bolts conforming to same ANSI Standard as flanges. Before flanges pieces are assembled, remove rust resistant coating from machined surfaces, clean gaskets and smooth all burrs and other defects. Make up flanged joints tight, care being taken to prevent undue strain upon valves or other pieces of equipment. 3.5 SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. Install tierods, pipe clamps or bridles when sleeve type couplings or fittings are used in piping system where indicated, and at changes in direction or other places as necessary, to prevent joints from pulling apart under pressure. Use bridles and tierods at least 3/4-in in diameter, except where tierods replace flange bolts of smaller size, in which case fit with nut on each side of pair of flanges. Joint harnessing shall conform, as a minimum, to the requirements for the bolts and tie bolt lugs as set forth in AWWA Manual M11. 3.6 WALL SLEEVE SEALS A. Use expandable rubber segmented sealing device with corrosion resistant fasteners to make watertight the annular space between pipe and sleeve. Determined the required inside diameter of each individual wall opening or sleeve to fit the pipe and seal it to assure a watertight joint as recommended by the manufacturer, before ordering, fabricating or installing. Install pipe concentrically through wall sleeve. Install and tighten seal per manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 TESTING A. Test all pipelines for water/gas tightness as specified in the Piping or System sections. Furnish all labor, testing plugs or caps, pressure pumps, pipe connections, gauges and all other equipment required. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one or more of the testing procedures appended to this Section as specified in each Piping or System Section. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the owner’s representative. B. Repair faulty joints or remove defective pipe and fittings and replace as approved by the Engineer. Retest. 3.8 DISINFECTION A. After satisfactory testing, all potable, and plant water collection and distributed systems downstream of the filters shall be thoroughly disinfected per Division 40 Specification as applicable. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Piping – General Requirements (Hydrostatic Test) -40 05 00.4 SECTION 40 05 00.4 PIPING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (HYDROSTATIC TEST) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This test shall be used to hydrostatically test piping systems for structural integrity and leaks. The test shall be performed at ambient temperature unless otherwise specified. 1.2 TEST FLUID A. Water should be used as the test fluid whenever possible. In those systems where water cannot be used the test fluid may be either the one to be used in the system or the one agreed upon by the Engineer and the Contractor. 1.3 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Water - Of sufficient capacity to deliver the required test pressure. B. Strainer - On inlet side of the pump to prevent foreign matter from entering the system. C. Valves - Shall be provided on the suction and discharge side of the pump. D. Heater - To allow heating of the test fluid when elevated temperatures are required for test. E. Relief Valve - Set at a pressure to relieve at 20 to 25 percent above the required test pressure. F. Pressure Gauge(s) - Capable of reaching 50 percent over the test pressure. These should be located at the pump discharge and any other place deemed convenient by the Contractor. G. Pressure gauges and relief valves shall be checked for accuracy before use in test procedures. 1.4 PREPARATION FOR TEST A. Determine the fluid to be used for the test, and, if other than ambient temperature is required, what the test temperature will be. B. When a fluid other than water is used for a test, the equipment used for the test shall be of a material compatible with the test fluid. Normally this would be equal to the piping material. C. Vents shall be provided at the high points of the system and drains provided where means of venting or draining do not exist. D. Remove or block off, all relief valves, rupture discs, alarms, control instruments, etc, that shall not be subjected to the test pressure. E. All discs, balls, or pistons from check valves shall be removed if they interfere with filling of the system. Open all valves between inlet and outlet of the section to be tested. F. Connect pump and provide temporary closures for all of the external openings in the system. Use caution to ensure that the closures are properly designed and strong enough to withstand the test pressure. G. All joints, including welds, are to be left uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. H. A joint previously tested in accordance with this Section may be covered or insulated. I. Piping designed for vapor or gas shall be provided with additional temporary supports, if necessary, to support the weight of the test liquid. J. Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary restraint for additional pressure under test or shall be isolated from the test. K. Flanged joints, where blanks are inserted to isolate equipment during the test, need not be tested. 1.5 TEST PRESSURE A. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 1-1/2 times the design pressure unless otherwise specified in the System Section. 1.6 TEST PROCEDURE A. Allow the test fluid to enter the system. Open vents to allow displacement of all entrapped air. For all pipelines exceeding 500-ft in length, the maximum rate of filling shall be limited to that which produces a maximum nominal flow velocity of one foot per second in the pipe to February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Piping – General Requirements (Hydrostatic Test) -40 05 00.4 be tested. B. Close vents and restrict personnel in the test area to those involved in the test. C. Raise the pressure slowly with the pump until the predetermined test pressure is reached. Maintain pressure for duration of time specified in System Section, keeping personnel at a safe distance. D. Reduce the pressure about 20 percent and hold it at that point while the entire system is carefully inspected for leaks, cracks, or other signs of defects. E. If defects are found, the pressure shall be released, the system drained, the defects corrected and the test repeated. F. After a satisfactory test has been completed, the line shall be drained. 1.7 FLUSHING A. Lines tested with water shall be completely drained. B. Lines shall be flushed, after test. 1.8 TEST RECORDS A. Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. B. Test records shall include: 1.Date of Testing 2.Identification of Piping Tested 3.Test Fluid 4.Test Pressure 5.Signatures of Contractor and Owner’s representative 6.If leaks are found, they shall be noted, on the record. After correction, retesting as specified for original test. 7.Records of test shall be maintained by the Contractor and copies furnished to the Engineer in accordance with Division 40 Specifications. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Piping – General Requirements (Service Pressure Test) - 40 05 00.5 SECTION 40 05 00.5 PIPING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (SERVICE PRESSURE TEST) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This test shall be used to test piping systems using service pressure and the fluid for which the system is used. It shall not be used to test piping systems conveying combustible or flammable liquids or systems that comply with ANSI B31 codes. 1.2 TEST FLUID A. The fluid for which the system is designed shall be the test fluid. 1.3 TEST EQUIPMENT A. A pressure gauge capable of registering 25 psi over the design pressure shall be installed down-stream from the supply shut-off valve if one is not included in the system. 1.4 PREPARATION FOR TEST A. Insulated lines shall have all joints left exposed until completion of the test. 1.5 TEST PRESSURE A. The test pressure shall be equal to the maximum pressure that the line will be subjected to under normal operating conditions as determined by the Engineer. 1.6 TEST PROCEDURE A. Liquids 1.See that all personnel not involved in the test vacate the area. 2.Allow the system fluid to enter the system slowly while venting the air at the extreme far and uppermost points. For all pipelines exceeding 500-ft in length, the maximum rate of filling shall be limited to that which produces a maximum nominal flow velocity of one foot per second in the pipe to be tested. B. W hen the system is full and all air is vented, close the vents. 1.Allow the pressure in the system to build up to the full line pressure. 2.Inspect entire system for leaks. C. Gas or Vapor (Including Compressed Air and Steam) 1.See that all personnel not involved in the test vacate the area. 2.In systems that do not have a pressure gauge near the main shut-off valve, a gauge shall be installed. 3.Allow the system fluid to enter the system slowly until the full operating pressure is reached. 4.Shut off main supply valve. Observe the gauge for 15 minutes. The pressure gauge shall not drop during this time. 5.If the gauge drops, indicating the presence of leaks, the systems shall be inspected visually and, if necessary, with soap suds or commercially available leak detectors to locate the leak(s). D. If leaks are found, the lines shall be relieved of pressure, purged if necessary, and repaired. Tests shall be repeated for repaired sections. 1.7 TEST RECORDS A. Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. B. Test records shall include: 1.Date of Testing 2.Identification of Piping Tested 3.Test Fluid 4.Test Pressure 5.Signatures of Contractor and Owner’s representative. C. If leaks are found, they shall be noted on the record. After correction, retesting is required. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Piping – General Requirements (Service Pressure Test) - 40 05 00.5 D. Test records shall be maintained by the Contractor and copies furnished to the Engineer in accordance with Division 40 Specifications. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Piping – General Requirements (Pneumatic Test) - 40 05 00.6 SECTION 40 05 00.6 PIPING – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (PNEUMATIC TEST) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This procedure for a pneumatic test of piping systems shall be used when water, or other liquid, cannot be introduced into the line, or as a supplement to a hydrostatic test. IT SHALL NOT BE USED TO TEST NON-METALLIC (PLASTIC) PIPE. 1.2 GENERAL A. There is a hazard in using gases for test fluids because of their compressibility. B. Gases shall never be used unless there is ample justification and always in a safe manner. See Paragraph 3.0. 1.3 TEST GASES & PRESSURES A. Compressed air shall normally be used. Other gases may be used when specified or directed by the Engineer. B. Test pressures shall be 110 percent of the anticipated maximum operating pressure, but not exceeding 100 psig and not less than 5 psig at the highest point in the system. 1.4 SAFETY A. All pneumatic tests shall be done under the supervision of Contractor and in the presence of the Engineer. B. New Construction: The Engineer's permission shall be secured before testing. C. Renovation Projects: The Owner representative and the Engineer must be informed and their permission secured before testing. D. Only those people actively participating in the test shall be allowed in the test area. E. Safety glasses and hard-hats must be worn. 1.5 EQUIPMENT A. Building supply air to deliver the required test pressure if available, or Contractor shall provide a compressor capable of the required test pressure. B. Valves shall be provided on the discharge side of the pump. C. Relief valve to relieve at 10 to 15 percent over the test pressure. D. Pressure Gauge(s) capable of reaching 50 percent over the test pressure. A gauge shall be located on the pump discharge and other location as required. 1.6 TEST PROCEDURE A. Increase the pressure in the line gradually, in steps, to the specified pressure. Checks shall be made at 25 psig and at 10 psig intervals until the test pressure is reached using sound, soap solution or a drop in indicated pressure. B. When the specified pressure for the test is reached, shut off the valve in the supply line from the pump. C. Maintain the test pressure long enough to visually inspect all joints or a minimum of 10 minutes. There shall be no drop in the test pressure in this time. D. Leaks shall be repaired and the line retested. All leaks shall be noted on the Test Record form. E. After satisfactory completion of the test, vent the line and allow it to return to atmospheric pressure. Connection can then be made to the supply line. 1.7 TEST RECORDS A. Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. B. Test records shall include: 1.Date of Testing 2.Identification of Piping Tested February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Piping – General Requirements (Pneumatic Test) - 40 05 00.6 3.Test Fluid 4.Test Pressure 5.Signatures of Contractor and Owner’s Representative C. If leaks are found, they shall be noted on the record. After correction, retesting is required. D. Test records shall be maintained by the Contractor and copies furnished to the Engineer per Division 40 Specifications. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 2 Pipe Penetrations – 40 05 09 SECTION 40 05 09 PIPE PENETRATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install pipe penetration assemblies as shown. This Section covers materials for the various pipe penetration configurations. Refer to Standard Mechanical Detail. B. This Section covers materials for the various pipe penetration configurations. Generally, penetration details are called out on the Drawings and referenced on the Standard Mechanical Detail Drawings. Where penetrations are required and not called out, it shall be assumed the most conservative penetration detail shown on the detail sheets shall be utilized as appropriate for the piping type, the wall, or floor construction and the rating of the wall or floor penetrated. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Ductile Iron piping is included in Section 40 05 18. B. C. Steel piping is included in Section 40 23 10. Miscellaneous Metals is included in Section 05 10 01. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers' literature, installation instructions, and where applicable, fire rating and certified test results of the various components on all items to be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 02. B. A detailed schedule shall be submitted listing each pipe penetration and mechanical modular seal provided on the project. The schedule shall list process area, process pipeline service, pipe size, contract Drawing reference number, quantity, and materials of construction of all components inclusive of the wall pipe sleeve, mechanical modular seals, hardware, etc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE SLEEVES A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings all pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53 and hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A123. Pipe sleeve shall include a 2-inch minimum circumferential water stop welded to exterior of sleeve at its midpoint; have ends cut and ground smooth and flush with the wall or ceiling; and extend 2-in above finished floors. Sleeves to be sealed with mechanical seals shall be sized in accordance with the seal manufacturer's recommendations. Sleeves to be sealed by caulking and sleeves for insulated piping shall be sized as required. B. For locations requiring stainless steel, fabricate in a similar manner using Sch 40 Type 316L pipe fabricated in accordance with ASTM A778. C. External wall penetrations 36–in diameter and less may be made by means of a ductile iron sleeve capable of being bolted directly to the formwork. Seal of the annular space between the carrier pipe and the sleeve shall be made by means of a confined rubber gasket and be capable of withstanding 350 psi. Sleeve shall have an integrally cast waterstop of 1/2-in minimum thickness, 2-½–in minimum height. Sleeves shall be by Omni Sleeve, Malden, MA or equal. 2.2 WALL CASTINGS A. Unless otherwise shown, wall castings shall be ductile iron conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.51/C151, thickness Class 53, diameter as required. Flanges and/or mechanical joint bells shall be drilled and tapped for studs where flush with the wall. Castings shall be February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 2 Pipe Penetrations – 40 05 09 provided with a 2-in minimum circumferential flange/waterstop integrally cast with or welded to the casting, located as follows: for castings set flush with walls located at the center of the overall length of the casting; for castings which extend through wall located within the middle third of the wall. Interior lining shall conform to ANSI A 21.16 fusion bonded epoxy coating; comply with NSF 61. 2.3 SEALING MATERIALS A. Mechanical seals shall be modular, adjustable, bolted, mechanical type consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve. B. Link pressure plates shall be molded of glass reinforced nylon. Hardware shall be mild steel with a 60,000 psi minimum tensile strength and 2-part Zinc Dichromate coating per ASTM B- 633 and Organic Coating, tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 to pass a 1,470-hour salt spray test. Type 316 Stainless Steel hardware (ASTM F593-95) shall be used for submerged service and for penetrations in potable water service, process treatment basins containing treated surface / raw water, chemical storage and feed areas, sludge, or wastewater. C. Any drinking water facility/potable water applications shall require use of modular seal element assemblies that are NSF-61 certified. D. Links shall be colored throughout elastomer for positive material identification. Each link shall have permanent identification of the size and manufacturer's name molded into the pressure plate and sealing element. Completed sealing system shall be duty pressure rated for a minimum of 20 psig differential pressure. Link material shall be EPDM for all services except fire rated assemblies, fire rated seals shall use silicone link material and shall be single (1- hour) or double seal (3 hour) service to match fire rating of wall, floor, or ceiling. E. Mechanical seals shall be Link-Seal® as manufactured by GPT, Houston, TX, or pre- approved equal. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bonding compound shall be Sikadur Hi Mod epoxy by Sika Corp.; Euclid Chemical Corp.; Master Builders Company or equal. B. Fire stop sealant shall be a two part foamed silicone elastomer by Dow Corning Co., Product No. 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam; 3M™ brand fire barrier products caulk CP 25WB+ and 3M™ Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+; or FlameSafe FS 900+ by Rectorseal. Sealant bead configuration, depth and width shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Non shrink grout shall be Masterflow 713 by Master Builders Co.; Euco N S by Euclid Chemical Co.; Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp. or equal. D. Escutcheons plates shall be hot dipped galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Provide 316 stainless steel hardware for Treatment Basins and wet submerged areas. E. All materials in contact with treated surface water shall be NSF-61 listed for contact with potable water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components of pipe penetration assemblies as detailed on the Drawings. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 PVC and CPVC Pipe and Fittings – 40 05 13 SECTION 40 05 13 PVC & CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 1/8 inch to 4 inch PVC and CPVC piping and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Buried piping is included under Division 33 B. Concrete work is included in Division 03. C. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 50. D. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 40 05 76. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, shall include the following: 1.Shop drawings including piping layouts in AutoCAD R-2002 and schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall include dimensioning, fittings, locations of valves and appurtenances, joint details, methods and locations of supports, location of expansion loops, and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. 2.Shop drawing submittals for piping under this Section shall include all data and information required for the complete piping systems. All dimensions shall be based on the actual equipment to be furnished. Types and locations of pipe hangers and/or supports shall be shown on the piping layout for each piping submittal. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM D1784 – Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2.ASTM D1785 – Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 3.ASTM D2464 – Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 4.ASTM D2466 – Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 5.ASTM D2467 – Standard Specification for Socket Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 6.ASTM D2564 – Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 7.ASTM D2665 – Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 8.ASTM D2774 – Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping 9.ASTM D2855 – Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 10.ASTM D3311 – Standard Specification for Drain, Waste and Vent Plastic Fittings Patterns. 11.ASTM F437 – Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 PVC and CPVC Pipe and Fittings – 40 05 13 12.ASTM F438 – Standard Specification for Socket Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 13.ASTM F439 – Standard Specification for Socket Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 14.ASTM F441 – Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 15.ASTM F493 – Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 16.ASTM F593 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. 17.ASTM F594 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. B. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 1.PPI TR31 – Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping. C. American National Standard Institute 1.ANSI B16.5 – Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revisions in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plastic pipe and fittings of each type shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is experienced in the manufacture of the items to be furnished; however, it shall not be a requirement that the pipe and fittings be manufactured by the same manufacturer, provided that the pipe and fittings are compatible in both compounding and size. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall be suitable for the intended service. B. When CPVC is used, all installers must be trained by Corzan representatives as provided by Noveon (www.corzancpvc.com) or by licensed manufacturer of FlowGuard Gold or Corzan material. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings. B. The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard types of plastic pipe and fittings for use in transporting water and chemicals. C. The piping system shall be designed to handle a fluid temperature of 40°F to 110°F, and an outside air temperature of 20°F to 110°F. D. Other uses of PVC and CPVC within the project site include the following: 1.Other process piping as shown on the Drawings such as acid and alkaline chemical waste piping, vent piping, etc. 2.Potable water (PW). 3.Plant process water (PPW, potable water protected by RPZBP). 4.Drain piping. 5.Finished Water Sample piping. 6.Sanitary sewer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings – PVC 1.Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454 B in accordance with ASTM D1785, PVC 1120. The pipe shall have a minimum hydrostatic design stress of 2,000 psi at 73EF and shall be suitable for field cutting and solvent welding. Pipe shall be of the sizes as shown on the Drawings and shall be Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown. 2.Fittings shall be the socket type for solvent welded joints conforming to ASTM D2467 or ASTM D2466 where Schedule 40 pipe is shown on the Drawings. Fittings shall be manufactured from PVC compound meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454 B. Solvent cement shall be as specified in ASTM D2564. Solvent cement for sodium hypochlorite service piping shall be Weld-On CPVC 724 by IPS Corp. or Oatey Industrial Grade Low February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 PVC and CPVC Pipe and Fittings – 40 05 13 Voc Heavy Duty Gray. 3.Pipe, fittings and solvent for use with potable water shall be certified by NSF in accordance with NSF standard No. 14 and the seal shall be included on the pipe. B. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste and Vent Services 1.Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454 B in accordance with ASTM D2665. The patterns, dimensions and laying lengths of fittings including adapters shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3311. Solvent cement for joining pipe and fittings shall be as specified in ASTM D2564. C. Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings – CPVC 1.Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F441 Schedule 80. The Corzan® CPVC pipe compound used for pipe up to 8” in diameter shall meet cell class 24448 as defined by ASTM D1784. Corzan CPVC pipe 8” in diameter and larger shall meet cell class 23447. 2.Fittings shall be socket type for solvent weld joints conforming to ASTM F439 or ASTM F438 where Schedule 40 pipe is shown on the Drawings. Fittings shall be manufactured from Corzan® CPVC compound meeting ASTM D1784, Class 23447. Fitting compound shall be pressure rated in accordance with ASTM D-2837 and PPI TR-3 having Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4000 psi at 72oF and 1000 psi at 180oF as listed in PPI TR-4. 3.All socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cements that meet or exceed the requirements ASTM F493 and primers that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F656. IPS Weld-On CPVC 724 heavy bodied, medium setting, CPVC cement shall be used for all caustics including hypochlorite solutions. D. Threaded joints shall be as specified under the applicable ASTM standard for the pipe and fittings being used. Thread sealer shall be thread tape which shall be standard industrial quality Teflon, Type 1. Where this material is not compatible with intended service, pipe manufacturer shall offer an alternate “A-grade” material. Where threads are necessary on CPVC piping systems, it is recommended that threaded male adapters be utilized. Do not thread the CPVC pipe. E. Flanged Joints 1.Where flanged joints are shown on the Drawings, they shall be supplied with 1/8 inch thick full faced gaskets compatible with intended service. Provide Telflon or other “A- grade” material compatible with intended service. 2.Flange bolt spacing, number and dimensions shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16.5. CPVC and PVC flanges shall be single piece, suitable for solvent cementing to the pipe and shall be suitable for a minimum pressure of 150 psi. Two piece sleeved flanges (Van Stone type) shall not be acceptable. 3.Bolts, nuts and washers for flanged joints shall be for corrosive service conditions and shall be ASTM F593 and F594, Type 316 stainless steel. Antisieze compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be of a molybdenum disulfide base such as Molycoat G or equal. Confirm compatibility with CPVC prior to use (www.corzancpvc.com). F. Fittings, specials, unions and flanges shall be of the same schedule number and manufactured of the same materials as the pipe. Whenever unions are called out on the Drawings, flanged connections may be substituted, provided that dimensional controls do not preclude use of flanges. G. Sleeves for plastic pipe shall be as specified in Section 40 05 09. 1.Expansion joints for PVC and CPVC sizes 1/2– inch to 4 inches shall be telescoping type as manufactured by IPEX, Plastinetics, Inc.; ASAHI/America or equal. Expansion in pipes smaller than 1/2– inch shall be accommodated with expansion loops. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of plastic pipe shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and printed instructions. Cut and fit pipe accurately to measurements established at the site. Use methods of cutting, welding, and threading as recommended in instruction manuals published by the manufacturer of the materials being used. Use only strap wrenches for February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 PVC and CPVC Pipe and Fittings – 40 05 13 tightening threaded joints. Do not spring or force pipe in place. B. Joints for PVC and CPVC pipe shall be solvent cemented unless threaded are otherwise shown on the Drawings or are specified as other types herein. In making solvent cemented connections, clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings. A slight chamfer (bevel) of 15 degrees should be incorporated to the end of the pipe to permit easier insertion of the pipe into the fitting. Remove any burrs from cutting of the pipe. Solvent cement joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D2855, except that solvent cement formulated especially for and as specified above shall be used for joining CPVC pipe and fittings. Primer shall be used whenever recommended by the pipe, fitting, or cement manufacturer and in all cases for joints on pipe systems four inches in diameter or larger. Making solvent cement joints shall not be performed and the work shall stop when the temperature, measured in the shade, is 40F and falling. C. Installation of valves and fittings shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Particular care shall be taken not to overstress threaded connections. In making solvent cement connections, the solvent cement or primer shall not be spilled on valves. Any cement allowed to run from joints shall be cleaned from the pipe and fittings immediately. D. All piping shall have a sufficient number of unions to allow convenient removal of piping and shall be as approved by the Engineer. PVC and CPVC pipe shall be installed with at least one expansion joint or loop near the center of each straight run of pipe which is 50 feet or longer with the maximum spacing between expansion joints or loops being 150 feet. E. Where plastic pipe passes through wall sleeves, the space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a mechanical sealing element as specified in Section 40 05 09. F. All plastic pipe to metal pipe connections shall be made using flanged connections. Metal piping shall not be threaded into plastic fittings, valves, or couplings nor shall plastic piping be threaded into metal valves, fittings or couplings. Only socket to thread adaptors (Male Adapters) shall be used for threaded plastic pipe connections to other threaded devices. G. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall be set in accordance with the requirements of the piping layout and the Contractor shall verify these locations from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 40 05 76. H. Where practical, pitch all horizontal runs of piping to drain. I. Use spring hangers on vertical runs of piping when necessary to provide for expansion. J. Use roller and sliding, guiding supports on horizontal runs of piping when necessary to provide for expansion. K. Anchor and brace pipe at expansion joints to force expansion and contraction within joint without buckling. Follow manufacturer’s published instructions. L. Minimum span to be shown on the Drawings or as recommended in the published manuals of the pipe manufacturer for the sizes and weights being used. Use 100F for inside piping and 120F for outside piping when selecting span dimensions. Span to be the shortest required or recommended in any case of conflict between Drawings and published data. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Hydrostatic Pressure Test. This procedure applies to all exposed plastic piping systems except for gas vacuum lines. 1.All pipelines shall remain undisturbed for the minimum curing or cooling time specified for each type of pipe material but no less than 8 hours to develop full curing and complete strength at all joints. All pipe systems shall be flushed clean and then subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test for 8 hours at a test pressure and temperature specified below. Should the temperature not be attainable under hydrostatic conditions, then the test may be performed under hydro-dynamic conditions, provided that accurate measurements for loss of the test fluid can be made, or the pressure shall be proportionally increased to simulate the stresses of the higher temperature in relation to the lowest system temperature that is expected during the duration of the test. The proportionally higher test pressures shall be determined in accordance with the accepted temperature versus strength properties as published by the pipe manufacturer, Plastic Pipe Institute or other pipe material standards organization. 2.The test pressures shall be in accordance with the schedule as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of a test pressure for any line designation use 150 psig as a February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 PVC and CPVC Pipe and Fittings – 40 05 13 test pressure. 3.The test shall be performed by slowly filling the piping system, expelling entrapped air from all high points. The fill rate shall be controlled so that the fluid velocity within the pipe system is less than two fps. Upon completion of the filling process, the system shall be brought up to the specified test temperature as applicable, holding the system pressure to less than ten percent of the test pressure. Once the system has been stabilized at the specified test temperature, the pipe should be slowly brought up to the test pressure in such a manner so as to not create shock, surge or water hammer in the pipe system. The test duration time limit shall not begin until the full pressure specified above has been reached and the system has been stabilized to within five percent of the test temperature. The system pressure and temperature shall be maintained to within one half percent but no more than five percent of the specified value for the temperature and within five psi of the specified value for the pressure. These tolerances shall be held for the entire duration of the test. Upon completion of the test, the pressure shall be slowly removed by opening a valve or other pressure relieving device at a location remote to the location of the pressure/temperature monitoring equipment. 4.The pressure test shall be monitored by a recording type pressure gage for tests not requiring temperature control or a dual pen pressure/temperature recording gage when temperature control is required. The entire test process shall be recorded, including the initial temperature stabilization and pressurization of the piping system. The record shall be continuous through the system test and shall show the final de pressurization of the pipe system. 5.All visible leaks detected during the pressure test shall be repaired and the pressure/temperature test rerun. A successful test shall be a test in which no visible leaks are detected and the pipe system pressure can be maintained within one half percent but no more than five psi of the specified value. 6.Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to prevent movement during the tests. B. Testing for all gas vacuum lines shall be performed prior to installing mechanical equipment by placing the pipe system under 10 psi vacuum for 8 hours duration. No water or other fluids shall be introduced into gas vacuum lines. Pipe support system shall be installed before testing. Pipe system shall be temporarily capped and isolated during the test, and once the initial vacuum is achieved, no further pumping or evacuation shall be performed during the test. A vacuum gauge with minimum 0 to 15 psi range and at least 0.1 psi resolution shall be installed, and the pipe shall be slowly evacuated to achieve the test vacuum, then isolated. Testing shall be continuously monitored and recorded as described for pressure testing. A successful test shall indicate no loss of vacuum over 12 hours, other than any decrease due to documented change in ambient temperature. Any defects shall be repaired and the vacuum test rerun. Relieve vacuum slowly when test is completed. 3.3 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Keep inside of all pipes, fittings and valves clean and free from dirt and debris. B. Thoroughly blow all lines with high pressure air before connecting mechanical equipment, testing, or placing in service. 3.4 PAINTING AND INSULATION A. All PVC and CPVC pipe and fittings exposed to the direct sunlight and not insulated shall be field painted with a latex based paint system, to provide additional UV protection. This painting shall be required whether or not marking is required and shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 10. If required by Drawings, and/or specification section provide aluminum jacketed insulation in lieu of pipe painting. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Stainless Steel Piping – 40 05 14 SECTION 40 05 14 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, test, complete and ready for operation all stainless steel pipe as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Where the word "pipe" is used it shall refer to pipe, fittings, hangers, supports and appurtenances unless otherwise noted. C. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1.Furnishing and installing interior, above grade, stainless steel pipe, fittings and specials with screwed, butt welded, or flanged and plain ends. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Testing is included in Division 40. B. Concrete work is included in Division 03. C. Instrumentation and controls, other than those specified herein, are specified in Section 40 90 00. D. Valves are included in Section 40 05 50. E. Piping Specialties are included in Section 40 05 70. F. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints are included in Section 40 05 76. G. Thermal Insulation is included in Section 07 21 00. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for Engineer's review. 1.Within 30 calendar days following effective date of the Agreement submit the name of the pipe, fitting and appurtenances manufacturers and a list of the material to be furnished by each manufacturer. Also include information on local representative for each manufacturer, if product is sold through a distributor. 2.Shop drawings including piping layouts and schedules, including dimensioning, fittings, expansion joints, locations of valves and appurtenances, joint details, wall penetration details, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. Shop drawings shall include all data and information required for the complete piping systems. All dimensions shall be based on the actual equipment to be furnished. Types and locations of pipe hangers and/or supports shall be shown on the piping layouts for each pipe submittal. Not all dimensions will be checked by the Engineer, nor will detailed review be performed. Contractor shall be responsible for accurate dimensioning of piping systems. 3.Proposed cleaning method, including precleaning, descaling, chemicals to be used, or mechanical descaling method and final cleaning/passivation. 4.Certifications that welders are qualified, in accordance with ANSI B31.1, Paragraph 127.5 for shop and project site welding of pipe work. 5.Test Records a.Records shall be maintained of all tests performed. b.Test records shall include: (1) Date of Testing (2) Identification of Piping Tested (3) Test Fluid (4) Test Pressure (5) Signature of Contractor February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Stainless Steel Piping – 40 05 14 c. If leaks are found, they shall be noted, on the record. After correction, retesting as specified for original test. d.Records of test shall be maintained by the Contractor and two copies furnished to the Engineer. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A312 – Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. 2.ASTM A530 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. 3.ASTM A778 – Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI B16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125 and 250. 2.ANSI B16.9 – Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. 3.ANSI B36.19 – Stainless Steel Pipe C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.AWWA C111 – Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1.ASME B31.1 – Power Piping. E. American Welding Society (AWS) F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, qualified and regularly engaged for the last 5 years in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with this Section. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard types of stainless steel pipe and fittings for use in transporting air and water. B. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings. C. Stainless steel piping for the systems listed below shall be designed for the following conditions: 1.HS3 Sample Lines to Distribution Water Analyzers a.System:Sample Lines to Analyzers b.Material:Type 316L c. Fluid:Distribution Sample Water d.Design Pressure: 222 psig e.Testing Pressure: 333 psig f. Flow Velocity:5.12 fps g.Temperature: Ambient h.Special Conditions: Restrained piping system 2.HS3 Pump Room Drain Sump Pump Discharge a.System:Drain Sump Pump Discharge Line b.Material:Type 316L c. Fluid:Drain Water d.Design Pressure: 63 psig e.Testing Pressure: 94 psig f. Flow Velocity:5.95 fps g.Temperature: Ambient h.Special Conditions: Restrained piping system 3.Other services as scheduled on the Drawings. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Stainless Steel Piping – 40 05 14 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall not be dropped. Pipe and fittings shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. B. In handling the pipe, wide cushioned slings or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer shall be used. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges or levers shall be used in handling the pipe, fittings and couplings. C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe by the Contractor, at the Contractor's own expense. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be kept clean until they are put into service. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet and conform to ASTM A312 Type 316L. Carbon content of Type 316L material shall be 0.03 percent maximum. Finish shall be No. 1 or No. 2B. B. Pipe shall be die-formed or rolled true to dimension and round. Tolerances for length, inside and outside diameter and straightness shall conform to ASTM A530. The two edges of sheet shall be brought to line so as not to leave a shoulder on the inside of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. Longitudinal seams on pipe and fittings shall be welded by either the tungsten gas or the metallic-gas method. The interior welds shall be smooth, even and shall not have an internal bead higher than 1/16-in. All pieces shall be marked with gauge and type of stainless steel and with the initials of the inspector marked on the inside of each piece, at each end. C. Pipe and fittings shall be supplied with the following wall thicknesses: Tube OD or Pipe Diameter Tube Wall Thickness * Pipe Wall Thickness * 3 inches and less 4 to 6 8 to 12 14 to 16 18 to 20 24 30 36 16 Gauge (0.062 inch) 14 Gauge (0.079 inch) 12 Gauge (0.109 inch) 11 Gauge (0.124 inch) 10 Gauge (0.138 inch) 8 Gauge (0.168 inch) 3/16 inch 1/4 inch Schedule 10 Schedule 5 (0.065 to 0.109)** 12 Gauge (0.109 inch) 11 Gauge (0.124 inch) 10 Gauge (0.138 inch) 8 Gauge (0.168 inch) 3/16 inch 1/4 inch D. Fittings shall be smooth curve type up to 18-in diameter and mitered type 20-in diameter and greater. Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.9. E. All piping assemblies shall be shop assembled with flanged ends (or other type as noted herein) to the minimum extent shown on the Drawings to allow for shipping. Flanges for pipe 4-inch and smaller shall be of the type of stainless steel as the pipeline, and shall be welded directly to the pipe end, and shall be drilled to the 125 lb ANSI B16.1 standard. Flanges for pipe larger than 4-inch shall have stub ends or rolled angle rings of the type of stainless steel as the pipeline welded to the pipe end, with suitable gaskets between the mating surfaces and joined through the use of 125 lb rated back up flanges, drilled to ANSI B16.1, and made of Type 316 stainless steel. Flanges shall be AWWA Class B. Where the pipe stub is to pass through a sleeve during installation, a split type back up flange shall be used. Bolts, washers, nuts and other hardware for flange bolting shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Gaskets for flanged connections for water service shall be a minimum of 1/16-inch thick and shall be 45 to 55 durometer (Shore A) neoprene. The gaskets shall be compatible with the fluid being conveyed. F. Grooved couplings may be used in lieu of flanged couplings for water service piping. Couplings shall be rigid type. Housing shall be ductile iron, ASTM A-536, with hot dip February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Stainless Steel Piping – 40 05 14 galvanized finish. Gaskets shall be EPDM. Couplings shall be Victualic Style 07 (rigid). Bolts and nuts for all couplings shall be Type 316 stainless steel. See Section 40 05 70 for additional requirements for grooved couplings. G. For air service piping, in lieu of flanged connections, rigid field connections may be made with restrained, split ring couplings. Couplings shall be “fixed x fixed” restrained couplings with end rings shop-welded to the pipe ends. Couplings shall be as manufactured by Victualic Depend-O-Lok, Model F x F, Type 1 SR Type 2, based on pipe diameter. 1.Gaskets shall be Viton, 1/15-inch thick and rated for a minimum of 250 degrees F service. 2.The housing shall be of the double arch cross section manufactured from stainless steel conforming to ASTM A204, Type 316. The coupling thickness shall be sufficient to prevent the pipe ends from separating and shall not be less than 0.12-inch. 3.The integral shoulders and end ring weld to the stainless steel pipe ends shall be sized properly to ensure total joint restraint to prevent any axial movement of the pipe. H. For compressed instrument and MIT air piping 1/2-inch to 2-inch in diameter, pipe may be coupled with Press-fit style connectors as manufactured by Victaulic. Piping system shall conform to the general requirements of this section and be rated for a maximum pressure of 300 psig. If this coupling style is utilized, one press-fit installation tool shall be provided at the end of the project. Shop fabricated multiple output headers may be used in lieu of individual flanged fittings. I. Wall pipes shall have integral shop welded wall stops. J. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be pickled at the point of manufacture, scrubbed and washed until all discoloration is removed in accordance with ASTM A380. Remove all carbon deposits, greases, and oils by pickling and neutralization to aid the regeneration of a uniform corrosion resistant chromium oxide film. Completely immerse all stainless steel assemblies and parts after welding and brushing in a pickling solution as described in Section 6.2.11 of ASTM A380-88. The solution shall be a nitric hydrofluoric solution as defined in Table A.2.1 of Annex a2 of ASTM A30. Provide a final thorough rinse using ordinary industrial or potable water and dry in conformance per Section 8.3 of ASTM A380. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be pickled at the point of manufacturer. K. Pipe ends shall be prepared for couplings or other type ends where required by transport and handling limitations, where required by the support layout requirements and where noted on the Drawings. Plain end pipe may be coupled with "Pressfit"-style connectors, for pipe/tubing sizes 1 1/2-in and smaller, manufactured by the Victaulic Co. or by the use of grooved end couplings. Grooving (or built-up ends for Schedule 5s or 10s pipe) shall be of the coupling manufacturers standard type. Contractor is responsible for ensuring rigidity of joints where required. All normal pipe joints at valves, bends, etc, shall be flanged, drilling per ANSI B16.1, Class 125. L. Shop welding of fabrications shall be done according to the procedures and by welders certified per ASME Section IX. Welds shall be by an inert gas shielding process using only extra low carbon filler metals. Welds shall have a bead height of no more than 1/16 in. Butt welds shall have 100 percent penetration to the interior or backside of the weld joint. Cross sectional thickness of welds shall be equal or greater than that of the parent metal. M. Where shown on the Drawings or where approved by the Engineer, plain end pipe shall be joined by all stainless steel flexible couplings. Sleeve type couplings shall be of the Type 316L stainless steel and shall be Style 38 as manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries; coupling 411 as manufactured by Smith Blair, Inc. or equivalent couplings manufactured by Victaulic Depend-O-Lok Co. N. Where shown on the Drawings or where approved by the Engineer, flanged coupling adaptors shall be used to connect plain end pipe to equipment, fittings and valves. Flanged coupling adaptors shall be of the Type 316L stainless steel and shall comply with AWWA C207. Flanged coupling adapters shall be manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries; Smith Blair, Inc. or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All pipe and fittings shall be installed true to grade and alignment and pipe anchorage and/or February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Stainless Steel Piping – 40 05 14 restraint shall be provided where required. Manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed. B. All pipe and fittings shall be protected from dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign matter during installation to prevent damage to pipe and to assure no foreign matter is left in the piping. C. To assemble the joints in the field, thoroughly clean all joint surfaces and gaskets, if any, with soapy water before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened alternately, evenly to the manufacturer's specified torques. Under no condition shall extension wrenches or pipe-over- handle ratchet wrenches be used to secure greater leverage. All electrical bonding or insulation shall be installed as joints are made up. D. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided if required. Due consideration shall be given to thermal expansion/contraction over a temperature range of 200F. E. Sleeves of the proper size shall be installed for all pipes passing through floors or walls as shown on the Drawings. Sleeves shall be as specified in Section 40 05 09. F. When cutting of pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine neatly, without damage to the pipe. Cut ends shall be smooth and at right angles to the axis of the pipe. G. After installation, stainless steel pipe lines shall be washed clean with steam or hot water to remove any foreign material picked up during transport. 3.2 JOINING MECHANICAL AND RESTRAINED JOINTS A. Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with the "Notes on Methods of Installation" under AWWA C111 and the instructions of the manufacturer. B. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings and as acceptable to the Engineer. 3.3 JOINING FLANGED JOINTS A. Flanged joints shall be made with gasket, bolts and nut bolts stud with a nut on each end, or studs with nuts where the pipe is tapped. The number and size of bolts shall conform to the same standard requirements as the flange. 3.4 FIELD WELDING A. Welding in the field shall be done only if approved by the Engineer. Field welds shall be made by welders certified under ASME Section IX and be equal in all respects to shop welds. After field welding has been done, all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and buffed using deburring and finishing wheels. 3.5 FIELD PAINTING A. Final field painting is included in Section 09 90 00 except that for all stainless steel pipes, only bands, labels and arrows rather than full pipe painting will be required. 3.6 DISINFECTION AND CLEANUP A. After installation, completed lines shall be cleaned with Oakite deoxidizer or similar deoxidizer as recommended by the manufacturer to remove all foreign matter, construction stains or shop markings. Cleaned lines shall be rinsed clear with steam or hot water. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Pneumatic Test 1.Contractor shall provide a compressor capable of the required test pressure. 2.Valves shall be provided on the discharge side of the compressor. 3.Relief valve to relieve at 10 to 15 percent over the test pressure. 4.Pressure gage(s) capable of reaching 50 percent over test pressure. A gage shall be located on the compressor discharge and other location as required. B. Safety 1.All pneumatic tests shall be done under the supervision of Contractor and in the presence of the engineer. 2.New Construction: The Engineer’s permission shall be secured before testing. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Stainless Steel Piping – 40 05 14 3.Renovation Projects: The Owner representative and the Engineer must be informed and their permission secured before testing. 4.Only those people actively participating in the test shall be allowed in the test area. 5.Safety glasses and hard-hats must be worn. C. Test Procedures 1.Increase the pressure in the line gradually, in steps, to the specified pressure. Checks shall be made at 25-psig intervals until the test pressure is reached using sound, soap solution or a drop in indicated pressure. 2.When the specified pressure for the test is reached, shut off the valve in the supply line from the compressor. 3.Maintain the test pressure long enough to visually inspect all joints or a minimum of 10 minutes. There shall be no drop in the test pressure in this time. 4.Leaks shall be repaired and the line retested. All leaks shall be noted on the Test Record form. 5.After satisfactory completion of the test, vent the line and allow it to return to atmospheric pressure. Connection can then be made to the supply line. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Plant Piping Above Ground – 40 05 18 SECTION 40 05 18 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS – PLANT PIPING ABOVEGROUND PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, install and test ductile iron pipe and fittings for plant mechanical piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Mechanical piping shall include all piping and fittings installed above grade and shall exclude pipe in valve vaults, manholes, cleanouts and similar yard structures. C. Mechanical piping shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Provide pipe supports, hangers and couplings as required to achieve a complete pipe system. D. Where the word "pipe" is used, it shall refer to pipe, fittings, or appurtenances unless otherwise noted. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Pipe penetrations are included in Section 40 05 09. B. Belowground ductile iron pipe is included in Section 33 11 16.13. C. Painting is included in Division 09. D. Valves are included in Section 40 05 50. E. Pipe Hangers and Supports are included in Section 40 05 76. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for Engineer's review. B. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style or series designation. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A377 – Specification for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe 2.ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3.ASTM A193 – Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 4.ASTM A194 – Carbon and Alloy-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High- Temperature Service. 5.ASTM A536 – Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI B1.1 – Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). 2.ANSI B16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. 3.ANSI B18.2 – Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series Including Hex Cap Screws and Lag Screws. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 – ANSI Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2.ANSI/AWWA C116-09 – Protective Fusion Bonded Coatings for Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water Supply Services. 3.ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 – ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3- in Through 48-in for Water and Other Liquids. 4.ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 – ANSI Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5.ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 – ANSI Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Plant Piping Above Ground – 40 05 18 Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 6.ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 – ANSI Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 7.ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 – ANSI Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. 8.ANSI/AWWA C600 – ANSI Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 9.ANSI/AWWA C606 – ANSI Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.AWWA C651 – Disinfection of Water Mains. E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer is responsible for the performance of all inspection requirements as specified in ANSI/AWWA Standards. In addition, all pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant for compliance with these Specifications by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Owner. B. Inspection of the pipe and fittings will also be made by the Engineer or representative of the Owner after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the Specification requirements, even though sample pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the job. C. All pipe and fittings shall be permanently marked with the following information: 1.Manufacturer, date. 2.Size, type, class, or wall thickness. 3.Standard produced to (ANSI/AWWA, ASTM, etc). D. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See Section 01 31 00 for general requirements. B. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. Under no circumstances shall the pipe be dropped or skidded against each other. Slings, hooks, or pipe tongs shall be padded and used in such a manner as to prevent damage to the exterior surface or internal lining of the pipe. C. Materials, if stored, shall be kept safe from damage. The interior of all pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept free from dirt or foreign matter at all times. D. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by its manufacturer. The bottom tier shall be kept off the ground on timbers, rails, or concrete. Pipe in tiers shall be alternated. At least two rows of 4-inch by 4-inch timbers shall be placed between tiers and chocks affixed to each end in order to prevent movement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe 1.Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.51 and C110/A21.10 standards. The pipe shall be Class 53 per ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50. 2.Pipe shall be supplied in standard lengths as much as possible. B. Joints 1.Ductile iron pipe shall have flanged or grooved joints. Flange shall be flat face type, unless otherwise noted, meeting ANSI requirements either ANSI B16.1 Class 125 or Class 250. 2.Flange gasket shall be full face type SBR per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 to provide positive sealing for the flanged ductile iron joints. Thickness shall be 1/8-inch unless otherwise indicated. 3.Assembly bolts shall be square headed carbon steel machine bolts with hexagon nuts February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Plant Piping Above Ground – 40 05 18 per ANSI B18.2. Thread shall conform to ANSI B1.1. Bolt length shall be such that after joints are assembled, the bolts shall protrude through the nuts, but not more than 1/2-inch. 4.Grooved joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C606 standard rigid (flange equivalent) and shall be Style 31 couplings as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America or equal. This applies to pipe sizes 24-inches and smaller. 5.Coupling gaskets shall be FlushSeal® as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America. 6.Sleeve type couplings shall be Dresser Style 38 or 138 as manufactured by Dresser Industries or engineer approved equal. 7.Split-Sleeve type couplings shall be Depend-O-Lok® as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America. 8.Flanged Coupling Adapter: a.Type: Ductile iron or steel; Victaulic Depend-O-Lok®, Romac Industries, Style FCA501, Dresser Style 128, or engineer approved equal. b.Interior Lining: Heat-fused epoxy coating complying with AWWA C213. c. Bolts, studs and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel. 9.For all couplings; sleeve type, split sleeve, and flange coupling adapters, provide type 316 stainless steel gusset plates and tierods per AWWA M-11. C. Fittings 1.Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be grooved end or Class 150. Fittings shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 as applicable. Fittings shall have the same pressure rating, as a minimum, of the connecting pipe. Grooved fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings. D. Interior Lining 1.Interior lining: AWWA C104 shop applied cement-mortar lining (40 mils thick), comply with NSF 61. E. Exterior Coatings 1.Unless otherwise specified, all coatings shall be shop applied with "hold-backs" provided as required at pipe and fitting ends for satisfactory installation for joint connections in the field. Provide all necessary coating materials to perform field coating applications at joints. Unless otherwise noted, field applied coating material shall be compatible with or equal to the shop applied material. Field repair of pipe with damaged coating shall receive prior approval of the Engineer. If, in the opinion of the Engineer that the coating damage is beyond repair, the pipe shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. All flange bearing surfaces shall be uncoated. 2.Unless otherwise specified, all exposed exterior ferrous surfaces shall be painted with an applicable paint system as specified under Division 09. Surface preparation and application thereof shall be in conformance with applicable provisions of Division 9. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports 1.Pipe hangers and supports shall be provided at suitable distance along the pipeline regardless whether they are shown or not shown on the Drawings. 2.Pipe hangers and supports shall be as specified in Section 40 05 76. G. Wall Pipes: Ductile iron grooved or flanged with water stop collar. 1.Ductile iron water stop collar to be welded on the wall pipe prior to installation of the interior lining. 2.Interior Lining: As specified for pipe in paragraph 2.01 D. 3.Bolts, studs, and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General 1.All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported. Anchorage shall be provided where required. Any damage to linings shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the pipe is installed. Each length of pipe shall be cleaned out before installation. All of manufacturer's recommendations shall be utilized. 2.The deflection at joints shall not exceed that recommended by the pipe manufacturer. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Plant Piping Above Ground – 40 05 18 Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided, if required, in areas where conflict exists with the existing facilities. 3.When pipe cutting is acceptable to the Engineer, the cutting shall be done by abrasive saw, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Repair lining as per procedures in Part 1.5.C.2. 4.Ductile iron and fittings shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA C600 modified. B. Jointing 1.Flanged joints shall be made using gaskets, bolts, bolt studs with a nut on each end, or studs with nuts where the flange is tapped. The number and size of bolts shall conform to the same ANSI Standard as the flanges. 2.Bolts in flanged joints or mechanical joints shall be tightened alternately and evenly. 3.Sleeve type couplings and grooved joints using split ring couplings shall be installed in accordance with the recommended procedures required by their respective manufacturers. a.The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved joint products. The manufacturer’s representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.) Contractor shall remove and replace any joints deemed improperly installed. C. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, submit a certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. D. Sleeves of proper size shall be installed for all pipes passing through floors or walls. Sleeves shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or required for liquid or gas-tightness, the pipe shall be sealed with a mechanical seal equal to Link-Seal as per Section 40 05 09. E. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed as recommended by the manufacturer or as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. The inserts shall be set in accordance with the requirements of the piping layout and the Contractor shall verify their locations from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. 3.2 TESTING A. All piping shall be subject to acceptance tests. Provide all necessary utilities, labor and equipment for flushing and testing and dispose all waste after the test including water. B. All pipe and fittings shall be pressure tested in accordance with Section 40 05 00 and Drawings. C. The Contractor shall, at his/her own expense, correct any leakage and repair any damage to the pipe and pipe appurtenances or to any structures resulting from, or caused by tests. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean the entire pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, or other material which may have entered during the construction period. All debris shall be removed from the pipeline. The lowest segment outlet shall be flushed last to assure complete debris removal. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 SECTION 40 05 50 VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation and test all non-buried valves as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following. However not all items specified herein may be included in this project. 1.General Requirements 2.Valve Actuators – Manual 3.Valve Actuators – Powered 4.Butterfly Valves 5.Gate Valves 6.Ball Valves 7.Thermoplastic Valves 8.Pressure Regulating Valves 9.Solenoid Valves 10.Corporation Stops 11.Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valves 12.Hose End Valves 13.Insulating Fittings 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Price. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. B. Buried valves and appurtenances are included in Division 33. Piping and disinfection for potable water systems is included in the respective Section of C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Division 33. Shop and Finish painting is included in Sections 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Instrumentation, not specified herein, is included in Division Valves on all HVAC and plumbing systems are included in their respective sections of Division 23. Pump Control Valves are included in Sections 40 05 65. Electrical work is included in Division 26. Certain items similar to those specified in this Section may be specified to be furnished and installed with individual equipment or systems. In case of a conflict, those individual equipment or system requirements shall govern. Electric valve operators of all types, rate of flow controllers (including modulating valves and operators) and other types of valves which are part of the automated instrumentation (such as some solenoid valves) if not included herein shall be provided by the Engineer on request. Valve operators shall, however, be mounted at the factory on the valves as specified herein, as part of the work of this Section. Piping Specialties and Appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 70. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, materials required to establish compliance with this Section. The first submittal shall be the valve schedule described in Paragraph 1.09. Approval of the valve schedule submittal is required prior to Contractor submitting any of the equipment in this specification. Subsequent Equipment Submittals shall include at least the following: 1.Valve tag number and location within plant. 2.The manufacturer and supplier. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 3.The address at which equipment will be fabricated or assembled. 4.Shop drawings showing assembly details, materials of construction (by common name and ASTM number), and dimensions. 5.Provide hydraulic characteristics of valves being provided. 6.Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 7.The total weight of each item. 8.A complete bill of materials. 9.Additional submittal data, where noted with individual pieces of equipment. 10.Individual electrical control schematics and wiring diagrams for each valve operator with all external interfaces, identified exactly as detailed on the Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings. Standard catalogue cut sheets that show typical wiring diagrams only are not acceptable. Valve actuators shall be coordinated with electrical requirements shown on the Drawings and valves as specified herein. B. Test Reports 1.Provide certified hydrostatic test data, per manufacturer’s standard procedure or MSS SP 61 for all valves. C. Certificates 1.For each valve specified to be manufactured, tested and/or installed in accordance with AWWA and other standards, submit an affidavit of compliance with the appropriate standards, including certified results of required tests and certification of proper installation. D. Manufacturer's Installation and Application Data E. Operating and Maintenance Data 1.Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided in Section 01 70 00. The instructions shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions and other information required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2.ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 3.ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 4.ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 5.ASTM A436 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. 6.ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7.ASTM B30 - Standard Specification for Copper Base Alloys in Ingot Form. 8.ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.AWWA C111 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2.AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves Supply Service 3.AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves 4.AWWA C507 - Ball Valves, 6 in through 48 in (150mm through 1200mm) 5.AWWA C508 - Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in (50mm through 24 in (600mm) NPS 6.AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 7.AWWA C511 - Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly 8.AWWA C540 - Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates 9.AWWA C550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 10.AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI B1.20.1 - Specifications, Dimensions, Gauging for Taper and Straight Pipe Threads (except dry seals). 2.ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 3.ANSI B16.10 - Face to Face and End to End Dimensions of Valves 4.ANSI B16.104 - Butterfly Valves February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) E. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1.MSS SP 61 - Pressure Testing of Steel Valves. 2.MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3.MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4.MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanges and Threaded Ends. 5.MSS SP 72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Services. 6.MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7.MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 8.MSS SP 82 - Valve Pressure Testing Methods 9.MSS SP 98 - Protective Coatings for the Interior of Valves, Hydrants and Fittings. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) H. Factory Mutual (FM) I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1.Valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established firms who are fully experienced, minimum 10 years, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. 2.The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with this Section as applicable. 3.All units of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 4.All 480 volt motor actuators shall be the product of one manufacturer; Contractor shall coordinate this requirement with vendors who supply actuated valves as part of systems specified in Division 26. Specifically note; Process Blowers in Paragraph 1.02. B. Certifications 1.The manufacturers shall furnish an affidavit of compliance with Standards referred to herein as specified in Paragraph 1.03C above. Refer to PART 3 for testing required for certain items in addition to that required by referenced standards. C. Provide the services of a qualified and factory trained service representative of the manufacturer to provide operational and maintenance instruction, for a 1 day, 8 hour period for each type of the following equipment: 1.Pressure regulating valves. 2.Air release, air and vacuum valves. D. Inspection of the units may also be made by the Engineer or other representative of the Owner after delivery. The equipment shall be subject to rejection at any time due to failure to meet any of the specified requirements, even though submittal data may have been accepted previously. Equipment rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the job site at once. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of water, wastewater, sludge, air, and chemicals as noted on the Drawings. B. Valves, appurtenances and miscellaneous items shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as specified, so as to form complete workable systems. C. Unless otherwise noted all powered valve operators shall have: 1.Valves larger than 3-in: electric operators 460 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz. 2.Valves 3-inch and under: electric operators, 120 Volt, 1 Phase, 60 Hz. 3.See other paragraphs for additional requirements. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference is made to Section 01 31 00 for additional information. B. Packing and Shipping 1.Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the valves, appurtenances, or coatings. Equipment shall not be dropped. All valves and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 appurtenances shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the coatings shall be repaired as acceptable to the Engineer. 2.Prior to shipping, the ends of all valves shall be acceptably covered to prevent entry of foreign material. Covers shall remain in place until after installation and connecting piping is completed. a.All valves 3-in and larger shall be shipped and stored on site until time of use with wood or plywood covers on each valve end. b.Valves smaller than 3-in shall be shipped and stored as above except that heavy cardboard covers may be used on the openings. c. Rising stems and exposed stem valves shall be coated with a protective oil film which shall be maintained until the valve is installed and put into use. d.Any corrosion in evidence at the time of acceptance by the Owner shall be removed, or the valve shall be removed and replaced. C. Storage and Protection 1.Special care shall be taken to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun, or exposed to extremes in temperature, to prevent deformation. See the individual piping sections and manufacturer's information for further requirements. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Special tools and the manufacturer's standard spare parts, if required for normal operation B. C. and maintenance, shall be supplied with the equipment in accordance with Section 01 70 00 and where noted, as specified herein. Tools shall be packaged in a steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. Provide one Operations and Maintenance manual for each type of valve and operator supplied under this specification in accordance with Section 01 70 00. Included within the Operations and Maintenance manuals, provide a list of all spare and replacement parts with individual prices and location where they are available. 1.10 VALVE DESIGNATIONS AND SCHEDULE A. All valves shall be identified by a unique valve tag as identified in the valve schedule prepared by the Contractor. The specific type of valve to be used will be identified by the symbol and/or call out on the Drawings. The Contractor shall identify each valve by its assigned tag number on all shop drawings and equipment submittals. B. The Contractor shall refer to the P&IDs and Process Mechanical Plans for type of each valve called out by abbreviation or drawing symbol. Prior to the first valve submittal, Contractor shall submit a detailed valve schedule listing all of the process valves to be furnished along with the Contract Drawing P&IDs edited electronically which shall include the valve tag numbers prepared by the Contractor identifying each valve. This valve schedule shall NOT include the valves furnished under Division 33 or in Plumbing and HVAC sections of Division 23. The valve schedule shall include: valve tag number; valve designation; valve size; end connections and operator type. The valve tag convention shall be in compliance with valve abbreviation and drawing symbols, numbering shall be linked to the P&ID Sheet on which it is shown. Identical valves in the same position in parallel processes (EX. Pump inlet/outlet isolation valves where there are 3 parallel pumps of same type) shall have same tag number followed by a hyphen and quantifier -1, 2, 3 etc. Where electric, hydraulic or pneumatic actuators are supplied their type shall be so noted with an E, H or P. Modulating duty actuators shall be noted with an M following the actuator type notation. An excerpt of an EXAMPLE schedule is as follows: Valve Tag. Designation Size Ends Operator Notes PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT - GENERAL A. Reference is made to Division 40 for additional requirements, including nameplates, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 provisions for temporary pressure gauges, protection against electrolysis and anchor bolts. B. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. C. Valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted and as far as possible equipment of the same type shall be identical and from one manufacturer. D. Valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows, working pressure for which they are designed and standard referenced, cast in raised letters or via riveted stainless steel nameplate upon some appropriate part of the body. E. Unless otherwise noted, items shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psig or be of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. F. Joints, size and material - unless otherwise noted or required by the Engineer: 1.Except where noted, all joints referred to herein shall be of the same type, nominal diameter, material and with a minimum rating equal to the pipe or fittings they are connected to. 2.Valves and appurtenances shall be of the same nominal diameter as the pipe or fittings they are connected to. 3.All valves exposed to view, or in vaults: a.Plastic valves in chemical service - solvent cement, or flanged ends. b.3-in and smaller - threaded ends- unless noted otherwise herein or on the Drawings. c. 4-in and larger - flanged ends. G. Provide all special adaptors as required to ensure compatibility between valves, appurtenances and adjacent pipe. H. Valves and actuators located outdoors but not within a building; within maximum 2-ft above liquid; in vaults; or where otherwise noted shall be especially designed for submerged service where water may completely submerge the valve and operator. All other units shall be as a minimum weather tight. I. No alternative materials will be considered for approval unless complete documentation is provided regarding their satisfactory long-term use in similar conditions; in addition, the consideration of any substitution will be considered only if the superiority of the proposed materials is the intent of the substitution, and only if sufficient evidence is provided to document that superiority. 2.2 VALVE ACTUATORS – GENERAL/ MANUAL A. See the Paragraph 2.01H above for submergence requirements. B. The valve manufacturer shall supply, mount and test all actuators on valves at the factory. The valves and their individual actuators shall be shipped as a unit. C. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, valves shall be manually actuated; non-buried valves shall have an operating wheel, handle or lever mounted on the operator; those with operating nuts shall have a non-rising stem with an AWWA 2-in nut; At least two tee handles shall be provided for all operating nuts. Unless otherwise noted, operation for all valves shall be CCW open. D. Manually actuated butterfly valves 6 inches and smaller for fluid service shall have a 10 position, spring retained ratcheting handle. Handle shall be fusion bonded epoxy coated steel or cast iron, hardware, spring and ratcheting plate shall be 316 stainless steel. Manually actuated butterfly valves for air service 6 inches and smaller shall have a memory stop handle with infinite throttling position capability. Memory stop plate and all hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. E. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein, all valves 3-in diameter or larger, with the valve hand wheel center line located 7-ft or more above the operating floor, shall be provided with chain wheel operators complete with chain guides and hot dipped galvanized steel chain, which loop within 4-ft of the operating floor. These requirements shall supersede positioning lever actuator requirements of manual butterfly valves 6 inches and smaller. F. All actuators shall be capable of moving the valve from the full open to full close position and in reverse and holding the valve at any position part way between full open or closed. G. Each operating device shall have cast on it the word "OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction of operation. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 H. Floor boxes for operating nuts recessed in concrete shall be standard cast iron type, cast in place, with fastening top by Clow or equal. I. Stem guides shall be of the adjustable wall bracket type, bronze bushed, with maximum spacing of 10-ft as manufactured by Clow; Rodney Hunt or equal. Extended operating nuts and/or stems shall have universal joints and pin couplings, if longer than 10-ft and a rating of at least five times the maximum operating torque. Stem adaptors shall be provided. J. Where required by the installation, or as specified, provide the following: extended stem; floor stand and handwheel; position indicator and etched or cast arrow to show direction of rotation to open the valve; resilient, moisture-resistant seal around stem penetration of slab. K. Gear Actuators 1.Unless otherwise noted, gear actuators shall be provided for the following: plug and ball valves larger than 3-in diameter; butterfly valves larger than 6 inch diameter; where specified and/or indicated on the Drawings; where manual operator effort is greater than 40 lbs rim pull. 2.Actuators shall be capable of being removed from the valve without dismantling the valve or removing the valve from the line. 3.Gear actuators for quarter turn valves shall be of the worm or helical worm gear type with output shaft perpendicular to valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft. Where shown on the Drawings, a 2 inch cast iron operating nut shall be provided. Actuators shall conform to AWWA C504 except where more stringent requirements are provided hereinafter. Gearing shall be machine cut steel designed for smooth operation. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated, with bronze bearing bushings provided to take all thrusts and mechanical shaft seals to contain lubricants. Housings shall be sealed to exclude moisture and dirt, allow the reduction mechanisms to operate in lubricant and be constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B, or of ductile iron, ASTM A536. Gear housing bodies for thermoplastic valves may be cast aluminum or fabricated steel to reduce weight. Gear actuators shall indicate valve position and have adjustable stops. 4.Where indicated on the Drawings, gear actuators for butterfly valves shall be of the travelling nut type with output shaft perpendicular to valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft. Unless noted they shall conform to AWWA C504. Stem shaft shall be machine cut alloy steel, nut and cross head shall be bronze, lever shall be ductile iron. Nut Actuators for valves 24-in and smaller shall be slotted lever design, actuators for valves greater than 24 inch shall be link and lever design. Mechanism shall be lubricated with water resistant extreme pressure NLGI No. 2 grease. Bevel gear reduction box shall be mounted on the actuator when required to meet specified manual operating effort requirements Gear actuators shall have mechanical, external indication of valve position and have adjustable threaded stops secured to the stem with spring pins. Stop shall be capable of withstanding 450-fts-lb of input torque. Stop adjustment requiring shims are not acceptable. 5.Manual Input torque to produce required valve operating torque for worm and travelling nut gear operators shall not exceed 80 ft-lbs. In addition, hand wheel rim pull shall not exceed 20 lbs for valve sizes up to 12 inches, 40 lbs for valve size between 14 and 20 inches, 60 lbs for valve size 24 and greater. Minimum hand wheel size shall be 8 inches for up to 12 inch valve size, 12 inches for up to 16 inch valve size, 18 inches for up to 20 inch size. 6.Gear actuators for multi turn valves shall be of the bevel or spiral bevel type with output shaft perpendicular to valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft. Gearing shall be machine cut steel designed for smooth operation. Bearings shall be permanently grease lubricated, with dual anti-friction ball bearings on the output shaft and mechanical shaft seals to contain lubricants. The output flange of the primary gear reducer shall be designed to meet an appropriate MSS or ISO standard to allow mounting to the secondary gear reducer. The ring gear shall ride on ball bearings. The stem nut shall be bronze alloy, shouldered, and ride on needle bearings. Housing components shall be o-ring sealed to exclude moisture and dirt, constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B, or of ductile iron, ASTM A536. Gear housing bodies for thermoplastic valves may be cast aluminum or fabricated steel to reduce weight. Manual operator input effort to the hand wheel shall be a maximum of 30 lbs for operating the valve from full open to full close, under any conditions. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 Maximum hand wheel size shall be 24-in diameter. L. Additional valve actuator requirements are included with the individual valve types and as noted in Paragraph 1.02 above. M. All position indication and direction of opening arrows shall be embossed, stamped, engraved, etched or raised castings. Decals or painted indications shall not be allowed. N. Unless otherwise noted, all valves larger than 3-in nominal diameter shall be provided with position indicators at the point of operation. 2.3 VALVE ACTUATORS – POWERED A. General 1.Electric actuators for ¼ turn valves three inches and under which do not have submergence requirements, and which exhibit a maximum torque specified below shall be operated on 120 volt single phase power as specified below. All other actuators shall be operated on 480 volt power. 2.The actuators shall conform to AWWA Standard C540, insofar as applicable and as herein specified. Actuators shall be O-ring sealed, watertight to standard NEMA 4X/6, submersion to 6 feet for 30 minutes. Actuators installed in vaults below grade and elsewhere subject to submergence shall be watertight to standard NEMA 6P/IP68, 15 ft for 72 hours minimum. Actuators installed in hazardous locations as noted on the Electrical Drawings and/or area classification sheets of the Architectural Drawings shall be FM certified explosion proof for Class 1 Division 1 & 2, Groups C & D and also meet the standard NEMA 4X/6 rating. 3.Valve service/operation shall be as indicated on the P&IDs and as specified in the Control Descriptions in Division 40. 4.Actuators shall be configured as required to provide for part turn or multi-turn and be coupled with gearboxes as required to obtain the speed and operating torque as required for the valve or gate it controls. 5.Modulating actuators shall contain proportional control unit and be capable of 1200 starts per hour, open-closed valve actuators shall not require a proportional control unit, and be capable of 60 starts per hour. 6.Where shown on the Instrumentation Drawings, actuators shall have a digital control module, to allow valves or gates to be positioned remotely via a 2-wire non-proprietary field bus protocol. The digital control module shall be equipped with serial communication ports to allow actuation to be linked by a two wire local area network utilizing Modbus function code (report by exception) and arranged in a self-healing ring configuration, with multi-drop taps to each actuator. B. 120 Volt Single Phase Reversing, Non Spring Return Electric Actuators for ¼ Turn Valves, 100 to 1000 in-lb Torque Range 1.Valve actuators shall be sized by the valve supplier meeting the requirements of AWWA C540. Actuators shall be mounted on the valves in the valve supplier’s facility, and factory tested. 2.Actuators shall operate on 120 volt, 60 Hz single phase, power supply. Enclosure rating shall be NEMA 4X, constructed of cast aluminum or steel alloy, powder coated or fusion bonded epoxy finish. 3.Power train shall be self-locking planetary epicyclical gear design, consisting of hardened steel and or hardened bronze alloy gears with bronze bearings. Housing penetrations shall be sealed with mechanical seals. Housing shall be equipped with space heaters. Valve mounting system shall be ISO 5211. 4.Actuator shall be designed for open/close/jog reversing service. Proportional/modulating service shall be provided where required in the equipment specifications or Instrumentation Drawings. Actuators shall have visual mechanical indication of position. Manual override shall be direct worm drive with minimum 5 inch diameter hand wheel. Hand wheel size shall be provided such that a maximum 40 lb rim pull is required. 5.Motors shall be designed specifically for valve actuation service, with Class F insulation, with split phase capacitor protection. Duty cycle shall not be less than 40% at 100 deg F. for open/close duty, and 100% for modulating duty. 90 degree travel time shall vary from 10 to 20 seconds depending on actuator size. Actuators shall have SPDT contacts for remote valve position indication. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 6.Actuators shall be P Series as manufactured by Promation Engineering, Brooksville, FL, or equal. C. 480 Volt Powered Actuators for Part Turn or Multi-Turn Valve Operation 1.Per Division 40 Specifications. 2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES: TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. AWWA Butterfly Valves for Clear Water Service: Tag Type BFV 1.Butterfly valves and operators up to 72-in diameter shall conform to AWWA C504, Class B, except as specified herein. The manufacturer shall submit an affidavit of compliance stating that the valves have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA C504 and specifically listing all exceptions. Valves shall have a minimum 150 psi pressure rating or higher as noted on the Drawings or in this Section and be manufactured by M&H; Dezurik; Val-Matic; Henry Pratt or equal. 2.Butterfly valves for above grade service shall be flanged end with face to face dimensions in accordance with Table 2 of AWWA C504 for short-body valve. All valves for dead end shut off service shall be flanged type. 3.Valve seats shall be full resilient seats retained in the body or on the disc edge in accordance with AWWA C504. Valve discs shall be constructed of cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 40; Ni-resist, ASTM A436, Type 1; or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65- 45-12. 4.The resilient seat shall be attached to the body, discs shall have Type 316 stainless steel seating edges. . Resilient seats shall be EPDM. On 30” and above, seats shall be fully adjustable and replaceable with the valves in line using no special tools. 5.The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12, with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the through boss-type. Permanently self-lubricating body bushings shall be provided and shall be sized to withstand bearing loads. 6.Packing shall be of the self compensating U-Cup type. 7.Valves 30-in or larger shall use a stuffing box with follower gland. 8.The valve shaft shall be of Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. No reductions of shaft diameter will be allowed except at the operator connection. Any reduction shall have a full radius fillet. 9.Butterfly valve actuator shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C504, insofar as applicable and as specified herein. Gearing for the actuators where required shall be totally enclosed in a gear case in accordance with AWWA C504. Actuators shall have permanent indicators with raised or engraved marks to show position of the valve disc. 2.5 GATE VALVES TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. General Requirements 1.Unless otherwise specified below, these requirements shall apply to all gate valves. 2.Gate valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 as applicable to the type of valve specified. 3.Submerged valves shall be furnished with mechanical joints and 316 stainless steel hardware; non rising stem design. Flanges shall be provided if so indicated on the Drawings. 4.Exposed valves shall be furnished with Class 125 flanged ends; provide valves with bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel. 5.Rising stem valves shall be sealed with adjustable and replaceable packing; valve design must permit packing replacement under operating system pressures with only moderate leakage. 6.Non rising stem valves shall utilize a minimum of two O ring stem seals. 7.Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be rated at or above for the following working water pressures: Valve Size Pressure (psig) 3-in to 12-in 200 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 14-in to 30-in 150 36-in and greater as specified a.All valve bodies shall be hydrostatically tested to at least twice the rated working water pressure. In addition, valves shall be seat tested, bi-directional at the rated working pressure, with seat leakage not to exceed one fluid ounce per inch of valve diameter per hour. Provide certificates of testing. 8.Flanged valves to have face to face dimensions per ANSI B16.10 and flanges per ANSI B16.1. 9.Exposed valves 18-in and larger shall have valve by pass, by-pass valves shall be of same disc type as main valve and shall meet these specifications. 10.All bonnet and packing gland bolts shall be 316 stainless steel; packing gland bolts shall have bronze nuts. 11.Exposed valves 16-in and greater indicated for horizontal stem installation shall be furnished with rollers, tracks and scrapers and enclosed bevel gear grease case. 12.Provide geared operator and chain wheel, chain and chain guides for valves with handwheel centerline more than 7-ft above operating level. 13.All valves shall be marked per AWWA Standards, including name of manufacturer, valve size and working pressure and year of manufacture. 14.Unless otherwise indicated, valves 12-in and smaller shall be capable of installation in the vertical or horizontal position, and sealing in both directions at the rated pressure. B. Valve Applications 1.Valves for Potable Water Service: a.Double disc design manufactured by Kennedy/ M&H/ Clow Valve. b.Double revolving disc manufactured by American R/D Valve; Anchor Darling. c. Solid wedge-resilient seated design as manufactured by Mueller Co; J & H Valve; M&H/Clow Valve; American Flow Control; American R/D Valve. C. Valve Requirements 1.Double Disc: Tag Type GV1 a.Conform to AWWA C500. b.Wedging surfaces shall be bronze, Monel or stainless steel. 2.Double Revolving Disc: Tag Type GV2 a.Conform to applicable provisions of AWWA C500. b.Wedging surfaces shall be Monel or hardened stainless steel. c. Discs fully free to rotate, guided in travel by cast surfaces. d.Disc rotation shall produce a self-cleaning action during opening or closing. e.Wedging forces applied only when discs are in seating position. 3.Solid Wedge: Tag Type GV3 a.All metal valves shall be manufactured of ASTM A126 Cast Iron, Class B. Wedge seating surfaces and body seat rings shall be cast from B62 bronze. And shall conform to AWWA C500. b.Shall be coated internally and externally with an asphaltic varnish, per AWWA C500. c. Body shall have tongue and grooved guides for wedges. 4.Resilient Seated: Tag type GV4 a.Resilient seated valves shall be manufactured of ASTM A536 ductile iron, nitrile rubber disc per AWWA C509, manganese bronze or 316 stainless steel stem and trim, full port design, 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners as required in general requirements. Valves shall conform to AWWA C509 and be UL and FM approved. b.Shall have internal and external fusion bonded epoxy coating of valve body, including bonnet, per AWWA C550. c. Gate shall be encapsulated with synthetic rubber. It shall be bonded and vulcanized in accordance with ASTM B429 Method B. d.Shall have no recesses in valve body. D. Gate Valves 3 inch and Smaller: Tag Type GV5 1.Gate valves 2.5-in diameter and smaller shall have screwed ends and shall be bronze body. Gate valves 3-in diameter shall be flanged end, iron or bronze body. Gate shall February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 be brass, bronze, or Type 304 stainless steel solid wedge; union bonnet; silicon bronze rising-stem; equal to Jenkins Figure 47CUJ, division of Crane Valve Group; Lunkenheimer Figure 3127, Cincinnati Valve Co, Fairbanks Figure U-0252, or equal. Model numbers referenced above are for screwed ends, flanged shall be equal construction with appropriate end connections. Iron body valves shall be installed in steel or iron pipelines. E. Tapping Valves and Sleeves: Tag Type TGV 1.Under no circumstances shall a standard gate valve be used for a tapping valve. Tapping valves shall comply with the same requirements as solid wedge, resilient seat or double disc gate valves except they shall have the flanged end and port opening modified for tapping service. Tapping valves shall be provided with plugged flush port at bottom of gate guide and plugged tap for pressure/leak testing. Valves shall be capable of passing a full nominal sized cutter without damage to the valve. The tapping sleeve shall be gray cast iron or ductile iron mechanical joint type with the outlet flange conforming to MSS SP 60. 2.6 BALL VALVES: TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. General Service Ball Valves: Tag Type BV 1.Valves shall be bronze, resilient seated, full port, threaded two piece bolted body type valves. Manual valves shall have locking levers. The body and cap shall be of brass, ASTM B30, the ball and stem of Type 316 stainless steel and the seats and seals of glass filled TFE. The balls shall be full floating, non-lubricated. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. 2.Valves shall be Jamesbury Series 2000 Style 21 as manufactured by Metso Automation; or equal. B. Corrosion Resistant Ball Valves 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Tag type BV2. 1.Valves shall be two-piece stainless steel full port; solid ball construction with bottom loading stems, and adjustable packing with manual locking lever actuator. 2.Body shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 or ASTM A351 GR CF8M stainless steel, 2000 psig rated at 200 Deg F, FNPT ends. Ball and stem shall be type 316 stainless steel. Seats and seals shall be reinforced PTFE. 3.Valves shall be Jamesbury Series 6F as manufactured by Metso Automation; KF Contromatics Series 8000, equal by Milwaukee; or equal. C. Corrosion Resistant Ball Valves 3 Inch and Larger: Tag Type BV3. 1.Valves shall be two-piece full port stainless steel, solid, floating ball construction with bottom loading stems. Working pressure 250 psig; end connections shall be 150 lb full face flange. 2.Body: Stainless steel, ASTM A351, Grade C8M, Type 316. Ball/stem: ASTM B164 Ni- Cu Alloy- (alloy 400) Seats/seals: Reinforced PTFE. 3.Shall be Model WKM Dynaseal 310C or equal D. V-Port Ball Valves for Process Flow Control: Tag Type VPB1. 1.Valves shall be 3 piece, bolted body, soft seat, V-port insert design. Ends shall be flanged, Class 150, ANSI B16.5. Valves actuator shall be electric motorized, modulating. Valve characteristics shall provide for the operating conditions shown on the Drawings. 2.Body: Type 316 stainless steel; Ball and characterized insert: Type 316 stainless steel with hard chrome face. Shaft: Type 316 stainless steel, one piece. Seats: 316 stainless steel filled PTFE, replaceable; Packing: PTFE. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. 3.Valves shall be Marwin CV 3000, or equal. 2.7 THERMOPLASTIC VALVES TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW. A. General 1.All valves shall be certified as completely compatible with the intended and specified service; compatibility shall apply to the material of the valve and internal components, including all seals, gaskets, O rings and washers; solvents and primers used in valve joint make up shall be specifically in conformance with the written instructions of the valve supplier. Service chemicals and service conditions are shown in the piping sections in Division 40. 2.Except as otherwise specified valve ends shall be socket type designed for solvent February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 welding. Solvent and primer shall be as specified in the piping specifications, except that valves installed in systems carrying strong oxidizing, high alkalinity, and strong acid solutions shall contain NO fumed silica, and shall be Weld-On 724 for CPVC pipe as manufactured by IPS Corp., Compton, CA and Oatey Industrial Grade Low VOC Heavy Duty Gray for PVC pipe as manufactured by Oatey Corp., Cleveland OH. 3.Valve material shall be the same as the piping service except as specified. a.PVC shall be Type 1, Grade 1, per ASTM D1784 classification, made from unplasticized polymer, and generally suitable for service to 120 degrees F. b.CPVC shall be Type 4, Grade 1, per ASTM D1784, classification generally suitable for service to 180 degrees F. c. Polypropylene (PP) shall conform to the material requirements of ASTM D4101 for copolymer polypropylene. d.PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) shall be manufactured from high molecular weight polymers of vinylidene fluoride. e.The manufacturer of the valves shall retain material source quality documentation and shall furnish it to the Engineer upon request. 4.Unless otherwise specified: a.O rings, valve seats and stem seals shall be Teflon, or Teflon encapsulated elastomer. Alternative materials shall not be substituted without complete documentation provided to the Engineer of service suitability. b.Flange Gaskets shall be low torque, full face ANSI B16.5 with two concentric convex rings between ID and bolt hole diameter, constructed of EPDM, PTFE bonded EPDM or PVDF-bonded EPDM as manufactured by Asahi of America or equal. Documentation shall be provided to show compatibility of the bonded surface material for the fluid service intended. c. Valve external hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. No internal metallic components shall be exposed to the service fluid. d.No factory or field coatings shall be applied to the valves. 5.All valves, except butterfly valves shall have a non shock service pressure rating of not less than 120 psig at 70 degrees F. 6.All valves shall be given hydrostatic and pressure and leakage tests at the factory. Provide certified copy of test results. 7.Valves shall be the standard, catalogued products of the following manufacturers: a.Chemtrol b.Asahi/America c. Plast O Matic d.George-Fischer e.Hayward 8.Valves specified as furnished with equipment or equipment systems shall comply with these requirements. B. Ball Valves: Tag Type TBV 1.Ball valves shall be the double union type, unless otherwise specified, full port, adjustable seats. 2.Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite service shall be PVC body, furnished with socket ends, EPDM O-rings, Teflon seals and seats. Sodium hypochlorite service ball valves shall have the ball drilled to permit venting of pressure and gas from the confined ball cavity, when the valve is closed. The drilling shall vent to the upstream end of the valve. The drilling shall be 1/8-in opening, de burred for valves smaller than 1-inch diameter. For valve 1-inch diameter and larger, the ball shall be drilled with a 3/8-inch diameter opening. An arrow shall be inscribed on the valve body to indicate direction of flow. Field-drilled opening is not allowed. 3.Provide quarter turn manual valve operator unless mechanized actuators are specified on the drawings. C. Butterfly Valves: Tag Type TBFV 1.Valves shall be of the lined body design with PVC body and PP disc with only the liner and the disc as wetted parts. The liner shall be molded and formed around the body, functioning as a gasket on each side of the valve. Double O-ring seals on top and bottom disc trunnions will fully isolate a Type 316 stainless steel straight-through stem. Liner, seat, o-rings and seal shall be Teflon. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 2.The valves shall be wafer style, and lug style for dead end service as applicable. 3.Each valve shall be furnished with a lever actuator on sizes through 6-in; gear operator on sizes 8-in and larger. 4.Butterfly valves shall be Type 57 as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. D. Diaphragm valves: Tag Type TDV 1.Valves shall have double union ends. Acid service valves shall have flanged ends. 2.Valve body and bonnet shall be of solid CPVC. Acid service body and bonnet shall be PVDF, ASTM D3222 Cell Classification Type II. 3.Diaphragms shall be EPDM. Acid service diaphragms shall be layered EPDM, PVDF gas barrier, PTFE wetted. 4.The valve shall have a full width weir, designed for throttling, and complete bubble tight closure. 5.Provide a handwheel valve operator, with a stainless steel stem, a cast stem sleeve and a clear plastic stem cover with a position indicator; provide an adjustable limit stop to prevent over-travel. 6.Diaphragm valves shall be Type 14 as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. E. Gate Valves: Tag Type TGV 1.PVC gate valves shall be PVC body, non-rising stem, polypropylene plugs and viton seals. Where indicated on the drawings, valves shall be provided with stem extensions and handwheels, as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. F. Needle Valves: Tag Type TNV 1.Needle valves shall be designed for close control of flow throttling with a multi turn valve handle. Valves shall be PVC body, FPM seal, PTFE seat. Stem shall be 20 or 24 pitch for fine throttling control. Valve shall have lugs or panel screw on bonnet for panel mounting. 2.Needle valves shall be as manufactured by Chemline Plastics Limited, Haward, or equal. G. Ball Check Valves: Tag Type TBCV 1.Ball check valves shall be double union style with socket ends, solid and completely spherical ball, EPDM seals, PTFE seat, capable of either horizontal or vertical mounting. H. Diaphragm Check Valves: Tag type TDCV 1.Diaphragm check valves shall be union PVC, CPVC or PVDF body, thread or socket weld ends, EPDM or FKM diaphragms. Valves shall be mountable in any position, and shall be Plast-O-Matic model CKM or equal. I. Swing Check Valves: Tag Type TSCV 1.Swing check valves shall be high impact PVC body; seats and seals EPDM, AFPM or PTFE as required by fluid service; disc serviceable from top entry without removing valve, o-ring sealed top flange, ANSI flanged ends. Outside lever and weight and limit switch mounting shall be provided where shown on the drawings. J. Backpressure Regulating/Control Valves: Tag Type TBPV 1.Spring loaded diaphragm design, fully adjustable pressure setting, set to assure continuous positive pressure at the pump discharge. 2.Furnish with Teflon diaphragms and elastomer coated springs. 3.Body shall be of same material as pipeline in which it is installed or, CPVC if not otherwise specified. Valves shall be manufactured by Plast-O-Matic, or equal. K. Pressure Relief Valves: Tag Type TPRV 1.Angle pattern design, with adjustable relief pressure and locking nut. Spring loaded, with pressure adjustable over range up to 100 psig. 2.The valve spring shall be elastomer coated and isolated from the process flow. Provide Teflon diaphragms. 3.Relief valves shall be piped as indicated, and if not indicated, the relief piping shall be directed to the floor or adjacent gutter or drain. 4.Pressure relief valve settings shall be set to a pressure as recommended by the pump or equipment supplier and adjusted at the time of equipment testing, inspection and start up. 5.Body shall be of same material as pipeline in which it is installed or, CPVC if not otherwise specified. Valves shall be equal to Model RVD by Plast-O-Matic; Type A by Asahi-America or equal. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 L. Air Relief Valves: Tag Type TARV 1.Self guided poppet design. 2.Seals at 0 psig and bubble tight as low as 10 psig. 3.No metallic components. 4.Installed in vertical orientation only. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 2.8 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES: TAG TYPE PCV A. Pressure regulating valves shall be factory tested. Outlet pressure shall be easily field- adjustable over the pressure ranges and criteria noted on the Drawings. B. Threaded pressure regulating valves shall have unions mounted in the pipe on each side of the valve. C. Strainers for installation upstream of pressure regulating valves are specified elsewhere. The pressure regulating valve manufacturer shall specify the screen mesh or size of perforations that are required to protect the regulating valve. The valve supplier shall furnish both valve and strainer. D. Pressure Regulating Valves – 3-in and larger 1.Valves 3-in and larger and for pressure regulating shall be flanged with globe body, fully bronze mounted, external pilot operated, spring-loaded diaphragm type single seat with seat base equal to size of valve and shall be equal to the Figure x-4500D (with an industrial chrome finish) Pressure Reducing Valve as manufactured by GA Industries Inc., Pittsburgh, PA; or equal by Cla Val Company, Newport Beach, CA. 2.The valve shall be packed with leather material acceptable to the Engineer to ensure tight closure and prevent metal to metal friction and sticking. The valve shall be furnished with indicator rod, to show position of opening of the piston, and pet cocks for attachment to valve body for receiving gauges for testing purposes. 3.The pilot valve, controlling operation of the main valve, shall be easily accessible and so arranged to allow for its removal from the main valve, while the main valve is under pressure. The pilot valve shall be easily adjustable without removal of the springs, weights or use of special tools. The control piping on the valves shall have strainers to prevent plugging of control mechanisms. 4.The design shall be such that repairs and dismantling internally of main valve may be made without its removal from the line. 5.The unit shall be flanged. The valve body shall be constructed of cast iron. 6.The valve shall maintain pre adjusted downstream pressure for varying rates of flow through the positioning of the diaphragm by the pilot without causing: water hammer or waste of water and without cavitation. E. Pressure Regulating Valves – 2-in and Smaller 1.Pressure regulating valves 2-in and smaller shall be rated 150 psig working pressure, with bronze and brass body; renewable stainless steel seat and flexible diaphragm of suitable material. Outlet pressure shall be easily field-adjustable over the pressure ranges tabulated. 2.Pressure regulating valves 2-in and smaller shall be Figure No. 43D as manufactured by GA Industries, Inc.; Watts Muesco Regulator Co. Series 115 for 1-1/4-in and larger and Model 223 S for units smaller than 1-1/4-in or equal with strainer and of size noted on the Drawing. Shall be diaphragm type, pressure reducing globe valves designed for an inlet pressure of approximately 110 psig, and outlet pressures in the range of 20 to 60 psig. 2.9 SOLENOID VALVES: TAG TYPE SV A. Solenoid valves shall be packless piston type direct acting for sizes less than 1 in and internal pilot operated for sizes 1-in and larger, 2 way or 3 way, valves and shall be ASCO Valve; Red Hat by Automatic Switch Co., similar by Circle Seal Controls-Atkomatic Valve Co. or equal for air and water service. B. Valves shall be energized to open, except for valves on water seal lines to pumps which shall be energize to close. C. Valves shall have forged brass bodies, NPT end connections of the connected piping Type 304 stainless steel internal parts, and Buna N or Ethylene Propylene valve seats. Valves shall have a minimum 150 psig safe working pressure and zero minimum operating pressure differential. Connections shall be threaded or as indicated in the Drawings. D. Solenoid valves size 2-inch and larger shall be full bore bronze body, 430 Stainless Steel plunger, copper coil class A encapsulated, 302 stainless steel spring, wash-down safe, equal to type A as manufactured by Magnatrol Valve Corp., Hawthorne, NJ or equal. Solenoid valves shall have a manual override actuated by a handle levered plunger mounted on the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 bottom of the valve body. These valves must be mounted in a horizontal run of piping, with the solenoid up in the vertical position. E. Note that solenoid valves may be shown on Electrical and/or Mechanical Drawings, or may only be specified, but if so specified or shown, shall be provided. Solenoid valves located in hazardous classified areas shall be provided with electrical enclosures which satisfy the electrical classification as specified or shown on the electrical drawings. A NEMA 4X enclosure is the minimum and be provided with a continuous duty Class F coil. 2.10 CORPORATION STOPS: TAG TYPE CS A. 3/4" through 2" Corporation Stops shall be ball valve type, meeting AWWA Standard C800- 01, Sec. 4.2.3 (High Pressure), withstanding working pressures up to 300 psi. The body, ball, operating stem, T-head, and service line connector shall be manufactured from red brass and conform to ASTM B62 and/or ASTM B584, UNS No. C83600. The ball shall be fluorocarbon coated and shall float on two EPDM seats and be watertight in both directions. The operating stem and nut shall be one piece, held in place by a mating machined flange on the stem and in the body. The operating stem shall have an EPDM O-ring to provide a watertight seal against the body. B. Inlet threads shall be AWWA Taper, except where used with service clamps, where threads shall be IPS threads. All thread types and diameters shall conform to AWWA C800. The inlet threads will be integral to the body. The waterway diameter shall be approximately equivalent to the nominal size of the stop, and shall accommodate the maximum cutter size established by AWWA C800. The outlet shall be a compression connection meeting AWWA C800 Sec. 4.4.9. C. Corporation Stops shall be FB Style Ballcorp, as manufactured by The Ford Meter Box Company, Inc., Wabash, Indiana, or equal by Mueller – Model H-15008 (or H-15013), James Jones Corporation, or McDonald. Where corporation stops are used with plastic pipe, a brass companion flange shall be provided on the outlet of each corporation stop. 2.11 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES: TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. All valves shall be supplied with shutoff gate or ball valves with operator handle or lever removed. Valves shall be properly vented and piped to drain. B. Valve pressure rating shall be at least equal to the attached pipe's rating. C. Valves for sewage service shall have connections for draining and flushing with isolation ball valves for connection size up to 3 inch, and solid wedge gate valves for size 4 inch and larger. D. Air Release Valves: Tag Type ARV 1.Small orifice assembly air release valves shall automatically release air accumulations from the pipe while under positive pressure. When the valve body fills with air, the float mechanism shall fall to open the small orifice and exhaust the air to atmosphere. When the air has been exhausted, the float mechanism shall be buoyed up and shall tightly close the small orifice. The small orifice assembly shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel body and cover, and shall use 316 stainless steel hardware. The float mechanism shall be constructed of polypropylene or 316 stainless steel. All wetted components shall be polypropylene, Buna-N or 316 stainless steel. A resilient, Buna N seat shall provide drop tight closure. 2.Separate air release valves shall be Vent-O-Mat Model RBXb, equal as ARI of the special type for use with non clean water. 3.For clean water acceptable manufacturers are Pratt, GA Industries-LLC, Val-matic, and ARI. E. Vacuum Relief Valves: Tag Type VRV 1.Large orifice assembly vacuum valves shall automatically allow air to enter pipeline when pressure falls below atmospheric pressure. Vacuum relief valves shall not be configured to release air. 2.Vacuum relief valves shall be constructed as specified in subparagraph F below, except providing vacuum relief only, as manufactured by Pratt, GA Industries or Vent- O-Mat or as indicated on the Drawings. F. Combination Air and Vacuum Relief Valves: Tag Type CAV 1.Valves shall be designed to release large amounts of air during pipeline filling, release small amounts of air accumulated during pipeline operation, and allow large volume of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 air during pipeline drainage or pipe break. Combination double orifice air/vacuum valve for general service in sizes 1 to 6 inches housed in a tubular stainless steel body with epoxy powder coated cast iron or steel ends secured by means of stainless steel tie rods. Valve shall have an intake orifice area equal to the nominal size of the valve. 2.Air release/vacuum valves shall be compact single cylindrical chamber design with multiple solid cylindrical HDPE control floats. Discharge of pressurized air shall be controlled by the seating and unseating of a small orifice nozzle on a natural rubber seal affixed into the control float. The nozzle shall have a flat seating land surrounding the orifice so that damage to the rubber seal is prevented. Venting of large quantities of air during pipeline filling shall be accomplished through the large orifice at the top of the valve. Large orifice sealing shall be affected by the flat face of the control float seating against an “O” ring housed in a dovetail groove circumferentially surrounding the orifice. The valve shall feature integral ‘Anti-Shock’ Orifice mechanism in the top float which shall operate automatically to limit transient pressure rise or shock induced by closure to twice the valves rated working pressure. Vacuum relief shall be accomplished through the large orifice when the control floats fall due to negative pressure in the pipeline. The valve design shall incorporate an over pressure safety feature that will fail without an explosive effect, such as is normally the case when highly compressed air is released suddenly. The feature shall consist of easily replaceable gaskets. 3.Valves shall be rated for 230 psig service. Materials of construction shall be as follows: barrel- 304L stainless steel; top and bottom flanges- fusion bonded epoxy steel; upper/lower floats and anti-shock orifice- UHMW PE; small orifice nozzle seat and o- rings- Buna-N; nozzle, baffle plate, tie rods, studs, nuts, washers- 304 stainless steel. End Connections shall be NPT up to 2 inch, 125 lb flange 3 to 6 inch. 4.Valves shall be as manufactured by GA Industries or equal by Pratt, or Vent-O-Mat, Model RBX 2521 or 1631 or as indicated on the Drawings. 2.12 HOSE END VALVES: TAG TYPE HEV A. Hose end valves shall be globe pattern valves, similar to Fairbanks Fig. 074; Jenkins Fig. 112 or equal. Furnish cap and chain. 2.13 INSULATING FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be of type to provide control of electrolysis and similar to "Dielectric" as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., or equal. 2.14 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. All valves (inclusive of valve actuators) shall be finished painted by way of spray application prior to installation. Provide touch up paint after installed and commissioned. B. Notwithstanding any of these specified requirements, all coatings and lubricants in contact with potable water shall be certified as acceptable for use with that fluid. C. If not specified herein, coatings shall comply with the requirements of Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. In case of a conflict, the requirements of this Section govern. D. If the manufacturer's requirement is not to require finished coating on any interior surfaces, then manufacturer shall so state and no interior finish coating will be required, if acceptable to the Engineer. E. The exterior surface of various parts of valves, operators, floor stands and miscellaneous piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale, dirt, grease or other foreign matter and thereafter one shop coat of an approved rust inhibitive primer such as Inertol Primer No. 621 shall be applied in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer or other primer compatible with the finish coat provided. F. Unless otherwise noted, interior ferrous surfaces of all valves shall be given a shop finish epoxy conforming to AWWA C550 with a minimum thickness of 16 mils. G. Ferrous surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust resistant coating. Mounting surfaces shall be especially coated with a rust preventative. H. Special care shall be taken to protect uncoated items and plastic items, especially from environmental damage. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 2.15 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Factory inspection, testing and correction of deficiencies shall be done in accordance with the referenced standards and as noted herein. B. See Division 1 for additional requirements. Also refer to PART 1, especially for required submission of test data to the Engineer. C. In addition to all tests required by the referenced standards, the following shall also be factory tested: 1.Pressure regulating valves shall be factory tested at the specified pressures and flows. 2.Butterfly valves shall be factory tested to demonstrate drop tight closure at the specified conditions. 3.All types of air and vacuum valves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed. B. Install all brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings, or otherwise required. Before setting these items, check all Drawings and figures which have a direct bearing on their location. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of valves and appurtenances during the construction of the work. C. All materials shall be carefully inspected for defects in construction and materials. All debris and foreign material shall be cleaned out of openings, etc. All valve flange covers shall remain in place until connected piping is in place. All operating mechanisms shall be operated to check their proper functioning and all nuts and bolts checked for tightness. Valves and other equipment which do not operate easily, or are otherwise defective, shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Where installation is covered by a referenced standard, installation shall be in accordance with that standard, except as herein modified, and the Contractor shall certify such. Also note additional requirements in other parts of this Section. E. Unless otherwise noted, joints for valves and appurtenances shall be made up utilizing the same procedures as specified under the applicable type connecting pipe joint and all valves and other items shall be installed in the proper position as recommended by the manufacturer. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying manufacturers' torqueing requirements for all valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MANUAL OPERATIONAL DEVICES A. Unless otherwise noted, all operational devices shall be installed with the units of the factory, as shown on the Drawings or as acceptable to the Engineer to allow accessibility to operate and maintain the item and to prevent interference with other piping, valves and appurtenances. B. For manually operated valves 3-in in diameter and smaller, valve operators and indicators shall be rotated to display toward normal operation locations. C. Floor boxes, valve boxes, extension stems and low floor stands shall be installed vertically centered over the operating nut, with couplings as required and the elevation of the box top shall be adjusted to conform to the elevation of the finished floor surface or grade at the completion of the Contract. Boxes and stem guides shall be adequately supported during concrete placement to maintain vertical alignment. 3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. See also Division 1. Take care not to over pressure valves or appurtenances during pipe testing. If any unit proves to be defective, it shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Functional Test: Prior to plant startup, all items shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection and satisfactory performance. After installation, all manual valves shall be opened and closed in the presence of the Engineer to show the valve February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 18 of 18 Valves – 40 05 50 operates smoothly from full open to full close and without leakage. Valves equipped with electric, pneumatic or hydraulic actuators shall by cycled 5 times from full open to full closed in the presence of the Engineer without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating. Pressure control and pressure relief valves shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer to show they perform their specified function at some time prior to placing the piping system in operation and as agreed during construction coordination meetings. C. The various pipe lines in which the valves and appurtenances are to be installed are specified to be field tested. During these tests any defective valve or appurtenance shall be adjusted, removed and replaced, or otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. D. Various regulating valves, strainers, or other appurtenances shall be tested to demonstrate their conformance with the specified operational capabilities and any deficiencies shall be corrected or the device replaced or otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. 3.4 CLEANING A. All items including valve interiors shall be inspected before line closure, for the presence of debris. At the option of the Engineer, internal inspection of valve and appurtenances may be required any time that the likelihood of debris is a possibility. All pipes and valves shall be cleaned prior to installation, testing disinfection and final acceptance. 3.5 DISINFECTION A. Disinfection of valves and appurtenances on all potable water lines and where otherwise noted, shall be as noted in Paragraph 1.03B above. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment – 40 05 53 SECTION 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATON FOR PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GENERAL WORK INCLUDED A. Provide identifying devices for the following: Piping. Equipment. Electrical Equipment. Valves. HVAC equipment. Fire sprinkler and piping. Control devices. SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: Product data sheets for identifying devices. A list of where devices are to be installed, and the data to be included on each identifying device. List as necessary. STANDARDS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: ANSI A13.1 Pipe Marking Specifications DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store products inside storage sheds until installed. GUARANTEES The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Guarantee Identifying devices installed in wet locations or areas subject to moisture to be weather resistant for a period of 3 years after installation. PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Piping Identification: Pressure sensitive, adhesive-backed vinyl plastic label having the lettering indicated on background color as scheduled. Provide labels manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Corp. or Brady “Perma Code”. Provide labels having an arrow to indicate the direction of flow. Provide 1-1/4-inch high letters. B. Outdoor Pipe Markers: Seton “Weather Code” Fade resistant, vinyl markers, 2-1/4 by 9 inches. C. Valve Identification: Provide Seton [Style 2961, 1-1/2-inch round, plastic tag || Style 250-BL Black Filled, 1-1/2-inch round, brass tag] with proper identification stamped [or incised into plastic] on tag. Tag shall have the proper prefix followed by a code number that is unique and identifies the valve from all others in the project. Provide hole in top of tag for mounting chain. Provide brass jack chain, copper metal meter seals, or brass “S” hooks as appropriate. D. Equipment Nameplate: Seton Style 2060 “Seton-ply” engraved plastic plaque, approximately 3/4 by 2-1/2 inches in size. Plaque shall be 1/16 inch thick having beveled February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment – 40 05 53 edges and drilled with two mounting holes when attached by screws. Mounting screws shall be stainless steel. Lettering shall be approximately 3/16 inch high. Text to include equipment mark and equipment description (Example: EXHAUST FAN EF-5). Identification label on nameplate shall correspond to a typewritten legend included in the O & M Manual which includes the following: Equipment identifier. Location inside building (or on project site). Manufacturer’s model number. Brief description of function. Reference to shop drawings, parts lists, or other data included in the O & M Manual. E. Fire Sprinkler System Signs: Signs for fire protection system shall conform to NFPA-13 and shall be equal to Seton Style SFB, furnished in porcelain with “white on red” color. EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Install piping complete with insulation and valves in place prior to installing identification devices. Mount electrical components, including electrical control devices. Piping shall be dry and free of oil, grease, or other contaminants. Insulation shall be completely dry. INSTALLATION A. Install pipe labels on piping exposed to view, in any location inside buildings or structures, or in underground vaults, pump stations, basements, or other exposed locations. B. Install a minimum of one label in each area or room and additional labels at spacings not to exceed 5 feet. Position labels so that lettering is visible from the front of piping at floor level. Provide labels of a size that is legible from floor level. Install labels in rows with uniform spacings where several pipes run parallel to each other. C. Name the fluid flowing inside the pipe on color coded labels with text per the schedule below. Labels shall also include an arrow indicating the direction of flow. VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Install a valve tag on all valves. Attach the tag to hand wheel of valve stem so that it does not interfere with operation of valve tag brass link chains or copper meter seals furnished by the Tag Manufacturer. B. Number valves to correspond to a typewritten list included in the Operational and Maintenance Manual and include the following information: Valve Number. Description of piping fluid or purpose. Normal position of valve (Open or Closed). Manufacturer’s catalog number. Brief description of valve specification. Brief description of valve’s function in the system. C. Valve identification shall be based on the following example: Valve Number Function Locatio n Normal Position Mfg’s Cat No. Valve Type Description P-1 Domestic Water Rm. 103 Open Crane Fig. 315C Gate rising stem Shut off to heater EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an equipment identifier on each separate piece of equipment, including process equipment, HVAC equipment, plumbing equipment (other than plumbing fixtures), and electrical equipment. Provide a nameplate for each separate piece of electrical equipment, including but not limited to panelboards, switchgear, starters, disconnects, control devices and control panels. Provide name tags for each separate switch, starter, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment – 40 05 53 contactor, or other compartment on electrical switchgear. B. Engrave lettering on nameplates corresponding to the identification marks. Install nameplates prominently on equipment not occurring in occupied spaces. Install nameplates on the inside covers of lighting panelboards. Install nameplates on all other equipment centered and at top of equipment. Nameplates shall not be installed in a location that interferes with the equipment’s ability to operate. C. Attach nameplates to exterior equipment with two 3/8-inch stainless steel screws. Interior plaque may be attached by screws, or by the adhesion method when approved by the Engineer. SPECIAL GASES A. Provide a nameplate at each outlet of special gases at the laboratory. Attach nameplates directly above and centered on the outlet or valve. The label shall correspond with the supplied gas, and the plate color shall correspond with the incised identification disk installed on the valve. B. Install a nameplate above each active gas cylinder location with the complete name printed followed by the chemical designation (Example: Helium HE). Colors shall correspond to the color used on the cylinders as used by the Compressed Gas Association, Inc. ELECTRICAL OUTLET A. Provide a nameplate for electrical outlet listed below. The nameplate shall be white letters on red background, and shall specify the outlet’s voltage and ampere rating. The nameplate on special outlets shall have an appropriate warning. Lettering shall be 1/8 inch high. Overall plate size shall be approximately 3/4 by 2-1/2 inches. B. Provide nameplates on the following: 208/240 outlet: voltage and ampere rating. Special outlet: voltage, ampere rating and intended function (Example: Welder Outlet 240 V – 40 A). POTABLE AND NON-POTABLE WATER A. Provide name tags at every water hydrant or outlet. Fabricate name tags of 3/4-by-1-1/2- by-1/8-inch aluminum with a medium, duranodic finish and plexiglas face panel. The face panel shall have 1-inch high, white, helvetica medium lettering on blue background stating “Potable Water”, or white lettering on green background stating “Non-Potable Water”. Place signs on walls above the hydrant locations and attach to backplates. Yard hydrants shall have concrete piers which are 6 inches in diameter by 36 inches with signs attached to the face of the concrete directly in front of the hydrants. Extend the piers 4 inches minimum above finish grade. Signs shall be manufactured by Vomer Products, Inc., equal to Vocator Exterior sign series E9/12. SCHEDULES A. Prepare a typed schedule showing piping label requirements, valve tag identification, and equipment tags. Include each valve or piping type and the appropriate identification on the schedule. Submit the schedule to the Engineer for approval. B. Mark valve tags and pipe labels to conform with the following legend, or with requirements of standards noted. Include the full name, as appearing under the column heading “Description”, and the abbreviation under the column heading “Abbrev. Legend.” Description Valve Prefix Abbrev. Legend Label Color (Letter on Background) Description Valve Prefix Abbrev. Legend Label Color (Letter on Background) Plumbing Sewer, Sanitary W SW Black on Green Sewer, Storm SS SS Black on Green February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment – 40 05 53 Description Valve Prefix Abbrev. Legend Label Color (Letter on Background) Waste, Drain W DP Black on Green Waste, Acid W AW Black on Yellow Water, Domestic, Cold P CW Black on Green Water, Domestic, Hot P HW Black on Yellow Water, Domestic, Ret. P HWR Black on Yellow Water, Distilled P DW Black on Green Water, Non-potable N NPW Black on Green Fire Protection Fire Protection, Mains F FM White on Red Fire Protection, Sprinkler F FS White on Red Gas Piping Natural Gas G NG Black on Yellow Fuel Gas G NG Black on Yellow Acetylene G AC Black on Yellow Argon G AG White on Blue Hydrogen G HG Black on Yellow Nitrogen G NI Black on Green Nitrous Oxide G NO White on Blue Methane G MT Black on Yellow Oxygen G OX Black on Yellow Compressed Air G CA White on Blue Instrument Air G IA White on Blue Vapor G VG Black on Yellow Vacuum G VP White on Blue HVAC Refrigerant, Suction H RS Black on Green Refrigerant, Liquid H RL Black on Green Chilled Water H CW Black on Green Chilled Water Ret. H CWR Black on Green Hot Water H HW Black on Yellow Hot Water, Ret. H HWR Black on Yellow Condensate H CD Black on Green Process Piping Lime PP LI White on Green February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment – 40 05 53 Description Valve Prefix Abbrev. Legend Label Color (Letter on Background) Chlorine PP CH Black on Yellow Ammonia PP AM Black on Yellow Primary Effluent PP PE White on Green Primary Sludge PP PS White on Green Raw Sewage PP SR White on Green Recir. Sewage PP RS White on Green Recir. Sludge PP RR White on Green Thickened Sludge PP TS White on Green Activated Sludge PP AS White on Green Electrical Panelboards LP-1 White on Black Starters for Exhaust Fan S/EF-1 White on Black Control Panels for Exhaust Fan CP/EF-1 White on Black Disconnects for Exhaust Fan DS/EF-1 White on Black Junction Boxes JB/101 White on Black Controllers for Exhaust Fan CI/EF-1 White on Black Piping Color Schedule: Description Pipe Color Potable Water Light Blue Compressed Air Light Green Instrument Air Light Green with Dark Green Bands Chlorine (gas, liquid, or vent) Yellow Chlorine (solution) Yellow with Red Bands Liquid Alum Yellow with Orange Bands Alum (solution) Yellow with Green Bands Ammonia Yellow with Brown Bands Chlorine Dioxide (solution) Yellow with Blue Bands Ferric Chloride Brown with Red Bands Ferric Sulfate Brown with Yellow Bands Polymers White with Green Bands Liquid Caustic White with Red Bands Caustic (solution) White with Orange Bands Fluoride White with Yellow Bands February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment – 40 05 53 Description Pipe Color Ozone Stainless Steel with White Bands Settled Water Green Filter Effluent Light Blue Backwash Supply Light Blue Drain Dark Grey Raw Water Tan END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 SECTION 40 05 57 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC VALVE ACTUATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install, test, and make complete ready for operation, electro-hydraulic type valve actuators for pump control valves with accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein, including a hydraulic actuator, a remote power module/accumulator skid, a local control panel containing a dedicated programmable microprocessor controller, and interconnecting electrical cables. Furnish all necessary hardware associated with actuator-to-valve mounting disassembly. B. Contractor shall coordinate manufacture and shipment of proposed valve actuators to be delivered to the valve supplier. Upon completion of the factory functional testing, valve and actuator shall be shipped as an assembly to the job site. This shall include ten (10)) 20-inch pump control metal seated ball valves. . C. The Contractor shall provide all power and wiring to the actuator as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. D. All interconnection cables between the actuator control panels and the hydraulic portion of the actuators shall be supplied by the actuator manufacturer and field installed by Contractor under supervision of the actuator manufacturer. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for installation of the Pump Control Valve Electrohydraulic Actuators at HSPS No. 3 performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. B. Payment for Installation of the Pump Control Valve Electrohydraulic Actuators at existing HSPS No. 2 as specified herein shall be as defined in Part C – Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01.00, Bid Form. Include the cost for this work as an Additive Alternate bid item. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Pump Control Ball valves are included in Section 40 05 65. B. Mechanical piping, valves, pipe hangers and supports are specified in their respective sections of Division 40. C. Painting, in addition to the requirements in this Section, is specified in Division 9. D. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Sections 40 90 00 through 40 90 03. SCADA input and output signal requirements for monitoring/control are further defined in the P&ID Drawings, Instrumentation Drawings, and Sections 40 90 00 through 40 90 03. E. Electrical work, in addition to the requirements of this Section, is specified in Division 26. 1.4 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1.American Water Works Association (AWWA): C541-08, Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinder and Vane Type Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. 2.American National Standard ANSI/ISA-96.06.01-2014 Guidelines for the Specification of Self Contained Electro-Hydraulic Valve Actuators, Approved September 10, 2014. 3.Joint Industry Conference (JIC): Standards for Hydraulic Cylinders. 4.National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) 250-91, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 5.Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Fail Close (or Fail Safe): The actuator shall close the valve upon loss of power or a pump trip. 1.6 SUBMITTALS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in Section 01 33 02, shop drawings showing details of fabrication and installation of all items furnished under this Section. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1.Certified dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished including but not limited to electro-hydraulic type valve actuator mounted to the metal seated ball valve specified in Section 40 05 65. 2.Certified mechanical and electrical connection details. Power and control wiring diagrams including terminals and numbers. 3.Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the detailed Specifications. 4.Manufacturer’s certified data showing actuator characteristics of torque, speed, power requirements and consumption, options provided, operational flexibility characteristics to be provided, and total unit weight. This information shall be prepared specifically for each actuator size and type proposed. Catalog sheets showing general information and options available will not be acceptable. 5.Manufacturer’s catalog information, descriptive literature, and specifications. 6.Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled or alarmed. 7.Valve catalog torque requirements at given ΔP shut-off. Actuator output torque, to include a minimum of 50% safety factor. 8.Field performance test procedures. C. Shop Drawings of Control Panel including as a minimum the following information: 1.Out-to-out dimensions of Panel. 2.Layout of exterior panel faces. 3.Conduit and piping connections sizes and locations. 4.Interior Panel layout. 5.Schedule of control components and catalog data sheets for the same. 6.Schematic wiring diagram for and interlocks with pump motor circuit. D. Manufacturer’s Certifications: 1.Submit manufacturer’s certification that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents in detail, including the arrangement and conditions of proposed electrical, mechanical, and structural systems affecting the performance of the equipment, and the detailed requirements of manufacturing and subsequent installation of the equipment 2.Submit manufacturer’s certification that there are no omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in the Contract Documents or in the pumping station piping layout that affects the equipment, as shown on the Drawings, which have not already been clarified in writing. E. F. G. H. Project Record Document Operation and Maintenance Data in accordance with Section 01 70 00. Warranties Quality Control Submittals 1.Certificate of Compliance for materials. 2.Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3.Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 4.Certificate of Proper Installation. 5.Operations and maintenance manual. I. Manufacturer’s Field Report 1.Submit the equipment manufacturer’s Certificate of Physical Checkout and Installation. 2.Submit the equipment manufacturer’s Certificate of Field Testing. 3.Submit the equipment manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Testing. J. A list of the manufacturer’s recommended spare parts to be supplied, with the manufacturer’s current price for each item. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The actuator manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the design, manufacture of Fail Close electro-hydraulic actuators and their control systems. Manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer a list of furnished units of the same general design, type and comparable size specified herein, which have been used and provided satisfactory service under similar test, service and operating conditions for at least five years. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 B. Actuator and associated equipment must be manufactured in the United States of America. C. Overall Responsibility 1.To insure equipment compatibility the actuator manufacturer shall be responsible for furnishing the Pump Control Valve System equipment including metal seated Ball Valve, electro-hydraulic type valve actuator, actuator controller, mounting connections and all interconnecting cables. The actuator manufacturer shall have responsibility for the function of the complete system in accordance with the intent of these specifications and shall be experienced in similar work. Also, the actuator manufacturers shall be responsible for coordinating with the valve supplier for all specified testing of ball valve and complete valve/actuator assembly, start-up, training, and warranty. D. The actuator manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining torque requirements from the respective valve manufacturer based on the specified flow and pressure conditions, and sizing valve actuator. Valve manufacturer shall supply these torque values as specified in Section 40 05 65. E. The actuator manufacturer shall design and fabricate mounting hardware for attaching each actuator to corresponding valve based upon valve top-works dimensions supplied by Valve manufacturer as specified in Section 40 05 65. Mounting design shall be included as part of actuator manufacturer drawing submittals. F. The actuator manufacturer shall mount and calibrate each actuator to corresponding valve at valve manufacturer facility. Mounting procedure shall be assisted by the valve manufacturer and follow any specific instructions/direction provided by valve manufacturer per Section 40 05 65. Perform testing with control panel prior to shipping. Perform manufacturer’s standard functional tests in valve factory on each actuator unit on each job valve. G. The actuator manufacturer shall give two-week notification to Contractor & valve manufacturer prior to shipping of actuators to valve manufacturer. H. Valve manufacturer shall give two week notice to actuator manufacturer prior to mounting actuators to valves. The actuator manufacturer shall be present to witness mounting of actuators to valves at valve manufacturer’s factory per Section 40 05 65. I. The actuator manufacturer shall submit in writing to Contractor & Engineer that all actuator and valve assemblies are properly mounted and calibrated prior to shipment from the valve manufacturer facility to job-site. J. The actuator manufacturer shall provide on-site installation assistance by actuator manufacturer technician. K. The valve and actuator manufacturer shall submit in writing to Contractor & Engineer that all actuator and valve assemblies are properly installed at job-site. L. Manufacturer shall submit to the engineer a list of furnished units of the same general design, type and comparable size specified herein, which have been used and provided satisfactory service under similar test, service and operating conditions for at least five years. M. Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for equipment coordination, installation, testing, and operation. 1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provided below is a table with information on the pump control valve system that will be operated with an electro-hydraulic valve actuator. Refer to Section 40 05 65 for additional information on Pump Control Ball valves. 1.HSPS No. 2 Valve Tag 31-FCV-1908-02, 31-FCV-1909-02, 31-FCV-1910-02, 31-FCV-1911-02 2.HSPS No. 3 Valve Tag 31-FCV-2012, 31-FCV-2013, 31-FCV-2014, 31-FCV-2015, 31-FCV-2016, 31-FCV-2017 3.Service Distribution Potable Water 4.Valve Type Metal Seated Ball Valve 5.Valve Size 20 inch 6.Flow Range 10.80-34.56 mgd 7.Pump Flow at Duty Point 13,700 gpm 8.Pump Discharge Pressure at Duty Point 113 PSIG 9.Pump Run-off Pressure 78 PSIG 10.Pump Shut-off Pressure 124.8 PSIG February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 11.Pump Backpressure (min) Requirements 78 PSIG 12.Normal Open/Close Speed Range and Initial Time 0-180 seconds; Set initial time to open/close at 60 seconds 13.Emergence closure speed Range and initial time 0-60 seconds; Set initial time to fail close at 30 seconds B. The electro-hydraulic actuators will be designed to meet the following requirements: 1.Actuator Type Self-contained, rotary hydraulic actuator 2.Application:High Service Pump Discharge Valves 3.Voltage/phase/Hz:220/1/60 4.Maximum rotation:90 degrees 5.Rated Torque output:Up to minimum valve torque with 50% Safety Factor 6.Manual override:Handwheel Operator 1.9 WARRANTY A. B. Refer to Section 01 70 00 for requirements and conditions associated with the required manufacturer’s warranty period. The actuator manufacturer shall provide a warranty valid for all equipment supplied under this Section and obtain from the selected valve OEM a warranty valid for all equipment supplied under Section 40 05 65 – Metal Seated Ball Valves for a period of four (4) years commencing from the time of Substantial Completion by the Owner. This warranty shall include no fewer than two annual site visits by a factory maintenance technician of the actuator manufacturer to facilitate unit maintenance, service, repair, calibration, etc. 1.10 SPARE PARTS A. The actuator manufacturer shall provide one complete set of spare parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The actuators shall be manufactured and furnished by REXA, Inc., Massachusetts. 2.2 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS A. General Requirements: 1.Furnish electro-hydraulic actuators, defined in Part 1.8 A. The actuator shall be furnished as a totally sealed hydraulic system, with a hydraulic pump, electric motor, mounting frames, adjustable speed controls, adjustable pressure controls, no leak check valves, manual operation system, and control panel. The actuator shall be provided with a self-contained hydraulic accumulator for valve “Fail Closed” operation. 2.Actuators shall be designed for 100 percent continuous duty modulating control on pump discharge valves. Provide electrical surge protection for each actuator. Actuators with any limitations on starts & stops per hour are not acceptable. Provide a 4 to 20 mA output position transmitter for remote status indication. All panels supplied with the actuator systems shall be UL labeled. 3.Each actuator system shall include the hydraulic actuator, remote power module/accumulator skid, motor power cable, feedback cable, and a dedicated programmable microprocessor controller. 4.The actuator shall be constructed of anodized aluminum & steel with a 3 layer zinc based coating system or a two-part epoxy or powder coating, for maximum corrosion resistance. 5.Actuator shall provide the necessary torque throughout entire valve stroke based on the scheduled valve class and operating pressures provided per 1.8 and shall be sized to overcome valve breakaway/seating torque, valve friction, and process dynamics for the scheduled valve class rating. 6.Valve actuator shall Fail Close in the event of a loss of electrical power or loss of control February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 signal. Actuators shall be provided with manual operation by hand wheel operators. 7.Actuators must be designed with sufficient force output capable to meet the maximum required torque for each valve. A safety factor of 1.5x shall be applied to the maximum required valve torques using raw values from the valve OEM without safety factors already applied. B. Design Features: 1.The actuator shall clearly indicate valve position locally, via a visible mechanical apparatus. In addition, the valve actuators shall include electric limit switches and position feedback as specified herein. 2.The actuators shall be equipped with a mechanical means to operate the actuator when electrical supply power is not available. The mechanical means should be independent of the actuator hydraulics and capable of being isolated during normal operation of the actuator. 3.The valve actuators shall be provided with both local and remote control. 4.Upon loss of primary power or control signal, the actuators shall fail closed via an accumulator system. Speed for a full stroke closure shall be set at 30 seconds and adjustable in the field via a needle valve. C. Actuator 1.The actuator shall be designed as a direct mounted 90-degree rotary heavy-duty rack and pinion cylinder assembly that will be connected to a remotely mounted factory pre- assembled hydraulic power module/accumulator skid via hard hydraulic tubing and quick connect cables. Each skid will be dedicated to a specific cylinder/valve assembly. The skid shall be located as shown on the Drawings in strict with manufacturer’s installation recommendations. All interconnecting hydraulic hoses, piping, conduits, and wiring shall be securely supported. Actuator manufacturer shall furnish and install hard hydraulic tubing between a remotely mounted hydraulic power drive/module & accumulator skid and actuator cylinder. 2.Actuator shall be constructed to conform with NEMA 4X requirements. D. Hydraulic Power Unit 1.The hydraulic power unit shall consist of a motor, a gear pump and a pilot operated check valve system. The unit shall be self-contained, sealed and capable of being mounted in any orientation. No central hydraulics or reservoirs that contact atmosphere will be allowed. 2.The motor shall be directly coupled to the pump. The motor shall only operate when a position change is required or when recharging of the fail-close accumulator is required. 3.The actuator shall be designed to provide sufficient force throughout entire valve stroke to overcome valve breakaway/seating friction and process dynamics. The hydraulic assembly shall be designed to operate at a standard internal hydraulic operating pressure of 2,000 psig. In addition, the actuators shall contain pressure limiting devices that allow to limit the internal pressure build-up of the hydraulics to 2,200-2,300 psig maximum, and field adjustable, in order to protect the internals of the hydraulics. 4.When the motor/pump is stopped, the pilot operated check valves shall be closed and securely lock the actuator in place. 5.The actuator hydraulics shall be supplied from the manufacturer containing the maximum required oil, completely purged of air and hermetically sealed off from the environment. Actuator shall be slightly positive pressure to eliminate atmospheric ingress and any oil filtration requirements. 6.The hydraulic power drive/module assembly shall consist of a drive train apparatus containing a bi-directional gear pump and a hydraulic circuit regulating equal volumes of oil flow into and out of the hydraulic cylinder. The hydraulic circuit shall provide dual action, acting as a check valve in one direction and a throttling valve for the hydraulic pump in the opposite direction. The valves shall direct hydraulic flow from the pump to cause the actuator to stroke in the direction indicated by the controller. 7.The hydraulic power drive/module assembly shall also contain a motor that is directly coupled to the pump within the hydraulic manifold. The motor shall only operate when a valve position change is required. 8.The actuator hydraulics will employ food grade oil for the hydraulic medium. No hydraulic fluids, lubricants or any other variations from that of food grade oil will be acceptable. E. Power and Feedback Cable February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 1.All cables for connections between the electronics, the hydraulic cylinder and skid of the actuator shall be supplied by the actuator manufacturer. The power cable shall be field wired between the controller and the ten-point terminal strip on the hydraulic power unit. The feedback cable shall be field wired between the controller and the integral feedback thin film potentiometer mounted on the actuator. The feedback potentiometer shall be directly mounted to the actuator output shaft (pinion) for 1 to 1 ratio position readout. Sufficient length of cable shall be provided to run from panel location shown on the Drawings to the actuators. 2.All external cable connections between SCADA and the actuator shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. Conduits entries into the actuator control enclosure shall be made according to the actuator manufacturer instructions. Separate conduits for all high voltage and low voltage signal wiring connections must be supplied by The Contractor, no exceptions. F. Power Requirements 1.Power supply to electro-hydraulic actuator shall be 120 VAC single phase, 60 hertz. 2.Electro-hydraulic valve actuator shall coordinate power requirements with that as shown on the Drawings. Provide step down transformer as required. G. Control Panel 1.A single panel shall be furnished for each electro-hydraulic actuator. Control panel shall include a two-position Manual/Auto selector switch, and Open/Close pushbutton. Actuator controls shall be contained within a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure at the location shown on the Drawings. 2.The control panel shall provide automatic and local operations to permit valve to be operated through an external 4 – 20 mA input control signal for modulating service or through a local actuator control station to position the valve as required. 3.The control panel shall incorporate self-diagnostics. In the event of actuator failure or system malfunction, an alarm shall indicate locally and remotely the type of error. The error type may include loss of signal, incorrect direction, and loss of feedback. 4.Control enclosure shall include a display that will always show the current mode status of the actuator, the current position of the actuator and any alarm states. A continuous position feedback system shall be provided between the valve actuator and the SCADA system. All valve actuators shall include the ability to transmit a 4-20 mA continuous position indication signal for remote monitoring by the SCADA system. The valve actuators shall be designed with passive position transmitters, meaning the actuator manufacturer will not be supplying power to this loop. 5.Refer to the electrical Drawings for indication of valve control panel communication with the plant SCADA system. H. Actuator Performance 1.Speed of actuation shall be electronically adjustable at the control panel up to a maximum for actuator size and power unit combination as specified in Part 1.8. 2.Normal operation and closing speed shall be a nominal 60 seconds and shall be capable of being adjustable to a maximum as specified in Part 1.8. Fail-Close settings shall be set the rate of closing upon power failure for 30 seconds, but shall be field adjustable from 0 - 60 seconds. 3.The actuator shall be capable of throttling the valve during pump start and shutdown based on pump/pump control valve operation sequence. Back pressure control shall be provided by throttling the valve during low back pressure conditions as specified above. The low back pressure set point shall be fully adjustable. 4.The valve actuators shall be capable of providing sufficient torque to operate under specific valve operating conditions. Supplier shall verify with valve manufacturer. Refer to Paragraph 1.8 A. I. Identification Tagging Requirements 1.Provide a stainless steel tag bearing the valve tag number for each actuator based on P&ID designations. 2.3 SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING A. Prime and finish coat exposed metal surfaces with coating and application in accordance with Division 09 in the factory unless stainless steel is used, then no painting is required. B. Manufacturer shall provide materials for touch-up and recoating as necessary if coating February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 damage occurs prior to final acceptance. C. Piping integral to actuator shall be labeled as per Section 09 96 00 Part 3.11.B and Part 3.11.C. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer shall fully assemble actuator in the factory, including motor, and test with control panel prior to shipping. Perform manufacturer’s standard functional tests in factory on each actuator unit on each job valve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Pump Control Valve and electro-hydraulic actuator System in accordance with Drawings, Technical Specification Sections, approved shop drawings, and manufacturers’ installation instructions. For existing High Service Pump Station No. 2, only one pump may be taken out of service at a time to installed new pump control valves/actuators. B. Electro-Hydraulic Actuator Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating with valve manufacturer for installation of the valve/actuator assembly by the Contractor in the field. C. General Contractor shall be responsible for installing electrical conduit and pulling electrical wiring to each individual actuator and between the associated panels, per instructions of the actuator manufacturer. D. Contractor to properly support actuator per written instructions from manufacturer so that there is no movement detectable in the actuator body when the valve is operated under full locked-torque conditions. E. Lubricate all required parts prior to placing actuator in service. No hydraulic fluids, lubricants or any other variations from that of food grade oil will be acceptable. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING A. Perform manufacturer’s standard factory tests to ensure operation of valve and control panel prior to shipment for installation with valve body. Repeat tests on each complete valve/actuator assembly prior to shipment to the jobsite. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s representative to assist CONTRACTOR in performing the following tasks. 1.Check completed installation. 2.Service system using lubricants recommended by manufacturer. 3.Make any necessary adjustments. Valve speed controls and time delay relay to be adjusted to eliminate water hammer on loss of power. B. Performance test: 1.Conduct performance testing on each valve/actuator assembly once installed. Upon installation, conduct Equipment Checkout, Field Testing and Functional Testing. Each pump shall be field tested with the new pump control valve and actuator system and demonstrated a successful pass of the required testing and a functional installation before a subsequent pump can be replaced with new pump control valve and actuator. 2.Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. To simulate power failure condition, the following testing procedure shall be followed: a.Associated high service pump(s) shall be turned off. b.Associated pump discharge manual butterfly valve shall close. c. In local mode, open the pump control valve manually to fully open position. d.Open the pump discharge manual butterfly valve and shut off power to the pump control valve. e.Field adjust set-point for valve fail close speed. 3.Test for a continuous 7-day period without malfunction. 4.Adjust, realign, or modify units (as necessary) and retest until acceptable. 5.Actuator/valve assemblies shall stroke in a smooth and controlled manner. 6.If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with the specified requirements. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the Contractor. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators – 40 05 57 C. Manufacturer’s Installation Report 1.Submit within 30 days after installation inspection. 2.Include the following in report. a.Description of each deficiency found. b.Recommended corrective action(s). c.Statement that High Service pump control valves and associated control panels are properly installed and adjusted except as noted. 3.4 VENDOR TRAINING AND MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Provide vendor training for Pump Control Valve and actuator System. 1.Provide eight hours of vendor training. Vendor training shall include both classroom training at the Owner’s facility and hands-on training on the Owner’s equipment. 2.Vendor training session topics shall include sufficient information and skills training on the theory, design, and site specific operation and maintenance practices, including, but not limited to, routine monitoring with normal and abnormal parameters, troubleshooting techniques, and preventive and corrective maintenance requirements to operate and maintain equipment and systems. 3.A training video shall be provided. A training video shall be professionally made of the vendor training session. The training video must be representative of the equipment furnished for this project. The training video shall be in DVD format. 4.Documentation for vendor training shall be provided to each participant which includes actual manuals for the equipment and drawings and schematics of equipment supplied for this project. B. Manufacturer’s Services 1.A manufacturer’s representative who has a complete knowledge of the proper startup, installation, operation and maintenance shall be provided as noted below: MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE DUTIES Services Provided by Factory Representative Minimum # of Trips(a) Minimum Time On Site Per Trip(a) (8 hr. working days) 1.Supervise Installation 6 6 days 2.Inspect and Approve Installation(b)1(c) 1 day 3.Supervise Testing 2(d) 4 days 4.Instruct Owner in Proper Startup and O&M including Training 1(e) 2 days (a)The manufacturer’s factory representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper installation testing and initial operation of the equipment. (b)The manufacturer’s factory representative shall provide to the Engineer a written certification that each unit has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. (c)May be done immediately following completion of Item 1 if acceptable to the Engineer. (d)May be done immediately following completion of Item 2 if acceptable to the Engineer. (e)This instruction may be given following completion of Item 3, provided that the test is successful, the O&M Manuals have been approved, and if it is acceptable to the Engineer. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 SECTION 40 05 65 METAL SEATED BALL VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install, test, and make complete ready for operation, ten (10) 20-inch AWWA C507 metal seated ball valves for pump control valves with accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Contractor shall coordinate with the valve manufacturer to provide all torque requirements to the actuator manufacturer for proper design and sizing of the actuator design. C. Perform all valve testing per AWWA requirements. D. Contractor shall coordinate with the valve manufacturer to provide valve shaft orientation and valve top-works dimensions to the actuator manufacturer for proper design of the actuator-to- valve mounting hardware. E. Upon completion the valve and actuator testing, the valve and actuator will be shipped as an assembly from valve manufacturer factory to the job site for installation and field testing. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for installation of pump control ball valve(s) at HSPS No. 3 under this section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum base bid. B. Payment for Installation of the Pump Control Ball Valves at existing HSPS No. 2 as specified herein shall be as defined in Part C – Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01.00, Bid Form. Include the cost for this work as an Additive Alternate bid item. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. B. C. Painting, in addition to the requirements in this Section, is specified in Division 9. Disinfection of Waterlines. Section 33 13 00. Mechanical piping, fittings, valves, pipe hangers and supports are specified in their respective sections of Division 40. D. Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators are included in Section 40 05 57. E. Control Description is included in Division 40. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Sections 40 90 00 through 40 90 03. SCADA input and output signal requirements for monitoring/control are further defined in the P&ID Drawings, Instrumentation Drawings, and Sections 40 90 00 through 40 90 03. F. Electrical work, in addition to the requirements of this Section, is specified in Division 26. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply as a minimum with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1.ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2.AWWA C507 - Ball Valves. 3.AWWA C550 - Interior Coatings for Valves. 4.ASTM A-126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 5.ASTM A-395 - Ductile Iron Castings. 6.ASTM A-48 - Gray Iron Castings. 7.ASTM A-316 - Stainless Steel. 8.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 9.National Electric Code (NEC). 10.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 11.NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The pump discharge control valves shall be installed on individual 20-inch pump discharge lines at the new High Service Pump Station No. 3 and at the existing High Service Pump Station No. 2 as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Service is potable water. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 B. Valve Size: 20-inch C. Electrohydraulic actuator: Per Section 40 05 57 and per Contract Drawings. D. Functional Requirements: 1.The pump control valves will be controlled by electrical control signal(s) provided by the plant facility SCADA system via the valve actuators. The valve actuator shall permit the valve to be fully closed, fully opened, or held in any intermediate position as directed by the electrical control signals. 2.The valve shall be capable of continuous operation under cavitating conditions without experiencing cavitation damage. 3.Normal pump starting: Adjustable opening speed of 0 to 180 seconds. Set initial time to open at 60 seconds. 4.Normal pump stopping: Adjustable closing speed of 0 to 180 seconds. Set initial time to close at 60 seconds. 5.Upon loss of electrical power or a pump trip, the valve shall fail close. Set initial time to close at 30 seconds. 6.Throttling- The valve shall be capable of throttling during pump start and shutdown based on pump/pump control valve operation sequence as specified in Control Description. Back pressure control shall be provided by throttling the valve during low back pressure conditions as specified above. The low back pressure set point shall be fully adjustable. 7.In the submittal, the valve manufacture shall submit what equipment would be necessary to incorporate backpressure control. 8.The following table describes the hydraulic operating conditions for the pump control valves at the proposed facility. The pump control valves shall work at all conditions listed below as well as combinations. Hydraulic Operating Conditions for 20-inch Pump Control Valves 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit project specific shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 02 - Submittals. B. Submit a list of not less than five installations where pumping equipment of the type and approximate size specified has been in successful operation for at least five years. C. Submit locations of the nearest permanent service headquarters of the equipment submitted. D. Shop drawing for ball valves. Include at least the following information on shop drawing. 1.Size of valve and weight of all components. 2.Pressure rating of valve and pressure loss versus flow performance. 3.Project specific AutoCAD drawing of how operator is mounted on valve including valve shaft orientation and valve top-works dimensions. 4.Integral valve supports and relation to pump floor support. Include elevations on Drawing. 5.Catalog bulletin or other manufacturer’s literature illustrating and describing valve construction. Indicate materials of construction and associated referenced standards. Mark out inapplicable data and options. 6.The valve manufacturer shall also provide a computerized cavitation chart which show flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, Cv factor, system velocity, and if there will be cavitation damage for the selected valves. Operation Parameter Min Max Pump Flowrate Range (gpm) 7,500 24,000 Piping Centerline Elevation of PCV (ft) MSL As shown on the Drawings Pump Discharge Pressure at Duty Point (psig) 113 Pump Flow at Duty Point (gpm) 13,700 Pump Shut-off Pressure (psig) 124.8 Pump Backpressure (min) Requirements (psig) 78 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 7.Valve torque information/data includes 1) A raw value for the maximum operating torques without a safety factor included; 2) A raw value for the maximum allowable stem/seating torques without a safety factor included. E. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for valve, and accessories. F. Manufacturer’s Certifications: 1.Submit manufacturer’s certification that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents in detail, including the arrangement and conditions of proposed electrical, mechanical, and structural systems affecting the performance of the equipment, and the detailed requirements of manufacturing and subsequent installation of the equipment. 2.Submit manufacturer’s certification that there are no omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in the Contract Documents or in the pumping station piping layout that affects the equipment, as shown on the Drawings, which have no already been clarified in writing. G. Manufacturer’s Installation Report 1.Submit within 30 days after installation inspection. 2.Include the following in report. a.Description of each deficiency found. b.Recommended corrective action(s). c. Statement that booster pump control valves and associated control panels are properly installed and adjusted except as noted. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.Furnished manuals in accordance with Specification Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials used shall be new, of high grade, and with properties best suited to the work required. B. Manufacturer’s name, working pressure, direction of flow, and size to be cast on valve body. C. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1.Valve equipment provided under this section shall be a standard production in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least five years. 2.Manufacturer shall satisfy that it is capable of the following: a.Providing local factory trained personnel to service the equipment when needed within a 48-hour period. b.Providing all needed spare parts for the equipment within a 48-hour period. c. Each complete system to be designed and factory tested by manufacturer. D. Coordination Responsibility 1.In order to ensure equipment compatibility, one manufacturer shall be responsible for providing all pump control valve system equipment, including valve, actuator, and control panels. Refer to Section 40 05 57 for coordination responsibilities requirements with electrohydraulic actuators supplier. 2.The valve manufacturer shall provide the following information to both the Contractor and actuator manufacturer, including this information in the valve submittal: a.Maximum raw seating/break torque (no safety factor added) b.Maximum raw operating/running torque in either direction (no safety factor added) c. Maximum raw allowable stem torque (no safety factor added) d.Valve top-work dimension for use to design mounting hardware 3.The valve manufacturer shall sign off submittal drawings for actuator mounting details as designed by the actuator manufacturer within two-weeks upon receiving and prior to production release by Engineer. 4.The valve manufacturer shall conduct hydrostatic and tests of each valve in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA C507 as defined herein in this Section. Certifications of completion of Proof-of-Design testing shall be included in the submittal. All testing documentation shall include in the submittal for Engineer review. Submit valve manufacturer’s certificate that valves are in full compliance with the valve specification. 5.The actuator manufacturer shall mount and calibrate each actuator to corresponding February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 valve at valve manufacturer facility. Mounting procedure shall be assisted by the valve manufacturer and follow any specific instructions/direction provided by valve. The actuator manufacturer shall give two- week notification to Contractor & valve manufacturer prior to shipping of actuators to valve manufacturer. The actuator manufacturer shall ship all actuators and mounting hardware to the valve manufacturer’s factory for assembling actuator to valve. 6.Valve manufacturer shall give two week notice to actuator manufacturer prior to mounting actuators to valves. The actuator manufacturer shall be present to witness mounting of actuators to valves at valve manufacturer’s factory. The actuator manufacture must confirm to deliverable schedule requirements so as not to hold up shipment of the assembly. .The valve manufacturer shall fully assemble valve and actuator in their factory, with assistance from actuator manufacturer, and test with control panel prior to shipping. Perform manufacturer’s standard functional tests in valve factory on each actuator unit on each job valve. 7.The valve manufacturer shall submit in writing to Contractor & Engineer that all actuator and valve assemblies are properly mounted and calibrated prior to shipment from the valve manufacturer facility to job-site. 8.The valve and actuator manufacturers shall submit in writing to Contractor & Engineer that all actuator and valve assemblies are properly installed at job-site. 9.Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for equipment coordination, installation, testing, and operation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment to site, all store and protect equipment in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer’s instruction. B. Store all equipment off the ground in enclosed shelter to protect from damage and exposure to the elements until installed. 1.9 EVALUATION AND SELECTION A. The City reserves the right to select any equipment which is deemed to be in its best interest. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 00 72 00 for requirements and conditions associated with the required manufacturer’s warranty period. B. Manufacturer shall provide a warranty valid for all equipment supplied under this Section for a period of four (4) years commencing from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. Equipment repaired under warranty will be returned to the job site freight pre-paid. Warranty shall be supplied in writing, identifying both proper valve manufacturer contacts and local representatives. Warranty shall state that valve/actuator assembly has been designed and successfully installed as of commissioning date and shall also define expiration date of warranty period for the valve. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER(S) A. Metal Seated Ball Valve: 1.Henry Pratt Company 2.GA Industries. 2.2 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Pump Control Ball Valve 1.Pump Control Ball Valves shall be Pressure Class 150 and consist of a main valve body assembly and an electro-hydraulic mechanical actuator as specified in Section 40 05 57. The valve, actuator, and associated controls shall be furnished completely assembled, tested, and ready for field installation and wiring. 2.The valve shall have a full, circular, unobstructed waterway and meet or exceed the minimum design requirements of AWWA C507, latest revision. a.Ball Valve Construction February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 (1) Body: The valve body shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126 Class B. The valve body shall either be a three or four-piece cast assembly; two-piece body assemblies are not acceptable. The valve body shall include integral mounting pads for supporting the weight of the valve body. Vent and drain connections shall be provided. Inlet and outlet flanges shall be flat faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 for Class 125 cast iron flanges. The bearing load shall not exceed 2000 lb./sq. inch at 250 psi differential pressure. (2) Body Seat: The body seat shall be Monel electronically fused to the base metal, then accurately machined to form the seating seal, or other C507-(latest revision) approved materials. Body seat rings shall be securely fastened to the valve body. Valve body seats shall be retained in the valve body, by mechanical means without retaining rings, segments, screws or hardware of any kind in the flow stream, or by welding to the valve body. The seat in the valve body shall contain a single seat arrangement suitable for pump check service. Seats shall seal a full 360° without interruption mating with a spherical stainless steel seating surface on the ball. Seats shall be field adjustable around the full 360° circumference and replaceable. (3) Rotor: The valve ball or rotor shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536 Gr. 65-45-12. (4) Ball: The ball shall be cast ductile iron ASTM A 536 grade 65-45-12. It shall have integrally cast trunnions which will be bronze-bushed. One trunnion holds the operating shaft which passes through a packing seal area and connects to the actuator. To prevent leakage around the shaft, V-Type packing is installed to form a seal. The ball seat shall be stainless steel 300 series. It shall be a pressure-assisted design and by using an offset on the body and ball, the seats will only be in contact at the actual point of closing. The seat is connected to the ball by means of a stainless steel mounting ring which is securely attached and pinned into position after the correct setting has been attained. Seats threaded directly on to the ductile iron ball shall not be acceptable. (5) Shaft: Acceptable materials for valve shafts shall be ASTM A 564 Type 630, H1150 (17-4 PH) Stainless Steel, or other C507-(latest revision) approved materials. Plated steel shafts are not acceptable. (6) Bearings: Sleeve bearings shall be provided on both top and bottom body hubs. The body mounted sleeve bearings shall mate with sleeve bearings mounted on cast trunnions integral with the valve ball. and Body and ball mounted bearings shall be constructed of either Teflon- lined with fiberglass backing, bronze or stainless steel. The valve shaft shall not be utilized as a bearing or a bearing support. (7) Seals: Where the rotor trunnions pass through the body assembly, O- ring seals of Buna-N or other suitable AWWA material shall be provided. (8) Valve seat assembly shall be fully adjustable and replaceable in the field without removing the valve from the line. The ball seat shall be located at the top, when the valve is in the open position. (9) Valve Testing: All ball valves shall be subjected to hydrostatic shop leakage and performance tests as specified in AWWA Standard C507-(latest revision). Maximum seat leakage allowances 1 fl. oz. per diameter inch per hour at design pressure differential as per AWWA C507-(latest revision). 2.3 BALL VALVE ACTUATOR A. Refer to Section 40 05 57 for requirements of the electrohydraulic actuator. B. Refer to P&ID Drawing for additional detail and performance requirements on controls. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 2.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - CONTROLS A. Each valve shall be furnished with a LOCAL-REMOTE (L/R) switch. In the Local position, the valve is controlled locally by the open/close/stop pushbuttons. B. In the REMOTE position, the valve is controlled by PLC logic for pump/valve sequence. Refer to Control Description and P&IDs for additional information. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test all valves hydrostatically to manufacturer’s published standard at the valve manufacturer’s factory prior to assembling the valve to the actuator. 2.6 SHOP PAINTING A. Before exposure to the weather and prior to shop painting, the ferrous components of the mechanical surface aerator equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned in the shop and coated as specified in Section 09 96 00. B. Manufacturer shall provide materials for touch-up and recoating as necessary if coating damage occurs prior to final acceptance. C. Interior of carbon steel vessels shall be coated with a fusion bonded epoxy coating NSF-61 listed for contact with potable water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Install pump control valve system in accordance with Drawings, Technical Specification Sections, approved shop drawings, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. For existing High Service Pump Station No. 2 pump control valve replacement, only one pump may be taken out of service at a time to install new metal seated ball valves. C. Coordinate pump control valve replacement work with associated electrical work. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING A. Perform hydrostatic and Proof-of-Design tests of each valve in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA C507. The valve and actuator functional testing shall be coordinated with the actuator manufacturer, in accordance with the assembly plans and schedule of the actuator manufacturer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s representative to assist CONTRACTOR in performing the following tasks. 1.Check completed installation. 2.Service system using lubricants recommended by manufacturer. 3.Make any necessary adjustments. Valve speed controls and time delay relay to be adjusted to eliminate water hammer on loss of power. 4.Cycle valve and test to ensure that it can perform all specified functions. 5.Place system in service. 6.Prepare installation report as specified under Paragraph 1.6 H. 7.Instruct operators on proper operation and maintenance procedures. B. Performance test: 1.Conduct performance testing on each valve/actuator assembly once installed. Upon installation, conduct Equipment Checkout, Field Testing and Functional Testing. 2.Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. 3.To simulate power failure condition, the following testing procedure shall be followed: a.Associated high service pump(s) shall be turned off. b.Associated pump discharge manual butterfly valve shall close. c. In local mode, open the pump control valve manually to fully open position. d.Open the pump discharge manual butterfly valve and shut off power to the pump control valve. e.Field adjust set-point for valve fail close speed. 4.Test for a continuous 7-day period without malfunction. 5.Adjust, realign, or modify units (as necessary) and retest until acceptable. 6.Actuator/valve assemblies shall stroke in a smooth and controlled manner. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 C. Manufacturer’s Installation Report 1.Submit within 30 days after installation inspection. 2.Include the following in report. a.Description of each deficiency found. b.Recommended corrective action(s). c. Statement that High Service pump control valves and associated control panels are properly installed and adjusted except as noted. 3.4 CLEANING A. After system is in service, clean dirt, oil, and grease from equipment and touch up factory finishes damaged during installation. Complete field painting of items without factory finishes. 3.5 VENDOR TRAINING AND MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Provide vendor training for Pump Control Valve. 1.Provide eight hours of vendor training. Vendor training shall include both classroom training at the Owner’s facility and hands-on training on the Owner’s equipment. 2.Vendor training session topics shall include sufficient information and skills training on the theory, design, and site specific operation and maintenance practices, including, but not limited to, routine monitoring with normal and abnormal parameters, troubleshooting techniques, and preventive and corrective maintenance requirements to operate and maintain equipment and systems. 3.A training video shall be provided. A training video shall be professionally made of the vendor training session. The training video must be representative of the equipment furnished for this project. The training video shall be in DVD format. 4.Documentation for vendor training shall be provided to each participant which includes actual manuals for the equipment and drawings and schematics of equipment supplied for this project. B. Manufacturer’s Services 1.A manufacturer’s representative who has a complete knowledge of the proper startup, installation, operation and maintenance shall be provided as noted below: MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE DUTIES Services Provided by Factory Representative Minimum # of Trips(a) Minimum Time On Site Per Trip(a) (8 hr. working days) 1.Supervise Installation 6 6 days 2.Inspect and Approve Installation(b)1(c) 1 day 3.Supervise Testing 2(d) 4 days 4.Instruct Owner in Proper Startup and O&M including Training 1(e) 2 days (a)The manufacturer’s factory representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper installation testing and initial operation of the equipment. (b)The manufacturer’s factory representative shall provide to the Engineer a written certification that each unit has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. (c)May be done immediately following completion of Item 1 if acceptable to the Engineer. (d)May be done immediately following completion of Item 2 if acceptable to the Engineer. (e)This instruction may be given following completion of Item 3, provided that the test is successful, the O&M Manuals have been approved, and if it is acceptable to the Engineer. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 8 Metal seated ball valve and control system – 40 05 65 END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 SECTION 40 05 70 PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies piping appurtenances which are not specifically covered in other sections. Specific piping materials, systems and related installation and testing requirements are included in other sections of Divisions 40. B. The items shall include the following: 1.Unions 2.Flanged Joints 3.Dielectric Connectors 4.Plugs and Caps 5.Miscellaneous Adaptors 6.Vents and Drains 7.Service Clamps 8.Quick Connect Couplings 9.Mechanical Sleeve Seals 10.Flexible Connectors a.Sleeve Couplings b.Split or Grooved Couplings c.Flange Adapters d.Pump and Equipment Flexible Connectors e.Flexible Connectors 11.Harnessing and Restraints 12.Pressure Gauges 13.Diaphragm Seals for Gages 14.Line Strainers 15.Cleanouts 16.Floor Drains 17.Rotameters and Flow Indicators 18.Spray Nozzle 19.Appurtenances and Miscellaneous Items 20.Color Coding and Labeling 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Submittals are specified in Section 01 33 02. B. Field Painting is included in Section 09 96 00. C. Shop Preparation, and Painting is included in Section 09 91 10. D. Piping Materials and Systems are included in Division 40. E. Piping – General Requirements is specified in Section 40 05 00. F. Valves are included in Section 40 05 50. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General submittals for piping, piping systems and pipeline appurtenances are listed below. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 02. It is not intended that all submittals listed below be provided for all piping materials and systems. Refer to individual System or Piping Sections for specific submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1.Piping layouts in full detail and in AutoCAD or equivalent software. 2.Location of pipe hangers and supports. 3.Location and type of backup block or device to prevent joint separation. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 4.Large scale details of wall penetrations and fabricated fittings. 5.Schedules of all pipe, fittings, special castings, couplings, expansion joints and other appurtenances in detail per each process area. 6.Catalog cuts of joints, couplings, harnesses, expansion joints, gaskets, fasteners and other accessories. 7.Catalog cuts of all pipeline appurtenances specified herein. 8.Brochures and technical data on coatings and linings and proposed method for application and repair. C. Samples D. Design Data E. Test Reports 1.Copies of certified shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard. 2.Copies of all field test reports, signed by Contractor and Engineer. F. Certificates 1.Copies of certification for all welders performing work in accordance with ANSI B31.1. G. Manufacturer’s Installation (or application) instructions. H. Statement of Qualifications I. Manufacturer's Field Report J. Project Record Document K. Operation and Maintenance Data in accordance with Section 01 70 00. L. Warranties 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2.ASTM A126 – Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 3.ASTM A183 – Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 4.ASTM A278 – Gray Iron Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures up to 650EF. 5.ASTM A307 – Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 6.ASTM A325 – Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 7.ASTM A536 – Ductile Iron Castings. 8.ASTM A575 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M Grade. 9.ASTM B62 – Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 10.ASTM B88 – Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI A13.1 – Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2.ANSI B1.1 – Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). 3.ANSI B2.1 – Specifications, Dimensions, Gauging for Taper and Straight Pipe Threads (except dry seals). 4.ANSI B16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. 5.ANSI B16.5 – Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings. 6.ANSI B18.2 – Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series Including Hex Cap Screws and Lag Screws. 7.ANSI B31 – Code for Pressure Piping, B31 Interpretation. 8.ANSI B31.1 – Power Piping. 9.American Welding Society (AWS). 10.AWS B3.0 – Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.AWWA C 110 – Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3 in Through 48 in, for Water and Other Liquids. 2.AWWA C 111 – Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3.AWWA C 200 – Steel Water Pipe – 6-in and larger. 4.AWWA C 606 – Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. 5.AWWA Manual M11 – Steel Pipe – A Guide for Design and Installation. D. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) 1.WH 201 – Water Hammer Arrestors February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new and unused. B. Install piping to meet requirements of local codes. C. All grooved joint specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer, and be of the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings. D. Provide manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. Reference to standards such as ASTM and ANSI shall apply to those versions in effect at the time of bid opening. E. Coordinate dimensions and drilling of flanges with flanges for valves, pumps and other equipment to be installed in piping systems. Bolt holes in flanges to straddle vertical centerline. F. Reject materials contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuel, aromatic compounds, paint solvent, paint thinner and acid solder. G. Pipe joint compound, for pipe carrying flammable or toxic gas, must bear approval of Underwriters' Laboratories or Factory Mutual Engineering Division. H. Unless otherwise specified, pressures referred to in all Piping Sections are expressed in pounds per square in gage above atmospheric pressure; psig and all temperature are expressed in degrees Fahrenheit. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. During loading, transportation and unloading take care to prevent damage to pipes and coating. Carefully load and unload each pipe under control at all times. Place skids or blocks under each pipe in the shop and securely wedge pipe during transportation to ensure no injury to pipe and lining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Specific piping materials and appurtenances are specified in the respective Piping or System Sections. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Equipment shall be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted and as far as possible equipment of the same type shall be identical and from one manufacturer. C. Equipment shall have the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows (if applicable), working pressure for which they are designed and standard referenced specifications cast in raised letters or indelibly marked upon some appropriate part of the body. D. Unless otherwise noted, items shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psig or be of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. 2.2 UNIONS A. Unions shall be brass or bronze unions for joining nonferrous pipe; malleable brass or bronze seated iron or steel unions for joining ferrous pipe; PVC unions for joining PVC pipe; CPVC unions for joining CPVC pipe. B. Unions for chemical feed systems shall be socket union type with gasket material compatible with process fluid. C. Unions are not required in installations using grooved mechanical couplings. (The couplings shall serve as unions.) 2.3 FLANGED JOINTS A. Flanged Joints. Bolt and nuts, Type 316 stainless steel, bolt number and size same as flange standard; studs - same quality as machine bolts; Gaskets for other than air service shall be cloth-inserted rubber, 1/8-inch thick. Gaskets shall be full face. Gaskets for air service shall be 1/8-inch thick, constructed of elastomers suitable for temperatures to 250°F; rust resistant February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 coatings. 2.4 DIELECTRIC CONNECTORS A. Dielectric pipe fittings/insulators and unions shall be used to prevent galvanic action wherever valves or piping of dissimilar metals connect. This shall be particularly the case for copper, brass and bronze piping connecting to cast iron or steel piping systems, etc. B. Dielectric unions shall be used for 2 inches and smaller connections unless flanged connection shown on Drawings. Steel union nuts shall meet ASTM A575 requirements. The steel or ductile iron connection end shall have a steel body and shall have accurately machined taper tapped pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1. The copper connection end shall be a copper solder joint that meets requirements of ASTM B88. Dielectric unions shall be rated for at least 250 psig at 210F. C. Dielectric flange unions shall be used for connections 2-1/2 inches and larger. Cast iron flanges shall meet ASTM A126; the copper solder end shall meet ASTM B62 and the pipe thread shall meet ANSI B2.1. Dielectric flange unions shall be rated for at least 175 psig at 210F. D. Dielectric unions and flange unions shall be as manufactured by Epco Inc., Cleveland, OH or equal. E. Dielectric waterway fittings may be used for connections 8 inches and smaller. Zinc- electroplated ductile iron or steel pipe nipple with inert thermoplastic lining and grooved or threaded ends; Style 47 as manufactured by Victaulic Company, Easton, PA. F. Flange insulating kits shall be as acceptable to the Engineer, as manufactured by PSI or equal. G. Insulated sleeve couplings and flange adaptors shall be similar to those units as specified elsewhere. 2.5 PLUGS AND CAPS A. Provide standard plug or cap as required for testing; plugs, caps suitable for permanent service. B. Plug or cap or otherwise cover all piping work in progress. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ADAPTORS A. Between different types of pipe and/or fittings special adapters may be required to provide proper connection. Some of these may be indicated on the Drawings or specified with individual types of pipe or equipment. However, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure proper connection between various types of pipe, to structures and between pipe and valves, gates, fittings and other appurtenances. The Contractor shall provide all adapters as required, whether specifically noted or not. B. As required, these adapters shall be suitable for direct bury, with proper dielectric insulation and as a minimum, if metallic (not stainless steel or galvanized), with two coats of Coal Tar Epoxy. 2.7 VENTS AND DRAINS A. 1/2 inch vents shall be provided at the high point in each system. Vent connections may be tapped, provided the tap will accept three full threads on the bronze nipple. On the chemical system piping, the vent shall have a valve and the vent line routed to the nearest drain. B. 1–inch drains shall be provided to permit drainage of each system; provide hose end valve. 2.8 SERVICE CLAMPS A. Service clamps for outlet sizes up to 2 inches shall have malleable or ductile iron bodies which extend at least 160 degrees around the circumference of the pipe and shall have neoprene gaskets cemented to the saddle body. Bodies shall be tapped for IPS. Clamps shall be of the double strap design. Service clamps shall be Style 91 as manufactured by Dresser Industries, Inc. or equal as manufactured by Smith Blair; Mueller or equal. B. Service clamps for outlet sizes 4 inches through 12 inches where the outlet size is not greater than half the size of the main pipe shall have ductile iron bodies and a neoprene circular cross section O-ring gasket confined within the body. Outlet shall be AWWA C 110 flange or AWWA C 111 mechanical joint as required for the application. Straps shall be alloy steel, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 minimum 1/4 inch by 1–1/2 inches in cross section and fabricated with 3/4 inch threaded ends. Service clamps shall be Fig. A 10920 or A 30920 as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company or equal. 2.9 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS A. Fill station quick connect couplings shall be of the cam and groove type consisting of a male adapter conforming to Specification MIL C 27487. Male adapters shall be designed to receive a female coupler without requiring threading, bolting, or tools. Connections shall remain tight and leakproof under pressures up to 100 psig. Each adapter shall be furnished with a female coupler dust cap with Type 316 stainless steel cams, complete with an 18 inch long Type 316 stainless steel security chain. The coupling assembly for the hydrofluosilicic acid fill station shall consist of a PVDF male adapter with a PVDF female coupler dust cap as manufactured by Flo-Couplings, or equal. All other coupling assemblies shall consist of Type 316 stainless steel male adapters and female coupler dust caps as manufactured by Sivacon, Ever-tite, or equal. B. Chemical feed service flushing quick connects shall consist of PVDF female couplers with Type 316 stainless steel cams as manufactured by Flo-Couplings, or equal. Connections shall remain tight and leakproof under pressures up to 100 psig. C. Adapters shall be furnished in accordance with the Drawings, or as required by the installation. 2.10 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Refer to Section 40 05 09.00 for requirements. 2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Sleeve Couplings 1.Provide plain end type ends to be joined by sleeve couplings as stipulated in AWWA C201. a.Join welds on ends by couplings without pipe stops. Grind flush to permit slipping coupling in at least one direction to clear pipe joint. b.Outside diameter and out of round tolerances shall be within limits specified by coupling manufacturer. c. Provide lugs in accordance with ASTM A36. d.Provide hardened steel washers in accordance with ASTM A325. e.Plastic plugs shall be fitted in coupling to protect bolt holes. f. Nuts and bolts: (1) Provide bolts and bolt studs in accordance with ASTM A307 and ANSI B1.1 with hexagonal or square heads, coarse thread fit, threaded full length with ends chamfered or rounded. (2) Project ends 1/4 inch beyond surface of nuts. (3) Hexagonal nuts with dimensions in accordance with ANSI B18.2 and coarse threads in accordance with ANSI B1.1. 2.Middle ring of each mechanical coupling shall have a thickness at least equal to that specified for size of pipe on which coupling is to be used and shall not be less than 10 inches long for pipe 30 inches and larger and not less than 7 inches long for pipe under 30 inches in diameter. a.Omit pipe stop from inner surface of middle rings of couplings whenever necessary to permit removal of valves, flowmeters and other installed equipment. b.Provide pipe stops in other couplings. 3.Clean and shop prime with manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. 4.Furnish gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the fluid service. 5.Where shown on the Drawings, anchor sleeve coupled joints with harness bolts. Weld harness lugs to steel pipe in accordance with AWWA M-11. 6.Joint harness bolts shall be of sufficient length, with harness lugs placed so that coupling can be slipped at least in one direction to clear joint. Provide harnesses of sufficient number and strength to withstand test pressure. 7.Unless otherwise specified with the individual type of pipe, sleeve couplings (mechanical couplings) shall be Dresser Style 38 or 138 as manufactured by Dresser February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 Industries or engineer approved equal. 8.Similar insulation type couplings shall be provided at the face of buildings, between different type metals or where otherwise noted. 9.In addition to those locations noted on the Drawings, sleeve couplings shall be provided on all piping where it connects with a structure or buried directly under a structure at the structure's expansion joints. Special treatment will be required where pipe is encased in concrete, utilizing minimum 3 inch thick styrofoam placed perpendicular to the horizontal centerline of the coupling. B. Split or Grooved Couplings 1.Split couplings shall be cast in two or more parts. When secured together with ASTM A449 and A183 bolts and nuts, couplings shall engage grooved or shouldered pipe ends and encase a pressure-responsive elastomeric gasket to create a pipe seal. Gasket material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service required. 2.Split couplings shall be as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America; Numbers below refer to Victaulic Co. items, for reference only. 3.Unless otherwise specified with the individual type of pipe: a.Flexible split ring couplings for steel pipe shall be: (1) grooved ends – Style 77 (sizes through 12 inches) or W77 (sizes 14 through 24 inches) (2) shouldered ends – Style 44 b.Rigid split ring couplings shall be: (1) grooved ends – rigid type with Style 07 couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for steel pipe through 12 inches; Style W07 for sizes 14 through 24 inches; and for high pressure applications Style HP 70 couplings on steel pipe less than 18 in diameter; with sufficient wall thickness per AWWA C606, on standard groove on manufactured steel or other pipe. (2) shouldered ends – Style 44 coupling on ductile iron over 24-in diameter or without sufficient wall thickness per AWWA C606 or on manufactured steel pipe or thin wall stainless steel pipe. c. Vic-Rings (Shoulders) for Style 44 couplings shall be manufactured by Victaulic Company, and shall be of a type suitable for the intended service. 4.Ductile iron pipe for use with Victaulic Style 31 split type coupling joints shall have radius grooved ends conforming to AWWA C606. Pipe shall have grooved ends to provide either a rigid joint or flexible joint as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Flexible joint grooving shall permit expansion and contraction, and angular deflection. Rigid joint grooving shall allow no angular or linear movement. Minimum pipe wall thickness for grooved pipe shall be the following class: Size Class 4 thru 16 53 18 54 20 55 24 56 5.Grooved couplings for steel and stainless steel piping shall have roll grooving, machine roll or cut grooving, or ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting. 6.Stainless steel pipe shall be grooved with tools specifically designed for stainless steel pipe, equipped with ‘RX’ roll sets. 7.Rigid split couplings may be substituted for flanges as noted on the Drawings and in the individual pipe specifications. 8.Certain minimum thickness of pipe walls are required by AWWA C606 and coupling manufacturers for use of various type split couplings with certain pipes. The Contractor shall be responsible for utilizing at least those minimum wall thicknesses required (unless a greater thickness is specified or required in the individual pipe specifications) with split couplings. 9.If minimum thicknesses are not utilized with grooving, then a shouldered end treatment February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 with couplings as noted shall be utilized. C. Flanged Adaptors 1.Flanged adaptor connections for grooved or shouldered end pipe compatible with split couplings at fittings, valves and equipment shall be VIC Flange Style 341 for AWWA ductile iron pipe or Style 741 or W45R for steel pipe sizes as manufactured by the Victaulic Company of America. 2.Flanged adaptor connections for plain end pipe at fittings, valves and equipment shall be Victaulic “Depend-O-Lok®”, Dresser Style 127 or 128, similar models by ITT (formerly Smith Blair); Baker or equal. 3.All flange adapters shall be restrained as per AWWA M-11. No anchor pins are allowed. D. Pump and Equipment Flexible Connectors 1.The flexible connectors shall be expansion/vibration joints of the single arch type of butyl rubber construction with carcass of high grade woven cotton or suitable synthetic fiber and individual solid steel ring reinforcement. Soft rubber fillers shall be integrally cured into the arches to provide a smooth flow path to prevent settling of material into the arch. Joints shall be constructed to pipeline size and to meet working pressures and corrosive conditions similar to the line where installed. Joints shall have full faced fabric reinforced butyl flanges integral with the body. 2.Split steel or ductile iron back up rings shall be provided to ensure a good joint. Rings shall be designed for mating with ANSI Standard minimum 150 lb flanges. All joints shall be finish coated with Hypalon, or equal paint. 3.Expansion/vibration joints shall be furnished with control (harness) units. Harness units shall consist of minimum two drilled plates, stretcher bolts, and rubber washers backed by metal washers. The stretcher bolts shall prevent over elongation of the joint. Extra nuts shall be provided on the stretcher bolts on the inside of the plate to prevent overcompression. All nuts, bolts and plates shall be galvanized unless piping system requires a higher grade material. 4.The manufacturer of the expansion joints shall be a member of the Rubber Expansion Joint Division of the Fluid Sealing Association. Expansion joints shall be Style 1025 filled arch as manufactured by General Rubber Corp., South Hackensack, NJ or similar products of Mercer Rubber; Goodall Rubber. 5.In addition to other locations shown on the Drawings, expansion joints shall be utilized in all exposed piping, within one foot of a building expansion joint, and on the suction and discharge side of all positive displacement pumps, compressors and rotating machinery, as close to the unit as possible. E. Flexible Connectors 1.Provide one flexible connector for the seal water connection to each pump stuffing box. Connectors shall be of hose of Buna N or similar resilient material, with fiber reinforcement, rated minimum 150 psi with bronze or Type 304 stainless steel NPT end fittings and shall be 12 inches in length. Connectors shall be for the purpose of isolating pump vibration from the seal water piping. 2.In steel piping systems through 12 inches, three flexible type grooved joint couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector at equipment connections for vibration attenuation and stress relief. Couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration. Victaulic Style 77. 2.12 HARNESSING AND RESTRAINT A. Where harnessed couplings or adapters are noted, they shall conform to AWWA Manual M11 except as modified by the Drawings or this Specification. B. Unless otherwise noted, size and material for tie rods, clamps, plates and hex nuts shall be as shown on the Drawings, or, if not shown on the Drawings, shall be as required in AWWA Manual M11. Manufactured restraining clamp assemblies shall be as manufactured by Stellar Corporation, Columbus, OH, or fabricated equal. C. Restrained joints (such as welded, locking mechanical joints) shall be of the type specified with the individual type of pipe. If not specified, restrained (locking) mechanical joint pipe shall be of the manufacturer's standard design utilizing a locking device (ring or ears) integrally cast with the pipe. D. For sizes through 18 inch diameter ductile iron pipe only, the following may be used as an February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 alternative to other restraint system: 1.The optional mechanical joint restraints shall be incorporated in the design of a follower gland. The gland shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Dimensions of the gland shall be such that it can be used with the standardized mechanical joint bell and tee head bolts as specified with the pipe. 2.The restraint mechanism shall consist of numerous individually activated gripping surfaces to maximize restraint capability. The gripping surfaces shall be wedges designed to spread the bearing surfaces on the pipe. Twist off nuts, sized same as tee head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of restraining devices. When the nut is sheared off, standard hex nut shall remain. 3.The mechanical joint restraint device for ductile iron pipe shall have a working pressure of at least 250 pounds per square inch with a minimum safety factor of 2:1. 4.The mechanical joint restraint devices shall be of the type listed below or equal. 5.For Ductile Iron Pipe: EBAA Iron, Inc. Megalug 1100 series or equal by Star Pipe Products. E. F. Joint restraint for PVC pipe shall be EBAA Iron, Inc. Megalug Series 2000PV or equal by Star Pipe Products (Stargrip). The Contractor shall be responsible for anchorage including restraint. 2.13 PRESSURE GAGES A. Bosses, connections, or nipples for gages shall be provided as acceptable to the Engineer. Unbossed tappings shall not be acceptable. Where gage tappings are not available in the suction or discharge nozzle, the necessary tapping in the adjacent piping shall be made. B. In addition to the locations shown on the Drawings, pressure gages shall be furnished and installed on the upstream and downstream sides of pressure reducing stations and in the suction and discharge nozzle of all pumps, compressors and similar equipment. Additional pressure gages shall be furnished and installed as specified with individual equipment. C. Gages shall be furnished as part of a complete factory assembly, including gage, snubber, liquid fill, diaphragm seal (if shown on Drawings), isolation valve and connecting piping. Assembly shall be done in an instrumentation house using Vacuum Fill equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Unless otherwise noted, gage rating shall be from 0 to at least 2.5 percent higher than the rating of the pipe it is connected to. E. For Liquid Service 1.Pressure gages shall have an aluminum case and shall be 2-inch nominal diameter with a full sized Type 316 stainless steel Bourdon tube and a 300 series stainless steel movement. The gages shall be liquid filled with food grade oil and shall be provided with a filler/breather cap. The socket shall be 1/4 inch NPT Type 316 stainless steel with a bottom connection and the dial shall be a white background with black markings. Gages shall be ANSI Grade A plus or minus 1 percent of scale and shall have a blow out back design. 2.Gages for the above services shall be Model 344Y liquid filled with mineral or food grade oil as manufactured by Crosby Valve & Gage Co., or equal by U.S. Gage; Ashcroft or Trerice. F. Gages shall be furnished from standard ranges of the manufacturer, with dual range (ft and psi) scales, and with scales as approved during submittals. 2.14 DIAPHRAGM SEALS FOR GAGES A. Diaphragm seals shall be installed for all pressure gages and pressure switches not on clean water lines, to protect pressure gages and pressure switches from contact with the fluid in the pipeline. Gages shall be furnished as part of a complete factory assembly, including gage, snubber, diaphragm seal, liquid fill, bar stock isolation valve and threaded red brass interconnecting piping. Furnish also a 1/4 inch backflushing connection and ball valve. B. Diaphragm seals shall be minimum 2-inch diameter, or as required for the connected pressure gages. The diaphragm shall be "thread attached" to both piping and pressure switches or gages. Furnish mineral or food grade oil fill between the diaphragm seal and the gage. 1.Diaphragm seals shall have an upper housing of cadmium plated carbon steel, with the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 lower housing of material specifically chosen according to the fluid type and pressure being monitored with Type 304 stainless steel bolts. Diaphragms shall be Teflon. 2.Each diaphragm seal shall be connected to its respective piping or equipment with threaded red brass pipe and fittings. Pipe size and diaphragm tap size shall match the size of the gage tap on the equipment, but shall not be less than 3/4 inch, except for connections to plant water piping which shall be minimum 1/2 inch. Furnish a ball valve shut off valve between the pipeline or equipment and the diaphragm seal. 3.Each diaphragm seal shall have a minimum 1/4 inch NPT flush connection with ball valve and gage tap to match the size of the gage. 4.Furnish pulsation dampeners adequate to prevent pulsation and/or vibration of the gage indicator under all system operating conditions. 5.Pump gages shall connect to the diaphragm seal by a flexible Type 304 stainless steel capillary tube. Gages shall be mounted on a support stand independent of the pump and piping, to minimize vibration of the gages caused by vibration of the equipment or piping. Mount both the suction and discharge gages at the same elevation. Furnish supports as specified in Section 40 05 76, or attach gages to the seal water assembly support (where applicable). 6.Diaphragm seals shall be Type SG by Mansfield and Green, equal by Ashcroft, or equal. 2.15 LINE STRAINERS A. "Y" Type Strainers 1.Manual strainers furnished for pipe diameters smaller than 2 inches shall be "Y" type, capable of removing solids 0.01 inch in diameter and larger. The strainer body shall be of semi steel construction for steel pipe and brass or bronze for copper pipe and shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A278, Class 30. Strainer elements, including woven wire mesh, shall be constructed of stainless steel. 2.In grooved piping water systems, Victaulic Style 732 “Y” type strainers may be used. The strainer body shall be of ductile-iron construction for steel pipe and shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Perforated stainless steel basket shall be constructed of stainless steel. 3.The design of the strainer body shall be such that the cleanout plug and screen may be easily removed to permit inspection and cleaning without disassembly of the inlet and outlet piping. End connections shall be ANSI screwed pipe threads. 4.Sufficient spare screen shall be furnished for replacement of all "Y" type units at least once. The strainers shall be designed for a maximum operating pressure of 150 psig. They shall be as manufactured by GA Industries Inc., Pittsburgh, PA or equal B. “T” Type Strainers 1.In grooved piping water systems, Victaulic Style 730 “T” type strainers may be used. The strainer body shall be of ductile-iron construction for steel pipe and shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Perforated stainless steel basket shall be constructed of stainless steel. a.For sizes 14 through 24 inches, Victaulic Style W730 “T” type strainer with T- bolt hinged closure, AGS grooved ends, and steel body construction for steel pipe. 2.16 CLEANOUTS A. Interior flush floor cleanouts shall be of PVC construction with a 4-inch diameter threaded cover as shown on the Drawings. Interior flush floor cleanouts shall be Model PTC-208 with Gray 212 materials as manufactured by Plastic Oddities Inc., Shelby, NC. B. Exterior cleanouts on Schedule 40 PVC solvent welded drain piping (NOT located in the roadway) shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.10A and painted in accordance with Section 09 96 00.00. Provide a square 24-inch H 24-inch H 6-inch concrete pad for center flush mounting of cleanout in yard if cleanout is not located in sidewalk or other suitable structure as determined by Engineer. Concrete pad shall be Type A concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 with 6-inch H 6-inch (W1.4 H W1.4) welded wire mesh and 3/4-inch chamfer around perimeter of pad. C. All other exterior cleanouts shall consist of a coated cast iron ferrule with cut off sections, a tapered threaded bronze cleanout plug, Josam 58486 or equal, with a heavy round coated February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 cast iron access frame with anchor flanges and a gasketed cover, Josam Type No. 58680, similar models by Tyler or equal. Exterior cleanouts shall be installed as noted on the Drawings. D. Cleanouts shall be located where shown on the Drawings. E. Cleanout connections to 6 inch cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe and cleanout connections to 6 in ductile iron bell and spigot pipe shall be caulked. 2.17 FLOOR DRAINS A. Unless otherwise shown or scheduled on the Drawings, floor drains shall be Schedule 40 PVC solvent welded drain piping. B. Floor drains located inside pipe trenches or channel drains shall be of PVC construction with a 6 inch diameter grate and 4-inch diameter threads to be flush mounted on finished floor as shown on the Drawings. Floor drains shall be Model PTS-206 with Gray 212 colored materials as manufactured by Plastic Oddities, Inc., Shelby, NC. C. All other floor drains shall be of heavy-duty PVC construction with a 9-inch diameter grate and sediment trap to be flush-mounted on finished floor as shown on the Drawings. Floor drains shall be Model PSB 952 as manufactured by Plastic Oddities, Inc., Shelby, NC. D. Provide PVC P-trap drain fitting with primer tap only as shown on the Drawings. E. Provide PVC reducer/increaser drain fittings as needed to match drain pipe size shown on the Drawings. 2.18 ROTAMETERS & FLOW INDICATORS A. Specific rotameter sizes, types, and model numbers may be called out on the Drawings. If not, refer to below text. B. Rotameters for the systems shall be of the glass tube type with Borosilicate glass tubes, Type 302 stainless steel frames with slip on covers, 10 inch detached type aluminum scales graduated in gallons per minute, 10:1 flow range, accuracy of 2 percent of full scale and vertical screwed end connections. Tube size shall be the same size as the end connections. Pressure drop at rated capacity shall not exceed 32 inches of water. A flow control valve shall be provided to meet maximum flows. C. Number of rotameters shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Flow indicators for shaft seal/flushing water systems shall be brass body, glass or plastic tube, stainless steel float, 125 psig pressure rating. Accuracy shall be at least 5 percent of full scale. E. Rotameters as manufactured by King Instruments. 2.19 SPRAY NOZZLES A. Nozzles shall be of the size, with feed rates as noted on the Drawings. Nozzles shall be attached to the distribution header, as indicated on the Drawings, via split eyelet connections. Unless otherwise noted nozzles shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. Each nozzle shall be furnished with a stainless steel adjustable ball fitting. C. The distribution piping to the nozzles shall be sloped for drainage and shall be adequately supported to prevent sagging, while facilitating access for nozzle replacement. The Contractor shall test the system to demonstrate to the Engineer that it is entirely self draining prior to acceptance. D. All nozzles shall be the appropriate model, as manufactured by Spraying Systems Incorporated or equal. 2.20 APPURTENANCES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. All gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts and other required hardware shall be provided for connection of piping and appurtenances. Bolts and nuts shall be high strength, Type 316 stainless steel if submerged, buried, or subject to splashing and hot dipped galvanized otherwise, with tee head and hexagon nut. All other hardware shall be of the size, type and number as required and recommended by the piping or appurtenance manufacturer and as specified herein. B. All gaskets for flanges shall be full face and suitable for 200F operating temperature, unless higher temperature required on individual systems and the fluids carried. See also Division 1. C. Plugs, caps and similar accessories shall be of the same material as the pipe and of the locking type, unless otherwise noted. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 D. Unions shall be of the same material as the pipe, except for dielectric connections. E. Special protective tape shall be fabric reinforced petroleum tape as manufactured by Denso Inc., Houston, TX or equal. 2.21 COLOR CODING AND LABELING A. General 1.Provide a complete color coding system in compliance with the TCEQ Water Hygiene Division consisting of preprinted labels, Setmark Marking System, as manufactured by Seton or equal. Coding shall comply with the requirements of the PIPING SCHEDULE as indicated in Section 09 96 00.00. 2.Pipe labeling is required for all new or modified systems. 3.Piping system identification shall comply with the requirements of ANSI A13.1. 4.Colors listed in 09 96 00.00 are general. Actual colors will be selected based on a comparison to the existing plant color codes, except as otherwise indicated; samples shall be furnished for all pipe paint colors; with chips from existing piping where new service lines are connecting. 5.Labeling shall follow recommendations of ASME A13.1 – 2007 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 6.Labels and Directional Arrows a.Apply labels with directional arrows at connections to equipment, valves, branch fittings, at least one wall, floor, or ceiling boundary within a room and at intervals not greater than 30 feet. b.At each label, arrows indicating direction of flow shall point away from label. If flow may be in both directions, use double headed arrows. c. Lettering shall bear the full pipe system name as scheduled. d.Lettering height shall be as follows: Outside Pipe Diameter Minimum Letter Height 3/4-in to 1-in 1/2-in 1-in to 2-in 3/4-in 2-in to 6-in 1-in 8-in to 10-in 2-in Over 10-in 3-in e.Two labels minimum each room, crawl space or compartment, unless otherwise approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All dirt, scale, weld splatter, water and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside and outside of all pipe and sub-assemblies prior to installing. B. All pipe joints and connections to equipment shall be made in such a manner as to produce a minimum of strain at the joint. C. Install piping in a neat manner with lines straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines and with risers plumb. Run piping so as to avoid passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets and/or interference with other lines. All work shall be accomplished using recognized methods and procedures of pipe fabrication and in accordance with the latest revision of applicable ANSI Standards, ASME Codes and Pipe Fabrication Institute Standards. 1.Use full length of pipe except where cut lengths are necessary. Do not spring or deform piping to make up joints. 2.Pipe shall be cut square, not upset, undersize or out of round. Ends shall be carefully reamed and cleaned before being installed. Bending of pipe is not permitted. Use fittings for all changes in direction. 3.Do not use bushings except where specifically approved by the Engineer. Reducers shall be eccentric to provide for drainage from all liquid bearing lines and facilitate air February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 removal from water lines. 4.Verify the locations and elevations of any existing piping and manholes before proceeding with work on any system. Any discrepancies between the information shown on the Drawings and the actual conditions found in the field shall be reported at once to the Engineer. No claim for extra payment will be considered if the above provision has not been complied with. 5.Where lines of lower service rating tie into services or equipment of higher service rating the isolation valve between the two shall conform to the higher rating. 6.Mitering of pipe to form elbow is not permitted. 7.All piping interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned after installation and kept clean by approved temporary closures on all openings until the system is put in service. Closures should be suitable to withstand the hydrostatic test. 8.End caps on pre cleaned pipe shall not be removed until immediately before assembly. All open ends shall be capped immediately after completion of installation. D. Test Connections 1.Provide 1/2 inch female NPT test connection equipped with 1/2 inch brass plug on all pump suction and discharge lines. Where indicated on the Drawings, test connections should be equipped with bar stock valve and gage. Provide test connections at all steam traps. The connection shall be located on the discharge side of the trap between the trap and the first valve. It shall consist of a 1/2 inch branch connection terminated with a gate valve. E. Unions 1.Unions screwed or flanged shall be provided where indicated and in the following locations even if not indicated. a.In long runs of piping to permit convenient disassembly for alterations or repairs. b.In by-passes around equipment. c. In connections to tanks, pumps and other equipment between the shut-off valve and the equipment. d.In connections on both sides of traps, controls and automatic control valves. e.Unions are not required in installations using grooved mechanical couplings. (The couplings shall serve as unions.) F. Vents and Drains 1.Provide vents and drains in the following places: a.Water Lines – Vents at high points and drains at low points. b.Air Lines – Drains at low points. 3.2 UNIONS A. Use unions or Victaulic couplings to allow dismantling of pipe, valves and equipment. 3.3 WELDING A. Welding in accordance with ANSI Standard B31 and AWS B3.0. B. Install welding fittings on all welded lines. Make changes in direction and intersection of lines with welding fittings. Do not miter pipes to form elbows or notching of straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction. Do not employ welder who has not been fully qualified in above specified procedure and so certified by approved welding bureau or similar locally recognized testing authority. 3.4 GROOVED JOINTS A. Grooved joint couplings and specialties shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 3.5 FLANGED JOINTS A. Make flanged joints with bolts; bolt studs with nut on each end; or studs with nuts where one flange is tapped. Use number and size of bolts conforming to same ANSI Standard as flanges. Before flange pieces are assembled, remove rust resistant coating from machined surfaces, clean gaskets and smooth all burrs and other defects. Make up flanged joints tight, care being taken to prevent undue strain upon valves or other pieces of equipment. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 13 Piping Specialties – 40 05 70 3.6 SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. Install tierods, pipe clamps or bridles when sleeve type couplings or fittings are used in piping systems where indicated, and at changes in direction or other places as necessary, to prevent joints from pulling apart under pressure. Use bridles and tierods at least 3/4 inch in diameter, except where tierods replace flange bolts of smaller size; in which case, fit with nut on each side of pair of flanges. Joint harnessing shall conform, as a minimum, to the requirements for the bolts and tie bolt lugs as set forth in AWWA Manual M11. 3.7 WALL SLEEVE SEALS A. Use expandable rubber segmented sealing device with corrosion-resistant fasteners to make watertight the annular space between pipe and sleeve. Determine the required inside diameter of each individual wall opening or sleeve to fit the pipe and seal to assure a watertight joint as recommended by the manufacturer, before ordering, fabricating or installing. Install pipe concentrically through wall sleeve. Install and tighten seal per manufacturer's instructions. 3.8 TESTING A. Test all pipelines for water/gas tightness as specified in the Piping or System sections. Furnish all labor, testing plugs or caps, pressure pumps, pipe connections, gages and all other equipment required. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one or more of the testing procedures contained in Section 40 05 00 as specified in each Piping or System section. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. B. Repair faulty joints or remove defective pipe and fittings and replace as approved by the Engineer. Retest. 3.9 DISINFECTION A. After satisfactory testing, all piping specialties associated with water lines and potable water facilities shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance with Specification Section 33 13 00. B. Water being flushed from structures or pipelines after disinfection with a chlorine residue of 2 mg/L or greater, shall be treated with a dechlorination solution, in a method approved by the Engineer, prior to discharge to natural streams or upon the ground. If the disinfection water is bled slowly into the plant drain system, Engineer shall determine if dechlorination is required. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 SECTION 40 05 76 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals, and install a complete system of pipe hangers, supports, restraints, structural connections, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and expansion units, including all hanging, restraining, expansion, and supporting devices for supporting and restraining piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The absence of pipe supports, additional restraints, and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them. Pipe supports and restraints indicated on the Drawings are shown only to convey the intent of the design for a particular location and are not intended to represent a complete system. Not all pipe supports and restraints are indicated on the Drawings; if not shown, required pipe supports' design is included in the Contractor's scope of work. 1.Piping smaller than 12-in: Supports and restraints are shown only where specific types and locations are required; additional supports and restraint design and installation will be required and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 2.Piping 12-in and larger: Support and restraint systems are generally as indicated on the Drawings; Contractor shall provide supports as shown, but may augment or propose alternative means if they coordinate better with support products provided by the Contractor for the systems he is required to design. C. D. E. The requirements and references of Section 40 05 00 apply to Section 40 05 76 although all may not be specifically indicated in Section 40 05 76. For specific items: in case of a conflict between Section 40 05 76 and the requirements and references of any other Sections, the requirements of individual Sections shall take precedence over Section 40 05 76, unless specifically noted otherwise. This is a Reference Section; therefore not all the items included in Section 40 05 76 may be required in the Project. Please refer to the Drawings for items specifically required in this Project. Additional requirements for related items may be included in Section 23 05 13; in case of a conflict that Section governs. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Price. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Ferrous Metal: Iron, steel, stainless steel, and alloys with iron as principal component. B. Wetted or submerged: Submerged, less than 1-ft above liquid surface, below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other damp locations. C. "Pipe" or "piping" shall mean all pipe, piping system(s), hose, tube, fittings, joints, valves, and similar appurtenances. D. Supports: wherever the word "supports" or "pipe supports" are used, they shall mean pipe supports, hangers, structural connections, concrete inserts, anchors, guides, bolts, expansion units, restraints and all restraint, hanging, supporting, allowing controlled expansion, or other means of attaching piping along with the necessary appurtenances. E. See also Section 40 05 00. 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Concrete is included in Division 03. B. Miscellaneous metal is included in Section 05 10 01. C. Field painting is included in Division 09 96 00. D. Pipe and fittings are included in respective sections of Divisions 40. E. The project process piping schedule is included in Section 40 05 70. F. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 50. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 G. Hangers and supports pertaining to HVAC and Plumbing systems are included in their respective Sections. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See also Sections 40 05 00 and 01 33 02. B. Shop Drawings 1.Submit complete sets of shop drawings in AutoCAD of all items to be furnished under Section 40 05 76, including complete layouts, schedules, location plans, and complete total bill of materials for all pipe support systems. 2.Submittals shall include a representative catalog cut for each different type of item indicating the materials of construction, important dimensions and range of pipe sizes for which that item is suitable. 3.Complete piping drawings as submitted for each piping submittal indicating type of support, location, magnitude of load transmitted to the structure, magnitude and direction of thermal expansion and thrust forces and type of expansion fittings, anchor, guide and other pipe supporting appurtenances including structural fasteners. 4.Where standard items are not suitable, submit detailed drawings showing materials and details of construction for each type of special item. Show also revisions to support, restraint and expansion, systems resulting from changes in related piping system layout, or addition of flexible joints. Provide detailed information on anti-seize compound. 5.Submit complete design data for all systems under Section 40 05 76 to show conformance with Section 40 05 76. C. Quality Control Submittals 1.Submit maintenance information on all items in Section 40 05 76. 2.Submit support system calculations. 3.All supports and appurtenances shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI B31.1, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of Section 40 05 76. D. Support System Design 1.Contractor shall engage the services of an independent registered professional engineer ordinarily engaged in the business of pipe support systems analysis, to analyze system piping and service conditions, and to develop a detailed support system, specific to the piping material, pipe joints, valves, and piping appurtenances proposed for use. a.The proposed support system engineer shall have at least 5 years of experience in the analysis and design of similar systems, including the use of commercial and custom pipe supports and in the use of commercial pipe stress software programs. Provide a detailed resume, including references from projects within the past 5 years. The use of support systems engineer shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.The support system design shall include: a.Criteria by piping system. b.Summary of Contractor-selected related components including joints, class, valves, appurtenances, etc., and commercial supports and especially including pipe materials. c. Dead weight and dynamic analysis, including system thermal effects and pressure thrusts. Computer-based software system equivalent to ADLPIPE. (1) Each system shall be presented in an isometric graphic and shall show the resolved and resultant force and moment systems, as well as all recommended hangers, supports, anchors, restraints, and expansion/flexible joints. d.Submit a support system design to the Engineer for approval. (1) After the work is installed, but before it is filled for start-up and testing, the support system design engineer shall inspect the work and shall certify its complete adequacy. Each system shall be inspected and certified in the same way. (2) Submit a report, including all field modifications and including all certificates. (3) The report shall bear the stamp of a professional engineer registered in February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 State of Texas and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. e.All aspects of the analysis and design shall comply with the provisions of ANSI B31.1 and the referenced standards. f. Support arrangements shall be coordinated to eliminate interference with similar systems to be installed under HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical; to account for structural expansion joints and to maintain access for both personnel and for the removal of equipment. 1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1.MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture 2.MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application 3.MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2.ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping 1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General 1.All supports and appurtenances shall be of approved standard design, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. Any reference to a specific figure number of a specific manufacturer is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of product and shall not be considered as proprietary. Note that different materials required, as specified in paragraph 2.01K, may require different figures or model numbers than those shown. 2.The minimum working factor of safety for all items, with the exception of springs, shall be 5 times the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming 10-ft of water-filled pipe being supported and normal test pressures. 3.Design for all loads using a safety factor of 5. 4.All items shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support, restrain and allow expansion of the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations, and all probable externally applied forces. 5.All of the equipment specified herein is intended to support, restrain and allow expansion of the various types of pipe and piping systems shown on the Drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to develop final details and any details associated with special conditions not already covered to meet the system conditions (in particular system temperatures and pressures) specified in the respective Divisions, 43, , and 40. 6.Supports shall be sufficiently close together such that the sag of the pipe is within limits that will permit drainage and avoid excessive bending stresses from concentrated loads between supports. 7.Complete design details of the pipe system components shall be submitted for review and approval as specified in PART 1. No support shall be installed without approved support system drawings. B. If not specified in Section 40 05 76, related piping appurtenances shall comply with other and related requirements Sections of Divisions or 40. Also, additional supports and restraints and related requirements, are indicated on the Drawings. C. Seismic Design and restraint requirements, in accordance with the Structural Design criteria shall be included. PART 2 PRODUCTS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 2.1 GENERAL A. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, submit certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. B. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves, fittings and other pipe appurtenances, and to support and secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. Any structural steel members required to brace any piping from excessive dislocation shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 05 10 01 and shall be furnished and installed under Section 40 05 76. C. Contractor may propose minor adjustments to the piping arrangements in order to simplify the supports, or in order to resolve minor conflicts in the work. Such an adjustment might involve minor change to a pipe centerline elevation so that a single trapeze support may be used. D. Where flexible sleeve, split ring, vibration, or other couplings are required at equipment, tanks, etc., the end opposite to the piece of equipment, tank, etc shall be rigidly supported to prevent transfer of force systems to the equipment. No fixed or restraining supports shall be installed between a flexible coupling and the piece of equipment. E. All pipe and appurtenances connected to the equipment shall be supported in a manner to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment or piping system. F. Pipe supports shall not induce point loadings but shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. G. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or as specified herein. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders, and walkways, unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. H. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of flexible split ring type couplings and sleeve type couplings, and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. I. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in the pipe support selection and installation. J. Insofar as is possible, floor supports shall be given preference. Where specifically indicated, concrete supports, as shown on the Drawings may be used. Base elbow and base tees shall be used where possible. K. Restraints, flexible connections, expansion items, and related items as included in other specifications (especially Sections 40 05 70 and other individual pipe sections) and shown on the Drawings. L. Materials of Construction for all Supports: 1.All materials shall be certified as resistant to the fluid being carried and the location where they are installed, while providing di-electric protection between dissimilar metals and cushioning as required between metallic and non-metallic surfaces. The following shall apply unless specifically indicated otherwise, or acceptable to the Engineer. 2.For restraints and flexible couplings as noted above. 3.For support of metallic pipe: a.Submerged, buried, or within outdoor structures (vaults, etc): Type 316 stainless steel. b.Within chemical areas: Vinyl ester fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) for pipe size up to 2-in, epoxy coated steel for 2.5-in size and larger. c. Other locations: steel with galvanizing where noted or if not otherwise noted, coating as required in Division 09; all with dielectric protection. d.Additional requirements (including dielectric insulation): see following paragraphs. 4.For support of non-metallic pipe: a.Submerged, buried, or within outdoor structures: Type 316 stainless steel or FRP. b.Within chemical areas: vinyl ester FRP. c. Other locations: steel with galvanizing where noted or if not otherwise noted, February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 coating as required in Division 09; all with local stress protection shields. d.Additional requirements (including stress protection shields): see following paragraphs 5.Wherever stainless steel is noted, it shall be Type 316 unless noted otherwise. 2.2 INSULATION A. See Paragraph 2.14 and Drawings. B. See also Section07 21 00. 2.3 SUPPORT AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS A. Steel or Ductile Iron Piping 1.Cast iron and ductile iron, steel and stainless steel piping shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10-ft with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 2.Support spacing for ductile iron, steel, and stainless steel piping 2-in and smaller diameter shall not exceed 5-ft. B. Copper Piping 1.Supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated or shall have a 1/16-in plastic coating. 2.Support spacing for copper piping and tubing 2-in and smaller diameter shall not exceed 5 ft and greater than 2-in diameter shall not exceed 8-ft. 3.Where pipe supports come in contact with copper piping, provide protection from galvanic corrosion by: wrapping pipe with 1/16-in thick neoprene sheet material and galvanized protection shield; isolators similar to Elcen, Figure No. 228; or copper-plated or PVC-coated hangers and supports. C. Non-Metallic Piping 1.All uninsulated non-metallic piping such as PVC, CPVC, HDPE, PVDF, etc shall be protected from local stress concentrations at each support point. Protection shall be provided by non-metallic protection shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. a.Where pipes are bottom supported 180 degrees, arc shields shall be furnished. Where 360-degree arc support is required, such as U-bolts, protection shields shall be provided for the entire pipe circumference. All U- bolts or clamps for non-metallic pipes shall be plastic coated. b.Protection shields shall have an 18-gauge minimum thickness, not be less than 12-in in length, and be securely fastened to pipe with Type 316 stainless steel straps not less than 1/2-in wide. 2.Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by the manufacturer except that support-spacing shall be manufacturers recommendation minus 2-ft down to 5- ft spacing recommendation, then spacing shall be 3-ft. 3.Supports for horizontal multiple PVC plastic piping: a.Shall be continuous wherever possible. b.Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic PVC pipe runs, where possible, shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as: Electray Ladder by Husky- Burndy; The Globetray by the Metal Products, a Division of United States Gypsum or equal. c. Rung spacing shall be 12-in. Tray width shall be approximately 6-in for single runs and 12-in for double runs. d.Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners similar to: Globe, Model M-CAC; Husky-Burndy, Model SCR or equal. e.Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9-ft. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact with plastic PVC pipe shall provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. D. Framing Support System 1.Beams: Size such that beam stress does not exceed 25,000 psi and maximum February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 deflection does not exceed 1/240 of span. 2.Column Members: Size in accordance with manufacturers’ recommended method. 3.Support Loads: Calculate using weight of pipes filled with water. 4.Maximum Spans: a.Steel and ductile iron pipe, 3-in diameter and larger: 10-ft centers, unless otherwise shown. b.Other pipelines and special situations: Same as noted in previous paragraphs. May require supplementary hangers and supports. E. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of not more than 12-ft by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests and at all points necessary to ensure rigid construction. All vertical pipes passing through pipe sleeves shall be secured using a pipe collar. 2.4 ANCHOR BOLTS/SYSTEMS A. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to withstand shear, and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED ON ANY PIPE SUPPORT HUNG BELOW A ROOF OR CEILING, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Expansion anchors shall be equal to Kwik Bolt as manufactured by Hilti USA, Tulsa, Oklahoma; or Wej-it by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Broomfield, CO. The length of expansion bolts shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1-in behind the steel reinforcement. C. Unless otherwise noted: use Type 304 stainless steel anchoring parts/bolts and hardware for non-submerged supports, Type 316 stainless steel for submerged anchors. 1.Size of anchor bolts as designed by manufacturer, 1/2-in minimum diameter or as shown on the Drawings. D. Anchors to concrete in chemical areas shall be epoxy secured vinyl ester FRP all thread, insertion depth and size as required by the manufacturer for the design loads. Nuts, bolts and hardware shall all be vinyl ester FRP construction. Floor supports and anchors shall be installed prior to application of chemical resistant seamless flooring systems. 2.5 HANGER RODS A. Paragraph 2.01 may require different materials. Where use of steel is allowed, hanger rods shall be hot-rolled steel, machine-threaded, and, except for stainless steel, galvanized after fabrication. The strength of the rod shall be based on its root diameter. 1.Hanger rods shall be attached to concrete structures using concrete inserts similar to F&S, Figures 180, 571, or 150; or continuous concrete inserts per F&S. Inserts shall be malleable iron or steel with galvanized finish. 2.Beam-clamps, C-clamps, or welded-beam attachments shall be used for attaching hanger rods to structural steel members. B. Minimum rod size for metallic rod hangers: (* For pipe diameters less than 14-in, if using pipe roller, use 2 hanger rods with minimum diameter noted below for pipe's diameter). Nominal Pipe/ Minimum Hanger Tube Diameter Rod Diameter 1.Less than 2-1/2 =1/4-in* 2.3-in - 8-in = 1/2-in* 3. 10-in - 14-in = 3/4-in* 4. 16-in - 20-in = 2 at 1-in 5. 24-in = 2 at 1-1/4-in 6. 30-in = 2 at 1-1/2-in 2.6 SINGLE PIPE HANGERS A. See Paragraph 2.01 for materials. B. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe hangers and supports shall be standard catalogued components, conforming to the requirements of MSS-41, 58, or 69 and shall be of the following type: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 1.Grinnell Co., Inc., Figure 104, 260, or 171. 2.Equal models by: B-Line; F&S Central, Brooklyn, NY; Elcen Metal Products Co., Franklin Park, IL; or Unistrut Northeast, Cambridge, MA. C. Single pipes shall be supported by hangers suspended by hanger rods from structural steel members, concrete ceilings, bottom of trapeze hangers, and wall-mounted steel angle brackets. D. Where pipes are near walls, beams, columns, etc and located an excessive distance from ceilings or underside of beams, welded steel wall brackets similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure Nos. 69-68, 84, or 139 shall be used for hanging pipe. Where single pipes rest on top of bracket pipe supports, attachments shall meet requirements as specified under multiple pipe hangers. 2.7 MULTIPLE PIPE HANGERS A. Paragraph 2.01 may require different materials than those noted below. B. Suspended multiple pipes, running parallel in the same horizontal plane that are adjacent to each other, shall be suspended by trapeze type hangers or wall brackets. Trapeze hangers shall consist of galvanized structural steel channel (where steel is allowed) supported from galvanized threaded rod or attached to concrete walls, columns, or structural steel support members. See previous paragraphs about multiple PVC pipe supports. C. Except as otherwise specified herein, pipe anchors used for attaching pipe to trapeze or multiple pipe wall brackets shall be anchor or pipe chairs similar to F&S, Figure Nos. 158, 419, 160A, 160B, as required. Material of construction shall be galvanized steel where allowed. Chair U bolts shall be tightened to allow freedom of movement for normal expansion and contraction except where pipe must be anchored to control direction of movement or act as a thrust anchor. 2.8 SINGLE PIPE SUPPORTS FROM BELOW A. Paragraph 2.01 may require different materials than those noted below. B. Single pipes located in a horizontal plane close to the floor shall be Pedestal type: Schedule 40 pipe stanchion, saddle and anchoring flange. 1.Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 37 with U-Bolt a.Grinnell, Figure 259. b.B-Line, Figure B3090. c. F&S, Figure 427. 2.Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 38 without clamp a.Grinnell, Figure 264. b.B-Line, Figure B3093. C. Pipes less than 3-in in diameter shall be held in position by supports fabricated from steel C channel, welded post base similar to Unistrut, Figure P2072A; and pipe clamps similar to Unistrut, Figures P1109 through 26 (except see paragraph 2.01 for alternate materials required). Where required to assure adequate support, fabricate supports using two vertical members and post bases connected together by horizontal member of sufficient load capacity to support pipe. Wherever possible, supports shall be fastened to nearby walls or other structural member to provide horizontal rigidity. More than one pipe may be supported from a common fabricated support. D. Unless otherwise noted, pipes 3-in in diameter and larger shall be supported by adjustable stanchions. Stanchions shall provide at least 4-in adjustment and be flange mounted to floor. E. Use yoked saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18-in or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. F. Provide neoprene waffle isolation pad under anchoring. G. Pipe roller type supports may be used where noted on the Drawings. 2.9 WALL SUPPORTED SINGLE AND MULTIPLE PIPES A. Single or multiple pipes located adjacent to walls, columns, or other structural members shall be supported using welded steel wall brackets (except see Paragraph 2.01 for alternate material requirements) as manufactured by Grinnell, Figure 195 or Elcen, Figure 57. B. Where noted, multiple pipes may be supported on C-channel with steel brackets similar to Unistrut pipe clamps; with pipe anchor chairs; or equal. C. Individual pipes, up to 8-in diameter, where noted, may use MSS Type 8 pipe clamps as February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 noted on the Drawings. D. All members shall be securely fastened to wall, column, etc., using double-expansion shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required. 2.10 BASE ANCHOR SUPPORT A. Where pipes change direction from horizontal to vertical via a bend, a welded or cast base bend support (except see Paragraph 2.01 for alternate material requirements) shall be installed at the bend to carry the load. The base bend shall be fastened to the floor, pipe stanchion, or concrete pedestal using expansion anchors or other method as approved by the Engineer. B. Where shown on the Drawings, pipe bends shall be supported using concrete supports. Pipes shall be securely fastened to the concrete supports with suitable metal bands as required and approved by the Engineer. A neoprene insert shall be used to isolate the piping from the poured concrete. 2.11 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Where vertical pipes are not supported by a Unistrut type system as specified, they shall be supported in one of the following methods. See Paragraph 2.01 for alternative materials required. 1. For pipes 1/4-in to 2-in in diameter, an extension hanger ring shall be provided with an extension rod and hanger flange. The rod diameter shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of pipe to be supported. The hanger ring shall be steel- or PVC-clad depending on the supported pipe. The hanger ring shall be equal to Carpenter & Patterson, Figure Nos. 81 or 81CT. The anchor flange shall be galvanized malleable iron similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 85. 2.For pipes equal to or greater than 2-in in diameter, extended pipe clamps similar to Carpenter & Patterson, Figure No. 267 may be used. The hanger shall be attached to concrete structures using double expansion shields or to steel support members using welding lugs similar to Carpenter & Patterson, Figure No. 220. B. Pipe supports shall be provided for closely spaced vertical piping systems required to provide a rigid installation. The interval of vertical support spacing shall be as specified, but in no case shall vertical interval exceed 12-ft. The support system shall consist of a framework suitably anchored to floors, ceilings, or roofs. C. Unless otherwise specified, shown, or specifically approved by the Engineer, vertical runs exceeding 12-ft shall be supported by base elbows/tees, clamps, brackets, wall rests, and pipe collars, all located as required to ensure a rigid installation. D. Pipe riser clamps, per MSS SP58, shall be used to support all vertical pipes extending through floor slabs. Riser clamps shall be galvanized steel (unless other materials required in Paragraph 2.01) manufactured by: 1.Carpenter & Patterson, Figure No. 126. 2.Grinnell, Figure 261. 3.B-Line, Figure B3373. 4.Or equal. E. Copper-clad or PVC-coated clamps shall be used on copper pipes. Insulation shall be removed from insulated pipes prior to installing riser clamps. Insulation shall not be damaged by clamp installation. 2.12 SPECIAL SUPPORTS A. Frame work supports 1.Vertical and horizontal supporting members shall be U-shaped channels similar to Unistrut, Series P1000. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps or pipe straps. All components shall be of materials as previously noted. See also Paragraph 2.08. 2.For piping 3-in and smaller, the framework shall be as manufactured by the Unistrut Corporation; Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products Division of U.S. Gypsum; or equal. For piping larger than 3-in, the support frame shall be fabricated February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 from structural steel shapes and secured through the use of drop in, adhesive or expansion anchors. 3.The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and fittings required for a complete assembly including end caps for all Unistrut members. 4.Electrical Conduit Support: Under Division 16. 5.The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Shop drawings, as specified in Paragraph 1.03, shall be submitted and shall show all details of the installation, including dimensions and types of supports. In all instances the completed frame shall be adequately braced to provide a complete rigid structure when all the piping has been attached. See also Paragraph 2.03D. B. Supports not otherwise described in Section 40 05 76 shall be fabricated or constructed from standard structural steel shapes in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 05500 or Unistrut-type frame; have anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein; shall meet the minimum requirements listed below; and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. C. Additional Pipe Support Situations 1.Supporting Multiple Chemical and Related Piping: 2.Location: indicated on Drawings or otherwise required, especially adjacent to chemical pumps. 3.Use: framework support. 4.Materials: FRP, with proper local stress protection. 2.13 SHOP FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare and prime metallic (except non-stainless steel) supports in accordance with Division 09. 2.14 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated non-steel piping. Oversize the rollers and supports as required. Manufacturers: Grinnell, Figure 167; B-Line, Series B3151. B. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated metal pipe. Oversize the rollers and supports as required. Manufacturers: Grinnell, Figure 160; or B-Line, Series B316. C. Vibration Isolation Pad: Install under base flange of pedestal type pipe supports adjacent to equipment, and where required to isolate vibration. Isolation pads to be neoprene, waffle type, manufacturers Mason Industries, Type W; or Korfund. D. Dielectric Barrier 1.Install between carbon steel members and copper or stainless steel pipe. 2.Install between stainless steel supports and non-stainless steel ferrous metal piping. 3.All stainless steel piping shall be isolated from all ferrous materials, including galvanized steel by use of neoprene sheet material and protection shields. E. Electrical Isolation: Install 1/4-in by 3-in neoprene rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Proceed with the installation of piping and supports only after any building structural work has been completed and new concrete has reached its 28-day compressive strength. B. The installation of pipe support systems shall in no way interfere with the operation of any overhead bridge cranes, monorails, access hatches, etc. No piping shall be supported from metal stairs, other pipes, ladders, and walkways unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. The installed systems shall not interfere with maintenance and operational access to any equipment installed under Section 40 05 76, or any other Section. C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings (within four pipe diameters), and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. D. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is placed. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked that have a direct bearing on the pipe February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 10 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints – 40 05 76 location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under Section 40 05 76. E. Apply anti-seize compound to all nuts and bolts. Supports installed without the approved compound shall be dismantled and correctly installed, at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Support no pipe from any other pipe above it. G. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP69 and MSS SP89, unless shown otherwise. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. H. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are made. I. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently of connected piping. J. Brace horizontal pipes movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. K. Where supports are required in areas to receive chemical resistant seamless flooring, install supports prior to application of flooring system. 3.2 TESTING A. All pipe support systems shall be tested after installation in conjunction with the respective piping pressure tests. If any part of the pipe support system proves to be defective or inadequate, it shall be repaired or augmented under Section 40 05 76 to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.3 FIELD FINISHING A. Paint atmospheric exposed surfaces as specified in Division 09. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 SECTION 40 23 10 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install test, and disinfect (as required) all steel pipe and fittings (aboveground) as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Steel pipe shall include black steel and galvanized steel pipe and fittings. C. Steel pipe shall include steel pipe casing as shown on the Drawings as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is specified in Section 03 30 00. B. C. D. E. F. Pipeline Testing and Disinfection of Water Lines is included in Section 33 13 00. Piping General Requirements are included in Section 40 05 00. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 50. Piping specialties are included in Section 40 05 70. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 40 05 76. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for Engineer's review. 1.Large–scale complete and dimensional working AutoCAD drawings of all pipe layouts. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, lining and coating systems, proposed welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Include location of any sample taps Contractor may require for sampling disinfection, etc. 2.Joint details; methods, and locations of supports; and complete information concerning type, size, and location of all welds. Shop and field welds shall be clearly differentiated, and welds will be clearly detailed with preparation procedures for all pipe and parent metal comprising each weld. Critical welding procedures shall be identified along with methods for controlling welding stresses and distortions. Locations and proposed joint details or butt straps used to control temperature stresses in the shop and field shall also be clearly identified. B. Submit manufacturer's certifications that pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C 200. C. Submit manufacturer's affidavits that coatings, linings, tape coatings, and heat shrink joint sleeves comply with applicable requirements of this Section and: 1.Coatings were applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. 2.Coatings and linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. 3.Test Results: a.Compressive strength (7 and 28 day) test results for mortar coating. b.Hydrostatic testing, magnetic particle, and x-ray weld test reports as required. D. Submit certification from NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, having Level III certification for coatings and linings, that steel pipe furnished on the project was properly inspected and all defective coatings detected were properly repaired. E. Submit design calculations for all steel pipe and fittings including wall thickness and stress February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 analysis. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. F. Submit manufacturer’s hot tapping procedure, and a laying schedule of a pictorial nature with a plan view of each pipe segment sketched so that pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, and welded joints are detailed. G. Submit certification from the manufacturer that design was performed for the project in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Certification to be signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. H. Submit affidavits of compliance that materials and work furnished comply with the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and these specifications. I. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and assurance for materials and welding as indicated in Part 1.06. Submit at least 30 days prior to repair work, procedures that describe in details shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, etc. J. Submit following for non-shrink grout for special applications: 1. Manufacturer’s technical literature included specifications for mixing, placing, and curing grout. 2. Results of tests performed by certified independent testing laboratory showing conformance to ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink Grout and requirements of this specification. 3. Certification product is suitable for use in contact with potable water. K. Submit proof of certification for welders. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to perform. Ensure welder and welding operator have been certified within the last 6 months in accordance with AWWA C 206. L. Prior to start of field-applied cement mortar lining operation, submit comprehensive plan which identifies and describes as minimum: 1. Equipment used for batching, weighing, mixing, transporting, and placing mortar. 2. Qualifications and specific experience of machine operators. 3. Source and type of cement, pozzolan, sand, and mixtures used and certifications from suppliers that materials meet specifications. 4. Mix proportions to be used and slump limits (maximum and minimum). 5. A quality control plan which identifies quality control material tests and documented inspections necessary to ensure compliance with specified requirements. M. Submit certification showing calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by Project Manager. 1.5 REFERENCES A. AASHTO – Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. B. AREA – Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume II, Chapter 15. C. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel. D. ASTM A 53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc–Coated Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM A 105 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Pipe Forging for Piping Applications. F. ASTM A 106 – Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. G. ASTM A 120 – Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot–Dipped Zinc–Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. H. ASTM A 135 – Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. I. ASTM A 139 – Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (ARC) - Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over). J. ASTM A 234 – Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Services. K. ASTM A 570 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 L. ASTM A 1011 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. M. ASTM C 33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. N. ASTM C 150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement. O. ASTM C 595 – Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. P. ASTM C 1107 – Standard Specification for Package Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non- shrink). Q. ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tests. R. ANSI B2.1 – Pipe Threads, Except Dry Seal. S. ANSI B16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. T. ANSI B16.5 – Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. U. ANSI B16.9 – Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings. V. ANSI B16.11 – Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded. W. AWWA C 200 – Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger. X. AWWA C 203 – Coal–Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines – 4 Inches and Larger–Shop applied. Y. AWWA C 205 – Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe. Z. AWWA C 206 – Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. AA. AWWA C 207 – Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. BB. AWWA C 208 – Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; Addendum C 208A. CC. AWWA C 209 – Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. DD. AWWA C 210 – Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. EE. AWWA C 213 – Fusion–Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. FF. AWWA C 214 – Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. GG. AWWA C219 – Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe. HH. AWWA C 602 – Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines - 4 in. (100 mm) and Larger - In Place. II.AWWA C606 – Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. JJ. AWWA M 11 – Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation. KK. SSPC Good Painting Practice, Volume 1. LL. SSPC PA 2 – Paint Application Specification No. 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. MM. SSPC SP 1 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 Solvent Cleaning. NN. SSPC SP 5 – Joint Surface Preparation Standard White Blast Cleaning. OO. SSPC SP 6 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. PP. SSPC SP 10 – Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. QQ. SSPC VIS 1 – Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. RR. FS WW-P-521F – Pipe-Fittings, Flange Fittings, and Flanges; Steel and Malleable Iron (Threaded and Butt Welded), 150 pound SS. FS WW-U-531D – Unions, Pipe, Steel, or Malleable Iron; Threaded Connection, 150 pound and 250 pound 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. For large-diameter water lines, manufacturer shall have a permanent quality control department and laboratory facilities capable of performing inspections and testing required by the Specifications. Certification by the Steel Plate Fabricators Association (SPFA) or certification under International Standards Organization (ISO) quality control standards at the discretion of the Engineer. Material testing, inspection procedures, and manufacturing process shall be subject to inspection by Project Manager. Perform tests and inspections required by referenced standards and these Specifications, including but not limited to, the following. Correct all nonconforming conditions. 1.Steel Plate: Review mill certifications for conformance to requirements of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 Specifications; perform physical testing of each heat of steel for conformance to applicable ASTM standards. 2.Pipe: a.Inspect thickness, circumference, roundness, strength and size of seam welds (spiral or longitudinal), and squareness of pipe ends to verify compliance with AWWA C 200. b.Inspect physical dimensions and overall conditions of all joints for compliance with AWWA C 200, approved submittals, and Specifications. c. Finished pipe section shall be hydrostatically tested to 75 percent of specified minimum yield strength of steel being used with zero leakage. d.For wall thickness greater than ½-inch, perform Charpy V-notch (CVN) test in accordance with AWWA C 200. 3.Linings: a.Inspect unlined pipe for overall condition of bare inside barrel. Inside barrel shall be free of corrosive products, oil, grease, dirt, chemical, and deleterious material. b.Inspect lined pipe for physical dimensions and overall condition of lining, visible surface defects, thickness of lining, and adhesion to steel surface. c. Review certifications by manufacturers of lining components for conformance to AWWA standards and these Specifications. 4.Coatings: Measure temperature and dew points of ambient air before applying coatings. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of coatings. Inspect for visible surface defects, thickness, and adhesion of coating to surface and between layers. 5.Final Inspection: a.Before shipment, inspect each finished pipe, fitting, special and accessory for markings, metal thickness, coating thickness, lining thickness (if shop applied), joint dimensions, and roundness. b.Inspect for coating placement and defects. Test exterior coating for holidays. c. Inspect linings for thickness, pitting, scarring, and adhesion. B. Fabricated pipe and fitting items under this Section may be designed and supplied by multiple manufacturers to meet supply requirements provided all manufacturers meet the quality assurance requirements of this specification including the required experience clause. Coordination of design and submittal requirements for consistency will be the Contractor's sole responsibility C. The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all inspection and testing requirements as specified in the referenced standards. Submit signed certificates of such test and their results at least 5 days prior to shipment of the goods. In addition, all pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant by the Engineer for compliance with this Section including using an independent testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least 14 days in advance of any phase of the pipe manufacture. D. All automatic and manual welding procedures used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be prequalified under Section IX of the ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or AWS B2.1. Welding procedures shall be required for, but not necessarily limited to, longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for harness and lug connectors. All factory welding shall be done by certified welders, who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 and AWWA C206 by an independent local, approved testing agency in advance of any pipe production. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests and Contractor shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders. Submit welder qualifications. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings B. Dimensions and elevations for all buried and above grade piping shall be field verified by the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 Contractor. C. Note information in Pipe Schedule on Drawings, if any, and in this Section especially concerning pressures, coating and linings, minimum thickness, etc. In case of a conflict, the more stringent information in Engineer's opinion shall govern. D. Note that Contractor is responsible for compatibility between their pipe, flanges, valves, etc. E. Provide steel pipe casing where shown on the Drawings and as required to resolve a construction conflict where applicable. 1.8 MARKINGS, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Legibly mark all pipes, fittings, specials, and appurtenances to be consistent with laying schedule and marking drawings. Each pipe shall be identified with sequential numbering and each marked pipe will appear on marking drawings in the identified locations for installation. Special fittings, bends, and appurtenances requiring a specific orientation will be appropriately marked with the words "TOP" in the correct position and in a consistent location. B. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. See also AWWA C214 and/or C222 and the referenced AWWA manual for shipping, handling, and storage procedures. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damage to linings or coatings discovered during examination shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's cost before the pipe is installed. Pipe shall be transported from the coating plant to the jobsite on padded bunks with nylon tie-down straps or padded banding to adequately protect the pipe and coating. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by its manufacturer. C. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned, and shall be kept clean until they are used in the work. D. Lined and/or coated pipe shall be suitably protected from exposure and heating of the sun at all times following procedures recommended by the coating system manufacturer. Exposure will not be allowed (except for short periods such as installation, assembly, and coating repairs). If the coating system includes UV inhibitors and the manufacturer will guarantee the coating against UV related damage, longer exposure may be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer. E. In handling the pipe, a double 2-ft wide cushioned sling shall be used or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges, cables, or levers shall be used in handling the finished pipe, fittings, or couplings. Care should be taken not to mar the pipe's outer coating. Padded wooden pipe cradles or chocks suitable for protection of tape or polyurethane coatings shall be used between fabricated pipes and beneath them on rough surfaces when pipes are stacked. Pipe shall not be stored on bare ground unless soft sand berms are used to support the pipe. F. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily with the finished coating. Workers will be permitted to walk upon the coating only when necessary, in which case they shall wear shoes with rubber or composition soles and heels. G. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent damage to the linings or coating that might be caused by handling and/or storage of the completed pipe at low temperature (due to embrittlement) or high temperatures or direct sunlight. H. Adequate strutting (stulling) shall be provided on all specials, fittings, and straight pipe, so as to limit handling and storage damage to the pipe coating and lining. The strutting shall be installed by the manufacturer and shall remain in place while each pipe is loaded, transported, unloaded, and backfilled at the job site. Strutting shall be adequate for all handling, hauling, and storage. Struts shall be left in the pipe until backfill is complete. Additional strutting required to prevent damage and excess deflection of the pipe during installation due to loads imposed by backfilling and compaction equipment shall be the responsibility of the installation contractor. Pipe damaged during any phase of handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper strutting will be repaired or replaced at no expense to Owner. Submit informational review details on strutting assembly to Engineer prior to pipe manufacture. PART 2 PRODUCTS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 A. Steel Pipe B. Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C 200, C 207, C 208 and AWWA M 11 except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A-36, ASTM A-570 Grade 36, ASTM A-53 Grade B, ASTM A-135 Grade B, or ASTM A-139 Grade B. C. Black steel or galvanized steel pipe sizes 3–inch or smaller shall comply with ASTM 53. Unless otherwise specified, black steel or steel pipe sizes 3–inch up to and including 6–inch, may comply with any of the standards ASTM A53 and AWWA C200 for black steel or steel pipe. D. Method of Manufacture 1.Black or galvanized steel pipe may be seamless, electro-resistance welded or furnace- welded. 2.Steel Pipe a.Except for seamless mill-type pipe, all piping shall be made from steel plates rolled into cylinders or sections thereof with no more than two longitudinal butt- welded seams, or shall by spirally formed and butt welded. Girth seams shall be butt welded and shall not be closer than 6 feet except in specials and fittings. b.Circumferential deflection of all pipe in-place shall not exceed 2.0 percent of pipe diameter. c. Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 16 feet and no less than 10 feet for large diameter except as required for special fittings or closure sections, and no greater than 40 feet. d.Provide short section of pipe no less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on Drawings. E. Black or galvanized steel pipe shall be standard weight (Schedule 40) or extra heavy weight (Schedule 80) depending on service. See below for wall thickness validation requirements. F. Wall Thickness - Steel pipe 6-in diameter or greater. 1.Fabricated steel pipe shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA M11. References below are to the 2004 (Fourth edition) of AWWA M11. 2.Wall thickness design shall be based on: a.AWWA M11, Chapter 4, equations 4-6 and 4-7 concerning minimum handling wall thickness. Wall thickness for minimum handling shall be a minimum of D/T of 200 defined as outside diameter divided by wall thickness. b.AWWA M11, including Chapters 4, 5, and 6, especially Good Practice in Chapter 4 concerning pipe material stresses. c. Maximum internal static (working) design pressures, internal design pressures shall be equivalent to maximum static or working indicated on the Drawings and contained herein for factory test pressures. (1) Working pressure = Minimum of 100 psig; or greater if indicated on the Drawings. (2) Factory test pressure = 150 psig (for factory test sections). (3) Maximum pressure due to surge = 150 psig. (4) Minimum Pressure due to surge = -5 psig. (5) Design water temperature: 95 degrees F maximum, 45 degrees F minimum. d.Design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external loads, internal pressures, and surge contribution. Design of pipe and pipe joints to carry all loads including but not limited to: overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil and water loads, grouting, other conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and any stresses anticipated during handling and installation of pipe. Maximum external loads for buried pipe design shall include: (1) Base design on minimum of AASHTO HS-20 loading, Cooper E-80 loads (where shown on Drawings or as indicated in Part 1.07), and depths of bury as indicated on Drawings. Loading at minimum earth February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 cover (identified in Chapter 6, AWWA M11). (2) Maximum earth load of 125-lb/ft3 with appropriate HS-20 loading, through 16-ft of cover. Representative types of soils are indicated in the soils information, as noted elsewhere. Design for most critical groundwater level condition. Design pipes larger than 20-inch with Marston's earth loads for a transition width trench for all heights of cover. (3) Other items in Chapter 6 of AWWA M11, including equation 6-4 for prism loading. Do not decrease dead load (Wc) by any factors. (4) For all piping, utilize E' factors based on having moderate compaction of bedding (per Table 6-1 – as modified by Errata July 2004 - in AWWA M11), unless lower E' values are indicated in the geotechnical investigation. In no case shall E' exceed 1,200 psi. Modulus of soil reaction (E') < 1500 psi. If E'> 1000 psi, silty sand (SM) shall not be used for embedment. Unit weight of fill (w) > 125 pcf. Deflection lag factor (D1) = 1.25. Fully saturated soil conditions: hw = h = depth of cover above top of pipe. (5) Calculation for deflection shall be based on the modified Iowa formula (EQ. 6-5, AWWA M11). Deflection of pipe, in place, shall not exceed 2.0 percent. Deflection lag factor shall be 1.0 and bedding constant (K) shall be 0.10. (6) Diameter (D) over thickness (t) ratio shall be no greater than 200. (7) Exclude any structural benefits associated with primary liner in design of pipe in tunnel installations. (8) Do not use internal removable stiffeners. (9) External welded steel stiffeners will be permitted in design calculations for steel pipe, provided wall thickness is a minimum of 1/2 inch. Minimum clearances specified between exterior pipe wall and tunnel liner shall apply to distance between outside diameter of external welded stiffener and tunnel liner. e.Design aboveground steel piping for spans as shown on the Drawings. Pipe wall thickness for a given aboveground system shall be based on the worst case span condition. Pipe manufacturer shall account for weights of valves, fittings, and other items attached to the pipe which provides an external loading condition to the pipe system. f. The stress due to design working pressure shall be no greater than 50 percent of the minimum yield strength. However, regardless of the yield strength of the steel, the maximum combined stress based on design pressure shall never exceed 16,500 psi or 50 percent of yield strength for the grade and class of steel (whichever is lower). g.The stress due to test pressure shall not exceed 75 percent of the minimum yield strength. However, regardless of the yield strength of the steel the maximum combined stress based on test pressure shall not exceed 24,750 psi or 75 percent of yield strength for the grade and class of steel (whichever is lower). G. Provide shop-coated and shop-lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape-coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H. Standard or Special Sections: Within plus 1/8 inch of specified or theoretical lengths. Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled with sleeve couplings. I. Diameter. Nominal pipe diameter shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the diameter shall be as follows: 1.Fabricated Steel Pipe: Larger than 18-in nominal size, the diameter noted shall be equal to the actual clear inside diameter from lining surface to lining surface. 2.Manufactured Steel Pipe - 6 inches through 16 inches nominal size: Outside Diameter February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 shall match requirements of ANSI/ASME B36.10, B31.1 for a given nominal diameter. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Threaded Fittings 1.Malleable iron fittings shall comply with FS WW-P-521, Type 1 for use with black steel pipe and Type 2 for use with galvanized steel pipe. 2.Forged steel threaded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.11 for Extra Heavy Weight Piping. B. Small Branch Connection “Fittings” 1.Pipe nipples shall be seamless black steel pipe, ASTM A53, standard weight (Schedule 40). 2.Welding fittings (for 4-in and smaller connections) shall be: For threaded outlets - Bonney "Thredolets," Porter "W-S Teelets," or Vogt "Weld Couplets;" for welded outlets - Bonney "Weldolets," Porter "W-S Teelets," or Vogt "Weld Couplets." 3.Provide small branch connections where required for use in pressure gauge taps, disinfection taps, passing hose or lead wires into pipe. Plugs shall be tapped with standard pipe threads and weld to pipe in approved manner and use solid forged steel plugs for closure C. Forged Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 20 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1.Forged steel fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.11. 2.Butt-welded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.9. 3.Wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless or welded construction shall comply with ASTM A234. D. Welded Fittings: Fittings and specials shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200/C208, Section 4, including nondestructive testing in accordance with AWWA C200/C208, Section 5 by NSF approved dye penetrant or wet magnetic particle testing of welds not previously tested in the straight pipe. 1.Fittings for steel piping larger than 20-inches in diameter: Fabricated steel fittings shall be of the same material as pipe and shall conform to the dimensions of AWWA C208. Wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the pipe to which fitting is to be welded 2.Fabricated from tested pipe in accordance with AWWA M 11, Section 13.3-13.7, and AWWA C 208. 3.Angles up to 5 degrees may be accomplished using joint deflections or mitered end joints as proposed by the manufacturer. 4.Elbows: 2-piece for 0 degrees to 22-1/2 degrees; 3-piece for 23 degrees to 45 degrees; 4-piece for 46 degrees to 67-1/2 degrees; and 5-piece for 68 degrees to 90 degrees. Radius: Minimum radius of one and one–half times pipe diameter unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required by site constraints subject to approval of the Engineer. 5.Outlets: Reinforced in accordance with AWWA M 11, Sections 13.3-13.7, AWWA C 200, and AWWA C 208. 6.Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Minimum 12–inch–wide split butt strap; minimum plate thickness equal to thinnest member being joined; fabricated from material equal in chemical and physical properties to thinnest member being joined. Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of butt strap, welded on both inside and outside, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. Provide minimum 6–inch welded outlet for inspecting each closure section, unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section. 7.Dished Head Plugs: Design dished head plugs (test plugs) with withstand field hydrostatic test pressure from either side of plug. Design stress due to hydrostatic pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of minimum yield. Pipe on opposite side of hydrostatic test may or may not contain water. Manufacturer of the steel pipe to February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 hydrostatically test plug at factory if the plug is made from multiple pieces of steel plate. 8.After fitting fabrication the pipe manufacturer shall hydrostatically test the completed fittings or alternatively test each weld non-destructively using radiography. All testing shall occur in pipe manufacturer’s factory. 2.3 JOINTS A. Pipe ends/joints shall be: Pipe Size/Type: Ends/Joints (if not noted otherwise) Fabricated Steel: Single and double lap weld (buried only). Butt welded for thicknesses greater than or equal to 0.625-in (5/8-in) and all aboveground piping Flanged : (aboveground, buried where required for valves or specials) O-ring: (where allowed in specific locations on Drawings or Details) B. Welded/Fabricated Pipe End Joints. 1.Forged steel fitting shall comply with ANSI B16.11. 2.Butt-welded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.9. 3.Wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless or welded construction shall comply with ASTM A234. 4.Fabricated steel fittings shall comply with AWWA C-200, shall be of the same material as pipe, and shall comply with AWWA C208. 5.Restrained joints where required at changes in direction or shown on the Drawings shall be single or double welded lap joints. Design of the joint and welds shall include considerations of stresses induced in the steel wall, the joints, and any field welds, caused by thrust at bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from the working and/or transient pressure. 6.For field welded joints, design stresses shall not exceed 50 percent of specified minimum yield strength of the grade of steel utilized for the part being examined when longitudinal thrust is assumed to be uniformly distributed around the circumference of the joint. C. Flanged Joints 1.Flanges will be provided at all valve connections and as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2.Flanges shall comply with the requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125; AWWA C207, Class D. Flanges shall be machined to flat face using 1/8-in thick full face rubber gaskets suitable for potable water service and/or services described in Part 1.07. Flanges and gaskets shall be capable of meeting or exceeding the operating and test pressures cited in the pipe schedule on the Drawings. Gaskets shall not exceed OD or ID of piping flanges 3.Flanges for pipe 20 inches in diameter and smaller shall be AWWA 207 Class D or ANSI 150 lb. flat face, slip on or weld neck flanges, meeting ASTM A105/AWWA Class D requirements. Where flanges are to join to valves with raised face flanges, use ANSI 150 lb. raised flange face. 4.Provide same coating for non-wetted flange face and the side of the flange. Flange face to be coated with Rust Veto or equal suitable for NSF-61 potable water service. flange faces as interior of pipe when epoxy lining system is used. 5.Gaskets for air service shall be 1/8-inch thick, constructed of elastomers suitable for continuous temperatures to 300°F. Gaskets shall be full face. 6.Flanges shall be flat faced with a serrated finish. 7.Steel ring or flat plate flanges are only acceptable when cement mortar lined pipe requires a larger outer diameter pipe than nominal diameter pipe. Any attaching flanges will require an over bore. Pipe manufacturer shall coordinate as required to suit installation. 8.Flanges for 24-in connections and for blowoffs shall be compatible with ANSI B16.5 for ANSI class 300 service for test pressures greater than 275 psig. Blind flanges or dish heads furnished for testing purposes at valves shall meet the minimum test pressures. 9.Compatibility of flanges, including drilling and sizing of flanges and bolts, shall be coordinated by Contractor to insure compatibility with Owner and Contractor furnished February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 valves. ANSI Class 300 valves may require raised flanges. 10.Flange faces shall be normal to the pipe axis with a maximum tolerance of 0.005-in/ft of flange diameter. Angular deflection (or layback) of the flange face shall not exceed 0.75 degree from a plane surface and shall be uniform within 0.010-in. All flanges, after welding to the pipe, shall be measured and shall be refaced, if necessary, to bring them within the specified tolerances. Flanges shall only be welded in the shop. 11.Bolts and hardware shall be per Part 2.06. 12.Provide same coating for exposed portions of nuts and bolts as flanges which they secure for aboveground piping. 13.Proper lubricants, washers and torque procedures shall be used on assembly of flanges in accordance with Chapter 12 of AWWA M11 and as required by the flange manufacturer. 14.Flange insulating kits shall be utilized between all dissimilar metals and where otherwise noted. Fabricate flanges with oversize bolt holes, with flanges drilled in pairs, to accommodate insulating sleeves. Test, coat, line and ship each shop–assembled insulated flange assembly to field as fitting. Use no less than two snug–fitting alignment pins to assist in aligning flanges during assembly. Do not remove pins until bolts have been installed in all remaining holes and have been drawn up tight. After insulating joints have been assembled, subject each assembly (fitting) to test pressure and electrically test to ensure that insulated sections are effective. After assembly has been tested, coat insulating joint and adjacent steel pipe as specified for below–ground installation. Line assembly as specified for interior surfaces and in accordance with details shown on Drawings. D. O-Ring Joints (where specifically shown on the Drawings). 1.The spigot end of the pipe shall have a rolled in groove designed to retain the O-ring rubber gasket. Joints consisting of a Carnegie shape joint ring for spigot end or flared bell end and a grooved spigot end shall also be acceptable. Bell and spigot ends shall be sized by forcing over a sizing die or by expanding to stretch the steel beyond its elastic limit so that the difference in diameter between outside of spigot and inside of bell at normal engagement does not exceed 0.400-in measured on the circumference with a diameter tape. The O-ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill the area of the groove and shall conform to AWWA C200. Manufacturer shall submit test reports on gaskets to be used in construction consistent with section 4.13.6.3 of AWWA C200. The bell and spigot with flared bell and grooved spigot end shall be submitted for engineering review complete with dimension data and tolerances. Performance data shall be required demonstrating that the joint has performed satisfactorily under the anticipated operating conditions. 2.The joint shall be suitable for a safe working pressure equal to the class of pipe furnished and shall operate satisfactorily with a deflection (the tangent of which is not to exceed 0.75-in divided by D where D is the outside diameter of the pipe in inches) or with a pullout of 0.75-in. In no case will O-ring gasket joints be allowed for design working pressures in excess of 250 psig (maximum static working pressure of 250 psig, maximum test pressure of 350 psig). Note welding requirements for certain pipe. 3.O-ring joints shall be electrically bonded using bonding wire filter rings and brazing cartridges furnished by the pipe fabricator. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the continuity of this system before final acceptance. E. Lap Joints for Double Lap Welding (Buried Steel piping only). 1.All lap joints shall be double welded (inside and outside) as indicated on the Drawings unless pipe diameter is 24-in or smaller, in which case only single lap exterior weld or double exterior weld butt strap is acceptable. 2.All bell ends shall be formed by expanding with segmental dies using a hydraulic type expander, or by die pressing in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell. Preformed welded bell and spigot joints (Carnegie shapes) will not be allowed. The post formed section shall have a minimum radius of curvature of the bell end at any point of not less than 15 times the thickness of the steel shell. All longitudinal or spiral welds extending into the bell and spigot sections of lap joints shall be ground flush with the surrounding metal a minimum of 18- February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 in from the ends. All burrs and sharp edges on the inside of bells and outside of spigots will also be ground flush or lightly chamfered. 3.Field joints shall be assembled so that seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the pipes being joined. Minimum sectional overlap of the joint shall be at least 1-1/2-in or four times the thickness of the thinner of the pipe wall thicknesses being joined, whichever is greater. The inside circumference of the bell section shall not exceed the outside circumference of the spigot section by more than 0.400-in in accordance with AWWA C200. No part of any field weld shall be closer than 1-in to the nearest point of tangency to a bell radius. F. Butt Joints for Welding (Aboveground and Belowground) 1.Butt joints shall be used for aboveground piping systems and where pipe wall thicknesses exceed 5/8-in. Butt weld joints shall be used for all steel casing pipe used at short tunnel crossing noted on the Drawings (butt welded or lap welded joints for carrier pipe). Butt joints shall be single V-groove butt joints. The butt joints shall be complete joint "full" penetration welds. 2.Field joints shall be assembled so that seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the pipes being joined. Joints shall be accurately aligned and retained in position during welding operations so that the finished joint has abutting lining sections that are not misaligned by more than 20 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe or 1/8-in, whichever is smaller. 3.Welder qualifications shall follow requirements cited elsewhere in this Section. 4.Backing rings shall be used to assist in lining up pipe joints and for completion of welds. Rings shall be a minimum of 4-in in width and 1/4-in in thickness and shall avoid interference with internal joint finishing. 5.For all pipe greater than 1/2-in in thickness, field and fabrication welders and welding procedures shall be qualified to provide notch tough welds. A Charpy test will be performed on jointed specimens meeting a minimum CVN value of 25 lbf-ft at 30 degrees F. Transverse specimen heat-lot testing for the steel shall be used, and all filler materials shall meet the same CVN requirements. G. Butt Straps 1.Butt straps shall comply with all requirements of AWWA C200 and C206 and SHALL have a minimum shell thickness equivalent to the greatest thickness of the pipe sections being joined. Minimum butt strap width will be at least 12-in for 24-in and smaller pipe and 18-in for 36 inch and larger pipe (greater than 24-in nominal). Minimum overlap on each section of pipe being joined shall be 2-in. For smaller pipes butt strap width shall be sufficiently wide to result in a minimum overlap of 1-in on each pipe or four times the thickness of the greatest shell thickness of the pipes being joined, whichever is greater. Butt straps will be welded on the outside only for 24-in and smaller pipe. For larger pipe double lap weld joint pipe is required unless special welded closures are needed. 2.4 COUPLINGS A. Flexible Coupling 1.Coupling shall be of a gasketed, sleeve-type, with diameter to properly fit the pipe. 2.Minimum sleeve length shall be 5 inches for pipe 5 inches and smaller, 7 inches for pipe larger than 5 inches and smaller than 36 inches, and 10 inches for pipe 36 inches and larger. Sleeves shall be supplied without pipe stop unless otherwise specified. 3.Couplings shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 411, or equal. 4.Steel coupled joints, which will be required to resist thrust shall be reinforced with a harness of bolts as follows: a.All tie bolts and lugs shall conform to the recommendations in the American Water Works Association, Manual of Water Supply Practice M-11 (Latest edition), Section 13.8 for test pressure specified. b.Bolts shall span the steel couplings connecting to steel lugs. c. Lugs (Type P and Type RR) shall be either welded to the pipe or to a sleeve that is welded to the pipe. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 d.Bolt length and lug placement shall permit steel coupling to be slipped in one direction to clear joint. e.Number of bolts shall depend on operating conditions, with a minimum of two tie bolts installed. 5.Gaskets for couplings on air service piping shall be suitable for use up to 300°F (Viton). 6.Coupling shall be provided with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating unless otherwise specified. 7.All bolting hardware shall be per Part 2.06. B. Advanced Flexible Couplings 1.All AISI 316L stainless steel construction. 2.Sealing element: EPDM rubber good for -4°F to 176°F for water service. 3.Minimum pressure capability of 150 psig minimum. 4.Steel coupled joints, which will be required to resist thrust shall be reinforced with a harness of bolts as follows: a.All tie bolts and lugs shall conform to the recommendations in the American Water Works Association, Manual of Water Supply Practice M-11 (Latest Edition), Section 13.8 for test pressure specified. b.Bolts shall span the steel couplings connecting to steel lugs (Type P and Type RR). c. Lugs (Type P and Type RR) shall be either welded to the pipe or to a sleeve that is welded to the pipe. d.Bolt length and lug (Type P and Type RR) placement shall permit steel coupling to be slipped in one direction to clear joint. e.Number of bolts shall depend on operating conditions, with a minimum of two tie bolts installed. 5.Minimum deflection angle capability of 2°. 6.Products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to meet or exceed the design, materials, manufacture, and performance requirements set forth in AWWA C-219. 7.As manufactured by Straub (Flex model) or equal by Victaulic Depend-o-Lok. 2.5 UNIONS A. Unions shall be malleable iron complying to FS WW-U-531, Class 1, Type A for use with black steel pipe and Type B for use with galvanized steel pipe. Use dielectric union where specified. 2.6 FLANGE BOLTS AND NUTS A. Use Type 316 stainless steel when required by Drawings or buried or submerged service, otherwise use ASTM A307, Grade B, ANSI B18.2.1 painted in the field to match adjacent piping. Bolts to extend past nut at least 3 threads but not more than 5 threads maximum. Do not leave aboveground bolting exposed more than 5 days without finish painting. 2.7 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE, ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS A. Supply steel pipe with epoxy lining for aboveground and vault piping and shop applied cement-mortar lining for buried piping, capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F. Linings shall conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and shall be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges, blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers, etc., with epoxy lining, as specified. B. Epoxy Lining: 1.AWWA C 210, White, NSF-61 listed for shop and field joint applied, except as modified in this Section. Provide materials from same manufacturer. Protect interior surface with approved liquid two-part chemically cured epoxy primer specified for interior surfaces. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 Surface Preparation 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile SSPC-SP-5 – White Blast Clean Prime Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT NSF Certified Epoxy – Buff, or approved equal Intermediate Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT NSF Certified Epoxy – Buff, or approved equal Finish Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT NSF Certified Epoxy – White, or approved equal 2.Total allowable dry film thickness for system: a.Minimum: 14.0 mils. b.Maximum: 18.0 mils. 3.Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 4.The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 5.Perform adhesion test on pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger in accordance with ASTM D4541. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. Perform test on actual pipe to be installed at a rate of one for every 1,000 square feet of epoxy lining. Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D4752 (solvent rub test) and ASTM D3363 (pencil hardness) for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. C. Shop-applied Cement-mortar Lining 1.AWWA C 205; shop-applied cement-mortar linings, except as specified herein: 1/2- inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger; 3/8-inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 36 inches and smaller. Cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2.The inside of all pipe shall receive a cement-mortar lining applied by centrifugally spinning. 3.Application of cement-mortar lining to special sections, the shape of which precludes application by the spinning method, shall be accomplished by mechanical placement or pneumatic placement and finished to produce a smooth, dense surface comparable to centrifugally spinning. 4.Repairs of the cement-mortar lining for widths exceeding 6 inches shall be bonded to the steel and adjacent faces of the lining with a bonding agent conforming to ASTM C 881, Type II. 5.Restrict usage of sprinkler heads during moist curing to prevent overspraying onto lining. No alternative curing methods are allowed as described in Section 4.4.7.4 of AWWA C 205. 6.Use galvanized wire mesh when shop applied mortar is not applied by machine. Wire mesh not to extend across welded portion of mitered fittings. Crimp mesh to provide integral “chair” so wire does not fully rest against steel cylinder. D. Field-applied Cement-mortar Lining: (For pipe > 48 inches in diameter). Provide field- applied internal cement-mortar linings in accordance with AWWA C 602, latest edition, except as modified in this Section. 1.Lining: Applied in a one-course application of cement-mortar by a machine that will centrifugally place mortar against wall of pipe and then mechanically trowel lining to a smooth finish. 2.Cement-mortar for lining. a.Cement-mortar: Dense, smooth, and of uniform quality and consistency to assure efficient machine operation and a uniform cement-mortar lining on pipe wall. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 b.Water-cement ratio: Kept as low as possible; consistent with proper plasticity for application, allowing slight variations dependent upon temperature, length of haul for mortar, and moisture condition in pipe. c. Mortar: Mixture of one part cement with not less than one or more than 1-1/2 parts of dry screened sand, by volume. When mixture has been determined, materials shall be controlled to within plus or minus 2-1/2 percent by weight throughout entire work. d.Materials for cement-mortar comply with following: (1) Cement: Type II low-alkali Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150, or Type IP (MS) Portland-Pozzolan cement conforming to ASTM C 595, unless otherwise specified. Conform to low alkali requirements of Table IA of ASTM C 150. Type IP (MS) cement shall contain no more than 20 percent Pozzolan, which shall be inter- ground with clinker. (2) Use suitable facilities approved by Engineer when available for handling and weighing bulk cement. Otherwise, deliver cement in original unopened sacks that have been filled by manufacturer. Plainly mark sacks with manufacturer's name or brand, cement type and weight. (3) Store cement to permit ready access for inspection and sampling. Protect cement against contamination or moisture. Do not use or remove from site cement delivered with evidence of contamination or otherwise unsuitable. (4) Use Portland cement of same brand and type unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. (5) Pozzolanic material: AWWA C 602, Paragraph 2.2. (6) Sand: AWWA C 205, Section 2.3, except gradation of sand shall yield a fineness modulus of approximately 1.7; having no material coarser than that passing a No. 16 sieve. Submit certification as to compliance of sand with these specifications at least 10 calendar days before start of lining placement. (7) Water: Clean; free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis or organic materials; total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/l; ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/l for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. 2.8 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) A. Provide a 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-10 Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT Tnemec Series 90–97 Tnemec–Zinc Intermediate Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT TNMEC Series 20 Pota–Pox 1255 Beige Finish Coat 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Tnemecc Series 1074 Endura–Shield II Color to be Selected B. Total Allowable Dry Film Thickness (DFT) for System: 1.Minimum: 9.5 mils. 2.Maximum: 12.5 mils. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 C. D. E. F. Clean bare pipe free from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminant. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC–SP–1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use only approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Use preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. Remove surface imperfections such as silvers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges, presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. Provide materials from same manufacturer. For submerged service in a Pump Well or a Treatment Structure minimum DFT thickness shall be 16 mils and per Section 09 96 00 (NSF-61 approved coatings). 2.9 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Supply pipe with one of the following coatings specified. ONLY use this section if buried system is not specified earlier in this specification. 1.Tape Coating: AWWA C214/C209. a.Where sleeve type or victaulic couplings, are required, bond coupling to adjacent pipes with bonding cables as shown on Drawings. b.Use approved filler putty type insulating putty to fill in gap and create smooth sloped transition between top of reinforcing plate and pipe, before tape coating is applied. c. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. d.Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints to facilitate welding. e.Inner and outer tape widths: 12 or 18 inches. B. Heat Shrink Joint Sleeves: Canusatube, Canusawrap, or Canusa Wrapid Sleeve, or approved equal. For repairs to heat shrink joint sleeves, use Canusa Repair Patch Kit or approved equal. C. For steel pipe encased in concrete under treatment structures follow surface prep in 2.08A and apply prime coat only. 2.10 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL, CASING OR AUGER HOLES A. Provide exterior coating system of pipe in tunnel without annular grout in accordance with AWWA C203. B. For large-diameter water lines where annular grout will be used, shop prime external surfaces of steel pipe with 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Inhibited Epoxy Primer, unless pipe has cement-mortar coating. 1.Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10(64); Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2.Prime Coat: ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT, or approved equal. 3.Coating procedures and dry film thicknesses for approved alternate product shall be in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 2.11 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS A. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand. Mix interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff but workable. Mix exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of thick cream. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 19 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement grout or water to mixed cement grout to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. C. Sand: 1.Inside joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand. 2.Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D. Water: Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/l; ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/l for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. Use water with 250 ppm limit on chlorides and sulfates. E. Non-shrink Grout: 1.Pre-blended factory-packaged material manufactured under rigid quality control, suitable for use in joints of prestressed concrete cylinder pipe. 2.Contain non-metallic natural aggregate and shall be nonstaining and noncorrosive. 3.Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7-day unconfined; 5000 psi minimum 28-day unconfined. 4.Conform to requirements of ASTM C 1107, Non-shrink Grout. 5.Suitable for use in contact with a potable water supply. 6.Highly flowable so joint wrapper around exterior of pipe joint can be filled without leaving any voids or trapped air. Capable of being placed with a plastic consistency in interior of pipe joint. 7.Non-bleeding and non-segregating at fluid consistency. 8.Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of steel pipe. 9.Free of gas-producing, gas-releasing agents. 10.Resist attack by oil or water. 11.Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Upon 72 hours' notice, provide services of a qualified representative of non-shrink grout manufacturer to aid in assuring proper use of product under job conditions. Representative to be on site when product is first used. 12.Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 17.7 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement grout to mixed cement grout or water to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. F. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9 inches for 33-inch diameter and smaller; minimum width of 12 inches for diameters greater than 33-inch in diameter; hemmed at edge to allow threading with a minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel strap; minimum 6-inch-wide wire Ethafoam strip sized, positioned and sewn such that two circumferential edges of Ethafoam are 1-½ inches from outer edge of wrapper. 2.12 COLD-APPLIED TAPE COATING A. Shop–applied Tape Wrap Coating 1.Use primer furnished by tape manufacturer. 2.Wrap, specials and fittings that cannot be machine wrapped due to configuration with primer layer and two layers of prefabricated tape each 35 mils thick. 3.Overlap machine applied tape with hand applied tape by minimum of two inches and bind to it. 4.Apply approved 30 mil filler tape parallel to spiral weld seams if weld height measures greater than or equal to 1/8 inch. B. Surface Preparation 1.Clean bare pipe from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminants. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC–SP–1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice may be used provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. 2.Remove surface imperfections such as slivers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges by hand filling or grinding to prevent excessive number of holidays. Presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 2.13 EXTERNAL TAPE COATING SHOP APPLICATION A. Separate tape dispensing equipment far enough apart to visually inspect continuous steps. B. Make cutbacks straight and for total thickness of coating. C. State of dryness of primer prior to application of weld filler and inner layer of tape to be in accordance with written recommendation of manufacturer. D. Apply weld filler tape over primer and extend minimum of one inch on each side of weld seam. Filler tape may contact rollers as long as release liner is in place and adhesion requirements are met. Remove release liner before applying inner layer tape. E. Spirally apply inner layer of tape in direction of helix weld. Overlap each spiral of tape 1 inch or greater with next successive spiral of tape applied. F. Overlap end of new roll on top of previous roll minimum of 6 inches. G. Tape–roll body temperature to be greater than 70 degrees F; pipe surface temperature to be greater than 60 degrees F. H. Spirally apply outer layer tapes in direction of helix weld and use overlap width and application tensions as recommended by manufacturer. 2.14 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF COATINGS A. Perform electrical inspection on inner layer of tape before intermediate layer of tape is applied. B. If holidays are detected, repair holidays immediately before applying outer layer of tape. Clear holiday area of material and reprime if necessary. Recoat area with inner wrap tape. Overlap inner wrap tape onto surrounding inner wrap coating by at least 2 inches. Perform electrical retest at repaired area after repairing holiday, and before outer wrap is continued. C. Shrink Wrap: Perform electrical inspection on shrink wrap to check for holidays. Perform peel tests over heat affected zone. Minimum acceptable result: 15 lbs–ft/in. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 40 05 00 – Piping – General Requirements, except as modified in this Section. B. Comply with the following: 1.Manufacturer shall make available services of a representative when deemed necessary by Project Manager. Advise in all aspects of installation, including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coating and lining repair, and general construction methods as applicable to the pipe. 2.For large diameter water line, install stulls prior to placement of pipe, bends, and fittings to prevent deflection during installation. Provide stulls consisting of timber struts with end blocks shaped to fit curvature of interior surface of pipe or other appropriate configuration and material. Firmly edge and secure stulls to blocks so that they will remain intact position during handling and installation. Provide stulls adequate to resist loads encountered without structural failure to stull members or damage to pipe. Where applicable, place stulls at such lengths so as to elongate vertical diameter of pipe as required to suit trench conditions encountered. 3.Handling and Storing (for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger): Install padded struts or stulls prior to shipping, horizontally and vertically by manufacturer at 10-foot intervals, or as proposed by manufacturer and approved by Project Manager. Spiders: Installed by manufacturer in joint ends of fittings. Stulls shall remain in place, horizontally and vertically positioned at all times during storage and shipping, and until all welding, backfilling and compaction has been completed. 4.Bedding and Backfilling: a.Conform to requirements of Section 02 20 20 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. b.Take necessary precautions during bedding and backfilling operations to prevent deformation or deflection of cylindrical shape of pipe by more than February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 18 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 allowable pipe deflection. Do not move trench support system (trench safety system) once the bedding material is compacted. 5.Pipe Deflection: After backfilling is complete, all pipe larger than 30 inches in diameter shall be tested for excessive deflection by measuring the actual inside vertical diameter. a.Deflection may be measured by Project Manager at any location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection are not acceptable. b.If deflection exceeds that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe as directed by Project Manager at no additional cost to the City or remove backfill and side support. Reround the pipe and properly replace compacted backfill and side support. Review cement mortar lining to assure that no harmful damage has occurred. C. Static Electricity: 1.Properly ground steel pipeline during construction as necessary to prevent build–up of static electricity. 2.Electrically test where required after installation is complete. D. Piping Exposed, 3 Inches and Smaller 1.Piping Layout a.Make provisions for expansion and contraction during normal operations. b.Provide unions to permit removal of equipment, pumps, and valves. c. Provide dielectric unions for connection of copper piping. 2.Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, using Drawings as guide. 3.Water Piping: Arrange so system can be completely drained. 4.Air Piping: Grade to points of drainage collection. E. Piping, Exposed, Larger than 3 Inches 1.Piping Layout a.Install as shown on the Drawings and per fabricator's shop drawings. b.In placing the pipe, hold pipe by one or more padded slings. Handle in a manner that will prevent damage to the pipe or the protective coating. Support pipe adequately while being fitted and joined with adjoining pipe section. c. After each section of pipe has been set into position, attach to the adjoining section as specified or shown on the Drawings. 2.Provide drains and high point vents to facilitate pressure testing. 3.Install valves with operator positioned to permit access for operation. 3.2 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) AND EPOXY LINING INTERNAL LINING SYSTEM A. Safety: Paints, coatings, and linings specified in this Section are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. B. Workmanship: 1.Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2.Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. C. Surface Preparation: 1.Prepare surfaces for painting by using abrasive blasting. 2.Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 3.Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 4.Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges, pits, welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5.Abrasive Material: a.Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b.Use sharp, angular, properly-graded abrasive capable of producing depth of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 19 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Project Manager for filing and future reference. d.Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences, or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6.Evaluate degree of cleanliness for surface preparation with the use of SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces, SSPC-V is 1. 7.Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. Test cleanliness by placing a 3/4-inch by 4-inch piece of clear Scotch type tape on blasted surface, then removing and placing the tape on a 3x5 white index card. Reclean areas exhibiting dust or residue. D. Coating and Lining Application: 1.Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F; when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating; or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2.Application Procedures: a.Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs, sags, curtains, pinholes, orange peel, fish eyes, excessive overspray, or delaminations. b.Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3.Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of undersurface occurs. 4.Cure a minimum of 24 hours at 77 degrees F before successive coats are applied. During curing process, provide force air ventilation in volume sufficient to maintain solvent vapor levels below the published threshold limit value. Apply successive coats within recoat threshold time as recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written communications. Brush blast joints of pipe which have been shop primed and are to receive intermediate and finish coats in field prior to application of additional coats. After interior coatings are applied, provide forced air ventilation in a sufficient volume and for a sufficient length of time to ensure proper curing before filling pipe with water. 3.3 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Tape Coating System: 1.Joint Protection a.Coating field joints, tie–ins, and other field–welded joints: Provide application of approved insulating putty at belt step–offs, and two wraps of Field Joint Tape Primer: Furnished by tape manufacturer. b.At Contractor’s option, apply approved special heat resistant tape system prior to internal welding of pipe. Coat entire pipe with shop–applied tape. Coat bell end with shop–applied heat–resistant tape. In field, fill joint step off area with insulating putty. Field apply two layers of field joint tape over joint followed by high shear strength outerwrap. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation for field–applied tape coating. c. At Contractor’s option, provide field–applied shrink–wrap coating system for February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 20 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 coating field joints, tie–ins and other field welded joints. Apply heat–shrink sleeves prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible with coating system. Install heat–shrink joint sleeves in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide shrink–wrap systems consisting of primer, tape coating and polyurethane coating and high–strength application of Aqua–shield Wrap for pipeline. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipelaying operations. Representative to advise Contractor and Project Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction methods. 2.Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C 209 around joint cutbacks except as modified. Field-welded joints: clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer, and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a.Prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting, solvent or other method as approved by Project Manager. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. b.Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP 6 in accordance with AWWA C 209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating-system primer. c. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still "tacky" with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop-applied coating. 3.Joint Tape a.Apply joint wrap tape to uncontaminated primer at proper roll body temperature. If necessary, store joint wrap material in a heated box up to point of application. b.Joint wrap material may be applied to pipe in either a spiral or cigarette fashion dependent upon specification. Begin wrapping process 2 to 4 inches onto mill- applied pipe wrap and proceed wrinkle-free up over bell and across joint to spigot side pipe wrap. c. Apply joint wrap under machine tension of 5 to 10 pounds per inch width. Joint wrap width should narrow (neck down) as material is applied tightly around pipe. d.Apply first 1/3 and last 1/3 turn of joint material around pipe with less tension to prevent wrap crawl back. Overlap of joint wrap material and system's total thickness as specified in this specification section. e.End joint wrap process such that its final edge is directed downwards when pipe is placed in ditch to prevent backfill from pulling an exposed joint wrap edge. 4.At Project Manager’s option, Contractor may apply heat shrink sleeves prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible with coating system. Install heat shrink joint sleeves in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide Canusa Wrapid Sleeve or approved equal. Provide services of a technical representative of the manufacturer available on site at the beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative shall advise Contractor and Project Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction methods. 5.Do not expose tape coatings or heat-shrinkable joint sleeves to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings, remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. 6.At option of Project Manager, Contractor may apply tape coating system prior to internal welding of pipe. Coat bell end with shop-applied Polyken #2036-25 heat resistant tape. Coat entire pipe with shop-applied Polyken #989-20, Polyken #955-30 and Polyken #956-30. In the field, install joint and fill step off area with Polyken #935 insulating putty. Field apply two layers of Polyken #930 field joint tape over joint followed by Polyklen #2055 high shear strength outer wrap. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for field applied tape coating. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 21 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 B. At option of Project Manager, coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C 214. C. Cement-mortar Coating: AWWA C 205; 1-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.4 JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints. 1.O-ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill area of groove and gasket material shall be in accordance with AWWA C 200. Check each splice in a gasket by stretching gasket to at least twice original length of gasket. Visually check stretched splice by rotating 360 degrees. Reject splices showing visible separation or cracks. 2.Equalize rubber gasket cross section after rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe by inserting a tool or bar such as a large screwdriver under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. Lubricate gaskets with a nontoxic water- soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. Fit pipe units together in a manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. Check gaskets after pipe sections are joined with a feeler gauge to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred at any point around circumference after joining. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and remake joint as if for new pipe. Remove old gasket and replace before remaking joint. B. Threaded 1.Comply with ANSI B2.1, NPT. 2.Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies, with not more than three threads exposed at each connection. 3.Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs. 4.Use joint compound or thread tape on male threads only. After having been set up, a joint must not be backed off unless the joint is completely broken, the threads cleaned, and new compound applied. C. Welded 1.All welds shall be sound and free from embedded scale or slag, shall have tensile strength across the weld not less than that of the thinner of the connected sections, and shall be watertight. All field welds shall comply with AWWA C206. 2.Use butt-welds for fabrication of bends and other specials. Use fillet welds for flange attachment in accordance with AWWA C207. 3.After installation of pipe, fittings, and specials, all unlined or uncoated ends adjacent to welded field joints, including the weld proper, shall be cleaned, primed, lined, and coated as specified for the pipe adjacent to the weld. Preparation of surfaces to be lined and coated shall be as stipulated for shop application of coal tar primers and enamels except that all foreign matter, including all damaged lining or coating materials, shall be removed by scraping, chipping, or brushing and the surfaces cleaned to bright metal free of all rust, slag, and scale by means of wire brushing or sandblasting. Entry for application of interior linings to unlined ends shall be from open ends. Pour holes shall not be provided. D. Flanged 1.Tighten flange bolts so gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed. 2.Do not distort flanges. 3.Flange bolts shall be coated with anti-seize compound. E. Flexible Couplings 1.Prepare ends of pipe square, removing all burrs from inside and outside pipe. 2.Prepare exterior surface of pipe in accordance with compression coupling manufacturer's instructions. 3.Install harness lugs on pipe as applicable. 4.Pipe gaps shall be as recommended by coupling manufacturer with a maximum gap of 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Pipe exterior surface and interior surface of compression sleeve ring shall receive required protective coating prior to assembly. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 22 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 F. Grooved or Shouldered Type Couplings (Split Couplings) 1.Cut grooves clean and sharp without burrs or chuck marks. 2.Ream end of pipe after grooving and before assembly to remove burrs. 3.Pipe shall be free of indentations, projections, or roll marks from the end of pipe to the groove to provide a leak-tight seat for the gasket. 4.Lubricate gasket with manufacturer's furnished lubricant prior to assembly. 5.Split couplings used in lieu of flanges shall be of the rigid type. G. Shouldered 1.Assemble shoulder ring to pipe ends and weld. 2.Repair damaged pipe lining extending protective coating over pipe end and should ring. 3.Lubricate gasket with manufacturer's furnished lubricant prior to assembly. 3.5 FIELD-APPLIED CEMENT-MORTAR LINING A. Entrances Into Pipeline: 1.Establish a means to permit entry and exit of labor, materials and equipment necessary for progress of work, as approved by Project Manager. 2.Provide dikes and channeling for diversion of flood and drainage waters away from these openings in pipeline. Use temporary airtight covers over openings to provide proper curing conditions in completed sections of lined pipe. Where operation of equipment requires that an end of pipe be left open, install a temporary bulkhead inside pipe to eliminate a direct draft through pipe over completed sections. 3.Brace closure sections of pipeline left out to facilitate field lining above ground to conform as nearly as possible to shape of pipe in ground and then place cement- mortar lining by machine or hand trowel to same thickness as in adjoining machine- lined sections. Bulkhead sections immediately after being lined to maintain proper curing conditions for a period of not less than 48 hours before sections are installed in pipeline. Install these sections of steel pipe. 4.Coat exterior surface of buttstraps and any uncoated exterior surface area of steel pipe within excavations in accordance specifications. Place cement-mortar lining inside areas of joints in accordance with specifications. B. Mixing of Cement-mortar: Mix ingredients for cement-mortar for not less than 1-1/2 and not more than 6 minutes; use mortar promptly after mixing for lining pipe. Do not use mortar that has attained its initial for lining. Do not retemper mortar. Add water to mix last. C. Placing Cement-mortar Lining: 1.Complete joint work, backfill and welding before cement–mortar lining begins. After cement–mortar lining has cured hydrostatic testing of pipe can begin. 2.Provide provisions necessary for Project Manager to conduct inspections of work in safe and thorough manner during and after initial application of mortar and after necessary repairs made. Include, as minimum, space on application machine, and adequate lighting to inspect gross surface areas. 3.Comply with ASTM C494 and with manufacturer’s recommendations when using chemical admixtures, bonding agents, accelerators, and other additives. 4.Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease and loose mill scale and rust from interior surfaces of pipe, and scrape or brush surface with stiff bristle brush and/or water blast as may be necessary, and approved by Project Manager, to ensure clean surfaces for successful application of cement–mortar lining. Interior surfaces to be approved by Project Manager prior to placing lining. 5.Provide cement–mortar lining uniform in thickness along entire length of pipe. Provide cement–mortar no less than 1/2–inch over all surfaces with tolerance of plus 1/8–inch, and no allowance for minus tolerance. 6.Mechanically control travel of machine and rates of discharge of mortar to produce uniform thickness of lining without segregation around perimeter and along length of pipe. 7.Check finished surface by placing 12–inch straightedge parallel to axis pipe along surface of straight section of lining. At no point will space between lined surface and straightedge be greater than 1/16–inch. 8.Provide smoother finished surface, within tolerances specified. Repair or replace February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 23 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 surface irregularities including corrugations, ripples, or pits in any direction, to satisfaction of Project Manager. Remove defective lining material, including, sand pockets, voids, oversanded areas, blisters, delaminations, or unbounded areas, cracked areas, irregular surfaces, and unsatisfactory thin spots. Remove to pipe wall and area repaired to full thickness of mortar lining. 9.Repair cracks 1/16–inch and larger to satisfaction of Project Manager. 10.Place cement–mortar lining by a machine having following features: a.An applicator head which can be centered within pipe and which will centrifugally project mortar against wall of pipe at a high velocity producing a dense, uniformly distributed mortar on wall of pipe. b.Equipped with mechanically driven, rotating steel trowels that immediately follow applicator, providing a smooth, hard surface without spiral shoulders. Compensate for torque so that machine will sit true in pipe and trowel faces will not vary in angle with mortar face during a complete 360-degree cycle. Clean trowels at frequent intervals to prevent accumulated mortar from obtaining initial set resulting in a sanded or unglazed finish. Continuously operate trowels during application of cement-mortar and forward progress of lining machine. c. Design applicator so that nothing will come in contact with troweled surface until it has attained final set, and so that forward progress of machine and mechanical placing of mortar can be controlled to assure a uniform thickness of lining. 11.Cement-mortar Lining: Adhere to steel at all points; finished thickness except that lining of bell end of pipe shall be thicker in order to fill depression and make a smooth surface. 12.Immediately prior to application of cement-mortar lining, sweep and clean off slime, dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and any other foreign materials. Free interior surface of pipe after cleaning of accumulated water on pipe wall or at joints. 13.After receiving its finish troweling, do not roughen lining by rebound material or by mortar direct from machine. 14.Temporarily close outlets in pipeline with easily removable stoppers to prevent spun mortar from being thrown into such openings. After lining is applied, remove stoppers from outlets and repair any lining damaged by removal of stoppers. Point outlet openings up to provide smooth flow. D. Hand Finishing: 1.Repair defective areas in machine-applied lining and unlined joints by hand patching to yield a lining equal to that required for machine-applied troweled lining. 2.Provide non-shrink grout for patching or lining joints as specified in this Section. 3.Clean defective areas of loose foreign material and moisten with water just prior to application of hand-applied mortar. 4.Use steel finishing trowels for hand application of cement-mortar. 5.Complete hand finishing required in a given pipe section not later than day following machine application of mortar lining to that particular pipe section, whether a normal working day or otherwise. Slow down or stop machine application of mortar lining to allow time for any hand patching. E. Curing of Lining: Begin curing operations immediately after completing any portion of mortar lining. Close pipe by airtight bulkheads, and maintain a moist atmosphere in completed section of pipe to keep lining damp and to prevent evaporation of entrained water from mortar lining. Humidify any air introduced into pipe for ventilating or curing purposes and maintain a moist atmosphere inside pipe until Project Manager accepts the Work. 3.6 SMALL BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Branch connections 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be made with welding fittings with threaded outlets. Where there is some doubt as to the exact outlet size desired, but it is known that the size will be less than 1 inch, provide a 1-inch outlet and bush down as required. B. Branch connections 3 inches through 12 inches in size shall be made with pipe nipples or February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 24 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 C. D. with welding fittings. Pipe nipples for branch connections shall be black, standard weight, Schedule 40, seamless pipe conforming to ASTM A120. Steel pipe nipples and welding fittings shall be welded to the pipe and shall be reinforced as required to meet design and test requirements. Small branch connections shall be located so as not to interfere with joints, supports, or other details. Coordinate disinfection tap connections with the City Utilities Department. 3.7 TESTING (EXCEPT MORTAR COATED PIPE) A. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for carrying out a pressure test on the pipelines. B. C. D. E. The procedures and method for carrying out the pressure tests shall be approved by the Engineer. The test gauge shall have minor graduations no greater than one percent of the specified test pressure. Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, etc., as required in conjunction with testing a portion of the pipe between valves. Furnish a test pump, gauges, and any other equipment required in conjunction with carrying out the hydrostatic tests. All steel pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 40 05 00.40. Testing shall take place in the presence of the Engineer. If leaks are discovered, they shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner and approved by the Engineer. Holiday Test: 1.Perform holiday test in accordance with NACE Standard Recommended Practice, RPO 188-90, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings. 2.Begin testing of completed coating after coating has sufficiently cured, usually one to 5 days. Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule. 3.For coating thickness of 20 mils or less, test with a wet sponge low-voltage holiday detector. For coating thickness in excess of 20 mils, test with a high-voltage holiday detector. Select test voltage as suggested in table below. MINIMUM VOLTAGES FOR HIGH VOLTAGE SPARK TESTING Total Dry Film Thickness (mils) Suggested Inspection (V) 20 to 40 3,000 41 to 55 4,000 56 to 80 6,000 4.For large–diameter waterlines, perform test procedure in accordance with NACE Standard RP–02–74. Perform electrical holiday test with 60–cycle current audio detector. Use test voltage below: Total Coating Thickness (Mils) Test Voltage (Volts) 20 30/35 50 70 80 6,000 7,500 9,000 11,500 12,000 5.For large-diameter water mains, include cost of inspection described in Paragraph February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 25 of 25 Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials – 40 23 10 3.08, Inspection, in contract unit price for water lines. Furnish copies of all certified inspection reports to Project Manager for review. F. Adhesion Tests: Adhesion testing may be directed by Project Manager on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section or for any other condition considered to adversely affect adequate adhesion. Perform adhesion test on pipe in accordance with ASTM D 4541. 3.8 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor is responsible for quality control of coatings and linings applications and the testing and inspection stipulated in this Section. Project Manager is responsible for quality assurance and reserves the right to inspect or acquire services of an independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable and qualified to inspect surface preparation and application of high-performance coatings at all phases of coatings and linings work, field- or shop-applied. Contractor is responsible for proper application and performance of coatings and linings whether or not Project Manager provides such inspection. B. Cement Mortar Lining and Joint Finish for large diameter water lines: Finished surface of lining and joint to be comparable to surface rubbed with No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring past to surface, to remove depressions and projections, and to produce a smooth, dense surface. Add cement to form surface past as necessary. Leave interior with a clean, neat and uniform-appearing finish. 3.9 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL FITTINGS APPLICATION FOR CEMENT MORTAR LINING A. Areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter: patch honeycomb and minor defects in concrete surfaces with non-shrink grout. Repair defects by cutting out unsatisfactory material and replacing with non-shrink grout, securely bonded to existing concrete. Finish to make junctures between patches and existing concrete as inconspicuous as possible. After each patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of shrinkage, strike off grout flush with surrounding surface. B. Areas greater than 6 inches in diameter: 1.Remove defective lining down to bare steel by chipping, making sure care is taken to prevent further lining damage. Ends of lining where defective lining is removed are to be left square and uniform not feathered. 2.Clean bare steel with wire brush to remove loose or other foreign matter. 3.Remove existing wire reinforcement and replace. Overlap new reinforcement to existing reinforcement by 1/2–inch. Secure reinforcement, against wall of pipe, at frequent intervals, by tack welding to pipe. 4.Prepare cement mortar mixture. Mixture to compose of Portland Type II cement, sand, and water. Proportions of sand to cement not to exceed 3 parts sand to 1 part cement, by weight. Use only enough water to obtain proper placement characteristics. Set up time before mixture is to be discarded is to be no longer than 1/2 hour. Non-shrink grout may also be used. Do not use combination of cement mortar and non-shrink grout within same repair. 5.Apply WELD–CRETE, or approved equal, concrete bonding agent to bare steel and interface of existing lining. After bonding agent is applied to steel and lining new mix must be applied within 10 minutes. 6.Apply cement mortar to repair area 1/2–inch thick then hand trowel to achieve smooth dense finish, making sure wire is not left exposed. To ensure proper thickness while placing new mortar, check thickness with 1/2–inch long wire gauge. 7.Curing: Place plastic sheeting over repair area, use tape to adhere plastic to area surrounding repair area. Let cure for 4 days then remove plastic sheeting. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems – 40 90 00 SECTION 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS GENERAL SCOPE A. General Requirements for Instrumentation: There are two areas of work in the Instrumentation Work in this project as described below: 1. The Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor shall provide all hardware, software, and configuration and integration associated with the PLC based Instrumentation and Process Control system. Provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents: a. Provide instrumentation, hardware, conductors and raceway required for a complete and operable system that is above that specified in the Contract Documents. Provide all labor and materials specified in the Contract Documents. b. Provide two PLCs tied together in a fully-redundant configuration. The PLCs shall be connected by an Ethernet 802.3 10 Base-F system to the existing HSQ system in the SCADA building. c. Provide all required labor, materials and PLC programming and system configuration and integration to interconnect the PLCs to HSQ’s Ethernet in the SCADA Building. Provide fiber optic cables and “Black Box” single-port and dual-port 10 Base-T to 10 Base-F converters. d. Provide all required software and programming in the PLC for a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents. e. Coordinate and fully cooperate with HSQ to provide all required hardware and PLC hardware and PLC programming necessary to interface with the existing HMI system. f. Provide personnel to check out, test and commission the system. g. Provide personnel to train the Owner’s staff as specified. 2. HSQ shall be responsible for the following work to provide a complete and operational system in accordance with these Contract Documents: a. Provide software programming to create new screens and modify existing screens as specified. b. Provide the required drivers to receive and transmit data over the specified Ethernet data highway to fully communicate with the PLC system provided by the System Integrator Contractor. c. Coordinate and fully cooperate with the Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor to provide all required HSQ system programming necessary to interface with the existing HSQ system for a complete and operational system as specified. d. Provide all software programming required in their system for a complete and operational system as specified. e. Create or modify all required data bases in their system. f. Provide personal to check out, test and commission the system. g. Provide personnel to train the Owner’s staff as specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Should there be a conflict between various standards, codes, specifications, and contract drawings, bring the matter immediately to the attention of the Owner’s Representative. B. Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems – 40 90 00 ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ASTM B68 Seamless Copper Tube ASTM D1047 Polyvinyl Chloride Jacket for Wire and Cable 2. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ). 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Painting Specifications for weather exposure. 5. American Welding Society (AWS): Welding Code D 1.1-75. 6. Federal Specifications: Primer, Paint Zinc, Chromate, Alkyd Type, Fed. Spec. TT- P-645a. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code (NEC), 1990 edition. 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA) Standards: RP 3.1-1960 Flow Meter Installations, Seal and Condensate Chambers S5.1-1973 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification RP7.1-1956 Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test S7.3-1975 Quality Standard for Instrument Air RP18.1-1965 Specifications and Guides for the Use of General Purpose Annunciators S5.4-1976 Instrument Loop Diagrams S8.1-1968 Instrument Enclosures for Industrial Environments RP12.1-1960 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres RP20.1, 20.2 Specification Forms for Instruments S39.1-1972 Control Valve Sizing Equations S39.2-1972 Control Valve Capacity Test Procedures S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology 10. American Petroleum Institute (API) Standards: API RP 550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems API RP 520 Recommended Practice for the Design and Installation of Pressure- Relieving Systems in Refineries 11. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA) Standards: PM 20.1-1973 Process Measurement and Control Terminology RC5-10-1963 Resistance Thermometers 12. Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL): Subject 13, Subject 1227. 13. Factory Mutual (FM). 14. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): Supplement to C37.90-1971, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (IEEE Std. 313- 1971), C37.90a-1974. 15. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 16. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Tray Fire Tests, IEEE 383. GUARANTEES The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Guarantee Period: The Contractor shall provide guarantees as defined hereunder for a period of 1 year after final acceptance by the Owner. B. Guarantee Requirements for Analog Devices: Each device shall perform its intended function within the specified operating accuracy and repeatability without more than 12 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems – 40 90 00 adjustments for any consecutive period of 12 months. The availability of each device shall be not less than 98.0 percent for any consecutive period of 6 months. Downtime of analog devices affecting more than eight loops shall be considered a system failure. CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS A. The Instrumentation System Integrator Contractor’s personnel shall have a minimum of 10 years of prior experience in furnishing, installation, testing, programming, debugging, start-up, and training for systems at least as large and similar to the one in this Contract. The system installer shall have employees who are qualified technicians for the duration of the contract located in the Corpus Christi area. The Contractor shall submit for evaluation within 1 week of Notice to Proceed, his instrumentation systems installer’s company resumes complete with company history, project lists, locations, Owner, costs, type of system installed, and references with phone numbers. Installers not meeting these qualifications shall not be accepted. As a part of this contract, the instrumentation system installers shall assume complete system responsibility, including coordination and interfacing with all subsystems and equipment suppliers and manufacturers. The Contractor shall actively be involved in control system integration industry for the last 5 years. The Contractor shall not act as a broker for the project; he shall provide and be responsible for all hardware, interfacing software, training, testing, and extended warranties. DEFINITIONS The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. The terms used in this specification conform to definitions in ISA S51.1, SAMA PMC 20.1-1973 and RC 5-10-1963, except as modified below. 1. Device: An electronic or mechanical apparatus designed to perform a specific measurement or control function. 2. Equipment: The machinery used in a process, e.g., pumps, fans, etc. 3. Interchangeability error: The algebraic difference between the indication and true value of the measured variable as a result of exchanging a device with a replacement. 4. Loop: Any combination of interconnected transmitters, receivers, switches, alarms, indicators, controllers, computers, or final control elements. 5. Operating accuracy: Conformity of indicated value to accepted standard value or true value throughout specified operating conditions with a confidence level of 95 percent includes, but is not limited to, hysteresis, linearity, and operating influence of temperature, pressure, supply voltage, and transmitter power supply. Operating accuracy for loop is defined as root-mean-square (RMS) of individual device operation accuracies. 6. Process: A progressively continuing operation that consists of a series of controlled actions systemically directed toward a particular result, e.g., a process to mix, filter, heat, and/or cool air to a particular condition. 7. Response: The results of the act, or process of measuring the time difference between the time of a change in an input signal or a measured variable, and the time when the output, display, and final control element in the loop has changed to at least 60 percent of the change which should result from the input change. 8. Subsystem: A discrete subdivision of a system and an assemblage of parts, devices, or software modules designed to perform one or more of the specific tasks required for the system to accomplish its functions. 9. System: An assemblage of sometimes diverse parts, devices, or software modules serving a common set of measurement or control functions. 10. Time resolution: The result of the act or process of rendering distinguishable events occurring at nearly the same time. Expressed as a measurement of time in seconds. 11. Unit: Any combination of equipment items interconnected in a predetermined manner, performing one or more controlled actions toward a particular result. A discrete subdivision of a process. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems – 40 90 00 12. Concealed - Accessible: Out of general sight, but can be easily reached by removing panels or access doors. 13. Concealed - Inaccessible: Out of general sight and cannot be easily reached except by removing a permanent part of the building or using special tools. 14. Exposed: Open to general view without removing panels, access doors, or a permanent part of the building. 15. Field termination point: Termination of a run of raceway from an instrument panel to the vicinity of a field instrument. Field termination point is usually within 5 horizontal feet from the field instrument. 16. Analog device: Any sensor, transmitter, indicator, recorder, controller, computing relay, or control valve which transmits or receives an analog signal. Excludes the analog portion of a digital system or I/O subsystems. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Detail: Give sufficient detail to permit system configuration, installation, and wiring without reference to design drawings. Refer to Division 01 - General Provisions. 2. As a minimum, shop drawings shall include a bill of materials with original manufacturer’s name and catalog number (re-labeled component information is not acceptable), original manufacturer’s catalog cut sheets, front views, assembly drawings, nameplate schedules, electrical schematics, electrical connections diagrams, and piping connection diagrams. 3. Electrical, piping, and interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, complete with conduit, cable, and equipment designations, and shall include terminal identification information. 4. Include size of all conduits, pipe, cables, and conductors. 5. Physical arrangement drawings shall include operating and servicing clearance requirements, cooling requirements, electrical power requirements, and cabling information. 6. Operator console configuration drawings shall include specific location of all keys and pushbuttons. 7. Logic drawer drawings shall show used space and expansion space. 8. Show appropriate tag numbers on all product data. 9. Software specifications for all software provided in addition to existing standard software. a. Include fully annotated source listings, input-output requirements, memory requirements, timing and sequencing requirements, flow chart showing functions performed, operating sequences and decision points, required system configuration, list of known or anticipated limitations of software modules, list of malfunction procedures to be followed for recovering from operator error or other malfunction, and description of how each module interfaces with calling and called programs. b. Provide proposed screen layouts showing modifications to existing screens, and new screens: Show all displays, inputs, outputs, recorders, alarms and indications along with the associated signal tag number. 10. Technical Manuals: a. Supply six sets of technical manuals with software specifications to Owner’s Representative no later than the equipment shipment date. Each set shall be bound in a standard size, three-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard-cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2-1/2 inches. b. Each set of technical manuals shall include a general and detailed description, a theory of operation description, detailed schematic drawings, specifications, and installation, connection, calibration, operating, troubleshooting, preventive maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail with a clear and specific description of the steps the operators must take to perform each of the tasks and modes of operating specified. These manuals shall provide the Owner with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems – 40 90 00 views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. These manuals are in addition to all applicable requirements of Division 01 - General Provisions. 11. Spare Parts List: Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer’s review a master spare parts list of all Division 40 items. All Division 40 spare parts shall be turned over to the Owner at one time and stored into lockable cabinets. PRODUCTS INFORMATION ON DRAWINGS A. The following information is indicated on the drawings: 1. Approximate location of primary elements, instrument panels, and final control elements. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards for instrument electrical power. 3. Location of equipment having alarms and equipment status contacts. 4. Location of equipment being controlled by system. B. The following information is not shown on drawings, but shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine, furnish, and coordinate with other divisions based upon systems specified. Show this information on project record drawings: 1. Instrument loop drawings per ISA S5.4 minimum, desired and optional items. 2. Location of electrical distribution panel boards supplying power to any device supplied under this Contract. 3. Detailed enclosure and instrument panel layouts, PLC enclosure layouts, Filter console layouts, fabrication details, and wiring diagrams. 4. Detailed system configuration. 5. Raceway and cable routing for instrumentation wiring. OPERATING CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Provide equipment suitable for ambient conditions specified. Provide system elements to operate properly in the presence of radio frequency fields produced by portable RF transmitters with output of 5 watts operated at 24 inches from instruments in the presence of plant telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment, and in the presence of digital data transmission systems. B. Field Locations: Field equipment may be subjected to ambient temperatures from -5 to 50 C with direct radiation and relative humidity from 45 to 100 percent with condensation. C. Power Supply: Power supply will be 117-volt AC, 1-phase, 60-Hertz commercial power. Voltage variations will be at least plus or minus 8 percent. Certain loops shall have integral power supply as specified in the Contract Documents. Power supplies shall be provided in the panels as specified in the Contract Documents or required for a complete system, plus one spare. SPARE PARTS A. Supply spare parts as indicated in these Specifications. B. Spare parts shall become property of the Owner. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment of solid-state construction utilizing second source semiconductors, unless otherwise specified. De-rate components to assure dependability and long-term stability. Provide printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy, hand or wave soldered, of sufficient thickness to prevent warping. Coat printed circuit boards in field-mounted equipment with 2 mils of solderable conformal coating complying with MIL-I-46058B. Alignment and adjustments shall be noncritical, stable with temperature changes or aging, and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. Do not insert components of specially selected values into standard electronic assemblies to meet performance requirements. Use parts indicated in instruction manuals, replaceable with standard commercial components of the same description without degrading performance of completed assembly. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems – 40 90 00 B. Use test equipment and instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs suitable for purpose intended and rated to an accuracy of at least five times greater than the required accuracy of device being calibrated. Such test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the National Bureau of Standards as applicable. SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. As a part of this Contract, the instrumentation systems Contractor shall coordinate with HSQ, and with all the sub-systems suppliers and manufacturers, during bidding, construction, testing, installation and start-up phases of the project. The coordination is to assure that the instruments and sub-systems are in compliance with the Contract Documents and that the necessary tie-ins and interface signals with the HSQ system are provided as specified or required. B. The instrumentation system Contractor shall provide the Owner’s staff with all required training and operating procedures, at no extra cost to the Owner, in addition to In-Plant SCADA training specified in Section 40 90 02 “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System.” The training schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative. Training shall include operating, testing, calibration and programming of the system, and simple troubleshooting of the system. The training shall include manuals which are specifically written for the system provided as described in Division 01 - General Provisions of these Specifications. C. The calibration, testing, and start-up of all the instruments whether existing or provided new, shall be done by the manufacturer’s field technician/Engineer in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide a list of all manufacturers whose technicians will perform this work. The Contractor shall also provide a certified calibration report stating that each instrument shown or specified in the Contract Documents has been installed, tested and calibrated per manufacturer’s recommendations and per these Contract Documents. D. Follow-Up Services: After the acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall make four trips to the project site for calibration and adjustment of all the instruments and devices, including the In-Plant SCADA system. The first trip shall be 3 months after acceptance of the complete system, and thereafter every 3 months for a total of four trips. These trips are in addition to all warranty items, and shall be at no extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the services of a trained technician for each trip with appropriate calibration and testing instruments. All defects shall be immediately remedied. The trips shall be coordinated with the Owner. E. All control software developed for this contract shall be delivered to the Owner stored on electronic media in a format suitable for installing on the existing equipment and new equipment installed under this contract. This includes all source code, complied code, link libraries, run-time libraries or other modules necessary to recreate an operational system in the event of a catastrophic failure or cessation of business by any of the Contractors. In addition, copies of all data bases and necessary associated files as configured after the final test shall be supplied on the same medium. EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 SECTION 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL Work Included A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install all equipment for complete instrumentation and controls. Contractor’s work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of equipment furnished under this contract. 2. Interconnections between equipment furnished under this contract. 3. Interconnection between equipment furnished under this contract and the existing instrumentation and control equipment or that furnished and installed under other contracts. B. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the fact that instrumentation is an integrated system and as such shall be furnished by one vendor or system integrator who shall provide all the equipment and appurtenances, regardless of manufacture, and be responsible to the Contractor for satisfactory operation of the entire system. C. Supervision, labor, tools, and materials necessary for installation of the instrumentation equipment and material furnished herein and their interconnection shall be provided by the Contractor. Installation work shall conform to applicable city, state, and national building and electrical codes. D. Coordinate the work of the system manufacturer’s service personnel during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. Quality Assurance A. General: Equipment shall be the Manufacturer’s latest and proven design. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. B. Operating Voltage: Electrical components of the system shall operate on 120-volt, 1- phase, 60-Hertz, except as otherwise noted in the specifications. C. Power Supplies: The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the instrumentation. D. Protection: 1. The instrumentation system supplier shall be responsible for input-output isolation of all incoming and outgoing signals. 2. Each 4-20 mA DC process measurement current loop installed on this contract shall be protected by insertion which extends outside control room shall be protected by insertion of a 1/16-amp fuse, Buss Type MKB. Fuses shall be installed in standard fuse blocks. 3. The necessary fuses or switches required by the Instrumentation Manufacturer for his equipment shall be provided with the equipment. The instruments requiring an internal power supply shall have an internal On-Off switch. E. Input/Output: 1. In general and unless specifically stated otherwise, inputs and outputs involving instrumentation systems shown shall be 4-20 mA DC process measurement signals. Current loop isolators, current repeaters, or other signal isolators shall be furnished and installed as required to meet instrument specifications and to make instrumentation system fully operational. 2. Pair shielded cable, as specified in Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” shall be used for all 4-20 mA DC loops. F. Manufacturer’s Representative for Startup and Testing of Sample Pumps: Furnish February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 services of manufacturer’s technical representative to inspect equipment installation, supervise initial start-up and operation of the equipment and provide Owner instruction and follow up. Submittals The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication or shipment to the job. Equipment shall not be fabricated or shipped to the job before receipt of approved shop drawings from the Engineer. Submittals for approval shall include: (1) Component manufacturing data sheet indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by item number and nomenclature. (2) Component drawing showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. (3) A system piping schematic and wiring schematic each on a single drawing with full description of operation. (4) Complete schematic diagram of each piece of electrical and electronic equipment including electrical valves and tolerances for each component. Component identification on the schematic shall be as described above. b. Following approval, the manufacturer shall be responsible for preparation of the required sets of these drawings for distribution as indicated in Division 00 and Division 01 specifications. c. Shop drawings submitted for all equipment furnished under this Section of the specifications, shall be submitted at the same time in the same package. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. 2. Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for approval. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including the system schematics which reflect “as-built” modifications. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished as a part of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals which clearly show terminal numbers and wire numbers as they actually are in the instrumentation system. Instrument panel wiring shall be such that each wire installed has its own number designation at each end and such that no number is repeated. Instrument panel wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” shall be followed. b. Special maintenance requirements particular to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. Standards A. The applicable provisions of all standards listed in this specification shall apply as if written here in their entirety including but not limited to: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings ASTM B61 Specification for Steam and Valve Bronze Castings Job Conditions A. Spare Parts: 1. Furnish all standard recommended spare parts as indicated in the Manufacturer’s instruction manuals, for each component in the system. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 2. Furnish the following non-standard spare parts: a. One of each type of etched or printed circuit board. b. Six indicating lights for each type of control and switch module. c. One box of each different type and size of fuses. d. One servo positioner for each type receiver. B. Special Tools: Furnish a kit which contains special size wrenches and other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning, and calibrating each piece of equipment. In addition, any piece of equipment (meter, test set, etc.) required by the Manufacturer to align, adjust, or otherwise calibrate any item under this Section of the specification shall be furnished. PRODUCTS Remote Equipment A. Controls for remote electrically operated or motor driven equipment shall be complete, including the necessary auxiliary relays so as to require only wiring and connections to the equipment control circuit. Contacts for control of remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment shall be rated not less than 10 amperes at 120 volts unless otherwise specified herein. B. Remote motor operated or electrically operated equipment shall have a separate 120-volt control circuit which operates through the dry contacts provided by the instrumentation system. Enclosures/Panels A. Enclosures and panels as indicated on the plans and in this specification shall be furnished, installed, and wired. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel for outdoor environments and NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor environments, unless specifically stated otherwise. Tubing A. Instrument tubing shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing conforming to Fed. Spec. WW-T-799b, and ASTM B88 for seamless copper tubing for use with or flared fittings. Hydraulic connections to instruments shall be made with separable stainless steel Swagelok fittings so that fittings may be separated and reassembled without reworking tubing ends and without incurring any leaks. B. Tubing shall be 1/4-inch trade size (OD = 0.375 inch, ID = 0.315 inch, wall thickness = 0.030 inch), shall be rated for 810 psi working pressure at 150 F and shall be manufactured by Halstead or approved equal. Flared fittings shall be brass flared fittings as manufactured by Parker or approved equal. VenturiFlow Tubes A. Tubes shall be of the pressure differential producing type constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B. B. The throat liner shall be constructed of bronze, ASTM B61. C. Uncalibrated accuracy shall be within plus or minus 0.5 percent of actual rate. Head loss shall not exceed 6.0 percent. D. The entrance Section shall consist of the uniform arc of a circle, the radius of which shall be continuous with the throat. E. Provide flanges that match the pipe on which the flow tubes are attached. The flanges shall meet the specifications for the pipe as specified in this document. Determine that the flow tube is compatible with the pipe as indicated on the plans and specifications. F. The metering element shall not have debris collecting cavities or annular chambers, but shall have a single pressure connection at the inlet and throat. In addition, vent ports and drains shall be included on a 90-degree plane to the metering taps. Brass of 316 stainless steel ball valve type process block valves shall be connected at the high and low meter taps. G. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 performance. The data shall include: 1. Coefficient values of tolerance. 2. Effects of upstream configurations. 3. Head loss as a function of the velocity head expended. H. The flow tubes shall be Type PMT as manufactured by the Badger Meter Manufacturing Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or other approved equal with a lab test of uncalibrated accuracy and loss measurement for each of the flow tubes furnished or an exact duplicate of each. Tag Service Flow Range Differential Press. Range Line Size Insert Venturi Flow Tubes A. Furnish and install concentric low head loss type insert flow tubes complete with head recovery section as indicated on the plans. The upstream entrance section, holding flange, and downstream recovery core section shall be of carbon steel. The throat liner shall be stainless steel and shall include an internal annulus from which the low pressure metering taps shall be made through the holding flange, requiring no drilling or tapping of the pipeline itself. The entrance shall be nozzle type, the radius of which shall be continuous with the throat section. There shall not be any protrusion, sharp-edged annulus, or slot, or other sediment collecting areas exposed to the flow stream. B. High and low pressure ports shall have isolation valves. C. The Manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and performance. The data shall include: 1. Coefficient values and tolerance. 2. Effects of upstream configurations. 3. Head loss as a function of the velocity head expended. D. The insert flow tubes shall be Type PMT-IF as manufactured by the Badger Meter Mfg. Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or approved equal. Tag Service Flow Line Size Throat Diameter (in.) Orifice Plates A. Orifice plates shall be 316 stainless steel, concentric bored, with 300 psi forged steel flanges. Orifice shall be bored per ISA recommended practices RP3.2 for puddle type orifice plates. Flanges shall conform to ANSI pressure ratings, threaded type with raised face, and 1/2-inch NPT pressure taps. Holding rings shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. Orifice plates shall be Taylor model 7-20, Foxboro or approved equal. Tag Service Size Parshall Flume A. The parshall flume shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced polyester resin laminate. Throat size shall be 9 inches. The flume shall have accurate internal dimensions February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 conforming to those shown in the latest revisions of United States Department of Agriculture Circular 843. Flume shall be molded in one integral piece containing the approach, throat, and downstream section. B. The inside surface of the flume shall be smooth and free of any irregularities. The flume shall have a minimum 1/4-inch wall thickness, be self-supporting and require no external supporting structure, and be provided with sufficient flanges, reinforcing ribs, and/or anchoring ribs to prevent distortion during shipment, installation, and operation as well as providing for permanent anchorage in the concrete. C. The one-piece flume shall be ready and suitable for setting in the channel formwork, prior to pouring the concrete or shall be suitable for grouting into place in boxouts provided in the structural concrete. The flume shall be furnished with fiberglass tie strips or aluminum tie rods across the top of the flume to retain the vertical sides during concrete placement. Depending upon configuration, ties can be removed or remain in place after construction and during operation. Unit shall be provided with an integrally cast level sensor mounting track. Mounting track shall be compatible with specified level instrumentation. D. Cook’s gelcoat no. 944L181 shall be used to produce a blue flame color. Parshall flume shall be by Badger Meter, Inc., Tulsa, OK or approved equal. Tag Size Service Range Palmer Bowlus Flumes A. Palmer-Bowlus flumes for installation in the pipeline channel shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester including an integral approach section. The flume shall have an integral mounting track for an ultrasonic sensor for flowrate measurement in the flume. The inside surface shall be white gelcoat, smooth, and free form irregularities. The outside surface shall be provided with clips suitable for anchoring to concrete. B. [The entrance and exit ends shall be U-shaped and the flume shall have an inside radius the same as the inside radius of the pipeline in which it is installed.] [The entrance and exit ends shall be supplied with end bulkheads to fit into circular channel having a radius the same as the pipeline in which it is installed.] The flume shall be molded of isophthalic polyester resin and fiberglass to form a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch throughout (18 size and larger to 1/4-inch thick minimum). Flume shall be as manufactured by Plasti-Fab, Tualatin, Oregon or approved equal. Tag Size Maximum Laying Length Service Range V-Notch Wier Plate A. V-Notch weir plates shall be constructed of the dimensions indicated on the plans and shall be constructed of 1/4-inch thick 3003-H14 aluminum plate as sold by Reynolds Aluminum Co., Grand Prairie, Texas or approved equal. Tag Service February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Doppler Type Sonic Flow Transmitter A. Sonic flow meters shall be of the Doppler type consisting of a sensing element and a transmitter. Transmitter shall be powered by 120-volt, 60-Hertz, 1-phase. Transmitter shall provide for indicating, totalizing, signal strength indication and transmitting of flow rate in a full pipe. The rate indicator shall be a 6-inch length circular dial with up to 100 divisions reading directly in GPM or MGD. A signal strength meter with separate loss-of- signal indication shall be provided with circuitry to drive all outputs to zero upon loss of signal. The sensor shall be of the twin-crystal type containing a separate transmit and receive device designed to operate continuously at temperatures of 300 F and shall be supplied as a single submersible assembly with jacketed flexible armored cable. The sensing element circuitry shall be solid-state and transformer isolated and designed to meet intrinsic-safe requirements. B. Transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure with gasketed shatter-proof window for rate indicator and analog signal strength indicator and shall be corrosion resistant. Electronic circuits shall to be Mil-Spec coated with anti-fungus compound. Transmitter shall include a calibration dial and adjustments for sensitivity, span and zero. Housing shall be suitable for wall and pipe stand mounting. Transmitter output shall be 4-20 mA DC in 1000 ohms proportional to flow and optically isolated. C. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightening-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. D. Linearity shall be within plus or minus 0.5 percent full scale, repeatability shall be within plus or minus 0.1 percent accuracy shall be within plus or minus 2.0 percent full scale. Transmitter shall be able to operate within a temperature range of -10 F to +140 F. E. Sonic flowmeters shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily in the application described below or the purchase and removal costs shall be refunded to the Owner in the event of failure. Sonic flowmeters shall be Polysonics Model UFM-84. Tag Service Range Transit Time Ultrasonic Flow Transmitter A. An ultrasonic flowmeter shall be installed on the piping as indicated on the plans and mounted in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations. The flowmeter shall consist of two acoustic sensors, their associated mounting hardware, an electronic transmitter and accessories as required for the installation. The flowmeter shall produce a 4-20 mA DC signal, linear with the flow in the pipe over the specified flow range. The flowmeter shall be Panametrics DF 868. Mounting of the primary element shall be certified acceptable for seismic qualification as specified in “IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations” by an independent laboratory. B. Two flow sensors shall be permanently mounted to the pipe to insure accurate and stable measurement of flow. The sensors shall be positioned in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications with factory approved methods. Mounting templates and/or fixtures for sensor attachments shall be provided by the manufacturer. C. A junction box shall be mounted on the pipe, and each acoustic sensor shall be connected to this box. The electrical cables between the sensor mounting site and the junction box shall be contained in a flexible, water-tight, submersible electrically- conductive conduit. Wiring between the junction box and the electronic transmitter housing shall be as described in these specifications and all cable and wiring from sensor to flow indicating transmitter shall be in conduit. D. For external non-penetrating sensors, stainless steel mounting bands shall be placed about the pipe circumference to secure the sensor brackets; the mounting bands shall February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 have sufficient strength to maintain accurate sensor position. Positioning of the sensor mounting brackets shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications. E. The acoustic sensors shall be securely held in the sensor brackets and shall transmit acoustic energy through the (steel, cast iron, plastic) pipe wall for measurement of flow. The transducer design shall not penetrate the pipe wall, reduce or alter the process vessel integrity. Installation or maintenance on the primary element shall not cause process shutdown. Sensor design shall allow for high pressure stream cleaning and/or pig cleaning in the pipe without damage to the sensor. F. The transmitter shall contain all circuitry necessary to utilize signals from the acoustic sensors and shall produce an isolated accurate 4-20 mA DC signal linear with the flow rate. The unit shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X outdoor housing suitable for wall or pipe mounting remotely for location up to 1000 feet from the primary element. G. Setting of zero and span of the unit shall be easily accomplished and shall be non- interactive. Flow signal response time and damping shall be adjustable. The meter shall be readily re-scaled for different flow ranges. H. Accuracy shall be unaffected by changes in suspended solids or fluid density for the application range. I. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. J. Flow sampling shall be at a minimum rate of 150 samples per second, and the unit shall be able to operate with as few as 2 percent of the samples taken successfully. Unit shall have local indication of signal strength. In the event of prolonged loss of acoustic signaling in the fluid, the unit shall indicate the condition by an internal status light and shall provide for an external alarm connection. During periods of loss of signal the unit shall indicate zero flow. K. The output flow signal from the electronics shall be 4-20 mA DC operating into a maximum of 1000 ohms. The output signal shall indicate true volumetric flow to within plus or minus 2 percent if actual or plus or minus 0.02 fps, whichever is greater. L. A space heater shall be included to maintain the interior temperature of the electronics enclosure above the dew point temperature. M. The unit shall operate with 117/230-volt (plus or minus 10 percent), 60-Hz electrical power. Power requirements shall be less than 250 watts outdoor, with space heater. The unit shall function over an ambient temperature range of -40 F to +150 F (-40 C to +65 C) outdoor. N. External wiring connections shall be made via well-marked terminal blocks. O. The electrical signaling cable shall be supplied by the Flowmeter Manufacturer and shall be installed in an exclusive 1-inch metallic conduit, electrically continuous from the sensor junction box to the transmitter housing with a conduit drain at the conduit entrance through the flow sensor vault wall as shown in detail on the plans. P. Electronics and circuit boards shall be coated with permanent (not topicalization or anti- fungus coating) clear plastic type coating, Plasite 7122 or equal, to prevent corrosion from hydrogen sulfide, chlorine or moisture. Wiring conductors shall be tinned. Screws shall be stainless steel or plated with nickel. No exposed relay contacts, exposed copper, or exposed brass surfaces shall be allowed. Q. Flow indicating transmitter shall have a totalizer installed which integrates measured flow and displays this total at front face of enclosure. Totalizer shall be resettable by switch inside the enclosure and totalizer display shall be liquid crystal type with six digits, minimum. Totalizer reading shall be retained during power outage. Flow indicating transmitter shall be housed in NEMA 4X enclosure. R. Flowmeters shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily in the applications described above or the purchase and removal costs shall be refunded to the Owner in the event of failure. Tag Service Range February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Sonic Flowmetering/Indicating/Recording/Totalizing Instrument A. A sonic flowmetering/recording instrument shall be installed to measure flow at the flume locations in this project. The unit shall have microprocessor-based electronics, a font panel menu-driven keyboard and shall produce an isolated 4-20 mA DC signal proportional to the flow, which shall be recorded on a 12-inch circular chart recorder and displayed on an eight digit totalizer after integration. The flowmeter shall be self- compensating for ambient temperature conditions. The flowmeter shall have as standard four relay outputs available for alarm conditions, sampling or pulsing external totalizers. The unit shall be capable of simulating flow without any external devices for verifying outputs and calibrations. Totalizer display shall always be retained after power failure without battery backup by the use of an EEPROM. B. Acoustic Sensor and Mounting Equipment: The acoustic sensor shall be permanently mounted at the measuring site and positioned according to the Manufacturer’s approved method. Sensor mounting adaptor shall be supplied by the Manufacturer. The cable from the sensor to the electronics box shall be installed in an exclusive 3/4-inch rigid aluminum conduit. The sensor shall have built-in temperature compensation to maintain accuracy. The sensor shall be capable of an indefinite submergence of 30 feet without degradation. The sensor shall function over an ambient temperature of -20 F to +160 F. C. Transmitter Specifications: The transmitter shall contain all necessary circuitry and built in H/Q relationship for Parshall Flumes, Palmer-Bowlus Flumes and V-Notch Weirs to utilize the signal from the acoustic sensor and shall produce an accurate 4-20 mA DC flow signal. An RS-232 serial port connection shall be provided for computer interface for real-time communications. The transmitter shall be supplied with an LCD indicator to display flow rate and flow total and their respective flow units and multipliers. The display shall indicate if there is a fault or an alarm condition. The transmitter shall also produce four relay output connections for external alarms, sampling or pulse output to drive remote totalizer. The unit shall function over an ambient temperature range of -40 F to +150 F. Totalizer shall be such that display x 1000 = gallons. D. Recorder: none. E. Unit shall be Panametrics DI 868. Tag Service Range Electromagnetic Flow Transmitter A. Flow element shall be of the electromagnetic type utilizing the pulsed DC type coil excitation principle with high preamp input impedance. The flow measuring system, consisting of low element, transmitter, and appurtenances, shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of rate with a 10:1 turndown for all flows resulting from pipe velocities of 1 to 31 fps. Stream fluid meter size and flow range shall be as noted. System shall operate a 120-volt (plus or minus 10 percent), 60-Hz power. Unit shall have zero stability feature thereby eliminating the need to stop flow to check zero alignment. B. The flow element shall be of water-tight, NEMA 4 construction, unless otherwise noted. Meter shall consist of a 304SS meter tub, 150 pound ANSI carbon steel raised-face flanges, teflon liner, and 316SS electrodes, unless otherwise noted. Electrodes shall be either flush or bullet nose type. Suitable covers shall be provided for flow elements ends to protect the tube liner during shipment. Liners for magnetic flowmeters shall be NSF approved hard rubber, suitable for installation on pump suction pipes. C. Remote flow transmitter shall be indicating and suitable for wall mounting. The February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 transmitter output shall be a 4-20 mA DC signal in linear proportion to flow and shall dive loads with impedances in the range of 0 to 800 ohms without load adjustments for a 24- VDC supply. Output span and zero shall be m anually adjustable. Both transmitter and primary element shall be powered from the same 120-volt, 60-Hz source. D. Sufficient special cable shall be provided for interconnection between the flow element and the transmitter. Cable(s) shall facilitate both signal and power for the flow element (120-volt, 60-Hz power will be made available at the transmitter). Special cables shall be installed in conduit. E. Electromagnetic flowmeters shall be Toshiba or approved equal. Tag Flow Range Line Size Stream Description Service F. Stream Description: 1. Primary Sludge: Heavy organic solids in aqueous suspension, 3 to 5 percent by weight, some organic grease, occasional carbon fines and grit, 40 to 70 F. 2. Activated Sludge: Light filamentous organic solids in aqueous suspension, 2 to 3 percent by weight, 40 to 70 F. G. For flow meters that are to be installed on the pump suction pipes inside High Service Pump Building No. 3, manufacturer must submit a letter stating that the flow meter supplier has reviewed the Drawings, and proposed flow meters are designed with proper interior liner and will suit for installation on pump suction pipes as shown on the Drawings. Include such letter in the Show Drawing submittal. Differential Pressure Flow Transmitter A. Flow transmitters shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the calibrated differential pressure range. The transmitter shall have wetted parts of 316 stainless steel and a Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have a hermetically sealed enclosure with externally adjustable span and zero, and an accuracy of plus or minus 0.25 percent of span. Transmitter mounting bracket shall be furnished. B. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051 Series, or approved equal. Each transmitter shall include an integrally mounted transient protector, Gould Model TP-114, or approved equal, to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrated and Blowdown functions, Rosemount 3051, or approved equal. Tag Service Flow Range Differential Pressure Filter Loss of Head Transmitters A. Filter loss of head transmitters shall be of the thin film strain gage, solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the calibrated differential pressure range. The transmitters shall have wetted parts of 316 stainless steel and a Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have an adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box with an output meter reading of 0-100 percent, a 316 stainless steel three-valve manifold, and an accuracy of plus or minus 0.25 percent of span. Each transmitter shall be provided with a sediment trap and strainer. B. Transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051, or approved equal. Each transmitter shall February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 include an integrally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning-produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 316 stainless steel service block and zeroing manifold with Normal, Zero, Blocked, Calibrate, and Blowdown functions. Transmitters shall be as follows: Tag Service Range Pressure Transmitter A. Pressure transmitter shall be of the thin film strain gauge solid state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the calibrated pressure range. The transmitter shall have 316 stainless steel wetted parts and Hastelloy C diaphragm. The transmitters shall have a hermetically sealed enclosure with externally adjustable span and zero, an integral junction box and an accuracy of 0.25 percent of span. B. C. Range limits of transmitter shall be 0-40 to 0-200 psi. Each transmitter shall include an integrally or externally mounted transient protector to protect the instrument against lightning produced voltage spikes and other transient surges. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a three-valve manifold with Normal, Zero, Block, Calibrate and Blowdown functions and shall be D/A PTM6 or approved equal. Transmitter shall be Rosemount 3051. Tag Service Range Float Type Level Transmitters A. Transmitters shall be of the solid-state electronic type having a 4-20 mA DC output signal proportional to the measured level. Transmitters shall have a 6-inch copper float and stainless steel tape. Transmitters shall have an indicator reading 0-10 linear. Transmitters shall be furnished with a weatherproof enclosure and pulley cover for outdoor service. Transmitter shall be Bristol Series 2008, or approved equal. Tag Service Range Tape Level Transmitter A. Furnish and install a purely resistive type level sensor, Metritape Type LS-NC or equal, at the location indicated on the plans. Sensor shall be a resistance shorting type of 30.5 ohm/ft. resistance with a nominal actuation sensitivity of 0.2 psi. Sensor shall be installed in a 2-inch Schedule 80 perforated PVC still pipe having an 8-by-8-by-6-inch PVC top housing including a breather assembly and a plug-in compact 2-wire transmitter Series 710 convert sensor resistance into a linear 4-20 mA output signal. The level measuring system shall be as manufactured by Metritape, Inc. P.O. Box 23266, Littleton, MA 01460, or approved equal. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Tag Service Range Ultrasonic Level Transmitter A. Unit shall be ultrasonic type, continuous level measuring system consisting of level element, transmitter, and cable for connection from level element to transmitter. B. Level element shall be ultrasonic type transducer. Transducer shall be of water-proof construction rated NEMA 4X with operating range of -10 to +120 F at 1 atmosphere. Transducer shall be furnished with 1-inch NPT nipple for mounting. C. Transmitter shall contain solid state controls to operate transducer and to provide a 4-20 mA DC output signal in linear proportion to the level being sensed. Transmitter shall be provided with output indicator meter and shall have an operating range of 30 to 120 F. Transmitter scale range shall be as noted. Transmitter shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable for wall mounting. D. Level system shall have an overall accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 percent of full scale and shall operate on 12-volt, 50/60-Hz power. E. Transmitter shall provide up to three discrete outputs, adjustable over the entire scale range. At the noted set point, unit shall transfer SPDT contacts which shall be rated for 5 amperes, continuous, at 120 VAC. Set points shall be screwdriver adjustable from inside the enclosure and shall be repeatable within plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. F. Interconnecting cable between transducer and transmitter shall be furnished with the unit with length as indicated. G. Unit shall be Drexelbrook Usonic R or approved equal. Unit Tag No. Parameters Transducer Level Transmitter A. Level transmitter shall be Drexelbrook Usonic R, submersible level transducer type and shall consist of three elements: the lower assembly, the connecting cable, and the upper assembly. B. The lower assembly shall have a 316 stainless steel housing and a head pressure sensing bottom teflon-faced diaphragm with an internal, variable capacitance gauge pressure transducer assembly. C. The connecting cable between the upper and lower assemblies shall have a 1/2-inch O.D. polyurethane jacket, a three conductor shielded 16 AWG cable and an integral breather tube which is part of the vital sealed breathing system. D. The upper assembly houses the system signal conditioning and transient protective electronics, job connections terminal block and the expansion bag of the sealed breathing system. The housing shall be a fiberglass housing within a sheet aluminum enclosure. The aluminum outer enclosure is described below. The fiberglass enclosure shall have a rubber gasketed front door with stainless steel hinge and a labyrinth seal vent on the side such that atmospheric pressure has access to the expansion bag of the sealed breathing system. E. The upper assembly electronics shall be loop powered from a separate loop power supply and shall provide a 4-20 mA DC level signal output. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.3 percent of span and operating temperature range shall be 0 to plus or minus February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 70 C. Transmitter shall be factory calibrated for feet of water and shall be Consolidated Electric Model 157 GSCD with 1/8-inch diameter, 7 by 19 stainless steel cable and 1-inch stainless steel pipe with coupling, bolt, cable clamps and other hardware as necessary for cable suspension mounting, Consolidated Electric Part Nos. 601203-01-A and 801594-01. F. The level transmitter shall be pedestal mounted. The pedestal mounting consists of a hollow cast aluminum base with removable door, a 4-inch aluminum pipe thread into the base and a cast aluminum slip fitter which is the attachment point for the sheet aluminum enclosure. The sheet aluminum enclosure shall be ventilated through openings. A thermostatically operated 120-VAC ventilation fan shall provide forced air cooling. A thermostatically operated enclosure heater shall warm the enclosure interior in cold weather. G. Pedestal mounting components shall be as follows: Parts Hennessy Products (Chambersburg, PA) Catalog No. Cast Aluminum Base 231649 4” Aluminum Pipe (24” Long) 231652 Slip-fitter 231644 Ventilation Fan 230220 H. Enclosure heater shall be 200W, thermostatically controlled and shall be Hoffman Engineering Company (Anoka, MN) A-DAH2001FT. Enclosure shall be made of 5052- H32 sheet aluminum alloy which is 0.125 inch thick. Enclosure shall be large enough to house instrument(s) in each case but shall be 30 inches high by 24 inches wide by 8 inches deep as a minimum. Enclosure shall be by Hennessy Products, Chambersburg, PA. Tag Service Range RTD Transmitter A. Transmitter shall accept an input from a 100-ohm platinum two or three wire RTD. Temperature measurement range shall be selectable with a DIP (dual inline package) switch. Transmitter shall produce a 4-20 mA DC output input and be powered by an external power supply. Unit shall be capable of measuring and transmitting temperatures over the range 0 to 1000 F. A 3-1/2 digit, 0.8-inch high liquid crystal display (LCD) shall provide visibility up to 30 feet and the decimal point position shall switch selectable. Unit shall provide 80 percent zero and span adjustability within any user selected input range. B. In addition, the enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4 and the NEMA 4 rating shall not void the explosion-proof ratings. Transmitter shall be Action Instrum ents F513 or approved equal. Tag Service Range Indicating/Circular Chart/Recording/Totalizing Treatment A. None: all recording shall be implemented in SCADA. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Indicating Strip Chart Recorders A. None: all recording shall be implemented in SCADA. Note to Specifier: Revise for each project. Tag Service Scale Alarms Indicating/Totalizing Strip Chart Recorders A. None: all recording shall be implemented in SCADA. Integrators A. None: all integrating shall be implemented in SCADA. Totalizers A. None: all totalizing shall be implemented in SCADA. Process Indicators A. Indicating receivers shall be of the high visibility type and shall receive and indicate a 4- 20 mA DC signal on a vertical scale 4 inches long with an accuracy of plus or minus 0.6 percent of span. Each indicator shall have an engraved nameplate to identify the service. Indicators shall be Red Lion Model LD, or approved equal. Adjustable alarm contacts shall be furnished as tabulated below: Tag Service Scale Current Loop Isolators A. Current isolators shall accept an input of 4-20 mA DC and produce a linearly proportional 4-20 mA DC output signal. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.1 percent of scale. Isolators shall operate on 115 VAC, 60 Hz. Output load capability shall be a minimum of 1500 ohms. Current isolators shall be Acromag Model 816, or approved equal. Tag Service Location Current Alarm Modules A. None: all alarming shall be implemented in SCADA. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Track and Hold Modules A. None: implemented in SCADA. Square Root Extractors A. None: implemented in SCADA. Instrument Panel A. Furnish and install the instrumentation panel at the location indicated. The Cabinet shall be made of 14 gauge steel with an 11 gauge mounting panel inside. Dimensions of the cabinet shall be 70.87 inches high by 31.50 inches wide x 15.75 inches deep. Cabinet shall have a hinged front door and shall be Hoffman or approved equal. B. The front door mounted instruments shall be as indicated. In addition, this cabinet shall contain backplane mounted instruments and equipment. Instruments and equipment which are not indicated to be mounted on the front door by the plans shall be mounted on the backplane of the instrument panel. C. Relays contained in this cabinet shall be 3PDT, shall have 120-VAC coils, shall each have a pilot light indicating energized coil, and shall each be mounted in a plug in socket with relay retainer clip and screw terminals. Relays shall be Square D KU13M1P14 or approved equal. The instrumentation panel shall contain ___ relays. D. Timing relays in the instrument panel shall be “on delay” type relays and shall be settable with range selector switch and three thumbwheel switches. Timing relays shall be for 120-VAC operation and shall be Square D JCK60V20 with screw terminal mounting socket and restraining strap. The instrumentation panel shall contain ___ timing relays. E. Indicating lamps on the front door shall be rated NEMA 4X, shall have a LED cluster type of lamp, operated on 120-VAC and shall be push to test. Indicating lamps shall be Square D SKT38LAA31 or approved equal. The instrumentation panel shall contain ___ indicating lamps. F. Pushbuttons and rotary switches shall be Square D Class 9001 or approved equal. The instrumentation panel shall contain ___ pushbutton switches and ___ rotary switches. G. Instrument panel wiring shall be as follows: 1. Single conductor wire shall be stranded, tinned 18 AWG and TEW insulation, as manufactured by American Insulated Wire or approved equal. Color coding shall be purple for ungrounded conductors and white for grounded conductors. 2. Pair shielded cable for 4-20 mA DC loops shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.” 3. Each conductor terminated under a screw head shall have a crimp on spade terminal applied to its end prior to its termination. 4. Each conductor has its own number and no number is used more than once. 5. The number of each wire is placed at both ends of the wire next to its end according to wire tagging instructions as specified in Section 26 05 19 “Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.” 6. The wire numbers, as actually installed, match the numbers on the shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams for this instrument panel. 7. Wiring shall be run enclosed in plastic wireway wherever possible. Wireways shall be installed as required to enclose panel wiring. Where the use of plastic wireway is not practical, conductors shall be bundled and run open. Conductors run open shall be bundled and bound at regular intervals not to exceed 6 inches with nylon ties, or approved equal. Wires within a bundle are to be run parallel to one another and not twisted. Bundles shall have a uniform appearance, circular cross-section, and shall be securely fastened to the panel framework. Conductors carrying different voltages that are from the same source may occupy the same wireway provided all are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the wireway. Wiring carrying voltages that originate at different source shall not run in the same wireway. 8. Terminal strips shall be installed for wire terminations and shall be Allen-Bradley February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 1492 H1. Each terminal strip shall have hinged marking surfaces which snap on. These marking surfaces shall have typewritten labels glued to its surfaces with Elmer’s Glue All. Typewritten labels shall denote terminal strip numbers and shall match numbers shown on shop drawings, O&M manuals and wiring diagrams. Marking surfaces shall be Allen-Bradley 1492-N41 and labels shall be Allen- Bradley 1492-N43. Inputs to SCADA RTU shall be brought to terminal strips in the instrument panel in for connection to the SCADA RTU which shall be by others in the future. H. Provide a specification grade single pole toggle switch, P&S 501-I or approved equal, and a general purpose fuse, Gould Shawmut OTM or approved equal, with fuse holder for control power control inside the instrument panel. Fuse rating shall be adequate to power all instrument panel loads but shall not be greater than 10 amps. I. A print pocket shall be provided in the panel and shall contain an 11 x 17 control schematic and an 11 x 17 wiring diagram or diagrams. The wiring diagram shall contain all wire numbers, device names and terminal numbers. Drawings shall be laminated in clear plastic for preservation of the drawings. Raw Water Pump Control Switches A. Pump Control Switches shall be Honeywell Micro Switch Type CMC, or approved equal. Switches shall be two-position maintained contacts, four 6.3-volt indicator lamps with 120-VAC transformers and Electronic Duty gold contacts. The red and green quadrants shall be connected to light only when receiving the respective RUN or STOP pump status. The white quadrant shall be lighted continuously for identification of the pump. Pump control stations shall have legend plate and colored LED lamp inserts as indicated. High Service Pump Control Switches A. Pump Control Switches (H-___ through H-___) shall be Honeywell Micro Switch Type CMC, or approved equal. Switches shall be three-position maintained contacts, four quadrant display, four 6.3-volt indicator lamps with 120-VAC transformers and 10-amp heavy duty contact blocks. The yellow quadrant shall light when the switch is in the HAND position. The red quadrant shall light only when receiving the respective RUN pump status. The green quadrant shall light only when receiving the respective STOP pump status. The white quadrant shall be lighted continuously for identification of the pump. Pump control stations shall have legend plate and colored lamp inserts as indicated. B. Lead Pump selector switch (LPS) shall be Honeywell Micro Switch Type CMC, or approved equal. Switch shall be two-positioned maintained contacts, four 6.3-volt indicator lamps with 120-VAC transformers and 10-amp heavy duty contact blocks. The amber quadrants shall be connected to light when switched to the respective pump position. The white quadrant shall be lighted continuously for identification. Lead pump selector switch shall have legend plate and colored lamp inserts as indicated. Flow Controllers A. None: implemented in SCADA. Level Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. Process Controller A. None: implemented in SCADA. Annunciator A. The annunciator shall be a 24-point solid state annunciator, Panalarm Model 73B64, or approved equal. Cards shall be provided for all windows plus five spares. Controls shall include warble tone horn, Test and Acknowledge pushbuttons. A remote warble tone horn shall be installed in the ______ as indicated by the plans. The remote horn shall operate in time sequence with the local horn. Window labels shall be in Capital Letters February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 and worded as indicated on the plans. Turbidity Analyzer A. Instruments shall be a continuous reading low range nephelometer, utilizing a light beam passed through a water sample to measure the amount of light scattered by the turbidity particles. Each instrument shall consist of an instrument body and master indicator. The master indicator shall be of the indicating type with ranges of 0 to 0.1, 0 to 0.3, 0 to 1, 0 to 3, 0 to 10, 0 to 30, 0 to 100, 0 to 300, and 0 to 1000 NTU. Master indicator output shall be 4-20 mA DC. Turbidimeters shall be Hach Surface Scatter 6. B. There shall be furnished to the Owner one screw-in vial, grab sample curvette, light shield, spare lamp and fuse and accessory case, standard 0.12 NTU. Tag Service Range Chlorine Residual Analyzer/Recorders A. The chlorine analyzer equipment shall be Hach Model CL17, or approved equal. The analyzer equipment shall include a submersible sensor probe, complete with agitator, with sufficient interconnecting power and signal cable to connect to the analyzer. The analyzer and the agitator shall operate on ___-V, 60-Hz power. The analyzer shall be enclosed in NEMA 4X enclosures with wall mounting hardware. The analyzer and sensor probe shall be installed as indicated. B. The residual chlorine shall be indicated on a mirrored scale front panel meter, having three switch selectable ranges of 0 to 1, 0 to 5, and 0 to 10 ppm. Alarm status shall be displayed by LED indicators. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 percent. Temperature compensation shall be automatic from 0 to 50 C. The analyzer shall provide output of 4-20 mA DC and 0-1 mA DC. The 0-1 mA DC output shall be used to position the recorder needle. The 4-20 mA DC output shall be used as a residual level input as indicated. Tag Service Range Sulfite Ion Residual Analyzer A. Each sulfite ion analyzer shall provide a direct measurement of the sulfite ion concentration in a water sample. The analyzer system shall be comprised of a monitor, a flowcell assembly and a sulfite sensor. The analyzer monitor shall come complete with a direct reading digital LED display, two adjustable alarms with relays, an isolated 4-20 mA DC output and flashing LED indicating low sulfite ion level. The monitor shall be capable of being wall-mounted. B. The sulfite sensor shall be a voltametric membraned sensor, composed of polarized noble metal electrodes immersed in an electrolyte. The sensor shall be isolated from the waste stream by a ion permeable membrane. The sensor shall not require reagents for operation and shall not be affected by other constituents normally found in dechlorinated effluent streams. C. The sulfite ion sensor shall be placed into a flowcell assembly which shall automatically regulate the sample flowrate and pressure past the sensor. The assembly shall consist of a constant head overflow tube and a clear sensor flow chamber. A 1/4-inch hose bib February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 shall be provided for the sample inlet and a 3/8-inch hose bib shall be provided for the drain connection. D. The sulfite ion analyzer system shall have measurement range of 0 to 19.99 ppm sulfite ion concentration as a positive display and a 0 to 1.99 ppm chlorine concentration as a negative display. The chlorine indication shall be for relative value only. The analog output shall be an isolated 4-20 mA signal and shall correspond to a selectable output range of either 0 to 1, 0 to 2, 0 to 3, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, or 0 to 20 ppm sulfite ion concentration. The accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent or 0.05 ppm sulfite ion concentration with a repeatability of plus or minus 1 percent or .05 ppm sulfite ion concentration. The analyzer shall operate on a 10 to 30 gph sample flow rate. E. The analyzer shall have high and low alarm setpoints with auxiliary relays and an independent zero crossover relay to indicate the presence of residual chlorine. The relays shall be SPDT rated at 3 A at 110-VAC resistive. The analyzer shall operate on 110-VAC, 50/60-Hertz power supply and shall be housed in a NEMA 4X ABS enclosure. F. Two sensors and a 25-foot cable shall be provided with each unit. An accessory polarizer shall be supplied with each unit to maintain the spare sensors ready for immediate use. G. The sulfite ion residual analyzer monitor shall be as manufactured by Hach, or approved equal. Tag Service Range Sample Pumps A. Sample pumps shall be provided to pump liquid from the sample points to the Chlorine Residual and Sulfate Ion Analyzers. B. The submersible well pumps shall be multi-stage turbine type pumps of sufficient number of stages to produce the required pumping capacity at the required head. The impellers shall be Noryl and shall be statically and dynamically balanced on a stainless steel shaft. The pump shall be designed to handle momentary upthrust; however, pump selection will be made so it eliminates continuous upthrust condition. The submersible pumps shall Grunfos SQ series, or approved equal. C. Operating conditions for the well pump are as follows: Operating Point 1 20 GPM at 80 ft. TDH Operating Point 2 15 GPM at 125 ft. TDH Minimum Pipe Column Size* 12” *Diameter of pipe in which pump is to be installed. D. The pump end shall be direct coupled to a fully enclosed, liquid filled, full voltage starting, electrical submersible motor. The motor shall operate at 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 3600 rpm and be rated for continuous operation. The motor shall be of sufficient horsepower that the nameplate rating is not exceeded at any point on the pump characteristic curves, throughout the operating range of the pump furnished, including shut-off. The motor shall be equipped with a bearing assembly sufficiently large to carry the downthrust developed by the pump and water column during continuous service. E. The motor provided shall be filled with oil, glycerin or other approved fluid and shall incorporate an appropriate mechanical, or mercury seal to preclude the entrance of water. There shall be furnished under these specifications a sufficient amount of power cable of proper size and voltage to reach from the motor to a point not less than 10 feet above the surface. The cable shall be protected with a steel guard where it passes the bowl assembly to prevent damage from contact with the well casing and it shall be supported on the column pipe by suitable non-corrosive means at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 18 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Sample Point (Pump Location) Analyzer Suspended Solids Analyzer A. The suspended solids meter shall consist of an infrared measuring probe and a separate electronic transmitter. Suspended solids shall be measured using a four-beam infrared transmission system which is unaffected by or compensated for contamination, temperature, or sensor aging. B. The measuring probe shall have no moving parts, and shall be constructed of rugged materials capable of continuous operation in the process material within the specified environmental limits of the process. The measuring probe shall be designed for mounting for submersible installation in a basin, tank, or channel, or for insertion through a 2-inch ball valve into a pipeline. The measuring range of the measuring probe shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. C. The electronics unit shall provide a digital display which can be selected to show the output percentage, output current, probe signal level, power condition, and alarm levels. The electronics unit shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA DC output signal to drive 900 ohms maximum. The unit shall be calibrated by span and zero potentiometers. One high and one low limit alarm contact shall be provided (each adjustable over the full range by a potentiometer) with indicators showing when either is activated. One alarm contact shall be provided to indicate a full depletion condition, with an indicator showing when it is activated. The alarm contacts shall be rated at 3.5-A, 120-VAC general use; 2.5-A, 240- VAC general use; 5-A,30-VDC resistive, 5-A,240-VAC resistive. D. The electronic transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. A 25-foot cable, with quick-connect plug shall connect the measuring probe to the electronics unit. The unit shall operate over an ambient temperature range of -20 C to 55 C and shall be corrosion resistant. E. The suspended solids meter shall be as manufactured by Hach. The unit shall come complete with probe and necessary hardware for mounting it. Tag Probe Model No. Range Service Sludge Blanket Level Detectors A. The solids level detector shall provide a continuous measurement of the depth of a liquid- solids interface in gravity or flotational separation systems. The system shall be of the ultrasonic type, and shall not require the transducer to come in contact with the interface. The system shall be capable of monitoring interfaces continuously 2 to 19 feet from the sensor with a resolution of 0.1 foot. B. The system shall consist of an analyzer and a swing bracket holding the sensor and transceiver. The analyzer shall be housed in a NEMA 4X lockable enclosure with brackets for wall or handrail mounting. The analyzer shall have a digital display and shall provide the following functions: 9. Run or operate mode. 10. Test mode. 11. Program mode. 12. Set point program mode. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 19 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 13. Tank depth mode. 14. Self-diagnostics. C. The analyzer shall have a 4-20 mA DC isolated output scalable to all or any portion of the operating range. It shall also have four individually programmable SPDT relays at 7 amperes at 120 VAC. The analyzer shall also provide test outputs of 4 and 20 milliamperes. D. The swing bracket assembly holding the sensor/analyzer assembly shall be capable of being located as far as 200 feet from the analyzer and be complete with the necessary length of connecting cable. The system shall be Royce Model 2500 with Model 25 bracket assembly. Tag Service Dissolved Oxygen Analyzers A. Furnish and install where indicated a complete dissolved oxygen monitoring system. The primary sensing device for the dissolved oxygen level shall be a galvanic, membrane type oxygen probe mounted as indicated on the plans and operated in conjunction with a dissolved oxygen analyzer. The complete system shall be as manufactured by Hach, or approved equal. B. The dissolved oxygen analyzer shall be dual range, manually selectable 0 to 15 or 0 to 3 mg/L, with a temperature range of 0 to 50 C. The output of the analyzer shall be a 4-20 mA DC signal and shall not output a temperature signal when the unit is switched to read temperature on the meter. The analyzer shall be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure and furnished with the necessary hardware for handrail mounting. The unit shall operate a 115-V, 60-Hz power. Analyzers shall be as follows: Tag Service Oxygen Analyzers A. Dissolved oxygen analyzer shall measure dissolved oxygen at the locations where they are installed and shall have two scales, a 0 to 3 ppm scale and a 0 to 12 ppm scale. The analyzer enclosure shall be made of styrene and shall be rated NEMA 4X. The analyzer shall provide a 4-20 mA DC output signal which shall represent the dissolved oxygen value currently sensed by the analyzer. The analyzer shall operate over a temperature range of -30 to +50 C with 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. Analyzer display shall be 4- 1/2-inch dual scaled meter and unit shall be capable of functioning with sensor to analyzer distance of 600 feet. In addition, the analyzer shall meet the following performance standards as a minimum: Sensitivity 0.05% of span Stability 0.05% of span per C ambient temperature change Non-Linearity 0.1% of span Repeatability 0.05% of span or better Temperature Drift Zero: 0.002% of span/ C, Span: 0.009% of span/ C February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 20 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Response Time 3 seconds to 99% of value upon step change Maximum of dimensions of analyzer shall be 13” x 10” x 7” B. Provide a self-cleaning, automatically temperature compensated submersion type sensor which uses two dissimilar metals as electrodes. Sensor electrodes shall continually be cleaned by a motor operated rotating whetstone and electrode materials shall be iron and silver. Membrane/electrolyte type sensor or sensors operating on a different principle shall not be accepted. C. Dissolved oxygen analyzer shall be as manufactured by Hach or approved equal. Tag Service PH/Orp Analyzers A. PH/ORP analyzers shall provide PH measurements of 0 to 14 and ORP measurements of -2000 to 2000 MV. Unit shall provide single or two point automated calibration and automatic recognition of pre-selected buffer valves. Unit shall provide diagnostic error messages for identification of abnormal conditions, shall have a 4-1/2 digit liquid crystal display (LCD) and be mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure. Provide a 24-VDC power supply to supply instrument power and 4-20 mA DC loop power. Unit shall act as two- wire 4-20 mA DC transmitter to transmit PH or ORP values to remote locations. In addition, the analyzer shall meet the following performance standards as a minimum: Sensitivity 0.05% of span Stability 0.05% of span per 24 hrs., non-cumulative Non-linearity 0.05% of span Repeatability 0.05% of span or better Temperature Drift Zero: 0.01% of span per C, Span: 0.01% of span per C Response Time 1 second to 90% of value upon step change B. Provide sensor rated for -5 to +60 C operation and for insertion into liquid filled, pressurized process line without interrupting flow. Analyzer shall be Great Lakes Instruments Model 692 with 2070RO probe or approved equal. Power supply shall be as manufactured by Hach or approved equal. Tag Service EXECUTION Installation A. Wire each device requiring power so that when wires are removed from any one device, power is not be disrupted to any other device. Ground the case of each device either by mounting directly on a steel frame or by a third wire. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 21 of 21 Instrumentation – 40 90 01 Field Quality Control A. The supervisory service of a factory-trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting, piping, and wiring one of each type of device, and the methods of protecting all of the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for calibration and startup of the equipment and for instructing the operating personnel. The Manufacturer shall provide sufficient service to place the system in satisfactory operation. B. Upon completion of installation of sample pumps, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be checked for excessive noise, vibration, alignment, general operation, etc. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. C. Check out and calibrate the system upon completion of the installation. D. Prior to the Owner turning on any form of energy to the system, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified statement of approval of the installation including his supplier’s authorization for turning on energy to the system. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 SECTION 40 90 02 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM GENERAL WORK INCLUDED A. The Work involved under this Contract consists of the furnishing of all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and all labor and superintendence necessary for the installation of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA). The SCADA System shall be comprised of a PLC- based facility control system. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets suitable for the environment and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. The equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be part of a standard off-shelf configurable system readily available in the market place and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of all equipment, programming, configuration and any and all other labor and materials required necessary to deliver to the Owner a complete and fully functional SCADA system as described in this Specification. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1.Equipment shall comply with the Contract Documents and shall be produced by one of the following manufacturers: a.PLC/Network Equipment: (1) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) CompactLogix or ControlLogix (sole-source) b.Uninterruptible Power Supply: (1) APC. (Sole-source). c.Personal Computers: (1) Dell (Sole-source). d. Printers: (1) Hewlett Packard (Sole-source) e.PC Interface Software: (1) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) FactoryTalk (sole-source) (2) Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) RSLogix (sole-source) f.Network Devices (1) Moxa (Preferred) (2) Phoenix Contact (3) Rockwell Automation / Allen-Bradley (4) Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. (SEL) (Motor Protection System only) (5) Approved equal B. Qualifications: 1.The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall be regularly engaged in the design, installation and maintenance of PLC based control systems. PCSS must submit documentation listed in Section 1.02.5 below that verifies and demonstrates the following minimum qualifications: a.Organization Facilities and Business Viability b.Have Been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. c.Maintain adequate appropriate insurance d.Maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, programming, and testing of the products and systems. e.Have adequate financial resources to successfully execute projects. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 f. Have employee safety training program. 2. Organization and Personnel Experience a. Have experience in the Water and Waste Water industry. b. Successfully completed at least three (3) projects of $250,000.00 in scope and containing 350 I/O points in the last five (5) years. c. Employ at least one (1) full time licensed and registered Professional Engineer (P.E.). d. Employ full time degreed engineers from ABET accredited universities that have: (1) A minimum of five (5) years of experience working on projects and systems of similar size and scope. (2) Completed at least two (2) projects utilizing Plant PAX from Rockwell Automation (3) Has communications networking experience. (4) Has Rockwell certification. (5) Experience with the following software: (6) FactoryTalk ME (7) FactoryTalk SE (8) FactoryTalk Historian (9) RSLogix 5000 (10) RSLogix 500 e. Experience with the following hardware: (1) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley ControlLogix family of PLC (2) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley CompactLogix family of PLC (3) Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley FlexI/O (4) MOXA network hardware. f. Employ personnel within two hundred (200) miles of the project capable of providing on-site response within four (4) hours. g. Be an authorized Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Systems Integrator Contractor, Solutions Provider. h. Employ a PMI or PMP certified project manager. 3. Quality Assurance a. Have a Quality Assurance/Quality Control program, process or certification. b. Maintain an ISA association c. Provide a warranty for all contract work, including a minimum of one (1) year on all provided hardware and one (1) year on all application programming. d. Have a proven history of executing on-going maintenance service contracts or warranty work. e. Maintain a certified UL-508 control panel facility. f. Active members of the Control System Integrators Association (CSIA). C. PCSS shall submit three (3) hard copies along with an electronic copy of the Qualification Documentation to the Owner/Engineer. The following documentation is required for qualification purposes: 1. Organization Facilities and Business Viability Documentation a. Provide copy of State documents verifying the number of years that the firm has been in business b. Provide a Certificate of Insurance (COI) verifying adequate insurance coverage including: Commercial General Liability $2,000,000.00 Aggregate Automobile Liability $1,000,000.00 Single Limit Transit Coverage $25,000.00 min up to the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 value of the equipment being transported Workers Compensation Employers Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 c. Provide address and square footage of required fully staffed service facility. d. Provide a notarized statement from an officer of the Company verifying the size of the environmentally controlled space dedicated to the production, assembly and check-out of custom controls panels. e. Provide the company legal name, address as well as the Dun & Bradstreet D-U-N-S number for the company. f. Provide copies of the firm’s safety program and certify employ participation. 2. Organization and Personnel Experience Documentation a. Provide an overall Company Organization Chart and resumes for key personnel indicating water/wastewater experience. b. Provide a detailed listing of at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity successfully completed within the last five (5) years. Information must include the following for each project: (1) Project name (2) Project location (3) Owner’s name, address, and phone number (4) Owner’s contact person and phone number (5) Consultant/Design Engineering Firm name and contact (6) General Contractor’s name (if applicable) (7) SIC’s order/contract amount (8) Date project started (9) Date project completed (10) Technical description of provided control system in sufficient detail to verify equivalent size and complexity. c. Provide a copy of the Company’s full time employed Professional Engineer’s license/registration d. Provide resumes of employees that show their experience level e. Provide zip codes and resumes of personnel within two hundred (200) miles of the project site capable of providing on-site response within four (4) hours. f. Provide copy of organizations Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Systems Integrator Contractor, Solutions Provider certification g. Provide copy of project manager’s certification 3. Quality Assurance Requirements a. Provide documentation that demonstrates Quality Assurance/Quality Control program, process or certification. b. Provide copies of ISA association documentation. c. Provide resumes of full time employees that would respond to perform warranty or maintenance work. d. Provide a current list with contact information of Municipalities for which the Company has current and on-going Maintenance Contracts and/or existing warranty agreements. e. Provide copies of Company’s standard Maintenance and/or Warranty Contracts/Agreements. f. Provide a copy of the Company’s UL-508 current certification. g. Provide a copy of documentation showing active membership in the Control System Integrators Association (CSIA) or equivalent organization. D. All electronic components furnished by the Contractor shall be new products of manufacturers in North America having an established reputation in the manufacture of February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 such equipment with at least 5 years background. All PLC related equipment supplied shall be a proven product having been in field service for at least 1 year and in production for no less than 2 years. E. All materials are subject to the approval of the Owner and shall conform to all applicable state and federal codes and regulations. F. The Contractor shall warrant that all equipment will perform in accordance with published specifications, is suitable for the intended purposes and shall be free from defects in materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor shall also warrant all system configuration and programming for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance plus two (2) years of extended support. Where any product or system does not perform as specified during this warranty period, the Contractor shall correct any defect, including the non- conformance with any applicable specification and shall repair or replace any defective part or parts without charge to the Owner for parts and labor. G. Testing: A formal system test shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner or Owners representatives at the Contractor’s test facility, prior to shipment. The purpose of the test shall be to verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. Testing requirements are dictated in specification 40 90 03 – “SCADA and Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning.” SUBMITTALS The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. B. PCCS shall submit a Project Execution Plan to the Owner and Engineer for approval. This plan shall include, at a minimum: 1. A detailed work task breakdown. 2. Estimated start and end dates of each work task listed an above work task breakdown. 3. Estimated duration for each task listed in the above work task breakdown. 4. A Gantt chart or equivalent scheduling report shall be acceptable. 5. PCSS shall provide regular updates of the Project Execution Plan to Owner and Engineer. h. Update schedules to be agreed upon between PCSS and Owner / Engineer during pre-submittal meetings. STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. Electronic Industry Association (EIA). 5. International Electro-Technical CoHMIssion (IEC). 6. Federal Communications Commission (FCC). 7. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Equipment shall be the manufacturer’s latest and proven design. The Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. B. The PLC related equipment proposed by the Contractor shall not be a prototype, but shall be a part of a standard off-shelf configurable system of components readily available in the marketplace and have design specifications, engineering drawings and parts lists immediately available. Specified PLC processors, I/O modules, power supplies, chassis, etc. shall be sole-sourced from Allen-Bradley. C. The system shall be provided complete with cabinets, input/output equipment and associated electronic subsystems necessary to meet the functional requirements of this Section. D. Equipment shall have adequate test points with controls or adjustments required for alignment and maintenance accessible from the front of the equipment. These test points shall provide sufficient isolation to prevent disturbance to the system due to accidental short circuit or other mismatch during routine test or maintenance practices. E. Alarm LED or LCD indicators shall be included and be clearly visible with covers in place to indicate any alarm or off-normal condition. F. Lamps, controls and test points shall be etched or clearly marked on all electronic equipment. G. Equipment shall be designed to operate over the environmental, physical and primary power limits as specified herein without the use of blowers or other means of forced air circulation. Equipment Limits Full Specification Performance 0 C (32 F) to +60 C (140 F) Storage -40 C (-40 F) to +80 C (176 F) Altitude 15,000 ft. Humidity 5% to 95% Maximum, non-condensing Duty Conditions Continuous SYSTEM OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. The system shall be a continuous polling, supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA), utilizing programmable logic controllers (PLCs), as Station controllers and a Manufacture-specific controller for each VFD’s.. System shall be configured and programmed to meet the Owner provided Sequence of Operations. 2. Primary communications shall be fiber-optic, using the PLC manufacturer’s standard protocols. 3. Automatic control functions shall reside in the station PLC such that, upon loss of the Plant HMI, control of the system shall continue without interruption. The Operator, through the Plant HMI, shall have the capability to set or change any automatic control or alarm variable in the software control program. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement, installation, integration, testing and commissioning of all equipment, programming, and all other labor and materials required necessary to integrate the new High Service #3 pump system with the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant SCADA system. Integration shall be implemented in such a manner that the entire new High Service #3 pump system can be operated from a single workstation in the O.N. Stevens Water Plant Operations Center. i. Installation of all equipment, programming, configuration and materials including, but not limited to interface equipment, additional network switches, additional development and programming of new HMI screens to be incorporated in the existing O.N. Stevens Water Plant SCADA system, network switch configuration and any other hardware, software, programming and configuration required to integrate new High Service #3 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 Pump Station into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations SCADA system. j. Contractor shall conduct a series of interactive workshops with Water Plant Operations and SCADA personnel during preliminary SCADA design to develop all necessary screens and program control logic required to integrate new High Service #3 Pump Station into the existing O.N. Stevens Operations SCADA system B. Functional Descriptions: 1. A PLC shall be located in the new High Service #3 Electrical Room. The PLC shall monitor the station flow and automatically throttle the pump motors on the output of the station in response to the flow requested by the Central Control. The control scheme shall be configured such that these assignment changes are normally made from the Central Control Console located at the Water Treatment plant. Early turn-on or manual operation of pumps is required during peak operating times. This shall be done by the Operator at the Central Control Console, located at the water treatment plant. 2. There shall be provided custom generated system screens for operator interface and control. There shall be an overall system screen, a minimum of three graphics screens for each PLC location. All equipment control and status conditions and system variables (flows, pressures and levels) shall be displayed on these screens. Preliminary screen design shall be submitted to the Owner for review and/or approval. 3. Provide an alarm summary page showing a list of active and historical alarms; in addition there shall be alarm footer on each graphics page displaying the most recent unacknowledged alarm. PUMP STATION EQUIPMENT A. The High Service #3 Pump Station shall consist of the station PLC, together with all necessary hardware, network switches, UPS, local I/O, power supplies and any other hardware and software necessary for providing a complete and operative Pump Station. Communications between the High Service #3 Pump Station and the existing Plant SCADA system shall be via dedicated fiber optic cable installed in cable tray by the contractor. 1. All PLC hardware shall be installed in free-standing or wall-mounted 2-door enclosures sized for the amount of equipment installed in them and appropriate for the environment they are installed in. All enclosures shall be equipped with a copper ground bus, mounted on the backplate. The ground bus shall be provided with a suitable connectors sized for #20 AWG through 2 AWG copper cable. 2. All equipment in the enclosures shall be complete with all interconnecting wiring required, wired to terminals and connected to the 120-VAC and the communications cables. EQUIPMENT A. High Service #3 Pump Station PLC: 1. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system shall be the ControlLogix PLC system manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) only. PLC shall be the 1756-L7x family of Modular Controllers. Processor and associated I/O shall be selected as required to meet the minimum memory and I/O requirements of the final control programming with a minimum of 30% memory and a minimum of 20% spare I/O reserved for program and facility expansion. 2. PLC system shall be configured so as to have a separate, redundant ControlLogix 1756-L6x PLC processor connected to the primary operational PLC processor in a fully-redundant configuration. Fully-Redundant is defined in this case as the Stand- by processor being directly connected to the primary control processor, running the identical program concurrently as the primary processor, and will fail-over to the Stand-by processor automatically. PLC system shall be configured in such a manner that the system where, upon the failure of the primary processor, the redundant processor shall continue uninterrupted operation of the pump station. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 3. All user wiring to I/O modules shall be through a heavy-duty terminal strips. Compression-type screw terminals shall be used to provide fast, secure wire connections. Spring-type terminal blocks shall not be used in any control panel or junction box application. 4. All types of input/output modules shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label. 5. The PLC I/O modules shall be the ControlLogix PLC system manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) only. I/O modules shall be the 1756-L7x family of Modular Controllers. 6. The PLC shall contain discrete input/output hardware consisting of the following types: a. Discrete Inputs: (1) AC/DC input for devices which operate at 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC. (2) AC input for devices which operate at 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. (3) DC input for devices which operate at 5 to 30 VDC. (4) Discrete input modules shall be either 8- or 16-point modules. No 32-point input modules shall be used. b. Discrete Outputs: (1) AC output for devices which operate at 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. (2) AC output for devices which operate at 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. (3) AC output for devices which operate at 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz. (4) DC output for devices which operate at 10 to 60 VDC. (5) Isolated Contact output which provides eight isolated outputs capable of switching 120 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC power. (6) Combination Contact Output and 120-VAC Input available in two in two out, four in four out, or six in six out configuration. (7) Discrete output modules shall be either 8- or 16-point modules. No 32-point input modules shall be used. 7. The PLC shall contain analog input/output hardware consisting of the following types: a. Analog input which accepts analog signals and converts them to 16 bit binary values. Resolution of the analog conversion shall be 16 bit from analog value of 0 mA to +20 mA. Digital resolution shall be available in 1 part in 65536 voltage or 1 part in 32767 current. Analog inputs shall be differential. Analog inputs shall be available in the following ranges: (1) Voltage Range: -10 to +10 VDC. (2) Current Range: 0 to +20 mA. b. Analog input modules shall be either 8- or 16-point modules. No 32-point input modules shall be used. 8. Analog output which converts a 15 bit current or 16-bit voltage binary number (14- bit resolution) into an equivalent single-ended analog output signal. Analog outputs shall be available in the following ranges: c. Voltage Range: -10 to +10 VDC. d. Current Range: 0 to +20 mA. 9. The programming software shall be Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 with all associated required communications and configuration packages included. 10. Contractor shall provide any and all interface modules required to seamlessly communicate with other required station equipment such as VFD’s, Machine Condition and Vibration monitors, etc. B. Conduit and Wire: 1. Conductors: Soft-drawn, annealed copper, stranded, with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be #18. Conductors #8 or larger shall be stranded. 2. Single Conductors: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type XHHW insulation. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. 3. Ground Wire: Tinned, Class B stranded conductor without insulation. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 4. Paired Shielded Cable: 16 gauge, 7/26 stranded, copper conductors with 0.021- inch extruded PVC; 0.004-inch nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100 percent coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and 0.45-inch minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white and numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383. 5. Conduit shall be rigid aluminum with fittings of similar material. C. Human / Machine Interfaces (HMIs): 1. Human machine interfaces shall consist of network interface, personal computers, monitor, event printer, report printer, computer software PC interface software and any other hardware and software necessary for providing a complete and operative man machine interface. 2. The software shall be the latest version of Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk SE Client or FactoryTalk SE Station for the Operator desktop workstation and FactoryTalk Studio Enterprise on the Engineering Laptop workstation. These software packages will require the use of commercially available, Intel Core 2 Duo minimum with 8GB of RAM minimum based PCs or greater. Office or industrial PCs can be used but must be capable of running, at a minimum Microsoft Windows 7 Professional w/ the latest available Service Pack, 2008 Server Standard Edition w/ the latest available Service Pack, and furnished with at least Microsoft Windows 7 Professional w/ the latest available Service Packs. All software shall be provided and registered in Owners name. Computers shall be manufactured by Dell (sole source). 3. Monitors shall be microprocessor based, 20-inch flat-screen Color Monitor, 1280 x 1024 (60 Hz) minimum resolution with non-glare screen. 4. The computer shall be capable of running, at a minimum Microsoft Windows 7 Professional w/ the latest Service Pack, 2008 Server Standard Edition w/ the latest available Service Pack, and furnished with at least Microsoft Windows 7 Professional w/ the latest available Service Pack. All software shall be provided and registered in Owners name. 5. Engineering Laptop Computer: a. The computer shall have the same capabilities as the aforementioned desktop workstations. b. The computer shall be capable of running, at a minimum Microsoft Windows 7 Professional w/ the latest Service Pack, 2008 Server Standard Edition w/ the latest available Service Pack, and furnished with at least Microsoft Windows 7 Professional w/ the latest available Service Pack. All software shall be provided and registered in Owners name. D. PC Interface Software: 1. General: a. Interface software for interfacing the HMI to the Station PLC shall be Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 suite of configuration software, latest version. b. All required licenses for all software and documentation shall be provided for each computer. All software provided shall be of the latest version of the software with the latest patches and service packs applied. c. Contractor shall modify, develop and provide any and all SCADA architecture drawings that determine clearly and unambiguously all supervisory system hardware and software requirements. 2. System Configuration: a. An easy-to-learn graphical database development environment shall be provided, utilizing icon-driven function block programming for building a data acquisition and control logic strategy. An object-oriented, icon driven color graphic display builder shall be provided for creation of real-time, dynamic operator displays. b. At power up, the system shall boot to a desktop screen where the user can easily activate the Strategy Builder, Graphics Builder, Runtime, or select a utility. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 c. The software shall run as a service, so that when a user logs off, the system will keep on running. d. The graphical database shall be exportable and importable in .DXF format for external modification and reporting. e. The graphical database shall be available as an output to a printer in tabular and graphic format for hard copy documentation. f. Graphic Displays: (1) The graphical display builder shall Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Studio Enterprise, an object, oriented color graphic display builder featuring east to use, mouse driven icons. The icons are used to create color graphic displays with objects that may be linked to dynamic blocks in the graphical database for live real-time animation during runtime. Standard graphical editing functions shall include select, move, copy, erase, cut, paste, and global search-an- replace for selection and manipulation of the graphical objects. (2) Graphical objects may be animated by simple point and click connection to analog and/or discrete signals in the database strategy. All dynamic connections must be based on point names, consisting of Node Name, Strategy Name, Tag Name, and Tag Parameter. An object must accept multiple dynamic connections simultaneously (size, color, location, etc.). (3) Standard graphic building tools shall include: (a) Size connection. (b) Color connection. (c) Blink/Flash connection. (d) Location Movement. (e) Pick Field connection. (f) Process Point connection. (g) Data Entry connection. (h) State Field connection. (i) Display Call-up Button connection. (j) Trend Window function. (k) History Window function. (l) Dynamic Symbol connection. (m) Time/Date connection. (n) Digital Animator connection. (o) Digital Selector. (p) Analog Selector. (4) The graphical configurator shall include a Symbol Library. (5) The system shall utilize Rockwell Automation PlantPAx as the standard set of graphic symbols library. (6) Complete graphical displays must be able to run on any system node in a networked system, without the need to edit and/or re- establish dynamic connections. (7) A Pop-Up Window feature shall permit graphic displays, complete with dynamic connections, to be re-sized and popped up on command anywhere on the screen during runtime. Pop-Up Windows are required to give the Operator instant access to more detail of process operation, alarm listings, and guidance. (8) Utilities are to be available for import and export of graphic files to .DXF file format for use in AutoCAD Versions 2010 or later, or other software using the .DXF file format. (9) The system shall permit the import of .BMP files for use as objects in the graphic display builder. 3. Runtime: a. Runtime operation of the system shall execute the database strategy, graphic displays, and optional functions created during system configuration. For guaranteed data integrity, the system shall operate in a February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 true prioritized, pre-emptive real-time multi-tasking operating environment for simultaneous execution of data collection, control, graphics, alarming, trending, data logging, file transfer, and other system activities. CPU operation shall be optimized during runtime for maximum system efficiency and performance. b. Operator color graphic displays shall update in real-time with a refresh rate defined by the user. The display screen shall be partitioned into three segments. c. A Main Display Window shall occupy most of the screen, and display the dynamic color graphics created by the Display Builder. d. A Sub-Window shall appear beneath the Main Display Window, and permit keyboard selection of any one of multiple pre-packaged secondary displays. At minimum, Sub-Window displays shall consist of the following standard displays: (1) Help. (2) Display Directory. (3) Display and access to parameters of any block in the strategy. (4) System Parameters. (5) System Performance. e. Sub-Window access shall be password protected to restrict access to authorized personnel. f. A Message Line shall occupy the bottom line of the screen. The left portion of the Message Line shall automatically display Operator Messages, such as alarm acknowledgment and confirmation, data logging started/stopped, communication time-out, etc. The right portion of the Message Line shall display alarm alert messages, such as type of alarm and tag name of block alarm. g. The system shall have ready-to-run Function Key assignments to simplify Operator actions during runtime. Function Key assignments shall include Display Directory, New Display Call-up, Alarm/Event Summary Display, Alarm Acknowledgement, Trend Window, Recall last Display, etc. h. A color coded Alarm/Event screen shall list pertinent information on all system alarms and events (Operator actions) as they occur, are acknowledged, and return to normal. i. Alarm/Event screens shall include date, time, alarm/event type, tagname parameter, description, value, engineering units, and return-to-normal, as applicable. j. Operator access to Alarm squelch level shall be provided in the Sub- Window. Alarms with a squelch level less than the squelch level assigned are not displayed, sounded, printed, or logged to disk. k. Operator Events shall include: (1) Alarm Acknowledgement. (2) Block Parameter change (set point, output, etc.). (3) Block Auto/Manual change. (4) Block Setpoint Remote/Local Change. (5) Default Security Level Change. (6) Logging On and Logging Off. l. Alarm and Event messages may be printed to the same printer, or to different printers, as selected by the user. m. An on-line Trend Window function shall permit display of multiple selected data points in real-time as graphs of the values versus time. The system shall support multiple Trend Windows. n. Pen assignments and time period shall be configurable on-line. o. A Zoom/Unzoom feature shall permit expanding and shrinking the amplitude scale. p. An unlimited number of variables may be selected for real-time trending. The system will automatically collect and save up to 60 samples of each parameter. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 q. Real-time trend points shall be buffered such that when a Trend Window is called up, it shall appear with previously sampled trend pen data, not blank. r. The Trend Window shall also permit X-Y plotting of up to four variable on the x-axis versus one variable on the y-axis. s. The system shall be supplied with a Historian for collecting, saving, and replaying selected system data. t. Data logging may be started and stopped by the Operator, process conditions, or system events. u. Data may be logged to up to 100 History Files, each containing up to 100 data points. The logging rate may be manually or automatically switched between two settings on-line to permit high speed data collection during conditions of interest. v. Historical data file may be replayed on-line, and viewed in graphical or tabular form. The History Window time span and variable amplitude may be compressed or expended in logical increments by the Operator. w. The on-line Historical Replay function shall permit viewing previously saved files and/or currently active historical files. x. A File Management Utility shall be provided to permit on-line file handling operations. File Management shall be accessed via the Sub-Window to read directories, delete files, copy files between disks, and similar “housecleaning” activities. y. The system shall support print out of any CRT screen at any time by depressing the [Ctrl + Print Screen] keys, or automatically via a Display Block in the strategy. z. An adjustable time Screen Saver shall be included to prevent monitor screen burn. 4. Report Generation: a. A consolidated Report function shall be furnished. It shall utilize a standard spreadsheet format for creation of system reports. A comprehensive built-in library of standard spreadsheet functions shall be included for selection and simultaneous manipulation of local or network data. At minimum, the library shall include mathematical, statistical, and Boolean operations. b. The Report generation function shall collect real-time and/or file data from the local node, or remote nodes via a network when used. File data shall include historical and alarm files at minimum. c. Report files shall be output on command to the local printer or to disk, as specified. Initiation of report output may be manual or automatic based on time of day, system event, or process condition. d. Freeform text may be integrated anywhere in the report. e. Provision shall be included for incorporation of Operator message fields. This shall permit capture and save of Operator comments made during runtime for inclusion in the report. f. The report shall also provide for capture and saving of text fields from system alarm and event messages. 5. Networking: a. An efficient high speed, real-time networking function shall be optimally available. It shall provide on-line real-time access to live data and file transfer simultaneously during runtime. b. The networking option shall support all Ethernet network topologies. c. Each network node shall operate independently to permit unrestricted assignment of system functions in a true distributed architecture. d. Network data exchange shall be “exception driven” rather than “polled” for maximum throughput during runtime. e. A network timekeeper function must be supplied to insure synchronization of all network node time clocks. Any node may be designated as the master timekeeper to which all other node clocks are synchronized. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 Should the master node fail, multiple backup nodes may be designated to continue network time synchronization. f. A global alarm capability must be provided which will allow alarms that occur anywhere on the network to be automatically broadcast over the entire network. Individual nodes may be configured to receive all alarms, only certain alarm types, or all alarms from a single or m ultiple pre- selected nodes. g. In order to exchange data between different networks, the networking option shall support use of more than one network adapter on a node. 6. Training: a. Monthly training courses shall be offered by the software Supplier. Courses shall be conducted by degreed professional trainers, experienced in industrial automation and control. b. The software shall be easy to learn, such that the only prerequisites for attending training are familiarity with Personal Computers and knowledge of the fundamentals of industrial measurement and control. c. Training courses shall be optionally available on-Site. Course curriculum shall be customized to the needs of the user if requested. 7. Support: a. Technical support shall be available from a Factory Regional Office or local Representative of the software Supplier. b. Factory technical support shall be available from degreed engineers familiar with the software and typical industrial applications. c. Telephone technical support, voice and e-mail, shall be available weekdays. d. Technical support shall be offered for the life of the product, and for a minimum of 1 year after it is discontinued. e. The vendor must have a record of providing a continuous upgrade path for the product. 8. Upgrades: a. The vendor shall offer an Annual Software Maintenance Service for a nominal fee. This service shall provide upgrades to the software for releases of new features as they occur (e.g. - change from Version 4.0 to 4.1). b. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. - change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). c. A Site Software Maintenance Service shall also be offered for locations with multiple systems installed. d. There shall be provided, as part of this Contract, a basic 5-day training course at the software vendor’s training facility for each of two of the Owner’s personnel. This course shall cover the understanding and configuration of various application Modules within the software system. Concepts, implementations and trouble shooting skills shall be emphasized. e. The training course shall be part of a regularly scheduled training program by the software vendor. The scheduling shall allow the Owner sufficient time to schedule personnel for training between award of the Contract and delivery of the SCADA system. E. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): 9. Uninterruptible power supply shall provide 30 minute standby 120-VAC power for all Contractor-provided equipment at the Master Terminal Unit (MTU), including all HMI equipment and all PLC and control equipment. 10. The uninterruptible power supply shall have the following features: a. Input - 240 V: 192-276 VAC. b. Output - 120 VAC: Regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. Output shall February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 consist or not less than three duplex receptacles (six receptacles). c. No-Break Power: The supply shall not allow any break in output power, regardless of what happens to the input power. Switching is not permitted. d. Lightning and Surge Protection: Passes ANSI-IEEE C62.41 Categories A & B. UL listed. e. Spike Attenuation: 2000:1. f. Galvanic Isolation: Qualifies as true, separately derived power source as defined by NEC Article 250-5D. Complete from line. Output neutral bonded to ground. g. Voltage Regulation: Output voltage regulated to plus or minus 3 percent. h. Output Waveform: Computer-grade sine-wave, less than 5 percent THD. i. Noise (RF) Isolation: 120 dB common mode, 60 dB normal mode. j. Output Protection: Current-limiting ferroresonant transformer. k. Efficiency: 90 percent minimum, on line. l. Audible Noise: 57 dB maximum, on line. 11. Contractor shall configure network and diagnostic notification as required and demonstrate their operation as part of the integrated system. 12. If required, external battery cabinets for extended run-time shall be in cabinets similar to the UPS. SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING A. The Contractor shall provide a programmed database, using the equipment and software program specified, to accomplish the functions specified. B. For development of the HMI Graphics, the Contractor shall conduct a minimum of two (2) one (1) day workshops, at the Owner’s facility. The Engineer will be in attendance, to help ensure compliance with the control strategies, treatment processes and that the system being developed follows the Sequence of Operations documents and the memorandum of understanding developed at the Development of Control Strategy meeting. 1. The first workshop shall consist of the Contractor showing the basic layout the graphic and popup screens, Help screens, roll-over Tooltip implementation and online Operations Manual access implementation for discussion and comment. The screens shall be at a stage that reflects the process and illustrates the required set-points for control. The Owner will be allowed to comment on layout of screens, but the not graphic standards. After the workshop and before the next workshop the Contractor shall make the agreed upon changes to the screens. 2. The last workshop shall consist of the Contractor showing the final screens with database links complete. The Contractor shall show animation of screens by manipulating the HMI database. The Owner will be allowed to comment on the screens for process accuracy. The Contractor shall make corrections to the screens and shall be completed for testing at the Factory Acceptance Test. EXECUTION GENERAL A. The Contractor shall schedule and administer a minimum of three (3) mandatory coordination meetings. The Contractor shall make arrangements for these meetings; prepare agendas with copies delivered to the participants at least one (1) week before the scheduled meetings. These meetings shall be held at an Owner’s designated facility and shall include, as a minimum, attendance by the Owner, Engineer, Contractor’s Project Engineer, PCSS Project Engineer and the Electrical Sub-Contractor. 1. The first coordination meeting shall be held in advance of the first PCSS shop drawing, PLC programming and HMI screen submittals. The purpose of the first meeting shall be for the PCSS to: a. Summarize their understanding of the Project. b. Discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 c. Schedule testing and delivery milestone dates. d. Provide a forum for the PCSS and the Owner to coordinate hardware and software related issues. e. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer. f. The PCSI shall bring draft versions of shop drawings, PLC programming and HMI screens to the meetings to provide the basis for the Owner or Engineer’s input into their development. 2. The remaining coordination meetings shall be held no more than one month prior to site testing for each location. The purpose of these meetings is to discuss any remaining coordination requirements. 3. A typical agenda for the subsequent meetings may include, but shall not be limited to the following: a. Review minutes of the previous meeting. b. Review of the work in progress. c. Field observations, problems, and decisions. d. Identification of problems or issues that may impede planned progress. e. Review development of testing plans and schedules. f. Review of submittal schedule and submittal status. g. Maintenance of progress schedule. h. Corrective measures to regain progress schedules. i. Planned activities for subsequent work period. j. Coordination of work progress. k. Effect of any proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. l. Other business relating to the work. INSTALLATION A. Wire and Conduit: 1. Refer to the following specifications: a. 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical” b. 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” c. 26 05 26 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems” d. 40 90 01 “Instrumentation” e. Any and all other specifications pertaining to the installation, termination and grounding of instrument systems. 2. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 3. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 4. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 5. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes and equipment. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 6. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures. 7. Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is #16 AWG , unless otherwise noted. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp-on connector applied on the wire end. 8. Use the following color code for 120/240-V, single-phase wiring: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 Wiring Color Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green 9. Ground paired shielded at the PLC end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. The shield of shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. 10. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, enclosures, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid PVC conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless steel connections. Wire connections to ground rods shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 11. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. 12. Ground conductors shall be bare tinned copper where directly buried and insulated in all other cases. 13. Underground conduit which is not below a concrete slab on grade shall be sand encased. Conduit which is below the finished grade shall be rigid PVC. 14. At the transition from underground, protect PVC conduit from mechanical damage by extending rigid steel conduit a maximum of 12 inches and a minimum of 4 inches into the earth or concrete at the transition. 15. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 3 inches from adjacent conduit and shall not be closer than 1 inch from any reinforcement bars. 16. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade level, above concrete slab level, or for any exposed installations unless specified. 17. Where conduits stub up through a floor slab from below finished floor level, install a threaded fitting with PVC plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface. 18. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 18 inches deep to the top of the sand encasement. Backfill buried conduit banks with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at intervals to ensure that proper spacings are maintained. 19. Grade underground and outdoor conduits to drain free of condensation and moisture. Provide for automatic draining at low points. Install horizontal runs of conduit to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. 20. Route conduits parallel to building lines. Concealed conduits shall be below grade, within walls, or above ceilings. 21. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, route conduit through the roof with pitch pocket. Conduit shall not penetrate ductwork. Exposed conduit shall not be installed on the roof without the approval of the Owner’s representative. 22. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe, the structure, finished walls, etc. Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 3-inch separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 1 inch. 23. Conduits in buildings shall be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure. The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings, but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces, strut channel clamps, or one-hole straps with clamp backs. 24. Provide expansion fittings at expansion, construction and seismic joints. Provide combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at these joints. 25. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical. Use a conduit rack constructed of channels with conduit straps or clamps. B. Cable Installation: 1. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 2. Cable shall be laid straight without splices except in the case of accidental damage, but without tension applied at any time. Slight snaking of the cable will be permitted. Backfill on the cable shall be pulverized material free from stones, rock or other hard or sharp materials which might damage the cable. 3. The cable shall be handled with care at all times. The cable reel shall be shaft mounted or supported in such a manner as to keep the cable and reel from coming in contact with the ground or other foreign objects which might cause damage to the cable. At no time shall the wire be dragged along the ground or across objects. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall be 24 inches in all case of direction change. Care shall be taken to see that twists or bends of small radii do not occur. Any instance of damaged wire, observed at any time whether prior to installation, during installation, or discovered by test or observation subsequent to installation, shall be immediately called to the attention of the Owner’s representative. 4. The method of repair or correction of such damage shall be in accordance with the written instructions of the Owner’s representative. The Contractor shall promptly repair such damage or make such corrections in accordance with such written instruction of the Owner’s representative. 5. Minor damage to the outer jacket of the cable which penetrates to a depth not to exceed 0.02 inch, observed prior to or occurring during construction, may be repaired if approved by the Owner’s representative by covering the damaged section of the jacketed with two layers of a suitable 10-mil vinyl tape, each layer half-lapped extending 6 inches beyond the end of the damaged section, and Glyptal coated. 6. Damage to cable of greater severity than that set forth above, observed prior to or during construction, shall be immediately called to the attention of the Owner’s representative. The Contractor shall promptly repair such damage or make such corrections in accordance with such written instruction of the Owner’s representative. 7. Damage to the cable subsequent to burial, discovered either through test or observation shall be repaired by a method approved by the Owner’s representative. This may involve the replacement of a short section of cable with splices made in additional terminal housings, or the replacement of an entire section between terminal housings already installed. No buried splices shall be used for repairing damaged cable. 8. All splices of the cable shall be made in junction boxes or pull boxes. Where installation procedures require the Contractor to splice the cable, boxes or enclosures appropriate to the location of the splice shall be installed as required at the Contractor’s expense. The location of such boxes or enclosures shall be directed by the Owner’s representative. 9. Where cable is cut and box or enclosure is not immediately installed, the cable end shall be sealed by means of rubber boots, or plastic tape. C. Antennas and Coaxial Cable: 1. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended practices. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to equipment during installation. Damaged equipment shall be replaced by Contractor at no expense to the Owner. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 17 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System – 40 90 02 2. Antenna shall be oriented for the correct polarization and securely fastened to the mast. Mast shall be aligned so as to be vertical and clear of obstructions or overhead lines. Mast shall be mounted at least 10 feet from any components of the system being monitored. Mast shall be adequately grounded. Orient the antennas in the direction required. Coaxial cable shall be restrained from movement on mast by clamps and hangers placed at 3-foot intervals. All coaxial connections, hangers and fittings are to be tightened to ensure good contacts and secure installation. Feedline losses shall not exceed 1 dB. 3. A drip loop shall be provided at wall penetration to avoid water migration. Care shall be exercised to avoid exceeding the bending radius or number of bends for the coaxial cable as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. For wall penetrations, a penetration kit specifically manufactured for the purpose and specified herein shall be used. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Field fabrications shall not be accepted. 5. Grounding of the coaxial cable shall be with the use of a manufactured kit specifically designed for that purpose. Field fabrications shall not be accepted. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 SECTION 40 90 03 SCADA & INSTRUMENTAT ION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK Provide all testing and commissioning equipment, materials, incidentals and labor, necessary to perform and coordinate the system check-out and startup, commissioning, field testing and overall training for the Instrumentation and Controls System associated with the Project. The Contractor’s Process Control Systems Supplier (PCSS) shall supervise and/or perform the requirements of this Section. As part of these services, the PCSS shall include, for those equipment items not manufactured by him, the services of an authorized manufacturer's representative to check the equipment installation and place that portion of the equipment in operation. The PCSS shall provide to the Owner/Engineer, prior to putting the equipment into service, installation checklists, certificates, and all manufacturer provided start-up and commissioning documentation. The manufacturer's representative shall be thoroughly knowledgeable about the installation, operation, and maintenance of the manufacturer’s equipment for this project. The PCSS shall perform testing, verification, and validation of the Process Control System according to recognized and generally accepted good systems engineering practices such as V-model for systems development. System sub-systems and their respective components are to be tested and verified individually before being assembled into the higher-order systems. When fully assembled, the entire system shall be demonstrated to perform the intended function, correctly and in stable and reliable manner. The PCSS shall coordinate with the instrumentation sub-contractor to provide an integrated system test. SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT and shall include: 1. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall prepare and submit a complete overall system testing plan. The test plan shall describe clearly and unambiguously how the PCSS will ensure and demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the supplied system meets all the requirements of the specifications. 2. The Submittal shall contain an overall process control system overview. Each pump station area as affected by this contract shall be included. The detail shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Displays b. Control strategies c. Database d. Trending e. Reports f. Programming Submittal Content 1. Training Submittals shall cover the following: a. Programmable Logic Controller Programming (1) I/O List with register assignments. (2) Diagrams of the process control functions by each strategy. (3) Listing of inputs to the control function. (4) A short narrative of each control strategy. (5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. (6) Cross references of all I/O, showing to which I/O modules or software modules, they are in. (7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. (8) An annotated program, submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. (9) Logic flow charts that explain how the control strategy implementation logic works b. Operation Interface Terminal Programming (1) I/O List with register assignments. (2) Listing of all Operator displays with inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Displays shall be illustrated to show data presentation. (3) Cross references of all I/O, showing to which I/O modules or software modules, they are in. (4) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. c. Human Machine Interface Programming (1) I/O List with register assignments. (2) Displays for each process area including all necessary pop ups. (3) Listing of data points on each display. (4) A short narrative of each control usage. (5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. (6) Cross references of all I/O, showing which software module at each point used. (7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. (8) A complete listing of all historical points. (9) Listing of all required configuration files for each SCADA client. d. Submit a proposed Training Schedule. Testing Documentation Submittals 1. Control System Test Plan a. The PCSS shall prepare and submit for review a System Test Plan for preparing test procedures, for performing testing and for preparing test reports for all tests. The plan shall include the anticipated testing schedules. 2. Format a. The PCSS's Test Plan shall be organized to provide for witnessed tests shall address support of the Owner's personnel in conducting the Operational Readiness Test and Functional Demonstration Test. b. The plan shall also discuss the type and extent of component and subsystem testing the PCSS performs prior to the formal witnessed tests. c. The Test Plan shall consist of the following major components, as a minimum: (1) A description of each test and its objectives (2) A description of the test program organization and the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 responsibilities and qualifications of test personnel (3) A description of applicable prerequisites for testing including all unwitnessed testing (4) A description of the Owner's and the PCSS's responsibilities at various test sites and facilities (5) A description of the overall test schedules (6) A description of form and content of test reports (7) Where applicable, identification of the primary test agency if other than the Contractor (8) A description of the procedures for identifying, evaluating and correcting the causes of problems or failures which occur during tests and a description of procedures for reworking and testing. d. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall prepare and submit for review a Control System Test Plan within sixty (60) days of the first witnessed test taking place. 3. Test Procedures a. The purpose of the test procedures is to bring order to the testing process and to illustrate that the PCSS is actively aware of the functional and performance requirements that must be met to properly test the equipment. b. Format (1) The PCSS shall develop test procedures for each witnessed test that clearly describe the test steps to be performed and the results expected after each step. (2) Any assumptions to be used in evaluating the test results shall be defined in the test procedure. (3) Each step in the test procedures shall be numbered and each test shall include a space for the PCSS and for the Owner to initial when the test is satisfactorily completed. (4) All equipment including communications, electrical, mechanical and computer systems shall be tested both individually and together as a system. The Owner/Engineer will not normally witness subsystem tests, but reserves the right to do so. (5) The PCSS shall prepare and document a test procedure for each type of test. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Owner for review before the scheduled start of the corresponding test. None of the formal witnessed tests shall be initiated until the corresponding test procedure has been Successfully Reviewed. (6) As a minimum, the following information shall be included in the procedures for each function tested: (a) A test identification number and name (b) A statement of test objective and scope (c) A cross reference to the paragraph{s) of the Specification that defines the requirements of the function being tested (d) A test description (e) A list of the make and model of all test equipment required to perform the test, including simulation hardware and software (f) A list of prerequisite tests that shall be completed before the test can be performed February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 (g) A description of the required test setup including diagrams illustrating test equipment connections and identifying test points, where applicable (h) Step-by-step instructions for performing the test, identifying the points where data are to be recorded and the limits for acceptable data (i) Instructions for recording data on data sheets or verifying that procedure steps have been completed. (j) All blank test data sheets on which all results of testing are to be recorded; data sheets shall include a section for dates, make and model of all test equipment and signatures of witnesses. (k) Space for time and date of test (l) Pass/fail signature of both the Owner and the PCSS's Project Manager and Quality Control representative. (m) Test forms similar in content to those attached to this section shall be used for each system test. c. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall submit for review a detailed test procedure for each test activity. The test procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the scheduled test. No test shall be performed less than 7 days after the test procedure has been successfully reviewed and approved. If necessary, the PCSS shall reschedule the test, at no additional cost to the Owner, so that this requirement is met. All test procedures shall include inputs to be applied or simulated and expected outputs to be confirmed. 4. Test Reports a. Format (1) The PCSS shall develop, maintain, and update a test report for each test. (2) Test data sheets shall be used to record applicable drawing numbers, test equipment, including serial numbers and calibration dates where applicable, discrepancies, corrective action required, and test data. Data entries shall be referenced to the applicable procedures and allowable limits for each entry shall be indicated on the data sheets. The test data sheets shall be arranged in tabular form. (3) All discrepancies and/or anomalies shall be recorded on Discrepancy Report forms and entered into the Project DR Book. After commencement of Site Demonstration Testing, Discrepancy Reports shall be submitted weekly. (4) Test reports shall contain: (a) All test data sheets as completed at the time of test. (b) The PCSS's analyses and conclusions of the test results. (c) A complete list of deficiencies, discrepancies and/or deviations from expected results including how and when each item is to be resolved. (d) When applicable, state system retesting requirements including a list of items to be retested and system design changes, if required, due to system testing, and verification after successful resolution. Retesting and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 other remedial work required as a result of failed tests shall result in no increase to the Contract price. (e) A revised test procedure if corrections or revisions were made during the test. (f) A general summary for the item tested indicating any open items that are yet to be resolved and any test that is yet to be conducted. b. Requirement (1) The PCSS shall submit test reports within 15 days after the completion of each scheduled test. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to delay or suspend follow-on project activities if an acceptable test report has not been provided in the required time period. SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND START -UP The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. The Contractor, PCSS, and Instrument Suppliers, as applicable, shall perform the following: 1. Check and confirm the installation of all instrumentation, control components and all cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. Installation shall be in accordance with the contract documents – Plans and Specifications and in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all existing instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and testing of final control actions. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in startup of the various unit processes. PCSS shall provide all test equipment necessary to perform the test during System checkout and startup. PCSS and/or system supplier shall be responsible for initial operation of the instrumentation and control system per the Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) requirements and shall make any required changes, adjustment or replacements for operation, monitoring, and control of the various processes and equipment necessary to perform the functions intended. PCSS shall furnish to the Owner/Engineer certified calibration/recalibration (for existing Instruments) reports for field instruments and devices specified herein as soon as calibration is completed. 1. Receipt of any calibration/recalibration certificates shall in no way imply acceptance of any work or instrument. 2. Each calibration/recalibration certificates shall be signed and dated by a certified authorized representative of the instrument manufacturer. Three copies of each completed certificate shall be submitted to Owner/Engineer. 3. A typical form shall be as follows: CAL IBRAT ION CERTIFICATE Tag Number/Loop Number: Loop Description Instrument Location Manufacturer February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 Model Num ber Adjustable Range Calibrated Range Rem arks Installation Per Manufacturer's Requirements? Yes No Installation Per Contract Documents? Yes No If "No", explain Calibration Test: Input (Units) Output (Units) Accuracy 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Sw itch Test Switch Point Upscale Switch Point Downscal e Setting Deadband Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 I hereby certif y that the above information is correct and accurate, to the best of my knowledge, and that the instrument indicated above has been supplied, installed, calibrated, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, unless otherwise noted. Receipt of this Calibration Certification shall in no way imply acceptance of any work or instrument Authorized Mfgr Rep. Signature: Date: PCSS shall furnish to Owner/Engineer two copies of an installation inspection report certifying that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall itemize the equipment or shall have inspection reports for each item attached to it. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both the Contractor and the system supplier. TESTS (GENERAL) The PCSS shall test all equipment at the PCSS facility prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided by the PCSS shall be tested at the PCSS facility as a single fully integrated system. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Un-witnessed Test (UFAT) 2. Witnessed Test (WFAT) 3. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 4. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 5. 30-Day Site Acceptance Tests (SAT) Each test shall require input documentation to be prepared and approved prior to the test and the output (“work product”) documentation to be generated by test activities. Test activities shall execute test scenarios defined and approved by Owner/Engineer prior to the test. Test scenarios shall cover all normal operation, all knowable abnormal process conditions, and all knowable abnormal Process Control System conditions and malfunction. Test scenarios shall force the execution of every logical branch of the control logic. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement shall be satisfied. The cause and the correct effect shall be determined and documented in the test scenarios. The person conducting the test shall compare the actual effect with the expected correct effect with and shall document the outcome. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Owner/Engineer-approved procedures, forms, and checklists. A complete testing plan with the appropriate forms and checklists shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval prior to any testing taking place. The testing plan shall be submitted a minimum of three weeks in advance of the proposed testing date. Each specific test shall be described and followed by a section for sign off by the appropriate party after its status completion. Copies of these sign off test procedures, forms, and check lists will constitute the required test documentation. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provides suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. The General Contractor shall require the Integration Subcontractor to coordinate all testing with the Engineer, all affected Subcontractors, and the Owner. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior approved Test Procedures. The Owner/Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. No equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site until the Owner/Engineer has received all test results and approved the system as ready for shipment. The PCSS shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test equipment and labor to perform the field tests. Correction of Deficiencies 6. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 7. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. All deficiencies shall be corrected in no more than 24 hours. If the Integrator is unable to resolve the issue in less than 24 hours to allow the test to proceed, acceptance testing should be rescheduled. The owner shall bear no additional costs of attending subsequent re-tests. COMMISSIONING The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. Following the instrumentation and control system checkout and start-up, the PCSS shall, under the supervision of the system supplier, perform a complete system test in the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 presence of the Owner/Engineer to verify that all equipment and software is operating properly as a fully integrated system, and that the intended monitoring and control functions are fully implemented and operational. 1. Commissioning shall begin only after all instruments, PLC, and control panels are installed, wired and previously tested by the Contractor, in accordance with Paragraph 1.04 of this Section. The testing as required per the Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) as described in paragraph 3.03 of this specification shall be completed prior to beginning the commissioning. 2. All spare parts must be on site and accepted prior to Commissioning. 3. PCSS shall submit to the Owner/Engineer a schedule for Commissioning, including a proposed start date, at least three weeks in advance. Commissioning shall include, as a minimum, the following checks: 4. All wiring shall be checked at each termination point for correct wire size, type, color, termination and wire number. 5. All instruments and devices shall be checked to verify compliance with the specifications and approved shop drawings. The calibration of analog devices shall be verified including the zero and span. 6. Analog wiring shall be checked for correct polarity and ground continuity at each termination point in the loop. 7. All analog loops shall be verified at each termination point at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% signal levels. PCSS shall provide the following documentation for use during the Commissioning effort. 8. Checklist itemizing all required commissioning documentation, signed and dated. 9. Complete panel schematic and internal point-to-point wiring interconnect drawings. 10. Complete electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery, latest edition, and applicable NEMA standards. 11. Complete panel layout drawings. 12. Complete field wiring diagrams. 13. Complete instrument loop diagrams. 14. Completed Calibration/Recalibration Certificates for all field and panel devices that require adjustment or calibration. 15. PCSS shall provide one set of Commissioning documentation for the Owner's personnel, one set for the Owner/Engineer’s use, one set for field use, and the required number of sets for the Contractor's use. 16. The drawings corrected and modified during Commissioning shall form the basis for the "As-Built" record drawing requirement. 17. All documentation generated during acceptance testing (WFAT, ORD, FDT). All certificates, installation checklists, and reports delivered by equipment manufacturers. 18. Issue tracking system, such as electronic spreadsheet or a paper log book All PLC/RTU hardware and software shall be thoroughly tested to verify proper operation as an integrated system. System testing shall include, as a minimum, the following: 19. All digital inputs shall be activated at the field element to verify proper response to the status change on graphic displays, reports, and in automatic control algorithms. 20. All analog inputs shall be tested at the field transmitter over a full range to verify proper response on graphic displays, reports, and in automatic control algorithms. 21. All digital and analog outputs shall be forced to verify proper control operation. 22. Communications, including PLC/RTU data highway, computer local area network, PLC/RTU remote I/O, and serial communications shall be tested between all components, including existing equipment. 23. Alarm displays and printing shall be tested for all analog and digital alarm points. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 24. All automatic control algorithms shall be completely tested over various ranges and input conditions to verify proper operation. Graphic displays shall be observed to verify proper response to automatic control operations. 25. All historical data collection, trending, computation, totalizers and reporting functions shall be checked and tested to confirm proper operation and accuracy of the data. Any defects or problems found during the Commissioning effort or field test shall be corrected by the Contractor and then retested to demonstrate proper operation. Following testing and demonstration of all system functions, the Instrumentation and Control System including field sensors/transducers and instruments shall be running and fully operational for a continuous 48 hour period. The Field Test specified below shall not begin until the continuous 48 hour proving run has been successfully completed and Owner and Engineer agree that the Field Test can begin. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The Control System shall undergo comprehensive testing to demonstrate that the Control System performs as an integrated system to meet all the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall conduct all element and subsystem tests necessary to ensure the proper operation of all Control System functions. Test procedures and written notification to the Owner/Engineer of testing activities are required for all tests. Before the start of any test that will be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer, the Contractor shall have conducted all prerequisite testing as well as a dry run of the entire witnessed test to ensure the success of the test. The Contractor shall provide the Owner/Engineer with a copy of the un-witnessed test report before start of the witnessed version of the test. The test report requirements shall be the same as the witnessed version of the test. All tools and equipment necessary to perform all required tests shall be provided by the Contractor. Test instruments shall be suitable for the purpose of measurement, with a rated accuracy commensurate to the measurement value of the equipment being tested or calibrated. Each test instrument shall be certified by an established calibration laboratory prior to the commencement of testing and recertified, without adjustment, after completion of testing to verify accuracy throughout the testing period. If recertification without adjustment is not demonstrated, the calibration instrument must be adjusted and certified, the field calibration repeated, and the recertification without further adjustment verified. Certified calibration reports traceable to the National Bureau of Standards shall be included with the test report. 1. The major documents associated with the testing are: a. System Test Plan and Forms b. Witnessed Factory Test (WFAT) Procedures c. Operational Readiness Test (ORT) Procedures d. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) Procedures e. 30 Day Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Procedures f. Test Reports Each test shall be considered complete only when accepted by the Engineer and Owner. UNWITNESSED TEST (UFAT) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 The entire system, except primary elements, final control elements, and field mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested at the PCSS site to ensure the system operates as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices/functions, and control devices/functions. All panels and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals, specifications, and Contract Drawings. PCSS shall submit a copy of the panel test records - point to point wiring check, etc. to the Owner and Engineer prior to scheduling the Witnessed Test. During the tests all digital system hardware and software shall have operated continuously or five days without a failure to verify the system is capable of continuous operation. The un- witnessed test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the Witnessed Test (WFAT). Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Develop and present to Owner/Engineer for approval a Delivery Checklist. The checklist shall list every discrete item such as workstation, network switch, PLC panel, etc. The Contractor shall demonstrate clearly and unambiguously that every item required by the contract is present, along with all its accessories, in new and undamaged condition. 2. Demonstrate operability of all equipment 3. Demonstrate operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 4. 100 percent point check of I/O, including wiring 5. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 6. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 7. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers 8. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 9. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 10. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 11. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown. 12. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 13. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 14. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer’s and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. WITNESSED FACTORY TEST (WFAT) Before scheduling the Witnessed Test, the PCSS must determine through his own test and quality assurance program that the equipment is ready for shipment to the jobsite. All system tests specified for the Un-witnessed Test shall be repeated. The WFAT will be conducted at the PCSS facility. After receiving Un-witnessed Test approval, the PCSS shall notify the Engineer and Owner in writing that the system is ready for the Witnessed Test. In addition to notification, the PCSS shall submit to Owner/Engineer documentation from UFAT demonstrating that each test has been successfully completed and all issues have been resolved. The Engineer and/or Owner shall schedule a test date within 30 days of receipt of the "Ready to Test" letter. At the time of notification, the PCSS shall submit any February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer. This test shall verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test, as determined by the Engineer, shall be the basis for approval of the system to be shipped to the site. The various tests performed during the Witnessed Factory Test shall be designed to demonstrate that hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Specifications and Contract drawings. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, the actual installed conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the Owner. The PCSS shall be responsible to simulate the I/O signals for any equipment or device communicating with any new or existing PLC through peer-to-peer network by using a computer system with appropriate simulation software. Simulating the I/O signals by forcing them from the PLC programming software will not be acceptable. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Develop and present to Owner/Engineer for approval a Delivery Checklist. The checklist shall list every discrete item such as workstation, network switch, PLC panel, etc. The Contractor shall demonstrate clearly and unambiguously that every item required by the contract is present, along with all its accessories, in new and undamaged condition. 2. Demonstrate operability of all equipment 3. Demonstrate operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 4. 100 percent point check of I/O, including wiring 5. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 6. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 7. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers 8. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 9. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 10. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 11. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown. 12. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 13. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 14. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer’s and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. All analog control panels shall be included in these tests. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Witnessed Test as determined by the Owner/Engineer. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Witnessed Test: 1. All Contract Drawings and Specifications, addenda, and change orders 2. Master copy of the test procedure 3. List of the equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number 4. Design-related hardware submittal applicable to the equipment being tested 5. Software license 6. Issue tracker log, indicating issue’s severity and life cycle The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 1. Morning meeting to review the day's test schedule and status of outstanding issues. 2. Scheduled tests and signoffs. 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. 4. Unstructured testing period by the witnesses. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged and certified copies of the logs shall be provided and available throughout the test to the Engineer and Owner. All failed tests shall require re-test till successfully completed. OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS (ORT) Prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is READY for operation. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittal's and these Specifications. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer- approved forms and check lists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check off items with space for sign off by the PCSS. (1) Project Name (2) Loop Number (3) Tag Number for each component (4) Check offs/sign offs for each component b. Tag/identification c. Installation d. Termination – wiring e. Termination – tubing f. Calibration/adjustment – Check offs/sign offs for the loop g. Panel interface terminations h. I/O interface terminations i. I/O signal operation j. Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, and adjusted. k. Total loop operation – Provide space for comments l. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign off by the PCSS: (1) Project Name (2) Loop Number (3) Component Tag Number of I/O Module Number (4) Component Code Number Analog System (5) Manufacturer (for Analog system element) (6) Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system) (7) Summary of Functional Requirements: m. Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges n. Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges o. Computing Elements: Function p. Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control Modes (PID) q. Switching Elements: Unit range, differential r. (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), Preset (AUTO/MANUAL) s. I/O Modules: Input or output February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 2. Calibrations: a. Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b. Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points c. Controllers: Mode settings (PID) d. I/O Modules: Required an actual inputs or outputs for 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (1) Provide space for comments (2) Space for sign off by the PCSS. (3) The General Contractor shall require the PCSS to maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the job-site and make them available to the Owner/Engineer at any time. (4) These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer shall review and initial all Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) Prior to startup and the 30-Day Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the Operational Readiness Tests. The FDT will be a joint test by the PCSS and the Equipment suppliers. Once the facility has been started up and is operating, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under Functional Demonstration Tests except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functionality demonstrated. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the job-site both before and during the tests. In addition, one (1) copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Owner/Engineer at the job-site both before and during testing. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the tests shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. The system shall operate for 100 continuous hours without failure before this test shall be considered successful. Demonstrate communication failure and recovery. 30-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the PCSS shall be responsible for operation of the entire system for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non- field repairable malfunction. During this test, plant operating and PCSS personnel shall be present as required. For this test, the PCSS is expected to provide personnel who have an intimate knowledge of the system hardware and software. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of and derive benefit from the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. Any malfunction during the tests shall be logged into the issue tracking system, analyzed February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 and corrected by the PCSS. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. During this 30 consecutive day test period, any malfunction which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by PCSS personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered a non-field-repairable malfunction. Upon completion of repairs by the PCSS, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the PCSS shall perform repairs or replacement within 60 days. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent (99.5%) during this test period. Availability shall be defined as: Availability = (Total Testing Time-Down Time) / Total Testing Time Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or back- up power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above. Upon successful completion of the 30-day site acceptance test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete, and the one year warranty period shall commence. TRAINING General 1. A comprehensive training program shall be provided by the Contractor covering the operation and maintenance of all elements of the Control System. The cost of training programs for the Owner’s personnel shall be included in the Contract price. Where practical, the training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied. 2. Training shall be conducted at the Owner’s facilities. 3. Training classes shall be tailored to the specific needs of the class participants. Separate curricula shall be developed for Operators, Maintenance Staff, and Control System Administrators. All Technicians, Operators, Engineers, and Managers of the Facility shall require training on the Process Control System (PCS). The training courses shall address operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the system provided. The courses shall be designed specifically for the type of personnel attending, such as Operators, Engineers, etc. 4. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. 5. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. 6. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to Owner. 7. Contractor shall videotape all training sessions and provide recordings on a CD as formal submittal to the Owner. All training CDs shall become the sole property of the Owner. 8. All instructors shall be highly qualified for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only Control System functionality but also professional training techniques. Trainers should have no other duties that would interrupt training. Training shall not be combined with other activities such as Control System configuration or startup. Vendor Provided Training shall be conducted by Factory Authorized and Certified Trainers. Resumes and evidence of Qualifications of Instructors shall be provided as part of the Test Plan and subject to the approval of the Owner/Engineer. 9. Complete, professional, training materials shall be provided for all training classes including course outline and schedule, training manuals (in addition to Control February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 System documentation), and review/testing materials. The training manuals shall be designed to not only assists the student's comprehension of the course material but also to serve as reference documents after the completion of training. Training materials should be provided to students one week prior to class. The Owner reserves the right to make additional copies of training materials. 10. Training courses shall be a combination of classroom and hands-on training. To the extent possible, hands-on training shall utilize components from the new Control System. 11. Prior to any training taking place, Contractor to conduct workshops with the Owner and Engineer to identify specific training requirements, to define training courses, and to develop course outlines for approval by Owner/Engineer. Training Plan 1. The training plan shall include complete descriptions of all training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed training manuals, and a description of any special training tools available (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training, etc.). 2. Owner/Engineer shall review the training plan for assurance that the training planned by the Contractor shall meet the training needs. Special emphasis shall be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors. If a concern arises about the qualifications of particular instructors, the Contractor shall provide video tapes of classes taught by the proposed instructors. If the Owner determines that the proposed instructors are not sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses, the Contractor shall identify additional qualified instructors. Vendor Provided Training 1. Vendor provided training is intended to provide foundational training for equipment provided by the PCSS. This training shall be conducted by factory authorized trainers for each type of equipment discussed below: 2. Control System Software Training a. HMI Software b. System Administrator Software c. Reporting Software d. Historian Software e. Network Management Software f. PLC/RTU Software Training 3. Control System Hardware Training a. HMI Hardware b. Server Hardware c. Reporting Hardware d. Historian Hardware e. Network Management Hardware f. PLC/RTU Hardware Training Control System Specific Training 1. Training Manuals a. Comprehensive training manuals shall be provided for all training courses. The manuals shall be professionally written to present the course material in a format that is easy to comprehend. The manuals shall serve as teaching aids during presentation of the training classes and shall additionally serve as reference material after the training has been completed. It shall not be acceptable for the Contractor to use Control February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 System technical documentation solely as the training manuals since Control System documentation is generally not written in an instructional format. Portions of Control System documentation may be incorporated into training manuals provided that the overall manual achieves an instructional format. b. If the Contractor proposes to use standard training manuals, these manuals shall be revised or appended to reflect Control System characteristics specific to this Contract. 2. Required Training Courses a. Training courses shall be tailored to meet the specific needs of several distinct groups of Owner personnel. The specific categories and number of personnel in each category are identified in the following paragraphs. Class sizes shall be restricted to the number of students that can easily be accommodated. Classes that involve extensive hands-on activities (such as operator training, maintenance training, and software engineering) shall be limited to five students per class. Supervisor and overview courses may include up to ten participants. At least two sessions of each course shall be presented to satisfy class size restrictions and conflicts in Owner personnel scheduling. Additional sessions shall be presented if required to accommodate the total number of personnel identified for each course. b. All training classes shall be scheduled Monday – Friday. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for specific times. c. The intent of the training program is to provide the Owner's personnel with comprehensive instruction in all subjects and areas necessary for the efficient configuration, troubleshooting and repair, maintenance, and use of the Control System. If the Contractor's standard training curriculum includes courses in addition to those discussed below and which are necessary for the efficient configuration, maintenance, and use of the Control System, the Contractor shall also provide these courses. Following is a description of the categories of training to be provided. 3. Operator Training a. Training courses shall be presented that instruct the Control System operators in the efficient operation of all aspects of the Control System. The course material shall include not only the general operation of the Control System but also the operation of the specific Control System features require by this Contract. In particular, the operator training shall include instruction on the use of all operational functionality including, but not limited to alarm logging, trending, and the process displays, database, reports, and control software. 4. Software Maintenance Training a. Training courses shall be presented that shall enable Owner programmers to develop and maintain all aspects of the Control System software. Separate sessions shall be presented that deal with the following topics: (1) Process database development and modification (2) Historical database development and modification (3) Process display development and modification (4) Supervisory Control strategy development and modification (5) Report development and modification (6) Web Server Application development and modification (7) Supervisory control development and modification (8) General software maintenance, including Control System backup, restoration and archiving. b. These courses shall address the procedures for the standard Control February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 System software, plus material explaining the specific conventions and procedures used by the Contractor in developing the new Control System applications. The courses shall provide instruction in techniques for developing and maintaining current, comprehensive documentation for all applications. c. Control Application Training (1) A dedicated course shall be presented which addresses the customized software development and control strategy programming. 5. Specific Training a. Human Machine Interface (HMI) Software Training. This training shall be performed by PCSS. (1) Provide one week’s manufacturer’s standard training course for three (3) of Owner’s personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, and installation of the HMI software supplied. (2) This training shall be conducted no more than two (2) months before the Witnessed Test (WFT) (3) The following training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) Database generation (b) Display generation (c) Alarm system and configuration (d) Historical data s ystem configuration (e) Report generation (f) Security system (g) Trending system (h) Remote communications (i) Software configuration (j) OLE applications (k) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (l) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (4) Training shall include classroom and hands-on instruction such that a student with experience in process instrumentation can configure the HMI with no guidance or with only minimal supervision when attempting complex problems. b. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware and Software (1) Provide manufacturer’s standard training course for three (3) of the Owner’s personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, installation, and maintenance of the PLC hardware and software supplied. The courses shall be conducted in two groups for one week each. (2) The training shall be conducted no more than two (2) months before the Witnessed Test. (3) The hardware and software courses shall not be concurrent. (4) The following hardware training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) Hardware maintenance for the PLC equipment provided (b) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (c) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (d) Component removal and replacement February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 18 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 (e) Periodic maintenance (5) The following software training shall be provided as a minimum: (a) System configuration (b) Application specific program development/programming (c) Uploading/downloading programs (d) Documenting program/configuration (e) System backups and reload procedures (f) TCP/IP addressing procedures (g) Network communications configuration 6. Integrated Process Control System Training a. Human Machine Interface (HMI) (1) Integrated Process Control System Training shall be performed by individuals directly involved in development and implementation of the Process Control System for this project. All instructors shall be highly qualified for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only HMI functionality but also professional training techniques. Training personnel shall be intimately familiar with the control system equipment, its manipulation, and configuration. Training shall be conducted by Factory Authorized and Certified Trainers. Training personnel shall command knowledge of system debugging, program modification, troubleshooting, maintenance procedure, system operation, and programming, and shall be capable of transferring this knowledge in an orderly fashion to technically oriented personnel. (2) Training and instruction shall be specific to the system that is being supplied. (3) Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner’s system. (4) Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the Owner’s personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, backup, and historical archival/retrieval procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation (h) Windows 7 operation and maintenance as it pertains accessing the control system - HMI for this project. (i) System backups and reload procedures (j) TCP/IP addressing procedures February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 19 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 b. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware and Software (1) Five (5) 1-day session for three (3) of the Owner’s personnel shall be held before the FDT, but not more than one month before the FDT. (2) Training and instruction shall be specific to the system that is being supplied. (3) Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner’s system. (4) Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the Owner’s personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, backup, and historical archival/retrieval procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation (h) Windows 7 operation and maintenance as it pertains accessing the control system - PLC for this project. c. Network equipment and devices (1) Provide training on network switches, modems, and satellite radios. (2) The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: (a) System overview (b) System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements (c) System startup, shut down, load, and backup procedures (d) Specific application configuration covering the overall design and implementation of the applications provided under this Contract. The intent is to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided. (e) Periodic maintenance (f) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (g) Network configuration, communications, and operation d. Integrated training (1) Provide integrated training on operating the SCADA network and Process Control System as a whole. Training shall demonstrate dependencies of system element, system-level troubleshooting, health monitoring, problem diagnosis, etc. Field Training 1. Field Instruments February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 20 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 a. Provide a minimum of four (4) separate one 8-hour hardware training and instruction sections on the maintenance of the field instrumentation for four (4) of the Owners instrumentation technicians. The training will be broken up into separate groups – those that maintain, those that operate and those who own the system. This training shall be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but no more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall take place at the Owners facility. As a minimum the following shall be included: (1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided (2) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract (3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (5) Periodic maintenance 2. Panel Instruments a. Provide a minimum of one 8-hour hardware training and instruction in the maintenance of the panel instrumentation for four (4) of the Owners technicians. Training should be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but not more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owners facility and at a minimum the following shall be included: (1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided (2) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and configured for this Contract (3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures (4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis (5) Periodic maintenance 3. Panel Functions a. Provide a minimum of two 2-hour training sessions for four (4) shifts of Owner’s operations personnel on the detailed operation of the touch screen panel. This training shall be conducted within two (2) days of the completion of the Field Demonstration Test at times suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owner’s facility and at a minimum, the following shall be included: (1) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract. Management Seminar 1. Provide Management Seminar for the Owner’s personnel at the Owner’s facility. The objective of this seminar is to provide non-operations/maintenance personnel with an overview understanding of the process control system. The attendees will be the Owner’s management, engineering, and other non-operations personnel. The seminar shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. An overview of the process control system explaining how the hardware and software supplied under this Contract is used for the operation and February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 21 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 control of the facilities. b. A block diagram presentation of the process control system showing how and what information flow within the System and what is done by each functional unit. c. An explanation of the operator interfaces including a demonstration of how to use an HMI to access displays, reports, control, etc. d. A walk-through of the installed system explaining each of the items covered in the functional unit’s discussion. The features and functions of operator controls and interfaces shall be discussed. Follow-up Training 1. When requested by the Owner during the warranty period for the SCADA System and Instruments, one addition training session shall per provided for each type of training session as required in other sections of this specification. Requirements for follow-up training are the same as those stated in other training session sections of this specification. Follow-up training sessions shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner. WARRANTIES, MAINTENANCE, AND SUPPORT SERVICES Support Duration 1. All warranty, maintenance and support services specified shall be included in the Contract and shall be in full effect for a period of 36 months commencing upon Final Acceptance. The warranty for each piece of equipment shall transfer to the Owner and continue until expiration of the manufacturer's warranty, if period is longer. Technical Support 1. Technical support shall be available from a Factory Regional Office or local Authorized Trained Representative of the software Supplier. 2. Factory technical support shall be available from degreed Engineers familiar with the software and typical industrial applications. 3. Telephone technical support, voice and e-mail, shall be available weekdays and weekends and holidays. 4. Technical support shall be offered for the life of the product, and for a minimum of 1 year after it is discontinued. 5. The vendor must have a record of providing a continuous upgrade path for the product. Control System Warranty 1. The Control System warranty shall consist of a full scope, in-place warranty. All hardware, software and applications shall be covered by the warranty. Any failures in System functionality as compared to Final Acceptance shall be corrected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate any warranties provided by third party suppliers. Preventive Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing preventive maintenance. All equipment shall be systematically inspected, cleaned, aligned, adjusted, lubricated, calibrated and otherwise serviced as required to assure proper performance. Equipment manufacturer service recommendations shall be followed where applicable. 2. The preventive maintenance service interval (time-between-service activities) for each piece of equipment shall be that recommended by the equipment manufacturer in accordance with industry practice or six months, whichever is less. The cost to provide preventive maintenance during this period including February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 22 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 parts, labor, travel, and subsistence, shall be included in the contract price. Prior to start of in-service use of each part of the Control System, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a schedule for this maintenance service. 3. All preventive maintenance activities shall be documented with service reports which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe all work performed, and list materials used. The report shall also include the name of the technician performing the work and his signature. A copy of all service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. 4. All preventive maintenance procedures shall be planned and accomplished in such a manner as to minimize disruption of the Pump Station Control System operation. No preventive maintenance procedure shall be allowed to jeopardize the Owner's ability to monitor and Control System operation. 5. At the Owner's option, Owner's maintenance personnel may participate in any preventive maintenance procedures. Corrective Maintenance 1. The Contractor shall provide the services of factory-trained service technicians for the purpose of performing corrective maintenance on all Control System hardware and software. 2. The Contractor shall provide a 24-hour, 7-day/week-service hotline for telephone notification of Control System malfunctions. Within 2 hours from notification by the Owner of defective Control System operation, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative establish telephone contact with the Owner's maintenance personnel to discuss short-term corrective measures. 3. If it is not possible to correct the defective operation as a result of the telephone contact, the Contractor shall have a qualified service representative at the location of the installed Control System within 4 hours from initial notification. 4. The service representative shall perform all necessary inspections and diagnostic tests to determine the source of the defect and to establish a corrective action plan. The corrective action plan shall be developed such that the defect is corrected as quickly as possible and with the least impact on the operation of the Owner's facilities. Prior to beginning any repair or replacement procedure, the Contractor shall review the corrective action plan with the Owner in order to inform him of the planned course of action and to allow assessment of any impact that course of action might have on the operation of the Owner's facilities. At Owner's option, Owner maintenance personnel may participate in any corrective maintenance procedures. 5. If possible, the service representative shall effect replacement or repair of the defective component before leaving the site using replacement parts from the spare parts inventory delivered with the Control System. Otherwise, the corrective action plan shall include a detailed schedule for the planned course of action. Once the defect has been corrected, the corrective action plan shall be updated indicating the source of the defect and specific corrective action taken. A copy of the updated corrective action plan shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. Any spares from the onsite supply of spares used by the Contractor in correcting the Control System malfunction shall be replaced within 15 days. 6. If 24-hour response time is not provided, or other corrective maintenance requirements are not met by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to obtain corrective maintenance from other sources and charge the Contractor reasonable costs of the alternative maintenance services, including parts, labor, travel, and subsistence. Warranty shall not be affected. 7. The Owner, at Owner's option, may elect to employ its own maintenance staff February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 23 of 23 SCADA & Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning – 40 90 03 to locate and remove a defective component. Warranty shall not be affected. 8. In this case the Owner shall return the defective component to a repair location as instructed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace the defective component and return the properly working unit to the Owner within 15 days. Software Maintenance 1. After any equipment has been placed in service and tested, Owner personnel shall be permitted, at no additional cost to the Owner; to add, modify, and delete Owner provided software. Performance of such actions by the Owner shall not release the Contractor from satisfying any guarantee or maintenance requirements, or any other specified requirements. Software Update Services 1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test, and commission updates to the Control System software and computer provided software within 30 days from when such updates are announced and released by the manufacturer. 2. Execution of all updates shall be subject to review and approval of the Owner prior to commencement of the work. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring proper operation of all updates, including "bug fixes" or revisions to the update for 12 months after Support Duration for updates installed less than 12 months prior to Support Duration end date. 4. Maintenance releases for bug fixes shall be supplied when needed if requested by the user. (e.g. - change from Version 4.0 to Version 4.01). 5. There shall be provided, as part of this Contract, a basic 5-day training course at the software vendor’s training facility for each of three (3) of the Owner’s personnel. This course shall cover the understanding and configuration of various application Modules within the software system. Concepts, implementations and trouble shooting skills shall be emphasized. 6. The training course shall be part of a regularly scheduled training program by the software vendor. The scheduling shall allow the Owner sufficient time to schedule personnel for training between award of the Contract and delivery of the SCADA system. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 5 User Requirements Specification - 40 96 00 SECTION 40 96 00 USER REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATIONS (URS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PROCESS DESCRIPTION A. Treated water from ONSWTP will ultimately be provided to the City distribution system by High Service Pump Station No.2 and new High Service Pump Station No.3. The high service pump stations will pump treated water from the plant existing Clearwells 1 & 2 to the distribution system as required by system demands. B. High Service Pump Station No.2 is existing and includes the operation of four horizontal split-case centrifugal pumps (High Service Pump (HSP)-8 thru HSP-11), and the new High Service Pump Station No.3 will include the operation of six horizontal split-case centrifugal pumps (HSP-12 thru HSP-17). Three Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) will be installed in High Service Pump building 3 electrical room to operate HSP-11 (located in High Service Pump building 2), HSP-12 and HSP-15 located in High Service Pump building 3. All the remaining High Service Pumps will be operated at constant speed. Under normal operation condition, both Clearwells will be interconnected with common piping and will operate as a single supply for both High Service No.2 and High Service No.3 Pump Stations. C. High Service Pump Station No.3 suction and discharge piping has the capabilities to segregate the pump station into two (2) separate, independent sub-systems consisting of two (2) constant-speed pumps and a single VFD. Both sub-systems will primarily control on the City water distribution system pressure with flowrate and suction pressure overrides. 1.2 PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (P&ID’S) A. The Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID’s) shall be provided by the Instrumentation design engineer. 1.3 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY A. Project Scope The ONSWTP High Service Building No.3 project instrumentation controls and integration scope includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Procurement of all instrumentation, communications and PLC equipment required by this project to deliver a fully functional and integrated control system as specified by the Controls System Design Engineer. 2. Fabrication of all control panels per the Controls System Design Engineer. 3. Development and implementation of all component control and communications programming required to provide a fully-functional PLC-based control system for the new High Service Pump Station 3. 4. Modification of existing control system components, component programming and communications required to provide a fully-functional PLC based control system for the existing High Service Pump Station 2.Component drawing showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 5. The coordination with the system integrator for the verification and to demonstrate the functionality of the new and existing systems as specified. B. Scope of Automation New automation for new High Service Pump Station No.3 and the modification of the existing High Service Pump Station No.2 control system shall consist of the following: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 5 User Requirements Specification - 40 96 00 1. Monitor and report to the ONSWTP Control Room via SCADA pressure of the pump suction and discharge headers. 2. Monitor flowrates of all running pumps. 3. Monitor levels in both Clearwell #1 and Clearwell #2. 4. Monitor all pump bearing temperatures and vibration sensors, all motor bearing temperatures and vibration sensors, motor winding temperatures, and individual motor amps. 5. Automatically start, stop and adjust all VFD (variable frequency drives) speed rates based on process conditions or operator-specified parameters. Process variables that will be monitored and controlled shall be: (a) Discharge pressure (b) Flowrate (c) Controlling process variable shall be determined on process demands compared to operator-specified setpoints. Normal operation will utilize discharge (City water system) pressure, with high/low flow override or high/low suction pressure override. 6. Automatically start or stop constant speed pumps depending on total system pressure demands. 7. Monitor all alarm points and shutdown pumps as required when adverse process or motor/pump health conditions are detected. 8. Display all relevant process data and enable auto/manual control of the system from SCADA HMI. 9. Monitor water quality analytical equipment and record the data in the historical database, and display trending information when requested. 10. Automatically record specified process data and alarms in the historical database, and display trending information when requested. C. Continuous Operation Continual monitoring and control of all new and existing high service pump stations is required to maintain an adequate and acceptable level of pressure in the City water distribution system. D. Control Schemes and Strategies 1. Pump station control shall be accomplished by ramping a pump station VFD speed up or down according to the controlled process variable setpoint. Pump automated discharge valve shall not be used as a controlling device. 2. The High Service Pump Stations shall have three (3) operating modes: (a) LOCAL-MANUAL: VFD speed is set manually via a local VFD interface. All constant-speed pumps shall be started / stopped locally. Valves will be operated by Operations. All pump interlocks shall remain in place as described in Section E of this document. (b) REMOTE-MANUAL: VFD speeds are manually set by operations via SCADA. Constant-speed pumps can be started / stopped by operations via SCADA. Valves will be operated by Operations. All pump interlocks shall remain in place as described in Section E of this document. (c) REMOTE-AUTOMATIC: This shall be a fully-automated, closed-loop control system. VFD speed is controlled by the control system based on operator-entered setpoint of the desired process variable (usually City water system (discharge) pressure). Constant-speed pumps shall be started / stopped by the control system in order to maintain the required process variable setpoint. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 5 User Requirements Specification - 40 96 00 (d) Switching between control modes shall be executed in a way that prevents any sudden or abrupt changes in system pressure or flowrates. (e) The control systems shall automatically rotate inactive pumps within each pump station while in a REMOTE mode. Pump rotation schedules shall be governed by total runtimes for each pump. In determining this schedule, the total runtimes of each pump will be analyzed over a 30-day period. This schedule shall be modifiable by Operations via the SCADA HMI system. (f) Refer to Specification 40 96 00 – “Sequence of Operations” for more detail. E. Safeties and Interlocks The following list is a partial listing of safeties and interlocks. Refer to the P&ID’s and the Sequence of Operations documentation for a complete listing and explanation of all interlocks and safeties to be configured. 1. Each pump suction pipe shall have a LOW and LOW -LOW pressure setpoints, and will generate alarms in the SCADA HMI. A LOW -LOW pressure alarm shall cause the pump associated with the alarm to shutdown to prevent pump damage. To clear a LOW-LOW alarm, a pump reset will be required, combined with alarm acknowledgement in the HMI. 2. Manual or automatic starting of any pump shall not be permitted: (a) If the suction pressure is below the SUCTION PRESSURE LOW -LOW alarm setpoint. (b) The discharge control valve is open. (c) The levels in the Clearwells are in an LOW -LOW alarm situation unless by-passed by Operations. (d) A pump–start is attempted while the pump time-between-starts and/or starts-per-hour timers in the motor protection relay are running. F. Operator Involvement Operators shall be required to manually open all suction and discharge manual valves per defined City Operations procedures to reflect the desired piping and pump selection configuration. The following information shall be entered by Operations: 1. REMOTE-AUTOMATIC Mode: (a) Desired process variable setpoint to maintain. Default process variable shall be the City water distribution system pressure. If a different process variable (flowrate, suction pressure), Operations must select it via Operations HMI system. (b) Desired Variable Frequency Drive for control (High Service Pump Station 3 only). NOTE: Only one VFD may be used for control at a time, unless pump station has been segregated as described in Section 1.1, Paragraph C of this document. (c) Constant-speed pumps available for operation. G. Sequence Design Control sequence shall be based on operational requirements stated in this document and the Sequence of Operations documents. H. Failure Philosophy (a) When powered on, the system shall default to the REMOTE- AUTOMATIC mode, with discharge pressure set as the default process variable. Default setpoint shall be 0.0 PSIG. (b) Pump discharge valves shall close if not in the closed position upon control system re-start. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 5 User Requirements Specification - 40 96 00 (c) If communications is interrupted or lost with the Plant SCADA system, system shall operate with the last known good setpoint entered into the local PLC. I. Human Factors HMI screens for the new High Service Pump Station No.3 shall conform to the current Plant standards and existing look and feel. Details of the screen layouts, specific displays, controls, alarm categories and priorities shall mimic existing High Service Pump Station No.2 as much as possible. For any and all modifications to the High Service Pump Station No.2 screens and new screen development for High Service Pump Station No.3, contractor shall be required to allocate time and conduct conduct workshops with City staff to identify and document all modifications to existing HMI and High Service #2 control logic. J. Management Information Logging of setpoint changes, control of process variable changes control system access and alarms shall be automatically logged in the Plant Historian system. Interfaces with Management Information Services (MIS) are not required for this new system. 1.4 PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. System Hardware 1. Any and all new control system instrumentation and communications hardware shall conform to the current Plant standard specifications unless otherwise stated. 2. The City Water Department has standardized on the Allen-Bradley ControlLogix / CompactLogix PLC hardware platform and the Allen-Bradley FactoryTalk SCADA and HMI platform. 3. Due to the criticality for constant pump station operations, an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC system with redundant processors will be required for High Service Pump Station No.3. B. Plant Interface The new High Service Pump Station No.3 shall have the following interfaces with Plant devices: 1. Modbus over RS-485 interface with station VFD’s. (a) An analog 4-20mA output for speed control and an analog 4-20mA input for speed feedback shall be required for each VFD. 4-20mA inputs and outputs shall have a minimum of 16-bit resolution. 2. Ethernet/IP over fiber optic with SCADA server and existing High Service Pump Station No.2 controller. 3. Analog 4-20mA inputs with a minimum of 16-bit resolution from new pump station instrumentation. (a) If new analog instrumentation has intelligent digital interfaces (HART interface), this information shall be brought into the station PLC. 4. Digital 24VDC status and control for pump discharge valve MOV’s, suction and discharge pressure switches and any other digital devices utilized in this project. 5. Modbus over fiber optic communications interface for all new station motor protection relays. C. Operator Interface 1. Pump station constant speed pumps shall have a local STOP-START station February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 5 User Requirements Specification - 40 96 00 located adjacent to each pump motor for starting and stopping pumps when in LOCAL-MANUAL mode. 2. VFD’s shall have a local operator interface as part of the VFD controller for operator control while in LOCAL-MANUAL mode and monitoring of VFD parameters locally. 3. Pump discharge control valves shall have local Local-Off-Remote switches and local Open / Close control as part of the valve controller. 4. Local pressure indicators shall be mounted in such a manner to allow for ease of viewing by operators and ease of maintenance or replacement. D. Control System Software Configuration 1. System integrator shall read and be familiar with all Plant standard specifications and any and all documentation pertinent to this Project. 2. All control system software shall be written for the Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC platform. 3. Control system Engineer and integrator shall review any and all existing control system configurations with City staff and modify as required to meet new system configuration needs. 4. The system integrator shall be responsible for tuning any and all control loops. 1.5 ADDITIONAL NOTES AND COMMENTS A. None END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 SECTION 40 96 01 PLC LOGIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS PART 1 GENERAL The following document contains both a narrative of the sequence of operations that are to be programmed into the High Service #3 PLC (tag PLC-2000) as well as flow charts as shown on Sheets 232-234 of the plan set to be used as a visual representation of the sequences. Although the programming will be more detailed, the information contained within these documents as well as the User Requirements Specification (URS) will provide the reader with the necessary guidance to understanding the operation of the High Service #3 Pump Station automation systems. The narratives are meant to give a more detailed description of the flow charts for each sequence. Italicized bold characters are references to other steps within the sequence itself or references to steps in other sequences. P&ID’s should also be used in conjunction with this and the flow charts as an aid to understanding these documents. The flow charts are meant to be read from top to bottom except where indicated by the direction of the arrows. If a sequence has no finish icon then the process repeats indefinitely. PART 2 ACRONYMS DC: Discharge DCV: Discharge Valve HMI: Human Machine Interface, Operator Display LD: Lead LG: Lag LS: Limit Switch LVL: Level MNT: Maintenance PLC: Programmable Logic Controller PMP: Pump Press: Pressure Xmitter: Transmitter PART 3 PLC SEQUENCE NARRATIVES The High Service Pump Building No. 3 pump control strategy involves the operation of seven (7) horizontal centrifugal pumps to help meet demand in the City of Corpus Christi water distribution system. The following control features are provided to the operator. 3.1 LOCAL/REMOTE CONTROL OF HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO. 3 PUMPS A. Each pump has a LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch and RUN/STOP push buttons on a control station adjacent the pump. Interlocks (suction pressure, discharge pressure, discharge control valve position) shall remain in operation no matter which mode of operation. Switching an operating pump into the OFF position will immediately stop the pump, and a normal Pump Stop sequence will initiate. B. When the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in the “OFF” position, the pump shall be determined to be unavailable for operation. NOTE: Suction pressure switch interlock shall remain in operation while switch is in “OFF”. C. When the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in the “LOCAL” position, the pumps shall be February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 manually started and stopped by the operator using the RUN/STOP push buttons. NOTE: Suction pressure switch interlock shall remain in operation while switch is in LOCAL. D. When the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in the “REMOTE” position, control of the pumps shall be via the plant control system. The plant control system shall feature START and STOP pump control functions. 3.2 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO. 3 PUMP ALARMS AND INDICATION: The following alarms and indications shall be transmitted from PLC-2000 to the Plant HMI: Alarm signals from PLC-2000: PUMP in OFF, Pump in LOCAL, CLEARWELLS #1 or #2 LOW LEVEL (as indicated by the low-level alarm generated in the PLC from the level indicated by the Clearwell level transmitters), LOW SUCTION PRESSURE, HIGH and LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE, HIGH MOTOR VIBRATION, HIGH PUMP VIBRATION, HIGH MOTOR BEARING TEMPERATURE, HIGH PUMP BEARING TEMPERATURE and PUMP FAIL. A. If HS#3 Discharge Header Pressure exceeds operator entered High-High Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shutdown and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to immediately close. B. If Pump Motor Bearing Temperature exceeds High-High Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shutdown and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to immediately close. C. If Pump Motor Vibration exceeds High-High Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shutdown and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to immediately close. D. If Pump Bearing Temperature exceeds High-High Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shutdown and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to immediately close. E. If Pump Vibration exceeds High-High Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shutdown and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to immediately close. F. If Clearwell #1 or #2 Level is less than operator entered Low-Low Level Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shutdown and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to Close. G. PUMP FAIL Alarm shall be generated when pump is commanded to start but fails to start, or any alarm or interlock which shuts down the pump or prohibits the pump from starting. Refer to H.S. #2 & #3 P&ID’s for further information and other alarms. Indication signals from PLC-2000: ON, Pump in REMOTE, CLEARWELLS #1 and #2 LEVELS, DISCHARGE VALVE POSITION (OPEN, CLOSED, VALVE POSITION % OPEN, AVAILABILITY), SUCTION PRESSURE, DISCHARGE PRESSURE, DISCHARGE HEADER PRESSURE, FLOWRATE (individual pump), and AGGREGATE FLOWRATE, derived from the sum of all pumps in operation. Refer to H.S. #2 & #3 P&ID’s for further information and other indications. 3.3 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO. 3 PUMP INTERLOCKS: A. Each pump shall be interlocked to initiate a shutdown sequence upon reaching a high discharge pressure condition. B. Each pump shall be interlocked to initiate a shutdown sequence upon reaching a low suction pressure condition. C. Each pump shall be interlocked to initiate a shutdown sequence upon reaching a low- level condition in the Clearwells. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 3.4 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO. 3 PUMP EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN (ESD): Each pump shall have an Emergency Shutdown (ESD) button located adjacent to each pump. A. Operation of an ESD button shall immediately stop the pump then close pump discharge valve. B. Operation of an ESD button will not affect other pumps in operation. ESD button will be a mushroom -head style, maintain contact type button with protective cover. Button must be manually reset after ESD initiation. 3.5 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO. 3 PUMP VFD BYPASS: When a VFD is placed in “BYPASS” mode that VFD shall act as a constant-speed pump. Pump will start and run at full speed with no speed control. All interlocks shall remain in operation when VFD is placed in BYPASS mode. In REMOTE mode, control program will be able to start or stop that VFD the same way as any other constant-speed pump. In LOCAL mode, Operator will be able to start or stop the pump with the local START / STOP control station. 3.6 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO. 3 EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION: Upon loss of power to the plant, the plant emergency generators will start, providing backup power. Once power has been restored via the emergency generators, the pump discharge control valves associated with pumps in High Service Pump Building No. 3 that were running at the time of the power failure shall automatically close at the maximum speed allowed by the valve actuator (this sets pump up for immediate restart by Operations). Once the pump discharge control valves have closed, Operations can restart pumps as necessary. 3.7 HS # 3 PUMP START-UP SEQUENCE NARRATIVE A. The HS#3 Start-Up Sequence resides in the PLC-2000 and begins when any HS #3 PUMP is placed into service. B. PLC-2000 will check for Clearwell Level By-Passes initiated by operator via HMI. (a) If Clearwell #1 or #2 Low Level Lock-Out Bypass Switch is active then pump interlocks for Clearwell #1 or #2 Low Level are bypassed for the Pump Operations has selected to drain the Clearwell(s). See Section 3.10 of this document for more information. (b) If Clearwell #1 or #2 Calibration Level Low Lock-Out Bypass Switch is active then all Pump interlocks for Clearwell #1 or #2 Low Level are bypassed. See Section 3.11 of this document for more information. C. PLC-2000 will then check the following parameters: 1. Status of pump ESD. 2. If Clearwell #1 and/or #2 Level is NOT Low Level and 3. If Motor Vibration Level is NOT in High alarm and 4. If Motor Temperature Level is NOT in High alarm and 5. If Pump Vibration Level is NOT in High alarm and 6. If Pump Temperature Level is NOT in High alarm and 7. If Pump Discharge Pressure is NOT High in High alarm 8. If all above parameters are met, then February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 D. The HS#3 Start Pump Command Sequence will Command the Pump Discharge Valve to Close. E. PLC-2000 will wait for Discharge Valve CLOSE Indication (ZSO_XXXX) then Command Pump Motor Start. F. Once a Run indication has been received by PLC-2000 from the selected Pump starter relay, a Discharge Valve OPEN command will be issued. If PLC-2000 does not indicate Pump Discharge Valve Open within 10 minutes after commanded open then it will issue an alarm “Pump Discharge Valve Open FAILURE” alarm. (a) If “Pump Discharge Valve Open FAILURE” alarm, then Pump Sequence will be aborted by commanding a Pump Stop Sequence G. If Pump Discharge Pressure exceeds programmed High-High Shutdown Set Point then Pump will be commanded to shut down and Pump Discharge Valve will be commanded to immediately close. H. If PLC does not receive a RUN indication signal from the motor starter and a discharge pressure increase within 20 seconds of an issued START command, then alarm operator. I. For VFD controlled Pumps, PLC-2000 outputs the minimum speed set point to the motor variable frequency drive and provides speed control of the motor to reach operator- entered set point for flow or pressure control by ramping up VFD speed in accordance with the Engineer provided operational parameters. Default process variable for speed control shall be DISCHARGE HEADER PRESSURE with a HIGH FLOW or LOW FLOW override. 3.8 HS # 3 PUMP STATION MONITOR AND CONTROL SEQUENCE NARRATIVE A. PLC-2000 will provide information to the Plant HMI and Historian to monitor, record, and trend the following Process Parameters at a minimum: 1. Clearwell #1 Level A 2. Clearwell #1 Level B 3. Clearwell #2 Level A 4. Clearwell #2 Level B 5. Pump Discharge Header Pressure 6. Individual HS#3 Pump Flow Rate 7. HS#3 Pump Station TOTAL Flow Rate, (sum total of individual pump flow rates) 8. Pump Motor Electrical Parameters via serial communications (Modbus TCP/IP) with the Motor Protection Relays (SEL-710) a. Amperage b. Voltage c. Power (KVA) 9. Motor Vibration Levels 10. Motor Bearing Temperatures 11. Pump Vibration Levels 12. Pump Bearing Temperatures 13. Operator initiated Clearwell #1 Drain Interlock By-Passes for Clearwell #1 Low Level Interlock 14. Operator initiated Clearwell #1 Calibration Interlock By-Passes for Clearwell #1 Low Level Interlock February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 15. Operator initiated Clearwell #2 Drain Interlock By-Passes for Clearwell #2 Low Level Interlock 16. Operator initiated Clearwell #2 Calibration Interlock By-Passes for Clearwell #2 Low Level Interlock 17. Pump Discharge Valve Local / Remote 18. Pump Stop / Start, Local / Remote 19. Refer to High Service Setpoints documentation for instrumentation calibration ranges and control and alarm setpoints. B. For VFD controlled Pumps the PLC will monitor motor speed and provide PRESSURE or FLOW control by adjusting motor speed. 1. Default process variable for speed control shall be DISCHARGE HEADER PRESSURE with a HIGH FLOW or LOW FLOW override. 2. Additional process demand required to maintain the Operator-specified system pressure setpoint shall be provided by PLC-2000 starting constant-speed pumps one at a time. a. When system pressure drops below an Operator-specified setpoint and the controlling VFD is operating at the maximum allowed speed as dictated by the Engineer provided operational parameters, PLC-2000 shall start the next constant-speed pump that is in a 30-day based lowest-runtime schedule. 3. When system demand is above the Operator-specified system pressure setpoint and the controlling VFD is operating at the minimum allowed speed as dictated by the Engineer provided operational parameters, PLC-2000 shall stop constant speed pumps one at a time. a. Constant speed pumps with the highest runtime shall be stopped first. 3.9 HS # 3 PUMP STOP SEQUENCE NARRATIVE A. When either an Operator or the control system logic issues a Pump Stop Command: 1. For Constant Speed Pumps: a. PLC-2000 will issue a Close command to the selected Pump Discharge Valve. PLC-2000 will wait for Discharge Valve Closed Indication (ZSC_XXXX) then Command Pump Motor shutdown command. b. If PLC-2000 does not indicate Pump Discharge Valve Closed within the time frame allotted by the Engineer provided operational parameters after commanded close then it will issue an alarm “ Pump Discharge Valve Close FAILURE” c. Operator shall have option via the SCADA system or locally via the local shutdown button to force pump shutdown if Pump Discharge Valve Close FAILURE occurs and the pump motor continues to run. 2. For VFD’s: a. PLC-2000 will begin to ramp down VFD speed at the rate provided in the Engineer provided operational parameters to the minimum speed as provided in the Engineer provided operational parameters. b. PLC-2000 will issue a Close command to the selected Pump Discharge Valve. PLC-2000 will wait for Discharge Valve Closed Indication (ZSC_XXXX) then Command Pump Motor shutdown command. c. If PLC-2000 does not indicate Pump Discharge Valve Closed within the time frame allotted by the Engineer provided operational parameters February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 after commanded close then it will issue an alarm “ Pump Discharge Valve Close FAILURE” d. Operator shall have option via the SCADA system or locally via the local shutdown button to force pump shutdown if Pump Discharge Valve Close FAILURE occurs and the pump motor continues to run. 3.10 LOW LEVEL LOCKOUT BYPASS A. This bypass should be used to start a single pump when Clearwell #1 or #2 is to be drained for maintenance purposes. B. The button to initiate a Clearwell #1 or #2 low level lockout bypass is on the control screen for each individual pump. A timer, “Drain By-Pass Timer” will begin and run for 4 hours (Operator configurable). If Low Level By-Pass Timer expires before the Low Level Lock-Out Bypass Switch is de-activated, an Alarm should be sent to the HMI indicating “Drain By-Pass Switch Active”. C. In High Service #3, only one pump shall be bypassed at a time for use in draining the clearwell. D. This bypass will not keep other pumps running if a low level condition occurs in the Clearwells. 3.11 CALIBRATION BYPASS A. This switch should be used when preventive maintenance calibration is being performed on the level transmitters on Clearwell #1 or #2. B. A Calibration Bypass switch is located on each High Service Building #3 Overview Screen. C. This switch, when activated, will allow for the Clearwell #1 or #2 low level lockout by- pass of all pumps in the building for which the switch is active. A timer, “Calibration By- Pass Timer” will begin and run for 4 hours (Operator configurable). If Calibration By- Pass Timer expires before the Calibration Level Low Lock-Out Bypass Switch is de- activated, an Alarm should be sent to the HMI indicating “Calibration By-Pass Switch Active D. When Clearwell #1 or #2 level transmitter is calibrated, deactivate the Calibration Switch for High Service #2.” 3.12 PUMP SEGREGATION OF HS#3 A. High Service building #3 pumps shall be divided into two (2) sets of pumps with suction and discharge valves to isolate each set for service. B. Each set of pumps shall have a dedicated VFD for 1 pump in the set. C. The controls for High Service Building #3 shall be configured to allow operation of the system with any set of pumps offline or the entirety of High Service Building #2. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 7 Sequence Of Operations – 40 96 01 END OF SECTION Symbol Symbol Name Description Terminator Used to depict the start/end of a sequence Decision Used to indicate a decision in the sequence Action Used to indicate an action or math function Input/Output Used to indicate input/output command in the sequence Display Message Used to indicate a message sent to the HMI Predefined-Sequence Used to indicate calling another defined sequence Off-Page Connector Used to indicate an off page connection On-Page Connector Used to indicate an on page connection Annotation Used to indicate a note Label Pg. # Division 41 Material Processing and Handling Equipment February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 6 Bridge and Hoist Systems – 41 22 25 SECTION 41 22 25 BRIDGE AND HOIST SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, test and place in satisfactory operation the electric overhead traveling bridge crane with controls and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to, hoist, bridge, trolley, service walkway, motor starters, limit switches and push button controls. B. Design of the bridge crane runway beams has been provided by the Engineer and is shown on the Structural Drawings. Design of the ASCE rail shall be by the bridge crane manufacturer. Contractor shall coordinate with the bridge crane manufacturer to determine design requirements of the rails and coordinate with building steel work supplier to suit installation. C. Contractor shall confirm and coordinate all related shop drawings inclusive of the bridge crane shop drawings, pump and motor shop drawings, etc. to determine potential conflicts for final installation. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Miscellaneous metal is included in Section 05 50 00 and 05 12 00. B. Field painting is included in Section 09 91 10. C. Electrical work is included in Division 26. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, shop drawings showing details of fabrication and erection of all materials and equipment furnished under this Section. 1.Certified AutoCAD shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, erection and anchor bolt locations. 2.Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3.The total weight of the equipment as well as weights of individual components. 4.A complete component list for all equipment and associated bills of materials. 5.A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. 6.Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. 7.Complete data on motors as well as wiring and control diagrams. B. Operating and Maintenance Data 1.Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 70 00. 2.Provide services of factory-trained service technician, specifically trained on type of equipment specified. Submit qualifications of service technician for approval. Man-day requirements listed exclusive of travel time, and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. a.Installation: to assist in location of anchor bolts; setting, leveling, field erection, etc, coordination of piping, electrical, miscellaneous utility connections: (1) One 8-hour man-day. b.Start up, testing and calibration: (1) One 8-hour man-day. c. Operation and maintenance instruction: C. (1) One 8-hour man-day. Copies of a certificate of compliance with OSHA, Part 1910, Subpart N, Section 1910.179 - Overhead and Gantry Cranes, shall be submitted at the time that shop drawings are February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 6 Bridge and Hoist Systems – 41 22 25 submitted. 1.Design Responsibility a.Certificate of Design: Complete form at end of Section and submit to Engineer prior to manufacture of crane. b.Support Data: Submit following with Certificate of Design: (1) Certification, signed by Texas-registered professional engineer, stating that all members, elements and connections are designed to withstand required loads and forces. (2) Codes and standards to which structural design conforms. 2.Painting manufacturer's current printed recommendations. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with all applicable Federal, State and local codes and with requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) 1.CMAA 70 Rev 2010 (or latest revision) - Specification for Top Running Bridge and Gantry Type Multiple Girder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes. E. Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA). F. National Electrical Code (NEC). G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The overhead bridge crane shall be installed inside the new High Service Pump Station No. 3 to lift pump and motor equipment and appurtenance for maintenance purposes. B. Electrically operated bridge crane shall meet the following requirements: 1.Location; HSPS No. 3 2.SERVICE CLASS; CMAA - “C” 3.Rated Capacity; Tons 4.Bridge; 10 5.Hoist; 10 6.Span; Ft. 57 7.Operating Floor Elev.; as shown on Drawings 8.Crane Rail Elev; * (Top) as shown on Drawings 9.Hook 10.Upper Elev. Limit (Min.); as shown on Drawings 11.Lower Elev. Limit; as shown on Drawings 12.Hoist 13.Speed; fpm 20/3.3 fpm, 2 - speed 14.Hp (Max.); 15 Hp 15.Trolley 16.Speed; fpm 65 fpm step less 17.Hp (Max.); 1 Hp 18.Bridge 19.Speed; fpm 120 fpm VFD, step less 20.Hp (Max.); (2) @ 1.5 Hp 21.Operating Voltage; 460 Volt/3 ph/60 Hz 22. *Approximate, supplier to verify based upon rail design. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design of the overhead bridge crane shall be in general conformance to CMAA 70, except as otherwise specified herein. B. Permanently mark the capacity of the hoist, trolley and crane on each unit, in easy to read letters and a prominent position. C. Equipment of manufacturer's latest and proven design, compatible with functions required. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 6 Bridge and Hoist Systems – 41 22 25 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Suitably cover equipment and crate to provide protection against weather and possible damage in handling, transporting and storage. Protect controls and electrical equipment from moisture and block, brace and otherwise restrain to prevent damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment herein specified shall be manufactured by Proserv Anchor Crane Group, Houston, TX; ACCO Industries Inc. - Hoist & Crane Division, York, PA; Whiting Corp., Monee, IL; or Engineer Approved equal. 2.2 CRANE STRUCTURAL RUNWAY STEEL WORK A. Steel supports including ASCE Crane Rails are furnished under Section 05 50 00. B. Building steel supplier shall furnish runway rail supply and conform to straightness tolerance per CMAA 70. Third party (or crane supplier) shall report on the straightness of the runway prior to installation of the crane. If runway is not within CMAA tolerance, steel supplier shall correct. C. Provide structural steel bracing to assure rigidity of construction and to maintain accurate gauge of the length of crane. Structural steel shall conform to requirements as specified under Section 05 12 00. D. Verify all dimensions and clearances in field prior to erection and take responsibility for proper fitting and operation of equipment. E. Runway rail shall be exactly parallel and horizontal, level throughout, conforming to applicable code regarding size and performance. F. Include all stops at ends of all crane and trolley runs. The crane manufacturer is responsible for design of stops. Furnish and install materials required for stops. All stops securely anchored and positioned to protect adjacent construction, materials, equipment or similar obstructions. Design stops with capability of withstanding impact imposed by motion of fully loaded hoist and trolley or crane. 2.3 BRIDGE A. The crane bridge shall be double girder top running type. The crane girder shall be designed to resist all vertical, lateral and torsional forces combined as specified in CMAA 70 (Latest Version). B. The girder shall be rigidly connected with end trucks. Connections shall be adequate to resist the horizontal and vertical forces as defined by CMAA, and designed and constructed to keep entire bridge structure square and aligned under all operating conditions. C. Top running trolley on ASCE Type crane rails securely fastened to top of bridge girders, with rail clips or anti-creep bars at ends to hold rail in proper alignment. All rail joints shall be adequately supported by the sub structure. D. Bridge end trucks of welded steel construction providing rigid structure and trucks securely attached to bridge girders with turned bolts. All holes drilled and reamed for matched fit before final assembly and welding. E. The end truck shall have a minimum wheel base 1/7 of crane span. Bridge trucks shall have ball or roller bearings and medium or high carbon steel or high strength alloy steel fixed or rotating type steel axles. Provisions shall be made for easy removal of wheels and axles. The entire truck shall be machined as a unit to ensure perfect alignment. Provisions shall be made to prevent drop of more than one inch in case of axle failure. F. Bridge truck wheels shall be double flanged rolled of forged steel with hardened treads. The wheels shall be designed to carry the maximum wheel load under normal operating conditions without undue wear. The wheel diameter shall not be less than that shown for the maximum load in CMMA 70. G. Either CMAA A-1 or A-4 bridge drive. The driving mechanism shall be designed so travel will be steady and free from vibration or racking in any part of the structure while traveling under maximum load. Skewing forces shall be considered in the design such that tendency for the crane structure to get out of line will be minimized while traveling along the runway under any February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 6 Bridge and Hoist Systems – 41 22 25 operating condition. H. Provide full length checkered steel service walkway on drive side of bridge. Provide platform with 3-rail handrail, complying with OSHA design requirements, at least 42-in high. Protect walkway on all exposed edges with suitable toe guard. Provide short rear trolley service platform. 2.4 HOIST AND TROLLEY A. The hoist shall be close headroom type, with a welded steel trolley frame construction or a combination of both. Hoist shall be rigid construction and any deflections that are incurred while lifting a load shall be incorporated into the design without undue deflection. Provisions shall be made to prevent drop of more than 1-in in case of axle failure. B. Provide two-speed electric hoist with spur-, helical-, or herringbone-friction bearings throughout, including a mechanical load brake and a separate electrically operated motor brake. The shafts of the motor drum and drum pinion shall be designed to run in grease- lubricated-ball or roller bearings. The gear train and bearings shall be designed to be oil-bath or splash lubricated. C. The trolley wheels shall be similar in design and construction to bridge truck wheels. D. The trolley drive shall have a fully enclosed electric motor driving through spur or worm gears driving one wheel on each side of the trolley. The geared transmission shall be completely enclosed in an oiltight housing. Ball or roller bearings shall be used throughout. E. Hoist shall be provided with steel drum designed to withstand combined crushing and bending loads and not less than two complete wraps of hoisting rope to remain in grooves when hook is at lowest position for lift specified and no overlapping of rope when hook is at highest point. Machined drum grooves having right and left hand grooves for double reeving. F. Provide a block operated hoist limit switch as an ultimate upper limit switch, and a rotary switch as a primary upper / lower travel limit switch. In addition, provide an overload sensing device to shut down hoist if an overload is sensed (+10% of full rated load). G. The non-twisting type hoisting cables shall have flexible high strength plow steel load safety factor of 5 to 1. H. Load block frames shall be of steel construction with rolled steel or forged steel hook, supported on ball or roller thrust bearings, with the hook rotating freely on bearings. I. Provide only safety type hooks. 2.5 BRAKES A. The brakes shall be designed for assembly on the driving motor shaft or gear train per the requirements of CMAA requirements. B. Electric brakes shall be provided for bridge motion, trolley motion, and hoist motion. C. The bridge and trolley motors shall be furnished with self-adjusting AC disc-type brakes. The hoist motor shall be furnished with AC oil encapsulated disc brakes which holds its load and is applied automatically on removal of power. The bridge and trolley brakes shall be designed per CMAA requirements. Provide mechanical load brakes for hoist motion to prevent overspeeding. Hoist brakes shall be designed per CMAA requirements. All brakes shall be easily accessible for external adjustment by removing cover plates. 2.6 MOTORS A. Motors for Hoists, Trolley and Bridge: Trolley enclosed, reversible, Class F insulation, induction motors especially adapted to crane service and suitable for operation on 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, alternating current. Maximum 1,800 rpm (synchronous). Two-speed hoist motors. 2.7 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A. Supply a complete integral electrical control system with the electric bridge crane equipment (by crane manufacturer) consisting of starters, circuit breakers, overload relays, limit switches, control transformer for a 120 Volt control circuit, control relays and controlling devices in a NEMA 12 enclosure. B. Furnish magnetic controls for the hoist and trolley motors. Furnish VFD for the bridge travel. Controls shall be designed to permit "inching" in both forward and reverse directions under full load. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 6 Bridge and Hoist Systems – 41 22 25 C. Compliance: All electrical equipment including motors, controls, resistors, brakes plus all conduit, wiring, panels and enclosures shall be in accordance with applicable requirements for materials, workmanship, construction and installation in latest standards of NEMA and NEC. 2.8 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL A. The crane shall be pendant push button operated. B. Crane shall be operated from a manually operated traveling pendant push-button control station as a part of festooned flexible cable messenger system suspended from anti-friction bearing trolleys operating on a rigid metal track. The system shall be such that the crane, trolley and hoist can be moved to any position when operating the unit from the operating floor level. C. The pendant push button control station shall be provided with the following push buttons. Each push button shall be clearly marked to indicate its function: 1.Hoist a.High Speed (1)Up (2) Down b.Low Speed (1)Up (2) Down 2.Trolley a.Forward b.Reverse 3.Bridge a.Forward b.Reverse 4.Power a.ON b.OFF D. Pendant push-button station shall have a grounding conductor between a ground terminal in the station and the crane. E. Mount control equipment in an enclosed compartment which forms an integral part of bridge crane and includes transformer for a 120 Volt control circuit. 2.9 CONDUCTORS AND COLLECTORS A. Manufacturers: Insul-8-Bar Protected Conductors manufactured by Conductix-Wampfler., Omaha, NE; Safety-T-Bar Conductor System by Howell Corp., Stratford, CT; Duct-C-Bar Conductor System by Duct-O-Wire Co., Long Beach, CA or acceptable equivalent products. B. Use equipment and accessories approved by UL. C. For conductor for electric current supply to traveling bridge, use safety type in which conductor is shielded by a molded-plastic cover that surrounds conductor except for a slotted opening shaped to contour of collector head. Provide separate conductor for each phase and ground. (Dual conductors in a single insulating shield will not be acceptable.) Make conductor of copper as necessary for carrying maximum anticipated current. Molded-plastic shield shall be of high dielectric strength and resistant to corrosion and deterioration from sunlight or weather. Insulated supports shall be spaced per supplier’s recommendation or no more than 5-ft apart. D. Use dual arm collectors of sliding shoe type with an adjustable spring-load arm capable of horizontal or vertical movement to automatically adapt to irregularities of the conductor. Set shoe in a molded-plastic head that will prevent external contact with shoe when it is running on conductor. There shall be no exposed bare current carrying surfaces or wires in collector or arm where shoe is in contact with conductor. E. Use bridge festooned span conductor system for trolley electrification. F. Furnish junction box to connect conductors to power supply circuit. Power supply to junction box is specified under appropriate electrical sections. 2.10 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. Finish paint shall be factory applied on all components in accordance with Section 09 96 00. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 6 Bridge and Hoist Systems – 41 22 25 B. Shop painting is specified under Section 09 91 10. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify all dimensions and clearances in field prior to erection and be responsible for proper fitting and operation of equipment. B. Install crane in strict conformance with recommendations of each manufacturer and under direct supervision of manufacturer's representative. C. Obtain approval before attaching any rigging or hoisting equipment to any part of building structure. 3.2 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. Perform field tests before final acceptance under supervision of manufacturer's representative. B. Test crane after installation is complete to ensure compliance with this Section and standard. The crane shall be tested at its rated load. Contractor shall furnish test load as required. The crane functions such as hoisting and lowering, trolley travel, bridge travel, limit switches, locking and safety devices shall be tested to determine that the equipment will perform satisfactorily and safely without failure of any parts. Any defects in the equipment indicated by the tests shall be replaced/corrected and retested at no additional costs to the Owner. C. Include a check of horizontal and vertical alignment of rails. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 1 Safety Devices/Equipment – 41 67 19 SECTION 41 67 19 SAFETY DEVICES/EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install safety devices as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, shop drawings showing materials, construction, finishes, hanging devices and details, description of kit contents and ratings for all equipment specified herein. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and construction operations. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. Where reference is made to one the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A. Furnish one Industrial First Aid Kit, Model 8162 by Johnson and Johnson; or equal. Provide with approved stainless steel wall fastening devices. Locate in the Pump Room of High Service Pump Station No. 3 or as directed by the Owner in writing. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER A. Fire extinguisher shall be 20-lb capacity dry chemical type, UL rated for 20A-80B;C. Extinguisher shall be red-enameled steel cylinder with indicating gauge and shall be Model 20E by J. L. Industries; Model 20TAS-5 by Kidde Bellsville; Model 20ABC by Elkhard Brass Mfg. Co., or equal. B. Mark Series II Fire Extinguisher Braket, by J. L. Industries, or equal designed for the units furnished, shall be provided for fire extinguisher. C. Provide one unit in the Electrical Room of High Service Pump Station No. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all devices specified in conformance with approved shop drawings at locations directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Division 43 Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification, and Storage Equipment February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 SECTION 43 21 01 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP(S) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and completely install, put in operation and field test horizontally mounted, axial split case single stage, double suction, dual volute, constant and variable speed, centrifugal pumps and motors as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. Electric motors shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section and shall be as specified in Section 26 20 10. The pump Manufacturer shall coordinate the motor design with the VFD supplier. The VFDs will be supplied by others. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for horizontal split-case centrifugal pump(s). Include the cost for this work in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 03; however, anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section. B. Surface preparation and shop priming is included in Section 09 96 10. C. Field Vibration and Torsional Resonance testing costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Refer to Part 3 of this section for additional detail. D. Instrumentation construction as specified in Division 40 and as shown on the Drawings. E. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division 40. F. Electrical work per Division 26 and the related Drawings. Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives are included in Section 26 29 23.01. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1.Certified dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 2.Certified foundation, pump support and anchor bolt plans and details. 3.Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump installation. 4.Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the detail specifications. 5.Total weight of pumping unit. 6.A statement of guarantee that all required analyses as specified in Paragraph 1.6 E through 1.6 J below have been completed and that the specified limitations will be met. B. Design Data 1.Manufacturer's certified rating curves (including indication of the AOR and POR), to satisfy the specified design conditions, showing pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSH3) across the entire range of operation coupled with the required NPSHA margin. Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and speed and include shut off head. This information shall be prepared specifically for the pump proposed. Additionally, catalog sheets showing a family of curves shall be provided February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 separately from the performance curve. 2.Pump design shall be for variable speed operation. The pump shall be designed to operate at reduced speeds to achieve the low flow limits specified in the Pump Schedule located at 1.7 A. Include pump performance at five reduced speeds. 3.Provide actual WR2 for each pump and motor being supplied. C. Test Reports 1.Certified motor test data as described in Section 26 20 10. 2.Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated Hp, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Submit a certified statement from the motor manufacturer that the motors are capable of continuous operation on the power supply from the variable frequency drives to be furnished without affecting their design life for bearings or windings. 3.A schedule of the date of shop testing and delivery of the equipment to the job site. 4.Description of pump factory test procedures and equipment. 5.Pump factory test report. 6.Description of pump field test procedures and equipment. 7.Field test report. 8.Rotodynamic analysis report(s). 9.Vibration report. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1.Complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section as provided in Section 01 33 06. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the latest version of published standards of the following, as applicable: 1.American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 2.American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 3.American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6.American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 7.American Welding Society (AWS) 8.Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 9.Hydraulic Institute (HI) 10.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 11.National Electrical Code (NEC) 12.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 13.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 14.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 15.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 16.American Water Works Association (AWWA) B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the pumps, motors, couplings, and base plates shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump Manufacturer. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping system including pumps, motors, variable speed drives, base plates and controls as specified. B. The equipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment similar to the applications stated in Paragraphs 1.1 and 1.7. Units specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. The equipment furnished shall be February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest version of Hydraulic Institute Standards, except where otherwise specified herein. D. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. E. Prior to manufacture, submit for approval vibration analyses engineering reports outlined in this Part to demonstrate that the specified limitations will be met. For the dynamic analysis described, minimum and maximum operating speeds will be in accordance with the operating speeds required to satisfy the conditions of operation specified in Section 1.7. The pump manufacturer shall perform the dynamic analysis presented in the following paragraph. F. Structural dynamic analysis of the combined pump, motor, and baseplate. – The structural dynamic analysis shall predict no first or second bending mode frequencies within a range from 25 percent below minimum operating speed to 25 percent above maximum operating speed. G. Lateral rotodynamic analysis – The lateral rotodynamic analysis shall identify and predict that the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed or 25 percent below the minimum pump speed. Any pump component excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. H. Torsional rotodynamic analysis shall identify and predict that no torsional natural frequencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range. Any torsional rotor dynamic frequency within the above stated margin must have a forced response evaluation performed. The forces associated with the torsional rotor dynamic frequency within the above stated margin shall not reduce the rotor fatigue life. Any lateral rotodynamic frequencies not satisfying the ±25% margins will not result in a forced damped response that will allow vibration amplitudes to exceed the established limits at any operating speed. Speed avoidance settings in the operational strategy will not be considered as an acceptable solution. I. Vibration amplitude measured in the field shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4 latest edition. The pump manufacturer shall perform both lateral and torsional critical speed analyses to identify and ensure that (a) the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed and that (b) no torsional natural frequencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range and that any blade excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. Prior to manufacture, a report shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval indicating that the specified limitations will be met. J. Vibration, when measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on any pump or motor bearing housing, shall not exceed limits set by Hydraulic Institute Standard 9.6.4-2009 at any speed between maximum speed and minimum speed as defined by the hydraulic conditions. K. The pump and motor shall be designed for the reverse rotation with reverse speed operation that is 125% of forward speed. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The pumps shall be horizontal axial split case single stage centrifugal dual volute pumps with double suction enclosed type impeller with stable constantly rising curve to shut off head, renewable casing/impeller rings, flexible coupling and one-piece rigid structural steel base plate under the pump and driving motor. B. The pumping units depicted and specified herein will be used to pump finished potable water from the O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant (ONSWTP) to different hydraulic grades within the City of Corpus Christi water distribution system. C. Pumping units start and stop against a closed discharge valve and accordingly shall be capable of operating at shut-off head conditions for sustained periods of up to 1 minute duration without damage and without requiring increased preventive maintenance efforts. D. Key design conditions and other data are shown in the following table. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 Pump Schedule To Section 43 21 01 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pumps Pump Designation HSP-12, 13, 14, 15 HSP-16, 17 Capacity (gpm) (Guarantee Point 1) 13,700 13,700 Head (ft) (Guarantee Point 1) 260.8 260.8 Minimum Head (ft) at full speed 179 179 Capacity (gpm) at minimum head 24,500± 5% 24,500± 5% Minimum Shut-Off Head (ft) 288 288 Maximum NPSHR (ft) 40 40 Fluid Pumped Potable Water Potable Water Drive Horsepower (HP) 1500 1500 Constant or Adjustable Speed Constant Speed Variable Speed Maximum Speed (rpm) 900 900 Minimum Speed (rpm) 890 As required by minimum flow condition specified elsewhere. Elevation of Minimum Clearwell Level (ft) 63.5 (bottom of GST floor is 51.50 ft) 63.5 (bottom of GST floor is 51.50 ft) Elevation of Maximum Clearwell Level (ft) 69.00 69.00 Pump Impeller Centerline Elevation (ft) 48.80 48.80 Maximum Water Temperature (F) 95 95 Minimum Water Temperature (F) 40 40 Minimum Pump Efficiency (%) @ Guarantee Point 1 87.2% 87.2% Motor 4160V/3 Ph/60 Hz, TEFC, inverter duty 4160V/3 Ph/60 Hz, TEFC, inverter duty Typical FLOWSERVE Make and Model No. 400-LNN-800, 890 rpm 400-LNN-800, 890 rpm E. Where total head (TH) is referred to in conjunction with the specific discharge requirements, it shall be understood to consist of the sum of the pressure head plus the velocity head, in feet, at a distance of 3 pipe diameters downstream of the discharge nozzle of the pump minus the pressure head and the velocity head at the suction nozzle of the pump. The efficiency of the pump shall be understood to be based upon total head as just defined. F. All materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall be suitable for potable water. Materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall not contain more than 8.0% lead. All pump and motor maintenance and any future pump or motor removal and replacement activities shall be accomplishable utilizing the 10-ton bridge crane specified in Section 41 22 25. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 period at the site. Store equipment indoors and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until approved by the Engineer in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if prelubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and startup of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not prelubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage, while waiting completion of installation and start up, by the application of Exxon, Rust Ban No. 392 or equal treatment. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all special tools and test equipment required for the proper servicing of all equipment. B. C. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump model. 1.Complete set of wearing rings for one pump (two impeller and two case wear rings). 2.Two complete sets of packing rings and two sets of mechanical seal repair kits, as required. Provide bronze split-packing glands and bronze split lantern rings necessary to convert to packed stuffing boxes on one pump. 3.Complete set of gaskets and O rings. 4.One set of pump bearings. D. A current spare part price list for all manufacturer recommended spare parts. Prices shall remain in effect for a period not less than one year after start-up and final acceptance of each pumping unit. E. Crate and deliver spare parts in substantial wood or painted steel boxes with hinged covers. Clearly and indelibly identify the contents of each box on its exterior with stenciled paint or lamacoid plastic labels. Each part shall be sealed, wrapped or otherwise protected from corrosion during storage. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The pumping unit (i.e. pump, motor, coupling, base, and other pump OEM supplied accessories) will have a 24 month warranty after Owner acceptance. The warranty will not extend beyond 30 months after equipment delivery. This warranty is for defects in workmanship and or materials on the above mentioned equipment and excludes failure due to erosion, corrosion, and wear, and is further qualified by the requirement that the Contractor properly install the unit and the Owner properly operate and maintain the unit. Upon notice of defect the Contractor will promptly remove the part or unit from service and load it on pump OEM’s truck at the jobsite. The pump OEM will promptly repair and/or replace the part or unit and return it to the jobsite at which point the Contractor will unload and install the part or unit at his expense. Time lost while the unit is unavailable will be added to the end of the existing warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flowserve, Fairbanks Nijhuis, ITT-Goulds. 2.2 GENERAL February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. The pumps and motors shall be designed and built for 24 hour continuous service at any and all points within the range of operation listed in Part 1.7, without overheating, without cavitation, without exceeding motor nameplate HP (without exceeding service factor), and without excessive vibration or strain. C. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially constructed to meet the specified requirement. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and adjustment. D. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Once levelled, aligned, and anchored, pump skid shall be filled with high strength non-shrink epoxy grout. Furnish anchor bolt calculations considering all forces and moments for approval. E. Each major piece of equipment shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles and power and service factors. 2.3 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The pumps shall operate throughout the entire operating range, within the vibration limits specified in Paragraph 1.6 F above. B. Flow separation at the inlet of impeller shall not be permitted when it could result in damage to the impeller. Obvious, excessive hydraulic noise that is characteristic of flow separation shall be deemed as evidence that flow separation is occurring at the level that will cause damage. 2.4 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Casings shall be close grained ASTM A48 Class 35 cast iron of suitable cross section and suitably ribbed to withstand all stresses and strains of service at full operating pressure. Casings shall be of the double volute type split on the horizontal center line with the side suction and discharge nozzle cast integrally with the lower half. Removal of the upper half of the casing must allow the rotating element to be removed without disconnecting the suction and discharge flanges. Lifting eyes shall be cast into the upper casing. Flange and casings shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psig. The casing shall be provided with tapped and plugged (removable) vent, drain and gauge connections. Suction and discharge connections shall be 125 lbs ANSI Standard flat face flanges positioned as indicated on the Drawings. B. Impellers shall be of the enclosed double suction type of ASTM A744 Grade CF-8M (Type 316L stainless steel, Grade CF3M - certified analysis of the impeller pour metal required). Impeller shall be cast in one piece and shall be two-plane dynamically balanced to grade ISO 1940, G6.3 on a mandrel, and then two-plane dynamically balanced to Grade G2.5 on the pump shaft. Rotation of the impeller shall correspond to the pump discharge orientation as indicated on the Drawings. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and firmly held in place. The arrangement shall be such that the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse rotation. C. Wearing Rings 1. The pumps shall be provided with removable 13% chromed hardened steel wearing rings for both the casing and impeller, with the wearing surfaces parallel to the axis of rotation. The impeller wearing ring system shall be designed to compensate for a minimum of 1/4 inch wear. 2. Wearing rings shall be securely fastened to prevent any relative motion and designed for easy replacement. 3. Furnish the casing wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA-15 300-350 Bhn hardness. 4. Furnish the impeller wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA-15 200-250 February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 Bhn hardness. D. Each pump shall be equipped with John Crane, A.W. Chesterton, or Flowserve split-type mechanical seals furnished with ceramic stationary and carbon rotating seal faces. 1. The water seal connections on the pump(s) shall be connected to the pump discharge volute. The seal water pipes shall be sized to provide sufficient, but not excessive, seal water rate per the pump manufacturer’s recommendations. E. The pump thrust bearings shall be of the heavy duty double row anti friction type arranged for oil lubrication designed in accordance with AFBMA Standards for a minimum B 10 life of 100,000 hours. Bearing housings shall be complete with constant level oiler and sight-level indicator. Bearing temperatures at an ambient of 104⁰F shall not exceed 200⁰F when measured by RTD without the addition of external cooling. Removable bearing housings shall be supplied with 360⁰ mounting via a register fit, or 180⁰ mounting, bolted and doweled to the pump bearing brackets cast integral with the lower half casing. F. Pump shaft(s) shall be of heat treated alloy steel, rigid shaft type and of sufficient size to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor, accurately machined over the entire length and free from harmful and damaging vibrations. The shaft(s) shall be protected from wear in the stuffing box areas by renewable shaft sleeves of 316 stainless steel. The sleeves shall be sealed to prevent leakage between the sleeve and the shaft. Shrink fit shaft sleeves will not be acceptable. The sleeves shall be key-driven. The use of glued sleeves to prevent leakage is not acceptable. G. Furnish and install tapped holes in the suction and discharge flanges or nozzles and 1/2 inch copper pipe and nipples complete with quarter turn bronze plug valves for use in connecting pressure gauges. Nipples shall be of such length and provided with elbows if necessary so that a pressure gauge may be easily installed and read. Also, plumb a 1” casing drain to edge of pump baseplate using copper pipe and fittings and a bronze gate valve. Contractor to route the pump drain through 1” schedule 80 PVC pipe to nearby floor drain. Securely clamp the drain pipe to the floor to avoid creating a trip hazard. H. The pumps shall be provided with two mineral oil (NSF-61 listed) filled suction and discharge pressure gauges with a 1/4 inch NPT inlet and 2.5 inch dials. The suction gauges shall be of the compound type to indicate both vacuum and pressure and be graduated to read 30 psig positive pressures and 30 inch mercury negative pressures. The discharge gauges shall be graduated from 0 to 200 psig. The gauges shall be connected to the pump suction and discharge nozzle taps. All fittings and cocks shall be red brass. The pressure gauges shall be equal to Figure 1980 Solfrunt standard gauges, Model 1500, by Amtek, U.S. Gauge Division. Plumb gauges to a gauge bracket that supports the gauges side-by-side and located the gauge centerlines to coincide with the pump shaft centerline. I. The pump(s) shall be capable of temporary operation at and near shut off head during the first minute, maximum, opening and closing of the pump discharge control valve as the pump starts and stops. J. The pump and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to successfully withstand a maximum turbining speed of the unit resulting from backflow through the pump of 150 percent of the design operating speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head equal with the duty point, whichever is higher. 2.5 PUMP DRIVE SYSTEM A. Each pump shall be driven by a horizontal solid shaft squirrel cage induction electric motor with a horsepower and speed as specified in Paragraph 1.7 above, and shall meet all the requirements of Section 26 20 10. B. All motors shall be identical in make and manufacture and compatible with the VFDs specified in Section 26 29 23.01. C. The pump motors shall be suitable for driving the pumps continuously over the entire pumping range. The pump motors shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The motors shall be constructed and guaranteed to withstand runaway reverse speed equal to 150 percent of synchronous speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head equal with the duty point, whichever is higher. D. Each pump shall be directly connected to its driver by means of a Rexnord-Thomas flexible disc spacer-type coupling, suitably sized to transmit the required driving torque and to accommodate unavoidable shaft misalignment. The coupling shall be designed to February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 accommodate slight shaft misalignments, absorb shock, vibration, and pulsation. Coupling shall accept load reversals with minimum backlash. Disc packs shall be stainless steel. Other surfaces (except bores and keyways) shall have a manganese phosphate corrosion resistant coating. 2.6 BASE PLATES A. The pump and driving motor shall be mounted on an extended fabricated carbon steel structural steel base plate (bent form bases not acceptable), with provision to collect leakage and shall be of sufficient size and rigidity to support the unit and prevent harmful or damaging vibration. The baseplate design shall meet ANSI/HI 1.3-2009 Rotodynamic Pumps for Design and Application, and in particular the grouted fabricated steel baseplate requirements. Demonstrate compliance with this specification requirement at time of submittal. Post weld heat treatment is required to stress relieve the base prior to machining. Furnish a certificate of compliance from the heat treating sub-vendor as part of the quality assurance package. Machine equipment mounting surfaces flat and parallel to one-another. A 1-inch drain tap and Type 304 stainless steel pipe nipple shall be provided. The pump and motor skid drain shall be piped to the closest floor drain using schedule 10 Type 304 stainless steel piping. The steel base shall be anchored to the level surface of a concrete pad with suitably sized Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Design base such that Contractor can place non- shrink epoxy grout within the baseplate and the motor box without air pockets. See standard mechanical details on the Drawings. 2.7 SHOP TESTING A. The Engineer shall witness the factory test and inspect all equipment to be furnished under this Section, prior to shipment from point of manufacture. 1. A complete test report for each pump, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least all information required in Paragraphs 1.4 and 1.6 above, and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report, shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the pumps are shipped. B. Each pump being furnished in this Section shall be factory tested with one of the job motors in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Certified copies of the Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied prior to conducting a pump performance test. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the Engineer at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. Manufacturer to provide travel, accommodations, and meals for two people for the anticipated duration of the testing. All testing, required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. 1. Each pump’s head vs capacity shall be full speed tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as listed in Paragraph 2.2 above. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded at shut off head. Sufficient test point readings shall be made to establish complete head flow capacity, efficiency and brake horsepower curves for each pump. 2. In addition, one pump shall be tested at three additional equally spaced speeds between minimum and maximum speeds using the test lab variable speed drive. 3. All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. 4. Test each pump for NPSHR at reduced speed. Generate a four point NPSH3 curve that includes one point within 10 percent of the rated condition-of-service, and one point within 10% of the maximum flow rate. C. Pump motor tests as specified in Section 26 20 10 shall be submitted for approval by Engineer prior to shipping. D. Pump Test Acceptance Grade for SHOP TEST shall be GRADE 1U per ANSI/HI 14.6 - 2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Design/Guarantee Points). 2.8 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIMING A. Each pump, motor, and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finished coated in February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 accordance with Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Color shall be “Barr Blue” and an adequate supply of touch up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. B. For pump interior surfaces apply Belzona 1341N Superglidemetal coating for potable water to the casting wetted parts to improve efficiency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans. B. Qualified supervisory services, including manufacturers' engineering representatives, shall be provided for a minimum of 10 man days to ensure that the work is done in a manner fully approved by the respective equipment manufacturer. The pump manufacturer's representatives shall specifically supervise the installation and alignment of the pump with the driver, baseplate leveling (including coupling alignment) pre-grout and post-grout, the alignment of the connecting piping and the installation of the field installed mechanical seal. If there are difficulties in the startup or operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the City. Services of the manufacturer's representatives and training shall be provided when the first pump is started, with follow up visits upon startup of each subsequent pump. C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the Engineer. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. D. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of his/her equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.3 FIELD TESTS A. Perform such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps and motors and variable speed drives conform to the capacities specified shall be performed. A 30 day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified at no additional costs to the Owner. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above, and certified results of tests shall be submitted. If all required testing procedures are not possible by pumping into the system, then bypass pumping shall be employed as necessary to facilitate testing. The Contractor shall provide, calibrate and install all temporary gauges and flow meters, shall make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 30 days prior to testing. The field performance tests shall report clearwell water level, pump operating speed, pump suction and discharge pressure, position of suction and discharge valves, pump motor amperage and voltage, and flow rate readings when the test is performed. The calibration certificates of the temporary instruments used in the test shall be included in the field test report for submittal. B. After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the Contractor shall retain the services of Machine Dynamics, Inc. (contact Victor Wowk, P.E. at 505-898-2094, victor@machinedyn.com) or Engineering Dynamics Incorporated (contact Troy Feese, P.E. at 210-492-9100, troy_feese@engdyn.com) who are testing firms to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each unit, including both "Bump Tests" and X -Y vibration February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 10 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(s) – 43 21 01 profiles and field torsional critical speed test, to (a) prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and natural frequency analyses and (b) prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports, when operating at any speed within the specified operating range. A written report shall be submitted including a CAD sketch of the unit indicating where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak-to-peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency and (c) peak velocity level, in inches per second. The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problems encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. C. If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with this Section. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action and retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. D. The analysis indicated in Paragraph 3.3B above shall be repeated after six months after the signature testing. A report shall be prepared comparing the results of the six month tests with the results of the signature tests. Significant worsening of the vibration, to be determined by the Engineer, during the six month tests shall require corrective action and retesting. E. The results of ALL pump tests performed under this section shall be submitted in Final O&M Manual. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 SECTION 43 21 02 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to inspect, rehabilitate to like new condition and return to operation horizontally mounted split case single stage pumps, and motors as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. It is intended that the pumps shall be removed from service and shipped to pump refurbisher’s shop for inspection and rehabilitation prior to returning to service. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not; shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during inspection, field testing, and startup of each unit. C. This is a performance based specification. It is the intent of this project to restore the performance to like new condition meeting the performance and efficiency requirements as specified. The impellers furnished shall be factory witness performance tested in a new pump volute. The pump OEM shall guarantee performance to equal the performance of a new unit. D. The rehabilitated pump test will be the condition of performance acceptance. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps as specified herein shall be as defined in Part C – Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01.00, Bid Form. Include the cost for this work as an Additive Alternate bid item. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Manufacturer’s Services are included in Division 40. B. Equipment Checkout, Field Testing and Functional Testing is included in Division 40. C. Acceptance Testing is included in Division 40. D. Vendor Training is included in Section Division 40. E. Field Vibration and Torsional Resonance testing cost shall be borne by 3rd party firm purchased by the Pump Refurbisher. Refer to Part 3.5E of this section for additional detail. F. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section. The Contractor and Pump Refurbisher shall together inspect the baseplate anchor bolts, grout, and concrete foundation. Provide a report describing the condition of each, and any recommended replacement. G. Shop Priming is included in Section 09 91 10. Finish painting is included in Section 09 96 00. H. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 40. SCADA input and output signal requirements for monitoring/control are further defined in the P&ID Drawings, Instrumentation Drawings, and Division 40. I. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division 40. J. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) are specified in Section 26 29 23.01. The pump OEM shall perform a torsional analysis using the new impeller in the rotor to identify any excitation frequencies from the VFD. The VFD OEM will furnish their harmonic analysis for this review. K. Other electrical work except as hereinafter specified is included in Division 26 and the related Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with this Section, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1.Pump Refurbisher shall supply information documenting compliance with the February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 quality assurance requirements as specified under Section 1.6 Quality Assurance. Failure to comply with all Quality Assurance requirements as described herein will disqualify the pump refurbisher from performing the work. 2.Pump Refurbisher will present (for review and Owner acceptance) an example pump inspection report that includes an outline of the anticipated format and a description of the anticipated level of detailed information and digital photography (with photo annotations) anticipated to be submitted for each pump as specified herein. Report shall indicate as observed tolerances as compared to factory specs for all items. This report will be reviewed and approved by the Owner and Engineer prior to submitting the first pump inspection report. 3.Copies of the inspection report, list of findings, recommendations, and estimate of opinion of repair costs for additional items are included in the Base Bid. 4.Repair costs for items not included in the Base Bid scope of work shall be determined as identified in Part 1.2. 5.Certified factory dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 6.Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump re- installation; as applicable. B. Design Data 1.Provide original manufacturer's certified rating curves with the inspection report as available, to document the original design conditions, showing pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSHR). Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and include shut off head. This information shall be specifically for the pump that is to be rehabilitated. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. C. Test Reports 1.Certified motor test data as described in Section Division 40. 2.Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated HP, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at 1/2, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Provide the original motor submittal for record. 3.A schedule of inspection of the disassembled pump at the Pump Refurbisher facility by the Engineer, City, and Construction Manager if elected by the City. 4.Provide a factory test procedure with the submittal documents. Plan a pump performance test per Hydraulic Institute Standard ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Grade 1U (no negative tolerance) as specified in Table 14.6.3.4. A schedule of the date of Factory Witness Testing. Place a shipping hold on impellers until approval of test report by Engineer. 5.Furnish a field pre-inspection and post-repair test procedure for approval. The procedure shall include a list of applicable specifications and national standards that are applicable to the field testing. Include sections on Scope Of Supply, General Arrangement, Function, Test Objectives, Type Of Tests, Acceptance Criteria, Instrument List, Instrument Accuracy, Test Form Blanks. The final report shall include as a minimum, pump and motor field data, visual assessment and field observation, pump hydraulic performance, motor electrical performance, bearing and winding temperatures, vibration and impact test, alignment. From the data presented, provide discussion, draw conclusions, make recommendations, and assign action items. 6.Prior to removal of pump and motor bound for the repair shop perform a pre-removal field test as detailed above. The Pump Refurbisher shall perform pre-removal and post installation field test on each unit. Description of the field test procedures and equipment supplied by the Contractor to perform the work. 7.Report documentation of the field test results inclusive of type written sections complete with photos and supporting data. Perform field performance testing in accordance with AWWA E103-07 Appendix B Field Testing of Pumps. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, published standards of the following, as applicable: 1.American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 2.American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) a.AISI C1141 - Steel 3.American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a.ANSI - Class 125 Flanged Dimensions b.ANSI B.11 – Bearings 6.American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) a.ASTM B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings b.ASTM A-48 - Cast Iron 7.American Welding Society (AWS) 8.American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 9.American Petroleum Institute (API) a.API 610 Standards 10.Hydraulic Institute Standards (latest edition) 11.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 12.National Electrical Code (NEC) 13.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 14.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 15.Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) a.SAE 1045 – Steel b.SAE 4140 – Steel 16.The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 17.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 18.American Water Works Association AWWA E103-07 Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps Appendix B: Field Testing Of Pumps (latest edition). B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The pump refurbisher shall be experienced in the repair and refurbishing of horizontal split case pumps. B. Pump refurbisher’s facility shall maintain a registered ISO 9001 quality system throughout the contract period. C. All rehabilitation of pumping units specified herein shall be performed by a single pump refurbisher; unless otherwise approved by Owner and Engineer. The Pump Refurbisher must purchase, and show proof that all pump parts used in the repair were purchased from the pump OEM. The Pump Refurbisher will also furnish the pumping equipment for HSPS#3. D. The Pump Refurbisher shall have rebuilt pumping units in the United States which are similar in design, type, and service, and comparable in size, head, and capacity to the existing pumps be repaired. Such comparable pumping units shall have been in operation for a period of not less than five years. Pump Refurbisher shall provide a minimum of five references, with contact information, for the comparative pumping units and a brief description of the work and size of the pumping units. E. The Pump Refurbisher shall be a fully-equipped pump repair and machine shop with overhead cranes capable of lifting the largest of the pumps scheduled for repair, pump laser alignment tools, dynamic balancing machine, , boring mills (for re-boring of the pump casing if required), blasting machine and grinders, horizontal engine lathes and on-site facilities for vibrational analysis. The pump repair and machine shop will also have an on-site blasting and paint booths for shop priming and painting the repaired pumps. F. The Pump Refurbisher shall assign staff to this project with ten years or more of pump repair experience. Staff assigned to welding tasks will be certified by the American Welding Society (AWS) for the types of welding proposed by the Pump Refurbisher as part of the pump refurbishment process. The Pump Refurbisher is required to define any baseplate, pump, or motor welding contemplated by written procedure either in the shop or in the field to be complete as part of the pump refurbishment and to provide a copy of current AWS certification for the welder that will perform the work with the Inspection Report. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 G. The pump repair shop shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. As a minimum, the pump OEM shall perform a torsional analysis of the pump and motor rotor with the new larger impeller, and compare the results of this analysis to the harmonic analysis furnished by the VFD OEM. Alternatively the Contractor may elect not to use the OEM; then the Contractor shall disassemble one existing pump and obtain all necessary dimensional, weight, etc. information on the pump shaft, impeller, etc. in order to determine the necessary inputs for the analysis required in this specification. This work will be performed by an independent laboratory with a fully detailed report to supplement the analysis required by this specification. Additionally, the warranty requirement for this path will be increased to 5 years, and a warranty bond shall be furnished by the Pump Refurbisher. H. The pump and motor shall be designed for the reverse rotation with reverse speed operation that is 125% of forward speed. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1.The pumping units depicted and specified herein will be used to pump finished potable water from the O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant (ONSWTP) to different hydraulic grades within the City of Corpus Christi water distribution system. The pumps are single stage, double suction, horizontal split volute type centrifugal pumps as specified herein. 2.Pumping units start and stop against a closed discharge valve and accordingly shall be capable of operating at shut-off head conditions for sustained periods of up to one minute duration without damage and without requiring increased preventive maintenance efforts. 3.Rehabilitation of the pumping units will occur in stages to maintain ONSWTP operations during the installation process. No more than one pump may be out of service at one time. 4.The Pump refurbisher shall coordinate with the installing Contractor to ascertain exactly what equipment and materials of supply need to be delivered to the construction site at what time over the anticipated installing Contractor’s installation schedule. 5.Pump Rehabilitation includes: a.Pre-removal field test by Pump Refurbisher. b.Transportation of pump and motor by Pump Refurbisher from plant to Refurbisher shop. c.Disassembly at Refurbisher’s shop. d.Inspection with inspection reports. e.Blasting casing halves inside and outside, repair case surfaces, and re-coat. f.Machine work, repair work, installation of new replacement parts as described in Part 2, pump assembly, and pump testing. g.Perform other Base Bid repairs as described in Part 2. h.Rotating assembly balance and pump unit re-assembly. i.Post repair field testing. 6.Removal, Re-installation and Shipment: The Contractor will perform pump removal, preparation for shipment and re-installation work at the ONSWTP. The Pump Refurbisher will provide shipping to and from the pump refurbisher designated facility. The Pump Refurbisher shall include all freight cost in the Base Bid. The Pump Refurbisher shall furnish onsite supervision of installation of pump and motor by Contractor, and shall be responsible for coupling alignment. 7.Existing Pumping Unit Description and proposed design condition are summarized in the following table: Pump HSP-8 HSP-9 HSP-10 HSP-11 Location HS 2 HS 2 HS 2 HS 2 Manufacturer Flowserve Flowserve Flowserve Flowserve February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 5 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 Model Number 400-LNN-800 400-LNN-800 400-LNN-800 400-LNN-800 Serial Number 0212MS002074- 1 0212MS002074- 2 0212MS002074- 3 0212MS002073- 1 Current Rated Capacity 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH Motor Nameplate Hp 1500 1500 1500 1500 Motor Power Requirements 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz Rpm 890 890 890 890 Constant or Variable Speed (CS or VS) CS CS CS VS New Rated Capacity 13,700gpm 13,700gpm 13,700gpm 13,700gpm New Rated Head 260.8 ft 260.8 ft 260.8 ft 260.8 ft Pump Efficiency at New Rated Capacity 87.2% 87.2% 87.2% 87.2% 8.Existing Pumping Unit Shop Drawings and Materials of Construction are included in Attachment A to the end of this Specification. 9.An electronic copy of the High Service Pump Station #2 Condition Assessment Report prepared by Smith Pump Company dated March 4, 2013 is included in Attachment B to the end of this Specification. 10.Vibration: Provide refurbished pumps and motors that are within the limits set by the current Hydraulic Institute Standards. If pre-removal vibration amplitudes exceed these limits, the Pump Refurbisher shall work with the Contractor, Engineer, and Owner to determine how to reduce the amplitude of the repaired units to comply with the specified HIS vibration limit. a.Vibration Limit: 0.19 in/sec rms unfiltered per H.I.S. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The equipment and materials provided under this section shall be delivered, stored, and handled in compliance with Division 40. B. Special handling or storage procedures shall be clearly identified and submitted for approval as part of the submittal process. C. Stored motors shall have their space heaters under power during the entire storage period. Storage of motors and pumps with anti-friction bearings in operating pump stations shall have their shafts rotated several rounds by hand each week. 1.9 PUMP REFURBISHER MANUALS & SERVICES February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 6 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 A. The Pump Refurbisher shall provide approved installation manuals to the installing Contractor. A minimum of three approved installation manuals shall be shipped to the installing Contractor upon Owner’s approval of the submitted installation manual. 1.Complete parts list of replaced parts cross-referenced to an exploded view assembly drawing. 2.Step-by-step disassembly and reassembly instructions including tolerances and torque requirements. 3.Dimensional drawings of all provided equipment. B. Services of Pump Refurbisher 1.Provide the services of a factory certified service engineer specifically trained in the installation, start-up, testing, operation and maintenance of the equipment as herein specified. Such services shall be provided by a representative who is a direct, full-time employee of the Pump Refurbisher. 2.The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all parties to establish the Motor Protective Relay (MPR) protective settings. 3.The Pump Refurbisher shall be responsible for the initial check-out of the equipment prior to start up. Additionally, the Pump Refurbisher shall perform a final mechanical check-out to verify that the equipment has been properly assembled, lubricants have been properly installed, electrical connections have been properly made, MPR set points have been properly adjusted, the equipment is level and aligned properly, and that the equipment is ready for service. Finally, the Pump Refurbisher shall assist the installing Contractor in the initial start-up of the equipment and all field testing. 1.10 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. The Pump Refurbisher shall furnish the following spare parts for each pumping unit: 1.One set of split lantern rings per pump. 2.One set of wear rings per pump. 3.One set of split packing glands per pump. 4.One seal kit set (two) per pump. A current spare part price list for all manufacturer recommended spare parts. Prices shall remain in effect for a period not less than one year after start-up and final acceptance of each pumping unit. B. Crate and deliver spare parts in substantial wood or painted steel boxes with hinged covers. Clearly and indelibly identify the contents of each box on its exterior with stenciled paint or lamacoid plastic labels. Each part shall be sealed, wrapped or otherwise protected from corrosion during storage. 1.11 WARRANTIES, PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES, AND PERFORMANCE PENALTIES A. Warranty 1.Upon completion of installation (in accordance with approved installation manual) and successful start-up by installing Contractor and upon acceptance by Owner, provide Pump Refurbisher warranty for a twenty-four (24) month period from startup and acceptance, but not to exceed thirty (30) months from delivery. The warranty covers defects in workmanship and/or materials, and excludes failure due to erosion, corrosion, and wear. This warranty is further qualified by the requirement that the Contractor properly install the unit and the Owner properly operate and maintain the unit. Upon notice of defect the Contractor will promptly remove the part or unit from service and load it on Pump Refurbisher’s truck at the jobsite. The Pump Refurbisher will promptly repair and/or replace the part or unit and return it to the jobsite at which point the Contractor will unload and install the part or unit at his expense. Time lost while unit is unavailable will be added to the end of the existing warranty. . B. Performance Guarantee 1.In consideration that the award of this equipment Contract is based on performance representations as specified, the Pump Refurbisher shall guarantee the performance of each pumping unit to perform as specified. 2.Represented performance of refurbished pumps and motors will be verified via factory and field testing and as defined herein. Pumping units failing to meet minimum specified performance as indicated in Part 1.7 A (7) and 2.16 C (1) during factory shop testing or in Part 3.5 B (1) during field testing, will be rejected outright by the Owner. The Pump February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 7 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 Refurbisher shall be responsible for any liquidated damages levied by the City to the Contractor resulting from any delay associated with failure to meet minimum specified performance during testing. The Manufacturer/Supplier’s liquidated damage liability is limited to 10% of the unit price on the applicable Bid Item value. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED PUMP REFURBISHERS A. Flowserve B. Smith Pump Company C. Fairbanks Morse D. Or Engineer Approved Equal. E. Select one pump refurbishing company from the approved list to perform repairs for all pumps listed in this section. 2.2 DISMANTLING AND INSPECTION A. Disassemble pump into its basic components for cleaning and inspection. Basic components include such items as casing halves, impeller, bearings, bearing housings, shaft, shaft sleeves and other components bolted or joined together. B. All pump parts shall be cleaned prior to inspection. The cleaning shall remove dirt, grit, grease and rust scale. All internal surfaces of the pump casing and bearing housings components shall be grit or sand blast cleaned to remove rust scale. Note that prior to coating components additional blasting is necessary to prepare the surfaces so the coating will adhere. C. Each component shall be inspected for wear, corrosion and other damage. Bearing housing bores shall be measured with a micrometer to check for wear and overall concentricity. Perform a dye penetrant inspection in the high stress areas of the casing halves, and report any cracks discovered. Shaft run-out shall be checked with a dial indicator. Casing split line flatness shall be measured with a straight edge and feeler gage. D. Four copies of an inspection report for each pump shall be submitted to the Engineer. Each report shall show the results of the inspections and measurements and photographs of component part defects and shall indicate which component parts are suitable for reuse. Component parts that are suitable for reuse and are specified to be replaced by new parts, shall be returned to the City. Prepare reusable parts for long term storage. Crate components in secure wooden crates having a hinged cover. Provide a packing list attached to the inside of the hinged cover describing the enclosed parts. Components parts not suitable for reuse shall be properly disposed of by the Pump Refurbisher. 2.3 PARTS AND MATERIALS A. General: Provide all materials, new and replacement parts and any miscellaneous parts required to complete the parts replacement and restore the pumps to like new operating condition. Replacement pump parts shall be purchased from the pump OEM. Supply evidence of this sourcing in the Quality Assurance documents by furnishing packing lists and shipping documents. 2.4 IMPELLERS A. General: Replace the existing impellers for the four existing pumps at the High Service Pump Building No. 2 to meet new design condition. Impellers shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.04.B – Impellers. 1.Approximate new impeller size: 31.77 inches. 2.New rated capacity: 13,700 GPM @ 260.8ft TDH & 87.2% pump efficiency. 3.Pump Refurbisher shall purchase the replacement impeller (of same material or better) from the original pump manufacturer. B. Balance: Dual-plane dynamic balance impeller to the ISO G2.5 standard on rotor shaft. All pump and motor couplings shall conform to the requirements of 43 21 01 Part 2.05.C – Couplings. 2.5 WEAR RINGS February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 8 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 A. General: Replace the impeller and casing wear rings. Provide rings that are geometrically suitable with the new design conditions and new impeller size. Manufacture the rings to sufficient tolerances to permit replacement without special fitting or machining. Wear Rings should meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.04.C. – Wearing Rings. B. Lock the wear rings in place to prevent rotation. Describe method for locking rings in submittal. C. Materials: Construct impeller and casing wear rings of stainless steel alloys with difference hardnesses to reduce the potential for galling. D. 1.Furnish casing wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 CA-15 300-350 Bhn hardness. E. 2.Furnish impeller wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA-15 200-250 Bhn hardness. 2.6 SHAFT SLEEVES A. Shaft Sleeve: Provide replacement shaft sleeves of the same size and design as the original. B. Shaft Sleeve Material: Construct shaft sleeves of type 316 stainless steel and fit them to the shaft with O-rings and locked by impeller key and sleeve nut. 2.7 BEARINGS A. Radial Bearings: Replace the existing anti-friction type radial bearing with a new anti-friction bearing. Provide new anti-friction bearing of the same type and size as the original. Bearing brand shall be American made. On the bill-of-material, furnish bearing number and bearing brand used in the repair. B. Thrust Bearing: Replace the existing anti-friction type thrust bearing with a new anti-friction bearing. Provide new anti-friction bearing of the same type and size as the original. Bearing brand shall be American made. On the bill-of-material, furnish bearing number and bearing brand used in the repair. C. Lubricant Supply: Supply oil of the proper kind and quality, as required to place the pumping unit in operation. Furnish enough oil for initial filling during storage, for initial filling prior to start-up, and enough for one additional filling. 2.8 BEARING FRAMES A. Bearing Frames: Rehabilitate the existing bearing frames, maintain tolerances for the installation of the bearings. Provide a description of machine work intended for the bearing housings and casing halves in the inspection report. B. Confirm alignment of bearing housing bores to casing machined surfaces. List OEM tolerances along with found conditions, and describe any machine work intended to restore parts to OEM tolerances. 2.9 SPLIT TYPE MECHANICAL SEALS A. Provide new split type mechanical seals to refurbished pumps. Split type mechanical seals shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.D. 2.10 STUFFING BOX AREA A. The stuffing box shall accommodate packing and split-glands so the packing, split-glands and hardware defined in the spare parts can be used if a seal kit is not available. Hinged Covers: Construct gland of bronze. B. Install new hinged covers over the shaft openings and provide neoprene slingers on the shaft. 2.11 CASING A. If casing split line is washed out or not flat within 0.005 inch the upper and lower mating faces shall be machined and the casing line-bored. Casings shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.A - Casings. 2.12 GASKETS, SEALS, AND FASTENERS A. Gaskets and Seals: Replace all gaskets, lip-seals and O-rings. Provide replacement gaskets, lip-seals and O-rings of the same type and size as the original. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 9 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 B. Fasteners and Keys: Provide new shaft keys, bolts, studs, nuts, washers and other fasteners of the same size, design and material as furnished in the original pump. 2.13 PUMP SHAFT A. Pump Shaft: Provide a new pump shaft of the same size and design as the original. Pump shafts shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.F – Pump shafts. 2.14 COUPLING A. Pump-to-motor coupling shall be reused. Inspect condition and report on any issues found. Replace wear parts, disk packs, and grease. 2.15 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. Each pump, motor, and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finish coated in accordance with Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Color shall be per Section 09 96 00 and an adequate supply of touch up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. B. For pump interior surfaces, apply Belzona 1341N Superglidemetal NSF 61 coating for potable water to the casting wetted parts to improve efficiency. 2.16 SHOP TESTING A. The factory testing shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards – Section 14.6 - 2011 “ANSI Standard for Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests”. Certified copies of the Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied after conducting a pump performance shop test; hydrostatic test shall be per ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Appendix B. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the Engineer at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. All the testing required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer and City with the Pump Refurbisher providing travel and accommodations for up to two people for the duration of each test for a selected pump. 1.Pump Test Acceptance Grade for SHOP TEST shall be GRADE 1U (no negative tolerance) per ANSI/HI 14.6 – 2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Guarantee Point) as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. 2.Pump shall be tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as indicated in the pump rating point (Guarantee Point) as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded starting at shut off head and proceeding with sufficient test point readings made to establish complete head flow capacity (through the AOR and PORregions), efficiency, and brake horsepower curves for refurbished pump. Test all four (4) new impellers in a new pump case with shop driver. 3.Test impellers for NPSH. Measure NPSH at a minimum of four (4) conditions. 4.A complete test report for each refurbished pump identified for factory shop testing, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least all information required in Paragraphs 1.04 and 1.06 above, and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report, shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the pumps are shipped. 5.All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION A. Removal: The pump will be removed from its installed position and prepared for shipment by the Contactor as part of the Base Bid. The refurbisher shall inspect the pump after the preparation is completed. The Contractor shall provide the necessary caps, covers, bolts gaskets and thrust restraints as necessary to prevent the piping from being displaced. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 10 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 B. Reinstallation: The Contractor will reinstall the pump into its operating position, fully adjusted and aligned as part of the Base Bid. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: As part of the Base Bid, furnish the services of a qualified representative of the Pump Refurbisher to inspect, and pretest each unit prior to removal, supervise the repaired pump and motor reinstallation, and the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, participate in the startup of the equipment, perform field testing of the equipment and place the equipment in trouble-free operation. B. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in the presence of the Construction Manager. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. C. A certificate from the Pump Refurbisher shall be submitted stating that their installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the Owner's operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.3 START-UP A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make sure rotating elements are free before applying power. C. Check motor rotation to be sure that it is correct. D. Notify Construction Manager prior to startup and allow him to witness initial operation. 3.4 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. In the presence of the Construction Manager conduct such tests as necessary to indicate that the refurbished pumps and motors operate satisfactorily. A 7-day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance by the City. 1.Pump Refurbisher shall conduct Mechanical Testing of the refurbished pump and motor in accordance with and as defined in AWWA E103-07 Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps Appendix B: Field Testing of Pumps (latest edition). Submit report of test results as per the requirements of Part 1.04. B. If refurbished pumps and motors do not operate satisfactorily, then the Pump Refurbisher shall implement corrective measures as required to restore satisfactory operation. 3.5 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Conduct a Field Performance Testing in accordance with that as described. B. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above and certified results of tests shall be submitted. Provide, calibrate and install all temporary gauges and meters, make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 30 days prior to testing. Contractor can elect to use existing venturi flowmeter on the pump discharge pipe if re-calibration of the differential pressure gauge is performed prior to field testing. 1.Field Acceptance Tests: Upon completion of the installation and prior to final payment, the Contractor will perform a witnessed Field Performance Test on the refurbished pumping unit in accordance with AWWA E103-07 Appendix B except as specified. FIELD TEST Acceptance Grade shall be GRADE 1B per ANSI/HI 14.6 – 2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This includes hydraulic results showing the pump is operating within ± 5% of the factory tested flow capacity, and ± 3% of the factory tested TDH capacity within + 4% of factory tested power requirements and/or - 3% of the factory tested pump efficiency. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Guarantee Point) as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. C. A preliminary test shall be performed prior to the official witness test. Notify the City and submit test data and curves as determined by the preliminary test at least seven days in advance of the time scheduled for the witness test. If pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken which satisfies the conditions specified. D. The Field Performance Tests shall demonstrate under all conditions: February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 11 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps – 43 21 02 1.When the pump input horsepower is determined by electrical input measurement, use the true efficiency of the driver as determined by the driver manufacturer performance test. 2.Test at rated speed, to determine the curves of head, brake horsepower, and efficiency as a function of capacity. Pump Refurbisher shall provide ALL required calibrated test instruments as required to perform testing. The Pump Refurbisher may utilize the City’s existing flowmeter with permission from the Construction Manager. If the City’s flowmeter is used for the test, the flowmeter differential pressure gauge shall be calibrated prior to testing and proof of calibration shall be submitted with the testing results. The Contractor shall bear the cost of calibrating the flowmeter as part of the base bid. Take a minimum of six points, including shutoff to define operating regions through the AOR and POR regions of the pump curve as much as the system operating pressure will allow. Take one point as near as possible to each specified condition of head and capacity, one at or slightly above the maximum head specified, and one at the minimum head shown on the existing curve (if possible). 3.Express capacity in gallons per minute and express head in feet of water. Furnish certified copies of the curves, raw test data, calculated results and sufficient information for computation and plotting of the curves. E. The Pump Refurbisher shall employ an independent vibration testing firm as indicated below if the pump motor or pump impeller is replaced. 1.After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the Pump Refurbisher shall retain the services of Machine Dynamics, Inc. (contact Victor Wowk, P.E. at 505-898-2094, victor@machinedyn.com) or Engineering Dynamics Incorporated (contact Troy Feese, P.E. at 210-492-9100, troy_feese@engdyn.com) who are testing firms to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each unit, including both "Bump Tests" and X-Y vibration profiles and field torsional critical speed test, to (a) prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and natural frequency analyses and (b) prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports, when operating at any speed within the specified operating range. 2.A written report shall be submitted including a CAD sketch of the unit indicating on where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak- to-peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency and (c) rms velocity level, in inches per second. The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problems encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. F. If required, take corrective action and have the units retested to ensure full compliance with the specified requirements. G. Failure of Tests: If the Field Performance Acceptance Tests reveal defects in material or equipment, or if the material or equipment in any way fails to comply with the requirements of the specifications, then the Contractor and Pump Refurbisher shall promptly correct such deficiencies. All costs associated with additional Field Performance Tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Upon successful completion and passing of the Field Performance Test the City will accept the refurbished pump and motor on the day of acceptance of the Final Test Report. END OF SECTION February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 12 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 13 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 14 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 15 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 16 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 17 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 18 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 19 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 20 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 21 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 22 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 23 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT A) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 24 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 25 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 26 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 27 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 28 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 29 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 30 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 31 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 32 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 33 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 34 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 35 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 36 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 37 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 38 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 39 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 40 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 41 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 42 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 43 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 44 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 45 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 46 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 47 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 48 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 49 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 50 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 51 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 52 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 53 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 54 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 55 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 56 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 57 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 58 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 59 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 60 of 60 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps– 43 21 02 (ATTACHMENT B) February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 1 of 4 Sump Pumps – 40 21 06 SECTION 43 21 06 SUMP PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, complete and ready for operation and field test, sump pumps including all details as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this specification or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for sump pumps. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Mechanical piping and appurtenances are included in Division 40. B. Electrical work except as hereinafter specified is included in Division 26. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, certified shop drawings and literature describing the equipment and showing all important details, including pump and motor characteristics and performance. B. Operation and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The sump pumps shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The sump pumps shall be Model J08 as manufactured by BJM Corporation, or Engineer approved equal. PUMP SCHEDULE Notes: 1. Custom control panel by pump manufacturer/vendor. Refer to control panel section and/or electrical drawings and specifications for additional detail. 2. Pump mounted on discharge base elbow, with guide rails etc. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the motor and motor starter shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The Contractor and manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping system including pumps and motors, as specified herein. B. The equipment specified herein is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such Equipment Tag Pump Location Model Design Criteria Max Speed Max HP Power Supply Pump Operation SP-01 High Service Pump Room BJM J08 80 gpm @ 20-ft TDH 3450 rpm 1 460/3/60 Based on level float switches SP-02 High Service Pump Room BJM J08 80 gpm @ 20-ft TDH 3450 rpm 1 460/3/60 Based on level float switches February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 2 of 4 Sump Pumps – 40 21 06 equipment sim ilar to the applications stated in Paragraphs 1.01 and 1.04. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards, except where otherwise specified herein. D. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, to ensure operation meets all specified conditions. E. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all elements of the pump installation and pump setting so that the installation meets the requirements as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein including depth of setting, discharge column pipe and installation of water level instrumentation. 1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during shipment. Store equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment un less permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until all required submittals have been approved by the Engineer and shipment approved by the Engineer in writing. 1.8 MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall obtain from each manufacturer its warranty that the equipment will be free from defects in design, materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from Substantial completion. Said warranty, containing no exclusions or limitations, shall be in a form acceptable to and for the benefit of the Owner and shall be submitted by the Contractor as a condition of final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, floats and submersible power cable. B. Each major piece of equipment shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles and power and service factors. 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The pumps shall be submersible type, supported as shown on the Drawings. The pumps shall be capable of passing small solids without clogging and undue wear. B. The pump casing shall be constructed of 304 SS. Separate components shall be gasketed or sealed with Carbon Ceramic oil lubricated seals and bolted with Type 304SS bolts, nuts and washers. C. The impeller shall be of cast iron and shall be locked to the shaft and secured by an impeller nut. The impeller shall be concentrically positioned to prevent thrust and wear problems. Impeller shall be open design and there shall be no close clearances between the impeller and casing. February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 3 of 4 Sump Pumps – 40 21 06 D. The pump shafts shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. E. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs and adjustment. F. All pumps to be equipped with thermal overload protection against overheating. G. Piping and valves shall be as shown on the Drawings. As a minimum each pump shall have a pipe union, a ball check valve, and a full-port isolation valve on the pump discharge. 2.3 PUMP POWER CABLE A. Power Cable 1. Power and control cable shall be sized according to NEC and be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The power cables shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of at least 50 feet. Entry system shall be comprised of an elastomeric grommet and washer arrangement as a primary seal. Entry system must also provide protection against capillary action in the event of cable damage. 2.4 PUMP CONTROL PANEL PROTECTION SYSTEM A. A U.L. factory provided control panel will be supplied by the pump vendor for each sump pump station as required herein and/or as shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Electrical and Instrumentations Drawings as well as the specifications. B. Manufacturer shall furnish a complete pump monitoring and protection system consisting of an intrinsically safe solid state monitoring system to be installed in the motor starter cubicle, and independent probes integral to the pump/motor wired to a sealed cable entry terminal box for connection of submersible control cables. C. Monitoring unit shall be solid state, intrinsically safe system designed for mounting within the motor starter cubicle. Monitoring system shall accept inputs from the sensors specified and shall output independent contacts which close to alarm each condition, or separate independent output terminals suitable for direct connection to interposing relays for alarm contact development. Provide a separate N.C. alarm contact, rated for 120V, 5A inductive, which opens on any failure. Monitor system shall be suitable for operation from a 24VAC unregulated, unlimited power supply. Provide any additional equipment or appurtenances required to provide current and voltage limited intrinsically safe installation as specified. The monitoring system shall accept separate isolated N.O. contacts, which close to indicate pump running and to reset after pump trip. D. Sensors shall be independently wired to the monitoring system. Provisions for the following sensors for each pump: 1. Stator leak (one required). 2. Motor temperature (one required). 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES A. Pump Guide System 1. The guide system shall consist of no less than two rails for each pump. Furnish slide rail mechanisms to guide sump pumps from bottom of sump to the slab at the surface for inspection and maintenance. The base elbow shall be cast stainless steel. All pipe flanges shall be in compliance with 125 lb. American Standard. Design the base elbow to permit the slide mechanism to link up the pump with the base elbow. The guide rail shall be 316 stainless steel pipe to prevent corrosion and maintain a smooth surface for the guide shoes. Provide an upper guide rail bracket to support the guide rails near the top of the wet well. Guide Shoes: Provide shoes to guide each pump assembly down the guide rails. Each pump shall be fitted with a lifting bail. Bail shall be sized so that if the stainless steel lifting chain is removed from the pump then retrieval of the pump is easily attained with a lifting hook without requiring any persons to enter the wet well. No chain assemblies that act as a lifting bail will be accepted. Each pump shall be supplied with the required length of 316 stainless steel cable to lift each pump/motor assembly from the sump. Attach the chain on the upper end to a bolt bracket mounted just under the grating cover. Chain shall be connected to the pump lifting bail by a stainless steel February 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Page 4 of 4 Sump Pumps – 40 21 06 shackle. All brackets shall be 316L stainless steel. B. Bolts, Studs, Nuts 1. All bolts, studs, and nuts shall be in compliance with ANSI B1.1. 2. Bolt heads and nuts shall be semi-finished and shall be in compliance with ANSI B18.2. All nuts shall be hexagonal in shape. 3. Anchor bolts, flange bolts, studs and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in conformity with ASTM A276. 2.6 SHOP PAINTING A. Surface preparation and shop painting (prime and finish) shall be according to the manufacturer’s recommendations for the specific sump pump application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this Contrac t. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and these specifications and details shown on the Drawings. 3.3 FIELD PAINTING A. The only field painting required shall be touch-up to repair damage incurred during shipment and installation. This painting shall be according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. After the pump has been completely installed, a test of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor. If the pump performance does not meet Specifications, the Contractor shall take corrective measures, or pump shall be removed and replace with a pump, which satisfies the conditions specified. END OF SECTION APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT RETL REPORT NUMBER: G114183 PREPARED FOR: LNV, INC. 801 NAVIGATION BOULEVARD, SUITE 300 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78408 AUGUST 29, 2014 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, INC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM NO. - 2101 Mark C. Rock, P.E. Vice President of Operations %. *1 MARK C. ROCK f, 71395 944c / S T i.ikE''S'• $.:e tke,70NAL El 00E 3' .3111 ,YAOTAI P PSA -EE POPS - .O11 M (71).N.4'.‘41‘1„. ... *: *.* • CHRISTOPHER A. ROCK •X30A .A R3H90TeIRH3 95866 Ac; `9 .. casae 11ip� • •s �.. ..�''••y `� S/ONAI�� `� ,�JANU�, ®moo/ 2 Christopher A. Rock, P.E. Vice President Corpus Christi .3.9 ,)1301 .A •�erigoi itei,r13 eugio3 tnebiae,c \/ SUGGESTED BORING LOCATIONS FOR GEOTECHNICAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL. ACTUAL LOCATION & NUMBER OF BORES SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. IF ADDITIONAL BORE LOCATIONS ARE RECOMMENDED OR IF SUGGESTEDE BORES ARE TO BE RELOCATED, GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL REVISE ACCORDINGLY. PREVIOUS BORING LOCATIONS. EXISTING s P P' WASTEWATER w a. ,• _ AIANHO.E I} rF%ISTINGATC -- • i r UNETWTO D. )PROPOSED HIGH NC SERVICE NO.3 ,+� a PROPOSED CONCRETE SIDEWALK REMOVED 11 'B-2RETL Pro ect No. G114183 XI5INC STORM WATER MANHOLE i I })a \ 15 0' • B-3 RETL Project No. G114183 j—ti- VI El I l 0: RETL Project No. 0000572 .1 LEARWELL NO 1 4 M(.. r (PROPOSED (WASTEWATER MANHOLE C. ARWCU NO 2 10 MG PROPOSED STORM WATER LINE TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WASH WATER SUPPLY RUMP STATION I i • B-4 EXISTING STORM WA -ER RETL Project No. G110134 ,rte ww B-3 pM� RETL Project No. 0000572 PROPOSED WASTEWATER MANHOLE PROPOSED WASTEWATER UNE • B-6 RETL Project No 0000572 a / RETL Project No. 0000572 v 9 —\ 4 SCALE 1"=120' 120' 746' B-1 RETL Project No. G114183 \ g t I PROPOSED WASTEWATER MANHOLE B-1- os TIE -INTO EXISTING PAVEMENT F.. 11" LEGEND PROPOSED HIGH SERVICE NO.3 PIPING PROPOSED WASTEWATER UNE PROPOSED STORM WATER LINE PROPOSED ACCESS ROAD PROPOSED ACCESS ROAD IMPROVEMENTS PROPOSED CONCRETE SIDWALK PROPOSED GRADING LIMITS engineers Iarchitects 1 contractors MI NAVIONDON. SLATE. CONMAT CONNIE TUG MEM TM. FIRM NII FNEI �.IY,Ii Y CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT PROPOSED CIVIL SITE DEVELOPMENT FOR HIGH SEIFIVICE NO.3 PROJECT EMS DOCIATENI o.DR CONSTRUCTION. MENU RING AND PERIM OR Crn uuuma nm PURPOSES. . O0wu1Rrsnwrs rrtR RORizm TO BE REIGNED. MARCUS J. NAISER Pc must NO.. 92514 D•rz.2/19/14 r 0 0 w 0 O u z v - - - - r\�G T `a�� FST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. aG O 'tio 6817 Leopard St. A®' .c Corpus Christi, TX 78409 Al QeoR oPQ Telephone: (361) 883-4555 r P4 Fax: (361) 883-4111 �qr a`o o rn m11 _ - - vl ILL- I 1 01 L CLIENT: LNV, Inc. PROJECT: Prop. High Service 3 Project LOCATION: 13101 Leopard Street: Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G114183 DATE(S) DRILLED: 07/01/14 - 07/01/14 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Flight Auger & Mud Rotary MPLES SLOWS+FT 'ONS/SQ FT 'ONS/SQ FT RCENT RECOVERY/ CK QUALITY DESIGNATION 1 MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SO FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) J co - 1- u LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT 1PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was encountered at 33' during drilling operations SURFACE ELEVATION: 37.28' O rn o LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SILTY CLAYEY SAND, brown, dry, medium. Clay seam _ - - _ 5 -" - 10 - _ "SS 15 - - 20 - S i ss S-2 S 3 SS S-4 SS S-$ S-6 SS S-7 X N= 13 A N= 6 N= 16 X N= 8 X N= 21 R N= 36 R N= 16 13 20 12 4 - 14 11 21 23 NP - - NP 18 NP - - NP 5 NP NP - 27 15 29 encountered. Same as above, moist, loose (SC -SM) Same as above, dry, medium - SILTY SAND, brown, dry, loose. (SM) CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, very stiff. Sarne as above, Tight brown, hard. SILTY CLAYEY SAND, brown, moist, medium. (SM) Clay seam encountered. POORLY GRADED SAND, with gravel, brown, moist, dense. 25 _ 30 SS S-8 S-9 V N= 39 L1 N= 53 19 20 Clay seam encountered. Same as above, very dense. 0 35 -s% SH ®P= 4.5+ Q 26 52 17 35 101 3.6 94 FAT CLAY, brown, moist, very stiff, slightly slickensided. (CH) .li 450 - eSS 40 - - - - 45 - - - 55 - - _ 60 - - _ 65 SS S-11 ss S-12 SS 5-13 SS S-14 SS S-15 5-16- N= a5 p N= 33 v N= 45 --seam V N= 44 - N= 17 3Sand N= 39 t8 24 24 t7 25 20 41 CLAYEY SAND, greenish gray, moist, hard. Sand seam encountered. SILTY CLAYEY SAND, greenish gray, moist, dense. Clay seam encountered. CLAYEY SAND with gravel, greenish gray, moist, hard. Sand encountered. POORLY GRADED SAND, with gravel, brown, moist, dense. CLAYEY SAND, with gravel, greenish gray, moist, very stiff. seam encountered. Same as above, hard. N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE P POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Baring depth was determined by RE TL and boring location was determined by INV, Inc. Boring operations were performed by RE 1 L at GPs Coord N 27° 51.452' W 47" 37.034'. Boring Location Vicinity of High Service 3 Building NP= NomPlastic LOG OF BORING B-1 PNG ,x�� Fsr Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. Ls pard t.T �� ° c Corpus Christi, TX 78409 4G OC '� C6orpus eo9 010- Telephone: (361) 883-4555 qr aQ Fax: (361) 883-4711 :aG� CLIENT: LNV, Inc. PROJECT: Prop. High Service 3 Project LOCATION: 13101 Leopard Street; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G114183 DATE(S) DRILLED: 07/01/14 - 07/01/14 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) Flight Auger & Mud Rotary LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was encountered at 33' during drilling operations. LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM S 17 Z N= 39 24 Same as above, brown. ref70 d A 75 S 18 Z N= 39 25 CLAYEY SAND with gravel, brown, moist, hard. Sand seam encountered. SS g N= 39 23 20 7 SILTY SAND brown, moist, dense. Clay seam encountered. III 80 S-19 01 85 S 20 Z N= 67 22 Same as above, very dense. SS r7 FAT CLAY light brown, moist, very stiff. 90 S-21 A,N= 20 33 95 S 22 1 P= 45+ 26 89 Same as above. A: 100 S-23 1 P= 4.5+ 25 Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 100 -feet. 7 j 7 u u n 7 n 2 0 7 7 3 N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: ° P POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE Boring depth was determined by RETL and boring location was determined by LNV, Inc. - Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 51.452' W 97° 37.034'. T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH Boring Location: Vicinity of High Service 3 Building D NP= Non -Plastic LOG OF BORING B-2 Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 6817 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, TX 78409 Telephone: (361) 883-4555 Fax: (361) 883-4711 SHEET 1 of 2 CLIENT: LNV, Inc. PROJECT: Prop. High Service 3 Project LOCATION: 13101 Leopard Street; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G114183 DATE(S) DRILLED: 06/30/14 - 06/30/14 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA SOIL SYMBOL LL 2 ww 0 SAMPLE NUMBER - SS - S1 SH , 5 - S-2 SH S-3 SH 10 - S-4 SH , S-5 SS p . 15 - S-6 L� 20 - 25 - 30 35 -1 40 - SS S-7 N= 18 P= 4.5+ MOISTURE CONTENT (% 14 ATTERBERG LIMITS H O a U N a X w 0 t o LL 38 PL 13 PI 25 DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) w w v) N 0 z rn z 45 DRILLING METHOD(S): FI:ght Auger & Mud Rotary GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was encountered at 38' during drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: 44.59' DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CLAYEY SAND, dark brown, dry, very stiff. (SC) Same as above, moist. P= 4.5+ P= 4.5+ 15 31 13 18 118 7.2 68 SANDY LEAN CLAY dark brown, moist, very stiff. (CL) Sand seam encountered. Same as above, dry. P= 4.5+ N= 20 30 13 17 ss Q S-8 SS S-9 SS S-10 SS s-11 SS 77//4-45 S-12 X N= 19 ::: :- SS N= 50 w : 50 S-13 Y ' U'• O: ss • 55 - S-14 N= 32 CD u .. w 47SS ` S-15 ZN=38 12 60 N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE o P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE O T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH N= 25 13 39 CLAYEY SAND, brown, dry, very stiff. (SC) Same as above. SILTY CLAYEY SAND brown, moist, medium. N= 28 14 CLAYEY SAND, greenish gray, moist, very stiff. Sand seam encountered. z z N= 38 N= 30, 50/4" 19 17 N= 83 21 NP NP NP POORLY GRADED SAND with silt, brown, moist, dense. (SP -SM) Same as above, very dense. Same as above. 19 50 SANDY LEAN CLAY greenish gray, moist, very stiff. Sand seam encountered. 18 9 65 ss S-16 SILTY CLAYEY SAND brown, moist, dense. Same as above, with gravel. Clay seam encountered. CLAYEY SAND with gravel, greenish gray, moist, hard. Sand seam encountered. N= 42 14 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, with gravel, greenish gray, moist, dense. Clay seam encountered. J: REMARKS: Boring depth was determined by RETL and boring location was determined by LNV, Inc. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 51.515' W 97° 37.010'. Boring Location: Vicinity of High Service 3 Building NP= Non -Plastic - 0 0 cc0 0 z w F - Z 0 coco 0 z 0 m 0 0 0 -- — —. ,or' Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 6817 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, Tx 78409 (oc °ra °aQ°QP�� TelFaxephone 883-47883-4555 1 r Vie+ •• ••'• — r ontti Z or Z CLIENT: LNV, Inc. PROJECT: Prop. High Service 3 Project LOCATION: 13101 Leopard Street; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G114183 DATE(S) DRILLED: 06/30/14 - 06/30/14 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Flight Auger & Mud Rotary SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N BLOWS/FT P. TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) LIQUID LIMIT 1 LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH JTONS/SQ FTS MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) J 0 g CI_ W 0 0 o_ a GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was encountered at 38' during drilling operations. LL PL Pi DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS S 13 S 13 SH S-20 S 21 SH S-22 3-23 N= 28 N= 40 15 10 20 Same as above, medium. Same as above, dense. 70 - VFAT •- 75 - 80 - 85 - 90 - _ 95 - 100 I N= 29 p= 4.5+ .� N= 15 P= 4.5+ P= 4.5+ 29 36 21 29 26 100 92 CLAY brown and greenish gray, moist, very stiff. Sand seam encountered. Same as above. Same as above, with gravel, stiff. FAT CLAY, brown and greenish gray,moist, verystiff. 9 Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 100 -feet. N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth was determined by RETL and boring location was determined by LNV, Inc. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord N 27° 51.515' W 97° 37.010' Boring Location. Vicinity of High Service 3 Budding NP= Non -Plastic LOG OF BORING B-3 `��O'N Fs Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 4,0 6817 Leopard St. corpus Christi, TX 78409 1 OCTFelephone: (361) 883 471) 883-4555 4eO94r0 Fax: 491, a CLIENT: LNV, Inc. PROJECT: Prop. High Service 3 Project LOCATION: 13101 Leopard Street; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G114183 DATE(S) DRILLED: 06/30/14 - 06/30/14 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Flight Auger SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations. Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. 24 -Hour Delayed Reading: Dry and caved at 32'. SURFACE ELEVATION: 67.47' LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SANDY LEAN CLAY, dark gray,dry, very stiff. (CL) - , _ 5 - l _ SS ss S-2 SS s-3 Z N= 16 7 N= 36 77N= 28 9 38 12 12 14� 48 T 16 26 32 63 84 Same as above, moist, hard. LEAN CLAY with sand, brown, dry, very stiff. (CL) Sand seam encountered. 10 s a N= 10 4 SILTY CLAYEY SAND, brown, dry, medium. Same as above, loose. Same as above, medium. SILTY CLAYEY SAND brown, dry, medium. - - - _ - 15 - 20 - SS S-5 ss S-6 S 7 g N= 9 7 N= 17 Z N= 16 5 4 5 18 _ 25 t ss S-8 NFAT = 30 19 69 26 43 74 CLAY with sand, greenish gray and brown, dry, very stiff. (CH) Sand seam encountered. 7 - 30 - SS S-9 R N= 37, "" 50/5" 5 SILTY CLAYEY SAND brown, dry, very dense. - _ 35 SS7 S-10 /� N= 28 24 51 SANDY LEAN CLAY, brown, moist, very stiff. Sand seam encountered. D J I) L n, z' o v o Z — Boring was terminated at a depth of 35 -feet. o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE u- P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE 001 T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH JI REMARKS: Boring depth was determined by RETL and boring location was determined by LNV, Inc. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 51.621' W 97° 37.130'. Boring Location Prop. Alternate Power Building LOG OF BORING B-1 Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. 4214 Dillon Lane Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 Telephone: (361)851-9955 Fax: (361) 851-6760 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA 0 0 0 (1) a. wt— w 0 SAMPLE NUMBER rn w 0 i gi z 0 MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS F(LIQUID LIMIT 2 J 0 a PL 'o IPLASTICITY INDEX DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (% CLIENT: PROJECT: LOCATION: NUMBER: SHEET 1 of 1 City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Plant Wash Water System Leopard St.; Corpus Christi, TX 41244( 0000572 DATE(S) DRILLED: 05/09/00 - 05/09/00 DRILLING METHOD(S): Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Bonng dry during dulling. Boring dry and caved @ 18.5' upon complehon of drilling operations. 24 Hr. Delayed Reading; Boring dry & caved @ 20'. SURFACE ELEVATION: 71.6 DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM j 15 20 425- sS S-1 SH S-2 SH S-3 SH S-4 SH S-5 SS S-6 SS S-7 SS S-8 1 t 1 1 1 1 A1A N=9 P=4.0 P=4.5+ P=4.5+ P=4.25 N=12 15 5 15 17 15 11 40 33 15 14 25 19 131 108 6.1 3.7 32 SILTY CLAY, with roots and trace calcareous deposits, dark gray, moist, stiff. Same as above, gray and brown, dry. Same as above, trace calcareous deposits, moist.(CL) SILTY CLAY some calcareous deposits, brown, moist, stiff. Same as above, very stiff. CLAYEY SAND brown, dry, stiff.(SC) N=17 P=4.5 23 17 SILTY CLAY brown and greenish gray, moist, very stiff. Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 25 feet. N - STAND P - POCKE T -POCKE A T T RD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring location and depth was determined by Smith, Russo & Mercer Bonng was stakes in the field by RETL at the north end of proposed 60- drainline Boring operations were performed by Envirocore, Inc LOG OF BORING B-3 Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. 4214 Dillon Lane Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 Telephone: (361) 851-9955 Fax: (361) 851-6760 CLIENT: PROJECT: LOCATION: NUMBER: SHEET 1 of 1 City of Corpus Christi O. N. Stevens Plant Wash Water System Leopard St.; Corpus Christi, TX 0000572 DATE(S) DRILLED: 05/09/00 - 05/09/00 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA - 15 - - 20 25 - SAMPLE NUMBER m W a i \u / SS S-1 SS S-2 SS S-3 SS S-4 ss S-5 SS S-6 SS S-7 SS S-8 L N=16 N=15 N=21 N=18 N=34 N=33 N=43 N=32 MOISTURE CONTENT (%) 7 5 13 11 16 6 6 6 A F--. 'LIQUID LIMO 28 T7ERBERG LIMITS t ? J U QU 0. J a a PI PLASTIC LIMO PL 16 12 W X a COMPRESSIVE MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) 28 40 29 DRILLING METHOD(S): Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry during drilling. Boring dry and caved ® 17.5' upon completion of drilling operations. 24 Hr. Delayed Reading; Boring dry & caved © 18'. SURFACE ELEVATION: 55.3 DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CLAYEY SAND with roots and trace calcareous deposits, brown, dry, stiff.(SC) Same as above. Same as above. CLAYEY SAND, brown, dry, stiff. Same as above. moist, very stiff. FINE SAND, brown, dry, medium. Same as above, dense. Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 25 feet. ti N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Bonng location and depth was determined by Smith, Russo 8 Mercer. Boring was staked in the field by RETL a1 south end of proposed 60- drainline. Boring operations were performed by Envirocore, Inc. LOG OF BORING B-4 SHEET 1 of 1 Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. 4214 Dillon Lane ° Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 Lioc,Telephone: (361) 851-9955 Fax: (361) 851-6760 CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi PROJECT: O. N. Stevens Plant Wash Water System LOCATION: Leopard St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: 0000572 DATE(S) DRILLED: 05/09/00 - 05/09/00 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA ----kHotta* DRILLING METHOD(S): Stern Auger SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SO FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) A r I1 R13 LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (Y.) GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry during drilling. Boring dry and caved ® 15.5' upon completion of drilling operations. 24 Hr. Delayed Reading; Boring dry 8 caved © 18'. SURFACE ELEVATION: 64.0 LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT x La Z U 0. DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM LL PL PI yt3: - .S: :;:Same i��- * 5 - sS 5-2 .. N=9 • N=8 16 17 CLAYEY SAND with roots and trace calcareous deposits, dark brown, moist, stiff, fill. as above. Same as above. - i:i: - SH S-3 P=2.5 17 108 3 4 3;. 10 ❖ 1 ,�SH x it 15 - SH S-4 SH S-5 S-6 P=3.5 P=3.0 P=3.25 20 20 20 104 3.6 SILTY CLAY with sand, brown, moist, stiff, fill. Same as above, very stiff. Same as above. f, i if� ' 20 - _i/3. i y S-7 N =16 9 29 16 13 31 CLAYEY SAND, dark gray, dry, medium.(SC) ems% x 25 SS S-8 _ N=21 9 SILTY CLAY brown, moist, very stiff. DJ Boring was terminated at a depth of 25 feet. N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE a� � P -POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE ' T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH � 3 REMARKS; Boring location and depth was determined by Smith, Russo 6 Mercer. Boring was staket in the field by RETL al proposed location of the wash water pump station, Boring operations were performed by Envirocore, Inc. LOG OF BORING B-6 Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. 0 C 4214Corp Dillon sane 11010 Corpus lion Christi. Texas 78415 Telephone: (361) 851-9955 Fax: (361) 851-6760 o w N CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi PROJECT: O. N. Stevens Plant Wash Water System LOCATION: Leopard St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: 0000572 DATE(S) DRILLED: 05/09/00 - 05/09/00 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA _ DRILLING METHOD(S): HoDow Stem Auger 1 SOIL SYMBOL 1 SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONSISO FT T: TONSISO FT PERCENT RECOVERY! ROCK DUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDSICU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONSISO FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry during drilling. Boring dry and caved @ 31.5' upon completion of drilling operations. 24 Hr. Delayed Reading; Boring dry & caved @ 31'. SURFACE ELEVATION: 52.7 LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM **if :❖: S 0: 4 Obi 44- _ - 5 _ •• " 10 - sSN=10 s.1 Ss S-2 S-3 S� SH S 5 X . N=8 P=2.5 P=3.0 P=4.0 14 19 19 23 32 102 3.1 62 SILTY CLAY with roots and trace calcareous deposits, brown, dry, stiff, fill. Same as above, moist. Same as above. SILTY CLAY brown, moist, very stiff. Same as above. / r /' v. - 15 - - SS N=16 9 26 CLAYEY SAND dark gray, dry, medium. Same as above, loose. Same as above. a FINE SAND trace calcareous.deposits, brown, moist, % 20 : y SS S-7 N =7 6 25 • �' 25 -, 30 • - 35 - - •r - 40 S-8 S_9 SS SS S-11 ,, N=9 N=28 ^ N=20 '\ N=18 • 7 3 4 26 _ 7 medium. Same as above. Same as above, sandy clay @ 39.5', moist. Boring was terminated at a depth of 40 feet. N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE ii T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring location and depth was determined by Smith. Russo & Mercer. Boring was stakec in the field by RETL on the north side of the proposed 12.5 MG Clearwel No. 3. Boring operations were performed by Envirocore. Inc. LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 1 Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 6817 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, TX 78409 Telephone: (361) 883-4555 Fax: (361) 883-4711 CLIENT: Bath Engineering PROJECT: Prop. Electrical Distribution Improvements LOCATION: 13101 Leopard Street; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G110134 DATE(S) DRILLED: 04/08/10 - 04/08/10 SOIL SYMBOL FIELD DATA u_ a. o- w 0 SAMPLE NUMBER w a 2 �cn/ MOISTURE CONTENT (%) LABORATORY DATA ATI F I LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PL 1-- j j v) Z V) La 0 Z CC ono. COMPRESSIVE O0 rn Z W Z 0 b MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) DRILLING METHOD(S): Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations. Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM 0 a 1- 0 0 J F W 0 0 0 0. 0 m crr ix 0 J 0 U 1- 0 U w J w 0 s 0 z 0 0 U 0 O. O. • .4. 5 - 15 - - 20 - 25 SS S-1 SS S-2 SS S-3 SS S-4 ss S-5 Ss S-6 SS S-7 Ss S-8 N= 7 10 CLAYEY SAND with calcareous deposits, dark brown, dry, firm, possible fill. N= 6 8 22 15 7 28 SILTY CLAYEY SAND brown and light brown, dry, loose, possible fill. (SC -SM) Y N= 11 N= 21 N= 23 5 12 13 41 46 49 15 14 14 26 32 35 56 62 SANDY LEAN CLAY with calcareous deposits, brown and light brown, dry, stiff. (CL) Same as above, very stiff. (CL) Same as above. N= 15 N= 22 N= 31 6 8 18 SILTY CLAYEY SAND brown and light brown, dry, medium. Same as above. CLAYEY SAND with calcareous deposits, brown, moist, very stiff. Sand seam encountered. Boring was terminated at a depth of 25 -feet. N - STAND P - POCKE T - POCKE A T RD PENETRAT PENETROME TORVANE SH ION TER EAR TES RESI STR T RE STA ENG SIST NCE TH ANCE REMARKS: Boring depth was determined by RETL and boring location was determined by Bath Engineering. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 51.503' W 97° 31.155.' Boring Location: New Power Control Room "PCR -7" Engineering & Testing Laboratory, Inc. 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 Office: (361) 883-4555 Fax: (361) 883-4711 KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATIONS AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Major Divisions COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS GRAVEL AND GRAVELLY SOILS Letter GW GP Symbol Hatching Color w NAME Well — graded gravels or gravel — sand mixtures, little or no fines Poorly -graded gravels or gravel — sand mixtures, little or no fines GM GC O J -J w >- Silty gravels, gravel — sand — silt mixtures Clayey gravels, gravel - sand — clay mixtures SAND AND SANDY SOILS SILTS AND CLAYS LL < 50 SW SP SM 0 w Well - graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines cc Poorly —graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines SC ML CL i z w 0 OL Silty sands, sand — silt mixtures Clayey sands, sand — clay mixtures Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clayey fine sands or clayey silts with TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL STRUCTURE SLICKENSIDED — having inclined planes Of weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance FISSURED — containing shrinkage cracks, frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually more or less vertical LAMINATED (VARVED) — composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top. CRUMBLY — cohesive soils which break into small blocks or crumbs on drying CALCAREOUS — containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate, generally nodular. WELL GRADED — having wide range in grain sizes and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes, POORLY GRADED - predominantly of one grain size (uniformly graded) or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing (gap or skip graded) SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays Organic silts and organic silt -clays of low plasticity SILTS AN D CLAYS LL > 50 MH CH OH ...0 w DO Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandy or silty soils, elastic silts Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS P' 0 z cc cc 0 Peat and other highly organic soils MIC = 15 — Natural moisture content in percent. y = 95 — Dry unit weight in lbs/cu ft. Qu = 1.23 — Unconfined compression strength in tons/ sq ft. 51 — 21 — 30 — Liquid limit, Plastic limit, and Plasticity index. 30% FINER — Percent finer than No. 200 mesh sieve 30 B/F — Blows per foot, standard penetration test. 7 — Ground water table. TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL (2) COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE TERM NO. BLOWS / FT. STANDARD PEN. TEST DESCRIPTIVE TERM NO. BLOWS / FT. STANDARD PEN. TEST Very loose 0 — 4 Very Soft Loose 4 — 10 Soft Firm (medium) 10 — 30 Plastic (med. Stift) Dense 30 — 50 Stiff Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff Hard Field classification for "Consistency" is determined with a 0.25" diameter penetrometer. <2 2-4 4-8 8-15 15-30 over 30 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TONS PER SQ. FT. < 0.25 0.25 — 0.50 0.50- 1.00 1.0 — 2.00 2.00 — 4.00 over 4.00 FUGRO CONSULTANTS, INC. Report No. 04.11140020 August 7, 2014 Rock Engineering & Testing Laboratory, Inc. 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 Attention: Morgan Schummer Laboratory Testing Program The High Service Three Project MHZ 6100 Hdlcroft, Tech Building Houston, Tx 77081 Tel: (713) 369-5400 Fax: (713) 369-5545 www.fudroconsultants.com The Houston Geotechnical Testing Laboratory of Fugro Consultants. Inc. is pleased to present the results of this specialized geotechnical properties testing program for the above -referenced project. The tests were performed from July 21, 2014 through August 2, 2014 in general accordance with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard test methods D 4015 and D 4318. No design parameters have been selected as this task is beyond the scope of work. The test results relate only to the sample tested. The results are presented on the following 2 pages. We appreciate this opportunity to be of continued service to Rock Engineering We look forward to working with you on future projects. Sample/Specimen No. Initial Moisture (%) Liquid Limit LL (%) Plasticity Index PI (%) Initial Wet Density (pcf) Initial Dry Density (pcf) Void Ratio Consol Pressure (ksf) Shear Modulus at two (ksf) Gmax (ksf) B-2, Sample a 13.0 45 33 T 128.0 ( 113.0 0.49 1 0.81 439 550 Sincerely, Fugro Consultants, Inc. —11/42,ttAi_e:Vi \v,(0.4, Maurice N. Morvant Manager, Geotechnical Laboratory Page 1 of 4 Report No. 04.11140020 Low Amplitude Shear Modulus (ksf) 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 I 1 1 I I III 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 I 1 1 1 11 I II111 1 111 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I II 1 1 1 1 1 II I I I IIII 1 1 11111 1 1 11 I I 11 I 1 1 1 1 1 II 11 111111 I 11111II X 1 1 1 1 1 111111 I I I I I I II I I I I I 1 II 11 111 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1/ 1 1 1 1 11 1 111111 I i 1111 II 1 111 fHH 1 1111 I II 1 I1I111 111 I I 11 II 1 1111 I 1I11 I 1 1 1 1 1 IIII 1 11 11 I II I I 11III 1 1 1 1 1 11111 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 1 11 1111 IIII 1111 IIII 11111 11111 11111 III 11 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 111111 1 i 1 11111 1 111111 1 1 111111 1111111 . . ...,,,I 1 1 1 11111 11111 11111 11111 11111 1 1 111111 I 11 11111 1 I 111111 11111111 I 1 111111 1 I 111111 1 11 11111 1 1 111111 11111111 1 1111111 11 ,111 1 111111 1 1 1 11111 1 1 111111 1 1111111 I 1111111 1 . 1 1 —Sen 1 Y' 1 1 1 1 II 11 111111 I I IIIII 11111 1 1 1111 I 1 I 1 I I 1 1 I I I 11111 111111 1 1 1 11111 I 1 1 11111 1 1 I I 1111111 11 111111 1 111111 1 1 111111 1 1111111 1 1111111 1 1 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11111 1 1 1 1 1 111 I 1 1 1 1 111 1.0E-01 600 2 500 cn 400 m p � 300 d CD 200 4- r E • 100 O 0 1.0E+00 1.0E+01 1.0E+02 1.0E+03 Elapsed Time (min) 1.0E+04 c1 0 O 0 0 —a— Seq. 1 0 0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120 0 Elapsed Time (min) RESONANT COLUMN TEST One Stage of Isotropic Consolidation Sample: a Depth: 7.50 ft Boring B-2 Page 2 of 4 G G'El Report No. 04.11140020 Normalized Shear Modulus, G/Gmax Damping, a, (%) 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 1 1111 1 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 11111111 I I I 1 I 1111 1111 1111 111 1 111111 1 3111111 I I 1 I IIII I I 1 I I 1 1 I I I I I 3111111 I 3311111 I 1111111 1 1 I I 1 I 11 III 111 III 111 1 I 1 I I 1 1111 111111 111111 1 11111 } i l ®I 11 R I 1 111111 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 111 II I I III I Q 1 0 I 1 10 I 111111 1 111111 I I 1 1 111 I 1 1 I 111111;I 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 1111111 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 111 0111111 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111 1 1111111 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 3111111 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 111113 I I 11 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1111 1 1111111 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 I 1 I 1111111 1 11 11111 1 1 11 I 1 I I I I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 114111 111111 1 11111 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 I I I III 11 1 1 14111 I III I I 1 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I III 11 I III 1111 I I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 III 1 1 11 1 1 1111' 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' f•. 1 1 1 I 1 I. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111111 1 1 1 1 1 . 3 1 I. 1 I 1 I I 1 I I 1 1 1 I 1 1 I I 1111111I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I III 1 1111111 I I 1 I I I I I IIII 11111 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 I 1 1 I:: I I I I 1 11 1 1 1 11111 1 1 1 1 1 111,1 I 1 1 1111311 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 I 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 III 111 1 I I 1 I I 111 I 1 I 1 11 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 I 1111 1111 1 1 1 1 1111 1111 1 1 111111 11 111111 1111 1111 1 1 1 1 1111 1111 1 I 11101 1 1 111111 1 1 111111 11 11 1 I 11 II 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 IIII 1111 111' 1 I 1 I 1111 1111 - -TT, 0 Seq. 1 III 111 111 1 I I 1 I I 1 1 1 III IIII IIII 1 1 111111 1 1 1 11111 11,1 Ilii I I 1111 1111 I 1 111111 3 1 1 11111 0 3 1 1 11111 11 1 I 1 I I ,!. l O I 1 10 1111 III I IIII 11111 ; •1 1 1 1• 1" 1 1.0E-04 1.0E-03 1.0E-02 1.0E-01 1.0E+00 20.0 18.0 16.0 14.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0.0 Shear Strain Amplitude, ycy (%) 1.0E+01 0 Seq 1 i 1111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111 I 1111111 I 1 11 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 .111 I 1111141 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111111 1 3111111 I I 1 I IIII 1 1 .111 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1331311 11111 1 1 111 1 1 1 1 1 I 1141111 I 1111111 1 1111111 I 3111111 I 3311111 I 1111111 I I I I I I I 1 . I I II I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111 1 1111311 1 1111111 3 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3111411 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1. 1 1 4 I 1111111 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1111141 1 11111 1111111 1 111111 1 1 11111 1 1 1 11111 11 111111 1 1111111 I 1 1 11111 I 1 111111 1 1111111 11 111111 1 11 11111 I 1 1 11111 1 1 111111 I 1 111111 11 1 11111 I 1 1 11111 11 I I I I I I 1 1 111111 1 1 1 11111 1111111 11111111 1 11IIIII 01 1111111 11111111 1111111 1 I I I I I I I I 1111111 1 1111111 I I 1 I I I I I 1 1 11111 1 1 111111 1 1 1 111110 1 1 111111 1 I 1 11111 .r 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . 1 &I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 s 1 1.111 I I I 1 11 1 1 111111 11 111111 1 1 111111 1 I 11101 1 1 111111 1 1 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 IIII 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 3111111 I 1 1 11111 1 1 1 11111 1 101 11111 1 1 111111 1 1 1 11111 11 1 11111 I 1 111111 3 1 1 11111 0 3 1 1 11111 11 1 11111 1 ®1• I• 'll, ,!. l O I 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ; •1 1 1 1• 1" 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111111 11 111111 3 1 111111 1 111111 1 1 111114 1 1 1 I I III I 1111111 1 1113111 I 1 I I 1 1 1 1 I 1111111 11 111111 1 1111111 11 111111 1 1 111111 I 1111111 11 111111 I I 111111 1 1 111111 1 Ili 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 .111 1 11 1 1 111111 1 1 111111 11 111111 I 1 111111 11 111111 I 1 1 11111 I 1 1 11111 I I l 11111 1 1 111111 I 1 1 11111 I 1 111111 1 1 111111 1 1 111111 1 1 111111 1 I 111111 1 I 1 1 1 1 11 1 1111111 I 1 l 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 1 3 111111 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 11 1 I I I I I I I 1.0E-04 1.0E-03 1.0E-02 1.0E-01 Shear Strain Amplitude, ycy (%) 1.0E+00 RESONANT COLUMN TEST One stage of Isotropic Consolidation Sample: a Depth: 7.50 ft Boring B-2 Page 3 of 4 1.0E+01 Report No. 04.11140020 End of Report Page 4 of 4 Review your project results through Total Access Have a Question? The Exert Visit us at: www.testarne:noinc.com. TestAmerica THE LEADER IN ENVIRONMENTAL TESTING ANALYTICAL REPORT TestAmerica Laboratories, Inc. TestAmerica Corpus Christi 1733 N. Padre Island Drive Corpus Christi, TX 78408 Tel: (361)289-2673 TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Client Project/Site: High Service 3 Project For: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 Attn: Ms. Morgan Schummer m..e122 Authorized for release by: 7/22/2014 11:32:07 AM Neal Salcher, Senior Project Manager neal.salcher@testamericainc.com The test results in this report meet all 2003 NELAC and 2009 TNI requirements for accredited parameters, exceptions are noted in this report. This report may not be reproduced except in full, and with written approval from the laboratory. For questions please contact the Project Manager at the e-mail address or telephone number listed on this page. This report has been electronically signed and authorized by the signatory. Electronic signature is intended to be the legally binding equivalent of a traditionally handwritten signature. Results relate only to the items tested and the sample(s) as received by the laboratory. v Definitions/Glossary Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 si Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Glossary Abbreviation These commonly used abbreviations may or may not be present in this report. Listed under the "D" column to designate that the result is reported on a dry weight basis %R Percent Recovery CFL Contains Free Liquid CNF Contains no Free Liquid DER Duplicate error ratio (normalized absolute difference) Dil Fac Dilution Factor DL, RA. RE, 1N Indicates a Ddution, Re -analysis, Re -extraction, or additional Initial metals/anion analysis of the sample DLC Decision level concentration MDA Minimum detectable activity EDL Estimated Detection Limit MDC Minimum detectable concentration MDL Method Detection Limit MI Minimum Level (Dioxin) NC Not Calculated ND Not detected at the reporting limit (or MOL or EDL if shown) PQL Practical Quantitation Limit QC Quality Control RER Relative error ratio RL Reporting Limit or Requested Limit (Radiochemistry) RPD Relative Percent Difference, a measure of the relative difference between two points TEF Toxicity Equivalent Factor (Dioxin) TEC/ Toxicity Equivalent Quotient (Dioxin) TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 2 of 12 7/22/2014 Case Narrative Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Job ID: 560-48598-1 Laboratory: TestAmerica Corpus Christi Narrative Job Narrative 560-48598-1 Comments No additional comments. Receipt The samples were received on 7/10/2014 3:00 PM, the samples arrived in good condition, properly preserved and, where required, on ice. The temperature of the cooler at receipt was 1.6° C. General Chemistry No analytical or quality issues were noted, other than those described in the Definitions/Glossary page. Organic Prep No analytical or quality issues were noted, other than those described in the Definitions/Glossary page. TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 3 of 12 7/22/2014 Detection Summary Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab.. Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Client Sample ID: B-1; 1.0'-2.5' Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-1 Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Dil Fac D Method Prep Type Sulfate 220 110 94 mgr Kg 10 ' 9056 Soluble Client Sample ID: B-1; 11.0'-12.5' Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-2 Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Dil Fac D Method Prep Type Sulfate 280 130 110 mg'Kg 10 9056 Soluble Client Sample ID: B-2; 3.5'-5.0' Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-3 Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Dil Fac D Method Prep Type Sulfate 1100 110 98 mg/Kg 10 9056 Soluble Client Sample ID: B-2; 13.5'-15.0' Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-4 Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Dil Fac D Method Prep Type Sulfate 210 110 91 mgr Kg 10 9056 Soluble Client Sample ID: B-3; 8.5'-10.0' Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-5 Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Dil Fac D Method Prep Type Sulfate 310 100 90 mg/Kg 10 9056 Soluble Client Sample ID: B-3; 18.5'-20.0' Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-6 Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Dil Fac D Method Prep Type Sulfate 390 110 91 mg/Kg 10 7 9056 Soluble This Detection Summary does not include radiochemical test results. TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 4 of 12 7/22/2014 Client Sample Results Client Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Client Sample ID: B-1; 1.0'-2.5' Date Collected: 07/10/14 10:00 Date Received: 07/10/14 15:00 General Chemistry - Soluble Analyte Sulfate Client Sample ID: B-1; 11.0'-12.5' Date Collected: 07/10/14 10:00 Date Received: 07/10/14 15:00 Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-1 Matrix: Solid Percent Solids: 92.3 Result Qualifier RL MOL Unit D Prepared Analyzed Dil Fac 220 110 94 mg/Kg 07/16/14 21:40 10 General Chemistry - Soluble Analyte Result Qualifier RL MOL Unit Sulfate 280 130 110 mg/Kg Client Sample ID: B-2; 3.5'-5.0' Date Collected: 07/10/14 10:08 Date Received: 07/10/14 15:00 General Chemistry - Soluble Analyte Sulfate Client Sample ID: B-2; 13.5'-15.0' Date Collected: 07/10/14 10:12 Date Received: 07/10/14 15:00 Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-2 Matrix: Solid Percent Solids: 77.1 D Prepared Analyzed Dil Fac 07/16/14 22:02 10 Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-3 Matrix: Solid Percent Solids: 88.5 Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit 0 Prepared Analyzed 1311 Fac 1100 110 98 mg/Kg 07/16/14 2224 10 Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-4 Matrix: Solid Percent Solids: 94.9 General Chemistry - Soluble Analyte Result Qualifier RL MOL Unit D Prepared Analyzed Dil Fac Sulfate 210 110 91 mg/Kg 07/16/14 2330 10 Client Sample ID: B-3; 8.5'-10.0' Date Collected: 07/10/14 10:15 Date Received: 07/10/14 15:00 General Chemistry - Soluble Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Sulfate 310 100 90 mg/Kg Client Sample ID: B-3; 18.5'-20.0' Date Collected: 07/10/14 10:20 Date Received: 07/10/14 15:00 Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-5 Matrix: Solid Percent Solids: 96.2 Prepared Analyzed Dil Fac 07/16/14 2352 10 Lab Sample ID: 560-48598-6 Matrix: Solid Percent Solids: 95.1 General Chemistry - Soluble Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit D Prepared Analyzed Dil Fac Sulfate 390 110 91 mg/Kg 07/17/14 00.14 10 TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 5 of 12 7/22/2014 QC Sample Results Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Method: 9056 - Anions, Ion Chromatography Lab Sample ID: MB 560-104582/1-A Matrix: Solid Analysis Batch: 104630 MB MB Analyte Result Qualifier RL MDL Unit Sulfate <8.7 10 8.1 mg/Kg Lab Sample ID: LCS 560-104582/2-A Matrix: Solid Analysis Batch: 104630 Client Sample ID: Method Blank Prep Type: Soluble 0 Prepared Analyzed Dil Fac 07/16/14 17:37 1 Client Sample ID: Lab Control Sample Prep Type: Soluble Spike LCS LCS %Rec. Analyte Added Result Qualifier Unit 0 •/.Rec Limits Sulfate 200 210 mg/Kg 105 80- 120 TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 6 of 12 7/22/2014 Certification Summary Client Rock Engineering & Testing Lab.. Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Laboratory: TestAmerica Corpus Christi All certifications held by this laboratory are listed Not all certifications are applicable to this report. Authority Program EPA Region Certification ID Expiration Date Kansas NELAP 7 E-10362 10-31-14 Oklahoma State Program 6 9968 08-31-14 Texas NELAP 6 T104704210 03-31-15 TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 7 of 12 7/22/2014 Method Summary Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Method Method Description Protocol Laboratory 9056 Anions Ion Chromatography SW846 TAL CC Moisture Percent Moisture EPA TAL CC Protocol References: EPA = US Environrnenial Protection Agency SW846 = "Test Methods For Evaluating Solid Waste. Physical/Chemical Methods", Third Edition. November 1986 And Its Updates. Laboratory References: TAL CC = TestAmerica Corpus Christi. 1733 N. Padre Island Drive. Corpus Christi, TX 78408, TEL (361)289-2673 TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 8 of 12 7/22/2014 Sample Summary Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. TestAmerica Job ID: 560-48598-1 Project/Site: High Service 3 Project Lab Sample ID Client Sample ID Matrix Collected Received 560-48598-1 B-1, 1.0'-2.5' Solid 07/10/14 10.00 07/10/14 15.00 560-48598-2 B-1; 11.0'-12.5' Solid 07/10/14 10:00 07/10/14 15:00 560-48598-3 B-2, 3.5'-5.0' Solid 07/10/14 10:08 07/10/14 15:00 560-48598-4 B-2, 13.5'-15.0' Solid 07/10/14 10 12 07/10/14 15:00 560-48598-5 B-3; 8.5'-10.0' Solid 07/10/14 10 15 07/10/14 15:00 560-48598-6 B-3, 18.5'-20.0' Solid 07/10/14 10:20 07/10/14 15.00 TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 9 of 12 7/22/2014 TestAmerica Corpus Christi 1733 N. Padre Island Chive Corpus Christi, TX 78408 Phone (361) 289-2673 Fax (361) 289-2471 Chain of Custody RecordalislOPIPMNIPMMIN TestAn Loc: 560 tnr rArr •.r•.wn 48598 Client Information C Sampler Lab PM: Salcher, Neal Carder Tracking No(s): COC No: 560-14201-1271.1 Client Contact: Ms. Morgan Schummer Phone: E -Mel: neal.salcher@lestamericainc.com Page: Page 1 of 1 Company: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. Analysis Requested Job 4. /� rj6!q Address. 6817 Leopard Street;; Due Date Requested:a? IFIeld-Flttered Sample (Yes or No) : a 'r ,, {.. � t•, i Vr :2. : o . ;�- st y ;1, .it, 120.1, 261013, 90460, 9060, Moisture Total Number otcontainers Prosorvatlon Codes: A - HCL N - Hexene B-NeOH NoneN - C - Zn Acetate 0 - AeNo02 0- Nitric Acid P - Na204S E - NaHSO4 0 - Na2503 F -MeOH R-Na2S2503 G - Amchlor S - H2SO4 H- Ascorbic Acid T - TSP Dodecahydralo I - Ice U - Acetone J - DI Water V - MCAA K - EDTA W - ph 4-5 L - EDA Z - other (specify) Other. City: Corpus Christi Requested (days): TAT Rs q - Thr %\.)--% ",-SI OC1..y�'' Stale, Zip: TX, 78409 Phoma; 361-6634555(Tel) 361-883-4711(Fax) PO p' /�� ` \ r 1 1Q RETL Project # Here GI ` `t O 9, Email: morgan@rocklesting.com WO 5: Project Name: ��h S`,v\C... 3 Q'C0\:40 Pro)ed M: 56003431 O.N. C4e.c,, Site: SSOWH: Sam •le Identification Sample Date Semple Time Sample Type (C=comp, G=grab) Matrix (w-w,in, o-sw...drat eT-TI••u•,A-Alr Special Instructions/Note: . Presetvatlon Cbde) N >:====—• t i 1 ` •d - L •S r tho/''1 lalibbg,+1" Solid ~ i ) 11,01.— 1.2;---- J 7/10/11-i )if7;f 1(�As Solid 1( ��+ « Y3' . 3 5 5-D 7/1c/h -1 I; ) i '.08,4,,,,. Solid (� - R - ' 13,x6 - I' • a r -7/0.-)/1,4 10:12/41-1 solid V, r -• 3 o Q./-3 ti jDru‘ Mail ID! 64••,-t Solid '..� 8�'t f r v ` 7-0,0 ��Id/ �1: i%i%,�ivl Sold 7( `� r t 560-48596 Chain o Custody 1 l Possible Hazard identification Rnknown 0 Non -Hazard Flammable akin Irritant 'oison B "Unknown l iadiological Sale Dispose (A fee maybeassessed If samples �Retum To Client `-'Disposal By Lab are I �retained longer than 1 month) `7lrchrve For Monlhs Deliverable Requested: I, II, III, IV, Other (specify) Special Instructions/QC Requirements: Empty Kit Relinquished by: IDate: )Time: IMelhod of ( Shipment Relinquish Dalegime: 7�10 %ly 3.t� ir-�► Company R 1 t Dale/TI �� /V /J W /� 7�� ('J9�y, j C/ /`! 1, l Rellnqul ed b Date/Time: Company R slued by. Dai ma Crxrpuny -Relinquished by DalelTime: Company Received by: Dale/lime Company ,o y Seals Intact: Yes e No Custody Seal No.: - Coder Temperaltr (s) °C and Outer a li AI (R� 6(n IR If Page 1 of 1 Salcher, Neal From: Ms. Morgan Schummer [morgan@rocktesting.com] Sent: Thursday, July 10, 2014 3:23 PM To: Salcher, Neal Subject: High Service 3 Project - ON Stevens - TestAmerica Neal, The chain of custody recently submitted for the above referenced project may have been incorrect. We only need sulfate ion concentration (Method 9056) performed on each sample. Thanks, Morgan Morgan Schummer Rock Engineering & Testing Laboratory, Inc. Texas Professional Engineering Firm No. 2101 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 (361) 883-4555 - phone (361) 883-4711 - fax morgan(irocktesting.com 7212014 Page 11 of 12 7/22/2014 Login Sample Receipt Checklist Client: Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. Job Number: 560-48598-1 Login Number: 48598 List Number: 1 Creator: Hicks, Kristina M Question Answer Comment Radioactivity wasn't checked or is <1= background as measured by a survey N/A meter. The coolers custody seal, if present. is intact. True Sample custody seals, if present. are intact. True The cooler or samples do not appear to have been compromised or True tampered with. Samples were received on ice. True Cooler Temperature is acceptable. True Cooler Temperature is recorded. True COC is present. True COC is filled out in ink and legible. True COC is filled out with all pertinent information. True Is the Field Samplers name present on COC? True There are no discrepancies between the containers received and the COC. True Samples are received within Holding Time. True Sample containers have legible labels. True Containers are not broken or leaking. True Sample collection date/times are provided. True Appropriate sample containers are used. True Sample bottles are completely filled. True Sample Preservation Verified. True There is sufficient vol. for all requested analyses. incl_ any requested True MS/MSOs Containers requiring zero headspace have no headspace or bubble is N/A <6mm (1/4"). Mulliphasic samples are not present. True Samples do not require splitting or compositing. True Residual Chlorine Checked. N/A TestAmerica Corpus Christi List Source: TestAmerica Corpus Christi Page 12 of 12 7/22/2014 APPENDIX B CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING EXHIBITS ATTACHMENT NO. 1 AEP 69KV CIRCUIT 1-- - i ----► AEP 69KV CIRCUIT Existing High Service: Existing High Service: AEP SUBSTATIONg HS#1-Pumps 3,5,6,7 HS#1-Pumps 1,2,4 Total Total Capacity-46.2 MGD Capacity-36 MGD Total Total Horsepower-2,200 HP - '- Horsepower-1,700 HP Proposed High Service: Proposed High Service: HS#3-Pumps 13,15(VFD) HS#3-Pumps 14,16 Total Total Capacity-39.4 MGD Capacity-39.4 MGD Total Total Horsepower-3,000 HP Horsepower-3,000 HP Existing/Proposed Wash Water: PCR I BUS PCR-1 ExistinglProposed Wash Water: Wash Water-Pumps 3,5 Total Wash Water-Pump 7 Total Capacity-25.9 MGD Total SWITCHBOARD "A" TIE SWITCHBOARD "B" Capacity-12.9 MGD Total Horsepower 400 HP Horsepower-200 HP - � P ......-..._........._v.=.-. L..-_._.-....._..- 3 1st 2nd I PCR-2 BUS ACR-2 SWITCHBOARD "A" TIE SWITCHBOARD"B" EXISTING EXISTING HS#1 HS#1 I LOADS .-1LOADS = _ f 3rd I 4th PCR-3 BUS PCR-3 SWITCHBOARD"A" TIE SWITCHBOARD "B" SPARE SPARES EXISTING '` EXISTING s HS#2 HS#2 LOADS LOADS ......... Existing/Proposed High Service: Existing/Proposed High Service: HS#2-Pumps 8,9 HS#2-Pumps 10,11(VFD) Total Capacity-49 MGD Total Total Capacity-49 MGD Total Horsepower-3,000 HP NEW NEW Horsepower-3,000 HP Proposed High Service: HS#3 HS#3 Proposed High Service: HS#3-Pump 12(VFD)Total LOADS LOADS HS#3-Pump 17 Capacity-19.7 MGD Total Total Capacity-19.7 MGD Total Horsepower-1,500 HP Horsepower-1,500 HP SIMPLIFIED POWER DIAGRAM Note: LEGEND 1. Refer to Attachment No.2-Control Sequencing Exhibit for pump identification numbers. NEW WORK 2. 1st,2nd,3rd,and 4th refers to the electrical modification switchboard construction sequence order. - — EXISTING - - - -- EXISTING TO HE REMOVED "FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY" LNV CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS D.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT ertgfneers I architects I contractors , HIGH SERVICE NO. 3 TEXAS FIRM REGISTRATION NO Fd29 SIMPLIFIED POWER DIAGRAM sfisRP STAPeS SU TEM .......l"1we� ® CORPUS CNWSTI,TX 79!11 Ctceernµxo�"i�teau Twp ru rev usieu yy��yps (361199].2296 ATTACHMENT NO.2 LEGEND DPHASE 1: D PHASE 3: HIGH SERVICE 3 BUILDING, DECOMMISSION HIGH SERVICE 1 AND YARD PIPING, UTILITIES, AND TRANSFER ELECTRICAL TO HIGH SERVICE ROAD WORK 3, CLEARWELL 1 IMPROVEMENTS, AND 36" DRAIN LINE TIE—IN. NPHASE 2: PHASE 4: YARD PIPING TIE—INS HIGH SERVICE 2 REHABILITATION & SCALE 1"=180' ALTERNATE POWER BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS 0 180' O ONSWTP PUMP IDENTIFICATION � it CP&L ELECTRICAL STATION 2 w 12 12 ,zwQ " ELECTRICAL BUILDING 6 R P �\ HIGH SERVICE 1 36 RCP 36 RCP II 0000° e / e If,I�I,VII � 0 ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING 7A 6 5 4 3 2 1 STORAGE BUILDING POWER CONTROL ROOM 3 c�EARwE�� EXISTING HIGH POWER CONTROL ROOM 2 ego SERVICE 2 BUILDING Al, 8 RCP R CP h W 8 RCP V7 8 9CPC W % Fl RCP 4 fi W 12�vre 2 J2 I 72 W 72 W O I 8 2 � �.LEARWELL 2 3 9 8 m� ❑ WASH WATER SUPPLY PUMP 11 10 STATION 5 w 8 12 W 42 W 42 W a �N 15 14 13 12 13 E 4 s NOTE: PROPOSED HIGH SERVICE / IF THIS EXHIBIT IS NOT IN COLOR 3 BUILDING 1 FORMAT, PLEASE CONTACT ENGINEER. I LINE STOP & ISOLATION VALVE INSTALLATION N "FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY" SHEET 1 OF 1 E O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT ory L Nv HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 engineers architects contractors CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 807 NAVIGATION,SUITE 300 PH.(361)883-1984 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING EXHIBIT = CORPUS CHRISTI,TEXAS 78408 FAX(361)883.1986 TBPE FIRM NO.F-366 wvm.LNVINC.COM 009101 ADDENDUM NUMBER 04 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Project: Pump Building No. 3 Project Number: Owner: City of Corpus Christi E11066 City Engineer: J.W. Edmonds, P.E. - Designer: LNV, Inc. Addendum No. 4 Specification Section: 00 9101 Issue Date: 05/31/16 Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Sid Acknowledgement Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serge as the basis for rejecting the Bid. Make the additions,modifications or deletions to the Contract Documents described in this Addendum. Approved by: Grady S.Atkinson, P.E. 05/31/16 Name Dote Addendum Items: OF. MODIFICATION TF�t� • MODIFICATION TO BIDDING REQUIREMENTS do �P • MODIFICATION TO SPECIFICATIONS MODIFICATION TO DRAWINGS OV* • CLARIFICATIONS f GRADY S. ATKINSON /.......................... QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS �/+ 115461 ift` SEO. � LNV engineers architects surveyors TBPE FIRM NO. F-366 Addendum No.04 009101-1 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No.3—E11066 Rev 01-13.2016 ARTICLE 1—BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA A. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. 1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO THE BIDDING REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM: DELETE: SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM in its entirety. ADD: SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM (Attachment 1). * Please note that the Bid Form provided on the CivCast website does not include the "Schedule of Manufacturers and Suppliers for Major Equipment" form as shown in Attachment 1 on pages 3,4 and S. If Bidder chooses to use the CivCast bid form,please be sure to include the"Schedule of Manufacturers and Suppliers for Major Equipment" form with the bid submittal. B. SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT: DELETE: SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT in its entirety. ADD: SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT(Attachment 2). ARTICLE 2—MODIFICATIONS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 ADD, DELETE OR REPLACE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS (OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS) A. Delete the following Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications): Deleted Specification Sections(or Technical Specifications) (ADDENDUM NO. 3) SECTION 43 2101 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP(S) (ADDENDUM NO. 3) SECTION 43 2102 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP B. Add the following Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications): Added Specification Sections(or Technical Specifications) SECTION 43 2101 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP(S) (Attachment 3) SECTION 43 2102 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (Attachment 4) 2.02 AMEND SPECIFICATIONS(OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS) A. (ADDENDUM NO. 3) SECTION 40 23 10 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS AND SPECIALS—SECTION (2.7) DELETE: "ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS"from the Section 2.7 Title. ADD: "ALL INSTALLATIONS"at the end of the Section 2.7 Title. Addendum No.04 00 9101-2 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 ARTICLE 3—MODIFICATIONS TO THE DRAWINGS 3.01 ADD OR DELETE DRAWINGS A. DELETE the following Drawings: Deleted Drawings Sheet 39—HIGH SERVICE 3 REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN (ADDENDUM NO. 3) Sheet 43— HIGH SERVICE 3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Sheet 45—HIGH SERVICE 3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Sheet 51—HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS (ADDENDUM NO. 3) Sheet 53— HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS (ADDENDUM NO. 3) Sheet 54— HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR/WINDOW ELEVATIONS& SCHEDULES Sheet 55—HIGH SERVICE 3 PARTITION TYPES B. ADD the following Drawings: Added Drawings Sheet 39—HIGH SERVICE 3 REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN (Attachment 5) Sheet 43—HIGH SERVICE 3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS (Attachment 6) Sheet 45—HIGH SERVICE 3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (Attachment 7) Sheet 51—HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS (Attachment 8) Sheet 53—HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS (Attachment 9) Sheet 54—HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR/WINDOW ELEVATIONS&SCHEDULES (Attachment 10) Sheet 55—HIGH SERVICE 3 PARTITION TYPES (Attachment 11) ARTICLE 4—CLARIFICATIONS 4.01 QUESTIONS&ANSWERS A. Question: "On Drawing 1-102 and 1-103 PIT's tags (PIT-2012-02, PIT-2012-02, PIT-2013-02, PIT-2013-02, PIT-2014-02, PIT-2014-02, PIT-2015-02, PIT-2015-02, PIT-2016-02, PIT-2016-02, PIT-2017-02, PIT-2017-02) are duplicated. Please advise if both PIT's are needed for this project and what the Tags should read?" Answer: "Both PIT's, (currently having the "-02" designator), are required. Typical for all, the PIT downstream of the Flow Control Valve will be designated as"-03"." Question: "At the existing High Service Pump No. 2 does the 24", 42", 54" (outside the building) exposed piping get to be sandblasted and coated?" Answer: "The exposed piping outside the building will not be repainted. Refer to M12 and Note 16 on M9 for work limits of piping that need to be sandblasted and repainted." Question: "Spec section 40 90 01 2.13G indicates that the manufacturer must submit a letter stating that the flow meters will be suitable to be installed on the suction side of the pumps. Can you indicate what the lowest possible pressure the meters will be exposed to will be?" Addendum No.04 00 9101-3 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "The flow meter on pump suction shall be rated for-14.7 psi suction pressure." Question: "Do the exterior brick walls of the building get a clear sealer?The interior exposed metal areas of the pump building call to be coated is the intent to paint only the exposed bar joists and not the metal decking or both?Also what paint system do you want for the metal areas dry fall paint system or epoxy?What paint system do you want for the interior exposed pumps and piping? 2 coats of an epoxy polyamide or 1 coat of polyamide and 1 coat of urethane epoxy as a finish coat?At the existing high service no 2 recoating of existing pumps and piping instead of sandblasting, containment of blast abrasive, and providing dehumidification equipment could we mechanically hand tool clean and provide another paint system that would give good results and not having to deal with sand and dust getting into electrical boxes, motors or other sensitive equipment. Does the exposed structural steel at the generator building get coated?" Answer: "No, there is a moisture barrier behind the brick veneer. Paint will be applied to both the foists and the metal decking. Epoxy paint is only for the interior walls and metal areas will need primer and top coat: Alkyd Dry Fall: MPI #55. 89. 225 as specified in Specification Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. Bidders are advised to read Specification Section 09 9110 Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting and Section 09 96 00 Protective Coating, and individual pump and piping specifications for required painting products. Bidders are advised to follow requirements as specified in the bid documents and protect existing equipment when executing the work and any damage to existing equipment caused by contractor negligence shall be repaired at no additional costs to the Owner. Bidders are advised to follow requirements as specified in the bid documents for coating exposed structural steel at the generator building." Question: "Sheet A103 calls for a catwalk and references the structural plans. There is no catwalk on the structural plans. Is this the bridge crane?The catwalk is also shown in section on sheet A109. Please advise." Answer: "There is NO mezzanine catwalk.The catwalk referenced above is to be provided by the crane manufacturer and come attached to the crane system." Question: "Can Peerless Pump be approved as an equal supplier for the High Service Split Case pumps if they meet the pump requirements?" Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications. Also please refer to the attached revised Specification Section 00 30 01 Bid Form for additional requirements on alternate equipment manufacturer and supplier." Question: "Please clarify testing of clearwater. There are different tests required by TECQ depending on the facility and pricing can greatly vary. Please clarify the test required." Answer: "Please refer to TCEQ and AWWA standards for disinfection and testing requirements. Disinfection and testing techniques shall be coordinated with ONSWTP staff prior to implementation." Question: "Is all galvanized steel to be painted?" Answer: "Exclude painted finish on ALL galvanized steel." Addendum No.04 00 9101-4 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Question: "Spec 0135 00 and Attachment No. 2 in Appendix B require a single, 60-inch line stop to minimize dewatering when connecting the new HS 3 60-inch discharge header to the existing 60-inch transmission line. Per 01 35 00, "this line is typically closed", but we are concerned that the existing 60-inch upstream isolation may not seal well enough for the tie- in. Has the seal on the existing upstream isolation valve been confirmed recently? If the existing 60-inch upstream isolation valve doesn't seal well enough,will a second 60-inch line stop be required and would we be provided additional compensation for the second line stop?" Answer:"The seal on the existing upstream 60"isolation valve has been confirmed recently to seal completely." Question: "Specification#40-05-57; Electrohydraulic Valve Actuators. I would like to request that Harold Beck & Sons rotary controlled actuators be approved for use under this specification. Harold Beck actuators have already been furnished to the ON Stevens water plant and will provide a competitive alternate to the Rexa actuators specified. Submittal information will be forwarded shortly." Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications. Also please refer to the attached revised Specification Section 00 30 01 Bid Form for additional requirements on alternate equipment manufacturer and supplier." Question: "Note 7 under Concrete Repair Notes on sheet S20 or sheet 75 refers to replacing reinforcing steel that has less than 75% of it's original cross section. Because the contactor will only be guessing at the quantity of steel reinforcement to replace, can we be given a quantity(pounds) of steel reinforcement to bid to?" Answer: "The quantities provided on the drawings are the bid quantities. The reinforcing shall be the same size& quantity as originally constructed. For the bid use 200 linear feet of#4 bar installed in sections as required for spot concrete repairs and 100 linear feet of #3 bar/stirrup for the same repairs." Question: "Since no PLC or HMI software is being provided for this project since it is existing, is the Vender Training in spec section 40 90 03 needed for this project?" Answer: "HMI software is existing. Refer to Specification 40 90 00 Instrumentation & Control for Process Systems Part 1. Section 1.1.A.1.d Integrator shall purchase the latest versions of all required PLC software and required licenses for such and use purchased PLC programming software for Project. Purchased PLC programming software will then be turned over to Owner upon completion of Project. Any training shall be per the Specifications." Question: "In Spec Section 40 90 00 it references the PLC's to connect to existing HSQ system. On Dwg. 1-00 show the existing system to be Factory Talk. Please clarify if coordination is needed with HSQ." Answer: "PLC shall be integrated into existing Plant FactoryTalk HMI system as required." Question: "On Drawing E-22 there are interior and exterior Security Cameras labeled Proposed Future. Are the Cameras to be supplied and installed for this project? If so please supply spec and which Contractor is responsible for the Security Equipment." Addendum No.04 00 9101-5 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "The scope of work applicable to the Security Camera System is for the raceway, pull and device box interconnecting system, (backbone) only. Provide and install all required interconnecting raceways, complete with pullstrings for future installation of the camera system." Question: "On Dwg. E-12 note 5 states fiber optic cable to be installed by others. However on Dwg.E-17 note 4 states Contractor shall provide and install fiber. On dwg. F-1 and F-2 the notes state this is new work for the fiber optic equipment. Please advise who is responsible for all fiber optic cable, patch panels and termination work for this project. If Contractor is to provide fiber optic equipment please provide spec." Answer: "The Contractor shall provide all fiber optic materials and equipment. Refer to Specification 27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling." Question: "Please provide spec for High Temperature Switch for High Service # 3 Electrical Room (TIT-2001)." Answer: "Refer to Specification 40 90 01 Instrumentation for RTD-type Temperature transmitters. Temperature switches shall be adjustable, weatherproof, NEMA 4x, with terminal block-type connections with a ranee appropriate to the process being monitored. Acceptable switches are Static-O-Ring Model 201NN or approved equal." Question:"Please provide spec for Intrusion Alarm Switches for each door in the High Service #3 Building (XS-2001A, 2001B, 2001C, 2001D)." Answer: "Intrusion alarm switches shall be surface mount contact-type with terminals. Honeywell MPS80 or approved equal." Question: "Please provide spec for Pressure Switches (PSLL- 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017)." Answer: "Pressure switches shall be adjustable, weatherproof, NEMA 4X, with terminal block-type connections with a range appropriate to the process being monitored. Acceptable switches are Static-O-Ring Model 6NN or approved equal." Question: "Please provide spec for Ammonia Analyzer(AIT-2001-05)." Answer: "Ammonia analyzer shall be manufactured by Hach, Model APA6000, or latest version of this unit, to match existing Plant equipment." Question: "Please also consider the Rosemount Ultrasonic level transmitter Model #3107 and sensor Model #3490 for Spec sections 2.19 and Model #9700 submerged pressure transmitter for 2.20." Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications." Question: "Macaulay Controls Company is the manufacturer's representative for Rosemount for the state of Texas in the municipal market. We are asking for approval to bid the Rosemount Model #8750WD mag meter as an equal to the specified.We would also request that the Rosemount Model #2051for DP and Model #2088 be specified in lieu of the Model #3051.The 2051 and Model #2088 are the municipal models." Addendum No.04 00 9101-6 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications." Question: "What is the type, brand, and model of the devices needed for the expansion of the Fire Alarm System." Answer: "No Fire Alarm System is required for this project." Question: "The lightning protection Construction Note 1 on Drawing E23 (sheet 163) refers to spec 26 4113.There is no spec 26 4113. Please clarify." Answer: "Disregard Construction Note 1 on Drawing E23(sheet 163)." Question: "Please clarify the cable tray supports shown on sheet #72 of #254. The details refer you to the electrical plans. Sheet #157 "Cable tray layout" and section on sheet#164 refer you to sheet #171. The callout on sheet #164 is incorrect. This detail shows the cable tray where it turns up from the trench to vertical up the wall. Please clarify how far the cable tray runs along the exterior of the pump room walls. Sheet#157 seems to show the cable running all the way out to just past the future pump. Are the metal knee brace supports at every column? How will the cable tray be supported where it turns along the block wall?" Answer: "The referenced callout on sheet#164. (Drawing E24), is incorrect as stated. The tray extends along the pump building gust past the future pump pedestal as shown. The contractor shall provide, fabricate and install all required tray supports utilizing the fabrication details on sheet #72. Where modifications are required, the contractor shall utilize the sheet #72 cable tray support details as minimum guidelines for field fabrications." Question: "Sheet 16 (Additive Alternate No. 1) Existing 12 W lines. a. Existing 12 W between existing stormwater manhole and the new proposed stormwater manhole, this existing 12 W line is above the new 36 RCP line. b. Existing 12 W that runs parallel to the new 36 RCP line between two new proposed stormwater manholes, these two new mhs are in the existing base drive. " Would the Owner consider allowing one of the following options. o Temporary shutdown the existing 12 W lines during the installation of the applicable new 36 RCP lines locations and new Manholes? § If so, please provide the temporary shutdown timeframe windows. Temporary relocation of these two existing 12 W Lines? § If so, please provide the temporary shutdown timeframe windows for relocation and replacement of the existing 12 W lines." Answer: "Temporary shutdown will be coordinated with the ONSWTP Operating Department during construction for acceptable shutdown timeframes of the 12-inch waterline. An acceptable timeframe anticipated for the 12-inch waterline temporary shutdown shall be less than 4-hours." Question: "Drawing H9 shows new piping to the Day Tank.What is the size of the drain valves on the EFR and EFS pipelines? Please review and resolve." Answer: "The size of the drain valves should be 1/2 inch." Question: "Drawing H9 shows a new Day Tank. Please provide a Specification for this Day Tank so that we can properly estimate this work." Addendum No.04 00 9101-7 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "The Day Tank is a part of, and included with, the 2MW Generator package. Coordinate with the referenced Cummins Southern Plains LLC. contact." Question: "Is the Owner providing the Fuel for the Fuel Tank?" Answer: "Diesel fuel for the new tank will be provided by the Owner." Question: "Please provide more clarification on the extension of the generator building. Are we to tie the new structure into the existing structure? Can you provide details on how to make the tie in?" Answer:"Yes,the extension of the generator building will be tied to the existing structure. All the structural elements such as beam column connection, bridge crane connection and end wall (existing) has to be designed and detailed by Pre-Engineered Metal Building manufacturer." Question: "Please provide a ceiling framing detail for gypsum board ceilings in High service 3 building." Answer: "Ceiling framing details have been added. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 55." Question: "Guard / Handrail Material - Detail Sheet Number 53. All Guard / Handrail notes call for Hot Dip Galvanized Pipe, Painted Finish.Various architectural elevations and sections indicate "PRE-FIN ALUMINUM RAILING". Detail "5 / 64" makes reference to Detail "2 / S19 (74)" which also indicates Aluminum Guard/ Handrail. Mezzanine-Catwalk Guard/ Handrail on Sheet Number 40 makes reference to Details "5, 6 / A118 (53) which is noted as HDG- Painted. Guardrail system at caged ladder egress are not identified as HDG-Painted or Aluminum.We request identification of Guard/Handril component for the various locations -Aluminum or HDG-Painted? Can we assume all Guard/ Handrail is 1-1/2", S40 Pipe (1.900" O.D.).There is no pipe with a 1-1/2"O.D. In addition,we are assuming the reference to"1/2" x 1/2" GALV. PICKETS @ 4" O.C. and "36" O.C." are not applicable as they are not shown in the Guard/ Handail elevation views." Answer: "All guardrail material is hot-dip galvanized steel. Exclude painted finish on ALL galvanized steel. There is NO mezzanine catwalk. This catwalk referenced above is to be provided by the crane manufacturer and come attached to the crane system. The fixed ladder, cage and associated platform for crane maintenance access, is hot-dip galvanized (No Painting on Galvanized Steel).All Guard/Handrail is 1-1/2",Std Pipe(1.900" O.D.). No pickets for any of the guardrail system. All guardrail is standard industrial-type pipe guardrail that includes a top rail and mid-rail only.Post spacing not to exceed 8 feet. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheets 43 and 53." Question: "The structural drawings show an expansion of the existing generator building, but there is no mention of it in the architectural drawings. Please clarify the finishes of the interior and exterior of the expansion." Answer: "The finishes of the interior will be paint and closest color to match. Exterior is a brick veneer with closest color, size, and style to match." Question: "There are 15 louvers shown on the elevations of the architectural sheets and 13 shown on the mechanical schedule. Please advise." Addendum No.04 00 9101-8 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "The architectural sheets have been revised. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheets 43,45 and 54." Question: "In the MV drive spec it specifically calls out for Rockwell the PowerFlex 7000. We would like the ability to quote our variable torque fan and pump drive the Powerflex 6000 which is geared more for these types of applications. It meets the requirements in the specification and has significant cost savings. Please approve." Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications." Question: "Overhead Door No. 6 - Structural Steel Header. There are two (2) details which depict header configuration: Architectural "12 / 51" and Structural "7 / 70". Architectural Details "4, 12 / 51" do not indicate plate thickness or anchor spacing. Which header detail should be utilized, what is plate thickness and anchor spacing?" Answer:"The STRUCTURAL header shall be as shown on the structural drawing detail 7/70. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 51 for revised architectural detail 12." Question: "On Sheet 185 Generator Building Addition-On new generator#4 Feeder calls for 3-inch conduit with 3-750MCM w 2/0 GND and a spare Conduit up to Cable tray Is this correct?This is a 4160V correct?" Answer: "The feeder conduit and spare conduit will both be 5" raceways sized in accordance with 5/8kV MV-105, 133%, 3-1/C Cable.The Generator feed is 4160V." Question: "Section 1.06.13 of the "Insurance Requirements" requires waiver of subrogation rights against the "Owners Indemnitees". Owner's Indemnitees include both Owner entities and third party consultants not in privity of contract with Contractor's team on this project. Will Owner modify this language to require Waiver of Subrogation for the benefit of the Owner only." Answer: "No, the language will not be modified." Question: "Notes 21, 22, 23, 24, and 25 on Sheet 142 of drawings indicate the contractor is to extend and/or modify various existing systems. Please provide drawings to show extension of systems including the location of all devices and the panel location for existing systems. Also, please provide the amount of contingency the contractor should carry in our bid per note 25. Without drawings and more details, we cannot responsibly bid these items." Answer: "The GENERAL notes apply only to the scope of work as indicated and called out within the specific project construction documentation. All general notes are intended to be guidelines to the work indicated IF applicable." Question: "Can proprietary restrained joint(such as Flex-Ring or TR-Flex) pipe and fittings be used in lieu of restrained MJ fittings? 54" seems to be where most mfr's cut off their MJ fittings & restraints." Answer:"Yes, proprietary restrained joint(such as Flex-Ring or TR-Flex)may be used in lieu of restrained Mechanical Joint fittings." Question: "SETION 43 2106 SUMP PUMPS specifies BJM model J08 pumps for 80gpm @ 20' tdh.The model J08 produces 66gpm @ 20'tdh. Is this flow going to be sufficient?" Answer: "Yes, flow will be sufficient." Addendum No.04 00 9101-9 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Question: "The general conditions are requiring the GC to obtain and pay for the building permit. The City normally requires a full plan review before a permit will be issued. Has the City completed the plan review and can they give us a cost for the permit? It has been our experience that the City does not have a permit cost at this point and will not be able to give us an accurate cost. I have had this issue on other City of CC projects. What is the possibility of providing an allowance in the bid for the cost of the building permits?" Answer: "This project is exempt from a building permit; therefore, the contractor is not required to pay for the cost of a building permit. However,the contractor is to obtain and pay for all other construction permits and licenses that are necessary for the project." 4.02 CLARIFICATION A. Contractor shall be aware that 365 additional days will be awarded with Additive Alternate No. 1, or Additive Alternate No. 2, or a combination of Additive Alternate No.'s 1 and 2. The indirect costs associated with the additional 365 days should be split proportionately between Additive Alternates No. 1 and No. 2 so that each could be awarded and functionally completed individually, independent of the other. B. The Owner will accept the three (3) endorsements (GL IL 10 (12/06), CG 20 37, and CG 20 10) in lieu of endorsement CG 2032 as specified in Specification Section 00 72 01(1.03)(C.)(7.). END OF ADDENDUM NO. 04 Addendum No.04 00 9101- 10 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 ATTACHMENT NO. 1 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Project Number: City Project No. E11066 Owner: City of Corpus Christi Bidder: OAR: Designer: LNV, Inc. Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED QUANTITY AMOUNT Base Bid Part A-General(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Al IlMobilization I LS I 1 A2 lozone Advisory Day EA I 1 SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A2) Part B-WATER IMPROVEMENTS(per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) B1ONSWTP Improvements and Modifications LS 1 B2 JAIlowance for Unanticipated Improvements LS 1 $ 300,000.00 $ 300,000.00 SUBTOTAL PART B-WATER IMPROVEMENTS(Items B1 thru 132) Part C-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1 (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) C1 Alternate Generator Building Extension and Retrofit LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART C-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1(Cl) Part D-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2 (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) D1 High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation LS 1 D2 Allowance for HS2 Discharge Butterfly Valves LS 1 $ 50,000.00 $ 50,000.00 D3 Allowance for HS2 Pump Motor Repair LS 1 $ 60,000.00 $ 60,000.00 SUBTOTAL PART D-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2(D1 THRU D3) Part E-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.3 (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) E1 72-Inch Waterline Extension LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART E-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.3(E1) Part F-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4 (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) F1 High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehab LS 1 SUBTOTAL PART F-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4(F1) Bid Form Page 1 of 5 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3(E11066) ADDENDUM NO. 4 00 30 01 BID FORM BID SUMMARY SUBTOTAL PART A-GENERAL(Items Al thru A2) SUBTOTAL PART B -WATER IMPROVEMENTS(Items B1 thru 132) TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID (PARTS A THRU B) SUBTOTAL PART C-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (Item C1) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1(PART C) SUBTOTAL PART D -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (Items D1 thru D3) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2(PART D) SUBTOTAL PART E -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (Item E1) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3(PART E) SUBTOTAL PART F -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (Item F1) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4(PART F) Contract Times Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in 1 700 Idays Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in 1 730 Idays NOTE: 1. If only Base Bid is awarded, no additional days will be awarded. 2. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 3 or Additive Alternate No. 4 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 3 &4 is awarded, no additional days will be awarded. 3. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, 365 additional days will be awarded. Bid Form Page 2 of 5 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3(E11066) ADDENDUM NO. 4 00 30 01 BID FORM SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS FOR MAJOR EQUIPMENT The Contract Documents are based upon the equipment or products available from the manufactures/suppliers denoted as "a", "b", etc., below. Provision is made in the Contract Documents for the alternate manufacturers and suppliers whose equipment or product may be deemed equivalent in quality. However, the Bidder must indicate in his Bid which manufacturer/supplier he based his bid upon and which he intends to use for each item of equipment, listed below by circling one of the listed suppliers/ manufacturers. If the Bidder fails to indicate which listed supplier/manufacturer he intends to use, the Bidder must use the suppliers/manufacturers listed as "a". If the Bidder desires to propose one or more alternate suppliers/manufacturers, he may write in the name of such alternates in the spaces provided on the pages following the lists below, but he must nevertheless also circle one of the listed suppliers/manufacturers because Total Base Bid must be based upon this list. Wherever an alternate supplier is proposed, the Bidder must insert the amount to be deducted from the Contract Price (either lump sum or unit price) if the alternate supplier is eventually approved. If the proposed alternate supplier is determined "not equivalent" by the Engineer, the Bidder must use the circled supplier. If the Bidder fails to indicate which listed supplier/manufacturer he intends to use if an alternate is rejected, he must use the suppliers listed as "a". Also, if the Bidder circles more than one listed supplier, he must use the first supplier circled (unless an alternate is approved). For any alternate supplier accepted by the Owner, the Contract Price will be reduced by the deductive amount stated in the Bid. However, because the Contract Price is based on listed suppliers/manufacturers it will not be adjusted for any alternate supplier rejected. The deductive amount specified for alternate suppliers/manufacturers will not be used in determining the successful Bidder. Alternates will be considered only after award of the contract. In addition to the reimbursement due to the deduct, the Contractor shall also reimburse the Owner for any other costs directly attributable to the change in suppliers, such as additional field trips for the Engineer, additional redesign costs, additional review and inspection costs, modifications to structures or piping systems or other parts of the work, etc. The Owner may request and the Bidder shall supply complete information on proposed alternates prior to the Notice of Award. Bid Form Page 3 of 5 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3(E11066) ADDENDUM NO. 4 00 30 01 BID FORM Amount to Deduct From Base Specification "Base Bid" Alternate Manufacturer Bid and Alternates Bid Items Number Equipment Manufacturer or or Supplier to Use Alternate Equipment Supplier Listed DEDUCT 40 05 50 Butterfly Valves a. M&H b. Dezurik c. Val-Matic d. Henry Pratt e. GA Industries 40 05 57 Electro-Hydraulic Valve Actuators a. REXA 40 05 65 Metal Seated Ball Valves a. Henry Pratt Company b. GA Industries 41 22 25 Bridge and Hoist System a. Prosery Anchor Crane Group b. ACCO Industries Inc. c. Whiting Corp. 43 21 01 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal a. Flowserve Pumps b. ITT-Goulds 43 21 02 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split a. Flowserve Case Pumps Positive Displacement Blowers b. Smith Pump Company Bid Form Page 4 of 5 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3(E11066) ADDENDUM NO. 4 00 30 01 BID FORM ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS Bidder proposes the following alternate manufactuers/suppliers for the equipment or material categories so identified: Equipment Alternative Deductible Amount (Indicate Item or Drawing No. Spec. Section Manufacturer/Supplier whether lump sum or unit Material (List One Only) price) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Bid Form Page 5 of 5 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3(E11066) ADDENDUM NO. 4 ATTACHMENT NO. 2 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in SECTION 0129 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in SECTION 0129 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in SECTION 0129 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1 - Mobilization: 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Bonds and insurance; b. Transportation and setup for equipment; C. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; d. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; e. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; f. Demobilization; and g. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01- 1 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 ADDENDUM NO. 4 City Project No.E11066 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. B. Bid Item A2—Ozone Advisory Day: 1. Payment will be as described in Paragraph 1.09, Section 0157 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS. C. Bid Item B1—ONSWTP Improvements and Modifications: 1. Payment will be made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning improvements and modifications as per plans and specifications including all Trench Safety. 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES A. Bid Item B2—Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements: 1. Payment will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning improvements as specified by the OAR. B. Bid Item C1—Alternate Generator Building Extension and Retrofit: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning Alternate Generator Building, and associated components, as per plans and specifications. C. Bid Item D1—High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning High Service Pump Building No. 2, and associated components, as per plans and specifications. D. Bid Item D2—Allowance for HS2 Discharge Butterfly Valves: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning 24-inch butterfly valves associated with Bid Item D1 as per plans and specifications. E. Bid Item D3—Allowance for HS2 Pump Motor Repair 1. Payment will be made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning motors associated with Bid Item D1 as per plans and specifications F. Bid Item E1—72-Inch Waterline Extension: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning waterline and appurtenances as per plans and specifications. G. Bid Item F1—High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehabilitation: 1. Payment will made on a lump sum basis. Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01-2 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 ADDENDUM NO. 4 City Project No.E11066 2. Bid Item shall be measured by complete and functioning access road and appurtenances as per plans and specifications. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 0129 01-3 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 ADDENDUM NO. 4 City Project No.E11066 ATTACHMENT NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 43 21 01 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP(S) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and incidentals required and completely install, put in operation and field test horizontally mounted, axial split case single stage, double suction, dual volute,constant and variable speed,centrifugal pumps,motors,and vibration monitoring system as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service.Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. Electric motors shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section and shall be as specified in Section 26 20 10.The pump Manufacturer shall coordinate the motor design with the VFD supplier. The VFDs will be supplied by others. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for horizontal split-case centrifugal pump(s). Include the cost for this work in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 03; however, stainless steel anchor bolts forthese units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section. B. Surface preparation and shop priming is included in Section 09 96 10. C. Field Vibration and Torsional Resonance testing costs shall be borne by the Contractor.Refer to Part 3 of this section for additional detail. D. Instrumentation construction as specified in Division 40 and as shown on the Drawings. E. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division 40. F. Electrical work per Division 26 and the related Drawings. Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives are included in Section 26 29 23.01. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Certified dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 2. Certified foundation, pump support and anchor bolt plans and details. 3. Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump installation. 4. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction,to indicate full conformance with the detail specifications. 5. Total weight of pumping unit. 6. A statement of guarantee that all required analyses as specified in Paragraph 1.6 E through 1.6 J below have been completed and that the specified limitations will be met. B. Design Data 1. Manufacturer's certified rating curves (including indication of the AOR and POR), to satisfy the specified design conditions,showing pump characteristics of discharge,head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSH3)across the entire range of operation coupled with the required NPSHA margin. Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and speed and include shut off head. This information shall be prepared specifically for the pump proposed. Page 1 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Additionally,catalog sheets showing a family of curves shall be provided separately from the performance curve. 2. Pump design shall be for variable speed operation. The pump shall be designed to operate at reduced speeds to achieve the low flow limits specified in the Pump Schedule located at 1.7 A. Include pump performance at five reduced speeds. 3. Provide actual WR2 for each pump and motor being supplied. C. Test Reports 1. Certified motor test data as described in Section 26 20 10. 2. Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated Hp, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point.Submit a certified statement from the motor manufacturer that the motors are capable of continuous operation on the power supply from the variable frequency drives to be furnished without affecting their design life for bearings or windings. 3. A schedule of the date of shop testing and delivery of the equipment to the job site. 4. Description of pump factory test procedures and equipment. 5. Pump factory test report. 6. Description of pump field test procedures and equipment. 7. Field test report. 8. Rotodynamic analysis report(s). 9. Vibration report. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section as provided in Section 01 33 06. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to,the latest version of published standards of the following, as applicable: 1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 7. American Welding Society(AWS) 8. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 9. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 11. National Electrical Code (NEC) 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 14. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 16. American Water Works Association (AWWA) B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the pumps, motors, couplings, and base plates shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump Manufacturer.The Contractor and Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping system including pumps, motors, variable speed drives, base plates and controls as specified. B. The equipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of Page 2 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)-43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction such equipment similar to the applications stated in Paragraphs 1.1 and 1.7. Units specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest version of Hydraulic Institute Standards, except where otherwise specified herein. D. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design,arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. E. Prior to manufacture, submit for approval vibration analyses engineering reports outlined in this Part to demonstrate that the specified limitations will be met. For the dynamic analysis described, minimum and maximum operating speeds will be in accordance with the operating speeds required to satisfy the conditions of operation specified in Section 1.7. The pump manufacturer shall perform the dynamic analysis presented in the following paragraph. F. Structural dynamic analysis of the combined pump, motor, and baseplate. —The structural dynamic analysis shall predict no first or second bending mode frequencies within a range from 25 percent below minimum operating speed to 25 percent above maximum operating speed. G. Lateral rotodynamic analysis—The lateral rotodynamic analysis shall identify and predict that the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed or 25 percent below the minimum pump speed. Any pump component excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. H. Torsional rotodynamic analysis shall identify and predict that no torsional natural frequencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range. Any torsional rotor dynamic frequency within the above stated margin must have a forced response evaluation performed. The forces associated with the torsional rotor dynamic frequency within the above stated margin shall not reduce the rotor fatigue life. Any lateral rotodynamic frequencies not satisfying the ±25% margins will not result in a forced damped response that will allow vibration amplitudes to exceed the established limits at any operating speed. Speed avoidance settings in the operational strategy will not be considered as an acceptable solution. I. Vibration amplitude measured in the field shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4 latest edition. The pump manufacturer shall perform both lateral and torsional critical speed analyses to identify and ensure that (a) the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed and that(b)no torsional natural frequencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range and that any blade excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. Prior to manufacture, a report shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval indicating that the specified limitations will be met. J. Vibration, when measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on any pump or motor bearing housing,shall not exceed limits set by Hydraulic Institute Standard 9.6.4-2009 at any speed between maximum speed and minimum speed as defined by the hydraulic conditions. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The pumps shall be horizontal axial split case single stage centrifugal dual volute pumps with double suction enclosed type impeller with stable constantly rising curve to shut off head, renewable casing/impeller rings, flexible coupling and one-piece rigid structural steel base plate under the pump and driving motor. B. The pumping units depicted and specified herein will be used to pump finished potable water from the O. N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant(ONSWTP)to different hydraulic grades within the City of Corpus Christi water distribution system. C. Pumping units start and stop against a closed discharge pump control valve and accordingly shall be capable of operating at shut-off head conditions for sustained periods of up to 1 minute duration without damage and without requiring increased preventive maintenance efforts. Page 3 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Key design conditions and other data are shown in the following table. Pump Schedule To Section 43 21 01 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pumps Pump Designation HSP-13, 14, 16, 17 HSP-12, 15 Capacity (gpm) (Guarantee Point 1) 13,700 13,700 Head(ft) (Guarantee Point 1) 260.8 260.8 Minimum Head(ft) at full speed 179 179 Capacity (gpm) at minimum head 24,500±5% 24,500±5% Minimum Shut-Off Head (ft) 288 288 Maximum NPSHR(ft) 40 40 Fluid Pumped Potable Water Potable Water Drive Horsepower(HP) 1500 1500 Constant or Adjustable Speed Constant Speed Variable Speed Maximum Speed(rpm) 900 900 As required by minimum Minimum Speed (rpm) 890 flow condition specified elsewhere. Elevation of Minimum Clearwell 63.5 (bottom of GST floor 63.5 (bottom of GST floor Level(ft) is 51.50 ft) is 51.50 ft) Elevation of Maximum Clearwell 69.00 69.00 Level(ft) Pump Impeller Centerline Elevation 48.80 48.80 (ft) Maximum Water Temperature (°F) 95 95 Minimum Water Temperature (°F) 40 40 Minimum Pump Efficiency (%) @ 87.2% 87.2% Guarantee Point 1 Motor 4160V/3 Ph/60 Hz, WP-II, 4160V/3 Ph/60 Hz, WP-II inverter duty inverter duty Typical FLOWSERVE 400-LNN-800, 400-LNN-800, Make and Model No. 890 rpm 890 rpm E. Where total head(TH)is referred to in conjunction with the specific discharge requirements,it shall be understood to consist of the sum of the pressure head plus the velocity head, in feet, at a distance of pipe diameters downstream of the discharge nozzle of the pump minus the pressure head and the velocity head at the suction nozzle of the pump. The efficiency of the pump shall be understood to be based upon total head as just defined. F. All materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall be suitable for potable water. The Reduction of Lead in Drinking WaterAct(2011),which amends the Safe Drinking Water Act, was effective as of January 4,2014.The act reduces the lead content from 8%to a weighted average of at most 0.25%for the wetted surfaces of pumps conveying potable water. Refer also to ANSI/NSF 61, ANSI/NSF 61 Annex G and ANSI/NSF 372. Specified pump manufacturers agree that this act applies to their equipment in any drinking water application from raw water to finished water. Page 4 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction G. All pump and motor maintenance and any future pump or motor removal and replacement activities shall be accomplishable utilizing the 10-ton bridge crane specified in Section 4122 25. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. Store equipment indoors and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until approved by the Engineer in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed.Anti-friction bearings, if prelubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and startup of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not prelubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage, while waiting completion of installation and start up, by the application of Exxon, Rust Ban No. 392 or equal treatment. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all special tools and test equipment required for the proper servicing of all equipment as specified in Section 01 33 06. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. C. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump model. 1. Complete set of wearing rings for one pump (two impeller and two case wear rings). 2. Two complete sets of packing rings and two sets of mechanical seal repair kits, as required.Provide bronze split-packing glands and bronze split lantern rings necessary to convert to packed stuffing boxes on one pump. 3. Complete set of gaskets and O rings. 4. One set of pump bearings. D. A current spare part price list for all manufacturer recommended spare parts. Prices shall remain in effect for a period not less than one year after start-up and final acceptance of each pumping unit. E. Crate and deliver spare parts in substantial wood or painted steel boxes with hinged covers. Clearly and indelibly identify the contents of each box on its exterior with stenciled paint or lamacoid plastic labels. Each part shall be sealed, wrapped or otherwise protected from corrosion during storage. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The pumping unit (i.e. pump, motor, coupling, base, and other pump OEM supplied accessories) will have a 24 month warranty after Owner acceptance. This warranty is for defects in workmanship and or materials on the above mentioned equipment and excludes failure due to erosion,corrosion,and wear,and is further qualified by the requirement that the Contractor properly install the unit and the Owner properly operate and maintain the unit. Upon notice of defect the Contractor will promptly remove the part or unit from service and load it on pump OEM's truck at the jobsite.The pump OEM will promptly repair and/or replace the part or unit and return it to the jobsite at which point the Contractor will unload and install Page 5 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction the part or unit at his expense.Time lost while the unit is unavailable will be added to the end of the existing warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flowserve, ITT-Goulds. 2.2 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. The pumps and motors shall be designed and built for 24 hour continuous service at any and all points within the range of operation listed in Part 1.7, without overheating, without cavitation, without exceeding motor nameplate HP (without exceeding service factor), and without excessive vibration or strain. C. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially constructed to meet the specified requirement.Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and adjustment. D. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Once levelled, aligned, and anchored, pump skid shall be filled with high strength non-shrink epoxy grout. Furnish anchor bolt calculations considering all forces and moments for approval. E. Each major piece of equipment shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles and power and service factors. 2.3 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The pumps shall operate throughout the entire operating range, within the vibration limits specified in Paragraph 1.6 F above. B. Flow separation at the inlet of impeller shall not be permitted when it could result in damage to the impeller. Obvious, excessive hydraulic noise that is characteristic of flow separation shall be deemed as evidence that flow separation is occurring at the level that will cause damage. 2.4 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Casings shall be close grained ASTM A48 Class 35 cast iron of suitable cross section and suitably ribbed to withstand all stresses and strains of service at full operating pressure. Casings shall be of the double volute type split on the horizontal center line with the side suction and discharge nozzle cast integrally with the lower half. Removal of the upper half of the casing must allow the rotating element to be removed without disconnecting the suction and discharge flanges. Lifting eyes shall be cast into the upper casing. Flange and casings shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psig. The casing shall be provided with tapped and plugged (removable)vent,drain and gauge connections. Suction and discharge connections shall be 125 lbs ANSI Standard flat face flanges positioned as indicated on the Drawings. B. Impellers shall be of the enclosed double suction type of ASTM A744 Grade CF-8M (Type 316L stainless steel, Grade CF3M - certified analysis of the impeller pour metal required). Impeller shall be cast in one piece and shall be two-plane dynamically balanced to grade ISO 1940, G6.3 on a mandrel, and then two-plane dynamically balanced to Grade G2.5 on the pump shaft. Rotation of the impeller shall correspond to the pump discharge orientation as indicated on the Drawings. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and firmly held in place. The arrangement shall be such that the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse rotation. Page 6 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Wearing Rings 1. The pumps shall be provided with removable 13% chromed hardened steel wearing rings for both the casing and impeller, with the wearing surfaces parallel to the axis of rotation. The impeller wearing ring system shall be designed to compensate for a minimum of 1/4 inch wear. 2. Wearing rings shall be securely fastened to prevent any relative motion and designed for easy replacement. 3. Furnish the casing wear rings in 11-14%chrome ASTM A487 grade CA-15 300-350 Bhn hardness. 4. Furnish the impeller wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA-15 200-250 Bhn hardness. D. Each pump shall be equipped with John Crane, A.W. Chesterton, or Flowserve split-type mechanical seals furnished with ceramic stationary and carbon rotating seal faces. 1. The water seal connections on the pump(s)shall be connected to the pump discharge volute. The seal water pipes shall be sized to provide sufficient, but not excessive,seal water rate per the pump manufacturer's recommendations. E. The pump thrust bearings shall be of the heavy duty double row anti friction type arranged for oil lubrication designed in accordance with AFBMA Standards for a minimum B 10 life of 100,000 hours. Bearing housings shall be complete with constant level oiler and sight-level indicator. Bearing temperatures at an ambient of 104°F shall not exceed 200°F when measured by RTD without the addition of external cooling. Removable bearing housings shall be supplied with 3600 mounting via a register fit,or 1800 mounting, bolted and doweled to the pump bearing brackets cast integral with the lower half casing. F. Pump shaft(s) shall be of heat treated alloy steel, rigid shaft type and of sufficient size to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor, accurately machined over the entire length and free from harmful and damaging vibrations.The shaft(s)shall be protected from wear in the stuffing box areas by renewable shaft sleeves of 316 stainless steel. The sleeves shall be sealed to prevent leakage between the sleeve and the shaft.Shrink fit shaft sleeves will not be acceptable.The sleeves shall be key-driven.The use of glued sleeves to prevent leakage is not acceptable. G. Furnish and install tapped holes in the suction and discharge flanges or nozzles and 1/2 inch copper pipe and nipples complete with quarter turn bronze plug valves for use in connecting pressure gauges. Nipples shall be of such length and provided with elbows if necessary so that a pressure gauge may be easily installed and read.Also,plumb a 1"casing drain to edge of pump baseplate using copper pipe and fittings and a bronze gate valve.Contractor to route the pump drain through 1"schedule 80 PVC pipe to nearby floor drain. Securely clamp the drain pipe to the floor to avoid creating a trip hazard. H. The pumps shall be provided with two mineral oil(NSF-61 listed)filled suction and discharge pressure gauges with a 1/4 inch NPT inlet and 2.5 inch dials.The suction gauges shall be of the compound type to indicate both vacuum and pressure and be graduated to read 30 psig positive pressures and 30 inch mercury negative pressures. The discharge gauges shall be graduated from 0 to 200 psig. The gauges shall be connected to the pump suction and discharge nozzle taps.All fittings and cocks shall be red brass.The pressure gauges shall be equal to Figure 1980 Solfrunt standard gauges, Model 1500, by Amtek, U.S.Gauge Division. Plumb gauges to a gauge bracket that supports the gauges side-by-side and located the gauge centerlines to coincide with the pump shaft centerline. I. The pump(s)shall be capable of temporary operation at and near shut off head during the first minute, maximum,opening and closing of the pump discharge control valve as the pump starts and stops. J. The pump and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to successfully withstand a maximum turbining speed of the unit resulting from backflow through the pump of 150 percent of the design operating speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head equal with the duty point, whichever is higher. Page 7 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.5 PUMP DRIVE SYSTEM A. Each pump shall be driven by a horizontal solid shaft squirrel cage induction electric motor with a horsepower and speed as specified in Paragraph 1.7 above, and shall meet all the requirements of Section 26 20 10. B. All motors shall be identical in make and manufacture and compatible with the VFDs specified in Section 26 29 23.01. C. The pump motors shall be suitable for driving the pumps continuously over the entire pumping range.The pump motors shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer.The motors shall be constructed and guaranteed to withstand runaway reverse speed equal to 150 percent of synchronous speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head equal with the duty point, whichever is higher. D. Each pump shall be directly connected to its driver by means of a Rexnord-Thomas flexible disc spacer-type coupling, suitably sized to transmit the required driving torque and to accommodate unavoidable shaft misalignment. The coupling shall be designed to accommodate slight shaft misalignments, absorb shock, vibration, and pulsation. Coupling shall accept load reversals with minimum backlash. Disc packs shall be stainless steel.Other surfaces(except bores and keyways)shall have a manganese phosphate corrosion resistant coating. 2.6 BASE PLATES A. The pump and driving motor shall be mounted on an extended fabricated carbon steel structural steel base plate(bent form bases not acceptable),with provision to collect leakage and shall be of sufficient size and rigidity to support the unit and prevent harmful or damaging vibration.The baseplate design shall meet ANSI/HI 1.3-2009 Rotodynamic Pumps for Design and Application, and in particular the grouted fabricated steel baseplate requirements. Demonstrate compliance with this specification requirement at time of submittal. Post weld heat treatment is required to stress relieve the base prior to machining. Furnish a certificate of compliance from the heat treating sub-vendor as part of the quality assurance package. Machine equipment mounting surfaces flat and parallel to one-another.A 1-inch drain tap and Type 304 stainless steel pipe nipple shall be provided. The pump and motor skid drain shall be piped to the closest floor drain using schedule 10 Type 304 stainless steel piping. The steel base shall be anchored to the level surface of a concrete pad with suitably sized Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Design base such that Contractor can place non-shrink epoxy grout within the baseplate and the motor box without air pockets. See standard mechanical details on the Drawings. 2.7 VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM A. Provide a factory installed vibration monitoring system as described below,and as shown on the P&ID drawings of the plan sheets.The pump packager shall include eight(8)transducer for unfiltered vibration amplitude measurement. Four on the pump and four on the motor. B. Furnish transducers, vibration monitors, interconnect cabling, aluminum conduit, and local terminal boxes (NEMA IVX stainless steel) pre-mounted at the factory. Interconnect cabling and conduit from the local terminal boxes to PLCs shall be provided by Contractor. C. Vibration Monitoring Points. 1. Motor: Provide two vibration transducers on the X and Y axes at each bearing housing. 2. Pump: Provide two vibration transducers on the X and Y axes at each bearing housing. D. Acceptable manufacturers 3. Metrix E. Features 1. Provide a Metrix model 440 solid state switch for external transducer with two alarm set points,a 4 to 20 mA output with a scale range of 0.1 to 1.5 in/sec rms. Input power to be 115Vac 1 ph 60 Hz. 2. Furnish general purpose accelerometer with a frequency range of 0.5 to 10kHz with a range of 50g with a 100mV/g output.Accelerometer shall be packaged in a 316 stainless steel case that is electrically isolated from the sensing circuit. Use non-armored cabling between the transducer and the switch. Run all cables through aluminum conduit between transducer and switch. Page 8 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Furnish isolated power supply enclosure with individual circuits each with it's own adjustable time delay. 2.8 SHOP TESTING A. The Engineer shall witness the factory test and inspect all equipment to be furnished under this Section, prior to shipment from point of manufacture. 1. A complete test report for each pump, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least all information required in Paragraphs 1.4 and 1.6 above, and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report,shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the pumps are shipped. B. Each pump being furnished in this Section shall be factory tested with one of the job motors in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Certified copies of the Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied prior to conducting a pump performance test. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the Engineer at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. Manufacturer to provide travel, accommodations,and meals for two people forthe anticipated duration of the testing. All testing, required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. 1. Each pump's head vs capacity shall be full speed tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as listed in Paragraph 2.2 above. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded at shut off head. Sufficient test point readings shall be made to establish complete head flow capacity,efficiency and brake horsepower curves for each pump. 2. In addition,one pump shall be tested at three additional equally spaced speeds between minimum and maximum speeds using the test lab variable speed drive. 3. All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. 4. Test each pump for NPSHR at reduced speed.Generate a four point NPSH3 curve that includes one point within 10 percent of the rated condition-of-service, and one point within 10%of the maximum flow rate. C. Pump motor tests as specified in Section 26 20 10 shall be submitted for approval by Engineer prior to shipping. D. Pump Test Acceptance Grade for SHOP TEST shall be GRADE 1 U per ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Design/Guarantee Points). 2.9 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIMING A. Each pump, and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finished coated in accordance with Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Color shall be"Barr Blue"and an adequate supply of touch up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Coordinate with motor supplier to match the motor to the pump color. B. For pump interior surfaces apply Belzona 1341 N Superglidemetal coating for potable water to the casting wetted parts to improve efficiency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract.All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. Page 9 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans. B. Qualified supervisory services, including manufacturers'engineering representatives,shall be provided for a minimum of 10 man days to ensure that the work is done in a manner fully approved by the respective equipment manufacturer. The pump manufacturer's representatives shall specifically supervise the installation and alignment of the pump with the driver, baseplate leveling (including coupling alignment) pre-grout and post-grout, the alignment of the connecting piping and the installation of the field installed mechanical seal. If there are difficulties in the startup or operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the City. Services of the manufacturer's representatives and training shall be provided when the first pump is started, with follow up visits upon startup of each subsequent pump. C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the Engineer. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. D. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of his/her equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.3 FIELD TESTS A. Perform such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps and motors and variable speed drives conform to the capacities specified shall be performed. A 30 day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified at no additional costs to the Owner. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above, and certified results of tests shall be submitted. If all required testing procedures are not possible by pumping into the system, then bypass pumping shall be employed as necessary to facilitate testing.The Contractor shall provide,calibrate and install all temporary gauges and flow meters, shall make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 30 days prior to testing.The field performance tests shall report clearwell water level, pump operating speed, pump suction and discharge pressure, position of suction and discharge valves, pump motor amperage and voltage, and flow rate readings when the test is performed. The calibration certificates of the temporary instruments used in the test shall be included in the field test report for submittal. B. After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the Contractor shall retain the services of Engineering Dynamics Incorporated (EDI)of San Antonio,TX(contact Troy Feese, P.E. at 210-492-9100, troy—feese@engdyn.com)or Mechanical Solutions Inc. (MSI)of Whippany, NJ who are testing firms to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each unit, including both"Bump Tests"and X-Y vibration profiles and field torsional critical speed test, to (a) prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and natural frequency analyses and (b) prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports, when operating at any speed within the specified operating range.A written report shall be submitted including a CAD sketch of the unit indicating where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak-to-peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency and (c) peak velocity level, in inches per second.The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problems encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. C. If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with this Section.All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action and retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. D. The analysis indicated in Paragraph 3.313 above shall be repeated after six months after the signature testing.A report shall be prepared comparing the results of the six month tests with Page 10 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction the results of the signature tests. Significant worsening of the vibration,to be determined by the Engineer, during the six month tests shall require corrective action and retesting. E. The results of ALL pump tests performed under this section shall be submitted in Final O&M Manual. END OF SECTION Page 11 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction e O 7 �, O O 0. E d i E dwN d` E d E aLLcn a E a n im �,.�a=4 b.� m ,moo m �o❑ C N O N Q[D � O o'n 4 N VC[�a N �.a !F l6 lm6 N N � V H7� W Utl7� N r}f!}Q m V N d v � O V[A4 N C Z 0 mw Z (aws❑ U)Uj 'm caws© rnw o cowNa 0 � C- p -- - �--?-- --- m G. coodE p o y m $; 111« � H N 3 w 3 H = LL O O n 0 3 ——- w U) O v CL P o a 7 s r H UCIOr o lei I to - _-;-- a — a x --- - - - ' — — ,� -o-- --�--r- as .....__ — 7__—_—_—_._ O 73 j .1!�,00, 0 D o O O C, o 0 b O 4 o b o o C3 O 4 Q Q 4 a O CO rA � NM 2 MN [qN b'N 4 00 [¢ N O CO Lp N � M M M N (m)Hal Page 12 of 12 Horizontal Split-Case Centrifugal Pump(S)—43 2101 ADDENDUM NO. 2 ATTACHMENT NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 43 21 02 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMPS PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and incidentals required to inspect, rehabilitate to like new condition and return to operation horizontally mounted split case single stage High Service Pump Building No.2 pumps,and motors as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. It is intended that the pumps shall be removed from service and shipped to pump refurbisher's shop for inspection and rehabilitation prior to returning to service. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not;shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service.Also included shall be supervisory services during inspection, field testing, and startup of each unit. C. This is a performance based specification. It is the intent of this project to restore the performance to like new condition meeting the performance and efficiency requirements as specified. The impellers furnished shall be factory tested for the performance guarantee in a new pump volute, and also be factory witness tested for the mechanical performance test in the refurbished pump cases. The pump OEM shall guarantee performance to equal the performance of a new unit. D. The rehabilitated pump factory test will be the condition of performance acceptance. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps as specified herein shall be as defined in Part D—Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01, Bid Form. Include the cost for this work as an Additive Alternate bid item. B. Payment for Repair of High Service Pump Building No. 2 pump motors as specified herein shall be as defined in Part D—Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01, Bid Form, under Item D2—Allowance for HS2 Pump Motor Repair. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Manufacturer's Services are included in Division 40. B. Equipment Checkout, Field Testing and Functional Testing is included in Division 40. C. Acceptance Testing is included in Division 40. D. Vendor Training is included in Section Division 40. E. Field Vibration and Torsional Resonance testing cost shall be borne by 3rd party firm purchased by the Pump Refurbisher. Refer to Part 3.5E of this section for additional detail. F. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, stainless steel anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section. The Contractor and Pump Refurbisher shall together inspect the baseplate anchor bolts, grout, and concrete foundation. Provide a report describing the condition of each, and any recommended replacement. G. Shop Priming is included in Section 09 91 10. Finish painting is included in Section 09 96 00. H. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 40. SCADA input and output signal requirements for monitoring/control are further defined in the P&ID Drawings, Instrumentation Drawings, and Division 40. I. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division 40. J. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)are specified in Section 26 29 23.01.The pump OEM shall perform a torsional analysis using the new impeller in the rotor to identify any excitation frequencies from the VFD.The VFD OEM will furnish their harmonic analysis for this review. K. Other electrical work except as hereinafter specified is included in Division 26 and the related Drawings. Page 1 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with this Section, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Pump Refurbisher shall supply information documenting compliance with the quality assurance requirements as specified under Section 1.6 Quality Assurance. Failure to comply with all Quality Assurance requirements as described herein will disqualify the pump refurbisher from performing the work. 2. Pump Refurbisher will present(for review and Owner acceptance)an example pump inspection report that includes an outline of the anticipated format and a description of the anticipated level of detailed information and digital photography (with photo annotations) anticipated to be submitted for each pump as specified herein. Report shall indicate as observed tolerances as compared to factory specs for all items.This report will be reviewed and approved by the Owner and Engineer prior to submitting the first pump inspection report. 3. Copies of the inspection report, list of findings, recommendations, and estimate of opinion of repair costs for additional items are included in the Base Bid. 4. Repair costs for items not included in the Base Bid scope of work shall be determined as identified in Part 1.2. 5. Certified factory dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 6. Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump re- installation; as applicable. B. Design Data 1. Include original manufacturer's certified rating curves with the inspection report as available,to document the original design conditions,showing pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSHR). Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and include shut off head. This information shall be specifically for the pump that is to be rehabilitated. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. C. Test Reports 1. Certified motor test data as described in Section Division 40. 2. Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated HP,full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at 1/2, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Provide the original motor submittal for record. 3. A schedule of factory inspection of the disassembled pump at the Pump Refurbisher facility by the Engineer, City, and Construction Manager if elected by the City. 4. Provide a factory test procedure with the submittal documents. Plan a pump performance guarantee test per Hydraulic Institute Standard ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Grade 1 U(no negative tolerance)and a mechanical performance test per Hydraulic Institute Standard ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Grade 1B(+/-tolerance)as specified in Table 14.6.3.4. A schedule of the date of Factory Witness Testing. Place a shipping hold on impellers until approval of test report by Engineer. 5. Furnish a field pre-inspection and post-repair test procedure for approval. The procedure shall include a list of applicable specifications and national standards that are applicable to the field testing. Include sections on Scope of Supply, General Arrangement, Function, Test Objectives, Type of Tests, Acceptance Criteria, Instrument List, Instrument Accuracy,Test Form Blanks.The final report shall include as a minimum, pump and motor field data, visual assessment and field observation, pump hydraulic performance, motor electrical performance, bearing and winding temperatures, vibration and impact test, alignment. From the data presented, provide discussion, draw conclusions, make recommendations, and assign action items. 6. Prior to removal of pump and motor bound for the repair shop perform a pre-removal field test as detailed above.The Pump Refurbisher shall perform pre-removal and post installation field test on each unit. Description of the field test procedures and equipment supplied by the Contractor to perform the work. Page 2 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 7. Report documentation of the field test results inclusive of type written sections complete with photos and supporting data. Perform field performance testing in accordance with AWWA E103-07 Appendix B Field Testing of Pumps. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, published standards of the following, as applicable: 1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (ALMA) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) a. AISI C1141 -Steel 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI -Class 125 Flanged Dimensions b. ANSI B.11 —Bearings C. ANSI/NSF 61 d. ANSI/NSF 61 Annex G e. ANSI/NSF 372 6. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM B 584-Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings b. ASTM A-48-Cast Iron 7. American Welding Society(AWS) 8. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 9. American Petroleum Institute (API) a. API 610 Standards 10. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA El 03-16—Horizontal and Vertical Line Shaft Pumps 11. Hydraulic Institute Standards (latest edition) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 13. National Electrical Code (NEC) 14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 15. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 16. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) a. SAE 1045—Steel b. SAE 4140—Steel 17. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 18. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 19. American Water Works Association AWWA El 03-07 Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps Appendix B: Field Testing of Pumps (latest edition). B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The pump refurbisher shall be experienced in the repair and refurbishing of horizontal split case pumps. B. Pump refurbisher's facility shall maintain a registered ISO 9001 quality system throughout the contract period. C. All rehabilitation of pumping units specified herein shall be performed by a single pump refurbisher; unless otherwise approved by Owner and Engineer.The Pump Refurbisher must purchase, and show proof that all pump parts used in the repair were purchased from the pump OEM. The Pump Refurbisher will also furnish the pumping equipment for HSPS#3. D. The Pump Refurbisher shall have rebuilt pumping units in the United States which are similar in design, type, and service, and comparable in size, head, and capacity to the existing pumps be repaired.Such comparable pumping units shall have been in operation for a period of not less than five years.Pump Refurbisher shall provide a minimum of five references,with contact information,for the comparative pumping units and a brief description of the work and size of the pumping units. Page 3 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction E. The Pump Refurbisher shall be a fully-equipped pump repair and machine shop with overhead cranes capable of lifting the largest of the pumps scheduled for repair, pump laser alignment tools,dynamic balancing machine, , boring mills(for re-boring of the pump casing if required), blasting machine and grinders, horizontal engine lathes and on-site facilities for vibrational analysis.The pump repair and machine shop will also have an on-site blasting and paint booths for shop priming and painting the repaired pumps. F. The Pump Refurbisher shall assign staff to this project with ten years or more of pump repair experience. Staff assigned to welding tasks will be certified by the American Welding Society (AWS) for the types of welding proposed by the Pump Refurbisher as part of the pump refurbishment process.The Pump Refurbisher is required to define any baseplate,pump,or motor welding contemplated by written procedure either in the shop or in the field to be complete as part of the pump refurbishment and to provide a copy of current AWS certification for the welder that will perform the work with the Inspection Report. G. The pump repair shop shall be fully responsible for the design,arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range.As a minimum,the pump OEM shall perform a torsional analysis of the pump and motor rotor with the new larger impeller,and compare the results of this analysis to the harmonic analysis furnished by the VFD OEM. Alternatively,the Contractor may elect not to use the OEM;then the Contractor shall disassemble one existing pump and obtain all necessary dimensional, weight, etc. information on the pump shaft, impeller, etc. in order to determine the necessary inputs for the analysis required in this specification.This work will be performed by an independent laboratory with a fully detailed report to supplement the analysis required by this specification. Additionally, the warranty requirement for this path will be increased to 5 years,and a warranty bond shall be furnished by the Pump Refurbisher. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. The pumping units depicted and specified herein will be used to pump finished potable water from the O. N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant(ONSWTP)to different hydraulic grades within the City of Corpus Christi, TX water distribution system.The pumps are single stage,double suction,horizontal split volute type centrifugal pumps as specified herein. 2. Pumping units start and stop against a closed discharge pump control valve and accordingly shall be capable of operating at shut-off head conditions for sustained periods of up to one minute duration without damage and without requiring increased preventive maintenance efforts. 3. Rehabilitation of the pumping units will occur in stages to maintain ONSWTP operations during the installation process. No more than one pump may be out of service at one time. 4. The Pump Refurbisher shall coordinate with the installing Contractor to ascertain exactly what equipment and materials of supply need to be delivered to the construction site at what time over the anticipated installing Contractor's installation schedule. 5. Pump Rehabilitation includes: a. Pre-removal field test by Pump Refurbisher. b. Transportation of pump and motor by Pump Refurbisher from plant to Refurbisher shop. C. Disassembly at Refurbisher's shop. d. Inspection with detailed legible inspection reports with color photos. e. Blasting casing halves inside and outside, repair case surfaces, and re-coat. f. Machine work,repair work, installation of new replacement parts as described in Part 2, pump assembly, and pump testing. g. Perform other Base Bid repairs as described in Part 2. h. Rotating assembly balance and pump unit re-assembly. i. Post repair field testing. Page 4 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 6. Removal,Re-installation and Shipment: The Contractor will perform pump removal, preparation for shipment and re-installation work at the ONSWTP. The Pump Refurbisher will provide shipping to and from the pump refurbisher designated facility. The Pump Refurbisher shall include all freight cost in the Base Bid. The Pump Refurbisher shall furnish onsite supervision of installation of pump and motor by Contractor, and shall be responsible for coupling alignment. 7. Existing Pumping Unit Description and proposed design condition are summarized in the following table: Pump HSP-8 HSP-9 HSP-10 HSP-11 Location HS 2 HS 2 HS 2 HS 2 Manufacturer Flowserve Flowserve Flowserve Flowserve Model 400-LNN-800 400-LNN-800 400-LNN-800 400-LNN-800 Number Serial 0212MS002074- 0212MS002074- 0212MS002074- 0212MS002073- Number 1 2 3 1 Current Rated 17,000 gpm @ 17,000 gpm @ 17,000 gpm @ 17,000 gpm @ Capacity 240 ft TDH 240 ft TDH 240 ft TDH 240 ft TDH Motor 1500 1500 1500 1500 Nameplate Hp Motor Power 4160 Volt/3 4160 Volt/3 4160 Volt/3 4160 Volt/3 Requirements Ph/60 Hz Ph/60 Hz Ph/60 Hz Ph/60 Hz Rpm 890 890 890 890 Constant or CS CS CS VS Variable Speed (CS or VS) New Rated 13,700gpm 13,700gpm 13,700gpm 13,700gpm Capacity New Rated 260.8 ft 260.8 ft 260.8 ft 260.8 ft Head Pump 87.2% 87.2% 87.2% 87.2% Efficiency at New Rated Capacity Maximum 40 40 40 40 NPSHr(ft) at runout 8. Existing Pumping Unit Shop Drawings and Materials of Construction are included in Attachment A to the end of this Specification. Page 5 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 9. An electronic copy of the High Service Pump Station#2 Condition Assessment Report prepared by Smith Pump Company dated March 4,2013 is included in Attachment B to the end of this Specification. 10. Vibration: Provide refurbished pumps and motors that are within the limits set by the current Hydraulic Institute Standards. If pre-removal vibration amplitudes exceed these limits, the Pump Refurbisher shall work with the Contractor, Engineer, and Owner to determine how to reduce the amplitude of the repaired units to comply with the specified HIS vibration limit. a. Vibration Limit: 0.19 in/sec rms unfiltered per H.I.S within POR, 0.25 in/sec rms outside the POR but inside the AOR. 11. All materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall be suitable for potable water. The Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act(2011),which amends the Safe Drinking Water Act,was effective as of January 4,2014.The act reduces the lead content from 8%to a weighted average of at most 0.25%for the wetted surfaces of pumps conveying potable water. Refer also to ANSI/NSF 61, ANSI/NSF 61 Annex G and ANSI/NSF 372. Specified pump manufacturers agree that this act applies to their equipment in any drinking water application from raw water to finished water. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The equipment and materials provided under this section shall be delivered, stored, and handled in compliance with Division 40. B. Special handling or storage procedures shall be clearly identified and submitted for approval as part of the submittal process. C. Stored motors shall have their space heaters under power during the entire storage period. Storage of motors and pumps with anti-friction bearings in operating pump stations shall have their shafts rotated several rounds by hand each week. 1.9 PUMP REFURBISHER MANUALS &SERVICES A. The Pump Refurbisher shall provide approved installation manuals to the installing Contractor. A minimum of three approved installation manuals shall be shipped to the installing Contractor upon Owner's approval of the submitted installation manual. 1. Complete parts list of replaced parts cross-referenced to an exploded view assembly drawing. 2. Step-by-step disassembly and reassembly instructions including tolerances and torque requirements. 3. Dimensional drawings of all provided equipment. B. Services of Pump Refurbisher 1. Provide the services of a factory certified service engineer specifically trained in the installation, start-up, testing, operation and maintenance of the equipment as herein specified.Such services shall be provided by a representative who is a direct,full-time employee of the Pump Refurbisher. 2. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all parties to establish the Motor Protective Relay(MPR) protective settings. 3. The Pump Refurbisher shall be responsible for the initial check-out of the equipment prior to start up. Additionally, the Pump Refurbisher shall perform a final mechanical check-out to verify that the equipment has been properly assembled, lubricants have been properly installed, electrical connections have been properly made, MPR set points have been properly adjusted, the equipment is level and aligned properly, and that the equipment is ready for service. Finally,the Pump Refurbisher shall assist the installing Contractor in the initial start-up of the equipment and all field testing. 1.10 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. The Pump Refurbisher shall furnish the following spare parts for each pumping unit: 1. One set of split lantern rings per pump. 2. One set of wear rings per pump. 3. One set of split packing glands per pump. Page 6 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. One seal kit set (two) per pump. A current spare part price list for all manufacturer recommended spare parts. Prices shall remain in effect for a period not less than one year after start-up and final acceptance of each pumping unit. B. Crate and deliver spare parts in substantial wood or painted steel boxes with hinged covers. Clearly and indelibly identify the contents of each box on its exterior with stenciled paint or lamacoid plastic labels. Each part shall be sealed, wrapped or otherwise protected from corrosion during storage. 1.11 WARRANTIES, PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES,AND PERFORMANCE PENALTIES A. Warranty 1. Upon completion of installation(in accordance with approved installation manual)and successful start-up by installing Contractor and upon acceptance by Owner, provide Pump Refurbisher warranty for a twenty-four (24) month period from startup and acceptance. The warranty covers defects in workmanship and/or materials, and excludes failure due to erosion,corrosion,and wear. This warranty is further qualified by the requirement that the Contractor properly install the unit and the Owner properly operate and maintain the unit. Upon notice of defect the Contractor will promptly remove the part or unit from service and load it on Pump Refurbisher's truck at the jobsite. The Pump Refurbisher will promptly repair and/or replace the part or unit and return it to the jobsite at which point the Contractor will unload and install the part or unit at his expense. Time lost while unit is unavailable will be added to the end of the existing warranty. . B. Performance Guarantee 1. In consideration that the award of this equipment Contract is based on performance representations as specified,the Pump Refurbisher shall guarantee the performance of each pumping unit to perform as specified. 2. Represented performance of refurbished pumps will be verified via factory and field testing and as defined herein. Pumping units failing to meet minimum specified performance as indicated in Part 1.7 A(7)and 2.17A(1)during factory shop testing or in Part 3.5 B(1)during field testing,will be rejected outright by the Owner. The Pump Refurbisher shall be responsible for any liquidated damages levied by the City to the Contractor resulting from any delay associated with failure to meet minimum specified performance during testing.The Manufacturer/Supplier's liquidated damage liability is limited to 10%of the unit price on the applicable Bid Item value. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED PUMP REFURBISHERS A. Flowserve B. Smith Pump Company C. Or Engineer Approved Equal. D. Select one pump refurbishing company from the approved list to perform repairs for all pumps listed in this section. 2.2 DISMANTLING AND INSPECTION A. Disassemble pump into its basic components for cleaning and inspection. Basic components include such items as casing halves, impeller, bearings, bearing housings, shaft, shaft sleeves and other components bolted or joined together. B. All pump parts shall be cleaned prior to inspection. The cleaning shall remove dirt, grit, grease and rust scale. All internal surfaces of the pump casing and bearing housings components shall be grit or sand blast cleaned to remove rust scale. Note that prior to coating components additional blasting is necessary to prepare the surfaces so the coating will adhere. C. Each component shall be inspected for wear, corrosion and other damage. Bearing housing bores shall be measured with a micrometer to check for wear and overall concentricity. Perform a dye penetrant inspection in the high stress areas of the casing halves, and report any cracks discovered. Shaft run-out shall be checked with a dial indicator. Casing split line flatness shall be measured with a straight edge and feeler gage. Page 7 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Each pump motor shall be inspected as well for the following: 1. Perform no-load run test and record electrical test data including winding continuity test, stator winding insulation resistance megger test, Polarization Index (PI) test, Hi- Potential (Hi-pot)test, and surge comparator test. 2. Perform initial run test and record vibration and amperage readings. 3. Monitor and record bearing temperatures during no-load run. 4. Measure and record shaft runout. Check shaft for straight alignment and document. 5. Disassemble motor and inspect. Inspect rotor,end-rings,and rotor bars. Inspect stator windings for anomalies. Blast and prime parts as necessary. 6. Ultrasonically test sleeve bearings. 7. Measure and record bearing housing bores. 8. Measure and record shaft journal and shaft seal dimensions. 9. Measure and record rotor runout at coupling and at each end of rotor. 10. Visually inspect stator ties,wedges, coils, leads, lugs, and bracing. 11. Perform core loss test. 12. Perform a growler test. 13. Visually inspect for loose or broken rotor bars. 14. Visually inspect end rings for signs of cracking. 15. Inspect and test stator and bearing temperature detectors. 16. Inspect and test space heaters. 17. Provide report with digital color photos, measurement, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Four copies of an inspection report for each pump and motor shall be submitted to the Engineer. Each report shall show the results of the inspections and measurements and photographs of component part defects and shall indicate which component parts are suitable for reuse. Component parts that are suitable for reuse and are specified to be replaced by new parts, shall be returned to the City. Prepare reusable parts for long term storage. Crate components in secure wooden crates having a hinged cover. Provide a packing list attached to the inside of the hinged cover describing the enclosed parts. Components parts not suitable for reuse shall be properly disposed of by the Pump Refurbisher. 2.3 PARTS AND MATERIALS A. General: Provide all materials, new and replacement parts and any miscellaneous parts required to complete the parts replacement and restore the pumps to like new operating condition. Replacement pump parts shall be purchased from the pump OEM. Supply evidence of this sourcing in the Quality Assurance documents by furnishing packing lists and shipping documents. 2.4 IMPELLERS A. General: Replace the existing impellers for the four existing pumps at the High Service Pump Building No. 2 to meet new design condition. Impellers shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.04.13— Impellers. 1. Approximate new impeller size: 31.77 inches. 2. New rated capacity: 13,700 GPM @ 260.8ft TDH &87.2% pump efficiency. 3. Pump Refurbisher shall purchase the replacement impeller from the original pump manufacturer. 4. Impeller shall be cast nickel aluminum bronze,ASTM B148,Alloy UNS No.C95800 or CF-8M cast stainless steel, certified analysis of the impeller pour metal required. B. Balance: Dual-plane dynamic balance impeller to the ISO G2.5 standard on rotor shaft.All pump and motor couplings shall conform to the requirements of 43 21 01 Part 2.05.0 — Couplings. 2.5 WEAR RINGS A. General: Replace the impeller and casing wear rings. Provide rings that are geometrically suitable with the new design conditions and new impeller size. Manufacture the rings to sufficient tolerances to permit replacement without special fitting or machining. Wear Rings should meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.04.C. —Wearing Rings. Page 8 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Lock the wear rings in place to prevent rotation. Describe method for locking rings in submittal. C. Materials: Construct impeller and casing wear rings of stainless steel alloys with different hardnesses to reduce the potential for galling. D. Furnish casing wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 CA-15 300-350 Bhn hardness. E. Furnish impeller wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA-15 200-250 Bhn hardness. 2.6 SHAFT SLEEVES A. Shaft Sleeve: Provide replacement shaft sleeves of the same size and design as the original. B. Shaft Sleeve Material: Construct shaft sleeves of type 316 stainless steel and fit them to the shaft with O-rings and locked by impeller key and sleeve nut. 2.7 BEARINGS A. Radial Bearings: Replace the existing anti-friction type radial bearing with a new anti-friction bearing. Provide new anti-friction bearing of the same type and size as the original. Bearing brand shall be American made. On the bill-of-material, furnish bearing number and bearing brand used in the repair. B. Thrust Bearing: Replace the existing anti-friction type thrust bearing with a new anti-friction bearing. Provide new anti-friction bearing of the same type and size as the original. Bearing brand shall be American made. On the bill-of-material, furnish bearing number and bearing brand used in the repair. C. Lubricant Supply: Supply oil of the proper kind and quality,as required to place the pumping unit in operation. Furnish enough oil for initial filling during storage, for initial filling prior to start-up, and enough for one additional filling. Page 9 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.8 BEARING FRAMES A. Bearing Frames: Rehabilitate the existing bearing frames, maintain tolerances for the installation of the bearings. Provide a description of machine work intended for the bearing housings and casing halves in the inspection report. B. Confirm alignment of bearing housing bores to casing machined surfaces. List OEM tolerances along with found conditions, and describe any machine work intended to restore parts to OEM tolerances. 2.9 SPLIT TYPE MECHANICAL SEALS A. Provide new split type mechanical seals to refurbished pumps. Split type mechanical seals shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2A.D. 2.10 STUFFING BOX AREA A. The stuffing box shall accommodate packing and split-glands so the packing,split-glands and hardware defined in the spare parts can be used if a seal kit is not available. Hinged Covers: Construct gland of bronze. B. Install new hinged covers over the shaft openings and provide neoprene slingers on the shaft. 2.11 CASING A. If casing split line is washed out or not flat within 0.005 inch the upper and lower mating faces shall be machined and the casing line-bored.Casings shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.A-Casings. 2.12 GASKETS, SEALS, AND FASTENERS A. Gaskets and Seals: Replace all gaskets, lip-seals and O-rings. Provide replacement gaskets, lip-seals and O-rings of the same type and size as the original. B. Fasteners and Keys: Provide new shaft keys,bolts,studs, nuts,washers and other fasteners of the same size, design and material as furnished in the original pump. 2.13 PUMP SHAFT A. Pump Shaft: Provide a new pump shaft of the same size and design as the original. Pump shafts shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.45— Pump shafts. 2.14 COUPLING A. Pump-to-motor coupling shall be reused. Inspect condition and report on any issues found. Replace wear parts, disk packs, and grease. 2.15 MOTOR A. Should the pump motor repair be recommended by the Pump Refurbisher based on the inspection results, the following motor repair shall be performed: 1. Clean and oven dry stator and rotor. 2. If necessary varnish and bake stator and rotor. 3. Dynamic balance rotor at rated speed. 4. Clean component parts in preparation for re-assembly. 5. Replace bearings (bearing have ceramic races) 6. Replace seals. 7. Reassemble. 8. Recoat motor to match as received color. 9. Perform no-load run test and record vibration and electrical data as specified in Part 2.2D. 10. Provide "as built" report. B. Refer to Paragraph 1.02 B for payment for this work. 2.16 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. Each pump, motor, and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finish coated in accordance with Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Color shall be per Section 09 96 00 and an adequate supply of touch up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Page 10 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. For pump interior surfaces,apply Belzona 1341 N Superglidemetal NSF 61 coating for potable water to the casting wetted parts to improve efficiency. 2.17 SHOP TESTING A. The factory testing shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards — Section 14.6 - 2011 "ANSI Standard for Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests". Certified copies of the Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied after conducting a pump performance shop test; hydrostatic test shall be per ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Appendix B. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the Engineer at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. The shop test for the mechanical performance test required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer and City with the Pump Refurbisher providing travel and accommodations for up to two people for the duration of each test for a selected pump. 1. Pump Test Acceptance Grade for the performance guarantee shall be GRADE 1 U(no negative tolerance) per ANSI/HI 14.6 — 2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This is applicable to the pump rating point(Guarantee Point)as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. Pump Test Acceptance Grade for the mechanical performance test during witness testing shall be Grade 1 B (+/-test tolerance). 2. Pump shall be tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as indicated in the pump rating point(Guarantee Point)as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded starting at shut off head and proceeding with sufficient test point readings made to establish complete head flow capacity(through the AOR and PORregions),efficiency,and brake horsepower curves for refurbished pump. Test all four (4) new impellers in a new pump case with shop driver. 3. Test impellers for NPSHr. Measure NPSHr at a minimum of four(4)conditions. 4. A complete test report for each refurbished pump identified for factory shop testing, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least all information required in Paragraphs 1.04 and 1.06 above, and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report,shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the pumps are shipped. 5. All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided.All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION A. Removal: The pump will be removed from its installed position and prepared for shipment by the Contactor as part of the Base Bid. The refurbisher shall inspect the pump after the preparation is completed. The Contractor shall provide the necessary caps, covers, bolts gaskets and thrust restraints as necessary to prevent the piping from being displaced. B. Reinstallation: The Contractor will reinstall the pump into its operating position,fully adjusted and aligned as part of the Base Bid. C. Contractor to furnish and install the new anchor bolts per recommendation by the Pump Refurbisher. Repair the baseplate grout as needed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: As part of the Base Bid, furnish the services of a qualified representative of the Pump Refurbisher to inspect, and pretest each unit prior to removal, supervise the repaired pump and motor reinstallation, and the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, participate in the startup of the equipment, perform field testing of the equipment and place the equipment in trouble-free operation. B. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in the presence of the Construction Manager.All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. Page 11 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. A certificate from the Pump Refurbisher shall be submitted stating that their installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the Owner's operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.3 START-UP A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make sure rotating elements are free before applying power. C. Check motor rotation to be sure that it is correct. D. Notify Construction Manager prior to startup and allow him to witness initial operation. 3.4 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. In the presence of the Construction Manager conduct such tests as necessary to indicate that the refurbished pumps and motors operate satisfactorily. A 7-day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance by the City. 1. Pump Refurbisher shall conduct Mechanical Testing of the refurbished pump and motor in accordance with and as defined in AWWA E103-07 Horizontal and Vertical Line-Shaft Pumps Appendix B: Field Testing of Pumps(latest edition).Submit report of test results as per the requirements of Part 1.04. B. If refurbished pumps and motors do not operate satisfactorily, then the Pump Refurbisher shall implement corrective measures as required to restore satisfactory operation. 3.5 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Conduct a Field Performance Testing in accordance with that as described. B. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above and certified results of tests shall be submitted. Provide,calibrate and install all temporary gauges and meters, make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 30 days prior to testing.Contractor can elect to use existing venturi flowmeter on the pump discharge pipe if re-calibration of the differential pressure gauge is performed prior to field testing. 1. Field Acceptance Tests: Upon completion of the installation and prior to final payment, the Contractor will perform a witnessed Field Performance Test on the refurbished pumping unit in accordance with AWWA E103-07 Appendix B except as specified. FIELD TEST Acceptance Grade shall be GRADE 1 B per ANSI/HI 14.6—2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4.This includes hydraulic results showing the pump is operating within ± 5% of the factory tested flow capacity, and ± 3% of the factory tested TDH capacity within +4%of factory tested power requirements and/or -3%of the factory tested pump efficiency.This is applicable to the pump rating point(Guarantee Point)as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. C. A preliminary test shall be performed prior to the official witness test. Notify the City and submit test data and curves as determined by the preliminary test at least seven days in advance of the time scheduled for the witness test. If pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken which satisfies the conditions specified. D. The Field Performance Tests shall demonstrate under all conditions: 1. When the pump input horsepower is determined by electrical input measurement,use the true efficiency of the driver as determined by the driver manufacturer performance test. 2. Test at rated speed,to determine the curves of head,brake horsepower,and efficiency as a function of capacity. Pump Refurbisher shall provide ALL required calibrated test instruments as required to perform testing.The Pump Refurbisher may utilize the City's existing flowmeter with permission from the Construction Manager. If the City's flowmeter is used for the test, the flowmeter differential pressure gauge shall be calibrated prior to testing and proof of calibration shall be submitted with the testing results. The Contractor shall bear the cost of calibrating the flowmeter as part of the base bid. Take a minimum of six points, including shutoff to define operating regions through the AOR and POR regions of the pump curve as much as the system Page 12 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction operating pressure will allow. Take one point as near as possible to each specified condition of head and capacity,one at or slightly above the maximum head specified, and one at the minimum head shown on the existing curve (if possible). 3. Express capacity in gallons per minute and express head in feet of water. Furnish certified copies of the curves,raw test data,calculated results and sufficient information for computation and plotting of the curves. E. The Pump Refurbisher shall employ an independent vibration testing firm as indicated below. 1. After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the Pump Refurbisher shall retain the services of Engineering Dynamics Incorporated (EDI)of San Antonio,TX(contact Troy Feese,P.E.at 210-492-9100,troy feesea-engdyn.com or Mechanical Solutions Inc.(MSI)of Whippany,NJ)who are testing firms to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each unit,including both"Bump Tests"and X-Y vibration profiles and field torsional critical speed test,to(a)prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and natural frequency analyses and (b)prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports,when operating at any speed within the specified operating range. 2. A written report shall be submitted including a CAD sketch of the unit indicating on where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak-to-peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency and (c) rms velocity level, in inches per second. The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problems encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. F. If required, take corrective action and have the units retested to ensure full compliance with the specified requirements. G. Failure of Tests: If the Field Performance Acceptance Tests reveal defects in material or equipment,or if the material or equipment in anyway fails to comply with the requirements of the specifications, then the Contractor and Pump Refurbisher shall promptly correct such deficiencies. All costs associated with additional Field Performance Tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Upon successful completion and passing of the Field Performance Test the City will accept the refurbished pump and motor on the day of acceptance of the Final Test Report. END OF SECTION Page 13 of 13 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps—43 2102 ADDENDUM NO. 4 ATTACHMENT NO. 5 1D C Ai 4 4 FERENCE FLOOR PLAN • I • (Th ENL s - ® 6 ® 6 m TOILET ACCESSORY LEGEND — - — ® --Q — — —Jnog---4 a� nN e�€m s —€ Pi'i$a "90 a 11 KD 1 SHEET KEYNOTES Ilm es®® ®� ® CO SIN ®gam Irv. O� ® 11 Nsgoo�8r -pgc M p nm olm rn ��r®� W1 ® ---Jr -- 4s S El ® ® ' ti s - __® 011 a� e gm - ~� o ®Civ Cy � i s R m -� Amari 6 � r__• II CO li 05 1/20 ADDENDUM E • ^ w A i m CD N.ao..�...ov<< gDepartment O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engneers I arch sects I contractors e,.„.„,„��„gym„ e.. �i'� _- ^ A D $^ HIGH SERVICE3REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN C C UTILITIES %�% DEPARTMENT of Copt, Programs ATTACHMENT NO. 6 "T A;oeE.o. EaEo4� ez a�,aa,n aa8 GIBE WEST ELEVATION c JF �o`.' o.' 0"' .ol, o`.' .o;.` qo'.' o'.` .; o'.` 62 Q �Q �m !! h�i <� z aZ 0 EAST ELEVATION m z a W=_ 7 x WN wu`[xssmsn B 8 8 2W G.p' xu,wnxaua sawn xu,wnna� �� rw i N8 N S 2 UD - (7 =S 2 0 LIN - ,niss.svuwewn wu,wnxcum ,vnRk7 'r oar Y R SHEE1 43.254 B1W-FR-450 43 3 �',_ r+m.GRACE � aaa �\ SOUTH ELEVATION �\ NORTH ELEVATION ® ,a-,-v ,m-,-vSCALE 1 ffi-1 0rvvnwms Effa66 ATTACHMENT NO. 7 ELECTRICAL INTERIOR ELEVATION I1VOILL031 313 NO12131 D O z 0 05/3120 6 ADDENDUM IA BY O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Copit I Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 8 34 BWVr 2iOO4 OV3H13A F z 0 O O D cJ W X 0 0 0 D cJ W /1 1IV134 AdONVO 2iOO4 11111®Iil®II I RNSI `I 0 m D 0 0 0 F z C) TOOPOVt. $1101 d C •••• 1IV134 BWVr 05/3120 6 ADDENDUM IA BY O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of capitol Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 9 m H 0 z M Z D 90 H 0 z 05/3120 6 ADDENDUM IA 052020 6 ADDENDUM O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of capitol Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 10 ti N O O 11 g C m 11111111111111111111111111 V �o ADDENDUM IA 052.0 6 ADDENDUM BY Tina .3511/100N111/1 rf 3111031-1. HSINI3 WO. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR / WINDOW ELEVATIONS & SCHEDULES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Capital Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 11 05/3120 6 ADDENDUM IA O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PARTITION TYPES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of capitol Programs LNV 009101 ADDENDUM NUMBER 03 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Project: Pump Building No.3 Project Number: Owner: City of Corpus Christi E11066 City Engineer: J.H. Edmonds, P.E. Designer: LNV, Inc. Addendum No. 3 Specification Section: 00 9101 Issue Date: 05/24/16 Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Farm submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. Make the additions,modifications or deletions to the Contract Documents described in this Addendum. Approved by: Grady S.Atkinson, P.E. 05/24/16 Name Dote Addendum Items: ��•�`OF�� E....*-t rftit * r '� ' 4 1 • MODIFICATION TO SPECIFICATIONS i *IJ i*: :*► MODIFICATIONS TO DRAWINGS •�••••••••• •••••••••�•••I • CLARIFICATIONS % GRADY S. ATKiNSON ............................ QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 115461 �`, Stp,Ai Ili ..EN.... 5/24/16 LNV eng neers architects surveyors TBPE FIRM NO. F-366 Addendum No.03 009101-1 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No.3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 ARTICLE 1—BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA A. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. ARTICLE 2—MODIFICATIONS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 ADD, DELETE OR REPLACE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS (OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS) A. Delete the following Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications): Deleted Specification Sections(or Technical Specifications) SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07 42 13.16 VERTICAL INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07 42 13.19 HORIZONTAL INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS SECTION 08 9100 LOUVERS SECTION 40 05 50 VALVES SECTION 40 23 10 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALS SECTION 43 2101 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SECTION 43 2102 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SECTION 43 2106 SUMP PUMPS B. Add the following Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications): Added Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications) SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS (Attachment 1) SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS(Attachment 2) SECTION 07 72 33 ROOF HATCHES (Attachment 3) SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES (Attachment 4) SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS(Attachment 5) SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS (Attachment 6) SECTION 08 9100 LOUVERS (Attachment 7) SECTION 40 05 50 VALVES (Attachment 8) SECTION 40 23 10 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS,AND SPECIALS (Attachment 9) Addendum No. 03 009101-2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 SECTION 40 23 11 POLYURETAHNE COATING FOR STEEL PIPE (Attachment 10) SECTION 43 2101 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (Attachment 11) SECTION 43 2102 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (Attachment 12) SECTION 43 2106 SUMP PUMPS(Attachment 13) ARTICLE 3- MODIFICATIONS TO THE DRAWINGS 3.01 ADD OR DELETE DRAWINGS A. DELETE the following Drawings: Deleted Drawings Sheet 2—DRAWING INDEX Sheet 8—BASELINE A STA 0+00—5+00 Sheet 9—BASELINE A STA 5+00—10+20 Sheet 10—BASELINE B STA 0+00—5+00 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4) Sheet 11—BASELINE B STA 5+00—8+90 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4) Sheet 12—BASELINE C STA 0+00—3+40 Sheet 14—HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN VIEW Sheet 15—STORM WATER IMPROVEMENTS PLAN AND PROFILE 1 OF 2 Sheet 17—HIGH SERVICE 3 UTILITY SERVICE PLAN Sheet 20—CIVIL DETAILS 1 OF 2 Sheet 43—HIGH SERVICE 3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Sheet 50—HIGH SERVICE 3 WALL SECTIONS Sheet 53—HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS Sheet 54—HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR/WINDOW ELEVATIONS &SCHEDULES Sheet 59—HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION PLAN Sheet 62—HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS II Sheet 106— HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN B. ADD the following Drawings: Added Drawings Sheet 2—DRAWING INDEX (Attachment 14) Sheet 8—BASELINE A STA 0+00—5+00 (Attachment 15) Sheet 9—BASELINE A STA 5+00—10+20(Attachment 16) Sheet 10—BASELINE B STA 0+00—5+00 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE N0.41(Attachment 17) Sheet 11—BASELINE B STA 5+00—8+90 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4) (Attachment 18) Addendum No. 03 009101-3 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Sheet 12—BASELINE C STA 0+00—3+40 (Attachment 19) Sheet 14—HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN VIEW(Attachment 20) Sheet 15—STORM WATER IMPROVEMENTS PLAN AND PROFILE 1 OF 2 (Attachment 21) Sheet 17—HIGH SERVICE 3 UTILITY SERVICE PLAN (Attachment 22) Sheet 20—CIVIL DETAILS 1 OF 2 (Attachment 23) Sheet 43—HIGH SERVICE 3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS(Attachment 24) Sheet 50—HIGH SERVICE 3 WALL SECTIONS (Attachment 25) Sheet 53—HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS(Attachment 26) Sheet 54—HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR/WINDOW ELEVATIONS&SCHEDULES (Attachment 27) Sheet 59—HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION PLAN (Attachment 28) Sheet 62—HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS& DETAILS II (Attachment 29) Sheet 106—HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN (Attachment 30) 3.02 AMEND DRAWINGS A. Drawing Sheet No.'s 96 thru 101—Generator Building Retrofit(ADDITIVE ALTERNATE#5) DELETE: (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE#5) from all sheet titles. ADD: "(ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1)to all sheet titles" B. Drawing Sheet No. 75—Clearwell No. 1 General Notes and Design Criteria, Repair Materials, Concrete Column Repairs DELETE: The following wording from the Note 2. "CONTRACTOR SHALL MATCH COLOR TO EXISTING WITH THE ADDITION OF A DYE." ARTICLE 3—CLARIFICATIONS 3.01 QUESTIONS &ANSWERS A. Question: "Section 40-23-10 page 9 of 25 in PDF requires radiography on all welds. Will Ultrasonic (UT) be an acceptable NDT alternate to radiography?" Answer: "Ultrasonic testing is acceptable." Question: "For the Yard and Process Piping will C222 Polyurethane specification be acceptable in lieu of Tape Coating?Polyurethane has becomethe standard overtape on C200 Water Piping." Answer: "Please refer to the attached added specification section 40 23 11 Polyurethane Coating for Steel Pipes for detail requirements." Question: "We would like to request the engineer please consider adding Ross to the pre- approved manufacturers list for the Metal Seated Ball Valve specification 40 05 65.The Ross Model BLV-507 Metal Seated Valve we have asked the engineer to consider meet or exceed the written specification. We will be more than willing to provide information for engineer review, if requested, to support our request." Addendum No. 03 009101-4 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications." Question:"REGARDING THE VAC/AIR VALVES ON THE HSPS 3 DISCHARGE LINES, PLAN SHEET 107 CALLS THEM OUT AS "VACUUM BREAKER AIR RELEASE VALVES". HOWEVER, SPEC SECTION 40 05 50, PAGE 15, PART 2.11, E STATES THESE AREN'T TO BE CONFIGURED TO RELEASE AIR. PLEASE CLARIFY." Answer: "What is shown on plan sheet 107 is correct. Refer to Note 9 on valve model number." Question: "PLAN SHEET 107 HAS 1" AIR VALVE ASSYS ON TOP OF THE PUMPS. HOWEVER, THESE AREN'T SHOWN ON PLAN SHEETS 251 THRU 253. PLEASE CLARIFY." Answer: "Provide 1"air release valve for each pump as shown on plan sheet 107 and Note 6." Question: "PLAN SHEET 107 HAS 4" VAC / AIR VALVE ASSYS. HOWEVER, PLAN SHEETS 251 THRU 253 HAVE 2"A/ R &AVB ASSYS. PLEASE CLARIFY." Answer: "Provide 4"VAC/AIR VALVE ASSYS for each pump as shown on plan sheet 107 and Note 9." Question: "REGARDING THE 60"TIE-IN SOUTHEAST OF HSPS 3, PLAN SHEET 14 SHOWS A 60" BUTTERFLY VALVE. HOWEVER, THIS VALVE ISN'T SHOWN ON PLAN SHEET 106. PLEASE CLARIFY." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 106." Question: "We respectfully request NUCOR building systems to added as accepted manufacturer for Pre engineered metal buildings, metal roof and wall panels, trim. Ref Spec 13 12 00 Part 2.1." Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications." Question: "Drawing C15 shows that there is only one single spool between the 48"x 36"Tees on the existing High Service 1 discharge header. However, Drawing C16 shows a much different configuration between the Tees for HS-1, 3, and 5. Please review and resolve." Answer: "The intent of plan sheet C15 is to show the limits of the demolition that will be required at High Service 1. The intent of plan sheet C16 is to provide a more detailed view of the piping within the High Service 1 header pit." Question: "Drawing C16 is somewhat confusing. We understand that the existing piping between the existing pumps and the 36" Gate Valves to be removed. Please verify that this is correct." Answer: "That is correct." Question: "Drawing C6 (Plan View) shows STA 7+35.6 in 2 locations which is not possible. One is shown for the 72"x 72"Tee. The other is for the 72"45 Deg. Bend. Please review and correct the stationing." Addendum No. 03 009101-5 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3—E11066 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "Stations are shown correctly. The stationing is perpendicular to the baseline so must have the same station callout and the difference between the two callouts is the offset distance. For example, if it states (12.5 LT), this means 12.5 feet left of the baseline." Question: "Drawing C5 (Plan View) shows STA 3+60.3 in 2 locations which is not possible. One is shown for the 72" x 72" Tee. The other is for the 72" 90 Deg. Bend. Please review and correct the stationing." Answer: "Stations are shown correctly. The stationing is perpendicular to the baseline so must have the same station callout and the difference between the two callouts is the offset distance. For example, if it states (12.5 LT), this means 12.5 feet left of the baseline." Question: "Spec. 43 21 02 (Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps) Paragraph 1.3F mentions "...installation of anchor bolts..." and "... the anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section..."However, these pumps are existing so why would new anchor bolts be required? The pumps would be reinstalled after rework using the existing anchor bolts. There is nothing in the Project Documents that mentions about chipping out and installing new anchor bolts. Please review and resolve." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 43 2102 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps." Question: "The Pump Schedule (p. 4 of Spec. 43 21 01) calls out Pumps HSP -16 and HSP -17 to be driven by Variable Speed Drives. However, this doesn't agree with Spec. 40 96 00 1.1B which says that Pumps HSP -12 and HSP -15 are to be driven by Variable Frequency Drives. Which are the correct Pump Tag Numbers for those Pumps which are to be driven by the Variable Frequency Drives? Please review and resolve." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 43 21 01 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pumps." Question: "Drawing 31 -PID -1902 incorrectly shows Pump Control Valves FCV 1908-02 and FCV 1909-02 as 24". This does not agree with Specification 40 05 57 and the plan/section drawings which show these as 20". Please review and resolve." Answer: "Provide 20" pump control valve as shown on plan sheet 107 and specification section 40 05 65 Metal Seated Ball Valves." Question: "Spec. 43 21 06 (Sump Pumps) — Paragraph 1.5B states that the pump operation is "based on level float switches". The contract documents do not contain a P & ID drawing so we are unable to determine how many floats are to be provided for each pump. Please review and resolve." Answer: "Provide four floats for the sump pumps. Refer to Section C on plan sheet 108." Question: "Spec. 43 21 06 (Sump Pumps) — Paragraph 1.5B Note 1 calls out for a custom control panel. There was no P & ID provided so we cannot tell whether there are to be one (1) control panel total that would handle both pumps (duplex operation) or that each pump is to get its own control panel (2 total control panels). Please review and resolve." Answer: "Provide one common control panel to handle both pumps for duplex operation. Refer to updated Specification Section 43 2106 — Sump Pump." Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 009101-6 Rev 01-13-2016 Question: "Spec. 43 21 06 (Sump Pumps) —Paragraph 2.5A1 calls for minimum of 2 pipe rails for pump to slide on. BJM is the specified Pump vendor. The BJM pump is 58 pounds and does not need rails, base elbows, guide shoes, guide rail brackets, etc. A Lifting chain is an optional accessory for this pump and could be added as a means to lift the pump. Please review and resolve." Answer: "Provide a lifting chain for each sump pump. Refer to updated Specification Section 43 2106 — Sump Pump." Question: "Can we have another walkthrough with sub -contractors?" Answer: "Walkthrough of the water plant was provided to anyone interested following the pre-bid meeting. No additional walkthrough will be granted." Question: "Please provide a detail for the Sewer MH tie in @ Sta 0+25." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 8 for the existing wastewater manhole information at STA 0+25.0. The revised drawing shows as much information as can be reasonably obtained at this time, no detail will be provided." Question: "Window Schedule - Sheet Number 54. Schedule indicates there are two (2) Mark Number 1A Windows. Review of Architectural drawing plans view and sections indicate twenty-six (26) Mark Number 1 Windows. Please confirm there are no Mark Number 1A Windows required (the difference between the two types is the structural steel header lintel)." Answer: "Please refer to the revised attached plan sheet 43 for the location of the two (2) Mark Number 1A windows that are specified in the window schedule shown on plan sheet 54." Question: "I may be missing or have not found any schematics for the three new 1500hp VFD. I see in the specification under basic features several pilot devices called out related to pump or valve indication, industrial relays and timing relays etc. but do not see a schematic related to this to show detail and quantity of relays. Can provide the document # I should be looking for?" Answer: "Reference Sheets E-36 through E-42 for motor schematics and details." Question: "The 72" FW suction header is called out as DI/RMJ, we're not sure if DI/RMJ pipe is available in this diameter in either MJ or proprietary RJ. Can we use CPP for this section?" Answer: "Plan sheet 106 and Specification 40 23 10 — Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials are updated. Contractor is allowed to have an option to use carbon steel pipe and fittings for pump suction and discharge headers." Question: "We would like the opportunity to provide you with a highly competitive alternative material for the subject project. As an alternate to ductile iron pipe, we would propose polyurethane lined, 24and larger steel pipe with polyurethane coating in buried locations or epoxy coating in above ground, exposed and interior locations. Pipe sizes up to 24 could be provided as epoxy lined or cement mortar lined steel pipe with polyurethane coating for pipe in buried locations or epoxy coatings for above grade pipe. In our opinion the large diameter pipe, as a steel alternate, would provide the owner with a substantially lower project cost with an equal or longer life span. Lower maintenance costs would be achieved due to the durability and resistance of the polyurethane coatings and linings used Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 009101-7 Rev 01-13-2016 in cathodically corrosive underground areas. The owner would benefit from further cost reduction due to the elimination of several expensive pipe joints, and a competitive bid could be achieved, overall. This is rapidly becoming a prevalent specification with many large utilities across the country." Answer: "Plan sheet 106 and Specification 40 23 10 — Steel Pipe, Fittings, and Specials are updated. Contractor is allowed to have an option to use carbon steel pipe and fittings for pump suction and discharge headers." Question: "Respectfully resend statement regarding = 05.16.16 - Generator Building - Storage Access Platforms, Sheet Numbers 93, 94 and 95. There are no Anchor Bolt Details for the four WF Platform End Bents/Frames. Anchor Bolts located on Sheet Number 91. Apologize for any inconvenience." Answer: "Refer to Sheet 91 for the anchor bolt detail for the walkway frame. Please note for the four WF Platform End Bents/Frames these require welds and bolts. Refer to Sheet 94 — Detail 2 for the weld details and Sheet 94 — Detail 5 for bolt details. Also refer to Sheet 95 — Detail 4 for the anchor bolt detail for the ladder base." Question: "For repair work at the existing clearwell, verify if the entire structure needs to be sanitized before being placed back into operation. Verify if any testing (Bac-T, etc) is required and who is responsible for the testing." Answer: "Upon completion of repairs within the clearwell, sanitizing will be required. The Contractor will be responsible for any testing as required by TCEQ." Question: "For repair work at the existing clearwell, note on the foundation plan sheet 76 states existing floor may require cleaning to locate cracks. Please clarify the scope of "cleaning." Is it a simple wash down or is pressure washing required? If washing is required, assume that a containment system will be needed? Is any excessive sediment expected to be encountered on the floor?" Answer: "Some sediment is anticipated within the clearwell; quantity cannot be verified. Cleaning efforts do not include pressure washing." Question: "For repair work at the existing clearwell, will the Owner completely dewater this structure? If not, how much please clarify what the contractor will need to do to dewater this structure." Answer: "The owner will dewater the clearwell; however, there will be minor standing water on portions of the foundation." Question: "Alternate Generator Building Retrofit (Additive Alternate #5) - Sheet Numbers 97 through 101. Could not locate this Additive Alternate on the bid form." Answer: "There is no Additive Alternate No. 5 for this project. The Alternate Generator Building Retrofit improvements shown on plan sheet numbers 96 thru 101 shall be labeled and included with Additive Alternate No. 1 work. Titles for plan sheet numbers 96 thru 101 shall be revised to show (Additive Alternate No. 1) in lieu of (Additive Alternate #5). Question: "Regarding Section 2.03.B. of the "Insurance Requirements": "Owner may require the deletion, revision, " Where annually renewing corporate policies are used to meet the insurance specifications it may not be possible to delete, revise or modify such policies. If possible, it will reasonably involve additional cost. Please revise wording to include Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 009101-8 Rev 01-13-2016 confirmation that Owner will be responsible for additional costs associated with any changes in coverage requested that go beyond the coverage that is already stipulated in the contract." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Section 2.03.A of the "Insurance Requirements" requires copies of policies. Where corporate policies are used to meet these specifications for the benefit of the project such policies would contain proprietary information that could not be provided outside the company. Please strike the requirement for copies of policies so that only endorsements and documentation of SIR/Deductibles will be required and not full copies of policies. Alternatively, please modify wording to allow for redaction of ANY proprietary information from the required policies." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Section 1.06.B of the "Insurance Requirements" requires waiver of subrogation rights against the "Owners Indemnitees". Please provide a definition of "Owners Indemnitees" for clarity as to what entities will be required to get waiver of subrogation." Answer: "Owner's Indemnitees is defined in Article 1 of section 00 72 00 General Conditions." Question: "Section 1.05.A.12 of the "Insurance Requirements" requires Builders risk coverage to "...be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete..." Please modify this clause to tie the term of coverage to a defined term and period within the contract (i.e. Substantial Completion)." Answer: "Final completion of the Work is defined in paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. It is when the Application for Final Payment is accepted by the Owner." Question: "Regarding Section 1.03.F.3 of the "Insurance Requirements": "Include coverage for ....agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each named Insured or additional insured...". This wording suggests that the general liability policy and auto coverage will be a controlled insurance program covering all parties. Please delete or amend the language to reflect that the required coverage is for the Named Insured's vicarious liability of their agents, consultants and subcontractors only to make it clear that a controlled insurance program is not required." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Regarding Section 1.03.C.2 of the "Insurance Requirements": Wording requires "..coverage for Contractor's contractual Indemnity obligations and all other contractual indemnity obligations " Commercially available Commercial General Liability coverage will provide industry standard ISO Contractual Liability wording but such coverage does not imply that all indemnity obligations in any specific contract are insured. In fact there are always elements of any contract including indemnity provisions that are neither insured nor insurable. We request that wording be added to specify that industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet the specification." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 009101-9 Rev 01-13-2016 Question: "Regarding Section 1.03.C.1.a of the "Insurance Requirements": Generally speaking, insurers are unwilling to eliminate the care, custody, control exclusion in the Commercial General Liability policy. As a result the Installation Floater requirement will come into play. As described, the installation floater is redundant coverage to the builders risk required in section 1.05 of the insurance requirements. Please delete section 1.03,C,1 and as appropriate move the requirements to section 1.05." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Regarding Section 1.03.B.4 of the "Insurance Requirements": As currently written, this section implies coverage is required beyond the bodily injury and property damage coverage normally associated with CGL coverage and also implies coverage for "any other person" which could include coverage for parties or individuals unrelated to contractor. Please strike Item 4 From the CGL requirement or confirm that the coverage required is just that coverage for the First Named Insured and Additional Insured's consistent with commercially available ISO CGL coverage?" Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Regarding Section 1.03.B.3 of the "Insurance Requirement": As currently written these required coverages are more broad than would be commercially available on a CGL policy. This section implies that Employment Practices Liability would need to be included. Please confirm that the expected coverage is that which would be included in commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policies." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Regarding Section 1.02.D of the "Insurance Requirements": We request that Owner revise the specification to strike the requirement for copies of policies so that only endorsements and documentation of SIR/Deductibles will be required and not full copies of policies. Alternatively, will Owner modify wording to allow for redaction of ANY proprietary information from the required policies not limited to premium or pricing information?" Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised specification section 00 72 01 — Insurance Requirements." Question: "Please consider adding "caused by Contractor" to Section 15.08.B of the "General Conditions". See proposed revised wording: "Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas caused by Contractor, that Contractor has arranged to used through construction easements or other agreements." Answer: "This is understood. The City would not require the Contractor to correct damages to the Site not caused by Contractor or by someone under the control, direction or under contract with the Contractor." Question: "The liquidated damage provision in Article 3 of the "Agreement" is internally inconsistent. In paragraph A, the parties agree that delays will cause the Owner financial loss and that is it difficult to determine and prove the values of such loss. Therefore, the contract establishes a provision for liquidated damages. As Article 3.02A of the Agreement provides for liquidated damages, Article 3.02B (related to Actual Damages) should be deleted." Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 00 91 01 - 10 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "Paragraph 3.02 of Section 00 52 23 is not inconsistent. Subsection B states that if the owner can determine the actual damages, the Owner may pursue that remedy." Question: "In section 26 29 23 page 10 of 16, it specifies the Medium Voltage Drive is to be 45 inches deep, no exceptions. The specified Toshiba Drives are 48 inches deep. Please advise if this is acceptable." Answer: "The referenced 48 inch VFD depth is acceptable. The specification wording shall be modified to read "the maximum VFD depth allowed shall be 60 inches deep."" Question: "Spec section 40 90 01 2.13 - Electromagnetic Flow Meter paragraph B indicates the flow meter's liner should be teflon and hard rubber. Please clarify which liner type is required. Requesting approval of Krohne's OPTIFLUX 2000 if hard rubber liners are required and OPTIFLUX 4000 if teflon liners are required. Paragraph C indicates the transmitter shall be remote mounted; however, the plans appear to indicate integrally mounted transmitters. Please clarify. If remote mounted are required, please indicate where or let us know the cable length required." Answer: "The flow meter's liner should be hard rubber. Please refer to Specification 0131 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications. The mounting of the flow meter transmitters shall be local, and adjacent, to the flow element. The Contractor shall fabricate and install a stand for the purpose of mounting the transmitter. Cable length will be approximately five feet or less" Question: "Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls; paragraph 2.05.A states the contractor shall provide the temporary electrical power for the construction, testing, disinfection and start-up of the project. By the time we are ready to test the new pumps they will be connected to the permanent power with the new motors and drives installed. Typically, once connected to permanent power, the owner picks up the power costs. Is the contractor expected to pay for the power costs during the pump start-up / testing? if so, please provide us with the power consumption costs for a 1500 HP motor and pump." Answer: "No, the Contractor does not incur power costs for start-up and testing." Question: "Section 01 35 00.1.01- Special Procedures; the table in the first sheet is did not print correctly. It has blank boxes between some of the letters making it unreadable." Answer: "Table shown on Page 1 of Specification Section 01 35 00 — Special Procedures should show the following: ONSWTP REQUIRED FLOW RANGE TIME FRAME MINIMUM FLOW MAXIMUM FLOW November 1 through March 31 (all years) 45 MGD 85 MGD April 1 through October 31 (all years) 50 MGD 110 MGD Question: "Please provide a window specification." Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 00 91 01 - 11 Rev 01-13-2016 Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised Specification Section 08 43 13 — Aluminum - Framed Storefronts." Question: "Generator Building - Storage Access Platforms, Sheet Numbers 93, 94 and 95. There are no Anchor Bolt Details for the four WF Platform End Bents/Frames." Answer: "Refer to Sheet 91 for the anchor bolt detail for the walkway frame. Please note for the four WF Platform End Bents/Frames these require welds and bolts. Refer to Sheet 94 — Detail 2 for the weld details and Sheet 94 — Detail 5 for bolt details. Also refer to Sheet 95 — Detail 4 for the anchor bolt detail for the ladder base." Question: "Is this an AIS job?" Answer: "Please ask question again and specify what AIS means." Question: "Sheet Numbers 87 through 100. Zee Girt designation "10ZS2.75x070". Contact with two metal building component suppliers do not recognize this description. Everyone believes this is a nominal 10 -inch depth girt, maybe 2.75 -inch legs, maybe 14 -gage material. Usually, Zee Girts are described/dimensioned as 10.0x3.0Z14 (14 = gage) / 10.0 x 2.625 x 2.875. In essence, are the proposed Zee Girts 10 -inches in depth and 14 or 12 gage? Are they to be prime painted or hot dip galvanized?" Answer: "Refer AISI Manual (North American Cold -Formed Steel Specification Table I-4) for the section which has D = 10.00 -inch, B = 2.75 -inch, t = 0.070, d = 0.990. Thickness is equivalent to 14 gauge. Refer to Specification 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, Part 2 — Section 2.3 (E.) for painting and coating requirements and note that color shall match existing steel." Question: "The prevailing wages included in section 00 72 03 are Heavy, Highway and Building. The heavy and highway are similar in the rates for the wages however, the building wages are much higher especially when the fringes are included. Typically, when the building are not a public space and are not air conditioned spaces we have been able to use the heavy and highway wage scales. The problem is trying to track and pay the much higher building wage rates when you have employees working both on the site and inside the building in the same week. If you try and divide your employees between heavy/ highway and building on the same job it creates problems. Can the building wage scale be removed?" Answer: "Building Construction includes the construction, rehabilitation and repair of sheltered enclosures with walk-in access for the purpose of housing persons, machinery, equipment, or supplies. The application of wage schedules/determinations for more than one type of construction is appropriate if such items that fall in a separate type of construction will comprise at least 20% of the total project cost and/or $1 million dollars cost." Question: "I don't see a generator specification? I also don't see a fuel tank specification?" Answer: "The contractor shall coordinate the generator addition work with Cummins Southern Plains, LLC. The Contractor shall obtain and utilize manufactures shop drawings, power and control interconnecting wiring diagrams as well as installation details and manufacturers recommendations specific to this work. The Contractor shall incorporate the assistance and direction of Cummins Southern Plains representatives in developing a fully functional and integrated addition to the existing stand-by generator line-up. The Contractor shall utilize Cummins Southern Plains to obtain all software upgrades, Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 00 91 01 - 12 Rev 01-13-2016 programming work for the addition and integration of the new generator into the existing system." Contact: Lucas Spangler Application Engineer Cummins Southern Plains, LLC 7045 N. Loop 610 East Houston, Tx. 77028 Phone: (713) 679-7744 Cell: (832) 837-9844 Fax: (713) 679-7774 www.cummins-sp.com lucas.spangler@cummins.com Question: "Sheet #56 describes the windstorm certification and a WPI -8 certificate. What is the wind level required at the plant for the design? Also, the HM doors, aluminum windows, overhead doors and louver specifications don't mention any windstorm certification requirements. Please advise." Answer: "All exterior elements attached to the building envelope must meet windstorm requirements. The required design wind speed for the high service 3 building is 125 mph 3 - sec gust as noted on sheet 56. The design pressures for all component and cladding items (i.e. exterior doors, windows, storefronts, louvers, roofing, etc...) is provided on sheet 57. Please refer to the attached revised Specification Sections 08 11 13 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, 08 4313 — Aluminum -Framed Storefronts, 08 33 23 — Overhead Coiling Doors, and 08 9100 — Louvers which now include windstorm certification requirements." Question: "Will the City of CC require inspections during the construction phases such as structural, and all MEP trades?" Answer: "Please refer to specification section 0140 00 Quality Management for inspection requirements and quality control." Question: "Section 26 29 23.01 -Medium Voltage VFD's; paragraph 1.2.A lists the acceptable manufactures as being AB, Siemens, Eaton and Toshiba. In paragraph 2.2 and 2.3 only list AB and Siemens. So is only AB and Siemens approved or is Eaton and Toshiba also approved?" Answer: "All listed VFD manufacturers/series within the referenced specification are approved sources." Question: "Section 26 05 13- Medium Voltage Cables; paragraph 2.3.K calls for a 3 conductor cable assembly. Can we use 3 single conductors since 5KV cable is cable tray rated?" Answer: "All medium voltage cables shall be 3/C MC assembly equal to Okonite type CLX." Question: "Section 26 05 36- Cable Trays; the specified material is called to be aluminum and the existing cable trays are galvanized. Please advise." Answer: "The new cable tray system shall be aluminum as indicated. Provide galvanic reaction isolation and bonding as required when making connections to the existing tray system." Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 00 91 01 - 13 Rev 01-13-2016 Question: "Door Schedule - Sheet No. 54 (A119). Head, Jamb and Threshold detail references are all designated as A117 Drawing Reference. Minor item, but believe the correct Drawing Reference should be A116?" Answer: "Correct, drawing reference for the head, jamb, and threshold provided on the Door Schedule shown on plan sheet 54 should be A116. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 54." Question: "We have not found an overall grading plan for the project. The plan sheets which show the proposed grading contours do not show elevation labels for the existing contours. This will make it very difficult to create an accurate earthwork / grading model for take -off purposes. We would like to request the CAD file containing the existing topo and proposed grading data. If the CAD file will not be made available, please provide the estimated earthwork volume / balance along with a cut / fill grid." Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised plan sheets 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, and 17 which now include existing elevation callouts." Question: "In Spec Section 40 90 02.0 States The PCSS shall submit three (3) hard copies along with an electronic copy of the Qualification Documentation to the Owner/Engineer. The following documentation is required for qualification purposes. Can you please clarify per the Pre -Bid meeting Q&A's, that this referenced documentation needs to be submitted to the General Contractors and turned in with their bid." Answer: "The referenced documentation is required to be submitted within the General Contractor's bid documentation." Question: "Is the 2 MW generator for Alternate 1 contractor furnished? I see no specifications, only to coordinate with Cummins Southern Plains." Answer: "Yes, the generator is contractor furnished. Contact referenced Cummins Southern Plains application engineer for information regarding scope and costs." Question: "Will Dezurik/Willamette be an accepted manufacture for the Metal Seated Ball Valves?" Answer: "Please refer to Specification 01 31 14 Article 1.04 — EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS for requirements and procedures the Contractor must follow to substitute a product other than those specifically listed in the drawings and specifications." Question: "Architectural Sheet No. 42. Roof Hatch and Curb. Could not locate a technical specification for this item." Answer: "Specification Section 07 72 33 — Roof Hatches has been added and is attached to this addendum." Question: "Architectural Sheet No. 38 - "CATWALK" area bounded by column grid K -L/1-4. There is a note which reads "CATAWALK RE: STRUCT". Catwalk also shown on Architectural Sheet Nos. 40, 41, 44 and 47. Structural Sheet No. 65 (Electrical Room Framing Plan) and Detail, Section "F / 67" do not indicate any type of catwalk framing configuration in this area. Are there engineering details which depict the proposed Catwalk framing construction located elsewhere?" Answer: "The CATWALK area bounded and note which reads "CATWALK, RE: STRUCT." shall be deleted from plan sheets 38, 40, 44 and 47. A full length checkered steel service Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 00 91 01-14 Rev 01-13-2016 walkway shall be included with the bridge crane as specified on plan sheet 107 and specification section 4122 25 — Bridge and Hoist Systems." Question: "Exterior Ramp Concrete Access Stairs. Details "2, 6/53" indicate 3 Risers. Section "C/64" indicates only 2 Risers. Which is correct?" Answer: "2 risers is correct. Plan sheet 53 has been revised and is attached." Question: "Concrete Access Stairs to Electrical Room. Detail "9/53" indicates 9 -foot Width; Sheet 59 indicates 7 -foot Width. Which is correct?" Answer: "9 -foot width is correct. Sheet 59 has been revised to indicate a 9 -foot width for the concrete access stairs from pump room to electrical room. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 59." Question: "Note 1 on detail 1 sheet S24 on sheet 79 says to leave existing yellow colored crack repair material/sealant in place to seal the crack in preparation for injection repair. How are we to determine the width of the crack to determine which repair procedure to use if we leave this sealant in place? Also, if epoxy injection is performed, ports must be placed along the crack line. This will require removal of the existing yellow colored material." Answer: "Repair a small portion of existing repair for port installation." Question: "Sheet S23 or sheet 78 gives quantities of 150 cu. ft. of beam/column repair, 750 lin. ft. of floor expansion joint repair and 150 lin. ft. of wall expansion joint repair. Sheet S24 or sheet 79 gives quantities of 700 LF of floor and wall crack injection repair and 10 cu. ft. of exposed reinforcing repair. Are these the quantities we are to use for pricing? If not, what quantities are we to use if can't perform our own field take off?" Answer: "Use quantities provided. No prior access allowed." Question: "Detail 1 on sheet S23 or sheet 78 indicates a repair quantity of approx. 75 sq. ft. A note pointing to repair detail 1 (typical beam repair detail) and detail 2 (typical beam/column repair detail) says repair quantity approx. 150 cu. Ft. What quantity are we to use for pricing?" Answer: "150 cubic feet." Question: "Note 2 under Repair Materials under Concrete Column Repairs says that contractor shall match color of repair to existing with the addition of a dye. Why is this necessary when the repairs will be inside a clearwell out of the public's view? Also, will the manufacturer allow the addition of a dye to their repair material?" Answer: "Delete the color requirement." Question: "Note 11 under Concrete Repair Notes on sheet S20 or sheet 75 states that minor patchwork shall be repaired with Verticoat. One note on detail 1 on sheet S23 or sheet 78 states that existing deteriorated concrete to be repaired using Verticoat. Does this mean that all deteriorated concrete or concrete beam and column spalls are to be repaired with Verticoat?" Answer: "Yes." Question: "Note 7 under Concrete Repair Notes on sheet S20 or sheet 75 states "Where steel has less than 75% of its original cross-sectional area, new reinforcing steel of the original cross-sectional area shall be spliced on by welding with minimum 24 lap beyond the point of Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 00 91 01 - 15 Rev 01-13-2016 unacceptable deficiency condition. Notes on detail 2 on sheet S23 or sheet 78 indicates that new rebar to be wire tie lap spliced to existing reinforcing, and that lap splice to be 40 bar diameter of undamaged bar size. Are we to price welding in new reinforcement or wire tie? Are we to price 24 lap splice or 40 bar diameter lap splice of reinforcing? Can we be given a quantity (pounds) of reinforcement replacement to bid to?" Answer: "If contractor chooses to wire tie, then the lap splice requirement is 40 bar diameters. If the contractor chooses to weld, then the lap splice requirement is 24 bar diameters." Question: "Detail 3 on sheet S23 or sheet 78 indicates that Swellstop by Sika is to be installed in an existing expansion joint. Based on the product literature, Swellstop is not intended to seal an existing expansion joint. Is this what is intended or should another material be utilized here?" Answer: "Use specified material." Question: "Trench Checkered Plate Covers - Detail "4 / 64". Could not locate weight limitations for individual checkered plate panels/sections. Detail does not indicate underside angle stiffeners, lifting handles or finger lift holes; are these items required? There is no flat bar retainer at 1/4" gap between checkerd plate cover and concete floor; is there none required?" Answer: "Sections should be approximately 3 -ft long. Finger lift holes will be required." Question: "Plan sheet 62, section B shows the sump depth of 7'-1 5/16". Sheet 108, section C shows the sump depth of 9'-3 5/8". Sheet 59 says the sump is 5'-0" deep. Please confirm the depth of this sump." Answer: "Sump Depth is 9'-3 5/8"." Question: "Plan sheet 20, detail # 8, what is the required spacing for the expansion joints and control joints?" Answer: "All expansion joints shall be spaced at 40.0' (Max) apart, and subdivided every 20.0' (Max) with a control joint. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 20." Question: "Plan sheet 20, what is the required strength of the concrete paving? Detail # 8, note # 2 states 3,000 PSI but detail # 2 states 4,000 PSI." Answer: "Detail 8 — Note 2 on plan sheet 20 is detail for concrete sidewalk and concrete is required to meet Class "A", 3,000 psi. Detail 2 on plan sheet 20 is detail for concrete pavement and concrete is required to meet Class "P", 4,000 psi. Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 20." Question: "Plan sheet 63, detail # 4, what is the spacing of the control joints?" Answer: "Please refer to the attached revised plan sheet 59 for control joint locations." Question: "Section 00 21 13-7 Article 16 - Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy has two MBE goals established. On as 45% and one as 15%. Please define the difference in the two participation goals. Is the 15% included as a subcategory of the 45% or is it in addition for a total goal of 60%?" Answer: "Minority participation goal is 45% of the total hours worked on the project should be performed by minorities as defined in Section 00 72 03. MBE goal is 15% of the work Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 00 91 01 - 16 Rev 01-13-2016 performed should be performed by a minority business enterprise as defined in Section 00 72 03." Question: "Will there be a clarification on the type of Insulated Metal Wall Panel used between the specifications and the plan documents?" Answer: "Specification Sections 07 42 13.16 Vertical Insulated Metal Wall Panels and 07 42 13.19 Horizontal Insulated Metal Wall Panels shall be deleted from the specifications as per this addendum. Please refer to the drawings and attached revised Specification Section 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels for all metal wall panel requirements." END OF ADDENDUM NO. 03 Addendum No. 03 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3— E11066 00 91 01-17 Rev 01-13-2016 ATTACHMENT NO. 1 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ARTICLE 1— INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.01 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS A. Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises — Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products / Completed Operations Hazard 6. Contractual Liability 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal & Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Per Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate Business Automobile Liability - Owned, Non -Owned, Rented and Leased $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/ 500,000/ 500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Contractor's Pollution Liability/ Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. $2,000,000 Per Claim • Required X Not Required Builder's Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Contract Price X Required • Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price • Required X Not Required Owner's Protective Liability Equal to Contractor's liability insurance • Required X Not Required 1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with Article 6 of the General Conditions and this Section. Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-1 Rev 05-19-2016 B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Section. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A -VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 16 of the General Conditions if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner's Indemnitees in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-2 Rev 05-19-2016 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Section. Insurance is to remain in effective for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by Paragraph 1.01, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-3 Rev 05-19-2016 h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixture, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14 of the General Conditions, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. E. Purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first -dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owners Indemnities as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions; 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third -party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-4 Rev 05-19-2016 H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Section must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Section or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not by rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 1.04 OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain an Owner's Protective Liability insurance policy with the Owner as the named insured and other members of the OPT as additional insureds. Provide a policy that will protect the OPT from claims which arise from operations under the Contract Documents. Provide this coverage in the same amounts required for the Contractor's liability insurance and from the same company that provides the Contractor's liability insurance. 1.05 PROPERTY INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Section or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 1.06. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT, Contractor, and all Subcontractors, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-5 Rev 05-19-2016 caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner -furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04 of the General Conditions. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Section. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 1.06 WAIVER OF RIGHTS A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Section are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-6 Rev 05-19-2016 insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contains provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner's Indemnitees, Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 1.07 OWNER'S INSURANCE FOR THE PROJECT A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds, or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 — EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE 2.01 ACCEPTABLE EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of "Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 2.02 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-7 Rev 05-19-2016 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 2.03 INSURANCE POLICIES A. If requested by the Owner, provide a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 2.04 CONTINUING EVIDENCE OF COVERAGE A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Section prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 2.05 NOTICES REGARDING INSURANCE A. Submit notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: City of Corpus Christi — Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. ARTICLE 3 — TEXAS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE REQUIRED NOTICE 3.01 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-8 Rev 05-19-2016 directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 007201-9 Rev 05-19-2016 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. END OF SECTION Insurance Requirements O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 00 72 01-10 Rev 05-19-2016 ATTACHMENT NO. 2 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pre -formed metal wall panels with concealed fasteners, factory - finished. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Division 05 Section - Structural Steel 2. Division 05 Section - Steel Joists 3. Division 05 Section - Metal Fabrications 4. Division 06 Section - Rough Carpentry 5. Division 07 Section - Roof and Deck Insulation 6. Division 07 Section - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. SG02-1 2001 Edition of the North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A653-03 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip process. 2. B209 -02a Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. 1993 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th edition. D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show wall panels with flashings and accessories in elevations, sections and details. Include metal thickness and finishes, panel lengths, joining details, anchorage details, flashings and special fabrication provisions for termination and penetrations. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and provide fastener pullout values. Shop drawings must be completed by the wall panel manufacturer's engineering department. Any and/or all changes recommended by the successful bidder must be approved by the manufacturer in writing prior to submittal. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's detailed material and system description, sealant and closure installation instructions, and finish specifications. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and required fastener pullout values. Page 1 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Samples: Provide full-size samples of the following materials and system components. Samples shall be of identical material type, thickness, panel width, and material grade/alloy as the system specified for this project. 1. Submit sample of panel section, at least 4" long x full panel width showing panel profile and also a sample of color selected. 2. Submit sample of panel fasteners. D. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Mill production reports certifying that the steel thicknesses are within allowable tolerances of the nominal or minimum thickness or gauge specified. B. Qualification Data for Installer. Refer to Quality Assurance Article below. 1.6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Requirements of Division 01 Section Closeout Submittals. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide specified warranty for the Project, executed by the authorized agent of the Manufacturer. C. Wall Panel Maintenance Instructions. Provide a manual of manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance of installed systems. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To maintain consistency with performance, inspection services and warranty, the manufacturer of the Metal Wall Panels shall be identical to that providing material in Section 07 42 13 — Metal Roof Panel System and identical to that providing material in Section 07 52 00 — Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of the wall panel system from a single manufacturer. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer shall have direct authority and control over all fabrication of steel components as well as the raw materials used in their fabrication. C. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized quality control program such as ISO -9001 approval. D. Engage the Manufacturer's Field Representative to conduct three times weekly inspections of work in progress as described herein and shall furnish written documentation of all such inspections. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE Page 2 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction A. Convene a pre -installation conference approximately two (2) weeks before scheduled commencement of modified bituminous roofing system installation and associated work. B. Require attendance of installer of each component of associated work which must precede or follow wall panel work (including mechanical or electrical work if any), Architect, Owner, system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, testing agencies and governing authorities. C. Objectives of conference to include: 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to work, including set up and mobilization areas for stored material and work area. 2. Tour representative areas of building, inspect and discuss condition of substrates, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others. 3. Review structural loading limitations of wall framing and inspect for unacceptable variations in planarity 4. Review system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 5. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 7. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary wall protection (if not mandatory requirement). 9. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached. Furnish a copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. 10. Review notification procedures for weather or non -working days. D. The Owner's Representative will designate one of the conference participants to record the proceedings and promptly distribute them to the participants for record. E. The intent of the conference is to resolve issues affecting the installation and performance of wall panel work. Do not proceed with work until such issues are resolved the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer of Record. This shall not be construed as interference with the progress of Work on the part of the Owner or Engineer of Record. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's responsibilities: Page 3 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. All panels shall be shipped from the manufacturer with polystyrene or similar cushioned packaging material separating the individual panels to minimize flexing, stressing, scratching or otherwise damaging the material during transit to the job. 2. Fully cover steel with tarpaulins or similar protective cover during transit to prevent dirt and debris from coming in contact with the finished goods. B. Installer's responsibilities: 1. Stack pre -finished materials to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion and denting and elevate one end to facilitate moisture run-off. 2. Unload wall panels using a boom or crane, supporting the panels in at least two locations during lifting, and never lift more than three panels at a time. 3. Protect moisture -sensitive materials and water-based from the weather. 4. Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred material from project site. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and storage and protection requirements for wall panel system. 1. Protection: a. Protect completed work from subsequent construction operations. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. b. Do not encumber the site with stored materials or equipment. c. Do not support wall -mounted equipment directly on the wall panel system. B. Ascertain that work of other trades which penetrates the wall or is to be made watertight by the wall is in place an approved prior to installation of roofing. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTIONS A. When the project is in progress, the system manufacturer will provide the following: 1. Keep the Architect and Owner informed as to the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Provide job site inspections at least three (3) times a week. 3. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 4. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no applications procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected. 1.12 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA. A. Capacity shall be determined using defined method in accordance with ASTM E330. Page 4 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Air infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283, and meet or exceed the following performance requirements: Pressure 1.57 PSF Area Leakage Rate > 0.06 cfm/sq.ft. C. Static air pressure water infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331, and meet or exceed the following performance requirements: Pressure Result 5 Gal/Hr per S.F. and Static Air No Leakage Pressure of 12.0 psf for 15 minutes D. General: Provide metal wall panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. E. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. a. Wind Uplift Testing: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of proposed assembly per ASTM El 592 2. As indicated 3. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind building code with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span with no evidence or failure. 4. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" F. Wind Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind -uplift class UL -90, in addition shall comply with TDI Windstorm and Project Wind Loading Requirements. G. Air Infiltration, ASTM E1680: Maximum 0.25 cfm/sq. ft (1.27 L/S per sq. m) at static -air - pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). H. Water Penetration Static Pressure, ASTM E1646: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 12 lbf/sq. ft (575 Pa). Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. 1.13 WARRANTIES A. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer of wall panels covering all of the following criteria. Multiple warranties are not acceptable. 1. 10 year watertight warranty signed by the manufacturer 2. Manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year finish warranty covering checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading, or adhesion. 3. Installer's two (2) year warranty covering wall panel system installation. 4. Galvalume material shall have a 20 -year guarantee against corrosion, rupture, or perforation. Page 5 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Warranties shall commence on date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Common Product Requirements." B. Basis of Design: Materials, manufacturer's product designations, and/or manufacturer's names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1. C. Substitutions: Products proposed as equal to the products specified in this Section shall be submitted in accordance with Bidding Requirements and Division 01 provisions. 1. Proposals shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer's standard specification section. That specification section shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. Substitution requests containing specifications without licensed engineer certification shall be rejected for non-conformance. 2. Include a list of three (3) projects of similar type and extent, located within a one hundred mile radius from the location of the project. In addition, the three projects must be at least five (5) years old and be available for inspection by the Architect, Owner or Owner's Representative. 3. Equivalency of performance criteria, warranty terms, submittal procedures, and contractual terms will constitute the basis of acceptance. 4. The Owner's decision regarding substitutions will be considered final. Unauthorized substitutions will be rejected. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The design is based upon metal wall panel systems engineered and manufactured by: The Garland Company 3800 East 91st Street Cleveland, Ohio 44105 Telephone: (800) 762-8225 Website: www.garlandco.com B. Site Formed Panels: Bidder will not be allowed to supply panels formed at the job -site on portable rollformers; metal panels must be factory pre -manufactured and engineered for this project. 2.3 METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM A. General. 1. Product designations for the metal wall panel system and waterproofing materials used in this Section are based on performance characteristics of the R -Mer Line Metal Wall Panel system manufactured by The Garland Company. B. Materials. Page 6 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Panel material: 24 ga., Galvanized steel, type G-90, smooth as per ASTM A653- 96. 2. Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same material, thickness, and finish as wall panel system, unless indicated otherwise. C. Finish on surfaces: 1. Exposed surfaces for coated panels: a. Two coat coil applied, baked -on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system (polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2), applied by manufacturer's approved applicator. b. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and color coat. c. Color shall be selected by Architect. 2. Unexposed surfaces for coated panels shall be baked -on polyester coating with .20 - .30 dry film thickness (TDF). 3. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for uncoated panels shall be as shipped from the mill. D. Characteristics: 1. Fabrication: Panels shall be factory roll -formed from the specified metal. Field rolled panels will not be allowed. 2. Configuration: Panel shall have interlocking seams which conceal fasteners. 3. Panel Length: Full Length without joints. 4. Panel Coverage Width : 18", Profile: V -groove (9"). 5. Panel Depth (Concealed Leg Height): 3" 6. Mechanical Finish: Panel surface shall have two (2) equally spaced vee grooves. E. Accessories: Fasteners: 1. Anchor fasteners (Concealed fasteners): Corrosion resistant steel screws, #10 x length appropriate for substrate, pancake head, Phillips or Square drive. Use self - drilling, self -tapping for metal substrate or A -point for plywood substrate. 2. Exposed Trim Fasteners (trim to panel): Trim fasteners shall be #6x1/2" SS410 Tek 1 Round washer head, painted to match panel color. Fastener material shall be stainless steel washer head. 3. Anchor fasteners (Concealed fasteners): Corrosion resistant steel screws, #10 x length appropriate for substrate, pancake head, Phillips or Square drive. Use self - Page 7 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction drilling, self -tapping for metal substrate or A -point for plywood substrate. 4. Exposed Trim Fasteners (trim to panel): Trim fasteners shall be #6x1/2" SS410 Tek 1 Round washer head, painted to match panel color. Fastener material shall be stainless steel washer head. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate metal panels and flashing components to the maximum extent possible, forming metal work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises. Hem exposed edges of flashings. B. Form flashing components from full single width sheet in minimum ten (10'-0") feet sections. Provide shop fabricated, mitered corners, joined using closed end pop rivets and joint sealant. C. Fabricate panels and related sheet metal work in accordance with approved shop drawings and applicable standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION, GENERAL A. Comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Common Execution Requirements." 3.2 PREPARATION A. Inspection: Examine the alignment and placement of the building structure and substrate. Correct any objectionable warp, waves or buckles in the substrate before proceeding with installation of the pre -formed metal panels. B. Pre -installation conference: Prior to beginning metal wall panel work, convene a pre- installation conference as specified in Part 1 of this Specification. 3.3 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. All details will be shown on manufacturer's shop drawings to successful bidder; install panels and flashings in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, within specified erection tolerances. B. Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and panels. C. Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on shop drawings. D. Seal laps and joints in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's product data. E. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal work to provide weather -tight conditions at wall panel terminations. Fabricate and install in accordance with standards of SMACNA Manual. F. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects. In light gauge panels with wide flat surfaces, some oil canning may be present. Oil canning does not affect the finish or structural integrity of the panel and is therefore not cause for Page 8 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction rejection. G. Form joints in linear sheet metal to allow for one fourth (1/4) inch minimum expansion at twenty (20'-0") feet on center maximum and eight (8'-0") feet from corners. H. At joints in linear sheet metal items, set sheet metal items in two (2) one fourth (1/4) inch beads of butyl sealant. Extend sealant over all metal surfaces. Mate components for positive seal. Allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Replace damaged work than cannot be restored by normal cleaning methods. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during construction. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 3.6 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner, system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of system. B. Inspect work and flashing of penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. D. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections. E. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the system manufacturer. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner's facility manager, or other representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures: 1. Maintenance. 2. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the warranty in effect and force. 3. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the warranty in effect and force END OF SECTION Page 9 of 9 Metal Wall Panels — 07 42 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 07 72 33 ROOF HATCHES (BILCO TYPE E-50TB) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide factory -fabricated roof hatches for ladder access. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including profiles, accessories, location, adjacent construction interface, and dimensions. C. Warranty: Submit executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer: A minimum of 2 years experience installing similar products. C. Manufacturer's Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2008 Quality Standards including in-house engineering for product design activities. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original packaging. Store materials in a dry, protected, well -vented area. Inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier's freight bill of lading. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis -of -Design Manufacturer: Type E-50TB Roof Hatch by The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com. 2.2 ROOF HATCH A. Furnish and install, where indicated on plans, metal roof hatch Type E-50TB, size width: 36" (914mm) x length: 36" (914mm). Length denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. The roof hatch shall be pre -assembled from the manufacturer. B. Performance characteristics: 1. Cover and curb shall be thermally broken to prevent heat transfer between interior and exterior surfaces. 2. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf (97kg/m2) wind uplift. 3. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. 4. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 5. Entire hatch shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb. Page 1 of 3 Roof Hatches - 07 72 33 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Cover: Shall be 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum with a 5" (127mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be thermally broken to minimize heat transfer and to resist condensation. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb. D. Cover insulation: Shall be 3" (75mm) thick polyisocyanurate with an R -value = 18 (U=0.315 W/m2K), fully covered and protected by an 18 gauge (1 mm) aluminum liner. E. Curb: Shall be 12" (305mm) in height and of 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be thermally broken to minimize heat transfer and to resist condensation. The curb shall be formed with a 5-1/2" (140mm) flange with 7/16" (11mm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip® flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6" (153mm) on center, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place. F. Wind loads: Provide Curb; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures and to comply with TDI Windstorm requirements. G. Curb insulation: Shall be 3" (75mm) thick polyisocyanurate with an R -value = 18 (U=0.315 W/m2K). H. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe welded to the curb assembly. I. Hardware 1. Heavy stainless steel pintle hinges shall be provided 2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles 3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps. 4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly. 5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1" (25mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing. 6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti -corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. [For installation in highly corrosive environments or when prolonged exposure to hot water or steam is anticipated, specify Type 316 stainless steel hardware]. 7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space. J. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved. 2. Repair finishes damaged during installation. 3. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Page 2 of 3 Roof Hatches - 07 72 33 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer which will not damage finish. END OF SECTION Page 3 of 3 Roof Hatches - 07 72 33 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 4 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE. B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI -100); 2014. C. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2013. E. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011. F. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2014. (ANSI/BHMA A156.115) G. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009 (ANSI). H. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. Page 1 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames — 08 11 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 - Change Management. 2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating thickness interior, G90 exterior 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. B. sizes and 2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI -100); Level 3 - Extra Heavy -Duty, Physical Performance Level A, Model 2 - Seamless. 2. Core: Polyurethane. 3. Galvanizing: Components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90. 4. Insulating Value: U -value of.1, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 where indicated. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. 6. Wind loads: Provide Doors; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 60 lbs./sq. ft. inward and 60 lbs./sq. ft. outward and to comply with TDI Windstorm requirements. The design pressures are based on the 2009 International Building Code. 2.4 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI -100), Level 2 and 3 Door Frames: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum thickness. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. Page 2 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - 08 11 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. 3. Wind loads: Provide Door frames; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 60 lbs./sq. ft. inward and 60 lbs./sq. ft. outward and to comply with TDI Windstorm requirements. The design pressures are based on the 2009 International Building Code. C. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Removable type, of profile similar to jambs. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed. B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4 -inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop -assembled frames. 2.6 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI -100). B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. Page 3 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames — 08 11 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames — 08 11 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 5 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling doors, insulated slats, operating hardware, fire -rated and exterior, manual chain operation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. B. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Cylinder cores and keys. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Details of construction and fabrication. 4. Installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent construction. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Doors: Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: info@overheaddoor.com. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 31 14. 2.2 COILING DOORS A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain. 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 60 psf, without undue deflection or damage to components. 2. Finish: Field Painted. 3. Manual hand chain lift operation. 4. Mounting: Within framed opening. Page 1 of 3 Overhead Coiling Doors — 08 33 23 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Wind loads: Provide Doors; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 60 lbs./sq. ft. inward and 60 lbs./sq. ft. outward and to comply with TDI Windstorm requirements. The design pressures are based on the 2009 International Building Code. B. Fire -Rated Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain; conform to NFPA 80. 1. Oversized Openings: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of fire rated units and operating hardware assembly. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking insulated slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors. B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap -on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. C. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In addition, install fire -rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. Page 2 of 3 Overhead Coiling Doors — 08 33 23 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. END OF SECTION Page 3 of 3 Overhead Coiling Doors — 08 33 23 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 6 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum -framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Weatherstripping. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestop at system junction with structure. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. D. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE: Hardware items other than specified in this section. E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2015. C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014. F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013. G. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, and internal drainage details. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations. E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum -framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2 -Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. Page 1 of 4 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts — 08 43 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction a. Basic Wind Speed: 125 MPH b. Importance Factor (I, II, Ill): III c. Exposure Category (A, B, C, D): C B. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of 60 lbs./sq. ft. inward and 60 lbs./sq. ft. outward. The design pressures are based on the 2009 International Building Code. 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 I/s • m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 65 psf (3112 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/180 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.4% of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Windborne-Debris-lmpact-Resistance Performance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886 and information in ASTM E 1996 and /or AAMA 506. a. Large -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. b. Small -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 70 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING A. Wind -Borne -Debris Resistance Tested, Center -Set Style: 1. Basis of Design: Kawneer IR 501. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 5 inches deep. 2.2 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Unitized, shop assembly to comply with TDI Windstorm requirements. 2. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing. 3. Finish: Class I natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. Page 2 of 4 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts — 08 43 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 5. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 8. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. B. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the following: a. Positive Design Wind Load: 60 lbf/sq ft. b. Negative Design Wind Load: 60 lbf/sq ft. c. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum pressure. 2. Wind -Borne -Debris Resistance: Identical full-size glazed assembly without auxiliary protection tested by independent agency in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 2 - Enhanced Protection for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind pressure and TDI certification. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing stops: Flush. 2. Cross -Section: 2-1/2 x 5 inch nominal dimension. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Exposed Flashings: Aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness; finish to match framing members. E. Sealant for Setting Thresholds: Non -curing butyl type. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.5 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. Page 3 of 4 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts — 08 43 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts — 08 43 13 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 7 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 08 91 00 LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013. B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2012. C. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices; 2013. D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 — Document Management, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: 1. Airolite Company, LLC; www.airolite.com. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; www.awv.com. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc; www.c-sgroup.com. 4. Pottorff; www.pottorff.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 31 14 — Change Management 2.2 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511. 1. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 2. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 3. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. Page 1 of 2 Louvers — 08 91 00 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. Wind loads: Provide louver system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design to comply with TDI Windstorm requirements. The design pressures are based on the 2009 International Building Code. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Formed Aluminum: Formed sheet, ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). 2.4 FINISHES A. KYNAR 500/HYLAR 5000 FINISH B. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw attached; installed on inside face of louver frame. B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 14 gage, 0.0641 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, diagonal design. C. Insect Screen: 56" X 56" size aluminum mesh. D. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel. E. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one piece per location. F. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non -curing butyl type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant. D. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. E. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. 3.3 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION Page 2 of 2 Louvers — 08 91 00 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 8 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 05 50 VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation and test all non -buried valves as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following. However not all items specified herein may be included in this project. 1. General Requirements 2. Valve Actuators — Manual 3. Valve Actuators — Powered 4. Butterfly Valves 5. Gate Valves 6. Ball Valves 7. Thermoplastic Valves 8. Pressure Regulating Valves 9. Solenoid Valves 10. Corporation Stops 11. Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valves 12. Hose End Valves 13. Insulating Fittings 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Price. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Buried valves and appurtenances are included in Division 33. B. Piping and disinfection for potable water systems is included in the respective Sections of Divisions 2 and 5. C. Shop and Finish painting is included in Sections 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. D. Instrumentation, not specified herein, is included in Division E. Valves on all HVAC and plumbing systems are included in their respective sections of Division 23. F. Pump Control Valves are included in Sections 40 05 65. G. Electrical work is included in Division 26. H. Certain items similar to those specified in this Section may be specified to be furnished and installed with individual equipment or systems. In case of a conflict, those individual equipment or system requirements shall govern. I. Electric valve operators of all types, rate of flow controllers (including modulating valves and operators) and other types of valves which are part of the automated instrumentation (such as some solenoid valves) if not included herein are included in Division 13. Valve operators shall, however, be mounted at the factory on the valves as specified herein, as part of the work of this Section. J. Piping Specialties and Appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 70. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, materials required to establish compliance with this Section. The first submittal shall be the valve schedule described in Paragraph 1.09. Approval of the valve schedule submittal is required prior to Contractor submitting any of the equipment in this specification. Subsequent Equipment Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Valve tag number and location within plant. 2. The manufacturer and supplier. Page 1 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. The address at which equipment will be fabricated or assembled. 4. Shop drawings showing assembly details, materials of construction (by common name and ASTM number), and dimensions. 5. Provide hydraulic characteristics of valves being provided. 6. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 7. The total weight of each item. 8. A complete bill of materials. 9. Additional submittal data, where noted with individual pieces of equipment. 10. Individual electrical control schematics and wiring diagrams for each valve operator with all external interfaces, identified exactly as detailed on the Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings. Standard catalogue cut sheets that show typical wiring diagrams only are not acceptable. Valve actuators shall be coordinated with electrical requirements shown on the Drawings and valves as specified herein. B. Test Reports 1. Provide certified hydrostatic test data, per manufacturer's standard procedure or MSS SP 61 for all valves. C. Certificates 1. For each valve specified to be manufactured, tested and/or installed in accordance with AWWA and other standards, submit an affidavit of compliance with the appropriate standards, including certified results of required tests and certification of proper installation. D. Manufacturer's Installation and Application Data E. Operating and Maintenance Data 1. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided in Section 01 33 06. The instructions shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions and other information required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 3. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 4. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 5. ASTM A436 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. 6. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. ASTM B30 - Standard Specification for Copper Base Alloys in Ingot Form. 8. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C111 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. AWWA C500 - Metal -Seated Gate Valves Supply Service 3. AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves 4. AWWA C507 - Ball Valves, 6 in through 48 in (150mm through 1200mm) 5. AWWA C508 - Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 -in (50mm through 24 in (600mm) NPS 6. AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 7. AWWA C511 - Reduced -Pressure Principle Backflow -Prevention Assembly 8. AWWA C540 - Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates 9. AWWA C550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 10. AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B1.20.1 - Specifications, Dimensions, Gauging for Taper and Straight Pipe Threads (except dry seals). 2. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 3. ANSI B16.10 - Face to Face and End to End Dimensions of Valves Page 2 of 17 Valves - 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. ANSI B16.104 - Butterfly Valves D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) E. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1. MSS SP 61 - Pressure Testing of Steel Valves. 2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanges and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Services. 6. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 8. MSS SP 82 - Valve Pressure Testing Methods 9. MSS SP 98 - Protective Coatings for the Interior of Valves, Hydrants and Fittings. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) H. Factory Mutual (FM) I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established firms who are fully experienced, minimum 10 years, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. 2. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with this Section as applicable. 3. All units of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 4. All 480 volt motor actuators shall be the product of one manufacturer; Contractor shall coordinate this requirement with vendors who supply actuated valves as part of systems specified in Division 26. Specifically note; Process Blowers in Paragraph 1.02. B. Certifications 1. The manufacturers shall furnish an affidavit of compliance with Standards referred to herein as specified in Paragraph 1.03C above. Refer to PART 3 for testing required for certain items in addition to that required by referenced standards. C. Provide the services of a qualified and factory trained service representative of the manufacturer to provide operational and maintenance instruction, for a 1 day, 8 hour period for each type of the following equipment: 1. Pressure regulating valves. 2. Air release, air and vacuum valves. D. Inspection of the units may also be made by the Engineer or other representative of the Owner after delivery. The equipment shall be subject to rejection at any time due to failure to meet any of the specified requirements, even though submittal data may have been accepted previously. Equipment rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the job site at once. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of water, wastewater, sludge, air, and chemicals as noted on the Drawings. B. Valves, appurtenances and miscellaneous items shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as specified, so as to form complete workable systems. C. Unless otherwise noted all powered valve operators shall have: 1. Valves larger than 3 -in: electric operators 460 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz. 2. Valves 3 -inch and under: electric operators, 120 Volt, 1 Phase, 60 Hz. 3. See other paragraphs for additional requirements. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference is made to Section 01 31 00 for additional information. B. Packing and Shipping Page 3 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the valves, appurtenances, or coatings. Equipment shall not be dropped. All valves and appurtenances shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the coatings shall be repaired as acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Prior to shipping, the ends of all valves shall be acceptably covered to prevent entry of foreign material. Covers shall remain in place until after installation and connecting piping is completed. a. All valves 3 -in and larger shall be shipped and stored on site until time of use with wood or plywood covers on each valve end. b. Valves smaller than 3 -in shall be shipped and stored as above except that heavy cardboard covers may be used on the openings. c. Rising stems and exposed stem valves shall be coated with a protective oil film which shall be maintained until the valve is installed and put into use. d. Any corrosion in evidence at the time of acceptance by the Owner shall be removed, or the valve shall be removed and replaced. C. Storage and Protection 1. Special care shall be taken to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun, or exposed to extremes in temperature, to prevent deformation. See the individual piping sections and manufacturer's information for further requirements. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Special tools and the manufacturer's standard spare parts, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied with the equipment in accordance with Section 01 33 06 and where noted, as specified herein. Tools shall be packaged in a steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. B. Provide one Operations and Maintenance manual for each type of valve and operator supplied under this specification in accordance with Section 01 33 06. C. Included within the Operations and Maintenance manuals, provide a list of all spare and replacement parts with individual prices and location where they are available. 1.10 VALVE DESIGNATIONS AND SCHEDULE A. All valves shall be identified by a unique valve tag as identified in the valve schedule prepared by the Contractor. The specific type of valve to be used will be identified by the symbol and/or call out on the Drawings. The Contractor shall identify each valve by its assigned tag number on all shop drawings and equipment submittals. B. The Contractor shall refer to the P&IDs and Process Mechanical Plans for type of each valve called out by abbreviation or drawing symbol. Prior to the first valve submittal, Contractor shall submit a detailed valve schedule listing all of the process valves to be furnished along with the Contract Drawing P&IDs edited electronically which shall include the valve tag numbers prepared by the Contractor identifying each valve. This valve schedule shall NOT include the valves furnished under Division 33 or in Plumbing and HVAC sections of Division 23. The valve schedule shall include: valve tag number; valve designation; valve size; end connections and operator type. The valve tag convention shall be in compliance with valve abbreviation and drawing symbols, numbering shall be linked to the P&ID Sheet on which it is shown. Identical valves in the same position in parallel processes (EX. Pump inlet/outlet isolation valves where there are 3 parallel pumps of same type) shall have same tag number followed by a hyphen and quantifier -1, 2, 3 etc. Where electric, hydraulic or pneumatic actuators are supplied their type shall be so noted with an E, H or P. Modulating duty actuators shall be noted with an M following the actuator type notation. An excerpt of an EXAMPLE schedule is as follows: Valve Tag. Designation Size Ends Operator Notes Page 4 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT - GENERAL A. Reference is made to Division 40 for additional requirements, including nameplates, provisions for temporary pressure gauges, protection against electrolysis and anchor bolts. B. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. C. Valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted and as far as possible equipment of the same type shall be identical and from one manufacturer. D. Valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows, working pressure for which they are designed and standard referenced, cast in raised letters or via riveted stainless steel nameplate upon some appropriate part of the body. E. Unless otherwise noted, items shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psig or be of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. F. Joints, size and material - unless otherwise noted or required by the Engineer: 1. Except where noted, all joints referred to herein shall be of the same type, nominal diameter, material and with a minimum rating equal to the pipe or fittings they are connected to. 2. Valves and appurtenances shall be of the same nominal diameter as the pipe or fittings they are connected to. 3. All valves exposed to view, or in vaults: a. Plastic valves in chemical service - solvent cement, or flanged ends. b. 3 -in and smaller - threaded ends- unless noted otherwise herein or on the Drawings. c. 4 -in and larger - flanged ends. G. Provide all special adaptors as required to ensure compatibility between valves, appurtenances and adjacent pipe. H. Valves and actuators located outdoors but not within a building; within maximum 2 -ft above liquid; in vaults; or where otherwise noted shall be especially designed for submerged service where water may completely submerge the valve and operator. All other units shall be as a minimum weather tight. I. No alternative materials will be considered for approval unless complete documentation is provided regarding their satisfactory long-term use in similar conditions; in addition, the consideration of any substitution will be considered only if the superiority of the proposed materials is the intent of the substitution, and only if sufficient evidence is provided to document that superiority. 2.2 VALVE ACTUATORS — GENERAL/ MANUAL A. See the Paragraph 2.01 H above for submergence requirements. B. The valve manufacturer shall supply, mount and test all actuators on valves at the factory. The valves and their individual actuators shall be shipped as a unit. C. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, valves shall be manually actuated; non -buried valves shall have an operating wheel, handle or lever mounted on the operator; those with operating nuts shall have a non -rising stem with an AWWA 2 -in nut; At least two tee handles shall be provided for all operating nuts. Unless otherwise noted, operation for all valves shall be CCW open. D. Manually actuated butterfly valves 6 inches and smaller for fluid service shall have a 10 position, spring retained ratcheting handle. Handle shall be fusion bonded epoxy coated steel or cast iron, hardware, spring and ratcheting plate shall be 316 stainless steel. Manually actuated butterfly valves for air service 6 inches and smaller shall have a memory stop handle with infinite throttling position capability. Memory stop plate and all hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. E. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein, all valves 3 -in diameter or larger, with the valve hand wheel center line located 7 -ft or more above the operating floor, shall be provided with chain wheel operators complete with chain guides and hot dipped galvanized steel chain, which loop within 4 -ft of the operating floor. These requirements shall Page 5 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction supersede positioning lever actuator requirements of manual butterfly valves 6 inches and smaller. F. All actuators shall be capable of moving the valve from the full open to full close position and in reverse and holding the valve at any position part way between full open or closed. G. Each operating device shall have cast on it the word "OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction of operation. H. Floor boxes for operating nuts recessed in concrete shall be standard cast iron type, cast in place, with fastening top by Clow or equal. Stem guides shall be of the adjustable wall bracket type, bronze bushed, with maximum spacing of 10 -ft as manufactured by Clow; Rodney Hunt or equal. Extended operating nuts and/or stems shall have universal joints and pin couplings, if longer than 10 -ft and a rating of at least five times the maximum operating torque. Stem adaptors shall be provided. J. Where required by the installation, or as specified, provide the following: extended stem; floor stand and handwheel; position indicator and etched or cast arrow to show direction of rotation to open the valve; resilient, moisture -resistant seal around stem penetration of slab. K. Gear Actuators 1. Unless otherwise noted, gear actuators shall be provided for the following: plug and ball valves larger than 3 -in diameter; butterfly valves larger than 6 inch diameter; where specified and/or indicated on the Drawings; where manual operator effort is greater than 40 lbs rim pull. 2. Actuators shall be capable of being removed from the valve without dismantling the valve or removing the valve from the line. 3. Gear actuators for quarter turn valves shall be of the worm or helical worm gear type with output shaft perpendicular to valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft. Where shown on the Drawings, a 2 inch cast iron operating nut shall be provided. Actuators shall conform to AWWA C504 except where more stringent requirements are provided hereinafter. Gearing shall be machine cut steel designed for smooth operation. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated, with bronze bearing bushings provided to take all thrusts and mechanical shaft seals to contain lubricants. Housings shall be sealed to exclude moisture and dirt, allow the reduction mechanisms to operate in lubricant and be constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B, or of ductile iron, ASTM A536. Gear housing bodies for thermoplastic valves may be cast aluminum or fabricated steel to reduce weight. Gear actuators shall indicate valve position and have adjustable stops. 4. Where indicated on the Drawings, gear actuators for butterfly valves shall be of the travelling nut type with output shaft perpendicular to valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft. Unless noted they shall conform to AWWA C504. Stem shaft shall be machine cut alloy steel, nut and cross head shall be bronze, lever shall be ductile iron. Nut Actuators for valves 24 -in and smaller shall be slotted lever design, actuators for valves greater than 24 inch shall be link and lever design. Mechanism shall be lubricated with water resistant extreme pressure NLGI No. 2 grease. Bevel gear reduction box shall be mounted on the actuator when required to meet specified manual operating effort requirements Gear actuators shall have mechanical, external indication of valve position and have adjustable threaded stops secured to the stem with spring pins. Stop shall be capable of withstanding 450-fts-lb of input torque. Stop adjustment requiring shims are not acceptable. 5. Manual Input torque to produce required valve operating torque for worm and travelling nut gear operators shall not exceed 80 ft -lbs. In addition, hand wheel rim pull shall not exceed 20 lbs for valve sizes up to 12 inches, 40 lbs for valve size between 14 and 20 inches, 60 lbs for valve size 24 and greater. Minimum hand wheel size shall be 8 inches for up to 12 inch valve size, 12 inches for up to 16 inch valve size, 18 inches for up to 20 inch size. 6. Gear actuators for multi turn valves shall be of the bevel or spiral bevel type with output shaft perpendicular to valve shaft, having a removable hand wheel mounted on the output shaft. Gearing shall be machine cut steel designed for smooth operation. Bearings shall be permanently grease lubricated, with dual anti -friction ball bearings on the output shaft and mechanical shaft seals to contain lubricants. The output flange of the primary gear reducer shall be designed to meet an appropriate MSS or ISO Page 6 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction standard to allow mounting to the secondary gear reducer. The ring gear shall ride on ball bearings. The stem nut shall be bronze alloy, shouldered, and ride on needle bearings. Housing components shall be o -ring sealed to exclude moisture and dirt, constructed of cast iron, ASTM A126, Grade B, or of ductile iron, ASTM A536. Gear housing bodies for thermoplastic valves may be cast aluminum or fabricated steel to reduce weight. Manual operator input effort to the hand wheel shall be a maximum of 30 lbs for operating the valve from full open to full close, under any conditions. Maximum hand wheel size shall be 24 -in diameter. L. Additional valve actuator requirements are included with the individual valve types and as noted in Paragraph 1.02 above. M. All position indication and direction of opening arrows shall be embossed, stamped, engraved, etched or raised castings. Decals or painted indications shall not be allowed. N. Unless otherwise noted, all valves larger than 3 -in nominal diameter shall be provided with position indicators at the point of operation. 2.3 VALVE ACTUATORS — POWERED A. General 1. Electric actuators for 1/4 turn valves three inches and under which do not have submergence requirements, and which exhibit a maximum torque specified below shall be operated on 120 volt single phase power as specified below. All other actuators shall be operated on 480 volt power. 2. The actuators shall conform to AWWA Standard C540, insofar as applicable and as herein specified. Actuators shall be 0 -ring sealed, watertight to standard NEMA 4X/6, submersion to 6 feet for 30 minutes. Actuators installed in vaults below grade and elsewhere subject to submergence shall be watertight to standard NEMA 6P/I P68, 15 ft for 72 hours minimum. Actuators installed in hazardous locations as noted on the Electrical Drawings and/or area classification sheets of the Architectural Drawings shall be FM certified explosion proof for Class 1 Division 1 & 2, Groups C & D and also meet the standard NEMA 4X/6 rating. 3. Valve service/operation shall be as indicated on the P&IDs and as specified in the Control Descriptions in Division 40. 4. Actuators shall be configured as required to provide for part turn or multi -turn and be coupled with gearboxes as required to obtain the speed and operating torque as required for the valve or gate it controls. 5. Modulating actuators shall contain proportional control unit and be capable of 1200 starts per hour, open -closed valve actuators shall not require a proportional control unit, and be capable of 60 starts per hour. 6. Where shown on the Instrumentation Drawings, actuators shall have a digital control module, to allow valves or gates to be positioned remotely via a 2 -wire non-proprietary field bus protocol. The digital control module shall be equipped with serial communication ports to allow actuation to be linked by a two wire local area network utilizing Modbus function code (report by exception) and arranged in a self -healing ring configuration, with multi -drop taps to each actuator. B. 120 Volt Single Phase Reversing, Non Spring Return Electric Actuators for 1/4 Turn Valves, 100 to 1000 in -lb Torque Range 1. Valve actuators shall be sized by the valve supplier meeting the requirements of AWWA C540. Actuators shall be mounted on the valves in the valve supplier's facility, and factory tested. 2. Actuators shall operate on 120 volt, 60 Hz single phase, power supply. Enclosure rating shall be NEMA 4X, constructed of cast aluminum or steel alloy, powder coated or fusion bonded epoxy finish. 3. Power train shall be self-locking planetary epicyclical gear design, consisting of hardened steel and or hardened bronze alloy gears with bronze bearings. Housing penetrations shall be sealed with mechanical seals. Housing shall be equipped with space heaters. Valve mounting system shall be ISO 5211. 4. Actuator shall be designed for open/close/jog reversing service. Proportional/modulating service shall be provided where required in the equipment specifications or Instrumentation Drawings. Actuators shall have visual mechanical Page 7 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction indication of position. Manual override shall be direct worm drive with minimum 5 inch diameter hand wheel. Hand wheel size shall be provided such that a maximum 40 lb rim pull is required. 5. Motors shall be designed specifically for valve actuation service, with Class F insulation, with split phase capacitor protection. Duty cycle shall not be less than 40% at 100 deg F. for open/close duty, and 100% for modulating duty. 90 degree travel time shall vary from 10 to 20 seconds depending on actuator size. Actuators shall have SPDT contacts for remote valve position indication. 6. Actuators shall be P Series as manufactured by Promation Engineering, Brooksville, FL, or equal. C. 480 Volt Powered Actuators for Part Turn or Multi -Turn Valve Operation 1. Per Division 40 Specifications. 2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES: TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. AWWA Butterfly Valves for Clear Water Service: Tag Type BFV 1. Butterfly valves and operators up to 72 -in diameter shall conform to AWWA C504, Class B, except as specified herein. The manufacturer shall submit an affidavit of compliance stating that the valves have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA C504 and specifically listing all exceptions. Valves shall have a minimum 150 psi pressure rating or higher as noted on the Drawings or in this Section and be manufactured by M&H; Dezurik; Val -Matic; Henry Pratt, GA Industries, or equal. 2. Butterfly valves for above grade service shall be flanged end with face to face dimensions in accordance with Table 2 ofAWWA C504 for short -body valve. All valves for dead end shut off service shall be flanged type. 3. Valve seats shall be full resilient seats retained in the body or on the disc edge in accordance with AWWA C504. Valve discs shall be constructed of cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 40; Ni -resist, ASTM A436, Type 1; or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65- 45-12. 4. The resilient seat shall be attached to the body, discs shall have Type 316 stainless steel seating edges.. Resilient seats shall be EPDM. On 30" and above, seats shall be fully adjustable and replaceable with the valves in line using no special tools. 5. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12, with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the through boss -type. Permanently self-lubricating body bushings shall be provided and shall be sized to withstand bearing loads. 6. Packing shall be of the self compensating U -Cup type. 7. Valves 30 -in or larger shall use a stuffing box with follower gland. 8. The valve shaft shall be of Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. No reductions of shaft diameter will be allowed except at the operator connection. Any reduction shall have a full radius fillet. 9. Butterfly valve actuator shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C504, insofar as applicable and as specified herein. Gearing for the actuators where required shall be totally enclosed in a gear case in accordance with AWWA C504. Actuators shall have permanent indicators with raised or engraved marks to show position of the valve disc. 2.5 GATE VALVES TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. General Requirements 1. Unless otherwise specified below, these requirements shall apply to all gate valves. 2. Gate valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 as applicable to the type of valve specified. 3. Submerged valves shall be furnished with mechanical joints and 316 stainless steel hardware; non rising stem design. Flanges shall be provided if so indicated on the Drawings. 4. Exposed valves shall be furnished with Class 125 flanged ends; provide valves with bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel. Page 8 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Rising stem valves shall be sealed with adjustable and replaceable packing; valve design must permit packing replacement under operating system pressures with only moderate leakage. 6. Non rising stem valves shall utilize a minimum of two 0 ring stem seals. 7. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be rated at or above for the following working water pressures: Valve Size Pressure (psig) 3 -in to 12 -in 200 14 -in to 30 -in 150 36 -in and greater as specified a. All valve bodies shall be hydrostatically tested to at least twice the rated working water pressure. In addition, valves shall be seat tested, bi-directional at the rated working pressure, with seat leakage not to exceed one fluid ounce per inch of valve diameter per hour. Provide certificates of testing. 8. Flanged valves to have face to face dimensions perANSI B16.10 and flanges perANSI B16.1 9. Exposed valves 18 -in and larger shall have valve by pass, by-pass valves shall be of same disc type as main valve and shall meet these specifications. 10. All bonnet and packing gland bolts shall be 316 stainless steel; packing gland bolts shall have bronze nuts. 11. Exposed valves 16 -in and greater indicated for horizontal stem installation shall be furnished with rollers, tracks and scrapers and enclosed bevel gear grease case. 12. Provide geared operator and chain wheel, chain and chain guides for valves with handwheel centerline more than 7 -ft above operating level. 13. All valves shall be marked per AWWA Standards, including name of manufacturer, valve size and working pressure and year of manufacture. 14. Unless otherwise indicated, valves 12 -in and smaller shall be capable of installation in the vertical or horizontal position, and sealing in both directions at the rated pressure. B. Valve Applications 1. Valves for Potable Water Service: a. Double disc design manufactured by Kennedy/ M&H/ Clow Valve. b. Double revolving disc manufactured by American R/D Valve; Anchor Darling. c. Solid wedge -resilient seated design as manufactured by Mueller Co; J & H Valve; M&H/Clow Valve; American Flow Control; American R/D Valve. C. Valve Requirements 1. Double Disc: Tag Type GV1 a. Conform to AWWA C500. b. Wedging surfaces shall be bronze, Monel or stainless steel. 2. Double Revolving Disc: Tag Type GV2 a. Conform to applicable provisions of AWWA C500. b. Wedging surfaces shall be Monel or hardened stainless steel. c. Discs fully free to rotate, guided in travel by cast surfaces. d. Disc rotation shall produce a self-cleaning action during opening or closing. e. Wedging forces applied only when discs are in seating position. 3. Solid Wedge: Tag Type GV3 a. All metal valves shall be manufactured of ASTM A126 Cast Iron, Class B. Wedge seating surfaces and body seat rings shall be cast from B62 bronze. And shall conform to AWWA C500. b. Shall be coated internally and externally with an asphaltic varnish, perAWWA C500. c. Body shall have tongue and grooved guides for wedges. 4. Resilient Seated: Tag type GV4 a. Resilient seated valves shall be manufactured of ASTM A536 ductile iron, nitrile rubber disc per AWWA C509, manganese bronze or 316 stainless steel Page 9 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction stem and trim, full port design, 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners as required in general requirements. Valves shall conform to AWWA C509 and be UL and FM approved. b. Shall have internal and external fusion bonded epoxy coating of valve body, including bonnet, per AWWA C550. c. Gate shall be encapsulated with synthetic rubber. It shall be bonded and vulcanized in accordance with ASTM B429 Method B. d. Shall have no recesses in valve body. D. Gate Valves 3 inch and Smaller: Tag Type GV5 1. Gate valves 2.5 -in diameter and smaller shall have screwed ends and shall be bronze body. Gate valves 3 -in diameter shall be flanged end, iron or bronze body. Gate shall be brass, bronze, or Type 304 stainless steel solid wedge; union bonnet; silicon bronze rising -stem; equal to Jenkins Figure 47CUJ, division of Crane Valve Group; Lunkenheimer Figure 3127, Cincinnati Valve Co, Fairbanks Figure U-0252, or equal. Model numbers referenced above are for screwed ends, flanged shall be equal construction with appropriate end connections. Iron body valves shall be installed in steel or iron pipelines. E. Tapping Valves and Sleeves: Tag Type TGV 1. Under no circumstances shall a standard gate valve be used for a tapping valve. Tapping valves shall comply with the same requirements as solid wedge, resilient seat or double disc gate valves except they shall have the flanged end and port opening modified for tapping service. Tapping valves shall be provided with plugged flush port at bottom of gate guide and plugged tap for pressure/leak testing. Valves shall be capable of passing a full nominal sized cutter without damage to the valve. The tapping sleeve shall be gray cast iron or ductile iron mechanical joint type with the outlet flange conforming to MSS SP 60. 2.6 BALL VALVES: TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. General Service Ball Valves: Tag Type BV 1. Valves shall be bronze, resilient seated, full port, threaded two piece bolted body type valves. Manual valves shall have locking levers. The body and cap shall be of brass, ASTM B30, the ball and stem of Type 316 stainless steel and the seats and seals of glass filled TFE. The balls shall be full floating, non -lubricated. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. 2. Valves shall be Jamesbury Series 2000 Style 21 as manufactured by Metso Automation; or equal. B. Corrosion Resistant Ball Valves 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Tag type BV2. 1. Valves shall be two-piece stainless steel full port; solid ball construction with bottom loading stems, and adjustable packing with manual locking lever actuator. 2. Body shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 or ASTM A351 GR CF8M stainless steel, 2000 psig rated at 200 Deg F, FN PT ends. Ball and stem shall be type 316 stainless steel. Seats and seals shall be reinforced PTFE. 3. Valves shall be Jamesbury Series 6F as manufactured by Metso Automation; KF Contromatics Series 8000, equal by Milwaukee; or equal. C. Corrosion Resistant Ball Valves 3 Inch and Larger: Tag Type BV3. 1. Valves shall be two-piece full port stainless steel, solid, floating ball construction with bottom loading stems. Working pressure 250 psig; end connections shall be 150 lb full face flange. 2. Body: Stainless steel, ASTM A351, Grade C8M, Type 316. Ball/stem: ASTM B164 Ni - Cu Alloy- (alloy 400) Seats/seals: Reinforced PTFE. 3. Shall be Model WKM Dynaseal 310C or equal D. V -Port Ball Valves for Process Flow Control: Tag Type VPB1. 1. Valves shall be 3 piece, bolted body, soft seat, V -port insert design. Ends shall be flanged, Class 150, ANSI B16.5. Valves actuator shall be electric motorized, modulating. Valve characteristics shall provide for the operating conditions shown on the Drawings. Page 10 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Body: Type 316 stainless steel; Ball and characterized insert: Type 316 stainless steel with hard chrome face. Shaft: Type 316 stainless steel, one piece. Seats: 316 stainless steel filled PTFE, replaceable; Packing: PTFE. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Valves shall be Marwin CV 3000, or equal. 2.7 THERMOPLASTIC VALVES TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW. A. General 1. All valves shall be certified as completely compatible with the intended and specified service; compatibility shall apply to the material of the valve and internal components, including all seals, gaskets, 0 rings and washers; solvents and primers used in valve joint make up shall be specifically in conformance with the written instructions of the valve supplier. Service chemicals and service conditions are shown in the piping sections in Division 40. 2. Except as otherwise specified valve ends shall be socket type designed for solvent welding. Solvent and primer shall be as specified in the piping specifications, except that valves installed in systems carrying strong oxidizing, high alkalinity, and strong acid solutions shall contain NO fumed silica, and shall be Weld -On 724 for CPVC pipe as manufactured by IPS Corp., Compton, CA and Oatey Industrial Grade Low VOC Heavy Duty Gray for PVC pipe as manufactured by Oatey Corp., Cleveland OH. 3. Valve material shall be the same as the piping service except as specified. a. PVC shall be Type 1, Grade 1, per ASTM D1784 classification, made from unplasticized polymer, and generally suitable for service to 120 degrees F. b. CPVC shall be Type 4, Grade 1, per ASTM D1784, classification generally suitable for service to 180 degrees F. c. Polypropylene (PP) shall conform to the material requirements of ASTM D4101 for copolymer polypropylene. d. PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) shall be manufactured from high molecular weight polymers of vinylidene fluoride. e. The manufacturer of the valves shall retain material source quality documentation and shall furnish it to the Engineer upon request. 4. Unless otherwise specified: a. 0 rings, valve seats and stem seals shall be Teflon, or Teflon encapsulated elastomer. Alternative materials shall not be substituted without complete documentation provided to the Engineer of service suitability. b. Flange Gaskets shall be low torque, full face ANSI B16.5 with two concentric convex rings between ID and bolt hole diameter, constructed of EPDM, PTFE bonded EPDM or PVDF-bonded EPDM as manufactured by Asahi of America or equal. Documentation shall be provided to show compatibility of the bonded surface material for the fluid service intended. c. Valve external hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. No internal metallic components shall be exposed to the service fluid. d. No factory or field coatings shall be applied to the valves. 5. All valves, except butterfly valves shall have a non shock service pressure rating of not less than 120 psig at 70 degrees F. 6. All valves shall be given hydrostatic and pressure and leakage tests at the factory. Provide certified copy of test results. 7. Valves shall be the standard, catalogued products of the following manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. Chemtrol Asahi/America Plast 0 Matic George -Fischer Hayward 8. Valves specified as furnished with these requirements. B. Ball Valves: Tag Type TBV 1. Ball valves shall be the double adjustable seats. equipment or equipment systems shall comply with union type, unless otherwise specified, full port, Page 11 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite service shall be PVC body, furnished with socket ends, EPDM 0 -rings, Teflon seals and seats. Sodium hypochlorite service ball valves shall have the ball drilled to permit venting of pressure and gas from the confined ball cavity, when the valve is closed. The drilling shall vent to the upstream end of the valve. The drilling shall be 1/8 -in opening, de burred for valves smaller than 1 -inch diameter. For valve 1 -inch diameter and larger, the ball shall be drilled with a 3/8 -inch diameter opening. An arrow shall be inscribed on the valve body to indicate direction of flow. Field -drilled opening is not allowed. 3. Provide quarter turn manual valve operator unless mechanized actuators are specified on the drawings. C. Butterfly Valves: Tag Type TBFV 1. Valves shall be of the lined body design with PVC body and PP disc with only the liner and the disc as wetted parts. The liner shall be molded and formed around the body, functioning as a gasket on each side of the valve. Double 0 -ring seals on top and bottom disc trunnions will fully isolate a Type 316 stainless steel straight -through stem. Liner, seat, o -rings and seal shall be Teflon. 2. The valves shall be wafer style, and lug style for dead end service as applicable. 3. Each valve shall be furnished with a lever actuator on sizes through 6 -in; gear operator on sizes 8 -in and larger. 4. Butterfly valves shall be Type 57 as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. D. Diaphragm valves: Tag Type TDV 1. Valves shall have double union ends. Acid service valves shall have flanged ends. 2. Valve body and bonnet shall be of solid CPVC. Acid service body and bonnet shall be PVDF, ASTM D3222 Cell Classification Type II. 3. Diaphragms shall be EPDM. Acid service diaphragms shall be layered EPDM, PVDF gas barrier, PTFE wetted. 4. The valve shall have a full width weir, designed for throttling, and complete bubble tight closure. 5. Provide a handwheel valve operator, with a stainless steel stem, a cast stem sleeve and a clear plastic stem cover with a position indicator; provide an adjustable limit stop to prevent over -travel. 6. Diaphragm valves shall be Type 14 as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. E. Gate Valves: Tag Type TGV 1. PVC gate valves shall be PVC body, non -rising stem, polypropylene plugs and viton seals. Where indicated on the drawings, valves shall be provided with stem extensions and handwheels, as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. F. Needle Valves: Tag Type TNV 1. Needle valves shall be designed for close control of flow throttling with a multi turn valve handle. Valves shall be PVC body, FPM seal, PTFE seat. Stem shall be 20 or 24 pitch for fine throttling control. Valve shall have lugs or panel screw on bonnet for panel mounting. 2. Needle valves shall be as manufactured by Chemline Plastics Limited, Haward, or equal. G. Ball Check Valves: Tag Type TBCV 1. Ball check valves shall be double union style with socket ends, solid and completely spherical ball, EPDM seals, PTFE seat, capable of either horizontal or vertical mounting. H. Diaphragm Check Valves: Tag type TDCV 1. Diaphragm check valves shall be union PVC, CPVC or PVDF body, thread or socket weld ends, EPDM or FKM diaphragms. Valves shall be mountable in any position, and shall be Plast -O -Matic model CKM or equal. Swing Check Valves: Tag Type TSCV 1. Swing check valves shall be high impact PVC body; seats and seals EPDM, AFPM or PTFE as required by fluid service; disc serviceable from top entry without removing valve, o -ring sealed top flange, ANSI flanged ends. Outside lever and weight and limit switch mounting shall be provided where shown on the drawings. J. Backpressure Regulating/Control Valves: Tag Type TBPV Page 12 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Spring loaded diaphragm design, fully adjustable pressure setting, set to assure continuous positive pressure at the pump discharge. 2. Furnish with Teflon diaphragms and elastomer coated springs. 3. Body shall be of same material as pipeline in which it is installed or, CPVC if not otherwise specified. Valves shall be manufactured by Plast -O -Matic, or equal. K. Pressure Relief Valves: Tag Type TPRV 1. Angle pattern design, with adjustable relief pressure and locking nut. Spring loaded, with pressure adjustable over range up to 100 psig. 2. The valve spring shall be elastomer coated and isolated from the process flow. Provide Teflon diaphragms. 3. Relief valves shall be piped as indicated, and if not indicated, the relief piping shall be directed to the floor or adjacent gutter or drain. 4. Pressure relief valve settings shall be set to a pressure as recommended by the pump or equipment supplier and adjusted at the time of equipment testing, inspection and start up. 5. Body shall be of same material as pipeline in which it is installed or, CPVC if not otherwise specified. Valves shall be equal to Model RVD by Plast -O -Matic; Type A by Asahi-America or equal. L. Air Relief Valves: Tag Type TARV 1. Self guided poppet design. 2. Seals at 0 psig and bubble tight as low as 10 psig. 3. No metallic components. 4. Installed in vertical orientation only. 2.8 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES: TAG TYPE PCV A. Pressure regulating valves shall be factory tested. Outlet pressure shall be easily field - adjustable over the pressure ranges and criteria noted on the Drawings. B. Threaded pressure regulating valves shall have unions mounted in the pipe on each side of the valve. C. Strainers for installation upstream of pressure regulating valves are specified elsewhere. The pressure regulating valve manufacturer shall specify the screen mesh or size of perforations that are required to protect the regulating valve. The valve supplier shall furnish both valve and strainer. D. Pressure Regulating Valves — 3 -in and larger 1. Valves 3 -in and larger and for pressure regulating shall be flanged with globe body, fully bronze mounted, external pilot operated, spring-loaded diaphragm type single seat with seat base equal to size of valve and shall be equal to the Figure x -4500D (with an industrial chrome finish) Pressure Reducing Valve as manufactured by GA Industries Inc., Pittsburgh, PA; or equal by Cla Val Company, Newport Beach, CA. 2. The valve shall be packed with leather material acceptable to the Engineer to ensure tight closure and prevent metal to metal friction and sticking. The valve shall be furnished with indicator rod, to show position of opening of the piston, and pet cocks for attachment to valve body for receiving gauges for testing purposes. 3. The pilot valve, controlling operation of the main valve, shall be easily accessible and so arranged to allow for its removal from the main valve, while the main valve is under pressure. The pilot valve shall be easily adjustable without removal of the springs, weights or use of special tools. The control piping on the valves shall have strainers to prevent plugging of control mechanisms. 4. The design shall be such that repairs and dismantling internally of main valve may be made without its removal from the line. 5. The unit shall be flanged. The valve body shall be constructed of cast iron. 6. The valve shall maintain pre adjusted downstream pressure for varying rates of flow through the positioning of the diaphragm by the pilot without causing: water hammer or waste of water and without cavitation. E. Pressure Regulating Valves — 2 -in and Smaller 1. Pressure regulating valves 2 -in and smaller shall be rated 150 psig working pressure, with bronze and brass body; renewable stainless steel seat and flexible diaphragm of Page 13 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction suitable material. Outlet pressure shall be easily field -adjustable over the pressure ranges tabulated. 2. Pressure regulating valves 2 -in and smaller shall be Figure No. 43D as manufactured by GA Industries, Inc.; Watts Muesco Regulator Co. Series 115 for 1 -1/4 -in and larger and Model 223 S for units smaller than 1 -1/4 -in or equal with strainer and of size noted on the Drawing. Shall be diaphragm type, pressure reducing globe valves designed for an inlet pressure of approximately 110 psig, and outlet pressures in the range of 20 to 60 psig. 2.9 SOLENOID VALVES: TAG TYPE SV A. Solenoid valves shall be packless piston type direct acting for sizes less than 1 in and internal pilot operated for sizes 1 -in and larger, 2 way or 3 way, valves and shall be ASCO Valve; Red Hat by Automatic Switch Co., similar by Circle Seal Controls-Atkomatic Valve Co. or equal for air and water service. B. Valves shall be energized to open, except for valves on water seal lines to pumps which shall be energize to close. C. Valves shall have forged brass bodies, NPT end connections of the connected piping Type 304 stainless steel internal parts, and Buna N or Ethylene Propylene valve seats. Valves shall have a minimum 150 psig safe working pressure and zero minimum operating pressure differential. Connections shall be threaded or as indicated in the Drawings. D. Solenoid valves size 2 -inch and larger shall be full bore bronze body, 430 Stainless Steel plunger, copper coil class A encapsulated, 302 stainless steel spring, wash -down safe, equal to type A as manufactured by Magnatrol Valve Corp., Hawthorne, NJ or equal. Solenoid valves shall have a manual override actuated by a handle levered plunger mounted on the bottom of the valve body. These valves must be mounted in a horizontal run of piping, with the solenoid up in the vertical position. E. Note that solenoid valves may be shown on Electrical and/or Mechanical Drawings, or may only be specified, but if so specified or shown, shall be provided. Solenoid valves located in hazardous classified areas shall be provided with electrical enclosures which satisfy the electrical classification as specified or shown on the electrical drawings. A NEMA 4X enclosure is the minimum and be provided with a continuous duty Class F coil. 2.10 CORPORATION STOPS: TAG TYPE CS A. 3/4" through 2" Corporation Stops shall be ball valve type, meeting AWWA Standard C800- 01, Sec. 4.2.3 (High Pressure), withstanding working pressures up to 300 psi. The body, ball, operating stem, T -head, and service line connector shall be manufactured from red brass and conform to ASTM B62 and/or ASTM B584, UNS No. C83600. The ball shall be fluorocarbon coated and shall float on two EPDM seats and be watertight in both directions. The operating stem and nut shall be one piece, held in place by a mating machined flange on the stem and in the body. The operating stem shall have an EPDM 0 -ring to provide a watertight seal against the body. B. Inlet threads shall be AWWA Taper, except where used with service clamps, where threads shall be IPS threads. All thread types and diameters shall conform to AWWA C800. The inlet threads will be integral to the body. The waterway diameter shall be approximately equivalent to the nominal size of the stop, and shall accommodate the maximum cutter size established by AWWA C800. The outlet shall be a compression connection meeting AWWA C800 Sec. 4.4.9. C. Corporation Stops shall be FB Style Ballcorp, as manufactured by The Ford Meter Box Company, Inc., Wabash, Indiana, or equal by Mueller— Model H-15008 (or H-15013), James Jones Corporation, or McDonald. Where corporation stops are used with plastic pipe, a brass companion flange shall be provided on the outlet of each corporation stop. 2.11 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES: TAG TYPE NOTED BELOW A. All valves shall be supplied with shutoff gate or ball valves with operator handle or lever removed. Valves shall be properly vented and piped to drain. B. Valve pressure rating shall be at least equal to the attached pipe's rating. Page 14 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Valves for sewage service shall have connections for draining and flushing with isolation ball valves for connection size up to 3 inch, and solid wedge gate valves for size 4 inch and larger. D. Air Release Valves: Tag Type ARV 1. Small orifice assembly air release valves shall automatically release air accumulations from the pipe while under positive pressure. When the valve body fills with air, the float mechanism shall fall to open the small orifice and exhaust the air to atmosphere. When the air has been exhausted, the float mechanism shall be buoyed up and shall tightly close the small orifice. The small orifice assembly shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel body and cover, and shall use 316 stainless steel hardware. The float mechanism shall be constructed of polypropylene or 316 stainless steel. All wetted components shall be polypropylene, Buna-N or 316 stainless steel. A resilient, Buna N seat shall provide drop tight closure. 2. Separate air release valves shall be Vent -O -Mat Model RBXb, equal as ARI of the special type for use with non clean water. 3. For clean water acceptable manufacturers are Pratt, GA Industries -LLC, Val-matic, and ARI. E. Vacuum Relief Valves: Tag Type VRV 1. Large orifice assembly vacuum valves shall automatically allow air to enter pipeline when pressure falls below atmospheric pressure. Vacuum relief valves shall not be configured to release air. 2. Vacuum relief valves shall be constructed as specified in subparagraph F below, except providing vacuum relief only, as manufactured by Pratt, GA Industries or Vent - 0 -Mat or as indicated on the Drawings. F. Combination Air and Vacuum Relief Valves: Tag Type CAV 1. Valves shall be designed to release large amounts of air during pipeline filling, release small amounts of air accumulated during pipeline operation, and allow large volume of air during pipeline drainage or pipe break. Combination double orifice air/vacuum valve for general service in sizes 1 to 6 inches housed in a tubular stainless steel body with epoxy powder coated cast iron or steel ends secured by means of stainless steel tie rods. Valve shall have an intake orifice area equal to the nominal size of the valve. 2. Air release/vacuum valves shall be compact single cylindrical chamber design with multiple solid cylindrical HDPE control floats. Discharge of pressurized air shall be controlled by the seating and unseating of a small orifice nozzle on a natural rubber seal affixed into the control float. The nozzle shall have a flat seating land surrounding the orifice so that damage to the rubber seal is prevented. Venting of large quantities of air during pipeline filling shall be accomplished through the large orifice at the top of the valve. Large orifice sealing shall be affected by the flat face of the control float seating against an "0" ring housed in a dovetail groove circumferentially surrounding the orifice. The valve shall feature integral `Anti -Shock' Orifice mechanism in the top float which shall operate automatically to limit transient pressure rise or shock induced by closure to twice the valves rated working pressure. Vacuum relief shall be accomplished through the large orifice when the control floats fall due to negative pressure in the pipeline. The valve design shall incorporate an over pressure safety feature that will fail without an explosive effect, such as is normally the case when highly compressed air is released suddenly. The feature shall consist of easily replaceable gaskets. 3. Valves shall be rated for 230 psig service. Materials of construction shall be as follows: barrel- 304L stainless steel; top and bottom flanges- fusion bonded epoxy steel; upper/lower floats and anti -shock orifice- UHMW PE; small orifice nozzle seat and o- rings- Buna-N; nozzle, baffle plate, tie rods, studs, nuts, washers- 304 stainless steel. End Connections shall be NPT up to 2 inch, 125 lb flange 3 to 6 inch. 4. Valves shall be as manufactured by GA Industries or equal by Pratt, or Vent -O -Mat, Model RBX 2521 or 1631 or as indicated on the Drawings. 2.12 HOSE END VALVES: TAG TYPE HEV A. Hose end valves shall be globe pattern valves, similar to Fairbanks Fig. 074; Jenkins Fig. 112 or equal. Furnish cap and chain. Page 15 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.13 INSULATING FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be of type to provide control of electrolysis and similar to "Dielectric" as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., or equal. 2.14 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. All valves (inclusive of valve actuators) shall be finished painted by way of spray application prior to installation. Provide touch up paint after installed and commissioned. B. Notwithstanding any of these specified requirements, all coatings and lubricants in contact with potable water shall be certified as acceptable for use with that fluid. C. If not specified herein, coatings shall comply with the requirements of Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. In case of a conflict, the requirements of this Section govern. D. If the manufacturer's requirement is not to require finished coating on any interior surfaces, then manufacturer shall so state and no interior finish coating will be required, if acceptable to the Engineer. E. The exterior surface of various parts of valves, operators, floor stands and miscellaneous piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale, dirt, grease or other foreign matter and thereafter one shop coat of an approved rust inhibitive primer such as Inertol Primer No. 621 shall be applied in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer or other primer compatible with the finish coat provided. F. Unless otherwise noted, interior ferrous surfaces of all valves shall be given a shop finish epoxy conforming to AWWA C550 with a minimum thickness of 16 mils. G. Ferrous surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust resistant coating. Mounting surfaces shall be especially coated with a rust preventative. H. Special care shall be taken to protect uncoated items and plastic items, especially from environmental damage. 2.15 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Factory inspection, testing and correction of deficiencies shall be done in accordance with the referenced standards and as noted herein. B. See Division 1 for additional requirements. Also refer to PART 1, especially for required submission of test data to the Engineer. C. In addition to all tests required by the referenced standards, the following shall also be factory tested: 1. Pressure regulating valves shall be factory tested at the specified pressures and flows. 2. Butterfly valves shall be factory tested to demonstrate drop tight closure at the specified conditions. 3. All types of air and vacuum valves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed. B. Install all brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings, or otherwise required. Before setting these items, check all Drawings and figures which have a direct bearing on their location. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of valves and appurtenances during the construction of the work. C. All materials shall be carefully inspected for defects in construction and materials. All debris and foreign material shall be cleaned out of openings, etc. All valve flange covers shall remain in place until connected piping is in place. All operating mechanisms shall be operated to check their proper functioning and all nuts and bolts checked for tightness. Valves and other equipment which do not operate easily, or are otherwise defective, shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Page 16 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction D. Where installation is covered by a referenced standard, installation shall be in accordance with that standard, except as herein modified, and the Contractor shall certify such. Also note additional requirements in other parts of this Section. E. Unless otherwise noted, joints for valves and appurtenances shall be made up utilizing the same procedures as specified under the applicable type connecting pipe joint and all valves and other items shall be installed in the proper position as recommended by the manufacturer. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying manufacturers' torqueing requirements for all valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MANUAL OPERATIONAL DEVICES A. Unless otherwise noted, all operational devices shall be installed with the units of the factory, as shown on the Drawings or as acceptable to the Engineer to allow accessibility to operate and maintain the item and to prevent interference with other piping, valves and appurtenances. B. For manually operated valves 3 -in in diameter and smaller, valve operators and indicators shall be rotated to display toward normal operation locations. C. Floor boxes, valve boxes, extension stems and low floor stands shall be installed vertically centered over the operating nut, with couplings as required and the elevation of the box top shall be adjusted to conform to the elevation of the finished floor surface or grade at the completion of the Contract. Boxes and stem guides shall be adequately supported during concrete placement to maintain vertical alignment. 3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. See also Division 1. Take care not to over pressure valves or appurtenances during pipe testing. If any unit proves to be defective, it shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Functional Test: Prior to plant startup, all items shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection and satisfactory performance. After installation, all manual valves shall be opened and closed in the presence of the Engineer to show the valve operates smoothly from full open to full close and without leakage. Valves equipped with electric, pneumatic or hydraulic actuators shall by cycled 5 times from full open to full closed in the presence of the Engineer without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating. Pressure control and pressure relief valves shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer to show they perform their specified function at some time prior to placing the piping system in operation and as agreed during construction coordination meetings. C. The various pipe lines in which the valves and appurtenances are to be installed are specified to be field tested. During these tests any defective valve or appurtenance shall be adjusted, removed and replaced, or otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. D. Various regulating valves, strainers, or other appurtenances shall be tested to demonstrate their conformance with the specified operational capabilities and any deficiencies shall be corrected or the device replaced or otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. 3.4 CLEANING A. All items including valve interiors shall be inspected before line closure, for the presence of debris. At the option of the Engineer, internal inspection of valve and appurtenances may be required any time that the likelihood of debris is a possibility. All pipes and valves shall be cleaned prior to installation, testing disinfection and final acceptance. 3.5 DISINFECTION A. Disinfection of valves and appurtenances on all potable water lines and where otherwise noted, shall be as noted in Paragraph 1.03B above. END OF SECTION Page 17 of 17 Valves — 40 05 50 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 9 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 23 10 STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install test, and disinfect (as required) all steel pipe and fittings as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Steel pipe shall include black steel and galvanized steel pipe and fittings. C. Steel pipe shall include steel pipe casing as shown on the Drawings as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made forwork performed under this section. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum Base Bid Item. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is specified in Section 03 3000. B. Pipeline Testing and Disinfection of Water Lines is included in Section 33 13 01. C. Piping General Requirements are included in Section 40 05 00. D. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 40 05 50. E. Piping specialties are included in Section 40 05 70. F. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 40 05 76. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 02 for Engineer's review. 1. Large—scale complete and dimensional working AutoCAD drawings of all pipe layouts. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, lining and coating systems, proposed welding procedures, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Drawings. Include location of any sample taps Contractor may require for sampling disinfection, etc. 2. Joint details; methods, and locations of supports; and complete information concerning type, size, and location of all welds. Shop and field welds shall be clearly differentiated, and welds will be clearly detailed with preparation procedures for all pipe and parent metal comprising each weld. Critical welding procedures shall be identified along with methods for controlling welding stresses and distortions. Locations and proposed joint details or butt straps used to control temperature stresses in the shop and field shall also be clearly identified. B. Submit manufacturer's certifications that pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C200. C. Submit manufacturer's affidavits that coatings, linings, tape coatings, and heat shrink joint sleeves comply with applicable requirements of this Section and: 1. Coatings were applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. 2. Coatings and linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. 3. Test Results: a. Compressive strength (7 and 28 day) test results for mortar coating. b. Hydrostatic testing, magnetic particle, and x-ray weld test reports as required. D. Submit certification from NACE Certified Coatings Inspector, having Level III certification for coatings and linings, that steel pipe furnished on the project was properly inspected and all defective coatings detected were properly repaired. E. Submit design calculations for all steel pipe and fittings including wall thickness and stress analysis. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. Page 1 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction F. Submit manufacturer's hot tapping procedure, and a laying schedule of a pictorial nature with a plan view of each pipe segment sketched so that pipe invert elevations, horizontal bends, and welded joints are detailed. G. Submit certification from the manufacturer that design was performed for the project in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Certification to be signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. H. Submit affidavits of compliance that materials and work furnished comply with the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and these specifications. Submit inspection procedures to be used by manufacturer and for quality control and assurance for materials and welding as indicated in Part 1.06. Submit at least 30 days prior to repair work, procedures that describe in details shop and field work to be performed. Repair defects such as substandard welds, excessive radial offsets (misalignment), pitting, gouges, cracks, etc. J. Submit following for non -shrink grout for special applications: 1. Manufacturer's technical literature included specifications for mixing, placing, and curing grout. 2. Results of tests performed by certified independent testing laboratory showing conformance to ASTM C 1107, Non -shrink Grout and requirements of this specification. 3. Certification product is suitable for use in contact with potable water. K. Submit proof of certification for welders. Indicate certified procedures and position each welder is qualified to perform. Ensure welder and welding operator have been certified within the last 6 months in accordance with AWWA C206. L. Prior to start of field -applied cement mortar lining operation, submit comprehensive plan which identifies and describes as minimum: 1. Equipment used for batching, weighing, mixing, transporting, and placing mortar. 2. Qualifications and specific experience of machine operators. 3. Source and type of cement, pozzolan, sand, and mixtures used and certifications from suppliers that materials meet specifications. 4. Mix proportions to be used and slump limits (maximum and minimum). 5. A quality control plan which identifies quality control material tests and documented inspections necessary to ensure compliance with specified requirements. M. Submit certification showing calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices, and calibration tools used in manufacture of pipe. Each device used in manufacture of pipe is required to have tag recording date of last calibration. Devices are subject to inspection by Project Manager. 1.5 REFERENCES A. AASHTO — Standard Specifications for HighwayBridges. B. AREA — Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume II, Chapter 15. C. ASTM A 36 — Standard Specification for Structural Steel. D. ASTM A 53 — Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc—Coated Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM A 105 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Pipe Forging for Piping Applications. F. ASTM A 106 — Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High -Temperature Service. G. ASTM A 120 — Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot—Dipped Zinc—Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. H. ASTM A 135 — Standard Specification for Electric -Resistance -Welded Steel Pipe. I. ASTM A 139 — Standard Specification for Electric -Fusion (ARC) - Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over). J. ASTM A 234 — Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Services. K. ASTM A 570 — Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot -Rolled, Structural Quality. L. ASTM A 1011 — Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural High -Strength Low -Alloy, and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. Page 2 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction M. ASTM C 33 — Standard Specification for ConcreteAggregates. N. ASTM C 150 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 0. ASTM C 595 — Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. P. ASTM C 1107 — Standard Specification for Package Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Non - shrink). Q. ASTM D 4541 — Standard Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tests. R. ANSI B2.1 — Pipe Threads, Except DrySeal. S. ANSI B16.1 — Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. T. ANSI B16.5 — Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. U. ANSI B16.9 — Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings. V. ANSI B16.11 — Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded. W. AWWA C 200 — Steel Water Pipe 6 in. and Larger. X. AWWA C 203 — Coal—Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines — 4 Inches and Larger—Shop applied. Y. AWWA C 205 — Cement -Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe. Z. AWWA C 206 — Standard for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. AA. AWWA C 207 — Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in. through 144 in. BB. AWWA C 208 — Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; Addendum C 208A. CC. AWWA C 209 — Cold -Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. DD. AWWA C 210 — Liquid EpoxyCoating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. EE. AWWA C 213 — Fusion—Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior ofSteel Water Pipelines. FF. AWWA C 214 — Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. GG. AWWA C219 — Bolted Sleeve -Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe. HH. AWWA C 602 — Cement -Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines - 4 in. (100 mm) and Larger- In Place. II. AWWA C606 — Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. JJ. AWWA M 11 — Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation. KK. SSPC Good Painting Practice, Volume 1. LL. SSPC PA 2 — Paint Application Specification No. 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. MM. SSPC SP 1 — Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 SolventCleaning. NN. SSPC SP 5 — Joint Surface Preparation Standard White Blast Cleaning. 00. SSPC SP 6 — Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. PP. SSPC SP 10 — Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near -White Blast Cleaning. QQ. SSPC VIS 1 — Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. RR. FS WW -P-521 F — Pipe -Fittings, Flange Fittings, and Flanges; Steel and Malleable Iron (Threaded and Butt Welded), 150 pound SS. FS WW -U-531 D — Unions, Pipe, Steel, or Malleable Iron; Threaded Connection, 150 pound and 250 pound 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. For large -diameter water lines, manufacturer shall have a permanent quality control department and laboratory facilities capable of performing inspections and testing required by the Specifications. Certification by the Steel Plate Fabricators Association (SPFA) or certification under International Standards Organization (ISO) quality control standards at the discretion of the Engineer. Material testing, inspection procedures, and manufacturing process shall be subject to inspection by Project Manager. Perform tests and inspections required by referenced standards and these Specifications, including but not limited to, the following. Correct all nonconforming conditions. 1. Steel Plate: Review mill certifications for conformance to requirements of Specifications; perform physical testing of each heat of steel for conformance to applicable ASTM standards. Page 3 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Pipe: a. Inspect thickness, circumference, roundness, strength and size of seam welds (spiral or longitudinal), and squareness of pipe ends to verify compliance with AWWA C 200. b. Inspect physical dimensions and overall conditions of all joints for compliance with AWWA C 200, approved submittals, and Specifications. c. Finished pipe section shall be hydrostatically tested to 75 percent of specified minimum yield strength of steel being used with zero leakage. d. For wall thickness greater thanY-inch, perform Charpy V -notch (CVN) test in accordance with AWWA C 200. 3. Linings: a. Inspect unlined pipe for overall condition of bare inside barrel. Inside barrel shall be free of corrosive products, oil, grease, dirt, chemical, and deleterious material. b. Inspect lined pipe for physical dimensions and overall condition of lining, visible surface defects, thickness of lining, and adhesion to steel surface. c. Review certifications by manufacturers of lining components for conformance to AWWA standards and theseSpecifications. 4. Coatings: Measure temperature and dew points of ambient air before applying coatings. Inspect physical dimensions and overall condition of coatings. Inspect for visible surface defects, thickness, and adhesion of coating to surface and between layers. 5. Final Inspection: a. Before shipment, inspect each finished pipe, fitting, special and accessory for markings, metal thickness, coating thickness, lining thickness (if shop applied), joint dimensions, and roundness. b. Inspect for coating placement and defects. Test exterior coating for holidays. c. Inspect linings for thickness, pitting, scarring, and adhesion. B. Fabricated pipe and fitting items under this Section may be designed and supplied by multiple manufacturers to meet supply requirements provided all manufacturers meet the quality assurance requirements of this specification including the required experience clause. Coordination of design and submittal requirements for consistency will be the Contractor's sole responsibility C. The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all inspection and testing requirements as specified in the referenced standards. Submit signed certificates of such test and their results at least 5 days prior to shipment of the goods. In addition, all pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant by the Engineer for compliance with this Section including using an independent testing laboratory selected and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least 14 days in advance of any phase of the pipe manufacture. D. All automatic and manual welding procedures used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be prequalified under Section IX of the ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or AWS B2.1. Welding procedures shall be required for, but not necessarily limited to, longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for harness and lug connectors. All factory welding shall be done by certified welders, who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 and AWWA C206 by an independent local, approved testing agency in advance of any pipe production. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests and Contractor shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders. Submit welder qualifications. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings B. Dimensions and elevations for all buried and above grade piping shall be field verified by the Contractor. Page 4 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Note information in Pipe Schedule on Drawings, if any, and in this Section especially concerning pressures, coating and linings, minimum thickness, etc. In case of a conflict, the more stringent information in Engineer's opinion shall govern. D. Note that Contractor is responsible for compatibility between their pipe, flanges, valves, etc. E. Provide steel pipe casing where shown on the Drawings and as required to resolve a construction conflict where applicable. 1.8 MARKINGS, HANDLING, ANDSTORAGE A. Legibly mark all pipes, fittings, specials, and appurtenances to be consistent with laying schedule and marking drawings. Each pipe shall be identified with sequential numbering and each marked pipe will appear on marking drawings in the identified locations for installation. Special fittings, bends, and appurtenances requiring a specific orientation will be appropriately marked with the words "TOP" in the correct position and in a consistent location. B. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. See also AWWA C214 and/or C222 and the referenced AWWA manual for shipping, handling, and storage procedures. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damage to linings or coatings discovered during examination shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's cost before the pipe is installed. Pipe shall be transported from the coating plant to the jobsite on padded bunks with nylon tie -down straps or padded banding to adequately protect the pipe and coating. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by its manufacturer. C. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned, and shall be kept clean until they are used in the work. D. Lined and/or coated pipe shall be suitably protected from exposure and heating of the sun at all times following procedures recommended by the coating system manufacturer. Exposure will not be allowed (except for short periods such as installation, assembly, and coating repairs). If the coating system includes UV inhibitors and the manufacturer will guarantee the coating against UV related damage, longer exposure may be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer. E. In handling the pipe, a double 2 -ft wide cushioned sling shall be used or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges, cables, or levers shall be used in handling the finished pipe, fittings, or couplings. Care should be taken not to mar the pipe's outer coating. Padded wooden pipe cradles or chocks suitable for protection of tape or polyurethane coatings shall be used between fabricated pipes and beneath them on rough surfaces when pipes are stacked. Pipe shall not be stored on bare ground unless soft sand berms are used to support the pipe. F. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily with the finished coating. Workers will be permitted to walk upon the coating only when necessary, in which case they shall wear shoes with rubber or composition soles and heels. G. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent damage to the linings or coating that might be caused by handling and/or storage of the completed pipe at low temperature (due to embrittlement) or high temperatures or direct sunlight. H. Adequate strutting (stulling) shall be provided on all specials, fittings, and straight pipe, so as to limit handling and storage damage to the pipe coating and lining. The strutting shall be installed by the manufacturer and shall remain in place while each pipe is loaded, transported, unloaded, and backfilled at the job site. Strutting shall be adequate for all handling, hauling, and storage. Struts shall be left in the pipe until backfill is complete. Additional strutting required to prevent damage and excess deflection of the pipe during installation due to loads imposed by backfilling and compaction equipment shall be the responsibility of the installation contractor. Pipe damaged during any phase of handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper strutting will be repaired or replaced at no expense to Owner. Submit informational review details on strutting assembly to Engineer prior to pipe manufacture. Page 5 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Steel Pipe B. Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C 200, C 207, C 208 and AWWA M 11 except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A-36, ASTM A-570 Grade 36, ASTM A-53 Grade B, ASTM A-135 Grade B, or ASTM A-139 Grade B. C. Black steel or galvanized steel pipe sizes 3—inch or smaller shall comply with ASTM 53. Unless otherwise specified, black steel or steel pipe sizes 3—inch up to and including 6—inch, may comply with any of the standards ASTM A53 and AWWA C200 for black steel or steel pipe. D. Method of Manufacture 1. Black or galvanized steel pipe may be seamless, electro -resistance welded or furnace - welded. 2. Steel Pipe a. Except for seamless mill -type pipe, all piping shall be made from steel plates rolled into cylinders or sections thereof with no more than two longitudinal butt - welded seams, or shall by spirally formed and butt welded. Girth seams shall be butt welded and shall not be closer than 6 feet except in specials and fittings. b. Circumferential deflection of all pipe in-place shall not exceed 2.0 percent of pipe diameter. c. Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 16 feet and no less than 10 feet for large diameter except as required for special fittings or closure sections, and no greater than 40 feet. d. Provide short section of pipe no less than 4 feet in length unless indicated on Drawings. E. Black or galvanized steel pipe shall be standard weight (Schedule 40) or extra heavyweight (Schedule 80) depending on service. See below for wall thickness validation requirements. F. Wall Thickness - Steel pipe 6 -in diameter or greater. 1. Fabricated steel pipe shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition ofAWWA M11. References below are to the 2004 (Fourth edition) of AWWA M11. 2. Wall thickness design shall be based on: a. AWWA M11, Chapter 4, equations 4-6 and 4-7 concerning minimum handling wall thickness. Wall thickness for minimum handling shall be a minimum of D/T of 200 defined as outside diameter divided by wall thickness. b. AWWA M11, including Chapters 4, 5, and 6, especially Good Practice in Chapter 4 concerning pipe material stresses. c. Maximum internal static (working) design pressures, internal design pressures shall be equivalent to maximum static or working indicated on the Drawings and contained herein for factory test pressures. (1) Working pressure = Minimum of 100 psig; or greater if indicated on the Drawings. (2) Factory test pressure = 150 psig (for factory test sections). (3) Maximum pressure due to surge = 150 psig. (4) Minimum Pressure due to surge = -5 psig. (5) Design water temperature: 95 degrees F maximum, 45 degrees F minimum. d. Design pipe and fittings to withstand most critical simultaneous application of external loads, internal pressures, and surge contribution. Design of pipe and pipe joints to carry all loads including but not limited to: overburden and lateral earth pressures, subsurface soil and water loads, grouting, other conditions of service, thrust of jacks, and any stresses anticipated during handling and installation of pipe. Maximum external loads for buried pipe design shall include: (1) Base design on minimum of AASHTO HS -20 loading, Cooper E-80 loads (where shown on Drawings or as indicated in Part 1.07), and Page 6 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction depths of bury as indicated on Drawings. Loading at minimum earth cover (identified in Chapter 6, AWWAM11). (2) Maximum earth load of 125-Ib/ft3 with appropriate HS -20 loading, through 16 -ft of cover. Representative types of soils are indicated in the soils information, as noted elsewhere. Design for most critical groundwater level condition. Design pipes larger than 20 -inch with Marston's earth loads for a transition width trench for all heights of cover. (3) Other items in Chapter 6 of AWWA M11, including equation 6-4 for prism loading. Do not decrease dead load (Wc) by anyfactors. (4) For all piping, utilize E' factors based on having moderate compaction of bedding (per Table 6-1 — as modified by Errata July 2004 - in AWWA M11), unless lower E' values are indicated in the geotechnical investigation. In no case shall E' exceed 1,200 psi. Modulus of soil reaction (E') < 1500 psi. If E'> 1000 psi, silty sand (SM) shall not be used for embedment. Unit weight of fill (w)> 125 pcf. Deflection lag factor (D1) = 1.25. Fully saturated soil conditions: hw = h = depth of cover above top of pipe. (5) Calculation for deflection shall be based on the modified Iowa formula (EQ. 6-5, AWWA M11). Deflection of pipe, in place, shall not exceed 2.0 percent. Deflection lag factor shall be 1.0 and bedding constant (K) shall be 0.10. (6) Diameter (D) over thickness (t) ratio shall be no greater than 200. (7) Exclude any structural benefits associated with primary liner in design of pipe in tunnel installations. (8) Do not use internal removablestiffeners. (9) External welded steel stiffeners will be permitted in design calculations for steel pipe, provided wall thickness is a minimum of 1/2 inch. Minimum clearances specified between exterior pipe wall and tunnel liner shall apply to distance between outside diameter of external welded stiffener and tunnel liner. e. Design aboveground steel piping for spans as shown on the Drawings. Pipe wall thickness for a given aboveground system shall be based on the worst case span condition. Pipe manufacturer shall account for weights of valves, fittings, and other items attached to the pipe which provides an external loading condition to the pipesystem. f. The stress due to design working pressure shall be no greaterthan 50 percent of the minimum yield strength. However, regardless of the yield strength of the steel, the maximum combined stress based on design pressure shall never exceed 16,500 psi or 50 percent of yield strength for the grade and class of steel (whichever is lower). g. The stress due to test pressure shall not exceed 75 percent of the minimum yield strength. However, regardless of the yield strength of the steel the maximum combined stress based on test pressure shall not exceed 24,750 psi or 75 percent of yield strength for the grade and class of steel (whichever is lower). G. Provide shop -coated and shop -lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape -coated steel pipe to be used for field -applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H. Standard or Special Sections: Within plus 1/8 inch of specified or theoretical lengths. Provide 1/2 -inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled with sleeve couplings. Diameter. Nominal pipe diameter shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the diameter shall be as follows: 1. Fabricated Steel Pipe: Larger than 18 -in nominal size, the diameter noted shall be equal to the actual clear inside diameter from lining surface to lining surface. Page 7 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Manufactured Steel Pipe - 6 inches through 16 inches nominal size: Outside Diameter shall match requirements of ANSI/ASME B36.10, B31.1for agiven nominal diameter. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Threaded Fittings 1. Malleable iron fittings shall comply with FS WW -P-521, Type 1 for use with black steel pipe and Type 2 for use with galvanized steel pipe. 2. Forged steel threaded fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.11 for Extra Heavy Weight Piping. B. Small Branch Connection "Fittings" 1. Pipe nipples shall be seamless black steel pipe, ASTM A53, standard weight (Schedule 40). 2. Welding fittings (for 4 -in and smaller connections) shall be: For threaded outlets - Bonney "Thredolets," Porter "W -S Teelets," or Vogt "Weld Couplets;" for welded outlets - Bonney "Weldolets," Porter "W -S Teelets," or Vogt "Weld Couplets." 3. Provide small branch connections where required for use in pressure gauge taps, disinfection taps, passing hose or lead wires into pipe. Plugs shall be tapped with standard pipe threads and weld to pipe in approved manner and use solid forged steel plugs for closure C. Forged Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 20 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 1. Forged steel fittings shall comply with ANSI B16.11. 2. Butt -welded fittings shall complywith ANSI B16.9. 3. Wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless or welded construction shall comply with ASTM A234. D. Welded Fittings: Fittings and specials shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200/C208, Section 4, including nondestructive testing in accordance with AWWA C200/C208, Section 5 by NSF approved dye penetrant or wet magnetic particle testing of welds not previously tested in the straight pipe. 1. Fittings for steel piping larger than 20 -inches in diameter: Fabricated steel fittings shall be of the same material as pipe and shall conform to the dimensions of AWWA C208. Wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the pipe to which fitting is to be welded 2. Fabricated from tested pipe in accordance with AWWA M 11, Section 13.3-13.7, and AWWA C 208. 3. Angles up to 5 degrees may be accomplished using joint deflections or mitered end joints as proposed by the manufacturer. 4. Elbows: 2 -piece for 0 degrees to 22-1/2 degrees; 3 -piece for 23 degrees to 45 degrees; 4 -piece for 46 degrees to 67-1/2 degrees; and 5 -piece for 68 degrees to 90 degrees. Radius: Minimum radius of one and one—half times pipe diameter unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required by site constraints subject to approval ofthe Engineer. 5. Outlets: Reinforced in accordance with AWWA M 11, Sections 13.3-13.7, AWWAC 200, and AWWA C208. 6. Butt Straps for Closure Piece: Minimum 12—inch—wide split butt strap; minimum plate thickness equal to thinnest member being joined; fabricated from material equal in chemical and physical properties to thinnest member being joined. Provide minimum lap of 4 inches between member being joined and edge of butt strap, welded on both inside and outside, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. Provide minimum 6—inch welded outlet for inspecting each closure section, unless access manway is within 40 feet of closure section. 7. Dished Head Plugs: Design dished head plugs (test plugs) with withstand field hydrostatic test pressure from either side of plug. Design stress due to hydrostatic pressure to be no greater than 50 percent of minimum yield. Pipe on opposite side of hydrostatic test may or may not contain water. Manufacturer of the steel pipe to Page 8 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction hydrostatically test plug at factory if the plug is made from multiple pieces of steel plate. 8. After fitting fabrication the pipe manufacturer shall hydrostatically test the completed fittings or alternatively test each weld non-destructivelyusing radiography. All testing shall occur in pipe manufacturer's factory. 2.3 JOINTS A. Pipe ends/joints shall be: Pipe Size/Type: Ends/Joints (if not noted otherwise) Fabricated Steel: Single and double lap weld (buried only). Butt welded for thicknesses greater than or equal to 0.625 -in (5/8 -in) and all aboveground piping Flanged: (aboveground, buried where required for valves or specials) 0 -ring: (where allowed in specific locations on Drawings or Details) B. Welded/Fabricated Pipe End Joints. 1. Forged steel fitting shall comply with ANSI B16.11. 2. Butt -welded fittings shall complywith ANSI B16.9. 3. Wrought carbon steel fittings of seamless or welded construction shall comply with ASTM A234. 4. Fabricated steel fittings shall comply with AWWA C-200, shall be of the same material as pipe, and shall comply with AWWA C208. 5. Restrained joints where required at changes in direction or shown on the Drawings shall be single or double welded lap joints. Design of the joint and welds shall include considerations of stresses induced in the steel wall, the joints, and any field welds, caused by thrust at bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from the working and/or transient pressure. 6. For field welded joints, design stresses shall not exceed 50 percent of specified minimum yield strength of the grade of steel utilized for the part being examined when longitudinal thrust is assumed to be uniformly distributed around the circumference of the joint. C. Flanged Joints 1. Flanges will be provided at all valve connections and as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Flanges shall comply with the requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125; AWWA C207, Class D. Flanges shall be machined to flat face using 1/8 -in thick full face rubber gaskets suitable for potable water service and/or services described in Part 1.07. Flanges and gaskets shall be capable of meeting or exceeding the operating and test pressures cited in the pipe schedule on the Drawings. Gaskets shall not exceed OD or ID of piping flanges 3. Flanges for pipe 20 inches in diameter and smaller shall be AWWA 207 Class D or ANSI 150 lb. flat face, slip on or weld neck flanges, meeting ASTM A105/AWWAClass D requirements. Where flanges are to join to valves with raised face flanges, use ANSI 150 lb. raised flange face. 4. Provide same coating for non -wetted flange face and the side of the flange. Flange face to be coated with Rust Veto or equal suitable for NSF -61 potable water service. flange faces as interior of pipe when epoxy lining system is used. 5. Gaskets for air service shall be 1/8 -inch thick, constructed of elastomers suitable for continuous temperatures to 300°F. Gaskets shall be full face. 6. Flanges shall be flat faced with a serrated finish. 7. Steel ring or flat plate flanges are only acceptable when cement mortar lined pipe requires a larger outer diameter pipe than nominal diameter pipe. Any attaching flanges will require an over bore. Pipe manufacturer shall coordinate as required to suit installation. 8. Flanges for 24 -in connections and for blowoffs shall be compatible with ANSI B16.5 for ANSI class 300 service for test pressures greater than 275 psig. Blind flanges or dish heads furnished for testing purposes at valves shall meet the minimum test pressures. Page 9 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 9. Compatibility of flanges, including drilling and sizing of flanges and bolts, shall be coordinated by Contractor to insure compatibility with Owner and Contractor furnished valves. ANSI Class 300 valves may require raised flanges. 10. Flange faces shall be normal to the pipe axis with a maximum tolerance of 0.005-in/ft of flange diameter. Angular deflection (or layback) of the flange face shall not exceed 0.75 degree from a plane surface and shall be uniform within 0.010 -in. All flanges, after welding to the pipe, shall be measured and shall be refaced, if necessary, to bring them within the specified tolerances. Flanges shall only be welded in the shop. 11. Bolts and hardware shall be per Part 2.06. 12. Provide same coating for exposed portions of nuts and bolts as flanges which they secure for aboveground piping. 13. Proper lubricants, washers and torque procedures shall be used on assembly of flanges in accordance with Chapter 12 of AWWA M11 and as required by the flange manufacturer. 14. Flange insulating kits shall be utilized between all dissimilar metals and where otherwise noted. Fabricate flanges with oversize bolt holes, with flanges drilled in pairs, to accommodate insulating sleeves. Test, coat, line and ship each shop—assembled insulated flange assembly to field as fitting. Use no less than two snug—fitting alignment pins to assist in aligning flanges during assembly. Do not remove pins until bolts have been installed in all remaining holes and have been drawn up tight. After insulating joints have been assembled, subject each assembly (fitting) to test pressure and electrically test to ensure that insulated sections are effective. After assembly has been tested, coat insulating joint and adjacent steel pipe as specified for below—ground installation. Line assembly as specified for interior surfaces and in accordance with details shown on Drawings. D. 0 -Ring Joints (where specifically shown on the Drawings). 1. The spigot end of the pipe shall have a rolled in groove designed to retain the 0 -ring rubber gasket. Joints consisting of a Carnegie shape joint ring for spigot end or flared bell end and a grooved spigot end shall also be acceptable. Bell and spigot ends shall be sized by forcing over a sizing die or by expanding to stretch the steel beyond its elastic limit so that the difference in diameter between outside of spigot and inside of bell at normal engagement does not exceed 0.400 -in measured on the circumference with a diameter tape. The 0 -ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill the area of the groove and shall conform to AWWA C200. Manufacturer shall submit test reports on gaskets to be used in construction consistent with section 4.13.6.3 of AWWA C200. The bell and spigot with flared bell and grooved spigot end shall be submitted for engineering review complete with dimension data and tolerances. Performance data shall be required demonstrating that the joint has performed satisfactorily under the anticipated operating conditions. 2. The joint shall be suitable for a safe working pressure equal to the class of pipe furnished and shall operate satisfactorily with a deflection (the tangent of which is not to exceed 0.75 -in divided by D where D is the outside diameter of the pipe in inches) or with a pullout of 0.75 -in. In no case will 0 -ring gasket joints be allowed for design working pressures in excess of 250 psig (maximum static working pressure of 250 psig, maximum test pressure of 350 psig). Note welding requirements forcertain pipe. 3. 0 -ring joints shall be electrically bonded using bonding wire filter rings and brazing cartridges furnished by the pipe fabricator. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the continuity of this system before final acceptance. E. Lap Joints for Double Lap Welding (Buried Steel piping only). 1. All lap joints shall be double welded (inside and outside) as indicated on the Drawings unless pipe diameter is 24 -in or smaller, in which case only single lap exterior weld or double exterior weld butt strap is acceptable. 2. All bell ends shall be formed by expanding with segmental dies using a hydraulic type expander, or by die pressing in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell. Preformed welded bell and spigot joints (Carnegie shapes) will not be allowed. The post formed section shall have a minimum radius of curvature of the bell end at any point of not less than 15 times the thickness of Page 10 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction the steel shell. All longitudinal or spiral welds extending into the bell and spigot sections of lap joints shall be ground flush with the surrounding metal a minimum of 18 - in from the ends. All burrs and sharp edges on the inside of bells and outside of spigots will also be ground flush or lightly chamfered. 3. Field joints shall be assembled so that seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the pipes being joined. Minimum sectional overlap of the joint shall be at least 1 -1/2 -in or four times the thickness of the thinner of the pipe wall thicknesses being joined, whichever is greater. The inside circumference of the bell section shall not exceed the outside circumference of the spigot section by more than 0.400 -in in accordance with AWWA C200. No part of any field weld shall be closer than 1 -in to the nearest point of tangency to a bell radius. F. Butt Joints for Welding (Aboveground and Belowground) 1. Butt joints shall be used for aboveground piping systems and where pipe wall thicknesses exceed 5/8 -in. Butt weld joints shall be used for all steel casing pipe used at short tunnel crossing noted on the Drawings (butt welded or lap welded joints for carrier pipe). Butt joints shall be single V -groove butt joints. The butt joints shall be complete joint "full" penetration welds. 2. Field joints shall be assembled so that seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the pipes being joined. Joints shall be accurately aligned and retained in position during welding operations so that the finished joint has abutting lining sections that are not misaligned by more than 20 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe or 1/8 -in, whichever is smaller. 3. Welder qualifications shall follow requirements cited elsewhere in this Section. 4. Backing rings shall be used to assist in lining up pipe joints and for completion of welds. Rings shall be a minimum of 4 -in in width and 1/4 -in in thickness and shall avoid interference with internal joint finishing. 5. For all pipe greater than 1/2 -in in thickness, field and fabrication welders and welding procedures shall be qualified to provide notch tough welds. A Charpy test will be performed on jointed specimens meeting a minimum CVN value of 25 lbf-ft at 30 degrees F. Transverse specimen heat -lot testing for the steel shall be used, and all filler materials shall meet the same CVN requirements. G. Butt Straps 1. Butt straps shall comply with all requirements of AWWA C200 and C206 and SHALL have a minimum shell thickness equivalent to the greatest thickness of the pipe sections being joined. Minimum butt strap width will be at least 12 -in for 24 -in and smaller pipe and 18 -in for 36 inch and larger pipe (greater than 24 -in nominal). Minimum overlap on each section of pipe being joined shall be 2 -in. For smaller pipes butt strap width shall be sufficientlywide to result in a minimum overlap of 1 -in on each pipe or four times the thickness of the greatest shell thickness of the pipes being joined, whichever is greater. Butt straps will be welded on the outside only for 24 -in and smaller pipe. For larger pipe double lap weld joint pipe is required unless special welded closures are needed. 2.4 COUPLINGS A. Flexible Coupling 1. Coupling shall be of a gasketed, sleeve -type, with diameter to properly fit the pipe. 2. Minimum sleeve length shall be 5 inches for pipe 5 inches and smaller, 7 inches for pipe larger than 5 inches and smaller than 36 inches, and 10 inches for pipe 36 inches and larger. Sleeves shall be supplied without pipe stop unless otherwise specified. 3. Couplings shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 411, or equal. 4. Steel coupled joints, which will be required to resist thrust shall be reinforced with a harness of bolts as follows: a. All tie bolts and lugs shall conform to the recommendations in the American Water Works Association, Manual of Water Supply Practice M-11 (Latest edition), Section 13.8 for test pressurespecified. b. Bolts shall span the steel couplings connecting to steel lugs. Page 11 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction c. Lugs (Type P and Type RR) shall be either welded to the pipe or to a sleeve that is welded to the pipe. d. Bolt length and lug placement shall permit steel coupling to be slipped in one direction to clear joint. e. Number of bolts shall depend on operating conditions, with a minimum of two tie bolts installed. 5. Gaskets for couplings on air service piping shall be suitable for use up to 300°F (Viton). 6. Coupling shall be provided with a fusion -bonded epoxy coating unless otherwise specified. 7. All bolting hardware shall be perPart 2.06. B. Advanced Flexible Couplings 1. All AISI 316L stainless steel construction. 2. Sealing element: EPDM rubber good for -4°F to 176°F for water service. 3. Minimum pressure capability of 150 psig minimum. 4. Steel coupled joints, which will be required to resist thrust shall be reinforced with a harness of bolts as follows: a. All tie bolts and lugs shall conform to the recommendations in the American Water Works Association, Manual of Water Supply Practice M-11 (Latest Edition), Section 13.8 for test pressure specified. b. Bolts shall span the steel couplings connecting to steel lugs (Type P and Type RR). c. Lugs (Type P and Type RR) shall be either welded to the pipe or to a sleeve that is welded to the pipe. d. Bolt length and lug (Type P and Type RR) placement shall permit steel coupling to be slipped in one direction to clear joint. e. Number of bolts shall depend on operating conditions, with a minimum of two tie bolts installed. 5. Minimum deflection angle capability of2°. 6. Products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to meet or exceed the design, materials, manufacture, and performance requirements set forth in AWWA C-219. 7. As manufactured by Straub (Flex model) or equal by Victaulic Depend -o -Lok. 2.5 UNIONS A. Unions shall be malleable iron complying to FS WW -U-531, Class 1, Type A for use with black steel pipe and Type B for use with galvanized steel pipe. Use dielectric union where specified. 2.6 FLANGE BOLTS AND NUTS A. Use Type 316 stainless steel when required by Drawings or buried or submerged service, otherwise use ASTM A307, Grade B, ANSI B18.2.1 painted in the field to match adjacent piping. Bolts to extend past nut at least 3 threads but not more than 5 threads maximum. Do not leave aboveground bolting exposed more than 5 days without finish painting. 2.7 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE, ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS A. Supply steel pipe with epoxy lining for aboveground and vault piping and shop applied cement -mortar lining for buried piping, capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F. Linings shall conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and shall be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges, blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers, etc., with epoxy lining, as specified. B. Epoxy Lining: 1. AWWA C 210, White, NSF -61 listed for shop and field joint applied, except as modified in this Section. Provide materials from same manufacturer. Protect interior surface with approved liquid two-part chemically cured epoxy primer specified for interior surfaces. Page 12 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Surface Preparation 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile SSPC-SP-5 — White Blast Clean Prime Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT NSF Certified Epoxy — Buff, or approved equal Intermediate Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT NSF Certified Epoxy — Buff, or approved equal Finish Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT NSF Certified Epoxy — White, or approved equal 2. Total allowable dry film thickness for system: a. Minimum: 14.0 mils. b. Maximum: 18.0mils. 3. Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 5. Perform adhesion test on pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger in accordance with ASTM D4541. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. Perform test on actual pipe to be installed at a rate of one for every 1,000 square feet of epoxy lining. Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D4752 (solvent rub test) and ASTM D3363 (pencil hardness) for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. C. Shop -applied Cement -mortar Lining 1. AWWA C 205; shop -applied cement -mortar linings, except as specified herein:1/2- inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger; 3/8 -inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 36 inches and smaller. Cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2. The inside of all pipe shall receive a cement -mortar lining applied by centrifugally spinning. 3. Application of cement -mortar lining to special sections, the shape of which precludes application by the spinning method, shall be accomplished by mechanical placement or pneumatic placement and finished to produce a smooth, dense surface comparable to centrifugally spinning. 4. Repairs of the cement -mortar lining for widths exceeding 6 inches shall be bonded to the steel and adjacent faces of the lining with a bonding agent conforming to ASTM C 881, Type I I . 5. Restrict usage of sprinkler heads during moist curing to prevent overspraying onto lining. No alternative curing methods are allowed as described in Section 4.4.7.4 of AWWA C 205. 6. Use galvanized wire mesh when shop applied mortar is not applied by machine. Wire mesh not to extend across welded portion of mitered fittings. Crimp mesh to provide integral "chair" so wire does not fully rest against steel cylinder. D. Field -applied Cement -mortar Lining: (For pipe > 48 inches in diameter). Provide field - applied internal cement -mortar linings in accordance with AWWA C 602, latest edition, except as modified in this Section. 1. Lining: Applied in a one -course application of cement -mortar by a machine thatwill centrifugally place mortar against wall of pipe and then mechanically trowel lining to a smooth finish. 2. Cement -mortar for lining. a. Cement -mortar: Dense, smooth, and of uniform quality and consistency to assure efficient machine operation and a uniform cement -mortar lining on pipe wall. Page 13 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction b. Water -cement ratio: Kept as low as possible; consistent with proper plasticity for application, allowing slight variations dependent upon temperature, length of haul for mortar, and moisture condition in pipe. c. Mortar: Mixture of one part cement with not less than one or more than 1-1/2 parts of dry screened sand, by volume. When mixture has been determined, materials shall be controlled to within plus or minus 2-1/2 percent by weight throughout entire work. d. Materials for cement -mortar comply with following: (1) Cement: Type II low -alkali Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150, or Type IP (MS) Portland-Pozzolan cement conforming to ASTM C 595, unless otherwise specified. Conform to low alkali requirements of Table IA of ASTM C 150. Type IP (MS) cement shall contain no more than 20 percent Pozzolan, which shall be inter - ground with clinker. (2) Use suitable facilities approved by Engineer when available for handling and weighing bulk cement. Otherwise, deliver cement in original unopened sacks that have been filled by manufacturer. Plainly mark sacks with manufacturer's name or brand, cement type and weight. (3) Store cement to permit ready access for inspection and sampling. Protect cement against contamination or moisture. Do not use or remove from site cement delivered with evidence of contamination or otherwise unsuitable. (4) Use Portland cement of same brand and type unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. (5) Pozzolanic material: AWWA C 602, Paragraph 2.2. (6) Sand: AWWA C 205, Section 2.3, except gradation of sand shall yield a fineness modulus of approximately 1.7; having no material coarser than that passing a No. 16 sieve. Submit certification as to compliance of sand with these specifications at least 10 calendar days before start of lining placement. (7) Water: Clean; free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis or organic materials; total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I; ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/I for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. 2.8 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) A. Provide a 3 -coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-10 Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec—Zinc Intermediate Coat 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT TNMEC Series 20 Pota—Pox 1255 Beige Finish Coat 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Tnemecc Series 1074 Endura—Shield II Color to be Selected B. Total Allowable Dry Film Thickness (DFT) for System: 1. Minimum: 9.5 mils. 2. Maximum: 12.5 mils. Page 14 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. Clean bare pipe free from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminant. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC—SP-1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use only approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Use preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. D. Remove surface imperfections such as silvers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges, presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. E. Provide materials from same manufacturer. F. For submerged service in a Pump Well or a Treatment Structure minimum DFT thickness shall be 16 mils and per Section 09901-11 System 100 (NSF -61 approved coatings). G. Perform adhesion text on pipe in accordance with ASTM D 4541. Minimum field adhesion: 1,000 psi. Perform test on pipe for project at frequency of one for every 1,000 square feet of polyurethane coating. Perform cure test in accordance with ASTM D 4752 (solvent rub test) and ASTM D 3363 (pencil hardness) for each section of pipe. Repair tested areas with approved procedures. 2.9 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Supply pipe with one of the following coatings specified. ONLY use this section if buried system is not specified earlier in this specification. 1. Tape Coating: AWWAC214/C209. a. Where sleeve type or victaulic couplings, are required, bond coupling to adjacent pipes with bonding cables as shown on Drawings. b. Use approved filler putty type insulating putty to fill in gap and create smooth sloped transition between top of reinforcing plate and pipe, before tape coating is applied. c. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating -system manufacturer. d. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back approximately to 4-1/2 inches from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1 -inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints to facilitate welding. e. Inner and outer tape widths: 12 or 18 inches. 2. Polyurethane Coating: Provide inspections by NACE trained inspector under supervision of NACE Certified Coatings Inspector having Level III Certification. Refer to Paragraph 2.8 G of this Section for field testing requirements. See Specification 40 23 11 for Polyurethane Coating for Steel Pipe. B. Heat Shrink Joint Sleeves: Canusatube, Canusawrap, or Canusa Wrapid Sleeve, or approved equal. For repairs to heat shrink joint sleeves, use Canusa Repair Patch Kit or approved equal. C. For steel pipe encased in concrete under treatment structures follow surface prep in 2.08A and apply prime coat only. 2.10 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL, CASING OR AUGER HOLES A. Provide exterior coating system of pipe in tunnel without annular grout in accordance with AWWA C203. B. For large -diameter water lines where annular grout will be used, shop prime external surfaces of steel pipe with 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Inhibited Epoxy Primer, unless pipe has cement -mortar coating. 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10(64); Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT, or approved equal. 3. Coating procedures and dry film thicknesses for approved alternate product shall be in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. Page 15 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.11 GROUT FOR JOINTS AND SPECIALAPPLICATIONS A. Cement Grout Mixture: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand. Mix interior joint mortar with as little water as possible until very stiff but workable. Mix exterior joint mortar with water until it has consistency of thick cream. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 19 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement grout or water to mixed cement grout to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. C. Sand: 1. Inside joints: ASTM C 35 fine graded plaster sand. 2. Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D. Water: Potable water with total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/I; ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/I for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. Use water with 250 ppm limit on chlorides and sulfates. E. Non -shrink Grout: 1. Pre -blended factory -packaged material manufactured under rigid quality control, suitable for use in joints of prestressed concrete cylinder pipe. 2. Contain non-metallic natural aggregate and shall be nonstaining and noncorrosive. 3. Compressive strength: ASTM C 1107 2500 psi minimum 7 -day unconfined; 5000 psi minimum 28 -day unconfined. 4. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 1107, Non -shrink Grout. 5. Suitable for use in contact with a potable water supply. 6. Highly flowable so joint wrapper around exterior of pipe joint can be filled without leaving any voids or trapped air. Capable of being placed with a plastic consistency in interior of pipe joint. 7. Non-bleeding and non -segregating at fluid consistency. 8. Contain no chlorides or additives which may contribute to corrosion of steel pipe. 9. Free of gas -producing, gas -releasing agents. 10. Resist attack by oil or water. 11. Mix, place, and cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Upon 72 hours' notice, provide services of a qualified representative of non -shrink grout manufacturer to aid in assuring proper use of product under job conditions. Representative to be on site when product is first used. 12. Mix cement grout to specific gravity of 17.7 lb/gallon or greater as measured by grout/slurry balance. Use balance manufactured grout/slurry by Baroid or approved equal. Perform test in presence of and at request of Project Manager. Add additional cement grout to mixed cement grout or water to bring mix to proper moisture content or specific gravity. Discard cement grout that has been mixed more than 20 minutes and is not at proper specific gravity or moisture content. F. Joint Wrapper: Minimum width of 9 inches for 33 -inch diameter and smaller; minimum width of 12 inches for diameters greater than 33 -inch in diameter; hemmed at edge to allow threading with a minimum 5/8 -inch -wide steel strap; minimum 6 -inch -wide wire Ethafoam strip sized, positioned and sewn such that two circumferential edges of Ethafoam are 1-1/2 inches from outer edge of wrapper. 2.12 COLD -APPLIED TAPE COATING A. Shop—applied Tape Wrap Coating 1. Use primer furnished by tape manufacturer. 2. Wrap, specials and fittings that cannot be machine wrapped due to configuration with primer layer and two layers of prefabricated tape each 35 mils thick. 3. Overlap machine applied tape with hand applied tape by minimum of two inches and bind to it. 4. Apply approved 30 mil filler tape parallel to spiral weld seams if weld height measures greater than or equal to 1/8 inch. B. Surface Preparation Page 16 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. Clean bare pipe from mud, mill lacquer, oil, grease, or other contaminants. Inspect and clean surfaces according to SSPC—SP-1 to remove oil, grease, and loosely adhering deposits prior to blast cleaning. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use approved safety solvents which do not leave residue. Preheating to remove oil, grease, mill scale, water, and ice may be used provided pipe is preheated in uniform manner to avoid distortion. 2. Remove surface imperfections such as slivers, scabs, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges by hand filling or grinding to prevent excessive number of holidays. Presence of metallic defects may be cause for rejection of pipe. 2.13 EXTERNAL TAPE COATING SHOP APPLICATION A. Separate tape dispensing equipment far enough apart to visually inspect continuous steps. B. Make cutbacks straight and for total thickness of coating. C. State of dryness of primer prior to application of weld filler and inner layer of tape to be in accordance with written recommendation of manufacturer. D. Apply weld filler tape over primer and extend minimum of one inch on each side of weld seam. Filler tape may contact rollers as long as release liner is in place and adhesion requirements are met. Remove release liner before applying inner layer tape. E. Spirally apply inner layer of tape in direction of helix weld. Overlap each spiral of tape 1 inch or greater with next successive spiral of tape applied. F. Overlap end of new roll on top of previous roll minimum of 6 inches. G. Tape—roll body temperature to be greater than 70 degrees F; pipe surface temperature to be greater than 60 degrees F. H. Spirally apply outer layer tapes in direction of helix weld and use overlap width and application tensions as recommended by manufacturer. 2.14 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF COATINGS A. Perform electrical inspection on inner layer of tape before intermediate layer of tape is applied. B. If holidays are detected, repair holidays immediately before applying outer layer of tape. Clear holiday area of material and reprime if necessary. Recoat area with inner wrap tape. Overlap inner wrap tape onto surrounding inner wrap coating by at least 2 inches. Perform electrical retest at repaired area after repairing holiday, and before outer wrap is continued. C. Shrink Wrap: Perform electrical inspection on shrink wrap to check for holidays. Perform peel tests over heat affected zone. Minimum acceptable result: 15 lbs—ft/in. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 40 05 00 — Piping — General Requirements, except as modified in this Section. B. Comply with the following: 1. Manufacturer shall make available services of a representative when deemed necessary by Project Manager. Advise in all aspects of installation, including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coating and lining repair, and general construction methods as applicable to the pipe. 2. For large diameter water line, install stulls prior to placement of pipe, bends, and fittings to prevent deflection during installation. Provide stulls consisting of timberstruts with end blocks shaped to fit curvature of interior surface of pipe or other appropriate configuration and material. Firmly edge and secure stulls to blocks so that they will remain intact position during handling and installation. Provide stulls adequate to resist loads encountered without structural failure to stull members or damage to pipe. Where applicable, place stulls at such lengths so as to elongate vertical diameter of pipe as required to suit trench conditions encountered. 3. Handling and Storing (for pipe diameters 42 inches and larger): Install padded struts or stulls prior to shipping, horizontally and vertically by manufacturer at 10 -foot intervals, or as proposed by manufacturer and approved by Project Manager. Spiders: Installed Page 17 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction by manufacturer in joint ends of fittings. Stulls shall remain in place, horizontally and vertically positioned at all times during storage and shipping, and until all welding, backfilling and compaction has been completed. 4. Bedding and Backfilling: a. Conform to requirements of Section 31 2316 — Excavating and Section 31 23 23.13 — Backfill. b. Take necessary precautions during bedding and backfilling operations to prevent deformation or deflection of cylindrical shape of pipe by more than allowable pipe deflection. Do not move trench support system (trench safety system) once the bedding material is compacted. 5. Pipe Deflection: After backfilling is complete, all pipe larger than 30 inches in diameter shall be tested for excessive deflection by measuring the actual inside vertical diameter. a. Deflection may be measured by Project Manager at any location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection are notacceptable. b. If deflection exceeds that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe as directed by Project Manager at no additional cost to the City or remove backfill and side support. Reround the pipe and properly replace compacted backfill and side support. Review cement mortar lining to assure that no harmful damage has occurred. C. Static Electricity: 1. Properly ground steel pipeline during construction as necessary to prevent build—up of static electricity. 2. Electrically test where required after installation is complete. D. Piping Exposed, 3 Inches and Smaller 1. Piping Layout a. Make provisions for expansion and contraction during normal operations. b. Provide unions to permit removal of equipment, pumps, and valves. c. Provide dielectric unions for connection of copper piping. 2. Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, using Drawings as guide. 3. Water Piping: Arrange so system can be completely drained. 4. Air Piping: Grade to points of drainage collection. E. Piping, Exposed, Larger than 3 Inches 1. Piping Layout a. Install as shown on the Drawings and per fabricator's shop drawings. b. In placing the pipe, hold pipe by one or more padded slings. Handle in a manner that will prevent damage to the pipe or the protective coating. Support pipe adequately while being fitted and joined with adjoining pipe section. c. After each section of pipe has been set into position, attach to the adjoining section as specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide drains and high point vents to facilitate pressuretesting. 3. Install valves with operator positioned to permit access for operation. 3.2 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVE GROUND AND IN VAULTS (EXPOSED) AND EPDXY LINING INTERNAL LINING SYSTEM A. Safety: Paints, coatings, and linings specified in this Section are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. B. Workmanship: 1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces for painting by using abrasive blasting. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet, newly -painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. Page 18 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 3. Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt bysteaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges, pits, welding and torch -cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4 -inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly -graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture -proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press -O -Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Project Manager for filing and future reference. d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences, or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Evaluate degree of cleanliness for surface preparation with the use of SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces, SSPC-V is 1. 7. Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. Test cleanliness by placing a 3/4 -inch by4-inch piece of clear Scotch type tape on blasted surface, then removing and placing the tape on a 3x5 white index card. Reclean areas exhibiting dust or residue. D. Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F; when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating; or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field -applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: a. Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs, sags, curtains, pinholes, orange peel, fish eyes, excessive overspray, or delaminations. b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow -out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end ofday. 3. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of undersurface occurs. 4. Cure a minimum of 24 hours at 77 degrees F before successive coats are applied. During curing process, provide force air ventilation in volume sufficient to maintain solvent vapor levels below the published threshold limit value. Apply successive coats within recoat threshold time as recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written communications. Brush blast joints of pipe which have been shop primed and are to receive intermediate and finish coats in field prior to application of additional coats. After interior coatings are applied, provide forced air ventilation in a sufficient volume and for a sufficient length of time to ensure proper curing before filling pipe with water. 3.3 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A. Tape Coating System: 1. Joint Protection Page 19 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction a. Coating field joints, tie—ins, and other field—welded joints: Provide application of approved insulating putty at belt step—offs, and two wraps of Field Joint Tape Primer: Furnished by tape manufacturer. b. At Contractor's option, apply approved special heat resistant tape system prior to internal welding of pipe. Coat entire pipe with shop—applied tape. Coat bell end with shop—applied heat—resistant tape. In field, fill joint step off area with insulating putty. Field apply two layers of field joint tape over joint followed by high shear strength outerwrap. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for field—applied tape coating. c. At Contractor's option, provide field—applied shrink—wrap coating system for coating field joints, tie—ins and other field welded joints. Apply heat—shrink sleeves prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible with coating system. Install heat—shrink joint sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide shrink—wrap systems consisting of primer, tape coating and polyurethane coating and high—strength application of Aqua—shield Wrap for pipeline. Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipelaying operations. Representative to advise Contractor and Project Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction methods. 2. Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C 209 around joint cutbacks except as modified. Field -welded joints: clean shop -primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer, and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a. Prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop -applied primer by abrasive blasting, solvent or other method as approved by Project Manager. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. b. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP 6 in accordance with AWWA C 209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating -system primer. c. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still "tacky" with 3 -inch minimum overlap over shop -applied coating. 3. Joint Tape a. Apply joint wrap tape to uncontaminated primer at proper roll body temperature. If necessary, store joint wrap material in a heated box up to point of application. b. Joint wrap material maybe applied to pipe in either a spiral or cigarette fashion dependent upon specification. Begin wrapping process 2 to 4 inches onto mill- applied pipe wrap and proceed wrinkle -free up over bell and across joint to spigot side pipe wrap. c. Apply joint wrap under machine tension of 5 to 10 pounds per inch width. Joint wrap width should narrow (neck down) as material is applied tightly around pipe. d. Apply first 1/3 and last 1/3 turn of joint material around pipe with less tension to prevent wrap crawl back. Overlap of joint wrap material and system's total thickness as specified in this specification section. e. End joint wrap process such that its final edge is directed downwards when pipe is placed in ditch to prevent backfill from pulling an exposed joint wrap edge. 4. At Project Manager's option, Contractor may apply heat shrink sleeves prior to internal welding of pipe using approved procedure compatible with coating system. Install heat shrink joint sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide Canusa Wrapid Sleeve or approved equal. Provide services of a technical representative of the manufacturer available on site at the beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative shall advise Contractor and Project Manager regarding installation, repairs, and general construction methods. Page 20 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Do not expose tape coatings or heat -shrinkable joint sleeves to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings, remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. 6. At option of Project Manager, Contractor may apply tape coating system prior to internal welding of pipe. Coat bell end with shop -applied Polyken #2036-25 heat resistant tape. Coat entire pipe with shop -applied Polyken #989-20, Polyken #955-30 and Polyken #956-30. In the field, install joint and fill step off area with Polyken #935 insulating putty. Field apply two layers of Polyken #930 field joint tape over joint followed by Polyklen #2055 high shear strength outer wrap. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for field applied tape coating. B. At option of Project Manager, coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C214. C. Cement -mortar Coating: AWWA C 205; 1 -inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.4 JOINTS AND JOINTING A. Rubber Gasketed Bell -and -Spigot Joints. 1. 0 -ring gasket shall have sufficient volume to approximately fill area of groove and gasket material shall be in accordance with AWWA C 200. Check each splice in a gasket by stretching gasket to at least twice original length of gasket. Visually check stretched splice by rotating 360 degrees. Reject splices showing visible separation or cracks. 2. Equalize rubber gasket cross section after rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe by inserting a tool or bar such as a large screwdriver under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. Lubricate gaskets with a nontoxic water- soluble lubricant before pipe units are joined. Fit pipe units together in a manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. Check gaskets after pipe sections are joined with a feeler gauge to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred at any point around circumference after joining. If displacement has occurred, remove pipe section and remake joint as if for new pipe. Remove old gasket and replace before remaking joint. B. Threaded 1. Comply with ANSI B2.1, N PT. 2. Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies, with not more than three threads exposed at each connection. 3. Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs. 4. Use joint compound or thread tape on male threads only. After having been set up, a joint must not be backed off unless the joint is completely broken, the threads cleaned, and new compound applied. C. Welded 1. All welds shall be sound and free from embedded scale or slag, shall have tensile strength across the weld not less than that of the thinner of the connected sections, and shall be watertight. All field welds shall comply with AWWA C206. 2. Use butt -welds for fabrication of bends and other specials. Use fillet welds for flange attachment in accordance with AWWA C207. 3. After installation of pipe, fittings, and specials, all unlined or uncoated ends adjacent to welded field joints, including the weld proper, shall be cleaned, primed, lined, and coated as specified for the pipe adjacent to the weld. Preparation of surfaces to be lined and coated shall be as stipulated for shop application of coal tar primers and enamels except that all foreign matter, including all damaged lining or coating materials, shall be removed by scraping, chipping, or brushing and the surfaces cleaned to bright metal free of all rust, slag, and scale by means of wire brushing or sandblasting. Entry for application of interior linings to unlined ends shall be from open ends. Pour holes shall not be provided. D. Flanged 1. Tighten flange bolts so gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed. Page 21 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. Do not distort flanges. 3. Flange bolts shall be coated with anti -seize compound. E. Flexible Couplings 1. Prepare ends of pipe square, removing all burrs from inside and outside pipe. 2. Prepare exterior surface of pipe in accordance with compression coupling manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install harness lugs on pipe as applicable. 4. Pipe gaps shall be as recommended by coupling manufacturerwith a maximum gap of 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Pipe exterior surface and interior surface of compression sleeve ring shall receive required protective coating prior to assembly. F. Grooved or Shouldered Type Couplings (Split Couplings) 1. Cut grooves clean and sharp without burrs or chuck marks. 2. Ream end of pipe after grooving and before assembly to remove burrs. 3. Pipe shall be free of indentations, projections, or roll marks from the end of pipe to the groove to provide a leak -tight seat for the gasket. 4. Lubricate gasket with manufacturer's furnished lubricant prior to assembly. 5. Split couplings used in lieu of flanges shall be of the rigid type. G. Shouldered 1. Assemble shoulder ring to pipe ends and weld. 2. Repair damaged pipe lining extending protective coating over pipe end and should ring. 3. Lubricate gasket with manufacturer's furnished lubricant prior to assembly. 3.5 FIELD -APPLIED CEMENT -MORTAR LINING A. Entrances Into Pipeline: 1. Establish a means to permit entry and exit of labor, materials and equipment necessary for progress of work, as approved by Project Manager. 2. Provide dikes and channeling for diversion of flood and drainage waters away from these openings in pipeline. Use temporary airtight covers over openings to provide proper curing conditions in completed sections of lined pipe. Where operation of equipment requires that an end of pipe be left open, install a temporary bulkhead inside pipe to eliminate a direct draft through pipe over completed sections. 3. Brace closure sections of pipeline left out to facilitate field lining above ground to conform as nearly as possible to shape of pipe in ground and then place cement - mortar lining by machine or hand trowel to same thickness as in adjoining machine - lined sections. Bulkhead sections immediately after being lined to maintain proper curing conditions for a period of not less than 48 hours before sections are installed in pipeline. Install these sections of steel pipe. 4. Coat exterior surface of buttstraps and any uncoated exterior surface area of steel pipe within excavations in accordance specifications. Place cement -mortar lining inside areas of joints in accordance with specifications. B. Mixing of Cement -mortar: Mix ingredients for cement -mortar for not less than 1-1/2 and not more than 6 minutes; use mortar promptly after mixing for lining pipe. Do not use mortar that has attained its initial for lining. Do not retemper mortar. Add water to mix last. C. Placing Cement -mortar Lining: 1. Complete joint work, backfill and welding before cement—mortar lining begins. After cement—mortar lining has cured hydrostatic testing of pipe can begin. 2. Provide provisions necessary for Project Manager to conduct inspections of work in safe and thorough manner during and after initial application of mortar and after necessary repairs made. Include, as minimum, space on application machine, and adequate lighting to inspect gross surface areas. 3. Comply with ASTM C494 and with manufacturer's recommendations when using chemical admixtures, bonding agents, accelerators, and other additives. 4. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease and loose mill scale and rust from interior surfaces of pipe, and scrape or brush surface with stiff bristle brush and/or water blast as may be necessary, and approved by Project Manager, to ensure clean surfaces for successful Page 22 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction application of cement—mortar lining. Interior surfaces to be approved by Project Manager prior to placing lining. 5. Provide cement—mortar lining uniform in thickness along entire length of pipe. Provide cement—mortar no less than 1/2—inch over all surfaces with tolerance of plus 1/8—inch, and no allowance for minus tolerance. 6. Mechanically control travel of machine and rates of discharge of mortar to produce uniform thickness of lining without segregation around perimeter and along length of pipe. 7. Check finished surface by placing 12—inch straightedge parallel to axis pipe along surface of straight section of lining. At no point will space between lined surface and straightedge be greater than 1/16—inch. 8. Provide smoother finished surface, within tolerances specified. Repair or replace surface irregularities including corrugations, ripples, or pits in any direction, to satisfaction of Project Manager. Remove defective lining material, including, sand pockets, voids, oversanded areas, blisters, delaminations, or unbounded areas, cracked areas, irregular surfaces, and unsatisfactorythin spots. Remove to pipe wall and area repaired to full thickness of mortar lining. 9. Repair cracks 1/16—inch and larger to satisfaction of Project Manager. 10. Place cement—mortar lining by a machine having following features: a. An applicator head which can be centered within pipe and which will centrifugally project mortar against wall of pipe at a high velocity producing a dense, uniformly distributed mortar on wall of pipe. b. Equipped with mechanically driven, rotating steel trowels that immediately follow applicator, providing a smooth, hard surface without spiral shoulders. Compensate for torque so that machine will sit true in pipe and trowel faces will not vary in angle with mortar face during a complete 360 -degree cycle. Clean trowels at frequent intervals to prevent accumulated mortar from obtaining initial set resulting in a sanded or unglazed finish. Continuously operate trowels during application of cement -mortar and forward progress of lining machine. c. Design applicator so that nothing will come in contact with troweled surface until it has attained final set, and so that forward progress of machine and mechanical placing of mortar can be controlled to assure a uniform thickness of lining. 11. Cement -mortar Lining: Adhere to steel at all points; finished thickness except that lining of bell end of pipe shall be thicker in order to fill depression and make a smooth surface. 12. Immediately prior to application of cement -mortar lining, sweep and clean off slime, dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and any other foreign materials. Free interior surface of pipe after cleaning of accumulated water on pipe wall or at joints. 13. After receiving its finish troweling, do not roughen lining by rebound material or by mortar direct from machine. 14. Temporarily close outlets in pipeline with easily removable stoppers to prevent spun mortar from being thrown into such openings. After lining is applied, remove stoppers from outlets and repair any lining damaged by removal of stoppers. Point outlet openings up to provide smooth flow. D. Hand Finishing: 1. Repair defective areas in machine -applied lining and unlined joints by hand patching to yield a lining equal to that required for machine -applied troweled lining. 2. Provide non -shrink grout for patching or lining joints as specified in this Section. 3. Clean defective areas of loose foreign material and moisten with water just prior to application of hand -applied mortar. 4. Use steel finishing trowels for hand application of cement -mortar. 5. Complete hand finishing required in a given pipe section not later than day following machine application of mortar lining to that particular pipe section, whether a normal working day or otherwise. Slow down or stop machine application of mortar lining to allow time for any hand patching. Page 23 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction E. Curing of Lining: Begin curing operations immediately after completing any portion of mortar lining. Close pipe by airtight bulkheads, and maintain a moist atmosphere in completed section of pipe to keep lining damp and to prevent evaporation of entrained water from mortar lining. Humidify any air introduced into pipe for ventilating or curing purposes and maintain a moist atmosphere inside pipe until Project Manager accepts the Work. 3.6 SMALL BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Branch connections 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be made with welding fittings with threaded outlets. Where there is some doubt as to the exact outlet size desired, but it is known that the size will be less than 1 inch, provide a 1 -inch outlet and bush down as required. B. Branch connections 3 inches through 12 inches in size shall be made with pipe nipples or with welding fittings. Pipe nipples for branch connections shall be black, standard weight, Schedule 40, seamless pipe conforming to ASTM A120. Steel pipe nipples and welding fittings shall be welded to the pipe and shall be reinforced as required to meet design and test requirements. C. Small branch connections shall be located so as not to interfere with joints, supports, or other details. D. Coordinate disinfection tap connections with specification Section 02514 and the City Water Production Department. 3.7 TESTING (EXCEPT MORTAR COATED PIPE) A. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for carrying out a pressure test on the pipelines. The procedures and method for carrying out the pressure tests shall be approved by the Engineer. The test gauge shall have minor graduations no greater than one percent of the specified test pressure. B. Make any taps and furnish all necessary caps, plugs, etc., as required in conjunction with testing a portion of the pipe between valves. Furnish a test pump, gauges, and any other equipment required in conjunction with carrying out the hydrostatic tests. C. All steel pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 02515. D. Testing shall take place in the presence of the Engineer. If leaks are discovered, they shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner and approved by the Engineer. E. Holiday Test: 1. Perform holiday test in accordance with NACE Standard Recommended Practice, RPO 188-90, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings. 2. Begin testing of completed coating after coating has sufficiently cured, usually one to 5 days. Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule. 3. For coating thickness of 20 mils or less, test with a wet sponge low -voltage holiday detector. For coating thickness in excess of 20 mils, test with a high-voltage holiday detector. Select test voltage as suggested in table below. MINIMUM VOLTAGES FOR HIGH VOLTAGE SPARK TESTING Total Dry Film Thickness (mils) Suggested Inspection (V) 20 to 40 3,000 41 to 55 4,000 56 to 80 6,000 4. For large—diameter waterlines, perform test procedure in accordance with NACE Standard RP -02-74. Perform electrical holiday test with 60—cycle current audio detector. Use test voltage below: Page 24 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Total Coating Thickness Test Voltage (Mils) (Volts) 20 6,000 30/35 7,500 50 9,000 70 11,500 80 12,000 5. For large -diameter water mains, include cost of inspection described in Paragraph 3.8, Inspection, in contract unit price for water lines. Furnish copies of all certified inspection reports to Project Manager for review. F. Adhesion Tests: Adhesion testing may be directed by Project Manager on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section or for any other condition considered to adversely affect adequate adhesion. Perform adhesion test on pipe in accordance with ASTM D4541. 3.8 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor is responsible for quality control of coatings and linings applications and the testing and inspection stipulated in this Section. Project Manager is responsible for quality assurance and reserves the right to inspector acquire services of an independent third -party inspector who is fully knowledgeable and qualified to inspect surface preparation and application of high-performance coatings at all phases of coatings and linings work, field- or shop -applied. Contractor is responsible for proper application and performance of coatings and linings whether or not Project Manager provides such inspection. B. Cement Mortar Lining and Joint Finish for large diameter water lines: Finished surface of lining and joint to be comparable to surface rubbed with No. 16 Carborundum stone. Rub joint mortar sufficiently to bring past to surface, to remove depressions and projections, and to produce a smooth, dense surface. Add cement to form surface past as necessary. Leave interior with a clean, neat and uniform -appearing finish. 3.9 FIELD REPAIR PROCEDURES AND SPECIAL FITTINGS APPLICATION FOR CEMENT MORTAR LINING A. Areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter: patch honeycomb and minor defects in concrete surfaces with non -shrink grout. Repairdefects by cutting out unsatisfactory material and replacing with non -shrink grout, securely bonded to existing concrete. Finish to make junctures between patches and existing concrete as inconspicuous as possible. After each patch has stiffened sufficiently to allow for greatest portion of shrinkage, strike off grout flush with surrounding surface. B. Areas greater than 6 inches in diameter: 1. Remove defective lining down to bare steel by chipping, making sure care is taken to prevent further lining damage. Ends of lining where defective lining is removed are to be left square and uniform not feathered. 2. Clean bare steel with wire brush to remove loose or other foreign matter. 3. Remove existing wire reinforcement and replace. Overlap new reinforcement to existing reinforcement by 1/2—inch. Secure reinforcement, against wall of pipe, at frequent intervals, by tack welding to pipe. 4. Prepare cement mortar mixture. Mixture to compose of Portland Type II cement, sand, and water. Proportions of sand to cement not to exceed 3 parts sand to 1 part cement, by weight. Use only enough water to obtain proper placement characteristics. Set up time before mixture is to be discarded is to be no longer than 1/2 hour. Non -shrink grout may also be used. Do not use combination of cement mortar and non -shrink grout within same repair. Page 25 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 5. Apply WELD—CRETE, or approved equal, concrete bonding agent to bare steel and interface of existing lining. After bonding agent is applied to steel and lining new mix must be applied within 10 minutes. 6. Apply cement mortar to repair area 1/2—inch thick then hand trowel to achieve smooth dense finish, making sure wire is not left exposed. To ensure proper thickness while placing new mortar, check thickness with 1/2—inch long wire gauge. 7. Curing: Place plastic sheeting over repair area, use tape to adhere plastic to area surrounding repair area. Let cure for 4 days then remove plastic sheeting. END OF SECTION Page 26 of 26 Steel Pipe, Fittings and Specials — 40 23 10 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 10 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 40 23 11 POLYURETHANE COATINGS ON STEEL PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Two -component polyurethane coating system for use as external coating for steel. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost of polyurethane coatings in contract unit prices for steel pipe. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AWWA C 210 - Standard for Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. B. ASTM D 522 - Standard Test Method for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. C. SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. D. SSPC-PA Guide 3 - A Guide to Safety in Paint Application. E. SSPC-PS Guide 17.00 - Guide for Selecting Urethane Painting Systems. F. SSPC-PS10 - Near -White Blast Cleaning. 1.4 SAFETY A. Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane coatings and repair materials listed in this Section. B. Safety requirements stated in this specification and in related sections apply in addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters. C. Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 3; SSPC-PS Guide 17.00; Coating Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 02. B. Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets and technical information for approval, prior to delivery of pipe. C. Obtain from coating manufacturer and submit coating "affidavit of compliance" to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in factory and in accordance with manufacturer's minimum requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use standard containers to prevent gelling, thickening deleteriously or forming of gas in closed containers within period of one year from date of manufacture. B. Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than one year. C. Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating manufacturer. D. Store material onsite in enclosures, out of direct sunlight in warm, ventilated and dry area. E. Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening or other action which may lead to product contamination. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COATING MATERIAL A. CORROPIPE 3000 — Ultra High Design Life Pipeline Coating (two -component) or approved equal; mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1. For areas less than or equal to 6 inches in diameter, brush apply. Page 1 of 4 Polyurethane Coatings On Steel Pipe - 40 23 11 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2. For areas greater than 6 inches in diameter, spray apply. B. Coating System: Use Type V system which is 2 -package polyisocyanate, polyol -cured urethane coating, mixed in 1:1 ratio at time of application. Components shall be balanced viscosities in their liquid state and not require agitation during use. C. Exterior Coating Material: CORROPIPE 3000, manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc. D. Cured Coating Properties: 1. Conversion to Solids by Volume: 99 percent plus or minus 1 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F and plus 150 degrees F. 3. Minimum Adhesion: 1,800± 200 psi for 4 hours; 3,000 psi for 24 hours. 4. Cure Time: For handling in 20 minute at 70 degrees F, and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Maximum Specific Gravities: Polyisocyanate resin, 1.20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi. 7. Hardness: 75 plus or minus 5 Shore D at 70 degrees F. 8. Flexibility Resistance: ASTM D 522 using 1 -inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days. Perform testing on test coupons held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified in this Paragraph. 2.2 REPAIR AND TOUCHUP MATERIAL A. CORROPIPE 3000 (Two -component, brush applied, or approved equal). Mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove deposits of oil, grease or other organic contaminates before blast cleaning by using solvent wash as specified in SSPC-PA Guide 3. Clean and dry surfaces making them completely dry, free of moisture, dust, grit, oil, grease or other deleterious substances prior to application of coating. B. Exterior and Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SPI0, near -white metal blast cleaning. Blast with clean, hard, sharp cutting abrasives with no steel or cast iron shot in mix. 3.2 THICKNESS A. External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 40 mils. B. Thickness Determinations: Use Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge as described in SSPC-PA2 specification. Individual readings below 90 percent of specified minimum are not acceptable. Average individual spot readings (consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches of each other) less than 95 percent of minimum are not acceptable. Average of all spot readings less than minimum thickness specified are not acceptable. 3.3 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE COATING A. Equipment: Two -component, 1:1 mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. B. Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. Temperature of surface shall not be less than 60 degrees F during application. C. Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet requirements of Paragraph 2.1D, Cured Coating Properties, when relative humidity exceeds 80 percent. D. Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. E. Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple -pass, one -coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. F. Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush -blast or thoroughly sand coating surface. Blow -off cleaning using clean, dry, high pressure compressed air. G. Cure at ambient temperature above 0 degrees F. Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure as follows: Page 2 of 4 Polyurethane Coatings On Steel Pipe - 40 23 11 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Ambient Temperature Minimum Full Cure Time Over 70 degrees F 50 to 70 degrees F 0 to 50 degrees F 7 days 9 days 12 days 3.4 JOINTS A. Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell socket and outside of spigot. B. Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe exterior: Minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch), maximum of 10 mils (0.010 inch). Maximum 10 mils may be exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded. 3.5 INSPECTION A. Project Manager may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities. B. Secure approval of surface preparation by coating manufacturer's representative prior to coating application. C. Holiday Inspection: Conform to AWWA C 210, Section 5.3.3.1. Follow coating manufacturer's recommendation. Conduct inspection any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with Paragraph 3.7, Repair and Field Touchup. 3.6 PIPE INSTALLATION A. When required by Project Manager, provide services of manufacturer's representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting, coatings repairs, and general construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings. B. Use nylon straps, padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices. See Section 402310 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for additional requirements. C. Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into trench, conduct visual and holiday inspection. Repair defects in coating system before pipe is installed. 3.7 REPAIR AND FIELD TOUCHUP A. Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with factory application of polyurethane coating requirements specified in this Section, excluding equipment requirements. B. Repair Procedure - Holidays: 1. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 2. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper (40 grit). 3. Apply one coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. C. Repair Procedure - Field Cuts or Large Damage: 1. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating. 2. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 3. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper (40 grit). Feather edges and include overlap of 1 inch to 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. 4. Apply thick coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least 1 inch of roughened area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. D. Repair Procedure - Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds: 1. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection. 2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit grinding wheel. 3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment. Page 3 of 4 Polyurethane Coatings On Steel Pipe - 40 23 11 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 4. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F, apply protective coating repair material to weld, exposed pipe surface and damaged areas of polyurethane coating. 5. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 Polyurethane Coatings On Steel Pipe - 40 23 11 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 11 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 43 21 01 HORIZONTAL SPLIT -CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP(S) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and completely install, put in operation and field test horizontally mounted, axial split case single stage, double suction, dual volute, constant and variable speed, centrifugal pumps, motors, and vibration monitoring system as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. Electric motors shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section and shall be as specified in Section 26 20 10. The pump Manufacturer shall coordinate the motor design with the VFD supplier. The VFDs will be supplied by others. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for horizontal split -case centrifugal pump(s). Include the cost for this work in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 03; however, anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section. B. Surface preparation and shop priming is included in Section 09 96 10. C. Field Vibration and Torsional Resonance testing costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Refer to Part 3 of this section for additional detail. D. Instrumentation construction as specified in Division 40 and as shown on the Drawings. E. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division 40. F. Electrical work per Division 26 and the related Drawings. Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives are included in Section 26 29 23.01. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Certified dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 2. Certified foundation, pump support and anchor bolt plans and details. 3. Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump installation. 4. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the detail specifications. 5. Total weight of pumping unit. 6. A statement of guarantee that all required analyses as specified in Paragraph 1.6 E through 1.6 J below have been completed and that the specified limitations will be met. B. Design Data 1. Manufacturer's certified rating curves (including indication of the AOR and POR), to satisfy the specified design conditions, showing pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSH3) across the entire range of operation coupled with the required NPSHA margin. Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and speed and include shut off head. This information shall be prepared specifically for the pump proposed. Page 1 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Additionally, catalog sheets showing a family of curves shall be provided separately from the performance curve. 2. Pump design shall be for variable speed operation. The pump shall be designed to operate at reduced speeds to achieve the low flow limits specified in the Pump Schedule located at 1.7 A. Include pump performance at five reduced speeds. 3. Provide actual WR2 for each pump and motor being supplied. C. Test Reports 1. Certified motor test data as described in Section 26 20 10. 2. Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated Hp, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Submit a certified statement from the motor manufacturer that the motors are capable of continuous operation on the power supply from the variable frequency drives to be furnished without affecting their design life for bearings or windings. 3. A schedule of the date of shop testing and delivery of the equipment to the job site. 4. Description of pump factory test procedures and equipment. 5. Pump factory test report. 6. Description of pump field test procedures and equipment. 7. Field test report. 8. Rotodynamic analysis report(s). 9. Vibration report. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section as provided in Section 01 33 06. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the latest version of published standards of the following, as applicable: 1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 7. American Welding Society (AWS) 8. Anti -Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 9. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 11. National Electrical Code (NEC) 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 14. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 16. American Water Works Association (AWWA) B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the pumps, motors, couplings, and base plates shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump Manufacturer. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping system including pumps, motors, variable speed drives, base plates and controls as specified. B. The equipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of Page 2 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) - 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction such equipment similar to the applications stated in Paragraphs 1.1 and 1.7. Units specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest version of Hydraulic Institute Standards, except where otherwise specified herein. D. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. E. Prior to manufacture, submit for approval vibration analyses engineering reports outlined in this Part to demonstrate that the specified limitations will be met. For the dynamic analysis described, minimum and maximum operating speeds will be in accordance with the operating speeds required to satisfy the conditions of operation specified in Section 1.7. The pump manufacturer shall perform the dynamic analysis presented in the following paragraph. F. Structural dynamic analysis of the combined pump, motor, and baseplate. — The structural dynamic analysis shall predict no first or second bending mode frequencies within a range from 25 percent below minimum operating speed to 25 percent above maximum operating speed. G. Lateral rotodynamic analysis — The lateral rotodynamic analysis shall identify and predict that the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed or 25 percent below the minimum pump speed. Any pump component excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. H. Torsional rotodynamic analysis shall identify and predict that no torsional natural frequencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range. Any torsional rotor dynamic frequency within the above stated margin must have a forced response evaluation performed. The forces associated with the torsional rotor dynamic frequency within the above stated margin shall not reduce the rotor fatigue life. Any lateral rotodynamic frequencies not satisfying the ±25% margins will not result in a forced damped response that will allow vibration amplitudes to exceed the established limits at any operating speed. Speed avoidance settings in the operational strategy will not be considered as an acceptable solution. Vibration amplitude measured in the field shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4 latest edition. The pump manufacturer shall perform both lateral and torsional critical speed analyses to identify and ensure that (a) the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed and that (b) no torsional natural frequencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range and that any blade excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. Prior to manufacture, a report shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval indicating that the specified limitations will be met. J. Vibration, when measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on any pump or motor bearing housing, shall not exceed limits set by Hydraulic Institute Standard 9.6.4-2009 at any speed between maximum speed and minimum speed as defined by the hydraulic conditions. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The pumps shall be horizontal axial split case single stage centrifugal dual volute pumps with double suction enclosed type impeller with stable constantly rising curve to shut off head, renewable casing/impeller rings, flexible coupling and one-piece rigid structural steel base plate under the pump and driving motor. B. The pumping units depicted and specified herein will be used to pump finished potable water from the O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant (ONSWTP) to different hydraulic grades within the City of Corpus Christi water distribution system. C. Pumping units start and stop against a closed discharge valve and accordingly shall be capable of operating at shut-off head conditions for sustained periods of up to 1 minute duration without damage and without requiring increased preventive maintenance efforts. D. Key design conditions and other data are shown in the following table. Page 3 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Pump Schedule To Section 43 21 01 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pumps Pump Designation HSP -13, 14, 16, 17 HSP -12, 15 Capacity (gpm) (Guarantee Point 1) 13,700 13,700 Head (ft) (Guarantee Point 1) 260.8 260.8 Minimum Head (ft) at full speed 179 179 Capacity (gpm) at minimum head 24,500± 5% 24,500± 5% Minimum Shut -Off Head (ft) 288 288 Maximum NPSHR (ft) 40 40 Fluid Pumped Potable Water Potable Water Drive Horsepower (HP) 1500 1500 Constant or Adjustable Speed Constant Speed Variable Speed Maximum Speed (rpm) 900 900 Minimum Speed (rpm) 890 As required by minimum flow condition specified elsewhere. Elevation of Minimum Clearwell Level (ft) 63.5 (bottom of GST floor is 51.50 ft) 63.5 (bottom of GST floor is 51.50 ft) Elevation of Maximum Clearwell Level (ft) 69.00 69.00 Pump Impeller Centerline Elevation (ft) 48.80 48.80 Maximum Water Temperature (°F) 95 95 Minimum Water Temperature (°F) 40 40 Minimum Pump Efficiency (%) @ Guarantee Point 1 87.2% 87.2% Motor 4160V/3 Ph/60 Hz, TEFC, inverter duty 4160V/3 Ph/60 Hz, TEFC, inverter duty Typical FLOWSERVE Make and Model No. 400-LNN-800, 890 rpm 400-LNN-800, 890 rpm E. Where total head (TH) is referred to in conjunction with the specific discharge requirements, it shall be understood to consist of the sum of the pressure head plus the velocity head, in feet, at a distance of 3 pipe diameters downstream of the discharge nozzle of the pump minus the pressure head and the velocity head at the suction nozzle of the pump. The efficiency of the pump shall be understood to be based upon total head as just defined. F. All materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall be suitable for potable water. Materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall not contain more than 8.0% lead. All pump and motor maintenance and any future pump or motor removal and replacement activities shall be accomplishable utilizing the 10 -ton bridge crane specified in Section 41 22 25. Page 4 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. Store equipment indoors and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until approved by the Engineer in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti -friction bearings, if prelubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and startup of the machine in which they are used. Anti -friction bearings which are not prelubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage, while waiting completion of installation and start up, by the application of Exxon, Rust Ban No. 392 or equal treatment. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all special tools and test equipment required for the proper servicing of all equipment as specified in Section 01 33 06. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. C. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump model. 1. Complete set of wearing rings for one pump (two impeller and two case wear rings). 2. Two complete sets of packing rings and two sets of mechanical seal repair kits, as required. Provide bronze split -packing glands and bronze split lantern rings necessary to convert to packed stuffing boxes on one pump. 3. Complete set of gaskets and 0 rings. 4. One set of pump bearings. D. A current spare part price list for all manufacturer recommended spare parts. Prices shall remain in effect for a period not less than one year after start-up and final acceptance of each pumping unit. E. Crate and deliver spare parts in substantial wood or painted steel boxes with hinged covers. Clearly and indelibly identify the contents of each box on its exterior with stenciled paint or lamacoid plastic labels. Each part shall be sealed, wrapped or otherwise protected from corrosion during storage. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The pumping unit (i.e. pump, motor, coupling, base, and other pump OEM supplied accessories) will have a 24 month warranty after Owner acceptance. This warranty is for defects in workmanship and or materials on the above mentioned equipment and excludes failure due to erosion, corrosion, and wear, and is further qualified by the requirement that the Contractor properly install the unit and the Owner properly operate and maintain the unit. Upon notice of defect the Contractor will promptly remove the part or unit from service and load it on pump OEM's truck at the jobsite. The pump OEM will promptly repair and/or replace the part or unit and return it to the jobsite at which point the Contractor will unload and install the part or unit at his expense. Time lost while the unit is unavailable will be added to the end of the existing warranty. Page 5 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 PART 2 PRODUCTS Technical Specifications for Construction 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flowserve, ITT -Goulds. 2.2 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. The pumps and motors shall be designed and built for 24 hour continuous service at any and all points within the range of operation listed in Part 1.7, without overheating, without cavitation, without exceeding motor nameplate HP (without exceeding service factor), and without excessive vibration or strain. C. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially constructed to meet the specified requirement. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and adjustment. D. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Once levelled, aligned, and anchored, pump skid shall be filled with high strength non -shrink epoxy grout. Furnish anchor bolt calculations considering all forces and moments for approval. E. Each major piece of equipment shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles and power and service factors. 2.3 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The pumps shall operate throughout the entire operating range, within the vibration limits specified in Paragraph 1.6 F above. B. Flow separation at the inlet of impeller shall not be permitted when it could result in damage to the impeller. Obvious, excessive hydraulic noise that is characteristic of flow separation shall be deemed as evidence that flow separation is occurring at the level that will cause damage. 2.4 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Casings shall be close grained ASTM A48 Class 35 cast iron of suitable cross section and suitably ribbed to withstand all stresses and strains of service at full operating pressure. Casings shall be of the double volute type split on the horizontal center line with the side suction and discharge nozzle cast integrally with the lower half. Removal of the upper half of the casing must allow the rotating element to be removed without disconnecting the suction and discharge flanges. Lifting eyes shall be cast into the upper casing. Flange and casings shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psig. The casing shall be provided with tapped and plugged (removable) vent, drain and gauge connections. Suction and discharge connections shall be 125 lbs ANSI Standard flat face flanges positioned as indicated on the Drawings. B. Impellers shall be of the enclosed double suction type of ASTM A744 Grade CF -8M (Type 316L stainless steel, Grade CF3M - certified analysis of the impeller pour metal required). Impeller shall be cast in one piece and shall be two -plane dynamically balanced to grade ISO 1940, G6.3 on a mandrel, and then two -plane dynamically balanced to Grade G2.5 on the pump shaft. Rotation of the impeller shall correspond to the pump discharge orientation as indicated on the Drawings. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and firmly held in place. The arrangement shall be such that the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse rotation. C. Wearing Rings 1. The pumps shall be provided with removable 13% chromed hardened steel wearing rings for both the casing and impeller, with the wearing surfaces parallel to the axis of Page 6 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction rotation. The impeller wearing ring system shall be designed to compensate for a minimum of 1/4 inch wear. 2. Wearing rings shall be securely fastened to prevent any relative motion and designed for easy replacement. 3. Furnish the casing wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA -15 300-350 Bhn hardness. 4. Furnish the impeller wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA -15 200-250 Bhn hardness. D. Each pump shall be equipped with John Crane, A.W. Chesterton, or Flowserve split -type mechanical seals furnished with ceramic stationary and carbon rotating seal faces. 1. The water seal connections on the pump(s) shall be connected to the pump discharge volute. The seal water pipes shall be sized to provide sufficient, but not excessive, seal water rate per the pump manufacturer's recommendations. E. The pump thrust bearings shall be of the heavy duty double row anti friction type arranged for oil lubrication designed in accordance with AFBMA Standards for a minimum B 10 life of 100,000 hours. Bearing housings shall be complete with constant level oiler and sight -level indicator. Bearing temperatures at an ambient of 104°F shall not exceed 200°F when measured by RTD without the addition of external cooling. Removable bearing housings shall be supplied with 360° mounting via a register fit, or 180° mounting, bolted and doweled to the pump bearing brackets cast integral with the lower half casing. F. Pump shaft(s) shall be of heat treated alloy steel, rigid shaft type and of sufficient size to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor, accurately machined over the entire length and free from harmful and damaging vibrations. The shaft(s) shall be protected from wear in the stuffing box areas by renewable shaft sleeves of 316 stainless steel. The sleeves shall be sealed to prevent leakage between the sleeve and the shaft. Shrink fit shaft sleeves will not be acceptable. The sleeves shall be key -driven. The use of glued sleeves to prevent leakage is not acceptable. G. Furnish and install tapped holes in the suction and discharge flanges or nozzles and 1/2 inch copper pipe and nipples complete with quarter turn bronze plug valves for use in connecting pressure gauges. Nipples shall be of such length and provided with elbows if necessary so that a pressure gauge may be easily installed and read. Also, plumb a 1" casing drain to edge of pump baseplate using copper pipe and fittings and a bronze gate valve. Contractor to route the pump drain through 1" schedule 80 PVC pipe to nearby floor drain. Securely clamp the drain pipe to the floor to avoid creating a trip hazard. H. The pumps shall be provided with two mineral oil (NSF -61 listed) filled suction and discharge pressure gauges with a 1/4 inch NPT inlet and 2.5 inch dials. The suction gauges shall be of the compound type to indicate both vacuum and pressure and be graduated to read 30 psig positive pressures and 30 inch mercury negative pressures. The discharge gauges shall be graduated from 0 to 200 psig. The gauges shall be connected to the pump suction and discharge nozzle taps. All fittings and cocks shall be red brass. The pressure gauges shall be equal to Figure 1980 Solfrunt standard gauges, Model 1500, byAmtek, U.S. Gauge Division. Plumb gauges to a gauge bracket that supports the gauges side-by-side and located the gauge centerlines to coincide with the pump shaft centerline. I. The pump(s) shall be capable of temporary operation at and near shut off head during the first minute, maximum, opening and closing of the pump discharge control valve as the pump starts and stops. J. The pump and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to successfully withstand a maximum turbining speed of the unit resulting from backflow through the pump of 150 percent of the design operating speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head equal with the duty point, whichever is higher. 2.5 PUMP DRIVE SYSTEM A. Each pump shall be driven by a horizontal solid shaft squirrel cage induction electric motor with a horsepower and speed as specified in Paragraph 1.7 above, and shall meet all the requirements of Section 26 20 10. B. All motors shall be identical in make and manufacture and compatible with the VFDs specified in Section 26 29 23.01. Page 7 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction C. The pump motors shall be suitable for driving the pumps continuously over the entire pumping range. The pump motors shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The motors shall be constructed and guaranteed to withstand runaway reverse speed equal to 150 percent of synchronous speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head equal with the duty point, whichever is higher. D. Each pump shall be directly connected to its driver by means of a Rexnord-Thomas flexible disc spacer -type coupling, suitably sized to transmit the required driving torque and to accommodate unavoidable shaft misalignment. The coupling shall be designed to accommodate slight shaft misalignments, absorb shock, vibration, and pulsation. Coupling shall accept load reversals with minimum backlash. Disc packs shall be stainless steel. Other surfaces (except bores and keyways) shall have a manganese phosphate corrosion resistant coating. 2.6 BASE PLATES A. The pump and driving motor shall be mounted on an extended fabricated carbon steel structural steel base plate (bent form bases not acceptable), with provision to collect leakage and shall be of sufficient size and rigidity to support the unit and prevent harmful or damaging vibration. The baseplate design shall meet ANSI/HI 1.3-2009 Rotodynamic Pumps for Design and Application, and in particular the grouted fabricated steel baseplate requirements. Demonstrate compliance with this specification requirement at time of submittal. Post weld heat treatment is required to stress relieve the base prior to machining. Furnish a certificate of compliance from the heat treating sub -vendor as part of the quality assurance package. Machine equipment mounting surfaces flat and parallel to one -another. A 1 -inch drain tap and Type 304 stainless steel pipe nipple shall be provided. The pump and motor skid drain shall be piped to the closest floor drain using schedule 10 Type 304 stainless steel piping. The steel base shall be anchored to the level surface of a concrete pad with suitably sized Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Design base such that Contractor can place non -shrink epoxy grout within the baseplate and the motor box without air pockets. See standard mechanical details on the Drawings. 2.7 VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM A. Provide a factory installed vibration monitoring system as described below, and as shown on the P&ID drawings of the plan sheets. The pump packager shall include eight (8) transducer for unfiltered vibration amplitude measurement. Four on the pump and four on the motor. B. Furnish transducers, vibration monitors, interconnect cabling, aluminum conduit, and local terminal boxes (NEMA IVX stainless steel) pre -mounted at the factory. Interconnect cabling and conduit from the local terminal boxes to PLCs shall be provided by Contractor. C. Vibration Monitoring Points. 1. Motor: Provide two vibration transducers on the X and Y axes at each bearing housing. 2. Pump: Provide two vibration transducers on the X and Y axes at each bearing housing. D. Acceptable manufacturers 3. Metrix E. Features 1. Provide a Metrix model 440 solid state switch for external transducer with two alarm set points, a 4 to 20 mA output with a scale range of 0.1 to 1.5 in/sec rms. Input power to be 115Vac 1 ph 60Hz. 2. Furnish general purpose accelerometer with a frequency range of 0.5 to 10kHz with a range of 50g with a 100mV/g output. Accelerometer shall be packaged in a 316 stainless steel case that is electrically isolated from the sensing circuit. Use non -armored cabling between the transducer and the switch. Run all cables through aluminum conduit between transducer and switch. 3. Furnish isolated power supply enclosure with individual circuits each with it's own adjustable time delay. 2.8 SHOP TESTING A. The Engineer shall witness the factory test and inspect all equipment to be furnished under this Section, prior to shipment from point of manufacture. Page 8 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1. A complete test report for each pump, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least all information required in Paragraphs 1.4 and 1.6 above, and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report, shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the pumps are shipped. B. Each pump being furnished in this Section shall be factory tested with one of the job motors in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Certified copies of the Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied prior to conducting a pump performance test. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the Engineer at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. Manufacturer to provide travel, accommodations, and meals for two people for the anticipated duration of the testing. All testing, required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. 1. Each pump's head vs capacity shall be full speed tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as listed in Paragraph 2.2 above. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded at shut off head. Sufficient test point readings shall be made to establish complete head flow capacity, efficiency and brake horsepower curves for each pump. 2. In addition, one pump shall be tested at three additional equally spaced speeds between minimum and maximum speeds using the test lab variable speed drive. 3. All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. 4. Test each pump for NPSHR at reduced speed. Generate a four point NPSH3 curve that includes one point within 10 percent of the rated condition -of -service, and one point within 10% of the maximum flow rate. C. Pump motor tests as specified in Section 26 20 10 shall be submitted for approval by Engineer prior to shipping. D. Pump Test Acceptance Grade for SHOP TEST shall be GRADE 1U per ANSI/HI 14.6 - 2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Design/Guarantee Points). 2.9 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIMING A. Each pump, and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finished coated in accordance with Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Color shall be "Barr Blue" and an adequate supply of touch up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Coordinate with motor supplier to match the motor to the pump color. B. For pump interior surfaces apply Belzona 1341 N Superglidemetal coating for potable water to the casting wetted parts to improve efficiency. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans. B. Qualified supervisory services, including manufacturers' engineering representatives, shall be provided for a minimum of 10 man days to ensure that the work is done in a manner fully approved by the respective equipment manufacturer. The pump manufacturer's representatives shall specifically supervise the installation and alignment of the pump with the driver, baseplate leveling (including coupling alignment) pre -grout and post -grout, the alignment of the connecting piping and the installation of the field installed mechanical seal. If Page 9 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction there are difficulties in the startup or operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the City. Services of the manufacturer's representatives and training shall be provided when the first pump is started, with follow up visits upon startup of each subsequent pump. C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the Engineer. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. D. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of his/her equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.3 FIELD TESTS A. Perform such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps and motors and variable speed drives conform to the capacities specified shall be performed. A 30 day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified at no additional costs to the Owner. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above, and certified results of tests shall be submitted. If all required testing procedures are not possible by pumping into the system, then bypass pumping shall be employed as necessary to facilitate testing. The Contractor shall provide, calibrate and install all temporary gauges and flow meters, shall make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 30 days prior to testing. The field performance tests shall report clearwell water level, pump operating speed, pump suction and discharge pressure, position of suction and discharge valves, pump motor amperage and voltage, and flow rate readings when the test is performed. The calibration certificates of the temporary instruments used in the test shall be included in the field test report for submittal. B. After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the Contractor shall retain the services of Machine Dynamics, Inc. (contact Victor Wowk, P.E. at 505-898-2094, victor@machinedyn.com) or Engineering Dynamics Incorporated (contact Troy Feese, P.E. at 210-492-9100, troy_feese@engdyn.com) who are testing firms to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each unit, including both "Bump Tests" and X -Y vibration profiles and field torsional critical speed test, to (a) prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and natural frequency analyses and (b) prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports, when operating at any speed within the specified operating range. A written report shall be submitted including a CAD sketch of the unit indicating where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak -to -peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency and (c) peak velocity level, in inches per second. The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problems encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. C. If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with this Section. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action and retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. D. The analysis indicated in Paragraph 3.3B above shall be repeated after six months after the signature testing. A report shall be prepared comparing the results of the six month tests with the results of the signature tests. Significant worsening of the vibration, to be determined by the Engineer, during the six month tests shall require corrective action and retesting. E. The results of ALL pump tests performed under this section shall be submitted in Final O&M Manual. END OF SECTION Page 10 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 12 • m ca v E m In m E 0 O. 0 2,..41 o a.-. o ; a ; Q Q�, O 7 4 O 7 . a.,-: m d 0 aa'❑ ag: aa° . a -e❑ a gam, a.a a.d a.'c om n D. -:,''`f"' 9v Ta o0 .12 a !F f6 ,,,.0iE m.N ti lR N N [0 oR (6 o 0 3 153 � W Uy)C , 8 f!) Q m ON ib 0 v0. 41 V Ino N C 0 C0 UJ C CRL2❑ coutNci caws© rnw2o rnwNn co I 1 1 N N N r E41 E c c.� cTI 6 0 a E Q N i/ R� (ii) Hal Page 11 of 11 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pump(S) — 43 21 01 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 12 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 43 21 02 REHABILITATION OF HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to inspect, rehabilitate to like new condition and return to operation horizontally mounted split case single stage High Service Pump Building No. 2 pumps, and motors as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. It is intended that the pumps shall be removed from service and shipped to pump refurbisher's shop for inspection and rehabilitation prior to returning to service. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not; shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during inspection, field testing, and startup of each unit. C. This is a performance based specification. It is the intent of this project to restore the performance to like new condition meeting the performance and efficiency requirements as specified. The impellers furnished shall be factory witness performance tested in a new pump volute. The pump OEM shall guarantee performance to equal the performance of a new unit. D. The rehabilitated pump test will be the condition of performance acceptance. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps as specified herein shall be as defined in Part D — Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01, Bid Form. Include the cost for this work as an Additive Alternate bid item. B. Payment for Repair of High Service Pump Building No. 2 pump motors as specified herein shall be as defined in Part D — Additive Alternate No. 2 of Section 00 30 01, Bid Form, under Item D2 — Allowance for HS2 Pump Motor Repair. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Manufacturer's Services are included in Division 40. B. Equipment Checkout, Field Testing and Functional Testing is included in Division 40. C. Acceptance Testing is included in Division 40. D. Vendor Training is included in Section Division 40. E. Field Vibration and Torsional Resonance testing cost shall be borne by 3rd party firm purchased by the Pump Refurbisher. Refer to Part 3.5E of this section for additional detail. F. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shall be furnished by the Contractor under this Section. The Contractor and Pump Refurbisher shall together inspect the baseplate anchor bolts, grout, and concrete foundation. Provide a report describing the condition of each, and any recommended replacement. G. Shop Priming is included in Section 09 91 10. Finish painting is included in Section 09 96 00. H. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 40. SCADA input and output signal requirements for monitoring/control are further defined in the P&ID Drawings, Instrumentation Drawings, and Division 40. I. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division 40. J. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) are specified in Section 26 29 23.01. The pump OEM shall perform a torsional analysis using the new impeller in the rotor to identify any excitation frequencies from the VFD. The VFD OEM will furnish their harmonic analysis for this review. K. Other electrical work except as hereinafter specified is included in Division 26 and the related Drawings. Page 1 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with this Section, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Pump Refurbisher shall supply information documenting compliance with the quality assurance requirements as specified under Section 1.6 Quality Assurance. Failure to comply with all Quality Assurance requirements as described herein will disqualify the pump refurbisher from performing the work. 2. Pump Refurbisher will present (for review and Owner acceptance) an example pump inspection report that includes an outline of the anticipated format and a description of the anticipated level of detailed information and digital photography (with photo annotations) anticipated to be submitted for each pump as specified herein. Report shall indicate as observed tolerances as compared to factory specs for all items. This report will be reviewed and approved by the Owner and Engineer prior to submitting the first pump inspection report. 3. Copies of the inspection report, list of findings, recommendations, and estimate of opinion of repair costs for additional items are included in the Base Bid. 4. Repair costs for items not included in the Base Bid scope of work shall be determined as identified in Part 1.2. 5. Certified factory dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 6. Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump re- installation; as applicable. B. Design Data 1. Provide original manufacturer's certified rating curves with the inspection report as available, to document the original design conditions, showing pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSHR). Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and include shut off head. This information shall be specifically for the pump that is to be rehabilitated. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. C. Test Reports 1. Certified motor test data as described in Section Division 40. 2. Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated HP, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at 1/2, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Provide the original motor submittal for record. 3. A schedule of inspection of the disassembled pump at the Pump Refurbisher facility by the Engineer, City, and Construction Manager if elected by the City. 4. Provide a factory test procedure with the submittal documents. Plan a pump performance test per Hydraulic Institute Standard ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Grade 1U (no negative tolerance) as specified in Table 14.6.3.4. A schedule of the date of Factory Witness Testing. Place a shipping hold on impellers until approval of test report by Engineer. 5. Furnish a field pre -inspection and post -repair test procedure for approval. The procedure shall include a list of applicable specifications and national standards that are applicable to the field testing. Include sections on Scope Of Supply, General Arrangement, Function, Test Objectives, Type Of Tests, Acceptance Criteria, Instrument List, Instrument Accuracy, Test Form Blanks. The final report shall include as a minimum, pump and motor field data, visual assessment and field observation, pump hydraulic performance, motor electrical performance, bearing and winding temperatures, vibration and impact test, alignment. From the data presented, provide discussion, draw conclusions, make recommendations, and assign action items. 6. Prior to removal of pump and motor bound for the repair shop perform a pre -removal field test as detailed above. The Pump Refurbisher shall perform pre -removal and post installation field test on each unit. Description of the field test procedures and equipment supplied by the Contractor to perform the work. 7. Report documentation of the field test results inclusive of type written sections complete with photos and supporting data. Perform field performance testing in accordance with AWWA E103-07 Appendix B Field Testing of Pumps. Page 2 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, published standards of the following, as applicable: 1. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) a. AISI C1141 - Steel 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI - Class 125 Flanged Dimensions b. ANSI B.11 — Bearings 6. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings b. ASTM A-48 - Cast Iron 7. American Welding Society (AWS) 8. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 9. American Petroleum Institute (API) a. API 610 Standards 10. Hydraulic Institute Standards (latest edition) 11. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 12. National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 14. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 15. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) a. SAE 1045 — Steel b. SAE 4140 — Steel 16. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 17. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 18. American Water Works Association AWWA E103-07 Horizontal and Vertical Line -Shaft Pumps Appendix B: Field Testing Of Pumps (latest edition). B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The pump refurbisher shall be experienced in the repair and refurbishing of horizontal split case pumps. B. Pump refurbisher's facility shall maintain a registered ISO 9001 quality system throughout the contract period. C. All rehabilitation of pumping units specified herein shall be performed by a single pump refurbisher; unless otherwise approved by Owner and Engineer. The Pump Refurbisher must purchase, and show proof that all pump parts used in the repair were purchased from the pump OEM. The Pump Refurbisher will also furnish the pumping equipment for HSPS#3. D. The Pump Refurbisher shall have rebuilt pumping units in the United States which are similar in design, type, and service, and comparable in size, head, and capacity to the existing pumps be repaired. Such comparable pumping units shall have been in operation for a period of not less than five years. Pump Refurbisher shall provide a minimum of five references, with contact information, for the comparative pumping units and a brief description of the work and size of the pumping units. E. The Pump Refurbisher shall be a fully -equipped pump repair and machine shop with overhead cranes capable of lifting the largest of the pumps scheduled for repair, pump laser alignment tools, dynamic balancing machine, , boring mills (for re -boring of the pump casing if required), blasting machine and grinders, horizontal engine lathes and on-site facilities for vibrational analysis. The pump repair and machine shop will also have an on-site blasting and paint booths for shop priming and painting the repaired pumps. F. The Pump Refurbisher shall assign staff to this project with ten years or more of pump repair experience. Staff assigned to welding tasks will be certified by the American Welding Society (AWS) for the types of welding proposed by the Pump Refurbisher as part of the pump Page 3 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction refurbishment process. The Pump Refurbisher is required to define any baseplate, pump, or motor welding contemplated by written procedure either in the shop or in the field to be complete as part of the pump refurbishment and to provide a copy of current AWS certification for the welder that will perform the work with the Inspection Report. G. The pump repair shop shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. As a minimum, the pump OEM shall perform a torsional analysis of the pump and motor rotor with the new larger impeller, and compare the results of this analysis to the harmonic analysis furnished by the VFD OEM. Alternatively, the Contractor may elect not to use the OEM; then the Contractor shall disassemble one existing pump and obtain all necessary dimensional, weight, etc. information on the pump shaft, impeller, etc. in order to determine the necessary inputs for the analysis required in this specification. This work will be performed by an independent laboratory with a fully detailed report to supplement the analysis required by this specification. Additionally, the warranty requirement for this path will be increased to 5 years, and a warranty bond shall be furnished by the Pump Refurbisher. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. The pumping units depicted and specified herein will be used to pump finished potable water from the O. N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant (ONSWTP) to different hydraulic grades within the City of Corpus Christi water distribution system. The pumps are single stage, double suction, horizontal split volute type centrifugal pumps as specified herein. 2. Pumping units start and stop against a closed discharge valve and accordingly shall be capable of operating at shut-off head conditions for sustained periods of up to one minute duration without damage and without requiring increased preventive maintenance efforts. 3. Rehabilitation of the pumping units will occur in stages to maintain ONSWTP operations during the installation process. No more than one pump may be out of service at one time. 4. The Pump refurbisher shall coordinate with the installing Contractor to ascertain exactly what equipment and materials of supply need to be delivered to the construction site at what time over the anticipated installing Contractor's installation schedule. 5. Pump Rehabilitation includes: a. Pre -removal field test by Pump Refurbisher. b. Transportation of pump and possibly motor by Pump Refurbisher from plant to Refurbisher shop. c. Disassembly at Refurbisher's shop. d. Inspection with inspection reports. e. Blasting casing halves inside and outside, repair case surfaces, and re -coat. f. Machine work, repair work, installation of new replacement parts as described in Part 2, pump assembly, and pump testing. g. Perform other Base Bid repairs as described in Part 2. h. Rotating assembly balance and pump unit re -assembly. Post repair field testing. 6. Removal, Re -installation and Shipment: The Contractor will perform pump removal, preparation for shipment and re -installation work at the ONSWTP. The Pump Refurbisher will provide shipping to and from the pump refurbisher designated facility. The Pump Refurbisher shall include all freight cost in the Base Bid. The Pump Refurbisher shall furnish onsite supervision of installation of pump and motor by Contractor, and shall be responsible for coupling alignment. 7. Existing Pumping Unit Description and proposed design condition are summarized in the following table: Page 4 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction Pump HSP -8 HSP -9 HSP -10 HSP -11 Location HS 2 HS 2 HS 2 HS 2 Manufacturer Flowserve Flowserve Flowserve Flowserve Model Number 400-LNN-800 400 -LN N-800 400 -LN N-800 400 -LN N-800 Serial Number 0212MS002074- 1 0212MS002074- 2 0212MS002074- 3 0212MS002073- 1 Current Rated Capacity 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH 17,000 gpm @ 240 ft TDH Motor Nameplate Hp 1500 1500 1500 1500 Motor Power Requirements 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz 4160 Volt/3 Ph/60 Hz Rpm 890 890 890 890 Constant or Variable Speed (CS or VS) CS CS CS VS New Rated Capacity 13,700gpm 13,700gpm 13,700gpm 13,700gpm New Rated Head 260.8 ft 260.8 ft 260.8 ft 260.8 ft Pump Efficiency at New Rated Capacity 87.2% 87.2% 87.2% 87.2% 8. Existing Pumping Unit Shop Drawings and Materials of Construction are included in Attachment A to the end of this Specification. 9. An electronic copy of the High Service Pump Station #2 Condition Assessment Report prepared by Smith Pump Company dated March 4, 2013 is included in Attachment B to the end of this Specification. 10. Vibration: Provide refurbished pumps and motors that are within the limits set by the current Hydraulic Institute Standards. If pre -removal vibration amplitudes exceed these limits, the Pump Refurbisher shall work with the Contractor, Engineer, and Owner to determine how to reduce the amplitude of the repaired units to comply with the specified HIS vibration limit. a. Vibration Limit: 0.19 in/sec rms unfiltered per H.I.S. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The equipment and materials provided under this section shall be delivered, stored, and handled in compliance with Division 40. Page 5 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Special handling or storage procedures shall be clearly identified and submitted for approval as part of the submittal process. C. Stored motors shall have their space heaters under power during the entire storage period. Storage of motors and pumps with anti -friction bearings in operating pump stations shall have their shafts rotated several rounds by hand each week. 1.9 PUMP REFURBISHER MANUALS & SERVICES A. The Pump Refurbisher shall provide approved installation manuals to the installing Contractor. A minimum of three approved installation manuals shall be shipped to the installing Contractor upon Owner's approval of the submitted installation manual. 1. Complete parts list of replaced parts cross-referenced to an exploded view assembly drawing. 2. Step-by-step disassembly and reassembly instructions including tolerances and torque requirements. 3. Dimensional drawings of all provided equipment. B. Services of Pump Refurbisher 1. Provide the services of a factory certified service engineer specifically trained in the installation, start-up, testing, operation and maintenance of the equipment as herein specified. Such services shall be provided by a representative who is a direct, full-time employee of the Pump Refurbisher. 2. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all parties to establish the Motor Protective Relay (MPR) protective settings. 3. The Pump Refurbisher shall be responsible for the initial check-out of the equipment prior to start up. Additionally, the Pump Refurbisher shall perform a final mechanical check-out to verify that the equipment has been properly assembled, lubricants have been properly installed, electrical connections have been properly made, MPR set points have been properly adjusted, the equipment is level and aligned properly, and that the equipment is ready for service. Finally, the Pump Refurbisher shall assist the installing Contractor in the initial start-up of the equipment and all field testing. 1.10 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. The Pump Refurbisher shall furnish the following spare parts for each pumping unit: 1. One set of split lantern rings per pump. 2. One set of wear rings per pump. 3. One set of split packing glands per pump. 4. One seal kit set (two) per pump. A current spare part price list for all manufacturer recommended spare parts. Prices shall remain in effect for a period not less than one year after start-up and final acceptance of each pumping unit. B. Crate and deliver spare parts in substantial wood or painted steel boxes with hinged covers. Clearly and indelibly identify the contents of each box on its exterior with stenciled paint or lamacoid plastic labels. Each part shall be sealed, wrapped or otherwise protected from corrosion during storage. 1.11 WARRANTIES, PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES, AND PERFORMANCE PENALTIES A. Warranty 1. Upon completion of installation (in accordance with approved installation manual) and successful start-up by installing Contractor and upon acceptance by Owner, provide Pump Refurbisher warranty for a twenty-four (24) month period from startup and acceptance. The warranty covers defects in workmanship and/or materials, and excludes failure due to erosion, corrosion, and wear. This warranty is further qualified by the requirement that the Contractor properly install the unit and the Owner properly operate and maintain the unit. Upon notice of defect the Contractor will promptly remove the part or unit from service and load it on Pump Refurbisher's truck at the jobsite. The Pump Refurbisher will promptly repair and/or replace the part or unit and return it to the jobsite at which point the Contractor will unload and install the part or unit at his expense. Time lost while unit is unavailable will be added to the end of the existing warranty. . Page 6 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. Performance Guarantee 1. In consideration that the award of this equipment Contract is based on performance representations as specified, the Pump Refurbisher shall guarantee the performance of each pumping unit to perform as specified. 2. Represented performance of refurbished pumps and motors will be verified via factory and field testing and as defined herein. Pumping units failing to meet minimum specified performance as indicated in Part 1.7 A (7) and 2.16 C (1) during factory shop testing or in Part 3.5 B (1) during field testing, will be rejected outright by the Owner. The Pump Refurbisher shall be responsible for any liquidated damages levied by the City to the Contractor resulting from any delay associated with failure to meet minimum specified performance during testing. The Manufacturer/Supplier's liquidated damage liability is limited to 10% of the unit price on the applicable Bid Item value. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED PUMP REFURBISHERS A. Flowserve B. Smith Pump Company C. Or Engineer Approved Equal. D. Select one pump refurbishing company from the approved list to perform repairs for all pumps listed in this section. 2.2 DISMANTLING AND INSPECTION A. Disassemble pump into its basic components for cleaning and inspection. Basic components include such items as casing halves, impeller, bearings, bearing housings, shaft, shaft sleeves and other components bolted or joined together. B. All pump parts shall be cleaned prior to inspection. The cleaning shall remove dirt, grit, grease and rust scale. All internal surfaces of the pump casing and bearing housings components shall be grit or sand blast cleaned to remove rust scale. Note that prior to coating components additional blasting is necessary to prepare the surfaces so the coating will adhere. C. Each component shall be inspected for wear, corrosion and other damage. Bearing housing bores shall be measured with a micrometer to check for wear and overall concentricity. Perform a dye penetrant inspection in the high stress areas of the casing halves, and report any cracks discovered. Shaft run -out shall be checked with a dial indicator. Casing split line flatness shall be measured with a straight edge and feeler gage. D. Each pump motor shall be inspected as well for the following: 1 Perform no-load run test and record vibration and electrical data including megger test, PI test, Hi -pot test, and surge test. 2. Monitor and record bearing temperatures during no-load run. 3. Measure and record shaft runout. 4. Disassemble motor and inspect. 5. Measure and record bearing housing bores. 6. Measure and record shaft journal and shaft seal dimensions. 7. Measure and record rotor runout at coupling and at each end of rotor. 8. Visually inspect stator ties, wedges, coils, leads, lugs, and bracing. 9. Perform core loss test. 10. Perform a growler test. 11. Visually inspect for loose or broken rotor bars. 12. Visually inspect end rings for signs of cracking. 13. Inspect and test stator and bearing temperature detectors. 14. Inspect and test space heaters. 15. Provide report with digital photos, measurement, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Four copies of an inspection report for each pump and motor shall be submitted to the Engineer. Each report shall show the results of the inspections and measurements and photographs of component part defects and shall indicate which component parts are suitable for reuse. Component parts that are suitable for reuse and are specified to be replaced by new parts, shall be returned to the City. Prepare reusable parts for long term storage. Crate Page 7 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction components in secure wooden crates having a hinged cover. Provide a packing list attached to the inside of the hinged cover describing the enclosed parts. Components parts not suitable for reuse shall be properly disposed of by the Pump Refurbisher. 2.3 PARTS AND MATERIALS A. General: Provide all materials, new and replacement parts and any miscellaneous parts required to complete the parts replacement and restore the pumps to like new operating condition. Replacement pump parts shall be purchased from the pump OEM. Supply evidence of this sourcing in the Quality Assurance documents by furnishing packing lists and shipping documents. 2.4 IMPELLERS A. General: Replace the existing impellers for the four existing pumps at the High Service Pump Building No. 2 to meet new design condition. Impellers shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.04.B — Impellers. 1. Approximate new impeller size: 31.77 inches. 2. New rated capacity: 13,700 GPM @ 260.8ft TDH & 87.2% pump efficiency. 3. Pump Refurbisher shall purchase the replacement impeller (of same material or better) from the original pump manufacturer. B. Balance: Dual -plane dynamic balance impeller to the ISO G2.5 standard on rotor shaft. All pump and motor couplings shall conform to the requirements of 43 21 01 Part 2.05.0 — Couplings. 2.5 WEAR RINGS A. General: Replace the impeller and casing wear rings. Provide rings that are geometrically suitable with the new design conditions and new impeller size. Manufacture the rings to sufficient tolerances to permit replacement without special fitting or machining. Wear Rings should meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.04.C. — Wearing Rings. B. Lock the wear rings in place to prevent rotation. Describe method for locking rings in submittal. C. Materials: Construct impeller and casing wear rings of stainless steel alloys with difference hardnesses to reduce the potential for galling. D. Furnish casing wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 CA -15 300-350 Bhn hardness. E. Furnish impeller wear rings in 11-14% chrome ASTM A487 grade CA -15 200-250 Bhn hardness. 2.6 SHAFT SLEEVES A. Shaft Sleeve: Provide replacement shaft sleeves of the same size and design as the original. B. Shaft Sleeve Material: Construct shaft sleeves of type 316 stainless steel and fit them to the shaft with 0 -rings and locked by impeller key and sleeve nut. 2.7 BEARINGS A. Radial Bearings: Replace the existing anti -friction type radial bearing with a new anti -friction bearing. Provide new anti -friction bearing of the same type and size as the original. Bearing brand shall be American made. On the bill -of -material, furnish bearing number and bearing brand used in the repair. B. Thrust Bearing: Replace the existing anti -friction type thrust bearing with a new anti -friction bearing. Provide new anti -friction bearing of the same type and size as the original. Bearing brand shall be American made. On the bill -of -material, furnish bearing number and bearing brand used in the repair. C. Lubricant Supply: Supply oil of the proper kind and quality, as required to place the pumping unit in operation. Furnish enough oil for initial filling during storage, for initial filling prior to start-up, and enough for one additional filling. Page 8 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.8 BEARING FRAMES A. Bearing Frames: Rehabilitate the existing bearing frames, maintain tolerances for the installation of the bearings. Provide a description of machine work intended for the bearing housings and casing halves in the inspection report. B. Confirm alignment of bearing housing bores to casing machined surfaces. List OEM tolerances along with found conditions, and describe any machine work intended to restore parts to OEM tolerances. 2.9 SPLIT TYPE MECHANICAL SEALS A. Provide new split type mechanical seals to refurbished pumps. Split type mechanical seals shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.D. 2.10 STUFFING BOX AREA A. The stuffing box shall accommodate packing and split -glands so the packing, split -glands and hardware defined in the spare parts can be used if a seal kit is not available. Hinged Covers: Construct gland of bronze. B. Install new hinged covers over the shaft openings and provide neoprene slingers on the shaft. 2.11 CASING A. If casing split line is washed out or not flat within 0.005 inch the upper and lower mating faces shall be machined and the casing line -bored. Casings shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.A - Casings. 2.12 GASKETS, SEALS, AND FASTENERS A. Gaskets and Seals: Replace all gaskets, lip -seals and 0 -rings. Provide replacement gaskets, lip -seals and 0 -rings of the same type and size as the original. B. Fasteners and Keys: Provide new shaft keys, bolts, studs, nuts, washers and other fasteners of the same size, design and material as furnished in the original pump. 2.13 PUMP SHAFT A. Pump Shaft: Provide a new pump shaft of the same size and design as the original. Pump shafts shall meet the requirements of Section 43 21 01 Part 2.4.F — Pump shafts. 2.14 COUPLING A. Pump -to -motor coupling shall be reused. Inspect condition and report on any issues found. Replace wear parts, disk packs, and grease. 2.15 MOTOR A. Should the pump motor repair be recommended by the Pump Refurbisher based on the inspection results, the following motor repair shall be performed: 1. Clean and oven dry stator and rotor. 2. If necessary varnish and bake stator and rotor. 3. Dynamic balance rotor at rated speed. 4. Clean component parts in preparation for re -assembly. 5. Replace bearings (bearing have ceramic races) 6. Replace seals. 7. Reassemble. 8. Recoat motor to match as received color. 9. Perform no-load run test and record vibration and electrical data. 10. Provide "as built" report. B. Refer to Paragraph 1.02 B for payment for this work. 2.16 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. Each pump, motor, and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finish coated in accordance with Section 09 91 10 and 09 96 00. Color shall be per Section 09 96 00 and an adequate supply of touch up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. Page 9 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction B. For pump interior surfaces, apply Belzona 1341 N Superglidemetal NSF 61 coating for potable water to the casting wetted parts to improve efficiency. 2.17 SHOP TESTING A. The factory testing shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards — Section 14.6 - 2011 "ANSI Standard for Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests". Certified copies of the Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied after conducting a pump performance shop test; hydrostatic test shall be per ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 Appendix B. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the Engineer at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. All the testing required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer and City with the Pump Refurbisher providing travel and accommodations for up to two people for the duration of each test for a selected pump. 1. Pump Test Acceptance Grade for SHOP TEST shall be GRADE 1U (no negative tolerance) per ANSI/HI 14.6-2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Guarantee Point) as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. 2. Pump shall be tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as indicated in the pump rating point (Guarantee Point) as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded starting at shut off head and proceeding with sufficient test point readings made to establish complete head flow capacity (through the AOR and PORregions), efficiency, and brake horsepower curves for refurbished pump. Test all four (4) new impellers in a new pump case with shop driver. 3. Test impellers for NPSH. Measure NPSH at a minimum of four (4) conditions. 4. A complete test report for each refurbished pump identified for factory shop testing, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least all information required in Paragraphs 1.04 and 1.06 above, and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report, shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the pumps are shipped. 5. All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION A. Removal: The pump will be removed from its installed position and prepared for shipment by the Contactor as part of the Base Bid. The refurbisher shall inspect the pump after the preparation is completed. The Contractor shall provide the necessary caps, covers, bolts gaskets and thrust restraints as necessary to prevent the piping from being displaced. B. Reinstallation: The Contractor will reinstall the pump into its operating position, fully adjusted and aligned as part of the Base Bid. C. Contractor to furnish and install the new anchor bolts per recommendation by the Pump Refurbisher. Repair the baseplate grout as needed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: As part of the Base Bid, furnish the services of a qualified representative of the Pump Refurbisher to inspect, and pretest each unit prior to removal, supervise the repaired pump and motor reinstallation, and the completed installation, make any necessary adjustments, participate in the startup of the equipment, perform field testing of the equipment and place the equipment in trouble-free operation. B. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in the presence of the Construction Manager. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. C. A certificate from the Pump Refurbisher shall be submitted stating that their installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the Owner's Page 10 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.3 START-UP A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make sure rotating elements are free before applying power. C. Check motor rotation to be sure that it is correct. D. Notify Construction Manager prior to startup and allow him to witness initial operation. 3.4 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. In the presence of the Construction Manager conduct such tests as necessary to indicate that the refurbished pumps and motors operate satisfactorily. A 7 -day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance by the City. 1. Pump Refurbisher shall conduct Mechanical Testing of the refurbished pump and motor in accordance with and as defined in AWWA E103-07 Horizontal and Vertical Line -Shaft Pumps Appendix B: Field Testing of Pumps (latest edition). Submit report of test results as per the requirements of Part 1.04. B. If refurbished pumps and motors do not operate satisfactorily, then the Pump Refurbisher shall implement corrective measures as required to restore satisfactory operation. 3.5 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Conduct a Field Performance Testing in accordance with that as described. B. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above and certified results of tests shall be submitted. Provide, calibrate and install all temporary gauges and meters, make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 30 days prior to testing. Contractor can elect to use existing venturi flowmeter on the pump discharge pipe if re -calibration of the differential pressure gauge is performed prior to field testing. 1. Field Acceptance Tests: Upon completion of the installation and prior to final payment, the Contractor will perform a witnessed Field Performance Test on the refurbished pumping unit in accordance with AWWA E103-07 Appendix B except as specified. FIELD TEST Acceptance Grade shall be GRADE 1B per ANSI/HI 14.6 — 2011 as listed in Table 14.6.3.4. This includes hydraulic results showing the pump is operating within ± 5% of the factory tested flow capacity, and ± 3% of the factory tested TDH capacity within + 4% of factory tested power requirements and/or - 3% of the factory tested pump efficiency. This is applicable to the pump rating point (Guarantee Point) as shown in paragraph 2.4 of this specification. C. A preliminary test shall be performed prior to the official witness test. Notify the City and submit test data and curves as determined by the preliminary test at least seven days in advance of the time scheduled for the witness test. If pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken which satisfies the conditions specified. D. The Field Performance Tests shall demonstrate under all conditions: 1. When the pump input horsepower is determined by electrical input measurement, use the true efficiency of the driver as determined by the driver manufacturer performance test. 2. Test at rated speed, to determine the curves of head, brake horsepower, and efficiency as a function of capacity. Pump Refurbisher shall provide ALL required calibrated test instruments as required to perform testing. The Pump Refurbisher may utilize the City's existing flowmeter with permission from the Construction Manager. If the City's flowmeter is used for the test, the flowmeter differential pressure gauge shall be calibrated prior to testing and proof of calibration shall be submitted with the testing results. The Contractor shall bear the cost of calibrating the flowmeter as part of the base bid. Take a minimum of six points, including shutoff to define operating regions through the AOR and POR regions of the pump curve as much as the system operating pressure will allow. Take one point as near as possible to each specified Page 11 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction condition of head and capacity, one at or slightly above the maximum head specified, and one at the minimum head shown on the existing curve (if possible). 3. Express capacity in gallons per minute and express head in feet of water. Furnish certified copies of the curves, raw test data, calculated results and sufficient information for computation and plotting of the curves. E. The Pump Refurbisher shall employ an independent vibration testing firm as indicated below. 1. After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the Pump Refurbisher shall retain the services of Machine Dynamics, Inc. (contact Victor Wowk, P.E. at 505-898-2094, victor@machinedyn.com) or Engineering Dynamics Incorporated (contact Troy Feese, P.E. at 210-492-9100, troy_feese©engdyn.com) who are testing firms to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each unit, including both "Bump Tests" and X -Y vibration profiles and field torsional critical speed test, to (a) prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and natural frequency analyses and (b) prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports, when operating at any speed within the specified operating range. 2. A written report shall be submitted including a CAD sketch of the unit indicating on where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak -to -peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency and (c) rms velocity level, in inches per second. The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problems encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. F. If required, take corrective action and have the units retested to ensure full compliance with the specified requirements. G. Failure of Tests: If the Field Performance Acceptance Tests reveal defects in material or equipment, or if the material or equipment in anyway fails to comply with the requirements of the specifications, then the Contractor and Pump Refurbisher shall promptly correct such deficiencies. All costs associated with additional Field Performance Tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Upon successful completion and passing of the Field Performance Test the City will accept the refurbished pump and motor on the day of acceptance of the Final Test Report. END OF SECTION Page 12 of 12 Rehabilitation Of Horizontal Split Case Pumps — 43 21 02 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 13 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction SECTION 43 21 06 SUMP PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, complete and ready for operation and field test, sump pumps including all details as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this specification or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for sump pumps. Include the cost for this work in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Mechanical piping and appurtenances are included in Division 40. B. Electrical work except as hereinafter specified is included in Division 26. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01 33 02, certified shop drawings and literature describing the equipment and showing all important details, including pump and motor characteristics and performance. B. Operation and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The sump pumps shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The sump pumps shall be Model J08 as manufactured by BJM Corporation, or Engineer approved equal. PUMP SCHEDULE Equipment Tag Pump Location Model Design Criteria Max Speed Max HP Power Supply Pump Operation SP -01 High Service Pump Room BJM J08 80 gpm @ 20 -ft TDH 3450 rpm 1 460/3/60 Based on level float switches, Refer to M7. SP -02 High Service Pump Room BJM J08 80 gpm @ 20 -ft TDH 3450 rpm 1 460/3/60 Based on level float switches, Refer to M7. Notes: 1. Custom control panel by pump manufacturer/vendor. Refer to control panel section and/or electrical drawings and specifications for additional detail. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the motor and motor starter shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The Contractor and manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping system including pumps and motors, as specified herein. B. The equipment specified herein is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven Page 1 of 4 Sump Pumps — 40 21 06 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment similar to the applications stated in Paragraphs 1.01 and 1.04. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards, except where otherwise specified herein. D. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, to ensure operation meets all specified conditions. E. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all elements of the pump installation and pump setting so that the installation meets the requirements as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein including depth of setting, discharge column pipe and installation of water level instrumentation. 1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during shipment. Store equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until all required submittals have been approved by the Engineer and shipment approved by the Engineer in writing. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall obtain from each manufacturer its warranty that the equipment will be free from defects in design, materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from Substantial completion. Said warranty, containing no exclusions or limitations, shall be in a form acceptable to and for the benefit of the Owner and shall be submitted by the Contractor as a condition of final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, floats and submersible power cable. B. Each major piece of equipment shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles and power and service factors. 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The pumps shall be submersible type, supported as shown on the Drawings. The pumps shall be capable of passing small solids without clogging and undue wear. B. The pump casing shall be constructed of 304 SS. Separate components shall be gasketed or sealed with Carbon Ceramic oil lubricated seals and bolted with Type 304SS bolts, nuts and washers. C. The impeller shall be of cast iron and shall be locked to the shaft and secured by an impeller nut. The impeller shall be concentrically positioned to prevent thrust and wear problems. Impeller shall be open design and there shall be no close clearances between the impeller Page 2 of 4 Sump Pumps — 40 21 06 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction and casing. D. The pump shafts shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. E. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs and adjustment. F. All pumps to be equipped with thermal overload protection against overheating. G. Piping and valves shall be as shown on the Drawings. As a minimum each pump shall have a pipe union, a ball check valve, and a full -port isolation valve on the pump discharge. 2.3 PUMP POWER CABLE A. Power Cable 1. Power and control cable shall be sized according to NEC and be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The power cables shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of at least 50 feet. Entry system shall be comprised of an elastomeric grommet and washer arrangement as a primary seal. Entry system must also provide protection against capillary action in the event of cable damage. 2.4 PUMP CONTROL PANEL PROTECTION SYSTEM A. A U.L. factory provided control panel will be supplied by the pump vendor to handle both sump pumps for duplex operation as required herein and/or as shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Electrical and Instrumentations Drawings as well as the specifications. B. Manufacturer shall furnish a complete pump monitoring and protection system consisting of an intrinsically safe solid state monitoring system to be installed in the motor starter cubicle, and independent probes integral to the pump/motor wired to a sealed cable entry terminal box for connection of submersible control cables. C. Monitoring unit shall be solid state, intrinsically safe system designed for mounting within the motor starter cubicle. Monitoring system shall accept inputs from the sensors specified and shall output independent contacts which close to alarm each condition, or separate independent output terminals suitable for direct connection to interposing relays for alarm contact development. Provide a separate N.C. alarm contact, rated for 120V, 5A inductive, which opens on any failure. Monitor system shall be suitable for operation from a 24VAC unregulated, unlimited power supply. Provide any additional equipment or appurtenances required to provide current and voltage limited intrinsically safe installation as specified. The monitoring system shall accept separate isolated N.O. contacts, which close to indicate pump running and to reset after pump trip. D. Sensors shall be independently wired to the monitoring system. Provisions for the following sensors for each pump: 1. Stator leak (one required). 2. Motor temperature (one required). 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES A. Pump Lifting Chain. 1. Each pump shall be fitted with a lifting bail. Bail shall be sized so that if the stainless steel lifting chain is removed from the pump then retrieval of the pump is easily attained with a lifting hook without requiring any persons to enter the wet well. No chain assemblies that act as a lifting bail will be accepted. Each pump shall be supplied with the required length of 316 stainless steel cable to lift each pump/motor assembly from the sump. Attach the chain on the upper end to a bolt bracket mounted just under the grating cover. Chain shall be connected to the pump lifting bail by a stainless steel shackle. All brackets shall be 316L stainless steel. B. Bolts, Studs, Nuts 1. All bolts, studs, and nuts shall be in compliance with ANSI B1.1. 2. Bolt heads and nuts shall be semi -finished and shall be in compliance with ANSI B18.2. All nuts shall be hexagonal in shape. 3. Anchor bolts, flange bolts, studs and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in conformity with ASTM A276. Page 3 of 4 Sump Pumps — 40 21 06 ADDENDUM NO. 3 May 2016 Technical Specifications for Construction 2.6 SHOP PAINTING A. Surface preparation and shop painting (prime and finish) shall be according to the manufacturer's recommendations for the specific sump pump application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this Contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and these specifications and details shown on the Drawings. 3.3 FIELD PAINTING A. The only field painting required shall be touch-up to repair damage incurred during shipment and installation. This painting shall be according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. After the pump has been completely installed, a test of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor. If the pump performance does not meet Specifications, the Contractor shall take corrective measures, or pump shall be removed and replace with a pump, which satisfies the conditions specified. END OF SECTION Page 4 of 4 Sump Pumps — 40 21 06 ADDENDUM NO. 3 ATTACHMENT NO. 14 18 34dVdd2S.CteltfELE61(...lt 11TtE 81ittaiL6.161.1.b. hlakbRIIIIIIICEU .. .. - R -1 4r 1 A..AAP-1,— 111 111 aaa 111 i i g li V II ,....... gill" 111111 e II iii I 11111 ..1,— ii111 !! a- 11 ii 11 .. gl(11 ill e i .. ..1!--11.--) il 19111 111 111 I: : a i 11 1 c 111111111q1q1 Iiii221!!!!! ;;i;;RR nil 1 !!!!!! 1 ee 11ill! 1 1 Ill 1H' aa 11 i ! ; 11 II a i IR 1 a 1 2=,iiitifiElig ititiElitiiiiE Ei EitiEiEi itit, iiEiiiii .:iEiEilitiliEE E.B., 0 e.stesteD gPRERREPEEER..222TE222..,.. N mmg i.,,ig:E:,??Za2 E E'EqgriGIE AE,1!111,,11:E5 0 , G WGGIliGiP 40 P a 142211..1 R 1 111 a a 1 i a :11111"' rit"!!! i cl„Me 1 111 RQR ....L. rilillig 1 1111 1 a i 11 11111" iiirhiii1 FI:= .,. _ 1 1 1 illl C 1 I 1 ill1111111.11""e' 111 11111 1 11 qi P! I 11 i a g UUUU wiii1111 igg a 1 1 11111 iiii iiii 1111 ' 1 111 1 1111111111 e i.e.-1 1 lel" . ! 11 11 al V a ggl.NE U Mil -Eigi iit it i.iii5iiiE 1 $ P 1 1 ill ''' .IIII' a i 113333311 ii ': 11111111111111 111111111111 111 i I RRR I 1 ;iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii" g , 1 11i111111111 1 111111 11 II 11 116131313.11 111111 ' 6 i /IA IOU I i 1 11eeHUh --'ii 11101 11115; 1:414 ligg T1 I ' .1"1 11519 ee: kk. Ill 5 55111 111111 1 - I' 1 0 =0 111/ A il '11 p ' (fito zUU ! 1115i111 • at e'gll 3. i 1 1 1 aaa 1 li A 5.2[1.1 an racoon's B10.3 BBB. „a Br, By neomaTion „man. oBBE By omonvion SDRAWING SHEET 2 of 254 REC011a 11/11W1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0a CORPUS CHRISTI CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I anthitects I contractors ; .7. alele: i — ..„,, ..1 . . % ;';FEF.F.4-. 0 ; INDEX UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 15 Lo, F,. . , ..S. --1 f I irP3' I '2 / ' I 07-. i il •,..; 01 f ^,1", / il tr, / P i ----> 1 A g g g f: g h . , g 1 t r'. s 1 P ,. ,- ig 1---4 ' ( — ....... # . I li .-,..,.-.; gm= ,.8;6 : g / i 2—,' ' 1 P ..1 zji..1.. RI , 1 B ____. r--- i i I I I I ii _1# _ mo— I , # # i, #i # I/ I / / I 4/ I ' • ; FA i i i, ja* ArnR IVIi / i i i i. / I •°4-5 , . _)BASEUNE A STA CH -00 - 5-r( ga jr- , , ,i 4 m.,. _I _ , Xr PI P ,—..., — ..' ms.l. ------...............„ ; 1 II# ii# 4 El E. 0 11111 1111 ' Ill , , I I III 8V, B i / II /I( ;" X illk s! i C. 0 • • :1‘ B II AA An P , ri' gg gLt 7 - / m.1 r4 P ? ' ' t F I I a , 0 '.1 6 10 ; g 2, li li 15 , %. 1 RI -.'''\, lig g I . ' 1 ; BASELINE A MATCHLINE STA 5-r00 SEE SHEET CS E. .! W 5 BASE INE A MATCHLINE STA 5+D0 J. IA 0B SEE SHEET CS n 0 d 0 D a, — . ......- -, N N DEE DP ... P'. RER,N,,,, Ea ERN py DESCRIPTION i n . S SHEET 8 of 254 PEC011a 11/11W1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors a°Z,EF.4". W1g: , .0 e • - , '1 : _ , , ' , - i BASELINE A STA 0+00 - 5+00B = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 16 !! ,g •'' b t E 7.i t. t. E. g ! ! BASELINE A MATCHLINE STA 5-1-00 SEE SHEET C5 I , — BASELINE A MATCHLINE STA 5-F00 SEE SHEET CS • i • 1 , 1 ';'• 1 1 I ' 1 — mi ...7 4., —001 Crii6-w.-W41 U i E R g ,------- aitivi. . - / -...4 ,,,,, L. g i i 1 / 1, ' .4 *:.1' ', , gq ' dg 14 I i i i i - .r,•••••• 0 0' a a 0 10 ig 0 c, r - 5P H i i i 1 gliEW tit ,,7 g 8 ;?... - L.,'' —', 5 / ' ' g / i / -9 9 0 ,p/ • I 12 i i 0 / i i i i 0 0 / I (' L , tv - i i 0 i da NM I 1 11, 1 I I i 1! L J- 4.1 i ii at•AV I I ii , " 8 III i EASEuEEE C .4 ' gal/:+..i 4i 411.- . '11 h I II . 11 Oil_ .... ' /./„. „ , gg 91/10".". I wa•M„ =ilk "Ni9 1 / / t.....W 4, .. El R .° '''-'',- • • ', • . , All II t g °' WP. 1 i i 1 i / i 11/ r^" fit: li i 10 _>..„_______ - 0 C. V g, g'g grg- \ ',,,i'', 'A ' ' T ig =, 2 ,,, mw e, g , , - ' \ 553 0 ii. ", ,, 1 W . I , . 2 q2 7 gq ' .......- Ii',, •=23."- 4n 1@B il -gm AR„ p 11 1 i ,// ii 5E ,„„„/„:„/-„„/ /' .i...\-1-"--- • ''. `/- MA , , — III 2E ga ,--", Ea/ / Ex nEE,E/Ec. neolacExa NEE °/.n/°l/." SHEET 9 of 254 PEC011a 11/11W1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTITEXAS , CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors TM. "Fae.F.4". iEE t ,.„,, '„ ‘„,....!--/ - I BASELINE A STA 5+00 - 10+20 — = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 17 a SS S 8 8 6 8 6 S B o 0 0 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U ___--:---.-.:u i ; "�' Eklad —m-,_ SID PiHI.__ I o 1 i P®• #. IYP 8 i 8 aggg g ay o El B4m EI ` ttt h 141y-1 o m FF ggR 11 - • Cg — -raw— FGF o ➢� 0.: ... g'ar ice— g-11Ar°'a,oma __ __ __—__ _ qi "' ny 111 ,.` ° m II� an P $� li .. It 3B i''''. o to ; �_ HHh 8 -- BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00g SEE SHEET C8 „tLy-—kp =[ BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00 SEE SHEET C8 b e b eb b e b e b e "s e b nalXX o•'E DA MERVIN • i(ADDITIVE SHEET 10 of 254 REC011a MINIM 110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers architects contractors•'.'.gss. '""""""`"°° ,°"°° """"""°`m+� t a' '•� S BASELINE B STA O+OO • 5+00 ALTERNATE NO.4) UTILITIES r.... DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 18 BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00 SEE SHEET C7 Ii_ 2 $ g BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00 SEE SHEET C7 P ,i,.. J ... -, :,-- = g n v? I . na ?!BR 1 g • , P „zf,,r , ---, , / 4e. T. _ ------. -,- ' ; , 11 B , ii -00 - 8+90 2 1-4: MI ZOE ram WIN .. I ......-- _..., . Ng I ,-, ,,. .... P R ......... Jr". j=Zr......;f0 , ------- ', -- ,422.1 / . A EIMMITIMMI..: l'... ' A nip la r L'I -----___ '-'-'----- 25 P hi ' • S 2 BLDG IIS -- Lt. 01 R 1 5 a V ii 4 11 , 1 !EtEEEEE!!!!! ,8, —1 se Accescus KV mai i x X DEE V n,n„,. .1.10M Ma DEE BY DESCRIPTION i T. mu 11 of 254 PEC011a 11/11W1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors . '.i." ••• 5 P 2 a '' BASELINE B STA 5+00 • 8+90 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4) UTILITIES ........= DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 19 I , A — — -r, . '--... E g e g L', r.1 ,i...a,-....., i .„. , 4 i i i i I ' IIB ------r - __„.— ' ..........,44 •• I I V il dial5rt,WilA r iiiiiipg . . . . . , A : ---4( "° r ' ' 1,1 . '11 MP 4 2 A1 1, ..... ''Vrt:rifi : I ,, — • ,,; I B ib., .,.,. war h , 'i g , , 0 BASEUNE C STA 0+00 - 3+40 M MI 1 D l 0.. iii ,... I in ... _ f--, '-iiiiii g IES .Iig -,F, &:, / d• fk), : , - T 86.5EIDE 8 _ STA .2.4.8 (........../ " irig Pg• 0„, J; _ - , - — , \\ \., \_L„E 6, / .., -: B 11, A. 111 'M. i Ili 11 I'l R 6 me R e . R a I I X X RRs„,pooR REP MON NCI DINE DESCRIPTION .... SHEET 12 of 254 MORD 11/11W1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors T" a , i , , BASELINE C STA 0+00 - 3+40,EE = UTILITIES ..7....= DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 20 1► N D yen '9a gia ACOENDUIFI 110.3 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN VIEW CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ATTACHMENT NO. 21 8 8 8 8 6 8 S 8 S 8 o 6 o 6 o 6 o 6 o 6 lum / 4 4 t' ELM I '74q, C.. II- yA Oil t I P !, 91 ig041°r! *, . 1 1 - T e 1. V- -I - STA B.313. IS.S. LT BL -A 707,T3U"-ET eau 12 (H) f1,3S.50 1r- PI; = _ „-- _ n -11S--- - ---- ------ - -- -- - -''' g T 1 i NAM. ..- rE1 , pa i 1 z k 1 1 t I g r'l ii — 1. -. .1 RI Ft I lilli ,.....11 ..5 ,0 N _, 1 - lis ,,- - tl ell 1__ m,. ,-- sA " -., 41' gg ROVEMENTS PLAN r ,. ..,..., upiu , II ....t. , S S / ,,, r I/ 1 a . - „„, ..11-i, 41 c/ '111, 4/ A I rif " (pot 1 / . • , , 1 [ 0 2 • 2 2 I • ' gE OFI.S1 g,g 1 2n ' XITO, :;g1g1 illi 4 0 ii 81 SO g , 1 ell : 1 r - - g g 1 Ig EismasEm =1M REP MON NO TE DESCRIPTION i .'UTILITIES n, i SHEET 15 of 254 RECORD MIAMI. WTR — 450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors T" °EaI°P4- a , i ,. , STORM WATER IMPROVEMENTS PLAN AND PROFILE 1 OF 2 Fs..., DEPARTMENTI, Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 22 .":' '-' P'1'p p '-a t t. II , I it U 1 2 $ — 1 . i R _ . , ,g C SHEET CB 1 ,r 4,3 g1 g , I g • i Z ; ' g .. - gg = g g • ,„!.7 ' _ cAsq_ITM •-•;;Ri Eige r •kt lin. _ ...gg. 2Nz' -- 1 ?, r, g 1 il§ '9 u , R _-- 11 N grg— _ 7 _ gg. M''' • .- 1 4 1 ---1.' LI min r = a 0 H . x . 8§1 - - 2 ., 1 . 5 kie . ___ - ^ SElilf , II _ , r' i - 1 , , i 1 _ — A 0 5 „. 1 111 ! I .- i 1 r..' I - 40 9 1.111 1--, g _1_1_ -1g . -- UUU - - . - I - qi '"E"A OP a R 3 A ENTS PLAN & PROFILE e F =Psi EaMm • 51= II II .,. itot,„!;:_ a = • 9 114:22 2irmiggi UI7111 / P: ''2 _, I 1 ,. e - - II , 11. 40 II 1 1 1_„_ /, i : 1: i / UR .. - .1111.ga. 1,11; sit 5 0 II a 1 g X- 1 g ; 1-.- .• il 1 I I a , 1 Nei , ,,,,, 0 0 ,, ' ro 8 MI 1 n I ditat ' * _ _MOE .:ifq? .',..!,. 111 gn .4 / kr. 0 p \,-f 'r '°- " g ' ' 1 1 ' L z` /` - •"" /// g g I e : 7 7 11 !; IA It it b' 'g' It it t it it it E a, &g,,, . OLCEXCUll KV ppp „ p pa pp„ py DESCRIPTION RESIBION NCIDICE BY DESCRIPTION 9 T., iSERVICE MU 17 of 254 MORD 01111•1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0a CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors HIGH SERVICE 3 UTILITY PLAN UTILITIES -7_ . . F. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ATTACHMENT NO. 23 2 F ACOENDUIFI 110.3 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CIVIL DETAILS 1 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ATTACHMENT NO. 24 0 -.■ C=. • • 0 z ■ • : Mil ■ ■�— • - A : ■®• • NEI - o • — :®_ 0 3.33 S7 -0 -0 0 oEEE=MMIZMiZM O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Capital Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 25 m m 0 n NO11938 dwV I V OO 1 NO11O3S 11VM ri mlw see® 062.0 6 990{{3 ....,u0 r, 0, a o a' O O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 WALL SECTIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Capital Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 26 m H z 052.0 6 BY 990{{3 xu3mue110 Aa ONi O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Capital Programs LNV ATTACHMENT NO. 27 N 0 0 11111111111111111111111111111111 1 '7 052.0 6 BY 31110310S .11,113 WO. 990{{3 xu3mue110 A r, o 0 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR / WINDOW ELEVATIONS & SCHEDULES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of capital Programs LNV co ATTACHMENT NO. 28 zt 4D SDOE LEDGE ) 1 1 1 1 1 2,4- 11 72-022 7 cos ,', .702 (sEE ArecH.), -/- 1 2 .12 _LI .12 2.2 22 2 B-'3,-- I - ESE .12 2 .14 1,, 0 2 14' 1 -CT0EA- 4.-6. 7 7°E.7°67-fi- 14 51 6 gla III_ 1 , aft, '2' 1- 49VP 21 ,410 1 7 al MP I 0 q COL er, ©1 Q OL ADDENDUM NO.0 DESCRIPTION •1 DEECRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES Eg DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ATTACHMENT NO. 29 ADDENDUM NO.3 DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS II BY CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services DEECRIPTION LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 4 ATTACHMENT NO. 30 • ON El /— n Ipol OSEosEoES 2111.1 2. 212-5275; F 90 goo BS • 1®® AlI I� A,A .e ii.€II»U azimut _ 6 30 S'l.„:i€ lei 1-- Wo za c -m/ oR i iii . mii C11IIt rio g IeS 007,_ iii mi i ICS mom_ IVf1ll S„&B -,�� ,,:.• i POR°i iii• mi i :'.bilmL.,i*Am w� fr m 1:1 m iiimi g I'ICi €I till LJ I. Ell no II it .l��a — m smi 2M� .aoao 0 .o of POP "ES Et Ilmi e I a• • !I,Pii i 1 Iis g MURE WO SI rnZ`6°.` OSEosEoES 2111.1 2. 212-5275; 85/ SC DOE DU Smith O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors F BS m 1®® m A,A .e 85/ SC DOE DU Smith O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors 00 91 01 ADDENDUM NUMBER 2 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Project: High Service Pump Building No.3 Owner: City of Corpus Christi City Engineer: J.H. Edmonds, P.E. Designer: Project Number: E11066 Addendum No. 2 Specification Section: 00 91 01 Issue Date: 5/20/2016 Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. Make the additions, modifications or deletions to the Contract Documents described in this Addendum. Approved by: J.H. Edmonds, P.E. Addendum Items: To delay bid opening by one week. New bid date: 6/8/2016 ARTICLE 1— BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA A. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Acknowledgment Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgment Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. 1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO THE BIDDING REQUIREMENTS B. SECTION 00 21 13 INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS — Article 3; SECTION 00 30 00 BID ACKOWLEDGMENT FORM — Article 1: 1. The date for receipt of Bids has been changed to Wednesday, June 8, 2016 at 2:00 PM. The time and location for the receipt of Bids remains unchanged. 1.03 MODIFICATIONS TO INTERPRETATIONS AND ALTERNATE BIDS 7.01 The questions submitting date has been changed to Responses will be posted for questions submitted by May 27, 5:00 p.m. twelve (12) days prior to the date of the bid opening. Inquiries made after this period may not be addressed. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 Addendum No. 0 (Insert Project Name and Number) 009101-1 Rev 01-08-16 00 91 01 ADDENDUM NUMBER 01 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Project: Pump Building No. 3 Owner: City of Corpus Christi City Engineer: J.H. Edmonds, P.E. Designer: LNV, Inc. Project Number: E11066 Addendum No. 1 Specification Section: 00 9101 Issue Date: 05/16/16 Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. Make the additions, modifications or deletions to the Contract Documents described in this Addendum. Approved by: Grady S. Atkinson, P.E. 05/16/16 Name Date Addendum Items: SPECIFICATIONS: "AMEND" SPECIFICATION 00 45 16 — STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE CLARIFICATIONS: QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS \EOF.sPq%%14. - c7 . 4 16111 -* */ GRADY S. ATKINSON i /t 115461 5 <icENSE�.� c‘ssi • ... .L. 642 05/16/16 LNV engineers architects surveyors TBPE FIRM NO. F-366 Addendum No. 01 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 009101-1 Rev 01-13-2016 ARTICLE 1— BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA A. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Acknowledgement Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. ARTICLE 2 — MODIFICATIONS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 AMEND SPECIFICATIONS A. SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE — SECTION (2.06)(A.): DELETE: "Experience must include the satisfactory completion of at least five similar projects within the last 5 years for the Bidder's organization that are equal to or greater in size and magnitude than the current Project." ADD: "Experience must include the satisfactory completion of at least five similar projects in the State of Texas within the last 10 years for the Bidder's organization that are equal to or greater in size and magnitude than a $15,000,000.00 project." ARTICLE 3 — CLARIFICATIONS 3.01 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS A. Question: "Butterfly valves; conflicts with section 40 05 50 — Valves. This specification also has butterfly valves. Which one are we to use?" Answer: "Specification Section 40 05 50 — Valves specifies the requirements for all proposed butterfly valves "aboveground" in this project. Specification Section 33 12 16 — Butterfly Valves specifies the requirements for all butterfly valves "belowground" in this project." Question: "Does the project have to bid as a whole or can a bid be issued for certain sections?" Answer: "For bids to be considered responsive, a price must be included for the Base Bid items as well as all four (4) Additive Alternative bid items." Question: "Current specification required PCCP pipe only for large diameter buried waterlines. Since these lines require numerous fittings, the fittings for PCCP are in fact steel pipe. Will you allow AWWA C200 steel pipe as an alternate to PCCP? Not allowing C200 means the PCCP scope is sole -sourced to one manufacturer, which doesn't provide a competitive bid process?" Answer: "Unless large diameter pipe material is specified in the drawings, Contractor may use either Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe (in accordance to Specification Section 33 11 16.23), Ductile Iron Pipe (in accordance to Specification Section 33 11 16.13 "belowground" or 40 05 18 "aboveground"), or Steel Pipe (in accordance to Specification Section 40 23 10 "belowground or aboveground")." Addendum No. 01 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 009101-2 Rev 01-13-2016 Question: "Can C200 steel pipe be offered as an alternate to the large diameter ductile iron and PCCP?" Answer: "Unless large diameter pipe material is specified in the drawings, Contractor may use either Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe (in accordance to Specification Section 33 11 16.23), Ductile Iron Pipe (in accordance to Specification Section 33 11 16.13 "belowground" or 40 05 18 "aboveground"), or Steel Pipe (in accordance to Specification Section 40 23 10 "belowground or aboveground")." END OF ADDENDUM NO. 01 Addendum No. 01 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 — E11066 009101-3 Rev 01-13-2016 A a la .1311111111 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI. TEXAS COVER SHEET CITY OF (}y CORPUS CHRISTI f,eHj��l�,] TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Oeparlmenl of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 18 J4dVdd2S.CteltfELE61(...lt 11TtE 81ittaiL6.161.1.b. hlakbRIIIIIIICEU ...,.. .- !II 1 1111111111111111 111 111 1 i 11 1! 11 i11111 ii,,,1 iii '66e5 1111111 g1111 ,1; C 11 ii iiii dill 11; i iiiiiiiiiiiiir 11 lime! 11112:1c 111 i c I 11 i c eiiiiiierielliiiii' 111111111dj gWeeeee!!!! 11111 i lug ;i 1 ! !!! 111 111 !I! 1.:..1! 1 1 iElii!E N E P GGIIIG15 .- P 1 i 142211,!: 111 " 1 1 11 i 11-111 111 11M !".".4 "111111 1 illi 11 11111" 111r—hiii1 Fi li 1 g ll C 1 1 ill 1--- Ilr i 1 1111111111.11' "11"'1 11111 "—"' 1 ""11 ''-- li 1! V! a g 1 0 i 2 g Wiiillig e "1111 MI 1 !II !!! 1 1111111111 1 111111111 111111111 iiiii" 11110111 Almill 11 ee 111-. 1- -11111— 1:A111111 1111 IA ' !.... 1 F " 11 i U10!= U Mil .Eigi iiiiiilitii5iiiE $ P i 1 1 ""A0 -::—:..,..,. iii,,,,ia,,aiii..F.,;;E5Eieeeem. I ,i, !!11015gBER HEW 6 glg56560 iii 1 lin! a .iiii- 3 a 1111111111111i 113333311„111 11111111111111 i i I I 111 „, I 1 1 iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii" ,W1M11111 1 i iiiii 1111111111;; 1 111111 ........ Ilmgggil il ii 11""ii 111111 ; . 1 6 lir allq liq ' ! 1 q!!! A!!!UUh 1614 ii6156 111114 1 g 55 111 ////// i 11111i 1 -il a =! WV/ pl 'al..,. ' l''!a: ' ' g 1 i6i laa 99 Iee DUB BY DEMORIIIION § SHEET 2 of 254 REC011a 11/11W1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0a CORPUS CHRISTI CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I anthitects I contractors '°4- zrewx i — . .. ;AS 0 'F DRAWING INDEX UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services Z® tl i " ¢ O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PROJECT CONTROL PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 11 „ == - 1 ; li • .i.,, AV igi , ,g g I HATCH PATTERNS I . 1 liWIRM"-EIHIMPII0c11 JE IR' 2 6 i ! R F Pli:RqgRISO.RIAR g5 ! ggi ;!. k'qR i,n ! ° H 11 ! ! gas g.••F catcl 0 1 ! n u g g 1 . 4 , m ,f5 TYPICAL LEGEND/SYMBOLS 2 1 L=Fn 11E 1E111 'IIIE 1E111 IIE i g - 1 .... - P 5 0 , . JI ' . A g A Pn if 11 • 6 g ' R rl k IR 10 - 21 R Ill • I 1 i 2 R • = A 2 e cO — g.f. E 2 * < . 1 -u Sg. g m P.- i gggp p gg ' grrg" Bg . EPTEH c, rmip -. Mg.; IgH5g E Egm2 EE t '444 ; =0 ... Ipmm, mr5 T==,' NP 00ggi R ' 45,, ' 'WY' '9 q.9 ' g g Eg g , :'q? GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS aaiTi11111"'1111 ';1"'021KW . 23 ''- RI 1 - N i ?ZIP@ WI RIIIPIrg6 !1 g , R 4 3 4 2 • . -, - -..... e e 1., i I 0 1 1 SYMBOLS § I ARROW nrcrom.r..... ,...... AIEli jak SECTION TITLE KIP qp, SCALE: 1"A I. ...r. w.f.. .... rez......., Cr". •-..%11''""` Sena MSPAM My NuMMI S.M... 0...... Alak DETAI(TITLE AlIgh PLAN VIEW TITLE ....SAE,. ,... DETAIL/SECTION ID SYSTEM • gxx pR . g DESCRIPTION 'imam moclo, - TWIN IMCKFill wan. - MEXCII-0.MLL Ein21.2 Lin.474 p ri..EXML£ RASE ro. A.M-Mrs maInE0 pROCMR LA. ASP/MON (STA1.110) mane Of COWACTE0 ELME rar mr-rcorragro. 0E1M11, It spa., %%%?!.."Mar1,=) ZIMIls-1",ntgrok) MEOREOGL OENSITV - IX RACE (COPE) CONCRETE (UNCONME0 COMPRESSION, 7, IR OM) X.. CUM LOMIALKVIM CURS R.V.IPS CURS, POST ft CRATE MEM sox cuLsous (OST -N -RACE) MEM SEM WM.. (CAST -IN -PUCE) RPM, ATOJS S.Ets mon PAWPAW, 2.rILIRAL (IMM) STRENOTII (7 te TESTING SCHEDULE il e g5 • m maiam -man 111 g "--1§ iiiim MUNI liall 222 a 1 1 -M WON 111 g S ' .,.• w9 9. n. DEBDR11110 RN MOD DaDATE BY MERMAN i ' iTESTING SHEET 4 of 254 RECOMORAYOM SO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors . .0 o_, , f ,._,' q P : 2 '' TYPICAL CIVIL LEGEND AND SCHEDULE UTILITIES KZ DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services CONSTRUCTION NOTES ....,'Wettr=EccOL.nnf'. 'mr,X:r=igrra=7.3 amr 24.7076,'"'"'" 7:131f3T "%lt nrEMIRADISTErreTIUMZ4117-.E ettlelEXTO c=7,13%,TAA TUF.1112.="Marolnarstor 2=7:21747FIctaTI: FZIM s:ECw'''IMZECrunE RECYBEIMITS. A110 MAT HE HAS 1..1E0 REOLIPEO PERBP3 MO FEES A110 I.. A TX3ROU. L110.0/0110 OF . MENU PROJECT. cra: ":""n"T 7412 "I% ri• z,F 707,17,1 rem r. rOMEOZZTOVOMOTTIRWLITIFOTTrrfr: mare.. OF OE COMP. Ca ...CY SM... MUT, tIMres,"4141VITZMIAAlsE FenZIOVIIMIYZI LIr ""'".E'FaL FL" OrjEtronf ''`E • OXIMACTO1 SHALL nEu3 NM, ALL m•n„. uTunS. N 1nE BMW 1. meaRCHOuTO FACiunei NOT SHO. T1E EXCOMITISE,CertL, SE . R.A01.91.1TY TO COHSTRUCT ViZZEL:EF=a3mArgEIZI.V.E "`"E" Mliorellirrme..°"`TALIONO Far„ickyrrarEurciivvc,..Frogr=noz•alrErz icrzcz am -Jr= go-c...",n=“ -Arracr '2" TrjrrInitgarcellleT. gra .• nri=i7O. "ongjs-Vall mama. NOM EXCAM. OF MY OISCREPM.B. IS. =CWT. SHXL PEET AU. EPA M. T.C.E.O. STORM EATER Rem,no.s. ="c.r=ir= "AR.31:11V XL -T. ZroMPFZInn._ 2=417., AILTWASTI: =V& resErwrs="gagE. smonocv. gem PR.OE CUMOS AS FEM.. TO MIMI inUTM1.0316r3.13“11‘gE074aFRE7EliSIEIE"'WM12 glc"-"" FIE"gregc7IlarlgjVcfmrs7:err2LTIMMOis IS. AU. 0. .11( REU:CATONS .1111. EC PERFORM. BY ON PERM/BEL "=f4rTin4'02'08%711""IT FORT=MITMTP=MsZP11011 OF SM. M 1.0.L uzgroltmor,==‘;-...-77, gl: 11 4 1E 11:1 RO' R 0 FE lig -m a l'a I-1. El. 1 I El ,R q ,i1F Ali Igl li : EF IF1 ii 15 Pi PI 1, =4 gi al a. =1 16 0851 t'e ;':! Tt 01 N 11 .-ga go 11 IN gap PI1 11 ilil 1 21! II 1; 4 i. 1 : 1 h 1 i IA CONCRETE & SIDEWALK rECATE3 .PLICEIAVHa. STOP AT Exmac...mes WOMB AS • E EITE S =NZ co*= Tie 3 17 74" &V 3. SHALL SE.E0 H. FAN. CAF SE. 4. UN.. JONIVA MOTIF MOMS SHA11..1,E WOE :mew STORM WATER STREET & EXCAVATION os.tormuent MEMOS. SUS.. PREP/WT... OEVEIGPXBIT OF COMPXTED PS I. PROJIMT SECIFICATIOHS. A SOFT N. 91.1.1.n EEMIln3 M. THAT poo3ES A CaRBISON CREA..11 KEASupEO vERTEALLy BEN ILICILL.3 AT MERV. OR 1MS SY A 14.0 OMP mum, FULLY .0E0 2. K.2. m um-sneg SuBINDE COWACTE0 M "Mr= 51.2=`"ZaSIT froeMOLIEfol, 12 """ ▪ WialtrsracAll " =Pe' "r" r•t g=f1=r2r,r0T.'" ErsONW. ttrfarlAtinfl fr.3tc"`c oZ1,11.="AlTa4M;a37'' "'"'" S. HOT 1AL,Eirtli, ..,CONCiET.Eg4.1.1. MEET =REQUIRE.. OF MOT ST.. attfall OcatUPIrr ',3EOZ “"'ErE° AtTreNTrafatZ rd223 "A en " ErE HWCP TRMISMOM3 M EOSINS PAM.. SMALL SE TRMISTOHEO 0.1 10. TO rUCE A NEWT mnE 4.4.. FE CFECHEO NTH A 10. EOCE PROP 9. LOMTUONAL INACP JOIHT LOC.. BYLL SE AS APP.,. SY TE EXSTIEB2 Vollf="W'SeriSITSSTErVirLINT corcETAR.2"." C.CH.E FOR MOO (0.F.Er. PmEmEHTS SH.L. CLASS .F. H. A mnamum `craa'1122.17.3.T.47 tr=rest,' n"Vro“ 2"D'`' " co=clut PR.OE PROPOSED Loco. LMOJT TO .0111EER FOR =A.M. NSTMLAIION OF S.L OAFS FOR 13..IBEREva&.11SITZAMILT.L.P .CONC;REIE4 r3 TO SE CUT, TICE CUP3 S./ ' m ;I q;11W1IIIMPqg ' 11;g11111;150r al l'IlinWE'l 6 0 ;: 1141 Ri Pr; g g P g g 5 OM A 5 b. 1 i 1 Pi 2AE111 P lE 111 a g g ;leg 1 111 Blgril g gF A Ns. SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS FOR SEQUENCING WORK . 111 i4I 44 !I Ili ilygl ''' ;! 1 d 11041g gl1 3'' 31 11 il iii °1 11: 111 gli 1 g. gO 01 5 Jgil RR 1 7.0 • -02 - 1 't. 'g 1"11'21 III I gi R6 . aa p1 P HF5 !: PR igmy, g m Rr" m; g ill 1 g' .; i. gB . -AA 51 Va '2 ;; 2;490 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR STORMWATER DISCHARGES FROM CONSTRUCTION SITES (TPDES GENERAL PERMIT T(R150000) WASTEWATER 11MtrIZI ELLE PVC PIPE MR CUCTLE RCN PPE BULL SE US. FM ...MEP .1.011E0 SISMCES SHXL EC CON.TELY P.101E0 A/10 WPM AT fflE WM OP Sumr. SE... M... SE FLOW. • tIETATMOPITooTEff".1=12"ZorraS."-Ors sc MIO BYLL SE RACERUSO NTH SW. E.WTE0 WrOOLL COXPACIE0 TO HOT .9 T S. ST.APO INICCTOR DENSITY (ASTM 0699, S. PLL A110 UMW BEIM. WHHOLES SMALL SE MINSTE0 AM. <MOE PEP CITY SPECIAL... CLEms. Ca Funa. CF ExSTNO SE. uHei REC.. FCa COMOCIOL BASIBMTER SIN.J. FE TIE CONTRALTO. RUP01.13111TY. HO SMNATE PAYIABIT SM. FE WOE TO THE CONTRACT. FOR CLEM.. OR P.M OF M a• ' =107.'17 ',,,gostre AValr1.3,372, 3101732==. ...rm. if REC4.0 1HE HORIMIITM. PBS MIO/OR ..C. swamis WY BE uTu. TO ABIDE n. IEOUPEO CIMON U'ff= TIETEI 0 I FA" rfillfrO 171 1TO7 01."0% 044.' Fl“ F"W*Fra EL: %FEL X57"r ITEOC •I'E r 1#1ar. polo. TEST. ,P,,,L..,.Cs.BEIEWATER LSES SMALL FOLL. NOVEL cemnow OF. ExCNATF. LEFf OrEar.IT Smou. EM BTH WEN WATER LINES NeTnrjsMcVerslar"Tals"." " um" F"'cr 2. 11,VgrofgATLZ11°711.=E4.112.2f NV= ro'' m7rWsPial" mr17 “"HE12. `""9.1-7:""Tr.r."''. 0.1. PERMS. ZAMo171 rl'littiTAFTEZ mr“,rmarmr.-nre 2,7.3% Ear sarly7rEE.Eori levEEETTME.E EEE=EE E01711 ZZarar=11 'ucto."IZEI3VM ."`IcrlesTINEn . CITY MIER IRE CONTRACTOR WS PAM AU. IPPU.. FEIM FOP . WATER COWTHurnOm maER TET,t0°"="REITIOVTAILIPP9t."4111'eFFVFC=MT°' COHSE.. SUMO. TO . ITE. ntr ZE. BAS.ATER StiAu. EE CAMO WM A 23..OTH Of MO PvC RM. PPE. • SEF.TEN OF wAl...ASTE.. umB SE ACCOROM.E.n., MIO FOR PUBLIC MIER SFS.S. OF TE. COMIS4011 BOTEXIEHT. MIO ST.a. mre, OEMS. 4C1=FC"8"11 "ZZOWnVill." VP= • I.E.ANCAL .1011T OR EXCIFEB:11.P.E0 LorITO TIETII'111110rwITCVC;3= S. WM MOWS SWLL SE ACCEISISE OURS. C.STRUCT.. " ▪ MITI3 UuTCETATTsTE'FOcrEAV=TTE="'" 801. MIO WIER E0. TO PEWIll SOLL SE ..F.STE0 TO ROSH "-STOCERUM Co= 1374 001ITILG.TOTFOR SZAcE BY ME Cir v.grre3 Ma MAT OE umeminS3 . OE an arEME 'PECOS... OH ,TATBi OETZSIEETS oc=4E" s.,34,OrrYZ ORAI1NOS HOSE.. IT WY SE HEM.. TO FU:CE BUM. FEIS. amo. Low.: OPC. TO .10 COWUCTS. 'Orgrefrel P7AV.1011F=TVIETtlantRIVOIPEUlti P"I'r ILO tETE3 1S..CM11011S M EOM. WATER SM. WU. FE P/. FOR AS MOWED ME "IIZTE.177s. C-ri=s7FTZ.=, 'HIVN TRE'S'Onata".=°3 ItEEEmex mmtr MUSA. R010.3 OPC. TO AMOIBIOENTE CORM.. NaVlo°1111rr Z%70072grelnrailEll=lisay 'WM. AS VON STA/10mr4E"CTICAT011 Sfal=110 .110011E0 MAY UFES. SWLL SE 1E00E0 MIO CAPPED A XIIINUX OF 10 FEET FROM fflE co.ceno“ PONT. 17=CEM11111CrjATETralm."Igt=" TMOVIC" sm.i.101;3: Fm0 FOS OSECTLy OLFT SHALL 1. COHSSIESSO MEIStoRY mO1N. M. 00111V.IP SOLL ADJUST . PROM. INTER hCCORONCLI, TO AVOI3 rErnooTx.r. rE 21.,11iE PISOPOSSOZI: LIHS:PROVILISESITS ro ma/NSF 22.11YOROLTATILI=RATES SHALL COFFORM T3 wn. FORMULAS PER .0. 2311,14.414,r1. CWT. HO MOFE SP .0 AS PER .01 CH/P. "Ii="Sgal.'"E=TE nri .TrE:rCIIATTAH79,3r(er " SS. 0..er. OH ra, !SO... SHALL OS ASCSACIAIKE SOWS AH 0 Ellarp.1 DCMILI4INSS. MO R. EMBER *MUM PoRIVISsrant ACCCOMMICE HMI fflE E'3"' °""" 2"leg'E.WZIorIT=EMZ`gr"7.41:11,== COLINHIL AT MI FirWi=""RTIVIISten`A91.1"7.11=Eule" — • T. S SHEET 5 of 254 MORT 0.19016110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS a CITY CORPUS OF CHRISTI S engineer. I architects I contracthra , - ; , ,' CIVIL GENERAL NOTES UTILITIES K25 DEPARTMENT 8 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OVERALL DEMOLITION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors S II I» Th iro , ...,1: in iris / r . m m I ' 1 H rilFa' to A al k II ff AI - z 1 5 BY BY O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OVERALL SITE PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors L., 60 , --1 I 1 -COP. 1 '2 / .. ' 1 57 ' 1 il 01 f 2', 1 D il tr, , / i P i ----> 1 , A g g g ± g D , , g ; t ,.. s ° c 1 P - ,, - B 1---4 g ' I I P p, gr.g... # . I g ' g -; 1 E ' ; g g g E ' / 1 2—/'' 1 I i P 1,1•41Rii , 1 B 1 i i _I# I , # # f„ #i # # # ii # , / 4 ; FA 6:1 Lig, i i i, i I in ct , , , I I A i i i 11, I PA / Ii! 4 ' / D 1 /I#:R 1 ir 1 I I p; II_ 1 , . . iti *...11 , su 3,,, 811 , - Ira n i 0 ig PI 1 SU 3.1. ....;' A., —;-.— i i I I , , ; /# I ", B //# 11111 floo.i, Ill c e __ II, SU 3.4.51.4 , 5Rigig 6 .IIIAII.,,,Allr 0 , .SgWi : ;OM 0 PP22,- ad212M. B i i I/ iI( ;" gA 11: g p 1111111, .' v I II i .0. C. • • A II gg gig :g ; ri RR A ti 046... V q! '•- c gct , V4 i A g•• I, 0'21 I 7,,:,'',1 ssi 0 iF Ug' @ p '1 A gr il J -_, .8 12.5 , g2 !Z / 1 N / 7 Er- 14 A V r4 1 1 i I / 66g P g g ' r,-. ' F P if I I 6 ; 6 g !I ; g6 " i li RI -. '1, "' g I . ' I ; BASELINE A MATCHLINE STA 5+0D SEE SHEET CS E5 .! 1 BA 0 0 BASE INE A MATCHLINE STA 5+D0 B SEE SHEET CS ° .,,. X DEE BY ...T ...p, a . py DESCRIPTION i n : S SHEET 8 of 254 PEC011a 11/11W1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors a°Z,EFIL" =Mg: , .0 .. -,, 5 , '1 : _ , ' 0 V, X BASELINE A STA 0+00 - 5+00B UTILITIES --.7.....7. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services BASELINE A MATCHLINE STA 5-1-00 SEE SHEET C5 I , BASELINE A MATCHLINE STA 5-F00 SEE SHEET CS rn ii 1 PI ii ';''•I— 1 1 — E ,----- otth. 1-.4 il 1 1 1 1/ 1 1 1 1 rI / 1 .4 .: i , Oq .V. .- --''' , - 1 50 R / H i i i 1 iii0 It g 8 :?.. g - -/'. , 15.C. , / , A Yj i I Ix , i i ii ii ii ii 0 1 il . ' / 1 lb. i i i i ii 0 0 / — urtmnrna rum STA 7.38.8. 31.3 - , Ap - i 1 0 i arRiMi 1 • IX g. , r , /I..-- e I I g i i I I , FT:' p 1 \ .... i i I I III ii 1 I EASEuEEE C ME, l 1 4i All M ,- E' . . .00 h II§ ' ..Pig 1 I - AT 11 i i 0 -,.• f i / :_>-............, ,_...,,,-,-_, ,, , g 1, ill/ rj 11 0 1 r, 1'V 0; , q2 7 , -9 gi 1 /1------ 5,0 h5 il `ga AR„ ig , , 0 - ai ii IQ ./ ,g „,",:---„,, - .-7--' ., .,,i..--4---_,, 1-V ''— ' li 1- -1711-'-g: s*Hg ZFH',°.' ---;; 2; ga Ei' sa gi 4 31 R -T g . p.. ri s ; n „ g l'' ,i' ql 1 t t 1 't•',E,!tnELAk."! SHEET 9 of 254 ST.011110/11W1116110. WTR-450 0.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTITEXAS , CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors '":°E,'"E''gF.4.1° i11,1ia: TM. a, ,. . :- II ,„,....!--. BASELINE A STA 5+00 - 10+20 — = UTILITIES — DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services a SS S 8 8 6 8 6 S B o 0 0 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U___--:---.-.:u Bi ; "�' Ek �m-,_ A®• SID 0.2P_ o 1 i PIllrair #. 4 S �f ` 11 Wy�l IYv. P 8 i 8 \ "E � s arJ 11 �5 � a =B4m --fir = , Y lci a m h o ng m FF 11 2. 11 garsssi °'eG°.-oma__ ____-__ __ P :y Il _=-- \ I� Ll lir' _ 11 A5 8 m . P �a 11 IQ is 7 ,H 8 BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00g SEE SHEET C8 BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00 SEE SHEET C8 b e b e b e "s e b b e b eb py XX o•'E DA 2121212 • i(ADDITIVE SHEET 10 of 254 REC011a MINIM 110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers architects contractors•'.'.gss. '°""""`"°° ,°°° """"""°`m+� t a' '•� S BASELINE B STA O+OO • 5+00 ALTERNATE NO.4) UTILITIES r.... DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00 SEE SHEET C7 A— 1 _ 2 $ R 5 BASELINE B MATCHLINE STA 5+00 SEE SHEET C7 ;',.. s_L-- . F r I . . .. ,9•R 1 g _--, ,§,1 —at-rxe SEE 9.1a.INE C SHEET C9 \ BASEUNE B STA 5+00 - 8+90 ____ --- ----- _ - ___ _ _ - .. _ - , , ,.,. - , — 1 am .., : ga,,a _ Pr. IllSELNE C ' •,— , '--._ .-., II E.' P 5 — pX 58 hi 4. 2,-- , • ---___--- S 2 Hoc -- 01 V 1, il 4 1 ! EtEEEEEEEE! ! „,„„ n„„ „ „„,„,„ RE/IBION NCI DEE BY DESCRIPTION i i(ADDITIVE UHT 11 of 254 IIT.0119 DRAWN NO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors X ••• 5 21 BASELINE B STA 5+00 • 8+90 ALTERNATE NO.4) UTILITIES DEPARTMENT --7......F. Department of Engineering Services I , A— I / ..„. Or , 01.0 mil - 11 LiVsl= Aisne -""..NS le 0. 1 iiiHIP 1=7 • n 881iA h 1 ---- 0.-1 —7 t ''' 8‘45rt,-Wil.. 5. iiiii104 ---41 -- ) f 7 < r/V' , ' • 1 '11 JO 1 ( A " 4 1 oe iro 0.9 1 .,. , 0 . ha!Ika p„ SASEUNE C STA 0+00 - 3+40 I M M 1 _ CI i, , 6 .'Ph '1 ? / , ' — f.- '-'ali ; :.., IES M gl , _.„ . ..1' ' ' ', ,7-'• , S ' , *- - . " liNg Pg• "11 il -- ' P s I!. ill. 4 / A. 111 gi Ili 11 T P'4 me R e n....... ...'T .... S SHEET 12 of 254 MORD 11/11W1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors "°EE.F.4". '7iEiE T" a , i ,..... ',- BASELINE C STA 0+00 - 3+40 = UTILITIES ..7....= DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services kE S SE S S E k E k E S kE S E S k kE S SE S S S 1 SECTION A BASEL C5 CI O SLUE: I' -e• @ CB CIO SCALE: I'=e' �; < $ ,, — t ? `F _ SLY . n ' ' _ A mob\. ,e 1ms Li m ' ` u > n ilPMk o o S S S o 0 k k S S S S o o 0 V. o 0 e e o o e g 0 o e o 0 0 0 e e & e „R .. g¢p � a 11 g g .ell kw mdlOW a 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0NOV 1t7L[ � g a 3e Iib r '11 [massa aux TYPICAL DR PION O BASELINE A STA 7+35.6 sa slave sI E. $ PION a BASELINE A STA 3+60.3 maxi TYPICAL ROAD SECTIO SGLE: NTS PROP BO' WIN NM SEM. a` 2i f''Cm9 i! 4 4 l'nq `a S� ansa_ T i $e z I q8 1 �; ... Re A i I, - SAB - S ' ... C 5 k S S S k ke S S E S E E E p" XXL o•'E ....CITY i 3i SHEET 13 of 254 RECORD DRAWING KO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS `Nv architects contractors....-. engineers 10+. t ,.., -,` ,y ?¢ e�$�r '"� '~•J }"bE . €§ae, y "` TYPICAL SECTIONS __ UTILITIES ^^ DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services""`""""`�`�'"`m BY BY O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN VIEW CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractor 8 8 8 8 6 8 S 8 S 8 o 6 o 6 o 6 o 6 o 6 ? Z / lum I ID 4 t' MIJIM I / , §I II U .4 ! I' PDP 7Fi. Alimmi , !, iy„) yOrliJ°r! ,T;.J. II g , i[ 11 1 1 T p e 1 STA B.313. IS.S. LT BL -A 707,T3U"-ET eau 12 (H) f1,3S.50 1r- PI; = ' e.pi _ .- ,. a T ' m p= t ,--,r z t 1 1 / I 41 g u i At = .. - '41 ' 0 ,4 HI I R I . , II Ili ..40 1 1 -11 , Ilk-ei m,. i 11011°11 blif g / tg N. q BA IF '4 ROVEMENTS PLAN I .. : . ,. gi 2 .,;11i . ..41 ,,,,,, _ / i \ i i , / i 'd . h - ,..11-.. IMO ill ,—' II , II1 A M rig- ,L. 1 / • — V4 , VAPT r 1 4 1 1 MEW N: 1 VI .. 1 0 2 • 9 • i • 2E OFI.S1 U 2 n , 02!1T1 TN 4 0 ii 9 di MO g , R -- / r- -- E , ..• Ig g g L't,tEEED solimsom REP MON NO TE DESCRIPTION i n . iPLAN SHEET 15 of 254 RECORD MIAMI. WTR — 450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors ..,.,,,,.„ .,... T" a . . f ,. , STORM WATER IMPROVEMENTS AND PROFILE 1 OF 2 UTILITIES Fs..., DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services I,ggggLigEggEggg 1) p --------- ,- 1(1 , _ 7 1 10 71:,,, » , ) 4 3- ,7 — : .,, ' 2411) • A _ att. g:I z 044 4477 L4 ....... •..Ii.....Em.a. 00 4 ° Vlk 2l43i,,. t Nt , 1 w 1 '4 1 0 ENTS PLAN & PROFILE EE ZIER \ 4 \ w.3.. i g 4, x4 1 LA A9,\ ( ....1 f,1 10000001 1 , , 1 \ -...., ,1"---1 -2 , h ; • ,, — / k , ok pa g 1 , '34 A.- _ g ; ,• J71 0 • • — 2 , i / , „ , , • ; 1! R eg 0 1: ki 1! gl 1: ig 11 4 B 4 I q ri ig x :13 g X E Xi, 4 •-,,,_ 74,- r / kggEgEggEgEggg n--, -- - --- —.a-- - ---- * SHEET 16 of 254 PEC011.1111WIXO NO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0a CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ............. , 0 0 STORM WATER IMPROVEMENTS PLAN AND PROFILE 2 OF 2 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) UTILITIES KZ DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services P Li PL 55555 U I U 1 2 $ — I c 1 R _ ,! V. SEE BAsELINE C SHEET CO F ,,, "' 1 — , • :..7, , g : - ,.!7 V fft IP .. nand" -g - ..... , giNi -, , --.-.. .g.g..0 2,T,Tz' ., r, g 1 ,,... 1g " ;gg gg§ P . 4 r - I . ' I - 1 _,,,__ ' __,-- 0 ------ -- - E 111 H. • . g. . . .. gi qg _al - r' " 1 . . -. 1 41f 0 1- -- A I- IMPROVEMENTS PLAN & PROFILE :$ gar giE 1 'R. el. III _. mg' 1 111111 -1H-1- 5 _ = " . - --- I FR R - -5--. - . . qi q 2,TITZ' OP a L2 g i R g A t" • -- 51= '..-. IA itot;1-7,;:- " q '''' a. WO Ig i iaIIiin • - IC' I 71111 .. WU ilhgra- I- - , '' g 1111 - me em—ge 4 la -.I . 1-1 „,_ 1 fl , ,_ t I : '1,.. - 1 4 ; __----,--z r R 5 II a .. 2 gt" t — ' • I 1 1 11110,0 , , .8 MI MOE ' In Idtt _ .. 5 "4 U f L l J / -.- a a & Eq. 0 p 3 _ -_--1 ',- .,:___, ' - E ?AI g ' p?2,1: P. r. 1 r--Th LI ..---}•-. R-t' E , ,E` n" - - g -Ft - . II' ______ e ,' 71- --_ 5 = i i 11 !; Ix .,. Oil I. a P. f. t f. E 41 i MU 17 of 254 MORD 01111•1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0a CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors a — ' 0 1 HIGH SERVICE 3 UTILITY SERVICE PLAN UTILITIES KZ DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services pia a VAAAAAAAAAAAAA oH� � VAAAAAAAAAAAAAA O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 7 DEMOLITION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 2i 1CeRl(�C•G[[ON 0)=D0); 40111 4110.401**30)10411MMIll -1.1 �U�O� O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 1 DEMOLITION REFERENCE DRAWING CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors P S 2 F O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CIVIL DETAILS 1 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 01 PPE EP. I I R. BY BY O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CIVIL DETAILS 2 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractor x e 4 4 P 144- a Ss O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WATER DETAILS 1 OF 4 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors pp }pgpg pgpk f R aG pyydd: tett Rg'a`' 6 0% tats FF �, €�� a�� ddp g•I 9 pp @F . 9 float g M8 R3 Fa 9 eq ; q;q $ Rf E ��a $ R g t E ijKil iringia it 1. ;. 1.oi i (GREATER THAN PF UNPAVED AREAS ' PAVED AREAS :3R,_ e to gg "„a'tl668 6k g ot /: L€ R ;a 1 aggo i qqqq 4 4 4 .. a E 1 gpg hi26p 6 a a Ss O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WATER DETAILS 1 OF 4 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors BY BY E 2 g O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WATER DETAILS 2 OF 4 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors as t a a A sero , a o � N O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WATER DETAILS 3 OF 4 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors a 31 n nttl ttiSI SIen a TSI a N .d ttiC a O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WATER DETAILS 4 OF 4 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS 1 OF 5 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 7 F, el 0 'et •TI — • 7 Iii 7 "6:: " 0 -- - 2 , Vgg.1 g g .:, „ ,.. , 6 0 0 A a 2 6 6 , 7 6 ' rA A, 66-x.g6 . .,,..., 0 a t k r• rn DO 'I rei ca RING & COVER WITH 30" OPENING FOR 4' AND 5' DIA. MANHOLE INSTALLA M sl R I rft k XX g. P g-66. x C) Z ' g-gx ,.. ,--R, !A i • ot4 4 r... ' A X' to o, L..) 7 _ o .,: to t 1. .7, - I --, 0 - - - - RING & COVER DETAIL ON EXISTING 4' DIA. MAI MANHOLE RING & COVER a o A o , 11.. 4 y INHIBITOR COMMENTS , - El9 1.• 4 11 i SHE Er 27 of 254 MORD MINIM 110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contracbors 'ilaiF.F.."" , _ g. -. CITY STANDARD7.7.......7... WASTEWATER DETAILS 2 OF 5 UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services 24; Ileo a`a 03 as ya 0 CZ a< earno A sero I � O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS 3 OF 5 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors S O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS 4 OF 5 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors e VARIES O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WASTEWATER DETAILS 5 OF 5 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors cD c H H z T. s. A E r I � O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD STORMWATER DETAILS 1 OF CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architect I contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD STORMWATER DETAILS 2 OF CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors S8 411 R E 'Bg O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD STORMWATER DETAILS 3 OF CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors i 1` a p16 1€ 9$ R11 s, tRFRI 31 RI a q 6 a €R oil ! $ 66,6E • R, g - 31:riri:!: 461 !I! 11417::; ZWCIFILL (GREATERT THAN12" ABOVE IPn UNPAVED AREAS PAVED AREAS i. i +$ g t g� 6 IPS $ 141 I: BAR $ h R s�d j �y p�gg�gl, a , 6FE g ia` @g l'EM- g4 g 4 €Ila 668 1 y4g3 qp 5 26 ab. 4 S8 411 R E 'Bg O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD STORMWATER DETAILS 3 OF CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors b LU - k BY BY 2 2 - 4.• O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY STANDARD WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION STANDARD DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractor iK-r'r ! p.. = "--4, 414,gi2iii T"-;-;TII = r n ..' . ' ' ' • , 0 ABBREVIATIONS ME i E .7. , _,E L'.::' ;A MATERIAL LEGEND 1 ! 1 :4 ; W ! 1 1 ! 1 1 t GRAPHIC SYMBOLS LI,HHll Iiil e'l 7 i'ri '--;• = .;tEri - - BLDG. CODE ANALYSIS Tt;TTTTTT,T-TTT-T-TTTTT:R r"- _ =_= g T „ == = DRAWING INDEX 1 I 1 `"' "4;:i7g="E'priE,NRETL=7,;,3"T CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY Dr CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT LNV ''4' '''''' • '4- E k.: D 5 q DRAWING INDEX AND CONVENTIONS 0 S33NVHV310 AHOIVAV1 RE!) m m 0 cr) m 0 I 0 = IC 0 274 77 4:7 277 777 72= 2777777777 IIE7Z01 T72247772" ortalrnia G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXUS UTILITIES DEP=RTMENT , Hrlrok- LNV =.72F1`;7474.`77m:2727 7772EEE 0 NV1d 2=OO1d NOISN3IN fi Qw4 II J I . 3 3 3 �, i � 3 +I I � i 1 i Nl' IIgggg . . . 41 I]. — zP e e ,w, �- .,., . w., 0 MAMA No ortalrnia REM. KT R O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN CITY DE CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT oopo-fmoot or __ _,orvicoo LNV EEEE 0 ortalrnia o G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CLERESTORY DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN CITY DP CORPUS CHRISTI TEX5S UTILITIES DEPPRIMENT Doport—ont Lt LNV EEEE m y O IIa ' 4 4 FERENCE FLOOR PLAN e e 0 I 1— -7 H- ENL l s '.1). v ' ® ___ `___ __ ® -0 0 �S LV Mr a 533 C A®R 0 6_'� s 2 ie e TOILET ACCESSORY LEGEND ®, LA t- _ G' JrI! Ii a C �®8®..i41) O I SHEET KEYNOTES IID 0III ®® o °e,.,,.., _u o _ or m -. Gr)��_pppg ® _ eIg °-�� - - , -o �I- ate - �ee-�-- _- ® 0 .,Q ®l �'" ___ 9 .7� ; ® a m z FFA=EA==N�__ a s v F eigio 4 ® et m lav cid— ,.YI' - - v I a e O 0 a O II 4®() I E R SHEET 39 of 254 »E WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGHSERVICEPUMSTI,TEXAS INGNO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI. TE CITY CF CORPUS CHRISTI TEX45 LNV veers I arch sects I contactors „o "`"°".�"` """,.",�",•" :, •,._ °' \ e £ D o4 HIGH SERVICE 3 REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN UTILITIESeng %�% DEPP RTMENT Pnpc-tm_nr Pt En_ �� ory �c�.. EP a�T ao 0 O ®O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MY ERESTORY REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN __0 Flo I I _ED _c) __0 � _c) _c) � __0 _c) 1 , o 1 - - - - -_c) o7F�'amAP A a pim = o N 101 I © _ _ _ -_ — a E ',71CORPUS R SHEET 40 of 254 »E WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP ,BUILDING TEXAS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS TEXAS LNV engneers I arch teas I contractors „o,' "�" .S" "".�,�,. °' C S £ DE. HIGH SERVICE 3 CLERESTORY REFERENCE FLOOR PLAN UTILITIES .77,.....gDEPPRTMENT Le.,��ne,1 ,rleg es- ng Seiv �,es 0 r b 1 O 0 0 0 cnN ',' 16, 41 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN LEGEND MAMA No orsonrnia 61 R O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN CITY DE CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT DE_.nf-f,E,1 of a , ._rinq LNV ZIEEE 0 NV1d dOOH 0 H 0 z RENEW TO. oarapnw O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering services LNV 9 1a I I I T L dao moa 1 —dA-- i c 4 � — — — 0 H 0 z RENEW TO. oarapnw O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering services LNV 9 G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY DF CORPUS CHRISTI TED5S UTILITIES -= DEPPRIMENT 00 O z H m 0 r m H O Z A C 0 0 2 m 0 Dl m O z QS � 4114 HOIH ENI wood dWfld r MAMA No ortalrnia R O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CITY DF CORPUS CHRISTI TED5S. UTILITIES DEPP RTMENT Dopa-t—ent _r LNV 0 H I t oH rn m - o H 0 z H m 0 m 0 z ortalrnia G.M.o STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CITY DP CORPUS CHRISTI TEX5S UTILITIES DEPPRIMENT LNV „ciEEE 0 2 z m 0 O z 0 m z m 0 m 0 z r 0 z NOI1VA313 2,1O1H31N1 'O1S 313 2iO1H31N1 '01S 0 z m 0 m r m 0 z VA313 2iO1H31N1 'O1S 0 z r_ 1 i.,willsmidi MAMA No ortalrnia REM. KT O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS CITY DF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Dapo[tr—air i -y Selvi_e_ LNV ZIEEE 0 1i io z III G) =11 c 111111 mEl 111 0 O z Ell Ell Ell Ell Ell 111 Ell Ell Ell Ell Ell HI Ell Ell Ell Oz I® O z MAMA No orscaprnon REM. KT R O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 BUILDING SECTIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT -cpo Hr��t �t Eoa-i�=orio LNV P 2 ! ; L I1 a 4 Mionommmommommimaimaimmill) • (IIIIIIIMPIMPVIRIAIRIPIUUMWMPIIIMOMPIPMONA G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deoof-noeot of ino'oeefing Seoioes G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY DF CORPUS CHRISTI TED5S UTILITIES DEPPRIMENT Sep:lames- Er,ineecing Se -vices ELECTRICAL ROOM RAMP SECTION N0110aS TIVAA ortalrnia E 0.11. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS o HIGH SERVICE 3 WALL SECTIONS CITY DF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT 1,0r -hoer -I of Engireerir, Soofices LNV EEEE 0 .0 111111INIFINVII 0 4 0 0 0 0 F z 0 . . T 0 0 4 0 7Z1 m 0 r cr) 0 0 zF 0 m X 0 0 0 co ........... 1111111 III - -vinvifem7, • - - - - OSA *,•••••••••••••••1 ortalrnia G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS CITY Dr CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Dep,rtn-lerc c• Er,ineeri, LNV -:.°4F1`;0R04F°°44 „ci0EEE • • ••• • • 130 SINVI 2,13A0 A= I ,01010 •MIOT• .1L. AMIPMFM IWW, Ira w.a.14 1 --790.11~ w TO m 117 m r 0 GVH el3A110 - r ortalrnia G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS CITY DP CORPUS CHRISTI TEX5S UTILITIES DEPPRIMENT Loom -moot of Ing'oeefing Oeoices LNV EEEE ?, 2 4 0 m Z H A E > 0) m 0 0 z UT ortalrnia o ; G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 RAMP/STAIR DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEX5S UTILITIES DEPPRIMENT Dopo-trozof of Loginooring Sorvicoo LNV ZIEEE O C O O 2222.8, o O j 11111111111111111111111111 SCIEDULE MAMA No ortalrnia REM. KT .79 121 2 53XSINli„ M R O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DOOR/WINDOW ELEVATIONS & SCHEDULES CITY DF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT LNV ZIEEE cl itr.0113, G.M. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PARTITION TYPES CITY DP CORPUS CHRISTI TEX5S UTILITIES DEPPRIMENT lepartrnert of Engireerin, Services LNV ZIEEE 2 g E°E°;'e:r:°'-'c'EEREFE9:''IFrEiFiFak'E:,E'E 3 WIND & SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA EV:11EIE-=' MASON. WALL REINFORCING - PE.% DEFORMED LONCITUDINAL WIRE 9 CA CALVANIZED GEOTECHNICAL REINFORCING STEEL 8 Tau • ,7—novrN.rogk.,-" STEEL 2 881a 882 2 MATERIALS CONCRETE 31320NOD JO 3.9 0 0 J A. H.0 201.3 NO VAN .0 THIHS 91" 3.31 JO HOLLOB d o inoas JO 3101 01391.03 JO =I. 3120S Or LON ss,un USN urvnlo3 0 SNOISIA. V 130221 NOIL.313 0rIETHE 0E2 MN 0T2T2TIr IDEI3 31.5 = .1.5 jakk ipLoa Mir TII""Y 2.11 1.30 90 NOILD. VIILSAS NOLLVDIALLN301 11V130 NOLBilON ,1A g ^ x., 2 5 5 5 ,A,g,M0,E,OgOgOg800P,“§,ggggAq Aq 2^8 8 2,2802g-22222 2.. ,T2, 0 2. 8,2 2 g 801 2° jg2 8 10 - - 8a5 5 g 8 8 g g 8 T A , ,a0 — 2 g 2 E TT 2 INTERNEVEIONAL BUILDING CODE DO. & 3002 ED) WITH L.E. TEXAS REVISIONS .I MANUAL OF CONCRETE PRACTICE, 20. ER1 ORS! DES. HANDBOOK. 213. ASCE 7-05. MINIM. DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES ED) 318-05 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE AISC STEEL CONSTRUCTION MAW. ED. ALLOWABLE STRESS DES!. ED) STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE. A. D1.1. D1.2. D1.3. DI. LATEST EDITIONS 3R) STEEL DECK INSTITUTE ESDI) (D) STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE ES. ER) REINFORCED MASONDS ENOINEERINC STIL ED. EDI, ACI 530. BUILDING CODE REOUIREMENTS FOR MASON. STRUCTURES ED) MO USED F. DESIGN 2 CONSRUCTION ON r. BEFER.. WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS H IN ADDITION TO SELF WEIC. OF STRUCTURE DESIGN CODES Tg1.22 2 T 0 DESIGN DESIGN LOADS: 8 -Al q 'A 5 X ZT CC gg 2. T 2 2 21 U 20 T. 0 T. T. ;; 22 . 0 0 0 C „ ' g gg. ggl.g AA ' gg g1 12g ' 8 2 g F ,L1 xiX X, x x PP z c z . .. . zP z 2 . . T(Ij , 8' 2 . 2 2 " C o Z VT 28.2 m > X g .05 ga8 0 2 0 2 A g 0 .. e . SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL ITrrs TZ°V22:1Z. &,,U-7,Znaa° ' larc4-v z7„-s=TG:AszA.s,=.g^,v's.TAcNorg-Tr=roN "E FEEE'C'HTT GENERAL NOTES IT'' _, El x oo ... In CALL BEFO .1 1g g 'A gg D '9 g rd 2,8 82 22, 88 2 voD',Eg^,14ND, =N0EL-,v,= FORMS SHALL BE EITTOTNIEREAM TESULLETTEAESHETILLEEETTEEIEE SOIL RETA S-2 Fi >NE STAR ON COMPANY 7-669-8344 'RE YOU DIG! HOZ.M.TrZEO%"jOU DRILL, OR BLAST - STOP AND CALL' 811 " ' 0 ' ' U ESg,935. BE MANLIF5CTLIRED SURE NDID 125TER RESISTANCED ED FOR 5 MUM. 3F 1200 PSF SE.CE 7EHTECEEEETZEEEFOEFEEZ THE MENTHE'''. 1NER NOTES ORM NOTES N.'. ... N.. NAMN NV DESCRIPTION REVISION NO. DATE RV °N.. .Nr. N 1 I T. i SHEET 56 of 254 RECORD DRAWING WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OFi CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I artractors chitects I con F s , , Il M HIGH SERVICE 3 GENERAL NOTES & DESIGN CRITERIA I UTILITIES 77....g. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services ;22 2 0 . r 5 .15 54 2 2s 1 0 0 -o, m Z 2,,* 0- (5) 85 M q rrnm VI r,:,1- ,,- N 05 i; 55 2 0 .", !-: 2 5 ' 2 2 2 5 2 ' ; 2 ; 5 2 5' 2.! 2 4 2 2 ° 2 5 2 0 -C) 5 -0 2 5 5 ;„ 6 .!, rr , : . 6. r 2 5 CD 5 5 5 8 4 5 2 5 ; 2 (7) 2 . ; 2 2 ," ' ' , ; P, A :. rj,I, 5 5 E RA ;2; 55 2 2 . % 2 A A 5 — ' ' 2 2 2 .2. g 2 4 2; 2 ,L; ; 2 0 2- ,2. , 2, 2 2 5 o 0 3 . 5z N 522 0 c 4- to 5, 5 z .„ = -S Fn, ; 20 u) ; '''' -s 5 == , 0 . 2 - ; 25; ;s ,, ° 2 . ' 2 2 ;2 2 ,- . p ; 2 ; ;-, F'1 z > z o ,, o 5 5 z 2° H 55 2 gj W 5 2 5 2252I2 2°2,5 85 ; Fl o'- , " cn gr$,' z - " 0.1 ;' 2; ; C .,, .E= ;-g -7, :),,, - -- " 22 2, - 2 2 5 2 = , , g g' % . , 2 = ,g, ; 2 22 2 - z g 3 ' ' - , > c g 0 ; 0 rl 22 gggg F,„ H 2 *,,, gg'g 1g ; 5'5 5:0 ,,pPD - 5, : :2 '15 5 5 ., 0 5 5 5, `,:l p r' ' ' ''L; s 5 255 - .3 ' f, S.. 00 , ,-ri ';',.; , 8 55 5 g 2- - 0: 0 2 5 ; 2 . . 5 5 00_ '. ' " 05 ', ''. , , 4 r 2 2 ' 2, 2,4, ig 0 :' " 9 M 5 ; M i zA 9 ' -GX ; ,,, 6 g M w 5 2 2 2 22 22 F2F2F2F r Z3i , 5 5 5 ''' P';''F; °Ir 2,2 2.2222° 5E2 On z2-5'25 55; 22;523; Ed' C7511f-, 0 PLIFT PRESSURE & WIND WALL ZOI '0 zoNc , ; F 3 ZONE 2 ‘2`0 0 'P 7I Ir 2°1 WALL ZONE 9 i 'Z'i' 4:1,' ' i PI T.7..! i SHEET 57 of 254 MOW 1111101116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineer. I .rthitects I contractors PD *HIGH s `'.' P I SERVICE 3 GENERAL NOTES & DESIGN CRITERIA II UTILITIES DEPARTMENT zeb fl e Wind 391A1,13S H91 z DI 0 co Sc O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PIER LOCATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors z® -<!> 6206 12065 ooaxyrs) 44 z N O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS L-1-1! UTILITIES 5.—,5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers e I architects I contractorsn 8 -04- fv sN fN ryl r_Es` �as—r 112 2) s= 41(7:aes, 1 -'SEs IG VIII - 1122-72- 7im rr_-- I: m J . 4MV�iM/ !® -e, rN ��-air. EyD,lr1® 212 iii 21 2 ap 1 42-0 III ` 4 3^-272 02-1'1226 1 z N O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS L-1-1! UTILITIES 5.—,5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers e I architects I contractorsn 8 zt liar) P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 "j2 1; PEDESIS 'T LAPPEPS PEDESLALS as I PEDESTALS 19- qi ),--i I_ -11 II 1 ,----- .: -• 0- .1 - - ,-.,„ _„„_ T. , -.—. ,,.- 1- 1 ''— _. log —iti— 1 1 1 1 1 • _ I nE[b—[1 ii - U 1 , 1 .310N NO111/001 0N1011013 I ° • TI RC/1510 X 140. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 SHIPS LADDER & PIPE PEDESTAL LOCATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS L-1-1! UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors IEEE 0 1 t'S 371103HOS 1,13Id S. 59T 311103HOS 9Y1S AVM-3NO BY DESCRIPTION 131 DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS I CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LUTILITIES 5.-.5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 1 ReVI 101.1.0. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS II CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors P. 1/zNON-SNRT OUT •IIIIIIIII 11111111111 1111.IA DATE EV DESCRIPTION DATE 131 DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS III CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors z 0 1 SY DESCRIPTION •1 DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS IV oi!p CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS gig UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors TI IN 61: 2,- e RC/1510 X 140. —o- O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors PIN ispH ots INV , 02,. -- '-i--,- . I - — - N, 1 N 'N -N7 1 I I 7,-_—T_—L---_- I I _ N I I _ _ N - . , SLOPE 1 SLOPE N N P . - —.- — --- s- — 2 C' ,D 1 , __ _ iiiii _ 4D 1 _ , f L 1 / _ _ _ 511 _ lEk, P RC/1510 X 140. —o- O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ®D .444¢000 040ee0040e00e0010040e00040e00001.40.0444.0.09.0,e44.,ele MAI mz O w O LL03NNO0 100 0 z a�a�a�f 2 C Im 0 m O ,!II!I!I. L LICE 177 177 I--- I 00 �9m IIIMIMMD te',. z p 0 • LJJ 0000 DATE DESCRIPTION DATE O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES w,5.. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors E DESCRIPTION I31 84 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS II CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS =4 UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors IEEE 2 z DATE EV DESCRIPTION DATE DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS III CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors r 01 DESCRIPTION •1 DESCRITIOX —0 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 BUILDING SECTION 06 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS IA UTILITIES .77-.5.. DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ,d 10, , 3 1 - 1. I A . T II —7 , E . 1 rrurrurrurr-rT 1 1 r r r-rT r r-rT r L,T 4 DESCRIPTION •1 DESCRITIOX —0 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 BUILDING SECTION 06 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS IA UTILITIES .77-.5.. DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors g F 0 z 0 ,L0— I L Or 0 — NV, 83,380 , rmo,Kss 1.133,0,138 13.11 nrvo , Map 0 z BY DESCRIPTION •1 13C.C1.111,TION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CMU WALL DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors MMMIRO.MEM. .MffAM MIC= -T,FPPnFOF,• 4•A7ValiEWT FEE1 IMEMI .a&=MEMM=Miidm===MMI7 MMMLIMM=MM:•••1=MMVI ..UMg 1 47, D llllEmmemmensmanamsfflamanfa : AW-FPFVF" —1 = '!4 BY DESCRIPTION •1 DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 WALL SECTIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors IEEE Fa ,gg BY DESCRIPTION 131 DEECRliTION I 2 U O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS =4 UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors IEEE 11111111111111 1111 MENNEMENNEMIIIMMEMENNEMEN •1 DESCRIPTION •1 DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 LADDER DETAILS Aik CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES .77-.5.. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors REMOVABLE TRANSOM PANEL & DOOR OPENING Pt BY DESCRIPTION •1 DEECRIPION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 REMOVABLE WALL PANEL & DOOR DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 1 t ttt't 0, Fg x t 3. ,g n • tt . & g tt IT1 E ,;, m 0 ,1 8 g , c '''' gg 8 , STEEL: g 8 ,g, 8 8 K o 0 z (3 r031 F:1 ,,,A 2 g 2 p 2qqqq, 5 X ;t3 pA, 2 2. il 4D !! . o il , rT, ASTM DESIGNATION MINIMUM YIELD STRESS 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE CYLINDER STRENGTH 3000 PSI I 3500 PSI I 5000 PSI . AX, \ \ ,A Agg A - rAg P t V,, .—•!' ''' . . . ,'3, .', ' 4 h: g . . .. 8 ; . X x ,!>. .!! 't! X .W " AAA,Agg;AgN A . 8 g g E z0M. r 00 " f- 6, 6 -X '', 0 -‹ - A't , ,' 2 -A . " ,'V Z . . .. = = = = = g % C' '5 = == -, m - . e'. ,T, 0 . UCTURAL STEEL NOTE! z z R",s. N 0 DATE BY DFSC PIPTION PENSION N 0 D. iF BY oE o mp-r,ory 4 ' T. SHEET 75 of 254 =OM OPM1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES engineers I architects I cc,...ct.' F:FAAZAFAA,,,FggAn. A:AF,,iigiY, 2 ' ' A, , A ;,„,., 5 9 CLEARWELL NO.1i GENERAL NOTES AND DESIGN CRITERIA Depc7rtment DEPARTMENTofEng.neering Services z RENS ON NO DATE BY BY DESCRIPTION s. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CLEARWELL NO.1 FOUNDATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Sernce LNV engineers I architects I contractors IEEE 124 o c H o I I I I I 0 gg °N Ro I I I I I , I p R 11 I I I I -- - 02 0 0 i e "I RENS ON NO DATE BY BY DESCRIPTION s. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CLEARWELL NO.1 FOUNDATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Sernce LNV engineers I architects I contractors IEEE I: E #' s,, J.L 1 L 1 L L * J — L �J ss—a iL rz—e ss—a _ O ,,,,oF N 4 N __mea$ isw$" o 7E OF WORK z aEa o ��ore°µn°peoiiv3LLeo coxcrene reoc ITANT! CONSTRUCTION NOTES: :ESS TO THE INTERIOR OF CLEPRWELL 11 NA 24'0 OPENINGS AT THE NORTHEAST ] SOUTHWEST CORNERS OF THE ROOF. EQUIPMENT ANO MATEBE I REOUIREO THE PROJECT SHN1 NI iRANSPORIED SOUGH THESE TWO OPENINGS. VTRACTOR SHALL BE REOUIRED TO BE rnnEO FOR PERMIT—REQUIRED CONFINED )LE ENTRY UP TO ANO INCLUDING THE )UIRED EQUIPMENT ANO TOP—SIDE iSONNEL, COMMUNIGTON ANO PPE FOR )H ACCESS. vJ snae. 3/8 I -o s I LL_ I e a . PENSION NO DATEO.N. I' iROOF SHEET 77 0i 254 RECORD DIMIIII6110. WTR-450 STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES" LNV engineers architects contractors .e ..a..e".."...oe a w. ...... .'.'""°"`"°° ,� """"".�"`m 9 y�r'�{��3n o• $ ➢, 4 = 3;t � " �_d - m N I "� M M CLEARWELL NO.1 PLAN V....� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering services 5 0 8 0 7-g 87, 11111.111 lig 11k/130 ElPidal MOH 0 nIqo I9 9, 7 7 ?, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS - 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS L-1-1! UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 coapactors liNN ge 181"1 , O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS - 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS L-1-1! UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 coapactors 8 v A z S N S 9 NOVtl9 HOO1 1NVOIdINOIS - O LOHd RENS ON NO DATE BY BY DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS - 2 CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers g I architects I co •,acto, v PHOTO- LADDER ACCESS @ NE CORNER 1• 111111111111111111161 1 4© ei© RENS ON NO DATE BY DESCRIPTION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT TURN AROUND SUPPORT AND CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIRS CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CLEARWELL NO.1 REPAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS • 3 CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS L-1! UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 ca -`recto, RRRAEig 51: m mo aI!! aLIt - @ M =PLACE NM ASCE 7-05 1 BASIC 1.1143 SPED] - IRS NMI NPONINNP TI f GfilClOfl -IEOORY L 1.15 DESIGN STD'S. & CODE OF PRACTICE 1 1 1 1 1 WIND NOTATION OETNL I0ENTF1CATDN SYSTEM SECTION OR CET. WIN ® DEYVL OEN. 0 MINORS 0 MUMS NOM OTIIMSE NOT TO SCALE T.O.C. TOP Of CCIYPETE Me Of CPCUT TOP OF SIM BORON Of PLATE TOP Of JOST ON CENTER EY1.1 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE CYLINDER STRENGTH \� ASTM DESIGNATION MINIMUM YIELD STRESS . S " rii '" R RI �B�B^ B'=� � ' r:.0'2 ..�'2 $B 86 m �e TE�gyaa R0 E€ oam § mn gg R2,10 8 g�3m V.404- €o ��,ss V. uo s � � €a A "IRI a ,NE o g-g 2 g m a"�R 51 �g .2"g 'R4Y4 PIA. �a=� mr g PI: �msm a NB �� m D§ n 8 Smog R § a ftp $8gg g 8 �S ? a- 3 3m �So "SgiRO egg a z�i:$�i9gnippgprra m pzr �p 115 Gom�zmaN �a 'm - G$ &a8 sg= B gQe s e a e -_ g"..w-g€aa� 4 �� a =P€ `mp�� m�49m �� €3a � ge 3"q1 g�"r BoBmP p �a ti'ga aAi4Romm^' g"'aq �ogAdmg�Pg§ " § m ago a msa g 6 g ?-%2sEF Pill 'o- Fms oa R €sg9 7 rzfag M. m� G g`8 E^ass€r�p'� - 85^R B Q$ T�mm�€p= 4 0 § RFS"2sas ose gmmg _ .. e rExzma` Sias Bg=' s §_`':RM m�m� :1 9 a'o. g a= €��oo��Bm '# - €a a 'm'G 2i^ gym§ fig. �olQ 4-. "'S�m 9 0..2 .0==9 8 Fq. mma�p� A.z _ 9'g2 °R g Pi'�a 4€ 6 € RR m� 49RQ msog 'S 3�� m4 `aa B .' 8m to 3i3 !! " ��a oo� i �a § s 5y!d: Po 34$ §8.m§F ;;fig „ g�d2 `� §=g g T a §� 8 3 a� ea �m 3�3 oo p 8P. 3 P..•P o aQ P= gB2 APB NRS -a -z a Rm �4Rm4 a igirF ilrrr ma=€s€o�AAo�€om€m€ B $ mm m3^m Romg ,a§�oTAo oay g �'s„�� _ .g$” 'aaP y� Fg"Pzpm o€> w'gm �� A s > � R zRm� Boa o o m o R gg Zo8g. 3a��o� . Fg=Q?�y3o ohm aB =`a§ge. o ' ao8 A e�� - � oo»>on _ANS 6- - oho ='`N'�"> % zo��mN��=� =y. _a '" - ➢o,� a o n �� mA m �g�o oa = >- .. �y� A��m a -z„� H�z € P€yo 1 _ 0 ma2t0 G Sa€m 2gra ' o6amgixis'ig aq p gro�m�3gzg�S�3 rl IR . R g" "'BBa Q=" a a� F P, P = . g mgh 1 g �m aa$ `al x = � yam== � �� a`go• P�g �_"�� RAP; R��a�a _�� % g7� 3a N g $�m�� A1ska as §'gg_g�gR a Pea M O = `m"' €€. " az"'> C�¢y ��a-' 0I' SIA$" s' €$ �;' BQ"£�'F iSm mai. Ss§ 9a Y ��r § 0 sam ip as ..NMI a � m�$ 21es ^ 1 A$e"mg aT q Ra g5S4Bpmjs ��a�� '^i-'- � ,`^6 m ` $mm A F' �g§dao ��_ �e B = sae gg 3=oe _ g a€ B . oa 2?� �� s £ �'msa mQ ppw 5`a@ y4A` o ��=5w3a=��m�0p P p � o��= $E_ �AB m a ""u� Q V �m��" B& 9 'm $m?m ' B m.= m a.i' g- m gBma - � 1 IRg`� ag m� '-g 8 9 s R3= 8 N�p0 6 6% Cgi "3 apQpg FFo @ m �a g o =y a€ mB alma a s s ofm��®;§� $�o Ro9"mm ^�_ m'a"^ uB " " §§r ao a i' �^ �� 4 N� ��'"� �o�9�g am � p� mem"N`°o m a r�€g s .�=s�z a ex m m qg s-. g P �a�=, sm�� a=3 3 � P9�" KmgE 8[5 s R�- 4m-$ � Rg go= oi§•. R1 _ gm R '0 AoeS�g�=PR 4 g 5SA ''g _ m'msgm 1 4 2 E �m ` s m6a i�� - B€ � �� 1`� �'Q ��N3V £oma 822 N�n Mo� 3 4^AaA$ Gs9'aoF ma o mg- sgg 819=6 i4x g :a Q_m-5o y 'm ' 9 B '...A 4E' mamag mo Ag: Igs= ��$R oms� g' PPR i "5gfR gR Mm Flop PBI �� rgSag 4 ; i''' 485 Q. $ o 1- No m . s�g��m'o . . , _ SF, gR2m .g0 55 osa Damm A P5 MP ga1g9€1WiPl ili"aia P_ mmm go Pg.RR 4 ��_ `'IR��4S�mc � � � �m m a9 aa01.gmV122 90r^.Rgs! m$ gmx moas"s gR� P"3g � 9 � == as o €$9 Beam � g �Lm sQ� I4 ;4$mm"N= '`. p'ga EE.i '3 _ � d : �m �'§" 0� m m% �� G e� g a g � axa�� %.812= = F€g 55 m n %1 a1E 'k� a =$2"A" zG R ��m" pi: 00PRm3 o ¢a:omm=�e�o3PRgg , sa 4�'�3 �pg�$= 3g ROM . Fgi o '��Ea� -.20 a �i gopp a 9�4 m epm:. 56 ' �iS B g _� -§ ggm 4$ osa g� 1 a' p+ g momaog3 as � 9 ROI sg E-m 5 , � ,an 03 z a A mF a g _ P Pam s c m g�' a s $ x�os a a gsP$ m� W- B g'g R^L LO 4 �o oa 5 _ 9 0E20 $z �e _ = =yam 2 § m? _ €m�^- atbm�§m m, %'" §�� 9 i{� i s a p8"m m 3ama "` p 0R9a=o m�m ,9 $ 1 184181 1 amo r i o %1PrI! € lig= R 10 1 w.-m.o. �� ' A 0 0 § o 2` _^° N O.N. STEVENS WATERnTREATMENT PLANT HIGH C R PUS CHRI BUILDING N0.3 CORPUS CHRISTI' TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engin m°°u°'- �° architects contractors ^° e..';ITY... "�'°^°°"°'° -q n s Xcsy4 "'999 -�.� ynG IM= ti ' HAND GENEIRATOR BUILDING STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES _ e UTILITIES DEPARTMENT °eEngineering Department of En Services '°"" . ""° vocoso REVISISX O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY AND GENERATOR BUILDING PROJECT LOCATION PLANS CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deporim ent o[ Engineering Services LNV engin r I archil, contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY FOUNDATION LOCATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES E DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architect I contractors PR. Pi; (D) 14 11 00. Si405D Po (D) 14 11 6A. SP4 ED • Po p )n 0 R a R 2 R 60 G Y 00 s G 00 Eat ' 51/? ovompnon O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES K. DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors S R S S R-S3N MU 9I-S3N T T 9 9 S S S S PS. p 31ncoH3s 831d 03T1INO ostOwnan RENS16.0. 17I vo - O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY DRILLED PIER DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors Fi!:°E1.7EiFt.'" b uzt MAUI NO. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY SUPPORTS 1 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors C," S REVISIO Mb rumen, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY SUPPORTS 2 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors TgloPE gig Pa Poi Emip • 14! Q€ e gii 116 ASN in• -C 3w 3 J 13.-61/3 }3.-6 1/2. ovompnon p 2 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DRILLED PIER AND FOUNDATION PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES ..- DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ovompnon O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES ..- DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors RENSIO 100. 2411.) O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DIESEL STORAGE AREA PLAN AND SECTIONS 1 OF 2 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors • R6 E e WM- x 5 / IR .13 • • R/E' S$o s4 a� 2:) MORMIO O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DIESEL STORAGE AREA PLAN AND SECTIONS 2 OF 2 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 3 mS po 11 r 315 .'•eg.• N ostOwnan oESP O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DRILLED PIER DETAILS (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 7) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors $ A _ _ 3_R. _ 3_R. _ 3_5. _ _ 3_5• › , Ji CMr0.5 _ .Xrs a 1~ 5 1112 (-e) 11121165(6) S sv6x S A 0 deg I I k'0. SWN u L/ S u S 11131165 (-6) 3 u 11121165 Fr) A u SWN u i/ S u e N L L ' $ � � __c6.16.s—__ _ 1. e ♦ e e♦ ♦ e ♦- a t0 Y-0' sr -6• MAUI NO. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DIESEL STORAGE ACCESS PLATFORMS (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 7) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors $ 5 a B RENSIO 100. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DIESEL STORAGE ACCESS PLATFORMS 1 & 2 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 13'-1 1/1'3 • • •I•II•I•II•IMII•I II•I•II•Iui •I s. -ID 1/4 L--- --- gg ‘. REVISIO Mb rumen, ,21 3 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING DIESEL STORAGE ACCESS PLATFORMS 2 & 2 (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors S V V V V L 8 S S S S V a V a Y a V V V a a s a a s S S 8 S S B9 -L 3DStl Z 319V1 MD MORIMM 1411.11011110. Br O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES w..- DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 3 NI3 d N011tlA313 a -r x -s• a -a• IP 5 I! 10 Ix I5 ; 111111111 Ur Mb rumen, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors N011VA13 512110 -7I IS IS e-io• IS-VIa-VI,-o I3-VI 1 11 OA I MORIMM 1411.11011110. Br O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES w..- DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors -B VP B iB la u I S -C I I S' 13.-o. 13'-D.1 S -D' 1 S -D' I S -S. I \r-1 VP 8 mmon mamma Q B O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects contractors 2-21/r 23▪ ,/2" - _] ] ] ' 3-0 31/ 3-0 3-0 3- - C .I— 1-' 1—r —I- r r 1 I— 1 IE I§ IN ID Pegg a 5 E T a _1_ _1_1_ 01_1_ 1_1 l 10 10 I§ 10 11-0•: r -os GIST. COL. ossunpnen O O 0 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects contractors .l sas saa S45 S44 saa 'a 0 GIST. CM EXIST. CM. GIST. COL. ossunpnen O O 0 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects contractors 0 0 0 a 43.-B t/ I.-9 1/4' I.-9 1/4' m=a 111019 CO Br -11 111^ 49 -- FBISI NIB -- -- -- UM. YIN ME) MY I AO ottonpson RENSIO 10. otamcori S B O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS ALTERNATE GENERATOR BUILDING RETROFIT (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE #5) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Oeparim eni o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors imp2gE,'2p.li59v," .,-,1wg,,,q”' RP-j,-MWP-PilliFr.'nwWW"I , x ggg.g.5222,qmoui;mgE rrATIIIMIn° E,H1OLIVIll — 5 5 5 5 2 5 'WPM ' E 2 E ' ' ' ' 5 g 5 GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBREMATION ADDREMAT.K DESCRIPTION ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ABBRS.,. DESCRIPTION ''''HA.5gilLOHNMi' W'''^ -V, mg.-i,H PAAVAMg5MTMA PqRWIEH1 t t EIEI 999 5g5 222 g7 2955 ;80r,22, 2 9 5 2 2 2 5 g 5 2 550 92 g5 2.20222 --g w5,""55wAi',,,,6.5, 5I Ig EE EI5209Ig5 - g -- ggngAgggggmggggggvg 2,23x.Ex22'e,,,85' 0'9g,g5522222E3i Hpgromg-wrggEg, ggggg;ggmm' . . g gg 9 2 IgEIIIIIIIIIII 2 IIII IIIIIIIIII IIIIIII IIIIIMIIIIIIIII2IIIII .5555. ................ /IIE !!MMR9i mi ommmmmgmmWM mmipmmqmm ;,' 2 2 -522 - 22 2525 - ggg 55 52 29 20 E ,i 2, 5 2E KK 0 T m 5'555M ,, ' II 4- P ' . !"- s g. CDM nggg=og. .-. - g --- .-. - g --- -------- 4 E SHEET 102 of 254 RECORD MN= EL WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CM' OF CORPUS CHRIST/ N TEXAS — = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ,-.:". t -P"' i , GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS5.......7. LH' FLOW DIAGRAM SHEET CONNECTORS Syp,163MT„o6a-66X266666 ON3031 S1VR131YW 3dld iJ2, , - EH. T. ON30311NIOf 3dId 0 41- Cis" mth 1 090 1331SAS NOLLVOULLN3013dId S1O8WAS ONLL LId ONY 3dId OD O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERAL PIPING LEGEND AND SYMBOLS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r..Y DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Seryrce LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 35 ii 222 T.222 212 2 TI, 2 2 TT 'iH 2 g VALVE SYMBOLS m DD T , 66 2 ACTUATOR SYMBOLS c 0,. 3 "31 33 T 8E 8 g, 22 GNEN INDIVIDUAL EOUIPIENT NUMBERS. 4. SEE VALVE ACTUATOR SUM% CODES BELOW. VALVE ACTUATOR SUFFIX CODES 6 P321, -TE, 6 5 K g VALVE TAGS ,20 T 1 ; NOTES 6, 3 6 6 6 6 3 3 3 2 ; g g 6 g 3 3 6 6 3 6 3 6 33 6 6 2 i 3 grgE T CDM smd,.. FeTorf--- TBPE FM Req... -,, VALVE ABBREVIATIONS " n.,..m n. BY DEBER11110X RP/1810X Xa DEE BY MER11110X 4 .T. iDprm SHEET 104 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NTuAs CORP DEPARTMENT CITY OF US CHRISTI UTILITIES f Egirg SrW LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors -222l-rd E 5 Se 1 GENERAL VALVE LEGEND AND SYMBOLS =, .7.-..-=. 2162 , - 6 561,1, 14.6 'WI 556,21%.P,E i 1 e5A 're Nli PROCESS FLOW STREAM NOMENCLATURE AND PIPE TESTING SCHEDULE - - . . . 1' 5 . 66, 2 66 y661„ 58 PROCESS MECHANICAL NOTES CDM Smith g . : i NEP 105 of 254 RECORD OPPWIN6110 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV .ngineers I architects I contractors 1641111111.1 :11.6 0 , J.i.21 -1,742-71 I 1,,. . A a g GENERAL FLOW NOMENCLATURE AND PROCESS MECHANICAL NOTES UTILITIES = DEPARTMENT ...----- Department of Enng S gineeriervices • • 1 18 s el NUE :: m:::: is:� . k': fa z--888 30 CON:CIE !kit lot • • • (411:PCIE lal:l s�,zm W14= REEMpiii0:1N1 11* ,18 • Ott' m m:: le' oLd• frit spm 8 ;li . :ie m:.:.le3IIIf111 ll_ R 8 • m Smith r, 3 423 730 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers g I architects I contractors IM 1®® • • m Smith r, 3 423 730 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers g I architects I contractors ...8.......ggsATA.T.2° gUgs,s'i 8 T 00=,,,ssi FigkUX , gM 7' A ,--- : .2 7----N iJ 7P I - II n ......... '- Inc15 , -1- •,-r;- ii A , 2 A ' 141P6 -0' A 8 T sz T „ A. Ts. EP !I T0 '.2 , 2 .820 S ,A HI U6Iril Mil 7 a TE 2 22 . ,8 Ss . 2. Nill A •' ' 'Si P, es1 '0,5. ''' s,- - 8 0,s _, , z c' , z z — , X -o Sa • •z_kg,..„0__ -- Agag Illr- 8., A A A - •; , I • II s A ss : ° II 0 11 1 s HRH aZi ---,- mi IV \1111 - s 1111111111111111111 1111111111 —e, 1 1 0 -0' ...T„. ,ll '--1 0 1 ... CDM Smith HO siOn , ...... ..E . DESCIPPI. MISIOY WO. DUE BY OFSCRIIIM ;BUn=1. NO. , „ g sr I' 107 of 254 RECORD DRAWING RO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV ,i7121-k‘s kz* 2 1 aDeportment HIGHSERVICE 3 SECTION UTILITIES Kj.g DEPARTMENT of Engineering Services Ono ee rs 1 a reFilects 1 contractors ' , - 4.„ P-P' A I N. ),L11 2 1 /2. DR -55,1 1/2" DP -55,1 _ F -- u B - 0 0 0 0 AN I) al BY BY Cs” smith O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 SUMP DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors c 5 g g \/\/ 4_ 2 E.,/, 005,0 E E EEOSE LE -A, E09 SOL CDM Smith a oo O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors rirli,':' §I 'A% g,nm 9 5! g g Rgil ii,1 ' Ni Li Lo IP' 1 oni3 !I UP 1 ' n 4 EP P. .4 1,1g g -IlqF g 11 r1.1 1, r iti Hp I m 1:1 gs; 1 N 1 19 i i r5 P,1 OPI!g g ye - gi a 4 1 AB g n aaiii 1 Igx%i, il v ii a i i (0 : IR qi! ii , gp ig hal a ila1 li gi i I ;1qitI; iagriPl i' Eil1 eI!P 11E111 91 1 0 gi ilt illPh: 1 ill b n 1 1 il 114 4 s' -i qg us P 11 ill IR iei ax !' = aP /- €. - g g• § q5i ii gg= iia: g NI 1 u BY BY CDM Smith l'e'47T;TTe7T". "'" Tel:17131423,3GO I 222 24r2 1222,421i2„ 142. 4 '242 E 2 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS EXISTING HIGH SERVICE 2 OVERALL PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 5 ..i. is 17.1.11.1.- IN \ EAS I DO --,---- .. 414 _ . .r. gur 6. • r --- r= MOM ,... ... .....„ . .. .== ., t„ . • • . • ..,, : i- 11`- IRV 4, -111- 111 44 gr ,32 1 i / • . . _ • ASTING HIGH SERVICE 2 DENOUTION TYPICAL PLAN ig 11 4. r g ,i ,t41 3 A ; 1 3 i 1 11 .,. '2'2'''''." 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 A ' A CDM Smith Tel 17131423,300 Ball BM OWE BY ...'. Rail MOB BaOWE BY DESOR11110X i T., i smulll of 254 MORD 0/111N1116 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractors ,.. I''', g: -,--- db / '''''''' p EXISTING HIGH SERVICE 2 DEMOLITION TYPICAL PLAN AND SECTION (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2) UTILITIES -77_7_ DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services 2 Smith I 222 2421 2122,4211.„122. 4 '242 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS EXISTING HIGH SERVICE 2 MODIFICATION PHOTOS (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ie FM JEW yxo .,...FRI ill 2ME Im7— 0! -....-- _......_ I 1111 --....--. INS.. .. ria w ilia — MEM I I ---- pli lif 2M8V2 gFRP5 9M.,. rig ril a 4118V2 0! lig I' i3R ‘1114h I A .111: 44 la .... ,.eMm ISCHMIN 111H SHEET M-10 nEE "C'EIiII oe '7'i ° ! g g . 0 iii . i 1 1'Tg: g s 5 3 i R g PRI g ilB!0 F 40 gi ,8 RIgAgA Rog 0 :t - 10D0 R. Pn2g. 22P g IF 2-10 YO5 a 0' AgPI V 2 -0 gfi; 8._ a 211,. 2 R ii.s 1/011 i .-'"P 0 A. gg 3/0: i0111A g ' ' 6 led 5Ag; !R ' g P PAII 40 1 11 .' aki 2 1 1 . . .10.g gglo P 6 A-mnA sg sip psi 0 m gli 0 54 4P.B1 ' o M g CDM Smith .,,.,XQ OWE BY ...T. RNIBIOX XaDEE 4 T., i SHEET 113 of 254 RECOMOMIN1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS I architects I contracbors ' . •iii : ' El EXISTING HIGH SERVICE 2 MODIFICATION TYPICAL PLAN AND SECTION (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2) UTILITIES = DEPARTMENTengineers in Department of Engineering Services m BY BY CDM smith 44-474444440 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS I CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors . r79,,r, ,z g frab i — .... • - rW ' , N4 - 1 A 1 ,iggra FABRICATE( DETAIL rvo SCALE ...: , R I z ._. 0 L. - - - - -F -p 1 jlii, -1, m 4 2 in a i r:4 ; ,,3 Fill WHERE rgCS. ell - 111 PIPE DIWEIER AND N. - IR 1211 2 RFFF " _ :I il: 1 iliiiiilllirlill wami 11 L § c_pm smith --0,7 ... . 1 r! n, i Ma 115 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 0.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS 41 engineers 1 architects 1 contractors F -9r7-0 s c STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS II UTILITIES= .7.-...-7- DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services Li166.17,1g6166.666 Lr: F2T-FOTIE,n" T 65 OR APPROVED, EQUAL LINKED EVE ROD ESP'17: INSULATON (441 Jolt HANGER FOR INSULATED PIPE DETAIL © NO SCALE '..3• VAPIES (ir , ,,,,,, ENEET E 8 r$,EXEOEXE ; 8 616EEE"- E 6 2 1'. 1 -se N, ;11- 1 61X 1 El 6, 6 , 6 : 4 X -o ... E ;El Vt61/4, -.. 1,1,X, E 8 111112 1 1,, 61E6 E4 4 X' 4 E i611X LE 8 ,,,,,g !ANGER RODS 3/4" 9 SMALLER HANGER 51, 11 IN, EE 1,c E 8 E . r1 E X 6, 4 XE rY62 EE, E4, E 8 ,. , q ; F, -1 ,3 sc-,' :-.: ,Art v 8 :2 ,--, - 7,,• i EA, ' PE gm ,NNE0,N LEN'. AND SPACING 5 Er FE l A, ,j 7, r^ 0 ' g m f:1 ' r•'''''' g OM EVE E r:11 Irlik'"' 110 V 71 Fur 11 1 •,?, IT 4 ,MIN ifi —, - im,-- MI, ..--, kil, idr, lv' II ., ccq oil liti fll .5. 1 ., § .4001' , P ,E, • 2-. ME. ) : . 4 iq. 3RICATION, IGER RODS 7/8" 9 AND I. r THICK CONCRETE HANGER EE ETC, , m p El nr r ' III I ' •Z' I - E. !,I, 2 m m g S ACING 5 ff i E iirt " 11 ' .E ,c 2 la E 6, 11 E6 '111 ,.1 CDM smith FFriiFC--"'' ...... — „ ...-. .... ., , Hatnii•EION TBPE Firm 6,66E,6 EE. F303 ,,, SHEET 116 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF 6.,.. CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Fl engineers 1 architects 1 contractors F.: FI,IZ1FiF:''''.°' '',E;:;'°E:E ''' 4.,-- ,,,,•A ac, Z-,' i U m 4 p STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS III UTILITIES- 5........F..— DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services rriith O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS IV CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r ..Y DEPARTMENT Department 0 Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors m P P m a 3 c v ' O ti A5 0 0 o a o 0 0 o a o o Mcg rriith O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS IV CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r ..Y DEPARTMENT Department 0 Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors g • OEM 55 .1r, DI' BOLT, GRINNELL FIG. 122. OR t4 ECG, WHEN USED WITH PDC ore FIBERGL2SS PIPE, PROVIDE SLEEL ' 0141 L3''''iEDDEH7FgIPER''EITC""H rtIGL.%"199F na """ELL GALVANIZE ALL PARTS AFIER FABRICALION. PIPE BRACKET DETAIL © oo SC. ...... -,,,•11 1. ,--- ,.., stpr .• ILi imgi %.1 INIIM : II rISTErSELEINErIHHHL DOUBLE UNISTRUT TYPE 316 SS PICICI1 OKI3) SOCKET CLGIE (WELD) CAPSULE =Br (LOP) • SEE NOTES AND 3. TUBING SUPPORT DETAIL © g ; A"?- g gg ; g2221 II '881rr ; 2g2', ,. M 8 _gig P TIP IF --brit 4-..1111 ILI III lb „....„ ngl 3"1•31,2) SS ADHESIVE CAPSILLEy ANCHORS E• AT 90. IHLNHZTE'AFHOHREHLHEVEnG. DUCTILE IRON ELBOW OR TEE FLOOI DETAIL ( oo SCALE 7,,i6°,- ! g . . 111:=11011Md4 111BICIPIAlgt) MEI= 111111 lei g A g', 2:2, 114111.11111.1 gg gi% g; ro . rA 114,-,42Na81,8...-',C1 i.' ‘. 2.1 • , _ q ......--.....--- ... ggg a p : r44,46,666666886rn 66 66666666 g8 8 iiigiiiiii6,66,66,66.6.1 MOMMIII 6-6,666666666 - 6666 - ; a °° 6.; 11. M, 6 ; 8°4;68_ •6 66.64806;5666-6668 ° 8 i„-igigiii:56:6•6•6•;;;;ii ; P CDM smith ........ ........ ........ mom. Houston DI 77077 E=MMEMMEMMEM =ME s'EtPE F'H' RHHHt.'HH " 'H.3 1 . SHEET 118 of 254 RECORD OPM1116110. WTR-450 0.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRIST/ TEXAS LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ,--* .........,... 0011311LiONIS SIEE1110. M7-5 STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS V _ _41_ UTILITIES 5....e... DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering tioggpgrigIgig°88.P.; '6 LENGTH TO SUIT AI, SADDLE PIPE SUPPORT WITH OR WI DETAIL NO SC. ' P; Pig .., E.' r,-, ;4•2 ; ...- 0-• g; .„,._ ;"- ,21;2 2 , M -7,g.gt ii.. h , i o; -,, L : _.„. ---r, — tL1 - ,t,,,, p;PPPET2 EP° g !PE 5 g ggpg g 2 5, , -0 OP' R. ' 4E1 gEg ..„grgg, ° ° gg 2; P• ;11 E . ,. !°,•!' !° 22 I PE; z',p 2.egg E -S g= ° • 2 P P ; mililitSflo Ilr E , 2 m - i, g 8 ,, 2,, - g •,,', g g7' P g P P °;*°=° 2 ;E• P ;2 g gP gPI ° A','. P s 2°° E PE ,v, LENGTH l0 SUIT 71111111111MW" • F ,-, ,"Ag 0. E.E. -PS 1 rki C 22 r--1, 8 8 Ppg ;E;g2 PP gig -20 , gl ! PEE g E P .‘_=.,'- 110 EE :7E Eg g!2 „18A881, 80 8 .Pgg T;P• M r , „8 , 2.-,,,, -,r,,--p - ,i, • !si,e7,1 1 , 1 r,7,',1 2° A5,522V.; V 2 EP g Egg °Pli g g p, 8 ' r ,M . r-71 0;2 Frg Egg •F,----mm.s•s,•,.s;s1s.s-, g gE,S!,S.,M,M,S,PSSS,S.S.S.SE •!' p PEEP2822;UPSEPPPPPP° g m 6 '§ L. Mg g;Eg 0. PEEPPE r. 10,, -8s , 2 . d — . — P.' t Pp, 6 ri- r ,.1 CDM Smith m•-,,,%.I:voo 4 SHEET 119 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI NTEXAS engineers 1 architects 1 contractors v i STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS vi — = UTILITIES 5.......7. DEPARTMENT 2222626226,622626I626 2 OICOMMIN 62 6- 66 6 6 o AD1111111 .. .. 11 66 62 A I 04 1 i A66,' 6,16 , EMMENL•;2= g ,1 2 6 g6 66 6i'' 61 6'6 6,1 .;, ,74 F 6'2 E' 66 6' 9 9" 52- • 2 2 22 72 'g '0 I zEz'A-IT7p,(=s,'_'L'Irrs.). „Th 1 i -.E. EsSLIS TIP :LSE TE'LEES SP ) S 1 S _ RI, 1 ELBEITSPLSEWS. SST 1 /2" PELL VALVE lk EIESEE— IlSg-XIEE" '" 'II e 4 AND PRESSURE SWITCH DIAPHRAGM SEAL L NOT USED DETAIL © NO SCALE IEILISSSS-7/''''''ECVZSTPFS'ESTEIP rr,LgE.EILE UNI„ PK NIPPLE Zro BALL VALVE P"VCSCBSIZLIC ,s"s e'LLSI'P 1E-142 EZSEE'ElViCS) — - PRESSURE GAUGE OR SWITCH WITHOUT DIAPHRAGM SEAL DETAIL © rvo SCALE r = NtiBmwol '22Eg r Cni hell 0 2 2 2 2 2 u NOT USED DETAIL © NO SCALE 9E222 -. 6E462 A: '2,'22,A R 95 2 0 E '-'' 11611 . I --Elm I . 6 4 . T 0 -229 222 22 6262 ; =WA ; 9 E.' 222 2 „6 , F . s 66-6 6; Ez Er 9 2 6 61 'r6 62 CDM smith n.,..m n. y HERMON .'..M nAT nV ..CnEEM TBPE FM r,,,sm .. F..43 1 . SHEET 120 of 254 RECORD MY= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors F:FE,"Fi;F:.'" itIFEE ,,,,,-- 0011SOLTONIS MEET 110. M27 STANDARD MECHICAL DETAILS vii _LL UTILITIES 5.......... DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services TPPEDOLET FOP SIEEL PIPE FOP DIP, USE -.REPLIED SADDLE TAPE CONNECTION NI, -rep ROCKWELL SERIES 313 ore CLOW F-1280 27R'SRPONWZR. "D SA LINE (SEE DINOS FOR ACID, SIZE) EMDECI.1 ennrc,TZ,E, R.DE rBRASS HOSE BIBB 'Ll'OTE) SAMPLE CONNECTION DETAIL © z P ; ° ; g ,°_,, z -. r6,' F- 2 g' s,-, 11111 N. . . il s 6 0 I'M , , Di4 tet R-' ''' 76 gE V / •• m.— airiti; t ''D ; ; ; im._,E_MOLIEN rl ' 6 0 gris*lisem -46 gg,g71 6 4it; '''; ss Ir 111 6°L0FIHNEIC'K SS FLANGE RING TO Arir% 'an) rINSECL 1 1 SCREEN MP) LOP OF RESERVOIR 1.1111=1111111 AXEEDTAELE'rESLOP NADK, A INSECL SCREEN SHALL BE 1 6 MESH usloo AKRE CEDER INCHES N DIALLEIER (08.27, OPEN AREA) HD CLEVELAND WIRE CLOTH COMPANY. PUMP WELL OR RESERVIOR DOUBLE GOOSEBACK VENT DETAIL NO SCALE - H , . ., 2 F rT1 g P g 63 rg, gg h- 1 r'g ,g, " Llgs g NOT USED DETAIL NO SCALE OrZADINFEEEKrIEE' PIPE PERE' EEEEP) LANK FLOOR OR 'NALL WSW sy,s, FRP FRAMING CHANNEL TYPICAL SUBMERGED FRP PIPE SUPPORT FOR CHEMICAL, SAMPLE, OR AIR UNES DETAIL © oo SCALE III , gg 0 ri- r ,.1 CDM smith .... _ y ...- ..... nA" nV DESCRIPTION TBPE Firm. Registiatior. No. F3.3 i i surT121 of 254 RECORD OPM1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRIST/ TEXAS )0= engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 0011SOLTONIS MEET 110. M7-8 STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS I/111 UTILITIES = = DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering 663463.67.062646.6626 E, fpm A °y o °m r A.1II 00 a�F^�,�,"> o all, o - 30 m 1CUUM RELEASE VAL` ,ETAIL IE :e IIi�� II J j A o o oa ?o .,II' IIT, w m °m o i� x i3 V a z • E ,NIm 333Er' 114101111.141 II WI L az is m cSpmth ooE e DESCRIPTIONOF T r�,mfT�15r� o gm SHEET 122 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATERpI TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY CORPUS CHRISTI lib TEXAS `NV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ePp^Y w �,�o� m. F: `in y,lb TP @ L 3 i E STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS IX _ UTILITIES `^"^ DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services tiiiMS.,8,1882,212.28 EN M. EN EN Ea 1.5.5 t----------, rFiF's g ,„, ,i , FP, . m z . . ...,'T 1 i .., ,-,2,9_. ,... 5 5 z IMET,1 r , I, E z E E IMITill• , 1 z i r 2 g A ,As A ' A's A F V 2 "2"gs A zor,3 9 8 IT; 'A 1 Ir1, IHI Ar 111 :i' 1 1111111111111 IIm1RW014ff141O = 1 " ' 9 P ,P,de zUzT z„0— NJ (2) e40 6 6 FLANGE BOLT TIGHIENING SEQUENCE 1 5. 81 E , E, z F' OP ' P 2 , ( 1 ---‘111-1110.1:1=111= 1 \ c — I \ t \ \._ z ,4411,1 \ .----: ' -0, - 0I El ' ' ' r.I = VRP It / EP ,.1 CDM ....... TBPE Firm Roo istmtion No. F5D5 SHEET 123 of 254 RECORD MY= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF 6,, CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ii". I 0 ti a STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS X __FL UTILITIES—"Tir7p DEPARTMENT.. Department of Engineering Services EGGERIOR COALING ED..13PROTECTING RP..1.'i'E'D CGSVIVCDI'Or r REPAIR COATING FTEP EGGERIOR COALING BRAZED CONNECTION GrNtnl OrZ ' VII' TeA2R'PROTECTINO TC"O'N'N'EgIO9D'AZ" NP COATING -71= w s i - ,E'2,,,,, NOTES SI. F - Al Ill WI n JOINT 1:g ,sUNNEM REPAIR DOUBLE - BUTT WELD JOINT ' 'z:TE,1-,°,4^i,o,rgsEctT (WWERICAN WELDING SOCIETY) AND .=.4,,,S-gL PIPE FABRICATION 2 SEE SECTION 02615 FOR STEEL PIPE 3 SP=DOC'DNFORS4P7PGD'Il',Er°D' BUTT - WELDED STEEL PIPE JOINT WITH CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAIL © NTS - - - ei r' sis: 1, !li Er 9141101 e '], F, ,, , -, . A tm=7====* 0.0,. ‘,V'' g- Z 005 1 Ip i r8 , 2 0 2 z 0 R i2 pe Ps g g 0 lit 10 1 III h W ss Hqs N sl ..).. ..... a 1 m o CDM mg ;OR smith m.o. _ y ...„. .... asts py DESCRIPTION TBPE Firm Registration No F3.3 % SHEET 124 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS 4 engineers 1 architects 1 contractors t'''' STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS XI UTILITIES DEPARTMENT... 2 0' CAL DEEP ANODE GROUND DETAIL ("M - q, n 2.- 1 19 '' r ' 01 01 P 'II 4,- 4 36- • 11. oileili A - m 1 - zd , I 2 . I ! il : II. .-: 0 '• P r?, BI- CjD M smith 1 n, i5...-.5 NM 125 of 254 RECORD OPM1116110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers 1 architects 1 contractors —ULItuo 572r7¢-0 e, 0011311LiONIS SIEE1110. M212 STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS XII _It UTILITIES DEPARTMENT NOT USED DETAIL © NO SCALE rj gf 5Z 2.22 - 58 PE 25 225 N 22 55 V 288 l 1 f2-1..J. moom== 55 82 55 F58.: 55 8, 52 0 22 = 85. 51-' i, F 2 =kI,ft -5255 .2 555152 5 '82 X-00 M .21858 5, NOT USED DETAIL in NO SC. 5525 5,28 5 82 65 5 XX 6 232 is 8 2 ri g g g •2 - 8 X NOT USED DETAIL NO SC. ' . r` 1 r ,.1 CDMmith 5522585222250 .... 5. 5 —225 RP/1810X Xa DEE BY n.,,,m il 2: iDepartment SUM 126 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI. TEXAS CITY OF ,,, CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Fi LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ,:i- '. I , . 5 D. N ta i STANDARD MECHANICAL DETAILS XIII = UTILITIES—"Tir7p .7.-...-7- DEPARTMENT of Engineering Services E s o o x m o x ___m3!3om2�58g3D800$211::6 22°omom3Kpg8 E1.5.8223,3!2,8628:2883382382,82211::64233892,311383,1338 a PLUMBING SYMBOLS ,,, RRA owRARE NOT „EES,R,USED ONTHE DRAWINGS) 3A m $o A6 n5°gmmo D 6D6omm o3yAsgAns5�,mT..A3"A.Aom$�m�a>�mA�D "£z 4m�6 4F g`3 go - So N- ,g, _ __--=-_28_F :" o 3i - u - - N 3 0 mo Yz3 m z A - 23331 zz 2 38 o< 8 oRo 0 tiz o o m o o ooy Ao >m4➢�xaa�oomNaaz N 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 n 0 N. 0 n 0 n o m m _g._ "f oF A22 — RAoof - S °o - - - _ a t, - 1 o" Vi ➢ .No $ _ _ ga n�Ao -8 11 .';',-TD' > - n 3 og � _ a„ m N ! 17 - m zg. n - - F - t, tl F F g�n� u o 238 — e8 0 8 _v��o ,nnom o949� u < 33 n o {d, ig. " x m a ¢Q + bQnU i, 3 3 f- 7 88 A A8 08 a� - om o 8 a -A o `'g ^Q -' zo - - tom > •• zR AR 3 -- 3Ao J -,N A >B E „A3 gA^fi -0 �3a 3 _ tea' m 8R _ cg O III VIrh ...... 00011111101 11M310. I& BY OF301111110. `-' 'g • T. g 3i SHEET 127 of 254 MORD MINIM 110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING N0.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS I architects I contractors 9 nears V °"° .aoE Aa.p v<< .M..��.�m. <- ( sq �� eSi .",m _ .. `if PLUMBING LEGEND &SCHEDULE _ _ UTILITIES = DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services S31V0S 01HcIV210 NVld ONI8INfl1d oNiaiine 1:1 rill Ill ILA EiM=1 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLUMBING PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV ma / / / / / / 7 / / RDi�h O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLUMBING ISOMETRICS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV C -o 23 23 VI rill Ill ILA T-IVICraTt", O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PLUMBING DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV 0 0 0 m 0 co0 Co 0 2 m 0 m co co m 0 0 I- m -i 0 m -i a 31f103HOS HOSS321dWOO HIV RE/610 NO. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI. TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 AIR COMPRESSOR SYSTEM PIAN & DETAILS EY CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES wY DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors 1- MS2 Ur \" IP` II 1 III /11I II , e3•' —A,_. _ o- A • ,I I f ___ NI I �� til intII IC.;I` - II 1=loleee�er1;2;11 I I e' Mini III ■� II■.II =1_I..w,, 1.9,:=.: -SII __ .- �o !..L 61l■1 IIiI■, I III - ni I ..i Atilt: 611 i■�.1 II'Y_ICs�4 T -' I II 11 _,-r J:'�i(jI�I®.1.11 iii -1I I 11- ..I1; III111 61 .1. 1111 =L'--., _,e1yIJ;pl.l.hlil -1=1=111 i H DH = r ® � +11 I lr_ di 1 LAM II 1 :IIHI _ _ _q Mel .Ip,:':" III 11111.1 H4=- �i'..=O as „_r III t -� I liiim:01N�Illii•■II=I"i�l0e:1114a- it .,.r euiliIIal IC:IIto. =1":101:11 ® ro-fl -_illni _ -.Eft.. - ® �— ®� - gritA RE/610 NO. O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI. TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 AIR COMPRESSOR SYSTEM PIAN & DETAILS EY CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES wY DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors 1- MS2 Ur - 2 8€cm V IIS F IIS �II 3 i 1 - =x - - E II m t > w o u 6 , n=8=is4-5 x m o^➢ a'" N- A� z x m 5 5 _- - a2F- oCoo��g�oax__ og 3 Ay 6, 2 2 w,➢ _ mho ;� a6 o osssb6?€ 66 x ;oD of€A o 26 <22 N n < 0 F 6 o�w8 0000 s 0 B ,O®NIX z _? _? > > < a - naA _ _ 0680 HE n d d m REo og A A o 0 0 AAA _ lm EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS AC INDOOR AIR HANDLER ACCU AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIl AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT 2F1 CONDENSING UNIT EXP,S1 FAN EF HOOD LOUVER SF SUPPLY FAN UNIT HEATER AN EO US 0� VIII _g 1 � N ssssggu a 9 a 8 o _ g 3� 3 AS £SAA _ 'R - s� ma8 - g= _8A 2 --2 S� 8903 g -s3 �go D Pg to Rarh ..s ll IL. . TEWITEns�l�niilTZ, `-' 'g = gg d SHEET 132 of 254 MORD MINIM 110. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV�� g veers I architects I contractors °"° .a"P`Mp v" """`"��"`m�" 1j sq eSi 4"'��A — ..„, . f x MECHANICAL LEGEND _ UTILITIES = = DEPARTMENT �'� Deparim and of Engin eering Services ar,ftrIngr="--jI - NVld OVAH ONI011119 C 11111 ILA ; a o O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MECHANICAL HVAC PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV RVI�h O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MECHANICAL ENLARGED PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV Ul.',3nrIngr.Z.Z3-.°‘`° 8 m 7 —I C C C (3) H ! 4D 11 rill .m.11 Ill ILA O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MECHANICAL SECTIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV E5656655565":"5. 555556,6E A 55 .1\ 8 00 C > HO m C -D -a 0 c Oz 00 Auk 8 0 A 0 z0 PI PS m if 0 H0 0 o A 0 A m • z U) 0 0 11111111111111M 11 rill .m.11 Ill ILA EM=I O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS MECHANICAL DETAILS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV PM . 2N- ; ';71= I 34 Hs 442 IIIIIII 0,27 ' s ' LOUVER SCHEDULE R R g i R R R R .1, ,61 12 2 4 I I R T,igggigggb 0 2 2 2 g g g g gg g g gg g g g 02; ff-IIIIIIII4 Scq f f f f-Mtt Ifl ' t !IN iri-21V4 „ IgII VT"' -N "14 72 2 PM . 2N- ; ';71= I 34 Hs 442 IIIIIII 0,27 ' s ' EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE N ! g i ! i I6I .1, ,61 12 2 4 I I ; ;TT7TTTTT T,igggigggb 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 z 02; ff-IIIIIIII4 ' t ..„ • 6,7 '71 ; Ni !!nn f626n1 6444; II4III IIIIII N!I I ! 1 TN 2 .2 , 4 N ! g i ! i I6I .1, ,61 12 2 4 I I 1 uI'rh ILA O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS MECHANICAL SCHEDULES (1 OF 2) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV ;IEEE 311103HOS 3Ta0 OJ 213511A30 h n r,Pr RDi�h O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS MECHANICAL SCHEDULES (2 OF 2) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV 7m zg ,z Sm ,D 0 W 0 z ti I T 00 00 00 RVI�h O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING HVAC (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r,..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV 0 0 C C 2 0 C ;1k • --avalwom, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING FUEL PIPING (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV o 0 EE9 --avalwom, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING FUEL PIPING (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV .❑ ,ojgEooOT E - m 7 7 SZ, z Y A Y - ii 'i 66 Q�Q 4rz. . — o-6J-6rTTo v oog � - - 'o: Ao oz gSo iim Ai ➢off 3 o„ 2' A - 7£7 - - - a s� o s 2 61 ONELINE CURRENT TRANSFORMER OL / ,B ETA E STAB-I SOFT STA, M ES -mUre STARTER E (1 Z 1'1'4 -''I— - 3 0 ' i oR s 9 ( 10 i) ° I V° 2) I HAr i'l D1C7I C-Hl cnoo_ _ .2g 2-= z z z m z z 0 2 z z n 2 m K ;^ € = FA A m »3 R� _ - _ o Sim 3 0 3 osi0� 9 2 o€ =R m3 ➢a Cha __ os ® o®®0 0 0 4 0 0 0 o'' '. 9$ & f H - E Ss oz z z % x z oS - '" r i l 6» I g - m 0 S PLAN S CONDUIT TURNED DOWN 0 CONDUIT TURNED UA BoLLE PUN EXPOSED HOME RUN CONCEALED -F - ABOVEGROUND ELECTRIC, COND, o fou o� cnr. oN 6 2 F�� zzoto _ X' AB .��,- - neon ^ _ ,gyp - :^ srim P - �� n m z� -x m6 A3f�fa uffo aH`-' _ A v 5 - -� HI.z HI x YE Y828 8 _ - 8g 4� - £ - - _ 9 S 3 0_ - - - s � - - Z ,TT c o o oR o m n m III atill S sxErr 141 of 254 RECORD DRAMS DO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CORPUS YiJ CITY OF CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT of Engin a ing Services `Nv engin rs architects contractors vE�, .av wa Y^Y MNcc01 „� €' ,s r �'9j^ \=% LI ELECTRICAL LEGEND _ r^^% Oepartmenl • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERAL NOTES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors M w A • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS FACILITY PCR -1 MAIN SUB ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS FACILITY PRIMARY ELECTRICAL DIST. ONE -LINE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors EN 7 gal!' ..110 Ill ULM 1=EZELIM O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PCR -2 5kV MCC ONE -LINE SHEET 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS - UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors FiPFESEET411" 21 5= I 28 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PCR -2 5kV MCC ONE -LINE SHEET 2 CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportmen1 of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors I?'E 1 1 1 I I I 1 RICH SERVICE NO 1 PCIR-2 MCC — 2 I 2 I ,,,,, 12 ry2. I 2 2 ''2, 2 1 ' Li. 5 R P.; t FE 111, • cv RR 4 ES: ESE R', R :5, Nt•= ' eRs'I 1! 5 5, 551 F5 0 ..,., ! 2 2 r'r, 22' 2 22H 0 1 % gg 5,1. 51 1 53 F2 5 1 5 1 ! ,L.,. Ilk n rill .,,L. all liffilL111 N. Miiiiinan '15;i7ATEIFF"' ..... .. . ....,. ..... .. . ,.....^ --' 1 ,22 I SUET /47oi 254 PROPOOP.1116 NO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors FE'li.EET411" alF,EE ''' PCR-2 LAYOUT & MCC ELEVATION __ UTILITIES —7-....-,.. DEPARTMENT O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PCR -3 5kV MCC ONE -LINE CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors A AF 041 4 0. 4 4 LJ a/ IL• 11111111MEIMI O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PCR -3 MCC LOW VOLTAGE ONE -LINE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors FiPFESEET411" ± z L31 I I IAV. 31EIVO ! g r [3, 11 11-111 .01.111.11L• 11=11111111113111 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PCR -3 LAYOUT & MCC ELEVATION CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors FiPFESEET411" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 480V ONE -LINE CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors RS 1.61011110 ostEmpnen HEII&A RV. otEMrtierd ggm, #IVIVIld .la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 OVERALL SITE PLAN liporrik CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Itgl UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineer. 1 architects Hantractors ',.MEN MEM ,.ZW===1•11! . \W=MILAEMII 1, iminnmmimm 0111•1111.113 %Alai ini IN„ III bk II, illi 7 • Inn II -11 NaJO 1L• ENZI1211111113111 gram° O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OVERALL CABLE TRAY ROUTING SITE PLAN SHEET I OF 3 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES F. ---FA DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 2 :41 z MATCHLINE SHEET 1 OF 3 • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OVERALL CABLE TRAY ROUTING SITE PLAN SHEET 2 OF 3 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors MATCHLINE SHEET 2 OF 3 ongmniere gTa O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OVERALL CABLE TRAY ROUTING SITE PLAN SHEET 3 OF CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES r,.Z DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ■ N �, . _e 11 • IIIA IIII: a II ==[=1:14- IU :110101) Rauh O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 2 CABLE TRAY LAYOUT & EQUIPMENT PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors 'E03, G —grrotrum,°'.- -11mva"" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY LAYOUT AND EQUIPMENT PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES ..7.7%.-5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors sA I 11 49 1 11 0 1 1 1. 1 I ilioutEmomo•;040.0,01,,,,,,i — III Ii Ill _- I ElblIORI 11 00:6:411.0 6, A. Ih. '-' i,I 0141011 7 I 'LL' - I lj II wig:Emil:1*w 0 = 8 'I l' O ., _._ 1 v- 1 _ III 11111 III0 1210101 I I I I I h NI 1 II 1.1-m-or.o0A: E m r -..,,..174. - m 11 D. m. I 1.1 I I lir° al 1 ,-, 80 I 10 7 . ;; I I I ' Ill I I ,— , • .1411100:: ' 0 0 . 1, 1 ; I 8 I 3 I _ II r 1.7;.1; hill'i — A :It Oi ileill=i W IP I 'fiL,, I PE I ;,,' ._,1 - I Is I A il itt: I I NI EiliOMO !Ei ° II . . II it 0 :0:, -.I PIOICIFOIM I ID -- 1- 1. i - I ED . • .,-=0 0 Pr • 0 1! iii ..., Rill Ii' NN E .°;.' 4. in •III 11111111i .. Fg 1 111 --,--1 ........_.... a G —grrotrum,°'.- -11mva"" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY LAYOUT AND EQUIPMENT PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES ..7.7%.-5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 1ST FLOOR ENLARGED EQUIPMENT PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Oepartmenl of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 410 rT, H a T10,130321 xrdna voz 'As. "d"' 3N't3'11331311=35:= t aNv OVOE113Ntld S3,01.1 X -XXX% Na,N0i530 Nna 3.H un„,, itarti as./ IL• 101111111111111MMI -11mva"" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MEZZANINE LEVEL ENLARGED PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES .7.7%..-5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 2 '2,aq 5 33333= 33,35! . 3,- voD, I;J-. ri imilr" 1 1 ..' ",N, :2 '7''''' '- -,'- NE ON VIM 111111M rg lul i n ) 1 1 Nit, • 011111 2 1 run ili EEO 6.41-1 000Y II bilewommuno I ie:0,,.=441111. r 1 1 1 1 › 1 1 _ 1 . 1 1.1 gal 7 , : 1 w:01:11411 P; i Cg MEM 1 111111:=11101110LiM% 1 6 1 1 '' :±..;a- 11 1 11 I 11111110111=wEEE I 1 — II 'II I II I II I II 1 —..= lir W!111 fAt 6.4 1 1 I /V 4110 II 4 I II I II I II >1 N illi=•111011101110:01 :ft...; Lg.. sa, =i;;H ;HTING AND RECEPT/ I I II el 1 1 i 1 I I 1111 1111 ,_, 1• 1 , IIIMM'ilit=i111110:11:111a-. 111011"011111:21:11 es I I II r4 „ i I I )1 11 11 11 11 i p.-- HAI ,._ 1 IL, mil.6nilt:=.z.. 1 I 1 I 11 11 . leAll•WI' ' MI =W 01,9 __ OF ,_ - t „dew 4110 Ii ji I= rtt t t - t 0 t,t Q 6 I TNN =" I= EN, . 8s2 ":•-'1 , , i, i, W ,',3, ' , ,,,-,,' -A li •,, , ,, . .P .$ ,,, ,„ ,1 I'L''' 11 nl rlhi = ..........•. uziwzien —17ruaram,°- --gra- --- — ., — --- .— .-- '.2 I SUET 160c4 254 RECORD DRAMS DO. WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors FaF33,717" ,REF.'3;0°, _ HIGH SERVICE 3 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN _— UTILITIES —.7-!.....- DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services r;5 5 5 5 ; 5 = 5 8 6 5 ; 311103HOS 32InixiA IH011 f 000 8 6 5 ; a till ammizmien 55-5,5g1. g5555m55 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 N.E. 1ST FLOOR LIGHTING & RECPT. PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES ..7.7%.-5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors P. 6.116•81.636wi w. '16.8 -' 1 a n . 55 ' b 000 8 6 5 ; a till ammizmien 55-5,5g1. g5555m55 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 N.E. 1ST FLOOR LIGHTING & RECPT. PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES ..7.7%.-5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors :N:N''. mIl'lla"ill ]p_1 . .a ii' r.y.Ja N 111111•11111...1•111111:11i. 7 rn C 111:11 moan 1E06. :N:Ilal_aallIll:'ia" 'iWC 'J rl 11" 11 11 iNa11:: EII1IIa.1:111111:�4yii II I * 1 I "l —tr-, IA . 0 .= 11!; __.M • l111. Wham h... Ill 1II Immilunsc I I° il Ft." 1-11.1 iI 11 1 11111i 01 = MOOR - 141 • I :=, !!- QC% 7 in Lel= 1 r' i!:n:11 cm I I 1 II II 1 j SU: III II 01 MOIIIIIIIIM60049 :=JJ. ;all le. ..6. lg.., -- !_giIll 1 ---1111 _ g IrirI 511,MI iiiiminiIIIIiiMIA;i'i r-• • I gig Mg = 113;11 II 11 r, -....m - -- c -N1 11 II woe: Ammiln oomosia,..11 11. I - 1=11,12:11 6.4 ; 11 1 Ft-:::::: oli 11 F—Fil a II o--1- 11 I hi I, Ig. i Mil. 11111•11110...MILIIC;$1;=, •!;-•gg El 0 111111.. lia•m __I IM rgi 64IIPM:u • 111111iEllilleg1:111111:1:11ik";!-ZallIggi .11 11 11 I peg= 1 ! i i git..:11 ca- n.. • A VI- . - ..ir i —Ai ., g. IMMII,- l_lp • - g g ' Aill i kiAli -I • '' 5 ' °°,2° -AD S.,, ' ge_g° gg- 7 = '.,,.. 1 •7 im 1 II IIIi mmi .1. Er 1 rFi Fs. ini ggig 3 !a rijik°, ! g sa- --1Fi 0 nl ..0 CP BI EV lizgoirpar O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 GROUNDING PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRIST/ TEXAS UTILITIES = = DEPARTMENT Deportment a Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors alEaa's;, 531V3S DIHc10 11 r ULM 133=MCELIMI "-unztrum,°'- -",lemnr" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 SECTION DETAIL .1 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES 5..• -5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors La:Raa,,,1 13 33 WOOa '0 1 r r _._■_■■■._■_._�■ EN I sl 'lathEIMISEIMEIMMI • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 SECTION DETAIL 2 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors rn • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CONTROL SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors 2 5, ..• 5 . . . — 9 PANEL "USC UPS" - SCHEDULE SO AMP, 208/120 VAC, 1 -PHASE, 3 -WIRE, 30A MAIN BREAKER, GROUND BUS NEMA 12 SURFACE, INTERRUPT CAPACITY- 22KAIC MIN. o --- ME,AMMI SWITCHBOARD "HS -3 -PRI - SCHEDULE 22., AMP, .0 \I..] VAC, 3-PHASE 4-WRE, 225A MAIN BREAKER, 130,0M FEED GROUND BUS NEW, 12 SURFACE INTERRUPT CAPACITY- 65 MilC MAIN ,w222,1222.2222222222ggt , „,„,E'-E.F°. pl ---0F 0 ' 1H .-- 5 ! 5 5,1 "888888 ?, " 5 5 5 5 5s 5 5, 5 5 ,l'il 2 n—Ann—An,—,4Avn'nnn—An'AA!!!„T,, r t r WA mm— ,, ,-, 2,11 2 5, ..• 5 . . . — 9 PANEL "USC UPS" - SCHEDULE SO AMP, 208/120 VAC, 1 -PHASE, 3 -WIRE, 30A MAIN BREAKER, GROUND BUS NEMA 12 SURFACE, INTERRUPT CAPACITY- 22KAIC MIN. o --- ME,AMMI , „,„,E'-E.F°. ---0F 0 ' 1H .-- 5 ! 5 5,1 "888888 ?, I IV nrill all EICEinienn —tzrotrum,°'.- -Igma"" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PANEL SCHEDULES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors La:Raa,,,1 o --- SWITCHBOARD "HS -3 -LP - SCHEDULE 150 AMP 208V/120 VAC 3 -PI -ASE 4 -WIRE 150A .1,1 BREAKER, GROUND BUS NEM 12 SURFACE, INTERRUPT CAPACITY- 22 KAIC MIN , „,„,E'-E.F°. 555 .-- " 5 5 5 5 5s 5 5, 5 5 ,l'il 5,—W0 t h-0 WA mm— ,, ,-, ,, g PiiirF 2pg,T,,,, h. a,12,1,1,12,1,1.22naa2naa! I IV nrill all EICEinienn —tzrotrum,°'.- -Igma"" O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PANEL SCHEDULES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS = UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors La:Raa,,,1 • Rash • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS SHEET 1 OF 3 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Se LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors niv4343' 311, Er! 3 • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS SHEET 2 OF 3 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors LIMO" OMNI Ir... • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 DETAILS SHEET 3 OF 3 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 28 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 CABLE TRAY ELEVATIONS CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Servjce LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors • 5KV POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE 11111n rill 11112111 II I I O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 5kV CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ew m 3 3 3 3 3 Q o g. a rl a rl a rl as rl ,,,P„ m a A a a A aa9 m m Q g RN ha yo p - p mg w o- 0 p s - s ga- 0 s - h .I oN o [±a 8 h 2 h A w h ' h h p h p h w 20 1 N • 5KV POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE 11111n rill 11112111 II I I O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 5kV CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors o'Amm8!TI 8o88 888 2.88.888888.8°8 2, P 0 T0°000000800800°0 __ 6 „ 6666_ 6 _,___ 8088P8 -;;-:- 88,87 .-,.:<x<x x<x<x<x<,-82 222222 <<o- — x '°' A A p A A A A p A g 8 g 8 El • 480V POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE '881`,817 gram° O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 480V CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department a Engineering Se LNV engineers I architects I contractors naIREE 7 • 480V POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 480V CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors xx 0, oo�wNv0000 0, M 0, 0 D M M D 0 0 0 2 0 F, 0 o R - o • 480V POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 480V CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department o/ Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 120V MOTOR CONTROL -CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE ;i;;;;;((;(;!: )}})))) \ i1i))\)i1\j <<<<<<:Z) 00,0!0!! }!})}}}}(}!})[ : )!;)]} {f(ff!j .:........:. \\}(2 ) 8 22F0F in 2 \ ) 222222 %JMP IX1' AT HpH SERVICE IX2 : 2222)) 1111111111111 NOTES 120V MOTOR CONTROL -CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE • 208Y/120V POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MISC. CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS_S DEPARTMENT Department 0 Engineering Services LNV eers I architects I—_rs ;i;;;;;((;(;!: i1i))\)i1\j }!})}}}}(}!})[ .:........:. ) 2D2222222 22,0 1111111111111 ;§)4)§);Z;§;] j![![,[_[_; )!)\)<\> },§ >;>;>;i;; ( )g)�) ), : _ _ _ _ _ ) 4 }2}8'}8}2\2 }� rt :;c,6 d \))[11 262626262626 ;§§)§j§§)j§j • 208Y/120V POWER - CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 MISC. CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS_S DEPARTMENT Department 0 Engineering Services LNV eers I architects I—_rs A91 7 Y r--9 # # 1 3 i f 1 MrRe— I 1 ,-�____ ; e=ra RMER L_ _1ERE. LOAD SNITCH Rash cesimmina • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 4160v VFD SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors v O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER EPARTMEN 08/21 /12 PENSION NO. DAlf BY DESCRIPTION BEVIS. 1116 01 3 1 OR 81EVENS WATER 7FEATNENT PLANT HOH SERVICE PUMP MALMO NOS CORPUS CHRIST( TEXAS PCR 2 AND 3 5kV NON VFD MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES ..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV 6,6 6,6 -01 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) gCITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER EPARTMEN 08/21 /12 PENSION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION BEVIS. 1116 01 OM STEVENS WATER 71 ATMENT PLANT HON SERVICE PUMP MALMO NOS CORPUS CMVEYR TEXAS PCR 2 AND 3 5kV VFD MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES ..� DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT PCR 2 PUMP 11 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC lg CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT 08/21 /12 PENSION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION SI ON STEWSVS WATER TREATMENT PLANT FUOFI SHWICE PUMP MALOHO NO3 CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS PCR 2 PULP 11 5kV MOTOR 8CI EMATIC CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI XS UTILITITEAES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 FEEDER PROTECTION SCHEMATIC (TYP) it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS 01,2,92 RDASION BY DESCRIPTION SI SI R�h BILIETIMEEEI OH STEVENS WATER TPEATMBVTPLANT NIGH 8EM10EP41PELt.DNONO.8 CORPUS (WW1 TEXAS PCR 2MC3 FEEDER PROTECTPN EICFB ATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 17TT 7TT TrT TrT TrT TrT1 rfifirrfifirrrfifirrfissqfiR82rrfifirr s1 6 ▪ 0 0 0 ▪ 8 39 Imlololololo ni•h IMMINIMMEMEIMI 11 284 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PCR 2 AND 3 5kV MOTOR RTD WIRING SCHEMATIC CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Oeparfinenl of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 130 0 o N A 0 CJ o N A 0 CJ o IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIall IIIIII 1 k I N I•� � lb_.I_I. rl / OO OOOOO O 0 0 coo CI U U I[... :.SCI Rauh EMIEMEMIMMEIMI • O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 2 AND 3 MISCELLANEOUS FIELD AND CONTROL PANELS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS — UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Oepartmenf of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors z Tr,/ otscionol otstorrori O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION OVERALL PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors z 0 Tr,/ 27, MIN 2611 U m LN W, sig s� v R€ gAo �N3 m 3,: a o � otatornini J ZT 284 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION UNDERGROUND PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors z LP G LP G p H .5" — -5 I boa ;- 1 I I I — --moi 11 11 I { v I1 II II I I O Z o o - 111 I I H 11 iI 1 1 I II 11 11 11 11 11 ) ( 1 c++ JAdel z �� II,,I 1 (111111 I' L4> LL l �\ ��b A Q I m r IL H m g ///, a 0/ / I ,/ I /// // / I /// / ".. /// / // // 0 // // / r —III&i/'/--'-3. i!—I / III momma otatornini O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION ENLARGED PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors .5" Wz off: o� boa ;- momma otatornini O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION ENLARGED PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors z yr,/ ®14 0 vcsonmel oEuccore O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION GROUNDING PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES _ = DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors Tr/ 61 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION CABLE ROUTING SITE PLAN (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architect 1 contractors oa o VI "1 " gAo WI m a ' 0 itk» ...._.__...M.m .. _ 8 m a v o m m a v o m� 1 P a ti ,i o 0000000000 8 8 _68 8 000 A �, — _ , , _ , H > > -- '�0i p,,I d34 .J1 anmpna O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION EXISTING PANEL LP -G SCHEDULE (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES r,.Z DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors s v$a ih iv ®14 i® m$ NI - ;.........o - p €7 � `no o. __ !'s a m ,n-£2,�"a k^oo ^o .2,- w'.:4,1 rmiw 2. O x ! I 9 ®. z(uul e e IS 401. 43 i oA"II r Pg➢�o s' k 24,1 4 a S sz m \fes ll o 9- "sS ,„ lN�is . o�m §',, •c p ) O O Pg.g. MVO 0111.0. MASAI NO. RILIPILh 280 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS GENERATOR BUILDING ADDITION TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1) CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors og WEED -o 6 NttiN \\A; 5 0 IN SPARE <� I e COM L tim I 0 0 41.311. SI FAA sF it A5, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS OVERALL FACILITY PRIMARY DISTRIBUTION DEMO ONE•LINE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES .! DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 3N11-3N0 A'1 ON30 l 301Ai135 1-101H gg lark --4;r; ID \ Nfie adar 0 'AL E e SI 7 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE /PCR -2 5kV MCC ONE -LINE DEMO SHEET 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXASL/TI UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportmen1 of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 244 ID NOV ay, Val ik77.74 -**'• . \I k \\ \ "_'_ a ID - WES NOM' , eit.,A. ltrwo , — A .,. \lk \ __a Ntrisk , . ' Is. Ni• ` SI '711.5iTE; O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE /PCR -2 5kV MCC ONE -LINE DEMO SHEET 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportmen1 of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors uu E ; u L .9 1murtiza, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 1 DEMO PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS AUTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deporfinen,' of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors S31VDS DIHdd219 �III'®= �iSi I,I,-!!-iNllli.- 110[01111,. /114 00=31:104.11011111011 t[001,iai ]I.szoIg qi 1- li5mli V 0 i SI O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 7/PCR2 YARD DEMO PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXA _ UTILITISES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 61 11 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 2/PCR-3 5kV MCC DEMO ONE -LINE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deporfinen1 of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER EPAKMENT REVISION NO. BATE BY Or III ��hEIMESILIZIEEI liEgffp OR STEM'S WATER TFEATMENT PLANT NOR REFACE PUMP 6ULDDIO NO3 CORPUS CHAIM TEXAS PCR NO. 2 AND 3 5kV NON-VFD DEMO MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��IlFilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV ok II. \t k, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC (TYPICAL) it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER EPARTMENT 08/21/12 REVISION NO. BATE BY OFMAIIMOM WM Ma Dr liEgffp ON 13TEVal9 WATER 7FEATh ENE PLANT HON REFACE PUMP 6UILDDIO NO3 CORPUS CH IM TEXAS PCR 2 AND 3 5kV VFD DEMO MOTOR SCI ENTATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��Ilrilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV m N I O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE #2 PUMP #11 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC SHT.1 al CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS 013/21 CIE SUASION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION .71910111110 Or ozsarwmax R�ILhIMMEILLIZZEZI O.N arEvave WATER TREATMENT PLANT HON SERVICE PUMP 6UILDDIO NO3 CORPUS CH#SIt, TEXAS PCR 2 PUMP 11 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC DEMO SHEET 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��Ilrilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV o Wm 1 ca A Ada — ® e To o s _.� v o • . 0 duo 't 't O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE #2 PUMP #11 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC SHT.1 al CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS 013/21 CIE SUASION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION .71910111110 Or ozsarwmax R�ILhIMMEILLIZZEZI O.N arEvave WATER TREATMENT PLANT HON SERVICE PUMP 6UILDDIO NO3 CORPUS CH#SIt, TEXAS PCR 2 PUMP 11 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC DEMO SHEET 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��Ilrilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 42 PUMP 411 515 MOTOR SCHEMATIC SHT.2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT 10/1 3 00/21 /11 REVISION NO. DATE DESCRIPTION .7191011 PIO 1.17 914N Or Rath liEgffp O.N STEVE WATER 7FEATENE PLANT HON REFACE PUMP 6UILDDIO NO3 CORPUS CHiIM TEXAS POR 2 PUMP II 5kV MOTOR SCHEMATIC DEMO SHEET 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��Ilrilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 FEEDER PROTECTION SCHEMATIC (JVP.) litti CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS E.E WATER DEPARTMENT ERIS REVISED PER PREJECE REES OS/21 /IR REVISION NO SASE By DESCRIPTION .7191011 PIO 1.17 914N Or R�ILhIZEILLIZZEZI ON arEvave WATER 7FEATIIENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP 6UILDDIO NO3 CORPUS CHAI M TEXAS PCR 2 AND 3 EER PROTECTION DEMO SCI{MATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��IlFilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV n 80 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE 2 & 3 FEEDER PROTECTION SCHEMATIC (JVP.) litti CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS E.E WATER DEPARTMENT ERIS REVISED PER PREJECE REES OS/21 /IR REVISION NO SASE By DESCRIPTION .7191011 PIO 1.17 914N Or R�ILhIZEILLIZZEZI ON arEvave WATER 7FEATIIENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP 6UILDDIO NO3 CORPUS CHAI M TEXAS PCR 2 AND 3 EER PROTECTION DEMO SCI{MATIC (TYPICAL) CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ��IlFilti TEXAS _■ - UTILITIES a..=. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV 2,7 g 2 g g g„ ggsg 2 EQUIPMENT SYMBOLS 2 7 i' F rq 32 32 4 hT'D t!': - 4 I Y V 741 §—Ha"' Ijil III 1 n g g g 7 7, 1 T- 7 CDM smith TBPE Firm Rogistiation No. F3.3 nn—n. — ny -cm.- —0— — nV MORETON r! T.= i sun 201 of 254 RECORD OWN= M. WTR-450 O.N. .N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI ' TEXAS )0= UTILITIES = DEPARTMENT LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors —TF7;2 I Ili PROCESS EQUIPMENT LEGEND AND SYMBOLS Department of Engineering Services 090 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS EXISTING PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r ..Y DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors s '48 — A €a�s 4 1 090 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS PROPOSED AND FUTURE PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES r..Y DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Service LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors e 23 go h ottolimon otatornini O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK BLOCK DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors z4, —ama—=- 411111MIMIMiird—WA_MW 112.! 1=111=1:1 11111=1 =II NM ; 111 111 a../0 • RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ggm, #IVIVIld .la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS INSTRUMENTATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineer. architects I contractors •.11 z4, o I I n 411 111=g1 11111111=111111r11110i INIMITAMOI II /1.11 IMI 9111. kMi_TAIETIM I Lit° mi 0111.1 I OD. i171 ,L,442791 L11,0 nro11111inhim. 1011 gum., ak-40--i 4'0 ma% RS 1.61011110 RE11.1,1110. ofacnctsi '"IMITZT272,", ggm, #IVIVIld .la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS INSTRUMENTATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineer. architects 1 contractor z 0 0 RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi ggm, #IVIVIld .la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS INSTRUMENTATION PLAN liolkCITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineer. I architects I contractors z 0 n 1111 11w. t Elomm=imi II1 1 Ili. wiaa ..1, 11,41011010=1:101 11 : ;20111,1001i10111=1:11141 I I k „ 0 0 0 0 0 0 z gkvi moloonimr =1:1 I. :I :Wag f111111 Pam Ii 111=1===:14111 111=1===:14111 MI :Wail tisMil11010===:4111 U I. U U U RS 1.61011110 RE11.1,1110. ggm, #IVIVIld .la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS INSTRUMENTATION PLAN CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers architects I contractors L0,1 , .11.1nd iltl. .03,001 1,3 S S 2S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi 1151,11 aiLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM AxWMMMTAAY-°' ggZ=AilIA' gg.1, xlagrouaktia o O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2012 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV ,--' —3 VA gg glggIggIggEggIggIggIggIggIggIgglg —o ,--' AA vg, 66 In ,--' —3 Aggg 'AA " inIn —o ,--' AA NN 66 ,--' —o AA VA 66 in —.:=,. ,--' AA NN 66 In ,--' —o AA 'VA 66 in —.:=, ,--' AA NN 66 In ,--' —,—.C=, Ag AV1 AA In .--' AA NN 66 Ing ,--' —.:=, Ag AV1 AA In g bl ggIggg ',',3 .g g 'g' ggggggg-gggg go g g 8. gg-ggggg- gl gl -g n g g 22 ng gg ee Ing ss 22 igig, ss 22 in, 1 88 :AA gg 2.70 22 2-.F. 22 :AAA 88 2.70 ,, 2.70 TB -1 MaTikEril A W T1WTIW T1W TIT, T1W TIWTIWTIWTIWTIWT1T, A g W T1WTIW M — M — TIWTIT,T1W",'IWTIT,T1,,.','IWTIWTIT, AAMMAMMA — — — — A — — — — — ng 21 ng ng 21 AA ng TB -2 iliTik2EM AH.. .WWWW.W.W VA gAA —A7A. --, —c. 'AN gAA --, NN gAA —A7A. --, —cA. NN AvAA --, „ —— — --, V6 AvAA --, II S S 2S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi 1151,11 aiLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM AxWMMMTAAY-°' ggZ=AilIA' gg.1, xlagrouaktia o O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2012 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV L0,1 , .11.1nd iltl. .03,001 S 5's 70's 3,5 S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ottoman., 1151,11 aLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM gg.1, xlagrouaktia O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2013 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment o f Engineering Services LNV 5–' —3 " 46-43, —o ,--' EE gg I:3 ,--' —3 gm " ZE 1 —o ,c, c ,--' gg g6 ZE 1 ,c, ,--' —o gg 66 ZE c 1 —M. ,c, ,--' gg 66 ZE ,--' —o gg 66 ZE —M. ,--' gg 66 ZE ,--' —..=, cc L-4 ZE —M. .--' gg 66 1E ,--' —M. gg ZE ,;, =2, 2 c, _ gs -C1-C1 gg 23'5 , 22 2,T ee 2:5: 22 23. 22 23 88 22 23 22 22 22 23 88 23 23 TB -1 MaTBIEME g 35 5'1355'135 5 5'135512,5'135515.515.515.515.515.512, 5 7 5 7 7 5 7 A g 35 512512 M — M — 5135512,5135512512,512512512512, AAMMAMMA — — — — A — — — — — A TB -2 11H(4. r5 —c. —c. 1,-25 1,-25 —c. —c.—c. T5115 " T5115 II S 5's 70's 3,5 S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ottoman., 1151,11 aLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM gg.1, xlagrouaktia O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2013 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment o f Engineering Services LNV L0,1 , .11.1nd iltl. .03,001 C) S S 70's RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. usoncori 1151,11 aLMILWILM. EIMMMIMM AxWMMMT61,YA' gg.1, xlagrouaktia O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2014 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV ,--' —3 6-16 —o ,--' ggg 553 ,--' —3 gggg 5551 —o ,--' gg .5551 ,--' —o gg 5551 —.1=, ,--' 66 .5551 ,--' —o 66 5551 —.1=, ,--' gg .5551 ,--' —.,=,—.1=, 66 .5551 .--' 66 151 ,--' —.1=, gg .5551 '' '5'5 11 22 27 22 22 22 211 22 1.11.2, 22 2666 22 2.76 22 2-..g. 22 ,-C,g6 :.:. :Egg 22 2.76 TB -1 Malkill g 8.118.118.118.8'11,118.8118'18.811811811818, 5 5 - 5 - - 5 - AMMAAMMAAMMA - g 8.118.118.118.111,118.8'11111,8118'11811818, - - - - - - - - - - - 1 8 8° 11 °8' 5 1° °O 8. 8 8 8 8 8 8 1° 8 88 7, 7 7, 7 8 7 7 7 5155555555- "5"55" 27 55 21 1'5115' 22 `'4,5,''C,4 22 54114' 11-T A 55 22 TB -2 11131k= 11H. —C. —C. —C. —C. —C. —C. I1 S S 70's RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. usoncori 1151,11 aLMILWILM. EIMMMIMM AxWMMMT61,YA' gg.1, xlagrouaktia O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2014 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV L0,1 , .11.1nd iltl. .03,001 111 S S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ottoman., 1151,11 aLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM gg.1, xlagrouaktia lz,s, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2015 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment o f Engineering Services LNV ,--' —3 gg _gc: —o ,--' gg gg .-CF, ,--' —3 gg " ZE 1 —o ,c, c ,--' gg 66 ZE 1 ,c, ,--' —o gg 66 ZE c 1 —M. ,c, ,--' gg 66 ZE ,--' —o gg 66 ZE —M. ,--' gg 66 ZE ,--' —,—M. cc gg ZE .--' cg 66 1E ,--' —, gg gg ZE ,;, •=2, 2 c, -C1-C1 2' 22 2:1 ee 21' 22 2_77 22 :3 88 2E 22 2g: 22 23. 22 Z:g 88 Ig: 2g: TB -1 MaliEME g 7' 212212 2 212212,212212212212212212212, 5 7 5 7 7 5 7 A g 7' 212212 M — M — 212212,212212212,212212212212, AAMMAMMA — — — — A — — — — — A TB -2 iliTiEEEM 11H(4. —c. —c. —c. —c.—c. II S S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ottoman., 1151,11 aLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM gg.1, xlagrouaktia lz,s, O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2015 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment o f Engineering Services LNV L0,1 .11.1nd .03,001 S S 3 2S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi aiLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM gxWMMMTX6'' ggm, xlagrouaktia o O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2016 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV , gl*r ;31 ,--' —3 '.g,A 2666 glggIggIggIggIggIggIggIggE —o ,--' gggg 66 ng, ,--' —3 gggg " in —o ,--' gg 66 _Ing, ,--' —o gg 66 in —.:=3 ,--' 66 66 _Ing, ,--' —o 66 66 in —C. ,--' gg 66 _Ing, ,--' —,—.C=, 66 gg gn, ggIgglg .--' 66 66 in ,--' —, gg gn, ,,,, - . mm n 22 22 22 '2 22 ' 22 " 22 22 22 22 22 2 _ 22 8 - 22 n -- 22 TB -1 B7B,17_01 1W T1WTIW T1WTIWTIWTIWTIWTIWTIWTIWTIW 2 2 2 2 / A 1W T1WTIW M - MAAMMAAMMA - T1WTIWTIWTIWTIWTIWTIWTIWTIW - - - - - - - - - ''g" -vg" :7 gg gg 21 gg g',g', 2,3 2,-2: n n gg A grg TB -2 1-1:2017-0C 11Hg. 22222.W 2" TT VI gg -c7, 2" -,=. — TV VI n r„,4U ,? VI n -c7, -,7,-,7:,. :,' :,' 7? VI in pA gg " 22 gg in II S S 3 2S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi aiLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM gxWMMMTX6'' ggm, xlagrouaktia o O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2016 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV , gl*r ;31 L0,1 , .11.1nd iltl. .03,001 S S 70's S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. usoncori 1151,11 aLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM '1=MMT,101,1°1 gg.1, xlagrouaktia O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2017 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV 0-' —3 11 :0;0 0 0 —0 0 0 0-' gg 'L'A 61 .0-,3 1 0 0-' —3 gg 0-0 " ZE 0 0 —0 0 0 ,--' gg 11 66 ZE 1 0 0-' —o gg 11 66 ZE 0 1 —.:=3 0 0 0-' gg 11 66 ZE 1 0 0-' —o gg 11 66 ZE 0 1 —C. 0 0 0-' gg 11 66 ZE 1 0 0-' —0-0 " 11 ZE 0 1 0 0 .--' " 11 66 1E 1 0 0-' —, " 11 ZE 0 1 0 ,;, 0 0 c0, 0101 TB -1 MEdMEM g WRIRTIRTIRTIRTIR'FIRTIRFIRFIRFIR.F1 - - - - 7, / A 1 WTI M - WRIRTI M - AAMMAMMA - WRIT,TIR'FIRRIT,FIRFIRFIR.F17, - - - . A - .. - .. - - - 0., A TB -2 iliTikIEEM 11H. —c. —c. —c. —c.—c. II S S 70's S RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. usoncori 1151,11 aLMILOILM. EIMMMIMM '1=MMT,101,1°1 gg.1, xlagrouaktia O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS JUNCTION BOX 31-1JB-2017 WIRING DIAGRAM CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV 8 ,8§§88880, (g[s9,@8@,0,88g00 Pg88880 `..' :_t• 4 g gg' g 8 8 ii ° 0 g g I ' 1_ < < • . g g 8 g Ed 'E. g 'Eql- 8 8 g I E, I: go' 8 8 E I E 7, go' g l o 8 8 • 8 8. .• 8 '5, . ,,, . '-• ,., E. o 0g, ogl g g i 7 8 It" Ill Ill ..z 7.-, fin aLii EC= '11r,F5E+.T" ....... .. .„ ...,.... ...... .. ., 171.11II TM .,. .Z., i SHEET 215 of 254 PFC0P113.14,111G WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CORPUS CITY OF CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT ,,,, E„,,,,,,„9 engineers I architects I contractors ,,,, , : I .4 HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 120VAC POWER DISTRIBUTION, SHT. 1 OF 3 7.7.......5 ,,,,,, 2 55 o I14! I m E' 0 65 m a= 50 2 CO 5785 o o 2 o -3v 22 2 1- — - 1 2,1015 d 00.1 202 LOIS-Ll 5110011081000 1110-9581 231020-N311V L — - 2, 1 1015 1 2251 Moya L015-5 51001100203 02-95111 2310.2-1311 1- — - 1 15 2,10 0 M921 218 LOIS, Nom1Na . 22-9581 23102221312 z — — —7 0 1015 x598 — 399M8 1.223 51100110211.0 813-95111 231wae.311 0 IDIS Lo va aoS5302. 51001100.03 111-956 0318989-13119 0 1015 o ;ova 80430980 51901108200 111-9581 2310ae413112 589 Lots z MTM 0990 2Lw 11010 xoolloawoa 221-9581 231081011/05 210 1 1015 z 2,398 (N.) 2LN1 001.10 x1001102009 9131-95811003- 231089 110 ll 1015 rasa — 30009 1318381 9584 2318989 115 l 1 M015 o 3va — 300189 8318381 x1213-95111 9 "1015 ,110o 9990 2LN1 121910 x1901108200 2310022-93111N (090 L➢LNI OONO 511001108100 231022-938V 3 8015 35802 590010038 51001102106 .10.0.3161 3109001 2220 0030 x190110820 2310.021312 1 101S �0 MTM 01090 2621 111010 511001108200 9191-9581 2310.923110 5 2015 d NOM (091) 80,101 0010 5110011082.0 22-9581 2310.92312 L IDIS 1 218 831113 LOIS 510011021210.3 01-95111 2319629-13110 5 101S 0 MTM 83119 IDIS 511001108202 61-95111 231029-1n10 02 5 1015 UD 11010 511901102. 0990 2LN12 9191-9581 231022-N311V 022 051201. LN1 DON511001108100 9131-9581 231022-N311V 111 101S (0290 8218/210 22351 511001108200 191,10-9581 23102H-03112 9 2015 (090 LaLN 0010 5110011081.0 9131-9581 231082-1311 C 2 tots a x0011 L M.) 28100 2611 oa NO 191,10-95111 2310aS11,110 9 1015 (N.) I➢LN1 OONNv 0 2009 22 821 x0.92 5111 0108 9 11015 ,110C 101s , a 831113 Lots Nooz10= 231029-N3iN 8 Y N9va (NO L LiN0 NNW %10a91y, 2310001122-N3iN 9l 1013 MTM 831113 215 511001108200 81-95111 231089-N3iNL 9 1015 , NOM LoNa) 2... 0010 5110011081100 93095111 5110.92,110 3,8 J K K . 12, Rup�h 89 Q a SHEET 216of 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS `NV engineers I architects I contractor: `°"`°"°°' ` ,�, """'"'""°" `••,'� 1 �_* r�I �=-�'� S HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 12OVAC POWER DISTRIBUTION,SHT. 2 OF 3 _ UTILITIES ...�.� DEPARTMENT DRPe,/,,,e„/ or E„9moe 109 sernces )-2 RS 1.61011110 HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi CS, Lit 71Eigfpr ggm, #IVIVIld .la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 120VAC POWER DISTRIBUTION, SHT. 3 OF 3 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineer. architects 1 contractors o = z o C N th o 0 mF.w 0 266 F, _a _ P Tg E m O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O o R� til Ru i RvRv 1 1 _ o Rv 1 Roo 1 Ro 1 Roo N, 1 Roo 1 Roo 1,, Ro i a� g I24 SHEET 218 of 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY CORPUS TEXAS OF CHRISTI se„;„, �� engin rs I architects I contractors `°°""°'` ,', "°"''"'""°" " _ c ' '� 'iP \ .�:�sy� 19 ^� -'� 4 HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 VDC POWER DISTRIBUTION, SHT. 1 OF 2 UTILITIES w.! DEPARTMENT Dopon,,,o„ t of E„,,,,,,„9 0@ 0 0 0 0 0 0@ 0@@ 0 0 0@ 0 0 0@ 0 0@@@ 0 PS 1.61011110 momfnes HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi 88, 990113 #IVIVsd.la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 24VDC POWER DISTRIBUTION, SHT. 2 OF 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers architects 1 contractors s off+ N 0 90, pv rsT r,!--4 r,!--4 r�� r�r4--4 �s o+ o9 o� o rr, r_ � o �b x ,, i 8, Nnd�� =, C7 NHf S a a 3 3 u v v _ o o gr _ a ,, P— a `° '^ '" _ - -33 33 r4--4 V 3 r4--4 _ 3333, r4--4 33, N 33333- r,' r4--4 3 r4--4 - PNo r4--4 - 333 r4--4 z O 33 m� a u9 �_ �� •m V4 •v 9 �8 �9 •m 4 � < - N 8, a0 v0 m 8 m N m0 w a0 = v0 m o0 R CI .n Q a SHEET 220of 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF\ CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects I contractor: rv.� ,,.E.,.wo.,,.. .�, i.w,�.« '� %�,. �9r/r a :, rS _ ' ___ o e HIGH SERVICE 3 31-PLC-2000 1 ANALOG INPUT MODULE e e UTILITIES V.�.� DEPARTMENT oeenr,a„I aF Engmee , g sa.�,oes n �s mms I,- Vim, - A-o ��o opo w 3w = ww n n n n r, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I x b v1/1'V bn nb n_bnm � Nn ,_.1._,ns0,,no w o o € U m- a a v- o V 3, u = - %,--,:, ;77%'.9 I I I ren o•v Win' I I I I I I I ren z % I I I I I I I ren Pi, v, �� I I I I I I I ren I I I I I I ren I I I I I I I ren 3 AV I I I I I I I ren Ali I I I I I I I ren z O ZJ —I I I I is g+ a 8+ — L+ i m + ,,, + i v , i e + m < -L. ------ s mNo '8 N �0 U a v 0 N '5, a 2 L o R n r!? v a SHEET 221 of 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF23 CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS `NV engineers I architects I contractors `.�." ,,.vo.". .", "„"`o" .'"°"° _ � ', s ..; 9�4 CJ _ - E HIGH SERVICE 3 31-PLC-2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 2 UTILITIES 7.7....... DEPARTMENT oeenr,e„I or Engmee mq se.�,�es ooh o -�o I I I I I I I I oud v oo 1o m d � o wd o, od e ow d m oma, b ¢� Oma, d Ed n w La a 1. a o o= 24 2 4 V w j-', — _ asoa s Naa- rgza I : N I N I s C N I aa g, I q F -N I o I I I V 5i # �5i • gr o5i g •w gr 5i 8 n5i gr # g fi 2 m5i • gr # N5i m w ' a < - v e o N � a a - '2 Rath a SHEET 222 of 254 WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF,___ CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS �� engineers architects contractors '°"`""".'°`• ,�, """""'""°" _ ,ti 'a''"�'y 1 �4� • �' <. \ p _�` HIGH SERVICE 337•PLC•2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 3 UTILITIES N•,Y DEPARTMENT= oeonme„I o� Engmee mq se.��es F, v „Fr,, 0 J, til J, X� W J, ,_ �I W J, X I oI 0, J, ,„ I J,_, Yu I ,_ c: —C�Xx r r m m m ., f ,. o o , R' o A m r� 9 N 1 r11 r11 `'o r11 sS r11 ss 1-6:66i, r11 g+ g'.64 r11 + r�� z 25 i t i a i — m v m N a a _ v0 0 � a a - v0 00 o R a Mh a Q SHEET 223o1 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS �� engineers I architects I contractor: ,,•`•,•""."• ;'",ISIEEI _ E y�l ., \�,�'�. ',�� zs re; _ ,,,, 4 HIGH SERVICE 3 3bPLC-2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 4 e UTILITIES 3.x.7 DEPARTMENT oee,/..,e„/ or Engmee mq sc.�s�e� 2. 2 S am A A.222 2.2 2,22 g22 0 ed 1 ou d 1 1 Pd 1 6 ,. a o od <m I d o a ov d 1 T co A m s LI o 0 Pi o s �- s a a- _ s- - 2 R. < I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I z Agv- A 1 I 1 I I m I u I a I J I n I I m I u co gs N m0 w a0 _ g0 � 00 � m g m0 w 20 _ ti0 R a rh Q SHEET 224o1 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF\'•, CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS `NV ns architects contractors ,,•`•�•""�."• """.'"°`�" �. '^' :q"'^r, t!,m' ^ - o = _ HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 5 UTILITIES 7.7.......engin DEPARTMENTrq'`\ oee,l.ae„I or Engmee mq se.�,�es 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I I II I I I r�r�r�r-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I I I 1 rr�� r -i 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 --1b r -4—'0r-4—'0 0 u O b O ° 0 �b b No, b 'b 0, b Cr i/4,,,_ mg N — N N 2 2 N — 2 2 § i 2 o o o w m= U m w <— v= e o- N 7 u = �_ �I @I @ @I @I @I �LYJ LYJ+ I I iiiiiii ren @I @I �LYJ LYJ+ I I I I ren �I �I LYJ LYI+ I I I I ren @ [NNI LTJ LYI+ I I I I r @I @I 0I �I �LYJ LYJ+ I I iiiii ren RI @I LYJ LYI+ I I I I ren 0 PI ~ LTJ LYI+ I I I I r-1 0 0I 0I �I 0, 0, O O � - AN �LYJ LYJ+ 4 I I 1 ren : m t E ; •a ._ �� ; .m E t n� .v . mI •m NE m t N 00a 00 v00 w N � a 0 2 0 R u �n a SHEET 225o1 254 MONO BRAWIN WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS �� engineers I architects I contractor `•�•""°,' ,,•"` , ""'"°"F, " q s„ c , .1. o HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 ANALOG INPUT MODULE 6 e UTILITIES V.�. DEPARTMENT oeenr,e„I or Engmee mq se.�,�es L00, 00, 008066, (7:D 000, 0, 000880068PP VI4. II I P I P I P I P I P I p l i� I I 0403 0403 0403 0403 0403 0403 w 0.3 s� s \= m n 8 I8m �N I I SI 0403 0403 0403 0403 0403 0403 w 0.3 PS 1.61011110 momfnes HEII&A RV. ofacnctsi Rath 990113 #IVIVsd.la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers architects 1 contractors I I to to tt I I i i i i i i to I I I I to 111111111111111 1111111 ggl ggl I I I I I I T- T - ri ri ri ri ri ggl I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I T- T- T- T- T- rrrv r r r r i r i "r T i i T- T- T- T- T- o 111111111111111 1111111 me� PS 1.61011110 momfnes ofacnctsi Ranh our Oil ILE. 990113 #IVIVsd.la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers architects 1 contractors rl r 111111111111111 1111111 W CU CJ ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^Z �I �I �I aI aI �I I I I I I T. T. T. T. T. T. T. T- 1 1 1 T. T. T. T. T- 1■111111111111 1111111 PS 1.61011110 samisen ar usurps G �ILhBEEMEEEEM 990113 #IVIVsd.la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers architects 1 contractors iS As �ho mho �ho -`,15 � � 'Mg; gt L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L o A A A A A A Al A A A A A A PS 1.61011110 samisen usurps 0 A x H 111n NJ 990113 #IVIVsd.la O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC -2000 DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers architects 1 contractors • 0 2X4CWIREWAY 0 • 0' o ° • - —„, „,„ :IP '. 15111dICIRMIHRIPHIMMIld IRIPIIMMIIMINIINIINIIM - — , .... . . . .. , ... ,, .. .„. , . . . . .. . , .. ,,, _,. e 49 I P I e e eell N •,., 0 03%4 WIREWAY L. -9S, ^-, 51 0 02X+ WIREWAY 02X+ WIREWAY 02X+ WIREWAY O.N. STEV *IIMIIINIIPIMIIIMIMIIIMIIIVINNWRWRNIVPHOCr 4 ,-'z -, inn in .. 11. MN__ 11 C, 0 0 03 0 0 ?'< i 1,1 iii 0 ,._ ni z e3X4 WIREWAY t-0 E DCI (,) mo • 0 " r'l BACK PANEL LAYOUT rR TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE A ir—ANORIROMPARMINPAIMPIPHAPHIMPIRPID. 9 0 0 0 0 02X4 WIREWAY tr* 0 02X4 W EWAY 0 fJ4 °1101MIPIPIRIPIPIIMINIIMPIPIPIRIPIRII -_) IMPRINT 02X4 WIREWAY 00 0 1 e 1 e 02X4 WIREWAY P 11 PPITPITPITPITPINPPPPITPITPMPPPPPPPPITITINPPITITPPMPITPIPPITPITPITPITP[PP-PRPRPRPRPPIN 10 p . e 0 0 0 0 0 02%4 WIREWA e 0 e 0 0 0 0 0 e e e e WAY III : 41 !!!: ...... .PROWERPROAPPROPROMMOMPROMPOTRATREPPO 6.1 C)2X4 WIREWAY 0 1 e e e e e e 1 IPPHITIMORRITRATOPPIP 04 9S, j, 0 0 0 0 . c7i 0:k 0 0 • 0 2X40WIREWAY o oJ ......00:.it.:[, lila:: ..;°1 E=11 ...„ — ., ..... ‘-i 2 'E i SHEET 230of 254 PFC0P113.14,111G WTR-450 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS LNV engineers I architects hoontractors F°:liY:F.'0':" aEEE i ..5 '''X 2 NIGH SERVICE 3 31 -PLC-2000 PLC PANEL LAYOUT UTILITIES 7.7.......5 DEPARTMENT w anwma O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31.PLC.2000 PLC PANEL LAYOUT BILL OF MATERIALS CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services onEwriere LNV engineers I architects I contractors ti BILL OF MATERIALS ITEM MFR PART NO DESCRIPTION PTV ALLEN BRADLEY 1756—PA75 CHASSIS POWER SUPPLY 3 2 ALLEN BRADLEY 1756—A4 4 SLOT CHASSIS 2 CULTER—HAMMER SIEMENS PHOENIX SIEMENS SIEMENS 0800886 0800307 HOFFMAN NEMA -12, TWO—DOOR MILD STEEL ENCLOSURE, 72'1, X 72"W X 161 HOFFMAN MILD STEEL BACK PLATE, 68"H X 68"W S Ui4 FUSED TERMINAL BLOCK W/ 24VDC LED 1A FUSE GMA Ui4 FUSED TERMINAL BLOCK W/ 120VAC LED 2A FUSE GMA Ui4 FEED THROUGH TERMINAL BLOCK, CRAY Ui4 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK, GREEN SCALANCE X106-1 ETHERNET SWITCH SIEMENS 5SY BREAKER, 5A 1 POLE o (MAW LndNI 1V1I0Ia H39, (OVAEL) mdw 111010 HD9l CLX ETHERNET MODULE REDUNDANCY MODULE anwma O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 31.PLC.2000 PLC PANEL LAYOUT BILL OF MATERIALS CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services onEwriere LNV engineers I architects I contractors ti • 4, • • 11 1 8 I 8 ottolimon otatornini HIGH SERVICE PUMP SYSTEM SEQUENCE FLOW CHART all ILOh O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS NARRATIVES: HIGH SERVICE PLC PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5.--5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ottolimon otatornini HIGH SERVICE PUMP SYSTEM SEQUENCE FLOW CHART all ILOh O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS NARRATIVES: HIGH SERVICE PLC PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5.--5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors ottolimon otatornini HIGH SERVICE PUMP SYSTEM SEQUENCE FLOW CHART O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS NARRATIVES: HIGH SERVICE PLC PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 5,..5 DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors AREA 3NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS ROUTING PLAN } MATCHLINE AREA 2 MATCHLINE AREA 4 Ur Mb rumen, g SAME1111 3 LT OK STEMS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HON SEANCE PIMP MALOPIO N0.3 CORPUS CHIST4 TEXAS F ER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUSCHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV CO z 0 x 0 0 0 z2 -1! z 8 MATCHLINE AREA 7 - - - - - - - - - - - itikraffigdII .1ta hiffrA1111111111011111010140 MEWL o 0 9 eV RENSIONO. Ur onEnumen, IF I Vigil all ILO IL • ggm, #133N111,1A113 O1 STEVENS WATER TREATIIIENT PLANT NIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NOS CORMS asen TEXAS FBER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES = DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineer. I architects I contractors 2 1 "?,',3 2535 1 2,3 F,E35 .,,.1 9 z 1 ,2., 32,1 "r3, 2535 g ISSUED FOR REFERENCE ONLY 8 8 R F M 7 1 , J = 1 _,_ G L P P P M 11 3 53 555 55 5I„:.'" 5 Lm s 2 N F 1 = si, 1-1110 I-T F51 1 4 5--F IL 1 HF, Ig mo i I 5 9 I- 3,35" 53L ' MY 4 2d— 1= ,=, NO NO 4 —I—I—I L_II__II__11__I NO gl 1_111_111___ I 0 I I :P. NO '1 9 L'$, r. 2 8 ' ','XD 2R =s, 1 4 1,.' I' 4 -,g1 II , § " ,... IR ZIS , R I§ E... a . , ,,,_ :!, '''A . 4® N 2 u 2 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLAT N CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI s, N TEXAS ' NETWORK COICATIOS MMUNN EA WATER DEPARTMENT BLOCK DIAGRAM FILTER BUILDING REVISION NO. MN ISSUE FOR APPROVAL BY DESCRIMION III a Ili .s•-•I K2 IlL • IN 111=31 7MTEMr -;' '22 i SHEET z37ofmw ON STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HON SERVICE PUM. SUILOINO NO.3 CORMCFFMMUS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS engineers I architects I contractors FEEF" ,a'Esa°, ..... - 6i.MI ' , E FIBER OPTIC COIAMUNICATIONS = UTILITIES F.:-...-F. DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM HIGH SERVICE/PCR BUILDING CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT ADDED .01PLYZEPS PEP PROJECT .600 ADDED FILTER PLC IHTERCCH PROJECT .600 AMID .01PLYZEPS PEP PROJECT #F1600 ISSUE FOP CONSTRUCTION REVISION ND. ADDEO FILTER PLC INTERCONNECT PER PROJECT 000 - ISSOE IFC REVISED PER PR0 E11066 - H SERVICE ba PUUPPOUSE a/10 A00 ANALYZES PER PROJECT 000 - ISSUE MR wrvsaU:1I 10/10 JHW REVISED PER NEN. CAUSTIC PLC 990{{3 #I.I. se AM O.N STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM HIGH SERVICES/PCR BLD. CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors II"m ,,,o DTR u—O] „ moo,. —] °,,,-,,,P —MS ,gL —1., .m-- P PU—Aa ewn,-03gC Ai Ai;oC—A A -C gC—gin C—•,.=„mm-., C 1;C F'''''' ]D; K]m Al AFDC AC €C ]1 �m Al AEA, A-E. A la krw sa„o PCF BLDG. /3 (BUS 1) — 9,E M, S =' * F°—°—°—°—°—'16:'''' o—o—o—o—o—o1 m 1 112 1 IL I ,'IL_1o`__1_ 1_ r —I 1111 L. 0� o 0 0 0 0� ^° 1 . � 1 xo—lw r —o�o— o —T T I ass 1 1 11 1 1 E EJ L„,,,,, ;,,�I�H„„,,°,I�L'J LTJ Ips...;:h -- Lo_o_I_o _ (BD U) L J 0 . STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CITY OF CORPUS TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT CHRISTI NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM HIGH MOTOR PROTECTION FIBER NETWORK K.2. REVISION NO. DATE er DESCRIPTION POOLO FILTER PLC INTERCONNECT PER PROJECT 0600 - ISSOE IFA °TOT REVISED PER PR. E11066 - HIGH SERVICE ba PaMaHOUSE a/10 ADDED ANALYZERS PER PROTECT 4800 - ISSUE EDN wrvsauCTl 10/10 REVISED PER NEN. CAUSTIC PLC - SI nrv wax 'do DESCRIOTX 990{{3 x1.M.,113 O.N STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS MOTOR PROTECTION FIBER NETWORK CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors El 7 tl=11 l/M* ll "'II:Ell c'r1=1:/rl, Ell Ell 11; E1=1) "'"1=0„1 00 Eo 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 O o ▪ Co O 0 0 0 P O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM CHEMICAL BUILDING — RACK 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER 01,0,Eril ISSUE FOP CONSTRUCTION REVISION ND. DESCRIPTION SI nrv wax 'do DESCRIMON Ile Will ...111 UP IL W I=1 ""1M= ""V2Ilf"' ggagg, # I.I.Nd AM ON MEMO WATEFf TREATMENT PLANT MOH SERVICE PEW BULONO NQ3 CORPUS Chan TEXAS FBER OPTIC COIAMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 51-5 DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineer -Mg LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors aa1E1Ea:,`,, 31 4 ml lml ESIml ES I ES com IE I IES LoD lES 1 P O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM LAB BUILDING — LAB RACK it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEP.-WEN-I ISSUE FOP CONSPUCTION R.SION ND. Dalt DESCRIPTON SI nrv wax 'do DESPUTIM rITZUM 990{{3 #I.I. se AM ON STEVENS WATER T EATIENT PLANT M@1891VICE PULP BULDPoQ NO3 CORPUS CHM TEAS FElER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors SI nrv wax 'do DESCRIMON ""AIMUMMV, c'n=47di.7"' ggagg, # I.I.Nd AM ON STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT MON SERVICE PUMP TIMMS NO3 CORPUS Chart TEXAS FIBER OPTIC COIAMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors '1E01 0_ s . 1E01 IED1 — —oo ED ED 1 1 ED o ,-' EI 0 ossElE I =1 I ED El— 0 0 0 —0 El D 0=1:1) gp "'1011 I .1 p 4.1 El DO 0 DO > o,0 0 —DO 0 El D (DJ (=I '8'1=1 ID 1:1 0 11:1=11 I 1=1:11 ED ED I ED I ED I DDI ./.1 op I I El e- =1 El=1) EID) "''LED) I r' 1 z — r2 I p 3 I § 1 — I 1=1:11— OD' 1 0... 1111' I J:1=10 1 EIEE „„1 1 DDI 1 RD/DK I I Ell] P„K1 L _ _I DO I Ec I El L _L Ic 7 8E1 EU I Do I l 171 Ic 7 :L.acIEW 1 Eirl guni "/r0=11 . ED , ri, "s'LLUDI — „ ,— i .81 I—ET —I 18 I-0-0-1 I E 1 Ea -,, I- 1 L — — -I 1 __J .7.' E., E:W O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS = = WATER DEPPP,Eril r......r. NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM FILTER OFFICE — OFFICE RACK o REVISION ND. OKIE ,.,. ISSUE FOP CONSPUCTION RV DESCRIPTION SI nrv wax 'do DESCRIMON ""AIMUMMV, c'n=47di.7"' ggagg, # I.I.Nd AM ON STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT MON SERVICE PUMP TIMMS NO3 CORPUS Chart TEXAS FIBER OPTIC COIAMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors r- L e ER O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM FILTER GALLERY—GALLERY RACK it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER 01,1,11.0-1 ISSUE FOP CONSTRUCTION REVISION ND. Dalt DESCRIPTION SI nrv wax 'do DESCRIMON Rath rITZUM 990{{3 #I.I. se AM ON STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT MON 891VICE PULP BUILONQ NO3 CORPUS Chan TEXAS FIBER OPTIC COINAUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM HIGH SIRVICE /i1 PCR BUILDING gi CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER CIEPPRIMEN1 REVISED PEP PROJ E11066- 155U FOR CONSFIJCII0H PIPAPHSE REVIS.IDN ND. DAIE DESCRIPTIDN 11111n111 nranai ON STEVENS WATER 1REATMENT PLANT HI@18HWICE RAP MALDWO NO3 CORPUS CFH914 TEAS FIBER OPTIC COIAAUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES r„Y DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors O.IN. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM NIGH SERVICE #2 PER BUILDING it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS PRISM 1.13 PROF. El FOMMI.S. 3 P.M. RNSIDN ND. 1551. FOR COORMR1011 DESCRIPTION nrn No TEXARE5 F439 ON STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT SON SERVICE P AP SULOINC NOS CORPUS CHISTI TEAS FIBER OPTIC COIF MUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES r„Y DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors —Ektgp— 54 g Zi i N 54 F , WI I' L° '5 g "' EMI " no, ; " 1E11 ,1 -.1= gisna- P — 1 1E01 • = : : 0 0 , e e 8 `1, > 1,5 FE'E'' K _, „.1,1151171 El El rg El P ., r43 rg ma I 0 • ,11 22 E n 5 _I '1 I- rg -4 , on Pg g3 2 Pi — c: ","H on ElE1 lopl iilil al El El El El 2 ; ., r - 1 1 0 0 ,R IS , 2 g ' g N STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS w E WATER DEPARTMENT ......... NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTION, DIAGRAM ANALYZER FIBER INTERCONNEC REVISION ND DATE ssuE MR APPROVAL BY IHSCRIRION SI liFYISIOXMO OFROLLPTIOM ENGINEERING ggagg, # I.I.Nd AM OR STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HON SERVICE PUMP BUILONO NO3 CORPUS Chan TEXAS FIBER OPTIC COIAMUNICATIONS CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES = DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 88000080808®880880808008880808008808008000 FIBER CONDUIT & CABLE SCHEDULE CONDUIT DATA CliAMIND onnwax SIN p as/A FIBER OPTIC 8,1 -FB0in FILTER OFFICE LABBUILDINGBUILDING FPPpe LAB BUILDING FPPds, mmm, mmm aaa o1o„ mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm aAaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 8000000000000000000',1 '1 '000000',1 '1 2E7E2 - - O vuw v G G o g 7 g o 7 § g m - g - AA^ggE a - a gg - �, T - o o A 88 ° Os R O O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS FIBER CABLE SCHEDULES gil CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS 06/15 REVISION NO. DATE DESCRIPEM SI OFERSOON 990{{3 xt�e�oueuiu O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS FIBER OPTICS CABLE SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 00000000000000®000000060008000000606608060 FIBER CONDUIT & CABLE SCHEDULE io caouxoui aSrn CRAMIRE Sia N'x�c FROMoEsnI nox rO FIBERS USED SFIRm SPARE ORPHANED REMARKS O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS FIBER CABLE SCHEDULES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT 04/01 /11 REVISION NO. DATE DESCRIPTION AlNo 3sn 3anln3 a03 990{{3 ut..I.Nd AM O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS FIBER OPTICS CABLE SCHEDULE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors ®®®®®®®®.M O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 2 PUMPS 8 & 9 P&ID it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT SHIMS PROJECT DIODE READ PAW BUILDING DTORTII PROJECT BADE ENDUE, FEED OPTIMTATTOIT IDTHATIO 06/2,10 PROJECT 8605 CHEMICAL FEED OPTIMIEATTOO REVISION NO. DUE DESCRIPTIDN .../0 111 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 2 PUMP 8 & 9 P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEX _ UTILITIASES r,.. DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 0.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 2 PUMPS 10 & 11 P&ID glii CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS E.! WATER DEPARTMENT DO go PROJECT E11066 S PIMP BUILDING 3/08/11 PROJECT B605 CHEMICAL FLED OPTIMIZATION 11/22/10 PROJECT 8605 CHEMICAL FLED OPTIMIZATION 06/23/10 03/05/10 RENSI. NO. DATE DESCRIPION O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 2 PUMPIO & 11 P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES 7- DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors 61 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PUMPS 12 & 13 P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors Iv vo o - h .m I. o }---r} }}°}I}°—'1g Ivy i v}�-�°444N1 IL°—° 1PSc1�°T N i i iv d .m z} -4-}--a(-1Q-A! (-1Q—jig F°-° V� �P-� "` f�14 �i lt1 7y lr - �V$ ail I� - o s ox o. m - " a of of 8l q I s^ I }P 5- ..Ba a o - � L3� " 0 N Coos a ® °,�, ii l } " ° C o o al �E� mold` IP o � ° io111 P Y _ _ ,. " o� I Il°i- - " II " v ., IE fo��N� " 01 o1 HI F Le e a B 3 s "' - u�i q i C ,, 1 y " } ev\ L.^.000� .. - 3 � `{ �u u 7. �\ ^{ °° ° u u c N N� 5]-21 r I° fo o Y T.� ° o o oM u� - a `° l l 3 o r ass14 ®� ®a o- i II C130�3 3 °ma loo m®m1 II Ir° s IIIilti1I ^ ll I �inl I 11 a ° vi�y f,.11l .. I II nI III ti IL° u® 1 °u� g I LNII -o moo 4 - 11. I 4 II III r i;,I vv = R$ife as _oo _- 8- 5 ep g g s v V V 6 A 0 . STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Q p WATER ocverermevI0 HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 PUMPS 12 & 13 R&M REVISION NO .26014 MOE nOn FOR DESCRIPTION 61 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PUMPS 12 & 13 P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Service LNV engineers I architects I contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 PUMPS 14 & 15 P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT 10,26,14 REVISION NO. OKIE DESCRIKON 61 'IstMiggrai "" coRpils O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PUMPS 14 & 15 P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS UTILITIES DEPARTMENT Department of Engineering Services LNV engineer.1 architects 1 contractors 06 } .4[N '11:11::44''.11'4:1:11 mE J I roo®P® J ---.4[N 1.--111130 IS. . V�EEl cw Le ear 41f— Le • ( 4 -E fop O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 PUMPS 16 & 17 P&ID itti CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT 10/26/14 REVISION NO. DATE DESCRIPTION OntillPr SI ! Lh O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS HIGH SERVICE 3 PUMPS 16 & 17 P&ID oppRik CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI IITEXAS _ UTILITIES ..... DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers 1 architects 1 contractors O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING 3 FUTURE PUMP #18 & ANALYZER P&ID it CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS WATER DEPARTMEN1 10,6.14 REVISION NO. OKIE DESCRIPTION SI O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT HIGH SERVICE PUMP BUILDING NO.3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS NIGH SERVICE 3 FUTURE PUMP 318 & ANALYZER P&ID CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS _ UTILITIES wr DEPARTMENT Deportment of Engineering Services LNV engineers I architects I contractors 00 30 00 BID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM ARTICLE 1— BID RECIPIENT 1.01 In accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents, this Bid Proposal is submitted by PLW Cadagua Partners (type or print name of company) ons June . 2016 at 2:00 PM for E11066 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 **Wednesday, June 08, 2016 at 2:00 pm per Addendum No. 02 1.02 Submit Bids, Bid Security and all attachments to the Bid (See Section 7.01 below) to the City's. electronic bidding website at www.CivCastUSA.com. If submitting hard copy bids or bid security in the form of a cashier's or certified check, please send to: The City of Corpus Christi, Texas City Secretary's Office 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid - O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Project No. E11066 All envelopes and packages (including FEDEX envelopes) must clearly identify, on the OUTSIDE of the package, the project name and number and that bid documents are enclosed. ARTICLE 2 — BIDDERS'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 2.01 Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner on the form included in the Contract Documents, to perform all Work specified or indicated in Contract Documents for the Contract Price indicated in this Bid or as modified by Contract Amendment. Bidder agrees to complete the Work within the Contract Times established in the Agreement or as modified by Contract Amendment and comply with the all other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2.02 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of SECTION 00 21 13 INVITATION AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, including those dealing with required Bonds. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the opening of Bids. 2.03 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of its failure to complete Work in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Agreement. 2.04 Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No. Addendum Date Signature Acknowledging Receipt 01 May 16, 2016 02 May 20, 2016 Bid Acknowledgement Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 00 30 00 - 1 Rev 0143-2016 Signature Acknowledging Receipt 04 May 31, 2016 ARTICLE 3 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. 3.02 The Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.03 The Bidder is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.04 The Bidder has carefully studied the following Site -related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: A. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; B. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; C. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; D. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and E. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. 3.05 The Bidder has considered the: A. Information known to Bidder; B. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; C. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and D. The Contract Documents. 3.06 The Bidder has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 3.04 and 3.05 with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: A. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; B. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and C. Bidder's safety precautions and programs. 3.07 Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bid Acknowledgement Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003000-2 Rev 01-13-2015 3.08 The Bidder is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 3.09 The Bidder has correlated the information known to the Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. 3.10 The Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Bidder. 3.11 The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 3.12 Bidder's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 — BASIS OF BID 4.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for: Base Bid Additive Alternate 1 Additive Alternate 2 Additive Alternate 3 Additive Alternate 4 $ $ $ 2 Q(7�Oc 00 955 02o--- $ / 5c3 O uo , The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be either the Lowest Responsible Bidder or the Bidder who provides the Best Value for the Owner that submits a responsive Bid. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for the Base Bid, plus any combination of Add or Deduct Alternates or to the Bidder who provides the Best Value for the Owner. ARTICLE 5 — EVALUATION OF BIDDERS 5.01 The contract may be awarded either to the lowest responsible bidder or to the bidder who provides the best value for the Owner. The Owner will consider the amount bid, the Bidder's responsibility, the Bidder's safety record, the Bidder's indebtedness to Owner and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements to determine the lowest responsible Bidder. The Owner reserves the right to waive any and all irregularities in determining the Bidders' responsibility or value, and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements, and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. 5.02 The Owner has the right to accept a Bid, reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all irregularities in the Bids, or to reject non -conforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids. In Bid Acknowledgement Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003000-3 Revell -l3 -2O16 addition, the Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid where circumstances and developments have, in the opinion of the Owner, changed the responsibility of the Bidder. 5.03 Material misstatements in the documentation submitted to determine the Bidder's responsibility, including information submitted per SECTION 00 4516 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, may be grounds for rejection of the Bidder's Bid on this Project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the Contract to such Bidder, may be grounds for immediate termination of the Contract. Additionally, the Bidder will be liable to the Owner for any additional costs or damages to the Owner resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. ARTICLE 6 —TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01 Bidder will complete the Work required to be substantially completed within 700 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. Bidder will complete the Work required for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 730 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is awarded, 365 additional days will be added to the substantial and final completion dates. 6.02 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within the number of days indicated. ARTICLE 7 — ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID In compliance with the Bid Requirements in SECTION 00 2113 INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, the following are made a condition of this Bid: A. Bid Security. B. SECTION 00 30 00 BID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FORM and documentation of signatory authority. C. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. D. SECTION 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS. E. SECTION 00 30 05 DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST. F. SECTION 00 30 06 NON -COLLUSION CERTIFICATION. ARTICLE 8 — DEFINED TERMS 8.01 The terms used in this Bid have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. The significance of terms with initial capital letters is described in the General Conditions. Bid Acknowledgement Form 0.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003000-4 Rev 01-13-2016 ARTICLE 9 — VENUE 9.01 Bidder agrees that venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. ARTICLE 10 — SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDERS 10.01 Bidders must include their correct legal name, state of residency, and federal tax identification number in the Bid Form. 10.02 The Bidder, or the Bidder's authorized representative, shall sign and date the Bid Form to accompany all materials included in the submitted Bid. Bids which are not signed and dated in this manner, or which do not contain the required documentation of signatory authority may be rejected as non-responsive. The individual(s) signing the Bid must have the authority to bind the Bidder to a contract, and if required, shall attach documentation of signatory authority to the Bid Form. 10.03 Bidders who are individuals ("natural persons" as defined by the Texas Business Organizations Code §1.002), but who will not be signing the Bid Form personally, shall include in their bid a notarized power of attorney authorizing the individual designated as their authorized representative to submit the Bid and to sign on behalf of the Bidder. 10.04 Bidders that are entities who are not individuals shall identify in their Bid their charter or Certificate of Authority number issued by the Texas Secretary of State and shall submit with their Bid a copy of a resolution or other documentation approved by the Bidder's governing body authorizing the submission of the Bid and designating the individual(s) authorized to execute documents on behalf of the Bidder. Bidders using an assumed name (an "alias") shall submit a copy of the Certificate of Assumed Name or similar document. 10.05 Bidders that are not residents of the State of Texas must document their legal authority to conduct business in Texas. Nonresident Bidders that have previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State may submit a copy of their Certificate of Authority. Nonresident Bidders that have not previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State shall submit a copy of the Bidder's enabling documents as filed with the state of residency, or as otherwise existing. Bid Acknowledgement Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003000-5 Rev 01-13-2016 ARTICLE 11— BID SUBMITTAL 11.01 This Bid is submitted by: Bidder: PLW C..agu. Partners By:it Name: Atul. Raj (typed or printed full legal name of Bidder) (individual's signature) Title: President Attest: (typed or printed) (typed or printed) Lori Brown (individual's signature) State of Residency: TEXAS Federal Tax Id. No. 30-0941347 Address for giving notices: 9303 New Trails Drive, Suite 200 The Woodlands, Texas 77381 Phone: (713) 521-0174 Email: arajpepperlawson.com waterworksbids@pepperlawson.com (Attach evidence of authority to sign if the authorized individual is not the Bidder, but an individual signing on behalf of another individual Bidder, or if the authorized individual is a representative of a corporation, partnership, or joint venture.) END OF SECTION Bid Acknowledgement Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003000-6 Rev 01-13-2016 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Project Number: City Project No. E11066 Owner: City of Corpus Christi Bidder: /, -- j"-N,f CAD 4G(Joe P.r < -r j-Exr OAR: Mobilization Designer: LNV, Inc. Item DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT Base Bid Part A - General (per SECTION 01 2901 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Al Mobilization LS 1 766 Ot., D — -7GC-, Dos —A2 /75-7G o, ". Ozone Advisory Day EA 1-oa:0 — 3 asp SUBTOTAL PART A - GENERAL (Items Al thru A2) 7c 76cii ocfl-_ Part B - WATER IMPROVEMENTS (per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) B1 ONSWTP Improvements and Modifications LS 1 77 Z- c,t-%," (7 ?7 a, ,,o,, B2 Allowance for Unanticipated Improvements LS 1 $ 300,000.00 $ 300,000.00 SUBTOTAL PART B - WATER IMPROVEMENTS (Items Bl thru B2) /75-7G o, ". Part C -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) D1 High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation LS Cl Alternate Generator Building Extension and Retrofit LS 1 '',10 .".3.1 -` 0, Q- 02,6-"- 2R6`SUBTOTAL SUBTOTALPART C - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (C1) $ 50,000.00 $ 50,000.00 D3 Allowance for HS2 Pump Motor Repair .Z oma? yon --- Part D -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) D1 High Service Pump Building No. 2 Rehabilitation LS 1 8i5 0w- 3 ?s`,—.-- D2 Allowance for HS2 Discharge Butterfly Valves LS 1 $ 50,000.00 $ 50,000.00 D3 Allowance for HS2 Pump Motor Repair LS 1 $ 60,000.00 $ 60,000.00 SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (Dl THRU D3) `t55' 00 n-' Part E -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Fl High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehab El 72-1nch Waterline Extension LS 1 ac50 coo— „o C)c)` SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (El) (513,&s .Z6,7 ood.- Part F -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Fl High Service Pump Building No. 2 Access Road Rehab LS 1 f5-0; oo..).r /s'k.) J ate~ 1 SUBTOTAL PART F - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (F1) (513,&s Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11066) Page 1 of 5 ADDENDUM NO. 4 00 30 01 BID FORM BID SUMMARY SUBTOTAL PART A - GENERAL (Items Al thru A2) 9'.5-3—/ ocw. a' 7C7 oi.no -co SUBTOTAL PART B - WATER IMPROVEMENTS (Items B1 thru B2) TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (PART C) /1 ?74 0a0, f ,2 pr.->- ' -' TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID (PARTS A THRU B) 7I - — l'4 3(S,00t— SUBTOTAL PART C - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (Item Cl) 9'.5-3—/ ocw. a' ` q t at>,., -C3 TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 (PART C) days ,2 pr.->- ' -' SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (Items Dl thru D3) 9'.5-3—/ ocw. a' TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (PART D) gcrf 0,,�.TIT) SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (Item El) a. c7.7 , ,.s o - �s TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 (PART E) °coo o,,a . . SUBTOTAL PART F - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (Item Fl) /ToE m Laa . on TOTAL PROJECT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 (PART F) /So . a., . Go Contract Times Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in 700 days Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in 730 days NOTE: 1. If only Base Bid is awarded, no additional days will be awarded. 2. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 3 or Additive Alternate No. 4 or awarded, no additional days will be awarded. 3. If Base Bid plus Additive Alternate No. 1 or Additive Alternate No. 2 or awarded, 365 additional days will be awarded. Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11066) combination of Additive Alternates No. 3 & 4 is combination of Additive Alternates No. 1 & 2 is Page 2 of 5 ADDENDUM NO.4 00 30 01 BID FORM SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS FOR MAJOR EQUIPMENT The Contract Documents are based upon the equipment or products available from the manufactures / suppliers denoted as "a", "b", etc., below. Provision is made in the Contract Documents for the alternate manufacturers and suppliers whose equipment or product may be deemed equivalent in quality. However, the Bidder must indicate in his Bid which manufacturer/supplier he based his bid upon and which he intends to use for each item of equipment, listed below by circling one of the listed suppliers / manufacturers. If the Bidder fails to indicate which listed supplier/manufacturer he intends to use, the Bidder must use the suppliers/manufacturers listed as "a". If the Bidder desires to propose one or more alternate suppliers/ manufacturers, he may write in the name of such alternates in the spaces provided on the pages following the lists below, but he must nevertheless also circle one of the listed suppliers/manufacturers because Total Base Bid must be based upon this list. Wherever an alternate supplier is proposed, the Bidder must insert the amount to be deducted from the Contract Price (either lump sum or unit price) if the alternate supplier is eventually approved. If the proposed alternate supplier is determined "not equivalent" by the Engineer, the Bidder must use the circled supplier. If the Bidder fails to indicate which listed supplier/manufacturer he intends to use if an alternate is rejected, he must use the suppliers listed as "a". Also, if the Bidder circles more than one listed supplier, he must use the first supplier circled (unless an alternate is approved). For any alternate supplier accepted by the Owner, the Contract Price will be reduced by the deductive amount stated in the Bid. However, because the Contract Price is based on listed suppliers / manufacturers it will not be adjusted for any alternate supplier rejected. The deductive amount specified for alternate suppliers / manufacturers will not be used in determining the successful Bidder. Alternates will be considered only after award of the contract. In addition to the reimbursement due to the deduct, the Contractor shall also reimburse the Owner for any other costs directly attributable to the change in suppliers, such as additional field trips for the Engineer, additional redesign costs, additional review and inspection costs, modifications to structures or piping systems or other parts of the work, etc. The Owner may request and the Bidder shall supply complete information on proposed alternates prior to the Notice of Award. Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11066) ADDENDUM NO. 4 Page 3 of 5 00 30 01 BID FORM Specification Number Equipment "Base Bid" Manufacturer or Supplier Alternate Manufacturer or Supplier Amount to Deduct From Base Bid and Alternates Bid Items to Use Alternate Equipment Listed DEDUCT 40 05 50 Butterfly Valves a. M&H b. Dezurik c. Val -Matic d. Henry Pratt Ce. GA Industrie 40 05 57 Electro -Hydraulic Valve Actuators X 40 05 65 Metal Seated Ball Valves a. Henry Pratt Company b. GA Industries 41 22 25 Bridge and Hoist System . Proseru Anchor Crane Group b. ACCO Industries Inc. c. Whiting Corp. 43 21 01 Horizontal Split -Case Centrifugal Pumps .ajlowse _ b. ITT -Goulds 43 2102 Rehabilitation of Horizontal Split Case Pumps Positive Displacement Blowers . Flowservt b. Smith Pump Company Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11065) Page 4 of 5 ADDENDUM NO.4 00 30 01 BID FORM ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS Bidder proposes the following alternate manufactuers / suppliers for the equipment or material categories so identified: Equipment Item or Material Drawing No. Spec. Section Alternative Manufacturer / Supplier (List One Only) Deductible Amount (Indicate whether lump sum or unit price) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Bid Form O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 (E11066) Page 5 of 5 ADDENDUM NO.4 Issued in Triplicate" AIA Document A310TM - 2010 Bid Bond CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) PLW Cadagua Partners 9303 New Trails Drive The Woodlands, Texas 77381 SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place of business) Liberty Mutual Insurance Company 175 Berkeley Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 BOND AMOUNT: Five Percent of Accompanying Bid (5% of Accompanying Bid) PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Project No. E11066 This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable, The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators. successors and assigns. jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond. between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perforin the work covered by said bid. then this obligation shall be null and void. otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. Signed and sealed this 16th day of XCLIC (Witness) Lori Brown May, 2016 PLW Ca agua Partners (Nit ').101) dot F% ( tla I Raj, President Hitless) riniy Garcia (Seal) Liberty Mutual Insurance Company (Sure {.5'ealj (7. de) Adrienne C. Stevenson, Attorney -In -Fact ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR PRINCIPAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR PRINCIPAL IF LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY STATE OF Texas COUNTY OF Harris } } ON THE 17th DAY OF May , 2016 BEFORE ME ,TOME KNOWN AND KNOWN TO ME TO BE THE Officer OF PEPPER-LAWSON WATERWORKS, LLC, A LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY, DESCRIBED IN AND WHO EXECUTED THE FOREGOING INSTRUMENT AND ACKNOWLEDGED TO ME THAT (S)HE EXECUTED THE FOREGOING INSTRUMENT AND ACKNOWLEDGED TO ME THAT (S)HE EXECUTED THE SAME AS AND FOR THE ACT AND DEED OF SAID LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY. PERSONALLY APPEARED Atul Raj LORI A BROWN MY COMMISSION EXPIRES July 19, 2019 a Lori A. Brown Notary Public STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF COOK 1, Katherine J. Foreit a Notary Public in and for said County; do hereby certify that Adrienne C. Stevenson as Attorney -in -Fact, who is personally known to me to be the same person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, appeared before me this day in person, and acknowledged that they signed, sealed, and delivered said instrument for and on behalf of LIBERTY MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY for the uses and purposed therein set forth. Given under my hand and notarial seal at my office in the City of Chicago in said County, 16 this 'h day of May .D. 2016 4V/tOtGO:j- Notary Public "OFFICIAL SEAL" Katherine Foreit Notary Public, a f Illinois My Commission Expires 10 2017 THIS GOWER OF ATTORNEY IS NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RED BACKGROUND. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Certificate No. 7336898 American Fire and Casualty Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company West American Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Fire & Casualty Company and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts, and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein collectively called the 'Companies", pursuant to and by authority herein set forth, does hereby name, constitute and appoint, Adrienne C. Stevenson; Amy B. Wickett; C. R. Hemandez; Gabriel Jacquez; John K. Johnson; Katherine J. Foreit; Rebecca Hobbs; Trinly Garcia all of the city of CHICAGO state of IL each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful attorney-in-fact to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver, for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed, any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations, in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed thereto this 20th day of April 2016 STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA ss COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY American Fire and Casualty Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company West merican Insurance Company By: 6 David M. Carey(Assistant Secretary On this 20th day of April 2016 before me personally appeared David M. Carey, who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of American Fire and Casualty Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed m name and affixed my notarial seal at Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania, on the day and year first above written. COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA Notarial Seal Teresa Pastella, Notary Public Plymouth Twp., Montgomery County My Commission Expires March 28, 2017 Member. Pennsylvania Association of Notaries By di -11446 Lid& Teresa Pastella, Notary Public This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to an ' by authority of the following By-laws and Authorizations of American Are and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows: ARTICLE N—OFFICERS — Section 12. Power of Attorney. Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the President may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any power or authority granted to any representative or attorney -In -fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the Chairman, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. ARTICLE XIII — Execution of Contracts — SECTION 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings. Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president, and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and ail undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. Certificate of Designation — The President of the Company, acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company, authorizes David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys -in - fad as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization — By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors, the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Gregory W. Davenport, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Power of Attomey.executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 16 day of May _ 20 16 . 1991 By: LMS 12873 122013 Gregory W. Davenport, Assistant Secretary 49 of 400 ipPepper Lawson WATERWORKS June 6, 2016 To Whom It May Concern: Please be advised that by means of this letter, we, the partners of PLW Cadagua Partners (the "Company"), delegate specific authority to Mr. Atul Raj on the following terms and conditions: I. Mr. Atul Raj may, on behalf of the Company, sign the bid and related proposal documents related to the following project: O.N Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3. 2. The effective date of this delegation is June 6, 2016, and continues until revoked in writing. 3. The authority delegated herein is not subject to sub -delegation without the prior, written consent of each partner. Cadagua US, LLC Pepper -Lawson Waterworks, LLC By: Juan,' oreno W. ta, Director Acknowledged and agreed: Bv: By: Atul : `, President 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code applies to the award of government contract to nonresident bidders. This law provides that: "a government entity may not award a governmental contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident underbids the lower bid submitted by a responsible resident bidder by an amount that is not less than the amount by which a resident bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident's principal place of business is located." "Nonresident bidder" refers to a person who is not a resident of Texas. "Resident bidder" refers to a person whose principal place of business is in this state, including a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has its principal place of business in this state. Check the statement that is correct for Bidder. © Bidder qualifies as a nonresident bidder whose principal place of business or residency is in the State of X Bidder (includes parent company or majority owner) qualifies as a resident bidder whose principal place of business is in the State of Texas. The Owner will use the information provided in the State of Texas Comptroller's annual publication of other states' laws on contracts to evaluate the Bids of nonresident Bidders. Bidder: Company Name: By: Name: Title: Business address: PLW Cadaqua, Partners (typed or printed) Atul Raj (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) President (typed or printed) 9303 New Trails Drive, Ste 200 The Woodlands, TX 77381 Phone: (713) 521-0174 Email: araj@pepperlawson.com waterworksbids@pepperlawson.com END OF SECTION Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003002-1 11-25-2013 00 30 05 City of Corpus Christi Disclosure of Interest SUPPLIER NUMBER N/A TO BE ASSIGNED BV CII Y PURCHASING DIVISION .rw City of hn Cn Not Applicable CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST City of Corpus Christi Ordinance 17112, as amended, requires all persons or firms seeking to do business with the City to provide the following information. Every question must be answered. If the question is not applicable, answer with "NA". See reverse side for Filing Requirements, Certifications and definitions. COMPANY NAME: PLW Cadagua Partners P. O. BOX: STREET ADDRESS: 9303 New Trails Drive, Ste 200 CITY: The Woodlands ZIP: 77381 - FIRM IS: 1. Corporation2. Partnership 3. Sole Owner 0 4. Association ❑ 5. Other (LLC) - Linged Liability Company DISCLOSURE QUESTIONS If additional space is necessary, please use the reverse side of thispage or attach separate sheet. 1. State the names of each "employee" of the City of Corpus hristi having an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." Name Job Title and City Department (if known) NA 2. State the names of each "official" of the City of Corpus Christi having an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." Name Title NA 3. State the names of each "board member" of the City of Corpus Christi having an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." NA ame Board, Commission or Committee 4. State the names of each employee or officer of a "consultant" for the City of Corpus Christi who worked on any matter related to the subject of this contract and has an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in e above named "firm." Name Consultant NA City of Corpus Christi Disclosure of Interest 003005-1 Rev 01-13-2016 FILING REQUIREMENTS If a person who requests official action on a matter knows that the requested action will confer an economic benefit on any City official or employee that is distinguishable from the effect that the action will have on members of the public in general or a substantial segment thereof, you shall disclose that fact in a signed writing to the City official, employee or body that has been requested to act in the matter, unless the interest of the City official or employee in the matter is apparent. The disclosure shall also be made in a signed writing filed with the City Secretary. [Ethics Ordinance Section 2-349 (d)] CERTIFICATION I certify that all information provided is true and correct as of the date of this statement, that I have not knowingly withheld disclosure of any information requested; and that supplemental statements will be promptly submitted to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas as changes occur. Certifying Person: Atul Raj (Typo or Prim) Signature of Certifying Person: DEFINITIONS Title: President Date: June 08, 2016 a. "Board member." A member of any board, commission, or committee appointed by the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi, Texas. b. "Economic benefit". An action that is likely to affect an economic interest if it is likely to have an effect on that interest that is distinguishable from its effect on members of the public in general or a substantial segment thereof. c. "Employee." Any person employed by the City of Corpus Christi, Texas either on a full or part- time basis, but not as an independent contractor. d. "Firm." Any entity operated for economic gain, whether professional, industrial or commercial, and whether established to produce or deal with a product or service, including but not limited to, entities operated in the form of sole proprietorship, as self-employed person, partnership, corporation, joint stock company, joint venture, receivership or trust, and entities which for purposes of taxation are treated as non-profit organizations. e. "Official." The Mayor, members of the City Council, City Manager, Deputy City Manager, Assistant City Managers, Department and Division Heads, and Municipal Court Judges of the City of Corpus Christi, Texas. f. "Ownership Interest." Legal or equitable interest, whether actually or constructively held, in a firm, including when such interest is held through an agent, trust, estate, or holding entity. "Constructively held" refers to holdings or control established through voting trusts, proxies, or special terms of venture or partnership agreements." g. "Consultant." Any person or firm, such as engineers and architects, hired by the City of Corpus Christi for the purpose of professional consultation and recommendation. City of Corpus Christi Disclosure of Interest 003005-2 Rev 01-13-2016 00 30 06 NON -COLLUSION CERTIFICATION STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF NUECES OWNER: City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 CONTRACT: Q.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Pro'. Number E11066 Bidder certifies that the it has not been a party to any collusion among Bidders in the restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to submit a Bid at a fixed price or to refrain from bidding; or with any official or employee of the Owner as to quantity, quality, or price in the prospective contract, or any other terms of said prospective contract; or in any discussion between Bidders and any official of the Owner concerning exchange of money or other thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a contract. Company Name: PLW Cadagua Partners By: Name: Atul Raj (typed or printed) (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) (typed or printed) Title: President Business address: 9303 New Trails Drive, Suite 200 The Woodlands, TX 77381 Phone: (713) 521-0174 araj@pepperlawson.com Email: waterworksbids©pepperlawson.com END OF SECTION Non -Collusion Certification O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 City Project No. E11066 003006-1 11-25-2013 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code, by a vendor who has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the vendor becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a -i), Local Government Code. A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a misdemeanor. OFFICE USE ONLY Date Received .1 Name of vendor who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. NOT APPLICABLE HHCheck this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.) NOT APPLICABLE Name of local government officer about whom the information is being disclosed. NOT APPLICABLE Name of Officer ,J Describe each employment or other business relationship with the local government officer, officer, as described by Section 176.003(a)(2)(A). Also describe any family relationship with Complete subparts A and B for each employment or business relationship described. Attach CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local government officer or a family member of the officer receiving or likely other than investment income, from the vendor? or a family member of the the local government officer. additional pages to this Form to receive taxable income, income, from or at the direction is not received from the Yes X No B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment of the local government officer or a family member of the officer AND the taxable income local governmental entity? Yes x No Describe each employment or business relationship that the vendor named in Section 1 maintains with a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership interest of one percent or more. NOT APPLICABLE of the officer one or more gifts Check this box if the vendor has given�the local government officer or a family member as described inecAPPLICAg(a)(2)(B), excluding described in Section 176.003(a-1). gifts oT Mf 1 Atul Raj, Manager June 08, 2016 Signature of e •or doing business with the governmental entity Date Form provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Revised 11/30/2015 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on August 16, 2016 (Owner) and PLW Cadagua Partners (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: is between the City of Corpus Christi ARTICLE 1— WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: City Project No. E11066 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 ARTICLE 2 — DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: LNV, Inc. 801 Navigation, Suite 300 Corpus Christi, TX 78408 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Phil Boehk, P.E. - Acting Construction Engineer City of Corpus Christi - Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road #5 Corpus Christi TX 78411 ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 1,065 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 1,095 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Agreement 00 52 23 - 1 Proj. No. E11066 ONSWTP High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 06-22-2016 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $ 1,000 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $ 1,000 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 — CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price + Add. Alts. #1, #2, #3, #4 ARTICLE 5 — PAYMENT PROCEDURES $21,650,000.00 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23 - 2 Proj. No. E11066 ONSWTP High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 06-22-2016 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to 95% percent of the total earned value to date for completed Work and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. The balance will be held as retainage. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set -offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, retainage may be required at a higher percentage rate if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 — INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. 6.02 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 — CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23 - 3 Proj. No. E11066 ONSWTP High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 06-22-2016 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site -related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23 - 4 Rev 06-22-2016 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 — ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 13.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index 3. Addenda 4. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form b. 5. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10 — CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES One original of the signed Agreement will be required. The sequence of signatures will be completed in the following order: A. CONTRACTOR — Agreement must be signed by a person authorized to bind the firm or company. If Contractor is a Corporation, agreements must be Attested; B. ASSISTANT CITY ATTORNEY for the City; C. DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES; D. CITY SECRETARY for the City. Agreement 00 52 23 - 5 Proj. No. E11066 ONSWTP High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 06-22-2016 ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI '{ 1 1i C Digitally signed by Rebecca Huerta _ DN: cn=Rebecca Huerta, o, ou, email=rebeccah@cctexas.com, c=US Date: 2016.09.06 14:06:26 -0500' Rebecca Huerta City Secretary APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: 2016.09.01 10:34:11 -05'00' Janet L. Kellogg Assistant City Attorney Digitally signed by Jeff Edmonds DN: cn=Jeff Edmonds, o, ou=Engineering, email=jeffreye@cctexas.com, c=US Date: 2016.09.06 13:07:29 -05'00' J.H. Edmonds, P.E. Director of Engineering Services M2016-094 AUTHORIZED BY COUNCIL 8/16/16 RH/ML ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer PLW Cadagua Partners Digitally signed by RH/ML Date: 2016.09.06 13:29:38 -05'00' By: Title: Atul Raj Digitally signed by Atul Raj Date: 2016.08.25 11:40:42 -05'00' President 9303 New Trails Drive, Suite 200 Address The Woodlands, Texas 77381 City State Zip (713) 521-0174 (713) 521-0174 Phone Fax araj@pepperlawson.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23 - 6 Proj. No. E11066 ONSWTP High Service Pump Building No. 3 Rev 06-22-2016 ACORO® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 8/29/2016 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER VTC Insurance Group Troy Office 1175 W. Long Lake Ste. 200 Troy MI 48098-4960 INSURED PLW Cadagua Partners 9303 New Trails Drive Suite 200 The Woodlands TX 77381 COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:16/17PLW CONTACT NAME: Jennie LaVine PHONE (248) 828-3377 FAX (248)826-3741 (AJC, No, Ext): (A/C, No): E-MAIL •lavine@vtcins . com ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC 8 INSURER A:AmeriSUre Partners Ins. Co. 11050 INsuRER B :Amerisure Mutual Insurance Co. 23396 INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : Cadagua Partners REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTIMTHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADOL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MMIDO/YYYY) IMM/DOIYYYY) X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE A CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR PREM SESO(Ea occu RENTED S 100,000 CPP21009070005 8/29/2016 4/1/2017 MEDEXP(Anyoneperson) S 5,000 PERSONAL BADV INJURY S 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER. / GENERAL AGGREGATE S 2,000,000 POLICY X JECT LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S / 2,000,000 OTHER: Employee Benefit Liability $ 1,000,000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1 , 000 , 000 (Ea accident) / B X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) S ALL OWNED SCHEDULED CA21009060002 8/29/2016 4/1/2017 BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S AUTOS AUTOS NON -OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE S X HIRED AUTOS X AUTOS / (Per accident) PIP -Basic S X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 B EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE / AGGREGATE $ / 10,000,000 DED X RETENTIONS 0 CU21009050002 8/29/2016 4/1/2017 S WORKERS COMPENSATIONX PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY STATUTE ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y / N E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N / A B (Mandatory In NH) WC21025040002 8/29/2016 4/2/2017 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes. descnbe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S 1,000,000 .a�,�r�- DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) / Ji�//O� Project: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3Jj� The following policy provisions and/or endorsements form part of the policies of insurance represented by this certificate of insurance. The terms contained in the policies and/or endorsements supersede the representations made herein See the attached CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Corpus 1201 Leopard St Daniel Deng, TX Christi 78401 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Alan Chandler/V44 _ � /� zo- .a�,�r�- ACORD 25 (2014/01) INS025 (201401) © 1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD COMMENTS/REMARKS General Liability: Blanket additional insured Ongoing Operations per form #CG 70 85 09 13 Blanket additional insured Completed Operations per form # CG 70 85 09 13 Blanket waiver of subrogation per form #CG 70 63 07 12 Blanket primary/non-contributory per form #CG 70 85 09 13 Automobile: Blanket additional insured per form #CA 71 18 11 09 Blanket waiver of subrogation per form #CA 71 18 11 09 Blanket primary/non-contributory per form #CA 71 65 10 07 Worker's Compensation: Blanket waiver of subrogation per form #WC 42 03 04 B Umbrella Liability: Blanket additional insured per form #CU 74 69 08 10 Blanket waiver of subrogation per form #CU 24 03 09 00 Blanket primary/non-contributory per form #CU 74 69 08 10 OFREMARK COPYRIGHT 2000, AMS SERVICES INC. ACORD® EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE(MM)DD/YYYY) 8/29/2016 THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. AGENCY PHONE (AIC, No, Ext): VTC Insurance Group Troy Office 1175 W. Long Lake Ste. Troy MI (A/C,No):(24 El) 828-3741 AD RIESS: CODE: AGENCY 00128969 CUSTOMER ID #: INSURED PLW Cadagua Partners 9303 New Trails Drive Suite 200 The Woodlands (248)828-3377 200 48098-4960 achandler@vtcins.com SUB CODE: TX 77381 COMPANY Zurich American Insurance Company 1400 American Lane Schaumburg IL 60196-1056 LOAN NUMBER J J POLICY NUMBER CRT0146405 EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE 8/29/2016 8/29/2019 CONTINUED UNTIL TERMINATED IF CHECKED THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: PROPERTY INFORMATION LOCATION/DESCRIPTION 13101 Leopard St., Corpus Christi, TX 78410 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ( flVFRAGF INFt7RMATInN COVERAGE !PERILS/FORMS Builders Risk - Physical Damage Coverage to INSURED PROJECT Delay in Completion (30 days (15 min/30 day max deductible) In Transit Temporary Storage Windstorm Flood Earthquake Water Damage Limit Fungus Limit (Refer to policy for terms, conditions, exclusions) 1 AMOUNT OF INSURANCE 21,650,000 1,082,500 1,000,000 1,000,000 21,650,000 21,650,000 21,650,000 21,650,000 100,000 DEDUCTIBLE 25,000 25,000 25,000 1,000,000 25,000 25,000 100,000 10,000 REMARKS (Including Special Conditions) Project: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant ,e1 //64 High Service Pump Building No.3 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ADDITIONAL INTEREST City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 MORTGAGEE LOSS PAYEE LOAN # X ADDITIONAL INSURED AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Alan Chandler/V44 ACORD 27 (2009!12) INS027 (200912).02 © 1993-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD General Purpose Endorsement Zurich American Insurance Company ZURICH Policy No Effective Date of Policy Effective Date of Endorsement Addit anal Premium Retum Premium Endorsement No. CRT 0146405-00 8129116 8129116 n?a nia 1 Named Insured / Mailing Address: PLW Cadagua Partners 9303 New Trails Drive Suite 200 The Woodlands, TX 77381 Producer: VTC Insurance Group Producer No. 11079000 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ZURICH MASTER BUILDERS RISK POLICY PROJECT CERTIFICATE: The following Additional Named Insured is afforded the 60 day notice of cancellation for Project: O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building NO. 3. City of Corpus Christi, 1201 Leopard St. Corpus, Christi, TX 78401 Signed by: Jim Pike 8/29/16 Authorized Representative Date Cert 401 (10-10) Page 1 of 1 /THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS CONTRACTOR'S BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insuranze provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Expiration Date 4/1/2017 Agency Number Date 8/29/2016 Named Insured PLW Cadagua Partners Agency VTC Insurance Group Policy Effective Date 8/29/2016 Account Number Issuing Company AMERISURE INSURANCE 1. a. SECTION 9 -WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to add as an insured any person or organization. Whom you are required to add as an additional Insured on this policy under a written contract or written agreement relating to your uusiness. b. The written contract or written agreement must (1) Require additional insured status for a time period during the term of this policy; and (2) Be executed prior to the 'bodily injury'. "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" leading to a claim under this policy c. `f. however: (11 "Your work' began under a letter of intent or work order, and (2) The letter of intent or work order led to a written contract or written agreement within 30 days of beginning such work; and {31 Your customer s customary contracts requ~e persons or organizations to be named as additional insureds; we WI provide additional insured status as specified in This endorsement. However, if you have entered into a construction contract subject to Subchapter C of Chapter 151 of Subtitle C of Title 2 of the Texas Insurance Code with the additional insured, the insurance afforded to such persons) or organizations) only applies to the extent permitted by Subchapter C of Chapter 151 of Subtitle C of Title 2 of the Texas Insurance Code 2. SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to add the following: If the additional insured is: a. An ndividual. their spouse is also an additional insured. b. A partnership or joint venture. members partners, and their spouses are also addibonal insureds, c. A limited iiabFlitycompany, members and managers are also additional insureds_ d. An organizations other than a (1) Partnership. (2) Joint venture; or Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. CG TO 85 0913 Page 1 of 3 Policy Number: CPP21009070005 Policy Terris 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 (3) Limited liability company: executive officers and directors of the organization are also addition' insureds Stockholders are also additional insureds, but only with respect to their liabilty as stockholders. e. A trust. trustees are atso insureds but only with respect to their duties as trustees 3. The insurance provided under this endorsement is limited as follows a. That person or organization is an additional insured only with respect to liability arising out of: (1) Premises you (a) Own. (b) Rent. (c) Lease; or (d) Occupy; or (2) Ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf. If however, the written contract or written agreement also requires completed operations coverage we MI also provide completed operations coverage for that additional insured. b Premises. as respects paragraph 3.a.(1 i above. include common or public areas about such premises if so required in the writleri contract or written agreement. c Additional insured status provided under paragraphs 3.a.(1)(b) or 3.a ;1)(ct above does not extend beyond the end of a premises lease or rental agreement. d Ongoing operations. as respects paragraph 3 a (2) above, does not apply to "bodily injury" or 'property damage" occurring after (1) All work to be performed by you or on your behalf for the additional insured(s) at the site of the covered operations s complete rri J uding related materials. parts or equipment (other than service. maintenance or repairs). or (2) That porton of your work' out of which the injury or damage arises is put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor working for a pnncipal as a part of the same project. e, The limits of insurance that apply to the additional insured are the least of Mose specified in the: (1) Wntten contract: (2) Written agreement: or (3) Declarations or this potty The limits of insurance are inclusive of and not in addition to tne limits of Insurance shown ir. the Declarations f. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury", "property damage". cr "personal and advertising injury" arising out of an architect s. engineer's, or surveyor s rendering of, or failure to render any professional services, including but not limited to (1) The preparing approving or failing to prepare or approve - (a) Maps: (b) Drawings, (c) Opinions, (d) Reports, (e) Surveys; includes copynghted material of Insurance Sery ces Office. Inc. CG 70 85 09 13 Page2of3 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 9. (f) Change orders, (g) Design specifications, and (2) Supervisory. inspection. or eng; veering services SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS paragraph 4. Other Insurance is deleted and replaced with the following. 4. Other Insurance. Coverage provided by this endorsement is excess over any other va-id and collectible Insurance available to the add4Lunal insured whether, a. Primary b. Excess c. Contingent: or d. On any other basis unless the written contract or written agreement requires this insurance be primary to that case, th!s insurance will be primary without contribution from such other ins -trance available to the additional insured h. If the written contractor written agreement as outlined above requires addltionas insured status by use of CG 20 10 11 85 then the terms of that endorsement shown below are . ncorporated into this endorsement, to the extent such terms do not restrict coverage otherwise provided by this endorsement ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS (FORM B) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART. SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organisation: Blanket Where Required by Written Contractor Agreement that the terms of CG 2010 11 85 apply (If no entry appears above information required to complete this endorsement will be shown In the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement ) WHO IS AN INSURED (Section 11) as amended to include as an insured the person or organization shown in the Scnedute, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your worts" for that insured by or for you Copyright. Insurance Services Office ins . 1984 CG20101185 L If the written contract or written agreement as outlined above requires additional insured status by use of an Insurance Services Office (ISO) endorsementthen the coverage provided under this CG 70 85 endorsement does not apply. Additional insured status is limited to that provided by the ISO endorsement. includes copynphted material of Insurance Services Office CG 70 85 0913 Page 3 of 3 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Terre 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 h. Any state or political subdivision but only as respects legal liability incurred by the state or political subdivision sole y because it has issued a permit with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf. However, no state or political subdivision is an insurec with respect to: (1) 'Bodily injury", "property damage", "personal and advertising injury" arising out of operations performed for the state or municipality; or (2) "Bodily injury" or 'property damage" included within the "products -completed operations hazard " Any person or organ'zation who is the .essor of equipment leased to you, to whom you are obligated by virtue of a written contact to provide insurance such as is afforded by this policy, but only with respect to their liability arising out of the maintenance, operation ar use of such equipment by you or a subcontractor on your behalf with your permission and under your supervision. However, if you have entered into a construction contract subject to Subchapter C of Chapter 151 of Subtitle C of Title 2 of the Texas Insurance Code with the additional insured. the insurance afforded to such person(s) or organization(s) only applies to the extent permitted by Subchapter C of Chapter 151 of Subtitle C of Title 2 of the Texas Insurance Code. No such person ar organ zation, however, is an insured with respect to arty "occurrence' that takes place after the equipment lease expires. Any architect, engineer, or surveyor engaged by you but only with respect to liability arising out of your premises or your work.' However, if you have entered into a construction contract subject to Subchapter C of Chapter 151 of Subtitle C of Title 2 o` the Texas Insurance Code with the additional insured, the insurance afforded to such person only applies to the extent permitted by Subchapter C of the Chapter 151 of Subtitle C of Title 2 of the Texas Insurance Code. No architect, engineer, or surveyor, however. Is an insured with respect to "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of or the failure to render any professional services by or for you, including (1) The preparing, approving. or ,ailing to prepare or approve maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys. change orders, designs or specifications; or (2) Supervisory, inspection, or engineering services This paragraph j. does not apply if form CG 70 85, Texas Contractors Blanket Additional Insured Endorsement, Is attached to the policy. k. Any manager. owner, lessor, mortgagee. assignee or receiver pf premises. including land leased to you, but only with respect to liability arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that part of the promises or land loasod to you. However, no such person or organization is an insured with respect to: (1) Any "occurrence" that taxes place after you cease to occupy that premises, or cease to lease the land; or (2) Structural alteration. new construction or demo] tion operations performed by or on behalf of that person or organization. 3. Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than a partnership. joint venture or limited liability company and over which you maintain ownership or majority interest, will qua[ify as a Named Insured if there is no other similar insurance available to that organization. However: a. Coverage under this provision is afforded only until the end of the policy period; b. Coverage A does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization; c. Coverage B does not apply to "personal and advertising injury" arising out of an offense committed before you acquired or formed the organization. d. Coverage A does not apply to "product recall expense" arising out of any withdrawal or recall that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization. J• Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, inc. CG 70 63 07 12 Page 5 of 9 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 4. Any person or organization (referred to below as vendor) with whom you agreed, because of a written contract or agreement to provide insurance is an insured. but only with respect to "bodily injury' or "properly damage" ansing out of 'your products" that are distriauted or sold h the regular course of the vendor's business However, no such person or organization is an insured with respect to. a. 'Bod.ly injury" or 'property damage" for which the vendor is obligated 10 pay damages by reason of the assumption or Lability in a contractor agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vender would have in the absence of the contract or agreement. b. Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Any physical or chemical change in your product' made intentionally by the vendor d. Repackaging, except when unpacked solely for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, testing, or the substitution of parts under instructions from the manufacturer, and then repackaged in the original container. e. Any failure to make such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of "your products' 1. Demonstration installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in connection with the sate of the `your product"; g. "Your products' which. after distribution or sale by you. have been labeled or relabeled or used as a container, part or ingredient of any other thing or substance by or far the vendor h. "Bodily injury' or "property damage' arising out of the sole negligence of the vendor for its own acts or omissions or those of its empoyees or anyone else acting on its behalf, However, this exclusion does not apply to: (1 ) The exceptions contained in subparagraphs d. or If; or (2) Such Inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business. in connection with the distribution or sale of the products. This insurance does not apply to any insured person or organization from which you have acquired your products", or any ingredient, part, or container, entering into, accompanying or containing "your products" No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or pest partnership joint venture or 'imited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, 11. INCIDENTAL MALPRACTICE LIABILITY As respects provision 10., SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED, paragraph 2.a.(1Xd) does not apply to any nurse, emergency medical technician or paramedic employed by you to provide medical or paramedical services, provided that you are not engaged in the business or occupation of providing such services. and your "employee' does not have any other insurance that would also cover claims arising under this provision, whether the other insurance is primary, excess. contingent or on any other basis. Under SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE, provisions 12_ through 14. of this endorsement amend the policy as follows: 12. AGGREGATE LIMITS PER PROJECT The General Aggregate Limit applies separately la each of your construction projects away from premises owned by or minted to yoii. 13. INCREASED MEDICAL PAYMENTS LIMITS AND REPORTING PERIOD A. The requirement under SECTION I— COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS that expenses be incurred and reported to us within one year of the date of the accident is changed to three years B SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE, paragraph T., the Medical Expense Limit, Is subject to ail the terms of SECTION 111— LIMITS OF INSURANCE and is the greater of Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc Page6of9 CG70630712 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term 6/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM Under SECTION 1- COVERAGE A. BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY, paragraph 2. EXCLUSIONS, provisions 1. through 6. of this endorsement amend the poky as follows 1. LIQUOR LIABILITY Exclusion c, Liquor Liability is deleted. 2. NONOWNED WATERCRAFT Exclusion g. Aircraft, Auto or Watercraft, subparagraph (2) is deleted and replaced wth the following (2) A watercraft you do not own that is: (a) Less than 51 feet long. and (b) Not being used to carry persons or property for a charge 3. PREMISES ALIENATED A. Exclusion j. Damage to Property. subparagraph (2) is deleted, B. The following paragraph ;s deleted from Exclusion j. Damage to Property, Paragraph (2) of this exclusion does not appty if the premises are your work" and were never occupied. rented or held for rental by you 4. PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY - ELEVATORS AND SIDETRACK AGREEMENTS A. Exclusion j. Damage to Property. paragraphs (3), (4), and (6) do not apply to the use of elevators, B. Exclusion k. Damage to Your Product does not app!y to. 1. The use of elevators; or 2. Liabiliy assumed under a sidetrack agreement. 5. PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY - BORROWED EQUIPMENT A. Exclusion j. Damage to Property, paragraph (4) does not apply to "property damage" to borrowed equipment while at a jobsite and not be;ng used to perform operations. B. With respect to any one borrowed equipment item, provision S.A. above does not apply to "property damage" that exceeds $25,000 per occurrence or $25,000 annual aggregate 6. PRODUCT RECALL EXPENSE A. Exclusion n. Recall of Products. Work or impaired Property does not apply to 'product recall expenses' That you incur for the "covered recall" of "your product'. This exception to the exclusion does not apply to 'product recall expenses" resulting from. 1. Failure of any products to accomplish their ntended purpose: 2. Breach of warranties of fitness, quality durability or performance, 3. Loss of customer approval or any cost incurred to regain customer approval: 4. Redistribution or replacement of 'your product which has been recalled, by like products or subs itutes; 5. Caprice or whim of the insured. Includes copyrightod material of Insurance Services Office, Inc CG 70 63 07 12 Page 1 of 9 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term: 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 6. A condition likely to cause loss, about which any insured knew or had reason to know at the inception 4f this insurance. 7. Asbestos. including loss, damage or clean up resulting from asbestos or asbestos containing materials; S. Recall of "your product(s)" that have no known or suspected defect solely because a known or suspected defect in another of "your product(s)" has been found. B. Under SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE, paragraph 3. is replaced in its entirety as follows and paragraphs 8. is added. 3, The Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit is the mast we will pay for the Sum of: a. Damages under COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABIUTY because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" included in the "products -completed operations hazard" and b. 'Product recall expenses. 8. Subject to paragraph 5. above, $25,000 is the most we will pay for all "product recall expenses" arising out of the same defect or deficiency. The insurance afforded by reason of provisions 1. through 6. of this endorsement is excess over any valid and colJecble insurance (including any deductible) available to the insured whether primary. excess or contingent, and SECTION P1., paragraph 4. Other Insurance Is changed according y. 7. BLANKET CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY - RAILROADS When a written contract or written agreement requires Contractual Liability - Railroads, the definition of "insured contract* in Section V - Definitions is replaced by the following with respect to operations performed for. or affecting. a railroad: 9. "Insured Contract" means a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner is not an "insured contract", b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, lo indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to your business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which you assume the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to a third parson or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph 1. does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnities an architect, engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions. reports, surveys, feed orders, change orders or crawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them; (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to rendor professional services, including those listed in Paragraph (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering ocbvtties. 6. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY - PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY Includes copyrighted materiae of Insurance Services Office, Inc Page 2 of 9 CG 70 63 0712 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term: 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 Under SECTION 1 - COVERAGE B., paragraph 2. Exclusions, paragraph e. Contractual Liability is deleted. 9. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS Under SECTION 1- SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - COVERAGES A AND B, paragraph 1.b. is deleted and replaced with the following. 1. b. Up to $2,500 for cost of bail bonds required because of accidents or traffic law violations ansing out of the use of any vehicle to which the Bodily Injury Liability Coverage applies We do not have to furnish these bonds 10. BROADENED WHO 1S AN INSURED SECTION II - WHO 1S AN INSURED is deleted and replaced with the fvl.owing. 1. 11 you are designated in the Declarations as. a. An individual, you and your spouse are insureds, but only with respect 10 the conduct of a business of which you are the sole owner. b. A partnership or joint venture, you are an insured. Your members, your partners, and their spouses are also Insureds, but only with respect to the conduct of your business. c. A limited liability company. you are an insured. Your members are also insureds, but only with respect to the conduct of your business. Your managers are insureds. but only with respect to their duties as your managers. d. An organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, you are an insured. Your 'executive officers` and directors are insureds, but only with respect to their duties as your officers or directors.. Your stockholders are also insureds, but only with respect to their liability as stockholders. Paragraphs (1)(a), (1)(b) and (1)(c) above do not apply to your "employees' who are (I) Managers (01) Supervisors; (iii) Directors; or (iv) Officers, with respect to "bodily injury" ;o a co -employee". 2. Each of the following is also an insurer a. Your volunteer workers" only while performing duties related to the conduct of your business, or your "employees." other than either your "executive officers," (if you are an organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company) or your managers (if you are a limited liability company), but only for acts within the scope of their employment by you or while performing duties related to the conduct of your business However none of these "employees" or 'volunteer workers' are insured for (1) "Bodily Injury" or `personal and advertising injury". (a) To you, to your owners or members (f you are a partnership or joint venture), to your members (if you are a limited liab lity company), to a co -"employee" while in the course of his or her employment or performing duties related to the conduct of your business, or to your other 'volunteer workers" while performing duties related to the conduct of your business; (b) To the spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that co -"employee" or volunteer worker as a consequence of paragraph (1)(a) above; (c) For which there is any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury described in paragraphs (t)(a) or (b) above. or (d) Ansing out of his or her providing or failing to provide professional health care services except as provided in Provision 11. of this endorsement. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc CG70630712 Page3of9 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 (2) 'Property damage" to property: (a) Owned, occupied or used by, (b) Rented to, in the care, custody or control of, or over which physical control is being exercised for any purpose by you. any of your "employees," "volunteer workers", any partner or member (if you are a partnership or joint venture), or any member (if you are a limited liability company). b. Any person (other than your "emp;oyee" or "volunteer worker') or any organization while acting as your real estate manager. c. My person or organization having proper temporary custody of your property if you die, but only; (1) With respect to liability arising out of the maintenance or use of that property; and (2) Until your legal representative has been appointed. d. Your legal representative if you die, but only with respect to duties as such. fiat representative will have all your rights and duties under this Coverage Form. e. Your subsidiaries if: (1) They are legally incorporated entibes; and (2) You own more than 50% of the voting stock in such subsidiaries as of the effective date of this policy. if such subsidiaries are not shown in the Declarations, you must report them to us within 180 days of the inception of your originat policy. f. (1) Any person or organization, other than an architect, engineer or surveyor, required to be named as an additional Insured in a 'work contract". letter of intent or work order. However, such person or organization shall be an additional insured only with respect to covered "bodily injury," "property damage," and "personal and advertising injury" arising out of your work" under that 'Work contract", letter of intent or work order. (2) We will provide additional insured coverage to such person or organization only: (a) for a period of 30 days after the effective dale of the applicable "work contract". tetter of intent or work order; or (b) until the end of the policy term in effect at the inception of the applicable "work contract"_ letter of intent or work order whichever is earlier (3) Coverage provided under this paragraph f. is excess over any other valid and collectible insurance available to the additional insured whether primary, excess, contingent, or on any other basis unless the "work contract", letter of intent or work order requires this insurance be primary, in which case this insurance will be primary without contribution from such other insurance available to the adcitional insured. (4) This paragraph f. does not apply if form CG 70 85, Texas Contractors Blanket Additional Insured Endorsement, is attached to Me policy. g. Any person or organization to whom you are obligated by virtue of a written contract to provide insurance such as is afforded by this policy, but only with respect to liability arising out of the maintenance or use of that part of any premises leased to you, ncluding common or public areas about such premises rf so required in the contract. However, no such person or organization is an insured with respect to: (1) Any "occurrence" that takes place after you cease to occupy those premises; or (2) Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of such person or organization. includes copyrighted matenal of insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 4 of 9 CG 70 63 07 12 Policy Number CPP21009070005 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 1. $10 000, or 2. The amount shown in ttie Declarations for Medical Expense Limit. C. This provision 13. does not apply if COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS is excluded either by the provisions of the Coverage Form or by endorsement, 14, DAMAGE TO PREMISES RENTED TO YOU — SPECIFIC PERILS A. The word fire is changed to ''specific perils" where it appears in: 1. The last paragraph of SECTION I — COVERAGE A, paragraph 2. Exclusions 2. SECTION IV. paragraph 4.b. Excess Insurance. B. The Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations will apply to all damage proximately caused by the same event, whether such damage results from a "specific peril" or any combination of "specific perils." C. The Damage To Premises Rented To You L mit descnbed In SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE paragraph 6.. is replaced by a new limit which is the greater of. 1. $1.000,000, or 2. The amount shown in the Declaratons for Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit. D. This provision 14. does not apply if the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit of SECTION I - COVERAGE A is excluded either by the provisions of the Coverage Form or by endorsement. Under SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, provisions 15. through 17_ of this endorsement amend the policy as follows: 15. KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE Under 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim, Or Suit paragraph a. is deleted and replaced and paragraphs e. and f. are added as follows. a. You must see to it that we are notified as soon as practicable of an ''occurrence" or an offense, regardless cf the amount, which may result in a claim. Knowledge of an "occurrence' or an offense by your "employee(s)' shall not, in itself, constitute knowledge to you unless one of your partners, members, "executive officers," directors, or managers has knowledge of the "occurrence" or offense To the extent possible, notice should include: (1) How_ when and where the "occurrence' or offense took place; (2) The names and addresses of any inured persons and witnesses: and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. e. If you report an "occurrence" to your workers compensation carrier that develops into a liability claim for which coverage is provided by the Coverage Form, failure to report such an occurrence" to us at the time of the 'occurrence shall not be deemed a violation of paragraphs a , b., and c above However, you shall give written notice of this "occurrence" to us as soon you become aware that this "occurrence- may be a liability claim rather than a waiters compensation claim. f. You must see to it that the following are done in the event of an actual or anticipated "covered recall" that may result in "product recall expense": (1) Give us prompt notice of any discovery or notification that "your product must be withdrawn or recalled, Include a description of 'your product" and the reason for the withdrawal or recall; (2) Cease any further release, shipment, consignment or any other method of distribution of like or similar products until it has been determined that all such prod.,cis are free from defects that could be a cause o' loss under the insurance. 16. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS Paragraph 6. Representations is deleted and replaced with the following' 6. Representations By accepting this policy, you agree: Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office. inc. CG 70 63 0712 Page 7 of 9 Policy Number. CPP21009070005 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 a. The statements in the Declarations are accurate and complete b. Those statements are based upon representations you made to us, and c. We have issued this policy in reliance upon your representations. We will not deny coverage under this coverage part If you unintentionally fait to disclose all hazards existing as of the inception date of this policy. You must report to us any knowledge of an error or omission in the description of any premises or operations intended to be covered by the Coverage Form as soon as pracbcable after ils discovery. However, this provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or nonrenewal 17. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS (BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) Paragraph 8. Transfer of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us is deleted and replaced with the following: 8. If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us, The insured must do nothing after loss to impair them. At our request, the insured will bnng 'suit" or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. However, if the insured has waived rights to recover through a written contract, or if "your work" was commenced under a letter of Intent or work order, subject to a subsequent reduction to writing with customers whose customary contracts require a waiver, we waive any right of recovery we may have under this Coverage Form 18. EXTENDED NOTICE OF CANCELLATION AND NONRENEWAL Paragraph 2b. of A. Cancellation of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS is deleted and replaced with the following: b. 60 days before the effective dale of the cancellation if we cancel for any other reason Under SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS. Paragraph 9. When We Do Not Renew Is deleted and replaced with the fol::owing: 9. When We Do Not Renew a. We may elect not to renew this policy except, that under the provis ons of the Texas Insurance Code, we may not refuse to renew this policy solely because the policyholder is an elected official b. If we elect not 10 renew this policy, we may do so by marling or delivenng to the first Named Insured, at the last mailing address known to us, written notice of nonrenewalstating the reason for nonrenewal, at least 60 days before the expiration date. If notice is mated or delivered less than 60 days before the expiration date, this policy will remain in effect until the 61st day after the date on which the notice is mailed or delivered. Earned premium for any period or coverage that extends beyond the expiration date will be computed pro rata based on the previous year's premium. c. If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient proof of notice d. The transfer of a policyholder between admitted companies within the same insurance group is not considered a refusal to renew. 19. MOBILE EQUIPMENT REDEFINED Under SECTION V V. DEFINITIONS, paragraph 12. ''Mobile equipment", paragraph f. (1) does not apply to self- propelled vehicles of less than 1,000 pounds gross vehicle weight that are not des.gned for highway use. 20. DEFINITIONS 1. SECTION V — DEFINITIONS, paragraph 4. "Coverage territory" is replaced by the fol,owing definition° "Coverage territory" means anywhere in the world with respect to liability arising out of "bodily injury " 'property damage," or "personal and advertising injury," including "personal and advertising injury" offenses that take place through the Internet or similar electronic means of communication provided the insureds responsibility to pay damages is determined in a settlement to which we agree or In a "suit" on the merits, .n the United States of America (including its territories and possessions), Puerto Rico and Canada. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 6 of 9 CG 70 63 07 12 Policy Number CPP 21009070005 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 411/2017 2. SECTION V -- DEFINITIONS is amended by the addition of the following deflations. "Covered recall" means a recall made necessary because you or a government body has determined that a known or suspected defect, deficiency, inadequacy, or dangerous condition in -your product' has resulted or will result in "bodily injury" or "property damage" `Product Recall expenses" mean only reasonable and necessary extra costs, which result from or are related to the recall or withdrawal of "your product" for a. Telephone and telegraphic communication, radio or television announcements, computer time end newspaper advertising. b. Stationery. envelopes, production of announcements and postage or facsimiles; c. Remuneration paid to regular employees for necessary overtime or authorized travel expense. d. Temporary hiring by you or by agents designated by you of persons, other than your regular employees, to perform necessary tasks e. Rental of necessary additional warehouse or storage space; f. Packaging of or transportation or shipping of defective products to the location you designate; and g. Disposal of "your products" that cannot be reused_ Disposal expenses do not include (1) Expenses that exceed the original cost of the materials incurred to manufacture or process such product and (2) Expenses that exceed the cost of normal trash dscarding or disposal except as are necessary to avoid "bodily injury" or "property damage" "Specific Perils" means fire; lightning. explosion; windstorm or hail: smoke: aircraft or vehicles; not or civil commotion; vandalism; leakage from fire extinguishing equipment; weight of snow, ice or sleet; or "water damage." 'Water damage" means accidental discharge or leakage of water or steam as the direct result of the breaking or cracking of any part of a system or appliance containing water or steam; "Wort( contract' means a written agreement between you and one or more parties for work to be performed by you or on your behalf Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office. mc. CG 70 63 0712 Page 9 of 9 Policy Number, CPP21009070005 Policy Term: 8/2912016 to 4/1/2017 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POUCY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EARLIER NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US Number of Days Notice 60 For any statutorily permitted reason other Man nonpayment of premium, the number of days required for notice of cancellation is increased to the number of days shown In the Schedule above. H this policy is cancelled by us we will send the Named Insured and any party listed in the folowing schedule notice of cancellation based on the number of days notice shown above SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organization The Name of Person or Organization is any person or organuatron holding a certificate of insurance issued for you, provided Inc :.eru1icate 1. Refers to this policy, 2. States that notice of. a Cancellation b Nonrenewal: or c Material change reducing or restricting coverage, wil be provided to that person or organization 3. Is in effect at the time of the a, Cancellation b lyonreneviral or c. Material change redudng or restricting coverage and 4 Is on file at your agent or brokers office for ups policy Mailing Address The Mailing Address as the address shown for that person or o: ganizatron In that certificate of insurance IL 70 45 05 07 Policy Number CA21009060002 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS ADVANTAGE COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE BROAD FORM ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. The premium for this endorsement is $ 1. BROAD FORM INSURED SECTION It - LIABILITY COVERAGE. A.1. Who Is An Insured is amended by the addition of the following: d. Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than a partnership. joint venture or limited liability company. and over which you maintain ownership or a majority interest, will qualify as a Named Insured. However, (1) Coverage under this provision is afforded only until the end of the policy period; (2) Coverage does not apply to "accidents" or "loss" that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization; and (3) Coverage does not apply to an organization that is an "insured" under any other policy or would be an "insured" but for its termination or the exhausting of its lima of insurance. e. Any "employee" of yours using: (1) A covered "auto" you do not own. hire or borrow. or a covered "auto" not owned by the "employee" or a member of his or her household. while performing duties related to the conduct of your business or your personal affairs; or (2) An "auto" hired or rented under a contract or agreement in that "employee's' name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. However. your "employee" does not qualify as an insured under this paragraph (2) while using a covered "auto" rented from you or from any member of the -employee's" household. f. Your members. if you are a limited liability company, while using a covered auto" you do not own, hire or borrow and while performing duties related to the conduct of your business or your personal affairs_ Any person or organization with whom you agree in a written contract. written agreement or permit. to provide insurance such as is afforded under this policy, but only with respect to your covered "autos". This provision does not apply: (1) Unless the written contract or agreement is executed or the permit is issued pr or to the "bodily injury" or "properly damage"; (2) To any person or organization included as an insured by an endorsement or in the Declarations; or (3) To any lessor of "autos' unless' (a) The lease agreement requires you to provide direct pnmary insurance for the lessor; (6) The "auto" is teased without a driver; and Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office. inc, CA 71 1811 09 Page 1 of Policy Number: CA21009060002 Policy Term: Q/29/2016 to 4/112017 (c) The lease had not expired. Leased "autos" covered under this provision will be considered covered "autos" you own and not covered "autos" you hire. h. Any legally incorporated organization or subsidiary in which you own more than 50% of the voting stock on the effective date of this endorsement. This provision does not apply to "bodily injury" or -property damage" for which an "insured" is also an insured under any other automobile policy or would be an insured under such a policy. but for its termination or the exhaustion of its limits of insurance. unless such policy was written to apply specifically in excess of this policy. 2. COVERAGE EXTENSIONS - SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS Under Section 11- LIABILITY COVERAGE. A.2.a. Supplementary Payments. paragraphs (2) and (4) are deleted and replaced as follows; (2) Up to $2,500 for the cost of bail bonds (including bonds for related traffic law violations) required because of an "accident" we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured" at our request. Including actual loss of earnings up to $500 a day because of time off from work. 3. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION Under SECTION 11- LIABILITY COVERAGE, B. EXCLUSIONS. paragraph 5. Fellow Employee is deleted and replaced by the following: 5. Fellow Employee "Bodily injury" to: a. Any fellow "employee" of the Insured" arising out of and in the course of the fellow "employee's" employment or while performing duties related to the conduct of your business However, this exclusion does not apply to your "employees" that are officers. managers. supervisors or above Coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. b. The spouse. child, parent. brother or sister of that fellow "employee" as a consequence of paragraph a. above. 4. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE AND LASS OF USE EXPENSE A. Under SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE. the following is added; If any of your owned covered "autos" are covered for Physical Damage. we win provide Physical Damage coverage to autos" that you or your "employees" hire or borrow. under your name or the "employee's" name, for the purpose of doing your work. We will provide coverage equal to the broadest physical damage coverage applicable to any covered "auto" shown in the Declarations, Item Three. Schedule of Covered Autos You Own, or on any endorsements amending this schedule. B. Under SECTION Ill - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A.4. Coverage Extensions. paragraph b. Loss Of Use Expenses is deleted and replaced with the following' b. Loss Of Use Expenses For Hired Auto Physical Damage, we will pay expenses for which an "insured" becomes legally responsible to pay for loss of use of a vehicle rented or hired without a driver, under a written rental contract or agreement. We will pay for loss of use expenses if caused by: (1) Other than collision. only if the Declarations indicate that Comprehensive Coverage Js provided for any covered "auto"; includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office. Inc. Page2of5 GA711$1109 Policy Number CA21009060002 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 41112017 (2) Specified Causes of Loss. only if the Declarations indicate that Specified Causes Of Loss Coverage is provided for any covered "auto'': or (3) Collision. only if the Declarations indicate that Collision Coverage is provided for any covered "auto"_ However, the most we will pay for any expenses for loss of use is $30 per day. to a maximum of $2.000 C. Under SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS. B. General Conditions. 5. Other Insurance, paragraph b. is replaced by the following: b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage, the following are deemed to be covered "autos" you own: 1. Any covered "auto' you lease, hire, rentor borrow: and 2. Any covered "auto"' hired or rented by your "employees" under a contract in that individual "employee's" name, with your permission. while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. However, any "auto" that is leased, hired, rented or borrowed with a driver is not a covered "auto", nor is any "auto" you hire from any of your "employees". partners (if you are a partnership), members (.f you are a limited liability company), or members of their households. 5. LOAN OR LEASE GAP COVERAGE Under SECTION III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE. the following is added: If a covered "auto" is owned or leased and if we provide Physical Damage Coverage on it, we will pay. in the event of a covered total "loss". any unpaid amount due on the lease or roan for a covered "auto", less: (a) The amount paid under the Physical Damage Section of the policy; and: (b) Any (1) Overdue lease or loan payments including penalties, interest or other charges resulting from overdue payments at the time of the "loss'; (2) f=inancial penalties imposed under a lease for excessive use, abnormal wear and tear or high mileage: (3) Costs for extended warranties. Credit Life Insurance, Health, Accident or Disability insurance purchased with the loan or lease: (4) Security deposits not refunded by a lessor; and (5) Carry-over balances from previous loans or leases. 6. RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT Under SECTION 11I - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE. A.4. Coverage Extensions, paragraph a. Transportation Expenses is deleted and replaced by the following: a. Transportation Expenses (1) We will pay up to $75 per day to a maximum of $2.000 for transportation expense incurred by you because of covered "loss". We will pay only for those covered "autos" for which you carry Collision Coverage or either Comprehensive Coverage or Specified Causes of Loss Coverage. We will pay for transportation expenses incurred during the period beginning 24 hours after the covered loss" and ending. regardless of the policy's expiration, when the covered "auto" s returned to use or we pay for its "loss". This coverage is in addition to the otherwise applicable coverage you have on a covered "auto". No deductibles apply to this coverage. Includes copynghted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. CA71181109 Page3of5 Policy Number. CA21009060002 Policy Term: 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 (2) This coverage does not apply while there is a spare or reserve -auto" available to you for your operation. 7. AIRBAG COVERAGE Under SECTION 01 - PHYSICAL DAMAGE, B. EXCLUSIONS. paragraph 3. is deleted and replaced by the following; 3. We will not pay for "loss" caused by or resulting from any of the following unless caused by other "loss" that is covered by this insurance: (1) Wear and tear. freezing, mechanical or electrical breakdown. However. this exclusion does not include the discharge of an airbag. (2) Blowouts. punctures or other road damage to tires. 8. GLASS REPAIR — WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE Section IJI — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE. D. Deductible rvs amended to add the following. No deductible applies to glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than replaced. 9. COLLISION COVERAGE — WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE Under Section III - PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, D. Deductible is amended to add the fo lowing When there is a loss to your covered "auto" insured for Collision Coverage, no deductible will apply if the loss was caused by a collision with another "auto" insured by us. 10. KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT Under SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, A. Loss Conditions, 2. Duties In The Event Of Accident, Claim. Suit Or Loss. paragraph a. is deleted and replaced by the following° a. You must see to it that we are notified as soon as practicable of an "accident", claim, "suit" or "loss Knowledge of an "accident", claim. "surf" or "loss" by your "employees" shall not. in itself, constitute knowledge to you unless one of your partners, executive officers, directors. managers. or members (if you are a limited I iab.lity company has knowledge of the "accident". claim, "suit' or "loss". Notice should include: (1) How, when and where the "accident" or "loss" occurred; (2) The "insured's" name and address; and (3) To the extent possible, the names and addresses of any injured per ons and witnesses. 11. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS (BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) Under SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS. A. Loss Conditions paragraph 5. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us is deleted and replaced by the folFowing: 5. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us If any person or organrzatron to or for whom we make payment under this Coverage Form has nghts to recover damages from another, those rights are transferred to us, That person or organization must do everything necessary to secure our rights and must do nothing after "accident" or "loss" to impair them. However, if the insured" has waived rights to recover through a written contract, or if your work was commenced under a Letter of intent or work order. subject to a subsequent reduction in writing with customers whose customary contracts require a waver. we waive any right of recovery we may have under this Coverage Form. includes copyrighted matenal of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 4 of 5 CA 71 1811 09 Policy Number CA21009060002 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 12. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS Under SECTION IV - BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS . B. General Conditions , paragraph 2. Concealment, Misrepresentation Or Fraud is amended by the addition of the following. We will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form if you unintentionally fail to disclose all hazards existing as of the inception date of this policy. You must report to us any knowledge of an error or omission in your representations as soon as practcable alter its discovery. This provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or non -renewal. 13. BLANKET COVERAGE FOR CERTAIN OPERATIONS IN CONNECTION WITH RAILROADS When required by written contract or written agreement. the definition of "insured contract" is amended as follows: The exception contained in paragraph H.3. relating to construction or demolition operations on or within 50 feet of a railroad and Paragraph H.a. are deleted with respect to the use of a covered "auto' in operations for. or affecting. a railroad. Includes copyrighted material of insurance Services Office, Inc. CA 71 1811 09 Page 5 of 5 POLICY NUMBER: CA21009060002 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 71 65 10 07 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED INSURED - PRIMARY COVERAGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM The provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless changed by this endorsement. This endorsement identifies person(s) or organization(s) who are "insured" under the Who Is An Insured Provision of the Coverage Form. This endorsement changes the policy on the nception date of the policy. unless another date is shown below. Endorsement Effective: 8/29/2016 Named Insured: PLW Cadagua Partners Countersigned By: (1,(>0 (Authorized Representative) (No entry may appear above If so information to complete this endorsement is in the Declarations ) Section II — Liability Coverage, A. Coverage. 1 Who Is An Insured is amended to add. Any Person or Organization with whom you have an "insured contract" which requires: i. that Person or Organization to be added as an "insured" under this policy: and ii. this policy to be primary and non-contributory to any like insurance available to the Person or Organization, Each such person or organization is an "insured" for Liability Coverage_ They are an "insured" only if that person or organization is an "insured" under in SECTION II of the Coverage Form. The contract between the Named Insured and the person or organization is an "insured contract' Includes copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office, Inc , with its permission CA 71 65 10 07 Insurance Services Office.. 1998. Page 1 of 1 Policy Number' CA21009060002 Policy Term. 8/29/2016 to 4/112017 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY_ PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EARLIER NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US Number of bays Notice 60 For any statutorily permitted reason other than nonpayment of premiumthe number of days required for notice oI cancellation increased to tho number of days shown in the Schedule above. If this policy is cancelled by us we will send the Named Insured and any pony listed in the following schedule notice of cancellation based on the number of days notice shown above SCHEDULE Name of Person co Organization The Name of Person or Organization is any person or organization holding a certif tate of insurance issued for you, provided the certificate: 1. Refers to this policy; 2. Stator that notice of. a. Cancellation; b. Nonrenewal; or c Material change reducirg or restricting coverage, will be provided to that person or organization; 3_ Is in effect at the time of the: a. Cancellation. b. Nonrenewal; or c. Material change reducing or restricting coverage; and 4 Is on tile at your agent or broker's office for this policy. Malting Address The Meiling Address 15 the address shown fpr that person or organization in that certificate of insurance. IL 70 45 05 07 Policy Number. WC21009040002 Policy Terrn 8/29/2016 to 4/1/2017 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY, PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EARLIER NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US Number of Days Notice 5Q For any statutorily permitted reason other than nonpayment of premiurn.the number of days required for notice of cancellation is increased to the number of days shown in the Schedule above. If this policy is cancelled by us we will send the Named Insured and any party listed in the following schedule notice of cancellation based on the number of days notice shown above SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organization The Name of Person or Organization is any person or organization holding a certificate of insurane issued for you. provided the certificate. 1. Refers to this policy. 2. States that notice of; a. Cancellation; b. Nonrenewal; or c. Material change reducing or restricting coverage; will be provided to that person or organization, 3. Is in effect et the lime of the: a. Cancellation; b Nonrenewal; or c. Material change reducing or restricting coverage; and 4. Is an file at your agent or broker's office for this policy. Mailing Address The Mailing Address is the address shown for that person or orpanination in that certificate of insurance. IL 70 45 05 07 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC420304B (Ed. 6-14) TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT v This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an njury covered by this policy, We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver apples only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a wntten contract to obtain this waiver frorn us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule_ The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X) Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: 3, Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 0.020 percent of tie premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed far the above person(s) or organ,zation(s) arising out of the operations described 4. Advance Premium; This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The :nformetion below is required only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.I Endorsement Effective 6/29/2016 Insured PLW Cadagua Partners Policy M1tc. WC21025040002 Endorsement Nu. Premium S Insurance Company Amerisure Insurance Company WC 4203048 (Ed. 6-14) Countersigned by 0 Copyright 2Q14 National Council on Compensation Insurance, Inc. All Rights Reserved. POLICY NUMBER: CU21009050002 COMMERCIAL LIABILITY UMBRELLA CU 24 03 09 00 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL LIABILITY UMBRELLA COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: Any person or organization required by written contract or certificate of insurance. (If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement.) The Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us Condition under Section IV — Conditions is amended by the addition of the following: We waive any right of recovery we may have against the person or organization shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or "your work" done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products -completed operations hazard". This waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CU 24 03 09 00 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc.. 2000 Page 1 of 1 D Policy Number CU21009050302 Policy Term 8/29/2016 to 4,112017 COMMERCIAL LIABILITY UMBRELLA CU 74 69 081 0 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS ADDITIONAL INSURED - PRIMARYINON-CONTRIBUTORY COVERAGE WHEN REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT OR WRITTEN AGREEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL LIABILITY UMBRELLA COVERAGE FORM An policy terms apply except as stated below. Under SECTION 1I - WHO IS AN INSURED, the following is added to paragraph 3: If coverage provided to any additional insured is required by a written contract or written agreement. we will provide coverage to the additional insured on a primary basis without contribution from any other valid and collectible insurance avairable to the additional insured. Under SECTION IV - CONDITIONS. paragraph S. Other Insurance does not apply to coverage provided by this endorsement. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. CU74690810 Policy Number CU21009050002 Policy Tenn: 8/29/2016 to 4/112017 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POIJCY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EARLIER NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US Number of Days Notice 60 For any statutorily permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium. the number of days required for notice of cancellation is increased to tho number of days shown in the Schedule above. If this policy is cancelled by us we will send the Named Insured and any pony listed in the following schedule notice of cancellation based on the number of days notice shown above SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organization The Name of Person or Organization is any person or organization holding a certificate of insurance issued for you, provided the cart ticate' 1 Refers to this pno,ry. 2 States that notice of. a, Cancellation, b Nonrenewal. or c. Material change reducirg or restricting coverage: will be provided to that person or organaation; 3. Is in effect at the time of The. a. Cancellation, b. Nonrenewal; or c. Material change reducing or restricting coverage; and 4. Is on tile at your agent or brokers office tor this policy.. Mailing Address The Mailing Address is the address shown for that person or organization in that certificate of insurance. IL 70 45 05 07 00 6116 PAYMENT BOND 929622546/920695 BOND NO. 022053261/PRF9212696 Issued in Duplicate Contractor as Principal Name: PLW Cadat;ua Partners Mailing address (principal place of business): 9303 New Trails Drive, Suite 200 The Woodlands, Texas 77381 Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78469 Contract Project name and number: E11066 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Award Date of the Contract: August 16, 2016 Contract Price: $21,650,000.00 Bond Date of Bond: August 24, 2016 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of Contract) SuretyThe Continental Insurance Company, American NameHome Assurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance 'Company and Zurich American Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): See attached list Physical address (principal place of business): See attached list Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: PennsyyilIlvania, New York, Massachusetts and New York d y submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Telephone (main number): See attached list Telephone (for notice of claim): See attached list Local Agent for Surety Name: Marsh USA, Inc. Address: 500 Dallas Street, Suite 1500 Houston, Texas 77002 Telephone: 713-276-8585 Email Address: sandra.r.parker@marsh.com The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form E11066 ONSWTP High Sery Pump Bldg No 3 006116-1 7-8-2014 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Princi Signature: Surety //%% Signature: (! g Z Name: Atu Raj Name: Adrienne C. Stevenson Title: President Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: araj @pepperlawson. com Email Address: adrienne.c.stevenson@marsh.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form E11066 ONSWTP High Sery Pump Bldg No 3 006116-2 7-8-2014 Bond # 929622546/920695/022053261/PRF9212696 Principal: PLW Cadagua Partners 9303 New Trails Drive Suite 200 The Woodlands, Texas 77381 Obligee: City of Corpus Christi 1201 leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Co -Surety Information: The Continental Insurance Company 333 S. Wabash Avenue 41st Floor Chicago, Illinois 60604 312-822-5000 American Home Assurance Company 175 Water Street 18th Floor New York, New York 10038 212-770-7000 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company 175 Berkeley Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 617-357-9500 Zurich American Insurance Company 1400 American Lane, Tower I 18th Floor Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 847-605-6000 POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That The Continental Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, is a duly organized and existing insurance company having its principal office in the City of Chicago, and State of Illinois, and that it does by virtue of the signature and seal herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint C R Hernandez, Beatriz Polito, Adrienne C Stevenson, John K Johnson, Amy B Wickett, Katherine J Foreit, Michael Dougherty, Triniy Garcia, Rebecca Hobbs , Individually of Chicago, IL, its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on its behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the insurance company and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By -Law and Resolutions, printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the Board of Directors of the insurance company. In Witness Whereof, The Continental Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed on this 9th day of June, 2015. The Continental Insurance Company Paul Bru at Vice President State of South Dakota, County of Minnehaha, ss: On this 9th day of June, 2015, before me personally came Paul T. Bruflat to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is a Vice President of The Continental Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said insurance company; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said insurance company and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said insurance company. f\1.*•NMhM%••Ylti4rir\•l., t S, ETCH $ NQrARY euuue + SOUTH DAKOTA My Commission Expires February 12, 2021 S. Eich CERTIFICATE a L0,1 Notary Public 1, D. Bult, Assistant Secretary of The Continental Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney herein above set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By -Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the insurance company printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said insurance company this 24th day of August , 2016 . Form F6850-4!2012 The Continental Insurance Company D. Bult Assistant Secretary Authorizing Resolutions ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE CONTINENTAL INSURANCE COMPANY: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting held on May 10, 1995. "RESOLVED: That any Group Vice President may authorize an officer to sign specific documents, agreements and instruments on behalf of the Company provided that the name of such authorized officer and a description of the documents, agreements or instruments that such officer may sign will be provided in writing by the Group Vice President to the Secretary of the Company prior to such execution becoming effective." This Power of Attorney is signed by Paul T. Bruflat, Vice President, who has been authorized pursuant to the above resolution to execution power of attorneys on behalf of The Continental Insurance Company. This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company by unanimous written consent dated the 25`b day of April, 2012: "Whereas, the bylaws of the Company or specific resolution of the Board of Directors has authorized various officers (the "Authorized Officers") to execute various policies, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature; and Whereas, from time to time, the signature of the Authorized Officers in addition to being provided in original, hard copy format, may be provided via facsimile or otherwise in an electronic format (collectively, "Electronic Signatures"); Now therefore be it resolved: that the Electronic Signature of any Authorized Officer shall be valid and binding on the Company." POWER OF ATTORNEY American Home. Assurance Company. National Union Fire Insurance Companyof Pittsburgh, PA. Principal Bond Office: 175 Water Street, New York, NY 10038. KNOW ALL MEN BY` THESE: PRESENTS: Power No. 30731 No, :02-B-08785 tat American1-Tome Assuranee Company, a NOV. Yor corporation, and . ,tion, : nion:Ftre nsurancc Company of Pitts urgh :P A.; aPennsylvaina corporation, does each hereby appoint Amy B; Wickett, Cynthia R, l lcrnandc Katherine .1 Forint, Beatriz Polito. Adrienne C. Stevenson, Michael Dougherty; Triniy R .Garcia John K. Johnson:: Chicaeo;:IIltitois- its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,.with`fiill aiuhontyto`execute on_its behalf honds,undertikings, ecognizances and other contracts of indemnit.y,and writings obti tito in the nature thercoa, issued in the course of:its business, and to bind the respective con zn thoreb € g ry,. p P 3 .. iN W'11 NESS:WillREOF, Anierican Home Assurance CompanyandNational Union.--Fireansurance Conpany,ofPittsburgh, PA, have each executed' eselreuts, this 13th day of June..2016 t Michael C:::1?ay, Vice President STATE OF NEW YORK COUNTY OF NEW YORK. } s Oh this 13th day of . June,.2016 . before inc carne the above named officer of American Florae AsSfirance Company: and National Union.Fire • insurance Company of Pittsburgh, PA.,,to me personally known 16 be the individual and officer.described herein, and. acknowledged that:he executed the foregoing,insturment and affixed the seals of said corporations thereto by authority of his'offee: JULIANA HALLENBECK. Notary Public • State of New York No 01HA6125671 Qualified in 8ronxCounty My Commission Expires April :18, 2017 CERTIFICATE Fxcrpts ofResottitions adopted by the Boards of J)ircctors of Amcrican:I tome Assurance Companypnd N.ttional Union Fire htstirance Conipanv of Pittsburgh. PA. on May 18, 1976: .::• • "RESOLI'ED,.that:the.Chairman ofthe Biiard, the. President; or any Vice Presid .it be:and he,rebyi8, <1uthorized to. appoint AtIorne;ys•-in=l=ast to represent _;. and act for and on behalf of the Company to execute bonds, undertakings, recognizance -sand other contracts of indemity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and to attach thereto the corporate seal of the Company, in thc transaction` of its surety business, "RESOLVED. that the signatures acrd-at1estations`of such. Officers:and the seal ofthe Cornpan} inaYbe affixed.to anysuch Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating theretoibyfacsimtle; and any such Power -of Attorney'or certificate beariti such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon, he Company when so affixed with respect to any bond, undertaking, recognizance and`othcrcontract of -indemnity andwriting obligatory in the nature -thereof: "RESOLVED; that.any such Attorney -in -Fact act delivering n seerctariat certificuion:that the foregoing fesolutionsstill be.m eftectmay insert,in such• certification the date thereof; said date to bc:not tater than the date of delivery thereof. by such Attorney in-Eact:' ... .. 1, Mania:Bogue. Assistant Secretary ofAmerican i bine Assitrance.Contpany:and ofNational Union1in. insurance Cotiipatty of Pittsburgh, P:\. -do hereby certify that the foregoing exerpts of Resolutions adopted by the:Boards of Directors of these corporations, and the Powers of Attorney issued. pursuant thereto; are true and correct. and that both the. Resolutions and the Powers of Attorney are irr.full force and ctlect. 1N WITNESS WiIEREOF, 1 have hereunto setnt} hind andalfised the 1 tcsimili seat ol'eae corporation 65 166 (4/96) • • ;this24;. day of AO3guSt,..`:2016:- Martin J3ogue.Assistant:Sceretary. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RED BACKGROUND. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Certificate No. 7337123 American Fire and Casualty Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company West American Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Fire & Casualty Company and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts, and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein collectively called the "Companies"), pursuant to and by authority herein set forth, does hereby name, constitute and appoint. Adrienne C. Stevenson; Amy B. Wickett; C. R. Hernandez; Gabriel Jacquez; John K. Johnson; Katherine J. Foreit; Rebecca Hobbs; Triniy Garcia all of the city of CHICAGO state of IL each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful attorney-in-fact to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver, for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed, any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations, in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Power of Attomey has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed thereto this 20th day of April 2016 By: American Fire and Casualty Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company West ,merican Insurance Company STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA cc David M. Care ,Assistant Secretary COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY On this 20th day of April 2016 before me personally appeared David M. Carey, who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of American Fire and Casualty Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my notarial seal at Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania, on the day and year first above written. COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA 6P PAsp 4,oay,ONW °.(' Notarial Seal Teresa Pastella, Notary Public OF Plymouth Twp., Montgomery County My Commission Expires March 28, 2017 Member, Pennsylvania Association of Notaries -gRYP38 By: 126,1646 dAddlyt) Teresa Pastella, Notary Public This Power of Attomey is made and executed pursuant to ancby authority of the following By-laws and Authorizations of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows: ARTICLE IV— OFFICERS — Section 12. Power of Attorney. Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the President may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any power or authority granted to any representative or attorney-in-fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the Chairman, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. ARTICLE XIII — Execution of Contracts — SECTION 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings. Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president, and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. Certificate of Designation — The President of the Company, acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company, authorizes David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys -in - fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization — By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors, the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Gregory W. Davenport, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Power of. Attorney executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 2 4 day of Aug us t 20 1 6 . $OCA a 1906 o * LMS_12873_122013 SY IhSV,s, `yJ ofs'O1Nr"nr,F ro o 1919 1- r 2 k a 0yi'rnra�'ab 1 INS U.y4 JN INSU17,1. By: Gregory W. Davenport, Assistant Secretary 274 of 400 ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation of the State of New York, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Maryland, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND a corporation of the State of Maryland (herein collectively called the "Companies"), by GERALD F. HALEY, Vice President, in pursuance of authority granted by Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute, and appoint C. R. HERNANDEZ, Katherine J. FOREIT, Adrienne C. STEVENSON, Amy B. WICKETT, John K. JOHNSON, Michael DOUGHERTY, Triniy GARCIA and Gabriel JACQUEZ, all of Chicago, Illinois, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attomey-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at its office in New York, New York., the regularly elected officers of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., and the regularly elected officers of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., in their own proper persons. The said Vice President does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President has hereunto subscribed his/her names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 2nd day of June, A.D. 2016. By Secretary Eric D. Barnes State of Maryland County of Baltimore On this 2nd day of June, A.D. 2016, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, GERALD F. HALEY, Vice President, and ERIC D. BARNES, Secretary, of the Companies, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and acknowledged the execution of same, and being by me duly sworn, deposeth and saith, that he/she is the said officer of the Company aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and the signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. ATTEST: ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND Vice President Gerald F. Haley 41.o t\ros °A. O: \ 1998 'a? hy,"* IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. 97tAtti-D Maria D. Adamski, Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 8, 2019 POA -F 036-0600 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF THE COMPANIES "Article V, Section 8, Attorneys -in -Fact. The Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President may, by written instrument under the attested corporate seal, appoint attorneys -in -fact with authority to execute bonds, policies, recognizances, stipulations, undertakings, or other like instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any such attorney-in-fact to affix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without cause modify of revoke any such appointment or authority at any time." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of the Companies is still in force. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of December 1998. RESOLVED: "That the signature of the President or a Vice President and the attesting signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any Power of Attorney...Any such Power or any certificate thereof bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company." This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994, and the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as thougll,manually affixed. ,IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, 2 4 • day of 'A.0 g u s t , 20 16. s s=o , •, , �• tTM v 'tV� 1�G8 .•4 ��• w ... . • ` it O''�� •%, • G� EKY t *« Michael Bond, Vice President ACKNOWLEDGIEMENT FOR PRINCIPAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR PRINCIPAL IF LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY STATE OF Texas COUNTY OF Harris } } ON THE 25th DAY OF August 2016 BEFORE ME PERSONALLY APPEARED Atul Raj , TO ME KNOWN AND KNOWN TO ME TO BE THE Officer OF PEPPER-LAWSON WATERWORKS, LLC. A LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY, DESCRIBED IN AND WHO EXECUTED THE FOREGOING INSTRUMENT AND ACKNOWLEDGED TO ME THAT (S)HE EXECUTED THE FOREGOING INSTRUMENT AND ACKNOWLEDGED TO ME THAT (S)HE EXECUTED THE SAME AS AND FOR THE ACT AND DEED OF SAID LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY. ;" ' LORI A BROWN � "- MY COMMISSION EXPIRES ",;' July19,2019 ,Xa/: Lori A. Brown Notary Public STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF COOK I, Katherine J. Foreit a Notary Public in and for said County, do hereby certify that Adrienne C. Stevenson as Attorney -in -Fact, who is personally known to me to be the same person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, appeared before me this day in person, and acknowledged that they signed, sealed, and delivered said instrument for and on behalf of American Home Assurance Company A New York Corporation The Continental Insurance Company A Pennsylvania Corporation Liberty Mutual Insurance Company A Massachusetts Corporation Zurich American Insurance Company A New York Corporation for the uses and purposed therein set forth. Given under my hand and notarial seal at my office in the City of Chicago in said County. this 241h day of August A.D. 2016 /1- otary Public KATHERINE J FOREII (Alicia' Seal Notary Public • State of III410i6 My Commission Expires Aug 10, 2017 r' JPOI iter ts3? J&i.ii110 a10001 10 al12-.3tiduLl''1 ot1 MS .Qi 1?iJA vM 00 6113 PERFORMANCE BOND 929622546/920695 BOND NO. 022053261/PRF9212696 Contractor as Principal Name: PLW Cadagua Partners Mailing address (principal place of business): 9303 New Trails Drive, Suite 200 The Woodland, Texas 77381 Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78469 Contract Project name and number: E11066 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Award Date of the Contract: August 16, 2016 Contract Price: $21,650,000.00 Bond Date of Bond: August 24. 2016 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of the Contract) "ISSIIPCM in I)uplicatP" SUretyThe Continental Insurance Company, American Home Assurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Name:company and Zurich American Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): See attached list Physical address (principal place of business): See attached list Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: Pennsylvania, New York, Massachusetts and New York respectively, By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Telephone (main number): See attached list Telephone (for notice of claim): See attached list Local Agent for Surety Name: Marsh USA, Inc. Address: 500 Dallas Street, Suite 1500 Houston, Texas 77002 Telephone: 713-276-8585 Email Address: sandra.r.parker@marsh.com The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond E11066 ONSWTP High Sery Pmp Bldg 3 006113-1 7-8-2014 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code cis amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall !ie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Princi al Signature: Surety Signature: 1-4-.-.-,,-2.-- X t,c Name: Atul Raj Name: Adrienne C. Stevenson Title: President Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: araj @pepperlawson. com Email Address: adrienne.c.stevenson@marsh.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond E11066 ONSWTP High Sery Pmp Bldg 3 006113-2 7-8-2014 .,o Bond # 929622546/920695/022053261/PRF9212696 Principal: PLW Cadagua Partners 9303 New Trails Drive Suite 200 The Woodlands, Texas 77381 Obligee: City of Corpus Christi 1201 leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Co -Surety Information: The Continental Insurance Company 333 S. Wabash Avenue 41St Floor Chicago, Illinois 60604 312-822-5000 American Home Assurance Company 175 Water Street 18th Floor New York, New York 10038 212-770-7000 Liberty Mutual Insurance Company 175 Berkeley Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 617-357-9500 Zurich American Insurance Company 1400 American Lane, Tower I 18th Floor Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 847-605-6000 POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That The Continental Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, is a duly organized and existing insurance company having its principal office in the City of Chicago, and State of Illinois, and that it does by virtue of the signature and seal herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint C R Hernandez, Beatriz Polito, Adrienne C Stevenson, John K Johnson, Amy B Wickett, Katherine J Foreit, Michael Dougherty, Triniy Garcia, Rebecca Hobbs , Individually of Chicago, IL, its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on its behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the insurance company and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By -Law and Resolutions, printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the Board of Directors of the insurance company. In Witness Whereof, The Continental Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed on this 9th day of June, 2015. The Continental Insurance Company Paul T. Bruflat - / - Vice President State of South Dakota, County of Minnehaha, ss: On this 9th day of June, 2015, before me personally came Paul T. Brutlat to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is a Vice President of The Continental Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said insurance company; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said insurance company and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said insurance company. S. EICH NOTARY M18UC/'.+ *WARY DAKOTA f ♦.................... r. 1 My Commission Expires February 12, 2021 S. Eich CERTIFICATE a &.0,/ Notary Public I, D. Bult, Assistant Secretary of The Continental Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, do hereby certify that the Power of Anomey herein above set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By -Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the insurance company printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof 1 have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said insurance company this 24th day of August , 2016 . Form F6850-412012 The Continental Insurance Company D. Bult Assistant Secretary Authorizing Resolutions ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE CONTINENTAL INSURANCE COMPANY: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting held on May 10, 1995. "RESOLVED: That any Group Vice President may authorize an officer to sign specific documents, agreements and instruments on behalf of the Company provided that the name of such authorized officer and a description of the documents, agreements or instruments that such officer may sign will be provided in writing by the Group Vice President to the Secretary of the Company prior to such execution becoming effective." This Power of Attorney is signed by Paul T. Bruflat, Vice President, who has been authorized pursuant to the above resolution to execution power of attorneys on behalf of The Continental insurance Company. This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of' the Company by unanimous written consent dated the 25th day of April, 2012: "Whereas, the bylaws of the Company or specific resolution of the Board of Directors has authorized various officers (the "Authorized Officers") to execute various policies, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature; and Whereas, from time to time, the signature of the Authorized Officers in addition to being provided in original, hard copy format, may be provided via facsimile or otherwise in an electronic format (collectively, "Electronic Signatures"); Now therefore be it resolved: that the Electronic Signature deny Authorized Officer shall be valid and binding on the Company." POWER OF ATTORNEY American Home Assurance Company. National Union Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh, P. Principal. Bond Office: 175 Water Street, New York, NY 10033 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: Power No. 30731 No, 02-B-08785 'Ih it.Amcrican1Iome Assurance Company; a NewYork corporation, and National'Union Fire Insurance Company of Piasburgh;:PA.,,. corporation, does each hereby appoint --rimy B: Wickett, Cynthia R,`I lcrnande Katherine J .Forcit Beatriz Polito, Adrienne.C: Stevenson, Michael Dougherty,'Triniy, R Garcia, John K. Johnson:; Chicago; Ifhnots' Pennsylvania its true` and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,.with.ti ll authority to`execute omits behalf bonds; undert;kings,.recognizances and either contracts ofindeinnity..and writings obligatory -in the natureahereot; issued in the course. of:its business, and to`bind the respective etintpany. thereby..: IN 11'11'\l SS:WilEKEOF, AmericanJiorne Assurance Company and National Union Fire:htSurance Company. of Pittsburgh, PA, have each ekecuted. these presents this 13th day of June .20] 6 Michael C. Fay, Vice President STATE. OF NEW YORK }` COUNTY OF Nov YORK } ss. On this 13th day of:. Junc,:2016 :` before me can* the above named officer of American 1 lome'Assurance Company and National Unioti.Fire Insurance Company of Pittsburgh. PA., to me personally known to be the individual.and officer described herein, and acknowledged that he executed the foregoing insturipent and affixed the seals of said corporationsthereto by authority of his office. JULIANA HALLENBECK. Notary Public • State of New York No 01HA6125671 Qualified in Bronx County My Commission Expires April :18, 2017 CERTIFICATE Excrpts oFResol neons adopted by the Boards of Directors of Anierican:a tome Assurance; Company and National lJnion Fire. insurance Conipany-of Pittsburgh, 'A. on May 18, 1976: "RESOLVED, that: the. Chairman oftheBoard,the President, -or any Viee•President be, 'and hereby is, authorized to appoint Attorneys -in -Fact to represent,: and aet for and on behalf of theCompany to execute bonds, undertakings, rccognizances,and other contracts of indcmity and writings`obligatory in thc'nature thereof; and to attachthereto the:eorporate seal of the Company„male transictionof its surety business;' "RESOLVED,' ED that the signatures third attestations of such.of?iccrs:and the seal of the Cornpanvmati be:afflxed:to anv ,ueh Por of Attornev`or to any certificate relating thereto' by tacsiinile, and any Such Power. of Attorney or certificate hearini2.-.such facsimile signature . orfacsiniile seal shall be valid and binding uponthe Conipanywhen so affixed with respect to any hona, ultdcrtaking, ri,cogniz:inCe and'othcrcontract of iiulcmnity and writing ohligiuory:01 nature thereof; "RESOLVED, that any such Attorney -m -Fact delivering a seerctarial certification that the forcuoing'resoliitions still be int e.ticct:mav inset' in such certification the date thereof, said date. to be:not later than the date of delivery thereof by such.Attorncy-in Fact.” i. Martin:Bogue: AssistantSecretary o€:Atnerican !:Ione Assorance.Company:and ofNational Union Fire'lnsuranee Company of Pittsburgh;:PA. do hereby cenitj! thatthc foregoing exerpts of Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Dire.ctors'of these corporations, arid the Powers of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, arc true and correct, and that both the Resolutions and the Powers of Attorney: are in full force.and effect. IN WIT.NESSWIIEREOF, i` have hereunto set my hand and'affiNed the facSimile.seal of eacli corporation 63166 (4/96) this 24':' davof August,::; 2dl:b Martin Bogue Assistant Secretary THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RED BACKGROUND. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Certificate No. 7337123 American Fire and Casualty Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company West American Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Fire & Casualty Company and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts, and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein collectively called the 'Companies"), pursuant to and by authority herein set forth, does hereby name, constitute and appoint Adrienne C. Stevenson; Amy B. Wickett; C. R. Hernandez; Gabriel Jacquez; John K. Johnson; Katherine J. Foreit; Rebecca Hobbs; Triniy Garcia all of the city of CHICAGO state of IL each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful attorney-in-fact to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver, for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed, any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations, in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed thereto this 20th day of April 2016 STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY On this 20th day of April 2016 before me personally appeared David M. Carey, who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of American Fire and Casualty Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my notarial seal at Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania, on the day and year first above written. COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA / /1 ss American Fire and Casualty Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company West mericanInsurance Company By: '0-9=7174 David M. Carey: ssistant Secretary Sp PAST Z OF Notarial Seal Teresa Pastella, Notary Public Plymouth Twp., Montgomery County My Commission Expires March 28, 2017 _�G Member, Pennsylvania Association of Notaries Teresa Pastella, Notary Public This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-laws and Authorizations of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company which resolutions are now in hill force and effect reading as follows: ARTICLE IV— OFFICERS — Section 12. Power of Attorney. Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the President may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any power or authority granted to any representative or attomey-in-fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the Chairman, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. ARTICLE XIII — Execution of Contracts — SECTION 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings. Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president, and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attomeys-in-fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attomey, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. Certificate of Designation — The President of the Company, acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company, authorizes David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary to appoint such attorneys -in - fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization — By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors, the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company. wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Gregory W. Davenport, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Power of. Attorney executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 2 4 day of August 20 1 E �, , PNut�vorNt n W 1991 LMS_12873_122013 CF, By: - Gregory W. Davenport, Assistant Secretary 4•101. 274 of 400 y business day ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation of the State of New York, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Maryland, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND a corporation of the State of Maryland (herein collectively called the "Companies"), by GERALD F. HALEY, Vice President, in pursuance of authority granted by Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute, and appoint C. R. HERNANDEZ, Katherine J. FOREIT, Adrienne C. STEVENSON, Amy B. WICKETT, John K. JOHNSON, Michael DOUGHERTY, Triniy GARCIA and Gabriel JACQUEZ, all of Chicago, Illinois, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at its office in New York, New York., the regularly elected officers of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., and the regularly elected officers of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., in their own proper persons. The said Vice President does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President has hereunto subscribed his/her names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 2nd day of June, A.D. 2016. ATTEST: Secretary Eric D. Barnes State of Maryland County of Baltimore On this 2nd day of June, A.D. 2016, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, GERALD F. HALEY, Vice President, and ERIC D. BARNES, Secretary, of the Companies, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and acknowledged the execution of same, and being by me duly sworn, deposeth and saith, that he/she is the said officer of the Company aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and the signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND E: -. 4-4 Vice President Gerald F. Haley IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. 9)tvu, D Maria D. Adamski, Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 8, 2019 POA -F 036-0600 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF THE COMPANIES "Article V, Section 8, Attorneys -in -Fact. The Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President may, by written instrument under the attested corporate seal, appoint attorneys -in -fact with authority to execute bonds, policies, recognizances, stipulations, undertakings, or other like instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any such attorney-in-fact to affix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without cause modify of revoke any such appointment or authority at any time." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of the Companies is still in force. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of December 1998. RESOLVED: "That the signature of the President or a Vice President and the attesting signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any Power of Attorney...Any such Power or any certificate thereof bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company." This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994, and the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as thoRg,15mfiianually affixed. ,-v' IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, tliii 24' day of 'Aug ust ,20 16. kfy ,• R F�+. 71 •• w ,•�� ..> � �L 1908 fi I 0 ID I) Michael Bond, Vice President ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR PRINCIPAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR PRINCIPAL IF LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY STATE OF Texas COUNTY OF Harris } } ON THE 25th DAY OF August , 2016 BEFORE ME PERSONALLY APPEARED Atul Raj , TO ME KNOWN AND KNOWN TO ME TO BE THE Officer OF PEPPER-LAWSON WATERWORKS, LLC, A LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY, DESCRIBED IN AND WHO EXECUTED THE FOREGOING INSTRUMENT AND ACKNOWLEDGED TO ME THAT (S)HE EXECUTED THE FOREGOING INSTRUMENT AND ACKNOWLEDGED TO ME THAT (S)HE EXECUTED THE SAME AS AND FOR THE ACT AND DEED OF SAID LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY. _�" ";. LORI ABROWN s MY COMMISSION EXPIRES July 19, 2019 a/L: /95 Lori A. Brown Notary Public STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF COOK I, Katherine J. Foreit t a Notary Public in and for said County, do hereby certify that Adrienne C. Stevenson as Attorney -in -Fact, who is personally known to me to be the same person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, appeared before me this day in person, and acknowledged that they signed, sealed, and delivered said instrument for and on behalf of American Home Assurance Company A New York Corporation The Continental Insurance Company A Pennsylvania Corporation Liberty Mutual Insurance Company A Massachusetts Corporation Zurich American Insurance Company A New York Corporation for the uses and purposed therein set forth. Given under my hand and notarial seal at my office in the City of Chicago in said County, this 24th 1 upgrieworillmift day of August A.D. 2016 otary Public KATHERINE J FOREIT 011 cial Seal Notary Public • Stall 011111110M Icy Commission Expires Aug 10, 2017 1 i tu;�iitt) afoot l iQ -3l&I2-.311duq 'I,N .0! ut,.:Zirnnrn 1 sitA CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES Complete No s. 1 - 4 an d 6 if there are interested parti es. Complete Nos . 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 if ther e are no interested parties . 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the c ity, state and country of the bu s iness entity's place of business. PLW Cadagua Partners FORM 1295 1of1 OFFICE USE ONLY CERTIFICATION OF FILING Certificate Number: 2016-87865 The Woodlands, TX U nited States Date Filed: ""2-N~a-m_e _o~f g_o_v_e_rn_m-en_t_a~I e-n-t~ity-or_s_t-at_e_a_g_e_n-cy-th_a_t ~is_a_p_a_rt_y_t_o_t~he-co_n_t-ra_c_t~fo_r_w~h~i ~ch-th-e~f.-o-rm-,-is _ __..07 /20/2016 being filed. City of Corpus Christi Date Acknowledged : 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. Project No. E11066 O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant High Service Pump Building No. 3 Project No. E11066 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of bus iness) Nature of interest (check applicabl e) Co ntrolling Intermediary Ferrovial US Con s tru ction Corp. Austin, T X United States x 5 Ch eck only if there i s NO Interested Party. D ~!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!.'.!!!!!!!!!!!!!!~!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!ii I swear, ora a11ir , no penalty of perjury, that the above disclosure is tru e and correc t. I ·•""''"" LORI & BROWN ~~~~r~ " {.( j;~ MY COMMISSION EXPIRES Atul Raj, President ~~. :1_.l Julu 19 2019 ··-~.(..¥,;J~··· .,,, , Si~tu r e of authorized agen t of contracting business entity 6 AFFIDAVIT AFFI X NOTARY STAMP I SEA L ABOVE Sworn to and subsc rib ed before me , by the said ___________ A_t_u_l _R_a_j __ , th is the 20th day of _J_u_l y __ _ 20 16 , to certify which, witness my hand and seal of office. Lori A. Brown Notary I Asst. Secretary Signatu re of officer adm inis tering oath _,,, .-Printed name of officer administering oath Title of officer administering oath Forms prov ided by Texas Et hics Cornrn1ss1on www.eth1 cs.st ate.tx.u s Vers ion Vl.0.277